knots
Post on 10-Oct-2014
986 Views
Preview:
TRANSCRIPT
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
IntroductionKnots gives you the complete step-by-step instructions for 13 different knot tying projects Learn how to tie a variety of knots for survival projects All projects comefrom Instructablescom are written by our creative community and contain pictures for each step so you can easily make these yourself
Instructables is the most popular project-sharing community on the Internet We provide easy publishing tools to enable passionate creative people like you to sharetheir most innovative projects recipes skills and ideas Instructables has over 50000 projects covering all subjects including crafts art electronics kids homeimprovement pets outdoors reuse bikes cars robotics food decorating woodworking costuming games and more Check it out today
Laura KhalilEditor Instructablescom
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Table of Contents
Introduction 1
Author and Copyright Notices 6
Disclaimer 7
Cross Knot Paracord Lanyard 8
Intro Cross Knot Paracord Lanyard 8
Step 1 Supplies 8
Step 2 Step 2 9
Step 3 Step 3 9
Step 4 Step 4 10
Step 5 Step 5 11
Step 6 Step 6 11
Step 7 Step7 12
Step 8 Step 8 14
Step 9 Step 9 15
Step 10 Step 10 16
Step 11 Step 11 17
Step 12 Step 12 18
Step 13 Variations 20
Related Instructables 23
Paracord wrist lanyard made with the snake knot 24
Intro Paracord wrist lanyard made with the snake knot 24
Step 1 Supplies 24
Step 2 Attaching two colors of paracord 25
Step 3 Find the center of the length of paracord 25
Step 4 Making the snake knot 25
Step 5 Count your knots 29
Step 6 Trim and melt the excess paracord 29
Step 7 Youre done 29
Related Instructables 31
How to tie various knots 32
Intro How to tie various knots 32
Step 1 Sheet Bend 33
Step 2 Double Sheet Bend 34
Step 3 Bowline 34
Step 4 Bowline on the Bight 36
Step 5 Clove Hitch 36
Step 6 Round Turn and Two Half-Hitches 37
Step 7 Fishermans Bend 38
Step 8 Studsail Bend 39
Step 9 Figure-8 Knot 39
Step 10 Prussic Knot 40
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 11 Reef Knot 40
Step 12 Cleats 41
Step 13 Practice them 41
Related Instructables 41
How to Tie the Lanyard Knot 42
Intro How to Tie the Lanyard Knot 42
Step 1 Materials 42
Step 2 First Step 42
Step 3 Starting the Knot 43
Step 4 The Most Important Part 43
Step 5 Doubling 44
Step 6 Finishing 44
Related Instructables 45
Four knots to make paracord into a useful tool 46
Intro Four knots to make paracord into a useful tool 46
Step 1 46
Step 2 The half hitch 46
Step 3 The mid line half hitch 48
Step 4 The slippery hitch 49
Step 5 The mid line truchers hitch 50
Related Instructables 52
Figure 8 knot and double 8 knot 53
Intro Figure 8 knot and double 8 knot 53
Step 1 Stating the knot 53
Step 2 Finishing the knot 53
Step 3 The follow through knot 54
Related Instructables 55
Truckers Hitch THE most awesome knot on the planet 56
Intro Truckers Hitch THE most awesome knot on the planet 56
Step 1 Initial setup 58
Step 2 Creating a slip knot 59
Step 3 Tightening and securing 60
Step 4 Securing loose end 60
Step 5 Finished 61
Related Instructables 62
Carry any Bottle with a JUG KNOT Handle 63
Intro Carry any Bottle with a JUG KNOT Handle 63
Step 1 Getting Started 65
Step 2 Form a Bight 67
Step 3 Pull the Bight down 68
Step 4 Cross the Loops 69
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 5 Pass the Bight under the 1st loop 69
Step 6 Weave the Bight 69
Step 7 Extend the Bight 70
Step 8 Flip the Right Loop behind 70
Step 9 Flip the 2nd loop in front 71
Step 10 Remove Slack 72
Step 11 Tighten the Knot 73
Step 12 Secure on bottle neck 74
Step 13 Aluminum Bottle Water Bottle 75
Step 14 Tethered Cork Stopper 77
Step 15 Trussed for Transport 78
Step 16 Advanced 81
Related Instructables 81
Basic Knots Guide 82
Intro Basic Knots Guide 82
Step 1 Thumb knot 82
Step 2 Reef Knot 82
Step 3 Figure of eight 83
Step 4 Timber hitch 84
Step 5 Clove hitch 84
Step 6 Sheet band 84
Step 7 Sheep shank 86
Step 8 Slip knot 86
Related Instructables 86
How to Tie a Fire-escape Knot 87
Intro How to Tie a Fire-escape Knot 87
Step 1 Get Your Rope 87
Step 2 Twist the Rope 87
Step 3 Pull Through the Twist 88
Step 4 Go Over the Split End 88
Step 5 Finally 89
Step 6 Same Name Not Knot 89
Related Instructables 89
Climb Safe With A Figure 8 Knot 90
Intro Climb Safe With A Figure 8 Knot 90
Step 1 Dealing With The Rope 90
Step 2 Tying The First Figure 8 91
Step 3 Looping Into The Harness 93
Step 4 Following Back Through The Figure 8 94
Step 5 Finishing The Knot 96
Step 6 Ready To Climb 99
Related Instructables 100
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Turks Head Knots on a Bottle 101
Intro Turks Head Knots on a Bottle 101
Step 1 Supplies 102
Step 2 Preparation 102
Step 3 Adding the Pegs 102
Step 4 Adding Pegs to the Tape 103
Step 5 Adding the 2nd row of pegs 103
Step 6 Tying the first Turks Head Knot 104
Step 7 Remove the pegs and the tape 104
Step 8 Remove the slack from the knot 105
Step 9 Triple the Knot 105
Step 10 Add the second knot 105
Step 11 Maping the Top Knot 106
Step 12 Mapping the Bottom Knot 106
Step 13 Adding the last knot 107
Step 14 Thats It 107
Related Instructables 108
Larks head noose -- an easy useful knot that tightens and loosens 109
Intro Larks head noose -- an easy useful knot that tightens and loosens 109
Step 1 Double the cord over 110
Step 2 Form the larks head 111
Step 3 Form the noose 111
Step 4 Tightening retightening and locking 112
Related Instructables 113
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Author and Copyright NoticesInstructable Cross Knot Paracord LanyardAuthor StormdraneLicense Attribution-NonCommercial-ShareAlike (by-nc-sa)
Instructable Paracord wrist lanyard made with the snake knotAuthor StormdraneLicense Attribution-NonCommercial-ShareAlike (by-nc-sa)
Instructable How to tie various knotsAuthor adavielLicense Attribution (by)
Instructable How to Tie the Lanyard KnotAuthor eddy14777License Attribution-NonCommercial-ShareAlike (by-nc-sa)
Instructable Four knots to make paracord into a useful toolAuthor erik_mccrayLicense Attribution-NonCommercial-ShareAlike (by-nc-sa)
Instructable Figure 8 knot and double 8 knotAuthor jonathan111License Attribution-NonCommercial-ShareAlike (by-nc-sa)
Instructable Truckers Hitch THE most awesome knot on the planetAuthor schneidp20License Attribution-NonCommercial-ShareAlike (by-nc-sa)
Instructable Carry any Bottle with a JUG KNOT HandleAuthor hpstoutharrowLicense Attribution-NonCommercial-ShareAlike (by-nc-sa)
Instructable Basic Knots GuideAuthor zorro3355License None (All Rights Reserved) (c)
Instructable How to Tie a Fire-escape KnotAuthor leonardo ismaelLicense Attribution-NonCommercial-ShareAlike (by-nc-sa)
Instructable Climb Safe With A Figure 8 KnotAuthor mattsteLicense Attribution-NonCommercial-ShareAlike (by-nc-sa)
Instructable Turks Head Knots on a BottleAuthor sklnxbonesLicense Attribution-NonCommercial-ShareAlike (by-nc-sa)
Instructable Larks head noose -- an easy useful knot that tightens and loosensAuthor Larry BreedLicense Attribution-NonCommercial-ShareAlike (by-nc-sa)
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
DisclaimerAll do-it-yourself activities involve risk and your safety is your own responsibility including proper use of equipment and safety gear and determining whether you haveadequate skill and experience Some of the resources used for these projects are dangerous unless used properly and with adequate precautions including safety gearSome illustrative photos do not depict safety precautions or equipment in order to show the project steps more clearly The projects are not intended for use by children
Many projects on Instructables are user-submitted and appearance of a project in this format does not indicate it has been checked for safety or functionality Use of theinstructions and suggestions is at your own risk Instructables Inc disclaims all responsibility for any resulting damage injury or expense It is your responsibility to makesure that your activities comply with all applicable laws
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Cross Knot Paracord Lanyardby Stormdrane on May 22 2011
AuthorStormdrane Stormdranes BlogNo matter where you go there you are
Intro Cross Knot Paracord Lanyard
This instructable will show how to make a paracord lanyard using the cross knot and snake knot The lanyard can be used as a wallet chain to secure a key chainkeyring knife multitool flashlight cell phone camera binoculars compass and other assorted pocketable gadgets gear and gizmos More projects links knotreferences can be seen in my blog Stormdranes Blog
The cross knot can also be found under different names from other online and book references as The Chinese Crown Knot Chinese Cross Japanese Crown KnotJapanese Success Knot Rustlers Knot Friendship Knot and knot 808 in The Ashley Book of Knots
You can use the loop end of the lanyard to attach it to your item and use the clip end to secure to a belt loop bag pack etc Or run a belt through the lanyards loopand use the attachment to clip onto your gadget gear gizmo etc Longer versions could be used as a pet leash for your dog cat pot belly pig iguana ferret or otherassorted leashable rodents and varmints
Step 1 Supplies
For this project youll need 10 feet of paracord scissors swivel snap hook and a lighter Optional supplies are hemostats tape measure and your own choice ofattachments like split ring swivel clip carabiner snap shackle etc
I used 10 feet of paracord to make a finished lanyardwallet chain of about 25 feet in length You can use more or less to make one of your own preferred length
There are many online sources for paracord available in different lengths and color choices and can sometimes be found at local sporting goods outlets and ArmyNavySurplus stores Various attachments can also be found online and at local retail establishments and you may even scavenge them from keyringskeychains pet leashesetc that you already have
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 2 Step 2
Find the center of your length of cord form a bight which will be the the loop end of your lanyard
Step 3 Step 3
To tie the cross knot youre going to bring the strand of cord on the right over the left strand back under to the right and back under again to the left making an S shapeas shown
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 4 Step 4
Now with the left strand bring it up under the S shape through the top loop as shown
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 5 Step 5
Bring the strand back down over the first two parts of the S shape and under the bottom as shown
Step 6 Step 6
Tighten up the knot by carefully pulling on each of the working ends and loop ends of the cord You can adjust the size of the lanyards loop by working slack from theloop end to decrease its size or from the working ends to increase the loops size Ive kept the loop at about 2 inches in length so that a belt will fit through it but youcan make it larger or smaller to your preference You can also check that the working ends of the paracord are equal in length at this point and work slack through theknot to even them up if needed
Note the other side of the knot looks different with the cross pattern as shown
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 7 Step7
Now you can tie the next knot in the lanyard the same way as the first After tying the next knot work the slack through the knot until you have about 1 inch of spacebetween them then tighten and continue with the next knot Note that the knots look different on each side frontback and that you tie the each facing the same way oralternate them if you choose
Continue making knots until you have about 1 foot of cord left with each end of the working strands
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 8 Step 8
Now you will add your attachment like the swivel snap hook shown putting both strands through the swivel eye to begin tying the snake knot
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 9 Step 9Bring the right strand under the cords then up over them as shown
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 10 Step 10Now take the left strand over across the other strands back behind and under the cords and up through the right strand loop as shown Then tighten
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 11 Step 11
Take the right strand under and behind the cords then bring it back through the tightened knot along side itself as shown and tighten This is where hemostats come inhandy with tying this knot working the cord through the previously tightened part of the knot It can be done without hemostats but requires tighteningloosening of theknots with just your fingertips
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 12 Step 12
Turn the lanyard over so the other side of the knot is facing up The working strand now on the right side will be brought under the cords back up and down through theparallel strands of the knot as shown then tighten And continue this process flipping the lanyard over taking the right strand under and back up around and through theparallel cords and tighten Continue until you run out of cord or reach the cross knot
Youll now trim off any excess cord and quick melt the end of the strands to prevent fraying to finish
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 13 Variations
You can use other two strand knots instead of the cross knot for variations on this style of lanyard A few alternatives to try tying in a spaced out series or combination ofthem Matthew Walker knot double wall knot lanyard knot double overhand knots double figure 8 knots etc The finishing knots around the attachment can also bedifferent as Ive used the lanyard knot sometimes just one or several in a row
You can also use variations of the cross knot with paracord bracelets and watchbands Doubled version of the knot shown as a paracord bracelet and alternating withtwo pairs of strands for the paracord watchband Leftover pieces of paracord can be used for zipper pulls key ring fobs even paracord cross pendants
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Related Instructables
Paracord ChainSinnet FastDeploy BoonieHatband (video)by Stormdrane
Zigzag SpoolingParacord (video)by Stormdrane
SurvivalBracelet(Updated) bytevers94
Celtic ButtonKnot (video) byStormdrane
ParacordBoonie HatWrap (video) byStormdrane
Paracord wristlanyard madewith the snakeknot byStormdrane
SurvivalBracelet II bytevers94
Cobra WeaveKey Fob bytevers94
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Paracord wrist lanyard made with the snake knotby Stormdrane on September 12 2007
AuthorStormdrane Stormdranes BlogNo matter where you go there you are
Intro Paracord wrist lanyard made with the snake knotThis instructable will show how to make a wrist lanyard using paracord and the snake knot The lanyard can be used to secure a key chain knife multi-tool flashlightcell phone camera binoculars compass etc More projects links knot references can be seen on my blog page Stormdranes Blog
Step 1 SuppliesYoull need about 45 feet of paracord(you may use other types of cordage if desired) The paracord I used is from the Supply Captain I left the inner strands in theparacord but you can remove them if preferred If done in one color it will be one continuous 45 ft length if done in two colors youll need 3 ft for the primary color thatincludes the wrist section and 15 ft for the second color that will show in the snake knot Also used are scissors tape measure or ruler lighter hemostats or needle nosepliers(not necessary but they make it much easier) and a swivel clip key ring snap hook cell phone lariat carabiner or whatever attachment you prefer to use
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 2 Attaching two colors of paracordIf using two colors of paracord you will insert one color about 12 inch into the other color You may remove a small amount of the paracords inner strands by pullingthem out trimming with scissors and pulling the paracord outer sheath back over the strands leaving room to insert the other color For various projects Ive used threedifferent methods for attaching two colors of paracord melting sewing or gluing The choice is yours I usually sew them together it doesnt matter as long as its a goodconnection It will be hidden under the first knot
Step 3 Find the center of the length of paracordTake the center of the length of cord and bring it thru the attachment Im using a swivel clip For this tutorial Im measuring the wrist loop at about 10 inches from theattachment The connection of the two colors will be just on the other side at this point
Step 4 Making the snake knotThe snake knot will be made around the wrist loop section of paracord the loop strands being the core of the knot Ive added a series of photos showing the steps Iuse By using two colors youll see that I flip the lanyard over after making each knot so that Im working with the cord on the right side of the lanyard I bring it under allthe other cords working the hemostats under the previously tightened knot and pulling the cord back thru Then tightening up the knot keeping the cord from twisting andworking it up against the previous knot Again flipping the work over youll see two parallel cords of the same color which will be split with the cord on the right goingunder around and pulled thru with the hemostats then tightened up Continue this procedure until youve done about 10 snake knots(you can count them down eitherside
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 5 Count your knotsOnce you have 10 snake knots youre almost done Youll notice from the photos of both sides of the lanyard that one side has the snake knots alternating all the waydown and the other has a set of parallel knots at the top and botton of the sequence of knots Youll always have those at the start and finish of the snake knots I preferto have them end up on the same side of the lanyard so one side appears to have a more uniform look but its not required
Step 6 Trim and melt the excess paracordUse the scissors to trim off the excess cord and quickly melt the ends with a lighter so they dont fray
Step 7 Youre doneYou can make a range of variations using less or more cordknots Shorten the loop for a double ended key chain or make the loop longer for use as a neck lanyard aLanyard Break-Away Connector could be added for the safety conscious You can also add a wooden bead skull cord lock etc Visit my blog page for more knot relatedprojects links and resources Stormdranes Blog You can find ideas for other geargadgets to attach to your lanyard on EDC Forums
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Related Instructables
Paracord ChainSinnet FastDeploy BoonieHatband (video)by Stormdrane
Cross KnotParacordLanyard byStormdrane
Zigzag SpoolingParacord (video)by Stormdrane
SurvivalBracelet II bytevers94
SurvivalBracelet(Updated) bytevers94
Cobra WeaveKey Fob bytevers94
ParacordBoonie HatWrap (video) byStormdrane
Paracord KnotDisplay Bord byJamie bagn
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
How to tie various knotsby adaviel on September 7 2009
Intro How to tie various knotsKnots as a way of joining rope without special equipment are useful in many situations On a sailboat knots are essential both for daily use and for emergency repairsThis instructable describes several different common knots eg
Sheet Bend - to tie two lines togetherBowline - to make a loopReef Knot - to fasten a bundle of materialFishermans Bend - to secure a line to a post or ring
These knots are good for regular rope - braided or 3-strand polyester or natural fibre (hemp sisal) Monofilament (fishing line) or steel cable performs better with differentknots
Knots are typically quite a lot weaker than straight rope - when rope goes around a tight radius such as in a knot the outside is under more tension than the insideSplices (which require special tools and are time-consuming to make) are stronger so permanent fittings usually have eye-splices
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 1 Sheet BendThe sheet bend is used to tie two lines together It is perhaps the most generally useful knot of all When used to tie a line to itself making a loop it is called a bowlineThe strain is taken on the ropes in the middle - not the one coming out the side
How the knot is made is not critical - it is the final shape that is important One can make the flat loop first and work the other rope around it Or one can make thecrossed loop first - required when tying a bowline
The two images show front and back views of the same knot
AdvantagesEasy to makeEasy to undo when tension is removedDoes not easily capsize
DisadvantagesHard to make under loadDangerous to make under heavy load
UsesJoining two equally-sized ropesExtending a towline or stern line
Method 1 the same as a bowline
Method 2 starting with the flat loop
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 2 Double Sheet BendThe double sheet bend is used to tie two lines of different thickness - but not too different It is the same as a normal sheet bend but with an extra turn of the thinner ropearound the flat loop in the thickerThe load goes on the line through the flat loop not the one that comes out the side of the knot
UsesSecuring a heaving line to a tow lineExtending a stern line if you dont have enough line of one thickness
Step 3 BowlineThe bowline is really a special case of the sheet bend but it it tied at the end of a rope to make a loop
The photos show the completed loop and closeups of the front and back of the actual knot Note that it is the same as the sheet bend - but it must be made the right wayround This loop does not tighten in use The knot is quite easy to untie once the load is removed With practice it is very quick to tie
Some usesSecuring a dinghy line to a railing or stanchionSecuring an anchor line to an anchorTie a jib sheet to the sailTie a mooring line around a rock or treeTie a float to an anchor triplineUse one in each line to tie two ropes of very different sizes - eg a throwing line to a large tow ropeDisadvantages the knot must be completely made before it will take any strain - it is hard to tie if there is already a load on the rope
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Linked bowlines
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 4 Bowline on the BightA bowline on the bight is a bowline tied in a loop of rope (neither end is needed) The shape is the same as a bowline made with a double line but the middle of thebight forms the loop around the standing part
UsesAn impromptu bosuns chair - to sit in while being transferred between two boats at sea
Step 5 Clove HitchThe clove hitch can be made when you only have the bight (the middle) of a rope not the ends
UsesSecuring a burgee pole to a burgee halyard (a continuous loop of thin line)Securing a tiller from swinging
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 6 Round Turn and Two Half-HitchesThis is a knot used to secure a line to a ring or bar Wind a couple of turns around the bar then secure the end with two hitches around the standing part (this looks like aclove hitch when done)
AdvantagesCan be made under load - it is easy to take turns around the bar while maintaining tension on the ropeStrong - provided the bar is thicker than the rope the rope is not weakened by sharp bendsDisadvantagesThe end tends to work loose
UsesSecuring a line to a mooring ring or samson post
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 7 Fishermans BendThe fishermans bend is the same as the round turn and two half hitches except that the first hitch is looped under the round turn This uses the tension on the rope tosecure the end from working loose
AdvantagesSecure against working loose
DisadvantagesHard to make under tensionHard to undo under tensionMay seize up under load when wet making it hard to undo
UsesSecuring mooring line to ringSecuring fender lines to rail
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 8 Studsail BendThe studsail bend is like the fishermans bend but the second hitch is also secured under the round turn making it even more secure against working loose when undertension
AdvantagesVery secure against working looseDisadvantagesHard to make under tensionHard to undo under tension
Step 9 Figure-8 KnotThe figure-eight knot is used to prevent an end of rope from passing through a block (pulley) Sometimes called a stopper knot
The double figure-8 knot is used in rock climbing as an alternative to a bowline to secure a climbing harness to the end of a safety rope The double knot is made bymaking a single knot then tracing back around the knot with the free end after passing it around the harness loop
AdvantagesEasy to verify by inspectionNot prone to work loose
DisadvantagesSlow to make and undoCannot be made under load
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 10 Prussic KnotThe prussic knot may be used as a climbing ascender - when made around a vertical rope as shown downwards tension on the ends locks the knot while release oftension allows it to be slid up the rope A pair of prussic knots on foot loops may be used in tandem to climb a rope
UsesClimbing a ropeTaking up tension to free a riding turn on a winch
Step 11 Reef KnotThe reef knot or square knot is used to tie a bundle of material together It must be made around something - it should not be used to tie two free ropes togetherbecause it can easily capsizeIt should not be used to make a loop unless it can be tensioned around a solid object It should not be used around a person - use a bowline instead A capsized reefknot will slip easily and could constrict and cause severe injury
UsesReefing a sail (tying the unused portion around a spar)Securing a furled sail to a spar (sail ties)Wrapping a parcelTying shoelaces
AdvantagesMay be made under moderate load
DisadvantagesCapsizes (works free) if used improperlyCan seize up under load when wet
Tying the knot
Capsizing a reef knot
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 12 CleatsThis is not a knot but is very common on boatsThe first picture shows a rope cleated normally The second shows one with a final locking turn - the last turn is twisted before placing over the cleat so that the tensionon the rope helps secure the free end
When working with ropes under tension take a turn or two around a winch or cleat before trying to secure the end with a knot The load on the free end falls exponentiallywith each turn taken Severe injury can result if a finger or other body part is caught in a loop of rope or between a rope and another object
Step 13 Practice themIt is sometimes useful to be able to tie knots in the dark or as in this video behind your back
Related Instructables
AThird Hand forSailing or OtherThings by WadeTarzia
Paracord KnotDisplay Bord byJamie bagn
Trip LogOutriggerCanoe Sailingthe CaliforniaChannel Islandsby TimAnderson
How to Tie aFigure EightKnot byTactical_Pyro
How to build apirate ship bymdelaney3
Build a ShortDragon (16 foot3-BoardOutriggerSailing Canoe)by Wade Tarzia
repairing aheadsail by josh
How to get arope into a tree(withoutclimbing it) byvitex
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
How to Tie the Lanyard Knotby eddy14777 on January 31 2010
Intro How to Tie the Lanyard KnotMany people including myself have had trouble following the Stormdrane youtube video on tying the lanyard knot so i have done some research and found the solution
Image Notes1 Finished knot
Step 1 MaterialsAll you need is a reasonable length of para cord or whatever you wish to use
Image Notes1 One reasonable amount
Step 2 First StepThe first thing you are going to do is to make a bight that leaves you with to congruent endsThen you are going to put your ring finger through the bight
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Image Notes1 Close enough2 Bight
Step 3 Starting the KnotMake a loop just like the one in the picture and place it over the top strandBring the top strand under the bottom strand
Image Notes1 Notice the way the loop is done2 Top strand
Image Notes1 Bottom strand2 Top strand is under
Step 4 The Most Important PartNow you take the top stand from the previous picture and feed it over the first part of the loop under itself and back over the remainder of the loop
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Image Notes1 Under me2 Top strand3 This should make a diamond type shape
Step 5 DoublingNow take the bottom stand and take it around the part of the top strand nearest to the bight and than come up through the diamond shape in the middleDo the same for the top strand
Image Notes1 Top strand
Image Notes1 Both through the diamond
Step 6 FinishingWhen you take it off your finger it should look like thisWork out the slack by pulling on the bight and the two strands
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Image Notes1 Finished knot
Related Instructables
Cross KnotParacordLanyard byStormdrane
Celtic ButtonKnot (video) byStormdrane
Paracord wristlanyard madewith the snakeknot byStormdrane
Paracord ChainSinnet FastDeploy BoonieHatband (video)by Stormdrane
Zigzag SpoolingParacord (video)by Stormdrane
ParacordBoonie HatWrap (video) byStormdrane
Paracord IDbadge Lanyardby Flahusky
Cobra WeaveKey Fob bytevers94
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Four knots to make paracord into a useful toolby erik_mccray on March 27 2010
Authorerik_mccrayI am an ex-fabricator that is now a stay at home dad I love my new job but I do miss making stuff I love this site amp I am getting involved as a way to keep myskills upOn top of fad work I have also run two small business in the past One was custom sewing amp the other was as a small engine mechanicI have two votec degrees one in metal fabrication amp the other is in engine repairI look forward to getting to know everyone here
Intro Four knots to make paracord into a useful toolParacord is an awesome multitool used everywhere from the wild blue yonder to the deepest caverns But like any good tool it is only as good as the knowledge the userhas about the tool With most people out there using bungee cords amp ratchet straps it seems that paracord is being used for nothing more than friendship bracelets forgrown men This is a shame because for less then the price of a few cheap bungee cords amp some to short to be helpful straps You can get yourself hundreds of feet ofparacord
The key to getting the most out of the paracord is good knot work The first thing you need to know is what makes a good knot One is that the knot is easy amp quick to tieamp more impotant is that the knot is easy amp quick to untie The hitch class of knots is by far the best group of knots that the average person could know The four mostuseful hitch knots are the half hitch a quick simple knot that forms the base for many other knots the inline half hitch allowing you to get the most out of one length ofparacord the slippery hitch that gives you both on the fly control over tension on your paracord but also an adjustable loop that will not change unless you want it amp theinline truckers hitch instantly doubling the your pulling power
Step 1 To get started lets get some terminology that will be used defined
line= the paracord
Main line= the part of the paracord doing the work for example holding down your tarp or the long part of the paracord
Mid line= the middle of the length of the paracord
End line= the unused length of paracord or the short length of paracord
Step 2 The half hitch The half hitch is a simple way to secure a line to an anchor point like the tie down points in most trucks A half hitch is a constrictor knot meaning that the harder you pullon the line the tighter the knots grip gets Another common constrictor knot is the slip knot
Step 1 wrap your line around your anchor point Step 2 wrap the end line around the main line
Step 3 pass the end line threw the end line side of the newly formed loop
step 4 now take the slack out of the knot
step 5 to make sure the knot is secure tie another half hitch to the main line This knot is called adouble half hitch
step 6 another useful thing that can be done with the half hitch is that instead of repeating the wrap on the main line but repeating it on what you are tying to the half hitchcan be used to bind something like a stack of 2x4s
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Image Notes1 End line2 Main line3 step 1
Image Notes1 Step 2
Image Notes1 passing thew the end line side of the loop2 step 3
Image Notes1 step 5
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Image Notes1 step 6
Step 3 The mid line half hitch The mid line half hitch is for when the length of line is to long for the job at hand amp you dont want to have to cut the line to size or you are using multiple anchor pointswith one length of line
Step 1 double up the line at the point in the length you wish to make the knot
Step 2 wrap the doubled up portion of line around your anchor point The doubled up length is now now the end line
Step 3 now tie just as you did for the regular half hitch repeat the knot to make a double half hitch for security
Image Notes1 A mid line double half hitch
Image Notes1 step 1
Image Notes1 The end line2 step 2
Image Notes1 Step 3
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 4 The slippery hitch The slippery hitch is a great knot for adjusting tension on the main line or for having an adjustable fixed loop To adjust the knot simply slide the knot up or down the mainline
Step 1 wrap your line around the anchor point or just double over the line to form a loop
Step 2 wrap the end line around the main line three times Wrapping in the direction of the anchor point or loop
Step 3 put together the two lines making up the loop amp wrap the two lines one time with the end line
Step 4 pass the end line thew the last loop formed covering the two lined of the loop
Step 5 pull the knot tite
step 6 to adjust the size of the loop or main line tension grab the knot amp slide it up or down the main line
Image Notes1 grab just the knot its self to adjust it2 step 5
Image Notes1 step 1
Image Notes1 step 2
Image Notes1 step 3
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Image Notes1 step 4
Image Notes1 grab just the knot its self to adjust it2 step 5
Image Notes1 same knot as in last pic Just slid up2 step 6
Step 5 The mid line truchers hitch The truckers hitch is a great way to double the pulling force on a line There are many ways to tie this knot the problem with most of them is that at some point you aregoing to have to pass the end line through a loop on the main line that is acting like a pulley to double your pulling force this is great if you are making the knot close tothe end of your line but if you are using a 300 length of line amp want to make the knot in the first ten feet having to pass 290 of line thew a loop is a pain But with a fewhalf hitches you will not have to pass the end line threw any loop on the main line
step 1 wrap your line around the anchor point then double over your end line laying the top of the loop over the main line
Step 2 double up your main line amp lay the loop over the loop made by the end line
step 3 in main line above the knot twist in a loop
step 4 put main line loop thew the loop made in step 3 amp pull this loop tight over your main line loop forming a half hitch Repeat step 3 amp 4 to make a doublehalf hitch
step 5 To use the knot just pull down on the end line to put tension on the main line
step 6 after you have the main line snug tie a mid line double half hitch around the two lines forming the loop at the end of the main line with the end line
step 7 Tie a double half hitch with the end line around the end loop of the mid line half hitch of step 6 using the same method as used in steps 3 amp 4
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Image Notes1 the end of step 6
Image Notes1 main line2 end line3 step 1
Image Notes1 main line loop2 end line loop
Image Notes1 step 3
Image Notes1 step 4
Image Notes1 step 4 at the end with a double half hitch on the main loop
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Image Notes1 pull here2 step 5
Image Notes1 the start of step 6
Image Notes1 the end of step 6
Image Notes1 step 72 now the rest of the line is free to do more work
Related Instructables
Paracord KnotDisplay Bord byJamie bagn
ChokelessAdjustableParacord DogLeash byPizzaman101
ParacordLadder wWooden Rungsby josestude
tie a paracordshackle grip byitri45
ParacordPrussik Belt byJavaNut13
TiteTie is theTruckers Knoton Steroids bytitetie
ID Lanyard(Photos) byeschmunk
Dog Toys forHeavy Chewersby J3443RY
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Figure 8 knot and double 8 knotby jonathan111 on November 28 2007
Intro Figure 8 knot and double 8 knotI will show you how to tie a figure 8 knot and a figure 8 follow through
Step 1 Stating the knotThis is a simple knot so just follow the pictures
Step 2 Finishing the knotCross the string under and then push it through the hole Pull tightly unless you are going to do the follow through and leave it somewhat loose
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 3 The follow through knotThe follow through knot should be tied around something brought back and followed through the path of the 8 knot Look at the pictures Basically follow through the 8knot backwards
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Related Instructables
Climb Safe WithA Figure 8Knot by mattste A pocket full of
knots byKiteman
How to Tie aFigure EightKnot byTactical_Pyro
Paracord KnotDisplay Bord byJamie bagn
Cross KnotParacordLanyard byStormdrane
How to Tie aFire-escapeKnot by leonardoismael
Truckers HitchTHE mostawesome knoton the planetby schneidp20
Paracord ZipperPuller byrepeet13
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Truckers Hitch THE most awesome knot on the planetby schneidp20 on October 12 2008
Authorschneidp20I like building stuff Trouble is there just isnt enough time to build everything Sigh
Intro Truckers Hitch THE most awesome knot on the planetYes I know that there are plenty of other cool knots out there many of which I literally couldnt live wo I rock climb However this knot is unlike any other Plus Ineeded a grabber for my Instructable -) (BTW this ISNT a climbing knot) And in truth it isnt a knot by itself but rather a system of common knots
Have you ever tried to tie something down for transporting but just couldnt get the lines tight andor during transport the lines would continually loosen Then this is theknot for you I learned this knot back in the 70s when specialty car racks and ratchet straps were rare or unheard of I initially used it to tie a canoe on a car rack bothattaching to the rack as well as the lines to the bow and stern of the canoe Even with all the new gizmos available today this knot still shines because all you need is arope and ropes dont hum in the wind like straps
The unique aspect of this knot is that it gives you a 2-1 mechanical advantage when tightening the rope Be careful though You can actually damage some thingsbecause of the mechanical advantage This knot holds fast and is easy to untie hallmark traits of any good knot
Below you see the finished knot system well break it apart in the steps that follow
Image Notes1 1st anchor point a bowline2 loop3 securing knots 2 half hitches4 securing loose end with a fishermans knot5 2nd anchor point (should be round)
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Image Notes1 X marks the spot
Step 1 Initial setupThe first step is to anchor one end of the rope and then loop the rope around a 2nd anchor point
For attaching to the 1st anchor point I chose bowline a close 2 on my list -) There are other instructables on that one so I wont bore you here
The 2nd anchor really should be round because it serves as a pulley in this block and tackle type knot Ive used it on sharp anchor points and it doesnt work as well
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 2 Creating a slip knotTie a slip knot somewhere between the two anchor points Correct placement of the slip knot takes some experience to judge it correctly Typically I place it too close tothe 2nd anchor point and end up with not enough room to work with If the knot ends up too far from 2nd anchor point you can extend the knot by enlarging the loop
Be sure you tie the slip knot as shown You may not be able to untie other knots
In this small example the slip knot is uncharacteristically close to the 1st anchor point
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 3 Tightening and securingThe loose end of the rope that went around the 2nd anchor point goes through the slip knot loop Pull the loose end to the desired tension and secure with two halfhitches
Note To allow better view of the knots the rope isnt really tightened in this example
Step 4 Securing loose endThe final knot is just to secure the loose end somehow I chose a fishermans knot to do this
To tie a fishermans knot the rope goes around twice and goes under the X created by the loops Pull the loose end to tighten Finally slide the knot to put tension onthe half hitches
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Image Notes1 X marks the spot
Step 5 FinishedThere you have it I guarantee that the first time you really use this knot (not just practice) you will be amazed at how well it works and youll wish you knew this knot along time ago You may even come over to my side and declare that is is THE most awesome knot on the planet -)
Enjoy and happy haulingDave
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Related Instructables
TiteTie is theTruckers Knoton Steroids bytitetie
Four knots tomake paracordinto a usefultool byerik_mccray
Modify yourbike rack tocarry a sunfishor other boat byewilhelm
SurfboardHammock byGermy
GiganticHalloweenSpider Web bynolte919
How To Tie ASpiders Hitch(video) by back-cast
Three-hitch mathair ornamentby michiexile TRX from
ParacordChallengeAccepted bythrake
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Carry any Bottle with a JUG KNOT Handleby hpstoutharrow on September 17 2009
Intro Carry any Bottle with a JUG KNOT HandleTie a JUG KNOT around a water bottle soda bottle or aluminum bottle to make a secure carrying strap
Re-purpose any container into a reusable water bottle by adding a convenient carrying strap This Instructable will demonstrate how to tie a JUG knot which like its namesuggests is meant to properly secure around the neck of a container
With some cord and the knowledge of this knot you will be able add a handle lanyard or carabiner loop to any of your favorite beverages to carry them on the go
It works perfectly for those disposable water bottles and who knows once you add some colorful cord to the plain old clear water bottle you just might beinclined to refill it and use it again(Check out pictures 4amp5 below)
In addition to plastic beverage bottles like pop water and sports drinks you can turn those rugged aluminum beer bottles into a backpacking canteen
Those of you familiar with my previous aluminum bottle InstructablesROLLED RIM METAL TUMBLERhttpwwwinstructablescomidAluminum-Bottle-Tumbler-Cup-Cook-PotALUMINUM BOTTLE LIGHTWEIGHT ALCOHOL STOVEhttpwwwinstructablescomidAluminum-Bottle-Alcohol-Stovewill recognize the water canteen shown below as a re-purposed aluminum beer bottle Here I have added a painted surface treatment to turn it into a proper lookingwater bottle More on that in steps 13 14 15
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 1 Getting StartedCord size is important Select a small medium weight cord like the one shown here It is a general purpose camp cord sold at most sporting goods stores (shoelacesmight also work)
Do not use a heavy cord or rope because the larger diameter will not tuck under the relatively small lip at the top of the bottleneck and the bottle will fall out
Also the smaller cord cinches tight on itself and will not loosen accidentally
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 2 Form a BightThe next steps show how to tie a JUG KNOT It is the basic step for adding a carrying strap It is also the anchor point for any additional fancy bottle trussing you maywant to add
JUG KNOT Step 1
Form a Bight in the center of a length of cord Bight is a knot term for a loop or bend in the rope In this case the main Bight in this knot is highlighted with a white mark Imakes it easier to follow its path in these steps
The running ends of the cord should be equal length
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 3 Pull the Bight downPULL the Bight DOWN forming two Loops
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 4 Cross the LoopsCROSS the right Loop OVER the left Loop
Step 5 Pass the Bight under the 1st loopTake the main Bight and pass it UNDER the left Loop
Step 6 Weave the BightWEAVE the Bight OVER the portion of the right Loop and UNDER the portion of the left Loop
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 7 Extend the BightExtend the Bight OVER the outer portion of the right Loop
Step 8 Flip the Right Loop behindAdditional colored identification points have been added to the loops to follow their travel in these next two steps
The right Loop Yellow marker is FLIPPED BEHIND the knot and ends up on the far left side of the knot
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 9 Flip the 2nd loop in frontRaise the green marker (located on what was formerly the left loop) and pull it down and to the right FLIPPING IT IN FRONT of the knot
Note the blue portion of the this loop will pass around the outside of the yellow portion of the first loop
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Image Notes1 Center of knot that will tighten around the bottles neck
Step 10 Remove SlackNote where the blue green amp yellow markers end up
Start to remove the slack in the loops by pulling the original main Bight (white marker top right) and the two free standing ends at the bottom
the bottle neck will pass through the very center of the knot
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Image Notes1 Center of knot that will tighten around the bottles neck
Step 11 Tighten the KnotAfter removing the slack insert the bottle neck and finish tightening
The knot should look like this before slipping it over the bottle
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 12 Secure on bottle neckThis is the finished knot shown on the neck of various containers
The loop end and the two free standing ends can be tied together to create a carrying handle (last picture below)
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 13 Aluminum Bottle Water Bottle
The next few steps show the features of an aluminum beer bottle re-purposed as a water bottle canteen It is one of many containers that can be reused as a camp waterbottle
The bottle was lightly sanded masked and then pained with a hammered finished paint to create an interesting surface texture
Image Notes1 Textured finish paint makes an interesting grip-able surface2 Masked with tape for painting3 Masked with tape for painting
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Image Notes1 Dowel used for holding the bottle during painting
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 14 Tethered Cork StopperUse a wine bottle man made Cork as a stopper for your aluminum water bottleNote Use a cork that was removed from the wine bottle without the corkscrew penetrating through the bottom end of the cork (A hole all the way through the cork willcause it to leak) Use the unpierced end of the cork inside the water bottle
Drill a hole through the sides of the Cork Thread the cord through the hole to the center of the cord Use the cork as the main Bight and tie the Jug knot as shown inthe beginning steps
Now the cork is tethered to the bottle and will not get lost or fall on the ground
A Carabiner clip passes through the other cord end to attache the water bottle to you belt or pack
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 15 Trussed for TransportThis is another hanging method for carrying your aluminum bottle water canteen A Jug knot is tied conventionally around the neck
The running ends of the knot however are pulled down towards the bottom of the bottle A Barrel Knot is tied about 34 the way down the side of the bottle A squareknot is tied on the bottom of the knot to keep the two running ends tight against the sides of the bottle
I like the look of the accent colored cord running down the sides of the bottle and the fact that the bottle hangs from the belt upside down It adds to its uniqueness
The last picture shows another truss variation
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 16 AdvancedBelow is a bottle with some additional trussing You can be creative as you want It all starts with a re-purposed container and the Jug Knot (and enough cord)
Related Instructables
AluminumBottle TumblerCup amp Cook Potfor an AlcoholStove byhpstoutharrow
Water BottleBelt Clip byuglymike Duct Tape
Water Bottle byrabidsquire2
AluminumBottle AlcoholStove byhpstoutharrow
DIYGlass WaterBottle byCulturespy
Solar WaterHeater forBackpackingUsing WaterBottles and aCar Shade bykopomeroy
Duct tape waterbottle holder(Photos) by pinkmarshmallow
How to make aCamelPack withan old plasticbottle bywillrandship
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Basic Knots Guideby zorro3355 on April 29 2008
Intro Basic Knots Guidehi
Step 1 Thumb knotThe most simple knotUsed as a stopper and prevent ropes from fraying
Step 2 Reef KnotUsed to tie two ropes of equal thickness togetherIt is pretty easy to tie and untie but under tentionit may be diffcult to untieIt is also not sutible for smoothropes(egnylon ropes)
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 3 Figure of eightused as a stopperprevent ropes from fraying and its more secure than tumb knot its is also used to tie Caribinas to ropes and is often used in rock climbing
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 4 Timber hitchused for pulling logs
Step 5 Clove hitchUsed to tie a rope onto a pole or logThe pole must be roundThe pole lust be thicker then the rope itself
(greatly used during pioneering)
Step 6 Sheet bandused to tie ropes of different thickness together(works on same thickness of ropes too)
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 7 Sheep shankTo shorten RopesTo prevent middle fraying
Step 8 Slip knotWhippingUsed as a grip for pulling things(when tied on a stick or small pole)(marlin spike hitch)
Related Instructables
Rope Rings byhpstoutharrow
How to Tie aFigure EightKnot byTactical_Pyro
Whippin (WestCountry Style)by tim_n
SurvivalBracelet(Updated) bytevers94
HangmansNoose PackClosure byPopEye42
Turkey on aTripod byhpstoutharrow
SurvivalBracelet II bytevers94 Zigzag Spooling
Paracord (video)by Stormdrane
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
How to Tie a Fire-escape Knotby leonardo ismael on October 16 2007
Intro How to Tie a Fire-escape KnotThis knot is used by firemen in case of fires for example imagine a scene where the ladder on the firetruck messes up but people need to get down a five story buildingor more All they have is a long piece of rope they can safely get down with a secure knot like the fire-escape knot So why not learn it its easy to do and hard to untieif you tie it tightly
This is from the American Boys Handbook
Step 1 Get Your RopeFirst grab a piece of rope and bend it like this to make a loop in it Follow every step to the smallest detail
Step 2 Twist the RopeNow make a twist like this and hold it together
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 3 Pull Through the TwistPull the loop through the twist you just made from underneath
Step 4 Go Over the Split EndNow pull the tail through the loop
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 5 FinallyAnd finally just pull it through as pictured below
Congratulations you just learned the fire-escape knot
Step 6 Same Name Not KnotThis is another knot called the fire-escape knot this shouldnt be your result
Related Instructables
House FireEscape Plan(video) byWhatHappensNowAdvice
ParacordLadder wWooden Rungsby josestude
Bed SheetEscape Rope byjessehensel
rope ladder(glow-in-the-dark version) bymikeasaurus
HeadlockEscape 2(video) byjohnnyrockstah
QuickFirestarter byMattandJora
Trail sauna byjakee117
How to Kill FireAnts andCommitGenocide byKentsOkay
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Climb Safe With A Figure 8 Knotby mattste on February 23 2010
Intro Climb Safe With A Figure 8 Knot There are many things that a beginning climber needs to know including several important knots Perhaps the most essential knot is the Figure 8 Follow Through Thistutorial will demonstrate how to correctly harness yourself to a rope using a Figure 8 Follow Through knot This knot is used primarily by rock climbers to provide a life-line Since this knot is used as a life-line it is very important to be able to tie it correctly (Your life could depend upon it)
Dont worry with this tutorial and about 5 minutes of practice you can have this knot mastered
Things you will need
- Climbing Harness- Climbing Rope
If you are wanting to go climbing and dont already have these items they can be purchased for about $25 each at most outdoor sporting goods stores If you are merelylooking to learn the knot a belt loop and a rope (about five feet long) will do
Image Notes1 Climbing Harness2 Climbing Rope
Step 1 Dealing With The RopeThroughout this tutorial I will be discussing different parts of the rope To make these instructions as clear as possible I will define a few terms that I will use throughoutthe tutorial The Anchor End of the rope will generally be at the top of the images This is the end that would be anchored to the wall or rock and does not move Wewill not be doing much with the anchored end The Tail End of the rope is the opposite end that we will be dealing with I will call this the tail for short
Now that we have some terms to work with lets get started
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 2 Tying The First Figure 8This knot has several parts to it The first part of the knot is just tying a basic figure 8 To tie the first figure 8 there are four simple steps
1 - Using the tail make a loop over the rope (as shown in the first picture) keeping in mind that there should be about 3 ft of slack on the tail end
2 - Wrap the tail back this time go under the anchored end (As shown in the second picture)
3 - Bring the tail down through the first loop (As shown in the third picture)
4 - Finally pull the two ends to make the knot a little bit tighter and easier to deal with (Shown in the fourth picture)
After these four steps you should end up with a knot that resembles a figure 8
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 3 Looping Into The Harness In order to secure the rope to the harness simply thread the tail end of the rope through the front loop in the harness as shown in the picture below This step isobviously very important
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 4 Following Back Through The Figure 8After looping the rope through the harness you have to thread the tail end of the rope back through the knot following the first figure 8 I have divided this process intofive smaller steps in order to make it more clear
1 - Coming form underneath the knot bring the tail up through the near loop and to the left behind the anchored end of the rope (Shown in the first picture)
2 - Wrap the tail around the anchored end back to the right and down through the adjacent loop (Shown in the second picture)
3 - You simply need to bring the tail back over the top of the knot to the left (Shown in the third picture)
4 - Bring the tail end up through the far loop following the anchored end (Shown in the fourth picture)
5 - Finally pull the knot tight (Shown in the fifth picture)
As you can see the first four pictures are simply tracing the knot back through with the tail end
For the last part while you pull the knot tight you may want to make small adjustments and rearrange how it all fits together If the knot does not lay perfectly smoothand tight its NOT a big deal
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 5 Finishing The Knot After completing the Figure 8 knot you will want to somehow secure the tail end of the rope out of the way There are a couple different ways to do this the way that Iwill demonstrate is using whats called a Stopper Knot This secondary knot is similar to a Fishermans knot and is pretty simple I have once again divided thisprocess into several smaller steps
1 - Start by wrapping the tail end around the anchored end (As shown in the first picture)
2 - Wrap the tail back underneath the two vertical segments (As shown in the second picture)
3 - Simply repeat the first two steps wrapping the tail around again (As shown in the third picture)
4 - This step in the fourth picture may look complicated but all you need to do is insert the tail up through the two loops that you have just made
5 - To finish off the knot you will want to slowly pull the tail end while gently pushing the bottom of the stopper knot upwards If you have successfully completed this knotit should look something like the fifth picture
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 6 Ready To Climb Now that you have mastered the Figure 8 knot you can securely harness yourself into a climbing rope Remember there are many other skills that go into setting up ananchor and belaying a climber This tutorial only covers the figure 8 knot For more information there are many great websites that demonstrate how to correctly set up asafe climbing system (Ive posted a few below) If you are a beginning climber I recommend that you read up on a few other climbing techniques Also you shouldprobably go to a climbing wall or gym where there are experienced climbers that can show you the ropes Hopefully this tutorial has been helpful Have fun and be safe
Some useful linkshttpwwwstephenprattnetAnchorsanchorshtmhttpwwwuoregonedu~oppclimbingtopicsanchorshtmlhttpwwwabc-of-rockclimbingcomhowtoclimbingtechniquesasp
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Related Instructables
How to Tie aFigure EightKnot byTactical_Pyro
Paracord KnotDisplay Bord byJamie bagn
Basic KnotsGuide byzorro3355
How to Climb aTree (withprussiks) bystasterisk
How to climb atree (using onlyrope) thefunsimple wayby louieaw
How to get arope into a tree(withoutclimbing it) byvitex
How to tievarious knots byadaviel
How to make arope swing byjdub0928
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Turks Head Knots on a Bottleby sklnxbones on July 6 2010
Intro Turks Head Knots on a BottleThis is the finished project A bottle decorated with three Turks Head Knots There are only three knots on this bottle The RED and the BLUE knots are each a 20 Bightby 3 Lead Turks Head Knots The WHITE knot is a 20 Bight by 19 Lead Turks Head Knot
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 1 Supplies
Cord Lots and Lots of cord I cant tell you how much each bottle is differentBottle Washed and Dried inside and out Make sure to remove all water spotsThreaded Needle Cord screws into the threads at the base of the needlePegs I use brass rivets used as a map to tie the Turks Head KnotsHole Punch Used to punch holes in the painters tape to hold the pegsPainters Tape To hold the pegs in place and to make your map for the Turks Head KnotsMarker To write on the painters tapeCloth Towel To remove finger prints and dirt from your bottleKrazy Glue or Super Glue This is used to secure the knots in place to the bottle
OPTIONAL BUT HIGHLY RECOMMENDEDI use the Turks Head Cookbook from KnotToolcom
Step 2 PreparationYou will need to find a bottle you like I used an empty instant tea bottle of course washed and dried (I like to put the bottle in the oven for a few minutes to dry the insidewithout water spots Take off the lid and do not put lid in the oven) Now measure the circumference of the bottle Take a cord and tightly wrap the cord around the bottleMark where the ends meet and use a ruler to measure the length of the cord For my instant tea bottle the circumference is 27cm I know from past knots that I have tiedthat I want my knot to have 20 Bights in the top and bottom (bands) knots I am going to use the Bights in the (bands) knots to tie the middle knot Now divide the numberof Bights (20) into the size of the circumference (27) to get the space between each Bight (135) With me so far
Now take two pieces of painters tape using a ruler measure out the length of the circumference and mark the length on the both pieces of tape Next you will mark thespace between each Bight on the tape
Step 3 Adding the PegsI like to use pegs when tying Turks Head Knots it just makes tying the knot easier
These are what I use for pegs
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 4 Adding Pegs to the TapeNow take a hole punch to cut holes in the tape where the lines meet You will place the pegs in the holes
Insert a peg in each hole and carefully stick the first piece of tape to the bottle
Step 5 Adding the 2nd row of pegsNow do the same thing with the second piece of tape The numbers on each piece of tape must line up
This picture shows you what you should have now This odd looking thing will be your map to tie the Turks Head Knot And this is the end of Step 1
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 6 Tying the first Turks Head KnotUsing the Turks Head Cookbook follow the numbers going over and under as indicated in the book I chose a 20 Bight by 3 Lead knot which will give me a nice bandaround the bottle Once the ends meet you have made one complete knot Tape the running end of your cord and start removing the pegs and the tape
Step 7 Remove the pegs and the tapeBe careful not to untie the knot as you remove the pegs and tape from the bottle Continue to remove all the pegs and remove the tape from the bottle At this point theknot will be very loose and will need to be tightened up
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 8 Remove the slack from the knotHere you can see just how much the knot expanded Starting with the standing end begin to pull the slack out of the knot going towards the running end of the cordDo not expect to pull all the slack out at once You may have to make 3 - 5 attempts at removing the slack out of the knot DO NOT remove all of the slack out of the knotIn order to make the bands we will have to triple the Turks Head Knot We will do this by following the knot three times The threaded needle will really come in handyhere
Step 9 Triple the KnotOnce you have made three passes of the Turks Head Knot use your needle to go under your knot about half the circumference and cut the cord The knot will be tightenough to hide the tail in placeTIP I carefully add a couple of drops of super glue UNDER the band to hold them in place and keep them from sliding around in the nextsteps A drop or two in 3 or 4 places around the band should be enough
Step 10 Add the second knotNow repeat this whole step for the second bandWhen tying the second band you must make sure the Bights line up to the first band This is crucial for the next stepWipe down the bottle to make sure all your finger prints and adhesive from the tape are all removed You want to make sure your bottle is clean at this point Any dirt orfinger prints left on the bottle will be almost impossible to remove From this point on we will use gloves when tying our last knot
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 11 Maping the Top KnotStick a piece of painters tape on top of your first band leaving the bottom of the knot exposedUse a marker to count the number of Bights in your knot Instead of using the pegs we are going to use the Bights to tie our next Turks Head Knot
Step 12 Mapping the Bottom KnotDo the same thing for the bottom band but you must make sure your numbers on top and bottom line up So 1 on top should be the same position as 1 on the bottom
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 13 Adding the last knotAgain using the Turks Head Cookbook and the threaded needle you are going to follow the instructions going over and under as indicated in the book Be sure to usegloves when ever you handle the bottle
Step 14 Thats ItFor this Turks Head Knot I am using a 20 Bight by 19 Lead knot
Because of the amount of cord you are working with your cord will get twisted and knotted You will have to un-twist the cord often Its a pain in the rear but it has to bedone And it has to be done alot
Continue to tie the knot until you finish the knot If you have the cord and the patience you can double or triple the knot When you are done use your needle to hide theends under your bands Cut the ends and your DONE
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Related Instructables
Monkeys FistFloatingKeychain byjokerlz
How To Make ATurks headKnot WithParacord byDoggie Stylish
Tying Trivetsout of Rope forHoliday Gifts bykylemarsh
Paracord KnotDisplay Bord byJamie bagn
How to Make ATurks Head(Photos) bymchs60chip
A pocket full ofknots byKiteman
Monkeys fistknot AND themonkey byjonathan111
TiteTie is theTruckers Knoton Steroids bytitetie
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Larks head noose -- an easy useful knot that tightens and loosensby Larry Breed on February 19 2009
Intro Larks head noose -- an easy useful knot that tightens and loosensI thought I knew all the basic knots but then I was taught this incredibly useful simple knot Its good for tying up the neck of a bag that you want to repeatedly open andsecurely close Its good for tying around a springy bundle that will need tightening and retightening And its easy to undo
Ive looked at knot literature but havent found a name for this so I named it The basic knot is well known its called a larks head Since all Ive done is to slip the twoends through the larks head to make a noose I call it that
WARNING Dont use this knot when human safety would depend on it Climbers and mountaineers have well-tested reliable knots for such situations
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Image Notes1 To tighten further step on this side of the larks head and pull the free ends
Step 1 Double the cord overThe larks head noose requires enough cord to go twice around your bundle plus a foot or two Find the center and double it over Sailors call this a bight
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 2 Form the larks headComing from below the bight hook your thumb and forefinger over the two sides Reach outward and downward and pinch your fingertips together underneath thedoubled cord
Youve made a larks head Move the crossing cord a little farther from your hand so theres a clear opening through the two half-loops
Step 3 Form the nooseSlip the two ends of the cord through the opening we were just talking about Pull the larks head tight so it grips the two cords Find something that needs constrictingand put the noose around it
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 4 Tightening retightening and lockingSlide the knot against the bundle If its not tight enough to keep from slipping tighten it by holding it in one hand and tugging on the cords one at a time with the otherhand Notice that you can slide the knot out again for instance to re-open the bag you just tied shut For some applications this may be as tight as you need it
A springy bundle probably still feels loose If so compress the bundle and get a new grip on the cords Rest your foot on the bundle on the cords nearest the larks headand pull to slide the larks head tighter
To make the knot more permanent you can lock it Make an overhand in the cord ends (Exactly like the first step in tying shoelaces) With your foot still on the bundlepull on the cords and move your hands apart until youre pulling in opposite directions You have just locked the larks head and you can trust it to stay that way()
But lets say that later on you want to loosen the locked knot Again put your foot on the bundle and cords nearest the larks head hold the two cord ends together andpull This makes a little slack between the overhand and the larks head so you can untie the overhand
In twine or small string the locking overhand knot may be difficult to undo Use a shoelace knot instead of an overhand and itll unlock easily
() If youre using slippery cord like polypropylene an overhand may not lock securely You may want to tie another overhand knot For added security wrap a shortlength of duct tape around the two cords close to the knot
Image Notes1 To tighten further step on this side of the larks head and pull the free ends
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Related Instructables
TRX fromParacordChallengeAccepted bythrake
A pocket full ofknots byKiteman
Lens CapLanyard by~teknoarsonist~ how to tie a
noose byawesume
AdjustableParacordGlassesLanyard byjdtwelve12
HangmansNoose PackClosure byPopEye42
Paraleash - ADog LeashFrom Paracordby The Ideanator
How to make arugged andhandy ParacordBelt by Jake22
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Table of Contents
Introduction 1
Author and Copyright Notices 6
Disclaimer 7
Cross Knot Paracord Lanyard 8
Intro Cross Knot Paracord Lanyard 8
Step 1 Supplies 8
Step 2 Step 2 9
Step 3 Step 3 9
Step 4 Step 4 10
Step 5 Step 5 11
Step 6 Step 6 11
Step 7 Step7 12
Step 8 Step 8 14
Step 9 Step 9 15
Step 10 Step 10 16
Step 11 Step 11 17
Step 12 Step 12 18
Step 13 Variations 20
Related Instructables 23
Paracord wrist lanyard made with the snake knot 24
Intro Paracord wrist lanyard made with the snake knot 24
Step 1 Supplies 24
Step 2 Attaching two colors of paracord 25
Step 3 Find the center of the length of paracord 25
Step 4 Making the snake knot 25
Step 5 Count your knots 29
Step 6 Trim and melt the excess paracord 29
Step 7 Youre done 29
Related Instructables 31
How to tie various knots 32
Intro How to tie various knots 32
Step 1 Sheet Bend 33
Step 2 Double Sheet Bend 34
Step 3 Bowline 34
Step 4 Bowline on the Bight 36
Step 5 Clove Hitch 36
Step 6 Round Turn and Two Half-Hitches 37
Step 7 Fishermans Bend 38
Step 8 Studsail Bend 39
Step 9 Figure-8 Knot 39
Step 10 Prussic Knot 40
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 11 Reef Knot 40
Step 12 Cleats 41
Step 13 Practice them 41
Related Instructables 41
How to Tie the Lanyard Knot 42
Intro How to Tie the Lanyard Knot 42
Step 1 Materials 42
Step 2 First Step 42
Step 3 Starting the Knot 43
Step 4 The Most Important Part 43
Step 5 Doubling 44
Step 6 Finishing 44
Related Instructables 45
Four knots to make paracord into a useful tool 46
Intro Four knots to make paracord into a useful tool 46
Step 1 46
Step 2 The half hitch 46
Step 3 The mid line half hitch 48
Step 4 The slippery hitch 49
Step 5 The mid line truchers hitch 50
Related Instructables 52
Figure 8 knot and double 8 knot 53
Intro Figure 8 knot and double 8 knot 53
Step 1 Stating the knot 53
Step 2 Finishing the knot 53
Step 3 The follow through knot 54
Related Instructables 55
Truckers Hitch THE most awesome knot on the planet 56
Intro Truckers Hitch THE most awesome knot on the planet 56
Step 1 Initial setup 58
Step 2 Creating a slip knot 59
Step 3 Tightening and securing 60
Step 4 Securing loose end 60
Step 5 Finished 61
Related Instructables 62
Carry any Bottle with a JUG KNOT Handle 63
Intro Carry any Bottle with a JUG KNOT Handle 63
Step 1 Getting Started 65
Step 2 Form a Bight 67
Step 3 Pull the Bight down 68
Step 4 Cross the Loops 69
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 5 Pass the Bight under the 1st loop 69
Step 6 Weave the Bight 69
Step 7 Extend the Bight 70
Step 8 Flip the Right Loop behind 70
Step 9 Flip the 2nd loop in front 71
Step 10 Remove Slack 72
Step 11 Tighten the Knot 73
Step 12 Secure on bottle neck 74
Step 13 Aluminum Bottle Water Bottle 75
Step 14 Tethered Cork Stopper 77
Step 15 Trussed for Transport 78
Step 16 Advanced 81
Related Instructables 81
Basic Knots Guide 82
Intro Basic Knots Guide 82
Step 1 Thumb knot 82
Step 2 Reef Knot 82
Step 3 Figure of eight 83
Step 4 Timber hitch 84
Step 5 Clove hitch 84
Step 6 Sheet band 84
Step 7 Sheep shank 86
Step 8 Slip knot 86
Related Instructables 86
How to Tie a Fire-escape Knot 87
Intro How to Tie a Fire-escape Knot 87
Step 1 Get Your Rope 87
Step 2 Twist the Rope 87
Step 3 Pull Through the Twist 88
Step 4 Go Over the Split End 88
Step 5 Finally 89
Step 6 Same Name Not Knot 89
Related Instructables 89
Climb Safe With A Figure 8 Knot 90
Intro Climb Safe With A Figure 8 Knot 90
Step 1 Dealing With The Rope 90
Step 2 Tying The First Figure 8 91
Step 3 Looping Into The Harness 93
Step 4 Following Back Through The Figure 8 94
Step 5 Finishing The Knot 96
Step 6 Ready To Climb 99
Related Instructables 100
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Turks Head Knots on a Bottle 101
Intro Turks Head Knots on a Bottle 101
Step 1 Supplies 102
Step 2 Preparation 102
Step 3 Adding the Pegs 102
Step 4 Adding Pegs to the Tape 103
Step 5 Adding the 2nd row of pegs 103
Step 6 Tying the first Turks Head Knot 104
Step 7 Remove the pegs and the tape 104
Step 8 Remove the slack from the knot 105
Step 9 Triple the Knot 105
Step 10 Add the second knot 105
Step 11 Maping the Top Knot 106
Step 12 Mapping the Bottom Knot 106
Step 13 Adding the last knot 107
Step 14 Thats It 107
Related Instructables 108
Larks head noose -- an easy useful knot that tightens and loosens 109
Intro Larks head noose -- an easy useful knot that tightens and loosens 109
Step 1 Double the cord over 110
Step 2 Form the larks head 111
Step 3 Form the noose 111
Step 4 Tightening retightening and locking 112
Related Instructables 113
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Author and Copyright NoticesInstructable Cross Knot Paracord LanyardAuthor StormdraneLicense Attribution-NonCommercial-ShareAlike (by-nc-sa)
Instructable Paracord wrist lanyard made with the snake knotAuthor StormdraneLicense Attribution-NonCommercial-ShareAlike (by-nc-sa)
Instructable How to tie various knotsAuthor adavielLicense Attribution (by)
Instructable How to Tie the Lanyard KnotAuthor eddy14777License Attribution-NonCommercial-ShareAlike (by-nc-sa)
Instructable Four knots to make paracord into a useful toolAuthor erik_mccrayLicense Attribution-NonCommercial-ShareAlike (by-nc-sa)
Instructable Figure 8 knot and double 8 knotAuthor jonathan111License Attribution-NonCommercial-ShareAlike (by-nc-sa)
Instructable Truckers Hitch THE most awesome knot on the planetAuthor schneidp20License Attribution-NonCommercial-ShareAlike (by-nc-sa)
Instructable Carry any Bottle with a JUG KNOT HandleAuthor hpstoutharrowLicense Attribution-NonCommercial-ShareAlike (by-nc-sa)
Instructable Basic Knots GuideAuthor zorro3355License None (All Rights Reserved) (c)
Instructable How to Tie a Fire-escape KnotAuthor leonardo ismaelLicense Attribution-NonCommercial-ShareAlike (by-nc-sa)
Instructable Climb Safe With A Figure 8 KnotAuthor mattsteLicense Attribution-NonCommercial-ShareAlike (by-nc-sa)
Instructable Turks Head Knots on a BottleAuthor sklnxbonesLicense Attribution-NonCommercial-ShareAlike (by-nc-sa)
Instructable Larks head noose -- an easy useful knot that tightens and loosensAuthor Larry BreedLicense Attribution-NonCommercial-ShareAlike (by-nc-sa)
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
DisclaimerAll do-it-yourself activities involve risk and your safety is your own responsibility including proper use of equipment and safety gear and determining whether you haveadequate skill and experience Some of the resources used for these projects are dangerous unless used properly and with adequate precautions including safety gearSome illustrative photos do not depict safety precautions or equipment in order to show the project steps more clearly The projects are not intended for use by children
Many projects on Instructables are user-submitted and appearance of a project in this format does not indicate it has been checked for safety or functionality Use of theinstructions and suggestions is at your own risk Instructables Inc disclaims all responsibility for any resulting damage injury or expense It is your responsibility to makesure that your activities comply with all applicable laws
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Cross Knot Paracord Lanyardby Stormdrane on May 22 2011
AuthorStormdrane Stormdranes BlogNo matter where you go there you are
Intro Cross Knot Paracord Lanyard
This instructable will show how to make a paracord lanyard using the cross knot and snake knot The lanyard can be used as a wallet chain to secure a key chainkeyring knife multitool flashlight cell phone camera binoculars compass and other assorted pocketable gadgets gear and gizmos More projects links knotreferences can be seen in my blog Stormdranes Blog
The cross knot can also be found under different names from other online and book references as The Chinese Crown Knot Chinese Cross Japanese Crown KnotJapanese Success Knot Rustlers Knot Friendship Knot and knot 808 in The Ashley Book of Knots
You can use the loop end of the lanyard to attach it to your item and use the clip end to secure to a belt loop bag pack etc Or run a belt through the lanyards loopand use the attachment to clip onto your gadget gear gizmo etc Longer versions could be used as a pet leash for your dog cat pot belly pig iguana ferret or otherassorted leashable rodents and varmints
Step 1 Supplies
For this project youll need 10 feet of paracord scissors swivel snap hook and a lighter Optional supplies are hemostats tape measure and your own choice ofattachments like split ring swivel clip carabiner snap shackle etc
I used 10 feet of paracord to make a finished lanyardwallet chain of about 25 feet in length You can use more or less to make one of your own preferred length
There are many online sources for paracord available in different lengths and color choices and can sometimes be found at local sporting goods outlets and ArmyNavySurplus stores Various attachments can also be found online and at local retail establishments and you may even scavenge them from keyringskeychains pet leashesetc that you already have
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 2 Step 2
Find the center of your length of cord form a bight which will be the the loop end of your lanyard
Step 3 Step 3
To tie the cross knot youre going to bring the strand of cord on the right over the left strand back under to the right and back under again to the left making an S shapeas shown
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 4 Step 4
Now with the left strand bring it up under the S shape through the top loop as shown
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 5 Step 5
Bring the strand back down over the first two parts of the S shape and under the bottom as shown
Step 6 Step 6
Tighten up the knot by carefully pulling on each of the working ends and loop ends of the cord You can adjust the size of the lanyards loop by working slack from theloop end to decrease its size or from the working ends to increase the loops size Ive kept the loop at about 2 inches in length so that a belt will fit through it but youcan make it larger or smaller to your preference You can also check that the working ends of the paracord are equal in length at this point and work slack through theknot to even them up if needed
Note the other side of the knot looks different with the cross pattern as shown
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 7 Step7
Now you can tie the next knot in the lanyard the same way as the first After tying the next knot work the slack through the knot until you have about 1 inch of spacebetween them then tighten and continue with the next knot Note that the knots look different on each side frontback and that you tie the each facing the same way oralternate them if you choose
Continue making knots until you have about 1 foot of cord left with each end of the working strands
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 8 Step 8
Now you will add your attachment like the swivel snap hook shown putting both strands through the swivel eye to begin tying the snake knot
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 9 Step 9Bring the right strand under the cords then up over them as shown
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 10 Step 10Now take the left strand over across the other strands back behind and under the cords and up through the right strand loop as shown Then tighten
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 11 Step 11
Take the right strand under and behind the cords then bring it back through the tightened knot along side itself as shown and tighten This is where hemostats come inhandy with tying this knot working the cord through the previously tightened part of the knot It can be done without hemostats but requires tighteningloosening of theknots with just your fingertips
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 12 Step 12
Turn the lanyard over so the other side of the knot is facing up The working strand now on the right side will be brought under the cords back up and down through theparallel strands of the knot as shown then tighten And continue this process flipping the lanyard over taking the right strand under and back up around and through theparallel cords and tighten Continue until you run out of cord or reach the cross knot
Youll now trim off any excess cord and quick melt the end of the strands to prevent fraying to finish
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 13 Variations
You can use other two strand knots instead of the cross knot for variations on this style of lanyard A few alternatives to try tying in a spaced out series or combination ofthem Matthew Walker knot double wall knot lanyard knot double overhand knots double figure 8 knots etc The finishing knots around the attachment can also bedifferent as Ive used the lanyard knot sometimes just one or several in a row
You can also use variations of the cross knot with paracord bracelets and watchbands Doubled version of the knot shown as a paracord bracelet and alternating withtwo pairs of strands for the paracord watchband Leftover pieces of paracord can be used for zipper pulls key ring fobs even paracord cross pendants
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Related Instructables
Paracord ChainSinnet FastDeploy BoonieHatband (video)by Stormdrane
Zigzag SpoolingParacord (video)by Stormdrane
SurvivalBracelet(Updated) bytevers94
Celtic ButtonKnot (video) byStormdrane
ParacordBoonie HatWrap (video) byStormdrane
Paracord wristlanyard madewith the snakeknot byStormdrane
SurvivalBracelet II bytevers94
Cobra WeaveKey Fob bytevers94
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Paracord wrist lanyard made with the snake knotby Stormdrane on September 12 2007
AuthorStormdrane Stormdranes BlogNo matter where you go there you are
Intro Paracord wrist lanyard made with the snake knotThis instructable will show how to make a wrist lanyard using paracord and the snake knot The lanyard can be used to secure a key chain knife multi-tool flashlightcell phone camera binoculars compass etc More projects links knot references can be seen on my blog page Stormdranes Blog
Step 1 SuppliesYoull need about 45 feet of paracord(you may use other types of cordage if desired) The paracord I used is from the Supply Captain I left the inner strands in theparacord but you can remove them if preferred If done in one color it will be one continuous 45 ft length if done in two colors youll need 3 ft for the primary color thatincludes the wrist section and 15 ft for the second color that will show in the snake knot Also used are scissors tape measure or ruler lighter hemostats or needle nosepliers(not necessary but they make it much easier) and a swivel clip key ring snap hook cell phone lariat carabiner or whatever attachment you prefer to use
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 2 Attaching two colors of paracordIf using two colors of paracord you will insert one color about 12 inch into the other color You may remove a small amount of the paracords inner strands by pullingthem out trimming with scissors and pulling the paracord outer sheath back over the strands leaving room to insert the other color For various projects Ive used threedifferent methods for attaching two colors of paracord melting sewing or gluing The choice is yours I usually sew them together it doesnt matter as long as its a goodconnection It will be hidden under the first knot
Step 3 Find the center of the length of paracordTake the center of the length of cord and bring it thru the attachment Im using a swivel clip For this tutorial Im measuring the wrist loop at about 10 inches from theattachment The connection of the two colors will be just on the other side at this point
Step 4 Making the snake knotThe snake knot will be made around the wrist loop section of paracord the loop strands being the core of the knot Ive added a series of photos showing the steps Iuse By using two colors youll see that I flip the lanyard over after making each knot so that Im working with the cord on the right side of the lanyard I bring it under allthe other cords working the hemostats under the previously tightened knot and pulling the cord back thru Then tightening up the knot keeping the cord from twisting andworking it up against the previous knot Again flipping the work over youll see two parallel cords of the same color which will be split with the cord on the right goingunder around and pulled thru with the hemostats then tightened up Continue this procedure until youve done about 10 snake knots(you can count them down eitherside
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 5 Count your knotsOnce you have 10 snake knots youre almost done Youll notice from the photos of both sides of the lanyard that one side has the snake knots alternating all the waydown and the other has a set of parallel knots at the top and botton of the sequence of knots Youll always have those at the start and finish of the snake knots I preferto have them end up on the same side of the lanyard so one side appears to have a more uniform look but its not required
Step 6 Trim and melt the excess paracordUse the scissors to trim off the excess cord and quickly melt the ends with a lighter so they dont fray
Step 7 Youre doneYou can make a range of variations using less or more cordknots Shorten the loop for a double ended key chain or make the loop longer for use as a neck lanyard aLanyard Break-Away Connector could be added for the safety conscious You can also add a wooden bead skull cord lock etc Visit my blog page for more knot relatedprojects links and resources Stormdranes Blog You can find ideas for other geargadgets to attach to your lanyard on EDC Forums
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Related Instructables
Paracord ChainSinnet FastDeploy BoonieHatband (video)by Stormdrane
Cross KnotParacordLanyard byStormdrane
Zigzag SpoolingParacord (video)by Stormdrane
SurvivalBracelet II bytevers94
SurvivalBracelet(Updated) bytevers94
Cobra WeaveKey Fob bytevers94
ParacordBoonie HatWrap (video) byStormdrane
Paracord KnotDisplay Bord byJamie bagn
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
How to tie various knotsby adaviel on September 7 2009
Intro How to tie various knotsKnots as a way of joining rope without special equipment are useful in many situations On a sailboat knots are essential both for daily use and for emergency repairsThis instructable describes several different common knots eg
Sheet Bend - to tie two lines togetherBowline - to make a loopReef Knot - to fasten a bundle of materialFishermans Bend - to secure a line to a post or ring
These knots are good for regular rope - braided or 3-strand polyester or natural fibre (hemp sisal) Monofilament (fishing line) or steel cable performs better with differentknots
Knots are typically quite a lot weaker than straight rope - when rope goes around a tight radius such as in a knot the outside is under more tension than the insideSplices (which require special tools and are time-consuming to make) are stronger so permanent fittings usually have eye-splices
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 1 Sheet BendThe sheet bend is used to tie two lines together It is perhaps the most generally useful knot of all When used to tie a line to itself making a loop it is called a bowlineThe strain is taken on the ropes in the middle - not the one coming out the side
How the knot is made is not critical - it is the final shape that is important One can make the flat loop first and work the other rope around it Or one can make thecrossed loop first - required when tying a bowline
The two images show front and back views of the same knot
AdvantagesEasy to makeEasy to undo when tension is removedDoes not easily capsize
DisadvantagesHard to make under loadDangerous to make under heavy load
UsesJoining two equally-sized ropesExtending a towline or stern line
Method 1 the same as a bowline
Method 2 starting with the flat loop
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 2 Double Sheet BendThe double sheet bend is used to tie two lines of different thickness - but not too different It is the same as a normal sheet bend but with an extra turn of the thinner ropearound the flat loop in the thickerThe load goes on the line through the flat loop not the one that comes out the side of the knot
UsesSecuring a heaving line to a tow lineExtending a stern line if you dont have enough line of one thickness
Step 3 BowlineThe bowline is really a special case of the sheet bend but it it tied at the end of a rope to make a loop
The photos show the completed loop and closeups of the front and back of the actual knot Note that it is the same as the sheet bend - but it must be made the right wayround This loop does not tighten in use The knot is quite easy to untie once the load is removed With practice it is very quick to tie
Some usesSecuring a dinghy line to a railing or stanchionSecuring an anchor line to an anchorTie a jib sheet to the sailTie a mooring line around a rock or treeTie a float to an anchor triplineUse one in each line to tie two ropes of very different sizes - eg a throwing line to a large tow ropeDisadvantages the knot must be completely made before it will take any strain - it is hard to tie if there is already a load on the rope
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Linked bowlines
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 4 Bowline on the BightA bowline on the bight is a bowline tied in a loop of rope (neither end is needed) The shape is the same as a bowline made with a double line but the middle of thebight forms the loop around the standing part
UsesAn impromptu bosuns chair - to sit in while being transferred between two boats at sea
Step 5 Clove HitchThe clove hitch can be made when you only have the bight (the middle) of a rope not the ends
UsesSecuring a burgee pole to a burgee halyard (a continuous loop of thin line)Securing a tiller from swinging
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 6 Round Turn and Two Half-HitchesThis is a knot used to secure a line to a ring or bar Wind a couple of turns around the bar then secure the end with two hitches around the standing part (this looks like aclove hitch when done)
AdvantagesCan be made under load - it is easy to take turns around the bar while maintaining tension on the ropeStrong - provided the bar is thicker than the rope the rope is not weakened by sharp bendsDisadvantagesThe end tends to work loose
UsesSecuring a line to a mooring ring or samson post
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 7 Fishermans BendThe fishermans bend is the same as the round turn and two half hitches except that the first hitch is looped under the round turn This uses the tension on the rope tosecure the end from working loose
AdvantagesSecure against working loose
DisadvantagesHard to make under tensionHard to undo under tensionMay seize up under load when wet making it hard to undo
UsesSecuring mooring line to ringSecuring fender lines to rail
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 8 Studsail BendThe studsail bend is like the fishermans bend but the second hitch is also secured under the round turn making it even more secure against working loose when undertension
AdvantagesVery secure against working looseDisadvantagesHard to make under tensionHard to undo under tension
Step 9 Figure-8 KnotThe figure-eight knot is used to prevent an end of rope from passing through a block (pulley) Sometimes called a stopper knot
The double figure-8 knot is used in rock climbing as an alternative to a bowline to secure a climbing harness to the end of a safety rope The double knot is made bymaking a single knot then tracing back around the knot with the free end after passing it around the harness loop
AdvantagesEasy to verify by inspectionNot prone to work loose
DisadvantagesSlow to make and undoCannot be made under load
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 10 Prussic KnotThe prussic knot may be used as a climbing ascender - when made around a vertical rope as shown downwards tension on the ends locks the knot while release oftension allows it to be slid up the rope A pair of prussic knots on foot loops may be used in tandem to climb a rope
UsesClimbing a ropeTaking up tension to free a riding turn on a winch
Step 11 Reef KnotThe reef knot or square knot is used to tie a bundle of material together It must be made around something - it should not be used to tie two free ropes togetherbecause it can easily capsizeIt should not be used to make a loop unless it can be tensioned around a solid object It should not be used around a person - use a bowline instead A capsized reefknot will slip easily and could constrict and cause severe injury
UsesReefing a sail (tying the unused portion around a spar)Securing a furled sail to a spar (sail ties)Wrapping a parcelTying shoelaces
AdvantagesMay be made under moderate load
DisadvantagesCapsizes (works free) if used improperlyCan seize up under load when wet
Tying the knot
Capsizing a reef knot
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 12 CleatsThis is not a knot but is very common on boatsThe first picture shows a rope cleated normally The second shows one with a final locking turn - the last turn is twisted before placing over the cleat so that the tensionon the rope helps secure the free end
When working with ropes under tension take a turn or two around a winch or cleat before trying to secure the end with a knot The load on the free end falls exponentiallywith each turn taken Severe injury can result if a finger or other body part is caught in a loop of rope or between a rope and another object
Step 13 Practice themIt is sometimes useful to be able to tie knots in the dark or as in this video behind your back
Related Instructables
AThird Hand forSailing or OtherThings by WadeTarzia
Paracord KnotDisplay Bord byJamie bagn
Trip LogOutriggerCanoe Sailingthe CaliforniaChannel Islandsby TimAnderson
How to Tie aFigure EightKnot byTactical_Pyro
How to build apirate ship bymdelaney3
Build a ShortDragon (16 foot3-BoardOutriggerSailing Canoe)by Wade Tarzia
repairing aheadsail by josh
How to get arope into a tree(withoutclimbing it) byvitex
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
How to Tie the Lanyard Knotby eddy14777 on January 31 2010
Intro How to Tie the Lanyard KnotMany people including myself have had trouble following the Stormdrane youtube video on tying the lanyard knot so i have done some research and found the solution
Image Notes1 Finished knot
Step 1 MaterialsAll you need is a reasonable length of para cord or whatever you wish to use
Image Notes1 One reasonable amount
Step 2 First StepThe first thing you are going to do is to make a bight that leaves you with to congruent endsThen you are going to put your ring finger through the bight
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Image Notes1 Close enough2 Bight
Step 3 Starting the KnotMake a loop just like the one in the picture and place it over the top strandBring the top strand under the bottom strand
Image Notes1 Notice the way the loop is done2 Top strand
Image Notes1 Bottom strand2 Top strand is under
Step 4 The Most Important PartNow you take the top stand from the previous picture and feed it over the first part of the loop under itself and back over the remainder of the loop
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Image Notes1 Under me2 Top strand3 This should make a diamond type shape
Step 5 DoublingNow take the bottom stand and take it around the part of the top strand nearest to the bight and than come up through the diamond shape in the middleDo the same for the top strand
Image Notes1 Top strand
Image Notes1 Both through the diamond
Step 6 FinishingWhen you take it off your finger it should look like thisWork out the slack by pulling on the bight and the two strands
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Image Notes1 Finished knot
Related Instructables
Cross KnotParacordLanyard byStormdrane
Celtic ButtonKnot (video) byStormdrane
Paracord wristlanyard madewith the snakeknot byStormdrane
Paracord ChainSinnet FastDeploy BoonieHatband (video)by Stormdrane
Zigzag SpoolingParacord (video)by Stormdrane
ParacordBoonie HatWrap (video) byStormdrane
Paracord IDbadge Lanyardby Flahusky
Cobra WeaveKey Fob bytevers94
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Four knots to make paracord into a useful toolby erik_mccray on March 27 2010
Authorerik_mccrayI am an ex-fabricator that is now a stay at home dad I love my new job but I do miss making stuff I love this site amp I am getting involved as a way to keep myskills upOn top of fad work I have also run two small business in the past One was custom sewing amp the other was as a small engine mechanicI have two votec degrees one in metal fabrication amp the other is in engine repairI look forward to getting to know everyone here
Intro Four knots to make paracord into a useful toolParacord is an awesome multitool used everywhere from the wild blue yonder to the deepest caverns But like any good tool it is only as good as the knowledge the userhas about the tool With most people out there using bungee cords amp ratchet straps it seems that paracord is being used for nothing more than friendship bracelets forgrown men This is a shame because for less then the price of a few cheap bungee cords amp some to short to be helpful straps You can get yourself hundreds of feet ofparacord
The key to getting the most out of the paracord is good knot work The first thing you need to know is what makes a good knot One is that the knot is easy amp quick to tieamp more impotant is that the knot is easy amp quick to untie The hitch class of knots is by far the best group of knots that the average person could know The four mostuseful hitch knots are the half hitch a quick simple knot that forms the base for many other knots the inline half hitch allowing you to get the most out of one length ofparacord the slippery hitch that gives you both on the fly control over tension on your paracord but also an adjustable loop that will not change unless you want it amp theinline truckers hitch instantly doubling the your pulling power
Step 1 To get started lets get some terminology that will be used defined
line= the paracord
Main line= the part of the paracord doing the work for example holding down your tarp or the long part of the paracord
Mid line= the middle of the length of the paracord
End line= the unused length of paracord or the short length of paracord
Step 2 The half hitch The half hitch is a simple way to secure a line to an anchor point like the tie down points in most trucks A half hitch is a constrictor knot meaning that the harder you pullon the line the tighter the knots grip gets Another common constrictor knot is the slip knot
Step 1 wrap your line around your anchor point Step 2 wrap the end line around the main line
Step 3 pass the end line threw the end line side of the newly formed loop
step 4 now take the slack out of the knot
step 5 to make sure the knot is secure tie another half hitch to the main line This knot is called adouble half hitch
step 6 another useful thing that can be done with the half hitch is that instead of repeating the wrap on the main line but repeating it on what you are tying to the half hitchcan be used to bind something like a stack of 2x4s
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Image Notes1 End line2 Main line3 step 1
Image Notes1 Step 2
Image Notes1 passing thew the end line side of the loop2 step 3
Image Notes1 step 5
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Image Notes1 step 6
Step 3 The mid line half hitch The mid line half hitch is for when the length of line is to long for the job at hand amp you dont want to have to cut the line to size or you are using multiple anchor pointswith one length of line
Step 1 double up the line at the point in the length you wish to make the knot
Step 2 wrap the doubled up portion of line around your anchor point The doubled up length is now now the end line
Step 3 now tie just as you did for the regular half hitch repeat the knot to make a double half hitch for security
Image Notes1 A mid line double half hitch
Image Notes1 step 1
Image Notes1 The end line2 step 2
Image Notes1 Step 3
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 4 The slippery hitch The slippery hitch is a great knot for adjusting tension on the main line or for having an adjustable fixed loop To adjust the knot simply slide the knot up or down the mainline
Step 1 wrap your line around the anchor point or just double over the line to form a loop
Step 2 wrap the end line around the main line three times Wrapping in the direction of the anchor point or loop
Step 3 put together the two lines making up the loop amp wrap the two lines one time with the end line
Step 4 pass the end line thew the last loop formed covering the two lined of the loop
Step 5 pull the knot tite
step 6 to adjust the size of the loop or main line tension grab the knot amp slide it up or down the main line
Image Notes1 grab just the knot its self to adjust it2 step 5
Image Notes1 step 1
Image Notes1 step 2
Image Notes1 step 3
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Image Notes1 step 4
Image Notes1 grab just the knot its self to adjust it2 step 5
Image Notes1 same knot as in last pic Just slid up2 step 6
Step 5 The mid line truchers hitch The truckers hitch is a great way to double the pulling force on a line There are many ways to tie this knot the problem with most of them is that at some point you aregoing to have to pass the end line through a loop on the main line that is acting like a pulley to double your pulling force this is great if you are making the knot close tothe end of your line but if you are using a 300 length of line amp want to make the knot in the first ten feet having to pass 290 of line thew a loop is a pain But with a fewhalf hitches you will not have to pass the end line threw any loop on the main line
step 1 wrap your line around the anchor point then double over your end line laying the top of the loop over the main line
Step 2 double up your main line amp lay the loop over the loop made by the end line
step 3 in main line above the knot twist in a loop
step 4 put main line loop thew the loop made in step 3 amp pull this loop tight over your main line loop forming a half hitch Repeat step 3 amp 4 to make a doublehalf hitch
step 5 To use the knot just pull down on the end line to put tension on the main line
step 6 after you have the main line snug tie a mid line double half hitch around the two lines forming the loop at the end of the main line with the end line
step 7 Tie a double half hitch with the end line around the end loop of the mid line half hitch of step 6 using the same method as used in steps 3 amp 4
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Image Notes1 the end of step 6
Image Notes1 main line2 end line3 step 1
Image Notes1 main line loop2 end line loop
Image Notes1 step 3
Image Notes1 step 4
Image Notes1 step 4 at the end with a double half hitch on the main loop
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Image Notes1 pull here2 step 5
Image Notes1 the start of step 6
Image Notes1 the end of step 6
Image Notes1 step 72 now the rest of the line is free to do more work
Related Instructables
Paracord KnotDisplay Bord byJamie bagn
ChokelessAdjustableParacord DogLeash byPizzaman101
ParacordLadder wWooden Rungsby josestude
tie a paracordshackle grip byitri45
ParacordPrussik Belt byJavaNut13
TiteTie is theTruckers Knoton Steroids bytitetie
ID Lanyard(Photos) byeschmunk
Dog Toys forHeavy Chewersby J3443RY
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Figure 8 knot and double 8 knotby jonathan111 on November 28 2007
Intro Figure 8 knot and double 8 knotI will show you how to tie a figure 8 knot and a figure 8 follow through
Step 1 Stating the knotThis is a simple knot so just follow the pictures
Step 2 Finishing the knotCross the string under and then push it through the hole Pull tightly unless you are going to do the follow through and leave it somewhat loose
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 3 The follow through knotThe follow through knot should be tied around something brought back and followed through the path of the 8 knot Look at the pictures Basically follow through the 8knot backwards
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Related Instructables
Climb Safe WithA Figure 8Knot by mattste A pocket full of
knots byKiteman
How to Tie aFigure EightKnot byTactical_Pyro
Paracord KnotDisplay Bord byJamie bagn
Cross KnotParacordLanyard byStormdrane
How to Tie aFire-escapeKnot by leonardoismael
Truckers HitchTHE mostawesome knoton the planetby schneidp20
Paracord ZipperPuller byrepeet13
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Truckers Hitch THE most awesome knot on the planetby schneidp20 on October 12 2008
Authorschneidp20I like building stuff Trouble is there just isnt enough time to build everything Sigh
Intro Truckers Hitch THE most awesome knot on the planetYes I know that there are plenty of other cool knots out there many of which I literally couldnt live wo I rock climb However this knot is unlike any other Plus Ineeded a grabber for my Instructable -) (BTW this ISNT a climbing knot) And in truth it isnt a knot by itself but rather a system of common knots
Have you ever tried to tie something down for transporting but just couldnt get the lines tight andor during transport the lines would continually loosen Then this is theknot for you I learned this knot back in the 70s when specialty car racks and ratchet straps were rare or unheard of I initially used it to tie a canoe on a car rack bothattaching to the rack as well as the lines to the bow and stern of the canoe Even with all the new gizmos available today this knot still shines because all you need is arope and ropes dont hum in the wind like straps
The unique aspect of this knot is that it gives you a 2-1 mechanical advantage when tightening the rope Be careful though You can actually damage some thingsbecause of the mechanical advantage This knot holds fast and is easy to untie hallmark traits of any good knot
Below you see the finished knot system well break it apart in the steps that follow
Image Notes1 1st anchor point a bowline2 loop3 securing knots 2 half hitches4 securing loose end with a fishermans knot5 2nd anchor point (should be round)
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Image Notes1 X marks the spot
Step 1 Initial setupThe first step is to anchor one end of the rope and then loop the rope around a 2nd anchor point
For attaching to the 1st anchor point I chose bowline a close 2 on my list -) There are other instructables on that one so I wont bore you here
The 2nd anchor really should be round because it serves as a pulley in this block and tackle type knot Ive used it on sharp anchor points and it doesnt work as well
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 2 Creating a slip knotTie a slip knot somewhere between the two anchor points Correct placement of the slip knot takes some experience to judge it correctly Typically I place it too close tothe 2nd anchor point and end up with not enough room to work with If the knot ends up too far from 2nd anchor point you can extend the knot by enlarging the loop
Be sure you tie the slip knot as shown You may not be able to untie other knots
In this small example the slip knot is uncharacteristically close to the 1st anchor point
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 3 Tightening and securingThe loose end of the rope that went around the 2nd anchor point goes through the slip knot loop Pull the loose end to the desired tension and secure with two halfhitches
Note To allow better view of the knots the rope isnt really tightened in this example
Step 4 Securing loose endThe final knot is just to secure the loose end somehow I chose a fishermans knot to do this
To tie a fishermans knot the rope goes around twice and goes under the X created by the loops Pull the loose end to tighten Finally slide the knot to put tension onthe half hitches
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Image Notes1 X marks the spot
Step 5 FinishedThere you have it I guarantee that the first time you really use this knot (not just practice) you will be amazed at how well it works and youll wish you knew this knot along time ago You may even come over to my side and declare that is is THE most awesome knot on the planet -)
Enjoy and happy haulingDave
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Related Instructables
TiteTie is theTruckers Knoton Steroids bytitetie
Four knots tomake paracordinto a usefultool byerik_mccray
Modify yourbike rack tocarry a sunfishor other boat byewilhelm
SurfboardHammock byGermy
GiganticHalloweenSpider Web bynolte919
How To Tie ASpiders Hitch(video) by back-cast
Three-hitch mathair ornamentby michiexile TRX from
ParacordChallengeAccepted bythrake
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Carry any Bottle with a JUG KNOT Handleby hpstoutharrow on September 17 2009
Intro Carry any Bottle with a JUG KNOT HandleTie a JUG KNOT around a water bottle soda bottle or aluminum bottle to make a secure carrying strap
Re-purpose any container into a reusable water bottle by adding a convenient carrying strap This Instructable will demonstrate how to tie a JUG knot which like its namesuggests is meant to properly secure around the neck of a container
With some cord and the knowledge of this knot you will be able add a handle lanyard or carabiner loop to any of your favorite beverages to carry them on the go
It works perfectly for those disposable water bottles and who knows once you add some colorful cord to the plain old clear water bottle you just might beinclined to refill it and use it again(Check out pictures 4amp5 below)
In addition to plastic beverage bottles like pop water and sports drinks you can turn those rugged aluminum beer bottles into a backpacking canteen
Those of you familiar with my previous aluminum bottle InstructablesROLLED RIM METAL TUMBLERhttpwwwinstructablescomidAluminum-Bottle-Tumbler-Cup-Cook-PotALUMINUM BOTTLE LIGHTWEIGHT ALCOHOL STOVEhttpwwwinstructablescomidAluminum-Bottle-Alcohol-Stovewill recognize the water canteen shown below as a re-purposed aluminum beer bottle Here I have added a painted surface treatment to turn it into a proper lookingwater bottle More on that in steps 13 14 15
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 1 Getting StartedCord size is important Select a small medium weight cord like the one shown here It is a general purpose camp cord sold at most sporting goods stores (shoelacesmight also work)
Do not use a heavy cord or rope because the larger diameter will not tuck under the relatively small lip at the top of the bottleneck and the bottle will fall out
Also the smaller cord cinches tight on itself and will not loosen accidentally
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 2 Form a BightThe next steps show how to tie a JUG KNOT It is the basic step for adding a carrying strap It is also the anchor point for any additional fancy bottle trussing you maywant to add
JUG KNOT Step 1
Form a Bight in the center of a length of cord Bight is a knot term for a loop or bend in the rope In this case the main Bight in this knot is highlighted with a white mark Imakes it easier to follow its path in these steps
The running ends of the cord should be equal length
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 3 Pull the Bight downPULL the Bight DOWN forming two Loops
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 4 Cross the LoopsCROSS the right Loop OVER the left Loop
Step 5 Pass the Bight under the 1st loopTake the main Bight and pass it UNDER the left Loop
Step 6 Weave the BightWEAVE the Bight OVER the portion of the right Loop and UNDER the portion of the left Loop
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 7 Extend the BightExtend the Bight OVER the outer portion of the right Loop
Step 8 Flip the Right Loop behindAdditional colored identification points have been added to the loops to follow their travel in these next two steps
The right Loop Yellow marker is FLIPPED BEHIND the knot and ends up on the far left side of the knot
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 9 Flip the 2nd loop in frontRaise the green marker (located on what was formerly the left loop) and pull it down and to the right FLIPPING IT IN FRONT of the knot
Note the blue portion of the this loop will pass around the outside of the yellow portion of the first loop
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Image Notes1 Center of knot that will tighten around the bottles neck
Step 10 Remove SlackNote where the blue green amp yellow markers end up
Start to remove the slack in the loops by pulling the original main Bight (white marker top right) and the two free standing ends at the bottom
the bottle neck will pass through the very center of the knot
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Image Notes1 Center of knot that will tighten around the bottles neck
Step 11 Tighten the KnotAfter removing the slack insert the bottle neck and finish tightening
The knot should look like this before slipping it over the bottle
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 12 Secure on bottle neckThis is the finished knot shown on the neck of various containers
The loop end and the two free standing ends can be tied together to create a carrying handle (last picture below)
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 13 Aluminum Bottle Water Bottle
The next few steps show the features of an aluminum beer bottle re-purposed as a water bottle canteen It is one of many containers that can be reused as a camp waterbottle
The bottle was lightly sanded masked and then pained with a hammered finished paint to create an interesting surface texture
Image Notes1 Textured finish paint makes an interesting grip-able surface2 Masked with tape for painting3 Masked with tape for painting
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Image Notes1 Dowel used for holding the bottle during painting
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 14 Tethered Cork StopperUse a wine bottle man made Cork as a stopper for your aluminum water bottleNote Use a cork that was removed from the wine bottle without the corkscrew penetrating through the bottom end of the cork (A hole all the way through the cork willcause it to leak) Use the unpierced end of the cork inside the water bottle
Drill a hole through the sides of the Cork Thread the cord through the hole to the center of the cord Use the cork as the main Bight and tie the Jug knot as shown inthe beginning steps
Now the cork is tethered to the bottle and will not get lost or fall on the ground
A Carabiner clip passes through the other cord end to attache the water bottle to you belt or pack
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 15 Trussed for TransportThis is another hanging method for carrying your aluminum bottle water canteen A Jug knot is tied conventionally around the neck
The running ends of the knot however are pulled down towards the bottom of the bottle A Barrel Knot is tied about 34 the way down the side of the bottle A squareknot is tied on the bottom of the knot to keep the two running ends tight against the sides of the bottle
I like the look of the accent colored cord running down the sides of the bottle and the fact that the bottle hangs from the belt upside down It adds to its uniqueness
The last picture shows another truss variation
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 16 AdvancedBelow is a bottle with some additional trussing You can be creative as you want It all starts with a re-purposed container and the Jug Knot (and enough cord)
Related Instructables
AluminumBottle TumblerCup amp Cook Potfor an AlcoholStove byhpstoutharrow
Water BottleBelt Clip byuglymike Duct Tape
Water Bottle byrabidsquire2
AluminumBottle AlcoholStove byhpstoutharrow
DIYGlass WaterBottle byCulturespy
Solar WaterHeater forBackpackingUsing WaterBottles and aCar Shade bykopomeroy
Duct tape waterbottle holder(Photos) by pinkmarshmallow
How to make aCamelPack withan old plasticbottle bywillrandship
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Basic Knots Guideby zorro3355 on April 29 2008
Intro Basic Knots Guidehi
Step 1 Thumb knotThe most simple knotUsed as a stopper and prevent ropes from fraying
Step 2 Reef KnotUsed to tie two ropes of equal thickness togetherIt is pretty easy to tie and untie but under tentionit may be diffcult to untieIt is also not sutible for smoothropes(egnylon ropes)
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 3 Figure of eightused as a stopperprevent ropes from fraying and its more secure than tumb knot its is also used to tie Caribinas to ropes and is often used in rock climbing
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 4 Timber hitchused for pulling logs
Step 5 Clove hitchUsed to tie a rope onto a pole or logThe pole must be roundThe pole lust be thicker then the rope itself
(greatly used during pioneering)
Step 6 Sheet bandused to tie ropes of different thickness together(works on same thickness of ropes too)
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 7 Sheep shankTo shorten RopesTo prevent middle fraying
Step 8 Slip knotWhippingUsed as a grip for pulling things(when tied on a stick or small pole)(marlin spike hitch)
Related Instructables
Rope Rings byhpstoutharrow
How to Tie aFigure EightKnot byTactical_Pyro
Whippin (WestCountry Style)by tim_n
SurvivalBracelet(Updated) bytevers94
HangmansNoose PackClosure byPopEye42
Turkey on aTripod byhpstoutharrow
SurvivalBracelet II bytevers94 Zigzag Spooling
Paracord (video)by Stormdrane
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
How to Tie a Fire-escape Knotby leonardo ismael on October 16 2007
Intro How to Tie a Fire-escape KnotThis knot is used by firemen in case of fires for example imagine a scene where the ladder on the firetruck messes up but people need to get down a five story buildingor more All they have is a long piece of rope they can safely get down with a secure knot like the fire-escape knot So why not learn it its easy to do and hard to untieif you tie it tightly
This is from the American Boys Handbook
Step 1 Get Your RopeFirst grab a piece of rope and bend it like this to make a loop in it Follow every step to the smallest detail
Step 2 Twist the RopeNow make a twist like this and hold it together
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 3 Pull Through the TwistPull the loop through the twist you just made from underneath
Step 4 Go Over the Split EndNow pull the tail through the loop
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 5 FinallyAnd finally just pull it through as pictured below
Congratulations you just learned the fire-escape knot
Step 6 Same Name Not KnotThis is another knot called the fire-escape knot this shouldnt be your result
Related Instructables
House FireEscape Plan(video) byWhatHappensNowAdvice
ParacordLadder wWooden Rungsby josestude
Bed SheetEscape Rope byjessehensel
rope ladder(glow-in-the-dark version) bymikeasaurus
HeadlockEscape 2(video) byjohnnyrockstah
QuickFirestarter byMattandJora
Trail sauna byjakee117
How to Kill FireAnts andCommitGenocide byKentsOkay
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Climb Safe With A Figure 8 Knotby mattste on February 23 2010
Intro Climb Safe With A Figure 8 Knot There are many things that a beginning climber needs to know including several important knots Perhaps the most essential knot is the Figure 8 Follow Through Thistutorial will demonstrate how to correctly harness yourself to a rope using a Figure 8 Follow Through knot This knot is used primarily by rock climbers to provide a life-line Since this knot is used as a life-line it is very important to be able to tie it correctly (Your life could depend upon it)
Dont worry with this tutorial and about 5 minutes of practice you can have this knot mastered
Things you will need
- Climbing Harness- Climbing Rope
If you are wanting to go climbing and dont already have these items they can be purchased for about $25 each at most outdoor sporting goods stores If you are merelylooking to learn the knot a belt loop and a rope (about five feet long) will do
Image Notes1 Climbing Harness2 Climbing Rope
Step 1 Dealing With The RopeThroughout this tutorial I will be discussing different parts of the rope To make these instructions as clear as possible I will define a few terms that I will use throughoutthe tutorial The Anchor End of the rope will generally be at the top of the images This is the end that would be anchored to the wall or rock and does not move Wewill not be doing much with the anchored end The Tail End of the rope is the opposite end that we will be dealing with I will call this the tail for short
Now that we have some terms to work with lets get started
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 2 Tying The First Figure 8This knot has several parts to it The first part of the knot is just tying a basic figure 8 To tie the first figure 8 there are four simple steps
1 - Using the tail make a loop over the rope (as shown in the first picture) keeping in mind that there should be about 3 ft of slack on the tail end
2 - Wrap the tail back this time go under the anchored end (As shown in the second picture)
3 - Bring the tail down through the first loop (As shown in the third picture)
4 - Finally pull the two ends to make the knot a little bit tighter and easier to deal with (Shown in the fourth picture)
After these four steps you should end up with a knot that resembles a figure 8
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 3 Looping Into The Harness In order to secure the rope to the harness simply thread the tail end of the rope through the front loop in the harness as shown in the picture below This step isobviously very important
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 4 Following Back Through The Figure 8After looping the rope through the harness you have to thread the tail end of the rope back through the knot following the first figure 8 I have divided this process intofive smaller steps in order to make it more clear
1 - Coming form underneath the knot bring the tail up through the near loop and to the left behind the anchored end of the rope (Shown in the first picture)
2 - Wrap the tail around the anchored end back to the right and down through the adjacent loop (Shown in the second picture)
3 - You simply need to bring the tail back over the top of the knot to the left (Shown in the third picture)
4 - Bring the tail end up through the far loop following the anchored end (Shown in the fourth picture)
5 - Finally pull the knot tight (Shown in the fifth picture)
As you can see the first four pictures are simply tracing the knot back through with the tail end
For the last part while you pull the knot tight you may want to make small adjustments and rearrange how it all fits together If the knot does not lay perfectly smoothand tight its NOT a big deal
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 5 Finishing The Knot After completing the Figure 8 knot you will want to somehow secure the tail end of the rope out of the way There are a couple different ways to do this the way that Iwill demonstrate is using whats called a Stopper Knot This secondary knot is similar to a Fishermans knot and is pretty simple I have once again divided thisprocess into several smaller steps
1 - Start by wrapping the tail end around the anchored end (As shown in the first picture)
2 - Wrap the tail back underneath the two vertical segments (As shown in the second picture)
3 - Simply repeat the first two steps wrapping the tail around again (As shown in the third picture)
4 - This step in the fourth picture may look complicated but all you need to do is insert the tail up through the two loops that you have just made
5 - To finish off the knot you will want to slowly pull the tail end while gently pushing the bottom of the stopper knot upwards If you have successfully completed this knotit should look something like the fifth picture
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 6 Ready To Climb Now that you have mastered the Figure 8 knot you can securely harness yourself into a climbing rope Remember there are many other skills that go into setting up ananchor and belaying a climber This tutorial only covers the figure 8 knot For more information there are many great websites that demonstrate how to correctly set up asafe climbing system (Ive posted a few below) If you are a beginning climber I recommend that you read up on a few other climbing techniques Also you shouldprobably go to a climbing wall or gym where there are experienced climbers that can show you the ropes Hopefully this tutorial has been helpful Have fun and be safe
Some useful linkshttpwwwstephenprattnetAnchorsanchorshtmhttpwwwuoregonedu~oppclimbingtopicsanchorshtmlhttpwwwabc-of-rockclimbingcomhowtoclimbingtechniquesasp
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Related Instructables
How to Tie aFigure EightKnot byTactical_Pyro
Paracord KnotDisplay Bord byJamie bagn
Basic KnotsGuide byzorro3355
How to Climb aTree (withprussiks) bystasterisk
How to climb atree (using onlyrope) thefunsimple wayby louieaw
How to get arope into a tree(withoutclimbing it) byvitex
How to tievarious knots byadaviel
How to make arope swing byjdub0928
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Turks Head Knots on a Bottleby sklnxbones on July 6 2010
Intro Turks Head Knots on a BottleThis is the finished project A bottle decorated with three Turks Head Knots There are only three knots on this bottle The RED and the BLUE knots are each a 20 Bightby 3 Lead Turks Head Knots The WHITE knot is a 20 Bight by 19 Lead Turks Head Knot
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 1 Supplies
Cord Lots and Lots of cord I cant tell you how much each bottle is differentBottle Washed and Dried inside and out Make sure to remove all water spotsThreaded Needle Cord screws into the threads at the base of the needlePegs I use brass rivets used as a map to tie the Turks Head KnotsHole Punch Used to punch holes in the painters tape to hold the pegsPainters Tape To hold the pegs in place and to make your map for the Turks Head KnotsMarker To write on the painters tapeCloth Towel To remove finger prints and dirt from your bottleKrazy Glue or Super Glue This is used to secure the knots in place to the bottle
OPTIONAL BUT HIGHLY RECOMMENDEDI use the Turks Head Cookbook from KnotToolcom
Step 2 PreparationYou will need to find a bottle you like I used an empty instant tea bottle of course washed and dried (I like to put the bottle in the oven for a few minutes to dry the insidewithout water spots Take off the lid and do not put lid in the oven) Now measure the circumference of the bottle Take a cord and tightly wrap the cord around the bottleMark where the ends meet and use a ruler to measure the length of the cord For my instant tea bottle the circumference is 27cm I know from past knots that I have tiedthat I want my knot to have 20 Bights in the top and bottom (bands) knots I am going to use the Bights in the (bands) knots to tie the middle knot Now divide the numberof Bights (20) into the size of the circumference (27) to get the space between each Bight (135) With me so far
Now take two pieces of painters tape using a ruler measure out the length of the circumference and mark the length on the both pieces of tape Next you will mark thespace between each Bight on the tape
Step 3 Adding the PegsI like to use pegs when tying Turks Head Knots it just makes tying the knot easier
These are what I use for pegs
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 4 Adding Pegs to the TapeNow take a hole punch to cut holes in the tape where the lines meet You will place the pegs in the holes
Insert a peg in each hole and carefully stick the first piece of tape to the bottle
Step 5 Adding the 2nd row of pegsNow do the same thing with the second piece of tape The numbers on each piece of tape must line up
This picture shows you what you should have now This odd looking thing will be your map to tie the Turks Head Knot And this is the end of Step 1
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 6 Tying the first Turks Head KnotUsing the Turks Head Cookbook follow the numbers going over and under as indicated in the book I chose a 20 Bight by 3 Lead knot which will give me a nice bandaround the bottle Once the ends meet you have made one complete knot Tape the running end of your cord and start removing the pegs and the tape
Step 7 Remove the pegs and the tapeBe careful not to untie the knot as you remove the pegs and tape from the bottle Continue to remove all the pegs and remove the tape from the bottle At this point theknot will be very loose and will need to be tightened up
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 8 Remove the slack from the knotHere you can see just how much the knot expanded Starting with the standing end begin to pull the slack out of the knot going towards the running end of the cordDo not expect to pull all the slack out at once You may have to make 3 - 5 attempts at removing the slack out of the knot DO NOT remove all of the slack out of the knotIn order to make the bands we will have to triple the Turks Head Knot We will do this by following the knot three times The threaded needle will really come in handyhere
Step 9 Triple the KnotOnce you have made three passes of the Turks Head Knot use your needle to go under your knot about half the circumference and cut the cord The knot will be tightenough to hide the tail in placeTIP I carefully add a couple of drops of super glue UNDER the band to hold them in place and keep them from sliding around in the nextsteps A drop or two in 3 or 4 places around the band should be enough
Step 10 Add the second knotNow repeat this whole step for the second bandWhen tying the second band you must make sure the Bights line up to the first band This is crucial for the next stepWipe down the bottle to make sure all your finger prints and adhesive from the tape are all removed You want to make sure your bottle is clean at this point Any dirt orfinger prints left on the bottle will be almost impossible to remove From this point on we will use gloves when tying our last knot
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 11 Maping the Top KnotStick a piece of painters tape on top of your first band leaving the bottom of the knot exposedUse a marker to count the number of Bights in your knot Instead of using the pegs we are going to use the Bights to tie our next Turks Head Knot
Step 12 Mapping the Bottom KnotDo the same thing for the bottom band but you must make sure your numbers on top and bottom line up So 1 on top should be the same position as 1 on the bottom
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 13 Adding the last knotAgain using the Turks Head Cookbook and the threaded needle you are going to follow the instructions going over and under as indicated in the book Be sure to usegloves when ever you handle the bottle
Step 14 Thats ItFor this Turks Head Knot I am using a 20 Bight by 19 Lead knot
Because of the amount of cord you are working with your cord will get twisted and knotted You will have to un-twist the cord often Its a pain in the rear but it has to bedone And it has to be done alot
Continue to tie the knot until you finish the knot If you have the cord and the patience you can double or triple the knot When you are done use your needle to hide theends under your bands Cut the ends and your DONE
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Related Instructables
Monkeys FistFloatingKeychain byjokerlz
How To Make ATurks headKnot WithParacord byDoggie Stylish
Tying Trivetsout of Rope forHoliday Gifts bykylemarsh
Paracord KnotDisplay Bord byJamie bagn
How to Make ATurks Head(Photos) bymchs60chip
A pocket full ofknots byKiteman
Monkeys fistknot AND themonkey byjonathan111
TiteTie is theTruckers Knoton Steroids bytitetie
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Larks head noose -- an easy useful knot that tightens and loosensby Larry Breed on February 19 2009
Intro Larks head noose -- an easy useful knot that tightens and loosensI thought I knew all the basic knots but then I was taught this incredibly useful simple knot Its good for tying up the neck of a bag that you want to repeatedly open andsecurely close Its good for tying around a springy bundle that will need tightening and retightening And its easy to undo
Ive looked at knot literature but havent found a name for this so I named it The basic knot is well known its called a larks head Since all Ive done is to slip the twoends through the larks head to make a noose I call it that
WARNING Dont use this knot when human safety would depend on it Climbers and mountaineers have well-tested reliable knots for such situations
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Image Notes1 To tighten further step on this side of the larks head and pull the free ends
Step 1 Double the cord overThe larks head noose requires enough cord to go twice around your bundle plus a foot or two Find the center and double it over Sailors call this a bight
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 2 Form the larks headComing from below the bight hook your thumb and forefinger over the two sides Reach outward and downward and pinch your fingertips together underneath thedoubled cord
Youve made a larks head Move the crossing cord a little farther from your hand so theres a clear opening through the two half-loops
Step 3 Form the nooseSlip the two ends of the cord through the opening we were just talking about Pull the larks head tight so it grips the two cords Find something that needs constrictingand put the noose around it
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 4 Tightening retightening and lockingSlide the knot against the bundle If its not tight enough to keep from slipping tighten it by holding it in one hand and tugging on the cords one at a time with the otherhand Notice that you can slide the knot out again for instance to re-open the bag you just tied shut For some applications this may be as tight as you need it
A springy bundle probably still feels loose If so compress the bundle and get a new grip on the cords Rest your foot on the bundle on the cords nearest the larks headand pull to slide the larks head tighter
To make the knot more permanent you can lock it Make an overhand in the cord ends (Exactly like the first step in tying shoelaces) With your foot still on the bundlepull on the cords and move your hands apart until youre pulling in opposite directions You have just locked the larks head and you can trust it to stay that way()
But lets say that later on you want to loosen the locked knot Again put your foot on the bundle and cords nearest the larks head hold the two cord ends together andpull This makes a little slack between the overhand and the larks head so you can untie the overhand
In twine or small string the locking overhand knot may be difficult to undo Use a shoelace knot instead of an overhand and itll unlock easily
() If youre using slippery cord like polypropylene an overhand may not lock securely You may want to tie another overhand knot For added security wrap a shortlength of duct tape around the two cords close to the knot
Image Notes1 To tighten further step on this side of the larks head and pull the free ends
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Related Instructables
TRX fromParacordChallengeAccepted bythrake
A pocket full ofknots byKiteman
Lens CapLanyard by~teknoarsonist~ how to tie a
noose byawesume
AdjustableParacordGlassesLanyard byjdtwelve12
HangmansNoose PackClosure byPopEye42
Paraleash - ADog LeashFrom Paracordby The Ideanator
How to make arugged andhandy ParacordBelt by Jake22
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 11 Reef Knot 40
Step 12 Cleats 41
Step 13 Practice them 41
Related Instructables 41
How to Tie the Lanyard Knot 42
Intro How to Tie the Lanyard Knot 42
Step 1 Materials 42
Step 2 First Step 42
Step 3 Starting the Knot 43
Step 4 The Most Important Part 43
Step 5 Doubling 44
Step 6 Finishing 44
Related Instructables 45
Four knots to make paracord into a useful tool 46
Intro Four knots to make paracord into a useful tool 46
Step 1 46
Step 2 The half hitch 46
Step 3 The mid line half hitch 48
Step 4 The slippery hitch 49
Step 5 The mid line truchers hitch 50
Related Instructables 52
Figure 8 knot and double 8 knot 53
Intro Figure 8 knot and double 8 knot 53
Step 1 Stating the knot 53
Step 2 Finishing the knot 53
Step 3 The follow through knot 54
Related Instructables 55
Truckers Hitch THE most awesome knot on the planet 56
Intro Truckers Hitch THE most awesome knot on the planet 56
Step 1 Initial setup 58
Step 2 Creating a slip knot 59
Step 3 Tightening and securing 60
Step 4 Securing loose end 60
Step 5 Finished 61
Related Instructables 62
Carry any Bottle with a JUG KNOT Handle 63
Intro Carry any Bottle with a JUG KNOT Handle 63
Step 1 Getting Started 65
Step 2 Form a Bight 67
Step 3 Pull the Bight down 68
Step 4 Cross the Loops 69
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 5 Pass the Bight under the 1st loop 69
Step 6 Weave the Bight 69
Step 7 Extend the Bight 70
Step 8 Flip the Right Loop behind 70
Step 9 Flip the 2nd loop in front 71
Step 10 Remove Slack 72
Step 11 Tighten the Knot 73
Step 12 Secure on bottle neck 74
Step 13 Aluminum Bottle Water Bottle 75
Step 14 Tethered Cork Stopper 77
Step 15 Trussed for Transport 78
Step 16 Advanced 81
Related Instructables 81
Basic Knots Guide 82
Intro Basic Knots Guide 82
Step 1 Thumb knot 82
Step 2 Reef Knot 82
Step 3 Figure of eight 83
Step 4 Timber hitch 84
Step 5 Clove hitch 84
Step 6 Sheet band 84
Step 7 Sheep shank 86
Step 8 Slip knot 86
Related Instructables 86
How to Tie a Fire-escape Knot 87
Intro How to Tie a Fire-escape Knot 87
Step 1 Get Your Rope 87
Step 2 Twist the Rope 87
Step 3 Pull Through the Twist 88
Step 4 Go Over the Split End 88
Step 5 Finally 89
Step 6 Same Name Not Knot 89
Related Instructables 89
Climb Safe With A Figure 8 Knot 90
Intro Climb Safe With A Figure 8 Knot 90
Step 1 Dealing With The Rope 90
Step 2 Tying The First Figure 8 91
Step 3 Looping Into The Harness 93
Step 4 Following Back Through The Figure 8 94
Step 5 Finishing The Knot 96
Step 6 Ready To Climb 99
Related Instructables 100
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Turks Head Knots on a Bottle 101
Intro Turks Head Knots on a Bottle 101
Step 1 Supplies 102
Step 2 Preparation 102
Step 3 Adding the Pegs 102
Step 4 Adding Pegs to the Tape 103
Step 5 Adding the 2nd row of pegs 103
Step 6 Tying the first Turks Head Knot 104
Step 7 Remove the pegs and the tape 104
Step 8 Remove the slack from the knot 105
Step 9 Triple the Knot 105
Step 10 Add the second knot 105
Step 11 Maping the Top Knot 106
Step 12 Mapping the Bottom Knot 106
Step 13 Adding the last knot 107
Step 14 Thats It 107
Related Instructables 108
Larks head noose -- an easy useful knot that tightens and loosens 109
Intro Larks head noose -- an easy useful knot that tightens and loosens 109
Step 1 Double the cord over 110
Step 2 Form the larks head 111
Step 3 Form the noose 111
Step 4 Tightening retightening and locking 112
Related Instructables 113
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Author and Copyright NoticesInstructable Cross Knot Paracord LanyardAuthor StormdraneLicense Attribution-NonCommercial-ShareAlike (by-nc-sa)
Instructable Paracord wrist lanyard made with the snake knotAuthor StormdraneLicense Attribution-NonCommercial-ShareAlike (by-nc-sa)
Instructable How to tie various knotsAuthor adavielLicense Attribution (by)
Instructable How to Tie the Lanyard KnotAuthor eddy14777License Attribution-NonCommercial-ShareAlike (by-nc-sa)
Instructable Four knots to make paracord into a useful toolAuthor erik_mccrayLicense Attribution-NonCommercial-ShareAlike (by-nc-sa)
Instructable Figure 8 knot and double 8 knotAuthor jonathan111License Attribution-NonCommercial-ShareAlike (by-nc-sa)
Instructable Truckers Hitch THE most awesome knot on the planetAuthor schneidp20License Attribution-NonCommercial-ShareAlike (by-nc-sa)
Instructable Carry any Bottle with a JUG KNOT HandleAuthor hpstoutharrowLicense Attribution-NonCommercial-ShareAlike (by-nc-sa)
Instructable Basic Knots GuideAuthor zorro3355License None (All Rights Reserved) (c)
Instructable How to Tie a Fire-escape KnotAuthor leonardo ismaelLicense Attribution-NonCommercial-ShareAlike (by-nc-sa)
Instructable Climb Safe With A Figure 8 KnotAuthor mattsteLicense Attribution-NonCommercial-ShareAlike (by-nc-sa)
Instructable Turks Head Knots on a BottleAuthor sklnxbonesLicense Attribution-NonCommercial-ShareAlike (by-nc-sa)
Instructable Larks head noose -- an easy useful knot that tightens and loosensAuthor Larry BreedLicense Attribution-NonCommercial-ShareAlike (by-nc-sa)
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
DisclaimerAll do-it-yourself activities involve risk and your safety is your own responsibility including proper use of equipment and safety gear and determining whether you haveadequate skill and experience Some of the resources used for these projects are dangerous unless used properly and with adequate precautions including safety gearSome illustrative photos do not depict safety precautions or equipment in order to show the project steps more clearly The projects are not intended for use by children
Many projects on Instructables are user-submitted and appearance of a project in this format does not indicate it has been checked for safety or functionality Use of theinstructions and suggestions is at your own risk Instructables Inc disclaims all responsibility for any resulting damage injury or expense It is your responsibility to makesure that your activities comply with all applicable laws
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Cross Knot Paracord Lanyardby Stormdrane on May 22 2011
AuthorStormdrane Stormdranes BlogNo matter where you go there you are
Intro Cross Knot Paracord Lanyard
This instructable will show how to make a paracord lanyard using the cross knot and snake knot The lanyard can be used as a wallet chain to secure a key chainkeyring knife multitool flashlight cell phone camera binoculars compass and other assorted pocketable gadgets gear and gizmos More projects links knotreferences can be seen in my blog Stormdranes Blog
The cross knot can also be found under different names from other online and book references as The Chinese Crown Knot Chinese Cross Japanese Crown KnotJapanese Success Knot Rustlers Knot Friendship Knot and knot 808 in The Ashley Book of Knots
You can use the loop end of the lanyard to attach it to your item and use the clip end to secure to a belt loop bag pack etc Or run a belt through the lanyards loopand use the attachment to clip onto your gadget gear gizmo etc Longer versions could be used as a pet leash for your dog cat pot belly pig iguana ferret or otherassorted leashable rodents and varmints
Step 1 Supplies
For this project youll need 10 feet of paracord scissors swivel snap hook and a lighter Optional supplies are hemostats tape measure and your own choice ofattachments like split ring swivel clip carabiner snap shackle etc
I used 10 feet of paracord to make a finished lanyardwallet chain of about 25 feet in length You can use more or less to make one of your own preferred length
There are many online sources for paracord available in different lengths and color choices and can sometimes be found at local sporting goods outlets and ArmyNavySurplus stores Various attachments can also be found online and at local retail establishments and you may even scavenge them from keyringskeychains pet leashesetc that you already have
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 2 Step 2
Find the center of your length of cord form a bight which will be the the loop end of your lanyard
Step 3 Step 3
To tie the cross knot youre going to bring the strand of cord on the right over the left strand back under to the right and back under again to the left making an S shapeas shown
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 4 Step 4
Now with the left strand bring it up under the S shape through the top loop as shown
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 5 Step 5
Bring the strand back down over the first two parts of the S shape and under the bottom as shown
Step 6 Step 6
Tighten up the knot by carefully pulling on each of the working ends and loop ends of the cord You can adjust the size of the lanyards loop by working slack from theloop end to decrease its size or from the working ends to increase the loops size Ive kept the loop at about 2 inches in length so that a belt will fit through it but youcan make it larger or smaller to your preference You can also check that the working ends of the paracord are equal in length at this point and work slack through theknot to even them up if needed
Note the other side of the knot looks different with the cross pattern as shown
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 7 Step7
Now you can tie the next knot in the lanyard the same way as the first After tying the next knot work the slack through the knot until you have about 1 inch of spacebetween them then tighten and continue with the next knot Note that the knots look different on each side frontback and that you tie the each facing the same way oralternate them if you choose
Continue making knots until you have about 1 foot of cord left with each end of the working strands
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 8 Step 8
Now you will add your attachment like the swivel snap hook shown putting both strands through the swivel eye to begin tying the snake knot
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 9 Step 9Bring the right strand under the cords then up over them as shown
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 10 Step 10Now take the left strand over across the other strands back behind and under the cords and up through the right strand loop as shown Then tighten
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 11 Step 11
Take the right strand under and behind the cords then bring it back through the tightened knot along side itself as shown and tighten This is where hemostats come inhandy with tying this knot working the cord through the previously tightened part of the knot It can be done without hemostats but requires tighteningloosening of theknots with just your fingertips
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 12 Step 12
Turn the lanyard over so the other side of the knot is facing up The working strand now on the right side will be brought under the cords back up and down through theparallel strands of the knot as shown then tighten And continue this process flipping the lanyard over taking the right strand under and back up around and through theparallel cords and tighten Continue until you run out of cord or reach the cross knot
Youll now trim off any excess cord and quick melt the end of the strands to prevent fraying to finish
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 13 Variations
You can use other two strand knots instead of the cross knot for variations on this style of lanyard A few alternatives to try tying in a spaced out series or combination ofthem Matthew Walker knot double wall knot lanyard knot double overhand knots double figure 8 knots etc The finishing knots around the attachment can also bedifferent as Ive used the lanyard knot sometimes just one or several in a row
You can also use variations of the cross knot with paracord bracelets and watchbands Doubled version of the knot shown as a paracord bracelet and alternating withtwo pairs of strands for the paracord watchband Leftover pieces of paracord can be used for zipper pulls key ring fobs even paracord cross pendants
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Related Instructables
Paracord ChainSinnet FastDeploy BoonieHatband (video)by Stormdrane
Zigzag SpoolingParacord (video)by Stormdrane
SurvivalBracelet(Updated) bytevers94
Celtic ButtonKnot (video) byStormdrane
ParacordBoonie HatWrap (video) byStormdrane
Paracord wristlanyard madewith the snakeknot byStormdrane
SurvivalBracelet II bytevers94
Cobra WeaveKey Fob bytevers94
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Paracord wrist lanyard made with the snake knotby Stormdrane on September 12 2007
AuthorStormdrane Stormdranes BlogNo matter where you go there you are
Intro Paracord wrist lanyard made with the snake knotThis instructable will show how to make a wrist lanyard using paracord and the snake knot The lanyard can be used to secure a key chain knife multi-tool flashlightcell phone camera binoculars compass etc More projects links knot references can be seen on my blog page Stormdranes Blog
Step 1 SuppliesYoull need about 45 feet of paracord(you may use other types of cordage if desired) The paracord I used is from the Supply Captain I left the inner strands in theparacord but you can remove them if preferred If done in one color it will be one continuous 45 ft length if done in two colors youll need 3 ft for the primary color thatincludes the wrist section and 15 ft for the second color that will show in the snake knot Also used are scissors tape measure or ruler lighter hemostats or needle nosepliers(not necessary but they make it much easier) and a swivel clip key ring snap hook cell phone lariat carabiner or whatever attachment you prefer to use
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 2 Attaching two colors of paracordIf using two colors of paracord you will insert one color about 12 inch into the other color You may remove a small amount of the paracords inner strands by pullingthem out trimming with scissors and pulling the paracord outer sheath back over the strands leaving room to insert the other color For various projects Ive used threedifferent methods for attaching two colors of paracord melting sewing or gluing The choice is yours I usually sew them together it doesnt matter as long as its a goodconnection It will be hidden under the first knot
Step 3 Find the center of the length of paracordTake the center of the length of cord and bring it thru the attachment Im using a swivel clip For this tutorial Im measuring the wrist loop at about 10 inches from theattachment The connection of the two colors will be just on the other side at this point
Step 4 Making the snake knotThe snake knot will be made around the wrist loop section of paracord the loop strands being the core of the knot Ive added a series of photos showing the steps Iuse By using two colors youll see that I flip the lanyard over after making each knot so that Im working with the cord on the right side of the lanyard I bring it under allthe other cords working the hemostats under the previously tightened knot and pulling the cord back thru Then tightening up the knot keeping the cord from twisting andworking it up against the previous knot Again flipping the work over youll see two parallel cords of the same color which will be split with the cord on the right goingunder around and pulled thru with the hemostats then tightened up Continue this procedure until youve done about 10 snake knots(you can count them down eitherside
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 5 Count your knotsOnce you have 10 snake knots youre almost done Youll notice from the photos of both sides of the lanyard that one side has the snake knots alternating all the waydown and the other has a set of parallel knots at the top and botton of the sequence of knots Youll always have those at the start and finish of the snake knots I preferto have them end up on the same side of the lanyard so one side appears to have a more uniform look but its not required
Step 6 Trim and melt the excess paracordUse the scissors to trim off the excess cord and quickly melt the ends with a lighter so they dont fray
Step 7 Youre doneYou can make a range of variations using less or more cordknots Shorten the loop for a double ended key chain or make the loop longer for use as a neck lanyard aLanyard Break-Away Connector could be added for the safety conscious You can also add a wooden bead skull cord lock etc Visit my blog page for more knot relatedprojects links and resources Stormdranes Blog You can find ideas for other geargadgets to attach to your lanyard on EDC Forums
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Related Instructables
Paracord ChainSinnet FastDeploy BoonieHatband (video)by Stormdrane
Cross KnotParacordLanyard byStormdrane
Zigzag SpoolingParacord (video)by Stormdrane
SurvivalBracelet II bytevers94
SurvivalBracelet(Updated) bytevers94
Cobra WeaveKey Fob bytevers94
ParacordBoonie HatWrap (video) byStormdrane
Paracord KnotDisplay Bord byJamie bagn
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
How to tie various knotsby adaviel on September 7 2009
Intro How to tie various knotsKnots as a way of joining rope without special equipment are useful in many situations On a sailboat knots are essential both for daily use and for emergency repairsThis instructable describes several different common knots eg
Sheet Bend - to tie two lines togetherBowline - to make a loopReef Knot - to fasten a bundle of materialFishermans Bend - to secure a line to a post or ring
These knots are good for regular rope - braided or 3-strand polyester or natural fibre (hemp sisal) Monofilament (fishing line) or steel cable performs better with differentknots
Knots are typically quite a lot weaker than straight rope - when rope goes around a tight radius such as in a knot the outside is under more tension than the insideSplices (which require special tools and are time-consuming to make) are stronger so permanent fittings usually have eye-splices
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 1 Sheet BendThe sheet bend is used to tie two lines together It is perhaps the most generally useful knot of all When used to tie a line to itself making a loop it is called a bowlineThe strain is taken on the ropes in the middle - not the one coming out the side
How the knot is made is not critical - it is the final shape that is important One can make the flat loop first and work the other rope around it Or one can make thecrossed loop first - required when tying a bowline
The two images show front and back views of the same knot
AdvantagesEasy to makeEasy to undo when tension is removedDoes not easily capsize
DisadvantagesHard to make under loadDangerous to make under heavy load
UsesJoining two equally-sized ropesExtending a towline or stern line
Method 1 the same as a bowline
Method 2 starting with the flat loop
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 2 Double Sheet BendThe double sheet bend is used to tie two lines of different thickness - but not too different It is the same as a normal sheet bend but with an extra turn of the thinner ropearound the flat loop in the thickerThe load goes on the line through the flat loop not the one that comes out the side of the knot
UsesSecuring a heaving line to a tow lineExtending a stern line if you dont have enough line of one thickness
Step 3 BowlineThe bowline is really a special case of the sheet bend but it it tied at the end of a rope to make a loop
The photos show the completed loop and closeups of the front and back of the actual knot Note that it is the same as the sheet bend - but it must be made the right wayround This loop does not tighten in use The knot is quite easy to untie once the load is removed With practice it is very quick to tie
Some usesSecuring a dinghy line to a railing or stanchionSecuring an anchor line to an anchorTie a jib sheet to the sailTie a mooring line around a rock or treeTie a float to an anchor triplineUse one in each line to tie two ropes of very different sizes - eg a throwing line to a large tow ropeDisadvantages the knot must be completely made before it will take any strain - it is hard to tie if there is already a load on the rope
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Linked bowlines
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 4 Bowline on the BightA bowline on the bight is a bowline tied in a loop of rope (neither end is needed) The shape is the same as a bowline made with a double line but the middle of thebight forms the loop around the standing part
UsesAn impromptu bosuns chair - to sit in while being transferred between two boats at sea
Step 5 Clove HitchThe clove hitch can be made when you only have the bight (the middle) of a rope not the ends
UsesSecuring a burgee pole to a burgee halyard (a continuous loop of thin line)Securing a tiller from swinging
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 6 Round Turn and Two Half-HitchesThis is a knot used to secure a line to a ring or bar Wind a couple of turns around the bar then secure the end with two hitches around the standing part (this looks like aclove hitch when done)
AdvantagesCan be made under load - it is easy to take turns around the bar while maintaining tension on the ropeStrong - provided the bar is thicker than the rope the rope is not weakened by sharp bendsDisadvantagesThe end tends to work loose
UsesSecuring a line to a mooring ring or samson post
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 7 Fishermans BendThe fishermans bend is the same as the round turn and two half hitches except that the first hitch is looped under the round turn This uses the tension on the rope tosecure the end from working loose
AdvantagesSecure against working loose
DisadvantagesHard to make under tensionHard to undo under tensionMay seize up under load when wet making it hard to undo
UsesSecuring mooring line to ringSecuring fender lines to rail
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 8 Studsail BendThe studsail bend is like the fishermans bend but the second hitch is also secured under the round turn making it even more secure against working loose when undertension
AdvantagesVery secure against working looseDisadvantagesHard to make under tensionHard to undo under tension
Step 9 Figure-8 KnotThe figure-eight knot is used to prevent an end of rope from passing through a block (pulley) Sometimes called a stopper knot
The double figure-8 knot is used in rock climbing as an alternative to a bowline to secure a climbing harness to the end of a safety rope The double knot is made bymaking a single knot then tracing back around the knot with the free end after passing it around the harness loop
AdvantagesEasy to verify by inspectionNot prone to work loose
DisadvantagesSlow to make and undoCannot be made under load
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 10 Prussic KnotThe prussic knot may be used as a climbing ascender - when made around a vertical rope as shown downwards tension on the ends locks the knot while release oftension allows it to be slid up the rope A pair of prussic knots on foot loops may be used in tandem to climb a rope
UsesClimbing a ropeTaking up tension to free a riding turn on a winch
Step 11 Reef KnotThe reef knot or square knot is used to tie a bundle of material together It must be made around something - it should not be used to tie two free ropes togetherbecause it can easily capsizeIt should not be used to make a loop unless it can be tensioned around a solid object It should not be used around a person - use a bowline instead A capsized reefknot will slip easily and could constrict and cause severe injury
UsesReefing a sail (tying the unused portion around a spar)Securing a furled sail to a spar (sail ties)Wrapping a parcelTying shoelaces
AdvantagesMay be made under moderate load
DisadvantagesCapsizes (works free) if used improperlyCan seize up under load when wet
Tying the knot
Capsizing a reef knot
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 12 CleatsThis is not a knot but is very common on boatsThe first picture shows a rope cleated normally The second shows one with a final locking turn - the last turn is twisted before placing over the cleat so that the tensionon the rope helps secure the free end
When working with ropes under tension take a turn or two around a winch or cleat before trying to secure the end with a knot The load on the free end falls exponentiallywith each turn taken Severe injury can result if a finger or other body part is caught in a loop of rope or between a rope and another object
Step 13 Practice themIt is sometimes useful to be able to tie knots in the dark or as in this video behind your back
Related Instructables
AThird Hand forSailing or OtherThings by WadeTarzia
Paracord KnotDisplay Bord byJamie bagn
Trip LogOutriggerCanoe Sailingthe CaliforniaChannel Islandsby TimAnderson
How to Tie aFigure EightKnot byTactical_Pyro
How to build apirate ship bymdelaney3
Build a ShortDragon (16 foot3-BoardOutriggerSailing Canoe)by Wade Tarzia
repairing aheadsail by josh
How to get arope into a tree(withoutclimbing it) byvitex
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
How to Tie the Lanyard Knotby eddy14777 on January 31 2010
Intro How to Tie the Lanyard KnotMany people including myself have had trouble following the Stormdrane youtube video on tying the lanyard knot so i have done some research and found the solution
Image Notes1 Finished knot
Step 1 MaterialsAll you need is a reasonable length of para cord or whatever you wish to use
Image Notes1 One reasonable amount
Step 2 First StepThe first thing you are going to do is to make a bight that leaves you with to congruent endsThen you are going to put your ring finger through the bight
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Image Notes1 Close enough2 Bight
Step 3 Starting the KnotMake a loop just like the one in the picture and place it over the top strandBring the top strand under the bottom strand
Image Notes1 Notice the way the loop is done2 Top strand
Image Notes1 Bottom strand2 Top strand is under
Step 4 The Most Important PartNow you take the top stand from the previous picture and feed it over the first part of the loop under itself and back over the remainder of the loop
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Image Notes1 Under me2 Top strand3 This should make a diamond type shape
Step 5 DoublingNow take the bottom stand and take it around the part of the top strand nearest to the bight and than come up through the diamond shape in the middleDo the same for the top strand
Image Notes1 Top strand
Image Notes1 Both through the diamond
Step 6 FinishingWhen you take it off your finger it should look like thisWork out the slack by pulling on the bight and the two strands
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Image Notes1 Finished knot
Related Instructables
Cross KnotParacordLanyard byStormdrane
Celtic ButtonKnot (video) byStormdrane
Paracord wristlanyard madewith the snakeknot byStormdrane
Paracord ChainSinnet FastDeploy BoonieHatband (video)by Stormdrane
Zigzag SpoolingParacord (video)by Stormdrane
ParacordBoonie HatWrap (video) byStormdrane
Paracord IDbadge Lanyardby Flahusky
Cobra WeaveKey Fob bytevers94
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Four knots to make paracord into a useful toolby erik_mccray on March 27 2010
Authorerik_mccrayI am an ex-fabricator that is now a stay at home dad I love my new job but I do miss making stuff I love this site amp I am getting involved as a way to keep myskills upOn top of fad work I have also run two small business in the past One was custom sewing amp the other was as a small engine mechanicI have two votec degrees one in metal fabrication amp the other is in engine repairI look forward to getting to know everyone here
Intro Four knots to make paracord into a useful toolParacord is an awesome multitool used everywhere from the wild blue yonder to the deepest caverns But like any good tool it is only as good as the knowledge the userhas about the tool With most people out there using bungee cords amp ratchet straps it seems that paracord is being used for nothing more than friendship bracelets forgrown men This is a shame because for less then the price of a few cheap bungee cords amp some to short to be helpful straps You can get yourself hundreds of feet ofparacord
The key to getting the most out of the paracord is good knot work The first thing you need to know is what makes a good knot One is that the knot is easy amp quick to tieamp more impotant is that the knot is easy amp quick to untie The hitch class of knots is by far the best group of knots that the average person could know The four mostuseful hitch knots are the half hitch a quick simple knot that forms the base for many other knots the inline half hitch allowing you to get the most out of one length ofparacord the slippery hitch that gives you both on the fly control over tension on your paracord but also an adjustable loop that will not change unless you want it amp theinline truckers hitch instantly doubling the your pulling power
Step 1 To get started lets get some terminology that will be used defined
line= the paracord
Main line= the part of the paracord doing the work for example holding down your tarp or the long part of the paracord
Mid line= the middle of the length of the paracord
End line= the unused length of paracord or the short length of paracord
Step 2 The half hitch The half hitch is a simple way to secure a line to an anchor point like the tie down points in most trucks A half hitch is a constrictor knot meaning that the harder you pullon the line the tighter the knots grip gets Another common constrictor knot is the slip knot
Step 1 wrap your line around your anchor point Step 2 wrap the end line around the main line
Step 3 pass the end line threw the end line side of the newly formed loop
step 4 now take the slack out of the knot
step 5 to make sure the knot is secure tie another half hitch to the main line This knot is called adouble half hitch
step 6 another useful thing that can be done with the half hitch is that instead of repeating the wrap on the main line but repeating it on what you are tying to the half hitchcan be used to bind something like a stack of 2x4s
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Image Notes1 End line2 Main line3 step 1
Image Notes1 Step 2
Image Notes1 passing thew the end line side of the loop2 step 3
Image Notes1 step 5
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Image Notes1 step 6
Step 3 The mid line half hitch The mid line half hitch is for when the length of line is to long for the job at hand amp you dont want to have to cut the line to size or you are using multiple anchor pointswith one length of line
Step 1 double up the line at the point in the length you wish to make the knot
Step 2 wrap the doubled up portion of line around your anchor point The doubled up length is now now the end line
Step 3 now tie just as you did for the regular half hitch repeat the knot to make a double half hitch for security
Image Notes1 A mid line double half hitch
Image Notes1 step 1
Image Notes1 The end line2 step 2
Image Notes1 Step 3
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 4 The slippery hitch The slippery hitch is a great knot for adjusting tension on the main line or for having an adjustable fixed loop To adjust the knot simply slide the knot up or down the mainline
Step 1 wrap your line around the anchor point or just double over the line to form a loop
Step 2 wrap the end line around the main line three times Wrapping in the direction of the anchor point or loop
Step 3 put together the two lines making up the loop amp wrap the two lines one time with the end line
Step 4 pass the end line thew the last loop formed covering the two lined of the loop
Step 5 pull the knot tite
step 6 to adjust the size of the loop or main line tension grab the knot amp slide it up or down the main line
Image Notes1 grab just the knot its self to adjust it2 step 5
Image Notes1 step 1
Image Notes1 step 2
Image Notes1 step 3
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Image Notes1 step 4
Image Notes1 grab just the knot its self to adjust it2 step 5
Image Notes1 same knot as in last pic Just slid up2 step 6
Step 5 The mid line truchers hitch The truckers hitch is a great way to double the pulling force on a line There are many ways to tie this knot the problem with most of them is that at some point you aregoing to have to pass the end line through a loop on the main line that is acting like a pulley to double your pulling force this is great if you are making the knot close tothe end of your line but if you are using a 300 length of line amp want to make the knot in the first ten feet having to pass 290 of line thew a loop is a pain But with a fewhalf hitches you will not have to pass the end line threw any loop on the main line
step 1 wrap your line around the anchor point then double over your end line laying the top of the loop over the main line
Step 2 double up your main line amp lay the loop over the loop made by the end line
step 3 in main line above the knot twist in a loop
step 4 put main line loop thew the loop made in step 3 amp pull this loop tight over your main line loop forming a half hitch Repeat step 3 amp 4 to make a doublehalf hitch
step 5 To use the knot just pull down on the end line to put tension on the main line
step 6 after you have the main line snug tie a mid line double half hitch around the two lines forming the loop at the end of the main line with the end line
step 7 Tie a double half hitch with the end line around the end loop of the mid line half hitch of step 6 using the same method as used in steps 3 amp 4
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Image Notes1 the end of step 6
Image Notes1 main line2 end line3 step 1
Image Notes1 main line loop2 end line loop
Image Notes1 step 3
Image Notes1 step 4
Image Notes1 step 4 at the end with a double half hitch on the main loop
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Image Notes1 pull here2 step 5
Image Notes1 the start of step 6
Image Notes1 the end of step 6
Image Notes1 step 72 now the rest of the line is free to do more work
Related Instructables
Paracord KnotDisplay Bord byJamie bagn
ChokelessAdjustableParacord DogLeash byPizzaman101
ParacordLadder wWooden Rungsby josestude
tie a paracordshackle grip byitri45
ParacordPrussik Belt byJavaNut13
TiteTie is theTruckers Knoton Steroids bytitetie
ID Lanyard(Photos) byeschmunk
Dog Toys forHeavy Chewersby J3443RY
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Figure 8 knot and double 8 knotby jonathan111 on November 28 2007
Intro Figure 8 knot and double 8 knotI will show you how to tie a figure 8 knot and a figure 8 follow through
Step 1 Stating the knotThis is a simple knot so just follow the pictures
Step 2 Finishing the knotCross the string under and then push it through the hole Pull tightly unless you are going to do the follow through and leave it somewhat loose
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 3 The follow through knotThe follow through knot should be tied around something brought back and followed through the path of the 8 knot Look at the pictures Basically follow through the 8knot backwards
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Related Instructables
Climb Safe WithA Figure 8Knot by mattste A pocket full of
knots byKiteman
How to Tie aFigure EightKnot byTactical_Pyro
Paracord KnotDisplay Bord byJamie bagn
Cross KnotParacordLanyard byStormdrane
How to Tie aFire-escapeKnot by leonardoismael
Truckers HitchTHE mostawesome knoton the planetby schneidp20
Paracord ZipperPuller byrepeet13
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Truckers Hitch THE most awesome knot on the planetby schneidp20 on October 12 2008
Authorschneidp20I like building stuff Trouble is there just isnt enough time to build everything Sigh
Intro Truckers Hitch THE most awesome knot on the planetYes I know that there are plenty of other cool knots out there many of which I literally couldnt live wo I rock climb However this knot is unlike any other Plus Ineeded a grabber for my Instructable -) (BTW this ISNT a climbing knot) And in truth it isnt a knot by itself but rather a system of common knots
Have you ever tried to tie something down for transporting but just couldnt get the lines tight andor during transport the lines would continually loosen Then this is theknot for you I learned this knot back in the 70s when specialty car racks and ratchet straps were rare or unheard of I initially used it to tie a canoe on a car rack bothattaching to the rack as well as the lines to the bow and stern of the canoe Even with all the new gizmos available today this knot still shines because all you need is arope and ropes dont hum in the wind like straps
The unique aspect of this knot is that it gives you a 2-1 mechanical advantage when tightening the rope Be careful though You can actually damage some thingsbecause of the mechanical advantage This knot holds fast and is easy to untie hallmark traits of any good knot
Below you see the finished knot system well break it apart in the steps that follow
Image Notes1 1st anchor point a bowline2 loop3 securing knots 2 half hitches4 securing loose end with a fishermans knot5 2nd anchor point (should be round)
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Image Notes1 X marks the spot
Step 1 Initial setupThe first step is to anchor one end of the rope and then loop the rope around a 2nd anchor point
For attaching to the 1st anchor point I chose bowline a close 2 on my list -) There are other instructables on that one so I wont bore you here
The 2nd anchor really should be round because it serves as a pulley in this block and tackle type knot Ive used it on sharp anchor points and it doesnt work as well
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 2 Creating a slip knotTie a slip knot somewhere between the two anchor points Correct placement of the slip knot takes some experience to judge it correctly Typically I place it too close tothe 2nd anchor point and end up with not enough room to work with If the knot ends up too far from 2nd anchor point you can extend the knot by enlarging the loop
Be sure you tie the slip knot as shown You may not be able to untie other knots
In this small example the slip knot is uncharacteristically close to the 1st anchor point
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 3 Tightening and securingThe loose end of the rope that went around the 2nd anchor point goes through the slip knot loop Pull the loose end to the desired tension and secure with two halfhitches
Note To allow better view of the knots the rope isnt really tightened in this example
Step 4 Securing loose endThe final knot is just to secure the loose end somehow I chose a fishermans knot to do this
To tie a fishermans knot the rope goes around twice and goes under the X created by the loops Pull the loose end to tighten Finally slide the knot to put tension onthe half hitches
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Image Notes1 X marks the spot
Step 5 FinishedThere you have it I guarantee that the first time you really use this knot (not just practice) you will be amazed at how well it works and youll wish you knew this knot along time ago You may even come over to my side and declare that is is THE most awesome knot on the planet -)
Enjoy and happy haulingDave
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Related Instructables
TiteTie is theTruckers Knoton Steroids bytitetie
Four knots tomake paracordinto a usefultool byerik_mccray
Modify yourbike rack tocarry a sunfishor other boat byewilhelm
SurfboardHammock byGermy
GiganticHalloweenSpider Web bynolte919
How To Tie ASpiders Hitch(video) by back-cast
Three-hitch mathair ornamentby michiexile TRX from
ParacordChallengeAccepted bythrake
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Carry any Bottle with a JUG KNOT Handleby hpstoutharrow on September 17 2009
Intro Carry any Bottle with a JUG KNOT HandleTie a JUG KNOT around a water bottle soda bottle or aluminum bottle to make a secure carrying strap
Re-purpose any container into a reusable water bottle by adding a convenient carrying strap This Instructable will demonstrate how to tie a JUG knot which like its namesuggests is meant to properly secure around the neck of a container
With some cord and the knowledge of this knot you will be able add a handle lanyard or carabiner loop to any of your favorite beverages to carry them on the go
It works perfectly for those disposable water bottles and who knows once you add some colorful cord to the plain old clear water bottle you just might beinclined to refill it and use it again(Check out pictures 4amp5 below)
In addition to plastic beverage bottles like pop water and sports drinks you can turn those rugged aluminum beer bottles into a backpacking canteen
Those of you familiar with my previous aluminum bottle InstructablesROLLED RIM METAL TUMBLERhttpwwwinstructablescomidAluminum-Bottle-Tumbler-Cup-Cook-PotALUMINUM BOTTLE LIGHTWEIGHT ALCOHOL STOVEhttpwwwinstructablescomidAluminum-Bottle-Alcohol-Stovewill recognize the water canteen shown below as a re-purposed aluminum beer bottle Here I have added a painted surface treatment to turn it into a proper lookingwater bottle More on that in steps 13 14 15
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 1 Getting StartedCord size is important Select a small medium weight cord like the one shown here It is a general purpose camp cord sold at most sporting goods stores (shoelacesmight also work)
Do not use a heavy cord or rope because the larger diameter will not tuck under the relatively small lip at the top of the bottleneck and the bottle will fall out
Also the smaller cord cinches tight on itself and will not loosen accidentally
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 2 Form a BightThe next steps show how to tie a JUG KNOT It is the basic step for adding a carrying strap It is also the anchor point for any additional fancy bottle trussing you maywant to add
JUG KNOT Step 1
Form a Bight in the center of a length of cord Bight is a knot term for a loop or bend in the rope In this case the main Bight in this knot is highlighted with a white mark Imakes it easier to follow its path in these steps
The running ends of the cord should be equal length
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 3 Pull the Bight downPULL the Bight DOWN forming two Loops
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 4 Cross the LoopsCROSS the right Loop OVER the left Loop
Step 5 Pass the Bight under the 1st loopTake the main Bight and pass it UNDER the left Loop
Step 6 Weave the BightWEAVE the Bight OVER the portion of the right Loop and UNDER the portion of the left Loop
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 7 Extend the BightExtend the Bight OVER the outer portion of the right Loop
Step 8 Flip the Right Loop behindAdditional colored identification points have been added to the loops to follow their travel in these next two steps
The right Loop Yellow marker is FLIPPED BEHIND the knot and ends up on the far left side of the knot
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 9 Flip the 2nd loop in frontRaise the green marker (located on what was formerly the left loop) and pull it down and to the right FLIPPING IT IN FRONT of the knot
Note the blue portion of the this loop will pass around the outside of the yellow portion of the first loop
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Image Notes1 Center of knot that will tighten around the bottles neck
Step 10 Remove SlackNote where the blue green amp yellow markers end up
Start to remove the slack in the loops by pulling the original main Bight (white marker top right) and the two free standing ends at the bottom
the bottle neck will pass through the very center of the knot
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Image Notes1 Center of knot that will tighten around the bottles neck
Step 11 Tighten the KnotAfter removing the slack insert the bottle neck and finish tightening
The knot should look like this before slipping it over the bottle
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 12 Secure on bottle neckThis is the finished knot shown on the neck of various containers
The loop end and the two free standing ends can be tied together to create a carrying handle (last picture below)
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 13 Aluminum Bottle Water Bottle
The next few steps show the features of an aluminum beer bottle re-purposed as a water bottle canteen It is one of many containers that can be reused as a camp waterbottle
The bottle was lightly sanded masked and then pained with a hammered finished paint to create an interesting surface texture
Image Notes1 Textured finish paint makes an interesting grip-able surface2 Masked with tape for painting3 Masked with tape for painting
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Image Notes1 Dowel used for holding the bottle during painting
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 14 Tethered Cork StopperUse a wine bottle man made Cork as a stopper for your aluminum water bottleNote Use a cork that was removed from the wine bottle without the corkscrew penetrating through the bottom end of the cork (A hole all the way through the cork willcause it to leak) Use the unpierced end of the cork inside the water bottle
Drill a hole through the sides of the Cork Thread the cord through the hole to the center of the cord Use the cork as the main Bight and tie the Jug knot as shown inthe beginning steps
Now the cork is tethered to the bottle and will not get lost or fall on the ground
A Carabiner clip passes through the other cord end to attache the water bottle to you belt or pack
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 15 Trussed for TransportThis is another hanging method for carrying your aluminum bottle water canteen A Jug knot is tied conventionally around the neck
The running ends of the knot however are pulled down towards the bottom of the bottle A Barrel Knot is tied about 34 the way down the side of the bottle A squareknot is tied on the bottom of the knot to keep the two running ends tight against the sides of the bottle
I like the look of the accent colored cord running down the sides of the bottle and the fact that the bottle hangs from the belt upside down It adds to its uniqueness
The last picture shows another truss variation
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 16 AdvancedBelow is a bottle with some additional trussing You can be creative as you want It all starts with a re-purposed container and the Jug Knot (and enough cord)
Related Instructables
AluminumBottle TumblerCup amp Cook Potfor an AlcoholStove byhpstoutharrow
Water BottleBelt Clip byuglymike Duct Tape
Water Bottle byrabidsquire2
AluminumBottle AlcoholStove byhpstoutharrow
DIYGlass WaterBottle byCulturespy
Solar WaterHeater forBackpackingUsing WaterBottles and aCar Shade bykopomeroy
Duct tape waterbottle holder(Photos) by pinkmarshmallow
How to make aCamelPack withan old plasticbottle bywillrandship
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Basic Knots Guideby zorro3355 on April 29 2008
Intro Basic Knots Guidehi
Step 1 Thumb knotThe most simple knotUsed as a stopper and prevent ropes from fraying
Step 2 Reef KnotUsed to tie two ropes of equal thickness togetherIt is pretty easy to tie and untie but under tentionit may be diffcult to untieIt is also not sutible for smoothropes(egnylon ropes)
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 3 Figure of eightused as a stopperprevent ropes from fraying and its more secure than tumb knot its is also used to tie Caribinas to ropes and is often used in rock climbing
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 4 Timber hitchused for pulling logs
Step 5 Clove hitchUsed to tie a rope onto a pole or logThe pole must be roundThe pole lust be thicker then the rope itself
(greatly used during pioneering)
Step 6 Sheet bandused to tie ropes of different thickness together(works on same thickness of ropes too)
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 7 Sheep shankTo shorten RopesTo prevent middle fraying
Step 8 Slip knotWhippingUsed as a grip for pulling things(when tied on a stick or small pole)(marlin spike hitch)
Related Instructables
Rope Rings byhpstoutharrow
How to Tie aFigure EightKnot byTactical_Pyro
Whippin (WestCountry Style)by tim_n
SurvivalBracelet(Updated) bytevers94
HangmansNoose PackClosure byPopEye42
Turkey on aTripod byhpstoutharrow
SurvivalBracelet II bytevers94 Zigzag Spooling
Paracord (video)by Stormdrane
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
How to Tie a Fire-escape Knotby leonardo ismael on October 16 2007
Intro How to Tie a Fire-escape KnotThis knot is used by firemen in case of fires for example imagine a scene where the ladder on the firetruck messes up but people need to get down a five story buildingor more All they have is a long piece of rope they can safely get down with a secure knot like the fire-escape knot So why not learn it its easy to do and hard to untieif you tie it tightly
This is from the American Boys Handbook
Step 1 Get Your RopeFirst grab a piece of rope and bend it like this to make a loop in it Follow every step to the smallest detail
Step 2 Twist the RopeNow make a twist like this and hold it together
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 3 Pull Through the TwistPull the loop through the twist you just made from underneath
Step 4 Go Over the Split EndNow pull the tail through the loop
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 5 FinallyAnd finally just pull it through as pictured below
Congratulations you just learned the fire-escape knot
Step 6 Same Name Not KnotThis is another knot called the fire-escape knot this shouldnt be your result
Related Instructables
House FireEscape Plan(video) byWhatHappensNowAdvice
ParacordLadder wWooden Rungsby josestude
Bed SheetEscape Rope byjessehensel
rope ladder(glow-in-the-dark version) bymikeasaurus
HeadlockEscape 2(video) byjohnnyrockstah
QuickFirestarter byMattandJora
Trail sauna byjakee117
How to Kill FireAnts andCommitGenocide byKentsOkay
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Climb Safe With A Figure 8 Knotby mattste on February 23 2010
Intro Climb Safe With A Figure 8 Knot There are many things that a beginning climber needs to know including several important knots Perhaps the most essential knot is the Figure 8 Follow Through Thistutorial will demonstrate how to correctly harness yourself to a rope using a Figure 8 Follow Through knot This knot is used primarily by rock climbers to provide a life-line Since this knot is used as a life-line it is very important to be able to tie it correctly (Your life could depend upon it)
Dont worry with this tutorial and about 5 minutes of practice you can have this knot mastered
Things you will need
- Climbing Harness- Climbing Rope
If you are wanting to go climbing and dont already have these items they can be purchased for about $25 each at most outdoor sporting goods stores If you are merelylooking to learn the knot a belt loop and a rope (about five feet long) will do
Image Notes1 Climbing Harness2 Climbing Rope
Step 1 Dealing With The RopeThroughout this tutorial I will be discussing different parts of the rope To make these instructions as clear as possible I will define a few terms that I will use throughoutthe tutorial The Anchor End of the rope will generally be at the top of the images This is the end that would be anchored to the wall or rock and does not move Wewill not be doing much with the anchored end The Tail End of the rope is the opposite end that we will be dealing with I will call this the tail for short
Now that we have some terms to work with lets get started
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 2 Tying The First Figure 8This knot has several parts to it The first part of the knot is just tying a basic figure 8 To tie the first figure 8 there are four simple steps
1 - Using the tail make a loop over the rope (as shown in the first picture) keeping in mind that there should be about 3 ft of slack on the tail end
2 - Wrap the tail back this time go under the anchored end (As shown in the second picture)
3 - Bring the tail down through the first loop (As shown in the third picture)
4 - Finally pull the two ends to make the knot a little bit tighter and easier to deal with (Shown in the fourth picture)
After these four steps you should end up with a knot that resembles a figure 8
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 3 Looping Into The Harness In order to secure the rope to the harness simply thread the tail end of the rope through the front loop in the harness as shown in the picture below This step isobviously very important
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 4 Following Back Through The Figure 8After looping the rope through the harness you have to thread the tail end of the rope back through the knot following the first figure 8 I have divided this process intofive smaller steps in order to make it more clear
1 - Coming form underneath the knot bring the tail up through the near loop and to the left behind the anchored end of the rope (Shown in the first picture)
2 - Wrap the tail around the anchored end back to the right and down through the adjacent loop (Shown in the second picture)
3 - You simply need to bring the tail back over the top of the knot to the left (Shown in the third picture)
4 - Bring the tail end up through the far loop following the anchored end (Shown in the fourth picture)
5 - Finally pull the knot tight (Shown in the fifth picture)
As you can see the first four pictures are simply tracing the knot back through with the tail end
For the last part while you pull the knot tight you may want to make small adjustments and rearrange how it all fits together If the knot does not lay perfectly smoothand tight its NOT a big deal
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 5 Finishing The Knot After completing the Figure 8 knot you will want to somehow secure the tail end of the rope out of the way There are a couple different ways to do this the way that Iwill demonstrate is using whats called a Stopper Knot This secondary knot is similar to a Fishermans knot and is pretty simple I have once again divided thisprocess into several smaller steps
1 - Start by wrapping the tail end around the anchored end (As shown in the first picture)
2 - Wrap the tail back underneath the two vertical segments (As shown in the second picture)
3 - Simply repeat the first two steps wrapping the tail around again (As shown in the third picture)
4 - This step in the fourth picture may look complicated but all you need to do is insert the tail up through the two loops that you have just made
5 - To finish off the knot you will want to slowly pull the tail end while gently pushing the bottom of the stopper knot upwards If you have successfully completed this knotit should look something like the fifth picture
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 6 Ready To Climb Now that you have mastered the Figure 8 knot you can securely harness yourself into a climbing rope Remember there are many other skills that go into setting up ananchor and belaying a climber This tutorial only covers the figure 8 knot For more information there are many great websites that demonstrate how to correctly set up asafe climbing system (Ive posted a few below) If you are a beginning climber I recommend that you read up on a few other climbing techniques Also you shouldprobably go to a climbing wall or gym where there are experienced climbers that can show you the ropes Hopefully this tutorial has been helpful Have fun and be safe
Some useful linkshttpwwwstephenprattnetAnchorsanchorshtmhttpwwwuoregonedu~oppclimbingtopicsanchorshtmlhttpwwwabc-of-rockclimbingcomhowtoclimbingtechniquesasp
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Related Instructables
How to Tie aFigure EightKnot byTactical_Pyro
Paracord KnotDisplay Bord byJamie bagn
Basic KnotsGuide byzorro3355
How to Climb aTree (withprussiks) bystasterisk
How to climb atree (using onlyrope) thefunsimple wayby louieaw
How to get arope into a tree(withoutclimbing it) byvitex
How to tievarious knots byadaviel
How to make arope swing byjdub0928
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Turks Head Knots on a Bottleby sklnxbones on July 6 2010
Intro Turks Head Knots on a BottleThis is the finished project A bottle decorated with three Turks Head Knots There are only three knots on this bottle The RED and the BLUE knots are each a 20 Bightby 3 Lead Turks Head Knots The WHITE knot is a 20 Bight by 19 Lead Turks Head Knot
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 1 Supplies
Cord Lots and Lots of cord I cant tell you how much each bottle is differentBottle Washed and Dried inside and out Make sure to remove all water spotsThreaded Needle Cord screws into the threads at the base of the needlePegs I use brass rivets used as a map to tie the Turks Head KnotsHole Punch Used to punch holes in the painters tape to hold the pegsPainters Tape To hold the pegs in place and to make your map for the Turks Head KnotsMarker To write on the painters tapeCloth Towel To remove finger prints and dirt from your bottleKrazy Glue or Super Glue This is used to secure the knots in place to the bottle
OPTIONAL BUT HIGHLY RECOMMENDEDI use the Turks Head Cookbook from KnotToolcom
Step 2 PreparationYou will need to find a bottle you like I used an empty instant tea bottle of course washed and dried (I like to put the bottle in the oven for a few minutes to dry the insidewithout water spots Take off the lid and do not put lid in the oven) Now measure the circumference of the bottle Take a cord and tightly wrap the cord around the bottleMark where the ends meet and use a ruler to measure the length of the cord For my instant tea bottle the circumference is 27cm I know from past knots that I have tiedthat I want my knot to have 20 Bights in the top and bottom (bands) knots I am going to use the Bights in the (bands) knots to tie the middle knot Now divide the numberof Bights (20) into the size of the circumference (27) to get the space between each Bight (135) With me so far
Now take two pieces of painters tape using a ruler measure out the length of the circumference and mark the length on the both pieces of tape Next you will mark thespace between each Bight on the tape
Step 3 Adding the PegsI like to use pegs when tying Turks Head Knots it just makes tying the knot easier
These are what I use for pegs
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 4 Adding Pegs to the TapeNow take a hole punch to cut holes in the tape where the lines meet You will place the pegs in the holes
Insert a peg in each hole and carefully stick the first piece of tape to the bottle
Step 5 Adding the 2nd row of pegsNow do the same thing with the second piece of tape The numbers on each piece of tape must line up
This picture shows you what you should have now This odd looking thing will be your map to tie the Turks Head Knot And this is the end of Step 1
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 6 Tying the first Turks Head KnotUsing the Turks Head Cookbook follow the numbers going over and under as indicated in the book I chose a 20 Bight by 3 Lead knot which will give me a nice bandaround the bottle Once the ends meet you have made one complete knot Tape the running end of your cord and start removing the pegs and the tape
Step 7 Remove the pegs and the tapeBe careful not to untie the knot as you remove the pegs and tape from the bottle Continue to remove all the pegs and remove the tape from the bottle At this point theknot will be very loose and will need to be tightened up
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 8 Remove the slack from the knotHere you can see just how much the knot expanded Starting with the standing end begin to pull the slack out of the knot going towards the running end of the cordDo not expect to pull all the slack out at once You may have to make 3 - 5 attempts at removing the slack out of the knot DO NOT remove all of the slack out of the knotIn order to make the bands we will have to triple the Turks Head Knot We will do this by following the knot three times The threaded needle will really come in handyhere
Step 9 Triple the KnotOnce you have made three passes of the Turks Head Knot use your needle to go under your knot about half the circumference and cut the cord The knot will be tightenough to hide the tail in placeTIP I carefully add a couple of drops of super glue UNDER the band to hold them in place and keep them from sliding around in the nextsteps A drop or two in 3 or 4 places around the band should be enough
Step 10 Add the second knotNow repeat this whole step for the second bandWhen tying the second band you must make sure the Bights line up to the first band This is crucial for the next stepWipe down the bottle to make sure all your finger prints and adhesive from the tape are all removed You want to make sure your bottle is clean at this point Any dirt orfinger prints left on the bottle will be almost impossible to remove From this point on we will use gloves when tying our last knot
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 11 Maping the Top KnotStick a piece of painters tape on top of your first band leaving the bottom of the knot exposedUse a marker to count the number of Bights in your knot Instead of using the pegs we are going to use the Bights to tie our next Turks Head Knot
Step 12 Mapping the Bottom KnotDo the same thing for the bottom band but you must make sure your numbers on top and bottom line up So 1 on top should be the same position as 1 on the bottom
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 13 Adding the last knotAgain using the Turks Head Cookbook and the threaded needle you are going to follow the instructions going over and under as indicated in the book Be sure to usegloves when ever you handle the bottle
Step 14 Thats ItFor this Turks Head Knot I am using a 20 Bight by 19 Lead knot
Because of the amount of cord you are working with your cord will get twisted and knotted You will have to un-twist the cord often Its a pain in the rear but it has to bedone And it has to be done alot
Continue to tie the knot until you finish the knot If you have the cord and the patience you can double or triple the knot When you are done use your needle to hide theends under your bands Cut the ends and your DONE
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Related Instructables
Monkeys FistFloatingKeychain byjokerlz
How To Make ATurks headKnot WithParacord byDoggie Stylish
Tying Trivetsout of Rope forHoliday Gifts bykylemarsh
Paracord KnotDisplay Bord byJamie bagn
How to Make ATurks Head(Photos) bymchs60chip
A pocket full ofknots byKiteman
Monkeys fistknot AND themonkey byjonathan111
TiteTie is theTruckers Knoton Steroids bytitetie
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Larks head noose -- an easy useful knot that tightens and loosensby Larry Breed on February 19 2009
Intro Larks head noose -- an easy useful knot that tightens and loosensI thought I knew all the basic knots but then I was taught this incredibly useful simple knot Its good for tying up the neck of a bag that you want to repeatedly open andsecurely close Its good for tying around a springy bundle that will need tightening and retightening And its easy to undo
Ive looked at knot literature but havent found a name for this so I named it The basic knot is well known its called a larks head Since all Ive done is to slip the twoends through the larks head to make a noose I call it that
WARNING Dont use this knot when human safety would depend on it Climbers and mountaineers have well-tested reliable knots for such situations
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Image Notes1 To tighten further step on this side of the larks head and pull the free ends
Step 1 Double the cord overThe larks head noose requires enough cord to go twice around your bundle plus a foot or two Find the center and double it over Sailors call this a bight
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 2 Form the larks headComing from below the bight hook your thumb and forefinger over the two sides Reach outward and downward and pinch your fingertips together underneath thedoubled cord
Youve made a larks head Move the crossing cord a little farther from your hand so theres a clear opening through the two half-loops
Step 3 Form the nooseSlip the two ends of the cord through the opening we were just talking about Pull the larks head tight so it grips the two cords Find something that needs constrictingand put the noose around it
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 4 Tightening retightening and lockingSlide the knot against the bundle If its not tight enough to keep from slipping tighten it by holding it in one hand and tugging on the cords one at a time with the otherhand Notice that you can slide the knot out again for instance to re-open the bag you just tied shut For some applications this may be as tight as you need it
A springy bundle probably still feels loose If so compress the bundle and get a new grip on the cords Rest your foot on the bundle on the cords nearest the larks headand pull to slide the larks head tighter
To make the knot more permanent you can lock it Make an overhand in the cord ends (Exactly like the first step in tying shoelaces) With your foot still on the bundlepull on the cords and move your hands apart until youre pulling in opposite directions You have just locked the larks head and you can trust it to stay that way()
But lets say that later on you want to loosen the locked knot Again put your foot on the bundle and cords nearest the larks head hold the two cord ends together andpull This makes a little slack between the overhand and the larks head so you can untie the overhand
In twine or small string the locking overhand knot may be difficult to undo Use a shoelace knot instead of an overhand and itll unlock easily
() If youre using slippery cord like polypropylene an overhand may not lock securely You may want to tie another overhand knot For added security wrap a shortlength of duct tape around the two cords close to the knot
Image Notes1 To tighten further step on this side of the larks head and pull the free ends
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Related Instructables
TRX fromParacordChallengeAccepted bythrake
A pocket full ofknots byKiteman
Lens CapLanyard by~teknoarsonist~ how to tie a
noose byawesume
AdjustableParacordGlassesLanyard byjdtwelve12
HangmansNoose PackClosure byPopEye42
Paraleash - ADog LeashFrom Paracordby The Ideanator
How to make arugged andhandy ParacordBelt by Jake22
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 5 Pass the Bight under the 1st loop 69
Step 6 Weave the Bight 69
Step 7 Extend the Bight 70
Step 8 Flip the Right Loop behind 70
Step 9 Flip the 2nd loop in front 71
Step 10 Remove Slack 72
Step 11 Tighten the Knot 73
Step 12 Secure on bottle neck 74
Step 13 Aluminum Bottle Water Bottle 75
Step 14 Tethered Cork Stopper 77
Step 15 Trussed for Transport 78
Step 16 Advanced 81
Related Instructables 81
Basic Knots Guide 82
Intro Basic Knots Guide 82
Step 1 Thumb knot 82
Step 2 Reef Knot 82
Step 3 Figure of eight 83
Step 4 Timber hitch 84
Step 5 Clove hitch 84
Step 6 Sheet band 84
Step 7 Sheep shank 86
Step 8 Slip knot 86
Related Instructables 86
How to Tie a Fire-escape Knot 87
Intro How to Tie a Fire-escape Knot 87
Step 1 Get Your Rope 87
Step 2 Twist the Rope 87
Step 3 Pull Through the Twist 88
Step 4 Go Over the Split End 88
Step 5 Finally 89
Step 6 Same Name Not Knot 89
Related Instructables 89
Climb Safe With A Figure 8 Knot 90
Intro Climb Safe With A Figure 8 Knot 90
Step 1 Dealing With The Rope 90
Step 2 Tying The First Figure 8 91
Step 3 Looping Into The Harness 93
Step 4 Following Back Through The Figure 8 94
Step 5 Finishing The Knot 96
Step 6 Ready To Climb 99
Related Instructables 100
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Turks Head Knots on a Bottle 101
Intro Turks Head Knots on a Bottle 101
Step 1 Supplies 102
Step 2 Preparation 102
Step 3 Adding the Pegs 102
Step 4 Adding Pegs to the Tape 103
Step 5 Adding the 2nd row of pegs 103
Step 6 Tying the first Turks Head Knot 104
Step 7 Remove the pegs and the tape 104
Step 8 Remove the slack from the knot 105
Step 9 Triple the Knot 105
Step 10 Add the second knot 105
Step 11 Maping the Top Knot 106
Step 12 Mapping the Bottom Knot 106
Step 13 Adding the last knot 107
Step 14 Thats It 107
Related Instructables 108
Larks head noose -- an easy useful knot that tightens and loosens 109
Intro Larks head noose -- an easy useful knot that tightens and loosens 109
Step 1 Double the cord over 110
Step 2 Form the larks head 111
Step 3 Form the noose 111
Step 4 Tightening retightening and locking 112
Related Instructables 113
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Author and Copyright NoticesInstructable Cross Knot Paracord LanyardAuthor StormdraneLicense Attribution-NonCommercial-ShareAlike (by-nc-sa)
Instructable Paracord wrist lanyard made with the snake knotAuthor StormdraneLicense Attribution-NonCommercial-ShareAlike (by-nc-sa)
Instructable How to tie various knotsAuthor adavielLicense Attribution (by)
Instructable How to Tie the Lanyard KnotAuthor eddy14777License Attribution-NonCommercial-ShareAlike (by-nc-sa)
Instructable Four knots to make paracord into a useful toolAuthor erik_mccrayLicense Attribution-NonCommercial-ShareAlike (by-nc-sa)
Instructable Figure 8 knot and double 8 knotAuthor jonathan111License Attribution-NonCommercial-ShareAlike (by-nc-sa)
Instructable Truckers Hitch THE most awesome knot on the planetAuthor schneidp20License Attribution-NonCommercial-ShareAlike (by-nc-sa)
Instructable Carry any Bottle with a JUG KNOT HandleAuthor hpstoutharrowLicense Attribution-NonCommercial-ShareAlike (by-nc-sa)
Instructable Basic Knots GuideAuthor zorro3355License None (All Rights Reserved) (c)
Instructable How to Tie a Fire-escape KnotAuthor leonardo ismaelLicense Attribution-NonCommercial-ShareAlike (by-nc-sa)
Instructable Climb Safe With A Figure 8 KnotAuthor mattsteLicense Attribution-NonCommercial-ShareAlike (by-nc-sa)
Instructable Turks Head Knots on a BottleAuthor sklnxbonesLicense Attribution-NonCommercial-ShareAlike (by-nc-sa)
Instructable Larks head noose -- an easy useful knot that tightens and loosensAuthor Larry BreedLicense Attribution-NonCommercial-ShareAlike (by-nc-sa)
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
DisclaimerAll do-it-yourself activities involve risk and your safety is your own responsibility including proper use of equipment and safety gear and determining whether you haveadequate skill and experience Some of the resources used for these projects are dangerous unless used properly and with adequate precautions including safety gearSome illustrative photos do not depict safety precautions or equipment in order to show the project steps more clearly The projects are not intended for use by children
Many projects on Instructables are user-submitted and appearance of a project in this format does not indicate it has been checked for safety or functionality Use of theinstructions and suggestions is at your own risk Instructables Inc disclaims all responsibility for any resulting damage injury or expense It is your responsibility to makesure that your activities comply with all applicable laws
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Cross Knot Paracord Lanyardby Stormdrane on May 22 2011
AuthorStormdrane Stormdranes BlogNo matter where you go there you are
Intro Cross Knot Paracord Lanyard
This instructable will show how to make a paracord lanyard using the cross knot and snake knot The lanyard can be used as a wallet chain to secure a key chainkeyring knife multitool flashlight cell phone camera binoculars compass and other assorted pocketable gadgets gear and gizmos More projects links knotreferences can be seen in my blog Stormdranes Blog
The cross knot can also be found under different names from other online and book references as The Chinese Crown Knot Chinese Cross Japanese Crown KnotJapanese Success Knot Rustlers Knot Friendship Knot and knot 808 in The Ashley Book of Knots
You can use the loop end of the lanyard to attach it to your item and use the clip end to secure to a belt loop bag pack etc Or run a belt through the lanyards loopand use the attachment to clip onto your gadget gear gizmo etc Longer versions could be used as a pet leash for your dog cat pot belly pig iguana ferret or otherassorted leashable rodents and varmints
Step 1 Supplies
For this project youll need 10 feet of paracord scissors swivel snap hook and a lighter Optional supplies are hemostats tape measure and your own choice ofattachments like split ring swivel clip carabiner snap shackle etc
I used 10 feet of paracord to make a finished lanyardwallet chain of about 25 feet in length You can use more or less to make one of your own preferred length
There are many online sources for paracord available in different lengths and color choices and can sometimes be found at local sporting goods outlets and ArmyNavySurplus stores Various attachments can also be found online and at local retail establishments and you may even scavenge them from keyringskeychains pet leashesetc that you already have
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 2 Step 2
Find the center of your length of cord form a bight which will be the the loop end of your lanyard
Step 3 Step 3
To tie the cross knot youre going to bring the strand of cord on the right over the left strand back under to the right and back under again to the left making an S shapeas shown
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 4 Step 4
Now with the left strand bring it up under the S shape through the top loop as shown
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 5 Step 5
Bring the strand back down over the first two parts of the S shape and under the bottom as shown
Step 6 Step 6
Tighten up the knot by carefully pulling on each of the working ends and loop ends of the cord You can adjust the size of the lanyards loop by working slack from theloop end to decrease its size or from the working ends to increase the loops size Ive kept the loop at about 2 inches in length so that a belt will fit through it but youcan make it larger or smaller to your preference You can also check that the working ends of the paracord are equal in length at this point and work slack through theknot to even them up if needed
Note the other side of the knot looks different with the cross pattern as shown
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 7 Step7
Now you can tie the next knot in the lanyard the same way as the first After tying the next knot work the slack through the knot until you have about 1 inch of spacebetween them then tighten and continue with the next knot Note that the knots look different on each side frontback and that you tie the each facing the same way oralternate them if you choose
Continue making knots until you have about 1 foot of cord left with each end of the working strands
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 8 Step 8
Now you will add your attachment like the swivel snap hook shown putting both strands through the swivel eye to begin tying the snake knot
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 9 Step 9Bring the right strand under the cords then up over them as shown
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 10 Step 10Now take the left strand over across the other strands back behind and under the cords and up through the right strand loop as shown Then tighten
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 11 Step 11
Take the right strand under and behind the cords then bring it back through the tightened knot along side itself as shown and tighten This is where hemostats come inhandy with tying this knot working the cord through the previously tightened part of the knot It can be done without hemostats but requires tighteningloosening of theknots with just your fingertips
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 12 Step 12
Turn the lanyard over so the other side of the knot is facing up The working strand now on the right side will be brought under the cords back up and down through theparallel strands of the knot as shown then tighten And continue this process flipping the lanyard over taking the right strand under and back up around and through theparallel cords and tighten Continue until you run out of cord or reach the cross knot
Youll now trim off any excess cord and quick melt the end of the strands to prevent fraying to finish
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 13 Variations
You can use other two strand knots instead of the cross knot for variations on this style of lanyard A few alternatives to try tying in a spaced out series or combination ofthem Matthew Walker knot double wall knot lanyard knot double overhand knots double figure 8 knots etc The finishing knots around the attachment can also bedifferent as Ive used the lanyard knot sometimes just one or several in a row
You can also use variations of the cross knot with paracord bracelets and watchbands Doubled version of the knot shown as a paracord bracelet and alternating withtwo pairs of strands for the paracord watchband Leftover pieces of paracord can be used for zipper pulls key ring fobs even paracord cross pendants
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Related Instructables
Paracord ChainSinnet FastDeploy BoonieHatband (video)by Stormdrane
Zigzag SpoolingParacord (video)by Stormdrane
SurvivalBracelet(Updated) bytevers94
Celtic ButtonKnot (video) byStormdrane
ParacordBoonie HatWrap (video) byStormdrane
Paracord wristlanyard madewith the snakeknot byStormdrane
SurvivalBracelet II bytevers94
Cobra WeaveKey Fob bytevers94
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Paracord wrist lanyard made with the snake knotby Stormdrane on September 12 2007
AuthorStormdrane Stormdranes BlogNo matter where you go there you are
Intro Paracord wrist lanyard made with the snake knotThis instructable will show how to make a wrist lanyard using paracord and the snake knot The lanyard can be used to secure a key chain knife multi-tool flashlightcell phone camera binoculars compass etc More projects links knot references can be seen on my blog page Stormdranes Blog
Step 1 SuppliesYoull need about 45 feet of paracord(you may use other types of cordage if desired) The paracord I used is from the Supply Captain I left the inner strands in theparacord but you can remove them if preferred If done in one color it will be one continuous 45 ft length if done in two colors youll need 3 ft for the primary color thatincludes the wrist section and 15 ft for the second color that will show in the snake knot Also used are scissors tape measure or ruler lighter hemostats or needle nosepliers(not necessary but they make it much easier) and a swivel clip key ring snap hook cell phone lariat carabiner or whatever attachment you prefer to use
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 2 Attaching two colors of paracordIf using two colors of paracord you will insert one color about 12 inch into the other color You may remove a small amount of the paracords inner strands by pullingthem out trimming with scissors and pulling the paracord outer sheath back over the strands leaving room to insert the other color For various projects Ive used threedifferent methods for attaching two colors of paracord melting sewing or gluing The choice is yours I usually sew them together it doesnt matter as long as its a goodconnection It will be hidden under the first knot
Step 3 Find the center of the length of paracordTake the center of the length of cord and bring it thru the attachment Im using a swivel clip For this tutorial Im measuring the wrist loop at about 10 inches from theattachment The connection of the two colors will be just on the other side at this point
Step 4 Making the snake knotThe snake knot will be made around the wrist loop section of paracord the loop strands being the core of the knot Ive added a series of photos showing the steps Iuse By using two colors youll see that I flip the lanyard over after making each knot so that Im working with the cord on the right side of the lanyard I bring it under allthe other cords working the hemostats under the previously tightened knot and pulling the cord back thru Then tightening up the knot keeping the cord from twisting andworking it up against the previous knot Again flipping the work over youll see two parallel cords of the same color which will be split with the cord on the right goingunder around and pulled thru with the hemostats then tightened up Continue this procedure until youve done about 10 snake knots(you can count them down eitherside
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 5 Count your knotsOnce you have 10 snake knots youre almost done Youll notice from the photos of both sides of the lanyard that one side has the snake knots alternating all the waydown and the other has a set of parallel knots at the top and botton of the sequence of knots Youll always have those at the start and finish of the snake knots I preferto have them end up on the same side of the lanyard so one side appears to have a more uniform look but its not required
Step 6 Trim and melt the excess paracordUse the scissors to trim off the excess cord and quickly melt the ends with a lighter so they dont fray
Step 7 Youre doneYou can make a range of variations using less or more cordknots Shorten the loop for a double ended key chain or make the loop longer for use as a neck lanyard aLanyard Break-Away Connector could be added for the safety conscious You can also add a wooden bead skull cord lock etc Visit my blog page for more knot relatedprojects links and resources Stormdranes Blog You can find ideas for other geargadgets to attach to your lanyard on EDC Forums
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Related Instructables
Paracord ChainSinnet FastDeploy BoonieHatband (video)by Stormdrane
Cross KnotParacordLanyard byStormdrane
Zigzag SpoolingParacord (video)by Stormdrane
SurvivalBracelet II bytevers94
SurvivalBracelet(Updated) bytevers94
Cobra WeaveKey Fob bytevers94
ParacordBoonie HatWrap (video) byStormdrane
Paracord KnotDisplay Bord byJamie bagn
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
How to tie various knotsby adaviel on September 7 2009
Intro How to tie various knotsKnots as a way of joining rope without special equipment are useful in many situations On a sailboat knots are essential both for daily use and for emergency repairsThis instructable describes several different common knots eg
Sheet Bend - to tie two lines togetherBowline - to make a loopReef Knot - to fasten a bundle of materialFishermans Bend - to secure a line to a post or ring
These knots are good for regular rope - braided or 3-strand polyester or natural fibre (hemp sisal) Monofilament (fishing line) or steel cable performs better with differentknots
Knots are typically quite a lot weaker than straight rope - when rope goes around a tight radius such as in a knot the outside is under more tension than the insideSplices (which require special tools and are time-consuming to make) are stronger so permanent fittings usually have eye-splices
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 1 Sheet BendThe sheet bend is used to tie two lines together It is perhaps the most generally useful knot of all When used to tie a line to itself making a loop it is called a bowlineThe strain is taken on the ropes in the middle - not the one coming out the side
How the knot is made is not critical - it is the final shape that is important One can make the flat loop first and work the other rope around it Or one can make thecrossed loop first - required when tying a bowline
The two images show front and back views of the same knot
AdvantagesEasy to makeEasy to undo when tension is removedDoes not easily capsize
DisadvantagesHard to make under loadDangerous to make under heavy load
UsesJoining two equally-sized ropesExtending a towline or stern line
Method 1 the same as a bowline
Method 2 starting with the flat loop
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 2 Double Sheet BendThe double sheet bend is used to tie two lines of different thickness - but not too different It is the same as a normal sheet bend but with an extra turn of the thinner ropearound the flat loop in the thickerThe load goes on the line through the flat loop not the one that comes out the side of the knot
UsesSecuring a heaving line to a tow lineExtending a stern line if you dont have enough line of one thickness
Step 3 BowlineThe bowline is really a special case of the sheet bend but it it tied at the end of a rope to make a loop
The photos show the completed loop and closeups of the front and back of the actual knot Note that it is the same as the sheet bend - but it must be made the right wayround This loop does not tighten in use The knot is quite easy to untie once the load is removed With practice it is very quick to tie
Some usesSecuring a dinghy line to a railing or stanchionSecuring an anchor line to an anchorTie a jib sheet to the sailTie a mooring line around a rock or treeTie a float to an anchor triplineUse one in each line to tie two ropes of very different sizes - eg a throwing line to a large tow ropeDisadvantages the knot must be completely made before it will take any strain - it is hard to tie if there is already a load on the rope
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Linked bowlines
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 4 Bowline on the BightA bowline on the bight is a bowline tied in a loop of rope (neither end is needed) The shape is the same as a bowline made with a double line but the middle of thebight forms the loop around the standing part
UsesAn impromptu bosuns chair - to sit in while being transferred between two boats at sea
Step 5 Clove HitchThe clove hitch can be made when you only have the bight (the middle) of a rope not the ends
UsesSecuring a burgee pole to a burgee halyard (a continuous loop of thin line)Securing a tiller from swinging
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 6 Round Turn and Two Half-HitchesThis is a knot used to secure a line to a ring or bar Wind a couple of turns around the bar then secure the end with two hitches around the standing part (this looks like aclove hitch when done)
AdvantagesCan be made under load - it is easy to take turns around the bar while maintaining tension on the ropeStrong - provided the bar is thicker than the rope the rope is not weakened by sharp bendsDisadvantagesThe end tends to work loose
UsesSecuring a line to a mooring ring or samson post
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 7 Fishermans BendThe fishermans bend is the same as the round turn and two half hitches except that the first hitch is looped under the round turn This uses the tension on the rope tosecure the end from working loose
AdvantagesSecure against working loose
DisadvantagesHard to make under tensionHard to undo under tensionMay seize up under load when wet making it hard to undo
UsesSecuring mooring line to ringSecuring fender lines to rail
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 8 Studsail BendThe studsail bend is like the fishermans bend but the second hitch is also secured under the round turn making it even more secure against working loose when undertension
AdvantagesVery secure against working looseDisadvantagesHard to make under tensionHard to undo under tension
Step 9 Figure-8 KnotThe figure-eight knot is used to prevent an end of rope from passing through a block (pulley) Sometimes called a stopper knot
The double figure-8 knot is used in rock climbing as an alternative to a bowline to secure a climbing harness to the end of a safety rope The double knot is made bymaking a single knot then tracing back around the knot with the free end after passing it around the harness loop
AdvantagesEasy to verify by inspectionNot prone to work loose
DisadvantagesSlow to make and undoCannot be made under load
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 10 Prussic KnotThe prussic knot may be used as a climbing ascender - when made around a vertical rope as shown downwards tension on the ends locks the knot while release oftension allows it to be slid up the rope A pair of prussic knots on foot loops may be used in tandem to climb a rope
UsesClimbing a ropeTaking up tension to free a riding turn on a winch
Step 11 Reef KnotThe reef knot or square knot is used to tie a bundle of material together It must be made around something - it should not be used to tie two free ropes togetherbecause it can easily capsizeIt should not be used to make a loop unless it can be tensioned around a solid object It should not be used around a person - use a bowline instead A capsized reefknot will slip easily and could constrict and cause severe injury
UsesReefing a sail (tying the unused portion around a spar)Securing a furled sail to a spar (sail ties)Wrapping a parcelTying shoelaces
AdvantagesMay be made under moderate load
DisadvantagesCapsizes (works free) if used improperlyCan seize up under load when wet
Tying the knot
Capsizing a reef knot
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 12 CleatsThis is not a knot but is very common on boatsThe first picture shows a rope cleated normally The second shows one with a final locking turn - the last turn is twisted before placing over the cleat so that the tensionon the rope helps secure the free end
When working with ropes under tension take a turn or two around a winch or cleat before trying to secure the end with a knot The load on the free end falls exponentiallywith each turn taken Severe injury can result if a finger or other body part is caught in a loop of rope or between a rope and another object
Step 13 Practice themIt is sometimes useful to be able to tie knots in the dark or as in this video behind your back
Related Instructables
AThird Hand forSailing or OtherThings by WadeTarzia
Paracord KnotDisplay Bord byJamie bagn
Trip LogOutriggerCanoe Sailingthe CaliforniaChannel Islandsby TimAnderson
How to Tie aFigure EightKnot byTactical_Pyro
How to build apirate ship bymdelaney3
Build a ShortDragon (16 foot3-BoardOutriggerSailing Canoe)by Wade Tarzia
repairing aheadsail by josh
How to get arope into a tree(withoutclimbing it) byvitex
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
How to Tie the Lanyard Knotby eddy14777 on January 31 2010
Intro How to Tie the Lanyard KnotMany people including myself have had trouble following the Stormdrane youtube video on tying the lanyard knot so i have done some research and found the solution
Image Notes1 Finished knot
Step 1 MaterialsAll you need is a reasonable length of para cord or whatever you wish to use
Image Notes1 One reasonable amount
Step 2 First StepThe first thing you are going to do is to make a bight that leaves you with to congruent endsThen you are going to put your ring finger through the bight
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Image Notes1 Close enough2 Bight
Step 3 Starting the KnotMake a loop just like the one in the picture and place it over the top strandBring the top strand under the bottom strand
Image Notes1 Notice the way the loop is done2 Top strand
Image Notes1 Bottom strand2 Top strand is under
Step 4 The Most Important PartNow you take the top stand from the previous picture and feed it over the first part of the loop under itself and back over the remainder of the loop
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Image Notes1 Under me2 Top strand3 This should make a diamond type shape
Step 5 DoublingNow take the bottom stand and take it around the part of the top strand nearest to the bight and than come up through the diamond shape in the middleDo the same for the top strand
Image Notes1 Top strand
Image Notes1 Both through the diamond
Step 6 FinishingWhen you take it off your finger it should look like thisWork out the slack by pulling on the bight and the two strands
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Image Notes1 Finished knot
Related Instructables
Cross KnotParacordLanyard byStormdrane
Celtic ButtonKnot (video) byStormdrane
Paracord wristlanyard madewith the snakeknot byStormdrane
Paracord ChainSinnet FastDeploy BoonieHatband (video)by Stormdrane
Zigzag SpoolingParacord (video)by Stormdrane
ParacordBoonie HatWrap (video) byStormdrane
Paracord IDbadge Lanyardby Flahusky
Cobra WeaveKey Fob bytevers94
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Four knots to make paracord into a useful toolby erik_mccray on March 27 2010
Authorerik_mccrayI am an ex-fabricator that is now a stay at home dad I love my new job but I do miss making stuff I love this site amp I am getting involved as a way to keep myskills upOn top of fad work I have also run two small business in the past One was custom sewing amp the other was as a small engine mechanicI have two votec degrees one in metal fabrication amp the other is in engine repairI look forward to getting to know everyone here
Intro Four knots to make paracord into a useful toolParacord is an awesome multitool used everywhere from the wild blue yonder to the deepest caverns But like any good tool it is only as good as the knowledge the userhas about the tool With most people out there using bungee cords amp ratchet straps it seems that paracord is being used for nothing more than friendship bracelets forgrown men This is a shame because for less then the price of a few cheap bungee cords amp some to short to be helpful straps You can get yourself hundreds of feet ofparacord
The key to getting the most out of the paracord is good knot work The first thing you need to know is what makes a good knot One is that the knot is easy amp quick to tieamp more impotant is that the knot is easy amp quick to untie The hitch class of knots is by far the best group of knots that the average person could know The four mostuseful hitch knots are the half hitch a quick simple knot that forms the base for many other knots the inline half hitch allowing you to get the most out of one length ofparacord the slippery hitch that gives you both on the fly control over tension on your paracord but also an adjustable loop that will not change unless you want it amp theinline truckers hitch instantly doubling the your pulling power
Step 1 To get started lets get some terminology that will be used defined
line= the paracord
Main line= the part of the paracord doing the work for example holding down your tarp or the long part of the paracord
Mid line= the middle of the length of the paracord
End line= the unused length of paracord or the short length of paracord
Step 2 The half hitch The half hitch is a simple way to secure a line to an anchor point like the tie down points in most trucks A half hitch is a constrictor knot meaning that the harder you pullon the line the tighter the knots grip gets Another common constrictor knot is the slip knot
Step 1 wrap your line around your anchor point Step 2 wrap the end line around the main line
Step 3 pass the end line threw the end line side of the newly formed loop
step 4 now take the slack out of the knot
step 5 to make sure the knot is secure tie another half hitch to the main line This knot is called adouble half hitch
step 6 another useful thing that can be done with the half hitch is that instead of repeating the wrap on the main line but repeating it on what you are tying to the half hitchcan be used to bind something like a stack of 2x4s
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Image Notes1 End line2 Main line3 step 1
Image Notes1 Step 2
Image Notes1 passing thew the end line side of the loop2 step 3
Image Notes1 step 5
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Image Notes1 step 6
Step 3 The mid line half hitch The mid line half hitch is for when the length of line is to long for the job at hand amp you dont want to have to cut the line to size or you are using multiple anchor pointswith one length of line
Step 1 double up the line at the point in the length you wish to make the knot
Step 2 wrap the doubled up portion of line around your anchor point The doubled up length is now now the end line
Step 3 now tie just as you did for the regular half hitch repeat the knot to make a double half hitch for security
Image Notes1 A mid line double half hitch
Image Notes1 step 1
Image Notes1 The end line2 step 2
Image Notes1 Step 3
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 4 The slippery hitch The slippery hitch is a great knot for adjusting tension on the main line or for having an adjustable fixed loop To adjust the knot simply slide the knot up or down the mainline
Step 1 wrap your line around the anchor point or just double over the line to form a loop
Step 2 wrap the end line around the main line three times Wrapping in the direction of the anchor point or loop
Step 3 put together the two lines making up the loop amp wrap the two lines one time with the end line
Step 4 pass the end line thew the last loop formed covering the two lined of the loop
Step 5 pull the knot tite
step 6 to adjust the size of the loop or main line tension grab the knot amp slide it up or down the main line
Image Notes1 grab just the knot its self to adjust it2 step 5
Image Notes1 step 1
Image Notes1 step 2
Image Notes1 step 3
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Image Notes1 step 4
Image Notes1 grab just the knot its self to adjust it2 step 5
Image Notes1 same knot as in last pic Just slid up2 step 6
Step 5 The mid line truchers hitch The truckers hitch is a great way to double the pulling force on a line There are many ways to tie this knot the problem with most of them is that at some point you aregoing to have to pass the end line through a loop on the main line that is acting like a pulley to double your pulling force this is great if you are making the knot close tothe end of your line but if you are using a 300 length of line amp want to make the knot in the first ten feet having to pass 290 of line thew a loop is a pain But with a fewhalf hitches you will not have to pass the end line threw any loop on the main line
step 1 wrap your line around the anchor point then double over your end line laying the top of the loop over the main line
Step 2 double up your main line amp lay the loop over the loop made by the end line
step 3 in main line above the knot twist in a loop
step 4 put main line loop thew the loop made in step 3 amp pull this loop tight over your main line loop forming a half hitch Repeat step 3 amp 4 to make a doublehalf hitch
step 5 To use the knot just pull down on the end line to put tension on the main line
step 6 after you have the main line snug tie a mid line double half hitch around the two lines forming the loop at the end of the main line with the end line
step 7 Tie a double half hitch with the end line around the end loop of the mid line half hitch of step 6 using the same method as used in steps 3 amp 4
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Image Notes1 the end of step 6
Image Notes1 main line2 end line3 step 1
Image Notes1 main line loop2 end line loop
Image Notes1 step 3
Image Notes1 step 4
Image Notes1 step 4 at the end with a double half hitch on the main loop
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Image Notes1 pull here2 step 5
Image Notes1 the start of step 6
Image Notes1 the end of step 6
Image Notes1 step 72 now the rest of the line is free to do more work
Related Instructables
Paracord KnotDisplay Bord byJamie bagn
ChokelessAdjustableParacord DogLeash byPizzaman101
ParacordLadder wWooden Rungsby josestude
tie a paracordshackle grip byitri45
ParacordPrussik Belt byJavaNut13
TiteTie is theTruckers Knoton Steroids bytitetie
ID Lanyard(Photos) byeschmunk
Dog Toys forHeavy Chewersby J3443RY
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Figure 8 knot and double 8 knotby jonathan111 on November 28 2007
Intro Figure 8 knot and double 8 knotI will show you how to tie a figure 8 knot and a figure 8 follow through
Step 1 Stating the knotThis is a simple knot so just follow the pictures
Step 2 Finishing the knotCross the string under and then push it through the hole Pull tightly unless you are going to do the follow through and leave it somewhat loose
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 3 The follow through knotThe follow through knot should be tied around something brought back and followed through the path of the 8 knot Look at the pictures Basically follow through the 8knot backwards
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Related Instructables
Climb Safe WithA Figure 8Knot by mattste A pocket full of
knots byKiteman
How to Tie aFigure EightKnot byTactical_Pyro
Paracord KnotDisplay Bord byJamie bagn
Cross KnotParacordLanyard byStormdrane
How to Tie aFire-escapeKnot by leonardoismael
Truckers HitchTHE mostawesome knoton the planetby schneidp20
Paracord ZipperPuller byrepeet13
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Truckers Hitch THE most awesome knot on the planetby schneidp20 on October 12 2008
Authorschneidp20I like building stuff Trouble is there just isnt enough time to build everything Sigh
Intro Truckers Hitch THE most awesome knot on the planetYes I know that there are plenty of other cool knots out there many of which I literally couldnt live wo I rock climb However this knot is unlike any other Plus Ineeded a grabber for my Instructable -) (BTW this ISNT a climbing knot) And in truth it isnt a knot by itself but rather a system of common knots
Have you ever tried to tie something down for transporting but just couldnt get the lines tight andor during transport the lines would continually loosen Then this is theknot for you I learned this knot back in the 70s when specialty car racks and ratchet straps were rare or unheard of I initially used it to tie a canoe on a car rack bothattaching to the rack as well as the lines to the bow and stern of the canoe Even with all the new gizmos available today this knot still shines because all you need is arope and ropes dont hum in the wind like straps
The unique aspect of this knot is that it gives you a 2-1 mechanical advantage when tightening the rope Be careful though You can actually damage some thingsbecause of the mechanical advantage This knot holds fast and is easy to untie hallmark traits of any good knot
Below you see the finished knot system well break it apart in the steps that follow
Image Notes1 1st anchor point a bowline2 loop3 securing knots 2 half hitches4 securing loose end with a fishermans knot5 2nd anchor point (should be round)
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Image Notes1 X marks the spot
Step 1 Initial setupThe first step is to anchor one end of the rope and then loop the rope around a 2nd anchor point
For attaching to the 1st anchor point I chose bowline a close 2 on my list -) There are other instructables on that one so I wont bore you here
The 2nd anchor really should be round because it serves as a pulley in this block and tackle type knot Ive used it on sharp anchor points and it doesnt work as well
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 2 Creating a slip knotTie a slip knot somewhere between the two anchor points Correct placement of the slip knot takes some experience to judge it correctly Typically I place it too close tothe 2nd anchor point and end up with not enough room to work with If the knot ends up too far from 2nd anchor point you can extend the knot by enlarging the loop
Be sure you tie the slip knot as shown You may not be able to untie other knots
In this small example the slip knot is uncharacteristically close to the 1st anchor point
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 3 Tightening and securingThe loose end of the rope that went around the 2nd anchor point goes through the slip knot loop Pull the loose end to the desired tension and secure with two halfhitches
Note To allow better view of the knots the rope isnt really tightened in this example
Step 4 Securing loose endThe final knot is just to secure the loose end somehow I chose a fishermans knot to do this
To tie a fishermans knot the rope goes around twice and goes under the X created by the loops Pull the loose end to tighten Finally slide the knot to put tension onthe half hitches
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Image Notes1 X marks the spot
Step 5 FinishedThere you have it I guarantee that the first time you really use this knot (not just practice) you will be amazed at how well it works and youll wish you knew this knot along time ago You may even come over to my side and declare that is is THE most awesome knot on the planet -)
Enjoy and happy haulingDave
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Related Instructables
TiteTie is theTruckers Knoton Steroids bytitetie
Four knots tomake paracordinto a usefultool byerik_mccray
Modify yourbike rack tocarry a sunfishor other boat byewilhelm
SurfboardHammock byGermy
GiganticHalloweenSpider Web bynolte919
How To Tie ASpiders Hitch(video) by back-cast
Three-hitch mathair ornamentby michiexile TRX from
ParacordChallengeAccepted bythrake
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Carry any Bottle with a JUG KNOT Handleby hpstoutharrow on September 17 2009
Intro Carry any Bottle with a JUG KNOT HandleTie a JUG KNOT around a water bottle soda bottle or aluminum bottle to make a secure carrying strap
Re-purpose any container into a reusable water bottle by adding a convenient carrying strap This Instructable will demonstrate how to tie a JUG knot which like its namesuggests is meant to properly secure around the neck of a container
With some cord and the knowledge of this knot you will be able add a handle lanyard or carabiner loop to any of your favorite beverages to carry them on the go
It works perfectly for those disposable water bottles and who knows once you add some colorful cord to the plain old clear water bottle you just might beinclined to refill it and use it again(Check out pictures 4amp5 below)
In addition to plastic beverage bottles like pop water and sports drinks you can turn those rugged aluminum beer bottles into a backpacking canteen
Those of you familiar with my previous aluminum bottle InstructablesROLLED RIM METAL TUMBLERhttpwwwinstructablescomidAluminum-Bottle-Tumbler-Cup-Cook-PotALUMINUM BOTTLE LIGHTWEIGHT ALCOHOL STOVEhttpwwwinstructablescomidAluminum-Bottle-Alcohol-Stovewill recognize the water canteen shown below as a re-purposed aluminum beer bottle Here I have added a painted surface treatment to turn it into a proper lookingwater bottle More on that in steps 13 14 15
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 1 Getting StartedCord size is important Select a small medium weight cord like the one shown here It is a general purpose camp cord sold at most sporting goods stores (shoelacesmight also work)
Do not use a heavy cord or rope because the larger diameter will not tuck under the relatively small lip at the top of the bottleneck and the bottle will fall out
Also the smaller cord cinches tight on itself and will not loosen accidentally
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 2 Form a BightThe next steps show how to tie a JUG KNOT It is the basic step for adding a carrying strap It is also the anchor point for any additional fancy bottle trussing you maywant to add
JUG KNOT Step 1
Form a Bight in the center of a length of cord Bight is a knot term for a loop or bend in the rope In this case the main Bight in this knot is highlighted with a white mark Imakes it easier to follow its path in these steps
The running ends of the cord should be equal length
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 3 Pull the Bight downPULL the Bight DOWN forming two Loops
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 4 Cross the LoopsCROSS the right Loop OVER the left Loop
Step 5 Pass the Bight under the 1st loopTake the main Bight and pass it UNDER the left Loop
Step 6 Weave the BightWEAVE the Bight OVER the portion of the right Loop and UNDER the portion of the left Loop
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 7 Extend the BightExtend the Bight OVER the outer portion of the right Loop
Step 8 Flip the Right Loop behindAdditional colored identification points have been added to the loops to follow their travel in these next two steps
The right Loop Yellow marker is FLIPPED BEHIND the knot and ends up on the far left side of the knot
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 9 Flip the 2nd loop in frontRaise the green marker (located on what was formerly the left loop) and pull it down and to the right FLIPPING IT IN FRONT of the knot
Note the blue portion of the this loop will pass around the outside of the yellow portion of the first loop
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Image Notes1 Center of knot that will tighten around the bottles neck
Step 10 Remove SlackNote where the blue green amp yellow markers end up
Start to remove the slack in the loops by pulling the original main Bight (white marker top right) and the two free standing ends at the bottom
the bottle neck will pass through the very center of the knot
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Image Notes1 Center of knot that will tighten around the bottles neck
Step 11 Tighten the KnotAfter removing the slack insert the bottle neck and finish tightening
The knot should look like this before slipping it over the bottle
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 12 Secure on bottle neckThis is the finished knot shown on the neck of various containers
The loop end and the two free standing ends can be tied together to create a carrying handle (last picture below)
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 13 Aluminum Bottle Water Bottle
The next few steps show the features of an aluminum beer bottle re-purposed as a water bottle canteen It is one of many containers that can be reused as a camp waterbottle
The bottle was lightly sanded masked and then pained with a hammered finished paint to create an interesting surface texture
Image Notes1 Textured finish paint makes an interesting grip-able surface2 Masked with tape for painting3 Masked with tape for painting
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Image Notes1 Dowel used for holding the bottle during painting
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 14 Tethered Cork StopperUse a wine bottle man made Cork as a stopper for your aluminum water bottleNote Use a cork that was removed from the wine bottle without the corkscrew penetrating through the bottom end of the cork (A hole all the way through the cork willcause it to leak) Use the unpierced end of the cork inside the water bottle
Drill a hole through the sides of the Cork Thread the cord through the hole to the center of the cord Use the cork as the main Bight and tie the Jug knot as shown inthe beginning steps
Now the cork is tethered to the bottle and will not get lost or fall on the ground
A Carabiner clip passes through the other cord end to attache the water bottle to you belt or pack
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 15 Trussed for TransportThis is another hanging method for carrying your aluminum bottle water canteen A Jug knot is tied conventionally around the neck
The running ends of the knot however are pulled down towards the bottom of the bottle A Barrel Knot is tied about 34 the way down the side of the bottle A squareknot is tied on the bottom of the knot to keep the two running ends tight against the sides of the bottle
I like the look of the accent colored cord running down the sides of the bottle and the fact that the bottle hangs from the belt upside down It adds to its uniqueness
The last picture shows another truss variation
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 16 AdvancedBelow is a bottle with some additional trussing You can be creative as you want It all starts with a re-purposed container and the Jug Knot (and enough cord)
Related Instructables
AluminumBottle TumblerCup amp Cook Potfor an AlcoholStove byhpstoutharrow
Water BottleBelt Clip byuglymike Duct Tape
Water Bottle byrabidsquire2
AluminumBottle AlcoholStove byhpstoutharrow
DIYGlass WaterBottle byCulturespy
Solar WaterHeater forBackpackingUsing WaterBottles and aCar Shade bykopomeroy
Duct tape waterbottle holder(Photos) by pinkmarshmallow
How to make aCamelPack withan old plasticbottle bywillrandship
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Basic Knots Guideby zorro3355 on April 29 2008
Intro Basic Knots Guidehi
Step 1 Thumb knotThe most simple knotUsed as a stopper and prevent ropes from fraying
Step 2 Reef KnotUsed to tie two ropes of equal thickness togetherIt is pretty easy to tie and untie but under tentionit may be diffcult to untieIt is also not sutible for smoothropes(egnylon ropes)
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 3 Figure of eightused as a stopperprevent ropes from fraying and its more secure than tumb knot its is also used to tie Caribinas to ropes and is often used in rock climbing
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 4 Timber hitchused for pulling logs
Step 5 Clove hitchUsed to tie a rope onto a pole or logThe pole must be roundThe pole lust be thicker then the rope itself
(greatly used during pioneering)
Step 6 Sheet bandused to tie ropes of different thickness together(works on same thickness of ropes too)
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 7 Sheep shankTo shorten RopesTo prevent middle fraying
Step 8 Slip knotWhippingUsed as a grip for pulling things(when tied on a stick or small pole)(marlin spike hitch)
Related Instructables
Rope Rings byhpstoutharrow
How to Tie aFigure EightKnot byTactical_Pyro
Whippin (WestCountry Style)by tim_n
SurvivalBracelet(Updated) bytevers94
HangmansNoose PackClosure byPopEye42
Turkey on aTripod byhpstoutharrow
SurvivalBracelet II bytevers94 Zigzag Spooling
Paracord (video)by Stormdrane
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
How to Tie a Fire-escape Knotby leonardo ismael on October 16 2007
Intro How to Tie a Fire-escape KnotThis knot is used by firemen in case of fires for example imagine a scene where the ladder on the firetruck messes up but people need to get down a five story buildingor more All they have is a long piece of rope they can safely get down with a secure knot like the fire-escape knot So why not learn it its easy to do and hard to untieif you tie it tightly
This is from the American Boys Handbook
Step 1 Get Your RopeFirst grab a piece of rope and bend it like this to make a loop in it Follow every step to the smallest detail
Step 2 Twist the RopeNow make a twist like this and hold it together
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 3 Pull Through the TwistPull the loop through the twist you just made from underneath
Step 4 Go Over the Split EndNow pull the tail through the loop
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 5 FinallyAnd finally just pull it through as pictured below
Congratulations you just learned the fire-escape knot
Step 6 Same Name Not KnotThis is another knot called the fire-escape knot this shouldnt be your result
Related Instructables
House FireEscape Plan(video) byWhatHappensNowAdvice
ParacordLadder wWooden Rungsby josestude
Bed SheetEscape Rope byjessehensel
rope ladder(glow-in-the-dark version) bymikeasaurus
HeadlockEscape 2(video) byjohnnyrockstah
QuickFirestarter byMattandJora
Trail sauna byjakee117
How to Kill FireAnts andCommitGenocide byKentsOkay
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Climb Safe With A Figure 8 Knotby mattste on February 23 2010
Intro Climb Safe With A Figure 8 Knot There are many things that a beginning climber needs to know including several important knots Perhaps the most essential knot is the Figure 8 Follow Through Thistutorial will demonstrate how to correctly harness yourself to a rope using a Figure 8 Follow Through knot This knot is used primarily by rock climbers to provide a life-line Since this knot is used as a life-line it is very important to be able to tie it correctly (Your life could depend upon it)
Dont worry with this tutorial and about 5 minutes of practice you can have this knot mastered
Things you will need
- Climbing Harness- Climbing Rope
If you are wanting to go climbing and dont already have these items they can be purchased for about $25 each at most outdoor sporting goods stores If you are merelylooking to learn the knot a belt loop and a rope (about five feet long) will do
Image Notes1 Climbing Harness2 Climbing Rope
Step 1 Dealing With The RopeThroughout this tutorial I will be discussing different parts of the rope To make these instructions as clear as possible I will define a few terms that I will use throughoutthe tutorial The Anchor End of the rope will generally be at the top of the images This is the end that would be anchored to the wall or rock and does not move Wewill not be doing much with the anchored end The Tail End of the rope is the opposite end that we will be dealing with I will call this the tail for short
Now that we have some terms to work with lets get started
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 2 Tying The First Figure 8This knot has several parts to it The first part of the knot is just tying a basic figure 8 To tie the first figure 8 there are four simple steps
1 - Using the tail make a loop over the rope (as shown in the first picture) keeping in mind that there should be about 3 ft of slack on the tail end
2 - Wrap the tail back this time go under the anchored end (As shown in the second picture)
3 - Bring the tail down through the first loop (As shown in the third picture)
4 - Finally pull the two ends to make the knot a little bit tighter and easier to deal with (Shown in the fourth picture)
After these four steps you should end up with a knot that resembles a figure 8
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 3 Looping Into The Harness In order to secure the rope to the harness simply thread the tail end of the rope through the front loop in the harness as shown in the picture below This step isobviously very important
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 4 Following Back Through The Figure 8After looping the rope through the harness you have to thread the tail end of the rope back through the knot following the first figure 8 I have divided this process intofive smaller steps in order to make it more clear
1 - Coming form underneath the knot bring the tail up through the near loop and to the left behind the anchored end of the rope (Shown in the first picture)
2 - Wrap the tail around the anchored end back to the right and down through the adjacent loop (Shown in the second picture)
3 - You simply need to bring the tail back over the top of the knot to the left (Shown in the third picture)
4 - Bring the tail end up through the far loop following the anchored end (Shown in the fourth picture)
5 - Finally pull the knot tight (Shown in the fifth picture)
As you can see the first four pictures are simply tracing the knot back through with the tail end
For the last part while you pull the knot tight you may want to make small adjustments and rearrange how it all fits together If the knot does not lay perfectly smoothand tight its NOT a big deal
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 5 Finishing The Knot After completing the Figure 8 knot you will want to somehow secure the tail end of the rope out of the way There are a couple different ways to do this the way that Iwill demonstrate is using whats called a Stopper Knot This secondary knot is similar to a Fishermans knot and is pretty simple I have once again divided thisprocess into several smaller steps
1 - Start by wrapping the tail end around the anchored end (As shown in the first picture)
2 - Wrap the tail back underneath the two vertical segments (As shown in the second picture)
3 - Simply repeat the first two steps wrapping the tail around again (As shown in the third picture)
4 - This step in the fourth picture may look complicated but all you need to do is insert the tail up through the two loops that you have just made
5 - To finish off the knot you will want to slowly pull the tail end while gently pushing the bottom of the stopper knot upwards If you have successfully completed this knotit should look something like the fifth picture
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 6 Ready To Climb Now that you have mastered the Figure 8 knot you can securely harness yourself into a climbing rope Remember there are many other skills that go into setting up ananchor and belaying a climber This tutorial only covers the figure 8 knot For more information there are many great websites that demonstrate how to correctly set up asafe climbing system (Ive posted a few below) If you are a beginning climber I recommend that you read up on a few other climbing techniques Also you shouldprobably go to a climbing wall or gym where there are experienced climbers that can show you the ropes Hopefully this tutorial has been helpful Have fun and be safe
Some useful linkshttpwwwstephenprattnetAnchorsanchorshtmhttpwwwuoregonedu~oppclimbingtopicsanchorshtmlhttpwwwabc-of-rockclimbingcomhowtoclimbingtechniquesasp
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Related Instructables
How to Tie aFigure EightKnot byTactical_Pyro
Paracord KnotDisplay Bord byJamie bagn
Basic KnotsGuide byzorro3355
How to Climb aTree (withprussiks) bystasterisk
How to climb atree (using onlyrope) thefunsimple wayby louieaw
How to get arope into a tree(withoutclimbing it) byvitex
How to tievarious knots byadaviel
How to make arope swing byjdub0928
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Turks Head Knots on a Bottleby sklnxbones on July 6 2010
Intro Turks Head Knots on a BottleThis is the finished project A bottle decorated with three Turks Head Knots There are only three knots on this bottle The RED and the BLUE knots are each a 20 Bightby 3 Lead Turks Head Knots The WHITE knot is a 20 Bight by 19 Lead Turks Head Knot
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 1 Supplies
Cord Lots and Lots of cord I cant tell you how much each bottle is differentBottle Washed and Dried inside and out Make sure to remove all water spotsThreaded Needle Cord screws into the threads at the base of the needlePegs I use brass rivets used as a map to tie the Turks Head KnotsHole Punch Used to punch holes in the painters tape to hold the pegsPainters Tape To hold the pegs in place and to make your map for the Turks Head KnotsMarker To write on the painters tapeCloth Towel To remove finger prints and dirt from your bottleKrazy Glue or Super Glue This is used to secure the knots in place to the bottle
OPTIONAL BUT HIGHLY RECOMMENDEDI use the Turks Head Cookbook from KnotToolcom
Step 2 PreparationYou will need to find a bottle you like I used an empty instant tea bottle of course washed and dried (I like to put the bottle in the oven for a few minutes to dry the insidewithout water spots Take off the lid and do not put lid in the oven) Now measure the circumference of the bottle Take a cord and tightly wrap the cord around the bottleMark where the ends meet and use a ruler to measure the length of the cord For my instant tea bottle the circumference is 27cm I know from past knots that I have tiedthat I want my knot to have 20 Bights in the top and bottom (bands) knots I am going to use the Bights in the (bands) knots to tie the middle knot Now divide the numberof Bights (20) into the size of the circumference (27) to get the space between each Bight (135) With me so far
Now take two pieces of painters tape using a ruler measure out the length of the circumference and mark the length on the both pieces of tape Next you will mark thespace between each Bight on the tape
Step 3 Adding the PegsI like to use pegs when tying Turks Head Knots it just makes tying the knot easier
These are what I use for pegs
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 4 Adding Pegs to the TapeNow take a hole punch to cut holes in the tape where the lines meet You will place the pegs in the holes
Insert a peg in each hole and carefully stick the first piece of tape to the bottle
Step 5 Adding the 2nd row of pegsNow do the same thing with the second piece of tape The numbers on each piece of tape must line up
This picture shows you what you should have now This odd looking thing will be your map to tie the Turks Head Knot And this is the end of Step 1
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 6 Tying the first Turks Head KnotUsing the Turks Head Cookbook follow the numbers going over and under as indicated in the book I chose a 20 Bight by 3 Lead knot which will give me a nice bandaround the bottle Once the ends meet you have made one complete knot Tape the running end of your cord and start removing the pegs and the tape
Step 7 Remove the pegs and the tapeBe careful not to untie the knot as you remove the pegs and tape from the bottle Continue to remove all the pegs and remove the tape from the bottle At this point theknot will be very loose and will need to be tightened up
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 8 Remove the slack from the knotHere you can see just how much the knot expanded Starting with the standing end begin to pull the slack out of the knot going towards the running end of the cordDo not expect to pull all the slack out at once You may have to make 3 - 5 attempts at removing the slack out of the knot DO NOT remove all of the slack out of the knotIn order to make the bands we will have to triple the Turks Head Knot We will do this by following the knot three times The threaded needle will really come in handyhere
Step 9 Triple the KnotOnce you have made three passes of the Turks Head Knot use your needle to go under your knot about half the circumference and cut the cord The knot will be tightenough to hide the tail in placeTIP I carefully add a couple of drops of super glue UNDER the band to hold them in place and keep them from sliding around in the nextsteps A drop or two in 3 or 4 places around the band should be enough
Step 10 Add the second knotNow repeat this whole step for the second bandWhen tying the second band you must make sure the Bights line up to the first band This is crucial for the next stepWipe down the bottle to make sure all your finger prints and adhesive from the tape are all removed You want to make sure your bottle is clean at this point Any dirt orfinger prints left on the bottle will be almost impossible to remove From this point on we will use gloves when tying our last knot
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 11 Maping the Top KnotStick a piece of painters tape on top of your first band leaving the bottom of the knot exposedUse a marker to count the number of Bights in your knot Instead of using the pegs we are going to use the Bights to tie our next Turks Head Knot
Step 12 Mapping the Bottom KnotDo the same thing for the bottom band but you must make sure your numbers on top and bottom line up So 1 on top should be the same position as 1 on the bottom
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 13 Adding the last knotAgain using the Turks Head Cookbook and the threaded needle you are going to follow the instructions going over and under as indicated in the book Be sure to usegloves when ever you handle the bottle
Step 14 Thats ItFor this Turks Head Knot I am using a 20 Bight by 19 Lead knot
Because of the amount of cord you are working with your cord will get twisted and knotted You will have to un-twist the cord often Its a pain in the rear but it has to bedone And it has to be done alot
Continue to tie the knot until you finish the knot If you have the cord and the patience you can double or triple the knot When you are done use your needle to hide theends under your bands Cut the ends and your DONE
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Related Instructables
Monkeys FistFloatingKeychain byjokerlz
How To Make ATurks headKnot WithParacord byDoggie Stylish
Tying Trivetsout of Rope forHoliday Gifts bykylemarsh
Paracord KnotDisplay Bord byJamie bagn
How to Make ATurks Head(Photos) bymchs60chip
A pocket full ofknots byKiteman
Monkeys fistknot AND themonkey byjonathan111
TiteTie is theTruckers Knoton Steroids bytitetie
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Larks head noose -- an easy useful knot that tightens and loosensby Larry Breed on February 19 2009
Intro Larks head noose -- an easy useful knot that tightens and loosensI thought I knew all the basic knots but then I was taught this incredibly useful simple knot Its good for tying up the neck of a bag that you want to repeatedly open andsecurely close Its good for tying around a springy bundle that will need tightening and retightening And its easy to undo
Ive looked at knot literature but havent found a name for this so I named it The basic knot is well known its called a larks head Since all Ive done is to slip the twoends through the larks head to make a noose I call it that
WARNING Dont use this knot when human safety would depend on it Climbers and mountaineers have well-tested reliable knots for such situations
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Image Notes1 To tighten further step on this side of the larks head and pull the free ends
Step 1 Double the cord overThe larks head noose requires enough cord to go twice around your bundle plus a foot or two Find the center and double it over Sailors call this a bight
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 2 Form the larks headComing from below the bight hook your thumb and forefinger over the two sides Reach outward and downward and pinch your fingertips together underneath thedoubled cord
Youve made a larks head Move the crossing cord a little farther from your hand so theres a clear opening through the two half-loops
Step 3 Form the nooseSlip the two ends of the cord through the opening we were just talking about Pull the larks head tight so it grips the two cords Find something that needs constrictingand put the noose around it
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 4 Tightening retightening and lockingSlide the knot against the bundle If its not tight enough to keep from slipping tighten it by holding it in one hand and tugging on the cords one at a time with the otherhand Notice that you can slide the knot out again for instance to re-open the bag you just tied shut For some applications this may be as tight as you need it
A springy bundle probably still feels loose If so compress the bundle and get a new grip on the cords Rest your foot on the bundle on the cords nearest the larks headand pull to slide the larks head tighter
To make the knot more permanent you can lock it Make an overhand in the cord ends (Exactly like the first step in tying shoelaces) With your foot still on the bundlepull on the cords and move your hands apart until youre pulling in opposite directions You have just locked the larks head and you can trust it to stay that way()
But lets say that later on you want to loosen the locked knot Again put your foot on the bundle and cords nearest the larks head hold the two cord ends together andpull This makes a little slack between the overhand and the larks head so you can untie the overhand
In twine or small string the locking overhand knot may be difficult to undo Use a shoelace knot instead of an overhand and itll unlock easily
() If youre using slippery cord like polypropylene an overhand may not lock securely You may want to tie another overhand knot For added security wrap a shortlength of duct tape around the two cords close to the knot
Image Notes1 To tighten further step on this side of the larks head and pull the free ends
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Related Instructables
TRX fromParacordChallengeAccepted bythrake
A pocket full ofknots byKiteman
Lens CapLanyard by~teknoarsonist~ how to tie a
noose byawesume
AdjustableParacordGlassesLanyard byjdtwelve12
HangmansNoose PackClosure byPopEye42
Paraleash - ADog LeashFrom Paracordby The Ideanator
How to make arugged andhandy ParacordBelt by Jake22
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Turks Head Knots on a Bottle 101
Intro Turks Head Knots on a Bottle 101
Step 1 Supplies 102
Step 2 Preparation 102
Step 3 Adding the Pegs 102
Step 4 Adding Pegs to the Tape 103
Step 5 Adding the 2nd row of pegs 103
Step 6 Tying the first Turks Head Knot 104
Step 7 Remove the pegs and the tape 104
Step 8 Remove the slack from the knot 105
Step 9 Triple the Knot 105
Step 10 Add the second knot 105
Step 11 Maping the Top Knot 106
Step 12 Mapping the Bottom Knot 106
Step 13 Adding the last knot 107
Step 14 Thats It 107
Related Instructables 108
Larks head noose -- an easy useful knot that tightens and loosens 109
Intro Larks head noose -- an easy useful knot that tightens and loosens 109
Step 1 Double the cord over 110
Step 2 Form the larks head 111
Step 3 Form the noose 111
Step 4 Tightening retightening and locking 112
Related Instructables 113
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Author and Copyright NoticesInstructable Cross Knot Paracord LanyardAuthor StormdraneLicense Attribution-NonCommercial-ShareAlike (by-nc-sa)
Instructable Paracord wrist lanyard made with the snake knotAuthor StormdraneLicense Attribution-NonCommercial-ShareAlike (by-nc-sa)
Instructable How to tie various knotsAuthor adavielLicense Attribution (by)
Instructable How to Tie the Lanyard KnotAuthor eddy14777License Attribution-NonCommercial-ShareAlike (by-nc-sa)
Instructable Four knots to make paracord into a useful toolAuthor erik_mccrayLicense Attribution-NonCommercial-ShareAlike (by-nc-sa)
Instructable Figure 8 knot and double 8 knotAuthor jonathan111License Attribution-NonCommercial-ShareAlike (by-nc-sa)
Instructable Truckers Hitch THE most awesome knot on the planetAuthor schneidp20License Attribution-NonCommercial-ShareAlike (by-nc-sa)
Instructable Carry any Bottle with a JUG KNOT HandleAuthor hpstoutharrowLicense Attribution-NonCommercial-ShareAlike (by-nc-sa)
Instructable Basic Knots GuideAuthor zorro3355License None (All Rights Reserved) (c)
Instructable How to Tie a Fire-escape KnotAuthor leonardo ismaelLicense Attribution-NonCommercial-ShareAlike (by-nc-sa)
Instructable Climb Safe With A Figure 8 KnotAuthor mattsteLicense Attribution-NonCommercial-ShareAlike (by-nc-sa)
Instructable Turks Head Knots on a BottleAuthor sklnxbonesLicense Attribution-NonCommercial-ShareAlike (by-nc-sa)
Instructable Larks head noose -- an easy useful knot that tightens and loosensAuthor Larry BreedLicense Attribution-NonCommercial-ShareAlike (by-nc-sa)
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
DisclaimerAll do-it-yourself activities involve risk and your safety is your own responsibility including proper use of equipment and safety gear and determining whether you haveadequate skill and experience Some of the resources used for these projects are dangerous unless used properly and with adequate precautions including safety gearSome illustrative photos do not depict safety precautions or equipment in order to show the project steps more clearly The projects are not intended for use by children
Many projects on Instructables are user-submitted and appearance of a project in this format does not indicate it has been checked for safety or functionality Use of theinstructions and suggestions is at your own risk Instructables Inc disclaims all responsibility for any resulting damage injury or expense It is your responsibility to makesure that your activities comply with all applicable laws
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Cross Knot Paracord Lanyardby Stormdrane on May 22 2011
AuthorStormdrane Stormdranes BlogNo matter where you go there you are
Intro Cross Knot Paracord Lanyard
This instructable will show how to make a paracord lanyard using the cross knot and snake knot The lanyard can be used as a wallet chain to secure a key chainkeyring knife multitool flashlight cell phone camera binoculars compass and other assorted pocketable gadgets gear and gizmos More projects links knotreferences can be seen in my blog Stormdranes Blog
The cross knot can also be found under different names from other online and book references as The Chinese Crown Knot Chinese Cross Japanese Crown KnotJapanese Success Knot Rustlers Knot Friendship Knot and knot 808 in The Ashley Book of Knots
You can use the loop end of the lanyard to attach it to your item and use the clip end to secure to a belt loop bag pack etc Or run a belt through the lanyards loopand use the attachment to clip onto your gadget gear gizmo etc Longer versions could be used as a pet leash for your dog cat pot belly pig iguana ferret or otherassorted leashable rodents and varmints
Step 1 Supplies
For this project youll need 10 feet of paracord scissors swivel snap hook and a lighter Optional supplies are hemostats tape measure and your own choice ofattachments like split ring swivel clip carabiner snap shackle etc
I used 10 feet of paracord to make a finished lanyardwallet chain of about 25 feet in length You can use more or less to make one of your own preferred length
There are many online sources for paracord available in different lengths and color choices and can sometimes be found at local sporting goods outlets and ArmyNavySurplus stores Various attachments can also be found online and at local retail establishments and you may even scavenge them from keyringskeychains pet leashesetc that you already have
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 2 Step 2
Find the center of your length of cord form a bight which will be the the loop end of your lanyard
Step 3 Step 3
To tie the cross knot youre going to bring the strand of cord on the right over the left strand back under to the right and back under again to the left making an S shapeas shown
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 4 Step 4
Now with the left strand bring it up under the S shape through the top loop as shown
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 5 Step 5
Bring the strand back down over the first two parts of the S shape and under the bottom as shown
Step 6 Step 6
Tighten up the knot by carefully pulling on each of the working ends and loop ends of the cord You can adjust the size of the lanyards loop by working slack from theloop end to decrease its size or from the working ends to increase the loops size Ive kept the loop at about 2 inches in length so that a belt will fit through it but youcan make it larger or smaller to your preference You can also check that the working ends of the paracord are equal in length at this point and work slack through theknot to even them up if needed
Note the other side of the knot looks different with the cross pattern as shown
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 7 Step7
Now you can tie the next knot in the lanyard the same way as the first After tying the next knot work the slack through the knot until you have about 1 inch of spacebetween them then tighten and continue with the next knot Note that the knots look different on each side frontback and that you tie the each facing the same way oralternate them if you choose
Continue making knots until you have about 1 foot of cord left with each end of the working strands
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 8 Step 8
Now you will add your attachment like the swivel snap hook shown putting both strands through the swivel eye to begin tying the snake knot
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 9 Step 9Bring the right strand under the cords then up over them as shown
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 10 Step 10Now take the left strand over across the other strands back behind and under the cords and up through the right strand loop as shown Then tighten
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 11 Step 11
Take the right strand under and behind the cords then bring it back through the tightened knot along side itself as shown and tighten This is where hemostats come inhandy with tying this knot working the cord through the previously tightened part of the knot It can be done without hemostats but requires tighteningloosening of theknots with just your fingertips
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 12 Step 12
Turn the lanyard over so the other side of the knot is facing up The working strand now on the right side will be brought under the cords back up and down through theparallel strands of the knot as shown then tighten And continue this process flipping the lanyard over taking the right strand under and back up around and through theparallel cords and tighten Continue until you run out of cord or reach the cross knot
Youll now trim off any excess cord and quick melt the end of the strands to prevent fraying to finish
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 13 Variations
You can use other two strand knots instead of the cross knot for variations on this style of lanyard A few alternatives to try tying in a spaced out series or combination ofthem Matthew Walker knot double wall knot lanyard knot double overhand knots double figure 8 knots etc The finishing knots around the attachment can also bedifferent as Ive used the lanyard knot sometimes just one or several in a row
You can also use variations of the cross knot with paracord bracelets and watchbands Doubled version of the knot shown as a paracord bracelet and alternating withtwo pairs of strands for the paracord watchband Leftover pieces of paracord can be used for zipper pulls key ring fobs even paracord cross pendants
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Related Instructables
Paracord ChainSinnet FastDeploy BoonieHatband (video)by Stormdrane
Zigzag SpoolingParacord (video)by Stormdrane
SurvivalBracelet(Updated) bytevers94
Celtic ButtonKnot (video) byStormdrane
ParacordBoonie HatWrap (video) byStormdrane
Paracord wristlanyard madewith the snakeknot byStormdrane
SurvivalBracelet II bytevers94
Cobra WeaveKey Fob bytevers94
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Paracord wrist lanyard made with the snake knotby Stormdrane on September 12 2007
AuthorStormdrane Stormdranes BlogNo matter where you go there you are
Intro Paracord wrist lanyard made with the snake knotThis instructable will show how to make a wrist lanyard using paracord and the snake knot The lanyard can be used to secure a key chain knife multi-tool flashlightcell phone camera binoculars compass etc More projects links knot references can be seen on my blog page Stormdranes Blog
Step 1 SuppliesYoull need about 45 feet of paracord(you may use other types of cordage if desired) The paracord I used is from the Supply Captain I left the inner strands in theparacord but you can remove them if preferred If done in one color it will be one continuous 45 ft length if done in two colors youll need 3 ft for the primary color thatincludes the wrist section and 15 ft for the second color that will show in the snake knot Also used are scissors tape measure or ruler lighter hemostats or needle nosepliers(not necessary but they make it much easier) and a swivel clip key ring snap hook cell phone lariat carabiner or whatever attachment you prefer to use
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 2 Attaching two colors of paracordIf using two colors of paracord you will insert one color about 12 inch into the other color You may remove a small amount of the paracords inner strands by pullingthem out trimming with scissors and pulling the paracord outer sheath back over the strands leaving room to insert the other color For various projects Ive used threedifferent methods for attaching two colors of paracord melting sewing or gluing The choice is yours I usually sew them together it doesnt matter as long as its a goodconnection It will be hidden under the first knot
Step 3 Find the center of the length of paracordTake the center of the length of cord and bring it thru the attachment Im using a swivel clip For this tutorial Im measuring the wrist loop at about 10 inches from theattachment The connection of the two colors will be just on the other side at this point
Step 4 Making the snake knotThe snake knot will be made around the wrist loop section of paracord the loop strands being the core of the knot Ive added a series of photos showing the steps Iuse By using two colors youll see that I flip the lanyard over after making each knot so that Im working with the cord on the right side of the lanyard I bring it under allthe other cords working the hemostats under the previously tightened knot and pulling the cord back thru Then tightening up the knot keeping the cord from twisting andworking it up against the previous knot Again flipping the work over youll see two parallel cords of the same color which will be split with the cord on the right goingunder around and pulled thru with the hemostats then tightened up Continue this procedure until youve done about 10 snake knots(you can count them down eitherside
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 5 Count your knotsOnce you have 10 snake knots youre almost done Youll notice from the photos of both sides of the lanyard that one side has the snake knots alternating all the waydown and the other has a set of parallel knots at the top and botton of the sequence of knots Youll always have those at the start and finish of the snake knots I preferto have them end up on the same side of the lanyard so one side appears to have a more uniform look but its not required
Step 6 Trim and melt the excess paracordUse the scissors to trim off the excess cord and quickly melt the ends with a lighter so they dont fray
Step 7 Youre doneYou can make a range of variations using less or more cordknots Shorten the loop for a double ended key chain or make the loop longer for use as a neck lanyard aLanyard Break-Away Connector could be added for the safety conscious You can also add a wooden bead skull cord lock etc Visit my blog page for more knot relatedprojects links and resources Stormdranes Blog You can find ideas for other geargadgets to attach to your lanyard on EDC Forums
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Related Instructables
Paracord ChainSinnet FastDeploy BoonieHatband (video)by Stormdrane
Cross KnotParacordLanyard byStormdrane
Zigzag SpoolingParacord (video)by Stormdrane
SurvivalBracelet II bytevers94
SurvivalBracelet(Updated) bytevers94
Cobra WeaveKey Fob bytevers94
ParacordBoonie HatWrap (video) byStormdrane
Paracord KnotDisplay Bord byJamie bagn
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
How to tie various knotsby adaviel on September 7 2009
Intro How to tie various knotsKnots as a way of joining rope without special equipment are useful in many situations On a sailboat knots are essential both for daily use and for emergency repairsThis instructable describes several different common knots eg
Sheet Bend - to tie two lines togetherBowline - to make a loopReef Knot - to fasten a bundle of materialFishermans Bend - to secure a line to a post or ring
These knots are good for regular rope - braided or 3-strand polyester or natural fibre (hemp sisal) Monofilament (fishing line) or steel cable performs better with differentknots
Knots are typically quite a lot weaker than straight rope - when rope goes around a tight radius such as in a knot the outside is under more tension than the insideSplices (which require special tools and are time-consuming to make) are stronger so permanent fittings usually have eye-splices
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 1 Sheet BendThe sheet bend is used to tie two lines together It is perhaps the most generally useful knot of all When used to tie a line to itself making a loop it is called a bowlineThe strain is taken on the ropes in the middle - not the one coming out the side
How the knot is made is not critical - it is the final shape that is important One can make the flat loop first and work the other rope around it Or one can make thecrossed loop first - required when tying a bowline
The two images show front and back views of the same knot
AdvantagesEasy to makeEasy to undo when tension is removedDoes not easily capsize
DisadvantagesHard to make under loadDangerous to make under heavy load
UsesJoining two equally-sized ropesExtending a towline or stern line
Method 1 the same as a bowline
Method 2 starting with the flat loop
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 2 Double Sheet BendThe double sheet bend is used to tie two lines of different thickness - but not too different It is the same as a normal sheet bend but with an extra turn of the thinner ropearound the flat loop in the thickerThe load goes on the line through the flat loop not the one that comes out the side of the knot
UsesSecuring a heaving line to a tow lineExtending a stern line if you dont have enough line of one thickness
Step 3 BowlineThe bowline is really a special case of the sheet bend but it it tied at the end of a rope to make a loop
The photos show the completed loop and closeups of the front and back of the actual knot Note that it is the same as the sheet bend - but it must be made the right wayround This loop does not tighten in use The knot is quite easy to untie once the load is removed With practice it is very quick to tie
Some usesSecuring a dinghy line to a railing or stanchionSecuring an anchor line to an anchorTie a jib sheet to the sailTie a mooring line around a rock or treeTie a float to an anchor triplineUse one in each line to tie two ropes of very different sizes - eg a throwing line to a large tow ropeDisadvantages the knot must be completely made before it will take any strain - it is hard to tie if there is already a load on the rope
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Linked bowlines
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 4 Bowline on the BightA bowline on the bight is a bowline tied in a loop of rope (neither end is needed) The shape is the same as a bowline made with a double line but the middle of thebight forms the loop around the standing part
UsesAn impromptu bosuns chair - to sit in while being transferred between two boats at sea
Step 5 Clove HitchThe clove hitch can be made when you only have the bight (the middle) of a rope not the ends
UsesSecuring a burgee pole to a burgee halyard (a continuous loop of thin line)Securing a tiller from swinging
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 6 Round Turn and Two Half-HitchesThis is a knot used to secure a line to a ring or bar Wind a couple of turns around the bar then secure the end with two hitches around the standing part (this looks like aclove hitch when done)
AdvantagesCan be made under load - it is easy to take turns around the bar while maintaining tension on the ropeStrong - provided the bar is thicker than the rope the rope is not weakened by sharp bendsDisadvantagesThe end tends to work loose
UsesSecuring a line to a mooring ring or samson post
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 7 Fishermans BendThe fishermans bend is the same as the round turn and two half hitches except that the first hitch is looped under the round turn This uses the tension on the rope tosecure the end from working loose
AdvantagesSecure against working loose
DisadvantagesHard to make under tensionHard to undo under tensionMay seize up under load when wet making it hard to undo
UsesSecuring mooring line to ringSecuring fender lines to rail
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 8 Studsail BendThe studsail bend is like the fishermans bend but the second hitch is also secured under the round turn making it even more secure against working loose when undertension
AdvantagesVery secure against working looseDisadvantagesHard to make under tensionHard to undo under tension
Step 9 Figure-8 KnotThe figure-eight knot is used to prevent an end of rope from passing through a block (pulley) Sometimes called a stopper knot
The double figure-8 knot is used in rock climbing as an alternative to a bowline to secure a climbing harness to the end of a safety rope The double knot is made bymaking a single knot then tracing back around the knot with the free end after passing it around the harness loop
AdvantagesEasy to verify by inspectionNot prone to work loose
DisadvantagesSlow to make and undoCannot be made under load
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 10 Prussic KnotThe prussic knot may be used as a climbing ascender - when made around a vertical rope as shown downwards tension on the ends locks the knot while release oftension allows it to be slid up the rope A pair of prussic knots on foot loops may be used in tandem to climb a rope
UsesClimbing a ropeTaking up tension to free a riding turn on a winch
Step 11 Reef KnotThe reef knot or square knot is used to tie a bundle of material together It must be made around something - it should not be used to tie two free ropes togetherbecause it can easily capsizeIt should not be used to make a loop unless it can be tensioned around a solid object It should not be used around a person - use a bowline instead A capsized reefknot will slip easily and could constrict and cause severe injury
UsesReefing a sail (tying the unused portion around a spar)Securing a furled sail to a spar (sail ties)Wrapping a parcelTying shoelaces
AdvantagesMay be made under moderate load
DisadvantagesCapsizes (works free) if used improperlyCan seize up under load when wet
Tying the knot
Capsizing a reef knot
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 12 CleatsThis is not a knot but is very common on boatsThe first picture shows a rope cleated normally The second shows one with a final locking turn - the last turn is twisted before placing over the cleat so that the tensionon the rope helps secure the free end
When working with ropes under tension take a turn or two around a winch or cleat before trying to secure the end with a knot The load on the free end falls exponentiallywith each turn taken Severe injury can result if a finger or other body part is caught in a loop of rope or between a rope and another object
Step 13 Practice themIt is sometimes useful to be able to tie knots in the dark or as in this video behind your back
Related Instructables
AThird Hand forSailing or OtherThings by WadeTarzia
Paracord KnotDisplay Bord byJamie bagn
Trip LogOutriggerCanoe Sailingthe CaliforniaChannel Islandsby TimAnderson
How to Tie aFigure EightKnot byTactical_Pyro
How to build apirate ship bymdelaney3
Build a ShortDragon (16 foot3-BoardOutriggerSailing Canoe)by Wade Tarzia
repairing aheadsail by josh
How to get arope into a tree(withoutclimbing it) byvitex
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
How to Tie the Lanyard Knotby eddy14777 on January 31 2010
Intro How to Tie the Lanyard KnotMany people including myself have had trouble following the Stormdrane youtube video on tying the lanyard knot so i have done some research and found the solution
Image Notes1 Finished knot
Step 1 MaterialsAll you need is a reasonable length of para cord or whatever you wish to use
Image Notes1 One reasonable amount
Step 2 First StepThe first thing you are going to do is to make a bight that leaves you with to congruent endsThen you are going to put your ring finger through the bight
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Image Notes1 Close enough2 Bight
Step 3 Starting the KnotMake a loop just like the one in the picture and place it over the top strandBring the top strand under the bottom strand
Image Notes1 Notice the way the loop is done2 Top strand
Image Notes1 Bottom strand2 Top strand is under
Step 4 The Most Important PartNow you take the top stand from the previous picture and feed it over the first part of the loop under itself and back over the remainder of the loop
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Image Notes1 Under me2 Top strand3 This should make a diamond type shape
Step 5 DoublingNow take the bottom stand and take it around the part of the top strand nearest to the bight and than come up through the diamond shape in the middleDo the same for the top strand
Image Notes1 Top strand
Image Notes1 Both through the diamond
Step 6 FinishingWhen you take it off your finger it should look like thisWork out the slack by pulling on the bight and the two strands
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Image Notes1 Finished knot
Related Instructables
Cross KnotParacordLanyard byStormdrane
Celtic ButtonKnot (video) byStormdrane
Paracord wristlanyard madewith the snakeknot byStormdrane
Paracord ChainSinnet FastDeploy BoonieHatband (video)by Stormdrane
Zigzag SpoolingParacord (video)by Stormdrane
ParacordBoonie HatWrap (video) byStormdrane
Paracord IDbadge Lanyardby Flahusky
Cobra WeaveKey Fob bytevers94
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Four knots to make paracord into a useful toolby erik_mccray on March 27 2010
Authorerik_mccrayI am an ex-fabricator that is now a stay at home dad I love my new job but I do miss making stuff I love this site amp I am getting involved as a way to keep myskills upOn top of fad work I have also run two small business in the past One was custom sewing amp the other was as a small engine mechanicI have two votec degrees one in metal fabrication amp the other is in engine repairI look forward to getting to know everyone here
Intro Four knots to make paracord into a useful toolParacord is an awesome multitool used everywhere from the wild blue yonder to the deepest caverns But like any good tool it is only as good as the knowledge the userhas about the tool With most people out there using bungee cords amp ratchet straps it seems that paracord is being used for nothing more than friendship bracelets forgrown men This is a shame because for less then the price of a few cheap bungee cords amp some to short to be helpful straps You can get yourself hundreds of feet ofparacord
The key to getting the most out of the paracord is good knot work The first thing you need to know is what makes a good knot One is that the knot is easy amp quick to tieamp more impotant is that the knot is easy amp quick to untie The hitch class of knots is by far the best group of knots that the average person could know The four mostuseful hitch knots are the half hitch a quick simple knot that forms the base for many other knots the inline half hitch allowing you to get the most out of one length ofparacord the slippery hitch that gives you both on the fly control over tension on your paracord but also an adjustable loop that will not change unless you want it amp theinline truckers hitch instantly doubling the your pulling power
Step 1 To get started lets get some terminology that will be used defined
line= the paracord
Main line= the part of the paracord doing the work for example holding down your tarp or the long part of the paracord
Mid line= the middle of the length of the paracord
End line= the unused length of paracord or the short length of paracord
Step 2 The half hitch The half hitch is a simple way to secure a line to an anchor point like the tie down points in most trucks A half hitch is a constrictor knot meaning that the harder you pullon the line the tighter the knots grip gets Another common constrictor knot is the slip knot
Step 1 wrap your line around your anchor point Step 2 wrap the end line around the main line
Step 3 pass the end line threw the end line side of the newly formed loop
step 4 now take the slack out of the knot
step 5 to make sure the knot is secure tie another half hitch to the main line This knot is called adouble half hitch
step 6 another useful thing that can be done with the half hitch is that instead of repeating the wrap on the main line but repeating it on what you are tying to the half hitchcan be used to bind something like a stack of 2x4s
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Image Notes1 End line2 Main line3 step 1
Image Notes1 Step 2
Image Notes1 passing thew the end line side of the loop2 step 3
Image Notes1 step 5
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Image Notes1 step 6
Step 3 The mid line half hitch The mid line half hitch is for when the length of line is to long for the job at hand amp you dont want to have to cut the line to size or you are using multiple anchor pointswith one length of line
Step 1 double up the line at the point in the length you wish to make the knot
Step 2 wrap the doubled up portion of line around your anchor point The doubled up length is now now the end line
Step 3 now tie just as you did for the regular half hitch repeat the knot to make a double half hitch for security
Image Notes1 A mid line double half hitch
Image Notes1 step 1
Image Notes1 The end line2 step 2
Image Notes1 Step 3
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 4 The slippery hitch The slippery hitch is a great knot for adjusting tension on the main line or for having an adjustable fixed loop To adjust the knot simply slide the knot up or down the mainline
Step 1 wrap your line around the anchor point or just double over the line to form a loop
Step 2 wrap the end line around the main line three times Wrapping in the direction of the anchor point or loop
Step 3 put together the two lines making up the loop amp wrap the two lines one time with the end line
Step 4 pass the end line thew the last loop formed covering the two lined of the loop
Step 5 pull the knot tite
step 6 to adjust the size of the loop or main line tension grab the knot amp slide it up or down the main line
Image Notes1 grab just the knot its self to adjust it2 step 5
Image Notes1 step 1
Image Notes1 step 2
Image Notes1 step 3
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Image Notes1 step 4
Image Notes1 grab just the knot its self to adjust it2 step 5
Image Notes1 same knot as in last pic Just slid up2 step 6
Step 5 The mid line truchers hitch The truckers hitch is a great way to double the pulling force on a line There are many ways to tie this knot the problem with most of them is that at some point you aregoing to have to pass the end line through a loop on the main line that is acting like a pulley to double your pulling force this is great if you are making the knot close tothe end of your line but if you are using a 300 length of line amp want to make the knot in the first ten feet having to pass 290 of line thew a loop is a pain But with a fewhalf hitches you will not have to pass the end line threw any loop on the main line
step 1 wrap your line around the anchor point then double over your end line laying the top of the loop over the main line
Step 2 double up your main line amp lay the loop over the loop made by the end line
step 3 in main line above the knot twist in a loop
step 4 put main line loop thew the loop made in step 3 amp pull this loop tight over your main line loop forming a half hitch Repeat step 3 amp 4 to make a doublehalf hitch
step 5 To use the knot just pull down on the end line to put tension on the main line
step 6 after you have the main line snug tie a mid line double half hitch around the two lines forming the loop at the end of the main line with the end line
step 7 Tie a double half hitch with the end line around the end loop of the mid line half hitch of step 6 using the same method as used in steps 3 amp 4
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Image Notes1 the end of step 6
Image Notes1 main line2 end line3 step 1
Image Notes1 main line loop2 end line loop
Image Notes1 step 3
Image Notes1 step 4
Image Notes1 step 4 at the end with a double half hitch on the main loop
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Image Notes1 pull here2 step 5
Image Notes1 the start of step 6
Image Notes1 the end of step 6
Image Notes1 step 72 now the rest of the line is free to do more work
Related Instructables
Paracord KnotDisplay Bord byJamie bagn
ChokelessAdjustableParacord DogLeash byPizzaman101
ParacordLadder wWooden Rungsby josestude
tie a paracordshackle grip byitri45
ParacordPrussik Belt byJavaNut13
TiteTie is theTruckers Knoton Steroids bytitetie
ID Lanyard(Photos) byeschmunk
Dog Toys forHeavy Chewersby J3443RY
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Figure 8 knot and double 8 knotby jonathan111 on November 28 2007
Intro Figure 8 knot and double 8 knotI will show you how to tie a figure 8 knot and a figure 8 follow through
Step 1 Stating the knotThis is a simple knot so just follow the pictures
Step 2 Finishing the knotCross the string under and then push it through the hole Pull tightly unless you are going to do the follow through and leave it somewhat loose
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 3 The follow through knotThe follow through knot should be tied around something brought back and followed through the path of the 8 knot Look at the pictures Basically follow through the 8knot backwards
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Related Instructables
Climb Safe WithA Figure 8Knot by mattste A pocket full of
knots byKiteman
How to Tie aFigure EightKnot byTactical_Pyro
Paracord KnotDisplay Bord byJamie bagn
Cross KnotParacordLanyard byStormdrane
How to Tie aFire-escapeKnot by leonardoismael
Truckers HitchTHE mostawesome knoton the planetby schneidp20
Paracord ZipperPuller byrepeet13
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Truckers Hitch THE most awesome knot on the planetby schneidp20 on October 12 2008
Authorschneidp20I like building stuff Trouble is there just isnt enough time to build everything Sigh
Intro Truckers Hitch THE most awesome knot on the planetYes I know that there are plenty of other cool knots out there many of which I literally couldnt live wo I rock climb However this knot is unlike any other Plus Ineeded a grabber for my Instructable -) (BTW this ISNT a climbing knot) And in truth it isnt a knot by itself but rather a system of common knots
Have you ever tried to tie something down for transporting but just couldnt get the lines tight andor during transport the lines would continually loosen Then this is theknot for you I learned this knot back in the 70s when specialty car racks and ratchet straps were rare or unheard of I initially used it to tie a canoe on a car rack bothattaching to the rack as well as the lines to the bow and stern of the canoe Even with all the new gizmos available today this knot still shines because all you need is arope and ropes dont hum in the wind like straps
The unique aspect of this knot is that it gives you a 2-1 mechanical advantage when tightening the rope Be careful though You can actually damage some thingsbecause of the mechanical advantage This knot holds fast and is easy to untie hallmark traits of any good knot
Below you see the finished knot system well break it apart in the steps that follow
Image Notes1 1st anchor point a bowline2 loop3 securing knots 2 half hitches4 securing loose end with a fishermans knot5 2nd anchor point (should be round)
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Image Notes1 X marks the spot
Step 1 Initial setupThe first step is to anchor one end of the rope and then loop the rope around a 2nd anchor point
For attaching to the 1st anchor point I chose bowline a close 2 on my list -) There are other instructables on that one so I wont bore you here
The 2nd anchor really should be round because it serves as a pulley in this block and tackle type knot Ive used it on sharp anchor points and it doesnt work as well
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 2 Creating a slip knotTie a slip knot somewhere between the two anchor points Correct placement of the slip knot takes some experience to judge it correctly Typically I place it too close tothe 2nd anchor point and end up with not enough room to work with If the knot ends up too far from 2nd anchor point you can extend the knot by enlarging the loop
Be sure you tie the slip knot as shown You may not be able to untie other knots
In this small example the slip knot is uncharacteristically close to the 1st anchor point
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 3 Tightening and securingThe loose end of the rope that went around the 2nd anchor point goes through the slip knot loop Pull the loose end to the desired tension and secure with two halfhitches
Note To allow better view of the knots the rope isnt really tightened in this example
Step 4 Securing loose endThe final knot is just to secure the loose end somehow I chose a fishermans knot to do this
To tie a fishermans knot the rope goes around twice and goes under the X created by the loops Pull the loose end to tighten Finally slide the knot to put tension onthe half hitches
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Image Notes1 X marks the spot
Step 5 FinishedThere you have it I guarantee that the first time you really use this knot (not just practice) you will be amazed at how well it works and youll wish you knew this knot along time ago You may even come over to my side and declare that is is THE most awesome knot on the planet -)
Enjoy and happy haulingDave
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Related Instructables
TiteTie is theTruckers Knoton Steroids bytitetie
Four knots tomake paracordinto a usefultool byerik_mccray
Modify yourbike rack tocarry a sunfishor other boat byewilhelm
SurfboardHammock byGermy
GiganticHalloweenSpider Web bynolte919
How To Tie ASpiders Hitch(video) by back-cast
Three-hitch mathair ornamentby michiexile TRX from
ParacordChallengeAccepted bythrake
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Carry any Bottle with a JUG KNOT Handleby hpstoutharrow on September 17 2009
Intro Carry any Bottle with a JUG KNOT HandleTie a JUG KNOT around a water bottle soda bottle or aluminum bottle to make a secure carrying strap
Re-purpose any container into a reusable water bottle by adding a convenient carrying strap This Instructable will demonstrate how to tie a JUG knot which like its namesuggests is meant to properly secure around the neck of a container
With some cord and the knowledge of this knot you will be able add a handle lanyard or carabiner loop to any of your favorite beverages to carry them on the go
It works perfectly for those disposable water bottles and who knows once you add some colorful cord to the plain old clear water bottle you just might beinclined to refill it and use it again(Check out pictures 4amp5 below)
In addition to plastic beverage bottles like pop water and sports drinks you can turn those rugged aluminum beer bottles into a backpacking canteen
Those of you familiar with my previous aluminum bottle InstructablesROLLED RIM METAL TUMBLERhttpwwwinstructablescomidAluminum-Bottle-Tumbler-Cup-Cook-PotALUMINUM BOTTLE LIGHTWEIGHT ALCOHOL STOVEhttpwwwinstructablescomidAluminum-Bottle-Alcohol-Stovewill recognize the water canteen shown below as a re-purposed aluminum beer bottle Here I have added a painted surface treatment to turn it into a proper lookingwater bottle More on that in steps 13 14 15
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 1 Getting StartedCord size is important Select a small medium weight cord like the one shown here It is a general purpose camp cord sold at most sporting goods stores (shoelacesmight also work)
Do not use a heavy cord or rope because the larger diameter will not tuck under the relatively small lip at the top of the bottleneck and the bottle will fall out
Also the smaller cord cinches tight on itself and will not loosen accidentally
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 2 Form a BightThe next steps show how to tie a JUG KNOT It is the basic step for adding a carrying strap It is also the anchor point for any additional fancy bottle trussing you maywant to add
JUG KNOT Step 1
Form a Bight in the center of a length of cord Bight is a knot term for a loop or bend in the rope In this case the main Bight in this knot is highlighted with a white mark Imakes it easier to follow its path in these steps
The running ends of the cord should be equal length
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 3 Pull the Bight downPULL the Bight DOWN forming two Loops
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 4 Cross the LoopsCROSS the right Loop OVER the left Loop
Step 5 Pass the Bight under the 1st loopTake the main Bight and pass it UNDER the left Loop
Step 6 Weave the BightWEAVE the Bight OVER the portion of the right Loop and UNDER the portion of the left Loop
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 7 Extend the BightExtend the Bight OVER the outer portion of the right Loop
Step 8 Flip the Right Loop behindAdditional colored identification points have been added to the loops to follow their travel in these next two steps
The right Loop Yellow marker is FLIPPED BEHIND the knot and ends up on the far left side of the knot
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 9 Flip the 2nd loop in frontRaise the green marker (located on what was formerly the left loop) and pull it down and to the right FLIPPING IT IN FRONT of the knot
Note the blue portion of the this loop will pass around the outside of the yellow portion of the first loop
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Image Notes1 Center of knot that will tighten around the bottles neck
Step 10 Remove SlackNote where the blue green amp yellow markers end up
Start to remove the slack in the loops by pulling the original main Bight (white marker top right) and the two free standing ends at the bottom
the bottle neck will pass through the very center of the knot
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Image Notes1 Center of knot that will tighten around the bottles neck
Step 11 Tighten the KnotAfter removing the slack insert the bottle neck and finish tightening
The knot should look like this before slipping it over the bottle
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 12 Secure on bottle neckThis is the finished knot shown on the neck of various containers
The loop end and the two free standing ends can be tied together to create a carrying handle (last picture below)
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 13 Aluminum Bottle Water Bottle
The next few steps show the features of an aluminum beer bottle re-purposed as a water bottle canteen It is one of many containers that can be reused as a camp waterbottle
The bottle was lightly sanded masked and then pained with a hammered finished paint to create an interesting surface texture
Image Notes1 Textured finish paint makes an interesting grip-able surface2 Masked with tape for painting3 Masked with tape for painting
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Image Notes1 Dowel used for holding the bottle during painting
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 14 Tethered Cork StopperUse a wine bottle man made Cork as a stopper for your aluminum water bottleNote Use a cork that was removed from the wine bottle without the corkscrew penetrating through the bottom end of the cork (A hole all the way through the cork willcause it to leak) Use the unpierced end of the cork inside the water bottle
Drill a hole through the sides of the Cork Thread the cord through the hole to the center of the cord Use the cork as the main Bight and tie the Jug knot as shown inthe beginning steps
Now the cork is tethered to the bottle and will not get lost or fall on the ground
A Carabiner clip passes through the other cord end to attache the water bottle to you belt or pack
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 15 Trussed for TransportThis is another hanging method for carrying your aluminum bottle water canteen A Jug knot is tied conventionally around the neck
The running ends of the knot however are pulled down towards the bottom of the bottle A Barrel Knot is tied about 34 the way down the side of the bottle A squareknot is tied on the bottom of the knot to keep the two running ends tight against the sides of the bottle
I like the look of the accent colored cord running down the sides of the bottle and the fact that the bottle hangs from the belt upside down It adds to its uniqueness
The last picture shows another truss variation
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 16 AdvancedBelow is a bottle with some additional trussing You can be creative as you want It all starts with a re-purposed container and the Jug Knot (and enough cord)
Related Instructables
AluminumBottle TumblerCup amp Cook Potfor an AlcoholStove byhpstoutharrow
Water BottleBelt Clip byuglymike Duct Tape
Water Bottle byrabidsquire2
AluminumBottle AlcoholStove byhpstoutharrow
DIYGlass WaterBottle byCulturespy
Solar WaterHeater forBackpackingUsing WaterBottles and aCar Shade bykopomeroy
Duct tape waterbottle holder(Photos) by pinkmarshmallow
How to make aCamelPack withan old plasticbottle bywillrandship
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Basic Knots Guideby zorro3355 on April 29 2008
Intro Basic Knots Guidehi
Step 1 Thumb knotThe most simple knotUsed as a stopper and prevent ropes from fraying
Step 2 Reef KnotUsed to tie two ropes of equal thickness togetherIt is pretty easy to tie and untie but under tentionit may be diffcult to untieIt is also not sutible for smoothropes(egnylon ropes)
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 3 Figure of eightused as a stopperprevent ropes from fraying and its more secure than tumb knot its is also used to tie Caribinas to ropes and is often used in rock climbing
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 4 Timber hitchused for pulling logs
Step 5 Clove hitchUsed to tie a rope onto a pole or logThe pole must be roundThe pole lust be thicker then the rope itself
(greatly used during pioneering)
Step 6 Sheet bandused to tie ropes of different thickness together(works on same thickness of ropes too)
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 7 Sheep shankTo shorten RopesTo prevent middle fraying
Step 8 Slip knotWhippingUsed as a grip for pulling things(when tied on a stick or small pole)(marlin spike hitch)
Related Instructables
Rope Rings byhpstoutharrow
How to Tie aFigure EightKnot byTactical_Pyro
Whippin (WestCountry Style)by tim_n
SurvivalBracelet(Updated) bytevers94
HangmansNoose PackClosure byPopEye42
Turkey on aTripod byhpstoutharrow
SurvivalBracelet II bytevers94 Zigzag Spooling
Paracord (video)by Stormdrane
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
How to Tie a Fire-escape Knotby leonardo ismael on October 16 2007
Intro How to Tie a Fire-escape KnotThis knot is used by firemen in case of fires for example imagine a scene where the ladder on the firetruck messes up but people need to get down a five story buildingor more All they have is a long piece of rope they can safely get down with a secure knot like the fire-escape knot So why not learn it its easy to do and hard to untieif you tie it tightly
This is from the American Boys Handbook
Step 1 Get Your RopeFirst grab a piece of rope and bend it like this to make a loop in it Follow every step to the smallest detail
Step 2 Twist the RopeNow make a twist like this and hold it together
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 3 Pull Through the TwistPull the loop through the twist you just made from underneath
Step 4 Go Over the Split EndNow pull the tail through the loop
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 5 FinallyAnd finally just pull it through as pictured below
Congratulations you just learned the fire-escape knot
Step 6 Same Name Not KnotThis is another knot called the fire-escape knot this shouldnt be your result
Related Instructables
House FireEscape Plan(video) byWhatHappensNowAdvice
ParacordLadder wWooden Rungsby josestude
Bed SheetEscape Rope byjessehensel
rope ladder(glow-in-the-dark version) bymikeasaurus
HeadlockEscape 2(video) byjohnnyrockstah
QuickFirestarter byMattandJora
Trail sauna byjakee117
How to Kill FireAnts andCommitGenocide byKentsOkay
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Climb Safe With A Figure 8 Knotby mattste on February 23 2010
Intro Climb Safe With A Figure 8 Knot There are many things that a beginning climber needs to know including several important knots Perhaps the most essential knot is the Figure 8 Follow Through Thistutorial will demonstrate how to correctly harness yourself to a rope using a Figure 8 Follow Through knot This knot is used primarily by rock climbers to provide a life-line Since this knot is used as a life-line it is very important to be able to tie it correctly (Your life could depend upon it)
Dont worry with this tutorial and about 5 minutes of practice you can have this knot mastered
Things you will need
- Climbing Harness- Climbing Rope
If you are wanting to go climbing and dont already have these items they can be purchased for about $25 each at most outdoor sporting goods stores If you are merelylooking to learn the knot a belt loop and a rope (about five feet long) will do
Image Notes1 Climbing Harness2 Climbing Rope
Step 1 Dealing With The RopeThroughout this tutorial I will be discussing different parts of the rope To make these instructions as clear as possible I will define a few terms that I will use throughoutthe tutorial The Anchor End of the rope will generally be at the top of the images This is the end that would be anchored to the wall or rock and does not move Wewill not be doing much with the anchored end The Tail End of the rope is the opposite end that we will be dealing with I will call this the tail for short
Now that we have some terms to work with lets get started
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 2 Tying The First Figure 8This knot has several parts to it The first part of the knot is just tying a basic figure 8 To tie the first figure 8 there are four simple steps
1 - Using the tail make a loop over the rope (as shown in the first picture) keeping in mind that there should be about 3 ft of slack on the tail end
2 - Wrap the tail back this time go under the anchored end (As shown in the second picture)
3 - Bring the tail down through the first loop (As shown in the third picture)
4 - Finally pull the two ends to make the knot a little bit tighter and easier to deal with (Shown in the fourth picture)
After these four steps you should end up with a knot that resembles a figure 8
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 3 Looping Into The Harness In order to secure the rope to the harness simply thread the tail end of the rope through the front loop in the harness as shown in the picture below This step isobviously very important
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 4 Following Back Through The Figure 8After looping the rope through the harness you have to thread the tail end of the rope back through the knot following the first figure 8 I have divided this process intofive smaller steps in order to make it more clear
1 - Coming form underneath the knot bring the tail up through the near loop and to the left behind the anchored end of the rope (Shown in the first picture)
2 - Wrap the tail around the anchored end back to the right and down through the adjacent loop (Shown in the second picture)
3 - You simply need to bring the tail back over the top of the knot to the left (Shown in the third picture)
4 - Bring the tail end up through the far loop following the anchored end (Shown in the fourth picture)
5 - Finally pull the knot tight (Shown in the fifth picture)
As you can see the first four pictures are simply tracing the knot back through with the tail end
For the last part while you pull the knot tight you may want to make small adjustments and rearrange how it all fits together If the knot does not lay perfectly smoothand tight its NOT a big deal
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 5 Finishing The Knot After completing the Figure 8 knot you will want to somehow secure the tail end of the rope out of the way There are a couple different ways to do this the way that Iwill demonstrate is using whats called a Stopper Knot This secondary knot is similar to a Fishermans knot and is pretty simple I have once again divided thisprocess into several smaller steps
1 - Start by wrapping the tail end around the anchored end (As shown in the first picture)
2 - Wrap the tail back underneath the two vertical segments (As shown in the second picture)
3 - Simply repeat the first two steps wrapping the tail around again (As shown in the third picture)
4 - This step in the fourth picture may look complicated but all you need to do is insert the tail up through the two loops that you have just made
5 - To finish off the knot you will want to slowly pull the tail end while gently pushing the bottom of the stopper knot upwards If you have successfully completed this knotit should look something like the fifth picture
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 6 Ready To Climb Now that you have mastered the Figure 8 knot you can securely harness yourself into a climbing rope Remember there are many other skills that go into setting up ananchor and belaying a climber This tutorial only covers the figure 8 knot For more information there are many great websites that demonstrate how to correctly set up asafe climbing system (Ive posted a few below) If you are a beginning climber I recommend that you read up on a few other climbing techniques Also you shouldprobably go to a climbing wall or gym where there are experienced climbers that can show you the ropes Hopefully this tutorial has been helpful Have fun and be safe
Some useful linkshttpwwwstephenprattnetAnchorsanchorshtmhttpwwwuoregonedu~oppclimbingtopicsanchorshtmlhttpwwwabc-of-rockclimbingcomhowtoclimbingtechniquesasp
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Related Instructables
How to Tie aFigure EightKnot byTactical_Pyro
Paracord KnotDisplay Bord byJamie bagn
Basic KnotsGuide byzorro3355
How to Climb aTree (withprussiks) bystasterisk
How to climb atree (using onlyrope) thefunsimple wayby louieaw
How to get arope into a tree(withoutclimbing it) byvitex
How to tievarious knots byadaviel
How to make arope swing byjdub0928
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Turks Head Knots on a Bottleby sklnxbones on July 6 2010
Intro Turks Head Knots on a BottleThis is the finished project A bottle decorated with three Turks Head Knots There are only three knots on this bottle The RED and the BLUE knots are each a 20 Bightby 3 Lead Turks Head Knots The WHITE knot is a 20 Bight by 19 Lead Turks Head Knot
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 1 Supplies
Cord Lots and Lots of cord I cant tell you how much each bottle is differentBottle Washed and Dried inside and out Make sure to remove all water spotsThreaded Needle Cord screws into the threads at the base of the needlePegs I use brass rivets used as a map to tie the Turks Head KnotsHole Punch Used to punch holes in the painters tape to hold the pegsPainters Tape To hold the pegs in place and to make your map for the Turks Head KnotsMarker To write on the painters tapeCloth Towel To remove finger prints and dirt from your bottleKrazy Glue or Super Glue This is used to secure the knots in place to the bottle
OPTIONAL BUT HIGHLY RECOMMENDEDI use the Turks Head Cookbook from KnotToolcom
Step 2 PreparationYou will need to find a bottle you like I used an empty instant tea bottle of course washed and dried (I like to put the bottle in the oven for a few minutes to dry the insidewithout water spots Take off the lid and do not put lid in the oven) Now measure the circumference of the bottle Take a cord and tightly wrap the cord around the bottleMark where the ends meet and use a ruler to measure the length of the cord For my instant tea bottle the circumference is 27cm I know from past knots that I have tiedthat I want my knot to have 20 Bights in the top and bottom (bands) knots I am going to use the Bights in the (bands) knots to tie the middle knot Now divide the numberof Bights (20) into the size of the circumference (27) to get the space between each Bight (135) With me so far
Now take two pieces of painters tape using a ruler measure out the length of the circumference and mark the length on the both pieces of tape Next you will mark thespace between each Bight on the tape
Step 3 Adding the PegsI like to use pegs when tying Turks Head Knots it just makes tying the knot easier
These are what I use for pegs
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 4 Adding Pegs to the TapeNow take a hole punch to cut holes in the tape where the lines meet You will place the pegs in the holes
Insert a peg in each hole and carefully stick the first piece of tape to the bottle
Step 5 Adding the 2nd row of pegsNow do the same thing with the second piece of tape The numbers on each piece of tape must line up
This picture shows you what you should have now This odd looking thing will be your map to tie the Turks Head Knot And this is the end of Step 1
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 6 Tying the first Turks Head KnotUsing the Turks Head Cookbook follow the numbers going over and under as indicated in the book I chose a 20 Bight by 3 Lead knot which will give me a nice bandaround the bottle Once the ends meet you have made one complete knot Tape the running end of your cord and start removing the pegs and the tape
Step 7 Remove the pegs and the tapeBe careful not to untie the knot as you remove the pegs and tape from the bottle Continue to remove all the pegs and remove the tape from the bottle At this point theknot will be very loose and will need to be tightened up
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 8 Remove the slack from the knotHere you can see just how much the knot expanded Starting with the standing end begin to pull the slack out of the knot going towards the running end of the cordDo not expect to pull all the slack out at once You may have to make 3 - 5 attempts at removing the slack out of the knot DO NOT remove all of the slack out of the knotIn order to make the bands we will have to triple the Turks Head Knot We will do this by following the knot three times The threaded needle will really come in handyhere
Step 9 Triple the KnotOnce you have made three passes of the Turks Head Knot use your needle to go under your knot about half the circumference and cut the cord The knot will be tightenough to hide the tail in placeTIP I carefully add a couple of drops of super glue UNDER the band to hold them in place and keep them from sliding around in the nextsteps A drop or two in 3 or 4 places around the band should be enough
Step 10 Add the second knotNow repeat this whole step for the second bandWhen tying the second band you must make sure the Bights line up to the first band This is crucial for the next stepWipe down the bottle to make sure all your finger prints and adhesive from the tape are all removed You want to make sure your bottle is clean at this point Any dirt orfinger prints left on the bottle will be almost impossible to remove From this point on we will use gloves when tying our last knot
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 11 Maping the Top KnotStick a piece of painters tape on top of your first band leaving the bottom of the knot exposedUse a marker to count the number of Bights in your knot Instead of using the pegs we are going to use the Bights to tie our next Turks Head Knot
Step 12 Mapping the Bottom KnotDo the same thing for the bottom band but you must make sure your numbers on top and bottom line up So 1 on top should be the same position as 1 on the bottom
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 13 Adding the last knotAgain using the Turks Head Cookbook and the threaded needle you are going to follow the instructions going over and under as indicated in the book Be sure to usegloves when ever you handle the bottle
Step 14 Thats ItFor this Turks Head Knot I am using a 20 Bight by 19 Lead knot
Because of the amount of cord you are working with your cord will get twisted and knotted You will have to un-twist the cord often Its a pain in the rear but it has to bedone And it has to be done alot
Continue to tie the knot until you finish the knot If you have the cord and the patience you can double or triple the knot When you are done use your needle to hide theends under your bands Cut the ends and your DONE
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Related Instructables
Monkeys FistFloatingKeychain byjokerlz
How To Make ATurks headKnot WithParacord byDoggie Stylish
Tying Trivetsout of Rope forHoliday Gifts bykylemarsh
Paracord KnotDisplay Bord byJamie bagn
How to Make ATurks Head(Photos) bymchs60chip
A pocket full ofknots byKiteman
Monkeys fistknot AND themonkey byjonathan111
TiteTie is theTruckers Knoton Steroids bytitetie
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Larks head noose -- an easy useful knot that tightens and loosensby Larry Breed on February 19 2009
Intro Larks head noose -- an easy useful knot that tightens and loosensI thought I knew all the basic knots but then I was taught this incredibly useful simple knot Its good for tying up the neck of a bag that you want to repeatedly open andsecurely close Its good for tying around a springy bundle that will need tightening and retightening And its easy to undo
Ive looked at knot literature but havent found a name for this so I named it The basic knot is well known its called a larks head Since all Ive done is to slip the twoends through the larks head to make a noose I call it that
WARNING Dont use this knot when human safety would depend on it Climbers and mountaineers have well-tested reliable knots for such situations
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Image Notes1 To tighten further step on this side of the larks head and pull the free ends
Step 1 Double the cord overThe larks head noose requires enough cord to go twice around your bundle plus a foot or two Find the center and double it over Sailors call this a bight
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 2 Form the larks headComing from below the bight hook your thumb and forefinger over the two sides Reach outward and downward and pinch your fingertips together underneath thedoubled cord
Youve made a larks head Move the crossing cord a little farther from your hand so theres a clear opening through the two half-loops
Step 3 Form the nooseSlip the two ends of the cord through the opening we were just talking about Pull the larks head tight so it grips the two cords Find something that needs constrictingand put the noose around it
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 4 Tightening retightening and lockingSlide the knot against the bundle If its not tight enough to keep from slipping tighten it by holding it in one hand and tugging on the cords one at a time with the otherhand Notice that you can slide the knot out again for instance to re-open the bag you just tied shut For some applications this may be as tight as you need it
A springy bundle probably still feels loose If so compress the bundle and get a new grip on the cords Rest your foot on the bundle on the cords nearest the larks headand pull to slide the larks head tighter
To make the knot more permanent you can lock it Make an overhand in the cord ends (Exactly like the first step in tying shoelaces) With your foot still on the bundlepull on the cords and move your hands apart until youre pulling in opposite directions You have just locked the larks head and you can trust it to stay that way()
But lets say that later on you want to loosen the locked knot Again put your foot on the bundle and cords nearest the larks head hold the two cord ends together andpull This makes a little slack between the overhand and the larks head so you can untie the overhand
In twine or small string the locking overhand knot may be difficult to undo Use a shoelace knot instead of an overhand and itll unlock easily
() If youre using slippery cord like polypropylene an overhand may not lock securely You may want to tie another overhand knot For added security wrap a shortlength of duct tape around the two cords close to the knot
Image Notes1 To tighten further step on this side of the larks head and pull the free ends
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Related Instructables
TRX fromParacordChallengeAccepted bythrake
A pocket full ofknots byKiteman
Lens CapLanyard by~teknoarsonist~ how to tie a
noose byawesume
AdjustableParacordGlassesLanyard byjdtwelve12
HangmansNoose PackClosure byPopEye42
Paraleash - ADog LeashFrom Paracordby The Ideanator
How to make arugged andhandy ParacordBelt by Jake22
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Author and Copyright NoticesInstructable Cross Knot Paracord LanyardAuthor StormdraneLicense Attribution-NonCommercial-ShareAlike (by-nc-sa)
Instructable Paracord wrist lanyard made with the snake knotAuthor StormdraneLicense Attribution-NonCommercial-ShareAlike (by-nc-sa)
Instructable How to tie various knotsAuthor adavielLicense Attribution (by)
Instructable How to Tie the Lanyard KnotAuthor eddy14777License Attribution-NonCommercial-ShareAlike (by-nc-sa)
Instructable Four knots to make paracord into a useful toolAuthor erik_mccrayLicense Attribution-NonCommercial-ShareAlike (by-nc-sa)
Instructable Figure 8 knot and double 8 knotAuthor jonathan111License Attribution-NonCommercial-ShareAlike (by-nc-sa)
Instructable Truckers Hitch THE most awesome knot on the planetAuthor schneidp20License Attribution-NonCommercial-ShareAlike (by-nc-sa)
Instructable Carry any Bottle with a JUG KNOT HandleAuthor hpstoutharrowLicense Attribution-NonCommercial-ShareAlike (by-nc-sa)
Instructable Basic Knots GuideAuthor zorro3355License None (All Rights Reserved) (c)
Instructable How to Tie a Fire-escape KnotAuthor leonardo ismaelLicense Attribution-NonCommercial-ShareAlike (by-nc-sa)
Instructable Climb Safe With A Figure 8 KnotAuthor mattsteLicense Attribution-NonCommercial-ShareAlike (by-nc-sa)
Instructable Turks Head Knots on a BottleAuthor sklnxbonesLicense Attribution-NonCommercial-ShareAlike (by-nc-sa)
Instructable Larks head noose -- an easy useful knot that tightens and loosensAuthor Larry BreedLicense Attribution-NonCommercial-ShareAlike (by-nc-sa)
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
DisclaimerAll do-it-yourself activities involve risk and your safety is your own responsibility including proper use of equipment and safety gear and determining whether you haveadequate skill and experience Some of the resources used for these projects are dangerous unless used properly and with adequate precautions including safety gearSome illustrative photos do not depict safety precautions or equipment in order to show the project steps more clearly The projects are not intended for use by children
Many projects on Instructables are user-submitted and appearance of a project in this format does not indicate it has been checked for safety or functionality Use of theinstructions and suggestions is at your own risk Instructables Inc disclaims all responsibility for any resulting damage injury or expense It is your responsibility to makesure that your activities comply with all applicable laws
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Cross Knot Paracord Lanyardby Stormdrane on May 22 2011
AuthorStormdrane Stormdranes BlogNo matter where you go there you are
Intro Cross Knot Paracord Lanyard
This instructable will show how to make a paracord lanyard using the cross knot and snake knot The lanyard can be used as a wallet chain to secure a key chainkeyring knife multitool flashlight cell phone camera binoculars compass and other assorted pocketable gadgets gear and gizmos More projects links knotreferences can be seen in my blog Stormdranes Blog
The cross knot can also be found under different names from other online and book references as The Chinese Crown Knot Chinese Cross Japanese Crown KnotJapanese Success Knot Rustlers Knot Friendship Knot and knot 808 in The Ashley Book of Knots
You can use the loop end of the lanyard to attach it to your item and use the clip end to secure to a belt loop bag pack etc Or run a belt through the lanyards loopand use the attachment to clip onto your gadget gear gizmo etc Longer versions could be used as a pet leash for your dog cat pot belly pig iguana ferret or otherassorted leashable rodents and varmints
Step 1 Supplies
For this project youll need 10 feet of paracord scissors swivel snap hook and a lighter Optional supplies are hemostats tape measure and your own choice ofattachments like split ring swivel clip carabiner snap shackle etc
I used 10 feet of paracord to make a finished lanyardwallet chain of about 25 feet in length You can use more or less to make one of your own preferred length
There are many online sources for paracord available in different lengths and color choices and can sometimes be found at local sporting goods outlets and ArmyNavySurplus stores Various attachments can also be found online and at local retail establishments and you may even scavenge them from keyringskeychains pet leashesetc that you already have
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 2 Step 2
Find the center of your length of cord form a bight which will be the the loop end of your lanyard
Step 3 Step 3
To tie the cross knot youre going to bring the strand of cord on the right over the left strand back under to the right and back under again to the left making an S shapeas shown
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 4 Step 4
Now with the left strand bring it up under the S shape through the top loop as shown
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 5 Step 5
Bring the strand back down over the first two parts of the S shape and under the bottom as shown
Step 6 Step 6
Tighten up the knot by carefully pulling on each of the working ends and loop ends of the cord You can adjust the size of the lanyards loop by working slack from theloop end to decrease its size or from the working ends to increase the loops size Ive kept the loop at about 2 inches in length so that a belt will fit through it but youcan make it larger or smaller to your preference You can also check that the working ends of the paracord are equal in length at this point and work slack through theknot to even them up if needed
Note the other side of the knot looks different with the cross pattern as shown
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 7 Step7
Now you can tie the next knot in the lanyard the same way as the first After tying the next knot work the slack through the knot until you have about 1 inch of spacebetween them then tighten and continue with the next knot Note that the knots look different on each side frontback and that you tie the each facing the same way oralternate them if you choose
Continue making knots until you have about 1 foot of cord left with each end of the working strands
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 8 Step 8
Now you will add your attachment like the swivel snap hook shown putting both strands through the swivel eye to begin tying the snake knot
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 9 Step 9Bring the right strand under the cords then up over them as shown
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 10 Step 10Now take the left strand over across the other strands back behind and under the cords and up through the right strand loop as shown Then tighten
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 11 Step 11
Take the right strand under and behind the cords then bring it back through the tightened knot along side itself as shown and tighten This is where hemostats come inhandy with tying this knot working the cord through the previously tightened part of the knot It can be done without hemostats but requires tighteningloosening of theknots with just your fingertips
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 12 Step 12
Turn the lanyard over so the other side of the knot is facing up The working strand now on the right side will be brought under the cords back up and down through theparallel strands of the knot as shown then tighten And continue this process flipping the lanyard over taking the right strand under and back up around and through theparallel cords and tighten Continue until you run out of cord or reach the cross knot
Youll now trim off any excess cord and quick melt the end of the strands to prevent fraying to finish
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 13 Variations
You can use other two strand knots instead of the cross knot for variations on this style of lanyard A few alternatives to try tying in a spaced out series or combination ofthem Matthew Walker knot double wall knot lanyard knot double overhand knots double figure 8 knots etc The finishing knots around the attachment can also bedifferent as Ive used the lanyard knot sometimes just one or several in a row
You can also use variations of the cross knot with paracord bracelets and watchbands Doubled version of the knot shown as a paracord bracelet and alternating withtwo pairs of strands for the paracord watchband Leftover pieces of paracord can be used for zipper pulls key ring fobs even paracord cross pendants
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Related Instructables
Paracord ChainSinnet FastDeploy BoonieHatband (video)by Stormdrane
Zigzag SpoolingParacord (video)by Stormdrane
SurvivalBracelet(Updated) bytevers94
Celtic ButtonKnot (video) byStormdrane
ParacordBoonie HatWrap (video) byStormdrane
Paracord wristlanyard madewith the snakeknot byStormdrane
SurvivalBracelet II bytevers94
Cobra WeaveKey Fob bytevers94
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Paracord wrist lanyard made with the snake knotby Stormdrane on September 12 2007
AuthorStormdrane Stormdranes BlogNo matter where you go there you are
Intro Paracord wrist lanyard made with the snake knotThis instructable will show how to make a wrist lanyard using paracord and the snake knot The lanyard can be used to secure a key chain knife multi-tool flashlightcell phone camera binoculars compass etc More projects links knot references can be seen on my blog page Stormdranes Blog
Step 1 SuppliesYoull need about 45 feet of paracord(you may use other types of cordage if desired) The paracord I used is from the Supply Captain I left the inner strands in theparacord but you can remove them if preferred If done in one color it will be one continuous 45 ft length if done in two colors youll need 3 ft for the primary color thatincludes the wrist section and 15 ft for the second color that will show in the snake knot Also used are scissors tape measure or ruler lighter hemostats or needle nosepliers(not necessary but they make it much easier) and a swivel clip key ring snap hook cell phone lariat carabiner or whatever attachment you prefer to use
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 2 Attaching two colors of paracordIf using two colors of paracord you will insert one color about 12 inch into the other color You may remove a small amount of the paracords inner strands by pullingthem out trimming with scissors and pulling the paracord outer sheath back over the strands leaving room to insert the other color For various projects Ive used threedifferent methods for attaching two colors of paracord melting sewing or gluing The choice is yours I usually sew them together it doesnt matter as long as its a goodconnection It will be hidden under the first knot
Step 3 Find the center of the length of paracordTake the center of the length of cord and bring it thru the attachment Im using a swivel clip For this tutorial Im measuring the wrist loop at about 10 inches from theattachment The connection of the two colors will be just on the other side at this point
Step 4 Making the snake knotThe snake knot will be made around the wrist loop section of paracord the loop strands being the core of the knot Ive added a series of photos showing the steps Iuse By using two colors youll see that I flip the lanyard over after making each knot so that Im working with the cord on the right side of the lanyard I bring it under allthe other cords working the hemostats under the previously tightened knot and pulling the cord back thru Then tightening up the knot keeping the cord from twisting andworking it up against the previous knot Again flipping the work over youll see two parallel cords of the same color which will be split with the cord on the right goingunder around and pulled thru with the hemostats then tightened up Continue this procedure until youve done about 10 snake knots(you can count them down eitherside
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 5 Count your knotsOnce you have 10 snake knots youre almost done Youll notice from the photos of both sides of the lanyard that one side has the snake knots alternating all the waydown and the other has a set of parallel knots at the top and botton of the sequence of knots Youll always have those at the start and finish of the snake knots I preferto have them end up on the same side of the lanyard so one side appears to have a more uniform look but its not required
Step 6 Trim and melt the excess paracordUse the scissors to trim off the excess cord and quickly melt the ends with a lighter so they dont fray
Step 7 Youre doneYou can make a range of variations using less or more cordknots Shorten the loop for a double ended key chain or make the loop longer for use as a neck lanyard aLanyard Break-Away Connector could be added for the safety conscious You can also add a wooden bead skull cord lock etc Visit my blog page for more knot relatedprojects links and resources Stormdranes Blog You can find ideas for other geargadgets to attach to your lanyard on EDC Forums
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Related Instructables
Paracord ChainSinnet FastDeploy BoonieHatband (video)by Stormdrane
Cross KnotParacordLanyard byStormdrane
Zigzag SpoolingParacord (video)by Stormdrane
SurvivalBracelet II bytevers94
SurvivalBracelet(Updated) bytevers94
Cobra WeaveKey Fob bytevers94
ParacordBoonie HatWrap (video) byStormdrane
Paracord KnotDisplay Bord byJamie bagn
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
How to tie various knotsby adaviel on September 7 2009
Intro How to tie various knotsKnots as a way of joining rope without special equipment are useful in many situations On a sailboat knots are essential both for daily use and for emergency repairsThis instructable describes several different common knots eg
Sheet Bend - to tie two lines togetherBowline - to make a loopReef Knot - to fasten a bundle of materialFishermans Bend - to secure a line to a post or ring
These knots are good for regular rope - braided or 3-strand polyester or natural fibre (hemp sisal) Monofilament (fishing line) or steel cable performs better with differentknots
Knots are typically quite a lot weaker than straight rope - when rope goes around a tight radius such as in a knot the outside is under more tension than the insideSplices (which require special tools and are time-consuming to make) are stronger so permanent fittings usually have eye-splices
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 1 Sheet BendThe sheet bend is used to tie two lines together It is perhaps the most generally useful knot of all When used to tie a line to itself making a loop it is called a bowlineThe strain is taken on the ropes in the middle - not the one coming out the side
How the knot is made is not critical - it is the final shape that is important One can make the flat loop first and work the other rope around it Or one can make thecrossed loop first - required when tying a bowline
The two images show front and back views of the same knot
AdvantagesEasy to makeEasy to undo when tension is removedDoes not easily capsize
DisadvantagesHard to make under loadDangerous to make under heavy load
UsesJoining two equally-sized ropesExtending a towline or stern line
Method 1 the same as a bowline
Method 2 starting with the flat loop
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 2 Double Sheet BendThe double sheet bend is used to tie two lines of different thickness - but not too different It is the same as a normal sheet bend but with an extra turn of the thinner ropearound the flat loop in the thickerThe load goes on the line through the flat loop not the one that comes out the side of the knot
UsesSecuring a heaving line to a tow lineExtending a stern line if you dont have enough line of one thickness
Step 3 BowlineThe bowline is really a special case of the sheet bend but it it tied at the end of a rope to make a loop
The photos show the completed loop and closeups of the front and back of the actual knot Note that it is the same as the sheet bend - but it must be made the right wayround This loop does not tighten in use The knot is quite easy to untie once the load is removed With practice it is very quick to tie
Some usesSecuring a dinghy line to a railing or stanchionSecuring an anchor line to an anchorTie a jib sheet to the sailTie a mooring line around a rock or treeTie a float to an anchor triplineUse one in each line to tie two ropes of very different sizes - eg a throwing line to a large tow ropeDisadvantages the knot must be completely made before it will take any strain - it is hard to tie if there is already a load on the rope
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Linked bowlines
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 4 Bowline on the BightA bowline on the bight is a bowline tied in a loop of rope (neither end is needed) The shape is the same as a bowline made with a double line but the middle of thebight forms the loop around the standing part
UsesAn impromptu bosuns chair - to sit in while being transferred between two boats at sea
Step 5 Clove HitchThe clove hitch can be made when you only have the bight (the middle) of a rope not the ends
UsesSecuring a burgee pole to a burgee halyard (a continuous loop of thin line)Securing a tiller from swinging
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 6 Round Turn and Two Half-HitchesThis is a knot used to secure a line to a ring or bar Wind a couple of turns around the bar then secure the end with two hitches around the standing part (this looks like aclove hitch when done)
AdvantagesCan be made under load - it is easy to take turns around the bar while maintaining tension on the ropeStrong - provided the bar is thicker than the rope the rope is not weakened by sharp bendsDisadvantagesThe end tends to work loose
UsesSecuring a line to a mooring ring or samson post
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 7 Fishermans BendThe fishermans bend is the same as the round turn and two half hitches except that the first hitch is looped under the round turn This uses the tension on the rope tosecure the end from working loose
AdvantagesSecure against working loose
DisadvantagesHard to make under tensionHard to undo under tensionMay seize up under load when wet making it hard to undo
UsesSecuring mooring line to ringSecuring fender lines to rail
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 8 Studsail BendThe studsail bend is like the fishermans bend but the second hitch is also secured under the round turn making it even more secure against working loose when undertension
AdvantagesVery secure against working looseDisadvantagesHard to make under tensionHard to undo under tension
Step 9 Figure-8 KnotThe figure-eight knot is used to prevent an end of rope from passing through a block (pulley) Sometimes called a stopper knot
The double figure-8 knot is used in rock climbing as an alternative to a bowline to secure a climbing harness to the end of a safety rope The double knot is made bymaking a single knot then tracing back around the knot with the free end after passing it around the harness loop
AdvantagesEasy to verify by inspectionNot prone to work loose
DisadvantagesSlow to make and undoCannot be made under load
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 10 Prussic KnotThe prussic knot may be used as a climbing ascender - when made around a vertical rope as shown downwards tension on the ends locks the knot while release oftension allows it to be slid up the rope A pair of prussic knots on foot loops may be used in tandem to climb a rope
UsesClimbing a ropeTaking up tension to free a riding turn on a winch
Step 11 Reef KnotThe reef knot or square knot is used to tie a bundle of material together It must be made around something - it should not be used to tie two free ropes togetherbecause it can easily capsizeIt should not be used to make a loop unless it can be tensioned around a solid object It should not be used around a person - use a bowline instead A capsized reefknot will slip easily and could constrict and cause severe injury
UsesReefing a sail (tying the unused portion around a spar)Securing a furled sail to a spar (sail ties)Wrapping a parcelTying shoelaces
AdvantagesMay be made under moderate load
DisadvantagesCapsizes (works free) if used improperlyCan seize up under load when wet
Tying the knot
Capsizing a reef knot
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 12 CleatsThis is not a knot but is very common on boatsThe first picture shows a rope cleated normally The second shows one with a final locking turn - the last turn is twisted before placing over the cleat so that the tensionon the rope helps secure the free end
When working with ropes under tension take a turn or two around a winch or cleat before trying to secure the end with a knot The load on the free end falls exponentiallywith each turn taken Severe injury can result if a finger or other body part is caught in a loop of rope or between a rope and another object
Step 13 Practice themIt is sometimes useful to be able to tie knots in the dark or as in this video behind your back
Related Instructables
AThird Hand forSailing or OtherThings by WadeTarzia
Paracord KnotDisplay Bord byJamie bagn
Trip LogOutriggerCanoe Sailingthe CaliforniaChannel Islandsby TimAnderson
How to Tie aFigure EightKnot byTactical_Pyro
How to build apirate ship bymdelaney3
Build a ShortDragon (16 foot3-BoardOutriggerSailing Canoe)by Wade Tarzia
repairing aheadsail by josh
How to get arope into a tree(withoutclimbing it) byvitex
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
How to Tie the Lanyard Knotby eddy14777 on January 31 2010
Intro How to Tie the Lanyard KnotMany people including myself have had trouble following the Stormdrane youtube video on tying the lanyard knot so i have done some research and found the solution
Image Notes1 Finished knot
Step 1 MaterialsAll you need is a reasonable length of para cord or whatever you wish to use
Image Notes1 One reasonable amount
Step 2 First StepThe first thing you are going to do is to make a bight that leaves you with to congruent endsThen you are going to put your ring finger through the bight
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Image Notes1 Close enough2 Bight
Step 3 Starting the KnotMake a loop just like the one in the picture and place it over the top strandBring the top strand under the bottom strand
Image Notes1 Notice the way the loop is done2 Top strand
Image Notes1 Bottom strand2 Top strand is under
Step 4 The Most Important PartNow you take the top stand from the previous picture and feed it over the first part of the loop under itself and back over the remainder of the loop
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Image Notes1 Under me2 Top strand3 This should make a diamond type shape
Step 5 DoublingNow take the bottom stand and take it around the part of the top strand nearest to the bight and than come up through the diamond shape in the middleDo the same for the top strand
Image Notes1 Top strand
Image Notes1 Both through the diamond
Step 6 FinishingWhen you take it off your finger it should look like thisWork out the slack by pulling on the bight and the two strands
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Image Notes1 Finished knot
Related Instructables
Cross KnotParacordLanyard byStormdrane
Celtic ButtonKnot (video) byStormdrane
Paracord wristlanyard madewith the snakeknot byStormdrane
Paracord ChainSinnet FastDeploy BoonieHatband (video)by Stormdrane
Zigzag SpoolingParacord (video)by Stormdrane
ParacordBoonie HatWrap (video) byStormdrane
Paracord IDbadge Lanyardby Flahusky
Cobra WeaveKey Fob bytevers94
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Four knots to make paracord into a useful toolby erik_mccray on March 27 2010
Authorerik_mccrayI am an ex-fabricator that is now a stay at home dad I love my new job but I do miss making stuff I love this site amp I am getting involved as a way to keep myskills upOn top of fad work I have also run two small business in the past One was custom sewing amp the other was as a small engine mechanicI have two votec degrees one in metal fabrication amp the other is in engine repairI look forward to getting to know everyone here
Intro Four knots to make paracord into a useful toolParacord is an awesome multitool used everywhere from the wild blue yonder to the deepest caverns But like any good tool it is only as good as the knowledge the userhas about the tool With most people out there using bungee cords amp ratchet straps it seems that paracord is being used for nothing more than friendship bracelets forgrown men This is a shame because for less then the price of a few cheap bungee cords amp some to short to be helpful straps You can get yourself hundreds of feet ofparacord
The key to getting the most out of the paracord is good knot work The first thing you need to know is what makes a good knot One is that the knot is easy amp quick to tieamp more impotant is that the knot is easy amp quick to untie The hitch class of knots is by far the best group of knots that the average person could know The four mostuseful hitch knots are the half hitch a quick simple knot that forms the base for many other knots the inline half hitch allowing you to get the most out of one length ofparacord the slippery hitch that gives you both on the fly control over tension on your paracord but also an adjustable loop that will not change unless you want it amp theinline truckers hitch instantly doubling the your pulling power
Step 1 To get started lets get some terminology that will be used defined
line= the paracord
Main line= the part of the paracord doing the work for example holding down your tarp or the long part of the paracord
Mid line= the middle of the length of the paracord
End line= the unused length of paracord or the short length of paracord
Step 2 The half hitch The half hitch is a simple way to secure a line to an anchor point like the tie down points in most trucks A half hitch is a constrictor knot meaning that the harder you pullon the line the tighter the knots grip gets Another common constrictor knot is the slip knot
Step 1 wrap your line around your anchor point Step 2 wrap the end line around the main line
Step 3 pass the end line threw the end line side of the newly formed loop
step 4 now take the slack out of the knot
step 5 to make sure the knot is secure tie another half hitch to the main line This knot is called adouble half hitch
step 6 another useful thing that can be done with the half hitch is that instead of repeating the wrap on the main line but repeating it on what you are tying to the half hitchcan be used to bind something like a stack of 2x4s
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Image Notes1 End line2 Main line3 step 1
Image Notes1 Step 2
Image Notes1 passing thew the end line side of the loop2 step 3
Image Notes1 step 5
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Image Notes1 step 6
Step 3 The mid line half hitch The mid line half hitch is for when the length of line is to long for the job at hand amp you dont want to have to cut the line to size or you are using multiple anchor pointswith one length of line
Step 1 double up the line at the point in the length you wish to make the knot
Step 2 wrap the doubled up portion of line around your anchor point The doubled up length is now now the end line
Step 3 now tie just as you did for the regular half hitch repeat the knot to make a double half hitch for security
Image Notes1 A mid line double half hitch
Image Notes1 step 1
Image Notes1 The end line2 step 2
Image Notes1 Step 3
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 4 The slippery hitch The slippery hitch is a great knot for adjusting tension on the main line or for having an adjustable fixed loop To adjust the knot simply slide the knot up or down the mainline
Step 1 wrap your line around the anchor point or just double over the line to form a loop
Step 2 wrap the end line around the main line three times Wrapping in the direction of the anchor point or loop
Step 3 put together the two lines making up the loop amp wrap the two lines one time with the end line
Step 4 pass the end line thew the last loop formed covering the two lined of the loop
Step 5 pull the knot tite
step 6 to adjust the size of the loop or main line tension grab the knot amp slide it up or down the main line
Image Notes1 grab just the knot its self to adjust it2 step 5
Image Notes1 step 1
Image Notes1 step 2
Image Notes1 step 3
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Image Notes1 step 4
Image Notes1 grab just the knot its self to adjust it2 step 5
Image Notes1 same knot as in last pic Just slid up2 step 6
Step 5 The mid line truchers hitch The truckers hitch is a great way to double the pulling force on a line There are many ways to tie this knot the problem with most of them is that at some point you aregoing to have to pass the end line through a loop on the main line that is acting like a pulley to double your pulling force this is great if you are making the knot close tothe end of your line but if you are using a 300 length of line amp want to make the knot in the first ten feet having to pass 290 of line thew a loop is a pain But with a fewhalf hitches you will not have to pass the end line threw any loop on the main line
step 1 wrap your line around the anchor point then double over your end line laying the top of the loop over the main line
Step 2 double up your main line amp lay the loop over the loop made by the end line
step 3 in main line above the knot twist in a loop
step 4 put main line loop thew the loop made in step 3 amp pull this loop tight over your main line loop forming a half hitch Repeat step 3 amp 4 to make a doublehalf hitch
step 5 To use the knot just pull down on the end line to put tension on the main line
step 6 after you have the main line snug tie a mid line double half hitch around the two lines forming the loop at the end of the main line with the end line
step 7 Tie a double half hitch with the end line around the end loop of the mid line half hitch of step 6 using the same method as used in steps 3 amp 4
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Image Notes1 the end of step 6
Image Notes1 main line2 end line3 step 1
Image Notes1 main line loop2 end line loop
Image Notes1 step 3
Image Notes1 step 4
Image Notes1 step 4 at the end with a double half hitch on the main loop
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Image Notes1 pull here2 step 5
Image Notes1 the start of step 6
Image Notes1 the end of step 6
Image Notes1 step 72 now the rest of the line is free to do more work
Related Instructables
Paracord KnotDisplay Bord byJamie bagn
ChokelessAdjustableParacord DogLeash byPizzaman101
ParacordLadder wWooden Rungsby josestude
tie a paracordshackle grip byitri45
ParacordPrussik Belt byJavaNut13
TiteTie is theTruckers Knoton Steroids bytitetie
ID Lanyard(Photos) byeschmunk
Dog Toys forHeavy Chewersby J3443RY
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Figure 8 knot and double 8 knotby jonathan111 on November 28 2007
Intro Figure 8 knot and double 8 knotI will show you how to tie a figure 8 knot and a figure 8 follow through
Step 1 Stating the knotThis is a simple knot so just follow the pictures
Step 2 Finishing the knotCross the string under and then push it through the hole Pull tightly unless you are going to do the follow through and leave it somewhat loose
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 3 The follow through knotThe follow through knot should be tied around something brought back and followed through the path of the 8 knot Look at the pictures Basically follow through the 8knot backwards
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Related Instructables
Climb Safe WithA Figure 8Knot by mattste A pocket full of
knots byKiteman
How to Tie aFigure EightKnot byTactical_Pyro
Paracord KnotDisplay Bord byJamie bagn
Cross KnotParacordLanyard byStormdrane
How to Tie aFire-escapeKnot by leonardoismael
Truckers HitchTHE mostawesome knoton the planetby schneidp20
Paracord ZipperPuller byrepeet13
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Truckers Hitch THE most awesome knot on the planetby schneidp20 on October 12 2008
Authorschneidp20I like building stuff Trouble is there just isnt enough time to build everything Sigh
Intro Truckers Hitch THE most awesome knot on the planetYes I know that there are plenty of other cool knots out there many of which I literally couldnt live wo I rock climb However this knot is unlike any other Plus Ineeded a grabber for my Instructable -) (BTW this ISNT a climbing knot) And in truth it isnt a knot by itself but rather a system of common knots
Have you ever tried to tie something down for transporting but just couldnt get the lines tight andor during transport the lines would continually loosen Then this is theknot for you I learned this knot back in the 70s when specialty car racks and ratchet straps were rare or unheard of I initially used it to tie a canoe on a car rack bothattaching to the rack as well as the lines to the bow and stern of the canoe Even with all the new gizmos available today this knot still shines because all you need is arope and ropes dont hum in the wind like straps
The unique aspect of this knot is that it gives you a 2-1 mechanical advantage when tightening the rope Be careful though You can actually damage some thingsbecause of the mechanical advantage This knot holds fast and is easy to untie hallmark traits of any good knot
Below you see the finished knot system well break it apart in the steps that follow
Image Notes1 1st anchor point a bowline2 loop3 securing knots 2 half hitches4 securing loose end with a fishermans knot5 2nd anchor point (should be round)
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Image Notes1 X marks the spot
Step 1 Initial setupThe first step is to anchor one end of the rope and then loop the rope around a 2nd anchor point
For attaching to the 1st anchor point I chose bowline a close 2 on my list -) There are other instructables on that one so I wont bore you here
The 2nd anchor really should be round because it serves as a pulley in this block and tackle type knot Ive used it on sharp anchor points and it doesnt work as well
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 2 Creating a slip knotTie a slip knot somewhere between the two anchor points Correct placement of the slip knot takes some experience to judge it correctly Typically I place it too close tothe 2nd anchor point and end up with not enough room to work with If the knot ends up too far from 2nd anchor point you can extend the knot by enlarging the loop
Be sure you tie the slip knot as shown You may not be able to untie other knots
In this small example the slip knot is uncharacteristically close to the 1st anchor point
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 3 Tightening and securingThe loose end of the rope that went around the 2nd anchor point goes through the slip knot loop Pull the loose end to the desired tension and secure with two halfhitches
Note To allow better view of the knots the rope isnt really tightened in this example
Step 4 Securing loose endThe final knot is just to secure the loose end somehow I chose a fishermans knot to do this
To tie a fishermans knot the rope goes around twice and goes under the X created by the loops Pull the loose end to tighten Finally slide the knot to put tension onthe half hitches
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Image Notes1 X marks the spot
Step 5 FinishedThere you have it I guarantee that the first time you really use this knot (not just practice) you will be amazed at how well it works and youll wish you knew this knot along time ago You may even come over to my side and declare that is is THE most awesome knot on the planet -)
Enjoy and happy haulingDave
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Related Instructables
TiteTie is theTruckers Knoton Steroids bytitetie
Four knots tomake paracordinto a usefultool byerik_mccray
Modify yourbike rack tocarry a sunfishor other boat byewilhelm
SurfboardHammock byGermy
GiganticHalloweenSpider Web bynolte919
How To Tie ASpiders Hitch(video) by back-cast
Three-hitch mathair ornamentby michiexile TRX from
ParacordChallengeAccepted bythrake
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Carry any Bottle with a JUG KNOT Handleby hpstoutharrow on September 17 2009
Intro Carry any Bottle with a JUG KNOT HandleTie a JUG KNOT around a water bottle soda bottle or aluminum bottle to make a secure carrying strap
Re-purpose any container into a reusable water bottle by adding a convenient carrying strap This Instructable will demonstrate how to tie a JUG knot which like its namesuggests is meant to properly secure around the neck of a container
With some cord and the knowledge of this knot you will be able add a handle lanyard or carabiner loop to any of your favorite beverages to carry them on the go
It works perfectly for those disposable water bottles and who knows once you add some colorful cord to the plain old clear water bottle you just might beinclined to refill it and use it again(Check out pictures 4amp5 below)
In addition to plastic beverage bottles like pop water and sports drinks you can turn those rugged aluminum beer bottles into a backpacking canteen
Those of you familiar with my previous aluminum bottle InstructablesROLLED RIM METAL TUMBLERhttpwwwinstructablescomidAluminum-Bottle-Tumbler-Cup-Cook-PotALUMINUM BOTTLE LIGHTWEIGHT ALCOHOL STOVEhttpwwwinstructablescomidAluminum-Bottle-Alcohol-Stovewill recognize the water canteen shown below as a re-purposed aluminum beer bottle Here I have added a painted surface treatment to turn it into a proper lookingwater bottle More on that in steps 13 14 15
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 1 Getting StartedCord size is important Select a small medium weight cord like the one shown here It is a general purpose camp cord sold at most sporting goods stores (shoelacesmight also work)
Do not use a heavy cord or rope because the larger diameter will not tuck under the relatively small lip at the top of the bottleneck and the bottle will fall out
Also the smaller cord cinches tight on itself and will not loosen accidentally
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 2 Form a BightThe next steps show how to tie a JUG KNOT It is the basic step for adding a carrying strap It is also the anchor point for any additional fancy bottle trussing you maywant to add
JUG KNOT Step 1
Form a Bight in the center of a length of cord Bight is a knot term for a loop or bend in the rope In this case the main Bight in this knot is highlighted with a white mark Imakes it easier to follow its path in these steps
The running ends of the cord should be equal length
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 3 Pull the Bight downPULL the Bight DOWN forming two Loops
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 4 Cross the LoopsCROSS the right Loop OVER the left Loop
Step 5 Pass the Bight under the 1st loopTake the main Bight and pass it UNDER the left Loop
Step 6 Weave the BightWEAVE the Bight OVER the portion of the right Loop and UNDER the portion of the left Loop
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 7 Extend the BightExtend the Bight OVER the outer portion of the right Loop
Step 8 Flip the Right Loop behindAdditional colored identification points have been added to the loops to follow their travel in these next two steps
The right Loop Yellow marker is FLIPPED BEHIND the knot and ends up on the far left side of the knot
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 9 Flip the 2nd loop in frontRaise the green marker (located on what was formerly the left loop) and pull it down and to the right FLIPPING IT IN FRONT of the knot
Note the blue portion of the this loop will pass around the outside of the yellow portion of the first loop
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Image Notes1 Center of knot that will tighten around the bottles neck
Step 10 Remove SlackNote where the blue green amp yellow markers end up
Start to remove the slack in the loops by pulling the original main Bight (white marker top right) and the two free standing ends at the bottom
the bottle neck will pass through the very center of the knot
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Image Notes1 Center of knot that will tighten around the bottles neck
Step 11 Tighten the KnotAfter removing the slack insert the bottle neck and finish tightening
The knot should look like this before slipping it over the bottle
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 12 Secure on bottle neckThis is the finished knot shown on the neck of various containers
The loop end and the two free standing ends can be tied together to create a carrying handle (last picture below)
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 13 Aluminum Bottle Water Bottle
The next few steps show the features of an aluminum beer bottle re-purposed as a water bottle canteen It is one of many containers that can be reused as a camp waterbottle
The bottle was lightly sanded masked and then pained with a hammered finished paint to create an interesting surface texture
Image Notes1 Textured finish paint makes an interesting grip-able surface2 Masked with tape for painting3 Masked with tape for painting
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Image Notes1 Dowel used for holding the bottle during painting
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 14 Tethered Cork StopperUse a wine bottle man made Cork as a stopper for your aluminum water bottleNote Use a cork that was removed from the wine bottle without the corkscrew penetrating through the bottom end of the cork (A hole all the way through the cork willcause it to leak) Use the unpierced end of the cork inside the water bottle
Drill a hole through the sides of the Cork Thread the cord through the hole to the center of the cord Use the cork as the main Bight and tie the Jug knot as shown inthe beginning steps
Now the cork is tethered to the bottle and will not get lost or fall on the ground
A Carabiner clip passes through the other cord end to attache the water bottle to you belt or pack
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 15 Trussed for TransportThis is another hanging method for carrying your aluminum bottle water canteen A Jug knot is tied conventionally around the neck
The running ends of the knot however are pulled down towards the bottom of the bottle A Barrel Knot is tied about 34 the way down the side of the bottle A squareknot is tied on the bottom of the knot to keep the two running ends tight against the sides of the bottle
I like the look of the accent colored cord running down the sides of the bottle and the fact that the bottle hangs from the belt upside down It adds to its uniqueness
The last picture shows another truss variation
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 16 AdvancedBelow is a bottle with some additional trussing You can be creative as you want It all starts with a re-purposed container and the Jug Knot (and enough cord)
Related Instructables
AluminumBottle TumblerCup amp Cook Potfor an AlcoholStove byhpstoutharrow
Water BottleBelt Clip byuglymike Duct Tape
Water Bottle byrabidsquire2
AluminumBottle AlcoholStove byhpstoutharrow
DIYGlass WaterBottle byCulturespy
Solar WaterHeater forBackpackingUsing WaterBottles and aCar Shade bykopomeroy
Duct tape waterbottle holder(Photos) by pinkmarshmallow
How to make aCamelPack withan old plasticbottle bywillrandship
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Basic Knots Guideby zorro3355 on April 29 2008
Intro Basic Knots Guidehi
Step 1 Thumb knotThe most simple knotUsed as a stopper and prevent ropes from fraying
Step 2 Reef KnotUsed to tie two ropes of equal thickness togetherIt is pretty easy to tie and untie but under tentionit may be diffcult to untieIt is also not sutible for smoothropes(egnylon ropes)
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 3 Figure of eightused as a stopperprevent ropes from fraying and its more secure than tumb knot its is also used to tie Caribinas to ropes and is often used in rock climbing
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 4 Timber hitchused for pulling logs
Step 5 Clove hitchUsed to tie a rope onto a pole or logThe pole must be roundThe pole lust be thicker then the rope itself
(greatly used during pioneering)
Step 6 Sheet bandused to tie ropes of different thickness together(works on same thickness of ropes too)
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 7 Sheep shankTo shorten RopesTo prevent middle fraying
Step 8 Slip knotWhippingUsed as a grip for pulling things(when tied on a stick or small pole)(marlin spike hitch)
Related Instructables
Rope Rings byhpstoutharrow
How to Tie aFigure EightKnot byTactical_Pyro
Whippin (WestCountry Style)by tim_n
SurvivalBracelet(Updated) bytevers94
HangmansNoose PackClosure byPopEye42
Turkey on aTripod byhpstoutharrow
SurvivalBracelet II bytevers94 Zigzag Spooling
Paracord (video)by Stormdrane
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
How to Tie a Fire-escape Knotby leonardo ismael on October 16 2007
Intro How to Tie a Fire-escape KnotThis knot is used by firemen in case of fires for example imagine a scene where the ladder on the firetruck messes up but people need to get down a five story buildingor more All they have is a long piece of rope they can safely get down with a secure knot like the fire-escape knot So why not learn it its easy to do and hard to untieif you tie it tightly
This is from the American Boys Handbook
Step 1 Get Your RopeFirst grab a piece of rope and bend it like this to make a loop in it Follow every step to the smallest detail
Step 2 Twist the RopeNow make a twist like this and hold it together
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 3 Pull Through the TwistPull the loop through the twist you just made from underneath
Step 4 Go Over the Split EndNow pull the tail through the loop
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 5 FinallyAnd finally just pull it through as pictured below
Congratulations you just learned the fire-escape knot
Step 6 Same Name Not KnotThis is another knot called the fire-escape knot this shouldnt be your result
Related Instructables
House FireEscape Plan(video) byWhatHappensNowAdvice
ParacordLadder wWooden Rungsby josestude
Bed SheetEscape Rope byjessehensel
rope ladder(glow-in-the-dark version) bymikeasaurus
HeadlockEscape 2(video) byjohnnyrockstah
QuickFirestarter byMattandJora
Trail sauna byjakee117
How to Kill FireAnts andCommitGenocide byKentsOkay
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Climb Safe With A Figure 8 Knotby mattste on February 23 2010
Intro Climb Safe With A Figure 8 Knot There are many things that a beginning climber needs to know including several important knots Perhaps the most essential knot is the Figure 8 Follow Through Thistutorial will demonstrate how to correctly harness yourself to a rope using a Figure 8 Follow Through knot This knot is used primarily by rock climbers to provide a life-line Since this knot is used as a life-line it is very important to be able to tie it correctly (Your life could depend upon it)
Dont worry with this tutorial and about 5 minutes of practice you can have this knot mastered
Things you will need
- Climbing Harness- Climbing Rope
If you are wanting to go climbing and dont already have these items they can be purchased for about $25 each at most outdoor sporting goods stores If you are merelylooking to learn the knot a belt loop and a rope (about five feet long) will do
Image Notes1 Climbing Harness2 Climbing Rope
Step 1 Dealing With The RopeThroughout this tutorial I will be discussing different parts of the rope To make these instructions as clear as possible I will define a few terms that I will use throughoutthe tutorial The Anchor End of the rope will generally be at the top of the images This is the end that would be anchored to the wall or rock and does not move Wewill not be doing much with the anchored end The Tail End of the rope is the opposite end that we will be dealing with I will call this the tail for short
Now that we have some terms to work with lets get started
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 2 Tying The First Figure 8This knot has several parts to it The first part of the knot is just tying a basic figure 8 To tie the first figure 8 there are four simple steps
1 - Using the tail make a loop over the rope (as shown in the first picture) keeping in mind that there should be about 3 ft of slack on the tail end
2 - Wrap the tail back this time go under the anchored end (As shown in the second picture)
3 - Bring the tail down through the first loop (As shown in the third picture)
4 - Finally pull the two ends to make the knot a little bit tighter and easier to deal with (Shown in the fourth picture)
After these four steps you should end up with a knot that resembles a figure 8
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 3 Looping Into The Harness In order to secure the rope to the harness simply thread the tail end of the rope through the front loop in the harness as shown in the picture below This step isobviously very important
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 4 Following Back Through The Figure 8After looping the rope through the harness you have to thread the tail end of the rope back through the knot following the first figure 8 I have divided this process intofive smaller steps in order to make it more clear
1 - Coming form underneath the knot bring the tail up through the near loop and to the left behind the anchored end of the rope (Shown in the first picture)
2 - Wrap the tail around the anchored end back to the right and down through the adjacent loop (Shown in the second picture)
3 - You simply need to bring the tail back over the top of the knot to the left (Shown in the third picture)
4 - Bring the tail end up through the far loop following the anchored end (Shown in the fourth picture)
5 - Finally pull the knot tight (Shown in the fifth picture)
As you can see the first four pictures are simply tracing the knot back through with the tail end
For the last part while you pull the knot tight you may want to make small adjustments and rearrange how it all fits together If the knot does not lay perfectly smoothand tight its NOT a big deal
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 5 Finishing The Knot After completing the Figure 8 knot you will want to somehow secure the tail end of the rope out of the way There are a couple different ways to do this the way that Iwill demonstrate is using whats called a Stopper Knot This secondary knot is similar to a Fishermans knot and is pretty simple I have once again divided thisprocess into several smaller steps
1 - Start by wrapping the tail end around the anchored end (As shown in the first picture)
2 - Wrap the tail back underneath the two vertical segments (As shown in the second picture)
3 - Simply repeat the first two steps wrapping the tail around again (As shown in the third picture)
4 - This step in the fourth picture may look complicated but all you need to do is insert the tail up through the two loops that you have just made
5 - To finish off the knot you will want to slowly pull the tail end while gently pushing the bottom of the stopper knot upwards If you have successfully completed this knotit should look something like the fifth picture
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 6 Ready To Climb Now that you have mastered the Figure 8 knot you can securely harness yourself into a climbing rope Remember there are many other skills that go into setting up ananchor and belaying a climber This tutorial only covers the figure 8 knot For more information there are many great websites that demonstrate how to correctly set up asafe climbing system (Ive posted a few below) If you are a beginning climber I recommend that you read up on a few other climbing techniques Also you shouldprobably go to a climbing wall or gym where there are experienced climbers that can show you the ropes Hopefully this tutorial has been helpful Have fun and be safe
Some useful linkshttpwwwstephenprattnetAnchorsanchorshtmhttpwwwuoregonedu~oppclimbingtopicsanchorshtmlhttpwwwabc-of-rockclimbingcomhowtoclimbingtechniquesasp
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Related Instructables
How to Tie aFigure EightKnot byTactical_Pyro
Paracord KnotDisplay Bord byJamie bagn
Basic KnotsGuide byzorro3355
How to Climb aTree (withprussiks) bystasterisk
How to climb atree (using onlyrope) thefunsimple wayby louieaw
How to get arope into a tree(withoutclimbing it) byvitex
How to tievarious knots byadaviel
How to make arope swing byjdub0928
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Turks Head Knots on a Bottleby sklnxbones on July 6 2010
Intro Turks Head Knots on a BottleThis is the finished project A bottle decorated with three Turks Head Knots There are only three knots on this bottle The RED and the BLUE knots are each a 20 Bightby 3 Lead Turks Head Knots The WHITE knot is a 20 Bight by 19 Lead Turks Head Knot
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 1 Supplies
Cord Lots and Lots of cord I cant tell you how much each bottle is differentBottle Washed and Dried inside and out Make sure to remove all water spotsThreaded Needle Cord screws into the threads at the base of the needlePegs I use brass rivets used as a map to tie the Turks Head KnotsHole Punch Used to punch holes in the painters tape to hold the pegsPainters Tape To hold the pegs in place and to make your map for the Turks Head KnotsMarker To write on the painters tapeCloth Towel To remove finger prints and dirt from your bottleKrazy Glue or Super Glue This is used to secure the knots in place to the bottle
OPTIONAL BUT HIGHLY RECOMMENDEDI use the Turks Head Cookbook from KnotToolcom
Step 2 PreparationYou will need to find a bottle you like I used an empty instant tea bottle of course washed and dried (I like to put the bottle in the oven for a few minutes to dry the insidewithout water spots Take off the lid and do not put lid in the oven) Now measure the circumference of the bottle Take a cord and tightly wrap the cord around the bottleMark where the ends meet and use a ruler to measure the length of the cord For my instant tea bottle the circumference is 27cm I know from past knots that I have tiedthat I want my knot to have 20 Bights in the top and bottom (bands) knots I am going to use the Bights in the (bands) knots to tie the middle knot Now divide the numberof Bights (20) into the size of the circumference (27) to get the space between each Bight (135) With me so far
Now take two pieces of painters tape using a ruler measure out the length of the circumference and mark the length on the both pieces of tape Next you will mark thespace between each Bight on the tape
Step 3 Adding the PegsI like to use pegs when tying Turks Head Knots it just makes tying the knot easier
These are what I use for pegs
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 4 Adding Pegs to the TapeNow take a hole punch to cut holes in the tape where the lines meet You will place the pegs in the holes
Insert a peg in each hole and carefully stick the first piece of tape to the bottle
Step 5 Adding the 2nd row of pegsNow do the same thing with the second piece of tape The numbers on each piece of tape must line up
This picture shows you what you should have now This odd looking thing will be your map to tie the Turks Head Knot And this is the end of Step 1
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 6 Tying the first Turks Head KnotUsing the Turks Head Cookbook follow the numbers going over and under as indicated in the book I chose a 20 Bight by 3 Lead knot which will give me a nice bandaround the bottle Once the ends meet you have made one complete knot Tape the running end of your cord and start removing the pegs and the tape
Step 7 Remove the pegs and the tapeBe careful not to untie the knot as you remove the pegs and tape from the bottle Continue to remove all the pegs and remove the tape from the bottle At this point theknot will be very loose and will need to be tightened up
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 8 Remove the slack from the knotHere you can see just how much the knot expanded Starting with the standing end begin to pull the slack out of the knot going towards the running end of the cordDo not expect to pull all the slack out at once You may have to make 3 - 5 attempts at removing the slack out of the knot DO NOT remove all of the slack out of the knotIn order to make the bands we will have to triple the Turks Head Knot We will do this by following the knot three times The threaded needle will really come in handyhere
Step 9 Triple the KnotOnce you have made three passes of the Turks Head Knot use your needle to go under your knot about half the circumference and cut the cord The knot will be tightenough to hide the tail in placeTIP I carefully add a couple of drops of super glue UNDER the band to hold them in place and keep them from sliding around in the nextsteps A drop or two in 3 or 4 places around the band should be enough
Step 10 Add the second knotNow repeat this whole step for the second bandWhen tying the second band you must make sure the Bights line up to the first band This is crucial for the next stepWipe down the bottle to make sure all your finger prints and adhesive from the tape are all removed You want to make sure your bottle is clean at this point Any dirt orfinger prints left on the bottle will be almost impossible to remove From this point on we will use gloves when tying our last knot
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 11 Maping the Top KnotStick a piece of painters tape on top of your first band leaving the bottom of the knot exposedUse a marker to count the number of Bights in your knot Instead of using the pegs we are going to use the Bights to tie our next Turks Head Knot
Step 12 Mapping the Bottom KnotDo the same thing for the bottom band but you must make sure your numbers on top and bottom line up So 1 on top should be the same position as 1 on the bottom
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 13 Adding the last knotAgain using the Turks Head Cookbook and the threaded needle you are going to follow the instructions going over and under as indicated in the book Be sure to usegloves when ever you handle the bottle
Step 14 Thats ItFor this Turks Head Knot I am using a 20 Bight by 19 Lead knot
Because of the amount of cord you are working with your cord will get twisted and knotted You will have to un-twist the cord often Its a pain in the rear but it has to bedone And it has to be done alot
Continue to tie the knot until you finish the knot If you have the cord and the patience you can double or triple the knot When you are done use your needle to hide theends under your bands Cut the ends and your DONE
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Related Instructables
Monkeys FistFloatingKeychain byjokerlz
How To Make ATurks headKnot WithParacord byDoggie Stylish
Tying Trivetsout of Rope forHoliday Gifts bykylemarsh
Paracord KnotDisplay Bord byJamie bagn
How to Make ATurks Head(Photos) bymchs60chip
A pocket full ofknots byKiteman
Monkeys fistknot AND themonkey byjonathan111
TiteTie is theTruckers Knoton Steroids bytitetie
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Larks head noose -- an easy useful knot that tightens and loosensby Larry Breed on February 19 2009
Intro Larks head noose -- an easy useful knot that tightens and loosensI thought I knew all the basic knots but then I was taught this incredibly useful simple knot Its good for tying up the neck of a bag that you want to repeatedly open andsecurely close Its good for tying around a springy bundle that will need tightening and retightening And its easy to undo
Ive looked at knot literature but havent found a name for this so I named it The basic knot is well known its called a larks head Since all Ive done is to slip the twoends through the larks head to make a noose I call it that
WARNING Dont use this knot when human safety would depend on it Climbers and mountaineers have well-tested reliable knots for such situations
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Image Notes1 To tighten further step on this side of the larks head and pull the free ends
Step 1 Double the cord overThe larks head noose requires enough cord to go twice around your bundle plus a foot or two Find the center and double it over Sailors call this a bight
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 2 Form the larks headComing from below the bight hook your thumb and forefinger over the two sides Reach outward and downward and pinch your fingertips together underneath thedoubled cord
Youve made a larks head Move the crossing cord a little farther from your hand so theres a clear opening through the two half-loops
Step 3 Form the nooseSlip the two ends of the cord through the opening we were just talking about Pull the larks head tight so it grips the two cords Find something that needs constrictingand put the noose around it
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 4 Tightening retightening and lockingSlide the knot against the bundle If its not tight enough to keep from slipping tighten it by holding it in one hand and tugging on the cords one at a time with the otherhand Notice that you can slide the knot out again for instance to re-open the bag you just tied shut For some applications this may be as tight as you need it
A springy bundle probably still feels loose If so compress the bundle and get a new grip on the cords Rest your foot on the bundle on the cords nearest the larks headand pull to slide the larks head tighter
To make the knot more permanent you can lock it Make an overhand in the cord ends (Exactly like the first step in tying shoelaces) With your foot still on the bundlepull on the cords and move your hands apart until youre pulling in opposite directions You have just locked the larks head and you can trust it to stay that way()
But lets say that later on you want to loosen the locked knot Again put your foot on the bundle and cords nearest the larks head hold the two cord ends together andpull This makes a little slack between the overhand and the larks head so you can untie the overhand
In twine or small string the locking overhand knot may be difficult to undo Use a shoelace knot instead of an overhand and itll unlock easily
() If youre using slippery cord like polypropylene an overhand may not lock securely You may want to tie another overhand knot For added security wrap a shortlength of duct tape around the two cords close to the knot
Image Notes1 To tighten further step on this side of the larks head and pull the free ends
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Related Instructables
TRX fromParacordChallengeAccepted bythrake
A pocket full ofknots byKiteman
Lens CapLanyard by~teknoarsonist~ how to tie a
noose byawesume
AdjustableParacordGlassesLanyard byjdtwelve12
HangmansNoose PackClosure byPopEye42
Paraleash - ADog LeashFrom Paracordby The Ideanator
How to make arugged andhandy ParacordBelt by Jake22
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
DisclaimerAll do-it-yourself activities involve risk and your safety is your own responsibility including proper use of equipment and safety gear and determining whether you haveadequate skill and experience Some of the resources used for these projects are dangerous unless used properly and with adequate precautions including safety gearSome illustrative photos do not depict safety precautions or equipment in order to show the project steps more clearly The projects are not intended for use by children
Many projects on Instructables are user-submitted and appearance of a project in this format does not indicate it has been checked for safety or functionality Use of theinstructions and suggestions is at your own risk Instructables Inc disclaims all responsibility for any resulting damage injury or expense It is your responsibility to makesure that your activities comply with all applicable laws
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Cross Knot Paracord Lanyardby Stormdrane on May 22 2011
AuthorStormdrane Stormdranes BlogNo matter where you go there you are
Intro Cross Knot Paracord Lanyard
This instructable will show how to make a paracord lanyard using the cross knot and snake knot The lanyard can be used as a wallet chain to secure a key chainkeyring knife multitool flashlight cell phone camera binoculars compass and other assorted pocketable gadgets gear and gizmos More projects links knotreferences can be seen in my blog Stormdranes Blog
The cross knot can also be found under different names from other online and book references as The Chinese Crown Knot Chinese Cross Japanese Crown KnotJapanese Success Knot Rustlers Knot Friendship Knot and knot 808 in The Ashley Book of Knots
You can use the loop end of the lanyard to attach it to your item and use the clip end to secure to a belt loop bag pack etc Or run a belt through the lanyards loopand use the attachment to clip onto your gadget gear gizmo etc Longer versions could be used as a pet leash for your dog cat pot belly pig iguana ferret or otherassorted leashable rodents and varmints
Step 1 Supplies
For this project youll need 10 feet of paracord scissors swivel snap hook and a lighter Optional supplies are hemostats tape measure and your own choice ofattachments like split ring swivel clip carabiner snap shackle etc
I used 10 feet of paracord to make a finished lanyardwallet chain of about 25 feet in length You can use more or less to make one of your own preferred length
There are many online sources for paracord available in different lengths and color choices and can sometimes be found at local sporting goods outlets and ArmyNavySurplus stores Various attachments can also be found online and at local retail establishments and you may even scavenge them from keyringskeychains pet leashesetc that you already have
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 2 Step 2
Find the center of your length of cord form a bight which will be the the loop end of your lanyard
Step 3 Step 3
To tie the cross knot youre going to bring the strand of cord on the right over the left strand back under to the right and back under again to the left making an S shapeas shown
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 4 Step 4
Now with the left strand bring it up under the S shape through the top loop as shown
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 5 Step 5
Bring the strand back down over the first two parts of the S shape and under the bottom as shown
Step 6 Step 6
Tighten up the knot by carefully pulling on each of the working ends and loop ends of the cord You can adjust the size of the lanyards loop by working slack from theloop end to decrease its size or from the working ends to increase the loops size Ive kept the loop at about 2 inches in length so that a belt will fit through it but youcan make it larger or smaller to your preference You can also check that the working ends of the paracord are equal in length at this point and work slack through theknot to even them up if needed
Note the other side of the knot looks different with the cross pattern as shown
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 7 Step7
Now you can tie the next knot in the lanyard the same way as the first After tying the next knot work the slack through the knot until you have about 1 inch of spacebetween them then tighten and continue with the next knot Note that the knots look different on each side frontback and that you tie the each facing the same way oralternate them if you choose
Continue making knots until you have about 1 foot of cord left with each end of the working strands
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 8 Step 8
Now you will add your attachment like the swivel snap hook shown putting both strands through the swivel eye to begin tying the snake knot
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 9 Step 9Bring the right strand under the cords then up over them as shown
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 10 Step 10Now take the left strand over across the other strands back behind and under the cords and up through the right strand loop as shown Then tighten
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 11 Step 11
Take the right strand under and behind the cords then bring it back through the tightened knot along side itself as shown and tighten This is where hemostats come inhandy with tying this knot working the cord through the previously tightened part of the knot It can be done without hemostats but requires tighteningloosening of theknots with just your fingertips
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 12 Step 12
Turn the lanyard over so the other side of the knot is facing up The working strand now on the right side will be brought under the cords back up and down through theparallel strands of the knot as shown then tighten And continue this process flipping the lanyard over taking the right strand under and back up around and through theparallel cords and tighten Continue until you run out of cord or reach the cross knot
Youll now trim off any excess cord and quick melt the end of the strands to prevent fraying to finish
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 13 Variations
You can use other two strand knots instead of the cross knot for variations on this style of lanyard A few alternatives to try tying in a spaced out series or combination ofthem Matthew Walker knot double wall knot lanyard knot double overhand knots double figure 8 knots etc The finishing knots around the attachment can also bedifferent as Ive used the lanyard knot sometimes just one or several in a row
You can also use variations of the cross knot with paracord bracelets and watchbands Doubled version of the knot shown as a paracord bracelet and alternating withtwo pairs of strands for the paracord watchband Leftover pieces of paracord can be used for zipper pulls key ring fobs even paracord cross pendants
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Related Instructables
Paracord ChainSinnet FastDeploy BoonieHatband (video)by Stormdrane
Zigzag SpoolingParacord (video)by Stormdrane
SurvivalBracelet(Updated) bytevers94
Celtic ButtonKnot (video) byStormdrane
ParacordBoonie HatWrap (video) byStormdrane
Paracord wristlanyard madewith the snakeknot byStormdrane
SurvivalBracelet II bytevers94
Cobra WeaveKey Fob bytevers94
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Paracord wrist lanyard made with the snake knotby Stormdrane on September 12 2007
AuthorStormdrane Stormdranes BlogNo matter where you go there you are
Intro Paracord wrist lanyard made with the snake knotThis instructable will show how to make a wrist lanyard using paracord and the snake knot The lanyard can be used to secure a key chain knife multi-tool flashlightcell phone camera binoculars compass etc More projects links knot references can be seen on my blog page Stormdranes Blog
Step 1 SuppliesYoull need about 45 feet of paracord(you may use other types of cordage if desired) The paracord I used is from the Supply Captain I left the inner strands in theparacord but you can remove them if preferred If done in one color it will be one continuous 45 ft length if done in two colors youll need 3 ft for the primary color thatincludes the wrist section and 15 ft for the second color that will show in the snake knot Also used are scissors tape measure or ruler lighter hemostats or needle nosepliers(not necessary but they make it much easier) and a swivel clip key ring snap hook cell phone lariat carabiner or whatever attachment you prefer to use
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 2 Attaching two colors of paracordIf using two colors of paracord you will insert one color about 12 inch into the other color You may remove a small amount of the paracords inner strands by pullingthem out trimming with scissors and pulling the paracord outer sheath back over the strands leaving room to insert the other color For various projects Ive used threedifferent methods for attaching two colors of paracord melting sewing or gluing The choice is yours I usually sew them together it doesnt matter as long as its a goodconnection It will be hidden under the first knot
Step 3 Find the center of the length of paracordTake the center of the length of cord and bring it thru the attachment Im using a swivel clip For this tutorial Im measuring the wrist loop at about 10 inches from theattachment The connection of the two colors will be just on the other side at this point
Step 4 Making the snake knotThe snake knot will be made around the wrist loop section of paracord the loop strands being the core of the knot Ive added a series of photos showing the steps Iuse By using two colors youll see that I flip the lanyard over after making each knot so that Im working with the cord on the right side of the lanyard I bring it under allthe other cords working the hemostats under the previously tightened knot and pulling the cord back thru Then tightening up the knot keeping the cord from twisting andworking it up against the previous knot Again flipping the work over youll see two parallel cords of the same color which will be split with the cord on the right goingunder around and pulled thru with the hemostats then tightened up Continue this procedure until youve done about 10 snake knots(you can count them down eitherside
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 5 Count your knotsOnce you have 10 snake knots youre almost done Youll notice from the photos of both sides of the lanyard that one side has the snake knots alternating all the waydown and the other has a set of parallel knots at the top and botton of the sequence of knots Youll always have those at the start and finish of the snake knots I preferto have them end up on the same side of the lanyard so one side appears to have a more uniform look but its not required
Step 6 Trim and melt the excess paracordUse the scissors to trim off the excess cord and quickly melt the ends with a lighter so they dont fray
Step 7 Youre doneYou can make a range of variations using less or more cordknots Shorten the loop for a double ended key chain or make the loop longer for use as a neck lanyard aLanyard Break-Away Connector could be added for the safety conscious You can also add a wooden bead skull cord lock etc Visit my blog page for more knot relatedprojects links and resources Stormdranes Blog You can find ideas for other geargadgets to attach to your lanyard on EDC Forums
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Related Instructables
Paracord ChainSinnet FastDeploy BoonieHatband (video)by Stormdrane
Cross KnotParacordLanyard byStormdrane
Zigzag SpoolingParacord (video)by Stormdrane
SurvivalBracelet II bytevers94
SurvivalBracelet(Updated) bytevers94
Cobra WeaveKey Fob bytevers94
ParacordBoonie HatWrap (video) byStormdrane
Paracord KnotDisplay Bord byJamie bagn
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
How to tie various knotsby adaviel on September 7 2009
Intro How to tie various knotsKnots as a way of joining rope without special equipment are useful in many situations On a sailboat knots are essential both for daily use and for emergency repairsThis instructable describes several different common knots eg
Sheet Bend - to tie two lines togetherBowline - to make a loopReef Knot - to fasten a bundle of materialFishermans Bend - to secure a line to a post or ring
These knots are good for regular rope - braided or 3-strand polyester or natural fibre (hemp sisal) Monofilament (fishing line) or steel cable performs better with differentknots
Knots are typically quite a lot weaker than straight rope - when rope goes around a tight radius such as in a knot the outside is under more tension than the insideSplices (which require special tools and are time-consuming to make) are stronger so permanent fittings usually have eye-splices
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 1 Sheet BendThe sheet bend is used to tie two lines together It is perhaps the most generally useful knot of all When used to tie a line to itself making a loop it is called a bowlineThe strain is taken on the ropes in the middle - not the one coming out the side
How the knot is made is not critical - it is the final shape that is important One can make the flat loop first and work the other rope around it Or one can make thecrossed loop first - required when tying a bowline
The two images show front and back views of the same knot
AdvantagesEasy to makeEasy to undo when tension is removedDoes not easily capsize
DisadvantagesHard to make under loadDangerous to make under heavy load
UsesJoining two equally-sized ropesExtending a towline or stern line
Method 1 the same as a bowline
Method 2 starting with the flat loop
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 2 Double Sheet BendThe double sheet bend is used to tie two lines of different thickness - but not too different It is the same as a normal sheet bend but with an extra turn of the thinner ropearound the flat loop in the thickerThe load goes on the line through the flat loop not the one that comes out the side of the knot
UsesSecuring a heaving line to a tow lineExtending a stern line if you dont have enough line of one thickness
Step 3 BowlineThe bowline is really a special case of the sheet bend but it it tied at the end of a rope to make a loop
The photos show the completed loop and closeups of the front and back of the actual knot Note that it is the same as the sheet bend - but it must be made the right wayround This loop does not tighten in use The knot is quite easy to untie once the load is removed With practice it is very quick to tie
Some usesSecuring a dinghy line to a railing or stanchionSecuring an anchor line to an anchorTie a jib sheet to the sailTie a mooring line around a rock or treeTie a float to an anchor triplineUse one in each line to tie two ropes of very different sizes - eg a throwing line to a large tow ropeDisadvantages the knot must be completely made before it will take any strain - it is hard to tie if there is already a load on the rope
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Linked bowlines
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 4 Bowline on the BightA bowline on the bight is a bowline tied in a loop of rope (neither end is needed) The shape is the same as a bowline made with a double line but the middle of thebight forms the loop around the standing part
UsesAn impromptu bosuns chair - to sit in while being transferred between two boats at sea
Step 5 Clove HitchThe clove hitch can be made when you only have the bight (the middle) of a rope not the ends
UsesSecuring a burgee pole to a burgee halyard (a continuous loop of thin line)Securing a tiller from swinging
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 6 Round Turn and Two Half-HitchesThis is a knot used to secure a line to a ring or bar Wind a couple of turns around the bar then secure the end with two hitches around the standing part (this looks like aclove hitch when done)
AdvantagesCan be made under load - it is easy to take turns around the bar while maintaining tension on the ropeStrong - provided the bar is thicker than the rope the rope is not weakened by sharp bendsDisadvantagesThe end tends to work loose
UsesSecuring a line to a mooring ring or samson post
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 7 Fishermans BendThe fishermans bend is the same as the round turn and two half hitches except that the first hitch is looped under the round turn This uses the tension on the rope tosecure the end from working loose
AdvantagesSecure against working loose
DisadvantagesHard to make under tensionHard to undo under tensionMay seize up under load when wet making it hard to undo
UsesSecuring mooring line to ringSecuring fender lines to rail
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 8 Studsail BendThe studsail bend is like the fishermans bend but the second hitch is also secured under the round turn making it even more secure against working loose when undertension
AdvantagesVery secure against working looseDisadvantagesHard to make under tensionHard to undo under tension
Step 9 Figure-8 KnotThe figure-eight knot is used to prevent an end of rope from passing through a block (pulley) Sometimes called a stopper knot
The double figure-8 knot is used in rock climbing as an alternative to a bowline to secure a climbing harness to the end of a safety rope The double knot is made bymaking a single knot then tracing back around the knot with the free end after passing it around the harness loop
AdvantagesEasy to verify by inspectionNot prone to work loose
DisadvantagesSlow to make and undoCannot be made under load
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 10 Prussic KnotThe prussic knot may be used as a climbing ascender - when made around a vertical rope as shown downwards tension on the ends locks the knot while release oftension allows it to be slid up the rope A pair of prussic knots on foot loops may be used in tandem to climb a rope
UsesClimbing a ropeTaking up tension to free a riding turn on a winch
Step 11 Reef KnotThe reef knot or square knot is used to tie a bundle of material together It must be made around something - it should not be used to tie two free ropes togetherbecause it can easily capsizeIt should not be used to make a loop unless it can be tensioned around a solid object It should not be used around a person - use a bowline instead A capsized reefknot will slip easily and could constrict and cause severe injury
UsesReefing a sail (tying the unused portion around a spar)Securing a furled sail to a spar (sail ties)Wrapping a parcelTying shoelaces
AdvantagesMay be made under moderate load
DisadvantagesCapsizes (works free) if used improperlyCan seize up under load when wet
Tying the knot
Capsizing a reef knot
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 12 CleatsThis is not a knot but is very common on boatsThe first picture shows a rope cleated normally The second shows one with a final locking turn - the last turn is twisted before placing over the cleat so that the tensionon the rope helps secure the free end
When working with ropes under tension take a turn or two around a winch or cleat before trying to secure the end with a knot The load on the free end falls exponentiallywith each turn taken Severe injury can result if a finger or other body part is caught in a loop of rope or between a rope and another object
Step 13 Practice themIt is sometimes useful to be able to tie knots in the dark or as in this video behind your back
Related Instructables
AThird Hand forSailing or OtherThings by WadeTarzia
Paracord KnotDisplay Bord byJamie bagn
Trip LogOutriggerCanoe Sailingthe CaliforniaChannel Islandsby TimAnderson
How to Tie aFigure EightKnot byTactical_Pyro
How to build apirate ship bymdelaney3
Build a ShortDragon (16 foot3-BoardOutriggerSailing Canoe)by Wade Tarzia
repairing aheadsail by josh
How to get arope into a tree(withoutclimbing it) byvitex
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
How to Tie the Lanyard Knotby eddy14777 on January 31 2010
Intro How to Tie the Lanyard KnotMany people including myself have had trouble following the Stormdrane youtube video on tying the lanyard knot so i have done some research and found the solution
Image Notes1 Finished knot
Step 1 MaterialsAll you need is a reasonable length of para cord or whatever you wish to use
Image Notes1 One reasonable amount
Step 2 First StepThe first thing you are going to do is to make a bight that leaves you with to congruent endsThen you are going to put your ring finger through the bight
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Image Notes1 Close enough2 Bight
Step 3 Starting the KnotMake a loop just like the one in the picture and place it over the top strandBring the top strand under the bottom strand
Image Notes1 Notice the way the loop is done2 Top strand
Image Notes1 Bottom strand2 Top strand is under
Step 4 The Most Important PartNow you take the top stand from the previous picture and feed it over the first part of the loop under itself and back over the remainder of the loop
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Image Notes1 Under me2 Top strand3 This should make a diamond type shape
Step 5 DoublingNow take the bottom stand and take it around the part of the top strand nearest to the bight and than come up through the diamond shape in the middleDo the same for the top strand
Image Notes1 Top strand
Image Notes1 Both through the diamond
Step 6 FinishingWhen you take it off your finger it should look like thisWork out the slack by pulling on the bight and the two strands
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Image Notes1 Finished knot
Related Instructables
Cross KnotParacordLanyard byStormdrane
Celtic ButtonKnot (video) byStormdrane
Paracord wristlanyard madewith the snakeknot byStormdrane
Paracord ChainSinnet FastDeploy BoonieHatband (video)by Stormdrane
Zigzag SpoolingParacord (video)by Stormdrane
ParacordBoonie HatWrap (video) byStormdrane
Paracord IDbadge Lanyardby Flahusky
Cobra WeaveKey Fob bytevers94
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Four knots to make paracord into a useful toolby erik_mccray on March 27 2010
Authorerik_mccrayI am an ex-fabricator that is now a stay at home dad I love my new job but I do miss making stuff I love this site amp I am getting involved as a way to keep myskills upOn top of fad work I have also run two small business in the past One was custom sewing amp the other was as a small engine mechanicI have two votec degrees one in metal fabrication amp the other is in engine repairI look forward to getting to know everyone here
Intro Four knots to make paracord into a useful toolParacord is an awesome multitool used everywhere from the wild blue yonder to the deepest caverns But like any good tool it is only as good as the knowledge the userhas about the tool With most people out there using bungee cords amp ratchet straps it seems that paracord is being used for nothing more than friendship bracelets forgrown men This is a shame because for less then the price of a few cheap bungee cords amp some to short to be helpful straps You can get yourself hundreds of feet ofparacord
The key to getting the most out of the paracord is good knot work The first thing you need to know is what makes a good knot One is that the knot is easy amp quick to tieamp more impotant is that the knot is easy amp quick to untie The hitch class of knots is by far the best group of knots that the average person could know The four mostuseful hitch knots are the half hitch a quick simple knot that forms the base for many other knots the inline half hitch allowing you to get the most out of one length ofparacord the slippery hitch that gives you both on the fly control over tension on your paracord but also an adjustable loop that will not change unless you want it amp theinline truckers hitch instantly doubling the your pulling power
Step 1 To get started lets get some terminology that will be used defined
line= the paracord
Main line= the part of the paracord doing the work for example holding down your tarp or the long part of the paracord
Mid line= the middle of the length of the paracord
End line= the unused length of paracord or the short length of paracord
Step 2 The half hitch The half hitch is a simple way to secure a line to an anchor point like the tie down points in most trucks A half hitch is a constrictor knot meaning that the harder you pullon the line the tighter the knots grip gets Another common constrictor knot is the slip knot
Step 1 wrap your line around your anchor point Step 2 wrap the end line around the main line
Step 3 pass the end line threw the end line side of the newly formed loop
step 4 now take the slack out of the knot
step 5 to make sure the knot is secure tie another half hitch to the main line This knot is called adouble half hitch
step 6 another useful thing that can be done with the half hitch is that instead of repeating the wrap on the main line but repeating it on what you are tying to the half hitchcan be used to bind something like a stack of 2x4s
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Image Notes1 End line2 Main line3 step 1
Image Notes1 Step 2
Image Notes1 passing thew the end line side of the loop2 step 3
Image Notes1 step 5
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Image Notes1 step 6
Step 3 The mid line half hitch The mid line half hitch is for when the length of line is to long for the job at hand amp you dont want to have to cut the line to size or you are using multiple anchor pointswith one length of line
Step 1 double up the line at the point in the length you wish to make the knot
Step 2 wrap the doubled up portion of line around your anchor point The doubled up length is now now the end line
Step 3 now tie just as you did for the regular half hitch repeat the knot to make a double half hitch for security
Image Notes1 A mid line double half hitch
Image Notes1 step 1
Image Notes1 The end line2 step 2
Image Notes1 Step 3
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 4 The slippery hitch The slippery hitch is a great knot for adjusting tension on the main line or for having an adjustable fixed loop To adjust the knot simply slide the knot up or down the mainline
Step 1 wrap your line around the anchor point or just double over the line to form a loop
Step 2 wrap the end line around the main line three times Wrapping in the direction of the anchor point or loop
Step 3 put together the two lines making up the loop amp wrap the two lines one time with the end line
Step 4 pass the end line thew the last loop formed covering the two lined of the loop
Step 5 pull the knot tite
step 6 to adjust the size of the loop or main line tension grab the knot amp slide it up or down the main line
Image Notes1 grab just the knot its self to adjust it2 step 5
Image Notes1 step 1
Image Notes1 step 2
Image Notes1 step 3
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Image Notes1 step 4
Image Notes1 grab just the knot its self to adjust it2 step 5
Image Notes1 same knot as in last pic Just slid up2 step 6
Step 5 The mid line truchers hitch The truckers hitch is a great way to double the pulling force on a line There are many ways to tie this knot the problem with most of them is that at some point you aregoing to have to pass the end line through a loop on the main line that is acting like a pulley to double your pulling force this is great if you are making the knot close tothe end of your line but if you are using a 300 length of line amp want to make the knot in the first ten feet having to pass 290 of line thew a loop is a pain But with a fewhalf hitches you will not have to pass the end line threw any loop on the main line
step 1 wrap your line around the anchor point then double over your end line laying the top of the loop over the main line
Step 2 double up your main line amp lay the loop over the loop made by the end line
step 3 in main line above the knot twist in a loop
step 4 put main line loop thew the loop made in step 3 amp pull this loop tight over your main line loop forming a half hitch Repeat step 3 amp 4 to make a doublehalf hitch
step 5 To use the knot just pull down on the end line to put tension on the main line
step 6 after you have the main line snug tie a mid line double half hitch around the two lines forming the loop at the end of the main line with the end line
step 7 Tie a double half hitch with the end line around the end loop of the mid line half hitch of step 6 using the same method as used in steps 3 amp 4
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Image Notes1 the end of step 6
Image Notes1 main line2 end line3 step 1
Image Notes1 main line loop2 end line loop
Image Notes1 step 3
Image Notes1 step 4
Image Notes1 step 4 at the end with a double half hitch on the main loop
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Image Notes1 pull here2 step 5
Image Notes1 the start of step 6
Image Notes1 the end of step 6
Image Notes1 step 72 now the rest of the line is free to do more work
Related Instructables
Paracord KnotDisplay Bord byJamie bagn
ChokelessAdjustableParacord DogLeash byPizzaman101
ParacordLadder wWooden Rungsby josestude
tie a paracordshackle grip byitri45
ParacordPrussik Belt byJavaNut13
TiteTie is theTruckers Knoton Steroids bytitetie
ID Lanyard(Photos) byeschmunk
Dog Toys forHeavy Chewersby J3443RY
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Figure 8 knot and double 8 knotby jonathan111 on November 28 2007
Intro Figure 8 knot and double 8 knotI will show you how to tie a figure 8 knot and a figure 8 follow through
Step 1 Stating the knotThis is a simple knot so just follow the pictures
Step 2 Finishing the knotCross the string under and then push it through the hole Pull tightly unless you are going to do the follow through and leave it somewhat loose
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 3 The follow through knotThe follow through knot should be tied around something brought back and followed through the path of the 8 knot Look at the pictures Basically follow through the 8knot backwards
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Related Instructables
Climb Safe WithA Figure 8Knot by mattste A pocket full of
knots byKiteman
How to Tie aFigure EightKnot byTactical_Pyro
Paracord KnotDisplay Bord byJamie bagn
Cross KnotParacordLanyard byStormdrane
How to Tie aFire-escapeKnot by leonardoismael
Truckers HitchTHE mostawesome knoton the planetby schneidp20
Paracord ZipperPuller byrepeet13
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Truckers Hitch THE most awesome knot on the planetby schneidp20 on October 12 2008
Authorschneidp20I like building stuff Trouble is there just isnt enough time to build everything Sigh
Intro Truckers Hitch THE most awesome knot on the planetYes I know that there are plenty of other cool knots out there many of which I literally couldnt live wo I rock climb However this knot is unlike any other Plus Ineeded a grabber for my Instructable -) (BTW this ISNT a climbing knot) And in truth it isnt a knot by itself but rather a system of common knots
Have you ever tried to tie something down for transporting but just couldnt get the lines tight andor during transport the lines would continually loosen Then this is theknot for you I learned this knot back in the 70s when specialty car racks and ratchet straps were rare or unheard of I initially used it to tie a canoe on a car rack bothattaching to the rack as well as the lines to the bow and stern of the canoe Even with all the new gizmos available today this knot still shines because all you need is arope and ropes dont hum in the wind like straps
The unique aspect of this knot is that it gives you a 2-1 mechanical advantage when tightening the rope Be careful though You can actually damage some thingsbecause of the mechanical advantage This knot holds fast and is easy to untie hallmark traits of any good knot
Below you see the finished knot system well break it apart in the steps that follow
Image Notes1 1st anchor point a bowline2 loop3 securing knots 2 half hitches4 securing loose end with a fishermans knot5 2nd anchor point (should be round)
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Image Notes1 X marks the spot
Step 1 Initial setupThe first step is to anchor one end of the rope and then loop the rope around a 2nd anchor point
For attaching to the 1st anchor point I chose bowline a close 2 on my list -) There are other instructables on that one so I wont bore you here
The 2nd anchor really should be round because it serves as a pulley in this block and tackle type knot Ive used it on sharp anchor points and it doesnt work as well
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 2 Creating a slip knotTie a slip knot somewhere between the two anchor points Correct placement of the slip knot takes some experience to judge it correctly Typically I place it too close tothe 2nd anchor point and end up with not enough room to work with If the knot ends up too far from 2nd anchor point you can extend the knot by enlarging the loop
Be sure you tie the slip knot as shown You may not be able to untie other knots
In this small example the slip knot is uncharacteristically close to the 1st anchor point
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 3 Tightening and securingThe loose end of the rope that went around the 2nd anchor point goes through the slip knot loop Pull the loose end to the desired tension and secure with two halfhitches
Note To allow better view of the knots the rope isnt really tightened in this example
Step 4 Securing loose endThe final knot is just to secure the loose end somehow I chose a fishermans knot to do this
To tie a fishermans knot the rope goes around twice and goes under the X created by the loops Pull the loose end to tighten Finally slide the knot to put tension onthe half hitches
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Image Notes1 X marks the spot
Step 5 FinishedThere you have it I guarantee that the first time you really use this knot (not just practice) you will be amazed at how well it works and youll wish you knew this knot along time ago You may even come over to my side and declare that is is THE most awesome knot on the planet -)
Enjoy and happy haulingDave
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Related Instructables
TiteTie is theTruckers Knoton Steroids bytitetie
Four knots tomake paracordinto a usefultool byerik_mccray
Modify yourbike rack tocarry a sunfishor other boat byewilhelm
SurfboardHammock byGermy
GiganticHalloweenSpider Web bynolte919
How To Tie ASpiders Hitch(video) by back-cast
Three-hitch mathair ornamentby michiexile TRX from
ParacordChallengeAccepted bythrake
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Carry any Bottle with a JUG KNOT Handleby hpstoutharrow on September 17 2009
Intro Carry any Bottle with a JUG KNOT HandleTie a JUG KNOT around a water bottle soda bottle or aluminum bottle to make a secure carrying strap
Re-purpose any container into a reusable water bottle by adding a convenient carrying strap This Instructable will demonstrate how to tie a JUG knot which like its namesuggests is meant to properly secure around the neck of a container
With some cord and the knowledge of this knot you will be able add a handle lanyard or carabiner loop to any of your favorite beverages to carry them on the go
It works perfectly for those disposable water bottles and who knows once you add some colorful cord to the plain old clear water bottle you just might beinclined to refill it and use it again(Check out pictures 4amp5 below)
In addition to plastic beverage bottles like pop water and sports drinks you can turn those rugged aluminum beer bottles into a backpacking canteen
Those of you familiar with my previous aluminum bottle InstructablesROLLED RIM METAL TUMBLERhttpwwwinstructablescomidAluminum-Bottle-Tumbler-Cup-Cook-PotALUMINUM BOTTLE LIGHTWEIGHT ALCOHOL STOVEhttpwwwinstructablescomidAluminum-Bottle-Alcohol-Stovewill recognize the water canteen shown below as a re-purposed aluminum beer bottle Here I have added a painted surface treatment to turn it into a proper lookingwater bottle More on that in steps 13 14 15
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 1 Getting StartedCord size is important Select a small medium weight cord like the one shown here It is a general purpose camp cord sold at most sporting goods stores (shoelacesmight also work)
Do not use a heavy cord or rope because the larger diameter will not tuck under the relatively small lip at the top of the bottleneck and the bottle will fall out
Also the smaller cord cinches tight on itself and will not loosen accidentally
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 2 Form a BightThe next steps show how to tie a JUG KNOT It is the basic step for adding a carrying strap It is also the anchor point for any additional fancy bottle trussing you maywant to add
JUG KNOT Step 1
Form a Bight in the center of a length of cord Bight is a knot term for a loop or bend in the rope In this case the main Bight in this knot is highlighted with a white mark Imakes it easier to follow its path in these steps
The running ends of the cord should be equal length
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 3 Pull the Bight downPULL the Bight DOWN forming two Loops
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 4 Cross the LoopsCROSS the right Loop OVER the left Loop
Step 5 Pass the Bight under the 1st loopTake the main Bight and pass it UNDER the left Loop
Step 6 Weave the BightWEAVE the Bight OVER the portion of the right Loop and UNDER the portion of the left Loop
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 7 Extend the BightExtend the Bight OVER the outer portion of the right Loop
Step 8 Flip the Right Loop behindAdditional colored identification points have been added to the loops to follow their travel in these next two steps
The right Loop Yellow marker is FLIPPED BEHIND the knot and ends up on the far left side of the knot
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 9 Flip the 2nd loop in frontRaise the green marker (located on what was formerly the left loop) and pull it down and to the right FLIPPING IT IN FRONT of the knot
Note the blue portion of the this loop will pass around the outside of the yellow portion of the first loop
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Image Notes1 Center of knot that will tighten around the bottles neck
Step 10 Remove SlackNote where the blue green amp yellow markers end up
Start to remove the slack in the loops by pulling the original main Bight (white marker top right) and the two free standing ends at the bottom
the bottle neck will pass through the very center of the knot
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Image Notes1 Center of knot that will tighten around the bottles neck
Step 11 Tighten the KnotAfter removing the slack insert the bottle neck and finish tightening
The knot should look like this before slipping it over the bottle
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 12 Secure on bottle neckThis is the finished knot shown on the neck of various containers
The loop end and the two free standing ends can be tied together to create a carrying handle (last picture below)
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 13 Aluminum Bottle Water Bottle
The next few steps show the features of an aluminum beer bottle re-purposed as a water bottle canteen It is one of many containers that can be reused as a camp waterbottle
The bottle was lightly sanded masked and then pained with a hammered finished paint to create an interesting surface texture
Image Notes1 Textured finish paint makes an interesting grip-able surface2 Masked with tape for painting3 Masked with tape for painting
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Image Notes1 Dowel used for holding the bottle during painting
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 14 Tethered Cork StopperUse a wine bottle man made Cork as a stopper for your aluminum water bottleNote Use a cork that was removed from the wine bottle without the corkscrew penetrating through the bottom end of the cork (A hole all the way through the cork willcause it to leak) Use the unpierced end of the cork inside the water bottle
Drill a hole through the sides of the Cork Thread the cord through the hole to the center of the cord Use the cork as the main Bight and tie the Jug knot as shown inthe beginning steps
Now the cork is tethered to the bottle and will not get lost or fall on the ground
A Carabiner clip passes through the other cord end to attache the water bottle to you belt or pack
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 15 Trussed for TransportThis is another hanging method for carrying your aluminum bottle water canteen A Jug knot is tied conventionally around the neck
The running ends of the knot however are pulled down towards the bottom of the bottle A Barrel Knot is tied about 34 the way down the side of the bottle A squareknot is tied on the bottom of the knot to keep the two running ends tight against the sides of the bottle
I like the look of the accent colored cord running down the sides of the bottle and the fact that the bottle hangs from the belt upside down It adds to its uniqueness
The last picture shows another truss variation
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 16 AdvancedBelow is a bottle with some additional trussing You can be creative as you want It all starts with a re-purposed container and the Jug Knot (and enough cord)
Related Instructables
AluminumBottle TumblerCup amp Cook Potfor an AlcoholStove byhpstoutharrow
Water BottleBelt Clip byuglymike Duct Tape
Water Bottle byrabidsquire2
AluminumBottle AlcoholStove byhpstoutharrow
DIYGlass WaterBottle byCulturespy
Solar WaterHeater forBackpackingUsing WaterBottles and aCar Shade bykopomeroy
Duct tape waterbottle holder(Photos) by pinkmarshmallow
How to make aCamelPack withan old plasticbottle bywillrandship
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Basic Knots Guideby zorro3355 on April 29 2008
Intro Basic Knots Guidehi
Step 1 Thumb knotThe most simple knotUsed as a stopper and prevent ropes from fraying
Step 2 Reef KnotUsed to tie two ropes of equal thickness togetherIt is pretty easy to tie and untie but under tentionit may be diffcult to untieIt is also not sutible for smoothropes(egnylon ropes)
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 3 Figure of eightused as a stopperprevent ropes from fraying and its more secure than tumb knot its is also used to tie Caribinas to ropes and is often used in rock climbing
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 4 Timber hitchused for pulling logs
Step 5 Clove hitchUsed to tie a rope onto a pole or logThe pole must be roundThe pole lust be thicker then the rope itself
(greatly used during pioneering)
Step 6 Sheet bandused to tie ropes of different thickness together(works on same thickness of ropes too)
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 7 Sheep shankTo shorten RopesTo prevent middle fraying
Step 8 Slip knotWhippingUsed as a grip for pulling things(when tied on a stick or small pole)(marlin spike hitch)
Related Instructables
Rope Rings byhpstoutharrow
How to Tie aFigure EightKnot byTactical_Pyro
Whippin (WestCountry Style)by tim_n
SurvivalBracelet(Updated) bytevers94
HangmansNoose PackClosure byPopEye42
Turkey on aTripod byhpstoutharrow
SurvivalBracelet II bytevers94 Zigzag Spooling
Paracord (video)by Stormdrane
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
How to Tie a Fire-escape Knotby leonardo ismael on October 16 2007
Intro How to Tie a Fire-escape KnotThis knot is used by firemen in case of fires for example imagine a scene where the ladder on the firetruck messes up but people need to get down a five story buildingor more All they have is a long piece of rope they can safely get down with a secure knot like the fire-escape knot So why not learn it its easy to do and hard to untieif you tie it tightly
This is from the American Boys Handbook
Step 1 Get Your RopeFirst grab a piece of rope and bend it like this to make a loop in it Follow every step to the smallest detail
Step 2 Twist the RopeNow make a twist like this and hold it together
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 3 Pull Through the TwistPull the loop through the twist you just made from underneath
Step 4 Go Over the Split EndNow pull the tail through the loop
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 5 FinallyAnd finally just pull it through as pictured below
Congratulations you just learned the fire-escape knot
Step 6 Same Name Not KnotThis is another knot called the fire-escape knot this shouldnt be your result
Related Instructables
House FireEscape Plan(video) byWhatHappensNowAdvice
ParacordLadder wWooden Rungsby josestude
Bed SheetEscape Rope byjessehensel
rope ladder(glow-in-the-dark version) bymikeasaurus
HeadlockEscape 2(video) byjohnnyrockstah
QuickFirestarter byMattandJora
Trail sauna byjakee117
How to Kill FireAnts andCommitGenocide byKentsOkay
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Climb Safe With A Figure 8 Knotby mattste on February 23 2010
Intro Climb Safe With A Figure 8 Knot There are many things that a beginning climber needs to know including several important knots Perhaps the most essential knot is the Figure 8 Follow Through Thistutorial will demonstrate how to correctly harness yourself to a rope using a Figure 8 Follow Through knot This knot is used primarily by rock climbers to provide a life-line Since this knot is used as a life-line it is very important to be able to tie it correctly (Your life could depend upon it)
Dont worry with this tutorial and about 5 minutes of practice you can have this knot mastered
Things you will need
- Climbing Harness- Climbing Rope
If you are wanting to go climbing and dont already have these items they can be purchased for about $25 each at most outdoor sporting goods stores If you are merelylooking to learn the knot a belt loop and a rope (about five feet long) will do
Image Notes1 Climbing Harness2 Climbing Rope
Step 1 Dealing With The RopeThroughout this tutorial I will be discussing different parts of the rope To make these instructions as clear as possible I will define a few terms that I will use throughoutthe tutorial The Anchor End of the rope will generally be at the top of the images This is the end that would be anchored to the wall or rock and does not move Wewill not be doing much with the anchored end The Tail End of the rope is the opposite end that we will be dealing with I will call this the tail for short
Now that we have some terms to work with lets get started
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 2 Tying The First Figure 8This knot has several parts to it The first part of the knot is just tying a basic figure 8 To tie the first figure 8 there are four simple steps
1 - Using the tail make a loop over the rope (as shown in the first picture) keeping in mind that there should be about 3 ft of slack on the tail end
2 - Wrap the tail back this time go under the anchored end (As shown in the second picture)
3 - Bring the tail down through the first loop (As shown in the third picture)
4 - Finally pull the two ends to make the knot a little bit tighter and easier to deal with (Shown in the fourth picture)
After these four steps you should end up with a knot that resembles a figure 8
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 3 Looping Into The Harness In order to secure the rope to the harness simply thread the tail end of the rope through the front loop in the harness as shown in the picture below This step isobviously very important
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 4 Following Back Through The Figure 8After looping the rope through the harness you have to thread the tail end of the rope back through the knot following the first figure 8 I have divided this process intofive smaller steps in order to make it more clear
1 - Coming form underneath the knot bring the tail up through the near loop and to the left behind the anchored end of the rope (Shown in the first picture)
2 - Wrap the tail around the anchored end back to the right and down through the adjacent loop (Shown in the second picture)
3 - You simply need to bring the tail back over the top of the knot to the left (Shown in the third picture)
4 - Bring the tail end up through the far loop following the anchored end (Shown in the fourth picture)
5 - Finally pull the knot tight (Shown in the fifth picture)
As you can see the first four pictures are simply tracing the knot back through with the tail end
For the last part while you pull the knot tight you may want to make small adjustments and rearrange how it all fits together If the knot does not lay perfectly smoothand tight its NOT a big deal
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 5 Finishing The Knot After completing the Figure 8 knot you will want to somehow secure the tail end of the rope out of the way There are a couple different ways to do this the way that Iwill demonstrate is using whats called a Stopper Knot This secondary knot is similar to a Fishermans knot and is pretty simple I have once again divided thisprocess into several smaller steps
1 - Start by wrapping the tail end around the anchored end (As shown in the first picture)
2 - Wrap the tail back underneath the two vertical segments (As shown in the second picture)
3 - Simply repeat the first two steps wrapping the tail around again (As shown in the third picture)
4 - This step in the fourth picture may look complicated but all you need to do is insert the tail up through the two loops that you have just made
5 - To finish off the knot you will want to slowly pull the tail end while gently pushing the bottom of the stopper knot upwards If you have successfully completed this knotit should look something like the fifth picture
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 6 Ready To Climb Now that you have mastered the Figure 8 knot you can securely harness yourself into a climbing rope Remember there are many other skills that go into setting up ananchor and belaying a climber This tutorial only covers the figure 8 knot For more information there are many great websites that demonstrate how to correctly set up asafe climbing system (Ive posted a few below) If you are a beginning climber I recommend that you read up on a few other climbing techniques Also you shouldprobably go to a climbing wall or gym where there are experienced climbers that can show you the ropes Hopefully this tutorial has been helpful Have fun and be safe
Some useful linkshttpwwwstephenprattnetAnchorsanchorshtmhttpwwwuoregonedu~oppclimbingtopicsanchorshtmlhttpwwwabc-of-rockclimbingcomhowtoclimbingtechniquesasp
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Related Instructables
How to Tie aFigure EightKnot byTactical_Pyro
Paracord KnotDisplay Bord byJamie bagn
Basic KnotsGuide byzorro3355
How to Climb aTree (withprussiks) bystasterisk
How to climb atree (using onlyrope) thefunsimple wayby louieaw
How to get arope into a tree(withoutclimbing it) byvitex
How to tievarious knots byadaviel
How to make arope swing byjdub0928
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Turks Head Knots on a Bottleby sklnxbones on July 6 2010
Intro Turks Head Knots on a BottleThis is the finished project A bottle decorated with three Turks Head Knots There are only three knots on this bottle The RED and the BLUE knots are each a 20 Bightby 3 Lead Turks Head Knots The WHITE knot is a 20 Bight by 19 Lead Turks Head Knot
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 1 Supplies
Cord Lots and Lots of cord I cant tell you how much each bottle is differentBottle Washed and Dried inside and out Make sure to remove all water spotsThreaded Needle Cord screws into the threads at the base of the needlePegs I use brass rivets used as a map to tie the Turks Head KnotsHole Punch Used to punch holes in the painters tape to hold the pegsPainters Tape To hold the pegs in place and to make your map for the Turks Head KnotsMarker To write on the painters tapeCloth Towel To remove finger prints and dirt from your bottleKrazy Glue or Super Glue This is used to secure the knots in place to the bottle
OPTIONAL BUT HIGHLY RECOMMENDEDI use the Turks Head Cookbook from KnotToolcom
Step 2 PreparationYou will need to find a bottle you like I used an empty instant tea bottle of course washed and dried (I like to put the bottle in the oven for a few minutes to dry the insidewithout water spots Take off the lid and do not put lid in the oven) Now measure the circumference of the bottle Take a cord and tightly wrap the cord around the bottleMark where the ends meet and use a ruler to measure the length of the cord For my instant tea bottle the circumference is 27cm I know from past knots that I have tiedthat I want my knot to have 20 Bights in the top and bottom (bands) knots I am going to use the Bights in the (bands) knots to tie the middle knot Now divide the numberof Bights (20) into the size of the circumference (27) to get the space between each Bight (135) With me so far
Now take two pieces of painters tape using a ruler measure out the length of the circumference and mark the length on the both pieces of tape Next you will mark thespace between each Bight on the tape
Step 3 Adding the PegsI like to use pegs when tying Turks Head Knots it just makes tying the knot easier
These are what I use for pegs
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 4 Adding Pegs to the TapeNow take a hole punch to cut holes in the tape where the lines meet You will place the pegs in the holes
Insert a peg in each hole and carefully stick the first piece of tape to the bottle
Step 5 Adding the 2nd row of pegsNow do the same thing with the second piece of tape The numbers on each piece of tape must line up
This picture shows you what you should have now This odd looking thing will be your map to tie the Turks Head Knot And this is the end of Step 1
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 6 Tying the first Turks Head KnotUsing the Turks Head Cookbook follow the numbers going over and under as indicated in the book I chose a 20 Bight by 3 Lead knot which will give me a nice bandaround the bottle Once the ends meet you have made one complete knot Tape the running end of your cord and start removing the pegs and the tape
Step 7 Remove the pegs and the tapeBe careful not to untie the knot as you remove the pegs and tape from the bottle Continue to remove all the pegs and remove the tape from the bottle At this point theknot will be very loose and will need to be tightened up
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 8 Remove the slack from the knotHere you can see just how much the knot expanded Starting with the standing end begin to pull the slack out of the knot going towards the running end of the cordDo not expect to pull all the slack out at once You may have to make 3 - 5 attempts at removing the slack out of the knot DO NOT remove all of the slack out of the knotIn order to make the bands we will have to triple the Turks Head Knot We will do this by following the knot three times The threaded needle will really come in handyhere
Step 9 Triple the KnotOnce you have made three passes of the Turks Head Knot use your needle to go under your knot about half the circumference and cut the cord The knot will be tightenough to hide the tail in placeTIP I carefully add a couple of drops of super glue UNDER the band to hold them in place and keep them from sliding around in the nextsteps A drop or two in 3 or 4 places around the band should be enough
Step 10 Add the second knotNow repeat this whole step for the second bandWhen tying the second band you must make sure the Bights line up to the first band This is crucial for the next stepWipe down the bottle to make sure all your finger prints and adhesive from the tape are all removed You want to make sure your bottle is clean at this point Any dirt orfinger prints left on the bottle will be almost impossible to remove From this point on we will use gloves when tying our last knot
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 11 Maping the Top KnotStick a piece of painters tape on top of your first band leaving the bottom of the knot exposedUse a marker to count the number of Bights in your knot Instead of using the pegs we are going to use the Bights to tie our next Turks Head Knot
Step 12 Mapping the Bottom KnotDo the same thing for the bottom band but you must make sure your numbers on top and bottom line up So 1 on top should be the same position as 1 on the bottom
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 13 Adding the last knotAgain using the Turks Head Cookbook and the threaded needle you are going to follow the instructions going over and under as indicated in the book Be sure to usegloves when ever you handle the bottle
Step 14 Thats ItFor this Turks Head Knot I am using a 20 Bight by 19 Lead knot
Because of the amount of cord you are working with your cord will get twisted and knotted You will have to un-twist the cord often Its a pain in the rear but it has to bedone And it has to be done alot
Continue to tie the knot until you finish the knot If you have the cord and the patience you can double or triple the knot When you are done use your needle to hide theends under your bands Cut the ends and your DONE
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Related Instructables
Monkeys FistFloatingKeychain byjokerlz
How To Make ATurks headKnot WithParacord byDoggie Stylish
Tying Trivetsout of Rope forHoliday Gifts bykylemarsh
Paracord KnotDisplay Bord byJamie bagn
How to Make ATurks Head(Photos) bymchs60chip
A pocket full ofknots byKiteman
Monkeys fistknot AND themonkey byjonathan111
TiteTie is theTruckers Knoton Steroids bytitetie
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Larks head noose -- an easy useful knot that tightens and loosensby Larry Breed on February 19 2009
Intro Larks head noose -- an easy useful knot that tightens and loosensI thought I knew all the basic knots but then I was taught this incredibly useful simple knot Its good for tying up the neck of a bag that you want to repeatedly open andsecurely close Its good for tying around a springy bundle that will need tightening and retightening And its easy to undo
Ive looked at knot literature but havent found a name for this so I named it The basic knot is well known its called a larks head Since all Ive done is to slip the twoends through the larks head to make a noose I call it that
WARNING Dont use this knot when human safety would depend on it Climbers and mountaineers have well-tested reliable knots for such situations
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Image Notes1 To tighten further step on this side of the larks head and pull the free ends
Step 1 Double the cord overThe larks head noose requires enough cord to go twice around your bundle plus a foot or two Find the center and double it over Sailors call this a bight
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 2 Form the larks headComing from below the bight hook your thumb and forefinger over the two sides Reach outward and downward and pinch your fingertips together underneath thedoubled cord
Youve made a larks head Move the crossing cord a little farther from your hand so theres a clear opening through the two half-loops
Step 3 Form the nooseSlip the two ends of the cord through the opening we were just talking about Pull the larks head tight so it grips the two cords Find something that needs constrictingand put the noose around it
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 4 Tightening retightening and lockingSlide the knot against the bundle If its not tight enough to keep from slipping tighten it by holding it in one hand and tugging on the cords one at a time with the otherhand Notice that you can slide the knot out again for instance to re-open the bag you just tied shut For some applications this may be as tight as you need it
A springy bundle probably still feels loose If so compress the bundle and get a new grip on the cords Rest your foot on the bundle on the cords nearest the larks headand pull to slide the larks head tighter
To make the knot more permanent you can lock it Make an overhand in the cord ends (Exactly like the first step in tying shoelaces) With your foot still on the bundlepull on the cords and move your hands apart until youre pulling in opposite directions You have just locked the larks head and you can trust it to stay that way()
But lets say that later on you want to loosen the locked knot Again put your foot on the bundle and cords nearest the larks head hold the two cord ends together andpull This makes a little slack between the overhand and the larks head so you can untie the overhand
In twine or small string the locking overhand knot may be difficult to undo Use a shoelace knot instead of an overhand and itll unlock easily
() If youre using slippery cord like polypropylene an overhand may not lock securely You may want to tie another overhand knot For added security wrap a shortlength of duct tape around the two cords close to the knot
Image Notes1 To tighten further step on this side of the larks head and pull the free ends
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Related Instructables
TRX fromParacordChallengeAccepted bythrake
A pocket full ofknots byKiteman
Lens CapLanyard by~teknoarsonist~ how to tie a
noose byawesume
AdjustableParacordGlassesLanyard byjdtwelve12
HangmansNoose PackClosure byPopEye42
Paraleash - ADog LeashFrom Paracordby The Ideanator
How to make arugged andhandy ParacordBelt by Jake22
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Cross Knot Paracord Lanyardby Stormdrane on May 22 2011
AuthorStormdrane Stormdranes BlogNo matter where you go there you are
Intro Cross Knot Paracord Lanyard
This instructable will show how to make a paracord lanyard using the cross knot and snake knot The lanyard can be used as a wallet chain to secure a key chainkeyring knife multitool flashlight cell phone camera binoculars compass and other assorted pocketable gadgets gear and gizmos More projects links knotreferences can be seen in my blog Stormdranes Blog
The cross knot can also be found under different names from other online and book references as The Chinese Crown Knot Chinese Cross Japanese Crown KnotJapanese Success Knot Rustlers Knot Friendship Knot and knot 808 in The Ashley Book of Knots
You can use the loop end of the lanyard to attach it to your item and use the clip end to secure to a belt loop bag pack etc Or run a belt through the lanyards loopand use the attachment to clip onto your gadget gear gizmo etc Longer versions could be used as a pet leash for your dog cat pot belly pig iguana ferret or otherassorted leashable rodents and varmints
Step 1 Supplies
For this project youll need 10 feet of paracord scissors swivel snap hook and a lighter Optional supplies are hemostats tape measure and your own choice ofattachments like split ring swivel clip carabiner snap shackle etc
I used 10 feet of paracord to make a finished lanyardwallet chain of about 25 feet in length You can use more or less to make one of your own preferred length
There are many online sources for paracord available in different lengths and color choices and can sometimes be found at local sporting goods outlets and ArmyNavySurplus stores Various attachments can also be found online and at local retail establishments and you may even scavenge them from keyringskeychains pet leashesetc that you already have
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 2 Step 2
Find the center of your length of cord form a bight which will be the the loop end of your lanyard
Step 3 Step 3
To tie the cross knot youre going to bring the strand of cord on the right over the left strand back under to the right and back under again to the left making an S shapeas shown
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 4 Step 4
Now with the left strand bring it up under the S shape through the top loop as shown
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 5 Step 5
Bring the strand back down over the first two parts of the S shape and under the bottom as shown
Step 6 Step 6
Tighten up the knot by carefully pulling on each of the working ends and loop ends of the cord You can adjust the size of the lanyards loop by working slack from theloop end to decrease its size or from the working ends to increase the loops size Ive kept the loop at about 2 inches in length so that a belt will fit through it but youcan make it larger or smaller to your preference You can also check that the working ends of the paracord are equal in length at this point and work slack through theknot to even them up if needed
Note the other side of the knot looks different with the cross pattern as shown
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 7 Step7
Now you can tie the next knot in the lanyard the same way as the first After tying the next knot work the slack through the knot until you have about 1 inch of spacebetween them then tighten and continue with the next knot Note that the knots look different on each side frontback and that you tie the each facing the same way oralternate them if you choose
Continue making knots until you have about 1 foot of cord left with each end of the working strands
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 8 Step 8
Now you will add your attachment like the swivel snap hook shown putting both strands through the swivel eye to begin tying the snake knot
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 9 Step 9Bring the right strand under the cords then up over them as shown
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 10 Step 10Now take the left strand over across the other strands back behind and under the cords and up through the right strand loop as shown Then tighten
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 11 Step 11
Take the right strand under and behind the cords then bring it back through the tightened knot along side itself as shown and tighten This is where hemostats come inhandy with tying this knot working the cord through the previously tightened part of the knot It can be done without hemostats but requires tighteningloosening of theknots with just your fingertips
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 12 Step 12
Turn the lanyard over so the other side of the knot is facing up The working strand now on the right side will be brought under the cords back up and down through theparallel strands of the knot as shown then tighten And continue this process flipping the lanyard over taking the right strand under and back up around and through theparallel cords and tighten Continue until you run out of cord or reach the cross knot
Youll now trim off any excess cord and quick melt the end of the strands to prevent fraying to finish
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 13 Variations
You can use other two strand knots instead of the cross knot for variations on this style of lanyard A few alternatives to try tying in a spaced out series or combination ofthem Matthew Walker knot double wall knot lanyard knot double overhand knots double figure 8 knots etc The finishing knots around the attachment can also bedifferent as Ive used the lanyard knot sometimes just one or several in a row
You can also use variations of the cross knot with paracord bracelets and watchbands Doubled version of the knot shown as a paracord bracelet and alternating withtwo pairs of strands for the paracord watchband Leftover pieces of paracord can be used for zipper pulls key ring fobs even paracord cross pendants
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Related Instructables
Paracord ChainSinnet FastDeploy BoonieHatband (video)by Stormdrane
Zigzag SpoolingParacord (video)by Stormdrane
SurvivalBracelet(Updated) bytevers94
Celtic ButtonKnot (video) byStormdrane
ParacordBoonie HatWrap (video) byStormdrane
Paracord wristlanyard madewith the snakeknot byStormdrane
SurvivalBracelet II bytevers94
Cobra WeaveKey Fob bytevers94
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Paracord wrist lanyard made with the snake knotby Stormdrane on September 12 2007
AuthorStormdrane Stormdranes BlogNo matter where you go there you are
Intro Paracord wrist lanyard made with the snake knotThis instructable will show how to make a wrist lanyard using paracord and the snake knot The lanyard can be used to secure a key chain knife multi-tool flashlightcell phone camera binoculars compass etc More projects links knot references can be seen on my blog page Stormdranes Blog
Step 1 SuppliesYoull need about 45 feet of paracord(you may use other types of cordage if desired) The paracord I used is from the Supply Captain I left the inner strands in theparacord but you can remove them if preferred If done in one color it will be one continuous 45 ft length if done in two colors youll need 3 ft for the primary color thatincludes the wrist section and 15 ft for the second color that will show in the snake knot Also used are scissors tape measure or ruler lighter hemostats or needle nosepliers(not necessary but they make it much easier) and a swivel clip key ring snap hook cell phone lariat carabiner or whatever attachment you prefer to use
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 2 Attaching two colors of paracordIf using two colors of paracord you will insert one color about 12 inch into the other color You may remove a small amount of the paracords inner strands by pullingthem out trimming with scissors and pulling the paracord outer sheath back over the strands leaving room to insert the other color For various projects Ive used threedifferent methods for attaching two colors of paracord melting sewing or gluing The choice is yours I usually sew them together it doesnt matter as long as its a goodconnection It will be hidden under the first knot
Step 3 Find the center of the length of paracordTake the center of the length of cord and bring it thru the attachment Im using a swivel clip For this tutorial Im measuring the wrist loop at about 10 inches from theattachment The connection of the two colors will be just on the other side at this point
Step 4 Making the snake knotThe snake knot will be made around the wrist loop section of paracord the loop strands being the core of the knot Ive added a series of photos showing the steps Iuse By using two colors youll see that I flip the lanyard over after making each knot so that Im working with the cord on the right side of the lanyard I bring it under allthe other cords working the hemostats under the previously tightened knot and pulling the cord back thru Then tightening up the knot keeping the cord from twisting andworking it up against the previous knot Again flipping the work over youll see two parallel cords of the same color which will be split with the cord on the right goingunder around and pulled thru with the hemostats then tightened up Continue this procedure until youve done about 10 snake knots(you can count them down eitherside
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 5 Count your knotsOnce you have 10 snake knots youre almost done Youll notice from the photos of both sides of the lanyard that one side has the snake knots alternating all the waydown and the other has a set of parallel knots at the top and botton of the sequence of knots Youll always have those at the start and finish of the snake knots I preferto have them end up on the same side of the lanyard so one side appears to have a more uniform look but its not required
Step 6 Trim and melt the excess paracordUse the scissors to trim off the excess cord and quickly melt the ends with a lighter so they dont fray
Step 7 Youre doneYou can make a range of variations using less or more cordknots Shorten the loop for a double ended key chain or make the loop longer for use as a neck lanyard aLanyard Break-Away Connector could be added for the safety conscious You can also add a wooden bead skull cord lock etc Visit my blog page for more knot relatedprojects links and resources Stormdranes Blog You can find ideas for other geargadgets to attach to your lanyard on EDC Forums
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Related Instructables
Paracord ChainSinnet FastDeploy BoonieHatband (video)by Stormdrane
Cross KnotParacordLanyard byStormdrane
Zigzag SpoolingParacord (video)by Stormdrane
SurvivalBracelet II bytevers94
SurvivalBracelet(Updated) bytevers94
Cobra WeaveKey Fob bytevers94
ParacordBoonie HatWrap (video) byStormdrane
Paracord KnotDisplay Bord byJamie bagn
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
How to tie various knotsby adaviel on September 7 2009
Intro How to tie various knotsKnots as a way of joining rope without special equipment are useful in many situations On a sailboat knots are essential both for daily use and for emergency repairsThis instructable describes several different common knots eg
Sheet Bend - to tie two lines togetherBowline - to make a loopReef Knot - to fasten a bundle of materialFishermans Bend - to secure a line to a post or ring
These knots are good for regular rope - braided or 3-strand polyester or natural fibre (hemp sisal) Monofilament (fishing line) or steel cable performs better with differentknots
Knots are typically quite a lot weaker than straight rope - when rope goes around a tight radius such as in a knot the outside is under more tension than the insideSplices (which require special tools and are time-consuming to make) are stronger so permanent fittings usually have eye-splices
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 1 Sheet BendThe sheet bend is used to tie two lines together It is perhaps the most generally useful knot of all When used to tie a line to itself making a loop it is called a bowlineThe strain is taken on the ropes in the middle - not the one coming out the side
How the knot is made is not critical - it is the final shape that is important One can make the flat loop first and work the other rope around it Or one can make thecrossed loop first - required when tying a bowline
The two images show front and back views of the same knot
AdvantagesEasy to makeEasy to undo when tension is removedDoes not easily capsize
DisadvantagesHard to make under loadDangerous to make under heavy load
UsesJoining two equally-sized ropesExtending a towline or stern line
Method 1 the same as a bowline
Method 2 starting with the flat loop
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 2 Double Sheet BendThe double sheet bend is used to tie two lines of different thickness - but not too different It is the same as a normal sheet bend but with an extra turn of the thinner ropearound the flat loop in the thickerThe load goes on the line through the flat loop not the one that comes out the side of the knot
UsesSecuring a heaving line to a tow lineExtending a stern line if you dont have enough line of one thickness
Step 3 BowlineThe bowline is really a special case of the sheet bend but it it tied at the end of a rope to make a loop
The photos show the completed loop and closeups of the front and back of the actual knot Note that it is the same as the sheet bend - but it must be made the right wayround This loop does not tighten in use The knot is quite easy to untie once the load is removed With practice it is very quick to tie
Some usesSecuring a dinghy line to a railing or stanchionSecuring an anchor line to an anchorTie a jib sheet to the sailTie a mooring line around a rock or treeTie a float to an anchor triplineUse one in each line to tie two ropes of very different sizes - eg a throwing line to a large tow ropeDisadvantages the knot must be completely made before it will take any strain - it is hard to tie if there is already a load on the rope
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Linked bowlines
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 4 Bowline on the BightA bowline on the bight is a bowline tied in a loop of rope (neither end is needed) The shape is the same as a bowline made with a double line but the middle of thebight forms the loop around the standing part
UsesAn impromptu bosuns chair - to sit in while being transferred between two boats at sea
Step 5 Clove HitchThe clove hitch can be made when you only have the bight (the middle) of a rope not the ends
UsesSecuring a burgee pole to a burgee halyard (a continuous loop of thin line)Securing a tiller from swinging
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 6 Round Turn and Two Half-HitchesThis is a knot used to secure a line to a ring or bar Wind a couple of turns around the bar then secure the end with two hitches around the standing part (this looks like aclove hitch when done)
AdvantagesCan be made under load - it is easy to take turns around the bar while maintaining tension on the ropeStrong - provided the bar is thicker than the rope the rope is not weakened by sharp bendsDisadvantagesThe end tends to work loose
UsesSecuring a line to a mooring ring or samson post
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 7 Fishermans BendThe fishermans bend is the same as the round turn and two half hitches except that the first hitch is looped under the round turn This uses the tension on the rope tosecure the end from working loose
AdvantagesSecure against working loose
DisadvantagesHard to make under tensionHard to undo under tensionMay seize up under load when wet making it hard to undo
UsesSecuring mooring line to ringSecuring fender lines to rail
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 8 Studsail BendThe studsail bend is like the fishermans bend but the second hitch is also secured under the round turn making it even more secure against working loose when undertension
AdvantagesVery secure against working looseDisadvantagesHard to make under tensionHard to undo under tension
Step 9 Figure-8 KnotThe figure-eight knot is used to prevent an end of rope from passing through a block (pulley) Sometimes called a stopper knot
The double figure-8 knot is used in rock climbing as an alternative to a bowline to secure a climbing harness to the end of a safety rope The double knot is made bymaking a single knot then tracing back around the knot with the free end after passing it around the harness loop
AdvantagesEasy to verify by inspectionNot prone to work loose
DisadvantagesSlow to make and undoCannot be made under load
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 10 Prussic KnotThe prussic knot may be used as a climbing ascender - when made around a vertical rope as shown downwards tension on the ends locks the knot while release oftension allows it to be slid up the rope A pair of prussic knots on foot loops may be used in tandem to climb a rope
UsesClimbing a ropeTaking up tension to free a riding turn on a winch
Step 11 Reef KnotThe reef knot or square knot is used to tie a bundle of material together It must be made around something - it should not be used to tie two free ropes togetherbecause it can easily capsizeIt should not be used to make a loop unless it can be tensioned around a solid object It should not be used around a person - use a bowline instead A capsized reefknot will slip easily and could constrict and cause severe injury
UsesReefing a sail (tying the unused portion around a spar)Securing a furled sail to a spar (sail ties)Wrapping a parcelTying shoelaces
AdvantagesMay be made under moderate load
DisadvantagesCapsizes (works free) if used improperlyCan seize up under load when wet
Tying the knot
Capsizing a reef knot
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 12 CleatsThis is not a knot but is very common on boatsThe first picture shows a rope cleated normally The second shows one with a final locking turn - the last turn is twisted before placing over the cleat so that the tensionon the rope helps secure the free end
When working with ropes under tension take a turn or two around a winch or cleat before trying to secure the end with a knot The load on the free end falls exponentiallywith each turn taken Severe injury can result if a finger or other body part is caught in a loop of rope or between a rope and another object
Step 13 Practice themIt is sometimes useful to be able to tie knots in the dark or as in this video behind your back
Related Instructables
AThird Hand forSailing or OtherThings by WadeTarzia
Paracord KnotDisplay Bord byJamie bagn
Trip LogOutriggerCanoe Sailingthe CaliforniaChannel Islandsby TimAnderson
How to Tie aFigure EightKnot byTactical_Pyro
How to build apirate ship bymdelaney3
Build a ShortDragon (16 foot3-BoardOutriggerSailing Canoe)by Wade Tarzia
repairing aheadsail by josh
How to get arope into a tree(withoutclimbing it) byvitex
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
How to Tie the Lanyard Knotby eddy14777 on January 31 2010
Intro How to Tie the Lanyard KnotMany people including myself have had trouble following the Stormdrane youtube video on tying the lanyard knot so i have done some research and found the solution
Image Notes1 Finished knot
Step 1 MaterialsAll you need is a reasonable length of para cord or whatever you wish to use
Image Notes1 One reasonable amount
Step 2 First StepThe first thing you are going to do is to make a bight that leaves you with to congruent endsThen you are going to put your ring finger through the bight
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Image Notes1 Close enough2 Bight
Step 3 Starting the KnotMake a loop just like the one in the picture and place it over the top strandBring the top strand under the bottom strand
Image Notes1 Notice the way the loop is done2 Top strand
Image Notes1 Bottom strand2 Top strand is under
Step 4 The Most Important PartNow you take the top stand from the previous picture and feed it over the first part of the loop under itself and back over the remainder of the loop
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Image Notes1 Under me2 Top strand3 This should make a diamond type shape
Step 5 DoublingNow take the bottom stand and take it around the part of the top strand nearest to the bight and than come up through the diamond shape in the middleDo the same for the top strand
Image Notes1 Top strand
Image Notes1 Both through the diamond
Step 6 FinishingWhen you take it off your finger it should look like thisWork out the slack by pulling on the bight and the two strands
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Image Notes1 Finished knot
Related Instructables
Cross KnotParacordLanyard byStormdrane
Celtic ButtonKnot (video) byStormdrane
Paracord wristlanyard madewith the snakeknot byStormdrane
Paracord ChainSinnet FastDeploy BoonieHatband (video)by Stormdrane
Zigzag SpoolingParacord (video)by Stormdrane
ParacordBoonie HatWrap (video) byStormdrane
Paracord IDbadge Lanyardby Flahusky
Cobra WeaveKey Fob bytevers94
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Four knots to make paracord into a useful toolby erik_mccray on March 27 2010
Authorerik_mccrayI am an ex-fabricator that is now a stay at home dad I love my new job but I do miss making stuff I love this site amp I am getting involved as a way to keep myskills upOn top of fad work I have also run two small business in the past One was custom sewing amp the other was as a small engine mechanicI have two votec degrees one in metal fabrication amp the other is in engine repairI look forward to getting to know everyone here
Intro Four knots to make paracord into a useful toolParacord is an awesome multitool used everywhere from the wild blue yonder to the deepest caverns But like any good tool it is only as good as the knowledge the userhas about the tool With most people out there using bungee cords amp ratchet straps it seems that paracord is being used for nothing more than friendship bracelets forgrown men This is a shame because for less then the price of a few cheap bungee cords amp some to short to be helpful straps You can get yourself hundreds of feet ofparacord
The key to getting the most out of the paracord is good knot work The first thing you need to know is what makes a good knot One is that the knot is easy amp quick to tieamp more impotant is that the knot is easy amp quick to untie The hitch class of knots is by far the best group of knots that the average person could know The four mostuseful hitch knots are the half hitch a quick simple knot that forms the base for many other knots the inline half hitch allowing you to get the most out of one length ofparacord the slippery hitch that gives you both on the fly control over tension on your paracord but also an adjustable loop that will not change unless you want it amp theinline truckers hitch instantly doubling the your pulling power
Step 1 To get started lets get some terminology that will be used defined
line= the paracord
Main line= the part of the paracord doing the work for example holding down your tarp or the long part of the paracord
Mid line= the middle of the length of the paracord
End line= the unused length of paracord or the short length of paracord
Step 2 The half hitch The half hitch is a simple way to secure a line to an anchor point like the tie down points in most trucks A half hitch is a constrictor knot meaning that the harder you pullon the line the tighter the knots grip gets Another common constrictor knot is the slip knot
Step 1 wrap your line around your anchor point Step 2 wrap the end line around the main line
Step 3 pass the end line threw the end line side of the newly formed loop
step 4 now take the slack out of the knot
step 5 to make sure the knot is secure tie another half hitch to the main line This knot is called adouble half hitch
step 6 another useful thing that can be done with the half hitch is that instead of repeating the wrap on the main line but repeating it on what you are tying to the half hitchcan be used to bind something like a stack of 2x4s
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Image Notes1 End line2 Main line3 step 1
Image Notes1 Step 2
Image Notes1 passing thew the end line side of the loop2 step 3
Image Notes1 step 5
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Image Notes1 step 6
Step 3 The mid line half hitch The mid line half hitch is for when the length of line is to long for the job at hand amp you dont want to have to cut the line to size or you are using multiple anchor pointswith one length of line
Step 1 double up the line at the point in the length you wish to make the knot
Step 2 wrap the doubled up portion of line around your anchor point The doubled up length is now now the end line
Step 3 now tie just as you did for the regular half hitch repeat the knot to make a double half hitch for security
Image Notes1 A mid line double half hitch
Image Notes1 step 1
Image Notes1 The end line2 step 2
Image Notes1 Step 3
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 4 The slippery hitch The slippery hitch is a great knot for adjusting tension on the main line or for having an adjustable fixed loop To adjust the knot simply slide the knot up or down the mainline
Step 1 wrap your line around the anchor point or just double over the line to form a loop
Step 2 wrap the end line around the main line three times Wrapping in the direction of the anchor point or loop
Step 3 put together the two lines making up the loop amp wrap the two lines one time with the end line
Step 4 pass the end line thew the last loop formed covering the two lined of the loop
Step 5 pull the knot tite
step 6 to adjust the size of the loop or main line tension grab the knot amp slide it up or down the main line
Image Notes1 grab just the knot its self to adjust it2 step 5
Image Notes1 step 1
Image Notes1 step 2
Image Notes1 step 3
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Image Notes1 step 4
Image Notes1 grab just the knot its self to adjust it2 step 5
Image Notes1 same knot as in last pic Just slid up2 step 6
Step 5 The mid line truchers hitch The truckers hitch is a great way to double the pulling force on a line There are many ways to tie this knot the problem with most of them is that at some point you aregoing to have to pass the end line through a loop on the main line that is acting like a pulley to double your pulling force this is great if you are making the knot close tothe end of your line but if you are using a 300 length of line amp want to make the knot in the first ten feet having to pass 290 of line thew a loop is a pain But with a fewhalf hitches you will not have to pass the end line threw any loop on the main line
step 1 wrap your line around the anchor point then double over your end line laying the top of the loop over the main line
Step 2 double up your main line amp lay the loop over the loop made by the end line
step 3 in main line above the knot twist in a loop
step 4 put main line loop thew the loop made in step 3 amp pull this loop tight over your main line loop forming a half hitch Repeat step 3 amp 4 to make a doublehalf hitch
step 5 To use the knot just pull down on the end line to put tension on the main line
step 6 after you have the main line snug tie a mid line double half hitch around the two lines forming the loop at the end of the main line with the end line
step 7 Tie a double half hitch with the end line around the end loop of the mid line half hitch of step 6 using the same method as used in steps 3 amp 4
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Image Notes1 the end of step 6
Image Notes1 main line2 end line3 step 1
Image Notes1 main line loop2 end line loop
Image Notes1 step 3
Image Notes1 step 4
Image Notes1 step 4 at the end with a double half hitch on the main loop
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Image Notes1 pull here2 step 5
Image Notes1 the start of step 6
Image Notes1 the end of step 6
Image Notes1 step 72 now the rest of the line is free to do more work
Related Instructables
Paracord KnotDisplay Bord byJamie bagn
ChokelessAdjustableParacord DogLeash byPizzaman101
ParacordLadder wWooden Rungsby josestude
tie a paracordshackle grip byitri45
ParacordPrussik Belt byJavaNut13
TiteTie is theTruckers Knoton Steroids bytitetie
ID Lanyard(Photos) byeschmunk
Dog Toys forHeavy Chewersby J3443RY
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Figure 8 knot and double 8 knotby jonathan111 on November 28 2007
Intro Figure 8 knot and double 8 knotI will show you how to tie a figure 8 knot and a figure 8 follow through
Step 1 Stating the knotThis is a simple knot so just follow the pictures
Step 2 Finishing the knotCross the string under and then push it through the hole Pull tightly unless you are going to do the follow through and leave it somewhat loose
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 3 The follow through knotThe follow through knot should be tied around something brought back and followed through the path of the 8 knot Look at the pictures Basically follow through the 8knot backwards
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Related Instructables
Climb Safe WithA Figure 8Knot by mattste A pocket full of
knots byKiteman
How to Tie aFigure EightKnot byTactical_Pyro
Paracord KnotDisplay Bord byJamie bagn
Cross KnotParacordLanyard byStormdrane
How to Tie aFire-escapeKnot by leonardoismael
Truckers HitchTHE mostawesome knoton the planetby schneidp20
Paracord ZipperPuller byrepeet13
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Truckers Hitch THE most awesome knot on the planetby schneidp20 on October 12 2008
Authorschneidp20I like building stuff Trouble is there just isnt enough time to build everything Sigh
Intro Truckers Hitch THE most awesome knot on the planetYes I know that there are plenty of other cool knots out there many of which I literally couldnt live wo I rock climb However this knot is unlike any other Plus Ineeded a grabber for my Instructable -) (BTW this ISNT a climbing knot) And in truth it isnt a knot by itself but rather a system of common knots
Have you ever tried to tie something down for transporting but just couldnt get the lines tight andor during transport the lines would continually loosen Then this is theknot for you I learned this knot back in the 70s when specialty car racks and ratchet straps were rare or unheard of I initially used it to tie a canoe on a car rack bothattaching to the rack as well as the lines to the bow and stern of the canoe Even with all the new gizmos available today this knot still shines because all you need is arope and ropes dont hum in the wind like straps
The unique aspect of this knot is that it gives you a 2-1 mechanical advantage when tightening the rope Be careful though You can actually damage some thingsbecause of the mechanical advantage This knot holds fast and is easy to untie hallmark traits of any good knot
Below you see the finished knot system well break it apart in the steps that follow
Image Notes1 1st anchor point a bowline2 loop3 securing knots 2 half hitches4 securing loose end with a fishermans knot5 2nd anchor point (should be round)
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Image Notes1 X marks the spot
Step 1 Initial setupThe first step is to anchor one end of the rope and then loop the rope around a 2nd anchor point
For attaching to the 1st anchor point I chose bowline a close 2 on my list -) There are other instructables on that one so I wont bore you here
The 2nd anchor really should be round because it serves as a pulley in this block and tackle type knot Ive used it on sharp anchor points and it doesnt work as well
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 2 Creating a slip knotTie a slip knot somewhere between the two anchor points Correct placement of the slip knot takes some experience to judge it correctly Typically I place it too close tothe 2nd anchor point and end up with not enough room to work with If the knot ends up too far from 2nd anchor point you can extend the knot by enlarging the loop
Be sure you tie the slip knot as shown You may not be able to untie other knots
In this small example the slip knot is uncharacteristically close to the 1st anchor point
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 3 Tightening and securingThe loose end of the rope that went around the 2nd anchor point goes through the slip knot loop Pull the loose end to the desired tension and secure with two halfhitches
Note To allow better view of the knots the rope isnt really tightened in this example
Step 4 Securing loose endThe final knot is just to secure the loose end somehow I chose a fishermans knot to do this
To tie a fishermans knot the rope goes around twice and goes under the X created by the loops Pull the loose end to tighten Finally slide the knot to put tension onthe half hitches
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Image Notes1 X marks the spot
Step 5 FinishedThere you have it I guarantee that the first time you really use this knot (not just practice) you will be amazed at how well it works and youll wish you knew this knot along time ago You may even come over to my side and declare that is is THE most awesome knot on the planet -)
Enjoy and happy haulingDave
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Related Instructables
TiteTie is theTruckers Knoton Steroids bytitetie
Four knots tomake paracordinto a usefultool byerik_mccray
Modify yourbike rack tocarry a sunfishor other boat byewilhelm
SurfboardHammock byGermy
GiganticHalloweenSpider Web bynolte919
How To Tie ASpiders Hitch(video) by back-cast
Three-hitch mathair ornamentby michiexile TRX from
ParacordChallengeAccepted bythrake
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Carry any Bottle with a JUG KNOT Handleby hpstoutharrow on September 17 2009
Intro Carry any Bottle with a JUG KNOT HandleTie a JUG KNOT around a water bottle soda bottle or aluminum bottle to make a secure carrying strap
Re-purpose any container into a reusable water bottle by adding a convenient carrying strap This Instructable will demonstrate how to tie a JUG knot which like its namesuggests is meant to properly secure around the neck of a container
With some cord and the knowledge of this knot you will be able add a handle lanyard or carabiner loop to any of your favorite beverages to carry them on the go
It works perfectly for those disposable water bottles and who knows once you add some colorful cord to the plain old clear water bottle you just might beinclined to refill it and use it again(Check out pictures 4amp5 below)
In addition to plastic beverage bottles like pop water and sports drinks you can turn those rugged aluminum beer bottles into a backpacking canteen
Those of you familiar with my previous aluminum bottle InstructablesROLLED RIM METAL TUMBLERhttpwwwinstructablescomidAluminum-Bottle-Tumbler-Cup-Cook-PotALUMINUM BOTTLE LIGHTWEIGHT ALCOHOL STOVEhttpwwwinstructablescomidAluminum-Bottle-Alcohol-Stovewill recognize the water canteen shown below as a re-purposed aluminum beer bottle Here I have added a painted surface treatment to turn it into a proper lookingwater bottle More on that in steps 13 14 15
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 1 Getting StartedCord size is important Select a small medium weight cord like the one shown here It is a general purpose camp cord sold at most sporting goods stores (shoelacesmight also work)
Do not use a heavy cord or rope because the larger diameter will not tuck under the relatively small lip at the top of the bottleneck and the bottle will fall out
Also the smaller cord cinches tight on itself and will not loosen accidentally
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 2 Form a BightThe next steps show how to tie a JUG KNOT It is the basic step for adding a carrying strap It is also the anchor point for any additional fancy bottle trussing you maywant to add
JUG KNOT Step 1
Form a Bight in the center of a length of cord Bight is a knot term for a loop or bend in the rope In this case the main Bight in this knot is highlighted with a white mark Imakes it easier to follow its path in these steps
The running ends of the cord should be equal length
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 3 Pull the Bight downPULL the Bight DOWN forming two Loops
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 4 Cross the LoopsCROSS the right Loop OVER the left Loop
Step 5 Pass the Bight under the 1st loopTake the main Bight and pass it UNDER the left Loop
Step 6 Weave the BightWEAVE the Bight OVER the portion of the right Loop and UNDER the portion of the left Loop
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 7 Extend the BightExtend the Bight OVER the outer portion of the right Loop
Step 8 Flip the Right Loop behindAdditional colored identification points have been added to the loops to follow their travel in these next two steps
The right Loop Yellow marker is FLIPPED BEHIND the knot and ends up on the far left side of the knot
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 9 Flip the 2nd loop in frontRaise the green marker (located on what was formerly the left loop) and pull it down and to the right FLIPPING IT IN FRONT of the knot
Note the blue portion of the this loop will pass around the outside of the yellow portion of the first loop
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Image Notes1 Center of knot that will tighten around the bottles neck
Step 10 Remove SlackNote where the blue green amp yellow markers end up
Start to remove the slack in the loops by pulling the original main Bight (white marker top right) and the two free standing ends at the bottom
the bottle neck will pass through the very center of the knot
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Image Notes1 Center of knot that will tighten around the bottles neck
Step 11 Tighten the KnotAfter removing the slack insert the bottle neck and finish tightening
The knot should look like this before slipping it over the bottle
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 12 Secure on bottle neckThis is the finished knot shown on the neck of various containers
The loop end and the two free standing ends can be tied together to create a carrying handle (last picture below)
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 13 Aluminum Bottle Water Bottle
The next few steps show the features of an aluminum beer bottle re-purposed as a water bottle canteen It is one of many containers that can be reused as a camp waterbottle
The bottle was lightly sanded masked and then pained with a hammered finished paint to create an interesting surface texture
Image Notes1 Textured finish paint makes an interesting grip-able surface2 Masked with tape for painting3 Masked with tape for painting
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Image Notes1 Dowel used for holding the bottle during painting
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 14 Tethered Cork StopperUse a wine bottle man made Cork as a stopper for your aluminum water bottleNote Use a cork that was removed from the wine bottle without the corkscrew penetrating through the bottom end of the cork (A hole all the way through the cork willcause it to leak) Use the unpierced end of the cork inside the water bottle
Drill a hole through the sides of the Cork Thread the cord through the hole to the center of the cord Use the cork as the main Bight and tie the Jug knot as shown inthe beginning steps
Now the cork is tethered to the bottle and will not get lost or fall on the ground
A Carabiner clip passes through the other cord end to attache the water bottle to you belt or pack
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 15 Trussed for TransportThis is another hanging method for carrying your aluminum bottle water canteen A Jug knot is tied conventionally around the neck
The running ends of the knot however are pulled down towards the bottom of the bottle A Barrel Knot is tied about 34 the way down the side of the bottle A squareknot is tied on the bottom of the knot to keep the two running ends tight against the sides of the bottle
I like the look of the accent colored cord running down the sides of the bottle and the fact that the bottle hangs from the belt upside down It adds to its uniqueness
The last picture shows another truss variation
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 16 AdvancedBelow is a bottle with some additional trussing You can be creative as you want It all starts with a re-purposed container and the Jug Knot (and enough cord)
Related Instructables
AluminumBottle TumblerCup amp Cook Potfor an AlcoholStove byhpstoutharrow
Water BottleBelt Clip byuglymike Duct Tape
Water Bottle byrabidsquire2
AluminumBottle AlcoholStove byhpstoutharrow
DIYGlass WaterBottle byCulturespy
Solar WaterHeater forBackpackingUsing WaterBottles and aCar Shade bykopomeroy
Duct tape waterbottle holder(Photos) by pinkmarshmallow
How to make aCamelPack withan old plasticbottle bywillrandship
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Basic Knots Guideby zorro3355 on April 29 2008
Intro Basic Knots Guidehi
Step 1 Thumb knotThe most simple knotUsed as a stopper and prevent ropes from fraying
Step 2 Reef KnotUsed to tie two ropes of equal thickness togetherIt is pretty easy to tie and untie but under tentionit may be diffcult to untieIt is also not sutible for smoothropes(egnylon ropes)
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 3 Figure of eightused as a stopperprevent ropes from fraying and its more secure than tumb knot its is also used to tie Caribinas to ropes and is often used in rock climbing
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 4 Timber hitchused for pulling logs
Step 5 Clove hitchUsed to tie a rope onto a pole or logThe pole must be roundThe pole lust be thicker then the rope itself
(greatly used during pioneering)
Step 6 Sheet bandused to tie ropes of different thickness together(works on same thickness of ropes too)
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 7 Sheep shankTo shorten RopesTo prevent middle fraying
Step 8 Slip knotWhippingUsed as a grip for pulling things(when tied on a stick or small pole)(marlin spike hitch)
Related Instructables
Rope Rings byhpstoutharrow
How to Tie aFigure EightKnot byTactical_Pyro
Whippin (WestCountry Style)by tim_n
SurvivalBracelet(Updated) bytevers94
HangmansNoose PackClosure byPopEye42
Turkey on aTripod byhpstoutharrow
SurvivalBracelet II bytevers94 Zigzag Spooling
Paracord (video)by Stormdrane
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
How to Tie a Fire-escape Knotby leonardo ismael on October 16 2007
Intro How to Tie a Fire-escape KnotThis knot is used by firemen in case of fires for example imagine a scene where the ladder on the firetruck messes up but people need to get down a five story buildingor more All they have is a long piece of rope they can safely get down with a secure knot like the fire-escape knot So why not learn it its easy to do and hard to untieif you tie it tightly
This is from the American Boys Handbook
Step 1 Get Your RopeFirst grab a piece of rope and bend it like this to make a loop in it Follow every step to the smallest detail
Step 2 Twist the RopeNow make a twist like this and hold it together
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 3 Pull Through the TwistPull the loop through the twist you just made from underneath
Step 4 Go Over the Split EndNow pull the tail through the loop
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 5 FinallyAnd finally just pull it through as pictured below
Congratulations you just learned the fire-escape knot
Step 6 Same Name Not KnotThis is another knot called the fire-escape knot this shouldnt be your result
Related Instructables
House FireEscape Plan(video) byWhatHappensNowAdvice
ParacordLadder wWooden Rungsby josestude
Bed SheetEscape Rope byjessehensel
rope ladder(glow-in-the-dark version) bymikeasaurus
HeadlockEscape 2(video) byjohnnyrockstah
QuickFirestarter byMattandJora
Trail sauna byjakee117
How to Kill FireAnts andCommitGenocide byKentsOkay
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Climb Safe With A Figure 8 Knotby mattste on February 23 2010
Intro Climb Safe With A Figure 8 Knot There are many things that a beginning climber needs to know including several important knots Perhaps the most essential knot is the Figure 8 Follow Through Thistutorial will demonstrate how to correctly harness yourself to a rope using a Figure 8 Follow Through knot This knot is used primarily by rock climbers to provide a life-line Since this knot is used as a life-line it is very important to be able to tie it correctly (Your life could depend upon it)
Dont worry with this tutorial and about 5 minutes of practice you can have this knot mastered
Things you will need
- Climbing Harness- Climbing Rope
If you are wanting to go climbing and dont already have these items they can be purchased for about $25 each at most outdoor sporting goods stores If you are merelylooking to learn the knot a belt loop and a rope (about five feet long) will do
Image Notes1 Climbing Harness2 Climbing Rope
Step 1 Dealing With The RopeThroughout this tutorial I will be discussing different parts of the rope To make these instructions as clear as possible I will define a few terms that I will use throughoutthe tutorial The Anchor End of the rope will generally be at the top of the images This is the end that would be anchored to the wall or rock and does not move Wewill not be doing much with the anchored end The Tail End of the rope is the opposite end that we will be dealing with I will call this the tail for short
Now that we have some terms to work with lets get started
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 2 Tying The First Figure 8This knot has several parts to it The first part of the knot is just tying a basic figure 8 To tie the first figure 8 there are four simple steps
1 - Using the tail make a loop over the rope (as shown in the first picture) keeping in mind that there should be about 3 ft of slack on the tail end
2 - Wrap the tail back this time go under the anchored end (As shown in the second picture)
3 - Bring the tail down through the first loop (As shown in the third picture)
4 - Finally pull the two ends to make the knot a little bit tighter and easier to deal with (Shown in the fourth picture)
After these four steps you should end up with a knot that resembles a figure 8
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 3 Looping Into The Harness In order to secure the rope to the harness simply thread the tail end of the rope through the front loop in the harness as shown in the picture below This step isobviously very important
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 4 Following Back Through The Figure 8After looping the rope through the harness you have to thread the tail end of the rope back through the knot following the first figure 8 I have divided this process intofive smaller steps in order to make it more clear
1 - Coming form underneath the knot bring the tail up through the near loop and to the left behind the anchored end of the rope (Shown in the first picture)
2 - Wrap the tail around the anchored end back to the right and down through the adjacent loop (Shown in the second picture)
3 - You simply need to bring the tail back over the top of the knot to the left (Shown in the third picture)
4 - Bring the tail end up through the far loop following the anchored end (Shown in the fourth picture)
5 - Finally pull the knot tight (Shown in the fifth picture)
As you can see the first four pictures are simply tracing the knot back through with the tail end
For the last part while you pull the knot tight you may want to make small adjustments and rearrange how it all fits together If the knot does not lay perfectly smoothand tight its NOT a big deal
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 5 Finishing The Knot After completing the Figure 8 knot you will want to somehow secure the tail end of the rope out of the way There are a couple different ways to do this the way that Iwill demonstrate is using whats called a Stopper Knot This secondary knot is similar to a Fishermans knot and is pretty simple I have once again divided thisprocess into several smaller steps
1 - Start by wrapping the tail end around the anchored end (As shown in the first picture)
2 - Wrap the tail back underneath the two vertical segments (As shown in the second picture)
3 - Simply repeat the first two steps wrapping the tail around again (As shown in the third picture)
4 - This step in the fourth picture may look complicated but all you need to do is insert the tail up through the two loops that you have just made
5 - To finish off the knot you will want to slowly pull the tail end while gently pushing the bottom of the stopper knot upwards If you have successfully completed this knotit should look something like the fifth picture
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 6 Ready To Climb Now that you have mastered the Figure 8 knot you can securely harness yourself into a climbing rope Remember there are many other skills that go into setting up ananchor and belaying a climber This tutorial only covers the figure 8 knot For more information there are many great websites that demonstrate how to correctly set up asafe climbing system (Ive posted a few below) If you are a beginning climber I recommend that you read up on a few other climbing techniques Also you shouldprobably go to a climbing wall or gym where there are experienced climbers that can show you the ropes Hopefully this tutorial has been helpful Have fun and be safe
Some useful linkshttpwwwstephenprattnetAnchorsanchorshtmhttpwwwuoregonedu~oppclimbingtopicsanchorshtmlhttpwwwabc-of-rockclimbingcomhowtoclimbingtechniquesasp
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Related Instructables
How to Tie aFigure EightKnot byTactical_Pyro
Paracord KnotDisplay Bord byJamie bagn
Basic KnotsGuide byzorro3355
How to Climb aTree (withprussiks) bystasterisk
How to climb atree (using onlyrope) thefunsimple wayby louieaw
How to get arope into a tree(withoutclimbing it) byvitex
How to tievarious knots byadaviel
How to make arope swing byjdub0928
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Turks Head Knots on a Bottleby sklnxbones on July 6 2010
Intro Turks Head Knots on a BottleThis is the finished project A bottle decorated with three Turks Head Knots There are only three knots on this bottle The RED and the BLUE knots are each a 20 Bightby 3 Lead Turks Head Knots The WHITE knot is a 20 Bight by 19 Lead Turks Head Knot
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 1 Supplies
Cord Lots and Lots of cord I cant tell you how much each bottle is differentBottle Washed and Dried inside and out Make sure to remove all water spotsThreaded Needle Cord screws into the threads at the base of the needlePegs I use brass rivets used as a map to tie the Turks Head KnotsHole Punch Used to punch holes in the painters tape to hold the pegsPainters Tape To hold the pegs in place and to make your map for the Turks Head KnotsMarker To write on the painters tapeCloth Towel To remove finger prints and dirt from your bottleKrazy Glue or Super Glue This is used to secure the knots in place to the bottle
OPTIONAL BUT HIGHLY RECOMMENDEDI use the Turks Head Cookbook from KnotToolcom
Step 2 PreparationYou will need to find a bottle you like I used an empty instant tea bottle of course washed and dried (I like to put the bottle in the oven for a few minutes to dry the insidewithout water spots Take off the lid and do not put lid in the oven) Now measure the circumference of the bottle Take a cord and tightly wrap the cord around the bottleMark where the ends meet and use a ruler to measure the length of the cord For my instant tea bottle the circumference is 27cm I know from past knots that I have tiedthat I want my knot to have 20 Bights in the top and bottom (bands) knots I am going to use the Bights in the (bands) knots to tie the middle knot Now divide the numberof Bights (20) into the size of the circumference (27) to get the space between each Bight (135) With me so far
Now take two pieces of painters tape using a ruler measure out the length of the circumference and mark the length on the both pieces of tape Next you will mark thespace between each Bight on the tape
Step 3 Adding the PegsI like to use pegs when tying Turks Head Knots it just makes tying the knot easier
These are what I use for pegs
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 4 Adding Pegs to the TapeNow take a hole punch to cut holes in the tape where the lines meet You will place the pegs in the holes
Insert a peg in each hole and carefully stick the first piece of tape to the bottle
Step 5 Adding the 2nd row of pegsNow do the same thing with the second piece of tape The numbers on each piece of tape must line up
This picture shows you what you should have now This odd looking thing will be your map to tie the Turks Head Knot And this is the end of Step 1
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 6 Tying the first Turks Head KnotUsing the Turks Head Cookbook follow the numbers going over and under as indicated in the book I chose a 20 Bight by 3 Lead knot which will give me a nice bandaround the bottle Once the ends meet you have made one complete knot Tape the running end of your cord and start removing the pegs and the tape
Step 7 Remove the pegs and the tapeBe careful not to untie the knot as you remove the pegs and tape from the bottle Continue to remove all the pegs and remove the tape from the bottle At this point theknot will be very loose and will need to be tightened up
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 8 Remove the slack from the knotHere you can see just how much the knot expanded Starting with the standing end begin to pull the slack out of the knot going towards the running end of the cordDo not expect to pull all the slack out at once You may have to make 3 - 5 attempts at removing the slack out of the knot DO NOT remove all of the slack out of the knotIn order to make the bands we will have to triple the Turks Head Knot We will do this by following the knot three times The threaded needle will really come in handyhere
Step 9 Triple the KnotOnce you have made three passes of the Turks Head Knot use your needle to go under your knot about half the circumference and cut the cord The knot will be tightenough to hide the tail in placeTIP I carefully add a couple of drops of super glue UNDER the band to hold them in place and keep them from sliding around in the nextsteps A drop or two in 3 or 4 places around the band should be enough
Step 10 Add the second knotNow repeat this whole step for the second bandWhen tying the second band you must make sure the Bights line up to the first band This is crucial for the next stepWipe down the bottle to make sure all your finger prints and adhesive from the tape are all removed You want to make sure your bottle is clean at this point Any dirt orfinger prints left on the bottle will be almost impossible to remove From this point on we will use gloves when tying our last knot
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 11 Maping the Top KnotStick a piece of painters tape on top of your first band leaving the bottom of the knot exposedUse a marker to count the number of Bights in your knot Instead of using the pegs we are going to use the Bights to tie our next Turks Head Knot
Step 12 Mapping the Bottom KnotDo the same thing for the bottom band but you must make sure your numbers on top and bottom line up So 1 on top should be the same position as 1 on the bottom
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 13 Adding the last knotAgain using the Turks Head Cookbook and the threaded needle you are going to follow the instructions going over and under as indicated in the book Be sure to usegloves when ever you handle the bottle
Step 14 Thats ItFor this Turks Head Knot I am using a 20 Bight by 19 Lead knot
Because of the amount of cord you are working with your cord will get twisted and knotted You will have to un-twist the cord often Its a pain in the rear but it has to bedone And it has to be done alot
Continue to tie the knot until you finish the knot If you have the cord and the patience you can double or triple the knot When you are done use your needle to hide theends under your bands Cut the ends and your DONE
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Related Instructables
Monkeys FistFloatingKeychain byjokerlz
How To Make ATurks headKnot WithParacord byDoggie Stylish
Tying Trivetsout of Rope forHoliday Gifts bykylemarsh
Paracord KnotDisplay Bord byJamie bagn
How to Make ATurks Head(Photos) bymchs60chip
A pocket full ofknots byKiteman
Monkeys fistknot AND themonkey byjonathan111
TiteTie is theTruckers Knoton Steroids bytitetie
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Larks head noose -- an easy useful knot that tightens and loosensby Larry Breed on February 19 2009
Intro Larks head noose -- an easy useful knot that tightens and loosensI thought I knew all the basic knots but then I was taught this incredibly useful simple knot Its good for tying up the neck of a bag that you want to repeatedly open andsecurely close Its good for tying around a springy bundle that will need tightening and retightening And its easy to undo
Ive looked at knot literature but havent found a name for this so I named it The basic knot is well known its called a larks head Since all Ive done is to slip the twoends through the larks head to make a noose I call it that
WARNING Dont use this knot when human safety would depend on it Climbers and mountaineers have well-tested reliable knots for such situations
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Image Notes1 To tighten further step on this side of the larks head and pull the free ends
Step 1 Double the cord overThe larks head noose requires enough cord to go twice around your bundle plus a foot or two Find the center and double it over Sailors call this a bight
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 2 Form the larks headComing from below the bight hook your thumb and forefinger over the two sides Reach outward and downward and pinch your fingertips together underneath thedoubled cord
Youve made a larks head Move the crossing cord a little farther from your hand so theres a clear opening through the two half-loops
Step 3 Form the nooseSlip the two ends of the cord through the opening we were just talking about Pull the larks head tight so it grips the two cords Find something that needs constrictingand put the noose around it
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 4 Tightening retightening and lockingSlide the knot against the bundle If its not tight enough to keep from slipping tighten it by holding it in one hand and tugging on the cords one at a time with the otherhand Notice that you can slide the knot out again for instance to re-open the bag you just tied shut For some applications this may be as tight as you need it
A springy bundle probably still feels loose If so compress the bundle and get a new grip on the cords Rest your foot on the bundle on the cords nearest the larks headand pull to slide the larks head tighter
To make the knot more permanent you can lock it Make an overhand in the cord ends (Exactly like the first step in tying shoelaces) With your foot still on the bundlepull on the cords and move your hands apart until youre pulling in opposite directions You have just locked the larks head and you can trust it to stay that way()
But lets say that later on you want to loosen the locked knot Again put your foot on the bundle and cords nearest the larks head hold the two cord ends together andpull This makes a little slack between the overhand and the larks head so you can untie the overhand
In twine or small string the locking overhand knot may be difficult to undo Use a shoelace knot instead of an overhand and itll unlock easily
() If youre using slippery cord like polypropylene an overhand may not lock securely You may want to tie another overhand knot For added security wrap a shortlength of duct tape around the two cords close to the knot
Image Notes1 To tighten further step on this side of the larks head and pull the free ends
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Related Instructables
TRX fromParacordChallengeAccepted bythrake
A pocket full ofknots byKiteman
Lens CapLanyard by~teknoarsonist~ how to tie a
noose byawesume
AdjustableParacordGlassesLanyard byjdtwelve12
HangmansNoose PackClosure byPopEye42
Paraleash - ADog LeashFrom Paracordby The Ideanator
How to make arugged andhandy ParacordBelt by Jake22
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 2 Step 2
Find the center of your length of cord form a bight which will be the the loop end of your lanyard
Step 3 Step 3
To tie the cross knot youre going to bring the strand of cord on the right over the left strand back under to the right and back under again to the left making an S shapeas shown
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 4 Step 4
Now with the left strand bring it up under the S shape through the top loop as shown
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 5 Step 5
Bring the strand back down over the first two parts of the S shape and under the bottom as shown
Step 6 Step 6
Tighten up the knot by carefully pulling on each of the working ends and loop ends of the cord You can adjust the size of the lanyards loop by working slack from theloop end to decrease its size or from the working ends to increase the loops size Ive kept the loop at about 2 inches in length so that a belt will fit through it but youcan make it larger or smaller to your preference You can also check that the working ends of the paracord are equal in length at this point and work slack through theknot to even them up if needed
Note the other side of the knot looks different with the cross pattern as shown
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 7 Step7
Now you can tie the next knot in the lanyard the same way as the first After tying the next knot work the slack through the knot until you have about 1 inch of spacebetween them then tighten and continue with the next knot Note that the knots look different on each side frontback and that you tie the each facing the same way oralternate them if you choose
Continue making knots until you have about 1 foot of cord left with each end of the working strands
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 8 Step 8
Now you will add your attachment like the swivel snap hook shown putting both strands through the swivel eye to begin tying the snake knot
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 9 Step 9Bring the right strand under the cords then up over them as shown
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 10 Step 10Now take the left strand over across the other strands back behind and under the cords and up through the right strand loop as shown Then tighten
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 11 Step 11
Take the right strand under and behind the cords then bring it back through the tightened knot along side itself as shown and tighten This is where hemostats come inhandy with tying this knot working the cord through the previously tightened part of the knot It can be done without hemostats but requires tighteningloosening of theknots with just your fingertips
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 12 Step 12
Turn the lanyard over so the other side of the knot is facing up The working strand now on the right side will be brought under the cords back up and down through theparallel strands of the knot as shown then tighten And continue this process flipping the lanyard over taking the right strand under and back up around and through theparallel cords and tighten Continue until you run out of cord or reach the cross knot
Youll now trim off any excess cord and quick melt the end of the strands to prevent fraying to finish
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 13 Variations
You can use other two strand knots instead of the cross knot for variations on this style of lanyard A few alternatives to try tying in a spaced out series or combination ofthem Matthew Walker knot double wall knot lanyard knot double overhand knots double figure 8 knots etc The finishing knots around the attachment can also bedifferent as Ive used the lanyard knot sometimes just one or several in a row
You can also use variations of the cross knot with paracord bracelets and watchbands Doubled version of the knot shown as a paracord bracelet and alternating withtwo pairs of strands for the paracord watchband Leftover pieces of paracord can be used for zipper pulls key ring fobs even paracord cross pendants
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Related Instructables
Paracord ChainSinnet FastDeploy BoonieHatband (video)by Stormdrane
Zigzag SpoolingParacord (video)by Stormdrane
SurvivalBracelet(Updated) bytevers94
Celtic ButtonKnot (video) byStormdrane
ParacordBoonie HatWrap (video) byStormdrane
Paracord wristlanyard madewith the snakeknot byStormdrane
SurvivalBracelet II bytevers94
Cobra WeaveKey Fob bytevers94
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Paracord wrist lanyard made with the snake knotby Stormdrane on September 12 2007
AuthorStormdrane Stormdranes BlogNo matter where you go there you are
Intro Paracord wrist lanyard made with the snake knotThis instructable will show how to make a wrist lanyard using paracord and the snake knot The lanyard can be used to secure a key chain knife multi-tool flashlightcell phone camera binoculars compass etc More projects links knot references can be seen on my blog page Stormdranes Blog
Step 1 SuppliesYoull need about 45 feet of paracord(you may use other types of cordage if desired) The paracord I used is from the Supply Captain I left the inner strands in theparacord but you can remove them if preferred If done in one color it will be one continuous 45 ft length if done in two colors youll need 3 ft for the primary color thatincludes the wrist section and 15 ft for the second color that will show in the snake knot Also used are scissors tape measure or ruler lighter hemostats or needle nosepliers(not necessary but they make it much easier) and a swivel clip key ring snap hook cell phone lariat carabiner or whatever attachment you prefer to use
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 2 Attaching two colors of paracordIf using two colors of paracord you will insert one color about 12 inch into the other color You may remove a small amount of the paracords inner strands by pullingthem out trimming with scissors and pulling the paracord outer sheath back over the strands leaving room to insert the other color For various projects Ive used threedifferent methods for attaching two colors of paracord melting sewing or gluing The choice is yours I usually sew them together it doesnt matter as long as its a goodconnection It will be hidden under the first knot
Step 3 Find the center of the length of paracordTake the center of the length of cord and bring it thru the attachment Im using a swivel clip For this tutorial Im measuring the wrist loop at about 10 inches from theattachment The connection of the two colors will be just on the other side at this point
Step 4 Making the snake knotThe snake knot will be made around the wrist loop section of paracord the loop strands being the core of the knot Ive added a series of photos showing the steps Iuse By using two colors youll see that I flip the lanyard over after making each knot so that Im working with the cord on the right side of the lanyard I bring it under allthe other cords working the hemostats under the previously tightened knot and pulling the cord back thru Then tightening up the knot keeping the cord from twisting andworking it up against the previous knot Again flipping the work over youll see two parallel cords of the same color which will be split with the cord on the right goingunder around and pulled thru with the hemostats then tightened up Continue this procedure until youve done about 10 snake knots(you can count them down eitherside
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 5 Count your knotsOnce you have 10 snake knots youre almost done Youll notice from the photos of both sides of the lanyard that one side has the snake knots alternating all the waydown and the other has a set of parallel knots at the top and botton of the sequence of knots Youll always have those at the start and finish of the snake knots I preferto have them end up on the same side of the lanyard so one side appears to have a more uniform look but its not required
Step 6 Trim and melt the excess paracordUse the scissors to trim off the excess cord and quickly melt the ends with a lighter so they dont fray
Step 7 Youre doneYou can make a range of variations using less or more cordknots Shorten the loop for a double ended key chain or make the loop longer for use as a neck lanyard aLanyard Break-Away Connector could be added for the safety conscious You can also add a wooden bead skull cord lock etc Visit my blog page for more knot relatedprojects links and resources Stormdranes Blog You can find ideas for other geargadgets to attach to your lanyard on EDC Forums
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Related Instructables
Paracord ChainSinnet FastDeploy BoonieHatband (video)by Stormdrane
Cross KnotParacordLanyard byStormdrane
Zigzag SpoolingParacord (video)by Stormdrane
SurvivalBracelet II bytevers94
SurvivalBracelet(Updated) bytevers94
Cobra WeaveKey Fob bytevers94
ParacordBoonie HatWrap (video) byStormdrane
Paracord KnotDisplay Bord byJamie bagn
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
How to tie various knotsby adaviel on September 7 2009
Intro How to tie various knotsKnots as a way of joining rope without special equipment are useful in many situations On a sailboat knots are essential both for daily use and for emergency repairsThis instructable describes several different common knots eg
Sheet Bend - to tie two lines togetherBowline - to make a loopReef Knot - to fasten a bundle of materialFishermans Bend - to secure a line to a post or ring
These knots are good for regular rope - braided or 3-strand polyester or natural fibre (hemp sisal) Monofilament (fishing line) or steel cable performs better with differentknots
Knots are typically quite a lot weaker than straight rope - when rope goes around a tight radius such as in a knot the outside is under more tension than the insideSplices (which require special tools and are time-consuming to make) are stronger so permanent fittings usually have eye-splices
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 1 Sheet BendThe sheet bend is used to tie two lines together It is perhaps the most generally useful knot of all When used to tie a line to itself making a loop it is called a bowlineThe strain is taken on the ropes in the middle - not the one coming out the side
How the knot is made is not critical - it is the final shape that is important One can make the flat loop first and work the other rope around it Or one can make thecrossed loop first - required when tying a bowline
The two images show front and back views of the same knot
AdvantagesEasy to makeEasy to undo when tension is removedDoes not easily capsize
DisadvantagesHard to make under loadDangerous to make under heavy load
UsesJoining two equally-sized ropesExtending a towline or stern line
Method 1 the same as a bowline
Method 2 starting with the flat loop
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 2 Double Sheet BendThe double sheet bend is used to tie two lines of different thickness - but not too different It is the same as a normal sheet bend but with an extra turn of the thinner ropearound the flat loop in the thickerThe load goes on the line through the flat loop not the one that comes out the side of the knot
UsesSecuring a heaving line to a tow lineExtending a stern line if you dont have enough line of one thickness
Step 3 BowlineThe bowline is really a special case of the sheet bend but it it tied at the end of a rope to make a loop
The photos show the completed loop and closeups of the front and back of the actual knot Note that it is the same as the sheet bend - but it must be made the right wayround This loop does not tighten in use The knot is quite easy to untie once the load is removed With practice it is very quick to tie
Some usesSecuring a dinghy line to a railing or stanchionSecuring an anchor line to an anchorTie a jib sheet to the sailTie a mooring line around a rock or treeTie a float to an anchor triplineUse one in each line to tie two ropes of very different sizes - eg a throwing line to a large tow ropeDisadvantages the knot must be completely made before it will take any strain - it is hard to tie if there is already a load on the rope
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Linked bowlines
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 4 Bowline on the BightA bowline on the bight is a bowline tied in a loop of rope (neither end is needed) The shape is the same as a bowline made with a double line but the middle of thebight forms the loop around the standing part
UsesAn impromptu bosuns chair - to sit in while being transferred between two boats at sea
Step 5 Clove HitchThe clove hitch can be made when you only have the bight (the middle) of a rope not the ends
UsesSecuring a burgee pole to a burgee halyard (a continuous loop of thin line)Securing a tiller from swinging
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 6 Round Turn and Two Half-HitchesThis is a knot used to secure a line to a ring or bar Wind a couple of turns around the bar then secure the end with two hitches around the standing part (this looks like aclove hitch when done)
AdvantagesCan be made under load - it is easy to take turns around the bar while maintaining tension on the ropeStrong - provided the bar is thicker than the rope the rope is not weakened by sharp bendsDisadvantagesThe end tends to work loose
UsesSecuring a line to a mooring ring or samson post
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 7 Fishermans BendThe fishermans bend is the same as the round turn and two half hitches except that the first hitch is looped under the round turn This uses the tension on the rope tosecure the end from working loose
AdvantagesSecure against working loose
DisadvantagesHard to make under tensionHard to undo under tensionMay seize up under load when wet making it hard to undo
UsesSecuring mooring line to ringSecuring fender lines to rail
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 8 Studsail BendThe studsail bend is like the fishermans bend but the second hitch is also secured under the round turn making it even more secure against working loose when undertension
AdvantagesVery secure against working looseDisadvantagesHard to make under tensionHard to undo under tension
Step 9 Figure-8 KnotThe figure-eight knot is used to prevent an end of rope from passing through a block (pulley) Sometimes called a stopper knot
The double figure-8 knot is used in rock climbing as an alternative to a bowline to secure a climbing harness to the end of a safety rope The double knot is made bymaking a single knot then tracing back around the knot with the free end after passing it around the harness loop
AdvantagesEasy to verify by inspectionNot prone to work loose
DisadvantagesSlow to make and undoCannot be made under load
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 10 Prussic KnotThe prussic knot may be used as a climbing ascender - when made around a vertical rope as shown downwards tension on the ends locks the knot while release oftension allows it to be slid up the rope A pair of prussic knots on foot loops may be used in tandem to climb a rope
UsesClimbing a ropeTaking up tension to free a riding turn on a winch
Step 11 Reef KnotThe reef knot or square knot is used to tie a bundle of material together It must be made around something - it should not be used to tie two free ropes togetherbecause it can easily capsizeIt should not be used to make a loop unless it can be tensioned around a solid object It should not be used around a person - use a bowline instead A capsized reefknot will slip easily and could constrict and cause severe injury
UsesReefing a sail (tying the unused portion around a spar)Securing a furled sail to a spar (sail ties)Wrapping a parcelTying shoelaces
AdvantagesMay be made under moderate load
DisadvantagesCapsizes (works free) if used improperlyCan seize up under load when wet
Tying the knot
Capsizing a reef knot
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 12 CleatsThis is not a knot but is very common on boatsThe first picture shows a rope cleated normally The second shows one with a final locking turn - the last turn is twisted before placing over the cleat so that the tensionon the rope helps secure the free end
When working with ropes under tension take a turn or two around a winch or cleat before trying to secure the end with a knot The load on the free end falls exponentiallywith each turn taken Severe injury can result if a finger or other body part is caught in a loop of rope or between a rope and another object
Step 13 Practice themIt is sometimes useful to be able to tie knots in the dark or as in this video behind your back
Related Instructables
AThird Hand forSailing or OtherThings by WadeTarzia
Paracord KnotDisplay Bord byJamie bagn
Trip LogOutriggerCanoe Sailingthe CaliforniaChannel Islandsby TimAnderson
How to Tie aFigure EightKnot byTactical_Pyro
How to build apirate ship bymdelaney3
Build a ShortDragon (16 foot3-BoardOutriggerSailing Canoe)by Wade Tarzia
repairing aheadsail by josh
How to get arope into a tree(withoutclimbing it) byvitex
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
How to Tie the Lanyard Knotby eddy14777 on January 31 2010
Intro How to Tie the Lanyard KnotMany people including myself have had trouble following the Stormdrane youtube video on tying the lanyard knot so i have done some research and found the solution
Image Notes1 Finished knot
Step 1 MaterialsAll you need is a reasonable length of para cord or whatever you wish to use
Image Notes1 One reasonable amount
Step 2 First StepThe first thing you are going to do is to make a bight that leaves you with to congruent endsThen you are going to put your ring finger through the bight
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Image Notes1 Close enough2 Bight
Step 3 Starting the KnotMake a loop just like the one in the picture and place it over the top strandBring the top strand under the bottom strand
Image Notes1 Notice the way the loop is done2 Top strand
Image Notes1 Bottom strand2 Top strand is under
Step 4 The Most Important PartNow you take the top stand from the previous picture and feed it over the first part of the loop under itself and back over the remainder of the loop
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Image Notes1 Under me2 Top strand3 This should make a diamond type shape
Step 5 DoublingNow take the bottom stand and take it around the part of the top strand nearest to the bight and than come up through the diamond shape in the middleDo the same for the top strand
Image Notes1 Top strand
Image Notes1 Both through the diamond
Step 6 FinishingWhen you take it off your finger it should look like thisWork out the slack by pulling on the bight and the two strands
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Image Notes1 Finished knot
Related Instructables
Cross KnotParacordLanyard byStormdrane
Celtic ButtonKnot (video) byStormdrane
Paracord wristlanyard madewith the snakeknot byStormdrane
Paracord ChainSinnet FastDeploy BoonieHatband (video)by Stormdrane
Zigzag SpoolingParacord (video)by Stormdrane
ParacordBoonie HatWrap (video) byStormdrane
Paracord IDbadge Lanyardby Flahusky
Cobra WeaveKey Fob bytevers94
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Four knots to make paracord into a useful toolby erik_mccray on March 27 2010
Authorerik_mccrayI am an ex-fabricator that is now a stay at home dad I love my new job but I do miss making stuff I love this site amp I am getting involved as a way to keep myskills upOn top of fad work I have also run two small business in the past One was custom sewing amp the other was as a small engine mechanicI have two votec degrees one in metal fabrication amp the other is in engine repairI look forward to getting to know everyone here
Intro Four knots to make paracord into a useful toolParacord is an awesome multitool used everywhere from the wild blue yonder to the deepest caverns But like any good tool it is only as good as the knowledge the userhas about the tool With most people out there using bungee cords amp ratchet straps it seems that paracord is being used for nothing more than friendship bracelets forgrown men This is a shame because for less then the price of a few cheap bungee cords amp some to short to be helpful straps You can get yourself hundreds of feet ofparacord
The key to getting the most out of the paracord is good knot work The first thing you need to know is what makes a good knot One is that the knot is easy amp quick to tieamp more impotant is that the knot is easy amp quick to untie The hitch class of knots is by far the best group of knots that the average person could know The four mostuseful hitch knots are the half hitch a quick simple knot that forms the base for many other knots the inline half hitch allowing you to get the most out of one length ofparacord the slippery hitch that gives you both on the fly control over tension on your paracord but also an adjustable loop that will not change unless you want it amp theinline truckers hitch instantly doubling the your pulling power
Step 1 To get started lets get some terminology that will be used defined
line= the paracord
Main line= the part of the paracord doing the work for example holding down your tarp or the long part of the paracord
Mid line= the middle of the length of the paracord
End line= the unused length of paracord or the short length of paracord
Step 2 The half hitch The half hitch is a simple way to secure a line to an anchor point like the tie down points in most trucks A half hitch is a constrictor knot meaning that the harder you pullon the line the tighter the knots grip gets Another common constrictor knot is the slip knot
Step 1 wrap your line around your anchor point Step 2 wrap the end line around the main line
Step 3 pass the end line threw the end line side of the newly formed loop
step 4 now take the slack out of the knot
step 5 to make sure the knot is secure tie another half hitch to the main line This knot is called adouble half hitch
step 6 another useful thing that can be done with the half hitch is that instead of repeating the wrap on the main line but repeating it on what you are tying to the half hitchcan be used to bind something like a stack of 2x4s
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Image Notes1 End line2 Main line3 step 1
Image Notes1 Step 2
Image Notes1 passing thew the end line side of the loop2 step 3
Image Notes1 step 5
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Image Notes1 step 6
Step 3 The mid line half hitch The mid line half hitch is for when the length of line is to long for the job at hand amp you dont want to have to cut the line to size or you are using multiple anchor pointswith one length of line
Step 1 double up the line at the point in the length you wish to make the knot
Step 2 wrap the doubled up portion of line around your anchor point The doubled up length is now now the end line
Step 3 now tie just as you did for the regular half hitch repeat the knot to make a double half hitch for security
Image Notes1 A mid line double half hitch
Image Notes1 step 1
Image Notes1 The end line2 step 2
Image Notes1 Step 3
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 4 The slippery hitch The slippery hitch is a great knot for adjusting tension on the main line or for having an adjustable fixed loop To adjust the knot simply slide the knot up or down the mainline
Step 1 wrap your line around the anchor point or just double over the line to form a loop
Step 2 wrap the end line around the main line three times Wrapping in the direction of the anchor point or loop
Step 3 put together the two lines making up the loop amp wrap the two lines one time with the end line
Step 4 pass the end line thew the last loop formed covering the two lined of the loop
Step 5 pull the knot tite
step 6 to adjust the size of the loop or main line tension grab the knot amp slide it up or down the main line
Image Notes1 grab just the knot its self to adjust it2 step 5
Image Notes1 step 1
Image Notes1 step 2
Image Notes1 step 3
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Image Notes1 step 4
Image Notes1 grab just the knot its self to adjust it2 step 5
Image Notes1 same knot as in last pic Just slid up2 step 6
Step 5 The mid line truchers hitch The truckers hitch is a great way to double the pulling force on a line There are many ways to tie this knot the problem with most of them is that at some point you aregoing to have to pass the end line through a loop on the main line that is acting like a pulley to double your pulling force this is great if you are making the knot close tothe end of your line but if you are using a 300 length of line amp want to make the knot in the first ten feet having to pass 290 of line thew a loop is a pain But with a fewhalf hitches you will not have to pass the end line threw any loop on the main line
step 1 wrap your line around the anchor point then double over your end line laying the top of the loop over the main line
Step 2 double up your main line amp lay the loop over the loop made by the end line
step 3 in main line above the knot twist in a loop
step 4 put main line loop thew the loop made in step 3 amp pull this loop tight over your main line loop forming a half hitch Repeat step 3 amp 4 to make a doublehalf hitch
step 5 To use the knot just pull down on the end line to put tension on the main line
step 6 after you have the main line snug tie a mid line double half hitch around the two lines forming the loop at the end of the main line with the end line
step 7 Tie a double half hitch with the end line around the end loop of the mid line half hitch of step 6 using the same method as used in steps 3 amp 4
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Image Notes1 the end of step 6
Image Notes1 main line2 end line3 step 1
Image Notes1 main line loop2 end line loop
Image Notes1 step 3
Image Notes1 step 4
Image Notes1 step 4 at the end with a double half hitch on the main loop
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Image Notes1 pull here2 step 5
Image Notes1 the start of step 6
Image Notes1 the end of step 6
Image Notes1 step 72 now the rest of the line is free to do more work
Related Instructables
Paracord KnotDisplay Bord byJamie bagn
ChokelessAdjustableParacord DogLeash byPizzaman101
ParacordLadder wWooden Rungsby josestude
tie a paracordshackle grip byitri45
ParacordPrussik Belt byJavaNut13
TiteTie is theTruckers Knoton Steroids bytitetie
ID Lanyard(Photos) byeschmunk
Dog Toys forHeavy Chewersby J3443RY
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Figure 8 knot and double 8 knotby jonathan111 on November 28 2007
Intro Figure 8 knot and double 8 knotI will show you how to tie a figure 8 knot and a figure 8 follow through
Step 1 Stating the knotThis is a simple knot so just follow the pictures
Step 2 Finishing the knotCross the string under and then push it through the hole Pull tightly unless you are going to do the follow through and leave it somewhat loose
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 3 The follow through knotThe follow through knot should be tied around something brought back and followed through the path of the 8 knot Look at the pictures Basically follow through the 8knot backwards
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Related Instructables
Climb Safe WithA Figure 8Knot by mattste A pocket full of
knots byKiteman
How to Tie aFigure EightKnot byTactical_Pyro
Paracord KnotDisplay Bord byJamie bagn
Cross KnotParacordLanyard byStormdrane
How to Tie aFire-escapeKnot by leonardoismael
Truckers HitchTHE mostawesome knoton the planetby schneidp20
Paracord ZipperPuller byrepeet13
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Truckers Hitch THE most awesome knot on the planetby schneidp20 on October 12 2008
Authorschneidp20I like building stuff Trouble is there just isnt enough time to build everything Sigh
Intro Truckers Hitch THE most awesome knot on the planetYes I know that there are plenty of other cool knots out there many of which I literally couldnt live wo I rock climb However this knot is unlike any other Plus Ineeded a grabber for my Instructable -) (BTW this ISNT a climbing knot) And in truth it isnt a knot by itself but rather a system of common knots
Have you ever tried to tie something down for transporting but just couldnt get the lines tight andor during transport the lines would continually loosen Then this is theknot for you I learned this knot back in the 70s when specialty car racks and ratchet straps were rare or unheard of I initially used it to tie a canoe on a car rack bothattaching to the rack as well as the lines to the bow and stern of the canoe Even with all the new gizmos available today this knot still shines because all you need is arope and ropes dont hum in the wind like straps
The unique aspect of this knot is that it gives you a 2-1 mechanical advantage when tightening the rope Be careful though You can actually damage some thingsbecause of the mechanical advantage This knot holds fast and is easy to untie hallmark traits of any good knot
Below you see the finished knot system well break it apart in the steps that follow
Image Notes1 1st anchor point a bowline2 loop3 securing knots 2 half hitches4 securing loose end with a fishermans knot5 2nd anchor point (should be round)
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Image Notes1 X marks the spot
Step 1 Initial setupThe first step is to anchor one end of the rope and then loop the rope around a 2nd anchor point
For attaching to the 1st anchor point I chose bowline a close 2 on my list -) There are other instructables on that one so I wont bore you here
The 2nd anchor really should be round because it serves as a pulley in this block and tackle type knot Ive used it on sharp anchor points and it doesnt work as well
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 2 Creating a slip knotTie a slip knot somewhere between the two anchor points Correct placement of the slip knot takes some experience to judge it correctly Typically I place it too close tothe 2nd anchor point and end up with not enough room to work with If the knot ends up too far from 2nd anchor point you can extend the knot by enlarging the loop
Be sure you tie the slip knot as shown You may not be able to untie other knots
In this small example the slip knot is uncharacteristically close to the 1st anchor point
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 3 Tightening and securingThe loose end of the rope that went around the 2nd anchor point goes through the slip knot loop Pull the loose end to the desired tension and secure with two halfhitches
Note To allow better view of the knots the rope isnt really tightened in this example
Step 4 Securing loose endThe final knot is just to secure the loose end somehow I chose a fishermans knot to do this
To tie a fishermans knot the rope goes around twice and goes under the X created by the loops Pull the loose end to tighten Finally slide the knot to put tension onthe half hitches
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Image Notes1 X marks the spot
Step 5 FinishedThere you have it I guarantee that the first time you really use this knot (not just practice) you will be amazed at how well it works and youll wish you knew this knot along time ago You may even come over to my side and declare that is is THE most awesome knot on the planet -)
Enjoy and happy haulingDave
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Related Instructables
TiteTie is theTruckers Knoton Steroids bytitetie
Four knots tomake paracordinto a usefultool byerik_mccray
Modify yourbike rack tocarry a sunfishor other boat byewilhelm
SurfboardHammock byGermy
GiganticHalloweenSpider Web bynolte919
How To Tie ASpiders Hitch(video) by back-cast
Three-hitch mathair ornamentby michiexile TRX from
ParacordChallengeAccepted bythrake
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Carry any Bottle with a JUG KNOT Handleby hpstoutharrow on September 17 2009
Intro Carry any Bottle with a JUG KNOT HandleTie a JUG KNOT around a water bottle soda bottle or aluminum bottle to make a secure carrying strap
Re-purpose any container into a reusable water bottle by adding a convenient carrying strap This Instructable will demonstrate how to tie a JUG knot which like its namesuggests is meant to properly secure around the neck of a container
With some cord and the knowledge of this knot you will be able add a handle lanyard or carabiner loop to any of your favorite beverages to carry them on the go
It works perfectly for those disposable water bottles and who knows once you add some colorful cord to the plain old clear water bottle you just might beinclined to refill it and use it again(Check out pictures 4amp5 below)
In addition to plastic beverage bottles like pop water and sports drinks you can turn those rugged aluminum beer bottles into a backpacking canteen
Those of you familiar with my previous aluminum bottle InstructablesROLLED RIM METAL TUMBLERhttpwwwinstructablescomidAluminum-Bottle-Tumbler-Cup-Cook-PotALUMINUM BOTTLE LIGHTWEIGHT ALCOHOL STOVEhttpwwwinstructablescomidAluminum-Bottle-Alcohol-Stovewill recognize the water canteen shown below as a re-purposed aluminum beer bottle Here I have added a painted surface treatment to turn it into a proper lookingwater bottle More on that in steps 13 14 15
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 1 Getting StartedCord size is important Select a small medium weight cord like the one shown here It is a general purpose camp cord sold at most sporting goods stores (shoelacesmight also work)
Do not use a heavy cord or rope because the larger diameter will not tuck under the relatively small lip at the top of the bottleneck and the bottle will fall out
Also the smaller cord cinches tight on itself and will not loosen accidentally
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 2 Form a BightThe next steps show how to tie a JUG KNOT It is the basic step for adding a carrying strap It is also the anchor point for any additional fancy bottle trussing you maywant to add
JUG KNOT Step 1
Form a Bight in the center of a length of cord Bight is a knot term for a loop or bend in the rope In this case the main Bight in this knot is highlighted with a white mark Imakes it easier to follow its path in these steps
The running ends of the cord should be equal length
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 3 Pull the Bight downPULL the Bight DOWN forming two Loops
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 4 Cross the LoopsCROSS the right Loop OVER the left Loop
Step 5 Pass the Bight under the 1st loopTake the main Bight and pass it UNDER the left Loop
Step 6 Weave the BightWEAVE the Bight OVER the portion of the right Loop and UNDER the portion of the left Loop
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 7 Extend the BightExtend the Bight OVER the outer portion of the right Loop
Step 8 Flip the Right Loop behindAdditional colored identification points have been added to the loops to follow their travel in these next two steps
The right Loop Yellow marker is FLIPPED BEHIND the knot and ends up on the far left side of the knot
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 9 Flip the 2nd loop in frontRaise the green marker (located on what was formerly the left loop) and pull it down and to the right FLIPPING IT IN FRONT of the knot
Note the blue portion of the this loop will pass around the outside of the yellow portion of the first loop
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Image Notes1 Center of knot that will tighten around the bottles neck
Step 10 Remove SlackNote where the blue green amp yellow markers end up
Start to remove the slack in the loops by pulling the original main Bight (white marker top right) and the two free standing ends at the bottom
the bottle neck will pass through the very center of the knot
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Image Notes1 Center of knot that will tighten around the bottles neck
Step 11 Tighten the KnotAfter removing the slack insert the bottle neck and finish tightening
The knot should look like this before slipping it over the bottle
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 12 Secure on bottle neckThis is the finished knot shown on the neck of various containers
The loop end and the two free standing ends can be tied together to create a carrying handle (last picture below)
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 13 Aluminum Bottle Water Bottle
The next few steps show the features of an aluminum beer bottle re-purposed as a water bottle canteen It is one of many containers that can be reused as a camp waterbottle
The bottle was lightly sanded masked and then pained with a hammered finished paint to create an interesting surface texture
Image Notes1 Textured finish paint makes an interesting grip-able surface2 Masked with tape for painting3 Masked with tape for painting
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Image Notes1 Dowel used for holding the bottle during painting
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 14 Tethered Cork StopperUse a wine bottle man made Cork as a stopper for your aluminum water bottleNote Use a cork that was removed from the wine bottle without the corkscrew penetrating through the bottom end of the cork (A hole all the way through the cork willcause it to leak) Use the unpierced end of the cork inside the water bottle
Drill a hole through the sides of the Cork Thread the cord through the hole to the center of the cord Use the cork as the main Bight and tie the Jug knot as shown inthe beginning steps
Now the cork is tethered to the bottle and will not get lost or fall on the ground
A Carabiner clip passes through the other cord end to attache the water bottle to you belt or pack
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 15 Trussed for TransportThis is another hanging method for carrying your aluminum bottle water canteen A Jug knot is tied conventionally around the neck
The running ends of the knot however are pulled down towards the bottom of the bottle A Barrel Knot is tied about 34 the way down the side of the bottle A squareknot is tied on the bottom of the knot to keep the two running ends tight against the sides of the bottle
I like the look of the accent colored cord running down the sides of the bottle and the fact that the bottle hangs from the belt upside down It adds to its uniqueness
The last picture shows another truss variation
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 16 AdvancedBelow is a bottle with some additional trussing You can be creative as you want It all starts with a re-purposed container and the Jug Knot (and enough cord)
Related Instructables
AluminumBottle TumblerCup amp Cook Potfor an AlcoholStove byhpstoutharrow
Water BottleBelt Clip byuglymike Duct Tape
Water Bottle byrabidsquire2
AluminumBottle AlcoholStove byhpstoutharrow
DIYGlass WaterBottle byCulturespy
Solar WaterHeater forBackpackingUsing WaterBottles and aCar Shade bykopomeroy
Duct tape waterbottle holder(Photos) by pinkmarshmallow
How to make aCamelPack withan old plasticbottle bywillrandship
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Basic Knots Guideby zorro3355 on April 29 2008
Intro Basic Knots Guidehi
Step 1 Thumb knotThe most simple knotUsed as a stopper and prevent ropes from fraying
Step 2 Reef KnotUsed to tie two ropes of equal thickness togetherIt is pretty easy to tie and untie but under tentionit may be diffcult to untieIt is also not sutible for smoothropes(egnylon ropes)
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 3 Figure of eightused as a stopperprevent ropes from fraying and its more secure than tumb knot its is also used to tie Caribinas to ropes and is often used in rock climbing
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 4 Timber hitchused for pulling logs
Step 5 Clove hitchUsed to tie a rope onto a pole or logThe pole must be roundThe pole lust be thicker then the rope itself
(greatly used during pioneering)
Step 6 Sheet bandused to tie ropes of different thickness together(works on same thickness of ropes too)
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 7 Sheep shankTo shorten RopesTo prevent middle fraying
Step 8 Slip knotWhippingUsed as a grip for pulling things(when tied on a stick or small pole)(marlin spike hitch)
Related Instructables
Rope Rings byhpstoutharrow
How to Tie aFigure EightKnot byTactical_Pyro
Whippin (WestCountry Style)by tim_n
SurvivalBracelet(Updated) bytevers94
HangmansNoose PackClosure byPopEye42
Turkey on aTripod byhpstoutharrow
SurvivalBracelet II bytevers94 Zigzag Spooling
Paracord (video)by Stormdrane
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
How to Tie a Fire-escape Knotby leonardo ismael on October 16 2007
Intro How to Tie a Fire-escape KnotThis knot is used by firemen in case of fires for example imagine a scene where the ladder on the firetruck messes up but people need to get down a five story buildingor more All they have is a long piece of rope they can safely get down with a secure knot like the fire-escape knot So why not learn it its easy to do and hard to untieif you tie it tightly
This is from the American Boys Handbook
Step 1 Get Your RopeFirst grab a piece of rope and bend it like this to make a loop in it Follow every step to the smallest detail
Step 2 Twist the RopeNow make a twist like this and hold it together
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 3 Pull Through the TwistPull the loop through the twist you just made from underneath
Step 4 Go Over the Split EndNow pull the tail through the loop
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 5 FinallyAnd finally just pull it through as pictured below
Congratulations you just learned the fire-escape knot
Step 6 Same Name Not KnotThis is another knot called the fire-escape knot this shouldnt be your result
Related Instructables
House FireEscape Plan(video) byWhatHappensNowAdvice
ParacordLadder wWooden Rungsby josestude
Bed SheetEscape Rope byjessehensel
rope ladder(glow-in-the-dark version) bymikeasaurus
HeadlockEscape 2(video) byjohnnyrockstah
QuickFirestarter byMattandJora
Trail sauna byjakee117
How to Kill FireAnts andCommitGenocide byKentsOkay
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Climb Safe With A Figure 8 Knotby mattste on February 23 2010
Intro Climb Safe With A Figure 8 Knot There are many things that a beginning climber needs to know including several important knots Perhaps the most essential knot is the Figure 8 Follow Through Thistutorial will demonstrate how to correctly harness yourself to a rope using a Figure 8 Follow Through knot This knot is used primarily by rock climbers to provide a life-line Since this knot is used as a life-line it is very important to be able to tie it correctly (Your life could depend upon it)
Dont worry with this tutorial and about 5 minutes of practice you can have this knot mastered
Things you will need
- Climbing Harness- Climbing Rope
If you are wanting to go climbing and dont already have these items they can be purchased for about $25 each at most outdoor sporting goods stores If you are merelylooking to learn the knot a belt loop and a rope (about five feet long) will do
Image Notes1 Climbing Harness2 Climbing Rope
Step 1 Dealing With The RopeThroughout this tutorial I will be discussing different parts of the rope To make these instructions as clear as possible I will define a few terms that I will use throughoutthe tutorial The Anchor End of the rope will generally be at the top of the images This is the end that would be anchored to the wall or rock and does not move Wewill not be doing much with the anchored end The Tail End of the rope is the opposite end that we will be dealing with I will call this the tail for short
Now that we have some terms to work with lets get started
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 2 Tying The First Figure 8This knot has several parts to it The first part of the knot is just tying a basic figure 8 To tie the first figure 8 there are four simple steps
1 - Using the tail make a loop over the rope (as shown in the first picture) keeping in mind that there should be about 3 ft of slack on the tail end
2 - Wrap the tail back this time go under the anchored end (As shown in the second picture)
3 - Bring the tail down through the first loop (As shown in the third picture)
4 - Finally pull the two ends to make the knot a little bit tighter and easier to deal with (Shown in the fourth picture)
After these four steps you should end up with a knot that resembles a figure 8
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 3 Looping Into The Harness In order to secure the rope to the harness simply thread the tail end of the rope through the front loop in the harness as shown in the picture below This step isobviously very important
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 4 Following Back Through The Figure 8After looping the rope through the harness you have to thread the tail end of the rope back through the knot following the first figure 8 I have divided this process intofive smaller steps in order to make it more clear
1 - Coming form underneath the knot bring the tail up through the near loop and to the left behind the anchored end of the rope (Shown in the first picture)
2 - Wrap the tail around the anchored end back to the right and down through the adjacent loop (Shown in the second picture)
3 - You simply need to bring the tail back over the top of the knot to the left (Shown in the third picture)
4 - Bring the tail end up through the far loop following the anchored end (Shown in the fourth picture)
5 - Finally pull the knot tight (Shown in the fifth picture)
As you can see the first four pictures are simply tracing the knot back through with the tail end
For the last part while you pull the knot tight you may want to make small adjustments and rearrange how it all fits together If the knot does not lay perfectly smoothand tight its NOT a big deal
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 5 Finishing The Knot After completing the Figure 8 knot you will want to somehow secure the tail end of the rope out of the way There are a couple different ways to do this the way that Iwill demonstrate is using whats called a Stopper Knot This secondary knot is similar to a Fishermans knot and is pretty simple I have once again divided thisprocess into several smaller steps
1 - Start by wrapping the tail end around the anchored end (As shown in the first picture)
2 - Wrap the tail back underneath the two vertical segments (As shown in the second picture)
3 - Simply repeat the first two steps wrapping the tail around again (As shown in the third picture)
4 - This step in the fourth picture may look complicated but all you need to do is insert the tail up through the two loops that you have just made
5 - To finish off the knot you will want to slowly pull the tail end while gently pushing the bottom of the stopper knot upwards If you have successfully completed this knotit should look something like the fifth picture
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 6 Ready To Climb Now that you have mastered the Figure 8 knot you can securely harness yourself into a climbing rope Remember there are many other skills that go into setting up ananchor and belaying a climber This tutorial only covers the figure 8 knot For more information there are many great websites that demonstrate how to correctly set up asafe climbing system (Ive posted a few below) If you are a beginning climber I recommend that you read up on a few other climbing techniques Also you shouldprobably go to a climbing wall or gym where there are experienced climbers that can show you the ropes Hopefully this tutorial has been helpful Have fun and be safe
Some useful linkshttpwwwstephenprattnetAnchorsanchorshtmhttpwwwuoregonedu~oppclimbingtopicsanchorshtmlhttpwwwabc-of-rockclimbingcomhowtoclimbingtechniquesasp
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Related Instructables
How to Tie aFigure EightKnot byTactical_Pyro
Paracord KnotDisplay Bord byJamie bagn
Basic KnotsGuide byzorro3355
How to Climb aTree (withprussiks) bystasterisk
How to climb atree (using onlyrope) thefunsimple wayby louieaw
How to get arope into a tree(withoutclimbing it) byvitex
How to tievarious knots byadaviel
How to make arope swing byjdub0928
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Turks Head Knots on a Bottleby sklnxbones on July 6 2010
Intro Turks Head Knots on a BottleThis is the finished project A bottle decorated with three Turks Head Knots There are only three knots on this bottle The RED and the BLUE knots are each a 20 Bightby 3 Lead Turks Head Knots The WHITE knot is a 20 Bight by 19 Lead Turks Head Knot
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 1 Supplies
Cord Lots and Lots of cord I cant tell you how much each bottle is differentBottle Washed and Dried inside and out Make sure to remove all water spotsThreaded Needle Cord screws into the threads at the base of the needlePegs I use brass rivets used as a map to tie the Turks Head KnotsHole Punch Used to punch holes in the painters tape to hold the pegsPainters Tape To hold the pegs in place and to make your map for the Turks Head KnotsMarker To write on the painters tapeCloth Towel To remove finger prints and dirt from your bottleKrazy Glue or Super Glue This is used to secure the knots in place to the bottle
OPTIONAL BUT HIGHLY RECOMMENDEDI use the Turks Head Cookbook from KnotToolcom
Step 2 PreparationYou will need to find a bottle you like I used an empty instant tea bottle of course washed and dried (I like to put the bottle in the oven for a few minutes to dry the insidewithout water spots Take off the lid and do not put lid in the oven) Now measure the circumference of the bottle Take a cord and tightly wrap the cord around the bottleMark where the ends meet and use a ruler to measure the length of the cord For my instant tea bottle the circumference is 27cm I know from past knots that I have tiedthat I want my knot to have 20 Bights in the top and bottom (bands) knots I am going to use the Bights in the (bands) knots to tie the middle knot Now divide the numberof Bights (20) into the size of the circumference (27) to get the space between each Bight (135) With me so far
Now take two pieces of painters tape using a ruler measure out the length of the circumference and mark the length on the both pieces of tape Next you will mark thespace between each Bight on the tape
Step 3 Adding the PegsI like to use pegs when tying Turks Head Knots it just makes tying the knot easier
These are what I use for pegs
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 4 Adding Pegs to the TapeNow take a hole punch to cut holes in the tape where the lines meet You will place the pegs in the holes
Insert a peg in each hole and carefully stick the first piece of tape to the bottle
Step 5 Adding the 2nd row of pegsNow do the same thing with the second piece of tape The numbers on each piece of tape must line up
This picture shows you what you should have now This odd looking thing will be your map to tie the Turks Head Knot And this is the end of Step 1
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 6 Tying the first Turks Head KnotUsing the Turks Head Cookbook follow the numbers going over and under as indicated in the book I chose a 20 Bight by 3 Lead knot which will give me a nice bandaround the bottle Once the ends meet you have made one complete knot Tape the running end of your cord and start removing the pegs and the tape
Step 7 Remove the pegs and the tapeBe careful not to untie the knot as you remove the pegs and tape from the bottle Continue to remove all the pegs and remove the tape from the bottle At this point theknot will be very loose and will need to be tightened up
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 8 Remove the slack from the knotHere you can see just how much the knot expanded Starting with the standing end begin to pull the slack out of the knot going towards the running end of the cordDo not expect to pull all the slack out at once You may have to make 3 - 5 attempts at removing the slack out of the knot DO NOT remove all of the slack out of the knotIn order to make the bands we will have to triple the Turks Head Knot We will do this by following the knot three times The threaded needle will really come in handyhere
Step 9 Triple the KnotOnce you have made three passes of the Turks Head Knot use your needle to go under your knot about half the circumference and cut the cord The knot will be tightenough to hide the tail in placeTIP I carefully add a couple of drops of super glue UNDER the band to hold them in place and keep them from sliding around in the nextsteps A drop or two in 3 or 4 places around the band should be enough
Step 10 Add the second knotNow repeat this whole step for the second bandWhen tying the second band you must make sure the Bights line up to the first band This is crucial for the next stepWipe down the bottle to make sure all your finger prints and adhesive from the tape are all removed You want to make sure your bottle is clean at this point Any dirt orfinger prints left on the bottle will be almost impossible to remove From this point on we will use gloves when tying our last knot
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 11 Maping the Top KnotStick a piece of painters tape on top of your first band leaving the bottom of the knot exposedUse a marker to count the number of Bights in your knot Instead of using the pegs we are going to use the Bights to tie our next Turks Head Knot
Step 12 Mapping the Bottom KnotDo the same thing for the bottom band but you must make sure your numbers on top and bottom line up So 1 on top should be the same position as 1 on the bottom
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 13 Adding the last knotAgain using the Turks Head Cookbook and the threaded needle you are going to follow the instructions going over and under as indicated in the book Be sure to usegloves when ever you handle the bottle
Step 14 Thats ItFor this Turks Head Knot I am using a 20 Bight by 19 Lead knot
Because of the amount of cord you are working with your cord will get twisted and knotted You will have to un-twist the cord often Its a pain in the rear but it has to bedone And it has to be done alot
Continue to tie the knot until you finish the knot If you have the cord and the patience you can double or triple the knot When you are done use your needle to hide theends under your bands Cut the ends and your DONE
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Related Instructables
Monkeys FistFloatingKeychain byjokerlz
How To Make ATurks headKnot WithParacord byDoggie Stylish
Tying Trivetsout of Rope forHoliday Gifts bykylemarsh
Paracord KnotDisplay Bord byJamie bagn
How to Make ATurks Head(Photos) bymchs60chip
A pocket full ofknots byKiteman
Monkeys fistknot AND themonkey byjonathan111
TiteTie is theTruckers Knoton Steroids bytitetie
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Larks head noose -- an easy useful knot that tightens and loosensby Larry Breed on February 19 2009
Intro Larks head noose -- an easy useful knot that tightens and loosensI thought I knew all the basic knots but then I was taught this incredibly useful simple knot Its good for tying up the neck of a bag that you want to repeatedly open andsecurely close Its good for tying around a springy bundle that will need tightening and retightening And its easy to undo
Ive looked at knot literature but havent found a name for this so I named it The basic knot is well known its called a larks head Since all Ive done is to slip the twoends through the larks head to make a noose I call it that
WARNING Dont use this knot when human safety would depend on it Climbers and mountaineers have well-tested reliable knots for such situations
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Image Notes1 To tighten further step on this side of the larks head and pull the free ends
Step 1 Double the cord overThe larks head noose requires enough cord to go twice around your bundle plus a foot or two Find the center and double it over Sailors call this a bight
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 2 Form the larks headComing from below the bight hook your thumb and forefinger over the two sides Reach outward and downward and pinch your fingertips together underneath thedoubled cord
Youve made a larks head Move the crossing cord a little farther from your hand so theres a clear opening through the two half-loops
Step 3 Form the nooseSlip the two ends of the cord through the opening we were just talking about Pull the larks head tight so it grips the two cords Find something that needs constrictingand put the noose around it
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 4 Tightening retightening and lockingSlide the knot against the bundle If its not tight enough to keep from slipping tighten it by holding it in one hand and tugging on the cords one at a time with the otherhand Notice that you can slide the knot out again for instance to re-open the bag you just tied shut For some applications this may be as tight as you need it
A springy bundle probably still feels loose If so compress the bundle and get a new grip on the cords Rest your foot on the bundle on the cords nearest the larks headand pull to slide the larks head tighter
To make the knot more permanent you can lock it Make an overhand in the cord ends (Exactly like the first step in tying shoelaces) With your foot still on the bundlepull on the cords and move your hands apart until youre pulling in opposite directions You have just locked the larks head and you can trust it to stay that way()
But lets say that later on you want to loosen the locked knot Again put your foot on the bundle and cords nearest the larks head hold the two cord ends together andpull This makes a little slack between the overhand and the larks head so you can untie the overhand
In twine or small string the locking overhand knot may be difficult to undo Use a shoelace knot instead of an overhand and itll unlock easily
() If youre using slippery cord like polypropylene an overhand may not lock securely You may want to tie another overhand knot For added security wrap a shortlength of duct tape around the two cords close to the knot
Image Notes1 To tighten further step on this side of the larks head and pull the free ends
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Related Instructables
TRX fromParacordChallengeAccepted bythrake
A pocket full ofknots byKiteman
Lens CapLanyard by~teknoarsonist~ how to tie a
noose byawesume
AdjustableParacordGlassesLanyard byjdtwelve12
HangmansNoose PackClosure byPopEye42
Paraleash - ADog LeashFrom Paracordby The Ideanator
How to make arugged andhandy ParacordBelt by Jake22
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 4 Step 4
Now with the left strand bring it up under the S shape through the top loop as shown
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 5 Step 5
Bring the strand back down over the first two parts of the S shape and under the bottom as shown
Step 6 Step 6
Tighten up the knot by carefully pulling on each of the working ends and loop ends of the cord You can adjust the size of the lanyards loop by working slack from theloop end to decrease its size or from the working ends to increase the loops size Ive kept the loop at about 2 inches in length so that a belt will fit through it but youcan make it larger or smaller to your preference You can also check that the working ends of the paracord are equal in length at this point and work slack through theknot to even them up if needed
Note the other side of the knot looks different with the cross pattern as shown
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 7 Step7
Now you can tie the next knot in the lanyard the same way as the first After tying the next knot work the slack through the knot until you have about 1 inch of spacebetween them then tighten and continue with the next knot Note that the knots look different on each side frontback and that you tie the each facing the same way oralternate them if you choose
Continue making knots until you have about 1 foot of cord left with each end of the working strands
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 8 Step 8
Now you will add your attachment like the swivel snap hook shown putting both strands through the swivel eye to begin tying the snake knot
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 9 Step 9Bring the right strand under the cords then up over them as shown
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 10 Step 10Now take the left strand over across the other strands back behind and under the cords and up through the right strand loop as shown Then tighten
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 11 Step 11
Take the right strand under and behind the cords then bring it back through the tightened knot along side itself as shown and tighten This is where hemostats come inhandy with tying this knot working the cord through the previously tightened part of the knot It can be done without hemostats but requires tighteningloosening of theknots with just your fingertips
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 12 Step 12
Turn the lanyard over so the other side of the knot is facing up The working strand now on the right side will be brought under the cords back up and down through theparallel strands of the knot as shown then tighten And continue this process flipping the lanyard over taking the right strand under and back up around and through theparallel cords and tighten Continue until you run out of cord or reach the cross knot
Youll now trim off any excess cord and quick melt the end of the strands to prevent fraying to finish
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 13 Variations
You can use other two strand knots instead of the cross knot for variations on this style of lanyard A few alternatives to try tying in a spaced out series or combination ofthem Matthew Walker knot double wall knot lanyard knot double overhand knots double figure 8 knots etc The finishing knots around the attachment can also bedifferent as Ive used the lanyard knot sometimes just one or several in a row
You can also use variations of the cross knot with paracord bracelets and watchbands Doubled version of the knot shown as a paracord bracelet and alternating withtwo pairs of strands for the paracord watchband Leftover pieces of paracord can be used for zipper pulls key ring fobs even paracord cross pendants
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Related Instructables
Paracord ChainSinnet FastDeploy BoonieHatband (video)by Stormdrane
Zigzag SpoolingParacord (video)by Stormdrane
SurvivalBracelet(Updated) bytevers94
Celtic ButtonKnot (video) byStormdrane
ParacordBoonie HatWrap (video) byStormdrane
Paracord wristlanyard madewith the snakeknot byStormdrane
SurvivalBracelet II bytevers94
Cobra WeaveKey Fob bytevers94
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Paracord wrist lanyard made with the snake knotby Stormdrane on September 12 2007
AuthorStormdrane Stormdranes BlogNo matter where you go there you are
Intro Paracord wrist lanyard made with the snake knotThis instructable will show how to make a wrist lanyard using paracord and the snake knot The lanyard can be used to secure a key chain knife multi-tool flashlightcell phone camera binoculars compass etc More projects links knot references can be seen on my blog page Stormdranes Blog
Step 1 SuppliesYoull need about 45 feet of paracord(you may use other types of cordage if desired) The paracord I used is from the Supply Captain I left the inner strands in theparacord but you can remove them if preferred If done in one color it will be one continuous 45 ft length if done in two colors youll need 3 ft for the primary color thatincludes the wrist section and 15 ft for the second color that will show in the snake knot Also used are scissors tape measure or ruler lighter hemostats or needle nosepliers(not necessary but they make it much easier) and a swivel clip key ring snap hook cell phone lariat carabiner or whatever attachment you prefer to use
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 2 Attaching two colors of paracordIf using two colors of paracord you will insert one color about 12 inch into the other color You may remove a small amount of the paracords inner strands by pullingthem out trimming with scissors and pulling the paracord outer sheath back over the strands leaving room to insert the other color For various projects Ive used threedifferent methods for attaching two colors of paracord melting sewing or gluing The choice is yours I usually sew them together it doesnt matter as long as its a goodconnection It will be hidden under the first knot
Step 3 Find the center of the length of paracordTake the center of the length of cord and bring it thru the attachment Im using a swivel clip For this tutorial Im measuring the wrist loop at about 10 inches from theattachment The connection of the two colors will be just on the other side at this point
Step 4 Making the snake knotThe snake knot will be made around the wrist loop section of paracord the loop strands being the core of the knot Ive added a series of photos showing the steps Iuse By using two colors youll see that I flip the lanyard over after making each knot so that Im working with the cord on the right side of the lanyard I bring it under allthe other cords working the hemostats under the previously tightened knot and pulling the cord back thru Then tightening up the knot keeping the cord from twisting andworking it up against the previous knot Again flipping the work over youll see two parallel cords of the same color which will be split with the cord on the right goingunder around and pulled thru with the hemostats then tightened up Continue this procedure until youve done about 10 snake knots(you can count them down eitherside
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 5 Count your knotsOnce you have 10 snake knots youre almost done Youll notice from the photos of both sides of the lanyard that one side has the snake knots alternating all the waydown and the other has a set of parallel knots at the top and botton of the sequence of knots Youll always have those at the start and finish of the snake knots I preferto have them end up on the same side of the lanyard so one side appears to have a more uniform look but its not required
Step 6 Trim and melt the excess paracordUse the scissors to trim off the excess cord and quickly melt the ends with a lighter so they dont fray
Step 7 Youre doneYou can make a range of variations using less or more cordknots Shorten the loop for a double ended key chain or make the loop longer for use as a neck lanyard aLanyard Break-Away Connector could be added for the safety conscious You can also add a wooden bead skull cord lock etc Visit my blog page for more knot relatedprojects links and resources Stormdranes Blog You can find ideas for other geargadgets to attach to your lanyard on EDC Forums
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Related Instructables
Paracord ChainSinnet FastDeploy BoonieHatband (video)by Stormdrane
Cross KnotParacordLanyard byStormdrane
Zigzag SpoolingParacord (video)by Stormdrane
SurvivalBracelet II bytevers94
SurvivalBracelet(Updated) bytevers94
Cobra WeaveKey Fob bytevers94
ParacordBoonie HatWrap (video) byStormdrane
Paracord KnotDisplay Bord byJamie bagn
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
How to tie various knotsby adaviel on September 7 2009
Intro How to tie various knotsKnots as a way of joining rope without special equipment are useful in many situations On a sailboat knots are essential both for daily use and for emergency repairsThis instructable describes several different common knots eg
Sheet Bend - to tie two lines togetherBowline - to make a loopReef Knot - to fasten a bundle of materialFishermans Bend - to secure a line to a post or ring
These knots are good for regular rope - braided or 3-strand polyester or natural fibre (hemp sisal) Monofilament (fishing line) or steel cable performs better with differentknots
Knots are typically quite a lot weaker than straight rope - when rope goes around a tight radius such as in a knot the outside is under more tension than the insideSplices (which require special tools and are time-consuming to make) are stronger so permanent fittings usually have eye-splices
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 1 Sheet BendThe sheet bend is used to tie two lines together It is perhaps the most generally useful knot of all When used to tie a line to itself making a loop it is called a bowlineThe strain is taken on the ropes in the middle - not the one coming out the side
How the knot is made is not critical - it is the final shape that is important One can make the flat loop first and work the other rope around it Or one can make thecrossed loop first - required when tying a bowline
The two images show front and back views of the same knot
AdvantagesEasy to makeEasy to undo when tension is removedDoes not easily capsize
DisadvantagesHard to make under loadDangerous to make under heavy load
UsesJoining two equally-sized ropesExtending a towline or stern line
Method 1 the same as a bowline
Method 2 starting with the flat loop
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 2 Double Sheet BendThe double sheet bend is used to tie two lines of different thickness - but not too different It is the same as a normal sheet bend but with an extra turn of the thinner ropearound the flat loop in the thickerThe load goes on the line through the flat loop not the one that comes out the side of the knot
UsesSecuring a heaving line to a tow lineExtending a stern line if you dont have enough line of one thickness
Step 3 BowlineThe bowline is really a special case of the sheet bend but it it tied at the end of a rope to make a loop
The photos show the completed loop and closeups of the front and back of the actual knot Note that it is the same as the sheet bend - but it must be made the right wayround This loop does not tighten in use The knot is quite easy to untie once the load is removed With practice it is very quick to tie
Some usesSecuring a dinghy line to a railing or stanchionSecuring an anchor line to an anchorTie a jib sheet to the sailTie a mooring line around a rock or treeTie a float to an anchor triplineUse one in each line to tie two ropes of very different sizes - eg a throwing line to a large tow ropeDisadvantages the knot must be completely made before it will take any strain - it is hard to tie if there is already a load on the rope
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Linked bowlines
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 4 Bowline on the BightA bowline on the bight is a bowline tied in a loop of rope (neither end is needed) The shape is the same as a bowline made with a double line but the middle of thebight forms the loop around the standing part
UsesAn impromptu bosuns chair - to sit in while being transferred between two boats at sea
Step 5 Clove HitchThe clove hitch can be made when you only have the bight (the middle) of a rope not the ends
UsesSecuring a burgee pole to a burgee halyard (a continuous loop of thin line)Securing a tiller from swinging
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 6 Round Turn and Two Half-HitchesThis is a knot used to secure a line to a ring or bar Wind a couple of turns around the bar then secure the end with two hitches around the standing part (this looks like aclove hitch when done)
AdvantagesCan be made under load - it is easy to take turns around the bar while maintaining tension on the ropeStrong - provided the bar is thicker than the rope the rope is not weakened by sharp bendsDisadvantagesThe end tends to work loose
UsesSecuring a line to a mooring ring or samson post
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 7 Fishermans BendThe fishermans bend is the same as the round turn and two half hitches except that the first hitch is looped under the round turn This uses the tension on the rope tosecure the end from working loose
AdvantagesSecure against working loose
DisadvantagesHard to make under tensionHard to undo under tensionMay seize up under load when wet making it hard to undo
UsesSecuring mooring line to ringSecuring fender lines to rail
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 8 Studsail BendThe studsail bend is like the fishermans bend but the second hitch is also secured under the round turn making it even more secure against working loose when undertension
AdvantagesVery secure against working looseDisadvantagesHard to make under tensionHard to undo under tension
Step 9 Figure-8 KnotThe figure-eight knot is used to prevent an end of rope from passing through a block (pulley) Sometimes called a stopper knot
The double figure-8 knot is used in rock climbing as an alternative to a bowline to secure a climbing harness to the end of a safety rope The double knot is made bymaking a single knot then tracing back around the knot with the free end after passing it around the harness loop
AdvantagesEasy to verify by inspectionNot prone to work loose
DisadvantagesSlow to make and undoCannot be made under load
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 10 Prussic KnotThe prussic knot may be used as a climbing ascender - when made around a vertical rope as shown downwards tension on the ends locks the knot while release oftension allows it to be slid up the rope A pair of prussic knots on foot loops may be used in tandem to climb a rope
UsesClimbing a ropeTaking up tension to free a riding turn on a winch
Step 11 Reef KnotThe reef knot or square knot is used to tie a bundle of material together It must be made around something - it should not be used to tie two free ropes togetherbecause it can easily capsizeIt should not be used to make a loop unless it can be tensioned around a solid object It should not be used around a person - use a bowline instead A capsized reefknot will slip easily and could constrict and cause severe injury
UsesReefing a sail (tying the unused portion around a spar)Securing a furled sail to a spar (sail ties)Wrapping a parcelTying shoelaces
AdvantagesMay be made under moderate load
DisadvantagesCapsizes (works free) if used improperlyCan seize up under load when wet
Tying the knot
Capsizing a reef knot
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 12 CleatsThis is not a knot but is very common on boatsThe first picture shows a rope cleated normally The second shows one with a final locking turn - the last turn is twisted before placing over the cleat so that the tensionon the rope helps secure the free end
When working with ropes under tension take a turn or two around a winch or cleat before trying to secure the end with a knot The load on the free end falls exponentiallywith each turn taken Severe injury can result if a finger or other body part is caught in a loop of rope or between a rope and another object
Step 13 Practice themIt is sometimes useful to be able to tie knots in the dark or as in this video behind your back
Related Instructables
AThird Hand forSailing or OtherThings by WadeTarzia
Paracord KnotDisplay Bord byJamie bagn
Trip LogOutriggerCanoe Sailingthe CaliforniaChannel Islandsby TimAnderson
How to Tie aFigure EightKnot byTactical_Pyro
How to build apirate ship bymdelaney3
Build a ShortDragon (16 foot3-BoardOutriggerSailing Canoe)by Wade Tarzia
repairing aheadsail by josh
How to get arope into a tree(withoutclimbing it) byvitex
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
How to Tie the Lanyard Knotby eddy14777 on January 31 2010
Intro How to Tie the Lanyard KnotMany people including myself have had trouble following the Stormdrane youtube video on tying the lanyard knot so i have done some research and found the solution
Image Notes1 Finished knot
Step 1 MaterialsAll you need is a reasonable length of para cord or whatever you wish to use
Image Notes1 One reasonable amount
Step 2 First StepThe first thing you are going to do is to make a bight that leaves you with to congruent endsThen you are going to put your ring finger through the bight
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Image Notes1 Close enough2 Bight
Step 3 Starting the KnotMake a loop just like the one in the picture and place it over the top strandBring the top strand under the bottom strand
Image Notes1 Notice the way the loop is done2 Top strand
Image Notes1 Bottom strand2 Top strand is under
Step 4 The Most Important PartNow you take the top stand from the previous picture and feed it over the first part of the loop under itself and back over the remainder of the loop
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Image Notes1 Under me2 Top strand3 This should make a diamond type shape
Step 5 DoublingNow take the bottom stand and take it around the part of the top strand nearest to the bight and than come up through the diamond shape in the middleDo the same for the top strand
Image Notes1 Top strand
Image Notes1 Both through the diamond
Step 6 FinishingWhen you take it off your finger it should look like thisWork out the slack by pulling on the bight and the two strands
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Image Notes1 Finished knot
Related Instructables
Cross KnotParacordLanyard byStormdrane
Celtic ButtonKnot (video) byStormdrane
Paracord wristlanyard madewith the snakeknot byStormdrane
Paracord ChainSinnet FastDeploy BoonieHatband (video)by Stormdrane
Zigzag SpoolingParacord (video)by Stormdrane
ParacordBoonie HatWrap (video) byStormdrane
Paracord IDbadge Lanyardby Flahusky
Cobra WeaveKey Fob bytevers94
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Four knots to make paracord into a useful toolby erik_mccray on March 27 2010
Authorerik_mccrayI am an ex-fabricator that is now a stay at home dad I love my new job but I do miss making stuff I love this site amp I am getting involved as a way to keep myskills upOn top of fad work I have also run two small business in the past One was custom sewing amp the other was as a small engine mechanicI have two votec degrees one in metal fabrication amp the other is in engine repairI look forward to getting to know everyone here
Intro Four knots to make paracord into a useful toolParacord is an awesome multitool used everywhere from the wild blue yonder to the deepest caverns But like any good tool it is only as good as the knowledge the userhas about the tool With most people out there using bungee cords amp ratchet straps it seems that paracord is being used for nothing more than friendship bracelets forgrown men This is a shame because for less then the price of a few cheap bungee cords amp some to short to be helpful straps You can get yourself hundreds of feet ofparacord
The key to getting the most out of the paracord is good knot work The first thing you need to know is what makes a good knot One is that the knot is easy amp quick to tieamp more impotant is that the knot is easy amp quick to untie The hitch class of knots is by far the best group of knots that the average person could know The four mostuseful hitch knots are the half hitch a quick simple knot that forms the base for many other knots the inline half hitch allowing you to get the most out of one length ofparacord the slippery hitch that gives you both on the fly control over tension on your paracord but also an adjustable loop that will not change unless you want it amp theinline truckers hitch instantly doubling the your pulling power
Step 1 To get started lets get some terminology that will be used defined
line= the paracord
Main line= the part of the paracord doing the work for example holding down your tarp or the long part of the paracord
Mid line= the middle of the length of the paracord
End line= the unused length of paracord or the short length of paracord
Step 2 The half hitch The half hitch is a simple way to secure a line to an anchor point like the tie down points in most trucks A half hitch is a constrictor knot meaning that the harder you pullon the line the tighter the knots grip gets Another common constrictor knot is the slip knot
Step 1 wrap your line around your anchor point Step 2 wrap the end line around the main line
Step 3 pass the end line threw the end line side of the newly formed loop
step 4 now take the slack out of the knot
step 5 to make sure the knot is secure tie another half hitch to the main line This knot is called adouble half hitch
step 6 another useful thing that can be done with the half hitch is that instead of repeating the wrap on the main line but repeating it on what you are tying to the half hitchcan be used to bind something like a stack of 2x4s
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Image Notes1 End line2 Main line3 step 1
Image Notes1 Step 2
Image Notes1 passing thew the end line side of the loop2 step 3
Image Notes1 step 5
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Image Notes1 step 6
Step 3 The mid line half hitch The mid line half hitch is for when the length of line is to long for the job at hand amp you dont want to have to cut the line to size or you are using multiple anchor pointswith one length of line
Step 1 double up the line at the point in the length you wish to make the knot
Step 2 wrap the doubled up portion of line around your anchor point The doubled up length is now now the end line
Step 3 now tie just as you did for the regular half hitch repeat the knot to make a double half hitch for security
Image Notes1 A mid line double half hitch
Image Notes1 step 1
Image Notes1 The end line2 step 2
Image Notes1 Step 3
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 4 The slippery hitch The slippery hitch is a great knot for adjusting tension on the main line or for having an adjustable fixed loop To adjust the knot simply slide the knot up or down the mainline
Step 1 wrap your line around the anchor point or just double over the line to form a loop
Step 2 wrap the end line around the main line three times Wrapping in the direction of the anchor point or loop
Step 3 put together the two lines making up the loop amp wrap the two lines one time with the end line
Step 4 pass the end line thew the last loop formed covering the two lined of the loop
Step 5 pull the knot tite
step 6 to adjust the size of the loop or main line tension grab the knot amp slide it up or down the main line
Image Notes1 grab just the knot its self to adjust it2 step 5
Image Notes1 step 1
Image Notes1 step 2
Image Notes1 step 3
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Image Notes1 step 4
Image Notes1 grab just the knot its self to adjust it2 step 5
Image Notes1 same knot as in last pic Just slid up2 step 6
Step 5 The mid line truchers hitch The truckers hitch is a great way to double the pulling force on a line There are many ways to tie this knot the problem with most of them is that at some point you aregoing to have to pass the end line through a loop on the main line that is acting like a pulley to double your pulling force this is great if you are making the knot close tothe end of your line but if you are using a 300 length of line amp want to make the knot in the first ten feet having to pass 290 of line thew a loop is a pain But with a fewhalf hitches you will not have to pass the end line threw any loop on the main line
step 1 wrap your line around the anchor point then double over your end line laying the top of the loop over the main line
Step 2 double up your main line amp lay the loop over the loop made by the end line
step 3 in main line above the knot twist in a loop
step 4 put main line loop thew the loop made in step 3 amp pull this loop tight over your main line loop forming a half hitch Repeat step 3 amp 4 to make a doublehalf hitch
step 5 To use the knot just pull down on the end line to put tension on the main line
step 6 after you have the main line snug tie a mid line double half hitch around the two lines forming the loop at the end of the main line with the end line
step 7 Tie a double half hitch with the end line around the end loop of the mid line half hitch of step 6 using the same method as used in steps 3 amp 4
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Image Notes1 the end of step 6
Image Notes1 main line2 end line3 step 1
Image Notes1 main line loop2 end line loop
Image Notes1 step 3
Image Notes1 step 4
Image Notes1 step 4 at the end with a double half hitch on the main loop
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Image Notes1 pull here2 step 5
Image Notes1 the start of step 6
Image Notes1 the end of step 6
Image Notes1 step 72 now the rest of the line is free to do more work
Related Instructables
Paracord KnotDisplay Bord byJamie bagn
ChokelessAdjustableParacord DogLeash byPizzaman101
ParacordLadder wWooden Rungsby josestude
tie a paracordshackle grip byitri45
ParacordPrussik Belt byJavaNut13
TiteTie is theTruckers Knoton Steroids bytitetie
ID Lanyard(Photos) byeschmunk
Dog Toys forHeavy Chewersby J3443RY
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Figure 8 knot and double 8 knotby jonathan111 on November 28 2007
Intro Figure 8 knot and double 8 knotI will show you how to tie a figure 8 knot and a figure 8 follow through
Step 1 Stating the knotThis is a simple knot so just follow the pictures
Step 2 Finishing the knotCross the string under and then push it through the hole Pull tightly unless you are going to do the follow through and leave it somewhat loose
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 3 The follow through knotThe follow through knot should be tied around something brought back and followed through the path of the 8 knot Look at the pictures Basically follow through the 8knot backwards
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Related Instructables
Climb Safe WithA Figure 8Knot by mattste A pocket full of
knots byKiteman
How to Tie aFigure EightKnot byTactical_Pyro
Paracord KnotDisplay Bord byJamie bagn
Cross KnotParacordLanyard byStormdrane
How to Tie aFire-escapeKnot by leonardoismael
Truckers HitchTHE mostawesome knoton the planetby schneidp20
Paracord ZipperPuller byrepeet13
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Truckers Hitch THE most awesome knot on the planetby schneidp20 on October 12 2008
Authorschneidp20I like building stuff Trouble is there just isnt enough time to build everything Sigh
Intro Truckers Hitch THE most awesome knot on the planetYes I know that there are plenty of other cool knots out there many of which I literally couldnt live wo I rock climb However this knot is unlike any other Plus Ineeded a grabber for my Instructable -) (BTW this ISNT a climbing knot) And in truth it isnt a knot by itself but rather a system of common knots
Have you ever tried to tie something down for transporting but just couldnt get the lines tight andor during transport the lines would continually loosen Then this is theknot for you I learned this knot back in the 70s when specialty car racks and ratchet straps were rare or unheard of I initially used it to tie a canoe on a car rack bothattaching to the rack as well as the lines to the bow and stern of the canoe Even with all the new gizmos available today this knot still shines because all you need is arope and ropes dont hum in the wind like straps
The unique aspect of this knot is that it gives you a 2-1 mechanical advantage when tightening the rope Be careful though You can actually damage some thingsbecause of the mechanical advantage This knot holds fast and is easy to untie hallmark traits of any good knot
Below you see the finished knot system well break it apart in the steps that follow
Image Notes1 1st anchor point a bowline2 loop3 securing knots 2 half hitches4 securing loose end with a fishermans knot5 2nd anchor point (should be round)
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Image Notes1 X marks the spot
Step 1 Initial setupThe first step is to anchor one end of the rope and then loop the rope around a 2nd anchor point
For attaching to the 1st anchor point I chose bowline a close 2 on my list -) There are other instructables on that one so I wont bore you here
The 2nd anchor really should be round because it serves as a pulley in this block and tackle type knot Ive used it on sharp anchor points and it doesnt work as well
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 2 Creating a slip knotTie a slip knot somewhere between the two anchor points Correct placement of the slip knot takes some experience to judge it correctly Typically I place it too close tothe 2nd anchor point and end up with not enough room to work with If the knot ends up too far from 2nd anchor point you can extend the knot by enlarging the loop
Be sure you tie the slip knot as shown You may not be able to untie other knots
In this small example the slip knot is uncharacteristically close to the 1st anchor point
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 3 Tightening and securingThe loose end of the rope that went around the 2nd anchor point goes through the slip knot loop Pull the loose end to the desired tension and secure with two halfhitches
Note To allow better view of the knots the rope isnt really tightened in this example
Step 4 Securing loose endThe final knot is just to secure the loose end somehow I chose a fishermans knot to do this
To tie a fishermans knot the rope goes around twice and goes under the X created by the loops Pull the loose end to tighten Finally slide the knot to put tension onthe half hitches
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Image Notes1 X marks the spot
Step 5 FinishedThere you have it I guarantee that the first time you really use this knot (not just practice) you will be amazed at how well it works and youll wish you knew this knot along time ago You may even come over to my side and declare that is is THE most awesome knot on the planet -)
Enjoy and happy haulingDave
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Related Instructables
TiteTie is theTruckers Knoton Steroids bytitetie
Four knots tomake paracordinto a usefultool byerik_mccray
Modify yourbike rack tocarry a sunfishor other boat byewilhelm
SurfboardHammock byGermy
GiganticHalloweenSpider Web bynolte919
How To Tie ASpiders Hitch(video) by back-cast
Three-hitch mathair ornamentby michiexile TRX from
ParacordChallengeAccepted bythrake
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Carry any Bottle with a JUG KNOT Handleby hpstoutharrow on September 17 2009
Intro Carry any Bottle with a JUG KNOT HandleTie a JUG KNOT around a water bottle soda bottle or aluminum bottle to make a secure carrying strap
Re-purpose any container into a reusable water bottle by adding a convenient carrying strap This Instructable will demonstrate how to tie a JUG knot which like its namesuggests is meant to properly secure around the neck of a container
With some cord and the knowledge of this knot you will be able add a handle lanyard or carabiner loop to any of your favorite beverages to carry them on the go
It works perfectly for those disposable water bottles and who knows once you add some colorful cord to the plain old clear water bottle you just might beinclined to refill it and use it again(Check out pictures 4amp5 below)
In addition to plastic beverage bottles like pop water and sports drinks you can turn those rugged aluminum beer bottles into a backpacking canteen
Those of you familiar with my previous aluminum bottle InstructablesROLLED RIM METAL TUMBLERhttpwwwinstructablescomidAluminum-Bottle-Tumbler-Cup-Cook-PotALUMINUM BOTTLE LIGHTWEIGHT ALCOHOL STOVEhttpwwwinstructablescomidAluminum-Bottle-Alcohol-Stovewill recognize the water canteen shown below as a re-purposed aluminum beer bottle Here I have added a painted surface treatment to turn it into a proper lookingwater bottle More on that in steps 13 14 15
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 1 Getting StartedCord size is important Select a small medium weight cord like the one shown here It is a general purpose camp cord sold at most sporting goods stores (shoelacesmight also work)
Do not use a heavy cord or rope because the larger diameter will not tuck under the relatively small lip at the top of the bottleneck and the bottle will fall out
Also the smaller cord cinches tight on itself and will not loosen accidentally
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 2 Form a BightThe next steps show how to tie a JUG KNOT It is the basic step for adding a carrying strap It is also the anchor point for any additional fancy bottle trussing you maywant to add
JUG KNOT Step 1
Form a Bight in the center of a length of cord Bight is a knot term for a loop or bend in the rope In this case the main Bight in this knot is highlighted with a white mark Imakes it easier to follow its path in these steps
The running ends of the cord should be equal length
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 3 Pull the Bight downPULL the Bight DOWN forming two Loops
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 4 Cross the LoopsCROSS the right Loop OVER the left Loop
Step 5 Pass the Bight under the 1st loopTake the main Bight and pass it UNDER the left Loop
Step 6 Weave the BightWEAVE the Bight OVER the portion of the right Loop and UNDER the portion of the left Loop
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 7 Extend the BightExtend the Bight OVER the outer portion of the right Loop
Step 8 Flip the Right Loop behindAdditional colored identification points have been added to the loops to follow their travel in these next two steps
The right Loop Yellow marker is FLIPPED BEHIND the knot and ends up on the far left side of the knot
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 9 Flip the 2nd loop in frontRaise the green marker (located on what was formerly the left loop) and pull it down and to the right FLIPPING IT IN FRONT of the knot
Note the blue portion of the this loop will pass around the outside of the yellow portion of the first loop
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Image Notes1 Center of knot that will tighten around the bottles neck
Step 10 Remove SlackNote where the blue green amp yellow markers end up
Start to remove the slack in the loops by pulling the original main Bight (white marker top right) and the two free standing ends at the bottom
the bottle neck will pass through the very center of the knot
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Image Notes1 Center of knot that will tighten around the bottles neck
Step 11 Tighten the KnotAfter removing the slack insert the bottle neck and finish tightening
The knot should look like this before slipping it over the bottle
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 12 Secure on bottle neckThis is the finished knot shown on the neck of various containers
The loop end and the two free standing ends can be tied together to create a carrying handle (last picture below)
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 13 Aluminum Bottle Water Bottle
The next few steps show the features of an aluminum beer bottle re-purposed as a water bottle canteen It is one of many containers that can be reused as a camp waterbottle
The bottle was lightly sanded masked and then pained with a hammered finished paint to create an interesting surface texture
Image Notes1 Textured finish paint makes an interesting grip-able surface2 Masked with tape for painting3 Masked with tape for painting
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Image Notes1 Dowel used for holding the bottle during painting
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 14 Tethered Cork StopperUse a wine bottle man made Cork as a stopper for your aluminum water bottleNote Use a cork that was removed from the wine bottle without the corkscrew penetrating through the bottom end of the cork (A hole all the way through the cork willcause it to leak) Use the unpierced end of the cork inside the water bottle
Drill a hole through the sides of the Cork Thread the cord through the hole to the center of the cord Use the cork as the main Bight and tie the Jug knot as shown inthe beginning steps
Now the cork is tethered to the bottle and will not get lost or fall on the ground
A Carabiner clip passes through the other cord end to attache the water bottle to you belt or pack
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 15 Trussed for TransportThis is another hanging method for carrying your aluminum bottle water canteen A Jug knot is tied conventionally around the neck
The running ends of the knot however are pulled down towards the bottom of the bottle A Barrel Knot is tied about 34 the way down the side of the bottle A squareknot is tied on the bottom of the knot to keep the two running ends tight against the sides of the bottle
I like the look of the accent colored cord running down the sides of the bottle and the fact that the bottle hangs from the belt upside down It adds to its uniqueness
The last picture shows another truss variation
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 16 AdvancedBelow is a bottle with some additional trussing You can be creative as you want It all starts with a re-purposed container and the Jug Knot (and enough cord)
Related Instructables
AluminumBottle TumblerCup amp Cook Potfor an AlcoholStove byhpstoutharrow
Water BottleBelt Clip byuglymike Duct Tape
Water Bottle byrabidsquire2
AluminumBottle AlcoholStove byhpstoutharrow
DIYGlass WaterBottle byCulturespy
Solar WaterHeater forBackpackingUsing WaterBottles and aCar Shade bykopomeroy
Duct tape waterbottle holder(Photos) by pinkmarshmallow
How to make aCamelPack withan old plasticbottle bywillrandship
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Basic Knots Guideby zorro3355 on April 29 2008
Intro Basic Knots Guidehi
Step 1 Thumb knotThe most simple knotUsed as a stopper and prevent ropes from fraying
Step 2 Reef KnotUsed to tie two ropes of equal thickness togetherIt is pretty easy to tie and untie but under tentionit may be diffcult to untieIt is also not sutible for smoothropes(egnylon ropes)
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 3 Figure of eightused as a stopperprevent ropes from fraying and its more secure than tumb knot its is also used to tie Caribinas to ropes and is often used in rock climbing
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 4 Timber hitchused for pulling logs
Step 5 Clove hitchUsed to tie a rope onto a pole or logThe pole must be roundThe pole lust be thicker then the rope itself
(greatly used during pioneering)
Step 6 Sheet bandused to tie ropes of different thickness together(works on same thickness of ropes too)
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 7 Sheep shankTo shorten RopesTo prevent middle fraying
Step 8 Slip knotWhippingUsed as a grip for pulling things(when tied on a stick or small pole)(marlin spike hitch)
Related Instructables
Rope Rings byhpstoutharrow
How to Tie aFigure EightKnot byTactical_Pyro
Whippin (WestCountry Style)by tim_n
SurvivalBracelet(Updated) bytevers94
HangmansNoose PackClosure byPopEye42
Turkey on aTripod byhpstoutharrow
SurvivalBracelet II bytevers94 Zigzag Spooling
Paracord (video)by Stormdrane
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
How to Tie a Fire-escape Knotby leonardo ismael on October 16 2007
Intro How to Tie a Fire-escape KnotThis knot is used by firemen in case of fires for example imagine a scene where the ladder on the firetruck messes up but people need to get down a five story buildingor more All they have is a long piece of rope they can safely get down with a secure knot like the fire-escape knot So why not learn it its easy to do and hard to untieif you tie it tightly
This is from the American Boys Handbook
Step 1 Get Your RopeFirst grab a piece of rope and bend it like this to make a loop in it Follow every step to the smallest detail
Step 2 Twist the RopeNow make a twist like this and hold it together
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 3 Pull Through the TwistPull the loop through the twist you just made from underneath
Step 4 Go Over the Split EndNow pull the tail through the loop
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 5 FinallyAnd finally just pull it through as pictured below
Congratulations you just learned the fire-escape knot
Step 6 Same Name Not KnotThis is another knot called the fire-escape knot this shouldnt be your result
Related Instructables
House FireEscape Plan(video) byWhatHappensNowAdvice
ParacordLadder wWooden Rungsby josestude
Bed SheetEscape Rope byjessehensel
rope ladder(glow-in-the-dark version) bymikeasaurus
HeadlockEscape 2(video) byjohnnyrockstah
QuickFirestarter byMattandJora
Trail sauna byjakee117
How to Kill FireAnts andCommitGenocide byKentsOkay
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Climb Safe With A Figure 8 Knotby mattste on February 23 2010
Intro Climb Safe With A Figure 8 Knot There are many things that a beginning climber needs to know including several important knots Perhaps the most essential knot is the Figure 8 Follow Through Thistutorial will demonstrate how to correctly harness yourself to a rope using a Figure 8 Follow Through knot This knot is used primarily by rock climbers to provide a life-line Since this knot is used as a life-line it is very important to be able to tie it correctly (Your life could depend upon it)
Dont worry with this tutorial and about 5 minutes of practice you can have this knot mastered
Things you will need
- Climbing Harness- Climbing Rope
If you are wanting to go climbing and dont already have these items they can be purchased for about $25 each at most outdoor sporting goods stores If you are merelylooking to learn the knot a belt loop and a rope (about five feet long) will do
Image Notes1 Climbing Harness2 Climbing Rope
Step 1 Dealing With The RopeThroughout this tutorial I will be discussing different parts of the rope To make these instructions as clear as possible I will define a few terms that I will use throughoutthe tutorial The Anchor End of the rope will generally be at the top of the images This is the end that would be anchored to the wall or rock and does not move Wewill not be doing much with the anchored end The Tail End of the rope is the opposite end that we will be dealing with I will call this the tail for short
Now that we have some terms to work with lets get started
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 2 Tying The First Figure 8This knot has several parts to it The first part of the knot is just tying a basic figure 8 To tie the first figure 8 there are four simple steps
1 - Using the tail make a loop over the rope (as shown in the first picture) keeping in mind that there should be about 3 ft of slack on the tail end
2 - Wrap the tail back this time go under the anchored end (As shown in the second picture)
3 - Bring the tail down through the first loop (As shown in the third picture)
4 - Finally pull the two ends to make the knot a little bit tighter and easier to deal with (Shown in the fourth picture)
After these four steps you should end up with a knot that resembles a figure 8
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 3 Looping Into The Harness In order to secure the rope to the harness simply thread the tail end of the rope through the front loop in the harness as shown in the picture below This step isobviously very important
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 4 Following Back Through The Figure 8After looping the rope through the harness you have to thread the tail end of the rope back through the knot following the first figure 8 I have divided this process intofive smaller steps in order to make it more clear
1 - Coming form underneath the knot bring the tail up through the near loop and to the left behind the anchored end of the rope (Shown in the first picture)
2 - Wrap the tail around the anchored end back to the right and down through the adjacent loop (Shown in the second picture)
3 - You simply need to bring the tail back over the top of the knot to the left (Shown in the third picture)
4 - Bring the tail end up through the far loop following the anchored end (Shown in the fourth picture)
5 - Finally pull the knot tight (Shown in the fifth picture)
As you can see the first four pictures are simply tracing the knot back through with the tail end
For the last part while you pull the knot tight you may want to make small adjustments and rearrange how it all fits together If the knot does not lay perfectly smoothand tight its NOT a big deal
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 5 Finishing The Knot After completing the Figure 8 knot you will want to somehow secure the tail end of the rope out of the way There are a couple different ways to do this the way that Iwill demonstrate is using whats called a Stopper Knot This secondary knot is similar to a Fishermans knot and is pretty simple I have once again divided thisprocess into several smaller steps
1 - Start by wrapping the tail end around the anchored end (As shown in the first picture)
2 - Wrap the tail back underneath the two vertical segments (As shown in the second picture)
3 - Simply repeat the first two steps wrapping the tail around again (As shown in the third picture)
4 - This step in the fourth picture may look complicated but all you need to do is insert the tail up through the two loops that you have just made
5 - To finish off the knot you will want to slowly pull the tail end while gently pushing the bottom of the stopper knot upwards If you have successfully completed this knotit should look something like the fifth picture
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 6 Ready To Climb Now that you have mastered the Figure 8 knot you can securely harness yourself into a climbing rope Remember there are many other skills that go into setting up ananchor and belaying a climber This tutorial only covers the figure 8 knot For more information there are many great websites that demonstrate how to correctly set up asafe climbing system (Ive posted a few below) If you are a beginning climber I recommend that you read up on a few other climbing techniques Also you shouldprobably go to a climbing wall or gym where there are experienced climbers that can show you the ropes Hopefully this tutorial has been helpful Have fun and be safe
Some useful linkshttpwwwstephenprattnetAnchorsanchorshtmhttpwwwuoregonedu~oppclimbingtopicsanchorshtmlhttpwwwabc-of-rockclimbingcomhowtoclimbingtechniquesasp
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Related Instructables
How to Tie aFigure EightKnot byTactical_Pyro
Paracord KnotDisplay Bord byJamie bagn
Basic KnotsGuide byzorro3355
How to Climb aTree (withprussiks) bystasterisk
How to climb atree (using onlyrope) thefunsimple wayby louieaw
How to get arope into a tree(withoutclimbing it) byvitex
How to tievarious knots byadaviel
How to make arope swing byjdub0928
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Turks Head Knots on a Bottleby sklnxbones on July 6 2010
Intro Turks Head Knots on a BottleThis is the finished project A bottle decorated with three Turks Head Knots There are only three knots on this bottle The RED and the BLUE knots are each a 20 Bightby 3 Lead Turks Head Knots The WHITE knot is a 20 Bight by 19 Lead Turks Head Knot
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 1 Supplies
Cord Lots and Lots of cord I cant tell you how much each bottle is differentBottle Washed and Dried inside and out Make sure to remove all water spotsThreaded Needle Cord screws into the threads at the base of the needlePegs I use brass rivets used as a map to tie the Turks Head KnotsHole Punch Used to punch holes in the painters tape to hold the pegsPainters Tape To hold the pegs in place and to make your map for the Turks Head KnotsMarker To write on the painters tapeCloth Towel To remove finger prints and dirt from your bottleKrazy Glue or Super Glue This is used to secure the knots in place to the bottle
OPTIONAL BUT HIGHLY RECOMMENDEDI use the Turks Head Cookbook from KnotToolcom
Step 2 PreparationYou will need to find a bottle you like I used an empty instant tea bottle of course washed and dried (I like to put the bottle in the oven for a few minutes to dry the insidewithout water spots Take off the lid and do not put lid in the oven) Now measure the circumference of the bottle Take a cord and tightly wrap the cord around the bottleMark where the ends meet and use a ruler to measure the length of the cord For my instant tea bottle the circumference is 27cm I know from past knots that I have tiedthat I want my knot to have 20 Bights in the top and bottom (bands) knots I am going to use the Bights in the (bands) knots to tie the middle knot Now divide the numberof Bights (20) into the size of the circumference (27) to get the space between each Bight (135) With me so far
Now take two pieces of painters tape using a ruler measure out the length of the circumference and mark the length on the both pieces of tape Next you will mark thespace between each Bight on the tape
Step 3 Adding the PegsI like to use pegs when tying Turks Head Knots it just makes tying the knot easier
These are what I use for pegs
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 4 Adding Pegs to the TapeNow take a hole punch to cut holes in the tape where the lines meet You will place the pegs in the holes
Insert a peg in each hole and carefully stick the first piece of tape to the bottle
Step 5 Adding the 2nd row of pegsNow do the same thing with the second piece of tape The numbers on each piece of tape must line up
This picture shows you what you should have now This odd looking thing will be your map to tie the Turks Head Knot And this is the end of Step 1
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 6 Tying the first Turks Head KnotUsing the Turks Head Cookbook follow the numbers going over and under as indicated in the book I chose a 20 Bight by 3 Lead knot which will give me a nice bandaround the bottle Once the ends meet you have made one complete knot Tape the running end of your cord and start removing the pegs and the tape
Step 7 Remove the pegs and the tapeBe careful not to untie the knot as you remove the pegs and tape from the bottle Continue to remove all the pegs and remove the tape from the bottle At this point theknot will be very loose and will need to be tightened up
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 8 Remove the slack from the knotHere you can see just how much the knot expanded Starting with the standing end begin to pull the slack out of the knot going towards the running end of the cordDo not expect to pull all the slack out at once You may have to make 3 - 5 attempts at removing the slack out of the knot DO NOT remove all of the slack out of the knotIn order to make the bands we will have to triple the Turks Head Knot We will do this by following the knot three times The threaded needle will really come in handyhere
Step 9 Triple the KnotOnce you have made three passes of the Turks Head Knot use your needle to go under your knot about half the circumference and cut the cord The knot will be tightenough to hide the tail in placeTIP I carefully add a couple of drops of super glue UNDER the band to hold them in place and keep them from sliding around in the nextsteps A drop or two in 3 or 4 places around the band should be enough
Step 10 Add the second knotNow repeat this whole step for the second bandWhen tying the second band you must make sure the Bights line up to the first band This is crucial for the next stepWipe down the bottle to make sure all your finger prints and adhesive from the tape are all removed You want to make sure your bottle is clean at this point Any dirt orfinger prints left on the bottle will be almost impossible to remove From this point on we will use gloves when tying our last knot
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 11 Maping the Top KnotStick a piece of painters tape on top of your first band leaving the bottom of the knot exposedUse a marker to count the number of Bights in your knot Instead of using the pegs we are going to use the Bights to tie our next Turks Head Knot
Step 12 Mapping the Bottom KnotDo the same thing for the bottom band but you must make sure your numbers on top and bottom line up So 1 on top should be the same position as 1 on the bottom
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 13 Adding the last knotAgain using the Turks Head Cookbook and the threaded needle you are going to follow the instructions going over and under as indicated in the book Be sure to usegloves when ever you handle the bottle
Step 14 Thats ItFor this Turks Head Knot I am using a 20 Bight by 19 Lead knot
Because of the amount of cord you are working with your cord will get twisted and knotted You will have to un-twist the cord often Its a pain in the rear but it has to bedone And it has to be done alot
Continue to tie the knot until you finish the knot If you have the cord and the patience you can double or triple the knot When you are done use your needle to hide theends under your bands Cut the ends and your DONE
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Related Instructables
Monkeys FistFloatingKeychain byjokerlz
How To Make ATurks headKnot WithParacord byDoggie Stylish
Tying Trivetsout of Rope forHoliday Gifts bykylemarsh
Paracord KnotDisplay Bord byJamie bagn
How to Make ATurks Head(Photos) bymchs60chip
A pocket full ofknots byKiteman
Monkeys fistknot AND themonkey byjonathan111
TiteTie is theTruckers Knoton Steroids bytitetie
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Larks head noose -- an easy useful knot that tightens and loosensby Larry Breed on February 19 2009
Intro Larks head noose -- an easy useful knot that tightens and loosensI thought I knew all the basic knots but then I was taught this incredibly useful simple knot Its good for tying up the neck of a bag that you want to repeatedly open andsecurely close Its good for tying around a springy bundle that will need tightening and retightening And its easy to undo
Ive looked at knot literature but havent found a name for this so I named it The basic knot is well known its called a larks head Since all Ive done is to slip the twoends through the larks head to make a noose I call it that
WARNING Dont use this knot when human safety would depend on it Climbers and mountaineers have well-tested reliable knots for such situations
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Image Notes1 To tighten further step on this side of the larks head and pull the free ends
Step 1 Double the cord overThe larks head noose requires enough cord to go twice around your bundle plus a foot or two Find the center and double it over Sailors call this a bight
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 2 Form the larks headComing from below the bight hook your thumb and forefinger over the two sides Reach outward and downward and pinch your fingertips together underneath thedoubled cord
Youve made a larks head Move the crossing cord a little farther from your hand so theres a clear opening through the two half-loops
Step 3 Form the nooseSlip the two ends of the cord through the opening we were just talking about Pull the larks head tight so it grips the two cords Find something that needs constrictingand put the noose around it
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 4 Tightening retightening and lockingSlide the knot against the bundle If its not tight enough to keep from slipping tighten it by holding it in one hand and tugging on the cords one at a time with the otherhand Notice that you can slide the knot out again for instance to re-open the bag you just tied shut For some applications this may be as tight as you need it
A springy bundle probably still feels loose If so compress the bundle and get a new grip on the cords Rest your foot on the bundle on the cords nearest the larks headand pull to slide the larks head tighter
To make the knot more permanent you can lock it Make an overhand in the cord ends (Exactly like the first step in tying shoelaces) With your foot still on the bundlepull on the cords and move your hands apart until youre pulling in opposite directions You have just locked the larks head and you can trust it to stay that way()
But lets say that later on you want to loosen the locked knot Again put your foot on the bundle and cords nearest the larks head hold the two cord ends together andpull This makes a little slack between the overhand and the larks head so you can untie the overhand
In twine or small string the locking overhand knot may be difficult to undo Use a shoelace knot instead of an overhand and itll unlock easily
() If youre using slippery cord like polypropylene an overhand may not lock securely You may want to tie another overhand knot For added security wrap a shortlength of duct tape around the two cords close to the knot
Image Notes1 To tighten further step on this side of the larks head and pull the free ends
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Related Instructables
TRX fromParacordChallengeAccepted bythrake
A pocket full ofknots byKiteman
Lens CapLanyard by~teknoarsonist~ how to tie a
noose byawesume
AdjustableParacordGlassesLanyard byjdtwelve12
HangmansNoose PackClosure byPopEye42
Paraleash - ADog LeashFrom Paracordby The Ideanator
How to make arugged andhandy ParacordBelt by Jake22
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 5 Step 5
Bring the strand back down over the first two parts of the S shape and under the bottom as shown
Step 6 Step 6
Tighten up the knot by carefully pulling on each of the working ends and loop ends of the cord You can adjust the size of the lanyards loop by working slack from theloop end to decrease its size or from the working ends to increase the loops size Ive kept the loop at about 2 inches in length so that a belt will fit through it but youcan make it larger or smaller to your preference You can also check that the working ends of the paracord are equal in length at this point and work slack through theknot to even them up if needed
Note the other side of the knot looks different with the cross pattern as shown
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 7 Step7
Now you can tie the next knot in the lanyard the same way as the first After tying the next knot work the slack through the knot until you have about 1 inch of spacebetween them then tighten and continue with the next knot Note that the knots look different on each side frontback and that you tie the each facing the same way oralternate them if you choose
Continue making knots until you have about 1 foot of cord left with each end of the working strands
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 8 Step 8
Now you will add your attachment like the swivel snap hook shown putting both strands through the swivel eye to begin tying the snake knot
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 9 Step 9Bring the right strand under the cords then up over them as shown
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 10 Step 10Now take the left strand over across the other strands back behind and under the cords and up through the right strand loop as shown Then tighten
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 11 Step 11
Take the right strand under and behind the cords then bring it back through the tightened knot along side itself as shown and tighten This is where hemostats come inhandy with tying this knot working the cord through the previously tightened part of the knot It can be done without hemostats but requires tighteningloosening of theknots with just your fingertips
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 12 Step 12
Turn the lanyard over so the other side of the knot is facing up The working strand now on the right side will be brought under the cords back up and down through theparallel strands of the knot as shown then tighten And continue this process flipping the lanyard over taking the right strand under and back up around and through theparallel cords and tighten Continue until you run out of cord or reach the cross knot
Youll now trim off any excess cord and quick melt the end of the strands to prevent fraying to finish
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 13 Variations
You can use other two strand knots instead of the cross knot for variations on this style of lanyard A few alternatives to try tying in a spaced out series or combination ofthem Matthew Walker knot double wall knot lanyard knot double overhand knots double figure 8 knots etc The finishing knots around the attachment can also bedifferent as Ive used the lanyard knot sometimes just one or several in a row
You can also use variations of the cross knot with paracord bracelets and watchbands Doubled version of the knot shown as a paracord bracelet and alternating withtwo pairs of strands for the paracord watchband Leftover pieces of paracord can be used for zipper pulls key ring fobs even paracord cross pendants
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Related Instructables
Paracord ChainSinnet FastDeploy BoonieHatband (video)by Stormdrane
Zigzag SpoolingParacord (video)by Stormdrane
SurvivalBracelet(Updated) bytevers94
Celtic ButtonKnot (video) byStormdrane
ParacordBoonie HatWrap (video) byStormdrane
Paracord wristlanyard madewith the snakeknot byStormdrane
SurvivalBracelet II bytevers94
Cobra WeaveKey Fob bytevers94
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Paracord wrist lanyard made with the snake knotby Stormdrane on September 12 2007
AuthorStormdrane Stormdranes BlogNo matter where you go there you are
Intro Paracord wrist lanyard made with the snake knotThis instructable will show how to make a wrist lanyard using paracord and the snake knot The lanyard can be used to secure a key chain knife multi-tool flashlightcell phone camera binoculars compass etc More projects links knot references can be seen on my blog page Stormdranes Blog
Step 1 SuppliesYoull need about 45 feet of paracord(you may use other types of cordage if desired) The paracord I used is from the Supply Captain I left the inner strands in theparacord but you can remove them if preferred If done in one color it will be one continuous 45 ft length if done in two colors youll need 3 ft for the primary color thatincludes the wrist section and 15 ft for the second color that will show in the snake knot Also used are scissors tape measure or ruler lighter hemostats or needle nosepliers(not necessary but they make it much easier) and a swivel clip key ring snap hook cell phone lariat carabiner or whatever attachment you prefer to use
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 2 Attaching two colors of paracordIf using two colors of paracord you will insert one color about 12 inch into the other color You may remove a small amount of the paracords inner strands by pullingthem out trimming with scissors and pulling the paracord outer sheath back over the strands leaving room to insert the other color For various projects Ive used threedifferent methods for attaching two colors of paracord melting sewing or gluing The choice is yours I usually sew them together it doesnt matter as long as its a goodconnection It will be hidden under the first knot
Step 3 Find the center of the length of paracordTake the center of the length of cord and bring it thru the attachment Im using a swivel clip For this tutorial Im measuring the wrist loop at about 10 inches from theattachment The connection of the two colors will be just on the other side at this point
Step 4 Making the snake knotThe snake knot will be made around the wrist loop section of paracord the loop strands being the core of the knot Ive added a series of photos showing the steps Iuse By using two colors youll see that I flip the lanyard over after making each knot so that Im working with the cord on the right side of the lanyard I bring it under allthe other cords working the hemostats under the previously tightened knot and pulling the cord back thru Then tightening up the knot keeping the cord from twisting andworking it up against the previous knot Again flipping the work over youll see two parallel cords of the same color which will be split with the cord on the right goingunder around and pulled thru with the hemostats then tightened up Continue this procedure until youve done about 10 snake knots(you can count them down eitherside
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 5 Count your knotsOnce you have 10 snake knots youre almost done Youll notice from the photos of both sides of the lanyard that one side has the snake knots alternating all the waydown and the other has a set of parallel knots at the top and botton of the sequence of knots Youll always have those at the start and finish of the snake knots I preferto have them end up on the same side of the lanyard so one side appears to have a more uniform look but its not required
Step 6 Trim and melt the excess paracordUse the scissors to trim off the excess cord and quickly melt the ends with a lighter so they dont fray
Step 7 Youre doneYou can make a range of variations using less or more cordknots Shorten the loop for a double ended key chain or make the loop longer for use as a neck lanyard aLanyard Break-Away Connector could be added for the safety conscious You can also add a wooden bead skull cord lock etc Visit my blog page for more knot relatedprojects links and resources Stormdranes Blog You can find ideas for other geargadgets to attach to your lanyard on EDC Forums
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Related Instructables
Paracord ChainSinnet FastDeploy BoonieHatband (video)by Stormdrane
Cross KnotParacordLanyard byStormdrane
Zigzag SpoolingParacord (video)by Stormdrane
SurvivalBracelet II bytevers94
SurvivalBracelet(Updated) bytevers94
Cobra WeaveKey Fob bytevers94
ParacordBoonie HatWrap (video) byStormdrane
Paracord KnotDisplay Bord byJamie bagn
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
How to tie various knotsby adaviel on September 7 2009
Intro How to tie various knotsKnots as a way of joining rope without special equipment are useful in many situations On a sailboat knots are essential both for daily use and for emergency repairsThis instructable describes several different common knots eg
Sheet Bend - to tie two lines togetherBowline - to make a loopReef Knot - to fasten a bundle of materialFishermans Bend - to secure a line to a post or ring
These knots are good for regular rope - braided or 3-strand polyester or natural fibre (hemp sisal) Monofilament (fishing line) or steel cable performs better with differentknots
Knots are typically quite a lot weaker than straight rope - when rope goes around a tight radius such as in a knot the outside is under more tension than the insideSplices (which require special tools and are time-consuming to make) are stronger so permanent fittings usually have eye-splices
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 1 Sheet BendThe sheet bend is used to tie two lines together It is perhaps the most generally useful knot of all When used to tie a line to itself making a loop it is called a bowlineThe strain is taken on the ropes in the middle - not the one coming out the side
How the knot is made is not critical - it is the final shape that is important One can make the flat loop first and work the other rope around it Or one can make thecrossed loop first - required when tying a bowline
The two images show front and back views of the same knot
AdvantagesEasy to makeEasy to undo when tension is removedDoes not easily capsize
DisadvantagesHard to make under loadDangerous to make under heavy load
UsesJoining two equally-sized ropesExtending a towline or stern line
Method 1 the same as a bowline
Method 2 starting with the flat loop
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 2 Double Sheet BendThe double sheet bend is used to tie two lines of different thickness - but not too different It is the same as a normal sheet bend but with an extra turn of the thinner ropearound the flat loop in the thickerThe load goes on the line through the flat loop not the one that comes out the side of the knot
UsesSecuring a heaving line to a tow lineExtending a stern line if you dont have enough line of one thickness
Step 3 BowlineThe bowline is really a special case of the sheet bend but it it tied at the end of a rope to make a loop
The photos show the completed loop and closeups of the front and back of the actual knot Note that it is the same as the sheet bend - but it must be made the right wayround This loop does not tighten in use The knot is quite easy to untie once the load is removed With practice it is very quick to tie
Some usesSecuring a dinghy line to a railing or stanchionSecuring an anchor line to an anchorTie a jib sheet to the sailTie a mooring line around a rock or treeTie a float to an anchor triplineUse one in each line to tie two ropes of very different sizes - eg a throwing line to a large tow ropeDisadvantages the knot must be completely made before it will take any strain - it is hard to tie if there is already a load on the rope
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Linked bowlines
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 4 Bowline on the BightA bowline on the bight is a bowline tied in a loop of rope (neither end is needed) The shape is the same as a bowline made with a double line but the middle of thebight forms the loop around the standing part
UsesAn impromptu bosuns chair - to sit in while being transferred between two boats at sea
Step 5 Clove HitchThe clove hitch can be made when you only have the bight (the middle) of a rope not the ends
UsesSecuring a burgee pole to a burgee halyard (a continuous loop of thin line)Securing a tiller from swinging
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 6 Round Turn and Two Half-HitchesThis is a knot used to secure a line to a ring or bar Wind a couple of turns around the bar then secure the end with two hitches around the standing part (this looks like aclove hitch when done)
AdvantagesCan be made under load - it is easy to take turns around the bar while maintaining tension on the ropeStrong - provided the bar is thicker than the rope the rope is not weakened by sharp bendsDisadvantagesThe end tends to work loose
UsesSecuring a line to a mooring ring or samson post
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 7 Fishermans BendThe fishermans bend is the same as the round turn and two half hitches except that the first hitch is looped under the round turn This uses the tension on the rope tosecure the end from working loose
AdvantagesSecure against working loose
DisadvantagesHard to make under tensionHard to undo under tensionMay seize up under load when wet making it hard to undo
UsesSecuring mooring line to ringSecuring fender lines to rail
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 8 Studsail BendThe studsail bend is like the fishermans bend but the second hitch is also secured under the round turn making it even more secure against working loose when undertension
AdvantagesVery secure against working looseDisadvantagesHard to make under tensionHard to undo under tension
Step 9 Figure-8 KnotThe figure-eight knot is used to prevent an end of rope from passing through a block (pulley) Sometimes called a stopper knot
The double figure-8 knot is used in rock climbing as an alternative to a bowline to secure a climbing harness to the end of a safety rope The double knot is made bymaking a single knot then tracing back around the knot with the free end after passing it around the harness loop
AdvantagesEasy to verify by inspectionNot prone to work loose
DisadvantagesSlow to make and undoCannot be made under load
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 10 Prussic KnotThe prussic knot may be used as a climbing ascender - when made around a vertical rope as shown downwards tension on the ends locks the knot while release oftension allows it to be slid up the rope A pair of prussic knots on foot loops may be used in tandem to climb a rope
UsesClimbing a ropeTaking up tension to free a riding turn on a winch
Step 11 Reef KnotThe reef knot or square knot is used to tie a bundle of material together It must be made around something - it should not be used to tie two free ropes togetherbecause it can easily capsizeIt should not be used to make a loop unless it can be tensioned around a solid object It should not be used around a person - use a bowline instead A capsized reefknot will slip easily and could constrict and cause severe injury
UsesReefing a sail (tying the unused portion around a spar)Securing a furled sail to a spar (sail ties)Wrapping a parcelTying shoelaces
AdvantagesMay be made under moderate load
DisadvantagesCapsizes (works free) if used improperlyCan seize up under load when wet
Tying the knot
Capsizing a reef knot
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 12 CleatsThis is not a knot but is very common on boatsThe first picture shows a rope cleated normally The second shows one with a final locking turn - the last turn is twisted before placing over the cleat so that the tensionon the rope helps secure the free end
When working with ropes under tension take a turn or two around a winch or cleat before trying to secure the end with a knot The load on the free end falls exponentiallywith each turn taken Severe injury can result if a finger or other body part is caught in a loop of rope or between a rope and another object
Step 13 Practice themIt is sometimes useful to be able to tie knots in the dark or as in this video behind your back
Related Instructables
AThird Hand forSailing or OtherThings by WadeTarzia
Paracord KnotDisplay Bord byJamie bagn
Trip LogOutriggerCanoe Sailingthe CaliforniaChannel Islandsby TimAnderson
How to Tie aFigure EightKnot byTactical_Pyro
How to build apirate ship bymdelaney3
Build a ShortDragon (16 foot3-BoardOutriggerSailing Canoe)by Wade Tarzia
repairing aheadsail by josh
How to get arope into a tree(withoutclimbing it) byvitex
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
How to Tie the Lanyard Knotby eddy14777 on January 31 2010
Intro How to Tie the Lanyard KnotMany people including myself have had trouble following the Stormdrane youtube video on tying the lanyard knot so i have done some research and found the solution
Image Notes1 Finished knot
Step 1 MaterialsAll you need is a reasonable length of para cord or whatever you wish to use
Image Notes1 One reasonable amount
Step 2 First StepThe first thing you are going to do is to make a bight that leaves you with to congruent endsThen you are going to put your ring finger through the bight
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Image Notes1 Close enough2 Bight
Step 3 Starting the KnotMake a loop just like the one in the picture and place it over the top strandBring the top strand under the bottom strand
Image Notes1 Notice the way the loop is done2 Top strand
Image Notes1 Bottom strand2 Top strand is under
Step 4 The Most Important PartNow you take the top stand from the previous picture and feed it over the first part of the loop under itself and back over the remainder of the loop
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Image Notes1 Under me2 Top strand3 This should make a diamond type shape
Step 5 DoublingNow take the bottom stand and take it around the part of the top strand nearest to the bight and than come up through the diamond shape in the middleDo the same for the top strand
Image Notes1 Top strand
Image Notes1 Both through the diamond
Step 6 FinishingWhen you take it off your finger it should look like thisWork out the slack by pulling on the bight and the two strands
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Image Notes1 Finished knot
Related Instructables
Cross KnotParacordLanyard byStormdrane
Celtic ButtonKnot (video) byStormdrane
Paracord wristlanyard madewith the snakeknot byStormdrane
Paracord ChainSinnet FastDeploy BoonieHatband (video)by Stormdrane
Zigzag SpoolingParacord (video)by Stormdrane
ParacordBoonie HatWrap (video) byStormdrane
Paracord IDbadge Lanyardby Flahusky
Cobra WeaveKey Fob bytevers94
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Four knots to make paracord into a useful toolby erik_mccray on March 27 2010
Authorerik_mccrayI am an ex-fabricator that is now a stay at home dad I love my new job but I do miss making stuff I love this site amp I am getting involved as a way to keep myskills upOn top of fad work I have also run two small business in the past One was custom sewing amp the other was as a small engine mechanicI have two votec degrees one in metal fabrication amp the other is in engine repairI look forward to getting to know everyone here
Intro Four knots to make paracord into a useful toolParacord is an awesome multitool used everywhere from the wild blue yonder to the deepest caverns But like any good tool it is only as good as the knowledge the userhas about the tool With most people out there using bungee cords amp ratchet straps it seems that paracord is being used for nothing more than friendship bracelets forgrown men This is a shame because for less then the price of a few cheap bungee cords amp some to short to be helpful straps You can get yourself hundreds of feet ofparacord
The key to getting the most out of the paracord is good knot work The first thing you need to know is what makes a good knot One is that the knot is easy amp quick to tieamp more impotant is that the knot is easy amp quick to untie The hitch class of knots is by far the best group of knots that the average person could know The four mostuseful hitch knots are the half hitch a quick simple knot that forms the base for many other knots the inline half hitch allowing you to get the most out of one length ofparacord the slippery hitch that gives you both on the fly control over tension on your paracord but also an adjustable loop that will not change unless you want it amp theinline truckers hitch instantly doubling the your pulling power
Step 1 To get started lets get some terminology that will be used defined
line= the paracord
Main line= the part of the paracord doing the work for example holding down your tarp or the long part of the paracord
Mid line= the middle of the length of the paracord
End line= the unused length of paracord or the short length of paracord
Step 2 The half hitch The half hitch is a simple way to secure a line to an anchor point like the tie down points in most trucks A half hitch is a constrictor knot meaning that the harder you pullon the line the tighter the knots grip gets Another common constrictor knot is the slip knot
Step 1 wrap your line around your anchor point Step 2 wrap the end line around the main line
Step 3 pass the end line threw the end line side of the newly formed loop
step 4 now take the slack out of the knot
step 5 to make sure the knot is secure tie another half hitch to the main line This knot is called adouble half hitch
step 6 another useful thing that can be done with the half hitch is that instead of repeating the wrap on the main line but repeating it on what you are tying to the half hitchcan be used to bind something like a stack of 2x4s
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Image Notes1 End line2 Main line3 step 1
Image Notes1 Step 2
Image Notes1 passing thew the end line side of the loop2 step 3
Image Notes1 step 5
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Image Notes1 step 6
Step 3 The mid line half hitch The mid line half hitch is for when the length of line is to long for the job at hand amp you dont want to have to cut the line to size or you are using multiple anchor pointswith one length of line
Step 1 double up the line at the point in the length you wish to make the knot
Step 2 wrap the doubled up portion of line around your anchor point The doubled up length is now now the end line
Step 3 now tie just as you did for the regular half hitch repeat the knot to make a double half hitch for security
Image Notes1 A mid line double half hitch
Image Notes1 step 1
Image Notes1 The end line2 step 2
Image Notes1 Step 3
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 4 The slippery hitch The slippery hitch is a great knot for adjusting tension on the main line or for having an adjustable fixed loop To adjust the knot simply slide the knot up or down the mainline
Step 1 wrap your line around the anchor point or just double over the line to form a loop
Step 2 wrap the end line around the main line three times Wrapping in the direction of the anchor point or loop
Step 3 put together the two lines making up the loop amp wrap the two lines one time with the end line
Step 4 pass the end line thew the last loop formed covering the two lined of the loop
Step 5 pull the knot tite
step 6 to adjust the size of the loop or main line tension grab the knot amp slide it up or down the main line
Image Notes1 grab just the knot its self to adjust it2 step 5
Image Notes1 step 1
Image Notes1 step 2
Image Notes1 step 3
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Image Notes1 step 4
Image Notes1 grab just the knot its self to adjust it2 step 5
Image Notes1 same knot as in last pic Just slid up2 step 6
Step 5 The mid line truchers hitch The truckers hitch is a great way to double the pulling force on a line There are many ways to tie this knot the problem with most of them is that at some point you aregoing to have to pass the end line through a loop on the main line that is acting like a pulley to double your pulling force this is great if you are making the knot close tothe end of your line but if you are using a 300 length of line amp want to make the knot in the first ten feet having to pass 290 of line thew a loop is a pain But with a fewhalf hitches you will not have to pass the end line threw any loop on the main line
step 1 wrap your line around the anchor point then double over your end line laying the top of the loop over the main line
Step 2 double up your main line amp lay the loop over the loop made by the end line
step 3 in main line above the knot twist in a loop
step 4 put main line loop thew the loop made in step 3 amp pull this loop tight over your main line loop forming a half hitch Repeat step 3 amp 4 to make a doublehalf hitch
step 5 To use the knot just pull down on the end line to put tension on the main line
step 6 after you have the main line snug tie a mid line double half hitch around the two lines forming the loop at the end of the main line with the end line
step 7 Tie a double half hitch with the end line around the end loop of the mid line half hitch of step 6 using the same method as used in steps 3 amp 4
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Image Notes1 the end of step 6
Image Notes1 main line2 end line3 step 1
Image Notes1 main line loop2 end line loop
Image Notes1 step 3
Image Notes1 step 4
Image Notes1 step 4 at the end with a double half hitch on the main loop
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Image Notes1 pull here2 step 5
Image Notes1 the start of step 6
Image Notes1 the end of step 6
Image Notes1 step 72 now the rest of the line is free to do more work
Related Instructables
Paracord KnotDisplay Bord byJamie bagn
ChokelessAdjustableParacord DogLeash byPizzaman101
ParacordLadder wWooden Rungsby josestude
tie a paracordshackle grip byitri45
ParacordPrussik Belt byJavaNut13
TiteTie is theTruckers Knoton Steroids bytitetie
ID Lanyard(Photos) byeschmunk
Dog Toys forHeavy Chewersby J3443RY
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Figure 8 knot and double 8 knotby jonathan111 on November 28 2007
Intro Figure 8 knot and double 8 knotI will show you how to tie a figure 8 knot and a figure 8 follow through
Step 1 Stating the knotThis is a simple knot so just follow the pictures
Step 2 Finishing the knotCross the string under and then push it through the hole Pull tightly unless you are going to do the follow through and leave it somewhat loose
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 3 The follow through knotThe follow through knot should be tied around something brought back and followed through the path of the 8 knot Look at the pictures Basically follow through the 8knot backwards
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Related Instructables
Climb Safe WithA Figure 8Knot by mattste A pocket full of
knots byKiteman
How to Tie aFigure EightKnot byTactical_Pyro
Paracord KnotDisplay Bord byJamie bagn
Cross KnotParacordLanyard byStormdrane
How to Tie aFire-escapeKnot by leonardoismael
Truckers HitchTHE mostawesome knoton the planetby schneidp20
Paracord ZipperPuller byrepeet13
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Truckers Hitch THE most awesome knot on the planetby schneidp20 on October 12 2008
Authorschneidp20I like building stuff Trouble is there just isnt enough time to build everything Sigh
Intro Truckers Hitch THE most awesome knot on the planetYes I know that there are plenty of other cool knots out there many of which I literally couldnt live wo I rock climb However this knot is unlike any other Plus Ineeded a grabber for my Instructable -) (BTW this ISNT a climbing knot) And in truth it isnt a knot by itself but rather a system of common knots
Have you ever tried to tie something down for transporting but just couldnt get the lines tight andor during transport the lines would continually loosen Then this is theknot for you I learned this knot back in the 70s when specialty car racks and ratchet straps were rare or unheard of I initially used it to tie a canoe on a car rack bothattaching to the rack as well as the lines to the bow and stern of the canoe Even with all the new gizmos available today this knot still shines because all you need is arope and ropes dont hum in the wind like straps
The unique aspect of this knot is that it gives you a 2-1 mechanical advantage when tightening the rope Be careful though You can actually damage some thingsbecause of the mechanical advantage This knot holds fast and is easy to untie hallmark traits of any good knot
Below you see the finished knot system well break it apart in the steps that follow
Image Notes1 1st anchor point a bowline2 loop3 securing knots 2 half hitches4 securing loose end with a fishermans knot5 2nd anchor point (should be round)
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Image Notes1 X marks the spot
Step 1 Initial setupThe first step is to anchor one end of the rope and then loop the rope around a 2nd anchor point
For attaching to the 1st anchor point I chose bowline a close 2 on my list -) There are other instructables on that one so I wont bore you here
The 2nd anchor really should be round because it serves as a pulley in this block and tackle type knot Ive used it on sharp anchor points and it doesnt work as well
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 2 Creating a slip knotTie a slip knot somewhere between the two anchor points Correct placement of the slip knot takes some experience to judge it correctly Typically I place it too close tothe 2nd anchor point and end up with not enough room to work with If the knot ends up too far from 2nd anchor point you can extend the knot by enlarging the loop
Be sure you tie the slip knot as shown You may not be able to untie other knots
In this small example the slip knot is uncharacteristically close to the 1st anchor point
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 3 Tightening and securingThe loose end of the rope that went around the 2nd anchor point goes through the slip knot loop Pull the loose end to the desired tension and secure with two halfhitches
Note To allow better view of the knots the rope isnt really tightened in this example
Step 4 Securing loose endThe final knot is just to secure the loose end somehow I chose a fishermans knot to do this
To tie a fishermans knot the rope goes around twice and goes under the X created by the loops Pull the loose end to tighten Finally slide the knot to put tension onthe half hitches
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Image Notes1 X marks the spot
Step 5 FinishedThere you have it I guarantee that the first time you really use this knot (not just practice) you will be amazed at how well it works and youll wish you knew this knot along time ago You may even come over to my side and declare that is is THE most awesome knot on the planet -)
Enjoy and happy haulingDave
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Related Instructables
TiteTie is theTruckers Knoton Steroids bytitetie
Four knots tomake paracordinto a usefultool byerik_mccray
Modify yourbike rack tocarry a sunfishor other boat byewilhelm
SurfboardHammock byGermy
GiganticHalloweenSpider Web bynolte919
How To Tie ASpiders Hitch(video) by back-cast
Three-hitch mathair ornamentby michiexile TRX from
ParacordChallengeAccepted bythrake
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Carry any Bottle with a JUG KNOT Handleby hpstoutharrow on September 17 2009
Intro Carry any Bottle with a JUG KNOT HandleTie a JUG KNOT around a water bottle soda bottle or aluminum bottle to make a secure carrying strap
Re-purpose any container into a reusable water bottle by adding a convenient carrying strap This Instructable will demonstrate how to tie a JUG knot which like its namesuggests is meant to properly secure around the neck of a container
With some cord and the knowledge of this knot you will be able add a handle lanyard or carabiner loop to any of your favorite beverages to carry them on the go
It works perfectly for those disposable water bottles and who knows once you add some colorful cord to the plain old clear water bottle you just might beinclined to refill it and use it again(Check out pictures 4amp5 below)
In addition to plastic beverage bottles like pop water and sports drinks you can turn those rugged aluminum beer bottles into a backpacking canteen
Those of you familiar with my previous aluminum bottle InstructablesROLLED RIM METAL TUMBLERhttpwwwinstructablescomidAluminum-Bottle-Tumbler-Cup-Cook-PotALUMINUM BOTTLE LIGHTWEIGHT ALCOHOL STOVEhttpwwwinstructablescomidAluminum-Bottle-Alcohol-Stovewill recognize the water canteen shown below as a re-purposed aluminum beer bottle Here I have added a painted surface treatment to turn it into a proper lookingwater bottle More on that in steps 13 14 15
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 1 Getting StartedCord size is important Select a small medium weight cord like the one shown here It is a general purpose camp cord sold at most sporting goods stores (shoelacesmight also work)
Do not use a heavy cord or rope because the larger diameter will not tuck under the relatively small lip at the top of the bottleneck and the bottle will fall out
Also the smaller cord cinches tight on itself and will not loosen accidentally
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 2 Form a BightThe next steps show how to tie a JUG KNOT It is the basic step for adding a carrying strap It is also the anchor point for any additional fancy bottle trussing you maywant to add
JUG KNOT Step 1
Form a Bight in the center of a length of cord Bight is a knot term for a loop or bend in the rope In this case the main Bight in this knot is highlighted with a white mark Imakes it easier to follow its path in these steps
The running ends of the cord should be equal length
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 3 Pull the Bight downPULL the Bight DOWN forming two Loops
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 4 Cross the LoopsCROSS the right Loop OVER the left Loop
Step 5 Pass the Bight under the 1st loopTake the main Bight and pass it UNDER the left Loop
Step 6 Weave the BightWEAVE the Bight OVER the portion of the right Loop and UNDER the portion of the left Loop
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 7 Extend the BightExtend the Bight OVER the outer portion of the right Loop
Step 8 Flip the Right Loop behindAdditional colored identification points have been added to the loops to follow their travel in these next two steps
The right Loop Yellow marker is FLIPPED BEHIND the knot and ends up on the far left side of the knot
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 9 Flip the 2nd loop in frontRaise the green marker (located on what was formerly the left loop) and pull it down and to the right FLIPPING IT IN FRONT of the knot
Note the blue portion of the this loop will pass around the outside of the yellow portion of the first loop
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Image Notes1 Center of knot that will tighten around the bottles neck
Step 10 Remove SlackNote where the blue green amp yellow markers end up
Start to remove the slack in the loops by pulling the original main Bight (white marker top right) and the two free standing ends at the bottom
the bottle neck will pass through the very center of the knot
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Image Notes1 Center of knot that will tighten around the bottles neck
Step 11 Tighten the KnotAfter removing the slack insert the bottle neck and finish tightening
The knot should look like this before slipping it over the bottle
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 12 Secure on bottle neckThis is the finished knot shown on the neck of various containers
The loop end and the two free standing ends can be tied together to create a carrying handle (last picture below)
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 13 Aluminum Bottle Water Bottle
The next few steps show the features of an aluminum beer bottle re-purposed as a water bottle canteen It is one of many containers that can be reused as a camp waterbottle
The bottle was lightly sanded masked and then pained with a hammered finished paint to create an interesting surface texture
Image Notes1 Textured finish paint makes an interesting grip-able surface2 Masked with tape for painting3 Masked with tape for painting
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Image Notes1 Dowel used for holding the bottle during painting
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 14 Tethered Cork StopperUse a wine bottle man made Cork as a stopper for your aluminum water bottleNote Use a cork that was removed from the wine bottle without the corkscrew penetrating through the bottom end of the cork (A hole all the way through the cork willcause it to leak) Use the unpierced end of the cork inside the water bottle
Drill a hole through the sides of the Cork Thread the cord through the hole to the center of the cord Use the cork as the main Bight and tie the Jug knot as shown inthe beginning steps
Now the cork is tethered to the bottle and will not get lost or fall on the ground
A Carabiner clip passes through the other cord end to attache the water bottle to you belt or pack
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 15 Trussed for TransportThis is another hanging method for carrying your aluminum bottle water canteen A Jug knot is tied conventionally around the neck
The running ends of the knot however are pulled down towards the bottom of the bottle A Barrel Knot is tied about 34 the way down the side of the bottle A squareknot is tied on the bottom of the knot to keep the two running ends tight against the sides of the bottle
I like the look of the accent colored cord running down the sides of the bottle and the fact that the bottle hangs from the belt upside down It adds to its uniqueness
The last picture shows another truss variation
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 16 AdvancedBelow is a bottle with some additional trussing You can be creative as you want It all starts with a re-purposed container and the Jug Knot (and enough cord)
Related Instructables
AluminumBottle TumblerCup amp Cook Potfor an AlcoholStove byhpstoutharrow
Water BottleBelt Clip byuglymike Duct Tape
Water Bottle byrabidsquire2
AluminumBottle AlcoholStove byhpstoutharrow
DIYGlass WaterBottle byCulturespy
Solar WaterHeater forBackpackingUsing WaterBottles and aCar Shade bykopomeroy
Duct tape waterbottle holder(Photos) by pinkmarshmallow
How to make aCamelPack withan old plasticbottle bywillrandship
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Basic Knots Guideby zorro3355 on April 29 2008
Intro Basic Knots Guidehi
Step 1 Thumb knotThe most simple knotUsed as a stopper and prevent ropes from fraying
Step 2 Reef KnotUsed to tie two ropes of equal thickness togetherIt is pretty easy to tie and untie but under tentionit may be diffcult to untieIt is also not sutible for smoothropes(egnylon ropes)
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 3 Figure of eightused as a stopperprevent ropes from fraying and its more secure than tumb knot its is also used to tie Caribinas to ropes and is often used in rock climbing
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 4 Timber hitchused for pulling logs
Step 5 Clove hitchUsed to tie a rope onto a pole or logThe pole must be roundThe pole lust be thicker then the rope itself
(greatly used during pioneering)
Step 6 Sheet bandused to tie ropes of different thickness together(works on same thickness of ropes too)
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 7 Sheep shankTo shorten RopesTo prevent middle fraying
Step 8 Slip knotWhippingUsed as a grip for pulling things(when tied on a stick or small pole)(marlin spike hitch)
Related Instructables
Rope Rings byhpstoutharrow
How to Tie aFigure EightKnot byTactical_Pyro
Whippin (WestCountry Style)by tim_n
SurvivalBracelet(Updated) bytevers94
HangmansNoose PackClosure byPopEye42
Turkey on aTripod byhpstoutharrow
SurvivalBracelet II bytevers94 Zigzag Spooling
Paracord (video)by Stormdrane
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
How to Tie a Fire-escape Knotby leonardo ismael on October 16 2007
Intro How to Tie a Fire-escape KnotThis knot is used by firemen in case of fires for example imagine a scene where the ladder on the firetruck messes up but people need to get down a five story buildingor more All they have is a long piece of rope they can safely get down with a secure knot like the fire-escape knot So why not learn it its easy to do and hard to untieif you tie it tightly
This is from the American Boys Handbook
Step 1 Get Your RopeFirst grab a piece of rope and bend it like this to make a loop in it Follow every step to the smallest detail
Step 2 Twist the RopeNow make a twist like this and hold it together
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 3 Pull Through the TwistPull the loop through the twist you just made from underneath
Step 4 Go Over the Split EndNow pull the tail through the loop
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 5 FinallyAnd finally just pull it through as pictured below
Congratulations you just learned the fire-escape knot
Step 6 Same Name Not KnotThis is another knot called the fire-escape knot this shouldnt be your result
Related Instructables
House FireEscape Plan(video) byWhatHappensNowAdvice
ParacordLadder wWooden Rungsby josestude
Bed SheetEscape Rope byjessehensel
rope ladder(glow-in-the-dark version) bymikeasaurus
HeadlockEscape 2(video) byjohnnyrockstah
QuickFirestarter byMattandJora
Trail sauna byjakee117
How to Kill FireAnts andCommitGenocide byKentsOkay
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Climb Safe With A Figure 8 Knotby mattste on February 23 2010
Intro Climb Safe With A Figure 8 Knot There are many things that a beginning climber needs to know including several important knots Perhaps the most essential knot is the Figure 8 Follow Through Thistutorial will demonstrate how to correctly harness yourself to a rope using a Figure 8 Follow Through knot This knot is used primarily by rock climbers to provide a life-line Since this knot is used as a life-line it is very important to be able to tie it correctly (Your life could depend upon it)
Dont worry with this tutorial and about 5 minutes of practice you can have this knot mastered
Things you will need
- Climbing Harness- Climbing Rope
If you are wanting to go climbing and dont already have these items they can be purchased for about $25 each at most outdoor sporting goods stores If you are merelylooking to learn the knot a belt loop and a rope (about five feet long) will do
Image Notes1 Climbing Harness2 Climbing Rope
Step 1 Dealing With The RopeThroughout this tutorial I will be discussing different parts of the rope To make these instructions as clear as possible I will define a few terms that I will use throughoutthe tutorial The Anchor End of the rope will generally be at the top of the images This is the end that would be anchored to the wall or rock and does not move Wewill not be doing much with the anchored end The Tail End of the rope is the opposite end that we will be dealing with I will call this the tail for short
Now that we have some terms to work with lets get started
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 2 Tying The First Figure 8This knot has several parts to it The first part of the knot is just tying a basic figure 8 To tie the first figure 8 there are four simple steps
1 - Using the tail make a loop over the rope (as shown in the first picture) keeping in mind that there should be about 3 ft of slack on the tail end
2 - Wrap the tail back this time go under the anchored end (As shown in the second picture)
3 - Bring the tail down through the first loop (As shown in the third picture)
4 - Finally pull the two ends to make the knot a little bit tighter and easier to deal with (Shown in the fourth picture)
After these four steps you should end up with a knot that resembles a figure 8
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 3 Looping Into The Harness In order to secure the rope to the harness simply thread the tail end of the rope through the front loop in the harness as shown in the picture below This step isobviously very important
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 4 Following Back Through The Figure 8After looping the rope through the harness you have to thread the tail end of the rope back through the knot following the first figure 8 I have divided this process intofive smaller steps in order to make it more clear
1 - Coming form underneath the knot bring the tail up through the near loop and to the left behind the anchored end of the rope (Shown in the first picture)
2 - Wrap the tail around the anchored end back to the right and down through the adjacent loop (Shown in the second picture)
3 - You simply need to bring the tail back over the top of the knot to the left (Shown in the third picture)
4 - Bring the tail end up through the far loop following the anchored end (Shown in the fourth picture)
5 - Finally pull the knot tight (Shown in the fifth picture)
As you can see the first four pictures are simply tracing the knot back through with the tail end
For the last part while you pull the knot tight you may want to make small adjustments and rearrange how it all fits together If the knot does not lay perfectly smoothand tight its NOT a big deal
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 5 Finishing The Knot After completing the Figure 8 knot you will want to somehow secure the tail end of the rope out of the way There are a couple different ways to do this the way that Iwill demonstrate is using whats called a Stopper Knot This secondary knot is similar to a Fishermans knot and is pretty simple I have once again divided thisprocess into several smaller steps
1 - Start by wrapping the tail end around the anchored end (As shown in the first picture)
2 - Wrap the tail back underneath the two vertical segments (As shown in the second picture)
3 - Simply repeat the first two steps wrapping the tail around again (As shown in the third picture)
4 - This step in the fourth picture may look complicated but all you need to do is insert the tail up through the two loops that you have just made
5 - To finish off the knot you will want to slowly pull the tail end while gently pushing the bottom of the stopper knot upwards If you have successfully completed this knotit should look something like the fifth picture
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 6 Ready To Climb Now that you have mastered the Figure 8 knot you can securely harness yourself into a climbing rope Remember there are many other skills that go into setting up ananchor and belaying a climber This tutorial only covers the figure 8 knot For more information there are many great websites that demonstrate how to correctly set up asafe climbing system (Ive posted a few below) If you are a beginning climber I recommend that you read up on a few other climbing techniques Also you shouldprobably go to a climbing wall or gym where there are experienced climbers that can show you the ropes Hopefully this tutorial has been helpful Have fun and be safe
Some useful linkshttpwwwstephenprattnetAnchorsanchorshtmhttpwwwuoregonedu~oppclimbingtopicsanchorshtmlhttpwwwabc-of-rockclimbingcomhowtoclimbingtechniquesasp
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Related Instructables
How to Tie aFigure EightKnot byTactical_Pyro
Paracord KnotDisplay Bord byJamie bagn
Basic KnotsGuide byzorro3355
How to Climb aTree (withprussiks) bystasterisk
How to climb atree (using onlyrope) thefunsimple wayby louieaw
How to get arope into a tree(withoutclimbing it) byvitex
How to tievarious knots byadaviel
How to make arope swing byjdub0928
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Turks Head Knots on a Bottleby sklnxbones on July 6 2010
Intro Turks Head Knots on a BottleThis is the finished project A bottle decorated with three Turks Head Knots There are only three knots on this bottle The RED and the BLUE knots are each a 20 Bightby 3 Lead Turks Head Knots The WHITE knot is a 20 Bight by 19 Lead Turks Head Knot
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 1 Supplies
Cord Lots and Lots of cord I cant tell you how much each bottle is differentBottle Washed and Dried inside and out Make sure to remove all water spotsThreaded Needle Cord screws into the threads at the base of the needlePegs I use brass rivets used as a map to tie the Turks Head KnotsHole Punch Used to punch holes in the painters tape to hold the pegsPainters Tape To hold the pegs in place and to make your map for the Turks Head KnotsMarker To write on the painters tapeCloth Towel To remove finger prints and dirt from your bottleKrazy Glue or Super Glue This is used to secure the knots in place to the bottle
OPTIONAL BUT HIGHLY RECOMMENDEDI use the Turks Head Cookbook from KnotToolcom
Step 2 PreparationYou will need to find a bottle you like I used an empty instant tea bottle of course washed and dried (I like to put the bottle in the oven for a few minutes to dry the insidewithout water spots Take off the lid and do not put lid in the oven) Now measure the circumference of the bottle Take a cord and tightly wrap the cord around the bottleMark where the ends meet and use a ruler to measure the length of the cord For my instant tea bottle the circumference is 27cm I know from past knots that I have tiedthat I want my knot to have 20 Bights in the top and bottom (bands) knots I am going to use the Bights in the (bands) knots to tie the middle knot Now divide the numberof Bights (20) into the size of the circumference (27) to get the space between each Bight (135) With me so far
Now take two pieces of painters tape using a ruler measure out the length of the circumference and mark the length on the both pieces of tape Next you will mark thespace between each Bight on the tape
Step 3 Adding the PegsI like to use pegs when tying Turks Head Knots it just makes tying the knot easier
These are what I use for pegs
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 4 Adding Pegs to the TapeNow take a hole punch to cut holes in the tape where the lines meet You will place the pegs in the holes
Insert a peg in each hole and carefully stick the first piece of tape to the bottle
Step 5 Adding the 2nd row of pegsNow do the same thing with the second piece of tape The numbers on each piece of tape must line up
This picture shows you what you should have now This odd looking thing will be your map to tie the Turks Head Knot And this is the end of Step 1
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 6 Tying the first Turks Head KnotUsing the Turks Head Cookbook follow the numbers going over and under as indicated in the book I chose a 20 Bight by 3 Lead knot which will give me a nice bandaround the bottle Once the ends meet you have made one complete knot Tape the running end of your cord and start removing the pegs and the tape
Step 7 Remove the pegs and the tapeBe careful not to untie the knot as you remove the pegs and tape from the bottle Continue to remove all the pegs and remove the tape from the bottle At this point theknot will be very loose and will need to be tightened up
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 8 Remove the slack from the knotHere you can see just how much the knot expanded Starting with the standing end begin to pull the slack out of the knot going towards the running end of the cordDo not expect to pull all the slack out at once You may have to make 3 - 5 attempts at removing the slack out of the knot DO NOT remove all of the slack out of the knotIn order to make the bands we will have to triple the Turks Head Knot We will do this by following the knot three times The threaded needle will really come in handyhere
Step 9 Triple the KnotOnce you have made three passes of the Turks Head Knot use your needle to go under your knot about half the circumference and cut the cord The knot will be tightenough to hide the tail in placeTIP I carefully add a couple of drops of super glue UNDER the band to hold them in place and keep them from sliding around in the nextsteps A drop or two in 3 or 4 places around the band should be enough
Step 10 Add the second knotNow repeat this whole step for the second bandWhen tying the second band you must make sure the Bights line up to the first band This is crucial for the next stepWipe down the bottle to make sure all your finger prints and adhesive from the tape are all removed You want to make sure your bottle is clean at this point Any dirt orfinger prints left on the bottle will be almost impossible to remove From this point on we will use gloves when tying our last knot
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 11 Maping the Top KnotStick a piece of painters tape on top of your first band leaving the bottom of the knot exposedUse a marker to count the number of Bights in your knot Instead of using the pegs we are going to use the Bights to tie our next Turks Head Knot
Step 12 Mapping the Bottom KnotDo the same thing for the bottom band but you must make sure your numbers on top and bottom line up So 1 on top should be the same position as 1 on the bottom
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 13 Adding the last knotAgain using the Turks Head Cookbook and the threaded needle you are going to follow the instructions going over and under as indicated in the book Be sure to usegloves when ever you handle the bottle
Step 14 Thats ItFor this Turks Head Knot I am using a 20 Bight by 19 Lead knot
Because of the amount of cord you are working with your cord will get twisted and knotted You will have to un-twist the cord often Its a pain in the rear but it has to bedone And it has to be done alot
Continue to tie the knot until you finish the knot If you have the cord and the patience you can double or triple the knot When you are done use your needle to hide theends under your bands Cut the ends and your DONE
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Related Instructables
Monkeys FistFloatingKeychain byjokerlz
How To Make ATurks headKnot WithParacord byDoggie Stylish
Tying Trivetsout of Rope forHoliday Gifts bykylemarsh
Paracord KnotDisplay Bord byJamie bagn
How to Make ATurks Head(Photos) bymchs60chip
A pocket full ofknots byKiteman
Monkeys fistknot AND themonkey byjonathan111
TiteTie is theTruckers Knoton Steroids bytitetie
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Larks head noose -- an easy useful knot that tightens and loosensby Larry Breed on February 19 2009
Intro Larks head noose -- an easy useful knot that tightens and loosensI thought I knew all the basic knots but then I was taught this incredibly useful simple knot Its good for tying up the neck of a bag that you want to repeatedly open andsecurely close Its good for tying around a springy bundle that will need tightening and retightening And its easy to undo
Ive looked at knot literature but havent found a name for this so I named it The basic knot is well known its called a larks head Since all Ive done is to slip the twoends through the larks head to make a noose I call it that
WARNING Dont use this knot when human safety would depend on it Climbers and mountaineers have well-tested reliable knots for such situations
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Image Notes1 To tighten further step on this side of the larks head and pull the free ends
Step 1 Double the cord overThe larks head noose requires enough cord to go twice around your bundle plus a foot or two Find the center and double it over Sailors call this a bight
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 2 Form the larks headComing from below the bight hook your thumb and forefinger over the two sides Reach outward and downward and pinch your fingertips together underneath thedoubled cord
Youve made a larks head Move the crossing cord a little farther from your hand so theres a clear opening through the two half-loops
Step 3 Form the nooseSlip the two ends of the cord through the opening we were just talking about Pull the larks head tight so it grips the two cords Find something that needs constrictingand put the noose around it
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 4 Tightening retightening and lockingSlide the knot against the bundle If its not tight enough to keep from slipping tighten it by holding it in one hand and tugging on the cords one at a time with the otherhand Notice that you can slide the knot out again for instance to re-open the bag you just tied shut For some applications this may be as tight as you need it
A springy bundle probably still feels loose If so compress the bundle and get a new grip on the cords Rest your foot on the bundle on the cords nearest the larks headand pull to slide the larks head tighter
To make the knot more permanent you can lock it Make an overhand in the cord ends (Exactly like the first step in tying shoelaces) With your foot still on the bundlepull on the cords and move your hands apart until youre pulling in opposite directions You have just locked the larks head and you can trust it to stay that way()
But lets say that later on you want to loosen the locked knot Again put your foot on the bundle and cords nearest the larks head hold the two cord ends together andpull This makes a little slack between the overhand and the larks head so you can untie the overhand
In twine or small string the locking overhand knot may be difficult to undo Use a shoelace knot instead of an overhand and itll unlock easily
() If youre using slippery cord like polypropylene an overhand may not lock securely You may want to tie another overhand knot For added security wrap a shortlength of duct tape around the two cords close to the knot
Image Notes1 To tighten further step on this side of the larks head and pull the free ends
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Related Instructables
TRX fromParacordChallengeAccepted bythrake
A pocket full ofknots byKiteman
Lens CapLanyard by~teknoarsonist~ how to tie a
noose byawesume
AdjustableParacordGlassesLanyard byjdtwelve12
HangmansNoose PackClosure byPopEye42
Paraleash - ADog LeashFrom Paracordby The Ideanator
How to make arugged andhandy ParacordBelt by Jake22
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 7 Step7
Now you can tie the next knot in the lanyard the same way as the first After tying the next knot work the slack through the knot until you have about 1 inch of spacebetween them then tighten and continue with the next knot Note that the knots look different on each side frontback and that you tie the each facing the same way oralternate them if you choose
Continue making knots until you have about 1 foot of cord left with each end of the working strands
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 8 Step 8
Now you will add your attachment like the swivel snap hook shown putting both strands through the swivel eye to begin tying the snake knot
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 9 Step 9Bring the right strand under the cords then up over them as shown
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 10 Step 10Now take the left strand over across the other strands back behind and under the cords and up through the right strand loop as shown Then tighten
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 11 Step 11
Take the right strand under and behind the cords then bring it back through the tightened knot along side itself as shown and tighten This is where hemostats come inhandy with tying this knot working the cord through the previously tightened part of the knot It can be done without hemostats but requires tighteningloosening of theknots with just your fingertips
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 12 Step 12
Turn the lanyard over so the other side of the knot is facing up The working strand now on the right side will be brought under the cords back up and down through theparallel strands of the knot as shown then tighten And continue this process flipping the lanyard over taking the right strand under and back up around and through theparallel cords and tighten Continue until you run out of cord or reach the cross knot
Youll now trim off any excess cord and quick melt the end of the strands to prevent fraying to finish
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 13 Variations
You can use other two strand knots instead of the cross knot for variations on this style of lanyard A few alternatives to try tying in a spaced out series or combination ofthem Matthew Walker knot double wall knot lanyard knot double overhand knots double figure 8 knots etc The finishing knots around the attachment can also bedifferent as Ive used the lanyard knot sometimes just one or several in a row
You can also use variations of the cross knot with paracord bracelets and watchbands Doubled version of the knot shown as a paracord bracelet and alternating withtwo pairs of strands for the paracord watchband Leftover pieces of paracord can be used for zipper pulls key ring fobs even paracord cross pendants
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Related Instructables
Paracord ChainSinnet FastDeploy BoonieHatband (video)by Stormdrane
Zigzag SpoolingParacord (video)by Stormdrane
SurvivalBracelet(Updated) bytevers94
Celtic ButtonKnot (video) byStormdrane
ParacordBoonie HatWrap (video) byStormdrane
Paracord wristlanyard madewith the snakeknot byStormdrane
SurvivalBracelet II bytevers94
Cobra WeaveKey Fob bytevers94
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Paracord wrist lanyard made with the snake knotby Stormdrane on September 12 2007
AuthorStormdrane Stormdranes BlogNo matter where you go there you are
Intro Paracord wrist lanyard made with the snake knotThis instructable will show how to make a wrist lanyard using paracord and the snake knot The lanyard can be used to secure a key chain knife multi-tool flashlightcell phone camera binoculars compass etc More projects links knot references can be seen on my blog page Stormdranes Blog
Step 1 SuppliesYoull need about 45 feet of paracord(you may use other types of cordage if desired) The paracord I used is from the Supply Captain I left the inner strands in theparacord but you can remove them if preferred If done in one color it will be one continuous 45 ft length if done in two colors youll need 3 ft for the primary color thatincludes the wrist section and 15 ft for the second color that will show in the snake knot Also used are scissors tape measure or ruler lighter hemostats or needle nosepliers(not necessary but they make it much easier) and a swivel clip key ring snap hook cell phone lariat carabiner or whatever attachment you prefer to use
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 2 Attaching two colors of paracordIf using two colors of paracord you will insert one color about 12 inch into the other color You may remove a small amount of the paracords inner strands by pullingthem out trimming with scissors and pulling the paracord outer sheath back over the strands leaving room to insert the other color For various projects Ive used threedifferent methods for attaching two colors of paracord melting sewing or gluing The choice is yours I usually sew them together it doesnt matter as long as its a goodconnection It will be hidden under the first knot
Step 3 Find the center of the length of paracordTake the center of the length of cord and bring it thru the attachment Im using a swivel clip For this tutorial Im measuring the wrist loop at about 10 inches from theattachment The connection of the two colors will be just on the other side at this point
Step 4 Making the snake knotThe snake knot will be made around the wrist loop section of paracord the loop strands being the core of the knot Ive added a series of photos showing the steps Iuse By using two colors youll see that I flip the lanyard over after making each knot so that Im working with the cord on the right side of the lanyard I bring it under allthe other cords working the hemostats under the previously tightened knot and pulling the cord back thru Then tightening up the knot keeping the cord from twisting andworking it up against the previous knot Again flipping the work over youll see two parallel cords of the same color which will be split with the cord on the right goingunder around and pulled thru with the hemostats then tightened up Continue this procedure until youve done about 10 snake knots(you can count them down eitherside
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 5 Count your knotsOnce you have 10 snake knots youre almost done Youll notice from the photos of both sides of the lanyard that one side has the snake knots alternating all the waydown and the other has a set of parallel knots at the top and botton of the sequence of knots Youll always have those at the start and finish of the snake knots I preferto have them end up on the same side of the lanyard so one side appears to have a more uniform look but its not required
Step 6 Trim and melt the excess paracordUse the scissors to trim off the excess cord and quickly melt the ends with a lighter so they dont fray
Step 7 Youre doneYou can make a range of variations using less or more cordknots Shorten the loop for a double ended key chain or make the loop longer for use as a neck lanyard aLanyard Break-Away Connector could be added for the safety conscious You can also add a wooden bead skull cord lock etc Visit my blog page for more knot relatedprojects links and resources Stormdranes Blog You can find ideas for other geargadgets to attach to your lanyard on EDC Forums
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Related Instructables
Paracord ChainSinnet FastDeploy BoonieHatband (video)by Stormdrane
Cross KnotParacordLanyard byStormdrane
Zigzag SpoolingParacord (video)by Stormdrane
SurvivalBracelet II bytevers94
SurvivalBracelet(Updated) bytevers94
Cobra WeaveKey Fob bytevers94
ParacordBoonie HatWrap (video) byStormdrane
Paracord KnotDisplay Bord byJamie bagn
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
How to tie various knotsby adaviel on September 7 2009
Intro How to tie various knotsKnots as a way of joining rope without special equipment are useful in many situations On a sailboat knots are essential both for daily use and for emergency repairsThis instructable describes several different common knots eg
Sheet Bend - to tie two lines togetherBowline - to make a loopReef Knot - to fasten a bundle of materialFishermans Bend - to secure a line to a post or ring
These knots are good for regular rope - braided or 3-strand polyester or natural fibre (hemp sisal) Monofilament (fishing line) or steel cable performs better with differentknots
Knots are typically quite a lot weaker than straight rope - when rope goes around a tight radius such as in a knot the outside is under more tension than the insideSplices (which require special tools and are time-consuming to make) are stronger so permanent fittings usually have eye-splices
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 1 Sheet BendThe sheet bend is used to tie two lines together It is perhaps the most generally useful knot of all When used to tie a line to itself making a loop it is called a bowlineThe strain is taken on the ropes in the middle - not the one coming out the side
How the knot is made is not critical - it is the final shape that is important One can make the flat loop first and work the other rope around it Or one can make thecrossed loop first - required when tying a bowline
The two images show front and back views of the same knot
AdvantagesEasy to makeEasy to undo when tension is removedDoes not easily capsize
DisadvantagesHard to make under loadDangerous to make under heavy load
UsesJoining two equally-sized ropesExtending a towline or stern line
Method 1 the same as a bowline
Method 2 starting with the flat loop
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 2 Double Sheet BendThe double sheet bend is used to tie two lines of different thickness - but not too different It is the same as a normal sheet bend but with an extra turn of the thinner ropearound the flat loop in the thickerThe load goes on the line through the flat loop not the one that comes out the side of the knot
UsesSecuring a heaving line to a tow lineExtending a stern line if you dont have enough line of one thickness
Step 3 BowlineThe bowline is really a special case of the sheet bend but it it tied at the end of a rope to make a loop
The photos show the completed loop and closeups of the front and back of the actual knot Note that it is the same as the sheet bend - but it must be made the right wayround This loop does not tighten in use The knot is quite easy to untie once the load is removed With practice it is very quick to tie
Some usesSecuring a dinghy line to a railing or stanchionSecuring an anchor line to an anchorTie a jib sheet to the sailTie a mooring line around a rock or treeTie a float to an anchor triplineUse one in each line to tie two ropes of very different sizes - eg a throwing line to a large tow ropeDisadvantages the knot must be completely made before it will take any strain - it is hard to tie if there is already a load on the rope
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Linked bowlines
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 4 Bowline on the BightA bowline on the bight is a bowline tied in a loop of rope (neither end is needed) The shape is the same as a bowline made with a double line but the middle of thebight forms the loop around the standing part
UsesAn impromptu bosuns chair - to sit in while being transferred between two boats at sea
Step 5 Clove HitchThe clove hitch can be made when you only have the bight (the middle) of a rope not the ends
UsesSecuring a burgee pole to a burgee halyard (a continuous loop of thin line)Securing a tiller from swinging
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 6 Round Turn and Two Half-HitchesThis is a knot used to secure a line to a ring or bar Wind a couple of turns around the bar then secure the end with two hitches around the standing part (this looks like aclove hitch when done)
AdvantagesCan be made under load - it is easy to take turns around the bar while maintaining tension on the ropeStrong - provided the bar is thicker than the rope the rope is not weakened by sharp bendsDisadvantagesThe end tends to work loose
UsesSecuring a line to a mooring ring or samson post
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 7 Fishermans BendThe fishermans bend is the same as the round turn and two half hitches except that the first hitch is looped under the round turn This uses the tension on the rope tosecure the end from working loose
AdvantagesSecure against working loose
DisadvantagesHard to make under tensionHard to undo under tensionMay seize up under load when wet making it hard to undo
UsesSecuring mooring line to ringSecuring fender lines to rail
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 8 Studsail BendThe studsail bend is like the fishermans bend but the second hitch is also secured under the round turn making it even more secure against working loose when undertension
AdvantagesVery secure against working looseDisadvantagesHard to make under tensionHard to undo under tension
Step 9 Figure-8 KnotThe figure-eight knot is used to prevent an end of rope from passing through a block (pulley) Sometimes called a stopper knot
The double figure-8 knot is used in rock climbing as an alternative to a bowline to secure a climbing harness to the end of a safety rope The double knot is made bymaking a single knot then tracing back around the knot with the free end after passing it around the harness loop
AdvantagesEasy to verify by inspectionNot prone to work loose
DisadvantagesSlow to make and undoCannot be made under load
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 10 Prussic KnotThe prussic knot may be used as a climbing ascender - when made around a vertical rope as shown downwards tension on the ends locks the knot while release oftension allows it to be slid up the rope A pair of prussic knots on foot loops may be used in tandem to climb a rope
UsesClimbing a ropeTaking up tension to free a riding turn on a winch
Step 11 Reef KnotThe reef knot or square knot is used to tie a bundle of material together It must be made around something - it should not be used to tie two free ropes togetherbecause it can easily capsizeIt should not be used to make a loop unless it can be tensioned around a solid object It should not be used around a person - use a bowline instead A capsized reefknot will slip easily and could constrict and cause severe injury
UsesReefing a sail (tying the unused portion around a spar)Securing a furled sail to a spar (sail ties)Wrapping a parcelTying shoelaces
AdvantagesMay be made under moderate load
DisadvantagesCapsizes (works free) if used improperlyCan seize up under load when wet
Tying the knot
Capsizing a reef knot
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 12 CleatsThis is not a knot but is very common on boatsThe first picture shows a rope cleated normally The second shows one with a final locking turn - the last turn is twisted before placing over the cleat so that the tensionon the rope helps secure the free end
When working with ropes under tension take a turn or two around a winch or cleat before trying to secure the end with a knot The load on the free end falls exponentiallywith each turn taken Severe injury can result if a finger or other body part is caught in a loop of rope or between a rope and another object
Step 13 Practice themIt is sometimes useful to be able to tie knots in the dark or as in this video behind your back
Related Instructables
AThird Hand forSailing or OtherThings by WadeTarzia
Paracord KnotDisplay Bord byJamie bagn
Trip LogOutriggerCanoe Sailingthe CaliforniaChannel Islandsby TimAnderson
How to Tie aFigure EightKnot byTactical_Pyro
How to build apirate ship bymdelaney3
Build a ShortDragon (16 foot3-BoardOutriggerSailing Canoe)by Wade Tarzia
repairing aheadsail by josh
How to get arope into a tree(withoutclimbing it) byvitex
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
How to Tie the Lanyard Knotby eddy14777 on January 31 2010
Intro How to Tie the Lanyard KnotMany people including myself have had trouble following the Stormdrane youtube video on tying the lanyard knot so i have done some research and found the solution
Image Notes1 Finished knot
Step 1 MaterialsAll you need is a reasonable length of para cord or whatever you wish to use
Image Notes1 One reasonable amount
Step 2 First StepThe first thing you are going to do is to make a bight that leaves you with to congruent endsThen you are going to put your ring finger through the bight
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Image Notes1 Close enough2 Bight
Step 3 Starting the KnotMake a loop just like the one in the picture and place it over the top strandBring the top strand under the bottom strand
Image Notes1 Notice the way the loop is done2 Top strand
Image Notes1 Bottom strand2 Top strand is under
Step 4 The Most Important PartNow you take the top stand from the previous picture and feed it over the first part of the loop under itself and back over the remainder of the loop
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Image Notes1 Under me2 Top strand3 This should make a diamond type shape
Step 5 DoublingNow take the bottom stand and take it around the part of the top strand nearest to the bight and than come up through the diamond shape in the middleDo the same for the top strand
Image Notes1 Top strand
Image Notes1 Both through the diamond
Step 6 FinishingWhen you take it off your finger it should look like thisWork out the slack by pulling on the bight and the two strands
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Image Notes1 Finished knot
Related Instructables
Cross KnotParacordLanyard byStormdrane
Celtic ButtonKnot (video) byStormdrane
Paracord wristlanyard madewith the snakeknot byStormdrane
Paracord ChainSinnet FastDeploy BoonieHatband (video)by Stormdrane
Zigzag SpoolingParacord (video)by Stormdrane
ParacordBoonie HatWrap (video) byStormdrane
Paracord IDbadge Lanyardby Flahusky
Cobra WeaveKey Fob bytevers94
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Four knots to make paracord into a useful toolby erik_mccray on March 27 2010
Authorerik_mccrayI am an ex-fabricator that is now a stay at home dad I love my new job but I do miss making stuff I love this site amp I am getting involved as a way to keep myskills upOn top of fad work I have also run two small business in the past One was custom sewing amp the other was as a small engine mechanicI have two votec degrees one in metal fabrication amp the other is in engine repairI look forward to getting to know everyone here
Intro Four knots to make paracord into a useful toolParacord is an awesome multitool used everywhere from the wild blue yonder to the deepest caverns But like any good tool it is only as good as the knowledge the userhas about the tool With most people out there using bungee cords amp ratchet straps it seems that paracord is being used for nothing more than friendship bracelets forgrown men This is a shame because for less then the price of a few cheap bungee cords amp some to short to be helpful straps You can get yourself hundreds of feet ofparacord
The key to getting the most out of the paracord is good knot work The first thing you need to know is what makes a good knot One is that the knot is easy amp quick to tieamp more impotant is that the knot is easy amp quick to untie The hitch class of knots is by far the best group of knots that the average person could know The four mostuseful hitch knots are the half hitch a quick simple knot that forms the base for many other knots the inline half hitch allowing you to get the most out of one length ofparacord the slippery hitch that gives you both on the fly control over tension on your paracord but also an adjustable loop that will not change unless you want it amp theinline truckers hitch instantly doubling the your pulling power
Step 1 To get started lets get some terminology that will be used defined
line= the paracord
Main line= the part of the paracord doing the work for example holding down your tarp or the long part of the paracord
Mid line= the middle of the length of the paracord
End line= the unused length of paracord or the short length of paracord
Step 2 The half hitch The half hitch is a simple way to secure a line to an anchor point like the tie down points in most trucks A half hitch is a constrictor knot meaning that the harder you pullon the line the tighter the knots grip gets Another common constrictor knot is the slip knot
Step 1 wrap your line around your anchor point Step 2 wrap the end line around the main line
Step 3 pass the end line threw the end line side of the newly formed loop
step 4 now take the slack out of the knot
step 5 to make sure the knot is secure tie another half hitch to the main line This knot is called adouble half hitch
step 6 another useful thing that can be done with the half hitch is that instead of repeating the wrap on the main line but repeating it on what you are tying to the half hitchcan be used to bind something like a stack of 2x4s
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Image Notes1 End line2 Main line3 step 1
Image Notes1 Step 2
Image Notes1 passing thew the end line side of the loop2 step 3
Image Notes1 step 5
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Image Notes1 step 6
Step 3 The mid line half hitch The mid line half hitch is for when the length of line is to long for the job at hand amp you dont want to have to cut the line to size or you are using multiple anchor pointswith one length of line
Step 1 double up the line at the point in the length you wish to make the knot
Step 2 wrap the doubled up portion of line around your anchor point The doubled up length is now now the end line
Step 3 now tie just as you did for the regular half hitch repeat the knot to make a double half hitch for security
Image Notes1 A mid line double half hitch
Image Notes1 step 1
Image Notes1 The end line2 step 2
Image Notes1 Step 3
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 4 The slippery hitch The slippery hitch is a great knot for adjusting tension on the main line or for having an adjustable fixed loop To adjust the knot simply slide the knot up or down the mainline
Step 1 wrap your line around the anchor point or just double over the line to form a loop
Step 2 wrap the end line around the main line three times Wrapping in the direction of the anchor point or loop
Step 3 put together the two lines making up the loop amp wrap the two lines one time with the end line
Step 4 pass the end line thew the last loop formed covering the two lined of the loop
Step 5 pull the knot tite
step 6 to adjust the size of the loop or main line tension grab the knot amp slide it up or down the main line
Image Notes1 grab just the knot its self to adjust it2 step 5
Image Notes1 step 1
Image Notes1 step 2
Image Notes1 step 3
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Image Notes1 step 4
Image Notes1 grab just the knot its self to adjust it2 step 5
Image Notes1 same knot as in last pic Just slid up2 step 6
Step 5 The mid line truchers hitch The truckers hitch is a great way to double the pulling force on a line There are many ways to tie this knot the problem with most of them is that at some point you aregoing to have to pass the end line through a loop on the main line that is acting like a pulley to double your pulling force this is great if you are making the knot close tothe end of your line but if you are using a 300 length of line amp want to make the knot in the first ten feet having to pass 290 of line thew a loop is a pain But with a fewhalf hitches you will not have to pass the end line threw any loop on the main line
step 1 wrap your line around the anchor point then double over your end line laying the top of the loop over the main line
Step 2 double up your main line amp lay the loop over the loop made by the end line
step 3 in main line above the knot twist in a loop
step 4 put main line loop thew the loop made in step 3 amp pull this loop tight over your main line loop forming a half hitch Repeat step 3 amp 4 to make a doublehalf hitch
step 5 To use the knot just pull down on the end line to put tension on the main line
step 6 after you have the main line snug tie a mid line double half hitch around the two lines forming the loop at the end of the main line with the end line
step 7 Tie a double half hitch with the end line around the end loop of the mid line half hitch of step 6 using the same method as used in steps 3 amp 4
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Image Notes1 the end of step 6
Image Notes1 main line2 end line3 step 1
Image Notes1 main line loop2 end line loop
Image Notes1 step 3
Image Notes1 step 4
Image Notes1 step 4 at the end with a double half hitch on the main loop
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Image Notes1 pull here2 step 5
Image Notes1 the start of step 6
Image Notes1 the end of step 6
Image Notes1 step 72 now the rest of the line is free to do more work
Related Instructables
Paracord KnotDisplay Bord byJamie bagn
ChokelessAdjustableParacord DogLeash byPizzaman101
ParacordLadder wWooden Rungsby josestude
tie a paracordshackle grip byitri45
ParacordPrussik Belt byJavaNut13
TiteTie is theTruckers Knoton Steroids bytitetie
ID Lanyard(Photos) byeschmunk
Dog Toys forHeavy Chewersby J3443RY
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Figure 8 knot and double 8 knotby jonathan111 on November 28 2007
Intro Figure 8 knot and double 8 knotI will show you how to tie a figure 8 knot and a figure 8 follow through
Step 1 Stating the knotThis is a simple knot so just follow the pictures
Step 2 Finishing the knotCross the string under and then push it through the hole Pull tightly unless you are going to do the follow through and leave it somewhat loose
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 3 The follow through knotThe follow through knot should be tied around something brought back and followed through the path of the 8 knot Look at the pictures Basically follow through the 8knot backwards
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Related Instructables
Climb Safe WithA Figure 8Knot by mattste A pocket full of
knots byKiteman
How to Tie aFigure EightKnot byTactical_Pyro
Paracord KnotDisplay Bord byJamie bagn
Cross KnotParacordLanyard byStormdrane
How to Tie aFire-escapeKnot by leonardoismael
Truckers HitchTHE mostawesome knoton the planetby schneidp20
Paracord ZipperPuller byrepeet13
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Truckers Hitch THE most awesome knot on the planetby schneidp20 on October 12 2008
Authorschneidp20I like building stuff Trouble is there just isnt enough time to build everything Sigh
Intro Truckers Hitch THE most awesome knot on the planetYes I know that there are plenty of other cool knots out there many of which I literally couldnt live wo I rock climb However this knot is unlike any other Plus Ineeded a grabber for my Instructable -) (BTW this ISNT a climbing knot) And in truth it isnt a knot by itself but rather a system of common knots
Have you ever tried to tie something down for transporting but just couldnt get the lines tight andor during transport the lines would continually loosen Then this is theknot for you I learned this knot back in the 70s when specialty car racks and ratchet straps were rare or unheard of I initially used it to tie a canoe on a car rack bothattaching to the rack as well as the lines to the bow and stern of the canoe Even with all the new gizmos available today this knot still shines because all you need is arope and ropes dont hum in the wind like straps
The unique aspect of this knot is that it gives you a 2-1 mechanical advantage when tightening the rope Be careful though You can actually damage some thingsbecause of the mechanical advantage This knot holds fast and is easy to untie hallmark traits of any good knot
Below you see the finished knot system well break it apart in the steps that follow
Image Notes1 1st anchor point a bowline2 loop3 securing knots 2 half hitches4 securing loose end with a fishermans knot5 2nd anchor point (should be round)
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Image Notes1 X marks the spot
Step 1 Initial setupThe first step is to anchor one end of the rope and then loop the rope around a 2nd anchor point
For attaching to the 1st anchor point I chose bowline a close 2 on my list -) There are other instructables on that one so I wont bore you here
The 2nd anchor really should be round because it serves as a pulley in this block and tackle type knot Ive used it on sharp anchor points and it doesnt work as well
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 2 Creating a slip knotTie a slip knot somewhere between the two anchor points Correct placement of the slip knot takes some experience to judge it correctly Typically I place it too close tothe 2nd anchor point and end up with not enough room to work with If the knot ends up too far from 2nd anchor point you can extend the knot by enlarging the loop
Be sure you tie the slip knot as shown You may not be able to untie other knots
In this small example the slip knot is uncharacteristically close to the 1st anchor point
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 3 Tightening and securingThe loose end of the rope that went around the 2nd anchor point goes through the slip knot loop Pull the loose end to the desired tension and secure with two halfhitches
Note To allow better view of the knots the rope isnt really tightened in this example
Step 4 Securing loose endThe final knot is just to secure the loose end somehow I chose a fishermans knot to do this
To tie a fishermans knot the rope goes around twice and goes under the X created by the loops Pull the loose end to tighten Finally slide the knot to put tension onthe half hitches
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Image Notes1 X marks the spot
Step 5 FinishedThere you have it I guarantee that the first time you really use this knot (not just practice) you will be amazed at how well it works and youll wish you knew this knot along time ago You may even come over to my side and declare that is is THE most awesome knot on the planet -)
Enjoy and happy haulingDave
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Related Instructables
TiteTie is theTruckers Knoton Steroids bytitetie
Four knots tomake paracordinto a usefultool byerik_mccray
Modify yourbike rack tocarry a sunfishor other boat byewilhelm
SurfboardHammock byGermy
GiganticHalloweenSpider Web bynolte919
How To Tie ASpiders Hitch(video) by back-cast
Three-hitch mathair ornamentby michiexile TRX from
ParacordChallengeAccepted bythrake
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Carry any Bottle with a JUG KNOT Handleby hpstoutharrow on September 17 2009
Intro Carry any Bottle with a JUG KNOT HandleTie a JUG KNOT around a water bottle soda bottle or aluminum bottle to make a secure carrying strap
Re-purpose any container into a reusable water bottle by adding a convenient carrying strap This Instructable will demonstrate how to tie a JUG knot which like its namesuggests is meant to properly secure around the neck of a container
With some cord and the knowledge of this knot you will be able add a handle lanyard or carabiner loop to any of your favorite beverages to carry them on the go
It works perfectly for those disposable water bottles and who knows once you add some colorful cord to the plain old clear water bottle you just might beinclined to refill it and use it again(Check out pictures 4amp5 below)
In addition to plastic beverage bottles like pop water and sports drinks you can turn those rugged aluminum beer bottles into a backpacking canteen
Those of you familiar with my previous aluminum bottle InstructablesROLLED RIM METAL TUMBLERhttpwwwinstructablescomidAluminum-Bottle-Tumbler-Cup-Cook-PotALUMINUM BOTTLE LIGHTWEIGHT ALCOHOL STOVEhttpwwwinstructablescomidAluminum-Bottle-Alcohol-Stovewill recognize the water canteen shown below as a re-purposed aluminum beer bottle Here I have added a painted surface treatment to turn it into a proper lookingwater bottle More on that in steps 13 14 15
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 1 Getting StartedCord size is important Select a small medium weight cord like the one shown here It is a general purpose camp cord sold at most sporting goods stores (shoelacesmight also work)
Do not use a heavy cord or rope because the larger diameter will not tuck under the relatively small lip at the top of the bottleneck and the bottle will fall out
Also the smaller cord cinches tight on itself and will not loosen accidentally
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 2 Form a BightThe next steps show how to tie a JUG KNOT It is the basic step for adding a carrying strap It is also the anchor point for any additional fancy bottle trussing you maywant to add
JUG KNOT Step 1
Form a Bight in the center of a length of cord Bight is a knot term for a loop or bend in the rope In this case the main Bight in this knot is highlighted with a white mark Imakes it easier to follow its path in these steps
The running ends of the cord should be equal length
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 3 Pull the Bight downPULL the Bight DOWN forming two Loops
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 4 Cross the LoopsCROSS the right Loop OVER the left Loop
Step 5 Pass the Bight under the 1st loopTake the main Bight and pass it UNDER the left Loop
Step 6 Weave the BightWEAVE the Bight OVER the portion of the right Loop and UNDER the portion of the left Loop
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 7 Extend the BightExtend the Bight OVER the outer portion of the right Loop
Step 8 Flip the Right Loop behindAdditional colored identification points have been added to the loops to follow their travel in these next two steps
The right Loop Yellow marker is FLIPPED BEHIND the knot and ends up on the far left side of the knot
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 9 Flip the 2nd loop in frontRaise the green marker (located on what was formerly the left loop) and pull it down and to the right FLIPPING IT IN FRONT of the knot
Note the blue portion of the this loop will pass around the outside of the yellow portion of the first loop
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Image Notes1 Center of knot that will tighten around the bottles neck
Step 10 Remove SlackNote where the blue green amp yellow markers end up
Start to remove the slack in the loops by pulling the original main Bight (white marker top right) and the two free standing ends at the bottom
the bottle neck will pass through the very center of the knot
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Image Notes1 Center of knot that will tighten around the bottles neck
Step 11 Tighten the KnotAfter removing the slack insert the bottle neck and finish tightening
The knot should look like this before slipping it over the bottle
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 12 Secure on bottle neckThis is the finished knot shown on the neck of various containers
The loop end and the two free standing ends can be tied together to create a carrying handle (last picture below)
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 13 Aluminum Bottle Water Bottle
The next few steps show the features of an aluminum beer bottle re-purposed as a water bottle canteen It is one of many containers that can be reused as a camp waterbottle
The bottle was lightly sanded masked and then pained with a hammered finished paint to create an interesting surface texture
Image Notes1 Textured finish paint makes an interesting grip-able surface2 Masked with tape for painting3 Masked with tape for painting
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Image Notes1 Dowel used for holding the bottle during painting
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 14 Tethered Cork StopperUse a wine bottle man made Cork as a stopper for your aluminum water bottleNote Use a cork that was removed from the wine bottle without the corkscrew penetrating through the bottom end of the cork (A hole all the way through the cork willcause it to leak) Use the unpierced end of the cork inside the water bottle
Drill a hole through the sides of the Cork Thread the cord through the hole to the center of the cord Use the cork as the main Bight and tie the Jug knot as shown inthe beginning steps
Now the cork is tethered to the bottle and will not get lost or fall on the ground
A Carabiner clip passes through the other cord end to attache the water bottle to you belt or pack
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 15 Trussed for TransportThis is another hanging method for carrying your aluminum bottle water canteen A Jug knot is tied conventionally around the neck
The running ends of the knot however are pulled down towards the bottom of the bottle A Barrel Knot is tied about 34 the way down the side of the bottle A squareknot is tied on the bottom of the knot to keep the two running ends tight against the sides of the bottle
I like the look of the accent colored cord running down the sides of the bottle and the fact that the bottle hangs from the belt upside down It adds to its uniqueness
The last picture shows another truss variation
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 16 AdvancedBelow is a bottle with some additional trussing You can be creative as you want It all starts with a re-purposed container and the Jug Knot (and enough cord)
Related Instructables
AluminumBottle TumblerCup amp Cook Potfor an AlcoholStove byhpstoutharrow
Water BottleBelt Clip byuglymike Duct Tape
Water Bottle byrabidsquire2
AluminumBottle AlcoholStove byhpstoutharrow
DIYGlass WaterBottle byCulturespy
Solar WaterHeater forBackpackingUsing WaterBottles and aCar Shade bykopomeroy
Duct tape waterbottle holder(Photos) by pinkmarshmallow
How to make aCamelPack withan old plasticbottle bywillrandship
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Basic Knots Guideby zorro3355 on April 29 2008
Intro Basic Knots Guidehi
Step 1 Thumb knotThe most simple knotUsed as a stopper and prevent ropes from fraying
Step 2 Reef KnotUsed to tie two ropes of equal thickness togetherIt is pretty easy to tie and untie but under tentionit may be diffcult to untieIt is also not sutible for smoothropes(egnylon ropes)
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 3 Figure of eightused as a stopperprevent ropes from fraying and its more secure than tumb knot its is also used to tie Caribinas to ropes and is often used in rock climbing
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 4 Timber hitchused for pulling logs
Step 5 Clove hitchUsed to tie a rope onto a pole or logThe pole must be roundThe pole lust be thicker then the rope itself
(greatly used during pioneering)
Step 6 Sheet bandused to tie ropes of different thickness together(works on same thickness of ropes too)
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 7 Sheep shankTo shorten RopesTo prevent middle fraying
Step 8 Slip knotWhippingUsed as a grip for pulling things(when tied on a stick or small pole)(marlin spike hitch)
Related Instructables
Rope Rings byhpstoutharrow
How to Tie aFigure EightKnot byTactical_Pyro
Whippin (WestCountry Style)by tim_n
SurvivalBracelet(Updated) bytevers94
HangmansNoose PackClosure byPopEye42
Turkey on aTripod byhpstoutharrow
SurvivalBracelet II bytevers94 Zigzag Spooling
Paracord (video)by Stormdrane
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
How to Tie a Fire-escape Knotby leonardo ismael on October 16 2007
Intro How to Tie a Fire-escape KnotThis knot is used by firemen in case of fires for example imagine a scene where the ladder on the firetruck messes up but people need to get down a five story buildingor more All they have is a long piece of rope they can safely get down with a secure knot like the fire-escape knot So why not learn it its easy to do and hard to untieif you tie it tightly
This is from the American Boys Handbook
Step 1 Get Your RopeFirst grab a piece of rope and bend it like this to make a loop in it Follow every step to the smallest detail
Step 2 Twist the RopeNow make a twist like this and hold it together
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 3 Pull Through the TwistPull the loop through the twist you just made from underneath
Step 4 Go Over the Split EndNow pull the tail through the loop
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 5 FinallyAnd finally just pull it through as pictured below
Congratulations you just learned the fire-escape knot
Step 6 Same Name Not KnotThis is another knot called the fire-escape knot this shouldnt be your result
Related Instructables
House FireEscape Plan(video) byWhatHappensNowAdvice
ParacordLadder wWooden Rungsby josestude
Bed SheetEscape Rope byjessehensel
rope ladder(glow-in-the-dark version) bymikeasaurus
HeadlockEscape 2(video) byjohnnyrockstah
QuickFirestarter byMattandJora
Trail sauna byjakee117
How to Kill FireAnts andCommitGenocide byKentsOkay
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Climb Safe With A Figure 8 Knotby mattste on February 23 2010
Intro Climb Safe With A Figure 8 Knot There are many things that a beginning climber needs to know including several important knots Perhaps the most essential knot is the Figure 8 Follow Through Thistutorial will demonstrate how to correctly harness yourself to a rope using a Figure 8 Follow Through knot This knot is used primarily by rock climbers to provide a life-line Since this knot is used as a life-line it is very important to be able to tie it correctly (Your life could depend upon it)
Dont worry with this tutorial and about 5 minutes of practice you can have this knot mastered
Things you will need
- Climbing Harness- Climbing Rope
If you are wanting to go climbing and dont already have these items they can be purchased for about $25 each at most outdoor sporting goods stores If you are merelylooking to learn the knot a belt loop and a rope (about five feet long) will do
Image Notes1 Climbing Harness2 Climbing Rope
Step 1 Dealing With The RopeThroughout this tutorial I will be discussing different parts of the rope To make these instructions as clear as possible I will define a few terms that I will use throughoutthe tutorial The Anchor End of the rope will generally be at the top of the images This is the end that would be anchored to the wall or rock and does not move Wewill not be doing much with the anchored end The Tail End of the rope is the opposite end that we will be dealing with I will call this the tail for short
Now that we have some terms to work with lets get started
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 2 Tying The First Figure 8This knot has several parts to it The first part of the knot is just tying a basic figure 8 To tie the first figure 8 there are four simple steps
1 - Using the tail make a loop over the rope (as shown in the first picture) keeping in mind that there should be about 3 ft of slack on the tail end
2 - Wrap the tail back this time go under the anchored end (As shown in the second picture)
3 - Bring the tail down through the first loop (As shown in the third picture)
4 - Finally pull the two ends to make the knot a little bit tighter and easier to deal with (Shown in the fourth picture)
After these four steps you should end up with a knot that resembles a figure 8
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 3 Looping Into The Harness In order to secure the rope to the harness simply thread the tail end of the rope through the front loop in the harness as shown in the picture below This step isobviously very important
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 4 Following Back Through The Figure 8After looping the rope through the harness you have to thread the tail end of the rope back through the knot following the first figure 8 I have divided this process intofive smaller steps in order to make it more clear
1 - Coming form underneath the knot bring the tail up through the near loop and to the left behind the anchored end of the rope (Shown in the first picture)
2 - Wrap the tail around the anchored end back to the right and down through the adjacent loop (Shown in the second picture)
3 - You simply need to bring the tail back over the top of the knot to the left (Shown in the third picture)
4 - Bring the tail end up through the far loop following the anchored end (Shown in the fourth picture)
5 - Finally pull the knot tight (Shown in the fifth picture)
As you can see the first four pictures are simply tracing the knot back through with the tail end
For the last part while you pull the knot tight you may want to make small adjustments and rearrange how it all fits together If the knot does not lay perfectly smoothand tight its NOT a big deal
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 5 Finishing The Knot After completing the Figure 8 knot you will want to somehow secure the tail end of the rope out of the way There are a couple different ways to do this the way that Iwill demonstrate is using whats called a Stopper Knot This secondary knot is similar to a Fishermans knot and is pretty simple I have once again divided thisprocess into several smaller steps
1 - Start by wrapping the tail end around the anchored end (As shown in the first picture)
2 - Wrap the tail back underneath the two vertical segments (As shown in the second picture)
3 - Simply repeat the first two steps wrapping the tail around again (As shown in the third picture)
4 - This step in the fourth picture may look complicated but all you need to do is insert the tail up through the two loops that you have just made
5 - To finish off the knot you will want to slowly pull the tail end while gently pushing the bottom of the stopper knot upwards If you have successfully completed this knotit should look something like the fifth picture
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 6 Ready To Climb Now that you have mastered the Figure 8 knot you can securely harness yourself into a climbing rope Remember there are many other skills that go into setting up ananchor and belaying a climber This tutorial only covers the figure 8 knot For more information there are many great websites that demonstrate how to correctly set up asafe climbing system (Ive posted a few below) If you are a beginning climber I recommend that you read up on a few other climbing techniques Also you shouldprobably go to a climbing wall or gym where there are experienced climbers that can show you the ropes Hopefully this tutorial has been helpful Have fun and be safe
Some useful linkshttpwwwstephenprattnetAnchorsanchorshtmhttpwwwuoregonedu~oppclimbingtopicsanchorshtmlhttpwwwabc-of-rockclimbingcomhowtoclimbingtechniquesasp
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Related Instructables
How to Tie aFigure EightKnot byTactical_Pyro
Paracord KnotDisplay Bord byJamie bagn
Basic KnotsGuide byzorro3355
How to Climb aTree (withprussiks) bystasterisk
How to climb atree (using onlyrope) thefunsimple wayby louieaw
How to get arope into a tree(withoutclimbing it) byvitex
How to tievarious knots byadaviel
How to make arope swing byjdub0928
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Turks Head Knots on a Bottleby sklnxbones on July 6 2010
Intro Turks Head Knots on a BottleThis is the finished project A bottle decorated with three Turks Head Knots There are only three knots on this bottle The RED and the BLUE knots are each a 20 Bightby 3 Lead Turks Head Knots The WHITE knot is a 20 Bight by 19 Lead Turks Head Knot
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 1 Supplies
Cord Lots and Lots of cord I cant tell you how much each bottle is differentBottle Washed and Dried inside and out Make sure to remove all water spotsThreaded Needle Cord screws into the threads at the base of the needlePegs I use brass rivets used as a map to tie the Turks Head KnotsHole Punch Used to punch holes in the painters tape to hold the pegsPainters Tape To hold the pegs in place and to make your map for the Turks Head KnotsMarker To write on the painters tapeCloth Towel To remove finger prints and dirt from your bottleKrazy Glue or Super Glue This is used to secure the knots in place to the bottle
OPTIONAL BUT HIGHLY RECOMMENDEDI use the Turks Head Cookbook from KnotToolcom
Step 2 PreparationYou will need to find a bottle you like I used an empty instant tea bottle of course washed and dried (I like to put the bottle in the oven for a few minutes to dry the insidewithout water spots Take off the lid and do not put lid in the oven) Now measure the circumference of the bottle Take a cord and tightly wrap the cord around the bottleMark where the ends meet and use a ruler to measure the length of the cord For my instant tea bottle the circumference is 27cm I know from past knots that I have tiedthat I want my knot to have 20 Bights in the top and bottom (bands) knots I am going to use the Bights in the (bands) knots to tie the middle knot Now divide the numberof Bights (20) into the size of the circumference (27) to get the space between each Bight (135) With me so far
Now take two pieces of painters tape using a ruler measure out the length of the circumference and mark the length on the both pieces of tape Next you will mark thespace between each Bight on the tape
Step 3 Adding the PegsI like to use pegs when tying Turks Head Knots it just makes tying the knot easier
These are what I use for pegs
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 4 Adding Pegs to the TapeNow take a hole punch to cut holes in the tape where the lines meet You will place the pegs in the holes
Insert a peg in each hole and carefully stick the first piece of tape to the bottle
Step 5 Adding the 2nd row of pegsNow do the same thing with the second piece of tape The numbers on each piece of tape must line up
This picture shows you what you should have now This odd looking thing will be your map to tie the Turks Head Knot And this is the end of Step 1
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 6 Tying the first Turks Head KnotUsing the Turks Head Cookbook follow the numbers going over and under as indicated in the book I chose a 20 Bight by 3 Lead knot which will give me a nice bandaround the bottle Once the ends meet you have made one complete knot Tape the running end of your cord and start removing the pegs and the tape
Step 7 Remove the pegs and the tapeBe careful not to untie the knot as you remove the pegs and tape from the bottle Continue to remove all the pegs and remove the tape from the bottle At this point theknot will be very loose and will need to be tightened up
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 8 Remove the slack from the knotHere you can see just how much the knot expanded Starting with the standing end begin to pull the slack out of the knot going towards the running end of the cordDo not expect to pull all the slack out at once You may have to make 3 - 5 attempts at removing the slack out of the knot DO NOT remove all of the slack out of the knotIn order to make the bands we will have to triple the Turks Head Knot We will do this by following the knot three times The threaded needle will really come in handyhere
Step 9 Triple the KnotOnce you have made three passes of the Turks Head Knot use your needle to go under your knot about half the circumference and cut the cord The knot will be tightenough to hide the tail in placeTIP I carefully add a couple of drops of super glue UNDER the band to hold them in place and keep them from sliding around in the nextsteps A drop or two in 3 or 4 places around the band should be enough
Step 10 Add the second knotNow repeat this whole step for the second bandWhen tying the second band you must make sure the Bights line up to the first band This is crucial for the next stepWipe down the bottle to make sure all your finger prints and adhesive from the tape are all removed You want to make sure your bottle is clean at this point Any dirt orfinger prints left on the bottle will be almost impossible to remove From this point on we will use gloves when tying our last knot
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 11 Maping the Top KnotStick a piece of painters tape on top of your first band leaving the bottom of the knot exposedUse a marker to count the number of Bights in your knot Instead of using the pegs we are going to use the Bights to tie our next Turks Head Knot
Step 12 Mapping the Bottom KnotDo the same thing for the bottom band but you must make sure your numbers on top and bottom line up So 1 on top should be the same position as 1 on the bottom
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 13 Adding the last knotAgain using the Turks Head Cookbook and the threaded needle you are going to follow the instructions going over and under as indicated in the book Be sure to usegloves when ever you handle the bottle
Step 14 Thats ItFor this Turks Head Knot I am using a 20 Bight by 19 Lead knot
Because of the amount of cord you are working with your cord will get twisted and knotted You will have to un-twist the cord often Its a pain in the rear but it has to bedone And it has to be done alot
Continue to tie the knot until you finish the knot If you have the cord and the patience you can double or triple the knot When you are done use your needle to hide theends under your bands Cut the ends and your DONE
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Related Instructables
Monkeys FistFloatingKeychain byjokerlz
How To Make ATurks headKnot WithParacord byDoggie Stylish
Tying Trivetsout of Rope forHoliday Gifts bykylemarsh
Paracord KnotDisplay Bord byJamie bagn
How to Make ATurks Head(Photos) bymchs60chip
A pocket full ofknots byKiteman
Monkeys fistknot AND themonkey byjonathan111
TiteTie is theTruckers Knoton Steroids bytitetie
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Larks head noose -- an easy useful knot that tightens and loosensby Larry Breed on February 19 2009
Intro Larks head noose -- an easy useful knot that tightens and loosensI thought I knew all the basic knots but then I was taught this incredibly useful simple knot Its good for tying up the neck of a bag that you want to repeatedly open andsecurely close Its good for tying around a springy bundle that will need tightening and retightening And its easy to undo
Ive looked at knot literature but havent found a name for this so I named it The basic knot is well known its called a larks head Since all Ive done is to slip the twoends through the larks head to make a noose I call it that
WARNING Dont use this knot when human safety would depend on it Climbers and mountaineers have well-tested reliable knots for such situations
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Image Notes1 To tighten further step on this side of the larks head and pull the free ends
Step 1 Double the cord overThe larks head noose requires enough cord to go twice around your bundle plus a foot or two Find the center and double it over Sailors call this a bight
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 2 Form the larks headComing from below the bight hook your thumb and forefinger over the two sides Reach outward and downward and pinch your fingertips together underneath thedoubled cord
Youve made a larks head Move the crossing cord a little farther from your hand so theres a clear opening through the two half-loops
Step 3 Form the nooseSlip the two ends of the cord through the opening we were just talking about Pull the larks head tight so it grips the two cords Find something that needs constrictingand put the noose around it
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 4 Tightening retightening and lockingSlide the knot against the bundle If its not tight enough to keep from slipping tighten it by holding it in one hand and tugging on the cords one at a time with the otherhand Notice that you can slide the knot out again for instance to re-open the bag you just tied shut For some applications this may be as tight as you need it
A springy bundle probably still feels loose If so compress the bundle and get a new grip on the cords Rest your foot on the bundle on the cords nearest the larks headand pull to slide the larks head tighter
To make the knot more permanent you can lock it Make an overhand in the cord ends (Exactly like the first step in tying shoelaces) With your foot still on the bundlepull on the cords and move your hands apart until youre pulling in opposite directions You have just locked the larks head and you can trust it to stay that way()
But lets say that later on you want to loosen the locked knot Again put your foot on the bundle and cords nearest the larks head hold the two cord ends together andpull This makes a little slack between the overhand and the larks head so you can untie the overhand
In twine or small string the locking overhand knot may be difficult to undo Use a shoelace knot instead of an overhand and itll unlock easily
() If youre using slippery cord like polypropylene an overhand may not lock securely You may want to tie another overhand knot For added security wrap a shortlength of duct tape around the two cords close to the knot
Image Notes1 To tighten further step on this side of the larks head and pull the free ends
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Related Instructables
TRX fromParacordChallengeAccepted bythrake
A pocket full ofknots byKiteman
Lens CapLanyard by~teknoarsonist~ how to tie a
noose byawesume
AdjustableParacordGlassesLanyard byjdtwelve12
HangmansNoose PackClosure byPopEye42
Paraleash - ADog LeashFrom Paracordby The Ideanator
How to make arugged andhandy ParacordBelt by Jake22
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 8 Step 8
Now you will add your attachment like the swivel snap hook shown putting both strands through the swivel eye to begin tying the snake knot
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 9 Step 9Bring the right strand under the cords then up over them as shown
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 10 Step 10Now take the left strand over across the other strands back behind and under the cords and up through the right strand loop as shown Then tighten
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 11 Step 11
Take the right strand under and behind the cords then bring it back through the tightened knot along side itself as shown and tighten This is where hemostats come inhandy with tying this knot working the cord through the previously tightened part of the knot It can be done without hemostats but requires tighteningloosening of theknots with just your fingertips
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 12 Step 12
Turn the lanyard over so the other side of the knot is facing up The working strand now on the right side will be brought under the cords back up and down through theparallel strands of the knot as shown then tighten And continue this process flipping the lanyard over taking the right strand under and back up around and through theparallel cords and tighten Continue until you run out of cord or reach the cross knot
Youll now trim off any excess cord and quick melt the end of the strands to prevent fraying to finish
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 13 Variations
You can use other two strand knots instead of the cross knot for variations on this style of lanyard A few alternatives to try tying in a spaced out series or combination ofthem Matthew Walker knot double wall knot lanyard knot double overhand knots double figure 8 knots etc The finishing knots around the attachment can also bedifferent as Ive used the lanyard knot sometimes just one or several in a row
You can also use variations of the cross knot with paracord bracelets and watchbands Doubled version of the knot shown as a paracord bracelet and alternating withtwo pairs of strands for the paracord watchband Leftover pieces of paracord can be used for zipper pulls key ring fobs even paracord cross pendants
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Related Instructables
Paracord ChainSinnet FastDeploy BoonieHatband (video)by Stormdrane
Zigzag SpoolingParacord (video)by Stormdrane
SurvivalBracelet(Updated) bytevers94
Celtic ButtonKnot (video) byStormdrane
ParacordBoonie HatWrap (video) byStormdrane
Paracord wristlanyard madewith the snakeknot byStormdrane
SurvivalBracelet II bytevers94
Cobra WeaveKey Fob bytevers94
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Paracord wrist lanyard made with the snake knotby Stormdrane on September 12 2007
AuthorStormdrane Stormdranes BlogNo matter where you go there you are
Intro Paracord wrist lanyard made with the snake knotThis instructable will show how to make a wrist lanyard using paracord and the snake knot The lanyard can be used to secure a key chain knife multi-tool flashlightcell phone camera binoculars compass etc More projects links knot references can be seen on my blog page Stormdranes Blog
Step 1 SuppliesYoull need about 45 feet of paracord(you may use other types of cordage if desired) The paracord I used is from the Supply Captain I left the inner strands in theparacord but you can remove them if preferred If done in one color it will be one continuous 45 ft length if done in two colors youll need 3 ft for the primary color thatincludes the wrist section and 15 ft for the second color that will show in the snake knot Also used are scissors tape measure or ruler lighter hemostats or needle nosepliers(not necessary but they make it much easier) and a swivel clip key ring snap hook cell phone lariat carabiner or whatever attachment you prefer to use
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 2 Attaching two colors of paracordIf using two colors of paracord you will insert one color about 12 inch into the other color You may remove a small amount of the paracords inner strands by pullingthem out trimming with scissors and pulling the paracord outer sheath back over the strands leaving room to insert the other color For various projects Ive used threedifferent methods for attaching two colors of paracord melting sewing or gluing The choice is yours I usually sew them together it doesnt matter as long as its a goodconnection It will be hidden under the first knot
Step 3 Find the center of the length of paracordTake the center of the length of cord and bring it thru the attachment Im using a swivel clip For this tutorial Im measuring the wrist loop at about 10 inches from theattachment The connection of the two colors will be just on the other side at this point
Step 4 Making the snake knotThe snake knot will be made around the wrist loop section of paracord the loop strands being the core of the knot Ive added a series of photos showing the steps Iuse By using two colors youll see that I flip the lanyard over after making each knot so that Im working with the cord on the right side of the lanyard I bring it under allthe other cords working the hemostats under the previously tightened knot and pulling the cord back thru Then tightening up the knot keeping the cord from twisting andworking it up against the previous knot Again flipping the work over youll see two parallel cords of the same color which will be split with the cord on the right goingunder around and pulled thru with the hemostats then tightened up Continue this procedure until youve done about 10 snake knots(you can count them down eitherside
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 5 Count your knotsOnce you have 10 snake knots youre almost done Youll notice from the photos of both sides of the lanyard that one side has the snake knots alternating all the waydown and the other has a set of parallel knots at the top and botton of the sequence of knots Youll always have those at the start and finish of the snake knots I preferto have them end up on the same side of the lanyard so one side appears to have a more uniform look but its not required
Step 6 Trim and melt the excess paracordUse the scissors to trim off the excess cord and quickly melt the ends with a lighter so they dont fray
Step 7 Youre doneYou can make a range of variations using less or more cordknots Shorten the loop for a double ended key chain or make the loop longer for use as a neck lanyard aLanyard Break-Away Connector could be added for the safety conscious You can also add a wooden bead skull cord lock etc Visit my blog page for more knot relatedprojects links and resources Stormdranes Blog You can find ideas for other geargadgets to attach to your lanyard on EDC Forums
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Related Instructables
Paracord ChainSinnet FastDeploy BoonieHatband (video)by Stormdrane
Cross KnotParacordLanyard byStormdrane
Zigzag SpoolingParacord (video)by Stormdrane
SurvivalBracelet II bytevers94
SurvivalBracelet(Updated) bytevers94
Cobra WeaveKey Fob bytevers94
ParacordBoonie HatWrap (video) byStormdrane
Paracord KnotDisplay Bord byJamie bagn
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
How to tie various knotsby adaviel on September 7 2009
Intro How to tie various knotsKnots as a way of joining rope without special equipment are useful in many situations On a sailboat knots are essential both for daily use and for emergency repairsThis instructable describes several different common knots eg
Sheet Bend - to tie two lines togetherBowline - to make a loopReef Knot - to fasten a bundle of materialFishermans Bend - to secure a line to a post or ring
These knots are good for regular rope - braided or 3-strand polyester or natural fibre (hemp sisal) Monofilament (fishing line) or steel cable performs better with differentknots
Knots are typically quite a lot weaker than straight rope - when rope goes around a tight radius such as in a knot the outside is under more tension than the insideSplices (which require special tools and are time-consuming to make) are stronger so permanent fittings usually have eye-splices
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 1 Sheet BendThe sheet bend is used to tie two lines together It is perhaps the most generally useful knot of all When used to tie a line to itself making a loop it is called a bowlineThe strain is taken on the ropes in the middle - not the one coming out the side
How the knot is made is not critical - it is the final shape that is important One can make the flat loop first and work the other rope around it Or one can make thecrossed loop first - required when tying a bowline
The two images show front and back views of the same knot
AdvantagesEasy to makeEasy to undo when tension is removedDoes not easily capsize
DisadvantagesHard to make under loadDangerous to make under heavy load
UsesJoining two equally-sized ropesExtending a towline or stern line
Method 1 the same as a bowline
Method 2 starting with the flat loop
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 2 Double Sheet BendThe double sheet bend is used to tie two lines of different thickness - but not too different It is the same as a normal sheet bend but with an extra turn of the thinner ropearound the flat loop in the thickerThe load goes on the line through the flat loop not the one that comes out the side of the knot
UsesSecuring a heaving line to a tow lineExtending a stern line if you dont have enough line of one thickness
Step 3 BowlineThe bowline is really a special case of the sheet bend but it it tied at the end of a rope to make a loop
The photos show the completed loop and closeups of the front and back of the actual knot Note that it is the same as the sheet bend - but it must be made the right wayround This loop does not tighten in use The knot is quite easy to untie once the load is removed With practice it is very quick to tie
Some usesSecuring a dinghy line to a railing or stanchionSecuring an anchor line to an anchorTie a jib sheet to the sailTie a mooring line around a rock or treeTie a float to an anchor triplineUse one in each line to tie two ropes of very different sizes - eg a throwing line to a large tow ropeDisadvantages the knot must be completely made before it will take any strain - it is hard to tie if there is already a load on the rope
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Linked bowlines
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 4 Bowline on the BightA bowline on the bight is a bowline tied in a loop of rope (neither end is needed) The shape is the same as a bowline made with a double line but the middle of thebight forms the loop around the standing part
UsesAn impromptu bosuns chair - to sit in while being transferred between two boats at sea
Step 5 Clove HitchThe clove hitch can be made when you only have the bight (the middle) of a rope not the ends
UsesSecuring a burgee pole to a burgee halyard (a continuous loop of thin line)Securing a tiller from swinging
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 6 Round Turn and Two Half-HitchesThis is a knot used to secure a line to a ring or bar Wind a couple of turns around the bar then secure the end with two hitches around the standing part (this looks like aclove hitch when done)
AdvantagesCan be made under load - it is easy to take turns around the bar while maintaining tension on the ropeStrong - provided the bar is thicker than the rope the rope is not weakened by sharp bendsDisadvantagesThe end tends to work loose
UsesSecuring a line to a mooring ring or samson post
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 7 Fishermans BendThe fishermans bend is the same as the round turn and two half hitches except that the first hitch is looped under the round turn This uses the tension on the rope tosecure the end from working loose
AdvantagesSecure against working loose
DisadvantagesHard to make under tensionHard to undo under tensionMay seize up under load when wet making it hard to undo
UsesSecuring mooring line to ringSecuring fender lines to rail
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 8 Studsail BendThe studsail bend is like the fishermans bend but the second hitch is also secured under the round turn making it even more secure against working loose when undertension
AdvantagesVery secure against working looseDisadvantagesHard to make under tensionHard to undo under tension
Step 9 Figure-8 KnotThe figure-eight knot is used to prevent an end of rope from passing through a block (pulley) Sometimes called a stopper knot
The double figure-8 knot is used in rock climbing as an alternative to a bowline to secure a climbing harness to the end of a safety rope The double knot is made bymaking a single knot then tracing back around the knot with the free end after passing it around the harness loop
AdvantagesEasy to verify by inspectionNot prone to work loose
DisadvantagesSlow to make and undoCannot be made under load
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 10 Prussic KnotThe prussic knot may be used as a climbing ascender - when made around a vertical rope as shown downwards tension on the ends locks the knot while release oftension allows it to be slid up the rope A pair of prussic knots on foot loops may be used in tandem to climb a rope
UsesClimbing a ropeTaking up tension to free a riding turn on a winch
Step 11 Reef KnotThe reef knot or square knot is used to tie a bundle of material together It must be made around something - it should not be used to tie two free ropes togetherbecause it can easily capsizeIt should not be used to make a loop unless it can be tensioned around a solid object It should not be used around a person - use a bowline instead A capsized reefknot will slip easily and could constrict and cause severe injury
UsesReefing a sail (tying the unused portion around a spar)Securing a furled sail to a spar (sail ties)Wrapping a parcelTying shoelaces
AdvantagesMay be made under moderate load
DisadvantagesCapsizes (works free) if used improperlyCan seize up under load when wet
Tying the knot
Capsizing a reef knot
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 12 CleatsThis is not a knot but is very common on boatsThe first picture shows a rope cleated normally The second shows one with a final locking turn - the last turn is twisted before placing over the cleat so that the tensionon the rope helps secure the free end
When working with ropes under tension take a turn or two around a winch or cleat before trying to secure the end with a knot The load on the free end falls exponentiallywith each turn taken Severe injury can result if a finger or other body part is caught in a loop of rope or between a rope and another object
Step 13 Practice themIt is sometimes useful to be able to tie knots in the dark or as in this video behind your back
Related Instructables
AThird Hand forSailing or OtherThings by WadeTarzia
Paracord KnotDisplay Bord byJamie bagn
Trip LogOutriggerCanoe Sailingthe CaliforniaChannel Islandsby TimAnderson
How to Tie aFigure EightKnot byTactical_Pyro
How to build apirate ship bymdelaney3
Build a ShortDragon (16 foot3-BoardOutriggerSailing Canoe)by Wade Tarzia
repairing aheadsail by josh
How to get arope into a tree(withoutclimbing it) byvitex
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
How to Tie the Lanyard Knotby eddy14777 on January 31 2010
Intro How to Tie the Lanyard KnotMany people including myself have had trouble following the Stormdrane youtube video on tying the lanyard knot so i have done some research and found the solution
Image Notes1 Finished knot
Step 1 MaterialsAll you need is a reasonable length of para cord or whatever you wish to use
Image Notes1 One reasonable amount
Step 2 First StepThe first thing you are going to do is to make a bight that leaves you with to congruent endsThen you are going to put your ring finger through the bight
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Image Notes1 Close enough2 Bight
Step 3 Starting the KnotMake a loop just like the one in the picture and place it over the top strandBring the top strand under the bottom strand
Image Notes1 Notice the way the loop is done2 Top strand
Image Notes1 Bottom strand2 Top strand is under
Step 4 The Most Important PartNow you take the top stand from the previous picture and feed it over the first part of the loop under itself and back over the remainder of the loop
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Image Notes1 Under me2 Top strand3 This should make a diamond type shape
Step 5 DoublingNow take the bottom stand and take it around the part of the top strand nearest to the bight and than come up through the diamond shape in the middleDo the same for the top strand
Image Notes1 Top strand
Image Notes1 Both through the diamond
Step 6 FinishingWhen you take it off your finger it should look like thisWork out the slack by pulling on the bight and the two strands
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Image Notes1 Finished knot
Related Instructables
Cross KnotParacordLanyard byStormdrane
Celtic ButtonKnot (video) byStormdrane
Paracord wristlanyard madewith the snakeknot byStormdrane
Paracord ChainSinnet FastDeploy BoonieHatband (video)by Stormdrane
Zigzag SpoolingParacord (video)by Stormdrane
ParacordBoonie HatWrap (video) byStormdrane
Paracord IDbadge Lanyardby Flahusky
Cobra WeaveKey Fob bytevers94
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Four knots to make paracord into a useful toolby erik_mccray on March 27 2010
Authorerik_mccrayI am an ex-fabricator that is now a stay at home dad I love my new job but I do miss making stuff I love this site amp I am getting involved as a way to keep myskills upOn top of fad work I have also run two small business in the past One was custom sewing amp the other was as a small engine mechanicI have two votec degrees one in metal fabrication amp the other is in engine repairI look forward to getting to know everyone here
Intro Four knots to make paracord into a useful toolParacord is an awesome multitool used everywhere from the wild blue yonder to the deepest caverns But like any good tool it is only as good as the knowledge the userhas about the tool With most people out there using bungee cords amp ratchet straps it seems that paracord is being used for nothing more than friendship bracelets forgrown men This is a shame because for less then the price of a few cheap bungee cords amp some to short to be helpful straps You can get yourself hundreds of feet ofparacord
The key to getting the most out of the paracord is good knot work The first thing you need to know is what makes a good knot One is that the knot is easy amp quick to tieamp more impotant is that the knot is easy amp quick to untie The hitch class of knots is by far the best group of knots that the average person could know The four mostuseful hitch knots are the half hitch a quick simple knot that forms the base for many other knots the inline half hitch allowing you to get the most out of one length ofparacord the slippery hitch that gives you both on the fly control over tension on your paracord but also an adjustable loop that will not change unless you want it amp theinline truckers hitch instantly doubling the your pulling power
Step 1 To get started lets get some terminology that will be used defined
line= the paracord
Main line= the part of the paracord doing the work for example holding down your tarp or the long part of the paracord
Mid line= the middle of the length of the paracord
End line= the unused length of paracord or the short length of paracord
Step 2 The half hitch The half hitch is a simple way to secure a line to an anchor point like the tie down points in most trucks A half hitch is a constrictor knot meaning that the harder you pullon the line the tighter the knots grip gets Another common constrictor knot is the slip knot
Step 1 wrap your line around your anchor point Step 2 wrap the end line around the main line
Step 3 pass the end line threw the end line side of the newly formed loop
step 4 now take the slack out of the knot
step 5 to make sure the knot is secure tie another half hitch to the main line This knot is called adouble half hitch
step 6 another useful thing that can be done with the half hitch is that instead of repeating the wrap on the main line but repeating it on what you are tying to the half hitchcan be used to bind something like a stack of 2x4s
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Image Notes1 End line2 Main line3 step 1
Image Notes1 Step 2
Image Notes1 passing thew the end line side of the loop2 step 3
Image Notes1 step 5
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Image Notes1 step 6
Step 3 The mid line half hitch The mid line half hitch is for when the length of line is to long for the job at hand amp you dont want to have to cut the line to size or you are using multiple anchor pointswith one length of line
Step 1 double up the line at the point in the length you wish to make the knot
Step 2 wrap the doubled up portion of line around your anchor point The doubled up length is now now the end line
Step 3 now tie just as you did for the regular half hitch repeat the knot to make a double half hitch for security
Image Notes1 A mid line double half hitch
Image Notes1 step 1
Image Notes1 The end line2 step 2
Image Notes1 Step 3
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 4 The slippery hitch The slippery hitch is a great knot for adjusting tension on the main line or for having an adjustable fixed loop To adjust the knot simply slide the knot up or down the mainline
Step 1 wrap your line around the anchor point or just double over the line to form a loop
Step 2 wrap the end line around the main line three times Wrapping in the direction of the anchor point or loop
Step 3 put together the two lines making up the loop amp wrap the two lines one time with the end line
Step 4 pass the end line thew the last loop formed covering the two lined of the loop
Step 5 pull the knot tite
step 6 to adjust the size of the loop or main line tension grab the knot amp slide it up or down the main line
Image Notes1 grab just the knot its self to adjust it2 step 5
Image Notes1 step 1
Image Notes1 step 2
Image Notes1 step 3
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Image Notes1 step 4
Image Notes1 grab just the knot its self to adjust it2 step 5
Image Notes1 same knot as in last pic Just slid up2 step 6
Step 5 The mid line truchers hitch The truckers hitch is a great way to double the pulling force on a line There are many ways to tie this knot the problem with most of them is that at some point you aregoing to have to pass the end line through a loop on the main line that is acting like a pulley to double your pulling force this is great if you are making the knot close tothe end of your line but if you are using a 300 length of line amp want to make the knot in the first ten feet having to pass 290 of line thew a loop is a pain But with a fewhalf hitches you will not have to pass the end line threw any loop on the main line
step 1 wrap your line around the anchor point then double over your end line laying the top of the loop over the main line
Step 2 double up your main line amp lay the loop over the loop made by the end line
step 3 in main line above the knot twist in a loop
step 4 put main line loop thew the loop made in step 3 amp pull this loop tight over your main line loop forming a half hitch Repeat step 3 amp 4 to make a doublehalf hitch
step 5 To use the knot just pull down on the end line to put tension on the main line
step 6 after you have the main line snug tie a mid line double half hitch around the two lines forming the loop at the end of the main line with the end line
step 7 Tie a double half hitch with the end line around the end loop of the mid line half hitch of step 6 using the same method as used in steps 3 amp 4
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Image Notes1 the end of step 6
Image Notes1 main line2 end line3 step 1
Image Notes1 main line loop2 end line loop
Image Notes1 step 3
Image Notes1 step 4
Image Notes1 step 4 at the end with a double half hitch on the main loop
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Image Notes1 pull here2 step 5
Image Notes1 the start of step 6
Image Notes1 the end of step 6
Image Notes1 step 72 now the rest of the line is free to do more work
Related Instructables
Paracord KnotDisplay Bord byJamie bagn
ChokelessAdjustableParacord DogLeash byPizzaman101
ParacordLadder wWooden Rungsby josestude
tie a paracordshackle grip byitri45
ParacordPrussik Belt byJavaNut13
TiteTie is theTruckers Knoton Steroids bytitetie
ID Lanyard(Photos) byeschmunk
Dog Toys forHeavy Chewersby J3443RY
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Figure 8 knot and double 8 knotby jonathan111 on November 28 2007
Intro Figure 8 knot and double 8 knotI will show you how to tie a figure 8 knot and a figure 8 follow through
Step 1 Stating the knotThis is a simple knot so just follow the pictures
Step 2 Finishing the knotCross the string under and then push it through the hole Pull tightly unless you are going to do the follow through and leave it somewhat loose
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 3 The follow through knotThe follow through knot should be tied around something brought back and followed through the path of the 8 knot Look at the pictures Basically follow through the 8knot backwards
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Related Instructables
Climb Safe WithA Figure 8Knot by mattste A pocket full of
knots byKiteman
How to Tie aFigure EightKnot byTactical_Pyro
Paracord KnotDisplay Bord byJamie bagn
Cross KnotParacordLanyard byStormdrane
How to Tie aFire-escapeKnot by leonardoismael
Truckers HitchTHE mostawesome knoton the planetby schneidp20
Paracord ZipperPuller byrepeet13
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Truckers Hitch THE most awesome knot on the planetby schneidp20 on October 12 2008
Authorschneidp20I like building stuff Trouble is there just isnt enough time to build everything Sigh
Intro Truckers Hitch THE most awesome knot on the planetYes I know that there are plenty of other cool knots out there many of which I literally couldnt live wo I rock climb However this knot is unlike any other Plus Ineeded a grabber for my Instructable -) (BTW this ISNT a climbing knot) And in truth it isnt a knot by itself but rather a system of common knots
Have you ever tried to tie something down for transporting but just couldnt get the lines tight andor during transport the lines would continually loosen Then this is theknot for you I learned this knot back in the 70s when specialty car racks and ratchet straps were rare or unheard of I initially used it to tie a canoe on a car rack bothattaching to the rack as well as the lines to the bow and stern of the canoe Even with all the new gizmos available today this knot still shines because all you need is arope and ropes dont hum in the wind like straps
The unique aspect of this knot is that it gives you a 2-1 mechanical advantage when tightening the rope Be careful though You can actually damage some thingsbecause of the mechanical advantage This knot holds fast and is easy to untie hallmark traits of any good knot
Below you see the finished knot system well break it apart in the steps that follow
Image Notes1 1st anchor point a bowline2 loop3 securing knots 2 half hitches4 securing loose end with a fishermans knot5 2nd anchor point (should be round)
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Image Notes1 X marks the spot
Step 1 Initial setupThe first step is to anchor one end of the rope and then loop the rope around a 2nd anchor point
For attaching to the 1st anchor point I chose bowline a close 2 on my list -) There are other instructables on that one so I wont bore you here
The 2nd anchor really should be round because it serves as a pulley in this block and tackle type knot Ive used it on sharp anchor points and it doesnt work as well
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 2 Creating a slip knotTie a slip knot somewhere between the two anchor points Correct placement of the slip knot takes some experience to judge it correctly Typically I place it too close tothe 2nd anchor point and end up with not enough room to work with If the knot ends up too far from 2nd anchor point you can extend the knot by enlarging the loop
Be sure you tie the slip knot as shown You may not be able to untie other knots
In this small example the slip knot is uncharacteristically close to the 1st anchor point
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 3 Tightening and securingThe loose end of the rope that went around the 2nd anchor point goes through the slip knot loop Pull the loose end to the desired tension and secure with two halfhitches
Note To allow better view of the knots the rope isnt really tightened in this example
Step 4 Securing loose endThe final knot is just to secure the loose end somehow I chose a fishermans knot to do this
To tie a fishermans knot the rope goes around twice and goes under the X created by the loops Pull the loose end to tighten Finally slide the knot to put tension onthe half hitches
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Image Notes1 X marks the spot
Step 5 FinishedThere you have it I guarantee that the first time you really use this knot (not just practice) you will be amazed at how well it works and youll wish you knew this knot along time ago You may even come over to my side and declare that is is THE most awesome knot on the planet -)
Enjoy and happy haulingDave
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Related Instructables
TiteTie is theTruckers Knoton Steroids bytitetie
Four knots tomake paracordinto a usefultool byerik_mccray
Modify yourbike rack tocarry a sunfishor other boat byewilhelm
SurfboardHammock byGermy
GiganticHalloweenSpider Web bynolte919
How To Tie ASpiders Hitch(video) by back-cast
Three-hitch mathair ornamentby michiexile TRX from
ParacordChallengeAccepted bythrake
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Carry any Bottle with a JUG KNOT Handleby hpstoutharrow on September 17 2009
Intro Carry any Bottle with a JUG KNOT HandleTie a JUG KNOT around a water bottle soda bottle or aluminum bottle to make a secure carrying strap
Re-purpose any container into a reusable water bottle by adding a convenient carrying strap This Instructable will demonstrate how to tie a JUG knot which like its namesuggests is meant to properly secure around the neck of a container
With some cord and the knowledge of this knot you will be able add a handle lanyard or carabiner loop to any of your favorite beverages to carry them on the go
It works perfectly for those disposable water bottles and who knows once you add some colorful cord to the plain old clear water bottle you just might beinclined to refill it and use it again(Check out pictures 4amp5 below)
In addition to plastic beverage bottles like pop water and sports drinks you can turn those rugged aluminum beer bottles into a backpacking canteen
Those of you familiar with my previous aluminum bottle InstructablesROLLED RIM METAL TUMBLERhttpwwwinstructablescomidAluminum-Bottle-Tumbler-Cup-Cook-PotALUMINUM BOTTLE LIGHTWEIGHT ALCOHOL STOVEhttpwwwinstructablescomidAluminum-Bottle-Alcohol-Stovewill recognize the water canteen shown below as a re-purposed aluminum beer bottle Here I have added a painted surface treatment to turn it into a proper lookingwater bottle More on that in steps 13 14 15
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 1 Getting StartedCord size is important Select a small medium weight cord like the one shown here It is a general purpose camp cord sold at most sporting goods stores (shoelacesmight also work)
Do not use a heavy cord or rope because the larger diameter will not tuck under the relatively small lip at the top of the bottleneck and the bottle will fall out
Also the smaller cord cinches tight on itself and will not loosen accidentally
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 2 Form a BightThe next steps show how to tie a JUG KNOT It is the basic step for adding a carrying strap It is also the anchor point for any additional fancy bottle trussing you maywant to add
JUG KNOT Step 1
Form a Bight in the center of a length of cord Bight is a knot term for a loop or bend in the rope In this case the main Bight in this knot is highlighted with a white mark Imakes it easier to follow its path in these steps
The running ends of the cord should be equal length
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 3 Pull the Bight downPULL the Bight DOWN forming two Loops
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 4 Cross the LoopsCROSS the right Loop OVER the left Loop
Step 5 Pass the Bight under the 1st loopTake the main Bight and pass it UNDER the left Loop
Step 6 Weave the BightWEAVE the Bight OVER the portion of the right Loop and UNDER the portion of the left Loop
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 7 Extend the BightExtend the Bight OVER the outer portion of the right Loop
Step 8 Flip the Right Loop behindAdditional colored identification points have been added to the loops to follow their travel in these next two steps
The right Loop Yellow marker is FLIPPED BEHIND the knot and ends up on the far left side of the knot
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 9 Flip the 2nd loop in frontRaise the green marker (located on what was formerly the left loop) and pull it down and to the right FLIPPING IT IN FRONT of the knot
Note the blue portion of the this loop will pass around the outside of the yellow portion of the first loop
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Image Notes1 Center of knot that will tighten around the bottles neck
Step 10 Remove SlackNote where the blue green amp yellow markers end up
Start to remove the slack in the loops by pulling the original main Bight (white marker top right) and the two free standing ends at the bottom
the bottle neck will pass through the very center of the knot
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Image Notes1 Center of knot that will tighten around the bottles neck
Step 11 Tighten the KnotAfter removing the slack insert the bottle neck and finish tightening
The knot should look like this before slipping it over the bottle
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 12 Secure on bottle neckThis is the finished knot shown on the neck of various containers
The loop end and the two free standing ends can be tied together to create a carrying handle (last picture below)
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 13 Aluminum Bottle Water Bottle
The next few steps show the features of an aluminum beer bottle re-purposed as a water bottle canteen It is one of many containers that can be reused as a camp waterbottle
The bottle was lightly sanded masked and then pained with a hammered finished paint to create an interesting surface texture
Image Notes1 Textured finish paint makes an interesting grip-able surface2 Masked with tape for painting3 Masked with tape for painting
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Image Notes1 Dowel used for holding the bottle during painting
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 14 Tethered Cork StopperUse a wine bottle man made Cork as a stopper for your aluminum water bottleNote Use a cork that was removed from the wine bottle without the corkscrew penetrating through the bottom end of the cork (A hole all the way through the cork willcause it to leak) Use the unpierced end of the cork inside the water bottle
Drill a hole through the sides of the Cork Thread the cord through the hole to the center of the cord Use the cork as the main Bight and tie the Jug knot as shown inthe beginning steps
Now the cork is tethered to the bottle and will not get lost or fall on the ground
A Carabiner clip passes through the other cord end to attache the water bottle to you belt or pack
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 15 Trussed for TransportThis is another hanging method for carrying your aluminum bottle water canteen A Jug knot is tied conventionally around the neck
The running ends of the knot however are pulled down towards the bottom of the bottle A Barrel Knot is tied about 34 the way down the side of the bottle A squareknot is tied on the bottom of the knot to keep the two running ends tight against the sides of the bottle
I like the look of the accent colored cord running down the sides of the bottle and the fact that the bottle hangs from the belt upside down It adds to its uniqueness
The last picture shows another truss variation
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 16 AdvancedBelow is a bottle with some additional trussing You can be creative as you want It all starts with a re-purposed container and the Jug Knot (and enough cord)
Related Instructables
AluminumBottle TumblerCup amp Cook Potfor an AlcoholStove byhpstoutharrow
Water BottleBelt Clip byuglymike Duct Tape
Water Bottle byrabidsquire2
AluminumBottle AlcoholStove byhpstoutharrow
DIYGlass WaterBottle byCulturespy
Solar WaterHeater forBackpackingUsing WaterBottles and aCar Shade bykopomeroy
Duct tape waterbottle holder(Photos) by pinkmarshmallow
How to make aCamelPack withan old plasticbottle bywillrandship
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Basic Knots Guideby zorro3355 on April 29 2008
Intro Basic Knots Guidehi
Step 1 Thumb knotThe most simple knotUsed as a stopper and prevent ropes from fraying
Step 2 Reef KnotUsed to tie two ropes of equal thickness togetherIt is pretty easy to tie and untie but under tentionit may be diffcult to untieIt is also not sutible for smoothropes(egnylon ropes)
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 3 Figure of eightused as a stopperprevent ropes from fraying and its more secure than tumb knot its is also used to tie Caribinas to ropes and is often used in rock climbing
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 4 Timber hitchused for pulling logs
Step 5 Clove hitchUsed to tie a rope onto a pole or logThe pole must be roundThe pole lust be thicker then the rope itself
(greatly used during pioneering)
Step 6 Sheet bandused to tie ropes of different thickness together(works on same thickness of ropes too)
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 7 Sheep shankTo shorten RopesTo prevent middle fraying
Step 8 Slip knotWhippingUsed as a grip for pulling things(when tied on a stick or small pole)(marlin spike hitch)
Related Instructables
Rope Rings byhpstoutharrow
How to Tie aFigure EightKnot byTactical_Pyro
Whippin (WestCountry Style)by tim_n
SurvivalBracelet(Updated) bytevers94
HangmansNoose PackClosure byPopEye42
Turkey on aTripod byhpstoutharrow
SurvivalBracelet II bytevers94 Zigzag Spooling
Paracord (video)by Stormdrane
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
How to Tie a Fire-escape Knotby leonardo ismael on October 16 2007
Intro How to Tie a Fire-escape KnotThis knot is used by firemen in case of fires for example imagine a scene where the ladder on the firetruck messes up but people need to get down a five story buildingor more All they have is a long piece of rope they can safely get down with a secure knot like the fire-escape knot So why not learn it its easy to do and hard to untieif you tie it tightly
This is from the American Boys Handbook
Step 1 Get Your RopeFirst grab a piece of rope and bend it like this to make a loop in it Follow every step to the smallest detail
Step 2 Twist the RopeNow make a twist like this and hold it together
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 3 Pull Through the TwistPull the loop through the twist you just made from underneath
Step 4 Go Over the Split EndNow pull the tail through the loop
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 5 FinallyAnd finally just pull it through as pictured below
Congratulations you just learned the fire-escape knot
Step 6 Same Name Not KnotThis is another knot called the fire-escape knot this shouldnt be your result
Related Instructables
House FireEscape Plan(video) byWhatHappensNowAdvice
ParacordLadder wWooden Rungsby josestude
Bed SheetEscape Rope byjessehensel
rope ladder(glow-in-the-dark version) bymikeasaurus
HeadlockEscape 2(video) byjohnnyrockstah
QuickFirestarter byMattandJora
Trail sauna byjakee117
How to Kill FireAnts andCommitGenocide byKentsOkay
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Climb Safe With A Figure 8 Knotby mattste on February 23 2010
Intro Climb Safe With A Figure 8 Knot There are many things that a beginning climber needs to know including several important knots Perhaps the most essential knot is the Figure 8 Follow Through Thistutorial will demonstrate how to correctly harness yourself to a rope using a Figure 8 Follow Through knot This knot is used primarily by rock climbers to provide a life-line Since this knot is used as a life-line it is very important to be able to tie it correctly (Your life could depend upon it)
Dont worry with this tutorial and about 5 minutes of practice you can have this knot mastered
Things you will need
- Climbing Harness- Climbing Rope
If you are wanting to go climbing and dont already have these items they can be purchased for about $25 each at most outdoor sporting goods stores If you are merelylooking to learn the knot a belt loop and a rope (about five feet long) will do
Image Notes1 Climbing Harness2 Climbing Rope
Step 1 Dealing With The RopeThroughout this tutorial I will be discussing different parts of the rope To make these instructions as clear as possible I will define a few terms that I will use throughoutthe tutorial The Anchor End of the rope will generally be at the top of the images This is the end that would be anchored to the wall or rock and does not move Wewill not be doing much with the anchored end The Tail End of the rope is the opposite end that we will be dealing with I will call this the tail for short
Now that we have some terms to work with lets get started
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 2 Tying The First Figure 8This knot has several parts to it The first part of the knot is just tying a basic figure 8 To tie the first figure 8 there are four simple steps
1 - Using the tail make a loop over the rope (as shown in the first picture) keeping in mind that there should be about 3 ft of slack on the tail end
2 - Wrap the tail back this time go under the anchored end (As shown in the second picture)
3 - Bring the tail down through the first loop (As shown in the third picture)
4 - Finally pull the two ends to make the knot a little bit tighter and easier to deal with (Shown in the fourth picture)
After these four steps you should end up with a knot that resembles a figure 8
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 3 Looping Into The Harness In order to secure the rope to the harness simply thread the tail end of the rope through the front loop in the harness as shown in the picture below This step isobviously very important
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 4 Following Back Through The Figure 8After looping the rope through the harness you have to thread the tail end of the rope back through the knot following the first figure 8 I have divided this process intofive smaller steps in order to make it more clear
1 - Coming form underneath the knot bring the tail up through the near loop and to the left behind the anchored end of the rope (Shown in the first picture)
2 - Wrap the tail around the anchored end back to the right and down through the adjacent loop (Shown in the second picture)
3 - You simply need to bring the tail back over the top of the knot to the left (Shown in the third picture)
4 - Bring the tail end up through the far loop following the anchored end (Shown in the fourth picture)
5 - Finally pull the knot tight (Shown in the fifth picture)
As you can see the first four pictures are simply tracing the knot back through with the tail end
For the last part while you pull the knot tight you may want to make small adjustments and rearrange how it all fits together If the knot does not lay perfectly smoothand tight its NOT a big deal
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 5 Finishing The Knot After completing the Figure 8 knot you will want to somehow secure the tail end of the rope out of the way There are a couple different ways to do this the way that Iwill demonstrate is using whats called a Stopper Knot This secondary knot is similar to a Fishermans knot and is pretty simple I have once again divided thisprocess into several smaller steps
1 - Start by wrapping the tail end around the anchored end (As shown in the first picture)
2 - Wrap the tail back underneath the two vertical segments (As shown in the second picture)
3 - Simply repeat the first two steps wrapping the tail around again (As shown in the third picture)
4 - This step in the fourth picture may look complicated but all you need to do is insert the tail up through the two loops that you have just made
5 - To finish off the knot you will want to slowly pull the tail end while gently pushing the bottom of the stopper knot upwards If you have successfully completed this knotit should look something like the fifth picture
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 6 Ready To Climb Now that you have mastered the Figure 8 knot you can securely harness yourself into a climbing rope Remember there are many other skills that go into setting up ananchor and belaying a climber This tutorial only covers the figure 8 knot For more information there are many great websites that demonstrate how to correctly set up asafe climbing system (Ive posted a few below) If you are a beginning climber I recommend that you read up on a few other climbing techniques Also you shouldprobably go to a climbing wall or gym where there are experienced climbers that can show you the ropes Hopefully this tutorial has been helpful Have fun and be safe
Some useful linkshttpwwwstephenprattnetAnchorsanchorshtmhttpwwwuoregonedu~oppclimbingtopicsanchorshtmlhttpwwwabc-of-rockclimbingcomhowtoclimbingtechniquesasp
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Related Instructables
How to Tie aFigure EightKnot byTactical_Pyro
Paracord KnotDisplay Bord byJamie bagn
Basic KnotsGuide byzorro3355
How to Climb aTree (withprussiks) bystasterisk
How to climb atree (using onlyrope) thefunsimple wayby louieaw
How to get arope into a tree(withoutclimbing it) byvitex
How to tievarious knots byadaviel
How to make arope swing byjdub0928
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Turks Head Knots on a Bottleby sklnxbones on July 6 2010
Intro Turks Head Knots on a BottleThis is the finished project A bottle decorated with three Turks Head Knots There are only three knots on this bottle The RED and the BLUE knots are each a 20 Bightby 3 Lead Turks Head Knots The WHITE knot is a 20 Bight by 19 Lead Turks Head Knot
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 1 Supplies
Cord Lots and Lots of cord I cant tell you how much each bottle is differentBottle Washed and Dried inside and out Make sure to remove all water spotsThreaded Needle Cord screws into the threads at the base of the needlePegs I use brass rivets used as a map to tie the Turks Head KnotsHole Punch Used to punch holes in the painters tape to hold the pegsPainters Tape To hold the pegs in place and to make your map for the Turks Head KnotsMarker To write on the painters tapeCloth Towel To remove finger prints and dirt from your bottleKrazy Glue or Super Glue This is used to secure the knots in place to the bottle
OPTIONAL BUT HIGHLY RECOMMENDEDI use the Turks Head Cookbook from KnotToolcom
Step 2 PreparationYou will need to find a bottle you like I used an empty instant tea bottle of course washed and dried (I like to put the bottle in the oven for a few minutes to dry the insidewithout water spots Take off the lid and do not put lid in the oven) Now measure the circumference of the bottle Take a cord and tightly wrap the cord around the bottleMark where the ends meet and use a ruler to measure the length of the cord For my instant tea bottle the circumference is 27cm I know from past knots that I have tiedthat I want my knot to have 20 Bights in the top and bottom (bands) knots I am going to use the Bights in the (bands) knots to tie the middle knot Now divide the numberof Bights (20) into the size of the circumference (27) to get the space between each Bight (135) With me so far
Now take two pieces of painters tape using a ruler measure out the length of the circumference and mark the length on the both pieces of tape Next you will mark thespace between each Bight on the tape
Step 3 Adding the PegsI like to use pegs when tying Turks Head Knots it just makes tying the knot easier
These are what I use for pegs
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 4 Adding Pegs to the TapeNow take a hole punch to cut holes in the tape where the lines meet You will place the pegs in the holes
Insert a peg in each hole and carefully stick the first piece of tape to the bottle
Step 5 Adding the 2nd row of pegsNow do the same thing with the second piece of tape The numbers on each piece of tape must line up
This picture shows you what you should have now This odd looking thing will be your map to tie the Turks Head Knot And this is the end of Step 1
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 6 Tying the first Turks Head KnotUsing the Turks Head Cookbook follow the numbers going over and under as indicated in the book I chose a 20 Bight by 3 Lead knot which will give me a nice bandaround the bottle Once the ends meet you have made one complete knot Tape the running end of your cord and start removing the pegs and the tape
Step 7 Remove the pegs and the tapeBe careful not to untie the knot as you remove the pegs and tape from the bottle Continue to remove all the pegs and remove the tape from the bottle At this point theknot will be very loose and will need to be tightened up
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 8 Remove the slack from the knotHere you can see just how much the knot expanded Starting with the standing end begin to pull the slack out of the knot going towards the running end of the cordDo not expect to pull all the slack out at once You may have to make 3 - 5 attempts at removing the slack out of the knot DO NOT remove all of the slack out of the knotIn order to make the bands we will have to triple the Turks Head Knot We will do this by following the knot three times The threaded needle will really come in handyhere
Step 9 Triple the KnotOnce you have made three passes of the Turks Head Knot use your needle to go under your knot about half the circumference and cut the cord The knot will be tightenough to hide the tail in placeTIP I carefully add a couple of drops of super glue UNDER the band to hold them in place and keep them from sliding around in the nextsteps A drop or two in 3 or 4 places around the band should be enough
Step 10 Add the second knotNow repeat this whole step for the second bandWhen tying the second band you must make sure the Bights line up to the first band This is crucial for the next stepWipe down the bottle to make sure all your finger prints and adhesive from the tape are all removed You want to make sure your bottle is clean at this point Any dirt orfinger prints left on the bottle will be almost impossible to remove From this point on we will use gloves when tying our last knot
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 11 Maping the Top KnotStick a piece of painters tape on top of your first band leaving the bottom of the knot exposedUse a marker to count the number of Bights in your knot Instead of using the pegs we are going to use the Bights to tie our next Turks Head Knot
Step 12 Mapping the Bottom KnotDo the same thing for the bottom band but you must make sure your numbers on top and bottom line up So 1 on top should be the same position as 1 on the bottom
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 13 Adding the last knotAgain using the Turks Head Cookbook and the threaded needle you are going to follow the instructions going over and under as indicated in the book Be sure to usegloves when ever you handle the bottle
Step 14 Thats ItFor this Turks Head Knot I am using a 20 Bight by 19 Lead knot
Because of the amount of cord you are working with your cord will get twisted and knotted You will have to un-twist the cord often Its a pain in the rear but it has to bedone And it has to be done alot
Continue to tie the knot until you finish the knot If you have the cord and the patience you can double or triple the knot When you are done use your needle to hide theends under your bands Cut the ends and your DONE
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Related Instructables
Monkeys FistFloatingKeychain byjokerlz
How To Make ATurks headKnot WithParacord byDoggie Stylish
Tying Trivetsout of Rope forHoliday Gifts bykylemarsh
Paracord KnotDisplay Bord byJamie bagn
How to Make ATurks Head(Photos) bymchs60chip
A pocket full ofknots byKiteman
Monkeys fistknot AND themonkey byjonathan111
TiteTie is theTruckers Knoton Steroids bytitetie
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Larks head noose -- an easy useful knot that tightens and loosensby Larry Breed on February 19 2009
Intro Larks head noose -- an easy useful knot that tightens and loosensI thought I knew all the basic knots but then I was taught this incredibly useful simple knot Its good for tying up the neck of a bag that you want to repeatedly open andsecurely close Its good for tying around a springy bundle that will need tightening and retightening And its easy to undo
Ive looked at knot literature but havent found a name for this so I named it The basic knot is well known its called a larks head Since all Ive done is to slip the twoends through the larks head to make a noose I call it that
WARNING Dont use this knot when human safety would depend on it Climbers and mountaineers have well-tested reliable knots for such situations
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Image Notes1 To tighten further step on this side of the larks head and pull the free ends
Step 1 Double the cord overThe larks head noose requires enough cord to go twice around your bundle plus a foot or two Find the center and double it over Sailors call this a bight
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 2 Form the larks headComing from below the bight hook your thumb and forefinger over the two sides Reach outward and downward and pinch your fingertips together underneath thedoubled cord
Youve made a larks head Move the crossing cord a little farther from your hand so theres a clear opening through the two half-loops
Step 3 Form the nooseSlip the two ends of the cord through the opening we were just talking about Pull the larks head tight so it grips the two cords Find something that needs constrictingand put the noose around it
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 4 Tightening retightening and lockingSlide the knot against the bundle If its not tight enough to keep from slipping tighten it by holding it in one hand and tugging on the cords one at a time with the otherhand Notice that you can slide the knot out again for instance to re-open the bag you just tied shut For some applications this may be as tight as you need it
A springy bundle probably still feels loose If so compress the bundle and get a new grip on the cords Rest your foot on the bundle on the cords nearest the larks headand pull to slide the larks head tighter
To make the knot more permanent you can lock it Make an overhand in the cord ends (Exactly like the first step in tying shoelaces) With your foot still on the bundlepull on the cords and move your hands apart until youre pulling in opposite directions You have just locked the larks head and you can trust it to stay that way()
But lets say that later on you want to loosen the locked knot Again put your foot on the bundle and cords nearest the larks head hold the two cord ends together andpull This makes a little slack between the overhand and the larks head so you can untie the overhand
In twine or small string the locking overhand knot may be difficult to undo Use a shoelace knot instead of an overhand and itll unlock easily
() If youre using slippery cord like polypropylene an overhand may not lock securely You may want to tie another overhand knot For added security wrap a shortlength of duct tape around the two cords close to the knot
Image Notes1 To tighten further step on this side of the larks head and pull the free ends
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Related Instructables
TRX fromParacordChallengeAccepted bythrake
A pocket full ofknots byKiteman
Lens CapLanyard by~teknoarsonist~ how to tie a
noose byawesume
AdjustableParacordGlassesLanyard byjdtwelve12
HangmansNoose PackClosure byPopEye42
Paraleash - ADog LeashFrom Paracordby The Ideanator
How to make arugged andhandy ParacordBelt by Jake22
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 8 Step 8
Now you will add your attachment like the swivel snap hook shown putting both strands through the swivel eye to begin tying the snake knot
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 9 Step 9Bring the right strand under the cords then up over them as shown
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 10 Step 10Now take the left strand over across the other strands back behind and under the cords and up through the right strand loop as shown Then tighten
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 11 Step 11
Take the right strand under and behind the cords then bring it back through the tightened knot along side itself as shown and tighten This is where hemostats come inhandy with tying this knot working the cord through the previously tightened part of the knot It can be done without hemostats but requires tighteningloosening of theknots with just your fingertips
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 12 Step 12
Turn the lanyard over so the other side of the knot is facing up The working strand now on the right side will be brought under the cords back up and down through theparallel strands of the knot as shown then tighten And continue this process flipping the lanyard over taking the right strand under and back up around and through theparallel cords and tighten Continue until you run out of cord or reach the cross knot
Youll now trim off any excess cord and quick melt the end of the strands to prevent fraying to finish
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 13 Variations
You can use other two strand knots instead of the cross knot for variations on this style of lanyard A few alternatives to try tying in a spaced out series or combination ofthem Matthew Walker knot double wall knot lanyard knot double overhand knots double figure 8 knots etc The finishing knots around the attachment can also bedifferent as Ive used the lanyard knot sometimes just one or several in a row
You can also use variations of the cross knot with paracord bracelets and watchbands Doubled version of the knot shown as a paracord bracelet and alternating withtwo pairs of strands for the paracord watchband Leftover pieces of paracord can be used for zipper pulls key ring fobs even paracord cross pendants
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Related Instructables
Paracord ChainSinnet FastDeploy BoonieHatband (video)by Stormdrane
Zigzag SpoolingParacord (video)by Stormdrane
SurvivalBracelet(Updated) bytevers94
Celtic ButtonKnot (video) byStormdrane
ParacordBoonie HatWrap (video) byStormdrane
Paracord wristlanyard madewith the snakeknot byStormdrane
SurvivalBracelet II bytevers94
Cobra WeaveKey Fob bytevers94
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Paracord wrist lanyard made with the snake knotby Stormdrane on September 12 2007
AuthorStormdrane Stormdranes BlogNo matter where you go there you are
Intro Paracord wrist lanyard made with the snake knotThis instructable will show how to make a wrist lanyard using paracord and the snake knot The lanyard can be used to secure a key chain knife multi-tool flashlightcell phone camera binoculars compass etc More projects links knot references can be seen on my blog page Stormdranes Blog
Step 1 SuppliesYoull need about 45 feet of paracord(you may use other types of cordage if desired) The paracord I used is from the Supply Captain I left the inner strands in theparacord but you can remove them if preferred If done in one color it will be one continuous 45 ft length if done in two colors youll need 3 ft for the primary color thatincludes the wrist section and 15 ft for the second color that will show in the snake knot Also used are scissors tape measure or ruler lighter hemostats or needle nosepliers(not necessary but they make it much easier) and a swivel clip key ring snap hook cell phone lariat carabiner or whatever attachment you prefer to use
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 2 Attaching two colors of paracordIf using two colors of paracord you will insert one color about 12 inch into the other color You may remove a small amount of the paracords inner strands by pullingthem out trimming with scissors and pulling the paracord outer sheath back over the strands leaving room to insert the other color For various projects Ive used threedifferent methods for attaching two colors of paracord melting sewing or gluing The choice is yours I usually sew them together it doesnt matter as long as its a goodconnection It will be hidden under the first knot
Step 3 Find the center of the length of paracordTake the center of the length of cord and bring it thru the attachment Im using a swivel clip For this tutorial Im measuring the wrist loop at about 10 inches from theattachment The connection of the two colors will be just on the other side at this point
Step 4 Making the snake knotThe snake knot will be made around the wrist loop section of paracord the loop strands being the core of the knot Ive added a series of photos showing the steps Iuse By using two colors youll see that I flip the lanyard over after making each knot so that Im working with the cord on the right side of the lanyard I bring it under allthe other cords working the hemostats under the previously tightened knot and pulling the cord back thru Then tightening up the knot keeping the cord from twisting andworking it up against the previous knot Again flipping the work over youll see two parallel cords of the same color which will be split with the cord on the right goingunder around and pulled thru with the hemostats then tightened up Continue this procedure until youve done about 10 snake knots(you can count them down eitherside
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 5 Count your knotsOnce you have 10 snake knots youre almost done Youll notice from the photos of both sides of the lanyard that one side has the snake knots alternating all the waydown and the other has a set of parallel knots at the top and botton of the sequence of knots Youll always have those at the start and finish of the snake knots I preferto have them end up on the same side of the lanyard so one side appears to have a more uniform look but its not required
Step 6 Trim and melt the excess paracordUse the scissors to trim off the excess cord and quickly melt the ends with a lighter so they dont fray
Step 7 Youre doneYou can make a range of variations using less or more cordknots Shorten the loop for a double ended key chain or make the loop longer for use as a neck lanyard aLanyard Break-Away Connector could be added for the safety conscious You can also add a wooden bead skull cord lock etc Visit my blog page for more knot relatedprojects links and resources Stormdranes Blog You can find ideas for other geargadgets to attach to your lanyard on EDC Forums
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Related Instructables
Paracord ChainSinnet FastDeploy BoonieHatband (video)by Stormdrane
Cross KnotParacordLanyard byStormdrane
Zigzag SpoolingParacord (video)by Stormdrane
SurvivalBracelet II bytevers94
SurvivalBracelet(Updated) bytevers94
Cobra WeaveKey Fob bytevers94
ParacordBoonie HatWrap (video) byStormdrane
Paracord KnotDisplay Bord byJamie bagn
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
How to tie various knotsby adaviel on September 7 2009
Intro How to tie various knotsKnots as a way of joining rope without special equipment are useful in many situations On a sailboat knots are essential both for daily use and for emergency repairsThis instructable describes several different common knots eg
Sheet Bend - to tie two lines togetherBowline - to make a loopReef Knot - to fasten a bundle of materialFishermans Bend - to secure a line to a post or ring
These knots are good for regular rope - braided or 3-strand polyester or natural fibre (hemp sisal) Monofilament (fishing line) or steel cable performs better with differentknots
Knots are typically quite a lot weaker than straight rope - when rope goes around a tight radius such as in a knot the outside is under more tension than the insideSplices (which require special tools and are time-consuming to make) are stronger so permanent fittings usually have eye-splices
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 1 Sheet BendThe sheet bend is used to tie two lines together It is perhaps the most generally useful knot of all When used to tie a line to itself making a loop it is called a bowlineThe strain is taken on the ropes in the middle - not the one coming out the side
How the knot is made is not critical - it is the final shape that is important One can make the flat loop first and work the other rope around it Or one can make thecrossed loop first - required when tying a bowline
The two images show front and back views of the same knot
AdvantagesEasy to makeEasy to undo when tension is removedDoes not easily capsize
DisadvantagesHard to make under loadDangerous to make under heavy load
UsesJoining two equally-sized ropesExtending a towline or stern line
Method 1 the same as a bowline
Method 2 starting with the flat loop
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 2 Double Sheet BendThe double sheet bend is used to tie two lines of different thickness - but not too different It is the same as a normal sheet bend but with an extra turn of the thinner ropearound the flat loop in the thickerThe load goes on the line through the flat loop not the one that comes out the side of the knot
UsesSecuring a heaving line to a tow lineExtending a stern line if you dont have enough line of one thickness
Step 3 BowlineThe bowline is really a special case of the sheet bend but it it tied at the end of a rope to make a loop
The photos show the completed loop and closeups of the front and back of the actual knot Note that it is the same as the sheet bend - but it must be made the right wayround This loop does not tighten in use The knot is quite easy to untie once the load is removed With practice it is very quick to tie
Some usesSecuring a dinghy line to a railing or stanchionSecuring an anchor line to an anchorTie a jib sheet to the sailTie a mooring line around a rock or treeTie a float to an anchor triplineUse one in each line to tie two ropes of very different sizes - eg a throwing line to a large tow ropeDisadvantages the knot must be completely made before it will take any strain - it is hard to tie if there is already a load on the rope
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Linked bowlines
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 4 Bowline on the BightA bowline on the bight is a bowline tied in a loop of rope (neither end is needed) The shape is the same as a bowline made with a double line but the middle of thebight forms the loop around the standing part
UsesAn impromptu bosuns chair - to sit in while being transferred between two boats at sea
Step 5 Clove HitchThe clove hitch can be made when you only have the bight (the middle) of a rope not the ends
UsesSecuring a burgee pole to a burgee halyard (a continuous loop of thin line)Securing a tiller from swinging
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 6 Round Turn and Two Half-HitchesThis is a knot used to secure a line to a ring or bar Wind a couple of turns around the bar then secure the end with two hitches around the standing part (this looks like aclove hitch when done)
AdvantagesCan be made under load - it is easy to take turns around the bar while maintaining tension on the ropeStrong - provided the bar is thicker than the rope the rope is not weakened by sharp bendsDisadvantagesThe end tends to work loose
UsesSecuring a line to a mooring ring or samson post
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 7 Fishermans BendThe fishermans bend is the same as the round turn and two half hitches except that the first hitch is looped under the round turn This uses the tension on the rope tosecure the end from working loose
AdvantagesSecure against working loose
DisadvantagesHard to make under tensionHard to undo under tensionMay seize up under load when wet making it hard to undo
UsesSecuring mooring line to ringSecuring fender lines to rail
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 8 Studsail BendThe studsail bend is like the fishermans bend but the second hitch is also secured under the round turn making it even more secure against working loose when undertension
AdvantagesVery secure against working looseDisadvantagesHard to make under tensionHard to undo under tension
Step 9 Figure-8 KnotThe figure-eight knot is used to prevent an end of rope from passing through a block (pulley) Sometimes called a stopper knot
The double figure-8 knot is used in rock climbing as an alternative to a bowline to secure a climbing harness to the end of a safety rope The double knot is made bymaking a single knot then tracing back around the knot with the free end after passing it around the harness loop
AdvantagesEasy to verify by inspectionNot prone to work loose
DisadvantagesSlow to make and undoCannot be made under load
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 10 Prussic KnotThe prussic knot may be used as a climbing ascender - when made around a vertical rope as shown downwards tension on the ends locks the knot while release oftension allows it to be slid up the rope A pair of prussic knots on foot loops may be used in tandem to climb a rope
UsesClimbing a ropeTaking up tension to free a riding turn on a winch
Step 11 Reef KnotThe reef knot or square knot is used to tie a bundle of material together It must be made around something - it should not be used to tie two free ropes togetherbecause it can easily capsizeIt should not be used to make a loop unless it can be tensioned around a solid object It should not be used around a person - use a bowline instead A capsized reefknot will slip easily and could constrict and cause severe injury
UsesReefing a sail (tying the unused portion around a spar)Securing a furled sail to a spar (sail ties)Wrapping a parcelTying shoelaces
AdvantagesMay be made under moderate load
DisadvantagesCapsizes (works free) if used improperlyCan seize up under load when wet
Tying the knot
Capsizing a reef knot
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 12 CleatsThis is not a knot but is very common on boatsThe first picture shows a rope cleated normally The second shows one with a final locking turn - the last turn is twisted before placing over the cleat so that the tensionon the rope helps secure the free end
When working with ropes under tension take a turn or two around a winch or cleat before trying to secure the end with a knot The load on the free end falls exponentiallywith each turn taken Severe injury can result if a finger or other body part is caught in a loop of rope or between a rope and another object
Step 13 Practice themIt is sometimes useful to be able to tie knots in the dark or as in this video behind your back
Related Instructables
AThird Hand forSailing or OtherThings by WadeTarzia
Paracord KnotDisplay Bord byJamie bagn
Trip LogOutriggerCanoe Sailingthe CaliforniaChannel Islandsby TimAnderson
How to Tie aFigure EightKnot byTactical_Pyro
How to build apirate ship bymdelaney3
Build a ShortDragon (16 foot3-BoardOutriggerSailing Canoe)by Wade Tarzia
repairing aheadsail by josh
How to get arope into a tree(withoutclimbing it) byvitex
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
How to Tie the Lanyard Knotby eddy14777 on January 31 2010
Intro How to Tie the Lanyard KnotMany people including myself have had trouble following the Stormdrane youtube video on tying the lanyard knot so i have done some research and found the solution
Image Notes1 Finished knot
Step 1 MaterialsAll you need is a reasonable length of para cord or whatever you wish to use
Image Notes1 One reasonable amount
Step 2 First StepThe first thing you are going to do is to make a bight that leaves you with to congruent endsThen you are going to put your ring finger through the bight
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Image Notes1 Close enough2 Bight
Step 3 Starting the KnotMake a loop just like the one in the picture and place it over the top strandBring the top strand under the bottom strand
Image Notes1 Notice the way the loop is done2 Top strand
Image Notes1 Bottom strand2 Top strand is under
Step 4 The Most Important PartNow you take the top stand from the previous picture and feed it over the first part of the loop under itself and back over the remainder of the loop
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Image Notes1 Under me2 Top strand3 This should make a diamond type shape
Step 5 DoublingNow take the bottom stand and take it around the part of the top strand nearest to the bight and than come up through the diamond shape in the middleDo the same for the top strand
Image Notes1 Top strand
Image Notes1 Both through the diamond
Step 6 FinishingWhen you take it off your finger it should look like thisWork out the slack by pulling on the bight and the two strands
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Image Notes1 Finished knot
Related Instructables
Cross KnotParacordLanyard byStormdrane
Celtic ButtonKnot (video) byStormdrane
Paracord wristlanyard madewith the snakeknot byStormdrane
Paracord ChainSinnet FastDeploy BoonieHatband (video)by Stormdrane
Zigzag SpoolingParacord (video)by Stormdrane
ParacordBoonie HatWrap (video) byStormdrane
Paracord IDbadge Lanyardby Flahusky
Cobra WeaveKey Fob bytevers94
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Four knots to make paracord into a useful toolby erik_mccray on March 27 2010
Authorerik_mccrayI am an ex-fabricator that is now a stay at home dad I love my new job but I do miss making stuff I love this site amp I am getting involved as a way to keep myskills upOn top of fad work I have also run two small business in the past One was custom sewing amp the other was as a small engine mechanicI have two votec degrees one in metal fabrication amp the other is in engine repairI look forward to getting to know everyone here
Intro Four knots to make paracord into a useful toolParacord is an awesome multitool used everywhere from the wild blue yonder to the deepest caverns But like any good tool it is only as good as the knowledge the userhas about the tool With most people out there using bungee cords amp ratchet straps it seems that paracord is being used for nothing more than friendship bracelets forgrown men This is a shame because for less then the price of a few cheap bungee cords amp some to short to be helpful straps You can get yourself hundreds of feet ofparacord
The key to getting the most out of the paracord is good knot work The first thing you need to know is what makes a good knot One is that the knot is easy amp quick to tieamp more impotant is that the knot is easy amp quick to untie The hitch class of knots is by far the best group of knots that the average person could know The four mostuseful hitch knots are the half hitch a quick simple knot that forms the base for many other knots the inline half hitch allowing you to get the most out of one length ofparacord the slippery hitch that gives you both on the fly control over tension on your paracord but also an adjustable loop that will not change unless you want it amp theinline truckers hitch instantly doubling the your pulling power
Step 1 To get started lets get some terminology that will be used defined
line= the paracord
Main line= the part of the paracord doing the work for example holding down your tarp or the long part of the paracord
Mid line= the middle of the length of the paracord
End line= the unused length of paracord or the short length of paracord
Step 2 The half hitch The half hitch is a simple way to secure a line to an anchor point like the tie down points in most trucks A half hitch is a constrictor knot meaning that the harder you pullon the line the tighter the knots grip gets Another common constrictor knot is the slip knot
Step 1 wrap your line around your anchor point Step 2 wrap the end line around the main line
Step 3 pass the end line threw the end line side of the newly formed loop
step 4 now take the slack out of the knot
step 5 to make sure the knot is secure tie another half hitch to the main line This knot is called adouble half hitch
step 6 another useful thing that can be done with the half hitch is that instead of repeating the wrap on the main line but repeating it on what you are tying to the half hitchcan be used to bind something like a stack of 2x4s
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Image Notes1 End line2 Main line3 step 1
Image Notes1 Step 2
Image Notes1 passing thew the end line side of the loop2 step 3
Image Notes1 step 5
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Image Notes1 step 6
Step 3 The mid line half hitch The mid line half hitch is for when the length of line is to long for the job at hand amp you dont want to have to cut the line to size or you are using multiple anchor pointswith one length of line
Step 1 double up the line at the point in the length you wish to make the knot
Step 2 wrap the doubled up portion of line around your anchor point The doubled up length is now now the end line
Step 3 now tie just as you did for the regular half hitch repeat the knot to make a double half hitch for security
Image Notes1 A mid line double half hitch
Image Notes1 step 1
Image Notes1 The end line2 step 2
Image Notes1 Step 3
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 4 The slippery hitch The slippery hitch is a great knot for adjusting tension on the main line or for having an adjustable fixed loop To adjust the knot simply slide the knot up or down the mainline
Step 1 wrap your line around the anchor point or just double over the line to form a loop
Step 2 wrap the end line around the main line three times Wrapping in the direction of the anchor point or loop
Step 3 put together the two lines making up the loop amp wrap the two lines one time with the end line
Step 4 pass the end line thew the last loop formed covering the two lined of the loop
Step 5 pull the knot tite
step 6 to adjust the size of the loop or main line tension grab the knot amp slide it up or down the main line
Image Notes1 grab just the knot its self to adjust it2 step 5
Image Notes1 step 1
Image Notes1 step 2
Image Notes1 step 3
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Image Notes1 step 4
Image Notes1 grab just the knot its self to adjust it2 step 5
Image Notes1 same knot as in last pic Just slid up2 step 6
Step 5 The mid line truchers hitch The truckers hitch is a great way to double the pulling force on a line There are many ways to tie this knot the problem with most of them is that at some point you aregoing to have to pass the end line through a loop on the main line that is acting like a pulley to double your pulling force this is great if you are making the knot close tothe end of your line but if you are using a 300 length of line amp want to make the knot in the first ten feet having to pass 290 of line thew a loop is a pain But with a fewhalf hitches you will not have to pass the end line threw any loop on the main line
step 1 wrap your line around the anchor point then double over your end line laying the top of the loop over the main line
Step 2 double up your main line amp lay the loop over the loop made by the end line
step 3 in main line above the knot twist in a loop
step 4 put main line loop thew the loop made in step 3 amp pull this loop tight over your main line loop forming a half hitch Repeat step 3 amp 4 to make a doublehalf hitch
step 5 To use the knot just pull down on the end line to put tension on the main line
step 6 after you have the main line snug tie a mid line double half hitch around the two lines forming the loop at the end of the main line with the end line
step 7 Tie a double half hitch with the end line around the end loop of the mid line half hitch of step 6 using the same method as used in steps 3 amp 4
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Image Notes1 the end of step 6
Image Notes1 main line2 end line3 step 1
Image Notes1 main line loop2 end line loop
Image Notes1 step 3
Image Notes1 step 4
Image Notes1 step 4 at the end with a double half hitch on the main loop
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Image Notes1 pull here2 step 5
Image Notes1 the start of step 6
Image Notes1 the end of step 6
Image Notes1 step 72 now the rest of the line is free to do more work
Related Instructables
Paracord KnotDisplay Bord byJamie bagn
ChokelessAdjustableParacord DogLeash byPizzaman101
ParacordLadder wWooden Rungsby josestude
tie a paracordshackle grip byitri45
ParacordPrussik Belt byJavaNut13
TiteTie is theTruckers Knoton Steroids bytitetie
ID Lanyard(Photos) byeschmunk
Dog Toys forHeavy Chewersby J3443RY
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Figure 8 knot and double 8 knotby jonathan111 on November 28 2007
Intro Figure 8 knot and double 8 knotI will show you how to tie a figure 8 knot and a figure 8 follow through
Step 1 Stating the knotThis is a simple knot so just follow the pictures
Step 2 Finishing the knotCross the string under and then push it through the hole Pull tightly unless you are going to do the follow through and leave it somewhat loose
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 3 The follow through knotThe follow through knot should be tied around something brought back and followed through the path of the 8 knot Look at the pictures Basically follow through the 8knot backwards
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Related Instructables
Climb Safe WithA Figure 8Knot by mattste A pocket full of
knots byKiteman
How to Tie aFigure EightKnot byTactical_Pyro
Paracord KnotDisplay Bord byJamie bagn
Cross KnotParacordLanyard byStormdrane
How to Tie aFire-escapeKnot by leonardoismael
Truckers HitchTHE mostawesome knoton the planetby schneidp20
Paracord ZipperPuller byrepeet13
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Truckers Hitch THE most awesome knot on the planetby schneidp20 on October 12 2008
Authorschneidp20I like building stuff Trouble is there just isnt enough time to build everything Sigh
Intro Truckers Hitch THE most awesome knot on the planetYes I know that there are plenty of other cool knots out there many of which I literally couldnt live wo I rock climb However this knot is unlike any other Plus Ineeded a grabber for my Instructable -) (BTW this ISNT a climbing knot) And in truth it isnt a knot by itself but rather a system of common knots
Have you ever tried to tie something down for transporting but just couldnt get the lines tight andor during transport the lines would continually loosen Then this is theknot for you I learned this knot back in the 70s when specialty car racks and ratchet straps were rare or unheard of I initially used it to tie a canoe on a car rack bothattaching to the rack as well as the lines to the bow and stern of the canoe Even with all the new gizmos available today this knot still shines because all you need is arope and ropes dont hum in the wind like straps
The unique aspect of this knot is that it gives you a 2-1 mechanical advantage when tightening the rope Be careful though You can actually damage some thingsbecause of the mechanical advantage This knot holds fast and is easy to untie hallmark traits of any good knot
Below you see the finished knot system well break it apart in the steps that follow
Image Notes1 1st anchor point a bowline2 loop3 securing knots 2 half hitches4 securing loose end with a fishermans knot5 2nd anchor point (should be round)
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Image Notes1 X marks the spot
Step 1 Initial setupThe first step is to anchor one end of the rope and then loop the rope around a 2nd anchor point
For attaching to the 1st anchor point I chose bowline a close 2 on my list -) There are other instructables on that one so I wont bore you here
The 2nd anchor really should be round because it serves as a pulley in this block and tackle type knot Ive used it on sharp anchor points and it doesnt work as well
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 2 Creating a slip knotTie a slip knot somewhere between the two anchor points Correct placement of the slip knot takes some experience to judge it correctly Typically I place it too close tothe 2nd anchor point and end up with not enough room to work with If the knot ends up too far from 2nd anchor point you can extend the knot by enlarging the loop
Be sure you tie the slip knot as shown You may not be able to untie other knots
In this small example the slip knot is uncharacteristically close to the 1st anchor point
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 3 Tightening and securingThe loose end of the rope that went around the 2nd anchor point goes through the slip knot loop Pull the loose end to the desired tension and secure with two halfhitches
Note To allow better view of the knots the rope isnt really tightened in this example
Step 4 Securing loose endThe final knot is just to secure the loose end somehow I chose a fishermans knot to do this
To tie a fishermans knot the rope goes around twice and goes under the X created by the loops Pull the loose end to tighten Finally slide the knot to put tension onthe half hitches
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Image Notes1 X marks the spot
Step 5 FinishedThere you have it I guarantee that the first time you really use this knot (not just practice) you will be amazed at how well it works and youll wish you knew this knot along time ago You may even come over to my side and declare that is is THE most awesome knot on the planet -)
Enjoy and happy haulingDave
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Related Instructables
TiteTie is theTruckers Knoton Steroids bytitetie
Four knots tomake paracordinto a usefultool byerik_mccray
Modify yourbike rack tocarry a sunfishor other boat byewilhelm
SurfboardHammock byGermy
GiganticHalloweenSpider Web bynolte919
How To Tie ASpiders Hitch(video) by back-cast
Three-hitch mathair ornamentby michiexile TRX from
ParacordChallengeAccepted bythrake
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Carry any Bottle with a JUG KNOT Handleby hpstoutharrow on September 17 2009
Intro Carry any Bottle with a JUG KNOT HandleTie a JUG KNOT around a water bottle soda bottle or aluminum bottle to make a secure carrying strap
Re-purpose any container into a reusable water bottle by adding a convenient carrying strap This Instructable will demonstrate how to tie a JUG knot which like its namesuggests is meant to properly secure around the neck of a container
With some cord and the knowledge of this knot you will be able add a handle lanyard or carabiner loop to any of your favorite beverages to carry them on the go
It works perfectly for those disposable water bottles and who knows once you add some colorful cord to the plain old clear water bottle you just might beinclined to refill it and use it again(Check out pictures 4amp5 below)
In addition to plastic beverage bottles like pop water and sports drinks you can turn those rugged aluminum beer bottles into a backpacking canteen
Those of you familiar with my previous aluminum bottle InstructablesROLLED RIM METAL TUMBLERhttpwwwinstructablescomidAluminum-Bottle-Tumbler-Cup-Cook-PotALUMINUM BOTTLE LIGHTWEIGHT ALCOHOL STOVEhttpwwwinstructablescomidAluminum-Bottle-Alcohol-Stovewill recognize the water canteen shown below as a re-purposed aluminum beer bottle Here I have added a painted surface treatment to turn it into a proper lookingwater bottle More on that in steps 13 14 15
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 1 Getting StartedCord size is important Select a small medium weight cord like the one shown here It is a general purpose camp cord sold at most sporting goods stores (shoelacesmight also work)
Do not use a heavy cord or rope because the larger diameter will not tuck under the relatively small lip at the top of the bottleneck and the bottle will fall out
Also the smaller cord cinches tight on itself and will not loosen accidentally
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 2 Form a BightThe next steps show how to tie a JUG KNOT It is the basic step for adding a carrying strap It is also the anchor point for any additional fancy bottle trussing you maywant to add
JUG KNOT Step 1
Form a Bight in the center of a length of cord Bight is a knot term for a loop or bend in the rope In this case the main Bight in this knot is highlighted with a white mark Imakes it easier to follow its path in these steps
The running ends of the cord should be equal length
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 3 Pull the Bight downPULL the Bight DOWN forming two Loops
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 4 Cross the LoopsCROSS the right Loop OVER the left Loop
Step 5 Pass the Bight under the 1st loopTake the main Bight and pass it UNDER the left Loop
Step 6 Weave the BightWEAVE the Bight OVER the portion of the right Loop and UNDER the portion of the left Loop
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 7 Extend the BightExtend the Bight OVER the outer portion of the right Loop
Step 8 Flip the Right Loop behindAdditional colored identification points have been added to the loops to follow their travel in these next two steps
The right Loop Yellow marker is FLIPPED BEHIND the knot and ends up on the far left side of the knot
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 9 Flip the 2nd loop in frontRaise the green marker (located on what was formerly the left loop) and pull it down and to the right FLIPPING IT IN FRONT of the knot
Note the blue portion of the this loop will pass around the outside of the yellow portion of the first loop
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Image Notes1 Center of knot that will tighten around the bottles neck
Step 10 Remove SlackNote where the blue green amp yellow markers end up
Start to remove the slack in the loops by pulling the original main Bight (white marker top right) and the two free standing ends at the bottom
the bottle neck will pass through the very center of the knot
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Image Notes1 Center of knot that will tighten around the bottles neck
Step 11 Tighten the KnotAfter removing the slack insert the bottle neck and finish tightening
The knot should look like this before slipping it over the bottle
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 12 Secure on bottle neckThis is the finished knot shown on the neck of various containers
The loop end and the two free standing ends can be tied together to create a carrying handle (last picture below)
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 13 Aluminum Bottle Water Bottle
The next few steps show the features of an aluminum beer bottle re-purposed as a water bottle canteen It is one of many containers that can be reused as a camp waterbottle
The bottle was lightly sanded masked and then pained with a hammered finished paint to create an interesting surface texture
Image Notes1 Textured finish paint makes an interesting grip-able surface2 Masked with tape for painting3 Masked with tape for painting
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Image Notes1 Dowel used for holding the bottle during painting
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 14 Tethered Cork StopperUse a wine bottle man made Cork as a stopper for your aluminum water bottleNote Use a cork that was removed from the wine bottle without the corkscrew penetrating through the bottom end of the cork (A hole all the way through the cork willcause it to leak) Use the unpierced end of the cork inside the water bottle
Drill a hole through the sides of the Cork Thread the cord through the hole to the center of the cord Use the cork as the main Bight and tie the Jug knot as shown inthe beginning steps
Now the cork is tethered to the bottle and will not get lost or fall on the ground
A Carabiner clip passes through the other cord end to attache the water bottle to you belt or pack
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 15 Trussed for TransportThis is another hanging method for carrying your aluminum bottle water canteen A Jug knot is tied conventionally around the neck
The running ends of the knot however are pulled down towards the bottom of the bottle A Barrel Knot is tied about 34 the way down the side of the bottle A squareknot is tied on the bottom of the knot to keep the two running ends tight against the sides of the bottle
I like the look of the accent colored cord running down the sides of the bottle and the fact that the bottle hangs from the belt upside down It adds to its uniqueness
The last picture shows another truss variation
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 16 AdvancedBelow is a bottle with some additional trussing You can be creative as you want It all starts with a re-purposed container and the Jug Knot (and enough cord)
Related Instructables
AluminumBottle TumblerCup amp Cook Potfor an AlcoholStove byhpstoutharrow
Water BottleBelt Clip byuglymike Duct Tape
Water Bottle byrabidsquire2
AluminumBottle AlcoholStove byhpstoutharrow
DIYGlass WaterBottle byCulturespy
Solar WaterHeater forBackpackingUsing WaterBottles and aCar Shade bykopomeroy
Duct tape waterbottle holder(Photos) by pinkmarshmallow
How to make aCamelPack withan old plasticbottle bywillrandship
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Basic Knots Guideby zorro3355 on April 29 2008
Intro Basic Knots Guidehi
Step 1 Thumb knotThe most simple knotUsed as a stopper and prevent ropes from fraying
Step 2 Reef KnotUsed to tie two ropes of equal thickness togetherIt is pretty easy to tie and untie but under tentionit may be diffcult to untieIt is also not sutible for smoothropes(egnylon ropes)
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 3 Figure of eightused as a stopperprevent ropes from fraying and its more secure than tumb knot its is also used to tie Caribinas to ropes and is often used in rock climbing
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 4 Timber hitchused for pulling logs
Step 5 Clove hitchUsed to tie a rope onto a pole or logThe pole must be roundThe pole lust be thicker then the rope itself
(greatly used during pioneering)
Step 6 Sheet bandused to tie ropes of different thickness together(works on same thickness of ropes too)
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 7 Sheep shankTo shorten RopesTo prevent middle fraying
Step 8 Slip knotWhippingUsed as a grip for pulling things(when tied on a stick or small pole)(marlin spike hitch)
Related Instructables
Rope Rings byhpstoutharrow
How to Tie aFigure EightKnot byTactical_Pyro
Whippin (WestCountry Style)by tim_n
SurvivalBracelet(Updated) bytevers94
HangmansNoose PackClosure byPopEye42
Turkey on aTripod byhpstoutharrow
SurvivalBracelet II bytevers94 Zigzag Spooling
Paracord (video)by Stormdrane
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
How to Tie a Fire-escape Knotby leonardo ismael on October 16 2007
Intro How to Tie a Fire-escape KnotThis knot is used by firemen in case of fires for example imagine a scene where the ladder on the firetruck messes up but people need to get down a five story buildingor more All they have is a long piece of rope they can safely get down with a secure knot like the fire-escape knot So why not learn it its easy to do and hard to untieif you tie it tightly
This is from the American Boys Handbook
Step 1 Get Your RopeFirst grab a piece of rope and bend it like this to make a loop in it Follow every step to the smallest detail
Step 2 Twist the RopeNow make a twist like this and hold it together
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 3 Pull Through the TwistPull the loop through the twist you just made from underneath
Step 4 Go Over the Split EndNow pull the tail through the loop
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 5 FinallyAnd finally just pull it through as pictured below
Congratulations you just learned the fire-escape knot
Step 6 Same Name Not KnotThis is another knot called the fire-escape knot this shouldnt be your result
Related Instructables
House FireEscape Plan(video) byWhatHappensNowAdvice
ParacordLadder wWooden Rungsby josestude
Bed SheetEscape Rope byjessehensel
rope ladder(glow-in-the-dark version) bymikeasaurus
HeadlockEscape 2(video) byjohnnyrockstah
QuickFirestarter byMattandJora
Trail sauna byjakee117
How to Kill FireAnts andCommitGenocide byKentsOkay
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Climb Safe With A Figure 8 Knotby mattste on February 23 2010
Intro Climb Safe With A Figure 8 Knot There are many things that a beginning climber needs to know including several important knots Perhaps the most essential knot is the Figure 8 Follow Through Thistutorial will demonstrate how to correctly harness yourself to a rope using a Figure 8 Follow Through knot This knot is used primarily by rock climbers to provide a life-line Since this knot is used as a life-line it is very important to be able to tie it correctly (Your life could depend upon it)
Dont worry with this tutorial and about 5 minutes of practice you can have this knot mastered
Things you will need
- Climbing Harness- Climbing Rope
If you are wanting to go climbing and dont already have these items they can be purchased for about $25 each at most outdoor sporting goods stores If you are merelylooking to learn the knot a belt loop and a rope (about five feet long) will do
Image Notes1 Climbing Harness2 Climbing Rope
Step 1 Dealing With The RopeThroughout this tutorial I will be discussing different parts of the rope To make these instructions as clear as possible I will define a few terms that I will use throughoutthe tutorial The Anchor End of the rope will generally be at the top of the images This is the end that would be anchored to the wall or rock and does not move Wewill not be doing much with the anchored end The Tail End of the rope is the opposite end that we will be dealing with I will call this the tail for short
Now that we have some terms to work with lets get started
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 2 Tying The First Figure 8This knot has several parts to it The first part of the knot is just tying a basic figure 8 To tie the first figure 8 there are four simple steps
1 - Using the tail make a loop over the rope (as shown in the first picture) keeping in mind that there should be about 3 ft of slack on the tail end
2 - Wrap the tail back this time go under the anchored end (As shown in the second picture)
3 - Bring the tail down through the first loop (As shown in the third picture)
4 - Finally pull the two ends to make the knot a little bit tighter and easier to deal with (Shown in the fourth picture)
After these four steps you should end up with a knot that resembles a figure 8
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 3 Looping Into The Harness In order to secure the rope to the harness simply thread the tail end of the rope through the front loop in the harness as shown in the picture below This step isobviously very important
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 4 Following Back Through The Figure 8After looping the rope through the harness you have to thread the tail end of the rope back through the knot following the first figure 8 I have divided this process intofive smaller steps in order to make it more clear
1 - Coming form underneath the knot bring the tail up through the near loop and to the left behind the anchored end of the rope (Shown in the first picture)
2 - Wrap the tail around the anchored end back to the right and down through the adjacent loop (Shown in the second picture)
3 - You simply need to bring the tail back over the top of the knot to the left (Shown in the third picture)
4 - Bring the tail end up through the far loop following the anchored end (Shown in the fourth picture)
5 - Finally pull the knot tight (Shown in the fifth picture)
As you can see the first four pictures are simply tracing the knot back through with the tail end
For the last part while you pull the knot tight you may want to make small adjustments and rearrange how it all fits together If the knot does not lay perfectly smoothand tight its NOT a big deal
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 5 Finishing The Knot After completing the Figure 8 knot you will want to somehow secure the tail end of the rope out of the way There are a couple different ways to do this the way that Iwill demonstrate is using whats called a Stopper Knot This secondary knot is similar to a Fishermans knot and is pretty simple I have once again divided thisprocess into several smaller steps
1 - Start by wrapping the tail end around the anchored end (As shown in the first picture)
2 - Wrap the tail back underneath the two vertical segments (As shown in the second picture)
3 - Simply repeat the first two steps wrapping the tail around again (As shown in the third picture)
4 - This step in the fourth picture may look complicated but all you need to do is insert the tail up through the two loops that you have just made
5 - To finish off the knot you will want to slowly pull the tail end while gently pushing the bottom of the stopper knot upwards If you have successfully completed this knotit should look something like the fifth picture
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 6 Ready To Climb Now that you have mastered the Figure 8 knot you can securely harness yourself into a climbing rope Remember there are many other skills that go into setting up ananchor and belaying a climber This tutorial only covers the figure 8 knot For more information there are many great websites that demonstrate how to correctly set up asafe climbing system (Ive posted a few below) If you are a beginning climber I recommend that you read up on a few other climbing techniques Also you shouldprobably go to a climbing wall or gym where there are experienced climbers that can show you the ropes Hopefully this tutorial has been helpful Have fun and be safe
Some useful linkshttpwwwstephenprattnetAnchorsanchorshtmhttpwwwuoregonedu~oppclimbingtopicsanchorshtmlhttpwwwabc-of-rockclimbingcomhowtoclimbingtechniquesasp
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Related Instructables
How to Tie aFigure EightKnot byTactical_Pyro
Paracord KnotDisplay Bord byJamie bagn
Basic KnotsGuide byzorro3355
How to Climb aTree (withprussiks) bystasterisk
How to climb atree (using onlyrope) thefunsimple wayby louieaw
How to get arope into a tree(withoutclimbing it) byvitex
How to tievarious knots byadaviel
How to make arope swing byjdub0928
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Turks Head Knots on a Bottleby sklnxbones on July 6 2010
Intro Turks Head Knots on a BottleThis is the finished project A bottle decorated with three Turks Head Knots There are only three knots on this bottle The RED and the BLUE knots are each a 20 Bightby 3 Lead Turks Head Knots The WHITE knot is a 20 Bight by 19 Lead Turks Head Knot
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 1 Supplies
Cord Lots and Lots of cord I cant tell you how much each bottle is differentBottle Washed and Dried inside and out Make sure to remove all water spotsThreaded Needle Cord screws into the threads at the base of the needlePegs I use brass rivets used as a map to tie the Turks Head KnotsHole Punch Used to punch holes in the painters tape to hold the pegsPainters Tape To hold the pegs in place and to make your map for the Turks Head KnotsMarker To write on the painters tapeCloth Towel To remove finger prints and dirt from your bottleKrazy Glue or Super Glue This is used to secure the knots in place to the bottle
OPTIONAL BUT HIGHLY RECOMMENDEDI use the Turks Head Cookbook from KnotToolcom
Step 2 PreparationYou will need to find a bottle you like I used an empty instant tea bottle of course washed and dried (I like to put the bottle in the oven for a few minutes to dry the insidewithout water spots Take off the lid and do not put lid in the oven) Now measure the circumference of the bottle Take a cord and tightly wrap the cord around the bottleMark where the ends meet and use a ruler to measure the length of the cord For my instant tea bottle the circumference is 27cm I know from past knots that I have tiedthat I want my knot to have 20 Bights in the top and bottom (bands) knots I am going to use the Bights in the (bands) knots to tie the middle knot Now divide the numberof Bights (20) into the size of the circumference (27) to get the space between each Bight (135) With me so far
Now take two pieces of painters tape using a ruler measure out the length of the circumference and mark the length on the both pieces of tape Next you will mark thespace between each Bight on the tape
Step 3 Adding the PegsI like to use pegs when tying Turks Head Knots it just makes tying the knot easier
These are what I use for pegs
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 4 Adding Pegs to the TapeNow take a hole punch to cut holes in the tape where the lines meet You will place the pegs in the holes
Insert a peg in each hole and carefully stick the first piece of tape to the bottle
Step 5 Adding the 2nd row of pegsNow do the same thing with the second piece of tape The numbers on each piece of tape must line up
This picture shows you what you should have now This odd looking thing will be your map to tie the Turks Head Knot And this is the end of Step 1
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 6 Tying the first Turks Head KnotUsing the Turks Head Cookbook follow the numbers going over and under as indicated in the book I chose a 20 Bight by 3 Lead knot which will give me a nice bandaround the bottle Once the ends meet you have made one complete knot Tape the running end of your cord and start removing the pegs and the tape
Step 7 Remove the pegs and the tapeBe careful not to untie the knot as you remove the pegs and tape from the bottle Continue to remove all the pegs and remove the tape from the bottle At this point theknot will be very loose and will need to be tightened up
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 8 Remove the slack from the knotHere you can see just how much the knot expanded Starting with the standing end begin to pull the slack out of the knot going towards the running end of the cordDo not expect to pull all the slack out at once You may have to make 3 - 5 attempts at removing the slack out of the knot DO NOT remove all of the slack out of the knotIn order to make the bands we will have to triple the Turks Head Knot We will do this by following the knot three times The threaded needle will really come in handyhere
Step 9 Triple the KnotOnce you have made three passes of the Turks Head Knot use your needle to go under your knot about half the circumference and cut the cord The knot will be tightenough to hide the tail in placeTIP I carefully add a couple of drops of super glue UNDER the band to hold them in place and keep them from sliding around in the nextsteps A drop or two in 3 or 4 places around the band should be enough
Step 10 Add the second knotNow repeat this whole step for the second bandWhen tying the second band you must make sure the Bights line up to the first band This is crucial for the next stepWipe down the bottle to make sure all your finger prints and adhesive from the tape are all removed You want to make sure your bottle is clean at this point Any dirt orfinger prints left on the bottle will be almost impossible to remove From this point on we will use gloves when tying our last knot
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 11 Maping the Top KnotStick a piece of painters tape on top of your first band leaving the bottom of the knot exposedUse a marker to count the number of Bights in your knot Instead of using the pegs we are going to use the Bights to tie our next Turks Head Knot
Step 12 Mapping the Bottom KnotDo the same thing for the bottom band but you must make sure your numbers on top and bottom line up So 1 on top should be the same position as 1 on the bottom
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 13 Adding the last knotAgain using the Turks Head Cookbook and the threaded needle you are going to follow the instructions going over and under as indicated in the book Be sure to usegloves when ever you handle the bottle
Step 14 Thats ItFor this Turks Head Knot I am using a 20 Bight by 19 Lead knot
Because of the amount of cord you are working with your cord will get twisted and knotted You will have to un-twist the cord often Its a pain in the rear but it has to bedone And it has to be done alot
Continue to tie the knot until you finish the knot If you have the cord and the patience you can double or triple the knot When you are done use your needle to hide theends under your bands Cut the ends and your DONE
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Related Instructables
Monkeys FistFloatingKeychain byjokerlz
How To Make ATurks headKnot WithParacord byDoggie Stylish
Tying Trivetsout of Rope forHoliday Gifts bykylemarsh
Paracord KnotDisplay Bord byJamie bagn
How to Make ATurks Head(Photos) bymchs60chip
A pocket full ofknots byKiteman
Monkeys fistknot AND themonkey byjonathan111
TiteTie is theTruckers Knoton Steroids bytitetie
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Larks head noose -- an easy useful knot that tightens and loosensby Larry Breed on February 19 2009
Intro Larks head noose -- an easy useful knot that tightens and loosensI thought I knew all the basic knots but then I was taught this incredibly useful simple knot Its good for tying up the neck of a bag that you want to repeatedly open andsecurely close Its good for tying around a springy bundle that will need tightening and retightening And its easy to undo
Ive looked at knot literature but havent found a name for this so I named it The basic knot is well known its called a larks head Since all Ive done is to slip the twoends through the larks head to make a noose I call it that
WARNING Dont use this knot when human safety would depend on it Climbers and mountaineers have well-tested reliable knots for such situations
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Image Notes1 To tighten further step on this side of the larks head and pull the free ends
Step 1 Double the cord overThe larks head noose requires enough cord to go twice around your bundle plus a foot or two Find the center and double it over Sailors call this a bight
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 2 Form the larks headComing from below the bight hook your thumb and forefinger over the two sides Reach outward and downward and pinch your fingertips together underneath thedoubled cord
Youve made a larks head Move the crossing cord a little farther from your hand so theres a clear opening through the two half-loops
Step 3 Form the nooseSlip the two ends of the cord through the opening we were just talking about Pull the larks head tight so it grips the two cords Find something that needs constrictingand put the noose around it
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 4 Tightening retightening and lockingSlide the knot against the bundle If its not tight enough to keep from slipping tighten it by holding it in one hand and tugging on the cords one at a time with the otherhand Notice that you can slide the knot out again for instance to re-open the bag you just tied shut For some applications this may be as tight as you need it
A springy bundle probably still feels loose If so compress the bundle and get a new grip on the cords Rest your foot on the bundle on the cords nearest the larks headand pull to slide the larks head tighter
To make the knot more permanent you can lock it Make an overhand in the cord ends (Exactly like the first step in tying shoelaces) With your foot still on the bundlepull on the cords and move your hands apart until youre pulling in opposite directions You have just locked the larks head and you can trust it to stay that way()
But lets say that later on you want to loosen the locked knot Again put your foot on the bundle and cords nearest the larks head hold the two cord ends together andpull This makes a little slack between the overhand and the larks head so you can untie the overhand
In twine or small string the locking overhand knot may be difficult to undo Use a shoelace knot instead of an overhand and itll unlock easily
() If youre using slippery cord like polypropylene an overhand may not lock securely You may want to tie another overhand knot For added security wrap a shortlength of duct tape around the two cords close to the knot
Image Notes1 To tighten further step on this side of the larks head and pull the free ends
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Related Instructables
TRX fromParacordChallengeAccepted bythrake
A pocket full ofknots byKiteman
Lens CapLanyard by~teknoarsonist~ how to tie a
noose byawesume
AdjustableParacordGlassesLanyard byjdtwelve12
HangmansNoose PackClosure byPopEye42
Paraleash - ADog LeashFrom Paracordby The Ideanator
How to make arugged andhandy ParacordBelt by Jake22
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 9 Step 9Bring the right strand under the cords then up over them as shown
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 10 Step 10Now take the left strand over across the other strands back behind and under the cords and up through the right strand loop as shown Then tighten
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 11 Step 11
Take the right strand under and behind the cords then bring it back through the tightened knot along side itself as shown and tighten This is where hemostats come inhandy with tying this knot working the cord through the previously tightened part of the knot It can be done without hemostats but requires tighteningloosening of theknots with just your fingertips
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 12 Step 12
Turn the lanyard over so the other side of the knot is facing up The working strand now on the right side will be brought under the cords back up and down through theparallel strands of the knot as shown then tighten And continue this process flipping the lanyard over taking the right strand under and back up around and through theparallel cords and tighten Continue until you run out of cord or reach the cross knot
Youll now trim off any excess cord and quick melt the end of the strands to prevent fraying to finish
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 13 Variations
You can use other two strand knots instead of the cross knot for variations on this style of lanyard A few alternatives to try tying in a spaced out series or combination ofthem Matthew Walker knot double wall knot lanyard knot double overhand knots double figure 8 knots etc The finishing knots around the attachment can also bedifferent as Ive used the lanyard knot sometimes just one or several in a row
You can also use variations of the cross knot with paracord bracelets and watchbands Doubled version of the knot shown as a paracord bracelet and alternating withtwo pairs of strands for the paracord watchband Leftover pieces of paracord can be used for zipper pulls key ring fobs even paracord cross pendants
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Related Instructables
Paracord ChainSinnet FastDeploy BoonieHatband (video)by Stormdrane
Zigzag SpoolingParacord (video)by Stormdrane
SurvivalBracelet(Updated) bytevers94
Celtic ButtonKnot (video) byStormdrane
ParacordBoonie HatWrap (video) byStormdrane
Paracord wristlanyard madewith the snakeknot byStormdrane
SurvivalBracelet II bytevers94
Cobra WeaveKey Fob bytevers94
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Paracord wrist lanyard made with the snake knotby Stormdrane on September 12 2007
AuthorStormdrane Stormdranes BlogNo matter where you go there you are
Intro Paracord wrist lanyard made with the snake knotThis instructable will show how to make a wrist lanyard using paracord and the snake knot The lanyard can be used to secure a key chain knife multi-tool flashlightcell phone camera binoculars compass etc More projects links knot references can be seen on my blog page Stormdranes Blog
Step 1 SuppliesYoull need about 45 feet of paracord(you may use other types of cordage if desired) The paracord I used is from the Supply Captain I left the inner strands in theparacord but you can remove them if preferred If done in one color it will be one continuous 45 ft length if done in two colors youll need 3 ft for the primary color thatincludes the wrist section and 15 ft for the second color that will show in the snake knot Also used are scissors tape measure or ruler lighter hemostats or needle nosepliers(not necessary but they make it much easier) and a swivel clip key ring snap hook cell phone lariat carabiner or whatever attachment you prefer to use
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 2 Attaching two colors of paracordIf using two colors of paracord you will insert one color about 12 inch into the other color You may remove a small amount of the paracords inner strands by pullingthem out trimming with scissors and pulling the paracord outer sheath back over the strands leaving room to insert the other color For various projects Ive used threedifferent methods for attaching two colors of paracord melting sewing or gluing The choice is yours I usually sew them together it doesnt matter as long as its a goodconnection It will be hidden under the first knot
Step 3 Find the center of the length of paracordTake the center of the length of cord and bring it thru the attachment Im using a swivel clip For this tutorial Im measuring the wrist loop at about 10 inches from theattachment The connection of the two colors will be just on the other side at this point
Step 4 Making the snake knotThe snake knot will be made around the wrist loop section of paracord the loop strands being the core of the knot Ive added a series of photos showing the steps Iuse By using two colors youll see that I flip the lanyard over after making each knot so that Im working with the cord on the right side of the lanyard I bring it under allthe other cords working the hemostats under the previously tightened knot and pulling the cord back thru Then tightening up the knot keeping the cord from twisting andworking it up against the previous knot Again flipping the work over youll see two parallel cords of the same color which will be split with the cord on the right goingunder around and pulled thru with the hemostats then tightened up Continue this procedure until youve done about 10 snake knots(you can count them down eitherside
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 5 Count your knotsOnce you have 10 snake knots youre almost done Youll notice from the photos of both sides of the lanyard that one side has the snake knots alternating all the waydown and the other has a set of parallel knots at the top and botton of the sequence of knots Youll always have those at the start and finish of the snake knots I preferto have them end up on the same side of the lanyard so one side appears to have a more uniform look but its not required
Step 6 Trim and melt the excess paracordUse the scissors to trim off the excess cord and quickly melt the ends with a lighter so they dont fray
Step 7 Youre doneYou can make a range of variations using less or more cordknots Shorten the loop for a double ended key chain or make the loop longer for use as a neck lanyard aLanyard Break-Away Connector could be added for the safety conscious You can also add a wooden bead skull cord lock etc Visit my blog page for more knot relatedprojects links and resources Stormdranes Blog You can find ideas for other geargadgets to attach to your lanyard on EDC Forums
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Related Instructables
Paracord ChainSinnet FastDeploy BoonieHatband (video)by Stormdrane
Cross KnotParacordLanyard byStormdrane
Zigzag SpoolingParacord (video)by Stormdrane
SurvivalBracelet II bytevers94
SurvivalBracelet(Updated) bytevers94
Cobra WeaveKey Fob bytevers94
ParacordBoonie HatWrap (video) byStormdrane
Paracord KnotDisplay Bord byJamie bagn
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
How to tie various knotsby adaviel on September 7 2009
Intro How to tie various knotsKnots as a way of joining rope without special equipment are useful in many situations On a sailboat knots are essential both for daily use and for emergency repairsThis instructable describes several different common knots eg
Sheet Bend - to tie two lines togetherBowline - to make a loopReef Knot - to fasten a bundle of materialFishermans Bend - to secure a line to a post or ring
These knots are good for regular rope - braided or 3-strand polyester or natural fibre (hemp sisal) Monofilament (fishing line) or steel cable performs better with differentknots
Knots are typically quite a lot weaker than straight rope - when rope goes around a tight radius such as in a knot the outside is under more tension than the insideSplices (which require special tools and are time-consuming to make) are stronger so permanent fittings usually have eye-splices
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 1 Sheet BendThe sheet bend is used to tie two lines together It is perhaps the most generally useful knot of all When used to tie a line to itself making a loop it is called a bowlineThe strain is taken on the ropes in the middle - not the one coming out the side
How the knot is made is not critical - it is the final shape that is important One can make the flat loop first and work the other rope around it Or one can make thecrossed loop first - required when tying a bowline
The two images show front and back views of the same knot
AdvantagesEasy to makeEasy to undo when tension is removedDoes not easily capsize
DisadvantagesHard to make under loadDangerous to make under heavy load
UsesJoining two equally-sized ropesExtending a towline or stern line
Method 1 the same as a bowline
Method 2 starting with the flat loop
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 2 Double Sheet BendThe double sheet bend is used to tie two lines of different thickness - but not too different It is the same as a normal sheet bend but with an extra turn of the thinner ropearound the flat loop in the thickerThe load goes on the line through the flat loop not the one that comes out the side of the knot
UsesSecuring a heaving line to a tow lineExtending a stern line if you dont have enough line of one thickness
Step 3 BowlineThe bowline is really a special case of the sheet bend but it it tied at the end of a rope to make a loop
The photos show the completed loop and closeups of the front and back of the actual knot Note that it is the same as the sheet bend - but it must be made the right wayround This loop does not tighten in use The knot is quite easy to untie once the load is removed With practice it is very quick to tie
Some usesSecuring a dinghy line to a railing or stanchionSecuring an anchor line to an anchorTie a jib sheet to the sailTie a mooring line around a rock or treeTie a float to an anchor triplineUse one in each line to tie two ropes of very different sizes - eg a throwing line to a large tow ropeDisadvantages the knot must be completely made before it will take any strain - it is hard to tie if there is already a load on the rope
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Linked bowlines
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 4 Bowline on the BightA bowline on the bight is a bowline tied in a loop of rope (neither end is needed) The shape is the same as a bowline made with a double line but the middle of thebight forms the loop around the standing part
UsesAn impromptu bosuns chair - to sit in while being transferred between two boats at sea
Step 5 Clove HitchThe clove hitch can be made when you only have the bight (the middle) of a rope not the ends
UsesSecuring a burgee pole to a burgee halyard (a continuous loop of thin line)Securing a tiller from swinging
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 6 Round Turn and Two Half-HitchesThis is a knot used to secure a line to a ring or bar Wind a couple of turns around the bar then secure the end with two hitches around the standing part (this looks like aclove hitch when done)
AdvantagesCan be made under load - it is easy to take turns around the bar while maintaining tension on the ropeStrong - provided the bar is thicker than the rope the rope is not weakened by sharp bendsDisadvantagesThe end tends to work loose
UsesSecuring a line to a mooring ring or samson post
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 7 Fishermans BendThe fishermans bend is the same as the round turn and two half hitches except that the first hitch is looped under the round turn This uses the tension on the rope tosecure the end from working loose
AdvantagesSecure against working loose
DisadvantagesHard to make under tensionHard to undo under tensionMay seize up under load when wet making it hard to undo
UsesSecuring mooring line to ringSecuring fender lines to rail
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 8 Studsail BendThe studsail bend is like the fishermans bend but the second hitch is also secured under the round turn making it even more secure against working loose when undertension
AdvantagesVery secure against working looseDisadvantagesHard to make under tensionHard to undo under tension
Step 9 Figure-8 KnotThe figure-eight knot is used to prevent an end of rope from passing through a block (pulley) Sometimes called a stopper knot
The double figure-8 knot is used in rock climbing as an alternative to a bowline to secure a climbing harness to the end of a safety rope The double knot is made bymaking a single knot then tracing back around the knot with the free end after passing it around the harness loop
AdvantagesEasy to verify by inspectionNot prone to work loose
DisadvantagesSlow to make and undoCannot be made under load
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 10 Prussic KnotThe prussic knot may be used as a climbing ascender - when made around a vertical rope as shown downwards tension on the ends locks the knot while release oftension allows it to be slid up the rope A pair of prussic knots on foot loops may be used in tandem to climb a rope
UsesClimbing a ropeTaking up tension to free a riding turn on a winch
Step 11 Reef KnotThe reef knot or square knot is used to tie a bundle of material together It must be made around something - it should not be used to tie two free ropes togetherbecause it can easily capsizeIt should not be used to make a loop unless it can be tensioned around a solid object It should not be used around a person - use a bowline instead A capsized reefknot will slip easily and could constrict and cause severe injury
UsesReefing a sail (tying the unused portion around a spar)Securing a furled sail to a spar (sail ties)Wrapping a parcelTying shoelaces
AdvantagesMay be made under moderate load
DisadvantagesCapsizes (works free) if used improperlyCan seize up under load when wet
Tying the knot
Capsizing a reef knot
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 12 CleatsThis is not a knot but is very common on boatsThe first picture shows a rope cleated normally The second shows one with a final locking turn - the last turn is twisted before placing over the cleat so that the tensionon the rope helps secure the free end
When working with ropes under tension take a turn or two around a winch or cleat before trying to secure the end with a knot The load on the free end falls exponentiallywith each turn taken Severe injury can result if a finger or other body part is caught in a loop of rope or between a rope and another object
Step 13 Practice themIt is sometimes useful to be able to tie knots in the dark or as in this video behind your back
Related Instructables
AThird Hand forSailing or OtherThings by WadeTarzia
Paracord KnotDisplay Bord byJamie bagn
Trip LogOutriggerCanoe Sailingthe CaliforniaChannel Islandsby TimAnderson
How to Tie aFigure EightKnot byTactical_Pyro
How to build apirate ship bymdelaney3
Build a ShortDragon (16 foot3-BoardOutriggerSailing Canoe)by Wade Tarzia
repairing aheadsail by josh
How to get arope into a tree(withoutclimbing it) byvitex
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
How to Tie the Lanyard Knotby eddy14777 on January 31 2010
Intro How to Tie the Lanyard KnotMany people including myself have had trouble following the Stormdrane youtube video on tying the lanyard knot so i have done some research and found the solution
Image Notes1 Finished knot
Step 1 MaterialsAll you need is a reasonable length of para cord or whatever you wish to use
Image Notes1 One reasonable amount
Step 2 First StepThe first thing you are going to do is to make a bight that leaves you with to congruent endsThen you are going to put your ring finger through the bight
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Image Notes1 Close enough2 Bight
Step 3 Starting the KnotMake a loop just like the one in the picture and place it over the top strandBring the top strand under the bottom strand
Image Notes1 Notice the way the loop is done2 Top strand
Image Notes1 Bottom strand2 Top strand is under
Step 4 The Most Important PartNow you take the top stand from the previous picture and feed it over the first part of the loop under itself and back over the remainder of the loop
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Image Notes1 Under me2 Top strand3 This should make a diamond type shape
Step 5 DoublingNow take the bottom stand and take it around the part of the top strand nearest to the bight and than come up through the diamond shape in the middleDo the same for the top strand
Image Notes1 Top strand
Image Notes1 Both through the diamond
Step 6 FinishingWhen you take it off your finger it should look like thisWork out the slack by pulling on the bight and the two strands
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Image Notes1 Finished knot
Related Instructables
Cross KnotParacordLanyard byStormdrane
Celtic ButtonKnot (video) byStormdrane
Paracord wristlanyard madewith the snakeknot byStormdrane
Paracord ChainSinnet FastDeploy BoonieHatband (video)by Stormdrane
Zigzag SpoolingParacord (video)by Stormdrane
ParacordBoonie HatWrap (video) byStormdrane
Paracord IDbadge Lanyardby Flahusky
Cobra WeaveKey Fob bytevers94
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Four knots to make paracord into a useful toolby erik_mccray on March 27 2010
Authorerik_mccrayI am an ex-fabricator that is now a stay at home dad I love my new job but I do miss making stuff I love this site amp I am getting involved as a way to keep myskills upOn top of fad work I have also run two small business in the past One was custom sewing amp the other was as a small engine mechanicI have two votec degrees one in metal fabrication amp the other is in engine repairI look forward to getting to know everyone here
Intro Four knots to make paracord into a useful toolParacord is an awesome multitool used everywhere from the wild blue yonder to the deepest caverns But like any good tool it is only as good as the knowledge the userhas about the tool With most people out there using bungee cords amp ratchet straps it seems that paracord is being used for nothing more than friendship bracelets forgrown men This is a shame because for less then the price of a few cheap bungee cords amp some to short to be helpful straps You can get yourself hundreds of feet ofparacord
The key to getting the most out of the paracord is good knot work The first thing you need to know is what makes a good knot One is that the knot is easy amp quick to tieamp more impotant is that the knot is easy amp quick to untie The hitch class of knots is by far the best group of knots that the average person could know The four mostuseful hitch knots are the half hitch a quick simple knot that forms the base for many other knots the inline half hitch allowing you to get the most out of one length ofparacord the slippery hitch that gives you both on the fly control over tension on your paracord but also an adjustable loop that will not change unless you want it amp theinline truckers hitch instantly doubling the your pulling power
Step 1 To get started lets get some terminology that will be used defined
line= the paracord
Main line= the part of the paracord doing the work for example holding down your tarp or the long part of the paracord
Mid line= the middle of the length of the paracord
End line= the unused length of paracord or the short length of paracord
Step 2 The half hitch The half hitch is a simple way to secure a line to an anchor point like the tie down points in most trucks A half hitch is a constrictor knot meaning that the harder you pullon the line the tighter the knots grip gets Another common constrictor knot is the slip knot
Step 1 wrap your line around your anchor point Step 2 wrap the end line around the main line
Step 3 pass the end line threw the end line side of the newly formed loop
step 4 now take the slack out of the knot
step 5 to make sure the knot is secure tie another half hitch to the main line This knot is called adouble half hitch
step 6 another useful thing that can be done with the half hitch is that instead of repeating the wrap on the main line but repeating it on what you are tying to the half hitchcan be used to bind something like a stack of 2x4s
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Image Notes1 End line2 Main line3 step 1
Image Notes1 Step 2
Image Notes1 passing thew the end line side of the loop2 step 3
Image Notes1 step 5
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Image Notes1 step 6
Step 3 The mid line half hitch The mid line half hitch is for when the length of line is to long for the job at hand amp you dont want to have to cut the line to size or you are using multiple anchor pointswith one length of line
Step 1 double up the line at the point in the length you wish to make the knot
Step 2 wrap the doubled up portion of line around your anchor point The doubled up length is now now the end line
Step 3 now tie just as you did for the regular half hitch repeat the knot to make a double half hitch for security
Image Notes1 A mid line double half hitch
Image Notes1 step 1
Image Notes1 The end line2 step 2
Image Notes1 Step 3
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 4 The slippery hitch The slippery hitch is a great knot for adjusting tension on the main line or for having an adjustable fixed loop To adjust the knot simply slide the knot up or down the mainline
Step 1 wrap your line around the anchor point or just double over the line to form a loop
Step 2 wrap the end line around the main line three times Wrapping in the direction of the anchor point or loop
Step 3 put together the two lines making up the loop amp wrap the two lines one time with the end line
Step 4 pass the end line thew the last loop formed covering the two lined of the loop
Step 5 pull the knot tite
step 6 to adjust the size of the loop or main line tension grab the knot amp slide it up or down the main line
Image Notes1 grab just the knot its self to adjust it2 step 5
Image Notes1 step 1
Image Notes1 step 2
Image Notes1 step 3
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Image Notes1 step 4
Image Notes1 grab just the knot its self to adjust it2 step 5
Image Notes1 same knot as in last pic Just slid up2 step 6
Step 5 The mid line truchers hitch The truckers hitch is a great way to double the pulling force on a line There are many ways to tie this knot the problem with most of them is that at some point you aregoing to have to pass the end line through a loop on the main line that is acting like a pulley to double your pulling force this is great if you are making the knot close tothe end of your line but if you are using a 300 length of line amp want to make the knot in the first ten feet having to pass 290 of line thew a loop is a pain But with a fewhalf hitches you will not have to pass the end line threw any loop on the main line
step 1 wrap your line around the anchor point then double over your end line laying the top of the loop over the main line
Step 2 double up your main line amp lay the loop over the loop made by the end line
step 3 in main line above the knot twist in a loop
step 4 put main line loop thew the loop made in step 3 amp pull this loop tight over your main line loop forming a half hitch Repeat step 3 amp 4 to make a doublehalf hitch
step 5 To use the knot just pull down on the end line to put tension on the main line
step 6 after you have the main line snug tie a mid line double half hitch around the two lines forming the loop at the end of the main line with the end line
step 7 Tie a double half hitch with the end line around the end loop of the mid line half hitch of step 6 using the same method as used in steps 3 amp 4
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Image Notes1 the end of step 6
Image Notes1 main line2 end line3 step 1
Image Notes1 main line loop2 end line loop
Image Notes1 step 3
Image Notes1 step 4
Image Notes1 step 4 at the end with a double half hitch on the main loop
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Image Notes1 pull here2 step 5
Image Notes1 the start of step 6
Image Notes1 the end of step 6
Image Notes1 step 72 now the rest of the line is free to do more work
Related Instructables
Paracord KnotDisplay Bord byJamie bagn
ChokelessAdjustableParacord DogLeash byPizzaman101
ParacordLadder wWooden Rungsby josestude
tie a paracordshackle grip byitri45
ParacordPrussik Belt byJavaNut13
TiteTie is theTruckers Knoton Steroids bytitetie
ID Lanyard(Photos) byeschmunk
Dog Toys forHeavy Chewersby J3443RY
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Figure 8 knot and double 8 knotby jonathan111 on November 28 2007
Intro Figure 8 knot and double 8 knotI will show you how to tie a figure 8 knot and a figure 8 follow through
Step 1 Stating the knotThis is a simple knot so just follow the pictures
Step 2 Finishing the knotCross the string under and then push it through the hole Pull tightly unless you are going to do the follow through and leave it somewhat loose
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 3 The follow through knotThe follow through knot should be tied around something brought back and followed through the path of the 8 knot Look at the pictures Basically follow through the 8knot backwards
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Related Instructables
Climb Safe WithA Figure 8Knot by mattste A pocket full of
knots byKiteman
How to Tie aFigure EightKnot byTactical_Pyro
Paracord KnotDisplay Bord byJamie bagn
Cross KnotParacordLanyard byStormdrane
How to Tie aFire-escapeKnot by leonardoismael
Truckers HitchTHE mostawesome knoton the planetby schneidp20
Paracord ZipperPuller byrepeet13
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Truckers Hitch THE most awesome knot on the planetby schneidp20 on October 12 2008
Authorschneidp20I like building stuff Trouble is there just isnt enough time to build everything Sigh
Intro Truckers Hitch THE most awesome knot on the planetYes I know that there are plenty of other cool knots out there many of which I literally couldnt live wo I rock climb However this knot is unlike any other Plus Ineeded a grabber for my Instructable -) (BTW this ISNT a climbing knot) And in truth it isnt a knot by itself but rather a system of common knots
Have you ever tried to tie something down for transporting but just couldnt get the lines tight andor during transport the lines would continually loosen Then this is theknot for you I learned this knot back in the 70s when specialty car racks and ratchet straps were rare or unheard of I initially used it to tie a canoe on a car rack bothattaching to the rack as well as the lines to the bow and stern of the canoe Even with all the new gizmos available today this knot still shines because all you need is arope and ropes dont hum in the wind like straps
The unique aspect of this knot is that it gives you a 2-1 mechanical advantage when tightening the rope Be careful though You can actually damage some thingsbecause of the mechanical advantage This knot holds fast and is easy to untie hallmark traits of any good knot
Below you see the finished knot system well break it apart in the steps that follow
Image Notes1 1st anchor point a bowline2 loop3 securing knots 2 half hitches4 securing loose end with a fishermans knot5 2nd anchor point (should be round)
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Image Notes1 X marks the spot
Step 1 Initial setupThe first step is to anchor one end of the rope and then loop the rope around a 2nd anchor point
For attaching to the 1st anchor point I chose bowline a close 2 on my list -) There are other instructables on that one so I wont bore you here
The 2nd anchor really should be round because it serves as a pulley in this block and tackle type knot Ive used it on sharp anchor points and it doesnt work as well
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 2 Creating a slip knotTie a slip knot somewhere between the two anchor points Correct placement of the slip knot takes some experience to judge it correctly Typically I place it too close tothe 2nd anchor point and end up with not enough room to work with If the knot ends up too far from 2nd anchor point you can extend the knot by enlarging the loop
Be sure you tie the slip knot as shown You may not be able to untie other knots
In this small example the slip knot is uncharacteristically close to the 1st anchor point
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 3 Tightening and securingThe loose end of the rope that went around the 2nd anchor point goes through the slip knot loop Pull the loose end to the desired tension and secure with two halfhitches
Note To allow better view of the knots the rope isnt really tightened in this example
Step 4 Securing loose endThe final knot is just to secure the loose end somehow I chose a fishermans knot to do this
To tie a fishermans knot the rope goes around twice and goes under the X created by the loops Pull the loose end to tighten Finally slide the knot to put tension onthe half hitches
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Image Notes1 X marks the spot
Step 5 FinishedThere you have it I guarantee that the first time you really use this knot (not just practice) you will be amazed at how well it works and youll wish you knew this knot along time ago You may even come over to my side and declare that is is THE most awesome knot on the planet -)
Enjoy and happy haulingDave
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Related Instructables
TiteTie is theTruckers Knoton Steroids bytitetie
Four knots tomake paracordinto a usefultool byerik_mccray
Modify yourbike rack tocarry a sunfishor other boat byewilhelm
SurfboardHammock byGermy
GiganticHalloweenSpider Web bynolte919
How To Tie ASpiders Hitch(video) by back-cast
Three-hitch mathair ornamentby michiexile TRX from
ParacordChallengeAccepted bythrake
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Carry any Bottle with a JUG KNOT Handleby hpstoutharrow on September 17 2009
Intro Carry any Bottle with a JUG KNOT HandleTie a JUG KNOT around a water bottle soda bottle or aluminum bottle to make a secure carrying strap
Re-purpose any container into a reusable water bottle by adding a convenient carrying strap This Instructable will demonstrate how to tie a JUG knot which like its namesuggests is meant to properly secure around the neck of a container
With some cord and the knowledge of this knot you will be able add a handle lanyard or carabiner loop to any of your favorite beverages to carry them on the go
It works perfectly for those disposable water bottles and who knows once you add some colorful cord to the plain old clear water bottle you just might beinclined to refill it and use it again(Check out pictures 4amp5 below)
In addition to plastic beverage bottles like pop water and sports drinks you can turn those rugged aluminum beer bottles into a backpacking canteen
Those of you familiar with my previous aluminum bottle InstructablesROLLED RIM METAL TUMBLERhttpwwwinstructablescomidAluminum-Bottle-Tumbler-Cup-Cook-PotALUMINUM BOTTLE LIGHTWEIGHT ALCOHOL STOVEhttpwwwinstructablescomidAluminum-Bottle-Alcohol-Stovewill recognize the water canteen shown below as a re-purposed aluminum beer bottle Here I have added a painted surface treatment to turn it into a proper lookingwater bottle More on that in steps 13 14 15
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 1 Getting StartedCord size is important Select a small medium weight cord like the one shown here It is a general purpose camp cord sold at most sporting goods stores (shoelacesmight also work)
Do not use a heavy cord or rope because the larger diameter will not tuck under the relatively small lip at the top of the bottleneck and the bottle will fall out
Also the smaller cord cinches tight on itself and will not loosen accidentally
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 2 Form a BightThe next steps show how to tie a JUG KNOT It is the basic step for adding a carrying strap It is also the anchor point for any additional fancy bottle trussing you maywant to add
JUG KNOT Step 1
Form a Bight in the center of a length of cord Bight is a knot term for a loop or bend in the rope In this case the main Bight in this knot is highlighted with a white mark Imakes it easier to follow its path in these steps
The running ends of the cord should be equal length
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 3 Pull the Bight downPULL the Bight DOWN forming two Loops
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 4 Cross the LoopsCROSS the right Loop OVER the left Loop
Step 5 Pass the Bight under the 1st loopTake the main Bight and pass it UNDER the left Loop
Step 6 Weave the BightWEAVE the Bight OVER the portion of the right Loop and UNDER the portion of the left Loop
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 7 Extend the BightExtend the Bight OVER the outer portion of the right Loop
Step 8 Flip the Right Loop behindAdditional colored identification points have been added to the loops to follow their travel in these next two steps
The right Loop Yellow marker is FLIPPED BEHIND the knot and ends up on the far left side of the knot
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 9 Flip the 2nd loop in frontRaise the green marker (located on what was formerly the left loop) and pull it down and to the right FLIPPING IT IN FRONT of the knot
Note the blue portion of the this loop will pass around the outside of the yellow portion of the first loop
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Image Notes1 Center of knot that will tighten around the bottles neck
Step 10 Remove SlackNote where the blue green amp yellow markers end up
Start to remove the slack in the loops by pulling the original main Bight (white marker top right) and the two free standing ends at the bottom
the bottle neck will pass through the very center of the knot
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Image Notes1 Center of knot that will tighten around the bottles neck
Step 11 Tighten the KnotAfter removing the slack insert the bottle neck and finish tightening
The knot should look like this before slipping it over the bottle
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 12 Secure on bottle neckThis is the finished knot shown on the neck of various containers
The loop end and the two free standing ends can be tied together to create a carrying handle (last picture below)
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 13 Aluminum Bottle Water Bottle
The next few steps show the features of an aluminum beer bottle re-purposed as a water bottle canteen It is one of many containers that can be reused as a camp waterbottle
The bottle was lightly sanded masked and then pained with a hammered finished paint to create an interesting surface texture
Image Notes1 Textured finish paint makes an interesting grip-able surface2 Masked with tape for painting3 Masked with tape for painting
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Image Notes1 Dowel used for holding the bottle during painting
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 14 Tethered Cork StopperUse a wine bottle man made Cork as a stopper for your aluminum water bottleNote Use a cork that was removed from the wine bottle without the corkscrew penetrating through the bottom end of the cork (A hole all the way through the cork willcause it to leak) Use the unpierced end of the cork inside the water bottle
Drill a hole through the sides of the Cork Thread the cord through the hole to the center of the cord Use the cork as the main Bight and tie the Jug knot as shown inthe beginning steps
Now the cork is tethered to the bottle and will not get lost or fall on the ground
A Carabiner clip passes through the other cord end to attache the water bottle to you belt or pack
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 15 Trussed for TransportThis is another hanging method for carrying your aluminum bottle water canteen A Jug knot is tied conventionally around the neck
The running ends of the knot however are pulled down towards the bottom of the bottle A Barrel Knot is tied about 34 the way down the side of the bottle A squareknot is tied on the bottom of the knot to keep the two running ends tight against the sides of the bottle
I like the look of the accent colored cord running down the sides of the bottle and the fact that the bottle hangs from the belt upside down It adds to its uniqueness
The last picture shows another truss variation
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 16 AdvancedBelow is a bottle with some additional trussing You can be creative as you want It all starts with a re-purposed container and the Jug Knot (and enough cord)
Related Instructables
AluminumBottle TumblerCup amp Cook Potfor an AlcoholStove byhpstoutharrow
Water BottleBelt Clip byuglymike Duct Tape
Water Bottle byrabidsquire2
AluminumBottle AlcoholStove byhpstoutharrow
DIYGlass WaterBottle byCulturespy
Solar WaterHeater forBackpackingUsing WaterBottles and aCar Shade bykopomeroy
Duct tape waterbottle holder(Photos) by pinkmarshmallow
How to make aCamelPack withan old plasticbottle bywillrandship
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Basic Knots Guideby zorro3355 on April 29 2008
Intro Basic Knots Guidehi
Step 1 Thumb knotThe most simple knotUsed as a stopper and prevent ropes from fraying
Step 2 Reef KnotUsed to tie two ropes of equal thickness togetherIt is pretty easy to tie and untie but under tentionit may be diffcult to untieIt is also not sutible for smoothropes(egnylon ropes)
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 3 Figure of eightused as a stopperprevent ropes from fraying and its more secure than tumb knot its is also used to tie Caribinas to ropes and is often used in rock climbing
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 4 Timber hitchused for pulling logs
Step 5 Clove hitchUsed to tie a rope onto a pole or logThe pole must be roundThe pole lust be thicker then the rope itself
(greatly used during pioneering)
Step 6 Sheet bandused to tie ropes of different thickness together(works on same thickness of ropes too)
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 7 Sheep shankTo shorten RopesTo prevent middle fraying
Step 8 Slip knotWhippingUsed as a grip for pulling things(when tied on a stick or small pole)(marlin spike hitch)
Related Instructables
Rope Rings byhpstoutharrow
How to Tie aFigure EightKnot byTactical_Pyro
Whippin (WestCountry Style)by tim_n
SurvivalBracelet(Updated) bytevers94
HangmansNoose PackClosure byPopEye42
Turkey on aTripod byhpstoutharrow
SurvivalBracelet II bytevers94 Zigzag Spooling
Paracord (video)by Stormdrane
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
How to Tie a Fire-escape Knotby leonardo ismael on October 16 2007
Intro How to Tie a Fire-escape KnotThis knot is used by firemen in case of fires for example imagine a scene where the ladder on the firetruck messes up but people need to get down a five story buildingor more All they have is a long piece of rope they can safely get down with a secure knot like the fire-escape knot So why not learn it its easy to do and hard to untieif you tie it tightly
This is from the American Boys Handbook
Step 1 Get Your RopeFirst grab a piece of rope and bend it like this to make a loop in it Follow every step to the smallest detail
Step 2 Twist the RopeNow make a twist like this and hold it together
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 3 Pull Through the TwistPull the loop through the twist you just made from underneath
Step 4 Go Over the Split EndNow pull the tail through the loop
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 5 FinallyAnd finally just pull it through as pictured below
Congratulations you just learned the fire-escape knot
Step 6 Same Name Not KnotThis is another knot called the fire-escape knot this shouldnt be your result
Related Instructables
House FireEscape Plan(video) byWhatHappensNowAdvice
ParacordLadder wWooden Rungsby josestude
Bed SheetEscape Rope byjessehensel
rope ladder(glow-in-the-dark version) bymikeasaurus
HeadlockEscape 2(video) byjohnnyrockstah
QuickFirestarter byMattandJora
Trail sauna byjakee117
How to Kill FireAnts andCommitGenocide byKentsOkay
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Climb Safe With A Figure 8 Knotby mattste on February 23 2010
Intro Climb Safe With A Figure 8 Knot There are many things that a beginning climber needs to know including several important knots Perhaps the most essential knot is the Figure 8 Follow Through Thistutorial will demonstrate how to correctly harness yourself to a rope using a Figure 8 Follow Through knot This knot is used primarily by rock climbers to provide a life-line Since this knot is used as a life-line it is very important to be able to tie it correctly (Your life could depend upon it)
Dont worry with this tutorial and about 5 minutes of practice you can have this knot mastered
Things you will need
- Climbing Harness- Climbing Rope
If you are wanting to go climbing and dont already have these items they can be purchased for about $25 each at most outdoor sporting goods stores If you are merelylooking to learn the knot a belt loop and a rope (about five feet long) will do
Image Notes1 Climbing Harness2 Climbing Rope
Step 1 Dealing With The RopeThroughout this tutorial I will be discussing different parts of the rope To make these instructions as clear as possible I will define a few terms that I will use throughoutthe tutorial The Anchor End of the rope will generally be at the top of the images This is the end that would be anchored to the wall or rock and does not move Wewill not be doing much with the anchored end The Tail End of the rope is the opposite end that we will be dealing with I will call this the tail for short
Now that we have some terms to work with lets get started
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 2 Tying The First Figure 8This knot has several parts to it The first part of the knot is just tying a basic figure 8 To tie the first figure 8 there are four simple steps
1 - Using the tail make a loop over the rope (as shown in the first picture) keeping in mind that there should be about 3 ft of slack on the tail end
2 - Wrap the tail back this time go under the anchored end (As shown in the second picture)
3 - Bring the tail down through the first loop (As shown in the third picture)
4 - Finally pull the two ends to make the knot a little bit tighter and easier to deal with (Shown in the fourth picture)
After these four steps you should end up with a knot that resembles a figure 8
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 3 Looping Into The Harness In order to secure the rope to the harness simply thread the tail end of the rope through the front loop in the harness as shown in the picture below This step isobviously very important
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 4 Following Back Through The Figure 8After looping the rope through the harness you have to thread the tail end of the rope back through the knot following the first figure 8 I have divided this process intofive smaller steps in order to make it more clear
1 - Coming form underneath the knot bring the tail up through the near loop and to the left behind the anchored end of the rope (Shown in the first picture)
2 - Wrap the tail around the anchored end back to the right and down through the adjacent loop (Shown in the second picture)
3 - You simply need to bring the tail back over the top of the knot to the left (Shown in the third picture)
4 - Bring the tail end up through the far loop following the anchored end (Shown in the fourth picture)
5 - Finally pull the knot tight (Shown in the fifth picture)
As you can see the first four pictures are simply tracing the knot back through with the tail end
For the last part while you pull the knot tight you may want to make small adjustments and rearrange how it all fits together If the knot does not lay perfectly smoothand tight its NOT a big deal
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 5 Finishing The Knot After completing the Figure 8 knot you will want to somehow secure the tail end of the rope out of the way There are a couple different ways to do this the way that Iwill demonstrate is using whats called a Stopper Knot This secondary knot is similar to a Fishermans knot and is pretty simple I have once again divided thisprocess into several smaller steps
1 - Start by wrapping the tail end around the anchored end (As shown in the first picture)
2 - Wrap the tail back underneath the two vertical segments (As shown in the second picture)
3 - Simply repeat the first two steps wrapping the tail around again (As shown in the third picture)
4 - This step in the fourth picture may look complicated but all you need to do is insert the tail up through the two loops that you have just made
5 - To finish off the knot you will want to slowly pull the tail end while gently pushing the bottom of the stopper knot upwards If you have successfully completed this knotit should look something like the fifth picture
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 6 Ready To Climb Now that you have mastered the Figure 8 knot you can securely harness yourself into a climbing rope Remember there are many other skills that go into setting up ananchor and belaying a climber This tutorial only covers the figure 8 knot For more information there are many great websites that demonstrate how to correctly set up asafe climbing system (Ive posted a few below) If you are a beginning climber I recommend that you read up on a few other climbing techniques Also you shouldprobably go to a climbing wall or gym where there are experienced climbers that can show you the ropes Hopefully this tutorial has been helpful Have fun and be safe
Some useful linkshttpwwwstephenprattnetAnchorsanchorshtmhttpwwwuoregonedu~oppclimbingtopicsanchorshtmlhttpwwwabc-of-rockclimbingcomhowtoclimbingtechniquesasp
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Related Instructables
How to Tie aFigure EightKnot byTactical_Pyro
Paracord KnotDisplay Bord byJamie bagn
Basic KnotsGuide byzorro3355
How to Climb aTree (withprussiks) bystasterisk
How to climb atree (using onlyrope) thefunsimple wayby louieaw
How to get arope into a tree(withoutclimbing it) byvitex
How to tievarious knots byadaviel
How to make arope swing byjdub0928
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Turks Head Knots on a Bottleby sklnxbones on July 6 2010
Intro Turks Head Knots on a BottleThis is the finished project A bottle decorated with three Turks Head Knots There are only three knots on this bottle The RED and the BLUE knots are each a 20 Bightby 3 Lead Turks Head Knots The WHITE knot is a 20 Bight by 19 Lead Turks Head Knot
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 1 Supplies
Cord Lots and Lots of cord I cant tell you how much each bottle is differentBottle Washed and Dried inside and out Make sure to remove all water spotsThreaded Needle Cord screws into the threads at the base of the needlePegs I use brass rivets used as a map to tie the Turks Head KnotsHole Punch Used to punch holes in the painters tape to hold the pegsPainters Tape To hold the pegs in place and to make your map for the Turks Head KnotsMarker To write on the painters tapeCloth Towel To remove finger prints and dirt from your bottleKrazy Glue or Super Glue This is used to secure the knots in place to the bottle
OPTIONAL BUT HIGHLY RECOMMENDEDI use the Turks Head Cookbook from KnotToolcom
Step 2 PreparationYou will need to find a bottle you like I used an empty instant tea bottle of course washed and dried (I like to put the bottle in the oven for a few minutes to dry the insidewithout water spots Take off the lid and do not put lid in the oven) Now measure the circumference of the bottle Take a cord and tightly wrap the cord around the bottleMark where the ends meet and use a ruler to measure the length of the cord For my instant tea bottle the circumference is 27cm I know from past knots that I have tiedthat I want my knot to have 20 Bights in the top and bottom (bands) knots I am going to use the Bights in the (bands) knots to tie the middle knot Now divide the numberof Bights (20) into the size of the circumference (27) to get the space between each Bight (135) With me so far
Now take two pieces of painters tape using a ruler measure out the length of the circumference and mark the length on the both pieces of tape Next you will mark thespace between each Bight on the tape
Step 3 Adding the PegsI like to use pegs when tying Turks Head Knots it just makes tying the knot easier
These are what I use for pegs
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 4 Adding Pegs to the TapeNow take a hole punch to cut holes in the tape where the lines meet You will place the pegs in the holes
Insert a peg in each hole and carefully stick the first piece of tape to the bottle
Step 5 Adding the 2nd row of pegsNow do the same thing with the second piece of tape The numbers on each piece of tape must line up
This picture shows you what you should have now This odd looking thing will be your map to tie the Turks Head Knot And this is the end of Step 1
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 6 Tying the first Turks Head KnotUsing the Turks Head Cookbook follow the numbers going over and under as indicated in the book I chose a 20 Bight by 3 Lead knot which will give me a nice bandaround the bottle Once the ends meet you have made one complete knot Tape the running end of your cord and start removing the pegs and the tape
Step 7 Remove the pegs and the tapeBe careful not to untie the knot as you remove the pegs and tape from the bottle Continue to remove all the pegs and remove the tape from the bottle At this point theknot will be very loose and will need to be tightened up
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 8 Remove the slack from the knotHere you can see just how much the knot expanded Starting with the standing end begin to pull the slack out of the knot going towards the running end of the cordDo not expect to pull all the slack out at once You may have to make 3 - 5 attempts at removing the slack out of the knot DO NOT remove all of the slack out of the knotIn order to make the bands we will have to triple the Turks Head Knot We will do this by following the knot three times The threaded needle will really come in handyhere
Step 9 Triple the KnotOnce you have made three passes of the Turks Head Knot use your needle to go under your knot about half the circumference and cut the cord The knot will be tightenough to hide the tail in placeTIP I carefully add a couple of drops of super glue UNDER the band to hold them in place and keep them from sliding around in the nextsteps A drop or two in 3 or 4 places around the band should be enough
Step 10 Add the second knotNow repeat this whole step for the second bandWhen tying the second band you must make sure the Bights line up to the first band This is crucial for the next stepWipe down the bottle to make sure all your finger prints and adhesive from the tape are all removed You want to make sure your bottle is clean at this point Any dirt orfinger prints left on the bottle will be almost impossible to remove From this point on we will use gloves when tying our last knot
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 11 Maping the Top KnotStick a piece of painters tape on top of your first band leaving the bottom of the knot exposedUse a marker to count the number of Bights in your knot Instead of using the pegs we are going to use the Bights to tie our next Turks Head Knot
Step 12 Mapping the Bottom KnotDo the same thing for the bottom band but you must make sure your numbers on top and bottom line up So 1 on top should be the same position as 1 on the bottom
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 13 Adding the last knotAgain using the Turks Head Cookbook and the threaded needle you are going to follow the instructions going over and under as indicated in the book Be sure to usegloves when ever you handle the bottle
Step 14 Thats ItFor this Turks Head Knot I am using a 20 Bight by 19 Lead knot
Because of the amount of cord you are working with your cord will get twisted and knotted You will have to un-twist the cord often Its a pain in the rear but it has to bedone And it has to be done alot
Continue to tie the knot until you finish the knot If you have the cord and the patience you can double or triple the knot When you are done use your needle to hide theends under your bands Cut the ends and your DONE
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Related Instructables
Monkeys FistFloatingKeychain byjokerlz
How To Make ATurks headKnot WithParacord byDoggie Stylish
Tying Trivetsout of Rope forHoliday Gifts bykylemarsh
Paracord KnotDisplay Bord byJamie bagn
How to Make ATurks Head(Photos) bymchs60chip
A pocket full ofknots byKiteman
Monkeys fistknot AND themonkey byjonathan111
TiteTie is theTruckers Knoton Steroids bytitetie
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Larks head noose -- an easy useful knot that tightens and loosensby Larry Breed on February 19 2009
Intro Larks head noose -- an easy useful knot that tightens and loosensI thought I knew all the basic knots but then I was taught this incredibly useful simple knot Its good for tying up the neck of a bag that you want to repeatedly open andsecurely close Its good for tying around a springy bundle that will need tightening and retightening And its easy to undo
Ive looked at knot literature but havent found a name for this so I named it The basic knot is well known its called a larks head Since all Ive done is to slip the twoends through the larks head to make a noose I call it that
WARNING Dont use this knot when human safety would depend on it Climbers and mountaineers have well-tested reliable knots for such situations
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Image Notes1 To tighten further step on this side of the larks head and pull the free ends
Step 1 Double the cord overThe larks head noose requires enough cord to go twice around your bundle plus a foot or two Find the center and double it over Sailors call this a bight
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 2 Form the larks headComing from below the bight hook your thumb and forefinger over the two sides Reach outward and downward and pinch your fingertips together underneath thedoubled cord
Youve made a larks head Move the crossing cord a little farther from your hand so theres a clear opening through the two half-loops
Step 3 Form the nooseSlip the two ends of the cord through the opening we were just talking about Pull the larks head tight so it grips the two cords Find something that needs constrictingand put the noose around it
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 4 Tightening retightening and lockingSlide the knot against the bundle If its not tight enough to keep from slipping tighten it by holding it in one hand and tugging on the cords one at a time with the otherhand Notice that you can slide the knot out again for instance to re-open the bag you just tied shut For some applications this may be as tight as you need it
A springy bundle probably still feels loose If so compress the bundle and get a new grip on the cords Rest your foot on the bundle on the cords nearest the larks headand pull to slide the larks head tighter
To make the knot more permanent you can lock it Make an overhand in the cord ends (Exactly like the first step in tying shoelaces) With your foot still on the bundlepull on the cords and move your hands apart until youre pulling in opposite directions You have just locked the larks head and you can trust it to stay that way()
But lets say that later on you want to loosen the locked knot Again put your foot on the bundle and cords nearest the larks head hold the two cord ends together andpull This makes a little slack between the overhand and the larks head so you can untie the overhand
In twine or small string the locking overhand knot may be difficult to undo Use a shoelace knot instead of an overhand and itll unlock easily
() If youre using slippery cord like polypropylene an overhand may not lock securely You may want to tie another overhand knot For added security wrap a shortlength of duct tape around the two cords close to the knot
Image Notes1 To tighten further step on this side of the larks head and pull the free ends
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Related Instructables
TRX fromParacordChallengeAccepted bythrake
A pocket full ofknots byKiteman
Lens CapLanyard by~teknoarsonist~ how to tie a
noose byawesume
AdjustableParacordGlassesLanyard byjdtwelve12
HangmansNoose PackClosure byPopEye42
Paraleash - ADog LeashFrom Paracordby The Ideanator
How to make arugged andhandy ParacordBelt by Jake22
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 10 Step 10Now take the left strand over across the other strands back behind and under the cords and up through the right strand loop as shown Then tighten
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 11 Step 11
Take the right strand under and behind the cords then bring it back through the tightened knot along side itself as shown and tighten This is where hemostats come inhandy with tying this knot working the cord through the previously tightened part of the knot It can be done without hemostats but requires tighteningloosening of theknots with just your fingertips
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 12 Step 12
Turn the lanyard over so the other side of the knot is facing up The working strand now on the right side will be brought under the cords back up and down through theparallel strands of the knot as shown then tighten And continue this process flipping the lanyard over taking the right strand under and back up around and through theparallel cords and tighten Continue until you run out of cord or reach the cross knot
Youll now trim off any excess cord and quick melt the end of the strands to prevent fraying to finish
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 13 Variations
You can use other two strand knots instead of the cross knot for variations on this style of lanyard A few alternatives to try tying in a spaced out series or combination ofthem Matthew Walker knot double wall knot lanyard knot double overhand knots double figure 8 knots etc The finishing knots around the attachment can also bedifferent as Ive used the lanyard knot sometimes just one or several in a row
You can also use variations of the cross knot with paracord bracelets and watchbands Doubled version of the knot shown as a paracord bracelet and alternating withtwo pairs of strands for the paracord watchband Leftover pieces of paracord can be used for zipper pulls key ring fobs even paracord cross pendants
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Related Instructables
Paracord ChainSinnet FastDeploy BoonieHatband (video)by Stormdrane
Zigzag SpoolingParacord (video)by Stormdrane
SurvivalBracelet(Updated) bytevers94
Celtic ButtonKnot (video) byStormdrane
ParacordBoonie HatWrap (video) byStormdrane
Paracord wristlanyard madewith the snakeknot byStormdrane
SurvivalBracelet II bytevers94
Cobra WeaveKey Fob bytevers94
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Paracord wrist lanyard made with the snake knotby Stormdrane on September 12 2007
AuthorStormdrane Stormdranes BlogNo matter where you go there you are
Intro Paracord wrist lanyard made with the snake knotThis instructable will show how to make a wrist lanyard using paracord and the snake knot The lanyard can be used to secure a key chain knife multi-tool flashlightcell phone camera binoculars compass etc More projects links knot references can be seen on my blog page Stormdranes Blog
Step 1 SuppliesYoull need about 45 feet of paracord(you may use other types of cordage if desired) The paracord I used is from the Supply Captain I left the inner strands in theparacord but you can remove them if preferred If done in one color it will be one continuous 45 ft length if done in two colors youll need 3 ft for the primary color thatincludes the wrist section and 15 ft for the second color that will show in the snake knot Also used are scissors tape measure or ruler lighter hemostats or needle nosepliers(not necessary but they make it much easier) and a swivel clip key ring snap hook cell phone lariat carabiner or whatever attachment you prefer to use
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 2 Attaching two colors of paracordIf using two colors of paracord you will insert one color about 12 inch into the other color You may remove a small amount of the paracords inner strands by pullingthem out trimming with scissors and pulling the paracord outer sheath back over the strands leaving room to insert the other color For various projects Ive used threedifferent methods for attaching two colors of paracord melting sewing or gluing The choice is yours I usually sew them together it doesnt matter as long as its a goodconnection It will be hidden under the first knot
Step 3 Find the center of the length of paracordTake the center of the length of cord and bring it thru the attachment Im using a swivel clip For this tutorial Im measuring the wrist loop at about 10 inches from theattachment The connection of the two colors will be just on the other side at this point
Step 4 Making the snake knotThe snake knot will be made around the wrist loop section of paracord the loop strands being the core of the knot Ive added a series of photos showing the steps Iuse By using two colors youll see that I flip the lanyard over after making each knot so that Im working with the cord on the right side of the lanyard I bring it under allthe other cords working the hemostats under the previously tightened knot and pulling the cord back thru Then tightening up the knot keeping the cord from twisting andworking it up against the previous knot Again flipping the work over youll see two parallel cords of the same color which will be split with the cord on the right goingunder around and pulled thru with the hemostats then tightened up Continue this procedure until youve done about 10 snake knots(you can count them down eitherside
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 5 Count your knotsOnce you have 10 snake knots youre almost done Youll notice from the photos of both sides of the lanyard that one side has the snake knots alternating all the waydown and the other has a set of parallel knots at the top and botton of the sequence of knots Youll always have those at the start and finish of the snake knots I preferto have them end up on the same side of the lanyard so one side appears to have a more uniform look but its not required
Step 6 Trim and melt the excess paracordUse the scissors to trim off the excess cord and quickly melt the ends with a lighter so they dont fray
Step 7 Youre doneYou can make a range of variations using less or more cordknots Shorten the loop for a double ended key chain or make the loop longer for use as a neck lanyard aLanyard Break-Away Connector could be added for the safety conscious You can also add a wooden bead skull cord lock etc Visit my blog page for more knot relatedprojects links and resources Stormdranes Blog You can find ideas for other geargadgets to attach to your lanyard on EDC Forums
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Related Instructables
Paracord ChainSinnet FastDeploy BoonieHatband (video)by Stormdrane
Cross KnotParacordLanyard byStormdrane
Zigzag SpoolingParacord (video)by Stormdrane
SurvivalBracelet II bytevers94
SurvivalBracelet(Updated) bytevers94
Cobra WeaveKey Fob bytevers94
ParacordBoonie HatWrap (video) byStormdrane
Paracord KnotDisplay Bord byJamie bagn
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
How to tie various knotsby adaviel on September 7 2009
Intro How to tie various knotsKnots as a way of joining rope without special equipment are useful in many situations On a sailboat knots are essential both for daily use and for emergency repairsThis instructable describes several different common knots eg
Sheet Bend - to tie two lines togetherBowline - to make a loopReef Knot - to fasten a bundle of materialFishermans Bend - to secure a line to a post or ring
These knots are good for regular rope - braided or 3-strand polyester or natural fibre (hemp sisal) Monofilament (fishing line) or steel cable performs better with differentknots
Knots are typically quite a lot weaker than straight rope - when rope goes around a tight radius such as in a knot the outside is under more tension than the insideSplices (which require special tools and are time-consuming to make) are stronger so permanent fittings usually have eye-splices
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 1 Sheet BendThe sheet bend is used to tie two lines together It is perhaps the most generally useful knot of all When used to tie a line to itself making a loop it is called a bowlineThe strain is taken on the ropes in the middle - not the one coming out the side
How the knot is made is not critical - it is the final shape that is important One can make the flat loop first and work the other rope around it Or one can make thecrossed loop first - required when tying a bowline
The two images show front and back views of the same knot
AdvantagesEasy to makeEasy to undo when tension is removedDoes not easily capsize
DisadvantagesHard to make under loadDangerous to make under heavy load
UsesJoining two equally-sized ropesExtending a towline or stern line
Method 1 the same as a bowline
Method 2 starting with the flat loop
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 2 Double Sheet BendThe double sheet bend is used to tie two lines of different thickness - but not too different It is the same as a normal sheet bend but with an extra turn of the thinner ropearound the flat loop in the thickerThe load goes on the line through the flat loop not the one that comes out the side of the knot
UsesSecuring a heaving line to a tow lineExtending a stern line if you dont have enough line of one thickness
Step 3 BowlineThe bowline is really a special case of the sheet bend but it it tied at the end of a rope to make a loop
The photos show the completed loop and closeups of the front and back of the actual knot Note that it is the same as the sheet bend - but it must be made the right wayround This loop does not tighten in use The knot is quite easy to untie once the load is removed With practice it is very quick to tie
Some usesSecuring a dinghy line to a railing or stanchionSecuring an anchor line to an anchorTie a jib sheet to the sailTie a mooring line around a rock or treeTie a float to an anchor triplineUse one in each line to tie two ropes of very different sizes - eg a throwing line to a large tow ropeDisadvantages the knot must be completely made before it will take any strain - it is hard to tie if there is already a load on the rope
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Linked bowlines
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 4 Bowline on the BightA bowline on the bight is a bowline tied in a loop of rope (neither end is needed) The shape is the same as a bowline made with a double line but the middle of thebight forms the loop around the standing part
UsesAn impromptu bosuns chair - to sit in while being transferred between two boats at sea
Step 5 Clove HitchThe clove hitch can be made when you only have the bight (the middle) of a rope not the ends
UsesSecuring a burgee pole to a burgee halyard (a continuous loop of thin line)Securing a tiller from swinging
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 6 Round Turn and Two Half-HitchesThis is a knot used to secure a line to a ring or bar Wind a couple of turns around the bar then secure the end with two hitches around the standing part (this looks like aclove hitch when done)
AdvantagesCan be made under load - it is easy to take turns around the bar while maintaining tension on the ropeStrong - provided the bar is thicker than the rope the rope is not weakened by sharp bendsDisadvantagesThe end tends to work loose
UsesSecuring a line to a mooring ring or samson post
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 7 Fishermans BendThe fishermans bend is the same as the round turn and two half hitches except that the first hitch is looped under the round turn This uses the tension on the rope tosecure the end from working loose
AdvantagesSecure against working loose
DisadvantagesHard to make under tensionHard to undo under tensionMay seize up under load when wet making it hard to undo
UsesSecuring mooring line to ringSecuring fender lines to rail
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 8 Studsail BendThe studsail bend is like the fishermans bend but the second hitch is also secured under the round turn making it even more secure against working loose when undertension
AdvantagesVery secure against working looseDisadvantagesHard to make under tensionHard to undo under tension
Step 9 Figure-8 KnotThe figure-eight knot is used to prevent an end of rope from passing through a block (pulley) Sometimes called a stopper knot
The double figure-8 knot is used in rock climbing as an alternative to a bowline to secure a climbing harness to the end of a safety rope The double knot is made bymaking a single knot then tracing back around the knot with the free end after passing it around the harness loop
AdvantagesEasy to verify by inspectionNot prone to work loose
DisadvantagesSlow to make and undoCannot be made under load
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 10 Prussic KnotThe prussic knot may be used as a climbing ascender - when made around a vertical rope as shown downwards tension on the ends locks the knot while release oftension allows it to be slid up the rope A pair of prussic knots on foot loops may be used in tandem to climb a rope
UsesClimbing a ropeTaking up tension to free a riding turn on a winch
Step 11 Reef KnotThe reef knot or square knot is used to tie a bundle of material together It must be made around something - it should not be used to tie two free ropes togetherbecause it can easily capsizeIt should not be used to make a loop unless it can be tensioned around a solid object It should not be used around a person - use a bowline instead A capsized reefknot will slip easily and could constrict and cause severe injury
UsesReefing a sail (tying the unused portion around a spar)Securing a furled sail to a spar (sail ties)Wrapping a parcelTying shoelaces
AdvantagesMay be made under moderate load
DisadvantagesCapsizes (works free) if used improperlyCan seize up under load when wet
Tying the knot
Capsizing a reef knot
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 12 CleatsThis is not a knot but is very common on boatsThe first picture shows a rope cleated normally The second shows one with a final locking turn - the last turn is twisted before placing over the cleat so that the tensionon the rope helps secure the free end
When working with ropes under tension take a turn or two around a winch or cleat before trying to secure the end with a knot The load on the free end falls exponentiallywith each turn taken Severe injury can result if a finger or other body part is caught in a loop of rope or between a rope and another object
Step 13 Practice themIt is sometimes useful to be able to tie knots in the dark or as in this video behind your back
Related Instructables
AThird Hand forSailing or OtherThings by WadeTarzia
Paracord KnotDisplay Bord byJamie bagn
Trip LogOutriggerCanoe Sailingthe CaliforniaChannel Islandsby TimAnderson
How to Tie aFigure EightKnot byTactical_Pyro
How to build apirate ship bymdelaney3
Build a ShortDragon (16 foot3-BoardOutriggerSailing Canoe)by Wade Tarzia
repairing aheadsail by josh
How to get arope into a tree(withoutclimbing it) byvitex
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
How to Tie the Lanyard Knotby eddy14777 on January 31 2010
Intro How to Tie the Lanyard KnotMany people including myself have had trouble following the Stormdrane youtube video on tying the lanyard knot so i have done some research and found the solution
Image Notes1 Finished knot
Step 1 MaterialsAll you need is a reasonable length of para cord or whatever you wish to use
Image Notes1 One reasonable amount
Step 2 First StepThe first thing you are going to do is to make a bight that leaves you with to congruent endsThen you are going to put your ring finger through the bight
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Image Notes1 Close enough2 Bight
Step 3 Starting the KnotMake a loop just like the one in the picture and place it over the top strandBring the top strand under the bottom strand
Image Notes1 Notice the way the loop is done2 Top strand
Image Notes1 Bottom strand2 Top strand is under
Step 4 The Most Important PartNow you take the top stand from the previous picture and feed it over the first part of the loop under itself and back over the remainder of the loop
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Image Notes1 Under me2 Top strand3 This should make a diamond type shape
Step 5 DoublingNow take the bottom stand and take it around the part of the top strand nearest to the bight and than come up through the diamond shape in the middleDo the same for the top strand
Image Notes1 Top strand
Image Notes1 Both through the diamond
Step 6 FinishingWhen you take it off your finger it should look like thisWork out the slack by pulling on the bight and the two strands
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Image Notes1 Finished knot
Related Instructables
Cross KnotParacordLanyard byStormdrane
Celtic ButtonKnot (video) byStormdrane
Paracord wristlanyard madewith the snakeknot byStormdrane
Paracord ChainSinnet FastDeploy BoonieHatband (video)by Stormdrane
Zigzag SpoolingParacord (video)by Stormdrane
ParacordBoonie HatWrap (video) byStormdrane
Paracord IDbadge Lanyardby Flahusky
Cobra WeaveKey Fob bytevers94
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Four knots to make paracord into a useful toolby erik_mccray on March 27 2010
Authorerik_mccrayI am an ex-fabricator that is now a stay at home dad I love my new job but I do miss making stuff I love this site amp I am getting involved as a way to keep myskills upOn top of fad work I have also run two small business in the past One was custom sewing amp the other was as a small engine mechanicI have two votec degrees one in metal fabrication amp the other is in engine repairI look forward to getting to know everyone here
Intro Four knots to make paracord into a useful toolParacord is an awesome multitool used everywhere from the wild blue yonder to the deepest caverns But like any good tool it is only as good as the knowledge the userhas about the tool With most people out there using bungee cords amp ratchet straps it seems that paracord is being used for nothing more than friendship bracelets forgrown men This is a shame because for less then the price of a few cheap bungee cords amp some to short to be helpful straps You can get yourself hundreds of feet ofparacord
The key to getting the most out of the paracord is good knot work The first thing you need to know is what makes a good knot One is that the knot is easy amp quick to tieamp more impotant is that the knot is easy amp quick to untie The hitch class of knots is by far the best group of knots that the average person could know The four mostuseful hitch knots are the half hitch a quick simple knot that forms the base for many other knots the inline half hitch allowing you to get the most out of one length ofparacord the slippery hitch that gives you both on the fly control over tension on your paracord but also an adjustable loop that will not change unless you want it amp theinline truckers hitch instantly doubling the your pulling power
Step 1 To get started lets get some terminology that will be used defined
line= the paracord
Main line= the part of the paracord doing the work for example holding down your tarp or the long part of the paracord
Mid line= the middle of the length of the paracord
End line= the unused length of paracord or the short length of paracord
Step 2 The half hitch The half hitch is a simple way to secure a line to an anchor point like the tie down points in most trucks A half hitch is a constrictor knot meaning that the harder you pullon the line the tighter the knots grip gets Another common constrictor knot is the slip knot
Step 1 wrap your line around your anchor point Step 2 wrap the end line around the main line
Step 3 pass the end line threw the end line side of the newly formed loop
step 4 now take the slack out of the knot
step 5 to make sure the knot is secure tie another half hitch to the main line This knot is called adouble half hitch
step 6 another useful thing that can be done with the half hitch is that instead of repeating the wrap on the main line but repeating it on what you are tying to the half hitchcan be used to bind something like a stack of 2x4s
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Image Notes1 End line2 Main line3 step 1
Image Notes1 Step 2
Image Notes1 passing thew the end line side of the loop2 step 3
Image Notes1 step 5
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Image Notes1 step 6
Step 3 The mid line half hitch The mid line half hitch is for when the length of line is to long for the job at hand amp you dont want to have to cut the line to size or you are using multiple anchor pointswith one length of line
Step 1 double up the line at the point in the length you wish to make the knot
Step 2 wrap the doubled up portion of line around your anchor point The doubled up length is now now the end line
Step 3 now tie just as you did for the regular half hitch repeat the knot to make a double half hitch for security
Image Notes1 A mid line double half hitch
Image Notes1 step 1
Image Notes1 The end line2 step 2
Image Notes1 Step 3
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 4 The slippery hitch The slippery hitch is a great knot for adjusting tension on the main line or for having an adjustable fixed loop To adjust the knot simply slide the knot up or down the mainline
Step 1 wrap your line around the anchor point or just double over the line to form a loop
Step 2 wrap the end line around the main line three times Wrapping in the direction of the anchor point or loop
Step 3 put together the two lines making up the loop amp wrap the two lines one time with the end line
Step 4 pass the end line thew the last loop formed covering the two lined of the loop
Step 5 pull the knot tite
step 6 to adjust the size of the loop or main line tension grab the knot amp slide it up or down the main line
Image Notes1 grab just the knot its self to adjust it2 step 5
Image Notes1 step 1
Image Notes1 step 2
Image Notes1 step 3
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Image Notes1 step 4
Image Notes1 grab just the knot its self to adjust it2 step 5
Image Notes1 same knot as in last pic Just slid up2 step 6
Step 5 The mid line truchers hitch The truckers hitch is a great way to double the pulling force on a line There are many ways to tie this knot the problem with most of them is that at some point you aregoing to have to pass the end line through a loop on the main line that is acting like a pulley to double your pulling force this is great if you are making the knot close tothe end of your line but if you are using a 300 length of line amp want to make the knot in the first ten feet having to pass 290 of line thew a loop is a pain But with a fewhalf hitches you will not have to pass the end line threw any loop on the main line
step 1 wrap your line around the anchor point then double over your end line laying the top of the loop over the main line
Step 2 double up your main line amp lay the loop over the loop made by the end line
step 3 in main line above the knot twist in a loop
step 4 put main line loop thew the loop made in step 3 amp pull this loop tight over your main line loop forming a half hitch Repeat step 3 amp 4 to make a doublehalf hitch
step 5 To use the knot just pull down on the end line to put tension on the main line
step 6 after you have the main line snug tie a mid line double half hitch around the two lines forming the loop at the end of the main line with the end line
step 7 Tie a double half hitch with the end line around the end loop of the mid line half hitch of step 6 using the same method as used in steps 3 amp 4
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Image Notes1 the end of step 6
Image Notes1 main line2 end line3 step 1
Image Notes1 main line loop2 end line loop
Image Notes1 step 3
Image Notes1 step 4
Image Notes1 step 4 at the end with a double half hitch on the main loop
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Image Notes1 pull here2 step 5
Image Notes1 the start of step 6
Image Notes1 the end of step 6
Image Notes1 step 72 now the rest of the line is free to do more work
Related Instructables
Paracord KnotDisplay Bord byJamie bagn
ChokelessAdjustableParacord DogLeash byPizzaman101
ParacordLadder wWooden Rungsby josestude
tie a paracordshackle grip byitri45
ParacordPrussik Belt byJavaNut13
TiteTie is theTruckers Knoton Steroids bytitetie
ID Lanyard(Photos) byeschmunk
Dog Toys forHeavy Chewersby J3443RY
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Figure 8 knot and double 8 knotby jonathan111 on November 28 2007
Intro Figure 8 knot and double 8 knotI will show you how to tie a figure 8 knot and a figure 8 follow through
Step 1 Stating the knotThis is a simple knot so just follow the pictures
Step 2 Finishing the knotCross the string under and then push it through the hole Pull tightly unless you are going to do the follow through and leave it somewhat loose
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 3 The follow through knotThe follow through knot should be tied around something brought back and followed through the path of the 8 knot Look at the pictures Basically follow through the 8knot backwards
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Related Instructables
Climb Safe WithA Figure 8Knot by mattste A pocket full of
knots byKiteman
How to Tie aFigure EightKnot byTactical_Pyro
Paracord KnotDisplay Bord byJamie bagn
Cross KnotParacordLanyard byStormdrane
How to Tie aFire-escapeKnot by leonardoismael
Truckers HitchTHE mostawesome knoton the planetby schneidp20
Paracord ZipperPuller byrepeet13
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Truckers Hitch THE most awesome knot on the planetby schneidp20 on October 12 2008
Authorschneidp20I like building stuff Trouble is there just isnt enough time to build everything Sigh
Intro Truckers Hitch THE most awesome knot on the planetYes I know that there are plenty of other cool knots out there many of which I literally couldnt live wo I rock climb However this knot is unlike any other Plus Ineeded a grabber for my Instructable -) (BTW this ISNT a climbing knot) And in truth it isnt a knot by itself but rather a system of common knots
Have you ever tried to tie something down for transporting but just couldnt get the lines tight andor during transport the lines would continually loosen Then this is theknot for you I learned this knot back in the 70s when specialty car racks and ratchet straps were rare or unheard of I initially used it to tie a canoe on a car rack bothattaching to the rack as well as the lines to the bow and stern of the canoe Even with all the new gizmos available today this knot still shines because all you need is arope and ropes dont hum in the wind like straps
The unique aspect of this knot is that it gives you a 2-1 mechanical advantage when tightening the rope Be careful though You can actually damage some thingsbecause of the mechanical advantage This knot holds fast and is easy to untie hallmark traits of any good knot
Below you see the finished knot system well break it apart in the steps that follow
Image Notes1 1st anchor point a bowline2 loop3 securing knots 2 half hitches4 securing loose end with a fishermans knot5 2nd anchor point (should be round)
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Image Notes1 X marks the spot
Step 1 Initial setupThe first step is to anchor one end of the rope and then loop the rope around a 2nd anchor point
For attaching to the 1st anchor point I chose bowline a close 2 on my list -) There are other instructables on that one so I wont bore you here
The 2nd anchor really should be round because it serves as a pulley in this block and tackle type knot Ive used it on sharp anchor points and it doesnt work as well
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 2 Creating a slip knotTie a slip knot somewhere between the two anchor points Correct placement of the slip knot takes some experience to judge it correctly Typically I place it too close tothe 2nd anchor point and end up with not enough room to work with If the knot ends up too far from 2nd anchor point you can extend the knot by enlarging the loop
Be sure you tie the slip knot as shown You may not be able to untie other knots
In this small example the slip knot is uncharacteristically close to the 1st anchor point
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 3 Tightening and securingThe loose end of the rope that went around the 2nd anchor point goes through the slip knot loop Pull the loose end to the desired tension and secure with two halfhitches
Note To allow better view of the knots the rope isnt really tightened in this example
Step 4 Securing loose endThe final knot is just to secure the loose end somehow I chose a fishermans knot to do this
To tie a fishermans knot the rope goes around twice and goes under the X created by the loops Pull the loose end to tighten Finally slide the knot to put tension onthe half hitches
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Image Notes1 X marks the spot
Step 5 FinishedThere you have it I guarantee that the first time you really use this knot (not just practice) you will be amazed at how well it works and youll wish you knew this knot along time ago You may even come over to my side and declare that is is THE most awesome knot on the planet -)
Enjoy and happy haulingDave
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Related Instructables
TiteTie is theTruckers Knoton Steroids bytitetie
Four knots tomake paracordinto a usefultool byerik_mccray
Modify yourbike rack tocarry a sunfishor other boat byewilhelm
SurfboardHammock byGermy
GiganticHalloweenSpider Web bynolte919
How To Tie ASpiders Hitch(video) by back-cast
Three-hitch mathair ornamentby michiexile TRX from
ParacordChallengeAccepted bythrake
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Carry any Bottle with a JUG KNOT Handleby hpstoutharrow on September 17 2009
Intro Carry any Bottle with a JUG KNOT HandleTie a JUG KNOT around a water bottle soda bottle or aluminum bottle to make a secure carrying strap
Re-purpose any container into a reusable water bottle by adding a convenient carrying strap This Instructable will demonstrate how to tie a JUG knot which like its namesuggests is meant to properly secure around the neck of a container
With some cord and the knowledge of this knot you will be able add a handle lanyard or carabiner loop to any of your favorite beverages to carry them on the go
It works perfectly for those disposable water bottles and who knows once you add some colorful cord to the plain old clear water bottle you just might beinclined to refill it and use it again(Check out pictures 4amp5 below)
In addition to plastic beverage bottles like pop water and sports drinks you can turn those rugged aluminum beer bottles into a backpacking canteen
Those of you familiar with my previous aluminum bottle InstructablesROLLED RIM METAL TUMBLERhttpwwwinstructablescomidAluminum-Bottle-Tumbler-Cup-Cook-PotALUMINUM BOTTLE LIGHTWEIGHT ALCOHOL STOVEhttpwwwinstructablescomidAluminum-Bottle-Alcohol-Stovewill recognize the water canteen shown below as a re-purposed aluminum beer bottle Here I have added a painted surface treatment to turn it into a proper lookingwater bottle More on that in steps 13 14 15
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 1 Getting StartedCord size is important Select a small medium weight cord like the one shown here It is a general purpose camp cord sold at most sporting goods stores (shoelacesmight also work)
Do not use a heavy cord or rope because the larger diameter will not tuck under the relatively small lip at the top of the bottleneck and the bottle will fall out
Also the smaller cord cinches tight on itself and will not loosen accidentally
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 2 Form a BightThe next steps show how to tie a JUG KNOT It is the basic step for adding a carrying strap It is also the anchor point for any additional fancy bottle trussing you maywant to add
JUG KNOT Step 1
Form a Bight in the center of a length of cord Bight is a knot term for a loop or bend in the rope In this case the main Bight in this knot is highlighted with a white mark Imakes it easier to follow its path in these steps
The running ends of the cord should be equal length
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 3 Pull the Bight downPULL the Bight DOWN forming two Loops
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 4 Cross the LoopsCROSS the right Loop OVER the left Loop
Step 5 Pass the Bight under the 1st loopTake the main Bight and pass it UNDER the left Loop
Step 6 Weave the BightWEAVE the Bight OVER the portion of the right Loop and UNDER the portion of the left Loop
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 7 Extend the BightExtend the Bight OVER the outer portion of the right Loop
Step 8 Flip the Right Loop behindAdditional colored identification points have been added to the loops to follow their travel in these next two steps
The right Loop Yellow marker is FLIPPED BEHIND the knot and ends up on the far left side of the knot
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 9 Flip the 2nd loop in frontRaise the green marker (located on what was formerly the left loop) and pull it down and to the right FLIPPING IT IN FRONT of the knot
Note the blue portion of the this loop will pass around the outside of the yellow portion of the first loop
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Image Notes1 Center of knot that will tighten around the bottles neck
Step 10 Remove SlackNote where the blue green amp yellow markers end up
Start to remove the slack in the loops by pulling the original main Bight (white marker top right) and the two free standing ends at the bottom
the bottle neck will pass through the very center of the knot
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Image Notes1 Center of knot that will tighten around the bottles neck
Step 11 Tighten the KnotAfter removing the slack insert the bottle neck and finish tightening
The knot should look like this before slipping it over the bottle
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 12 Secure on bottle neckThis is the finished knot shown on the neck of various containers
The loop end and the two free standing ends can be tied together to create a carrying handle (last picture below)
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 13 Aluminum Bottle Water Bottle
The next few steps show the features of an aluminum beer bottle re-purposed as a water bottle canteen It is one of many containers that can be reused as a camp waterbottle
The bottle was lightly sanded masked and then pained with a hammered finished paint to create an interesting surface texture
Image Notes1 Textured finish paint makes an interesting grip-able surface2 Masked with tape for painting3 Masked with tape for painting
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Image Notes1 Dowel used for holding the bottle during painting
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 14 Tethered Cork StopperUse a wine bottle man made Cork as a stopper for your aluminum water bottleNote Use a cork that was removed from the wine bottle without the corkscrew penetrating through the bottom end of the cork (A hole all the way through the cork willcause it to leak) Use the unpierced end of the cork inside the water bottle
Drill a hole through the sides of the Cork Thread the cord through the hole to the center of the cord Use the cork as the main Bight and tie the Jug knot as shown inthe beginning steps
Now the cork is tethered to the bottle and will not get lost or fall on the ground
A Carabiner clip passes through the other cord end to attache the water bottle to you belt or pack
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 15 Trussed for TransportThis is another hanging method for carrying your aluminum bottle water canteen A Jug knot is tied conventionally around the neck
The running ends of the knot however are pulled down towards the bottom of the bottle A Barrel Knot is tied about 34 the way down the side of the bottle A squareknot is tied on the bottom of the knot to keep the two running ends tight against the sides of the bottle
I like the look of the accent colored cord running down the sides of the bottle and the fact that the bottle hangs from the belt upside down It adds to its uniqueness
The last picture shows another truss variation
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 16 AdvancedBelow is a bottle with some additional trussing You can be creative as you want It all starts with a re-purposed container and the Jug Knot (and enough cord)
Related Instructables
AluminumBottle TumblerCup amp Cook Potfor an AlcoholStove byhpstoutharrow
Water BottleBelt Clip byuglymike Duct Tape
Water Bottle byrabidsquire2
AluminumBottle AlcoholStove byhpstoutharrow
DIYGlass WaterBottle byCulturespy
Solar WaterHeater forBackpackingUsing WaterBottles and aCar Shade bykopomeroy
Duct tape waterbottle holder(Photos) by pinkmarshmallow
How to make aCamelPack withan old plasticbottle bywillrandship
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Basic Knots Guideby zorro3355 on April 29 2008
Intro Basic Knots Guidehi
Step 1 Thumb knotThe most simple knotUsed as a stopper and prevent ropes from fraying
Step 2 Reef KnotUsed to tie two ropes of equal thickness togetherIt is pretty easy to tie and untie but under tentionit may be diffcult to untieIt is also not sutible for smoothropes(egnylon ropes)
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 3 Figure of eightused as a stopperprevent ropes from fraying and its more secure than tumb knot its is also used to tie Caribinas to ropes and is often used in rock climbing
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 4 Timber hitchused for pulling logs
Step 5 Clove hitchUsed to tie a rope onto a pole or logThe pole must be roundThe pole lust be thicker then the rope itself
(greatly used during pioneering)
Step 6 Sheet bandused to tie ropes of different thickness together(works on same thickness of ropes too)
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 7 Sheep shankTo shorten RopesTo prevent middle fraying
Step 8 Slip knotWhippingUsed as a grip for pulling things(when tied on a stick or small pole)(marlin spike hitch)
Related Instructables
Rope Rings byhpstoutharrow
How to Tie aFigure EightKnot byTactical_Pyro
Whippin (WestCountry Style)by tim_n
SurvivalBracelet(Updated) bytevers94
HangmansNoose PackClosure byPopEye42
Turkey on aTripod byhpstoutharrow
SurvivalBracelet II bytevers94 Zigzag Spooling
Paracord (video)by Stormdrane
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
How to Tie a Fire-escape Knotby leonardo ismael on October 16 2007
Intro How to Tie a Fire-escape KnotThis knot is used by firemen in case of fires for example imagine a scene where the ladder on the firetruck messes up but people need to get down a five story buildingor more All they have is a long piece of rope they can safely get down with a secure knot like the fire-escape knot So why not learn it its easy to do and hard to untieif you tie it tightly
This is from the American Boys Handbook
Step 1 Get Your RopeFirst grab a piece of rope and bend it like this to make a loop in it Follow every step to the smallest detail
Step 2 Twist the RopeNow make a twist like this and hold it together
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 3 Pull Through the TwistPull the loop through the twist you just made from underneath
Step 4 Go Over the Split EndNow pull the tail through the loop
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 5 FinallyAnd finally just pull it through as pictured below
Congratulations you just learned the fire-escape knot
Step 6 Same Name Not KnotThis is another knot called the fire-escape knot this shouldnt be your result
Related Instructables
House FireEscape Plan(video) byWhatHappensNowAdvice
ParacordLadder wWooden Rungsby josestude
Bed SheetEscape Rope byjessehensel
rope ladder(glow-in-the-dark version) bymikeasaurus
HeadlockEscape 2(video) byjohnnyrockstah
QuickFirestarter byMattandJora
Trail sauna byjakee117
How to Kill FireAnts andCommitGenocide byKentsOkay
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Climb Safe With A Figure 8 Knotby mattste on February 23 2010
Intro Climb Safe With A Figure 8 Knot There are many things that a beginning climber needs to know including several important knots Perhaps the most essential knot is the Figure 8 Follow Through Thistutorial will demonstrate how to correctly harness yourself to a rope using a Figure 8 Follow Through knot This knot is used primarily by rock climbers to provide a life-line Since this knot is used as a life-line it is very important to be able to tie it correctly (Your life could depend upon it)
Dont worry with this tutorial and about 5 minutes of practice you can have this knot mastered
Things you will need
- Climbing Harness- Climbing Rope
If you are wanting to go climbing and dont already have these items they can be purchased for about $25 each at most outdoor sporting goods stores If you are merelylooking to learn the knot a belt loop and a rope (about five feet long) will do
Image Notes1 Climbing Harness2 Climbing Rope
Step 1 Dealing With The RopeThroughout this tutorial I will be discussing different parts of the rope To make these instructions as clear as possible I will define a few terms that I will use throughoutthe tutorial The Anchor End of the rope will generally be at the top of the images This is the end that would be anchored to the wall or rock and does not move Wewill not be doing much with the anchored end The Tail End of the rope is the opposite end that we will be dealing with I will call this the tail for short
Now that we have some terms to work with lets get started
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 2 Tying The First Figure 8This knot has several parts to it The first part of the knot is just tying a basic figure 8 To tie the first figure 8 there are four simple steps
1 - Using the tail make a loop over the rope (as shown in the first picture) keeping in mind that there should be about 3 ft of slack on the tail end
2 - Wrap the tail back this time go under the anchored end (As shown in the second picture)
3 - Bring the tail down through the first loop (As shown in the third picture)
4 - Finally pull the two ends to make the knot a little bit tighter and easier to deal with (Shown in the fourth picture)
After these four steps you should end up with a knot that resembles a figure 8
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 3 Looping Into The Harness In order to secure the rope to the harness simply thread the tail end of the rope through the front loop in the harness as shown in the picture below This step isobviously very important
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 4 Following Back Through The Figure 8After looping the rope through the harness you have to thread the tail end of the rope back through the knot following the first figure 8 I have divided this process intofive smaller steps in order to make it more clear
1 - Coming form underneath the knot bring the tail up through the near loop and to the left behind the anchored end of the rope (Shown in the first picture)
2 - Wrap the tail around the anchored end back to the right and down through the adjacent loop (Shown in the second picture)
3 - You simply need to bring the tail back over the top of the knot to the left (Shown in the third picture)
4 - Bring the tail end up through the far loop following the anchored end (Shown in the fourth picture)
5 - Finally pull the knot tight (Shown in the fifth picture)
As you can see the first four pictures are simply tracing the knot back through with the tail end
For the last part while you pull the knot tight you may want to make small adjustments and rearrange how it all fits together If the knot does not lay perfectly smoothand tight its NOT a big deal
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 5 Finishing The Knot After completing the Figure 8 knot you will want to somehow secure the tail end of the rope out of the way There are a couple different ways to do this the way that Iwill demonstrate is using whats called a Stopper Knot This secondary knot is similar to a Fishermans knot and is pretty simple I have once again divided thisprocess into several smaller steps
1 - Start by wrapping the tail end around the anchored end (As shown in the first picture)
2 - Wrap the tail back underneath the two vertical segments (As shown in the second picture)
3 - Simply repeat the first two steps wrapping the tail around again (As shown in the third picture)
4 - This step in the fourth picture may look complicated but all you need to do is insert the tail up through the two loops that you have just made
5 - To finish off the knot you will want to slowly pull the tail end while gently pushing the bottom of the stopper knot upwards If you have successfully completed this knotit should look something like the fifth picture
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 6 Ready To Climb Now that you have mastered the Figure 8 knot you can securely harness yourself into a climbing rope Remember there are many other skills that go into setting up ananchor and belaying a climber This tutorial only covers the figure 8 knot For more information there are many great websites that demonstrate how to correctly set up asafe climbing system (Ive posted a few below) If you are a beginning climber I recommend that you read up on a few other climbing techniques Also you shouldprobably go to a climbing wall or gym where there are experienced climbers that can show you the ropes Hopefully this tutorial has been helpful Have fun and be safe
Some useful linkshttpwwwstephenprattnetAnchorsanchorshtmhttpwwwuoregonedu~oppclimbingtopicsanchorshtmlhttpwwwabc-of-rockclimbingcomhowtoclimbingtechniquesasp
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Related Instructables
How to Tie aFigure EightKnot byTactical_Pyro
Paracord KnotDisplay Bord byJamie bagn
Basic KnotsGuide byzorro3355
How to Climb aTree (withprussiks) bystasterisk
How to climb atree (using onlyrope) thefunsimple wayby louieaw
How to get arope into a tree(withoutclimbing it) byvitex
How to tievarious knots byadaviel
How to make arope swing byjdub0928
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Turks Head Knots on a Bottleby sklnxbones on July 6 2010
Intro Turks Head Knots on a BottleThis is the finished project A bottle decorated with three Turks Head Knots There are only three knots on this bottle The RED and the BLUE knots are each a 20 Bightby 3 Lead Turks Head Knots The WHITE knot is a 20 Bight by 19 Lead Turks Head Knot
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 1 Supplies
Cord Lots and Lots of cord I cant tell you how much each bottle is differentBottle Washed and Dried inside and out Make sure to remove all water spotsThreaded Needle Cord screws into the threads at the base of the needlePegs I use brass rivets used as a map to tie the Turks Head KnotsHole Punch Used to punch holes in the painters tape to hold the pegsPainters Tape To hold the pegs in place and to make your map for the Turks Head KnotsMarker To write on the painters tapeCloth Towel To remove finger prints and dirt from your bottleKrazy Glue or Super Glue This is used to secure the knots in place to the bottle
OPTIONAL BUT HIGHLY RECOMMENDEDI use the Turks Head Cookbook from KnotToolcom
Step 2 PreparationYou will need to find a bottle you like I used an empty instant tea bottle of course washed and dried (I like to put the bottle in the oven for a few minutes to dry the insidewithout water spots Take off the lid and do not put lid in the oven) Now measure the circumference of the bottle Take a cord and tightly wrap the cord around the bottleMark where the ends meet and use a ruler to measure the length of the cord For my instant tea bottle the circumference is 27cm I know from past knots that I have tiedthat I want my knot to have 20 Bights in the top and bottom (bands) knots I am going to use the Bights in the (bands) knots to tie the middle knot Now divide the numberof Bights (20) into the size of the circumference (27) to get the space between each Bight (135) With me so far
Now take two pieces of painters tape using a ruler measure out the length of the circumference and mark the length on the both pieces of tape Next you will mark thespace between each Bight on the tape
Step 3 Adding the PegsI like to use pegs when tying Turks Head Knots it just makes tying the knot easier
These are what I use for pegs
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 4 Adding Pegs to the TapeNow take a hole punch to cut holes in the tape where the lines meet You will place the pegs in the holes
Insert a peg in each hole and carefully stick the first piece of tape to the bottle
Step 5 Adding the 2nd row of pegsNow do the same thing with the second piece of tape The numbers on each piece of tape must line up
This picture shows you what you should have now This odd looking thing will be your map to tie the Turks Head Knot And this is the end of Step 1
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 6 Tying the first Turks Head KnotUsing the Turks Head Cookbook follow the numbers going over and under as indicated in the book I chose a 20 Bight by 3 Lead knot which will give me a nice bandaround the bottle Once the ends meet you have made one complete knot Tape the running end of your cord and start removing the pegs and the tape
Step 7 Remove the pegs and the tapeBe careful not to untie the knot as you remove the pegs and tape from the bottle Continue to remove all the pegs and remove the tape from the bottle At this point theknot will be very loose and will need to be tightened up
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 8 Remove the slack from the knotHere you can see just how much the knot expanded Starting with the standing end begin to pull the slack out of the knot going towards the running end of the cordDo not expect to pull all the slack out at once You may have to make 3 - 5 attempts at removing the slack out of the knot DO NOT remove all of the slack out of the knotIn order to make the bands we will have to triple the Turks Head Knot We will do this by following the knot three times The threaded needle will really come in handyhere
Step 9 Triple the KnotOnce you have made three passes of the Turks Head Knot use your needle to go under your knot about half the circumference and cut the cord The knot will be tightenough to hide the tail in placeTIP I carefully add a couple of drops of super glue UNDER the band to hold them in place and keep them from sliding around in the nextsteps A drop or two in 3 or 4 places around the band should be enough
Step 10 Add the second knotNow repeat this whole step for the second bandWhen tying the second band you must make sure the Bights line up to the first band This is crucial for the next stepWipe down the bottle to make sure all your finger prints and adhesive from the tape are all removed You want to make sure your bottle is clean at this point Any dirt orfinger prints left on the bottle will be almost impossible to remove From this point on we will use gloves when tying our last knot
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 11 Maping the Top KnotStick a piece of painters tape on top of your first band leaving the bottom of the knot exposedUse a marker to count the number of Bights in your knot Instead of using the pegs we are going to use the Bights to tie our next Turks Head Knot
Step 12 Mapping the Bottom KnotDo the same thing for the bottom band but you must make sure your numbers on top and bottom line up So 1 on top should be the same position as 1 on the bottom
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 13 Adding the last knotAgain using the Turks Head Cookbook and the threaded needle you are going to follow the instructions going over and under as indicated in the book Be sure to usegloves when ever you handle the bottle
Step 14 Thats ItFor this Turks Head Knot I am using a 20 Bight by 19 Lead knot
Because of the amount of cord you are working with your cord will get twisted and knotted You will have to un-twist the cord often Its a pain in the rear but it has to bedone And it has to be done alot
Continue to tie the knot until you finish the knot If you have the cord and the patience you can double or triple the knot When you are done use your needle to hide theends under your bands Cut the ends and your DONE
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Related Instructables
Monkeys FistFloatingKeychain byjokerlz
How To Make ATurks headKnot WithParacord byDoggie Stylish
Tying Trivetsout of Rope forHoliday Gifts bykylemarsh
Paracord KnotDisplay Bord byJamie bagn
How to Make ATurks Head(Photos) bymchs60chip
A pocket full ofknots byKiteman
Monkeys fistknot AND themonkey byjonathan111
TiteTie is theTruckers Knoton Steroids bytitetie
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Larks head noose -- an easy useful knot that tightens and loosensby Larry Breed on February 19 2009
Intro Larks head noose -- an easy useful knot that tightens and loosensI thought I knew all the basic knots but then I was taught this incredibly useful simple knot Its good for tying up the neck of a bag that you want to repeatedly open andsecurely close Its good for tying around a springy bundle that will need tightening and retightening And its easy to undo
Ive looked at knot literature but havent found a name for this so I named it The basic knot is well known its called a larks head Since all Ive done is to slip the twoends through the larks head to make a noose I call it that
WARNING Dont use this knot when human safety would depend on it Climbers and mountaineers have well-tested reliable knots for such situations
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Image Notes1 To tighten further step on this side of the larks head and pull the free ends
Step 1 Double the cord overThe larks head noose requires enough cord to go twice around your bundle plus a foot or two Find the center and double it over Sailors call this a bight
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 2 Form the larks headComing from below the bight hook your thumb and forefinger over the two sides Reach outward and downward and pinch your fingertips together underneath thedoubled cord
Youve made a larks head Move the crossing cord a little farther from your hand so theres a clear opening through the two half-loops
Step 3 Form the nooseSlip the two ends of the cord through the opening we were just talking about Pull the larks head tight so it grips the two cords Find something that needs constrictingand put the noose around it
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 4 Tightening retightening and lockingSlide the knot against the bundle If its not tight enough to keep from slipping tighten it by holding it in one hand and tugging on the cords one at a time with the otherhand Notice that you can slide the knot out again for instance to re-open the bag you just tied shut For some applications this may be as tight as you need it
A springy bundle probably still feels loose If so compress the bundle and get a new grip on the cords Rest your foot on the bundle on the cords nearest the larks headand pull to slide the larks head tighter
To make the knot more permanent you can lock it Make an overhand in the cord ends (Exactly like the first step in tying shoelaces) With your foot still on the bundlepull on the cords and move your hands apart until youre pulling in opposite directions You have just locked the larks head and you can trust it to stay that way()
But lets say that later on you want to loosen the locked knot Again put your foot on the bundle and cords nearest the larks head hold the two cord ends together andpull This makes a little slack between the overhand and the larks head so you can untie the overhand
In twine or small string the locking overhand knot may be difficult to undo Use a shoelace knot instead of an overhand and itll unlock easily
() If youre using slippery cord like polypropylene an overhand may not lock securely You may want to tie another overhand knot For added security wrap a shortlength of duct tape around the two cords close to the knot
Image Notes1 To tighten further step on this side of the larks head and pull the free ends
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Related Instructables
TRX fromParacordChallengeAccepted bythrake
A pocket full ofknots byKiteman
Lens CapLanyard by~teknoarsonist~ how to tie a
noose byawesume
AdjustableParacordGlassesLanyard byjdtwelve12
HangmansNoose PackClosure byPopEye42
Paraleash - ADog LeashFrom Paracordby The Ideanator
How to make arugged andhandy ParacordBelt by Jake22
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 11 Step 11
Take the right strand under and behind the cords then bring it back through the tightened knot along side itself as shown and tighten This is where hemostats come inhandy with tying this knot working the cord through the previously tightened part of the knot It can be done without hemostats but requires tighteningloosening of theknots with just your fingertips
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 12 Step 12
Turn the lanyard over so the other side of the knot is facing up The working strand now on the right side will be brought under the cords back up and down through theparallel strands of the knot as shown then tighten And continue this process flipping the lanyard over taking the right strand under and back up around and through theparallel cords and tighten Continue until you run out of cord or reach the cross knot
Youll now trim off any excess cord and quick melt the end of the strands to prevent fraying to finish
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 13 Variations
You can use other two strand knots instead of the cross knot for variations on this style of lanyard A few alternatives to try tying in a spaced out series or combination ofthem Matthew Walker knot double wall knot lanyard knot double overhand knots double figure 8 knots etc The finishing knots around the attachment can also bedifferent as Ive used the lanyard knot sometimes just one or several in a row
You can also use variations of the cross knot with paracord bracelets and watchbands Doubled version of the knot shown as a paracord bracelet and alternating withtwo pairs of strands for the paracord watchband Leftover pieces of paracord can be used for zipper pulls key ring fobs even paracord cross pendants
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Related Instructables
Paracord ChainSinnet FastDeploy BoonieHatband (video)by Stormdrane
Zigzag SpoolingParacord (video)by Stormdrane
SurvivalBracelet(Updated) bytevers94
Celtic ButtonKnot (video) byStormdrane
ParacordBoonie HatWrap (video) byStormdrane
Paracord wristlanyard madewith the snakeknot byStormdrane
SurvivalBracelet II bytevers94
Cobra WeaveKey Fob bytevers94
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Paracord wrist lanyard made with the snake knotby Stormdrane on September 12 2007
AuthorStormdrane Stormdranes BlogNo matter where you go there you are
Intro Paracord wrist lanyard made with the snake knotThis instructable will show how to make a wrist lanyard using paracord and the snake knot The lanyard can be used to secure a key chain knife multi-tool flashlightcell phone camera binoculars compass etc More projects links knot references can be seen on my blog page Stormdranes Blog
Step 1 SuppliesYoull need about 45 feet of paracord(you may use other types of cordage if desired) The paracord I used is from the Supply Captain I left the inner strands in theparacord but you can remove them if preferred If done in one color it will be one continuous 45 ft length if done in two colors youll need 3 ft for the primary color thatincludes the wrist section and 15 ft for the second color that will show in the snake knot Also used are scissors tape measure or ruler lighter hemostats or needle nosepliers(not necessary but they make it much easier) and a swivel clip key ring snap hook cell phone lariat carabiner or whatever attachment you prefer to use
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 2 Attaching two colors of paracordIf using two colors of paracord you will insert one color about 12 inch into the other color You may remove a small amount of the paracords inner strands by pullingthem out trimming with scissors and pulling the paracord outer sheath back over the strands leaving room to insert the other color For various projects Ive used threedifferent methods for attaching two colors of paracord melting sewing or gluing The choice is yours I usually sew them together it doesnt matter as long as its a goodconnection It will be hidden under the first knot
Step 3 Find the center of the length of paracordTake the center of the length of cord and bring it thru the attachment Im using a swivel clip For this tutorial Im measuring the wrist loop at about 10 inches from theattachment The connection of the two colors will be just on the other side at this point
Step 4 Making the snake knotThe snake knot will be made around the wrist loop section of paracord the loop strands being the core of the knot Ive added a series of photos showing the steps Iuse By using two colors youll see that I flip the lanyard over after making each knot so that Im working with the cord on the right side of the lanyard I bring it under allthe other cords working the hemostats under the previously tightened knot and pulling the cord back thru Then tightening up the knot keeping the cord from twisting andworking it up against the previous knot Again flipping the work over youll see two parallel cords of the same color which will be split with the cord on the right goingunder around and pulled thru with the hemostats then tightened up Continue this procedure until youve done about 10 snake knots(you can count them down eitherside
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 5 Count your knotsOnce you have 10 snake knots youre almost done Youll notice from the photos of both sides of the lanyard that one side has the snake knots alternating all the waydown and the other has a set of parallel knots at the top and botton of the sequence of knots Youll always have those at the start and finish of the snake knots I preferto have them end up on the same side of the lanyard so one side appears to have a more uniform look but its not required
Step 6 Trim and melt the excess paracordUse the scissors to trim off the excess cord and quickly melt the ends with a lighter so they dont fray
Step 7 Youre doneYou can make a range of variations using less or more cordknots Shorten the loop for a double ended key chain or make the loop longer for use as a neck lanyard aLanyard Break-Away Connector could be added for the safety conscious You can also add a wooden bead skull cord lock etc Visit my blog page for more knot relatedprojects links and resources Stormdranes Blog You can find ideas for other geargadgets to attach to your lanyard on EDC Forums
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Related Instructables
Paracord ChainSinnet FastDeploy BoonieHatband (video)by Stormdrane
Cross KnotParacordLanyard byStormdrane
Zigzag SpoolingParacord (video)by Stormdrane
SurvivalBracelet II bytevers94
SurvivalBracelet(Updated) bytevers94
Cobra WeaveKey Fob bytevers94
ParacordBoonie HatWrap (video) byStormdrane
Paracord KnotDisplay Bord byJamie bagn
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
How to tie various knotsby adaviel on September 7 2009
Intro How to tie various knotsKnots as a way of joining rope without special equipment are useful in many situations On a sailboat knots are essential both for daily use and for emergency repairsThis instructable describes several different common knots eg
Sheet Bend - to tie two lines togetherBowline - to make a loopReef Knot - to fasten a bundle of materialFishermans Bend - to secure a line to a post or ring
These knots are good for regular rope - braided or 3-strand polyester or natural fibre (hemp sisal) Monofilament (fishing line) or steel cable performs better with differentknots
Knots are typically quite a lot weaker than straight rope - when rope goes around a tight radius such as in a knot the outside is under more tension than the insideSplices (which require special tools and are time-consuming to make) are stronger so permanent fittings usually have eye-splices
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 1 Sheet BendThe sheet bend is used to tie two lines together It is perhaps the most generally useful knot of all When used to tie a line to itself making a loop it is called a bowlineThe strain is taken on the ropes in the middle - not the one coming out the side
How the knot is made is not critical - it is the final shape that is important One can make the flat loop first and work the other rope around it Or one can make thecrossed loop first - required when tying a bowline
The two images show front and back views of the same knot
AdvantagesEasy to makeEasy to undo when tension is removedDoes not easily capsize
DisadvantagesHard to make under loadDangerous to make under heavy load
UsesJoining two equally-sized ropesExtending a towline or stern line
Method 1 the same as a bowline
Method 2 starting with the flat loop
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 2 Double Sheet BendThe double sheet bend is used to tie two lines of different thickness - but not too different It is the same as a normal sheet bend but with an extra turn of the thinner ropearound the flat loop in the thickerThe load goes on the line through the flat loop not the one that comes out the side of the knot
UsesSecuring a heaving line to a tow lineExtending a stern line if you dont have enough line of one thickness
Step 3 BowlineThe bowline is really a special case of the sheet bend but it it tied at the end of a rope to make a loop
The photos show the completed loop and closeups of the front and back of the actual knot Note that it is the same as the sheet bend - but it must be made the right wayround This loop does not tighten in use The knot is quite easy to untie once the load is removed With practice it is very quick to tie
Some usesSecuring a dinghy line to a railing or stanchionSecuring an anchor line to an anchorTie a jib sheet to the sailTie a mooring line around a rock or treeTie a float to an anchor triplineUse one in each line to tie two ropes of very different sizes - eg a throwing line to a large tow ropeDisadvantages the knot must be completely made before it will take any strain - it is hard to tie if there is already a load on the rope
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Linked bowlines
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 4 Bowline on the BightA bowline on the bight is a bowline tied in a loop of rope (neither end is needed) The shape is the same as a bowline made with a double line but the middle of thebight forms the loop around the standing part
UsesAn impromptu bosuns chair - to sit in while being transferred between two boats at sea
Step 5 Clove HitchThe clove hitch can be made when you only have the bight (the middle) of a rope not the ends
UsesSecuring a burgee pole to a burgee halyard (a continuous loop of thin line)Securing a tiller from swinging
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 6 Round Turn and Two Half-HitchesThis is a knot used to secure a line to a ring or bar Wind a couple of turns around the bar then secure the end with two hitches around the standing part (this looks like aclove hitch when done)
AdvantagesCan be made under load - it is easy to take turns around the bar while maintaining tension on the ropeStrong - provided the bar is thicker than the rope the rope is not weakened by sharp bendsDisadvantagesThe end tends to work loose
UsesSecuring a line to a mooring ring or samson post
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 7 Fishermans BendThe fishermans bend is the same as the round turn and two half hitches except that the first hitch is looped under the round turn This uses the tension on the rope tosecure the end from working loose
AdvantagesSecure against working loose
DisadvantagesHard to make under tensionHard to undo under tensionMay seize up under load when wet making it hard to undo
UsesSecuring mooring line to ringSecuring fender lines to rail
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 8 Studsail BendThe studsail bend is like the fishermans bend but the second hitch is also secured under the round turn making it even more secure against working loose when undertension
AdvantagesVery secure against working looseDisadvantagesHard to make under tensionHard to undo under tension
Step 9 Figure-8 KnotThe figure-eight knot is used to prevent an end of rope from passing through a block (pulley) Sometimes called a stopper knot
The double figure-8 knot is used in rock climbing as an alternative to a bowline to secure a climbing harness to the end of a safety rope The double knot is made bymaking a single knot then tracing back around the knot with the free end after passing it around the harness loop
AdvantagesEasy to verify by inspectionNot prone to work loose
DisadvantagesSlow to make and undoCannot be made under load
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 10 Prussic KnotThe prussic knot may be used as a climbing ascender - when made around a vertical rope as shown downwards tension on the ends locks the knot while release oftension allows it to be slid up the rope A pair of prussic knots on foot loops may be used in tandem to climb a rope
UsesClimbing a ropeTaking up tension to free a riding turn on a winch
Step 11 Reef KnotThe reef knot or square knot is used to tie a bundle of material together It must be made around something - it should not be used to tie two free ropes togetherbecause it can easily capsizeIt should not be used to make a loop unless it can be tensioned around a solid object It should not be used around a person - use a bowline instead A capsized reefknot will slip easily and could constrict and cause severe injury
UsesReefing a sail (tying the unused portion around a spar)Securing a furled sail to a spar (sail ties)Wrapping a parcelTying shoelaces
AdvantagesMay be made under moderate load
DisadvantagesCapsizes (works free) if used improperlyCan seize up under load when wet
Tying the knot
Capsizing a reef knot
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 12 CleatsThis is not a knot but is very common on boatsThe first picture shows a rope cleated normally The second shows one with a final locking turn - the last turn is twisted before placing over the cleat so that the tensionon the rope helps secure the free end
When working with ropes under tension take a turn or two around a winch or cleat before trying to secure the end with a knot The load on the free end falls exponentiallywith each turn taken Severe injury can result if a finger or other body part is caught in a loop of rope or between a rope and another object
Step 13 Practice themIt is sometimes useful to be able to tie knots in the dark or as in this video behind your back
Related Instructables
AThird Hand forSailing or OtherThings by WadeTarzia
Paracord KnotDisplay Bord byJamie bagn
Trip LogOutriggerCanoe Sailingthe CaliforniaChannel Islandsby TimAnderson
How to Tie aFigure EightKnot byTactical_Pyro
How to build apirate ship bymdelaney3
Build a ShortDragon (16 foot3-BoardOutriggerSailing Canoe)by Wade Tarzia
repairing aheadsail by josh
How to get arope into a tree(withoutclimbing it) byvitex
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
How to Tie the Lanyard Knotby eddy14777 on January 31 2010
Intro How to Tie the Lanyard KnotMany people including myself have had trouble following the Stormdrane youtube video on tying the lanyard knot so i have done some research and found the solution
Image Notes1 Finished knot
Step 1 MaterialsAll you need is a reasonable length of para cord or whatever you wish to use
Image Notes1 One reasonable amount
Step 2 First StepThe first thing you are going to do is to make a bight that leaves you with to congruent endsThen you are going to put your ring finger through the bight
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Image Notes1 Close enough2 Bight
Step 3 Starting the KnotMake a loop just like the one in the picture and place it over the top strandBring the top strand under the bottom strand
Image Notes1 Notice the way the loop is done2 Top strand
Image Notes1 Bottom strand2 Top strand is under
Step 4 The Most Important PartNow you take the top stand from the previous picture and feed it over the first part of the loop under itself and back over the remainder of the loop
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Image Notes1 Under me2 Top strand3 This should make a diamond type shape
Step 5 DoublingNow take the bottom stand and take it around the part of the top strand nearest to the bight and than come up through the diamond shape in the middleDo the same for the top strand
Image Notes1 Top strand
Image Notes1 Both through the diamond
Step 6 FinishingWhen you take it off your finger it should look like thisWork out the slack by pulling on the bight and the two strands
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Image Notes1 Finished knot
Related Instructables
Cross KnotParacordLanyard byStormdrane
Celtic ButtonKnot (video) byStormdrane
Paracord wristlanyard madewith the snakeknot byStormdrane
Paracord ChainSinnet FastDeploy BoonieHatband (video)by Stormdrane
Zigzag SpoolingParacord (video)by Stormdrane
ParacordBoonie HatWrap (video) byStormdrane
Paracord IDbadge Lanyardby Flahusky
Cobra WeaveKey Fob bytevers94
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Four knots to make paracord into a useful toolby erik_mccray on March 27 2010
Authorerik_mccrayI am an ex-fabricator that is now a stay at home dad I love my new job but I do miss making stuff I love this site amp I am getting involved as a way to keep myskills upOn top of fad work I have also run two small business in the past One was custom sewing amp the other was as a small engine mechanicI have two votec degrees one in metal fabrication amp the other is in engine repairI look forward to getting to know everyone here
Intro Four knots to make paracord into a useful toolParacord is an awesome multitool used everywhere from the wild blue yonder to the deepest caverns But like any good tool it is only as good as the knowledge the userhas about the tool With most people out there using bungee cords amp ratchet straps it seems that paracord is being used for nothing more than friendship bracelets forgrown men This is a shame because for less then the price of a few cheap bungee cords amp some to short to be helpful straps You can get yourself hundreds of feet ofparacord
The key to getting the most out of the paracord is good knot work The first thing you need to know is what makes a good knot One is that the knot is easy amp quick to tieamp more impotant is that the knot is easy amp quick to untie The hitch class of knots is by far the best group of knots that the average person could know The four mostuseful hitch knots are the half hitch a quick simple knot that forms the base for many other knots the inline half hitch allowing you to get the most out of one length ofparacord the slippery hitch that gives you both on the fly control over tension on your paracord but also an adjustable loop that will not change unless you want it amp theinline truckers hitch instantly doubling the your pulling power
Step 1 To get started lets get some terminology that will be used defined
line= the paracord
Main line= the part of the paracord doing the work for example holding down your tarp or the long part of the paracord
Mid line= the middle of the length of the paracord
End line= the unused length of paracord or the short length of paracord
Step 2 The half hitch The half hitch is a simple way to secure a line to an anchor point like the tie down points in most trucks A half hitch is a constrictor knot meaning that the harder you pullon the line the tighter the knots grip gets Another common constrictor knot is the slip knot
Step 1 wrap your line around your anchor point Step 2 wrap the end line around the main line
Step 3 pass the end line threw the end line side of the newly formed loop
step 4 now take the slack out of the knot
step 5 to make sure the knot is secure tie another half hitch to the main line This knot is called adouble half hitch
step 6 another useful thing that can be done with the half hitch is that instead of repeating the wrap on the main line but repeating it on what you are tying to the half hitchcan be used to bind something like a stack of 2x4s
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Image Notes1 End line2 Main line3 step 1
Image Notes1 Step 2
Image Notes1 passing thew the end line side of the loop2 step 3
Image Notes1 step 5
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Image Notes1 step 6
Step 3 The mid line half hitch The mid line half hitch is for when the length of line is to long for the job at hand amp you dont want to have to cut the line to size or you are using multiple anchor pointswith one length of line
Step 1 double up the line at the point in the length you wish to make the knot
Step 2 wrap the doubled up portion of line around your anchor point The doubled up length is now now the end line
Step 3 now tie just as you did for the regular half hitch repeat the knot to make a double half hitch for security
Image Notes1 A mid line double half hitch
Image Notes1 step 1
Image Notes1 The end line2 step 2
Image Notes1 Step 3
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 4 The slippery hitch The slippery hitch is a great knot for adjusting tension on the main line or for having an adjustable fixed loop To adjust the knot simply slide the knot up or down the mainline
Step 1 wrap your line around the anchor point or just double over the line to form a loop
Step 2 wrap the end line around the main line three times Wrapping in the direction of the anchor point or loop
Step 3 put together the two lines making up the loop amp wrap the two lines one time with the end line
Step 4 pass the end line thew the last loop formed covering the two lined of the loop
Step 5 pull the knot tite
step 6 to adjust the size of the loop or main line tension grab the knot amp slide it up or down the main line
Image Notes1 grab just the knot its self to adjust it2 step 5
Image Notes1 step 1
Image Notes1 step 2
Image Notes1 step 3
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Image Notes1 step 4
Image Notes1 grab just the knot its self to adjust it2 step 5
Image Notes1 same knot as in last pic Just slid up2 step 6
Step 5 The mid line truchers hitch The truckers hitch is a great way to double the pulling force on a line There are many ways to tie this knot the problem with most of them is that at some point you aregoing to have to pass the end line through a loop on the main line that is acting like a pulley to double your pulling force this is great if you are making the knot close tothe end of your line but if you are using a 300 length of line amp want to make the knot in the first ten feet having to pass 290 of line thew a loop is a pain But with a fewhalf hitches you will not have to pass the end line threw any loop on the main line
step 1 wrap your line around the anchor point then double over your end line laying the top of the loop over the main line
Step 2 double up your main line amp lay the loop over the loop made by the end line
step 3 in main line above the knot twist in a loop
step 4 put main line loop thew the loop made in step 3 amp pull this loop tight over your main line loop forming a half hitch Repeat step 3 amp 4 to make a doublehalf hitch
step 5 To use the knot just pull down on the end line to put tension on the main line
step 6 after you have the main line snug tie a mid line double half hitch around the two lines forming the loop at the end of the main line with the end line
step 7 Tie a double half hitch with the end line around the end loop of the mid line half hitch of step 6 using the same method as used in steps 3 amp 4
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Image Notes1 the end of step 6
Image Notes1 main line2 end line3 step 1
Image Notes1 main line loop2 end line loop
Image Notes1 step 3
Image Notes1 step 4
Image Notes1 step 4 at the end with a double half hitch on the main loop
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Image Notes1 pull here2 step 5
Image Notes1 the start of step 6
Image Notes1 the end of step 6
Image Notes1 step 72 now the rest of the line is free to do more work
Related Instructables
Paracord KnotDisplay Bord byJamie bagn
ChokelessAdjustableParacord DogLeash byPizzaman101
ParacordLadder wWooden Rungsby josestude
tie a paracordshackle grip byitri45
ParacordPrussik Belt byJavaNut13
TiteTie is theTruckers Knoton Steroids bytitetie
ID Lanyard(Photos) byeschmunk
Dog Toys forHeavy Chewersby J3443RY
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Figure 8 knot and double 8 knotby jonathan111 on November 28 2007
Intro Figure 8 knot and double 8 knotI will show you how to tie a figure 8 knot and a figure 8 follow through
Step 1 Stating the knotThis is a simple knot so just follow the pictures
Step 2 Finishing the knotCross the string under and then push it through the hole Pull tightly unless you are going to do the follow through and leave it somewhat loose
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 3 The follow through knotThe follow through knot should be tied around something brought back and followed through the path of the 8 knot Look at the pictures Basically follow through the 8knot backwards
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Related Instructables
Climb Safe WithA Figure 8Knot by mattste A pocket full of
knots byKiteman
How to Tie aFigure EightKnot byTactical_Pyro
Paracord KnotDisplay Bord byJamie bagn
Cross KnotParacordLanyard byStormdrane
How to Tie aFire-escapeKnot by leonardoismael
Truckers HitchTHE mostawesome knoton the planetby schneidp20
Paracord ZipperPuller byrepeet13
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Truckers Hitch THE most awesome knot on the planetby schneidp20 on October 12 2008
Authorschneidp20I like building stuff Trouble is there just isnt enough time to build everything Sigh
Intro Truckers Hitch THE most awesome knot on the planetYes I know that there are plenty of other cool knots out there many of which I literally couldnt live wo I rock climb However this knot is unlike any other Plus Ineeded a grabber for my Instructable -) (BTW this ISNT a climbing knot) And in truth it isnt a knot by itself but rather a system of common knots
Have you ever tried to tie something down for transporting but just couldnt get the lines tight andor during transport the lines would continually loosen Then this is theknot for you I learned this knot back in the 70s when specialty car racks and ratchet straps were rare or unheard of I initially used it to tie a canoe on a car rack bothattaching to the rack as well as the lines to the bow and stern of the canoe Even with all the new gizmos available today this knot still shines because all you need is arope and ropes dont hum in the wind like straps
The unique aspect of this knot is that it gives you a 2-1 mechanical advantage when tightening the rope Be careful though You can actually damage some thingsbecause of the mechanical advantage This knot holds fast and is easy to untie hallmark traits of any good knot
Below you see the finished knot system well break it apart in the steps that follow
Image Notes1 1st anchor point a bowline2 loop3 securing knots 2 half hitches4 securing loose end with a fishermans knot5 2nd anchor point (should be round)
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Image Notes1 X marks the spot
Step 1 Initial setupThe first step is to anchor one end of the rope and then loop the rope around a 2nd anchor point
For attaching to the 1st anchor point I chose bowline a close 2 on my list -) There are other instructables on that one so I wont bore you here
The 2nd anchor really should be round because it serves as a pulley in this block and tackle type knot Ive used it on sharp anchor points and it doesnt work as well
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 2 Creating a slip knotTie a slip knot somewhere between the two anchor points Correct placement of the slip knot takes some experience to judge it correctly Typically I place it too close tothe 2nd anchor point and end up with not enough room to work with If the knot ends up too far from 2nd anchor point you can extend the knot by enlarging the loop
Be sure you tie the slip knot as shown You may not be able to untie other knots
In this small example the slip knot is uncharacteristically close to the 1st anchor point
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 3 Tightening and securingThe loose end of the rope that went around the 2nd anchor point goes through the slip knot loop Pull the loose end to the desired tension and secure with two halfhitches
Note To allow better view of the knots the rope isnt really tightened in this example
Step 4 Securing loose endThe final knot is just to secure the loose end somehow I chose a fishermans knot to do this
To tie a fishermans knot the rope goes around twice and goes under the X created by the loops Pull the loose end to tighten Finally slide the knot to put tension onthe half hitches
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Image Notes1 X marks the spot
Step 5 FinishedThere you have it I guarantee that the first time you really use this knot (not just practice) you will be amazed at how well it works and youll wish you knew this knot along time ago You may even come over to my side and declare that is is THE most awesome knot on the planet -)
Enjoy and happy haulingDave
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Related Instructables
TiteTie is theTruckers Knoton Steroids bytitetie
Four knots tomake paracordinto a usefultool byerik_mccray
Modify yourbike rack tocarry a sunfishor other boat byewilhelm
SurfboardHammock byGermy
GiganticHalloweenSpider Web bynolte919
How To Tie ASpiders Hitch(video) by back-cast
Three-hitch mathair ornamentby michiexile TRX from
ParacordChallengeAccepted bythrake
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Carry any Bottle with a JUG KNOT Handleby hpstoutharrow on September 17 2009
Intro Carry any Bottle with a JUG KNOT HandleTie a JUG KNOT around a water bottle soda bottle or aluminum bottle to make a secure carrying strap
Re-purpose any container into a reusable water bottle by adding a convenient carrying strap This Instructable will demonstrate how to tie a JUG knot which like its namesuggests is meant to properly secure around the neck of a container
With some cord and the knowledge of this knot you will be able add a handle lanyard or carabiner loop to any of your favorite beverages to carry them on the go
It works perfectly for those disposable water bottles and who knows once you add some colorful cord to the plain old clear water bottle you just might beinclined to refill it and use it again(Check out pictures 4amp5 below)
In addition to plastic beverage bottles like pop water and sports drinks you can turn those rugged aluminum beer bottles into a backpacking canteen
Those of you familiar with my previous aluminum bottle InstructablesROLLED RIM METAL TUMBLERhttpwwwinstructablescomidAluminum-Bottle-Tumbler-Cup-Cook-PotALUMINUM BOTTLE LIGHTWEIGHT ALCOHOL STOVEhttpwwwinstructablescomidAluminum-Bottle-Alcohol-Stovewill recognize the water canteen shown below as a re-purposed aluminum beer bottle Here I have added a painted surface treatment to turn it into a proper lookingwater bottle More on that in steps 13 14 15
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 1 Getting StartedCord size is important Select a small medium weight cord like the one shown here It is a general purpose camp cord sold at most sporting goods stores (shoelacesmight also work)
Do not use a heavy cord or rope because the larger diameter will not tuck under the relatively small lip at the top of the bottleneck and the bottle will fall out
Also the smaller cord cinches tight on itself and will not loosen accidentally
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 2 Form a BightThe next steps show how to tie a JUG KNOT It is the basic step for adding a carrying strap It is also the anchor point for any additional fancy bottle trussing you maywant to add
JUG KNOT Step 1
Form a Bight in the center of a length of cord Bight is a knot term for a loop or bend in the rope In this case the main Bight in this knot is highlighted with a white mark Imakes it easier to follow its path in these steps
The running ends of the cord should be equal length
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 3 Pull the Bight downPULL the Bight DOWN forming two Loops
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 4 Cross the LoopsCROSS the right Loop OVER the left Loop
Step 5 Pass the Bight under the 1st loopTake the main Bight and pass it UNDER the left Loop
Step 6 Weave the BightWEAVE the Bight OVER the portion of the right Loop and UNDER the portion of the left Loop
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 7 Extend the BightExtend the Bight OVER the outer portion of the right Loop
Step 8 Flip the Right Loop behindAdditional colored identification points have been added to the loops to follow their travel in these next two steps
The right Loop Yellow marker is FLIPPED BEHIND the knot and ends up on the far left side of the knot
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 9 Flip the 2nd loop in frontRaise the green marker (located on what was formerly the left loop) and pull it down and to the right FLIPPING IT IN FRONT of the knot
Note the blue portion of the this loop will pass around the outside of the yellow portion of the first loop
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Image Notes1 Center of knot that will tighten around the bottles neck
Step 10 Remove SlackNote where the blue green amp yellow markers end up
Start to remove the slack in the loops by pulling the original main Bight (white marker top right) and the two free standing ends at the bottom
the bottle neck will pass through the very center of the knot
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Image Notes1 Center of knot that will tighten around the bottles neck
Step 11 Tighten the KnotAfter removing the slack insert the bottle neck and finish tightening
The knot should look like this before slipping it over the bottle
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 12 Secure on bottle neckThis is the finished knot shown on the neck of various containers
The loop end and the two free standing ends can be tied together to create a carrying handle (last picture below)
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 13 Aluminum Bottle Water Bottle
The next few steps show the features of an aluminum beer bottle re-purposed as a water bottle canteen It is one of many containers that can be reused as a camp waterbottle
The bottle was lightly sanded masked and then pained with a hammered finished paint to create an interesting surface texture
Image Notes1 Textured finish paint makes an interesting grip-able surface2 Masked with tape for painting3 Masked with tape for painting
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Image Notes1 Dowel used for holding the bottle during painting
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 14 Tethered Cork StopperUse a wine bottle man made Cork as a stopper for your aluminum water bottleNote Use a cork that was removed from the wine bottle without the corkscrew penetrating through the bottom end of the cork (A hole all the way through the cork willcause it to leak) Use the unpierced end of the cork inside the water bottle
Drill a hole through the sides of the Cork Thread the cord through the hole to the center of the cord Use the cork as the main Bight and tie the Jug knot as shown inthe beginning steps
Now the cork is tethered to the bottle and will not get lost or fall on the ground
A Carabiner clip passes through the other cord end to attache the water bottle to you belt or pack
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 15 Trussed for TransportThis is another hanging method for carrying your aluminum bottle water canteen A Jug knot is tied conventionally around the neck
The running ends of the knot however are pulled down towards the bottom of the bottle A Barrel Knot is tied about 34 the way down the side of the bottle A squareknot is tied on the bottom of the knot to keep the two running ends tight against the sides of the bottle
I like the look of the accent colored cord running down the sides of the bottle and the fact that the bottle hangs from the belt upside down It adds to its uniqueness
The last picture shows another truss variation
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 16 AdvancedBelow is a bottle with some additional trussing You can be creative as you want It all starts with a re-purposed container and the Jug Knot (and enough cord)
Related Instructables
AluminumBottle TumblerCup amp Cook Potfor an AlcoholStove byhpstoutharrow
Water BottleBelt Clip byuglymike Duct Tape
Water Bottle byrabidsquire2
AluminumBottle AlcoholStove byhpstoutharrow
DIYGlass WaterBottle byCulturespy
Solar WaterHeater forBackpackingUsing WaterBottles and aCar Shade bykopomeroy
Duct tape waterbottle holder(Photos) by pinkmarshmallow
How to make aCamelPack withan old plasticbottle bywillrandship
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Basic Knots Guideby zorro3355 on April 29 2008
Intro Basic Knots Guidehi
Step 1 Thumb knotThe most simple knotUsed as a stopper and prevent ropes from fraying
Step 2 Reef KnotUsed to tie two ropes of equal thickness togetherIt is pretty easy to tie and untie but under tentionit may be diffcult to untieIt is also not sutible for smoothropes(egnylon ropes)
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 3 Figure of eightused as a stopperprevent ropes from fraying and its more secure than tumb knot its is also used to tie Caribinas to ropes and is often used in rock climbing
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 4 Timber hitchused for pulling logs
Step 5 Clove hitchUsed to tie a rope onto a pole or logThe pole must be roundThe pole lust be thicker then the rope itself
(greatly used during pioneering)
Step 6 Sheet bandused to tie ropes of different thickness together(works on same thickness of ropes too)
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 7 Sheep shankTo shorten RopesTo prevent middle fraying
Step 8 Slip knotWhippingUsed as a grip for pulling things(when tied on a stick or small pole)(marlin spike hitch)
Related Instructables
Rope Rings byhpstoutharrow
How to Tie aFigure EightKnot byTactical_Pyro
Whippin (WestCountry Style)by tim_n
SurvivalBracelet(Updated) bytevers94
HangmansNoose PackClosure byPopEye42
Turkey on aTripod byhpstoutharrow
SurvivalBracelet II bytevers94 Zigzag Spooling
Paracord (video)by Stormdrane
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
How to Tie a Fire-escape Knotby leonardo ismael on October 16 2007
Intro How to Tie a Fire-escape KnotThis knot is used by firemen in case of fires for example imagine a scene where the ladder on the firetruck messes up but people need to get down a five story buildingor more All they have is a long piece of rope they can safely get down with a secure knot like the fire-escape knot So why not learn it its easy to do and hard to untieif you tie it tightly
This is from the American Boys Handbook
Step 1 Get Your RopeFirst grab a piece of rope and bend it like this to make a loop in it Follow every step to the smallest detail
Step 2 Twist the RopeNow make a twist like this and hold it together
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 3 Pull Through the TwistPull the loop through the twist you just made from underneath
Step 4 Go Over the Split EndNow pull the tail through the loop
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 5 FinallyAnd finally just pull it through as pictured below
Congratulations you just learned the fire-escape knot
Step 6 Same Name Not KnotThis is another knot called the fire-escape knot this shouldnt be your result
Related Instructables
House FireEscape Plan(video) byWhatHappensNowAdvice
ParacordLadder wWooden Rungsby josestude
Bed SheetEscape Rope byjessehensel
rope ladder(glow-in-the-dark version) bymikeasaurus
HeadlockEscape 2(video) byjohnnyrockstah
QuickFirestarter byMattandJora
Trail sauna byjakee117
How to Kill FireAnts andCommitGenocide byKentsOkay
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Climb Safe With A Figure 8 Knotby mattste on February 23 2010
Intro Climb Safe With A Figure 8 Knot There are many things that a beginning climber needs to know including several important knots Perhaps the most essential knot is the Figure 8 Follow Through Thistutorial will demonstrate how to correctly harness yourself to a rope using a Figure 8 Follow Through knot This knot is used primarily by rock climbers to provide a life-line Since this knot is used as a life-line it is very important to be able to tie it correctly (Your life could depend upon it)
Dont worry with this tutorial and about 5 minutes of practice you can have this knot mastered
Things you will need
- Climbing Harness- Climbing Rope
If you are wanting to go climbing and dont already have these items they can be purchased for about $25 each at most outdoor sporting goods stores If you are merelylooking to learn the knot a belt loop and a rope (about five feet long) will do
Image Notes1 Climbing Harness2 Climbing Rope
Step 1 Dealing With The RopeThroughout this tutorial I will be discussing different parts of the rope To make these instructions as clear as possible I will define a few terms that I will use throughoutthe tutorial The Anchor End of the rope will generally be at the top of the images This is the end that would be anchored to the wall or rock and does not move Wewill not be doing much with the anchored end The Tail End of the rope is the opposite end that we will be dealing with I will call this the tail for short
Now that we have some terms to work with lets get started
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 2 Tying The First Figure 8This knot has several parts to it The first part of the knot is just tying a basic figure 8 To tie the first figure 8 there are four simple steps
1 - Using the tail make a loop over the rope (as shown in the first picture) keeping in mind that there should be about 3 ft of slack on the tail end
2 - Wrap the tail back this time go under the anchored end (As shown in the second picture)
3 - Bring the tail down through the first loop (As shown in the third picture)
4 - Finally pull the two ends to make the knot a little bit tighter and easier to deal with (Shown in the fourth picture)
After these four steps you should end up with a knot that resembles a figure 8
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 3 Looping Into The Harness In order to secure the rope to the harness simply thread the tail end of the rope through the front loop in the harness as shown in the picture below This step isobviously very important
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 4 Following Back Through The Figure 8After looping the rope through the harness you have to thread the tail end of the rope back through the knot following the first figure 8 I have divided this process intofive smaller steps in order to make it more clear
1 - Coming form underneath the knot bring the tail up through the near loop and to the left behind the anchored end of the rope (Shown in the first picture)
2 - Wrap the tail around the anchored end back to the right and down through the adjacent loop (Shown in the second picture)
3 - You simply need to bring the tail back over the top of the knot to the left (Shown in the third picture)
4 - Bring the tail end up through the far loop following the anchored end (Shown in the fourth picture)
5 - Finally pull the knot tight (Shown in the fifth picture)
As you can see the first four pictures are simply tracing the knot back through with the tail end
For the last part while you pull the knot tight you may want to make small adjustments and rearrange how it all fits together If the knot does not lay perfectly smoothand tight its NOT a big deal
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 5 Finishing The Knot After completing the Figure 8 knot you will want to somehow secure the tail end of the rope out of the way There are a couple different ways to do this the way that Iwill demonstrate is using whats called a Stopper Knot This secondary knot is similar to a Fishermans knot and is pretty simple I have once again divided thisprocess into several smaller steps
1 - Start by wrapping the tail end around the anchored end (As shown in the first picture)
2 - Wrap the tail back underneath the two vertical segments (As shown in the second picture)
3 - Simply repeat the first two steps wrapping the tail around again (As shown in the third picture)
4 - This step in the fourth picture may look complicated but all you need to do is insert the tail up through the two loops that you have just made
5 - To finish off the knot you will want to slowly pull the tail end while gently pushing the bottom of the stopper knot upwards If you have successfully completed this knotit should look something like the fifth picture
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 6 Ready To Climb Now that you have mastered the Figure 8 knot you can securely harness yourself into a climbing rope Remember there are many other skills that go into setting up ananchor and belaying a climber This tutorial only covers the figure 8 knot For more information there are many great websites that demonstrate how to correctly set up asafe climbing system (Ive posted a few below) If you are a beginning climber I recommend that you read up on a few other climbing techniques Also you shouldprobably go to a climbing wall or gym where there are experienced climbers that can show you the ropes Hopefully this tutorial has been helpful Have fun and be safe
Some useful linkshttpwwwstephenprattnetAnchorsanchorshtmhttpwwwuoregonedu~oppclimbingtopicsanchorshtmlhttpwwwabc-of-rockclimbingcomhowtoclimbingtechniquesasp
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Related Instructables
How to Tie aFigure EightKnot byTactical_Pyro
Paracord KnotDisplay Bord byJamie bagn
Basic KnotsGuide byzorro3355
How to Climb aTree (withprussiks) bystasterisk
How to climb atree (using onlyrope) thefunsimple wayby louieaw
How to get arope into a tree(withoutclimbing it) byvitex
How to tievarious knots byadaviel
How to make arope swing byjdub0928
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Turks Head Knots on a Bottleby sklnxbones on July 6 2010
Intro Turks Head Knots on a BottleThis is the finished project A bottle decorated with three Turks Head Knots There are only three knots on this bottle The RED and the BLUE knots are each a 20 Bightby 3 Lead Turks Head Knots The WHITE knot is a 20 Bight by 19 Lead Turks Head Knot
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 1 Supplies
Cord Lots and Lots of cord I cant tell you how much each bottle is differentBottle Washed and Dried inside and out Make sure to remove all water spotsThreaded Needle Cord screws into the threads at the base of the needlePegs I use brass rivets used as a map to tie the Turks Head KnotsHole Punch Used to punch holes in the painters tape to hold the pegsPainters Tape To hold the pegs in place and to make your map for the Turks Head KnotsMarker To write on the painters tapeCloth Towel To remove finger prints and dirt from your bottleKrazy Glue or Super Glue This is used to secure the knots in place to the bottle
OPTIONAL BUT HIGHLY RECOMMENDEDI use the Turks Head Cookbook from KnotToolcom
Step 2 PreparationYou will need to find a bottle you like I used an empty instant tea bottle of course washed and dried (I like to put the bottle in the oven for a few minutes to dry the insidewithout water spots Take off the lid and do not put lid in the oven) Now measure the circumference of the bottle Take a cord and tightly wrap the cord around the bottleMark where the ends meet and use a ruler to measure the length of the cord For my instant tea bottle the circumference is 27cm I know from past knots that I have tiedthat I want my knot to have 20 Bights in the top and bottom (bands) knots I am going to use the Bights in the (bands) knots to tie the middle knot Now divide the numberof Bights (20) into the size of the circumference (27) to get the space between each Bight (135) With me so far
Now take two pieces of painters tape using a ruler measure out the length of the circumference and mark the length on the both pieces of tape Next you will mark thespace between each Bight on the tape
Step 3 Adding the PegsI like to use pegs when tying Turks Head Knots it just makes tying the knot easier
These are what I use for pegs
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 4 Adding Pegs to the TapeNow take a hole punch to cut holes in the tape where the lines meet You will place the pegs in the holes
Insert a peg in each hole and carefully stick the first piece of tape to the bottle
Step 5 Adding the 2nd row of pegsNow do the same thing with the second piece of tape The numbers on each piece of tape must line up
This picture shows you what you should have now This odd looking thing will be your map to tie the Turks Head Knot And this is the end of Step 1
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 6 Tying the first Turks Head KnotUsing the Turks Head Cookbook follow the numbers going over and under as indicated in the book I chose a 20 Bight by 3 Lead knot which will give me a nice bandaround the bottle Once the ends meet you have made one complete knot Tape the running end of your cord and start removing the pegs and the tape
Step 7 Remove the pegs and the tapeBe careful not to untie the knot as you remove the pegs and tape from the bottle Continue to remove all the pegs and remove the tape from the bottle At this point theknot will be very loose and will need to be tightened up
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 8 Remove the slack from the knotHere you can see just how much the knot expanded Starting with the standing end begin to pull the slack out of the knot going towards the running end of the cordDo not expect to pull all the slack out at once You may have to make 3 - 5 attempts at removing the slack out of the knot DO NOT remove all of the slack out of the knotIn order to make the bands we will have to triple the Turks Head Knot We will do this by following the knot three times The threaded needle will really come in handyhere
Step 9 Triple the KnotOnce you have made three passes of the Turks Head Knot use your needle to go under your knot about half the circumference and cut the cord The knot will be tightenough to hide the tail in placeTIP I carefully add a couple of drops of super glue UNDER the band to hold them in place and keep them from sliding around in the nextsteps A drop or two in 3 or 4 places around the band should be enough
Step 10 Add the second knotNow repeat this whole step for the second bandWhen tying the second band you must make sure the Bights line up to the first band This is crucial for the next stepWipe down the bottle to make sure all your finger prints and adhesive from the tape are all removed You want to make sure your bottle is clean at this point Any dirt orfinger prints left on the bottle will be almost impossible to remove From this point on we will use gloves when tying our last knot
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 11 Maping the Top KnotStick a piece of painters tape on top of your first band leaving the bottom of the knot exposedUse a marker to count the number of Bights in your knot Instead of using the pegs we are going to use the Bights to tie our next Turks Head Knot
Step 12 Mapping the Bottom KnotDo the same thing for the bottom band but you must make sure your numbers on top and bottom line up So 1 on top should be the same position as 1 on the bottom
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 13 Adding the last knotAgain using the Turks Head Cookbook and the threaded needle you are going to follow the instructions going over and under as indicated in the book Be sure to usegloves when ever you handle the bottle
Step 14 Thats ItFor this Turks Head Knot I am using a 20 Bight by 19 Lead knot
Because of the amount of cord you are working with your cord will get twisted and knotted You will have to un-twist the cord often Its a pain in the rear but it has to bedone And it has to be done alot
Continue to tie the knot until you finish the knot If you have the cord and the patience you can double or triple the knot When you are done use your needle to hide theends under your bands Cut the ends and your DONE
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Related Instructables
Monkeys FistFloatingKeychain byjokerlz
How To Make ATurks headKnot WithParacord byDoggie Stylish
Tying Trivetsout of Rope forHoliday Gifts bykylemarsh
Paracord KnotDisplay Bord byJamie bagn
How to Make ATurks Head(Photos) bymchs60chip
A pocket full ofknots byKiteman
Monkeys fistknot AND themonkey byjonathan111
TiteTie is theTruckers Knoton Steroids bytitetie
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Larks head noose -- an easy useful knot that tightens and loosensby Larry Breed on February 19 2009
Intro Larks head noose -- an easy useful knot that tightens and loosensI thought I knew all the basic knots but then I was taught this incredibly useful simple knot Its good for tying up the neck of a bag that you want to repeatedly open andsecurely close Its good for tying around a springy bundle that will need tightening and retightening And its easy to undo
Ive looked at knot literature but havent found a name for this so I named it The basic knot is well known its called a larks head Since all Ive done is to slip the twoends through the larks head to make a noose I call it that
WARNING Dont use this knot when human safety would depend on it Climbers and mountaineers have well-tested reliable knots for such situations
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Image Notes1 To tighten further step on this side of the larks head and pull the free ends
Step 1 Double the cord overThe larks head noose requires enough cord to go twice around your bundle plus a foot or two Find the center and double it over Sailors call this a bight
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 2 Form the larks headComing from below the bight hook your thumb and forefinger over the two sides Reach outward and downward and pinch your fingertips together underneath thedoubled cord
Youve made a larks head Move the crossing cord a little farther from your hand so theres a clear opening through the two half-loops
Step 3 Form the nooseSlip the two ends of the cord through the opening we were just talking about Pull the larks head tight so it grips the two cords Find something that needs constrictingand put the noose around it
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 4 Tightening retightening and lockingSlide the knot against the bundle If its not tight enough to keep from slipping tighten it by holding it in one hand and tugging on the cords one at a time with the otherhand Notice that you can slide the knot out again for instance to re-open the bag you just tied shut For some applications this may be as tight as you need it
A springy bundle probably still feels loose If so compress the bundle and get a new grip on the cords Rest your foot on the bundle on the cords nearest the larks headand pull to slide the larks head tighter
To make the knot more permanent you can lock it Make an overhand in the cord ends (Exactly like the first step in tying shoelaces) With your foot still on the bundlepull on the cords and move your hands apart until youre pulling in opposite directions You have just locked the larks head and you can trust it to stay that way()
But lets say that later on you want to loosen the locked knot Again put your foot on the bundle and cords nearest the larks head hold the two cord ends together andpull This makes a little slack between the overhand and the larks head so you can untie the overhand
In twine or small string the locking overhand knot may be difficult to undo Use a shoelace knot instead of an overhand and itll unlock easily
() If youre using slippery cord like polypropylene an overhand may not lock securely You may want to tie another overhand knot For added security wrap a shortlength of duct tape around the two cords close to the knot
Image Notes1 To tighten further step on this side of the larks head and pull the free ends
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Related Instructables
TRX fromParacordChallengeAccepted bythrake
A pocket full ofknots byKiteman
Lens CapLanyard by~teknoarsonist~ how to tie a
noose byawesume
AdjustableParacordGlassesLanyard byjdtwelve12
HangmansNoose PackClosure byPopEye42
Paraleash - ADog LeashFrom Paracordby The Ideanator
How to make arugged andhandy ParacordBelt by Jake22
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 12 Step 12
Turn the lanyard over so the other side of the knot is facing up The working strand now on the right side will be brought under the cords back up and down through theparallel strands of the knot as shown then tighten And continue this process flipping the lanyard over taking the right strand under and back up around and through theparallel cords and tighten Continue until you run out of cord or reach the cross knot
Youll now trim off any excess cord and quick melt the end of the strands to prevent fraying to finish
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 13 Variations
You can use other two strand knots instead of the cross knot for variations on this style of lanyard A few alternatives to try tying in a spaced out series or combination ofthem Matthew Walker knot double wall knot lanyard knot double overhand knots double figure 8 knots etc The finishing knots around the attachment can also bedifferent as Ive used the lanyard knot sometimes just one or several in a row
You can also use variations of the cross knot with paracord bracelets and watchbands Doubled version of the knot shown as a paracord bracelet and alternating withtwo pairs of strands for the paracord watchband Leftover pieces of paracord can be used for zipper pulls key ring fobs even paracord cross pendants
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Related Instructables
Paracord ChainSinnet FastDeploy BoonieHatband (video)by Stormdrane
Zigzag SpoolingParacord (video)by Stormdrane
SurvivalBracelet(Updated) bytevers94
Celtic ButtonKnot (video) byStormdrane
ParacordBoonie HatWrap (video) byStormdrane
Paracord wristlanyard madewith the snakeknot byStormdrane
SurvivalBracelet II bytevers94
Cobra WeaveKey Fob bytevers94
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Paracord wrist lanyard made with the snake knotby Stormdrane on September 12 2007
AuthorStormdrane Stormdranes BlogNo matter where you go there you are
Intro Paracord wrist lanyard made with the snake knotThis instructable will show how to make a wrist lanyard using paracord and the snake knot The lanyard can be used to secure a key chain knife multi-tool flashlightcell phone camera binoculars compass etc More projects links knot references can be seen on my blog page Stormdranes Blog
Step 1 SuppliesYoull need about 45 feet of paracord(you may use other types of cordage if desired) The paracord I used is from the Supply Captain I left the inner strands in theparacord but you can remove them if preferred If done in one color it will be one continuous 45 ft length if done in two colors youll need 3 ft for the primary color thatincludes the wrist section and 15 ft for the second color that will show in the snake knot Also used are scissors tape measure or ruler lighter hemostats or needle nosepliers(not necessary but they make it much easier) and a swivel clip key ring snap hook cell phone lariat carabiner or whatever attachment you prefer to use
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 2 Attaching two colors of paracordIf using two colors of paracord you will insert one color about 12 inch into the other color You may remove a small amount of the paracords inner strands by pullingthem out trimming with scissors and pulling the paracord outer sheath back over the strands leaving room to insert the other color For various projects Ive used threedifferent methods for attaching two colors of paracord melting sewing or gluing The choice is yours I usually sew them together it doesnt matter as long as its a goodconnection It will be hidden under the first knot
Step 3 Find the center of the length of paracordTake the center of the length of cord and bring it thru the attachment Im using a swivel clip For this tutorial Im measuring the wrist loop at about 10 inches from theattachment The connection of the two colors will be just on the other side at this point
Step 4 Making the snake knotThe snake knot will be made around the wrist loop section of paracord the loop strands being the core of the knot Ive added a series of photos showing the steps Iuse By using two colors youll see that I flip the lanyard over after making each knot so that Im working with the cord on the right side of the lanyard I bring it under allthe other cords working the hemostats under the previously tightened knot and pulling the cord back thru Then tightening up the knot keeping the cord from twisting andworking it up against the previous knot Again flipping the work over youll see two parallel cords of the same color which will be split with the cord on the right goingunder around and pulled thru with the hemostats then tightened up Continue this procedure until youve done about 10 snake knots(you can count them down eitherside
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 5 Count your knotsOnce you have 10 snake knots youre almost done Youll notice from the photos of both sides of the lanyard that one side has the snake knots alternating all the waydown and the other has a set of parallel knots at the top and botton of the sequence of knots Youll always have those at the start and finish of the snake knots I preferto have them end up on the same side of the lanyard so one side appears to have a more uniform look but its not required
Step 6 Trim and melt the excess paracordUse the scissors to trim off the excess cord and quickly melt the ends with a lighter so they dont fray
Step 7 Youre doneYou can make a range of variations using less or more cordknots Shorten the loop for a double ended key chain or make the loop longer for use as a neck lanyard aLanyard Break-Away Connector could be added for the safety conscious You can also add a wooden bead skull cord lock etc Visit my blog page for more knot relatedprojects links and resources Stormdranes Blog You can find ideas for other geargadgets to attach to your lanyard on EDC Forums
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Related Instructables
Paracord ChainSinnet FastDeploy BoonieHatband (video)by Stormdrane
Cross KnotParacordLanyard byStormdrane
Zigzag SpoolingParacord (video)by Stormdrane
SurvivalBracelet II bytevers94
SurvivalBracelet(Updated) bytevers94
Cobra WeaveKey Fob bytevers94
ParacordBoonie HatWrap (video) byStormdrane
Paracord KnotDisplay Bord byJamie bagn
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
How to tie various knotsby adaviel on September 7 2009
Intro How to tie various knotsKnots as a way of joining rope without special equipment are useful in many situations On a sailboat knots are essential both for daily use and for emergency repairsThis instructable describes several different common knots eg
Sheet Bend - to tie two lines togetherBowline - to make a loopReef Knot - to fasten a bundle of materialFishermans Bend - to secure a line to a post or ring
These knots are good for regular rope - braided or 3-strand polyester or natural fibre (hemp sisal) Monofilament (fishing line) or steel cable performs better with differentknots
Knots are typically quite a lot weaker than straight rope - when rope goes around a tight radius such as in a knot the outside is under more tension than the insideSplices (which require special tools and are time-consuming to make) are stronger so permanent fittings usually have eye-splices
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 1 Sheet BendThe sheet bend is used to tie two lines together It is perhaps the most generally useful knot of all When used to tie a line to itself making a loop it is called a bowlineThe strain is taken on the ropes in the middle - not the one coming out the side
How the knot is made is not critical - it is the final shape that is important One can make the flat loop first and work the other rope around it Or one can make thecrossed loop first - required when tying a bowline
The two images show front and back views of the same knot
AdvantagesEasy to makeEasy to undo when tension is removedDoes not easily capsize
DisadvantagesHard to make under loadDangerous to make under heavy load
UsesJoining two equally-sized ropesExtending a towline or stern line
Method 1 the same as a bowline
Method 2 starting with the flat loop
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 2 Double Sheet BendThe double sheet bend is used to tie two lines of different thickness - but not too different It is the same as a normal sheet bend but with an extra turn of the thinner ropearound the flat loop in the thickerThe load goes on the line through the flat loop not the one that comes out the side of the knot
UsesSecuring a heaving line to a tow lineExtending a stern line if you dont have enough line of one thickness
Step 3 BowlineThe bowline is really a special case of the sheet bend but it it tied at the end of a rope to make a loop
The photos show the completed loop and closeups of the front and back of the actual knot Note that it is the same as the sheet bend - but it must be made the right wayround This loop does not tighten in use The knot is quite easy to untie once the load is removed With practice it is very quick to tie
Some usesSecuring a dinghy line to a railing or stanchionSecuring an anchor line to an anchorTie a jib sheet to the sailTie a mooring line around a rock or treeTie a float to an anchor triplineUse one in each line to tie two ropes of very different sizes - eg a throwing line to a large tow ropeDisadvantages the knot must be completely made before it will take any strain - it is hard to tie if there is already a load on the rope
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Linked bowlines
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 4 Bowline on the BightA bowline on the bight is a bowline tied in a loop of rope (neither end is needed) The shape is the same as a bowline made with a double line but the middle of thebight forms the loop around the standing part
UsesAn impromptu bosuns chair - to sit in while being transferred between two boats at sea
Step 5 Clove HitchThe clove hitch can be made when you only have the bight (the middle) of a rope not the ends
UsesSecuring a burgee pole to a burgee halyard (a continuous loop of thin line)Securing a tiller from swinging
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 6 Round Turn and Two Half-HitchesThis is a knot used to secure a line to a ring or bar Wind a couple of turns around the bar then secure the end with two hitches around the standing part (this looks like aclove hitch when done)
AdvantagesCan be made under load - it is easy to take turns around the bar while maintaining tension on the ropeStrong - provided the bar is thicker than the rope the rope is not weakened by sharp bendsDisadvantagesThe end tends to work loose
UsesSecuring a line to a mooring ring or samson post
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 7 Fishermans BendThe fishermans bend is the same as the round turn and two half hitches except that the first hitch is looped under the round turn This uses the tension on the rope tosecure the end from working loose
AdvantagesSecure against working loose
DisadvantagesHard to make under tensionHard to undo under tensionMay seize up under load when wet making it hard to undo
UsesSecuring mooring line to ringSecuring fender lines to rail
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 8 Studsail BendThe studsail bend is like the fishermans bend but the second hitch is also secured under the round turn making it even more secure against working loose when undertension
AdvantagesVery secure against working looseDisadvantagesHard to make under tensionHard to undo under tension
Step 9 Figure-8 KnotThe figure-eight knot is used to prevent an end of rope from passing through a block (pulley) Sometimes called a stopper knot
The double figure-8 knot is used in rock climbing as an alternative to a bowline to secure a climbing harness to the end of a safety rope The double knot is made bymaking a single knot then tracing back around the knot with the free end after passing it around the harness loop
AdvantagesEasy to verify by inspectionNot prone to work loose
DisadvantagesSlow to make and undoCannot be made under load
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 10 Prussic KnotThe prussic knot may be used as a climbing ascender - when made around a vertical rope as shown downwards tension on the ends locks the knot while release oftension allows it to be slid up the rope A pair of prussic knots on foot loops may be used in tandem to climb a rope
UsesClimbing a ropeTaking up tension to free a riding turn on a winch
Step 11 Reef KnotThe reef knot or square knot is used to tie a bundle of material together It must be made around something - it should not be used to tie two free ropes togetherbecause it can easily capsizeIt should not be used to make a loop unless it can be tensioned around a solid object It should not be used around a person - use a bowline instead A capsized reefknot will slip easily and could constrict and cause severe injury
UsesReefing a sail (tying the unused portion around a spar)Securing a furled sail to a spar (sail ties)Wrapping a parcelTying shoelaces
AdvantagesMay be made under moderate load
DisadvantagesCapsizes (works free) if used improperlyCan seize up under load when wet
Tying the knot
Capsizing a reef knot
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 12 CleatsThis is not a knot but is very common on boatsThe first picture shows a rope cleated normally The second shows one with a final locking turn - the last turn is twisted before placing over the cleat so that the tensionon the rope helps secure the free end
When working with ropes under tension take a turn or two around a winch or cleat before trying to secure the end with a knot The load on the free end falls exponentiallywith each turn taken Severe injury can result if a finger or other body part is caught in a loop of rope or between a rope and another object
Step 13 Practice themIt is sometimes useful to be able to tie knots in the dark or as in this video behind your back
Related Instructables
AThird Hand forSailing or OtherThings by WadeTarzia
Paracord KnotDisplay Bord byJamie bagn
Trip LogOutriggerCanoe Sailingthe CaliforniaChannel Islandsby TimAnderson
How to Tie aFigure EightKnot byTactical_Pyro
How to build apirate ship bymdelaney3
Build a ShortDragon (16 foot3-BoardOutriggerSailing Canoe)by Wade Tarzia
repairing aheadsail by josh
How to get arope into a tree(withoutclimbing it) byvitex
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
How to Tie the Lanyard Knotby eddy14777 on January 31 2010
Intro How to Tie the Lanyard KnotMany people including myself have had trouble following the Stormdrane youtube video on tying the lanyard knot so i have done some research and found the solution
Image Notes1 Finished knot
Step 1 MaterialsAll you need is a reasonable length of para cord or whatever you wish to use
Image Notes1 One reasonable amount
Step 2 First StepThe first thing you are going to do is to make a bight that leaves you with to congruent endsThen you are going to put your ring finger through the bight
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Image Notes1 Close enough2 Bight
Step 3 Starting the KnotMake a loop just like the one in the picture and place it over the top strandBring the top strand under the bottom strand
Image Notes1 Notice the way the loop is done2 Top strand
Image Notes1 Bottom strand2 Top strand is under
Step 4 The Most Important PartNow you take the top stand from the previous picture and feed it over the first part of the loop under itself and back over the remainder of the loop
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Image Notes1 Under me2 Top strand3 This should make a diamond type shape
Step 5 DoublingNow take the bottom stand and take it around the part of the top strand nearest to the bight and than come up through the diamond shape in the middleDo the same for the top strand
Image Notes1 Top strand
Image Notes1 Both through the diamond
Step 6 FinishingWhen you take it off your finger it should look like thisWork out the slack by pulling on the bight and the two strands
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Image Notes1 Finished knot
Related Instructables
Cross KnotParacordLanyard byStormdrane
Celtic ButtonKnot (video) byStormdrane
Paracord wristlanyard madewith the snakeknot byStormdrane
Paracord ChainSinnet FastDeploy BoonieHatband (video)by Stormdrane
Zigzag SpoolingParacord (video)by Stormdrane
ParacordBoonie HatWrap (video) byStormdrane
Paracord IDbadge Lanyardby Flahusky
Cobra WeaveKey Fob bytevers94
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Four knots to make paracord into a useful toolby erik_mccray on March 27 2010
Authorerik_mccrayI am an ex-fabricator that is now a stay at home dad I love my new job but I do miss making stuff I love this site amp I am getting involved as a way to keep myskills upOn top of fad work I have also run two small business in the past One was custom sewing amp the other was as a small engine mechanicI have two votec degrees one in metal fabrication amp the other is in engine repairI look forward to getting to know everyone here
Intro Four knots to make paracord into a useful toolParacord is an awesome multitool used everywhere from the wild blue yonder to the deepest caverns But like any good tool it is only as good as the knowledge the userhas about the tool With most people out there using bungee cords amp ratchet straps it seems that paracord is being used for nothing more than friendship bracelets forgrown men This is a shame because for less then the price of a few cheap bungee cords amp some to short to be helpful straps You can get yourself hundreds of feet ofparacord
The key to getting the most out of the paracord is good knot work The first thing you need to know is what makes a good knot One is that the knot is easy amp quick to tieamp more impotant is that the knot is easy amp quick to untie The hitch class of knots is by far the best group of knots that the average person could know The four mostuseful hitch knots are the half hitch a quick simple knot that forms the base for many other knots the inline half hitch allowing you to get the most out of one length ofparacord the slippery hitch that gives you both on the fly control over tension on your paracord but also an adjustable loop that will not change unless you want it amp theinline truckers hitch instantly doubling the your pulling power
Step 1 To get started lets get some terminology that will be used defined
line= the paracord
Main line= the part of the paracord doing the work for example holding down your tarp or the long part of the paracord
Mid line= the middle of the length of the paracord
End line= the unused length of paracord or the short length of paracord
Step 2 The half hitch The half hitch is a simple way to secure a line to an anchor point like the tie down points in most trucks A half hitch is a constrictor knot meaning that the harder you pullon the line the tighter the knots grip gets Another common constrictor knot is the slip knot
Step 1 wrap your line around your anchor point Step 2 wrap the end line around the main line
Step 3 pass the end line threw the end line side of the newly formed loop
step 4 now take the slack out of the knot
step 5 to make sure the knot is secure tie another half hitch to the main line This knot is called adouble half hitch
step 6 another useful thing that can be done with the half hitch is that instead of repeating the wrap on the main line but repeating it on what you are tying to the half hitchcan be used to bind something like a stack of 2x4s
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Image Notes1 End line2 Main line3 step 1
Image Notes1 Step 2
Image Notes1 passing thew the end line side of the loop2 step 3
Image Notes1 step 5
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Image Notes1 step 6
Step 3 The mid line half hitch The mid line half hitch is for when the length of line is to long for the job at hand amp you dont want to have to cut the line to size or you are using multiple anchor pointswith one length of line
Step 1 double up the line at the point in the length you wish to make the knot
Step 2 wrap the doubled up portion of line around your anchor point The doubled up length is now now the end line
Step 3 now tie just as you did for the regular half hitch repeat the knot to make a double half hitch for security
Image Notes1 A mid line double half hitch
Image Notes1 step 1
Image Notes1 The end line2 step 2
Image Notes1 Step 3
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 4 The slippery hitch The slippery hitch is a great knot for adjusting tension on the main line or for having an adjustable fixed loop To adjust the knot simply slide the knot up or down the mainline
Step 1 wrap your line around the anchor point or just double over the line to form a loop
Step 2 wrap the end line around the main line three times Wrapping in the direction of the anchor point or loop
Step 3 put together the two lines making up the loop amp wrap the two lines one time with the end line
Step 4 pass the end line thew the last loop formed covering the two lined of the loop
Step 5 pull the knot tite
step 6 to adjust the size of the loop or main line tension grab the knot amp slide it up or down the main line
Image Notes1 grab just the knot its self to adjust it2 step 5
Image Notes1 step 1
Image Notes1 step 2
Image Notes1 step 3
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Image Notes1 step 4
Image Notes1 grab just the knot its self to adjust it2 step 5
Image Notes1 same knot as in last pic Just slid up2 step 6
Step 5 The mid line truchers hitch The truckers hitch is a great way to double the pulling force on a line There are many ways to tie this knot the problem with most of them is that at some point you aregoing to have to pass the end line through a loop on the main line that is acting like a pulley to double your pulling force this is great if you are making the knot close tothe end of your line but if you are using a 300 length of line amp want to make the knot in the first ten feet having to pass 290 of line thew a loop is a pain But with a fewhalf hitches you will not have to pass the end line threw any loop on the main line
step 1 wrap your line around the anchor point then double over your end line laying the top of the loop over the main line
Step 2 double up your main line amp lay the loop over the loop made by the end line
step 3 in main line above the knot twist in a loop
step 4 put main line loop thew the loop made in step 3 amp pull this loop tight over your main line loop forming a half hitch Repeat step 3 amp 4 to make a doublehalf hitch
step 5 To use the knot just pull down on the end line to put tension on the main line
step 6 after you have the main line snug tie a mid line double half hitch around the two lines forming the loop at the end of the main line with the end line
step 7 Tie a double half hitch with the end line around the end loop of the mid line half hitch of step 6 using the same method as used in steps 3 amp 4
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Image Notes1 the end of step 6
Image Notes1 main line2 end line3 step 1
Image Notes1 main line loop2 end line loop
Image Notes1 step 3
Image Notes1 step 4
Image Notes1 step 4 at the end with a double half hitch on the main loop
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Image Notes1 pull here2 step 5
Image Notes1 the start of step 6
Image Notes1 the end of step 6
Image Notes1 step 72 now the rest of the line is free to do more work
Related Instructables
Paracord KnotDisplay Bord byJamie bagn
ChokelessAdjustableParacord DogLeash byPizzaman101
ParacordLadder wWooden Rungsby josestude
tie a paracordshackle grip byitri45
ParacordPrussik Belt byJavaNut13
TiteTie is theTruckers Knoton Steroids bytitetie
ID Lanyard(Photos) byeschmunk
Dog Toys forHeavy Chewersby J3443RY
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Figure 8 knot and double 8 knotby jonathan111 on November 28 2007
Intro Figure 8 knot and double 8 knotI will show you how to tie a figure 8 knot and a figure 8 follow through
Step 1 Stating the knotThis is a simple knot so just follow the pictures
Step 2 Finishing the knotCross the string under and then push it through the hole Pull tightly unless you are going to do the follow through and leave it somewhat loose
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 3 The follow through knotThe follow through knot should be tied around something brought back and followed through the path of the 8 knot Look at the pictures Basically follow through the 8knot backwards
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Related Instructables
Climb Safe WithA Figure 8Knot by mattste A pocket full of
knots byKiteman
How to Tie aFigure EightKnot byTactical_Pyro
Paracord KnotDisplay Bord byJamie bagn
Cross KnotParacordLanyard byStormdrane
How to Tie aFire-escapeKnot by leonardoismael
Truckers HitchTHE mostawesome knoton the planetby schneidp20
Paracord ZipperPuller byrepeet13
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Truckers Hitch THE most awesome knot on the planetby schneidp20 on October 12 2008
Authorschneidp20I like building stuff Trouble is there just isnt enough time to build everything Sigh
Intro Truckers Hitch THE most awesome knot on the planetYes I know that there are plenty of other cool knots out there many of which I literally couldnt live wo I rock climb However this knot is unlike any other Plus Ineeded a grabber for my Instructable -) (BTW this ISNT a climbing knot) And in truth it isnt a knot by itself but rather a system of common knots
Have you ever tried to tie something down for transporting but just couldnt get the lines tight andor during transport the lines would continually loosen Then this is theknot for you I learned this knot back in the 70s when specialty car racks and ratchet straps were rare or unheard of I initially used it to tie a canoe on a car rack bothattaching to the rack as well as the lines to the bow and stern of the canoe Even with all the new gizmos available today this knot still shines because all you need is arope and ropes dont hum in the wind like straps
The unique aspect of this knot is that it gives you a 2-1 mechanical advantage when tightening the rope Be careful though You can actually damage some thingsbecause of the mechanical advantage This knot holds fast and is easy to untie hallmark traits of any good knot
Below you see the finished knot system well break it apart in the steps that follow
Image Notes1 1st anchor point a bowline2 loop3 securing knots 2 half hitches4 securing loose end with a fishermans knot5 2nd anchor point (should be round)
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Image Notes1 X marks the spot
Step 1 Initial setupThe first step is to anchor one end of the rope and then loop the rope around a 2nd anchor point
For attaching to the 1st anchor point I chose bowline a close 2 on my list -) There are other instructables on that one so I wont bore you here
The 2nd anchor really should be round because it serves as a pulley in this block and tackle type knot Ive used it on sharp anchor points and it doesnt work as well
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 2 Creating a slip knotTie a slip knot somewhere between the two anchor points Correct placement of the slip knot takes some experience to judge it correctly Typically I place it too close tothe 2nd anchor point and end up with not enough room to work with If the knot ends up too far from 2nd anchor point you can extend the knot by enlarging the loop
Be sure you tie the slip knot as shown You may not be able to untie other knots
In this small example the slip knot is uncharacteristically close to the 1st anchor point
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 3 Tightening and securingThe loose end of the rope that went around the 2nd anchor point goes through the slip knot loop Pull the loose end to the desired tension and secure with two halfhitches
Note To allow better view of the knots the rope isnt really tightened in this example
Step 4 Securing loose endThe final knot is just to secure the loose end somehow I chose a fishermans knot to do this
To tie a fishermans knot the rope goes around twice and goes under the X created by the loops Pull the loose end to tighten Finally slide the knot to put tension onthe half hitches
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Image Notes1 X marks the spot
Step 5 FinishedThere you have it I guarantee that the first time you really use this knot (not just practice) you will be amazed at how well it works and youll wish you knew this knot along time ago You may even come over to my side and declare that is is THE most awesome knot on the planet -)
Enjoy and happy haulingDave
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Related Instructables
TiteTie is theTruckers Knoton Steroids bytitetie
Four knots tomake paracordinto a usefultool byerik_mccray
Modify yourbike rack tocarry a sunfishor other boat byewilhelm
SurfboardHammock byGermy
GiganticHalloweenSpider Web bynolte919
How To Tie ASpiders Hitch(video) by back-cast
Three-hitch mathair ornamentby michiexile TRX from
ParacordChallengeAccepted bythrake
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Carry any Bottle with a JUG KNOT Handleby hpstoutharrow on September 17 2009
Intro Carry any Bottle with a JUG KNOT HandleTie a JUG KNOT around a water bottle soda bottle or aluminum bottle to make a secure carrying strap
Re-purpose any container into a reusable water bottle by adding a convenient carrying strap This Instructable will demonstrate how to tie a JUG knot which like its namesuggests is meant to properly secure around the neck of a container
With some cord and the knowledge of this knot you will be able add a handle lanyard or carabiner loop to any of your favorite beverages to carry them on the go
It works perfectly for those disposable water bottles and who knows once you add some colorful cord to the plain old clear water bottle you just might beinclined to refill it and use it again(Check out pictures 4amp5 below)
In addition to plastic beverage bottles like pop water and sports drinks you can turn those rugged aluminum beer bottles into a backpacking canteen
Those of you familiar with my previous aluminum bottle InstructablesROLLED RIM METAL TUMBLERhttpwwwinstructablescomidAluminum-Bottle-Tumbler-Cup-Cook-PotALUMINUM BOTTLE LIGHTWEIGHT ALCOHOL STOVEhttpwwwinstructablescomidAluminum-Bottle-Alcohol-Stovewill recognize the water canteen shown below as a re-purposed aluminum beer bottle Here I have added a painted surface treatment to turn it into a proper lookingwater bottle More on that in steps 13 14 15
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 1 Getting StartedCord size is important Select a small medium weight cord like the one shown here It is a general purpose camp cord sold at most sporting goods stores (shoelacesmight also work)
Do not use a heavy cord or rope because the larger diameter will not tuck under the relatively small lip at the top of the bottleneck and the bottle will fall out
Also the smaller cord cinches tight on itself and will not loosen accidentally
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 2 Form a BightThe next steps show how to tie a JUG KNOT It is the basic step for adding a carrying strap It is also the anchor point for any additional fancy bottle trussing you maywant to add
JUG KNOT Step 1
Form a Bight in the center of a length of cord Bight is a knot term for a loop or bend in the rope In this case the main Bight in this knot is highlighted with a white mark Imakes it easier to follow its path in these steps
The running ends of the cord should be equal length
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 3 Pull the Bight downPULL the Bight DOWN forming two Loops
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 4 Cross the LoopsCROSS the right Loop OVER the left Loop
Step 5 Pass the Bight under the 1st loopTake the main Bight and pass it UNDER the left Loop
Step 6 Weave the BightWEAVE the Bight OVER the portion of the right Loop and UNDER the portion of the left Loop
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 7 Extend the BightExtend the Bight OVER the outer portion of the right Loop
Step 8 Flip the Right Loop behindAdditional colored identification points have been added to the loops to follow their travel in these next two steps
The right Loop Yellow marker is FLIPPED BEHIND the knot and ends up on the far left side of the knot
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 9 Flip the 2nd loop in frontRaise the green marker (located on what was formerly the left loop) and pull it down and to the right FLIPPING IT IN FRONT of the knot
Note the blue portion of the this loop will pass around the outside of the yellow portion of the first loop
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Image Notes1 Center of knot that will tighten around the bottles neck
Step 10 Remove SlackNote where the blue green amp yellow markers end up
Start to remove the slack in the loops by pulling the original main Bight (white marker top right) and the two free standing ends at the bottom
the bottle neck will pass through the very center of the knot
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Image Notes1 Center of knot that will tighten around the bottles neck
Step 11 Tighten the KnotAfter removing the slack insert the bottle neck and finish tightening
The knot should look like this before slipping it over the bottle
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 12 Secure on bottle neckThis is the finished knot shown on the neck of various containers
The loop end and the two free standing ends can be tied together to create a carrying handle (last picture below)
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 13 Aluminum Bottle Water Bottle
The next few steps show the features of an aluminum beer bottle re-purposed as a water bottle canteen It is one of many containers that can be reused as a camp waterbottle
The bottle was lightly sanded masked and then pained with a hammered finished paint to create an interesting surface texture
Image Notes1 Textured finish paint makes an interesting grip-able surface2 Masked with tape for painting3 Masked with tape for painting
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Image Notes1 Dowel used for holding the bottle during painting
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 14 Tethered Cork StopperUse a wine bottle man made Cork as a stopper for your aluminum water bottleNote Use a cork that was removed from the wine bottle without the corkscrew penetrating through the bottom end of the cork (A hole all the way through the cork willcause it to leak) Use the unpierced end of the cork inside the water bottle
Drill a hole through the sides of the Cork Thread the cord through the hole to the center of the cord Use the cork as the main Bight and tie the Jug knot as shown inthe beginning steps
Now the cork is tethered to the bottle and will not get lost or fall on the ground
A Carabiner clip passes through the other cord end to attache the water bottle to you belt or pack
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 15 Trussed for TransportThis is another hanging method for carrying your aluminum bottle water canteen A Jug knot is tied conventionally around the neck
The running ends of the knot however are pulled down towards the bottom of the bottle A Barrel Knot is tied about 34 the way down the side of the bottle A squareknot is tied on the bottom of the knot to keep the two running ends tight against the sides of the bottle
I like the look of the accent colored cord running down the sides of the bottle and the fact that the bottle hangs from the belt upside down It adds to its uniqueness
The last picture shows another truss variation
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 16 AdvancedBelow is a bottle with some additional trussing You can be creative as you want It all starts with a re-purposed container and the Jug Knot (and enough cord)
Related Instructables
AluminumBottle TumblerCup amp Cook Potfor an AlcoholStove byhpstoutharrow
Water BottleBelt Clip byuglymike Duct Tape
Water Bottle byrabidsquire2
AluminumBottle AlcoholStove byhpstoutharrow
DIYGlass WaterBottle byCulturespy
Solar WaterHeater forBackpackingUsing WaterBottles and aCar Shade bykopomeroy
Duct tape waterbottle holder(Photos) by pinkmarshmallow
How to make aCamelPack withan old plasticbottle bywillrandship
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Basic Knots Guideby zorro3355 on April 29 2008
Intro Basic Knots Guidehi
Step 1 Thumb knotThe most simple knotUsed as a stopper and prevent ropes from fraying
Step 2 Reef KnotUsed to tie two ropes of equal thickness togetherIt is pretty easy to tie and untie but under tentionit may be diffcult to untieIt is also not sutible for smoothropes(egnylon ropes)
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 3 Figure of eightused as a stopperprevent ropes from fraying and its more secure than tumb knot its is also used to tie Caribinas to ropes and is often used in rock climbing
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 4 Timber hitchused for pulling logs
Step 5 Clove hitchUsed to tie a rope onto a pole or logThe pole must be roundThe pole lust be thicker then the rope itself
(greatly used during pioneering)
Step 6 Sheet bandused to tie ropes of different thickness together(works on same thickness of ropes too)
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 7 Sheep shankTo shorten RopesTo prevent middle fraying
Step 8 Slip knotWhippingUsed as a grip for pulling things(when tied on a stick or small pole)(marlin spike hitch)
Related Instructables
Rope Rings byhpstoutharrow
How to Tie aFigure EightKnot byTactical_Pyro
Whippin (WestCountry Style)by tim_n
SurvivalBracelet(Updated) bytevers94
HangmansNoose PackClosure byPopEye42
Turkey on aTripod byhpstoutharrow
SurvivalBracelet II bytevers94 Zigzag Spooling
Paracord (video)by Stormdrane
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
How to Tie a Fire-escape Knotby leonardo ismael on October 16 2007
Intro How to Tie a Fire-escape KnotThis knot is used by firemen in case of fires for example imagine a scene where the ladder on the firetruck messes up but people need to get down a five story buildingor more All they have is a long piece of rope they can safely get down with a secure knot like the fire-escape knot So why not learn it its easy to do and hard to untieif you tie it tightly
This is from the American Boys Handbook
Step 1 Get Your RopeFirst grab a piece of rope and bend it like this to make a loop in it Follow every step to the smallest detail
Step 2 Twist the RopeNow make a twist like this and hold it together
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 3 Pull Through the TwistPull the loop through the twist you just made from underneath
Step 4 Go Over the Split EndNow pull the tail through the loop
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 5 FinallyAnd finally just pull it through as pictured below
Congratulations you just learned the fire-escape knot
Step 6 Same Name Not KnotThis is another knot called the fire-escape knot this shouldnt be your result
Related Instructables
House FireEscape Plan(video) byWhatHappensNowAdvice
ParacordLadder wWooden Rungsby josestude
Bed SheetEscape Rope byjessehensel
rope ladder(glow-in-the-dark version) bymikeasaurus
HeadlockEscape 2(video) byjohnnyrockstah
QuickFirestarter byMattandJora
Trail sauna byjakee117
How to Kill FireAnts andCommitGenocide byKentsOkay
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Climb Safe With A Figure 8 Knotby mattste on February 23 2010
Intro Climb Safe With A Figure 8 Knot There are many things that a beginning climber needs to know including several important knots Perhaps the most essential knot is the Figure 8 Follow Through Thistutorial will demonstrate how to correctly harness yourself to a rope using a Figure 8 Follow Through knot This knot is used primarily by rock climbers to provide a life-line Since this knot is used as a life-line it is very important to be able to tie it correctly (Your life could depend upon it)
Dont worry with this tutorial and about 5 minutes of practice you can have this knot mastered
Things you will need
- Climbing Harness- Climbing Rope
If you are wanting to go climbing and dont already have these items they can be purchased for about $25 each at most outdoor sporting goods stores If you are merelylooking to learn the knot a belt loop and a rope (about five feet long) will do
Image Notes1 Climbing Harness2 Climbing Rope
Step 1 Dealing With The RopeThroughout this tutorial I will be discussing different parts of the rope To make these instructions as clear as possible I will define a few terms that I will use throughoutthe tutorial The Anchor End of the rope will generally be at the top of the images This is the end that would be anchored to the wall or rock and does not move Wewill not be doing much with the anchored end The Tail End of the rope is the opposite end that we will be dealing with I will call this the tail for short
Now that we have some terms to work with lets get started
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 2 Tying The First Figure 8This knot has several parts to it The first part of the knot is just tying a basic figure 8 To tie the first figure 8 there are four simple steps
1 - Using the tail make a loop over the rope (as shown in the first picture) keeping in mind that there should be about 3 ft of slack on the tail end
2 - Wrap the tail back this time go under the anchored end (As shown in the second picture)
3 - Bring the tail down through the first loop (As shown in the third picture)
4 - Finally pull the two ends to make the knot a little bit tighter and easier to deal with (Shown in the fourth picture)
After these four steps you should end up with a knot that resembles a figure 8
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 3 Looping Into The Harness In order to secure the rope to the harness simply thread the tail end of the rope through the front loop in the harness as shown in the picture below This step isobviously very important
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 4 Following Back Through The Figure 8After looping the rope through the harness you have to thread the tail end of the rope back through the knot following the first figure 8 I have divided this process intofive smaller steps in order to make it more clear
1 - Coming form underneath the knot bring the tail up through the near loop and to the left behind the anchored end of the rope (Shown in the first picture)
2 - Wrap the tail around the anchored end back to the right and down through the adjacent loop (Shown in the second picture)
3 - You simply need to bring the tail back over the top of the knot to the left (Shown in the third picture)
4 - Bring the tail end up through the far loop following the anchored end (Shown in the fourth picture)
5 - Finally pull the knot tight (Shown in the fifth picture)
As you can see the first four pictures are simply tracing the knot back through with the tail end
For the last part while you pull the knot tight you may want to make small adjustments and rearrange how it all fits together If the knot does not lay perfectly smoothand tight its NOT a big deal
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 5 Finishing The Knot After completing the Figure 8 knot you will want to somehow secure the tail end of the rope out of the way There are a couple different ways to do this the way that Iwill demonstrate is using whats called a Stopper Knot This secondary knot is similar to a Fishermans knot and is pretty simple I have once again divided thisprocess into several smaller steps
1 - Start by wrapping the tail end around the anchored end (As shown in the first picture)
2 - Wrap the tail back underneath the two vertical segments (As shown in the second picture)
3 - Simply repeat the first two steps wrapping the tail around again (As shown in the third picture)
4 - This step in the fourth picture may look complicated but all you need to do is insert the tail up through the two loops that you have just made
5 - To finish off the knot you will want to slowly pull the tail end while gently pushing the bottom of the stopper knot upwards If you have successfully completed this knotit should look something like the fifth picture
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 6 Ready To Climb Now that you have mastered the Figure 8 knot you can securely harness yourself into a climbing rope Remember there are many other skills that go into setting up ananchor and belaying a climber This tutorial only covers the figure 8 knot For more information there are many great websites that demonstrate how to correctly set up asafe climbing system (Ive posted a few below) If you are a beginning climber I recommend that you read up on a few other climbing techniques Also you shouldprobably go to a climbing wall or gym where there are experienced climbers that can show you the ropes Hopefully this tutorial has been helpful Have fun and be safe
Some useful linkshttpwwwstephenprattnetAnchorsanchorshtmhttpwwwuoregonedu~oppclimbingtopicsanchorshtmlhttpwwwabc-of-rockclimbingcomhowtoclimbingtechniquesasp
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Related Instructables
How to Tie aFigure EightKnot byTactical_Pyro
Paracord KnotDisplay Bord byJamie bagn
Basic KnotsGuide byzorro3355
How to Climb aTree (withprussiks) bystasterisk
How to climb atree (using onlyrope) thefunsimple wayby louieaw
How to get arope into a tree(withoutclimbing it) byvitex
How to tievarious knots byadaviel
How to make arope swing byjdub0928
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Turks Head Knots on a Bottleby sklnxbones on July 6 2010
Intro Turks Head Knots on a BottleThis is the finished project A bottle decorated with three Turks Head Knots There are only three knots on this bottle The RED and the BLUE knots are each a 20 Bightby 3 Lead Turks Head Knots The WHITE knot is a 20 Bight by 19 Lead Turks Head Knot
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 1 Supplies
Cord Lots and Lots of cord I cant tell you how much each bottle is differentBottle Washed and Dried inside and out Make sure to remove all water spotsThreaded Needle Cord screws into the threads at the base of the needlePegs I use brass rivets used as a map to tie the Turks Head KnotsHole Punch Used to punch holes in the painters tape to hold the pegsPainters Tape To hold the pegs in place and to make your map for the Turks Head KnotsMarker To write on the painters tapeCloth Towel To remove finger prints and dirt from your bottleKrazy Glue or Super Glue This is used to secure the knots in place to the bottle
OPTIONAL BUT HIGHLY RECOMMENDEDI use the Turks Head Cookbook from KnotToolcom
Step 2 PreparationYou will need to find a bottle you like I used an empty instant tea bottle of course washed and dried (I like to put the bottle in the oven for a few minutes to dry the insidewithout water spots Take off the lid and do not put lid in the oven) Now measure the circumference of the bottle Take a cord and tightly wrap the cord around the bottleMark where the ends meet and use a ruler to measure the length of the cord For my instant tea bottle the circumference is 27cm I know from past knots that I have tiedthat I want my knot to have 20 Bights in the top and bottom (bands) knots I am going to use the Bights in the (bands) knots to tie the middle knot Now divide the numberof Bights (20) into the size of the circumference (27) to get the space between each Bight (135) With me so far
Now take two pieces of painters tape using a ruler measure out the length of the circumference and mark the length on the both pieces of tape Next you will mark thespace between each Bight on the tape
Step 3 Adding the PegsI like to use pegs when tying Turks Head Knots it just makes tying the knot easier
These are what I use for pegs
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 4 Adding Pegs to the TapeNow take a hole punch to cut holes in the tape where the lines meet You will place the pegs in the holes
Insert a peg in each hole and carefully stick the first piece of tape to the bottle
Step 5 Adding the 2nd row of pegsNow do the same thing with the second piece of tape The numbers on each piece of tape must line up
This picture shows you what you should have now This odd looking thing will be your map to tie the Turks Head Knot And this is the end of Step 1
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 6 Tying the first Turks Head KnotUsing the Turks Head Cookbook follow the numbers going over and under as indicated in the book I chose a 20 Bight by 3 Lead knot which will give me a nice bandaround the bottle Once the ends meet you have made one complete knot Tape the running end of your cord and start removing the pegs and the tape
Step 7 Remove the pegs and the tapeBe careful not to untie the knot as you remove the pegs and tape from the bottle Continue to remove all the pegs and remove the tape from the bottle At this point theknot will be very loose and will need to be tightened up
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 8 Remove the slack from the knotHere you can see just how much the knot expanded Starting with the standing end begin to pull the slack out of the knot going towards the running end of the cordDo not expect to pull all the slack out at once You may have to make 3 - 5 attempts at removing the slack out of the knot DO NOT remove all of the slack out of the knotIn order to make the bands we will have to triple the Turks Head Knot We will do this by following the knot three times The threaded needle will really come in handyhere
Step 9 Triple the KnotOnce you have made three passes of the Turks Head Knot use your needle to go under your knot about half the circumference and cut the cord The knot will be tightenough to hide the tail in placeTIP I carefully add a couple of drops of super glue UNDER the band to hold them in place and keep them from sliding around in the nextsteps A drop or two in 3 or 4 places around the band should be enough
Step 10 Add the second knotNow repeat this whole step for the second bandWhen tying the second band you must make sure the Bights line up to the first band This is crucial for the next stepWipe down the bottle to make sure all your finger prints and adhesive from the tape are all removed You want to make sure your bottle is clean at this point Any dirt orfinger prints left on the bottle will be almost impossible to remove From this point on we will use gloves when tying our last knot
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 11 Maping the Top KnotStick a piece of painters tape on top of your first band leaving the bottom of the knot exposedUse a marker to count the number of Bights in your knot Instead of using the pegs we are going to use the Bights to tie our next Turks Head Knot
Step 12 Mapping the Bottom KnotDo the same thing for the bottom band but you must make sure your numbers on top and bottom line up So 1 on top should be the same position as 1 on the bottom
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 13 Adding the last knotAgain using the Turks Head Cookbook and the threaded needle you are going to follow the instructions going over and under as indicated in the book Be sure to usegloves when ever you handle the bottle
Step 14 Thats ItFor this Turks Head Knot I am using a 20 Bight by 19 Lead knot
Because of the amount of cord you are working with your cord will get twisted and knotted You will have to un-twist the cord often Its a pain in the rear but it has to bedone And it has to be done alot
Continue to tie the knot until you finish the knot If you have the cord and the patience you can double or triple the knot When you are done use your needle to hide theends under your bands Cut the ends and your DONE
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Related Instructables
Monkeys FistFloatingKeychain byjokerlz
How To Make ATurks headKnot WithParacord byDoggie Stylish
Tying Trivetsout of Rope forHoliday Gifts bykylemarsh
Paracord KnotDisplay Bord byJamie bagn
How to Make ATurks Head(Photos) bymchs60chip
A pocket full ofknots byKiteman
Monkeys fistknot AND themonkey byjonathan111
TiteTie is theTruckers Knoton Steroids bytitetie
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Larks head noose -- an easy useful knot that tightens and loosensby Larry Breed on February 19 2009
Intro Larks head noose -- an easy useful knot that tightens and loosensI thought I knew all the basic knots but then I was taught this incredibly useful simple knot Its good for tying up the neck of a bag that you want to repeatedly open andsecurely close Its good for tying around a springy bundle that will need tightening and retightening And its easy to undo
Ive looked at knot literature but havent found a name for this so I named it The basic knot is well known its called a larks head Since all Ive done is to slip the twoends through the larks head to make a noose I call it that
WARNING Dont use this knot when human safety would depend on it Climbers and mountaineers have well-tested reliable knots for such situations
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Image Notes1 To tighten further step on this side of the larks head and pull the free ends
Step 1 Double the cord overThe larks head noose requires enough cord to go twice around your bundle plus a foot or two Find the center and double it over Sailors call this a bight
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 2 Form the larks headComing from below the bight hook your thumb and forefinger over the two sides Reach outward and downward and pinch your fingertips together underneath thedoubled cord
Youve made a larks head Move the crossing cord a little farther from your hand so theres a clear opening through the two half-loops
Step 3 Form the nooseSlip the two ends of the cord through the opening we were just talking about Pull the larks head tight so it grips the two cords Find something that needs constrictingand put the noose around it
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 4 Tightening retightening and lockingSlide the knot against the bundle If its not tight enough to keep from slipping tighten it by holding it in one hand and tugging on the cords one at a time with the otherhand Notice that you can slide the knot out again for instance to re-open the bag you just tied shut For some applications this may be as tight as you need it
A springy bundle probably still feels loose If so compress the bundle and get a new grip on the cords Rest your foot on the bundle on the cords nearest the larks headand pull to slide the larks head tighter
To make the knot more permanent you can lock it Make an overhand in the cord ends (Exactly like the first step in tying shoelaces) With your foot still on the bundlepull on the cords and move your hands apart until youre pulling in opposite directions You have just locked the larks head and you can trust it to stay that way()
But lets say that later on you want to loosen the locked knot Again put your foot on the bundle and cords nearest the larks head hold the two cord ends together andpull This makes a little slack between the overhand and the larks head so you can untie the overhand
In twine or small string the locking overhand knot may be difficult to undo Use a shoelace knot instead of an overhand and itll unlock easily
() If youre using slippery cord like polypropylene an overhand may not lock securely You may want to tie another overhand knot For added security wrap a shortlength of duct tape around the two cords close to the knot
Image Notes1 To tighten further step on this side of the larks head and pull the free ends
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Related Instructables
TRX fromParacordChallengeAccepted bythrake
A pocket full ofknots byKiteman
Lens CapLanyard by~teknoarsonist~ how to tie a
noose byawesume
AdjustableParacordGlassesLanyard byjdtwelve12
HangmansNoose PackClosure byPopEye42
Paraleash - ADog LeashFrom Paracordby The Ideanator
How to make arugged andhandy ParacordBelt by Jake22
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 13 Variations
You can use other two strand knots instead of the cross knot for variations on this style of lanyard A few alternatives to try tying in a spaced out series or combination ofthem Matthew Walker knot double wall knot lanyard knot double overhand knots double figure 8 knots etc The finishing knots around the attachment can also bedifferent as Ive used the lanyard knot sometimes just one or several in a row
You can also use variations of the cross knot with paracord bracelets and watchbands Doubled version of the knot shown as a paracord bracelet and alternating withtwo pairs of strands for the paracord watchband Leftover pieces of paracord can be used for zipper pulls key ring fobs even paracord cross pendants
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Related Instructables
Paracord ChainSinnet FastDeploy BoonieHatband (video)by Stormdrane
Zigzag SpoolingParacord (video)by Stormdrane
SurvivalBracelet(Updated) bytevers94
Celtic ButtonKnot (video) byStormdrane
ParacordBoonie HatWrap (video) byStormdrane
Paracord wristlanyard madewith the snakeknot byStormdrane
SurvivalBracelet II bytevers94
Cobra WeaveKey Fob bytevers94
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Paracord wrist lanyard made with the snake knotby Stormdrane on September 12 2007
AuthorStormdrane Stormdranes BlogNo matter where you go there you are
Intro Paracord wrist lanyard made with the snake knotThis instructable will show how to make a wrist lanyard using paracord and the snake knot The lanyard can be used to secure a key chain knife multi-tool flashlightcell phone camera binoculars compass etc More projects links knot references can be seen on my blog page Stormdranes Blog
Step 1 SuppliesYoull need about 45 feet of paracord(you may use other types of cordage if desired) The paracord I used is from the Supply Captain I left the inner strands in theparacord but you can remove them if preferred If done in one color it will be one continuous 45 ft length if done in two colors youll need 3 ft for the primary color thatincludes the wrist section and 15 ft for the second color that will show in the snake knot Also used are scissors tape measure or ruler lighter hemostats or needle nosepliers(not necessary but they make it much easier) and a swivel clip key ring snap hook cell phone lariat carabiner or whatever attachment you prefer to use
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 2 Attaching two colors of paracordIf using two colors of paracord you will insert one color about 12 inch into the other color You may remove a small amount of the paracords inner strands by pullingthem out trimming with scissors and pulling the paracord outer sheath back over the strands leaving room to insert the other color For various projects Ive used threedifferent methods for attaching two colors of paracord melting sewing or gluing The choice is yours I usually sew them together it doesnt matter as long as its a goodconnection It will be hidden under the first knot
Step 3 Find the center of the length of paracordTake the center of the length of cord and bring it thru the attachment Im using a swivel clip For this tutorial Im measuring the wrist loop at about 10 inches from theattachment The connection of the two colors will be just on the other side at this point
Step 4 Making the snake knotThe snake knot will be made around the wrist loop section of paracord the loop strands being the core of the knot Ive added a series of photos showing the steps Iuse By using two colors youll see that I flip the lanyard over after making each knot so that Im working with the cord on the right side of the lanyard I bring it under allthe other cords working the hemostats under the previously tightened knot and pulling the cord back thru Then tightening up the knot keeping the cord from twisting andworking it up against the previous knot Again flipping the work over youll see two parallel cords of the same color which will be split with the cord on the right goingunder around and pulled thru with the hemostats then tightened up Continue this procedure until youve done about 10 snake knots(you can count them down eitherside
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 5 Count your knotsOnce you have 10 snake knots youre almost done Youll notice from the photos of both sides of the lanyard that one side has the snake knots alternating all the waydown and the other has a set of parallel knots at the top and botton of the sequence of knots Youll always have those at the start and finish of the snake knots I preferto have them end up on the same side of the lanyard so one side appears to have a more uniform look but its not required
Step 6 Trim and melt the excess paracordUse the scissors to trim off the excess cord and quickly melt the ends with a lighter so they dont fray
Step 7 Youre doneYou can make a range of variations using less or more cordknots Shorten the loop for a double ended key chain or make the loop longer for use as a neck lanyard aLanyard Break-Away Connector could be added for the safety conscious You can also add a wooden bead skull cord lock etc Visit my blog page for more knot relatedprojects links and resources Stormdranes Blog You can find ideas for other geargadgets to attach to your lanyard on EDC Forums
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Related Instructables
Paracord ChainSinnet FastDeploy BoonieHatband (video)by Stormdrane
Cross KnotParacordLanyard byStormdrane
Zigzag SpoolingParacord (video)by Stormdrane
SurvivalBracelet II bytevers94
SurvivalBracelet(Updated) bytevers94
Cobra WeaveKey Fob bytevers94
ParacordBoonie HatWrap (video) byStormdrane
Paracord KnotDisplay Bord byJamie bagn
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
How to tie various knotsby adaviel on September 7 2009
Intro How to tie various knotsKnots as a way of joining rope without special equipment are useful in many situations On a sailboat knots are essential both for daily use and for emergency repairsThis instructable describes several different common knots eg
Sheet Bend - to tie two lines togetherBowline - to make a loopReef Knot - to fasten a bundle of materialFishermans Bend - to secure a line to a post or ring
These knots are good for regular rope - braided or 3-strand polyester or natural fibre (hemp sisal) Monofilament (fishing line) or steel cable performs better with differentknots
Knots are typically quite a lot weaker than straight rope - when rope goes around a tight radius such as in a knot the outside is under more tension than the insideSplices (which require special tools and are time-consuming to make) are stronger so permanent fittings usually have eye-splices
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 1 Sheet BendThe sheet bend is used to tie two lines together It is perhaps the most generally useful knot of all When used to tie a line to itself making a loop it is called a bowlineThe strain is taken on the ropes in the middle - not the one coming out the side
How the knot is made is not critical - it is the final shape that is important One can make the flat loop first and work the other rope around it Or one can make thecrossed loop first - required when tying a bowline
The two images show front and back views of the same knot
AdvantagesEasy to makeEasy to undo when tension is removedDoes not easily capsize
DisadvantagesHard to make under loadDangerous to make under heavy load
UsesJoining two equally-sized ropesExtending a towline or stern line
Method 1 the same as a bowline
Method 2 starting with the flat loop
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 2 Double Sheet BendThe double sheet bend is used to tie two lines of different thickness - but not too different It is the same as a normal sheet bend but with an extra turn of the thinner ropearound the flat loop in the thickerThe load goes on the line through the flat loop not the one that comes out the side of the knot
UsesSecuring a heaving line to a tow lineExtending a stern line if you dont have enough line of one thickness
Step 3 BowlineThe bowline is really a special case of the sheet bend but it it tied at the end of a rope to make a loop
The photos show the completed loop and closeups of the front and back of the actual knot Note that it is the same as the sheet bend - but it must be made the right wayround This loop does not tighten in use The knot is quite easy to untie once the load is removed With practice it is very quick to tie
Some usesSecuring a dinghy line to a railing or stanchionSecuring an anchor line to an anchorTie a jib sheet to the sailTie a mooring line around a rock or treeTie a float to an anchor triplineUse one in each line to tie two ropes of very different sizes - eg a throwing line to a large tow ropeDisadvantages the knot must be completely made before it will take any strain - it is hard to tie if there is already a load on the rope
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Linked bowlines
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 4 Bowline on the BightA bowline on the bight is a bowline tied in a loop of rope (neither end is needed) The shape is the same as a bowline made with a double line but the middle of thebight forms the loop around the standing part
UsesAn impromptu bosuns chair - to sit in while being transferred between two boats at sea
Step 5 Clove HitchThe clove hitch can be made when you only have the bight (the middle) of a rope not the ends
UsesSecuring a burgee pole to a burgee halyard (a continuous loop of thin line)Securing a tiller from swinging
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 6 Round Turn and Two Half-HitchesThis is a knot used to secure a line to a ring or bar Wind a couple of turns around the bar then secure the end with two hitches around the standing part (this looks like aclove hitch when done)
AdvantagesCan be made under load - it is easy to take turns around the bar while maintaining tension on the ropeStrong - provided the bar is thicker than the rope the rope is not weakened by sharp bendsDisadvantagesThe end tends to work loose
UsesSecuring a line to a mooring ring or samson post
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 7 Fishermans BendThe fishermans bend is the same as the round turn and two half hitches except that the first hitch is looped under the round turn This uses the tension on the rope tosecure the end from working loose
AdvantagesSecure against working loose
DisadvantagesHard to make under tensionHard to undo under tensionMay seize up under load when wet making it hard to undo
UsesSecuring mooring line to ringSecuring fender lines to rail
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 8 Studsail BendThe studsail bend is like the fishermans bend but the second hitch is also secured under the round turn making it even more secure against working loose when undertension
AdvantagesVery secure against working looseDisadvantagesHard to make under tensionHard to undo under tension
Step 9 Figure-8 KnotThe figure-eight knot is used to prevent an end of rope from passing through a block (pulley) Sometimes called a stopper knot
The double figure-8 knot is used in rock climbing as an alternative to a bowline to secure a climbing harness to the end of a safety rope The double knot is made bymaking a single knot then tracing back around the knot with the free end after passing it around the harness loop
AdvantagesEasy to verify by inspectionNot prone to work loose
DisadvantagesSlow to make and undoCannot be made under load
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 10 Prussic KnotThe prussic knot may be used as a climbing ascender - when made around a vertical rope as shown downwards tension on the ends locks the knot while release oftension allows it to be slid up the rope A pair of prussic knots on foot loops may be used in tandem to climb a rope
UsesClimbing a ropeTaking up tension to free a riding turn on a winch
Step 11 Reef KnotThe reef knot or square knot is used to tie a bundle of material together It must be made around something - it should not be used to tie two free ropes togetherbecause it can easily capsizeIt should not be used to make a loop unless it can be tensioned around a solid object It should not be used around a person - use a bowline instead A capsized reefknot will slip easily and could constrict and cause severe injury
UsesReefing a sail (tying the unused portion around a spar)Securing a furled sail to a spar (sail ties)Wrapping a parcelTying shoelaces
AdvantagesMay be made under moderate load
DisadvantagesCapsizes (works free) if used improperlyCan seize up under load when wet
Tying the knot
Capsizing a reef knot
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 12 CleatsThis is not a knot but is very common on boatsThe first picture shows a rope cleated normally The second shows one with a final locking turn - the last turn is twisted before placing over the cleat so that the tensionon the rope helps secure the free end
When working with ropes under tension take a turn or two around a winch or cleat before trying to secure the end with a knot The load on the free end falls exponentiallywith each turn taken Severe injury can result if a finger or other body part is caught in a loop of rope or between a rope and another object
Step 13 Practice themIt is sometimes useful to be able to tie knots in the dark or as in this video behind your back
Related Instructables
AThird Hand forSailing or OtherThings by WadeTarzia
Paracord KnotDisplay Bord byJamie bagn
Trip LogOutriggerCanoe Sailingthe CaliforniaChannel Islandsby TimAnderson
How to Tie aFigure EightKnot byTactical_Pyro
How to build apirate ship bymdelaney3
Build a ShortDragon (16 foot3-BoardOutriggerSailing Canoe)by Wade Tarzia
repairing aheadsail by josh
How to get arope into a tree(withoutclimbing it) byvitex
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
How to Tie the Lanyard Knotby eddy14777 on January 31 2010
Intro How to Tie the Lanyard KnotMany people including myself have had trouble following the Stormdrane youtube video on tying the lanyard knot so i have done some research and found the solution
Image Notes1 Finished knot
Step 1 MaterialsAll you need is a reasonable length of para cord or whatever you wish to use
Image Notes1 One reasonable amount
Step 2 First StepThe first thing you are going to do is to make a bight that leaves you with to congruent endsThen you are going to put your ring finger through the bight
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Image Notes1 Close enough2 Bight
Step 3 Starting the KnotMake a loop just like the one in the picture and place it over the top strandBring the top strand under the bottom strand
Image Notes1 Notice the way the loop is done2 Top strand
Image Notes1 Bottom strand2 Top strand is under
Step 4 The Most Important PartNow you take the top stand from the previous picture and feed it over the first part of the loop under itself and back over the remainder of the loop
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Image Notes1 Under me2 Top strand3 This should make a diamond type shape
Step 5 DoublingNow take the bottom stand and take it around the part of the top strand nearest to the bight and than come up through the diamond shape in the middleDo the same for the top strand
Image Notes1 Top strand
Image Notes1 Both through the diamond
Step 6 FinishingWhen you take it off your finger it should look like thisWork out the slack by pulling on the bight and the two strands
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Image Notes1 Finished knot
Related Instructables
Cross KnotParacordLanyard byStormdrane
Celtic ButtonKnot (video) byStormdrane
Paracord wristlanyard madewith the snakeknot byStormdrane
Paracord ChainSinnet FastDeploy BoonieHatband (video)by Stormdrane
Zigzag SpoolingParacord (video)by Stormdrane
ParacordBoonie HatWrap (video) byStormdrane
Paracord IDbadge Lanyardby Flahusky
Cobra WeaveKey Fob bytevers94
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Four knots to make paracord into a useful toolby erik_mccray on March 27 2010
Authorerik_mccrayI am an ex-fabricator that is now a stay at home dad I love my new job but I do miss making stuff I love this site amp I am getting involved as a way to keep myskills upOn top of fad work I have also run two small business in the past One was custom sewing amp the other was as a small engine mechanicI have two votec degrees one in metal fabrication amp the other is in engine repairI look forward to getting to know everyone here
Intro Four knots to make paracord into a useful toolParacord is an awesome multitool used everywhere from the wild blue yonder to the deepest caverns But like any good tool it is only as good as the knowledge the userhas about the tool With most people out there using bungee cords amp ratchet straps it seems that paracord is being used for nothing more than friendship bracelets forgrown men This is a shame because for less then the price of a few cheap bungee cords amp some to short to be helpful straps You can get yourself hundreds of feet ofparacord
The key to getting the most out of the paracord is good knot work The first thing you need to know is what makes a good knot One is that the knot is easy amp quick to tieamp more impotant is that the knot is easy amp quick to untie The hitch class of knots is by far the best group of knots that the average person could know The four mostuseful hitch knots are the half hitch a quick simple knot that forms the base for many other knots the inline half hitch allowing you to get the most out of one length ofparacord the slippery hitch that gives you both on the fly control over tension on your paracord but also an adjustable loop that will not change unless you want it amp theinline truckers hitch instantly doubling the your pulling power
Step 1 To get started lets get some terminology that will be used defined
line= the paracord
Main line= the part of the paracord doing the work for example holding down your tarp or the long part of the paracord
Mid line= the middle of the length of the paracord
End line= the unused length of paracord or the short length of paracord
Step 2 The half hitch The half hitch is a simple way to secure a line to an anchor point like the tie down points in most trucks A half hitch is a constrictor knot meaning that the harder you pullon the line the tighter the knots grip gets Another common constrictor knot is the slip knot
Step 1 wrap your line around your anchor point Step 2 wrap the end line around the main line
Step 3 pass the end line threw the end line side of the newly formed loop
step 4 now take the slack out of the knot
step 5 to make sure the knot is secure tie another half hitch to the main line This knot is called adouble half hitch
step 6 another useful thing that can be done with the half hitch is that instead of repeating the wrap on the main line but repeating it on what you are tying to the half hitchcan be used to bind something like a stack of 2x4s
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Image Notes1 End line2 Main line3 step 1
Image Notes1 Step 2
Image Notes1 passing thew the end line side of the loop2 step 3
Image Notes1 step 5
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Image Notes1 step 6
Step 3 The mid line half hitch The mid line half hitch is for when the length of line is to long for the job at hand amp you dont want to have to cut the line to size or you are using multiple anchor pointswith one length of line
Step 1 double up the line at the point in the length you wish to make the knot
Step 2 wrap the doubled up portion of line around your anchor point The doubled up length is now now the end line
Step 3 now tie just as you did for the regular half hitch repeat the knot to make a double half hitch for security
Image Notes1 A mid line double half hitch
Image Notes1 step 1
Image Notes1 The end line2 step 2
Image Notes1 Step 3
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 4 The slippery hitch The slippery hitch is a great knot for adjusting tension on the main line or for having an adjustable fixed loop To adjust the knot simply slide the knot up or down the mainline
Step 1 wrap your line around the anchor point or just double over the line to form a loop
Step 2 wrap the end line around the main line three times Wrapping in the direction of the anchor point or loop
Step 3 put together the two lines making up the loop amp wrap the two lines one time with the end line
Step 4 pass the end line thew the last loop formed covering the two lined of the loop
Step 5 pull the knot tite
step 6 to adjust the size of the loop or main line tension grab the knot amp slide it up or down the main line
Image Notes1 grab just the knot its self to adjust it2 step 5
Image Notes1 step 1
Image Notes1 step 2
Image Notes1 step 3
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Image Notes1 step 4
Image Notes1 grab just the knot its self to adjust it2 step 5
Image Notes1 same knot as in last pic Just slid up2 step 6
Step 5 The mid line truchers hitch The truckers hitch is a great way to double the pulling force on a line There are many ways to tie this knot the problem with most of them is that at some point you aregoing to have to pass the end line through a loop on the main line that is acting like a pulley to double your pulling force this is great if you are making the knot close tothe end of your line but if you are using a 300 length of line amp want to make the knot in the first ten feet having to pass 290 of line thew a loop is a pain But with a fewhalf hitches you will not have to pass the end line threw any loop on the main line
step 1 wrap your line around the anchor point then double over your end line laying the top of the loop over the main line
Step 2 double up your main line amp lay the loop over the loop made by the end line
step 3 in main line above the knot twist in a loop
step 4 put main line loop thew the loop made in step 3 amp pull this loop tight over your main line loop forming a half hitch Repeat step 3 amp 4 to make a doublehalf hitch
step 5 To use the knot just pull down on the end line to put tension on the main line
step 6 after you have the main line snug tie a mid line double half hitch around the two lines forming the loop at the end of the main line with the end line
step 7 Tie a double half hitch with the end line around the end loop of the mid line half hitch of step 6 using the same method as used in steps 3 amp 4
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Image Notes1 the end of step 6
Image Notes1 main line2 end line3 step 1
Image Notes1 main line loop2 end line loop
Image Notes1 step 3
Image Notes1 step 4
Image Notes1 step 4 at the end with a double half hitch on the main loop
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Image Notes1 pull here2 step 5
Image Notes1 the start of step 6
Image Notes1 the end of step 6
Image Notes1 step 72 now the rest of the line is free to do more work
Related Instructables
Paracord KnotDisplay Bord byJamie bagn
ChokelessAdjustableParacord DogLeash byPizzaman101
ParacordLadder wWooden Rungsby josestude
tie a paracordshackle grip byitri45
ParacordPrussik Belt byJavaNut13
TiteTie is theTruckers Knoton Steroids bytitetie
ID Lanyard(Photos) byeschmunk
Dog Toys forHeavy Chewersby J3443RY
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Figure 8 knot and double 8 knotby jonathan111 on November 28 2007
Intro Figure 8 knot and double 8 knotI will show you how to tie a figure 8 knot and a figure 8 follow through
Step 1 Stating the knotThis is a simple knot so just follow the pictures
Step 2 Finishing the knotCross the string under and then push it through the hole Pull tightly unless you are going to do the follow through and leave it somewhat loose
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 3 The follow through knotThe follow through knot should be tied around something brought back and followed through the path of the 8 knot Look at the pictures Basically follow through the 8knot backwards
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Related Instructables
Climb Safe WithA Figure 8Knot by mattste A pocket full of
knots byKiteman
How to Tie aFigure EightKnot byTactical_Pyro
Paracord KnotDisplay Bord byJamie bagn
Cross KnotParacordLanyard byStormdrane
How to Tie aFire-escapeKnot by leonardoismael
Truckers HitchTHE mostawesome knoton the planetby schneidp20
Paracord ZipperPuller byrepeet13
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Truckers Hitch THE most awesome knot on the planetby schneidp20 on October 12 2008
Authorschneidp20I like building stuff Trouble is there just isnt enough time to build everything Sigh
Intro Truckers Hitch THE most awesome knot on the planetYes I know that there are plenty of other cool knots out there many of which I literally couldnt live wo I rock climb However this knot is unlike any other Plus Ineeded a grabber for my Instructable -) (BTW this ISNT a climbing knot) And in truth it isnt a knot by itself but rather a system of common knots
Have you ever tried to tie something down for transporting but just couldnt get the lines tight andor during transport the lines would continually loosen Then this is theknot for you I learned this knot back in the 70s when specialty car racks and ratchet straps were rare or unheard of I initially used it to tie a canoe on a car rack bothattaching to the rack as well as the lines to the bow and stern of the canoe Even with all the new gizmos available today this knot still shines because all you need is arope and ropes dont hum in the wind like straps
The unique aspect of this knot is that it gives you a 2-1 mechanical advantage when tightening the rope Be careful though You can actually damage some thingsbecause of the mechanical advantage This knot holds fast and is easy to untie hallmark traits of any good knot
Below you see the finished knot system well break it apart in the steps that follow
Image Notes1 1st anchor point a bowline2 loop3 securing knots 2 half hitches4 securing loose end with a fishermans knot5 2nd anchor point (should be round)
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Image Notes1 X marks the spot
Step 1 Initial setupThe first step is to anchor one end of the rope and then loop the rope around a 2nd anchor point
For attaching to the 1st anchor point I chose bowline a close 2 on my list -) There are other instructables on that one so I wont bore you here
The 2nd anchor really should be round because it serves as a pulley in this block and tackle type knot Ive used it on sharp anchor points and it doesnt work as well
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 2 Creating a slip knotTie a slip knot somewhere between the two anchor points Correct placement of the slip knot takes some experience to judge it correctly Typically I place it too close tothe 2nd anchor point and end up with not enough room to work with If the knot ends up too far from 2nd anchor point you can extend the knot by enlarging the loop
Be sure you tie the slip knot as shown You may not be able to untie other knots
In this small example the slip knot is uncharacteristically close to the 1st anchor point
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 3 Tightening and securingThe loose end of the rope that went around the 2nd anchor point goes through the slip knot loop Pull the loose end to the desired tension and secure with two halfhitches
Note To allow better view of the knots the rope isnt really tightened in this example
Step 4 Securing loose endThe final knot is just to secure the loose end somehow I chose a fishermans knot to do this
To tie a fishermans knot the rope goes around twice and goes under the X created by the loops Pull the loose end to tighten Finally slide the knot to put tension onthe half hitches
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Image Notes1 X marks the spot
Step 5 FinishedThere you have it I guarantee that the first time you really use this knot (not just practice) you will be amazed at how well it works and youll wish you knew this knot along time ago You may even come over to my side and declare that is is THE most awesome knot on the planet -)
Enjoy and happy haulingDave
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Related Instructables
TiteTie is theTruckers Knoton Steroids bytitetie
Four knots tomake paracordinto a usefultool byerik_mccray
Modify yourbike rack tocarry a sunfishor other boat byewilhelm
SurfboardHammock byGermy
GiganticHalloweenSpider Web bynolte919
How To Tie ASpiders Hitch(video) by back-cast
Three-hitch mathair ornamentby michiexile TRX from
ParacordChallengeAccepted bythrake
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Carry any Bottle with a JUG KNOT Handleby hpstoutharrow on September 17 2009
Intro Carry any Bottle with a JUG KNOT HandleTie a JUG KNOT around a water bottle soda bottle or aluminum bottle to make a secure carrying strap
Re-purpose any container into a reusable water bottle by adding a convenient carrying strap This Instructable will demonstrate how to tie a JUG knot which like its namesuggests is meant to properly secure around the neck of a container
With some cord and the knowledge of this knot you will be able add a handle lanyard or carabiner loop to any of your favorite beverages to carry them on the go
It works perfectly for those disposable water bottles and who knows once you add some colorful cord to the plain old clear water bottle you just might beinclined to refill it and use it again(Check out pictures 4amp5 below)
In addition to plastic beverage bottles like pop water and sports drinks you can turn those rugged aluminum beer bottles into a backpacking canteen
Those of you familiar with my previous aluminum bottle InstructablesROLLED RIM METAL TUMBLERhttpwwwinstructablescomidAluminum-Bottle-Tumbler-Cup-Cook-PotALUMINUM BOTTLE LIGHTWEIGHT ALCOHOL STOVEhttpwwwinstructablescomidAluminum-Bottle-Alcohol-Stovewill recognize the water canteen shown below as a re-purposed aluminum beer bottle Here I have added a painted surface treatment to turn it into a proper lookingwater bottle More on that in steps 13 14 15
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 1 Getting StartedCord size is important Select a small medium weight cord like the one shown here It is a general purpose camp cord sold at most sporting goods stores (shoelacesmight also work)
Do not use a heavy cord or rope because the larger diameter will not tuck under the relatively small lip at the top of the bottleneck and the bottle will fall out
Also the smaller cord cinches tight on itself and will not loosen accidentally
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 2 Form a BightThe next steps show how to tie a JUG KNOT It is the basic step for adding a carrying strap It is also the anchor point for any additional fancy bottle trussing you maywant to add
JUG KNOT Step 1
Form a Bight in the center of a length of cord Bight is a knot term for a loop or bend in the rope In this case the main Bight in this knot is highlighted with a white mark Imakes it easier to follow its path in these steps
The running ends of the cord should be equal length
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 3 Pull the Bight downPULL the Bight DOWN forming two Loops
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 4 Cross the LoopsCROSS the right Loop OVER the left Loop
Step 5 Pass the Bight under the 1st loopTake the main Bight and pass it UNDER the left Loop
Step 6 Weave the BightWEAVE the Bight OVER the portion of the right Loop and UNDER the portion of the left Loop
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 7 Extend the BightExtend the Bight OVER the outer portion of the right Loop
Step 8 Flip the Right Loop behindAdditional colored identification points have been added to the loops to follow their travel in these next two steps
The right Loop Yellow marker is FLIPPED BEHIND the knot and ends up on the far left side of the knot
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 9 Flip the 2nd loop in frontRaise the green marker (located on what was formerly the left loop) and pull it down and to the right FLIPPING IT IN FRONT of the knot
Note the blue portion of the this loop will pass around the outside of the yellow portion of the first loop
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Image Notes1 Center of knot that will tighten around the bottles neck
Step 10 Remove SlackNote where the blue green amp yellow markers end up
Start to remove the slack in the loops by pulling the original main Bight (white marker top right) and the two free standing ends at the bottom
the bottle neck will pass through the very center of the knot
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Image Notes1 Center of knot that will tighten around the bottles neck
Step 11 Tighten the KnotAfter removing the slack insert the bottle neck and finish tightening
The knot should look like this before slipping it over the bottle
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 12 Secure on bottle neckThis is the finished knot shown on the neck of various containers
The loop end and the two free standing ends can be tied together to create a carrying handle (last picture below)
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 13 Aluminum Bottle Water Bottle
The next few steps show the features of an aluminum beer bottle re-purposed as a water bottle canteen It is one of many containers that can be reused as a camp waterbottle
The bottle was lightly sanded masked and then pained with a hammered finished paint to create an interesting surface texture
Image Notes1 Textured finish paint makes an interesting grip-able surface2 Masked with tape for painting3 Masked with tape for painting
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Image Notes1 Dowel used for holding the bottle during painting
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 14 Tethered Cork StopperUse a wine bottle man made Cork as a stopper for your aluminum water bottleNote Use a cork that was removed from the wine bottle without the corkscrew penetrating through the bottom end of the cork (A hole all the way through the cork willcause it to leak) Use the unpierced end of the cork inside the water bottle
Drill a hole through the sides of the Cork Thread the cord through the hole to the center of the cord Use the cork as the main Bight and tie the Jug knot as shown inthe beginning steps
Now the cork is tethered to the bottle and will not get lost or fall on the ground
A Carabiner clip passes through the other cord end to attache the water bottle to you belt or pack
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 15 Trussed for TransportThis is another hanging method for carrying your aluminum bottle water canteen A Jug knot is tied conventionally around the neck
The running ends of the knot however are pulled down towards the bottom of the bottle A Barrel Knot is tied about 34 the way down the side of the bottle A squareknot is tied on the bottom of the knot to keep the two running ends tight against the sides of the bottle
I like the look of the accent colored cord running down the sides of the bottle and the fact that the bottle hangs from the belt upside down It adds to its uniqueness
The last picture shows another truss variation
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 16 AdvancedBelow is a bottle with some additional trussing You can be creative as you want It all starts with a re-purposed container and the Jug Knot (and enough cord)
Related Instructables
AluminumBottle TumblerCup amp Cook Potfor an AlcoholStove byhpstoutharrow
Water BottleBelt Clip byuglymike Duct Tape
Water Bottle byrabidsquire2
AluminumBottle AlcoholStove byhpstoutharrow
DIYGlass WaterBottle byCulturespy
Solar WaterHeater forBackpackingUsing WaterBottles and aCar Shade bykopomeroy
Duct tape waterbottle holder(Photos) by pinkmarshmallow
How to make aCamelPack withan old plasticbottle bywillrandship
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Basic Knots Guideby zorro3355 on April 29 2008
Intro Basic Knots Guidehi
Step 1 Thumb knotThe most simple knotUsed as a stopper and prevent ropes from fraying
Step 2 Reef KnotUsed to tie two ropes of equal thickness togetherIt is pretty easy to tie and untie but under tentionit may be diffcult to untieIt is also not sutible for smoothropes(egnylon ropes)
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 3 Figure of eightused as a stopperprevent ropes from fraying and its more secure than tumb knot its is also used to tie Caribinas to ropes and is often used in rock climbing
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 4 Timber hitchused for pulling logs
Step 5 Clove hitchUsed to tie a rope onto a pole or logThe pole must be roundThe pole lust be thicker then the rope itself
(greatly used during pioneering)
Step 6 Sheet bandused to tie ropes of different thickness together(works on same thickness of ropes too)
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 7 Sheep shankTo shorten RopesTo prevent middle fraying
Step 8 Slip knotWhippingUsed as a grip for pulling things(when tied on a stick or small pole)(marlin spike hitch)
Related Instructables
Rope Rings byhpstoutharrow
How to Tie aFigure EightKnot byTactical_Pyro
Whippin (WestCountry Style)by tim_n
SurvivalBracelet(Updated) bytevers94
HangmansNoose PackClosure byPopEye42
Turkey on aTripod byhpstoutharrow
SurvivalBracelet II bytevers94 Zigzag Spooling
Paracord (video)by Stormdrane
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
How to Tie a Fire-escape Knotby leonardo ismael on October 16 2007
Intro How to Tie a Fire-escape KnotThis knot is used by firemen in case of fires for example imagine a scene where the ladder on the firetruck messes up but people need to get down a five story buildingor more All they have is a long piece of rope they can safely get down with a secure knot like the fire-escape knot So why not learn it its easy to do and hard to untieif you tie it tightly
This is from the American Boys Handbook
Step 1 Get Your RopeFirst grab a piece of rope and bend it like this to make a loop in it Follow every step to the smallest detail
Step 2 Twist the RopeNow make a twist like this and hold it together
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 3 Pull Through the TwistPull the loop through the twist you just made from underneath
Step 4 Go Over the Split EndNow pull the tail through the loop
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 5 FinallyAnd finally just pull it through as pictured below
Congratulations you just learned the fire-escape knot
Step 6 Same Name Not KnotThis is another knot called the fire-escape knot this shouldnt be your result
Related Instructables
House FireEscape Plan(video) byWhatHappensNowAdvice
ParacordLadder wWooden Rungsby josestude
Bed SheetEscape Rope byjessehensel
rope ladder(glow-in-the-dark version) bymikeasaurus
HeadlockEscape 2(video) byjohnnyrockstah
QuickFirestarter byMattandJora
Trail sauna byjakee117
How to Kill FireAnts andCommitGenocide byKentsOkay
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Climb Safe With A Figure 8 Knotby mattste on February 23 2010
Intro Climb Safe With A Figure 8 Knot There are many things that a beginning climber needs to know including several important knots Perhaps the most essential knot is the Figure 8 Follow Through Thistutorial will demonstrate how to correctly harness yourself to a rope using a Figure 8 Follow Through knot This knot is used primarily by rock climbers to provide a life-line Since this knot is used as a life-line it is very important to be able to tie it correctly (Your life could depend upon it)
Dont worry with this tutorial and about 5 minutes of practice you can have this knot mastered
Things you will need
- Climbing Harness- Climbing Rope
If you are wanting to go climbing and dont already have these items they can be purchased for about $25 each at most outdoor sporting goods stores If you are merelylooking to learn the knot a belt loop and a rope (about five feet long) will do
Image Notes1 Climbing Harness2 Climbing Rope
Step 1 Dealing With The RopeThroughout this tutorial I will be discussing different parts of the rope To make these instructions as clear as possible I will define a few terms that I will use throughoutthe tutorial The Anchor End of the rope will generally be at the top of the images This is the end that would be anchored to the wall or rock and does not move Wewill not be doing much with the anchored end The Tail End of the rope is the opposite end that we will be dealing with I will call this the tail for short
Now that we have some terms to work with lets get started
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 2 Tying The First Figure 8This knot has several parts to it The first part of the knot is just tying a basic figure 8 To tie the first figure 8 there are four simple steps
1 - Using the tail make a loop over the rope (as shown in the first picture) keeping in mind that there should be about 3 ft of slack on the tail end
2 - Wrap the tail back this time go under the anchored end (As shown in the second picture)
3 - Bring the tail down through the first loop (As shown in the third picture)
4 - Finally pull the two ends to make the knot a little bit tighter and easier to deal with (Shown in the fourth picture)
After these four steps you should end up with a knot that resembles a figure 8
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 3 Looping Into The Harness In order to secure the rope to the harness simply thread the tail end of the rope through the front loop in the harness as shown in the picture below This step isobviously very important
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 4 Following Back Through The Figure 8After looping the rope through the harness you have to thread the tail end of the rope back through the knot following the first figure 8 I have divided this process intofive smaller steps in order to make it more clear
1 - Coming form underneath the knot bring the tail up through the near loop and to the left behind the anchored end of the rope (Shown in the first picture)
2 - Wrap the tail around the anchored end back to the right and down through the adjacent loop (Shown in the second picture)
3 - You simply need to bring the tail back over the top of the knot to the left (Shown in the third picture)
4 - Bring the tail end up through the far loop following the anchored end (Shown in the fourth picture)
5 - Finally pull the knot tight (Shown in the fifth picture)
As you can see the first four pictures are simply tracing the knot back through with the tail end
For the last part while you pull the knot tight you may want to make small adjustments and rearrange how it all fits together If the knot does not lay perfectly smoothand tight its NOT a big deal
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 5 Finishing The Knot After completing the Figure 8 knot you will want to somehow secure the tail end of the rope out of the way There are a couple different ways to do this the way that Iwill demonstrate is using whats called a Stopper Knot This secondary knot is similar to a Fishermans knot and is pretty simple I have once again divided thisprocess into several smaller steps
1 - Start by wrapping the tail end around the anchored end (As shown in the first picture)
2 - Wrap the tail back underneath the two vertical segments (As shown in the second picture)
3 - Simply repeat the first two steps wrapping the tail around again (As shown in the third picture)
4 - This step in the fourth picture may look complicated but all you need to do is insert the tail up through the two loops that you have just made
5 - To finish off the knot you will want to slowly pull the tail end while gently pushing the bottom of the stopper knot upwards If you have successfully completed this knotit should look something like the fifth picture
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 6 Ready To Climb Now that you have mastered the Figure 8 knot you can securely harness yourself into a climbing rope Remember there are many other skills that go into setting up ananchor and belaying a climber This tutorial only covers the figure 8 knot For more information there are many great websites that demonstrate how to correctly set up asafe climbing system (Ive posted a few below) If you are a beginning climber I recommend that you read up on a few other climbing techniques Also you shouldprobably go to a climbing wall or gym where there are experienced climbers that can show you the ropes Hopefully this tutorial has been helpful Have fun and be safe
Some useful linkshttpwwwstephenprattnetAnchorsanchorshtmhttpwwwuoregonedu~oppclimbingtopicsanchorshtmlhttpwwwabc-of-rockclimbingcomhowtoclimbingtechniquesasp
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Related Instructables
How to Tie aFigure EightKnot byTactical_Pyro
Paracord KnotDisplay Bord byJamie bagn
Basic KnotsGuide byzorro3355
How to Climb aTree (withprussiks) bystasterisk
How to climb atree (using onlyrope) thefunsimple wayby louieaw
How to get arope into a tree(withoutclimbing it) byvitex
How to tievarious knots byadaviel
How to make arope swing byjdub0928
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Turks Head Knots on a Bottleby sklnxbones on July 6 2010
Intro Turks Head Knots on a BottleThis is the finished project A bottle decorated with three Turks Head Knots There are only three knots on this bottle The RED and the BLUE knots are each a 20 Bightby 3 Lead Turks Head Knots The WHITE knot is a 20 Bight by 19 Lead Turks Head Knot
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 1 Supplies
Cord Lots and Lots of cord I cant tell you how much each bottle is differentBottle Washed and Dried inside and out Make sure to remove all water spotsThreaded Needle Cord screws into the threads at the base of the needlePegs I use brass rivets used as a map to tie the Turks Head KnotsHole Punch Used to punch holes in the painters tape to hold the pegsPainters Tape To hold the pegs in place and to make your map for the Turks Head KnotsMarker To write on the painters tapeCloth Towel To remove finger prints and dirt from your bottleKrazy Glue or Super Glue This is used to secure the knots in place to the bottle
OPTIONAL BUT HIGHLY RECOMMENDEDI use the Turks Head Cookbook from KnotToolcom
Step 2 PreparationYou will need to find a bottle you like I used an empty instant tea bottle of course washed and dried (I like to put the bottle in the oven for a few minutes to dry the insidewithout water spots Take off the lid and do not put lid in the oven) Now measure the circumference of the bottle Take a cord and tightly wrap the cord around the bottleMark where the ends meet and use a ruler to measure the length of the cord For my instant tea bottle the circumference is 27cm I know from past knots that I have tiedthat I want my knot to have 20 Bights in the top and bottom (bands) knots I am going to use the Bights in the (bands) knots to tie the middle knot Now divide the numberof Bights (20) into the size of the circumference (27) to get the space between each Bight (135) With me so far
Now take two pieces of painters tape using a ruler measure out the length of the circumference and mark the length on the both pieces of tape Next you will mark thespace between each Bight on the tape
Step 3 Adding the PegsI like to use pegs when tying Turks Head Knots it just makes tying the knot easier
These are what I use for pegs
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 4 Adding Pegs to the TapeNow take a hole punch to cut holes in the tape where the lines meet You will place the pegs in the holes
Insert a peg in each hole and carefully stick the first piece of tape to the bottle
Step 5 Adding the 2nd row of pegsNow do the same thing with the second piece of tape The numbers on each piece of tape must line up
This picture shows you what you should have now This odd looking thing will be your map to tie the Turks Head Knot And this is the end of Step 1
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 6 Tying the first Turks Head KnotUsing the Turks Head Cookbook follow the numbers going over and under as indicated in the book I chose a 20 Bight by 3 Lead knot which will give me a nice bandaround the bottle Once the ends meet you have made one complete knot Tape the running end of your cord and start removing the pegs and the tape
Step 7 Remove the pegs and the tapeBe careful not to untie the knot as you remove the pegs and tape from the bottle Continue to remove all the pegs and remove the tape from the bottle At this point theknot will be very loose and will need to be tightened up
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 8 Remove the slack from the knotHere you can see just how much the knot expanded Starting with the standing end begin to pull the slack out of the knot going towards the running end of the cordDo not expect to pull all the slack out at once You may have to make 3 - 5 attempts at removing the slack out of the knot DO NOT remove all of the slack out of the knotIn order to make the bands we will have to triple the Turks Head Knot We will do this by following the knot three times The threaded needle will really come in handyhere
Step 9 Triple the KnotOnce you have made three passes of the Turks Head Knot use your needle to go under your knot about half the circumference and cut the cord The knot will be tightenough to hide the tail in placeTIP I carefully add a couple of drops of super glue UNDER the band to hold them in place and keep them from sliding around in the nextsteps A drop or two in 3 or 4 places around the band should be enough
Step 10 Add the second knotNow repeat this whole step for the second bandWhen tying the second band you must make sure the Bights line up to the first band This is crucial for the next stepWipe down the bottle to make sure all your finger prints and adhesive from the tape are all removed You want to make sure your bottle is clean at this point Any dirt orfinger prints left on the bottle will be almost impossible to remove From this point on we will use gloves when tying our last knot
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 11 Maping the Top KnotStick a piece of painters tape on top of your first band leaving the bottom of the knot exposedUse a marker to count the number of Bights in your knot Instead of using the pegs we are going to use the Bights to tie our next Turks Head Knot
Step 12 Mapping the Bottom KnotDo the same thing for the bottom band but you must make sure your numbers on top and bottom line up So 1 on top should be the same position as 1 on the bottom
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 13 Adding the last knotAgain using the Turks Head Cookbook and the threaded needle you are going to follow the instructions going over and under as indicated in the book Be sure to usegloves when ever you handle the bottle
Step 14 Thats ItFor this Turks Head Knot I am using a 20 Bight by 19 Lead knot
Because of the amount of cord you are working with your cord will get twisted and knotted You will have to un-twist the cord often Its a pain in the rear but it has to bedone And it has to be done alot
Continue to tie the knot until you finish the knot If you have the cord and the patience you can double or triple the knot When you are done use your needle to hide theends under your bands Cut the ends and your DONE
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Related Instructables
Monkeys FistFloatingKeychain byjokerlz
How To Make ATurks headKnot WithParacord byDoggie Stylish
Tying Trivetsout of Rope forHoliday Gifts bykylemarsh
Paracord KnotDisplay Bord byJamie bagn
How to Make ATurks Head(Photos) bymchs60chip
A pocket full ofknots byKiteman
Monkeys fistknot AND themonkey byjonathan111
TiteTie is theTruckers Knoton Steroids bytitetie
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Larks head noose -- an easy useful knot that tightens and loosensby Larry Breed on February 19 2009
Intro Larks head noose -- an easy useful knot that tightens and loosensI thought I knew all the basic knots but then I was taught this incredibly useful simple knot Its good for tying up the neck of a bag that you want to repeatedly open andsecurely close Its good for tying around a springy bundle that will need tightening and retightening And its easy to undo
Ive looked at knot literature but havent found a name for this so I named it The basic knot is well known its called a larks head Since all Ive done is to slip the twoends through the larks head to make a noose I call it that
WARNING Dont use this knot when human safety would depend on it Climbers and mountaineers have well-tested reliable knots for such situations
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Image Notes1 To tighten further step on this side of the larks head and pull the free ends
Step 1 Double the cord overThe larks head noose requires enough cord to go twice around your bundle plus a foot or two Find the center and double it over Sailors call this a bight
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 2 Form the larks headComing from below the bight hook your thumb and forefinger over the two sides Reach outward and downward and pinch your fingertips together underneath thedoubled cord
Youve made a larks head Move the crossing cord a little farther from your hand so theres a clear opening through the two half-loops
Step 3 Form the nooseSlip the two ends of the cord through the opening we were just talking about Pull the larks head tight so it grips the two cords Find something that needs constrictingand put the noose around it
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 4 Tightening retightening and lockingSlide the knot against the bundle If its not tight enough to keep from slipping tighten it by holding it in one hand and tugging on the cords one at a time with the otherhand Notice that you can slide the knot out again for instance to re-open the bag you just tied shut For some applications this may be as tight as you need it
A springy bundle probably still feels loose If so compress the bundle and get a new grip on the cords Rest your foot on the bundle on the cords nearest the larks headand pull to slide the larks head tighter
To make the knot more permanent you can lock it Make an overhand in the cord ends (Exactly like the first step in tying shoelaces) With your foot still on the bundlepull on the cords and move your hands apart until youre pulling in opposite directions You have just locked the larks head and you can trust it to stay that way()
But lets say that later on you want to loosen the locked knot Again put your foot on the bundle and cords nearest the larks head hold the two cord ends together andpull This makes a little slack between the overhand and the larks head so you can untie the overhand
In twine or small string the locking overhand knot may be difficult to undo Use a shoelace knot instead of an overhand and itll unlock easily
() If youre using slippery cord like polypropylene an overhand may not lock securely You may want to tie another overhand knot For added security wrap a shortlength of duct tape around the two cords close to the knot
Image Notes1 To tighten further step on this side of the larks head and pull the free ends
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Related Instructables
TRX fromParacordChallengeAccepted bythrake
A pocket full ofknots byKiteman
Lens CapLanyard by~teknoarsonist~ how to tie a
noose byawesume
AdjustableParacordGlassesLanyard byjdtwelve12
HangmansNoose PackClosure byPopEye42
Paraleash - ADog LeashFrom Paracordby The Ideanator
How to make arugged andhandy ParacordBelt by Jake22
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 13 Variations
You can use other two strand knots instead of the cross knot for variations on this style of lanyard A few alternatives to try tying in a spaced out series or combination ofthem Matthew Walker knot double wall knot lanyard knot double overhand knots double figure 8 knots etc The finishing knots around the attachment can also bedifferent as Ive used the lanyard knot sometimes just one or several in a row
You can also use variations of the cross knot with paracord bracelets and watchbands Doubled version of the knot shown as a paracord bracelet and alternating withtwo pairs of strands for the paracord watchband Leftover pieces of paracord can be used for zipper pulls key ring fobs even paracord cross pendants
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Related Instructables
Paracord ChainSinnet FastDeploy BoonieHatband (video)by Stormdrane
Zigzag SpoolingParacord (video)by Stormdrane
SurvivalBracelet(Updated) bytevers94
Celtic ButtonKnot (video) byStormdrane
ParacordBoonie HatWrap (video) byStormdrane
Paracord wristlanyard madewith the snakeknot byStormdrane
SurvivalBracelet II bytevers94
Cobra WeaveKey Fob bytevers94
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Paracord wrist lanyard made with the snake knotby Stormdrane on September 12 2007
AuthorStormdrane Stormdranes BlogNo matter where you go there you are
Intro Paracord wrist lanyard made with the snake knotThis instructable will show how to make a wrist lanyard using paracord and the snake knot The lanyard can be used to secure a key chain knife multi-tool flashlightcell phone camera binoculars compass etc More projects links knot references can be seen on my blog page Stormdranes Blog
Step 1 SuppliesYoull need about 45 feet of paracord(you may use other types of cordage if desired) The paracord I used is from the Supply Captain I left the inner strands in theparacord but you can remove them if preferred If done in one color it will be one continuous 45 ft length if done in two colors youll need 3 ft for the primary color thatincludes the wrist section and 15 ft for the second color that will show in the snake knot Also used are scissors tape measure or ruler lighter hemostats or needle nosepliers(not necessary but they make it much easier) and a swivel clip key ring snap hook cell phone lariat carabiner or whatever attachment you prefer to use
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 2 Attaching two colors of paracordIf using two colors of paracord you will insert one color about 12 inch into the other color You may remove a small amount of the paracords inner strands by pullingthem out trimming with scissors and pulling the paracord outer sheath back over the strands leaving room to insert the other color For various projects Ive used threedifferent methods for attaching two colors of paracord melting sewing or gluing The choice is yours I usually sew them together it doesnt matter as long as its a goodconnection It will be hidden under the first knot
Step 3 Find the center of the length of paracordTake the center of the length of cord and bring it thru the attachment Im using a swivel clip For this tutorial Im measuring the wrist loop at about 10 inches from theattachment The connection of the two colors will be just on the other side at this point
Step 4 Making the snake knotThe snake knot will be made around the wrist loop section of paracord the loop strands being the core of the knot Ive added a series of photos showing the steps Iuse By using two colors youll see that I flip the lanyard over after making each knot so that Im working with the cord on the right side of the lanyard I bring it under allthe other cords working the hemostats under the previously tightened knot and pulling the cord back thru Then tightening up the knot keeping the cord from twisting andworking it up against the previous knot Again flipping the work over youll see two parallel cords of the same color which will be split with the cord on the right goingunder around and pulled thru with the hemostats then tightened up Continue this procedure until youve done about 10 snake knots(you can count them down eitherside
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 5 Count your knotsOnce you have 10 snake knots youre almost done Youll notice from the photos of both sides of the lanyard that one side has the snake knots alternating all the waydown and the other has a set of parallel knots at the top and botton of the sequence of knots Youll always have those at the start and finish of the snake knots I preferto have them end up on the same side of the lanyard so one side appears to have a more uniform look but its not required
Step 6 Trim and melt the excess paracordUse the scissors to trim off the excess cord and quickly melt the ends with a lighter so they dont fray
Step 7 Youre doneYou can make a range of variations using less or more cordknots Shorten the loop for a double ended key chain or make the loop longer for use as a neck lanyard aLanyard Break-Away Connector could be added for the safety conscious You can also add a wooden bead skull cord lock etc Visit my blog page for more knot relatedprojects links and resources Stormdranes Blog You can find ideas for other geargadgets to attach to your lanyard on EDC Forums
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Related Instructables
Paracord ChainSinnet FastDeploy BoonieHatband (video)by Stormdrane
Cross KnotParacordLanyard byStormdrane
Zigzag SpoolingParacord (video)by Stormdrane
SurvivalBracelet II bytevers94
SurvivalBracelet(Updated) bytevers94
Cobra WeaveKey Fob bytevers94
ParacordBoonie HatWrap (video) byStormdrane
Paracord KnotDisplay Bord byJamie bagn
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
How to tie various knotsby adaviel on September 7 2009
Intro How to tie various knotsKnots as a way of joining rope without special equipment are useful in many situations On a sailboat knots are essential both for daily use and for emergency repairsThis instructable describes several different common knots eg
Sheet Bend - to tie two lines togetherBowline - to make a loopReef Knot - to fasten a bundle of materialFishermans Bend - to secure a line to a post or ring
These knots are good for regular rope - braided or 3-strand polyester or natural fibre (hemp sisal) Monofilament (fishing line) or steel cable performs better with differentknots
Knots are typically quite a lot weaker than straight rope - when rope goes around a tight radius such as in a knot the outside is under more tension than the insideSplices (which require special tools and are time-consuming to make) are stronger so permanent fittings usually have eye-splices
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 1 Sheet BendThe sheet bend is used to tie two lines together It is perhaps the most generally useful knot of all When used to tie a line to itself making a loop it is called a bowlineThe strain is taken on the ropes in the middle - not the one coming out the side
How the knot is made is not critical - it is the final shape that is important One can make the flat loop first and work the other rope around it Or one can make thecrossed loop first - required when tying a bowline
The two images show front and back views of the same knot
AdvantagesEasy to makeEasy to undo when tension is removedDoes not easily capsize
DisadvantagesHard to make under loadDangerous to make under heavy load
UsesJoining two equally-sized ropesExtending a towline or stern line
Method 1 the same as a bowline
Method 2 starting with the flat loop
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 2 Double Sheet BendThe double sheet bend is used to tie two lines of different thickness - but not too different It is the same as a normal sheet bend but with an extra turn of the thinner ropearound the flat loop in the thickerThe load goes on the line through the flat loop not the one that comes out the side of the knot
UsesSecuring a heaving line to a tow lineExtending a stern line if you dont have enough line of one thickness
Step 3 BowlineThe bowline is really a special case of the sheet bend but it it tied at the end of a rope to make a loop
The photos show the completed loop and closeups of the front and back of the actual knot Note that it is the same as the sheet bend - but it must be made the right wayround This loop does not tighten in use The knot is quite easy to untie once the load is removed With practice it is very quick to tie
Some usesSecuring a dinghy line to a railing or stanchionSecuring an anchor line to an anchorTie a jib sheet to the sailTie a mooring line around a rock or treeTie a float to an anchor triplineUse one in each line to tie two ropes of very different sizes - eg a throwing line to a large tow ropeDisadvantages the knot must be completely made before it will take any strain - it is hard to tie if there is already a load on the rope
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Linked bowlines
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 4 Bowline on the BightA bowline on the bight is a bowline tied in a loop of rope (neither end is needed) The shape is the same as a bowline made with a double line but the middle of thebight forms the loop around the standing part
UsesAn impromptu bosuns chair - to sit in while being transferred between two boats at sea
Step 5 Clove HitchThe clove hitch can be made when you only have the bight (the middle) of a rope not the ends
UsesSecuring a burgee pole to a burgee halyard (a continuous loop of thin line)Securing a tiller from swinging
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 6 Round Turn and Two Half-HitchesThis is a knot used to secure a line to a ring or bar Wind a couple of turns around the bar then secure the end with two hitches around the standing part (this looks like aclove hitch when done)
AdvantagesCan be made under load - it is easy to take turns around the bar while maintaining tension on the ropeStrong - provided the bar is thicker than the rope the rope is not weakened by sharp bendsDisadvantagesThe end tends to work loose
UsesSecuring a line to a mooring ring or samson post
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 7 Fishermans BendThe fishermans bend is the same as the round turn and two half hitches except that the first hitch is looped under the round turn This uses the tension on the rope tosecure the end from working loose
AdvantagesSecure against working loose
DisadvantagesHard to make under tensionHard to undo under tensionMay seize up under load when wet making it hard to undo
UsesSecuring mooring line to ringSecuring fender lines to rail
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 8 Studsail BendThe studsail bend is like the fishermans bend but the second hitch is also secured under the round turn making it even more secure against working loose when undertension
AdvantagesVery secure against working looseDisadvantagesHard to make under tensionHard to undo under tension
Step 9 Figure-8 KnotThe figure-eight knot is used to prevent an end of rope from passing through a block (pulley) Sometimes called a stopper knot
The double figure-8 knot is used in rock climbing as an alternative to a bowline to secure a climbing harness to the end of a safety rope The double knot is made bymaking a single knot then tracing back around the knot with the free end after passing it around the harness loop
AdvantagesEasy to verify by inspectionNot prone to work loose
DisadvantagesSlow to make and undoCannot be made under load
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 10 Prussic KnotThe prussic knot may be used as a climbing ascender - when made around a vertical rope as shown downwards tension on the ends locks the knot while release oftension allows it to be slid up the rope A pair of prussic knots on foot loops may be used in tandem to climb a rope
UsesClimbing a ropeTaking up tension to free a riding turn on a winch
Step 11 Reef KnotThe reef knot or square knot is used to tie a bundle of material together It must be made around something - it should not be used to tie two free ropes togetherbecause it can easily capsizeIt should not be used to make a loop unless it can be tensioned around a solid object It should not be used around a person - use a bowline instead A capsized reefknot will slip easily and could constrict and cause severe injury
UsesReefing a sail (tying the unused portion around a spar)Securing a furled sail to a spar (sail ties)Wrapping a parcelTying shoelaces
AdvantagesMay be made under moderate load
DisadvantagesCapsizes (works free) if used improperlyCan seize up under load when wet
Tying the knot
Capsizing a reef knot
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 12 CleatsThis is not a knot but is very common on boatsThe first picture shows a rope cleated normally The second shows one with a final locking turn - the last turn is twisted before placing over the cleat so that the tensionon the rope helps secure the free end
When working with ropes under tension take a turn or two around a winch or cleat before trying to secure the end with a knot The load on the free end falls exponentiallywith each turn taken Severe injury can result if a finger or other body part is caught in a loop of rope or between a rope and another object
Step 13 Practice themIt is sometimes useful to be able to tie knots in the dark or as in this video behind your back
Related Instructables
AThird Hand forSailing or OtherThings by WadeTarzia
Paracord KnotDisplay Bord byJamie bagn
Trip LogOutriggerCanoe Sailingthe CaliforniaChannel Islandsby TimAnderson
How to Tie aFigure EightKnot byTactical_Pyro
How to build apirate ship bymdelaney3
Build a ShortDragon (16 foot3-BoardOutriggerSailing Canoe)by Wade Tarzia
repairing aheadsail by josh
How to get arope into a tree(withoutclimbing it) byvitex
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
How to Tie the Lanyard Knotby eddy14777 on January 31 2010
Intro How to Tie the Lanyard KnotMany people including myself have had trouble following the Stormdrane youtube video on tying the lanyard knot so i have done some research and found the solution
Image Notes1 Finished knot
Step 1 MaterialsAll you need is a reasonable length of para cord or whatever you wish to use
Image Notes1 One reasonable amount
Step 2 First StepThe first thing you are going to do is to make a bight that leaves you with to congruent endsThen you are going to put your ring finger through the bight
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Image Notes1 Close enough2 Bight
Step 3 Starting the KnotMake a loop just like the one in the picture and place it over the top strandBring the top strand under the bottom strand
Image Notes1 Notice the way the loop is done2 Top strand
Image Notes1 Bottom strand2 Top strand is under
Step 4 The Most Important PartNow you take the top stand from the previous picture and feed it over the first part of the loop under itself and back over the remainder of the loop
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Image Notes1 Under me2 Top strand3 This should make a diamond type shape
Step 5 DoublingNow take the bottom stand and take it around the part of the top strand nearest to the bight and than come up through the diamond shape in the middleDo the same for the top strand
Image Notes1 Top strand
Image Notes1 Both through the diamond
Step 6 FinishingWhen you take it off your finger it should look like thisWork out the slack by pulling on the bight and the two strands
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Image Notes1 Finished knot
Related Instructables
Cross KnotParacordLanyard byStormdrane
Celtic ButtonKnot (video) byStormdrane
Paracord wristlanyard madewith the snakeknot byStormdrane
Paracord ChainSinnet FastDeploy BoonieHatband (video)by Stormdrane
Zigzag SpoolingParacord (video)by Stormdrane
ParacordBoonie HatWrap (video) byStormdrane
Paracord IDbadge Lanyardby Flahusky
Cobra WeaveKey Fob bytevers94
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Four knots to make paracord into a useful toolby erik_mccray on March 27 2010
Authorerik_mccrayI am an ex-fabricator that is now a stay at home dad I love my new job but I do miss making stuff I love this site amp I am getting involved as a way to keep myskills upOn top of fad work I have also run two small business in the past One was custom sewing amp the other was as a small engine mechanicI have two votec degrees one in metal fabrication amp the other is in engine repairI look forward to getting to know everyone here
Intro Four knots to make paracord into a useful toolParacord is an awesome multitool used everywhere from the wild blue yonder to the deepest caverns But like any good tool it is only as good as the knowledge the userhas about the tool With most people out there using bungee cords amp ratchet straps it seems that paracord is being used for nothing more than friendship bracelets forgrown men This is a shame because for less then the price of a few cheap bungee cords amp some to short to be helpful straps You can get yourself hundreds of feet ofparacord
The key to getting the most out of the paracord is good knot work The first thing you need to know is what makes a good knot One is that the knot is easy amp quick to tieamp more impotant is that the knot is easy amp quick to untie The hitch class of knots is by far the best group of knots that the average person could know The four mostuseful hitch knots are the half hitch a quick simple knot that forms the base for many other knots the inline half hitch allowing you to get the most out of one length ofparacord the slippery hitch that gives you both on the fly control over tension on your paracord but also an adjustable loop that will not change unless you want it amp theinline truckers hitch instantly doubling the your pulling power
Step 1 To get started lets get some terminology that will be used defined
line= the paracord
Main line= the part of the paracord doing the work for example holding down your tarp or the long part of the paracord
Mid line= the middle of the length of the paracord
End line= the unused length of paracord or the short length of paracord
Step 2 The half hitch The half hitch is a simple way to secure a line to an anchor point like the tie down points in most trucks A half hitch is a constrictor knot meaning that the harder you pullon the line the tighter the knots grip gets Another common constrictor knot is the slip knot
Step 1 wrap your line around your anchor point Step 2 wrap the end line around the main line
Step 3 pass the end line threw the end line side of the newly formed loop
step 4 now take the slack out of the knot
step 5 to make sure the knot is secure tie another half hitch to the main line This knot is called adouble half hitch
step 6 another useful thing that can be done with the half hitch is that instead of repeating the wrap on the main line but repeating it on what you are tying to the half hitchcan be used to bind something like a stack of 2x4s
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Image Notes1 End line2 Main line3 step 1
Image Notes1 Step 2
Image Notes1 passing thew the end line side of the loop2 step 3
Image Notes1 step 5
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Image Notes1 step 6
Step 3 The mid line half hitch The mid line half hitch is for when the length of line is to long for the job at hand amp you dont want to have to cut the line to size or you are using multiple anchor pointswith one length of line
Step 1 double up the line at the point in the length you wish to make the knot
Step 2 wrap the doubled up portion of line around your anchor point The doubled up length is now now the end line
Step 3 now tie just as you did for the regular half hitch repeat the knot to make a double half hitch for security
Image Notes1 A mid line double half hitch
Image Notes1 step 1
Image Notes1 The end line2 step 2
Image Notes1 Step 3
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 4 The slippery hitch The slippery hitch is a great knot for adjusting tension on the main line or for having an adjustable fixed loop To adjust the knot simply slide the knot up or down the mainline
Step 1 wrap your line around the anchor point or just double over the line to form a loop
Step 2 wrap the end line around the main line three times Wrapping in the direction of the anchor point or loop
Step 3 put together the two lines making up the loop amp wrap the two lines one time with the end line
Step 4 pass the end line thew the last loop formed covering the two lined of the loop
Step 5 pull the knot tite
step 6 to adjust the size of the loop or main line tension grab the knot amp slide it up or down the main line
Image Notes1 grab just the knot its self to adjust it2 step 5
Image Notes1 step 1
Image Notes1 step 2
Image Notes1 step 3
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Image Notes1 step 4
Image Notes1 grab just the knot its self to adjust it2 step 5
Image Notes1 same knot as in last pic Just slid up2 step 6
Step 5 The mid line truchers hitch The truckers hitch is a great way to double the pulling force on a line There are many ways to tie this knot the problem with most of them is that at some point you aregoing to have to pass the end line through a loop on the main line that is acting like a pulley to double your pulling force this is great if you are making the knot close tothe end of your line but if you are using a 300 length of line amp want to make the knot in the first ten feet having to pass 290 of line thew a loop is a pain But with a fewhalf hitches you will not have to pass the end line threw any loop on the main line
step 1 wrap your line around the anchor point then double over your end line laying the top of the loop over the main line
Step 2 double up your main line amp lay the loop over the loop made by the end line
step 3 in main line above the knot twist in a loop
step 4 put main line loop thew the loop made in step 3 amp pull this loop tight over your main line loop forming a half hitch Repeat step 3 amp 4 to make a doublehalf hitch
step 5 To use the knot just pull down on the end line to put tension on the main line
step 6 after you have the main line snug tie a mid line double half hitch around the two lines forming the loop at the end of the main line with the end line
step 7 Tie a double half hitch with the end line around the end loop of the mid line half hitch of step 6 using the same method as used in steps 3 amp 4
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Image Notes1 the end of step 6
Image Notes1 main line2 end line3 step 1
Image Notes1 main line loop2 end line loop
Image Notes1 step 3
Image Notes1 step 4
Image Notes1 step 4 at the end with a double half hitch on the main loop
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Image Notes1 pull here2 step 5
Image Notes1 the start of step 6
Image Notes1 the end of step 6
Image Notes1 step 72 now the rest of the line is free to do more work
Related Instructables
Paracord KnotDisplay Bord byJamie bagn
ChokelessAdjustableParacord DogLeash byPizzaman101
ParacordLadder wWooden Rungsby josestude
tie a paracordshackle grip byitri45
ParacordPrussik Belt byJavaNut13
TiteTie is theTruckers Knoton Steroids bytitetie
ID Lanyard(Photos) byeschmunk
Dog Toys forHeavy Chewersby J3443RY
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Figure 8 knot and double 8 knotby jonathan111 on November 28 2007
Intro Figure 8 knot and double 8 knotI will show you how to tie a figure 8 knot and a figure 8 follow through
Step 1 Stating the knotThis is a simple knot so just follow the pictures
Step 2 Finishing the knotCross the string under and then push it through the hole Pull tightly unless you are going to do the follow through and leave it somewhat loose
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 3 The follow through knotThe follow through knot should be tied around something brought back and followed through the path of the 8 knot Look at the pictures Basically follow through the 8knot backwards
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Related Instructables
Climb Safe WithA Figure 8Knot by mattste A pocket full of
knots byKiteman
How to Tie aFigure EightKnot byTactical_Pyro
Paracord KnotDisplay Bord byJamie bagn
Cross KnotParacordLanyard byStormdrane
How to Tie aFire-escapeKnot by leonardoismael
Truckers HitchTHE mostawesome knoton the planetby schneidp20
Paracord ZipperPuller byrepeet13
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Truckers Hitch THE most awesome knot on the planetby schneidp20 on October 12 2008
Authorschneidp20I like building stuff Trouble is there just isnt enough time to build everything Sigh
Intro Truckers Hitch THE most awesome knot on the planetYes I know that there are plenty of other cool knots out there many of which I literally couldnt live wo I rock climb However this knot is unlike any other Plus Ineeded a grabber for my Instructable -) (BTW this ISNT a climbing knot) And in truth it isnt a knot by itself but rather a system of common knots
Have you ever tried to tie something down for transporting but just couldnt get the lines tight andor during transport the lines would continually loosen Then this is theknot for you I learned this knot back in the 70s when specialty car racks and ratchet straps were rare or unheard of I initially used it to tie a canoe on a car rack bothattaching to the rack as well as the lines to the bow and stern of the canoe Even with all the new gizmos available today this knot still shines because all you need is arope and ropes dont hum in the wind like straps
The unique aspect of this knot is that it gives you a 2-1 mechanical advantage when tightening the rope Be careful though You can actually damage some thingsbecause of the mechanical advantage This knot holds fast and is easy to untie hallmark traits of any good knot
Below you see the finished knot system well break it apart in the steps that follow
Image Notes1 1st anchor point a bowline2 loop3 securing knots 2 half hitches4 securing loose end with a fishermans knot5 2nd anchor point (should be round)
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Image Notes1 X marks the spot
Step 1 Initial setupThe first step is to anchor one end of the rope and then loop the rope around a 2nd anchor point
For attaching to the 1st anchor point I chose bowline a close 2 on my list -) There are other instructables on that one so I wont bore you here
The 2nd anchor really should be round because it serves as a pulley in this block and tackle type knot Ive used it on sharp anchor points and it doesnt work as well
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 2 Creating a slip knotTie a slip knot somewhere between the two anchor points Correct placement of the slip knot takes some experience to judge it correctly Typically I place it too close tothe 2nd anchor point and end up with not enough room to work with If the knot ends up too far from 2nd anchor point you can extend the knot by enlarging the loop
Be sure you tie the slip knot as shown You may not be able to untie other knots
In this small example the slip knot is uncharacteristically close to the 1st anchor point
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 3 Tightening and securingThe loose end of the rope that went around the 2nd anchor point goes through the slip knot loop Pull the loose end to the desired tension and secure with two halfhitches
Note To allow better view of the knots the rope isnt really tightened in this example
Step 4 Securing loose endThe final knot is just to secure the loose end somehow I chose a fishermans knot to do this
To tie a fishermans knot the rope goes around twice and goes under the X created by the loops Pull the loose end to tighten Finally slide the knot to put tension onthe half hitches
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Image Notes1 X marks the spot
Step 5 FinishedThere you have it I guarantee that the first time you really use this knot (not just practice) you will be amazed at how well it works and youll wish you knew this knot along time ago You may even come over to my side and declare that is is THE most awesome knot on the planet -)
Enjoy and happy haulingDave
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Related Instructables
TiteTie is theTruckers Knoton Steroids bytitetie
Four knots tomake paracordinto a usefultool byerik_mccray
Modify yourbike rack tocarry a sunfishor other boat byewilhelm
SurfboardHammock byGermy
GiganticHalloweenSpider Web bynolte919
How To Tie ASpiders Hitch(video) by back-cast
Three-hitch mathair ornamentby michiexile TRX from
ParacordChallengeAccepted bythrake
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Carry any Bottle with a JUG KNOT Handleby hpstoutharrow on September 17 2009
Intro Carry any Bottle with a JUG KNOT HandleTie a JUG KNOT around a water bottle soda bottle or aluminum bottle to make a secure carrying strap
Re-purpose any container into a reusable water bottle by adding a convenient carrying strap This Instructable will demonstrate how to tie a JUG knot which like its namesuggests is meant to properly secure around the neck of a container
With some cord and the knowledge of this knot you will be able add a handle lanyard or carabiner loop to any of your favorite beverages to carry them on the go
It works perfectly for those disposable water bottles and who knows once you add some colorful cord to the plain old clear water bottle you just might beinclined to refill it and use it again(Check out pictures 4amp5 below)
In addition to plastic beverage bottles like pop water and sports drinks you can turn those rugged aluminum beer bottles into a backpacking canteen
Those of you familiar with my previous aluminum bottle InstructablesROLLED RIM METAL TUMBLERhttpwwwinstructablescomidAluminum-Bottle-Tumbler-Cup-Cook-PotALUMINUM BOTTLE LIGHTWEIGHT ALCOHOL STOVEhttpwwwinstructablescomidAluminum-Bottle-Alcohol-Stovewill recognize the water canteen shown below as a re-purposed aluminum beer bottle Here I have added a painted surface treatment to turn it into a proper lookingwater bottle More on that in steps 13 14 15
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 1 Getting StartedCord size is important Select a small medium weight cord like the one shown here It is a general purpose camp cord sold at most sporting goods stores (shoelacesmight also work)
Do not use a heavy cord or rope because the larger diameter will not tuck under the relatively small lip at the top of the bottleneck and the bottle will fall out
Also the smaller cord cinches tight on itself and will not loosen accidentally
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 2 Form a BightThe next steps show how to tie a JUG KNOT It is the basic step for adding a carrying strap It is also the anchor point for any additional fancy bottle trussing you maywant to add
JUG KNOT Step 1
Form a Bight in the center of a length of cord Bight is a knot term for a loop or bend in the rope In this case the main Bight in this knot is highlighted with a white mark Imakes it easier to follow its path in these steps
The running ends of the cord should be equal length
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 3 Pull the Bight downPULL the Bight DOWN forming two Loops
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 4 Cross the LoopsCROSS the right Loop OVER the left Loop
Step 5 Pass the Bight under the 1st loopTake the main Bight and pass it UNDER the left Loop
Step 6 Weave the BightWEAVE the Bight OVER the portion of the right Loop and UNDER the portion of the left Loop
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 7 Extend the BightExtend the Bight OVER the outer portion of the right Loop
Step 8 Flip the Right Loop behindAdditional colored identification points have been added to the loops to follow their travel in these next two steps
The right Loop Yellow marker is FLIPPED BEHIND the knot and ends up on the far left side of the knot
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 9 Flip the 2nd loop in frontRaise the green marker (located on what was formerly the left loop) and pull it down and to the right FLIPPING IT IN FRONT of the knot
Note the blue portion of the this loop will pass around the outside of the yellow portion of the first loop
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Image Notes1 Center of knot that will tighten around the bottles neck
Step 10 Remove SlackNote where the blue green amp yellow markers end up
Start to remove the slack in the loops by pulling the original main Bight (white marker top right) and the two free standing ends at the bottom
the bottle neck will pass through the very center of the knot
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Image Notes1 Center of knot that will tighten around the bottles neck
Step 11 Tighten the KnotAfter removing the slack insert the bottle neck and finish tightening
The knot should look like this before slipping it over the bottle
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 12 Secure on bottle neckThis is the finished knot shown on the neck of various containers
The loop end and the two free standing ends can be tied together to create a carrying handle (last picture below)
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 13 Aluminum Bottle Water Bottle
The next few steps show the features of an aluminum beer bottle re-purposed as a water bottle canteen It is one of many containers that can be reused as a camp waterbottle
The bottle was lightly sanded masked and then pained with a hammered finished paint to create an interesting surface texture
Image Notes1 Textured finish paint makes an interesting grip-able surface2 Masked with tape for painting3 Masked with tape for painting
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Image Notes1 Dowel used for holding the bottle during painting
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 14 Tethered Cork StopperUse a wine bottle man made Cork as a stopper for your aluminum water bottleNote Use a cork that was removed from the wine bottle without the corkscrew penetrating through the bottom end of the cork (A hole all the way through the cork willcause it to leak) Use the unpierced end of the cork inside the water bottle
Drill a hole through the sides of the Cork Thread the cord through the hole to the center of the cord Use the cork as the main Bight and tie the Jug knot as shown inthe beginning steps
Now the cork is tethered to the bottle and will not get lost or fall on the ground
A Carabiner clip passes through the other cord end to attache the water bottle to you belt or pack
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 15 Trussed for TransportThis is another hanging method for carrying your aluminum bottle water canteen A Jug knot is tied conventionally around the neck
The running ends of the knot however are pulled down towards the bottom of the bottle A Barrel Knot is tied about 34 the way down the side of the bottle A squareknot is tied on the bottom of the knot to keep the two running ends tight against the sides of the bottle
I like the look of the accent colored cord running down the sides of the bottle and the fact that the bottle hangs from the belt upside down It adds to its uniqueness
The last picture shows another truss variation
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 16 AdvancedBelow is a bottle with some additional trussing You can be creative as you want It all starts with a re-purposed container and the Jug Knot (and enough cord)
Related Instructables
AluminumBottle TumblerCup amp Cook Potfor an AlcoholStove byhpstoutharrow
Water BottleBelt Clip byuglymike Duct Tape
Water Bottle byrabidsquire2
AluminumBottle AlcoholStove byhpstoutharrow
DIYGlass WaterBottle byCulturespy
Solar WaterHeater forBackpackingUsing WaterBottles and aCar Shade bykopomeroy
Duct tape waterbottle holder(Photos) by pinkmarshmallow
How to make aCamelPack withan old plasticbottle bywillrandship
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Basic Knots Guideby zorro3355 on April 29 2008
Intro Basic Knots Guidehi
Step 1 Thumb knotThe most simple knotUsed as a stopper and prevent ropes from fraying
Step 2 Reef KnotUsed to tie two ropes of equal thickness togetherIt is pretty easy to tie and untie but under tentionit may be diffcult to untieIt is also not sutible for smoothropes(egnylon ropes)
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 3 Figure of eightused as a stopperprevent ropes from fraying and its more secure than tumb knot its is also used to tie Caribinas to ropes and is often used in rock climbing
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 4 Timber hitchused for pulling logs
Step 5 Clove hitchUsed to tie a rope onto a pole or logThe pole must be roundThe pole lust be thicker then the rope itself
(greatly used during pioneering)
Step 6 Sheet bandused to tie ropes of different thickness together(works on same thickness of ropes too)
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 7 Sheep shankTo shorten RopesTo prevent middle fraying
Step 8 Slip knotWhippingUsed as a grip for pulling things(when tied on a stick or small pole)(marlin spike hitch)
Related Instructables
Rope Rings byhpstoutharrow
How to Tie aFigure EightKnot byTactical_Pyro
Whippin (WestCountry Style)by tim_n
SurvivalBracelet(Updated) bytevers94
HangmansNoose PackClosure byPopEye42
Turkey on aTripod byhpstoutharrow
SurvivalBracelet II bytevers94 Zigzag Spooling
Paracord (video)by Stormdrane
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
How to Tie a Fire-escape Knotby leonardo ismael on October 16 2007
Intro How to Tie a Fire-escape KnotThis knot is used by firemen in case of fires for example imagine a scene where the ladder on the firetruck messes up but people need to get down a five story buildingor more All they have is a long piece of rope they can safely get down with a secure knot like the fire-escape knot So why not learn it its easy to do and hard to untieif you tie it tightly
This is from the American Boys Handbook
Step 1 Get Your RopeFirst grab a piece of rope and bend it like this to make a loop in it Follow every step to the smallest detail
Step 2 Twist the RopeNow make a twist like this and hold it together
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 3 Pull Through the TwistPull the loop through the twist you just made from underneath
Step 4 Go Over the Split EndNow pull the tail through the loop
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 5 FinallyAnd finally just pull it through as pictured below
Congratulations you just learned the fire-escape knot
Step 6 Same Name Not KnotThis is another knot called the fire-escape knot this shouldnt be your result
Related Instructables
House FireEscape Plan(video) byWhatHappensNowAdvice
ParacordLadder wWooden Rungsby josestude
Bed SheetEscape Rope byjessehensel
rope ladder(glow-in-the-dark version) bymikeasaurus
HeadlockEscape 2(video) byjohnnyrockstah
QuickFirestarter byMattandJora
Trail sauna byjakee117
How to Kill FireAnts andCommitGenocide byKentsOkay
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Climb Safe With A Figure 8 Knotby mattste on February 23 2010
Intro Climb Safe With A Figure 8 Knot There are many things that a beginning climber needs to know including several important knots Perhaps the most essential knot is the Figure 8 Follow Through Thistutorial will demonstrate how to correctly harness yourself to a rope using a Figure 8 Follow Through knot This knot is used primarily by rock climbers to provide a life-line Since this knot is used as a life-line it is very important to be able to tie it correctly (Your life could depend upon it)
Dont worry with this tutorial and about 5 minutes of practice you can have this knot mastered
Things you will need
- Climbing Harness- Climbing Rope
If you are wanting to go climbing and dont already have these items they can be purchased for about $25 each at most outdoor sporting goods stores If you are merelylooking to learn the knot a belt loop and a rope (about five feet long) will do
Image Notes1 Climbing Harness2 Climbing Rope
Step 1 Dealing With The RopeThroughout this tutorial I will be discussing different parts of the rope To make these instructions as clear as possible I will define a few terms that I will use throughoutthe tutorial The Anchor End of the rope will generally be at the top of the images This is the end that would be anchored to the wall or rock and does not move Wewill not be doing much with the anchored end The Tail End of the rope is the opposite end that we will be dealing with I will call this the tail for short
Now that we have some terms to work with lets get started
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 2 Tying The First Figure 8This knot has several parts to it The first part of the knot is just tying a basic figure 8 To tie the first figure 8 there are four simple steps
1 - Using the tail make a loop over the rope (as shown in the first picture) keeping in mind that there should be about 3 ft of slack on the tail end
2 - Wrap the tail back this time go under the anchored end (As shown in the second picture)
3 - Bring the tail down through the first loop (As shown in the third picture)
4 - Finally pull the two ends to make the knot a little bit tighter and easier to deal with (Shown in the fourth picture)
After these four steps you should end up with a knot that resembles a figure 8
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 3 Looping Into The Harness In order to secure the rope to the harness simply thread the tail end of the rope through the front loop in the harness as shown in the picture below This step isobviously very important
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 4 Following Back Through The Figure 8After looping the rope through the harness you have to thread the tail end of the rope back through the knot following the first figure 8 I have divided this process intofive smaller steps in order to make it more clear
1 - Coming form underneath the knot bring the tail up through the near loop and to the left behind the anchored end of the rope (Shown in the first picture)
2 - Wrap the tail around the anchored end back to the right and down through the adjacent loop (Shown in the second picture)
3 - You simply need to bring the tail back over the top of the knot to the left (Shown in the third picture)
4 - Bring the tail end up through the far loop following the anchored end (Shown in the fourth picture)
5 - Finally pull the knot tight (Shown in the fifth picture)
As you can see the first four pictures are simply tracing the knot back through with the tail end
For the last part while you pull the knot tight you may want to make small adjustments and rearrange how it all fits together If the knot does not lay perfectly smoothand tight its NOT a big deal
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 5 Finishing The Knot After completing the Figure 8 knot you will want to somehow secure the tail end of the rope out of the way There are a couple different ways to do this the way that Iwill demonstrate is using whats called a Stopper Knot This secondary knot is similar to a Fishermans knot and is pretty simple I have once again divided thisprocess into several smaller steps
1 - Start by wrapping the tail end around the anchored end (As shown in the first picture)
2 - Wrap the tail back underneath the two vertical segments (As shown in the second picture)
3 - Simply repeat the first two steps wrapping the tail around again (As shown in the third picture)
4 - This step in the fourth picture may look complicated but all you need to do is insert the tail up through the two loops that you have just made
5 - To finish off the knot you will want to slowly pull the tail end while gently pushing the bottom of the stopper knot upwards If you have successfully completed this knotit should look something like the fifth picture
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 6 Ready To Climb Now that you have mastered the Figure 8 knot you can securely harness yourself into a climbing rope Remember there are many other skills that go into setting up ananchor and belaying a climber This tutorial only covers the figure 8 knot For more information there are many great websites that demonstrate how to correctly set up asafe climbing system (Ive posted a few below) If you are a beginning climber I recommend that you read up on a few other climbing techniques Also you shouldprobably go to a climbing wall or gym where there are experienced climbers that can show you the ropes Hopefully this tutorial has been helpful Have fun and be safe
Some useful linkshttpwwwstephenprattnetAnchorsanchorshtmhttpwwwuoregonedu~oppclimbingtopicsanchorshtmlhttpwwwabc-of-rockclimbingcomhowtoclimbingtechniquesasp
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Related Instructables
How to Tie aFigure EightKnot byTactical_Pyro
Paracord KnotDisplay Bord byJamie bagn
Basic KnotsGuide byzorro3355
How to Climb aTree (withprussiks) bystasterisk
How to climb atree (using onlyrope) thefunsimple wayby louieaw
How to get arope into a tree(withoutclimbing it) byvitex
How to tievarious knots byadaviel
How to make arope swing byjdub0928
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Turks Head Knots on a Bottleby sklnxbones on July 6 2010
Intro Turks Head Knots on a BottleThis is the finished project A bottle decorated with three Turks Head Knots There are only three knots on this bottle The RED and the BLUE knots are each a 20 Bightby 3 Lead Turks Head Knots The WHITE knot is a 20 Bight by 19 Lead Turks Head Knot
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 1 Supplies
Cord Lots and Lots of cord I cant tell you how much each bottle is differentBottle Washed and Dried inside and out Make sure to remove all water spotsThreaded Needle Cord screws into the threads at the base of the needlePegs I use brass rivets used as a map to tie the Turks Head KnotsHole Punch Used to punch holes in the painters tape to hold the pegsPainters Tape To hold the pegs in place and to make your map for the Turks Head KnotsMarker To write on the painters tapeCloth Towel To remove finger prints and dirt from your bottleKrazy Glue or Super Glue This is used to secure the knots in place to the bottle
OPTIONAL BUT HIGHLY RECOMMENDEDI use the Turks Head Cookbook from KnotToolcom
Step 2 PreparationYou will need to find a bottle you like I used an empty instant tea bottle of course washed and dried (I like to put the bottle in the oven for a few minutes to dry the insidewithout water spots Take off the lid and do not put lid in the oven) Now measure the circumference of the bottle Take a cord and tightly wrap the cord around the bottleMark where the ends meet and use a ruler to measure the length of the cord For my instant tea bottle the circumference is 27cm I know from past knots that I have tiedthat I want my knot to have 20 Bights in the top and bottom (bands) knots I am going to use the Bights in the (bands) knots to tie the middle knot Now divide the numberof Bights (20) into the size of the circumference (27) to get the space between each Bight (135) With me so far
Now take two pieces of painters tape using a ruler measure out the length of the circumference and mark the length on the both pieces of tape Next you will mark thespace between each Bight on the tape
Step 3 Adding the PegsI like to use pegs when tying Turks Head Knots it just makes tying the knot easier
These are what I use for pegs
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 4 Adding Pegs to the TapeNow take a hole punch to cut holes in the tape where the lines meet You will place the pegs in the holes
Insert a peg in each hole and carefully stick the first piece of tape to the bottle
Step 5 Adding the 2nd row of pegsNow do the same thing with the second piece of tape The numbers on each piece of tape must line up
This picture shows you what you should have now This odd looking thing will be your map to tie the Turks Head Knot And this is the end of Step 1
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 6 Tying the first Turks Head KnotUsing the Turks Head Cookbook follow the numbers going over and under as indicated in the book I chose a 20 Bight by 3 Lead knot which will give me a nice bandaround the bottle Once the ends meet you have made one complete knot Tape the running end of your cord and start removing the pegs and the tape
Step 7 Remove the pegs and the tapeBe careful not to untie the knot as you remove the pegs and tape from the bottle Continue to remove all the pegs and remove the tape from the bottle At this point theknot will be very loose and will need to be tightened up
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 8 Remove the slack from the knotHere you can see just how much the knot expanded Starting with the standing end begin to pull the slack out of the knot going towards the running end of the cordDo not expect to pull all the slack out at once You may have to make 3 - 5 attempts at removing the slack out of the knot DO NOT remove all of the slack out of the knotIn order to make the bands we will have to triple the Turks Head Knot We will do this by following the knot three times The threaded needle will really come in handyhere
Step 9 Triple the KnotOnce you have made three passes of the Turks Head Knot use your needle to go under your knot about half the circumference and cut the cord The knot will be tightenough to hide the tail in placeTIP I carefully add a couple of drops of super glue UNDER the band to hold them in place and keep them from sliding around in the nextsteps A drop or two in 3 or 4 places around the band should be enough
Step 10 Add the second knotNow repeat this whole step for the second bandWhen tying the second band you must make sure the Bights line up to the first band This is crucial for the next stepWipe down the bottle to make sure all your finger prints and adhesive from the tape are all removed You want to make sure your bottle is clean at this point Any dirt orfinger prints left on the bottle will be almost impossible to remove From this point on we will use gloves when tying our last knot
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 11 Maping the Top KnotStick a piece of painters tape on top of your first band leaving the bottom of the knot exposedUse a marker to count the number of Bights in your knot Instead of using the pegs we are going to use the Bights to tie our next Turks Head Knot
Step 12 Mapping the Bottom KnotDo the same thing for the bottom band but you must make sure your numbers on top and bottom line up So 1 on top should be the same position as 1 on the bottom
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 13 Adding the last knotAgain using the Turks Head Cookbook and the threaded needle you are going to follow the instructions going over and under as indicated in the book Be sure to usegloves when ever you handle the bottle
Step 14 Thats ItFor this Turks Head Knot I am using a 20 Bight by 19 Lead knot
Because of the amount of cord you are working with your cord will get twisted and knotted You will have to un-twist the cord often Its a pain in the rear but it has to bedone And it has to be done alot
Continue to tie the knot until you finish the knot If you have the cord and the patience you can double or triple the knot When you are done use your needle to hide theends under your bands Cut the ends and your DONE
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Related Instructables
Monkeys FistFloatingKeychain byjokerlz
How To Make ATurks headKnot WithParacord byDoggie Stylish
Tying Trivetsout of Rope forHoliday Gifts bykylemarsh
Paracord KnotDisplay Bord byJamie bagn
How to Make ATurks Head(Photos) bymchs60chip
A pocket full ofknots byKiteman
Monkeys fistknot AND themonkey byjonathan111
TiteTie is theTruckers Knoton Steroids bytitetie
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Larks head noose -- an easy useful knot that tightens and loosensby Larry Breed on February 19 2009
Intro Larks head noose -- an easy useful knot that tightens and loosensI thought I knew all the basic knots but then I was taught this incredibly useful simple knot Its good for tying up the neck of a bag that you want to repeatedly open andsecurely close Its good for tying around a springy bundle that will need tightening and retightening And its easy to undo
Ive looked at knot literature but havent found a name for this so I named it The basic knot is well known its called a larks head Since all Ive done is to slip the twoends through the larks head to make a noose I call it that
WARNING Dont use this knot when human safety would depend on it Climbers and mountaineers have well-tested reliable knots for such situations
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Image Notes1 To tighten further step on this side of the larks head and pull the free ends
Step 1 Double the cord overThe larks head noose requires enough cord to go twice around your bundle plus a foot or two Find the center and double it over Sailors call this a bight
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 2 Form the larks headComing from below the bight hook your thumb and forefinger over the two sides Reach outward and downward and pinch your fingertips together underneath thedoubled cord
Youve made a larks head Move the crossing cord a little farther from your hand so theres a clear opening through the two half-loops
Step 3 Form the nooseSlip the two ends of the cord through the opening we were just talking about Pull the larks head tight so it grips the two cords Find something that needs constrictingand put the noose around it
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 4 Tightening retightening and lockingSlide the knot against the bundle If its not tight enough to keep from slipping tighten it by holding it in one hand and tugging on the cords one at a time with the otherhand Notice that you can slide the knot out again for instance to re-open the bag you just tied shut For some applications this may be as tight as you need it
A springy bundle probably still feels loose If so compress the bundle and get a new grip on the cords Rest your foot on the bundle on the cords nearest the larks headand pull to slide the larks head tighter
To make the knot more permanent you can lock it Make an overhand in the cord ends (Exactly like the first step in tying shoelaces) With your foot still on the bundlepull on the cords and move your hands apart until youre pulling in opposite directions You have just locked the larks head and you can trust it to stay that way()
But lets say that later on you want to loosen the locked knot Again put your foot on the bundle and cords nearest the larks head hold the two cord ends together andpull This makes a little slack between the overhand and the larks head so you can untie the overhand
In twine or small string the locking overhand knot may be difficult to undo Use a shoelace knot instead of an overhand and itll unlock easily
() If youre using slippery cord like polypropylene an overhand may not lock securely You may want to tie another overhand knot For added security wrap a shortlength of duct tape around the two cords close to the knot
Image Notes1 To tighten further step on this side of the larks head and pull the free ends
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Related Instructables
TRX fromParacordChallengeAccepted bythrake
A pocket full ofknots byKiteman
Lens CapLanyard by~teknoarsonist~ how to tie a
noose byawesume
AdjustableParacordGlassesLanyard byjdtwelve12
HangmansNoose PackClosure byPopEye42
Paraleash - ADog LeashFrom Paracordby The Ideanator
How to make arugged andhandy ParacordBelt by Jake22
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Related Instructables
Paracord ChainSinnet FastDeploy BoonieHatband (video)by Stormdrane
Zigzag SpoolingParacord (video)by Stormdrane
SurvivalBracelet(Updated) bytevers94
Celtic ButtonKnot (video) byStormdrane
ParacordBoonie HatWrap (video) byStormdrane
Paracord wristlanyard madewith the snakeknot byStormdrane
SurvivalBracelet II bytevers94
Cobra WeaveKey Fob bytevers94
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Paracord wrist lanyard made with the snake knotby Stormdrane on September 12 2007
AuthorStormdrane Stormdranes BlogNo matter where you go there you are
Intro Paracord wrist lanyard made with the snake knotThis instructable will show how to make a wrist lanyard using paracord and the snake knot The lanyard can be used to secure a key chain knife multi-tool flashlightcell phone camera binoculars compass etc More projects links knot references can be seen on my blog page Stormdranes Blog
Step 1 SuppliesYoull need about 45 feet of paracord(you may use other types of cordage if desired) The paracord I used is from the Supply Captain I left the inner strands in theparacord but you can remove them if preferred If done in one color it will be one continuous 45 ft length if done in two colors youll need 3 ft for the primary color thatincludes the wrist section and 15 ft for the second color that will show in the snake knot Also used are scissors tape measure or ruler lighter hemostats or needle nosepliers(not necessary but they make it much easier) and a swivel clip key ring snap hook cell phone lariat carabiner or whatever attachment you prefer to use
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 2 Attaching two colors of paracordIf using two colors of paracord you will insert one color about 12 inch into the other color You may remove a small amount of the paracords inner strands by pullingthem out trimming with scissors and pulling the paracord outer sheath back over the strands leaving room to insert the other color For various projects Ive used threedifferent methods for attaching two colors of paracord melting sewing or gluing The choice is yours I usually sew them together it doesnt matter as long as its a goodconnection It will be hidden under the first knot
Step 3 Find the center of the length of paracordTake the center of the length of cord and bring it thru the attachment Im using a swivel clip For this tutorial Im measuring the wrist loop at about 10 inches from theattachment The connection of the two colors will be just on the other side at this point
Step 4 Making the snake knotThe snake knot will be made around the wrist loop section of paracord the loop strands being the core of the knot Ive added a series of photos showing the steps Iuse By using two colors youll see that I flip the lanyard over after making each knot so that Im working with the cord on the right side of the lanyard I bring it under allthe other cords working the hemostats under the previously tightened knot and pulling the cord back thru Then tightening up the knot keeping the cord from twisting andworking it up against the previous knot Again flipping the work over youll see two parallel cords of the same color which will be split with the cord on the right goingunder around and pulled thru with the hemostats then tightened up Continue this procedure until youve done about 10 snake knots(you can count them down eitherside
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 5 Count your knotsOnce you have 10 snake knots youre almost done Youll notice from the photos of both sides of the lanyard that one side has the snake knots alternating all the waydown and the other has a set of parallel knots at the top and botton of the sequence of knots Youll always have those at the start and finish of the snake knots I preferto have them end up on the same side of the lanyard so one side appears to have a more uniform look but its not required
Step 6 Trim and melt the excess paracordUse the scissors to trim off the excess cord and quickly melt the ends with a lighter so they dont fray
Step 7 Youre doneYou can make a range of variations using less or more cordknots Shorten the loop for a double ended key chain or make the loop longer for use as a neck lanyard aLanyard Break-Away Connector could be added for the safety conscious You can also add a wooden bead skull cord lock etc Visit my blog page for more knot relatedprojects links and resources Stormdranes Blog You can find ideas for other geargadgets to attach to your lanyard on EDC Forums
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Related Instructables
Paracord ChainSinnet FastDeploy BoonieHatband (video)by Stormdrane
Cross KnotParacordLanyard byStormdrane
Zigzag SpoolingParacord (video)by Stormdrane
SurvivalBracelet II bytevers94
SurvivalBracelet(Updated) bytevers94
Cobra WeaveKey Fob bytevers94
ParacordBoonie HatWrap (video) byStormdrane
Paracord KnotDisplay Bord byJamie bagn
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
How to tie various knotsby adaviel on September 7 2009
Intro How to tie various knotsKnots as a way of joining rope without special equipment are useful in many situations On a sailboat knots are essential both for daily use and for emergency repairsThis instructable describes several different common knots eg
Sheet Bend - to tie two lines togetherBowline - to make a loopReef Knot - to fasten a bundle of materialFishermans Bend - to secure a line to a post or ring
These knots are good for regular rope - braided or 3-strand polyester or natural fibre (hemp sisal) Monofilament (fishing line) or steel cable performs better with differentknots
Knots are typically quite a lot weaker than straight rope - when rope goes around a tight radius such as in a knot the outside is under more tension than the insideSplices (which require special tools and are time-consuming to make) are stronger so permanent fittings usually have eye-splices
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 1 Sheet BendThe sheet bend is used to tie two lines together It is perhaps the most generally useful knot of all When used to tie a line to itself making a loop it is called a bowlineThe strain is taken on the ropes in the middle - not the one coming out the side
How the knot is made is not critical - it is the final shape that is important One can make the flat loop first and work the other rope around it Or one can make thecrossed loop first - required when tying a bowline
The two images show front and back views of the same knot
AdvantagesEasy to makeEasy to undo when tension is removedDoes not easily capsize
DisadvantagesHard to make under loadDangerous to make under heavy load
UsesJoining two equally-sized ropesExtending a towline or stern line
Method 1 the same as a bowline
Method 2 starting with the flat loop
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 2 Double Sheet BendThe double sheet bend is used to tie two lines of different thickness - but not too different It is the same as a normal sheet bend but with an extra turn of the thinner ropearound the flat loop in the thickerThe load goes on the line through the flat loop not the one that comes out the side of the knot
UsesSecuring a heaving line to a tow lineExtending a stern line if you dont have enough line of one thickness
Step 3 BowlineThe bowline is really a special case of the sheet bend but it it tied at the end of a rope to make a loop
The photos show the completed loop and closeups of the front and back of the actual knot Note that it is the same as the sheet bend - but it must be made the right wayround This loop does not tighten in use The knot is quite easy to untie once the load is removed With practice it is very quick to tie
Some usesSecuring a dinghy line to a railing or stanchionSecuring an anchor line to an anchorTie a jib sheet to the sailTie a mooring line around a rock or treeTie a float to an anchor triplineUse one in each line to tie two ropes of very different sizes - eg a throwing line to a large tow ropeDisadvantages the knot must be completely made before it will take any strain - it is hard to tie if there is already a load on the rope
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Linked bowlines
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 4 Bowline on the BightA bowline on the bight is a bowline tied in a loop of rope (neither end is needed) The shape is the same as a bowline made with a double line but the middle of thebight forms the loop around the standing part
UsesAn impromptu bosuns chair - to sit in while being transferred between two boats at sea
Step 5 Clove HitchThe clove hitch can be made when you only have the bight (the middle) of a rope not the ends
UsesSecuring a burgee pole to a burgee halyard (a continuous loop of thin line)Securing a tiller from swinging
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 6 Round Turn and Two Half-HitchesThis is a knot used to secure a line to a ring or bar Wind a couple of turns around the bar then secure the end with two hitches around the standing part (this looks like aclove hitch when done)
AdvantagesCan be made under load - it is easy to take turns around the bar while maintaining tension on the ropeStrong - provided the bar is thicker than the rope the rope is not weakened by sharp bendsDisadvantagesThe end tends to work loose
UsesSecuring a line to a mooring ring or samson post
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 7 Fishermans BendThe fishermans bend is the same as the round turn and two half hitches except that the first hitch is looped under the round turn This uses the tension on the rope tosecure the end from working loose
AdvantagesSecure against working loose
DisadvantagesHard to make under tensionHard to undo under tensionMay seize up under load when wet making it hard to undo
UsesSecuring mooring line to ringSecuring fender lines to rail
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 8 Studsail BendThe studsail bend is like the fishermans bend but the second hitch is also secured under the round turn making it even more secure against working loose when undertension
AdvantagesVery secure against working looseDisadvantagesHard to make under tensionHard to undo under tension
Step 9 Figure-8 KnotThe figure-eight knot is used to prevent an end of rope from passing through a block (pulley) Sometimes called a stopper knot
The double figure-8 knot is used in rock climbing as an alternative to a bowline to secure a climbing harness to the end of a safety rope The double knot is made bymaking a single knot then tracing back around the knot with the free end after passing it around the harness loop
AdvantagesEasy to verify by inspectionNot prone to work loose
DisadvantagesSlow to make and undoCannot be made under load
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 10 Prussic KnotThe prussic knot may be used as a climbing ascender - when made around a vertical rope as shown downwards tension on the ends locks the knot while release oftension allows it to be slid up the rope A pair of prussic knots on foot loops may be used in tandem to climb a rope
UsesClimbing a ropeTaking up tension to free a riding turn on a winch
Step 11 Reef KnotThe reef knot or square knot is used to tie a bundle of material together It must be made around something - it should not be used to tie two free ropes togetherbecause it can easily capsizeIt should not be used to make a loop unless it can be tensioned around a solid object It should not be used around a person - use a bowline instead A capsized reefknot will slip easily and could constrict and cause severe injury
UsesReefing a sail (tying the unused portion around a spar)Securing a furled sail to a spar (sail ties)Wrapping a parcelTying shoelaces
AdvantagesMay be made under moderate load
DisadvantagesCapsizes (works free) if used improperlyCan seize up under load when wet
Tying the knot
Capsizing a reef knot
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 12 CleatsThis is not a knot but is very common on boatsThe first picture shows a rope cleated normally The second shows one with a final locking turn - the last turn is twisted before placing over the cleat so that the tensionon the rope helps secure the free end
When working with ropes under tension take a turn or two around a winch or cleat before trying to secure the end with a knot The load on the free end falls exponentiallywith each turn taken Severe injury can result if a finger or other body part is caught in a loop of rope or between a rope and another object
Step 13 Practice themIt is sometimes useful to be able to tie knots in the dark or as in this video behind your back
Related Instructables
AThird Hand forSailing or OtherThings by WadeTarzia
Paracord KnotDisplay Bord byJamie bagn
Trip LogOutriggerCanoe Sailingthe CaliforniaChannel Islandsby TimAnderson
How to Tie aFigure EightKnot byTactical_Pyro
How to build apirate ship bymdelaney3
Build a ShortDragon (16 foot3-BoardOutriggerSailing Canoe)by Wade Tarzia
repairing aheadsail by josh
How to get arope into a tree(withoutclimbing it) byvitex
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
How to Tie the Lanyard Knotby eddy14777 on January 31 2010
Intro How to Tie the Lanyard KnotMany people including myself have had trouble following the Stormdrane youtube video on tying the lanyard knot so i have done some research and found the solution
Image Notes1 Finished knot
Step 1 MaterialsAll you need is a reasonable length of para cord or whatever you wish to use
Image Notes1 One reasonable amount
Step 2 First StepThe first thing you are going to do is to make a bight that leaves you with to congruent endsThen you are going to put your ring finger through the bight
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Image Notes1 Close enough2 Bight
Step 3 Starting the KnotMake a loop just like the one in the picture and place it over the top strandBring the top strand under the bottom strand
Image Notes1 Notice the way the loop is done2 Top strand
Image Notes1 Bottom strand2 Top strand is under
Step 4 The Most Important PartNow you take the top stand from the previous picture and feed it over the first part of the loop under itself and back over the remainder of the loop
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Image Notes1 Under me2 Top strand3 This should make a diamond type shape
Step 5 DoublingNow take the bottom stand and take it around the part of the top strand nearest to the bight and than come up through the diamond shape in the middleDo the same for the top strand
Image Notes1 Top strand
Image Notes1 Both through the diamond
Step 6 FinishingWhen you take it off your finger it should look like thisWork out the slack by pulling on the bight and the two strands
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Image Notes1 Finished knot
Related Instructables
Cross KnotParacordLanyard byStormdrane
Celtic ButtonKnot (video) byStormdrane
Paracord wristlanyard madewith the snakeknot byStormdrane
Paracord ChainSinnet FastDeploy BoonieHatband (video)by Stormdrane
Zigzag SpoolingParacord (video)by Stormdrane
ParacordBoonie HatWrap (video) byStormdrane
Paracord IDbadge Lanyardby Flahusky
Cobra WeaveKey Fob bytevers94
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Four knots to make paracord into a useful toolby erik_mccray on March 27 2010
Authorerik_mccrayI am an ex-fabricator that is now a stay at home dad I love my new job but I do miss making stuff I love this site amp I am getting involved as a way to keep myskills upOn top of fad work I have also run two small business in the past One was custom sewing amp the other was as a small engine mechanicI have two votec degrees one in metal fabrication amp the other is in engine repairI look forward to getting to know everyone here
Intro Four knots to make paracord into a useful toolParacord is an awesome multitool used everywhere from the wild blue yonder to the deepest caverns But like any good tool it is only as good as the knowledge the userhas about the tool With most people out there using bungee cords amp ratchet straps it seems that paracord is being used for nothing more than friendship bracelets forgrown men This is a shame because for less then the price of a few cheap bungee cords amp some to short to be helpful straps You can get yourself hundreds of feet ofparacord
The key to getting the most out of the paracord is good knot work The first thing you need to know is what makes a good knot One is that the knot is easy amp quick to tieamp more impotant is that the knot is easy amp quick to untie The hitch class of knots is by far the best group of knots that the average person could know The four mostuseful hitch knots are the half hitch a quick simple knot that forms the base for many other knots the inline half hitch allowing you to get the most out of one length ofparacord the slippery hitch that gives you both on the fly control over tension on your paracord but also an adjustable loop that will not change unless you want it amp theinline truckers hitch instantly doubling the your pulling power
Step 1 To get started lets get some terminology that will be used defined
line= the paracord
Main line= the part of the paracord doing the work for example holding down your tarp or the long part of the paracord
Mid line= the middle of the length of the paracord
End line= the unused length of paracord or the short length of paracord
Step 2 The half hitch The half hitch is a simple way to secure a line to an anchor point like the tie down points in most trucks A half hitch is a constrictor knot meaning that the harder you pullon the line the tighter the knots grip gets Another common constrictor knot is the slip knot
Step 1 wrap your line around your anchor point Step 2 wrap the end line around the main line
Step 3 pass the end line threw the end line side of the newly formed loop
step 4 now take the slack out of the knot
step 5 to make sure the knot is secure tie another half hitch to the main line This knot is called adouble half hitch
step 6 another useful thing that can be done with the half hitch is that instead of repeating the wrap on the main line but repeating it on what you are tying to the half hitchcan be used to bind something like a stack of 2x4s
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Image Notes1 End line2 Main line3 step 1
Image Notes1 Step 2
Image Notes1 passing thew the end line side of the loop2 step 3
Image Notes1 step 5
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Image Notes1 step 6
Step 3 The mid line half hitch The mid line half hitch is for when the length of line is to long for the job at hand amp you dont want to have to cut the line to size or you are using multiple anchor pointswith one length of line
Step 1 double up the line at the point in the length you wish to make the knot
Step 2 wrap the doubled up portion of line around your anchor point The doubled up length is now now the end line
Step 3 now tie just as you did for the regular half hitch repeat the knot to make a double half hitch for security
Image Notes1 A mid line double half hitch
Image Notes1 step 1
Image Notes1 The end line2 step 2
Image Notes1 Step 3
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 4 The slippery hitch The slippery hitch is a great knot for adjusting tension on the main line or for having an adjustable fixed loop To adjust the knot simply slide the knot up or down the mainline
Step 1 wrap your line around the anchor point or just double over the line to form a loop
Step 2 wrap the end line around the main line three times Wrapping in the direction of the anchor point or loop
Step 3 put together the two lines making up the loop amp wrap the two lines one time with the end line
Step 4 pass the end line thew the last loop formed covering the two lined of the loop
Step 5 pull the knot tite
step 6 to adjust the size of the loop or main line tension grab the knot amp slide it up or down the main line
Image Notes1 grab just the knot its self to adjust it2 step 5
Image Notes1 step 1
Image Notes1 step 2
Image Notes1 step 3
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Image Notes1 step 4
Image Notes1 grab just the knot its self to adjust it2 step 5
Image Notes1 same knot as in last pic Just slid up2 step 6
Step 5 The mid line truchers hitch The truckers hitch is a great way to double the pulling force on a line There are many ways to tie this knot the problem with most of them is that at some point you aregoing to have to pass the end line through a loop on the main line that is acting like a pulley to double your pulling force this is great if you are making the knot close tothe end of your line but if you are using a 300 length of line amp want to make the knot in the first ten feet having to pass 290 of line thew a loop is a pain But with a fewhalf hitches you will not have to pass the end line threw any loop on the main line
step 1 wrap your line around the anchor point then double over your end line laying the top of the loop over the main line
Step 2 double up your main line amp lay the loop over the loop made by the end line
step 3 in main line above the knot twist in a loop
step 4 put main line loop thew the loop made in step 3 amp pull this loop tight over your main line loop forming a half hitch Repeat step 3 amp 4 to make a doublehalf hitch
step 5 To use the knot just pull down on the end line to put tension on the main line
step 6 after you have the main line snug tie a mid line double half hitch around the two lines forming the loop at the end of the main line with the end line
step 7 Tie a double half hitch with the end line around the end loop of the mid line half hitch of step 6 using the same method as used in steps 3 amp 4
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Image Notes1 the end of step 6
Image Notes1 main line2 end line3 step 1
Image Notes1 main line loop2 end line loop
Image Notes1 step 3
Image Notes1 step 4
Image Notes1 step 4 at the end with a double half hitch on the main loop
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Image Notes1 pull here2 step 5
Image Notes1 the start of step 6
Image Notes1 the end of step 6
Image Notes1 step 72 now the rest of the line is free to do more work
Related Instructables
Paracord KnotDisplay Bord byJamie bagn
ChokelessAdjustableParacord DogLeash byPizzaman101
ParacordLadder wWooden Rungsby josestude
tie a paracordshackle grip byitri45
ParacordPrussik Belt byJavaNut13
TiteTie is theTruckers Knoton Steroids bytitetie
ID Lanyard(Photos) byeschmunk
Dog Toys forHeavy Chewersby J3443RY
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Figure 8 knot and double 8 knotby jonathan111 on November 28 2007
Intro Figure 8 knot and double 8 knotI will show you how to tie a figure 8 knot and a figure 8 follow through
Step 1 Stating the knotThis is a simple knot so just follow the pictures
Step 2 Finishing the knotCross the string under and then push it through the hole Pull tightly unless you are going to do the follow through and leave it somewhat loose
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 3 The follow through knotThe follow through knot should be tied around something brought back and followed through the path of the 8 knot Look at the pictures Basically follow through the 8knot backwards
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Related Instructables
Climb Safe WithA Figure 8Knot by mattste A pocket full of
knots byKiteman
How to Tie aFigure EightKnot byTactical_Pyro
Paracord KnotDisplay Bord byJamie bagn
Cross KnotParacordLanyard byStormdrane
How to Tie aFire-escapeKnot by leonardoismael
Truckers HitchTHE mostawesome knoton the planetby schneidp20
Paracord ZipperPuller byrepeet13
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Truckers Hitch THE most awesome knot on the planetby schneidp20 on October 12 2008
Authorschneidp20I like building stuff Trouble is there just isnt enough time to build everything Sigh
Intro Truckers Hitch THE most awesome knot on the planetYes I know that there are plenty of other cool knots out there many of which I literally couldnt live wo I rock climb However this knot is unlike any other Plus Ineeded a grabber for my Instructable -) (BTW this ISNT a climbing knot) And in truth it isnt a knot by itself but rather a system of common knots
Have you ever tried to tie something down for transporting but just couldnt get the lines tight andor during transport the lines would continually loosen Then this is theknot for you I learned this knot back in the 70s when specialty car racks and ratchet straps were rare or unheard of I initially used it to tie a canoe on a car rack bothattaching to the rack as well as the lines to the bow and stern of the canoe Even with all the new gizmos available today this knot still shines because all you need is arope and ropes dont hum in the wind like straps
The unique aspect of this knot is that it gives you a 2-1 mechanical advantage when tightening the rope Be careful though You can actually damage some thingsbecause of the mechanical advantage This knot holds fast and is easy to untie hallmark traits of any good knot
Below you see the finished knot system well break it apart in the steps that follow
Image Notes1 1st anchor point a bowline2 loop3 securing knots 2 half hitches4 securing loose end with a fishermans knot5 2nd anchor point (should be round)
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Image Notes1 X marks the spot
Step 1 Initial setupThe first step is to anchor one end of the rope and then loop the rope around a 2nd anchor point
For attaching to the 1st anchor point I chose bowline a close 2 on my list -) There are other instructables on that one so I wont bore you here
The 2nd anchor really should be round because it serves as a pulley in this block and tackle type knot Ive used it on sharp anchor points and it doesnt work as well
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 2 Creating a slip knotTie a slip knot somewhere between the two anchor points Correct placement of the slip knot takes some experience to judge it correctly Typically I place it too close tothe 2nd anchor point and end up with not enough room to work with If the knot ends up too far from 2nd anchor point you can extend the knot by enlarging the loop
Be sure you tie the slip knot as shown You may not be able to untie other knots
In this small example the slip knot is uncharacteristically close to the 1st anchor point
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 3 Tightening and securingThe loose end of the rope that went around the 2nd anchor point goes through the slip knot loop Pull the loose end to the desired tension and secure with two halfhitches
Note To allow better view of the knots the rope isnt really tightened in this example
Step 4 Securing loose endThe final knot is just to secure the loose end somehow I chose a fishermans knot to do this
To tie a fishermans knot the rope goes around twice and goes under the X created by the loops Pull the loose end to tighten Finally slide the knot to put tension onthe half hitches
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Image Notes1 X marks the spot
Step 5 FinishedThere you have it I guarantee that the first time you really use this knot (not just practice) you will be amazed at how well it works and youll wish you knew this knot along time ago You may even come over to my side and declare that is is THE most awesome knot on the planet -)
Enjoy and happy haulingDave
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Related Instructables
TiteTie is theTruckers Knoton Steroids bytitetie
Four knots tomake paracordinto a usefultool byerik_mccray
Modify yourbike rack tocarry a sunfishor other boat byewilhelm
SurfboardHammock byGermy
GiganticHalloweenSpider Web bynolte919
How To Tie ASpiders Hitch(video) by back-cast
Three-hitch mathair ornamentby michiexile TRX from
ParacordChallengeAccepted bythrake
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Carry any Bottle with a JUG KNOT Handleby hpstoutharrow on September 17 2009
Intro Carry any Bottle with a JUG KNOT HandleTie a JUG KNOT around a water bottle soda bottle or aluminum bottle to make a secure carrying strap
Re-purpose any container into a reusable water bottle by adding a convenient carrying strap This Instructable will demonstrate how to tie a JUG knot which like its namesuggests is meant to properly secure around the neck of a container
With some cord and the knowledge of this knot you will be able add a handle lanyard or carabiner loop to any of your favorite beverages to carry them on the go
It works perfectly for those disposable water bottles and who knows once you add some colorful cord to the plain old clear water bottle you just might beinclined to refill it and use it again(Check out pictures 4amp5 below)
In addition to plastic beverage bottles like pop water and sports drinks you can turn those rugged aluminum beer bottles into a backpacking canteen
Those of you familiar with my previous aluminum bottle InstructablesROLLED RIM METAL TUMBLERhttpwwwinstructablescomidAluminum-Bottle-Tumbler-Cup-Cook-PotALUMINUM BOTTLE LIGHTWEIGHT ALCOHOL STOVEhttpwwwinstructablescomidAluminum-Bottle-Alcohol-Stovewill recognize the water canteen shown below as a re-purposed aluminum beer bottle Here I have added a painted surface treatment to turn it into a proper lookingwater bottle More on that in steps 13 14 15
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 1 Getting StartedCord size is important Select a small medium weight cord like the one shown here It is a general purpose camp cord sold at most sporting goods stores (shoelacesmight also work)
Do not use a heavy cord or rope because the larger diameter will not tuck under the relatively small lip at the top of the bottleneck and the bottle will fall out
Also the smaller cord cinches tight on itself and will not loosen accidentally
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 2 Form a BightThe next steps show how to tie a JUG KNOT It is the basic step for adding a carrying strap It is also the anchor point for any additional fancy bottle trussing you maywant to add
JUG KNOT Step 1
Form a Bight in the center of a length of cord Bight is a knot term for a loop or bend in the rope In this case the main Bight in this knot is highlighted with a white mark Imakes it easier to follow its path in these steps
The running ends of the cord should be equal length
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 3 Pull the Bight downPULL the Bight DOWN forming two Loops
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 4 Cross the LoopsCROSS the right Loop OVER the left Loop
Step 5 Pass the Bight under the 1st loopTake the main Bight and pass it UNDER the left Loop
Step 6 Weave the BightWEAVE the Bight OVER the portion of the right Loop and UNDER the portion of the left Loop
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 7 Extend the BightExtend the Bight OVER the outer portion of the right Loop
Step 8 Flip the Right Loop behindAdditional colored identification points have been added to the loops to follow their travel in these next two steps
The right Loop Yellow marker is FLIPPED BEHIND the knot and ends up on the far left side of the knot
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 9 Flip the 2nd loop in frontRaise the green marker (located on what was formerly the left loop) and pull it down and to the right FLIPPING IT IN FRONT of the knot
Note the blue portion of the this loop will pass around the outside of the yellow portion of the first loop
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Image Notes1 Center of knot that will tighten around the bottles neck
Step 10 Remove SlackNote where the blue green amp yellow markers end up
Start to remove the slack in the loops by pulling the original main Bight (white marker top right) and the two free standing ends at the bottom
the bottle neck will pass through the very center of the knot
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Image Notes1 Center of knot that will tighten around the bottles neck
Step 11 Tighten the KnotAfter removing the slack insert the bottle neck and finish tightening
The knot should look like this before slipping it over the bottle
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 12 Secure on bottle neckThis is the finished knot shown on the neck of various containers
The loop end and the two free standing ends can be tied together to create a carrying handle (last picture below)
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 13 Aluminum Bottle Water Bottle
The next few steps show the features of an aluminum beer bottle re-purposed as a water bottle canteen It is one of many containers that can be reused as a camp waterbottle
The bottle was lightly sanded masked and then pained with a hammered finished paint to create an interesting surface texture
Image Notes1 Textured finish paint makes an interesting grip-able surface2 Masked with tape for painting3 Masked with tape for painting
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Image Notes1 Dowel used for holding the bottle during painting
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 14 Tethered Cork StopperUse a wine bottle man made Cork as a stopper for your aluminum water bottleNote Use a cork that was removed from the wine bottle without the corkscrew penetrating through the bottom end of the cork (A hole all the way through the cork willcause it to leak) Use the unpierced end of the cork inside the water bottle
Drill a hole through the sides of the Cork Thread the cord through the hole to the center of the cord Use the cork as the main Bight and tie the Jug knot as shown inthe beginning steps
Now the cork is tethered to the bottle and will not get lost or fall on the ground
A Carabiner clip passes through the other cord end to attache the water bottle to you belt or pack
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 15 Trussed for TransportThis is another hanging method for carrying your aluminum bottle water canteen A Jug knot is tied conventionally around the neck
The running ends of the knot however are pulled down towards the bottom of the bottle A Barrel Knot is tied about 34 the way down the side of the bottle A squareknot is tied on the bottom of the knot to keep the two running ends tight against the sides of the bottle
I like the look of the accent colored cord running down the sides of the bottle and the fact that the bottle hangs from the belt upside down It adds to its uniqueness
The last picture shows another truss variation
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 16 AdvancedBelow is a bottle with some additional trussing You can be creative as you want It all starts with a re-purposed container and the Jug Knot (and enough cord)
Related Instructables
AluminumBottle TumblerCup amp Cook Potfor an AlcoholStove byhpstoutharrow
Water BottleBelt Clip byuglymike Duct Tape
Water Bottle byrabidsquire2
AluminumBottle AlcoholStove byhpstoutharrow
DIYGlass WaterBottle byCulturespy
Solar WaterHeater forBackpackingUsing WaterBottles and aCar Shade bykopomeroy
Duct tape waterbottle holder(Photos) by pinkmarshmallow
How to make aCamelPack withan old plasticbottle bywillrandship
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Basic Knots Guideby zorro3355 on April 29 2008
Intro Basic Knots Guidehi
Step 1 Thumb knotThe most simple knotUsed as a stopper and prevent ropes from fraying
Step 2 Reef KnotUsed to tie two ropes of equal thickness togetherIt is pretty easy to tie and untie but under tentionit may be diffcult to untieIt is also not sutible for smoothropes(egnylon ropes)
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 3 Figure of eightused as a stopperprevent ropes from fraying and its more secure than tumb knot its is also used to tie Caribinas to ropes and is often used in rock climbing
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 4 Timber hitchused for pulling logs
Step 5 Clove hitchUsed to tie a rope onto a pole or logThe pole must be roundThe pole lust be thicker then the rope itself
(greatly used during pioneering)
Step 6 Sheet bandused to tie ropes of different thickness together(works on same thickness of ropes too)
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 7 Sheep shankTo shorten RopesTo prevent middle fraying
Step 8 Slip knotWhippingUsed as a grip for pulling things(when tied on a stick or small pole)(marlin spike hitch)
Related Instructables
Rope Rings byhpstoutharrow
How to Tie aFigure EightKnot byTactical_Pyro
Whippin (WestCountry Style)by tim_n
SurvivalBracelet(Updated) bytevers94
HangmansNoose PackClosure byPopEye42
Turkey on aTripod byhpstoutharrow
SurvivalBracelet II bytevers94 Zigzag Spooling
Paracord (video)by Stormdrane
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
How to Tie a Fire-escape Knotby leonardo ismael on October 16 2007
Intro How to Tie a Fire-escape KnotThis knot is used by firemen in case of fires for example imagine a scene where the ladder on the firetruck messes up but people need to get down a five story buildingor more All they have is a long piece of rope they can safely get down with a secure knot like the fire-escape knot So why not learn it its easy to do and hard to untieif you tie it tightly
This is from the American Boys Handbook
Step 1 Get Your RopeFirst grab a piece of rope and bend it like this to make a loop in it Follow every step to the smallest detail
Step 2 Twist the RopeNow make a twist like this and hold it together
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 3 Pull Through the TwistPull the loop through the twist you just made from underneath
Step 4 Go Over the Split EndNow pull the tail through the loop
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 5 FinallyAnd finally just pull it through as pictured below
Congratulations you just learned the fire-escape knot
Step 6 Same Name Not KnotThis is another knot called the fire-escape knot this shouldnt be your result
Related Instructables
House FireEscape Plan(video) byWhatHappensNowAdvice
ParacordLadder wWooden Rungsby josestude
Bed SheetEscape Rope byjessehensel
rope ladder(glow-in-the-dark version) bymikeasaurus
HeadlockEscape 2(video) byjohnnyrockstah
QuickFirestarter byMattandJora
Trail sauna byjakee117
How to Kill FireAnts andCommitGenocide byKentsOkay
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Climb Safe With A Figure 8 Knotby mattste on February 23 2010
Intro Climb Safe With A Figure 8 Knot There are many things that a beginning climber needs to know including several important knots Perhaps the most essential knot is the Figure 8 Follow Through Thistutorial will demonstrate how to correctly harness yourself to a rope using a Figure 8 Follow Through knot This knot is used primarily by rock climbers to provide a life-line Since this knot is used as a life-line it is very important to be able to tie it correctly (Your life could depend upon it)
Dont worry with this tutorial and about 5 minutes of practice you can have this knot mastered
Things you will need
- Climbing Harness- Climbing Rope
If you are wanting to go climbing and dont already have these items they can be purchased for about $25 each at most outdoor sporting goods stores If you are merelylooking to learn the knot a belt loop and a rope (about five feet long) will do
Image Notes1 Climbing Harness2 Climbing Rope
Step 1 Dealing With The RopeThroughout this tutorial I will be discussing different parts of the rope To make these instructions as clear as possible I will define a few terms that I will use throughoutthe tutorial The Anchor End of the rope will generally be at the top of the images This is the end that would be anchored to the wall or rock and does not move Wewill not be doing much with the anchored end The Tail End of the rope is the opposite end that we will be dealing with I will call this the tail for short
Now that we have some terms to work with lets get started
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 2 Tying The First Figure 8This knot has several parts to it The first part of the knot is just tying a basic figure 8 To tie the first figure 8 there are four simple steps
1 - Using the tail make a loop over the rope (as shown in the first picture) keeping in mind that there should be about 3 ft of slack on the tail end
2 - Wrap the tail back this time go under the anchored end (As shown in the second picture)
3 - Bring the tail down through the first loop (As shown in the third picture)
4 - Finally pull the two ends to make the knot a little bit tighter and easier to deal with (Shown in the fourth picture)
After these four steps you should end up with a knot that resembles a figure 8
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 3 Looping Into The Harness In order to secure the rope to the harness simply thread the tail end of the rope through the front loop in the harness as shown in the picture below This step isobviously very important
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 4 Following Back Through The Figure 8After looping the rope through the harness you have to thread the tail end of the rope back through the knot following the first figure 8 I have divided this process intofive smaller steps in order to make it more clear
1 - Coming form underneath the knot bring the tail up through the near loop and to the left behind the anchored end of the rope (Shown in the first picture)
2 - Wrap the tail around the anchored end back to the right and down through the adjacent loop (Shown in the second picture)
3 - You simply need to bring the tail back over the top of the knot to the left (Shown in the third picture)
4 - Bring the tail end up through the far loop following the anchored end (Shown in the fourth picture)
5 - Finally pull the knot tight (Shown in the fifth picture)
As you can see the first four pictures are simply tracing the knot back through with the tail end
For the last part while you pull the knot tight you may want to make small adjustments and rearrange how it all fits together If the knot does not lay perfectly smoothand tight its NOT a big deal
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 5 Finishing The Knot After completing the Figure 8 knot you will want to somehow secure the tail end of the rope out of the way There are a couple different ways to do this the way that Iwill demonstrate is using whats called a Stopper Knot This secondary knot is similar to a Fishermans knot and is pretty simple I have once again divided thisprocess into several smaller steps
1 - Start by wrapping the tail end around the anchored end (As shown in the first picture)
2 - Wrap the tail back underneath the two vertical segments (As shown in the second picture)
3 - Simply repeat the first two steps wrapping the tail around again (As shown in the third picture)
4 - This step in the fourth picture may look complicated but all you need to do is insert the tail up through the two loops that you have just made
5 - To finish off the knot you will want to slowly pull the tail end while gently pushing the bottom of the stopper knot upwards If you have successfully completed this knotit should look something like the fifth picture
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 6 Ready To Climb Now that you have mastered the Figure 8 knot you can securely harness yourself into a climbing rope Remember there are many other skills that go into setting up ananchor and belaying a climber This tutorial only covers the figure 8 knot For more information there are many great websites that demonstrate how to correctly set up asafe climbing system (Ive posted a few below) If you are a beginning climber I recommend that you read up on a few other climbing techniques Also you shouldprobably go to a climbing wall or gym where there are experienced climbers that can show you the ropes Hopefully this tutorial has been helpful Have fun and be safe
Some useful linkshttpwwwstephenprattnetAnchorsanchorshtmhttpwwwuoregonedu~oppclimbingtopicsanchorshtmlhttpwwwabc-of-rockclimbingcomhowtoclimbingtechniquesasp
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Related Instructables
How to Tie aFigure EightKnot byTactical_Pyro
Paracord KnotDisplay Bord byJamie bagn
Basic KnotsGuide byzorro3355
How to Climb aTree (withprussiks) bystasterisk
How to climb atree (using onlyrope) thefunsimple wayby louieaw
How to get arope into a tree(withoutclimbing it) byvitex
How to tievarious knots byadaviel
How to make arope swing byjdub0928
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Turks Head Knots on a Bottleby sklnxbones on July 6 2010
Intro Turks Head Knots on a BottleThis is the finished project A bottle decorated with three Turks Head Knots There are only three knots on this bottle The RED and the BLUE knots are each a 20 Bightby 3 Lead Turks Head Knots The WHITE knot is a 20 Bight by 19 Lead Turks Head Knot
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 1 Supplies
Cord Lots and Lots of cord I cant tell you how much each bottle is differentBottle Washed and Dried inside and out Make sure to remove all water spotsThreaded Needle Cord screws into the threads at the base of the needlePegs I use brass rivets used as a map to tie the Turks Head KnotsHole Punch Used to punch holes in the painters tape to hold the pegsPainters Tape To hold the pegs in place and to make your map for the Turks Head KnotsMarker To write on the painters tapeCloth Towel To remove finger prints and dirt from your bottleKrazy Glue or Super Glue This is used to secure the knots in place to the bottle
OPTIONAL BUT HIGHLY RECOMMENDEDI use the Turks Head Cookbook from KnotToolcom
Step 2 PreparationYou will need to find a bottle you like I used an empty instant tea bottle of course washed and dried (I like to put the bottle in the oven for a few minutes to dry the insidewithout water spots Take off the lid and do not put lid in the oven) Now measure the circumference of the bottle Take a cord and tightly wrap the cord around the bottleMark where the ends meet and use a ruler to measure the length of the cord For my instant tea bottle the circumference is 27cm I know from past knots that I have tiedthat I want my knot to have 20 Bights in the top and bottom (bands) knots I am going to use the Bights in the (bands) knots to tie the middle knot Now divide the numberof Bights (20) into the size of the circumference (27) to get the space between each Bight (135) With me so far
Now take two pieces of painters tape using a ruler measure out the length of the circumference and mark the length on the both pieces of tape Next you will mark thespace between each Bight on the tape
Step 3 Adding the PegsI like to use pegs when tying Turks Head Knots it just makes tying the knot easier
These are what I use for pegs
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 4 Adding Pegs to the TapeNow take a hole punch to cut holes in the tape where the lines meet You will place the pegs in the holes
Insert a peg in each hole and carefully stick the first piece of tape to the bottle
Step 5 Adding the 2nd row of pegsNow do the same thing with the second piece of tape The numbers on each piece of tape must line up
This picture shows you what you should have now This odd looking thing will be your map to tie the Turks Head Knot And this is the end of Step 1
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 6 Tying the first Turks Head KnotUsing the Turks Head Cookbook follow the numbers going over and under as indicated in the book I chose a 20 Bight by 3 Lead knot which will give me a nice bandaround the bottle Once the ends meet you have made one complete knot Tape the running end of your cord and start removing the pegs and the tape
Step 7 Remove the pegs and the tapeBe careful not to untie the knot as you remove the pegs and tape from the bottle Continue to remove all the pegs and remove the tape from the bottle At this point theknot will be very loose and will need to be tightened up
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 8 Remove the slack from the knotHere you can see just how much the knot expanded Starting with the standing end begin to pull the slack out of the knot going towards the running end of the cordDo not expect to pull all the slack out at once You may have to make 3 - 5 attempts at removing the slack out of the knot DO NOT remove all of the slack out of the knotIn order to make the bands we will have to triple the Turks Head Knot We will do this by following the knot three times The threaded needle will really come in handyhere
Step 9 Triple the KnotOnce you have made three passes of the Turks Head Knot use your needle to go under your knot about half the circumference and cut the cord The knot will be tightenough to hide the tail in placeTIP I carefully add a couple of drops of super glue UNDER the band to hold them in place and keep them from sliding around in the nextsteps A drop or two in 3 or 4 places around the band should be enough
Step 10 Add the second knotNow repeat this whole step for the second bandWhen tying the second band you must make sure the Bights line up to the first band This is crucial for the next stepWipe down the bottle to make sure all your finger prints and adhesive from the tape are all removed You want to make sure your bottle is clean at this point Any dirt orfinger prints left on the bottle will be almost impossible to remove From this point on we will use gloves when tying our last knot
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 11 Maping the Top KnotStick a piece of painters tape on top of your first band leaving the bottom of the knot exposedUse a marker to count the number of Bights in your knot Instead of using the pegs we are going to use the Bights to tie our next Turks Head Knot
Step 12 Mapping the Bottom KnotDo the same thing for the bottom band but you must make sure your numbers on top and bottom line up So 1 on top should be the same position as 1 on the bottom
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 13 Adding the last knotAgain using the Turks Head Cookbook and the threaded needle you are going to follow the instructions going over and under as indicated in the book Be sure to usegloves when ever you handle the bottle
Step 14 Thats ItFor this Turks Head Knot I am using a 20 Bight by 19 Lead knot
Because of the amount of cord you are working with your cord will get twisted and knotted You will have to un-twist the cord often Its a pain in the rear but it has to bedone And it has to be done alot
Continue to tie the knot until you finish the knot If you have the cord and the patience you can double or triple the knot When you are done use your needle to hide theends under your bands Cut the ends and your DONE
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Related Instructables
Monkeys FistFloatingKeychain byjokerlz
How To Make ATurks headKnot WithParacord byDoggie Stylish
Tying Trivetsout of Rope forHoliday Gifts bykylemarsh
Paracord KnotDisplay Bord byJamie bagn
How to Make ATurks Head(Photos) bymchs60chip
A pocket full ofknots byKiteman
Monkeys fistknot AND themonkey byjonathan111
TiteTie is theTruckers Knoton Steroids bytitetie
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Larks head noose -- an easy useful knot that tightens and loosensby Larry Breed on February 19 2009
Intro Larks head noose -- an easy useful knot that tightens and loosensI thought I knew all the basic knots but then I was taught this incredibly useful simple knot Its good for tying up the neck of a bag that you want to repeatedly open andsecurely close Its good for tying around a springy bundle that will need tightening and retightening And its easy to undo
Ive looked at knot literature but havent found a name for this so I named it The basic knot is well known its called a larks head Since all Ive done is to slip the twoends through the larks head to make a noose I call it that
WARNING Dont use this knot when human safety would depend on it Climbers and mountaineers have well-tested reliable knots for such situations
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Image Notes1 To tighten further step on this side of the larks head and pull the free ends
Step 1 Double the cord overThe larks head noose requires enough cord to go twice around your bundle plus a foot or two Find the center and double it over Sailors call this a bight
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 2 Form the larks headComing from below the bight hook your thumb and forefinger over the two sides Reach outward and downward and pinch your fingertips together underneath thedoubled cord
Youve made a larks head Move the crossing cord a little farther from your hand so theres a clear opening through the two half-loops
Step 3 Form the nooseSlip the two ends of the cord through the opening we were just talking about Pull the larks head tight so it grips the two cords Find something that needs constrictingand put the noose around it
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 4 Tightening retightening and lockingSlide the knot against the bundle If its not tight enough to keep from slipping tighten it by holding it in one hand and tugging on the cords one at a time with the otherhand Notice that you can slide the knot out again for instance to re-open the bag you just tied shut For some applications this may be as tight as you need it
A springy bundle probably still feels loose If so compress the bundle and get a new grip on the cords Rest your foot on the bundle on the cords nearest the larks headand pull to slide the larks head tighter
To make the knot more permanent you can lock it Make an overhand in the cord ends (Exactly like the first step in tying shoelaces) With your foot still on the bundlepull on the cords and move your hands apart until youre pulling in opposite directions You have just locked the larks head and you can trust it to stay that way()
But lets say that later on you want to loosen the locked knot Again put your foot on the bundle and cords nearest the larks head hold the two cord ends together andpull This makes a little slack between the overhand and the larks head so you can untie the overhand
In twine or small string the locking overhand knot may be difficult to undo Use a shoelace knot instead of an overhand and itll unlock easily
() If youre using slippery cord like polypropylene an overhand may not lock securely You may want to tie another overhand knot For added security wrap a shortlength of duct tape around the two cords close to the knot
Image Notes1 To tighten further step on this side of the larks head and pull the free ends
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Related Instructables
TRX fromParacordChallengeAccepted bythrake
A pocket full ofknots byKiteman
Lens CapLanyard by~teknoarsonist~ how to tie a
noose byawesume
AdjustableParacordGlassesLanyard byjdtwelve12
HangmansNoose PackClosure byPopEye42
Paraleash - ADog LeashFrom Paracordby The Ideanator
How to make arugged andhandy ParacordBelt by Jake22
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Related Instructables
Paracord ChainSinnet FastDeploy BoonieHatband (video)by Stormdrane
Zigzag SpoolingParacord (video)by Stormdrane
SurvivalBracelet(Updated) bytevers94
Celtic ButtonKnot (video) byStormdrane
ParacordBoonie HatWrap (video) byStormdrane
Paracord wristlanyard madewith the snakeknot byStormdrane
SurvivalBracelet II bytevers94
Cobra WeaveKey Fob bytevers94
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Paracord wrist lanyard made with the snake knotby Stormdrane on September 12 2007
AuthorStormdrane Stormdranes BlogNo matter where you go there you are
Intro Paracord wrist lanyard made with the snake knotThis instructable will show how to make a wrist lanyard using paracord and the snake knot The lanyard can be used to secure a key chain knife multi-tool flashlightcell phone camera binoculars compass etc More projects links knot references can be seen on my blog page Stormdranes Blog
Step 1 SuppliesYoull need about 45 feet of paracord(you may use other types of cordage if desired) The paracord I used is from the Supply Captain I left the inner strands in theparacord but you can remove them if preferred If done in one color it will be one continuous 45 ft length if done in two colors youll need 3 ft for the primary color thatincludes the wrist section and 15 ft for the second color that will show in the snake knot Also used are scissors tape measure or ruler lighter hemostats or needle nosepliers(not necessary but they make it much easier) and a swivel clip key ring snap hook cell phone lariat carabiner or whatever attachment you prefer to use
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 2 Attaching two colors of paracordIf using two colors of paracord you will insert one color about 12 inch into the other color You may remove a small amount of the paracords inner strands by pullingthem out trimming with scissors and pulling the paracord outer sheath back over the strands leaving room to insert the other color For various projects Ive used threedifferent methods for attaching two colors of paracord melting sewing or gluing The choice is yours I usually sew them together it doesnt matter as long as its a goodconnection It will be hidden under the first knot
Step 3 Find the center of the length of paracordTake the center of the length of cord and bring it thru the attachment Im using a swivel clip For this tutorial Im measuring the wrist loop at about 10 inches from theattachment The connection of the two colors will be just on the other side at this point
Step 4 Making the snake knotThe snake knot will be made around the wrist loop section of paracord the loop strands being the core of the knot Ive added a series of photos showing the steps Iuse By using two colors youll see that I flip the lanyard over after making each knot so that Im working with the cord on the right side of the lanyard I bring it under allthe other cords working the hemostats under the previously tightened knot and pulling the cord back thru Then tightening up the knot keeping the cord from twisting andworking it up against the previous knot Again flipping the work over youll see two parallel cords of the same color which will be split with the cord on the right goingunder around and pulled thru with the hemostats then tightened up Continue this procedure until youve done about 10 snake knots(you can count them down eitherside
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 5 Count your knotsOnce you have 10 snake knots youre almost done Youll notice from the photos of both sides of the lanyard that one side has the snake knots alternating all the waydown and the other has a set of parallel knots at the top and botton of the sequence of knots Youll always have those at the start and finish of the snake knots I preferto have them end up on the same side of the lanyard so one side appears to have a more uniform look but its not required
Step 6 Trim and melt the excess paracordUse the scissors to trim off the excess cord and quickly melt the ends with a lighter so they dont fray
Step 7 Youre doneYou can make a range of variations using less or more cordknots Shorten the loop for a double ended key chain or make the loop longer for use as a neck lanyard aLanyard Break-Away Connector could be added for the safety conscious You can also add a wooden bead skull cord lock etc Visit my blog page for more knot relatedprojects links and resources Stormdranes Blog You can find ideas for other geargadgets to attach to your lanyard on EDC Forums
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Related Instructables
Paracord ChainSinnet FastDeploy BoonieHatband (video)by Stormdrane
Cross KnotParacordLanyard byStormdrane
Zigzag SpoolingParacord (video)by Stormdrane
SurvivalBracelet II bytevers94
SurvivalBracelet(Updated) bytevers94
Cobra WeaveKey Fob bytevers94
ParacordBoonie HatWrap (video) byStormdrane
Paracord KnotDisplay Bord byJamie bagn
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
How to tie various knotsby adaviel on September 7 2009
Intro How to tie various knotsKnots as a way of joining rope without special equipment are useful in many situations On a sailboat knots are essential both for daily use and for emergency repairsThis instructable describes several different common knots eg
Sheet Bend - to tie two lines togetherBowline - to make a loopReef Knot - to fasten a bundle of materialFishermans Bend - to secure a line to a post or ring
These knots are good for regular rope - braided or 3-strand polyester or natural fibre (hemp sisal) Monofilament (fishing line) or steel cable performs better with differentknots
Knots are typically quite a lot weaker than straight rope - when rope goes around a tight radius such as in a knot the outside is under more tension than the insideSplices (which require special tools and are time-consuming to make) are stronger so permanent fittings usually have eye-splices
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 1 Sheet BendThe sheet bend is used to tie two lines together It is perhaps the most generally useful knot of all When used to tie a line to itself making a loop it is called a bowlineThe strain is taken on the ropes in the middle - not the one coming out the side
How the knot is made is not critical - it is the final shape that is important One can make the flat loop first and work the other rope around it Or one can make thecrossed loop first - required when tying a bowline
The two images show front and back views of the same knot
AdvantagesEasy to makeEasy to undo when tension is removedDoes not easily capsize
DisadvantagesHard to make under loadDangerous to make under heavy load
UsesJoining two equally-sized ropesExtending a towline or stern line
Method 1 the same as a bowline
Method 2 starting with the flat loop
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 2 Double Sheet BendThe double sheet bend is used to tie two lines of different thickness - but not too different It is the same as a normal sheet bend but with an extra turn of the thinner ropearound the flat loop in the thickerThe load goes on the line through the flat loop not the one that comes out the side of the knot
UsesSecuring a heaving line to a tow lineExtending a stern line if you dont have enough line of one thickness
Step 3 BowlineThe bowline is really a special case of the sheet bend but it it tied at the end of a rope to make a loop
The photos show the completed loop and closeups of the front and back of the actual knot Note that it is the same as the sheet bend - but it must be made the right wayround This loop does not tighten in use The knot is quite easy to untie once the load is removed With practice it is very quick to tie
Some usesSecuring a dinghy line to a railing or stanchionSecuring an anchor line to an anchorTie a jib sheet to the sailTie a mooring line around a rock or treeTie a float to an anchor triplineUse one in each line to tie two ropes of very different sizes - eg a throwing line to a large tow ropeDisadvantages the knot must be completely made before it will take any strain - it is hard to tie if there is already a load on the rope
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Linked bowlines
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 4 Bowline on the BightA bowline on the bight is a bowline tied in a loop of rope (neither end is needed) The shape is the same as a bowline made with a double line but the middle of thebight forms the loop around the standing part
UsesAn impromptu bosuns chair - to sit in while being transferred between two boats at sea
Step 5 Clove HitchThe clove hitch can be made when you only have the bight (the middle) of a rope not the ends
UsesSecuring a burgee pole to a burgee halyard (a continuous loop of thin line)Securing a tiller from swinging
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 6 Round Turn and Two Half-HitchesThis is a knot used to secure a line to a ring or bar Wind a couple of turns around the bar then secure the end with two hitches around the standing part (this looks like aclove hitch when done)
AdvantagesCan be made under load - it is easy to take turns around the bar while maintaining tension on the ropeStrong - provided the bar is thicker than the rope the rope is not weakened by sharp bendsDisadvantagesThe end tends to work loose
UsesSecuring a line to a mooring ring or samson post
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 7 Fishermans BendThe fishermans bend is the same as the round turn and two half hitches except that the first hitch is looped under the round turn This uses the tension on the rope tosecure the end from working loose
AdvantagesSecure against working loose
DisadvantagesHard to make under tensionHard to undo under tensionMay seize up under load when wet making it hard to undo
UsesSecuring mooring line to ringSecuring fender lines to rail
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 8 Studsail BendThe studsail bend is like the fishermans bend but the second hitch is also secured under the round turn making it even more secure against working loose when undertension
AdvantagesVery secure against working looseDisadvantagesHard to make under tensionHard to undo under tension
Step 9 Figure-8 KnotThe figure-eight knot is used to prevent an end of rope from passing through a block (pulley) Sometimes called a stopper knot
The double figure-8 knot is used in rock climbing as an alternative to a bowline to secure a climbing harness to the end of a safety rope The double knot is made bymaking a single knot then tracing back around the knot with the free end after passing it around the harness loop
AdvantagesEasy to verify by inspectionNot prone to work loose
DisadvantagesSlow to make and undoCannot be made under load
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 10 Prussic KnotThe prussic knot may be used as a climbing ascender - when made around a vertical rope as shown downwards tension on the ends locks the knot while release oftension allows it to be slid up the rope A pair of prussic knots on foot loops may be used in tandem to climb a rope
UsesClimbing a ropeTaking up tension to free a riding turn on a winch
Step 11 Reef KnotThe reef knot or square knot is used to tie a bundle of material together It must be made around something - it should not be used to tie two free ropes togetherbecause it can easily capsizeIt should not be used to make a loop unless it can be tensioned around a solid object It should not be used around a person - use a bowline instead A capsized reefknot will slip easily and could constrict and cause severe injury
UsesReefing a sail (tying the unused portion around a spar)Securing a furled sail to a spar (sail ties)Wrapping a parcelTying shoelaces
AdvantagesMay be made under moderate load
DisadvantagesCapsizes (works free) if used improperlyCan seize up under load when wet
Tying the knot
Capsizing a reef knot
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 12 CleatsThis is not a knot but is very common on boatsThe first picture shows a rope cleated normally The second shows one with a final locking turn - the last turn is twisted before placing over the cleat so that the tensionon the rope helps secure the free end
When working with ropes under tension take a turn or two around a winch or cleat before trying to secure the end with a knot The load on the free end falls exponentiallywith each turn taken Severe injury can result if a finger or other body part is caught in a loop of rope or between a rope and another object
Step 13 Practice themIt is sometimes useful to be able to tie knots in the dark or as in this video behind your back
Related Instructables
AThird Hand forSailing or OtherThings by WadeTarzia
Paracord KnotDisplay Bord byJamie bagn
Trip LogOutriggerCanoe Sailingthe CaliforniaChannel Islandsby TimAnderson
How to Tie aFigure EightKnot byTactical_Pyro
How to build apirate ship bymdelaney3
Build a ShortDragon (16 foot3-BoardOutriggerSailing Canoe)by Wade Tarzia
repairing aheadsail by josh
How to get arope into a tree(withoutclimbing it) byvitex
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
How to Tie the Lanyard Knotby eddy14777 on January 31 2010
Intro How to Tie the Lanyard KnotMany people including myself have had trouble following the Stormdrane youtube video on tying the lanyard knot so i have done some research and found the solution
Image Notes1 Finished knot
Step 1 MaterialsAll you need is a reasonable length of para cord or whatever you wish to use
Image Notes1 One reasonable amount
Step 2 First StepThe first thing you are going to do is to make a bight that leaves you with to congruent endsThen you are going to put your ring finger through the bight
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Image Notes1 Close enough2 Bight
Step 3 Starting the KnotMake a loop just like the one in the picture and place it over the top strandBring the top strand under the bottom strand
Image Notes1 Notice the way the loop is done2 Top strand
Image Notes1 Bottom strand2 Top strand is under
Step 4 The Most Important PartNow you take the top stand from the previous picture and feed it over the first part of the loop under itself and back over the remainder of the loop
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Image Notes1 Under me2 Top strand3 This should make a diamond type shape
Step 5 DoublingNow take the bottom stand and take it around the part of the top strand nearest to the bight and than come up through the diamond shape in the middleDo the same for the top strand
Image Notes1 Top strand
Image Notes1 Both through the diamond
Step 6 FinishingWhen you take it off your finger it should look like thisWork out the slack by pulling on the bight and the two strands
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Image Notes1 Finished knot
Related Instructables
Cross KnotParacordLanyard byStormdrane
Celtic ButtonKnot (video) byStormdrane
Paracord wristlanyard madewith the snakeknot byStormdrane
Paracord ChainSinnet FastDeploy BoonieHatband (video)by Stormdrane
Zigzag SpoolingParacord (video)by Stormdrane
ParacordBoonie HatWrap (video) byStormdrane
Paracord IDbadge Lanyardby Flahusky
Cobra WeaveKey Fob bytevers94
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Four knots to make paracord into a useful toolby erik_mccray on March 27 2010
Authorerik_mccrayI am an ex-fabricator that is now a stay at home dad I love my new job but I do miss making stuff I love this site amp I am getting involved as a way to keep myskills upOn top of fad work I have also run two small business in the past One was custom sewing amp the other was as a small engine mechanicI have two votec degrees one in metal fabrication amp the other is in engine repairI look forward to getting to know everyone here
Intro Four knots to make paracord into a useful toolParacord is an awesome multitool used everywhere from the wild blue yonder to the deepest caverns But like any good tool it is only as good as the knowledge the userhas about the tool With most people out there using bungee cords amp ratchet straps it seems that paracord is being used for nothing more than friendship bracelets forgrown men This is a shame because for less then the price of a few cheap bungee cords amp some to short to be helpful straps You can get yourself hundreds of feet ofparacord
The key to getting the most out of the paracord is good knot work The first thing you need to know is what makes a good knot One is that the knot is easy amp quick to tieamp more impotant is that the knot is easy amp quick to untie The hitch class of knots is by far the best group of knots that the average person could know The four mostuseful hitch knots are the half hitch a quick simple knot that forms the base for many other knots the inline half hitch allowing you to get the most out of one length ofparacord the slippery hitch that gives you both on the fly control over tension on your paracord but also an adjustable loop that will not change unless you want it amp theinline truckers hitch instantly doubling the your pulling power
Step 1 To get started lets get some terminology that will be used defined
line= the paracord
Main line= the part of the paracord doing the work for example holding down your tarp or the long part of the paracord
Mid line= the middle of the length of the paracord
End line= the unused length of paracord or the short length of paracord
Step 2 The half hitch The half hitch is a simple way to secure a line to an anchor point like the tie down points in most trucks A half hitch is a constrictor knot meaning that the harder you pullon the line the tighter the knots grip gets Another common constrictor knot is the slip knot
Step 1 wrap your line around your anchor point Step 2 wrap the end line around the main line
Step 3 pass the end line threw the end line side of the newly formed loop
step 4 now take the slack out of the knot
step 5 to make sure the knot is secure tie another half hitch to the main line This knot is called adouble half hitch
step 6 another useful thing that can be done with the half hitch is that instead of repeating the wrap on the main line but repeating it on what you are tying to the half hitchcan be used to bind something like a stack of 2x4s
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Image Notes1 End line2 Main line3 step 1
Image Notes1 Step 2
Image Notes1 passing thew the end line side of the loop2 step 3
Image Notes1 step 5
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Image Notes1 step 6
Step 3 The mid line half hitch The mid line half hitch is for when the length of line is to long for the job at hand amp you dont want to have to cut the line to size or you are using multiple anchor pointswith one length of line
Step 1 double up the line at the point in the length you wish to make the knot
Step 2 wrap the doubled up portion of line around your anchor point The doubled up length is now now the end line
Step 3 now tie just as you did for the regular half hitch repeat the knot to make a double half hitch for security
Image Notes1 A mid line double half hitch
Image Notes1 step 1
Image Notes1 The end line2 step 2
Image Notes1 Step 3
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 4 The slippery hitch The slippery hitch is a great knot for adjusting tension on the main line or for having an adjustable fixed loop To adjust the knot simply slide the knot up or down the mainline
Step 1 wrap your line around the anchor point or just double over the line to form a loop
Step 2 wrap the end line around the main line three times Wrapping in the direction of the anchor point or loop
Step 3 put together the two lines making up the loop amp wrap the two lines one time with the end line
Step 4 pass the end line thew the last loop formed covering the two lined of the loop
Step 5 pull the knot tite
step 6 to adjust the size of the loop or main line tension grab the knot amp slide it up or down the main line
Image Notes1 grab just the knot its self to adjust it2 step 5
Image Notes1 step 1
Image Notes1 step 2
Image Notes1 step 3
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Image Notes1 step 4
Image Notes1 grab just the knot its self to adjust it2 step 5
Image Notes1 same knot as in last pic Just slid up2 step 6
Step 5 The mid line truchers hitch The truckers hitch is a great way to double the pulling force on a line There are many ways to tie this knot the problem with most of them is that at some point you aregoing to have to pass the end line through a loop on the main line that is acting like a pulley to double your pulling force this is great if you are making the knot close tothe end of your line but if you are using a 300 length of line amp want to make the knot in the first ten feet having to pass 290 of line thew a loop is a pain But with a fewhalf hitches you will not have to pass the end line threw any loop on the main line
step 1 wrap your line around the anchor point then double over your end line laying the top of the loop over the main line
Step 2 double up your main line amp lay the loop over the loop made by the end line
step 3 in main line above the knot twist in a loop
step 4 put main line loop thew the loop made in step 3 amp pull this loop tight over your main line loop forming a half hitch Repeat step 3 amp 4 to make a doublehalf hitch
step 5 To use the knot just pull down on the end line to put tension on the main line
step 6 after you have the main line snug tie a mid line double half hitch around the two lines forming the loop at the end of the main line with the end line
step 7 Tie a double half hitch with the end line around the end loop of the mid line half hitch of step 6 using the same method as used in steps 3 amp 4
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Image Notes1 the end of step 6
Image Notes1 main line2 end line3 step 1
Image Notes1 main line loop2 end line loop
Image Notes1 step 3
Image Notes1 step 4
Image Notes1 step 4 at the end with a double half hitch on the main loop
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Image Notes1 pull here2 step 5
Image Notes1 the start of step 6
Image Notes1 the end of step 6
Image Notes1 step 72 now the rest of the line is free to do more work
Related Instructables
Paracord KnotDisplay Bord byJamie bagn
ChokelessAdjustableParacord DogLeash byPizzaman101
ParacordLadder wWooden Rungsby josestude
tie a paracordshackle grip byitri45
ParacordPrussik Belt byJavaNut13
TiteTie is theTruckers Knoton Steroids bytitetie
ID Lanyard(Photos) byeschmunk
Dog Toys forHeavy Chewersby J3443RY
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Figure 8 knot and double 8 knotby jonathan111 on November 28 2007
Intro Figure 8 knot and double 8 knotI will show you how to tie a figure 8 knot and a figure 8 follow through
Step 1 Stating the knotThis is a simple knot so just follow the pictures
Step 2 Finishing the knotCross the string under and then push it through the hole Pull tightly unless you are going to do the follow through and leave it somewhat loose
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 3 The follow through knotThe follow through knot should be tied around something brought back and followed through the path of the 8 knot Look at the pictures Basically follow through the 8knot backwards
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Related Instructables
Climb Safe WithA Figure 8Knot by mattste A pocket full of
knots byKiteman
How to Tie aFigure EightKnot byTactical_Pyro
Paracord KnotDisplay Bord byJamie bagn
Cross KnotParacordLanyard byStormdrane
How to Tie aFire-escapeKnot by leonardoismael
Truckers HitchTHE mostawesome knoton the planetby schneidp20
Paracord ZipperPuller byrepeet13
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Truckers Hitch THE most awesome knot on the planetby schneidp20 on October 12 2008
Authorschneidp20I like building stuff Trouble is there just isnt enough time to build everything Sigh
Intro Truckers Hitch THE most awesome knot on the planetYes I know that there are plenty of other cool knots out there many of which I literally couldnt live wo I rock climb However this knot is unlike any other Plus Ineeded a grabber for my Instructable -) (BTW this ISNT a climbing knot) And in truth it isnt a knot by itself but rather a system of common knots
Have you ever tried to tie something down for transporting but just couldnt get the lines tight andor during transport the lines would continually loosen Then this is theknot for you I learned this knot back in the 70s when specialty car racks and ratchet straps were rare or unheard of I initially used it to tie a canoe on a car rack bothattaching to the rack as well as the lines to the bow and stern of the canoe Even with all the new gizmos available today this knot still shines because all you need is arope and ropes dont hum in the wind like straps
The unique aspect of this knot is that it gives you a 2-1 mechanical advantage when tightening the rope Be careful though You can actually damage some thingsbecause of the mechanical advantage This knot holds fast and is easy to untie hallmark traits of any good knot
Below you see the finished knot system well break it apart in the steps that follow
Image Notes1 1st anchor point a bowline2 loop3 securing knots 2 half hitches4 securing loose end with a fishermans knot5 2nd anchor point (should be round)
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Image Notes1 X marks the spot
Step 1 Initial setupThe first step is to anchor one end of the rope and then loop the rope around a 2nd anchor point
For attaching to the 1st anchor point I chose bowline a close 2 on my list -) There are other instructables on that one so I wont bore you here
The 2nd anchor really should be round because it serves as a pulley in this block and tackle type knot Ive used it on sharp anchor points and it doesnt work as well
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 2 Creating a slip knotTie a slip knot somewhere between the two anchor points Correct placement of the slip knot takes some experience to judge it correctly Typically I place it too close tothe 2nd anchor point and end up with not enough room to work with If the knot ends up too far from 2nd anchor point you can extend the knot by enlarging the loop
Be sure you tie the slip knot as shown You may not be able to untie other knots
In this small example the slip knot is uncharacteristically close to the 1st anchor point
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 3 Tightening and securingThe loose end of the rope that went around the 2nd anchor point goes through the slip knot loop Pull the loose end to the desired tension and secure with two halfhitches
Note To allow better view of the knots the rope isnt really tightened in this example
Step 4 Securing loose endThe final knot is just to secure the loose end somehow I chose a fishermans knot to do this
To tie a fishermans knot the rope goes around twice and goes under the X created by the loops Pull the loose end to tighten Finally slide the knot to put tension onthe half hitches
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Image Notes1 X marks the spot
Step 5 FinishedThere you have it I guarantee that the first time you really use this knot (not just practice) you will be amazed at how well it works and youll wish you knew this knot along time ago You may even come over to my side and declare that is is THE most awesome knot on the planet -)
Enjoy and happy haulingDave
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Related Instructables
TiteTie is theTruckers Knoton Steroids bytitetie
Four knots tomake paracordinto a usefultool byerik_mccray
Modify yourbike rack tocarry a sunfishor other boat byewilhelm
SurfboardHammock byGermy
GiganticHalloweenSpider Web bynolte919
How To Tie ASpiders Hitch(video) by back-cast
Three-hitch mathair ornamentby michiexile TRX from
ParacordChallengeAccepted bythrake
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Carry any Bottle with a JUG KNOT Handleby hpstoutharrow on September 17 2009
Intro Carry any Bottle with a JUG KNOT HandleTie a JUG KNOT around a water bottle soda bottle or aluminum bottle to make a secure carrying strap
Re-purpose any container into a reusable water bottle by adding a convenient carrying strap This Instructable will demonstrate how to tie a JUG knot which like its namesuggests is meant to properly secure around the neck of a container
With some cord and the knowledge of this knot you will be able add a handle lanyard or carabiner loop to any of your favorite beverages to carry them on the go
It works perfectly for those disposable water bottles and who knows once you add some colorful cord to the plain old clear water bottle you just might beinclined to refill it and use it again(Check out pictures 4amp5 below)
In addition to plastic beverage bottles like pop water and sports drinks you can turn those rugged aluminum beer bottles into a backpacking canteen
Those of you familiar with my previous aluminum bottle InstructablesROLLED RIM METAL TUMBLERhttpwwwinstructablescomidAluminum-Bottle-Tumbler-Cup-Cook-PotALUMINUM BOTTLE LIGHTWEIGHT ALCOHOL STOVEhttpwwwinstructablescomidAluminum-Bottle-Alcohol-Stovewill recognize the water canteen shown below as a re-purposed aluminum beer bottle Here I have added a painted surface treatment to turn it into a proper lookingwater bottle More on that in steps 13 14 15
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 1 Getting StartedCord size is important Select a small medium weight cord like the one shown here It is a general purpose camp cord sold at most sporting goods stores (shoelacesmight also work)
Do not use a heavy cord or rope because the larger diameter will not tuck under the relatively small lip at the top of the bottleneck and the bottle will fall out
Also the smaller cord cinches tight on itself and will not loosen accidentally
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 2 Form a BightThe next steps show how to tie a JUG KNOT It is the basic step for adding a carrying strap It is also the anchor point for any additional fancy bottle trussing you maywant to add
JUG KNOT Step 1
Form a Bight in the center of a length of cord Bight is a knot term for a loop or bend in the rope In this case the main Bight in this knot is highlighted with a white mark Imakes it easier to follow its path in these steps
The running ends of the cord should be equal length
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 3 Pull the Bight downPULL the Bight DOWN forming two Loops
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 4 Cross the LoopsCROSS the right Loop OVER the left Loop
Step 5 Pass the Bight under the 1st loopTake the main Bight and pass it UNDER the left Loop
Step 6 Weave the BightWEAVE the Bight OVER the portion of the right Loop and UNDER the portion of the left Loop
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 7 Extend the BightExtend the Bight OVER the outer portion of the right Loop
Step 8 Flip the Right Loop behindAdditional colored identification points have been added to the loops to follow their travel in these next two steps
The right Loop Yellow marker is FLIPPED BEHIND the knot and ends up on the far left side of the knot
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 9 Flip the 2nd loop in frontRaise the green marker (located on what was formerly the left loop) and pull it down and to the right FLIPPING IT IN FRONT of the knot
Note the blue portion of the this loop will pass around the outside of the yellow portion of the first loop
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Image Notes1 Center of knot that will tighten around the bottles neck
Step 10 Remove SlackNote where the blue green amp yellow markers end up
Start to remove the slack in the loops by pulling the original main Bight (white marker top right) and the two free standing ends at the bottom
the bottle neck will pass through the very center of the knot
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Image Notes1 Center of knot that will tighten around the bottles neck
Step 11 Tighten the KnotAfter removing the slack insert the bottle neck and finish tightening
The knot should look like this before slipping it over the bottle
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 12 Secure on bottle neckThis is the finished knot shown on the neck of various containers
The loop end and the two free standing ends can be tied together to create a carrying handle (last picture below)
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 13 Aluminum Bottle Water Bottle
The next few steps show the features of an aluminum beer bottle re-purposed as a water bottle canteen It is one of many containers that can be reused as a camp waterbottle
The bottle was lightly sanded masked and then pained with a hammered finished paint to create an interesting surface texture
Image Notes1 Textured finish paint makes an interesting grip-able surface2 Masked with tape for painting3 Masked with tape for painting
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Image Notes1 Dowel used for holding the bottle during painting
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 14 Tethered Cork StopperUse a wine bottle man made Cork as a stopper for your aluminum water bottleNote Use a cork that was removed from the wine bottle without the corkscrew penetrating through the bottom end of the cork (A hole all the way through the cork willcause it to leak) Use the unpierced end of the cork inside the water bottle
Drill a hole through the sides of the Cork Thread the cord through the hole to the center of the cord Use the cork as the main Bight and tie the Jug knot as shown inthe beginning steps
Now the cork is tethered to the bottle and will not get lost or fall on the ground
A Carabiner clip passes through the other cord end to attache the water bottle to you belt or pack
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 15 Trussed for TransportThis is another hanging method for carrying your aluminum bottle water canteen A Jug knot is tied conventionally around the neck
The running ends of the knot however are pulled down towards the bottom of the bottle A Barrel Knot is tied about 34 the way down the side of the bottle A squareknot is tied on the bottom of the knot to keep the two running ends tight against the sides of the bottle
I like the look of the accent colored cord running down the sides of the bottle and the fact that the bottle hangs from the belt upside down It adds to its uniqueness
The last picture shows another truss variation
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 16 AdvancedBelow is a bottle with some additional trussing You can be creative as you want It all starts with a re-purposed container and the Jug Knot (and enough cord)
Related Instructables
AluminumBottle TumblerCup amp Cook Potfor an AlcoholStove byhpstoutharrow
Water BottleBelt Clip byuglymike Duct Tape
Water Bottle byrabidsquire2
AluminumBottle AlcoholStove byhpstoutharrow
DIYGlass WaterBottle byCulturespy
Solar WaterHeater forBackpackingUsing WaterBottles and aCar Shade bykopomeroy
Duct tape waterbottle holder(Photos) by pinkmarshmallow
How to make aCamelPack withan old plasticbottle bywillrandship
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Basic Knots Guideby zorro3355 on April 29 2008
Intro Basic Knots Guidehi
Step 1 Thumb knotThe most simple knotUsed as a stopper and prevent ropes from fraying
Step 2 Reef KnotUsed to tie two ropes of equal thickness togetherIt is pretty easy to tie and untie but under tentionit may be diffcult to untieIt is also not sutible for smoothropes(egnylon ropes)
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 3 Figure of eightused as a stopperprevent ropes from fraying and its more secure than tumb knot its is also used to tie Caribinas to ropes and is often used in rock climbing
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 4 Timber hitchused for pulling logs
Step 5 Clove hitchUsed to tie a rope onto a pole or logThe pole must be roundThe pole lust be thicker then the rope itself
(greatly used during pioneering)
Step 6 Sheet bandused to tie ropes of different thickness together(works on same thickness of ropes too)
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 7 Sheep shankTo shorten RopesTo prevent middle fraying
Step 8 Slip knotWhippingUsed as a grip for pulling things(when tied on a stick or small pole)(marlin spike hitch)
Related Instructables
Rope Rings byhpstoutharrow
How to Tie aFigure EightKnot byTactical_Pyro
Whippin (WestCountry Style)by tim_n
SurvivalBracelet(Updated) bytevers94
HangmansNoose PackClosure byPopEye42
Turkey on aTripod byhpstoutharrow
SurvivalBracelet II bytevers94 Zigzag Spooling
Paracord (video)by Stormdrane
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
How to Tie a Fire-escape Knotby leonardo ismael on October 16 2007
Intro How to Tie a Fire-escape KnotThis knot is used by firemen in case of fires for example imagine a scene where the ladder on the firetruck messes up but people need to get down a five story buildingor more All they have is a long piece of rope they can safely get down with a secure knot like the fire-escape knot So why not learn it its easy to do and hard to untieif you tie it tightly
This is from the American Boys Handbook
Step 1 Get Your RopeFirst grab a piece of rope and bend it like this to make a loop in it Follow every step to the smallest detail
Step 2 Twist the RopeNow make a twist like this and hold it together
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 3 Pull Through the TwistPull the loop through the twist you just made from underneath
Step 4 Go Over the Split EndNow pull the tail through the loop
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 5 FinallyAnd finally just pull it through as pictured below
Congratulations you just learned the fire-escape knot
Step 6 Same Name Not KnotThis is another knot called the fire-escape knot this shouldnt be your result
Related Instructables
House FireEscape Plan(video) byWhatHappensNowAdvice
ParacordLadder wWooden Rungsby josestude
Bed SheetEscape Rope byjessehensel
rope ladder(glow-in-the-dark version) bymikeasaurus
HeadlockEscape 2(video) byjohnnyrockstah
QuickFirestarter byMattandJora
Trail sauna byjakee117
How to Kill FireAnts andCommitGenocide byKentsOkay
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Climb Safe With A Figure 8 Knotby mattste on February 23 2010
Intro Climb Safe With A Figure 8 Knot There are many things that a beginning climber needs to know including several important knots Perhaps the most essential knot is the Figure 8 Follow Through Thistutorial will demonstrate how to correctly harness yourself to a rope using a Figure 8 Follow Through knot This knot is used primarily by rock climbers to provide a life-line Since this knot is used as a life-line it is very important to be able to tie it correctly (Your life could depend upon it)
Dont worry with this tutorial and about 5 minutes of practice you can have this knot mastered
Things you will need
- Climbing Harness- Climbing Rope
If you are wanting to go climbing and dont already have these items they can be purchased for about $25 each at most outdoor sporting goods stores If you are merelylooking to learn the knot a belt loop and a rope (about five feet long) will do
Image Notes1 Climbing Harness2 Climbing Rope
Step 1 Dealing With The RopeThroughout this tutorial I will be discussing different parts of the rope To make these instructions as clear as possible I will define a few terms that I will use throughoutthe tutorial The Anchor End of the rope will generally be at the top of the images This is the end that would be anchored to the wall or rock and does not move Wewill not be doing much with the anchored end The Tail End of the rope is the opposite end that we will be dealing with I will call this the tail for short
Now that we have some terms to work with lets get started
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 2 Tying The First Figure 8This knot has several parts to it The first part of the knot is just tying a basic figure 8 To tie the first figure 8 there are four simple steps
1 - Using the tail make a loop over the rope (as shown in the first picture) keeping in mind that there should be about 3 ft of slack on the tail end
2 - Wrap the tail back this time go under the anchored end (As shown in the second picture)
3 - Bring the tail down through the first loop (As shown in the third picture)
4 - Finally pull the two ends to make the knot a little bit tighter and easier to deal with (Shown in the fourth picture)
After these four steps you should end up with a knot that resembles a figure 8
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 3 Looping Into The Harness In order to secure the rope to the harness simply thread the tail end of the rope through the front loop in the harness as shown in the picture below This step isobviously very important
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 4 Following Back Through The Figure 8After looping the rope through the harness you have to thread the tail end of the rope back through the knot following the first figure 8 I have divided this process intofive smaller steps in order to make it more clear
1 - Coming form underneath the knot bring the tail up through the near loop and to the left behind the anchored end of the rope (Shown in the first picture)
2 - Wrap the tail around the anchored end back to the right and down through the adjacent loop (Shown in the second picture)
3 - You simply need to bring the tail back over the top of the knot to the left (Shown in the third picture)
4 - Bring the tail end up through the far loop following the anchored end (Shown in the fourth picture)
5 - Finally pull the knot tight (Shown in the fifth picture)
As you can see the first four pictures are simply tracing the knot back through with the tail end
For the last part while you pull the knot tight you may want to make small adjustments and rearrange how it all fits together If the knot does not lay perfectly smoothand tight its NOT a big deal
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 5 Finishing The Knot After completing the Figure 8 knot you will want to somehow secure the tail end of the rope out of the way There are a couple different ways to do this the way that Iwill demonstrate is using whats called a Stopper Knot This secondary knot is similar to a Fishermans knot and is pretty simple I have once again divided thisprocess into several smaller steps
1 - Start by wrapping the tail end around the anchored end (As shown in the first picture)
2 - Wrap the tail back underneath the two vertical segments (As shown in the second picture)
3 - Simply repeat the first two steps wrapping the tail around again (As shown in the third picture)
4 - This step in the fourth picture may look complicated but all you need to do is insert the tail up through the two loops that you have just made
5 - To finish off the knot you will want to slowly pull the tail end while gently pushing the bottom of the stopper knot upwards If you have successfully completed this knotit should look something like the fifth picture
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 6 Ready To Climb Now that you have mastered the Figure 8 knot you can securely harness yourself into a climbing rope Remember there are many other skills that go into setting up ananchor and belaying a climber This tutorial only covers the figure 8 knot For more information there are many great websites that demonstrate how to correctly set up asafe climbing system (Ive posted a few below) If you are a beginning climber I recommend that you read up on a few other climbing techniques Also you shouldprobably go to a climbing wall or gym where there are experienced climbers that can show you the ropes Hopefully this tutorial has been helpful Have fun and be safe
Some useful linkshttpwwwstephenprattnetAnchorsanchorshtmhttpwwwuoregonedu~oppclimbingtopicsanchorshtmlhttpwwwabc-of-rockclimbingcomhowtoclimbingtechniquesasp
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Related Instructables
How to Tie aFigure EightKnot byTactical_Pyro
Paracord KnotDisplay Bord byJamie bagn
Basic KnotsGuide byzorro3355
How to Climb aTree (withprussiks) bystasterisk
How to climb atree (using onlyrope) thefunsimple wayby louieaw
How to get arope into a tree(withoutclimbing it) byvitex
How to tievarious knots byadaviel
How to make arope swing byjdub0928
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Turks Head Knots on a Bottleby sklnxbones on July 6 2010
Intro Turks Head Knots on a BottleThis is the finished project A bottle decorated with three Turks Head Knots There are only three knots on this bottle The RED and the BLUE knots are each a 20 Bightby 3 Lead Turks Head Knots The WHITE knot is a 20 Bight by 19 Lead Turks Head Knot
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 1 Supplies
Cord Lots and Lots of cord I cant tell you how much each bottle is differentBottle Washed and Dried inside and out Make sure to remove all water spotsThreaded Needle Cord screws into the threads at the base of the needlePegs I use brass rivets used as a map to tie the Turks Head KnotsHole Punch Used to punch holes in the painters tape to hold the pegsPainters Tape To hold the pegs in place and to make your map for the Turks Head KnotsMarker To write on the painters tapeCloth Towel To remove finger prints and dirt from your bottleKrazy Glue or Super Glue This is used to secure the knots in place to the bottle
OPTIONAL BUT HIGHLY RECOMMENDEDI use the Turks Head Cookbook from KnotToolcom
Step 2 PreparationYou will need to find a bottle you like I used an empty instant tea bottle of course washed and dried (I like to put the bottle in the oven for a few minutes to dry the insidewithout water spots Take off the lid and do not put lid in the oven) Now measure the circumference of the bottle Take a cord and tightly wrap the cord around the bottleMark where the ends meet and use a ruler to measure the length of the cord For my instant tea bottle the circumference is 27cm I know from past knots that I have tiedthat I want my knot to have 20 Bights in the top and bottom (bands) knots I am going to use the Bights in the (bands) knots to tie the middle knot Now divide the numberof Bights (20) into the size of the circumference (27) to get the space between each Bight (135) With me so far
Now take two pieces of painters tape using a ruler measure out the length of the circumference and mark the length on the both pieces of tape Next you will mark thespace between each Bight on the tape
Step 3 Adding the PegsI like to use pegs when tying Turks Head Knots it just makes tying the knot easier
These are what I use for pegs
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 4 Adding Pegs to the TapeNow take a hole punch to cut holes in the tape where the lines meet You will place the pegs in the holes
Insert a peg in each hole and carefully stick the first piece of tape to the bottle
Step 5 Adding the 2nd row of pegsNow do the same thing with the second piece of tape The numbers on each piece of tape must line up
This picture shows you what you should have now This odd looking thing will be your map to tie the Turks Head Knot And this is the end of Step 1
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 6 Tying the first Turks Head KnotUsing the Turks Head Cookbook follow the numbers going over and under as indicated in the book I chose a 20 Bight by 3 Lead knot which will give me a nice bandaround the bottle Once the ends meet you have made one complete knot Tape the running end of your cord and start removing the pegs and the tape
Step 7 Remove the pegs and the tapeBe careful not to untie the knot as you remove the pegs and tape from the bottle Continue to remove all the pegs and remove the tape from the bottle At this point theknot will be very loose and will need to be tightened up
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 8 Remove the slack from the knotHere you can see just how much the knot expanded Starting with the standing end begin to pull the slack out of the knot going towards the running end of the cordDo not expect to pull all the slack out at once You may have to make 3 - 5 attempts at removing the slack out of the knot DO NOT remove all of the slack out of the knotIn order to make the bands we will have to triple the Turks Head Knot We will do this by following the knot three times The threaded needle will really come in handyhere
Step 9 Triple the KnotOnce you have made three passes of the Turks Head Knot use your needle to go under your knot about half the circumference and cut the cord The knot will be tightenough to hide the tail in placeTIP I carefully add a couple of drops of super glue UNDER the band to hold them in place and keep them from sliding around in the nextsteps A drop or two in 3 or 4 places around the band should be enough
Step 10 Add the second knotNow repeat this whole step for the second bandWhen tying the second band you must make sure the Bights line up to the first band This is crucial for the next stepWipe down the bottle to make sure all your finger prints and adhesive from the tape are all removed You want to make sure your bottle is clean at this point Any dirt orfinger prints left on the bottle will be almost impossible to remove From this point on we will use gloves when tying our last knot
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 11 Maping the Top KnotStick a piece of painters tape on top of your first band leaving the bottom of the knot exposedUse a marker to count the number of Bights in your knot Instead of using the pegs we are going to use the Bights to tie our next Turks Head Knot
Step 12 Mapping the Bottom KnotDo the same thing for the bottom band but you must make sure your numbers on top and bottom line up So 1 on top should be the same position as 1 on the bottom
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 13 Adding the last knotAgain using the Turks Head Cookbook and the threaded needle you are going to follow the instructions going over and under as indicated in the book Be sure to usegloves when ever you handle the bottle
Step 14 Thats ItFor this Turks Head Knot I am using a 20 Bight by 19 Lead knot
Because of the amount of cord you are working with your cord will get twisted and knotted You will have to un-twist the cord often Its a pain in the rear but it has to bedone And it has to be done alot
Continue to tie the knot until you finish the knot If you have the cord and the patience you can double or triple the knot When you are done use your needle to hide theends under your bands Cut the ends and your DONE
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Related Instructables
Monkeys FistFloatingKeychain byjokerlz
How To Make ATurks headKnot WithParacord byDoggie Stylish
Tying Trivetsout of Rope forHoliday Gifts bykylemarsh
Paracord KnotDisplay Bord byJamie bagn
How to Make ATurks Head(Photos) bymchs60chip
A pocket full ofknots byKiteman
Monkeys fistknot AND themonkey byjonathan111
TiteTie is theTruckers Knoton Steroids bytitetie
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Larks head noose -- an easy useful knot that tightens and loosensby Larry Breed on February 19 2009
Intro Larks head noose -- an easy useful knot that tightens and loosensI thought I knew all the basic knots but then I was taught this incredibly useful simple knot Its good for tying up the neck of a bag that you want to repeatedly open andsecurely close Its good for tying around a springy bundle that will need tightening and retightening And its easy to undo
Ive looked at knot literature but havent found a name for this so I named it The basic knot is well known its called a larks head Since all Ive done is to slip the twoends through the larks head to make a noose I call it that
WARNING Dont use this knot when human safety would depend on it Climbers and mountaineers have well-tested reliable knots for such situations
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Image Notes1 To tighten further step on this side of the larks head and pull the free ends
Step 1 Double the cord overThe larks head noose requires enough cord to go twice around your bundle plus a foot or two Find the center and double it over Sailors call this a bight
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 2 Form the larks headComing from below the bight hook your thumb and forefinger over the two sides Reach outward and downward and pinch your fingertips together underneath thedoubled cord
Youve made a larks head Move the crossing cord a little farther from your hand so theres a clear opening through the two half-loops
Step 3 Form the nooseSlip the two ends of the cord through the opening we were just talking about Pull the larks head tight so it grips the two cords Find something that needs constrictingand put the noose around it
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 4 Tightening retightening and lockingSlide the knot against the bundle If its not tight enough to keep from slipping tighten it by holding it in one hand and tugging on the cords one at a time with the otherhand Notice that you can slide the knot out again for instance to re-open the bag you just tied shut For some applications this may be as tight as you need it
A springy bundle probably still feels loose If so compress the bundle and get a new grip on the cords Rest your foot on the bundle on the cords nearest the larks headand pull to slide the larks head tighter
To make the knot more permanent you can lock it Make an overhand in the cord ends (Exactly like the first step in tying shoelaces) With your foot still on the bundlepull on the cords and move your hands apart until youre pulling in opposite directions You have just locked the larks head and you can trust it to stay that way()
But lets say that later on you want to loosen the locked knot Again put your foot on the bundle and cords nearest the larks head hold the two cord ends together andpull This makes a little slack between the overhand and the larks head so you can untie the overhand
In twine or small string the locking overhand knot may be difficult to undo Use a shoelace knot instead of an overhand and itll unlock easily
() If youre using slippery cord like polypropylene an overhand may not lock securely You may want to tie another overhand knot For added security wrap a shortlength of duct tape around the two cords close to the knot
Image Notes1 To tighten further step on this side of the larks head and pull the free ends
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Related Instructables
TRX fromParacordChallengeAccepted bythrake
A pocket full ofknots byKiteman
Lens CapLanyard by~teknoarsonist~ how to tie a
noose byawesume
AdjustableParacordGlassesLanyard byjdtwelve12
HangmansNoose PackClosure byPopEye42
Paraleash - ADog LeashFrom Paracordby The Ideanator
How to make arugged andhandy ParacordBelt by Jake22
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Related Instructables
Paracord ChainSinnet FastDeploy BoonieHatband (video)by Stormdrane
Zigzag SpoolingParacord (video)by Stormdrane
SurvivalBracelet(Updated) bytevers94
Celtic ButtonKnot (video) byStormdrane
ParacordBoonie HatWrap (video) byStormdrane
Paracord wristlanyard madewith the snakeknot byStormdrane
SurvivalBracelet II bytevers94
Cobra WeaveKey Fob bytevers94
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Paracord wrist lanyard made with the snake knotby Stormdrane on September 12 2007
AuthorStormdrane Stormdranes BlogNo matter where you go there you are
Intro Paracord wrist lanyard made with the snake knotThis instructable will show how to make a wrist lanyard using paracord and the snake knot The lanyard can be used to secure a key chain knife multi-tool flashlightcell phone camera binoculars compass etc More projects links knot references can be seen on my blog page Stormdranes Blog
Step 1 SuppliesYoull need about 45 feet of paracord(you may use other types of cordage if desired) The paracord I used is from the Supply Captain I left the inner strands in theparacord but you can remove them if preferred If done in one color it will be one continuous 45 ft length if done in two colors youll need 3 ft for the primary color thatincludes the wrist section and 15 ft for the second color that will show in the snake knot Also used are scissors tape measure or ruler lighter hemostats or needle nosepliers(not necessary but they make it much easier) and a swivel clip key ring snap hook cell phone lariat carabiner or whatever attachment you prefer to use
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 2 Attaching two colors of paracordIf using two colors of paracord you will insert one color about 12 inch into the other color You may remove a small amount of the paracords inner strands by pullingthem out trimming with scissors and pulling the paracord outer sheath back over the strands leaving room to insert the other color For various projects Ive used threedifferent methods for attaching two colors of paracord melting sewing or gluing The choice is yours I usually sew them together it doesnt matter as long as its a goodconnection It will be hidden under the first knot
Step 3 Find the center of the length of paracordTake the center of the length of cord and bring it thru the attachment Im using a swivel clip For this tutorial Im measuring the wrist loop at about 10 inches from theattachment The connection of the two colors will be just on the other side at this point
Step 4 Making the snake knotThe snake knot will be made around the wrist loop section of paracord the loop strands being the core of the knot Ive added a series of photos showing the steps Iuse By using two colors youll see that I flip the lanyard over after making each knot so that Im working with the cord on the right side of the lanyard I bring it under allthe other cords working the hemostats under the previously tightened knot and pulling the cord back thru Then tightening up the knot keeping the cord from twisting andworking it up against the previous knot Again flipping the work over youll see two parallel cords of the same color which will be split with the cord on the right goingunder around and pulled thru with the hemostats then tightened up Continue this procedure until youve done about 10 snake knots(you can count them down eitherside
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 5 Count your knotsOnce you have 10 snake knots youre almost done Youll notice from the photos of both sides of the lanyard that one side has the snake knots alternating all the waydown and the other has a set of parallel knots at the top and botton of the sequence of knots Youll always have those at the start and finish of the snake knots I preferto have them end up on the same side of the lanyard so one side appears to have a more uniform look but its not required
Step 6 Trim and melt the excess paracordUse the scissors to trim off the excess cord and quickly melt the ends with a lighter so they dont fray
Step 7 Youre doneYou can make a range of variations using less or more cordknots Shorten the loop for a double ended key chain or make the loop longer for use as a neck lanyard aLanyard Break-Away Connector could be added for the safety conscious You can also add a wooden bead skull cord lock etc Visit my blog page for more knot relatedprojects links and resources Stormdranes Blog You can find ideas for other geargadgets to attach to your lanyard on EDC Forums
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Related Instructables
Paracord ChainSinnet FastDeploy BoonieHatband (video)by Stormdrane
Cross KnotParacordLanyard byStormdrane
Zigzag SpoolingParacord (video)by Stormdrane
SurvivalBracelet II bytevers94
SurvivalBracelet(Updated) bytevers94
Cobra WeaveKey Fob bytevers94
ParacordBoonie HatWrap (video) byStormdrane
Paracord KnotDisplay Bord byJamie bagn
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
How to tie various knotsby adaviel on September 7 2009
Intro How to tie various knotsKnots as a way of joining rope without special equipment are useful in many situations On a sailboat knots are essential both for daily use and for emergency repairsThis instructable describes several different common knots eg
Sheet Bend - to tie two lines togetherBowline - to make a loopReef Knot - to fasten a bundle of materialFishermans Bend - to secure a line to a post or ring
These knots are good for regular rope - braided or 3-strand polyester or natural fibre (hemp sisal) Monofilament (fishing line) or steel cable performs better with differentknots
Knots are typically quite a lot weaker than straight rope - when rope goes around a tight radius such as in a knot the outside is under more tension than the insideSplices (which require special tools and are time-consuming to make) are stronger so permanent fittings usually have eye-splices
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 1 Sheet BendThe sheet bend is used to tie two lines together It is perhaps the most generally useful knot of all When used to tie a line to itself making a loop it is called a bowlineThe strain is taken on the ropes in the middle - not the one coming out the side
How the knot is made is not critical - it is the final shape that is important One can make the flat loop first and work the other rope around it Or one can make thecrossed loop first - required when tying a bowline
The two images show front and back views of the same knot
AdvantagesEasy to makeEasy to undo when tension is removedDoes not easily capsize
DisadvantagesHard to make under loadDangerous to make under heavy load
UsesJoining two equally-sized ropesExtending a towline or stern line
Method 1 the same as a bowline
Method 2 starting with the flat loop
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 2 Double Sheet BendThe double sheet bend is used to tie two lines of different thickness - but not too different It is the same as a normal sheet bend but with an extra turn of the thinner ropearound the flat loop in the thickerThe load goes on the line through the flat loop not the one that comes out the side of the knot
UsesSecuring a heaving line to a tow lineExtending a stern line if you dont have enough line of one thickness
Step 3 BowlineThe bowline is really a special case of the sheet bend but it it tied at the end of a rope to make a loop
The photos show the completed loop and closeups of the front and back of the actual knot Note that it is the same as the sheet bend - but it must be made the right wayround This loop does not tighten in use The knot is quite easy to untie once the load is removed With practice it is very quick to tie
Some usesSecuring a dinghy line to a railing or stanchionSecuring an anchor line to an anchorTie a jib sheet to the sailTie a mooring line around a rock or treeTie a float to an anchor triplineUse one in each line to tie two ropes of very different sizes - eg a throwing line to a large tow ropeDisadvantages the knot must be completely made before it will take any strain - it is hard to tie if there is already a load on the rope
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Linked bowlines
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 4 Bowline on the BightA bowline on the bight is a bowline tied in a loop of rope (neither end is needed) The shape is the same as a bowline made with a double line but the middle of thebight forms the loop around the standing part
UsesAn impromptu bosuns chair - to sit in while being transferred between two boats at sea
Step 5 Clove HitchThe clove hitch can be made when you only have the bight (the middle) of a rope not the ends
UsesSecuring a burgee pole to a burgee halyard (a continuous loop of thin line)Securing a tiller from swinging
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 6 Round Turn and Two Half-HitchesThis is a knot used to secure a line to a ring or bar Wind a couple of turns around the bar then secure the end with two hitches around the standing part (this looks like aclove hitch when done)
AdvantagesCan be made under load - it is easy to take turns around the bar while maintaining tension on the ropeStrong - provided the bar is thicker than the rope the rope is not weakened by sharp bendsDisadvantagesThe end tends to work loose
UsesSecuring a line to a mooring ring or samson post
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 7 Fishermans BendThe fishermans bend is the same as the round turn and two half hitches except that the first hitch is looped under the round turn This uses the tension on the rope tosecure the end from working loose
AdvantagesSecure against working loose
DisadvantagesHard to make under tensionHard to undo under tensionMay seize up under load when wet making it hard to undo
UsesSecuring mooring line to ringSecuring fender lines to rail
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 8 Studsail BendThe studsail bend is like the fishermans bend but the second hitch is also secured under the round turn making it even more secure against working loose when undertension
AdvantagesVery secure against working looseDisadvantagesHard to make under tensionHard to undo under tension
Step 9 Figure-8 KnotThe figure-eight knot is used to prevent an end of rope from passing through a block (pulley) Sometimes called a stopper knot
The double figure-8 knot is used in rock climbing as an alternative to a bowline to secure a climbing harness to the end of a safety rope The double knot is made bymaking a single knot then tracing back around the knot with the free end after passing it around the harness loop
AdvantagesEasy to verify by inspectionNot prone to work loose
DisadvantagesSlow to make and undoCannot be made under load
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 10 Prussic KnotThe prussic knot may be used as a climbing ascender - when made around a vertical rope as shown downwards tension on the ends locks the knot while release oftension allows it to be slid up the rope A pair of prussic knots on foot loops may be used in tandem to climb a rope
UsesClimbing a ropeTaking up tension to free a riding turn on a winch
Step 11 Reef KnotThe reef knot or square knot is used to tie a bundle of material together It must be made around something - it should not be used to tie two free ropes togetherbecause it can easily capsizeIt should not be used to make a loop unless it can be tensioned around a solid object It should not be used around a person - use a bowline instead A capsized reefknot will slip easily and could constrict and cause severe injury
UsesReefing a sail (tying the unused portion around a spar)Securing a furled sail to a spar (sail ties)Wrapping a parcelTying shoelaces
AdvantagesMay be made under moderate load
DisadvantagesCapsizes (works free) if used improperlyCan seize up under load when wet
Tying the knot
Capsizing a reef knot
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 12 CleatsThis is not a knot but is very common on boatsThe first picture shows a rope cleated normally The second shows one with a final locking turn - the last turn is twisted before placing over the cleat so that the tensionon the rope helps secure the free end
When working with ropes under tension take a turn or two around a winch or cleat before trying to secure the end with a knot The load on the free end falls exponentiallywith each turn taken Severe injury can result if a finger or other body part is caught in a loop of rope or between a rope and another object
Step 13 Practice themIt is sometimes useful to be able to tie knots in the dark or as in this video behind your back
Related Instructables
AThird Hand forSailing or OtherThings by WadeTarzia
Paracord KnotDisplay Bord byJamie bagn
Trip LogOutriggerCanoe Sailingthe CaliforniaChannel Islandsby TimAnderson
How to Tie aFigure EightKnot byTactical_Pyro
How to build apirate ship bymdelaney3
Build a ShortDragon (16 foot3-BoardOutriggerSailing Canoe)by Wade Tarzia
repairing aheadsail by josh
How to get arope into a tree(withoutclimbing it) byvitex
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
How to Tie the Lanyard Knotby eddy14777 on January 31 2010
Intro How to Tie the Lanyard KnotMany people including myself have had trouble following the Stormdrane youtube video on tying the lanyard knot so i have done some research and found the solution
Image Notes1 Finished knot
Step 1 MaterialsAll you need is a reasonable length of para cord or whatever you wish to use
Image Notes1 One reasonable amount
Step 2 First StepThe first thing you are going to do is to make a bight that leaves you with to congruent endsThen you are going to put your ring finger through the bight
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Image Notes1 Close enough2 Bight
Step 3 Starting the KnotMake a loop just like the one in the picture and place it over the top strandBring the top strand under the bottom strand
Image Notes1 Notice the way the loop is done2 Top strand
Image Notes1 Bottom strand2 Top strand is under
Step 4 The Most Important PartNow you take the top stand from the previous picture and feed it over the first part of the loop under itself and back over the remainder of the loop
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Image Notes1 Under me2 Top strand3 This should make a diamond type shape
Step 5 DoublingNow take the bottom stand and take it around the part of the top strand nearest to the bight and than come up through the diamond shape in the middleDo the same for the top strand
Image Notes1 Top strand
Image Notes1 Both through the diamond
Step 6 FinishingWhen you take it off your finger it should look like thisWork out the slack by pulling on the bight and the two strands
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Image Notes1 Finished knot
Related Instructables
Cross KnotParacordLanyard byStormdrane
Celtic ButtonKnot (video) byStormdrane
Paracord wristlanyard madewith the snakeknot byStormdrane
Paracord ChainSinnet FastDeploy BoonieHatband (video)by Stormdrane
Zigzag SpoolingParacord (video)by Stormdrane
ParacordBoonie HatWrap (video) byStormdrane
Paracord IDbadge Lanyardby Flahusky
Cobra WeaveKey Fob bytevers94
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Four knots to make paracord into a useful toolby erik_mccray on March 27 2010
Authorerik_mccrayI am an ex-fabricator that is now a stay at home dad I love my new job but I do miss making stuff I love this site amp I am getting involved as a way to keep myskills upOn top of fad work I have also run two small business in the past One was custom sewing amp the other was as a small engine mechanicI have two votec degrees one in metal fabrication amp the other is in engine repairI look forward to getting to know everyone here
Intro Four knots to make paracord into a useful toolParacord is an awesome multitool used everywhere from the wild blue yonder to the deepest caverns But like any good tool it is only as good as the knowledge the userhas about the tool With most people out there using bungee cords amp ratchet straps it seems that paracord is being used for nothing more than friendship bracelets forgrown men This is a shame because for less then the price of a few cheap bungee cords amp some to short to be helpful straps You can get yourself hundreds of feet ofparacord
The key to getting the most out of the paracord is good knot work The first thing you need to know is what makes a good knot One is that the knot is easy amp quick to tieamp more impotant is that the knot is easy amp quick to untie The hitch class of knots is by far the best group of knots that the average person could know The four mostuseful hitch knots are the half hitch a quick simple knot that forms the base for many other knots the inline half hitch allowing you to get the most out of one length ofparacord the slippery hitch that gives you both on the fly control over tension on your paracord but also an adjustable loop that will not change unless you want it amp theinline truckers hitch instantly doubling the your pulling power
Step 1 To get started lets get some terminology that will be used defined
line= the paracord
Main line= the part of the paracord doing the work for example holding down your tarp or the long part of the paracord
Mid line= the middle of the length of the paracord
End line= the unused length of paracord or the short length of paracord
Step 2 The half hitch The half hitch is a simple way to secure a line to an anchor point like the tie down points in most trucks A half hitch is a constrictor knot meaning that the harder you pullon the line the tighter the knots grip gets Another common constrictor knot is the slip knot
Step 1 wrap your line around your anchor point Step 2 wrap the end line around the main line
Step 3 pass the end line threw the end line side of the newly formed loop
step 4 now take the slack out of the knot
step 5 to make sure the knot is secure tie another half hitch to the main line This knot is called adouble half hitch
step 6 another useful thing that can be done with the half hitch is that instead of repeating the wrap on the main line but repeating it on what you are tying to the half hitchcan be used to bind something like a stack of 2x4s
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Image Notes1 End line2 Main line3 step 1
Image Notes1 Step 2
Image Notes1 passing thew the end line side of the loop2 step 3
Image Notes1 step 5
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Image Notes1 step 6
Step 3 The mid line half hitch The mid line half hitch is for when the length of line is to long for the job at hand amp you dont want to have to cut the line to size or you are using multiple anchor pointswith one length of line
Step 1 double up the line at the point in the length you wish to make the knot
Step 2 wrap the doubled up portion of line around your anchor point The doubled up length is now now the end line
Step 3 now tie just as you did for the regular half hitch repeat the knot to make a double half hitch for security
Image Notes1 A mid line double half hitch
Image Notes1 step 1
Image Notes1 The end line2 step 2
Image Notes1 Step 3
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 4 The slippery hitch The slippery hitch is a great knot for adjusting tension on the main line or for having an adjustable fixed loop To adjust the knot simply slide the knot up or down the mainline
Step 1 wrap your line around the anchor point or just double over the line to form a loop
Step 2 wrap the end line around the main line three times Wrapping in the direction of the anchor point or loop
Step 3 put together the two lines making up the loop amp wrap the two lines one time with the end line
Step 4 pass the end line thew the last loop formed covering the two lined of the loop
Step 5 pull the knot tite
step 6 to adjust the size of the loop or main line tension grab the knot amp slide it up or down the main line
Image Notes1 grab just the knot its self to adjust it2 step 5
Image Notes1 step 1
Image Notes1 step 2
Image Notes1 step 3
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Image Notes1 step 4
Image Notes1 grab just the knot its self to adjust it2 step 5
Image Notes1 same knot as in last pic Just slid up2 step 6
Step 5 The mid line truchers hitch The truckers hitch is a great way to double the pulling force on a line There are many ways to tie this knot the problem with most of them is that at some point you aregoing to have to pass the end line through a loop on the main line that is acting like a pulley to double your pulling force this is great if you are making the knot close tothe end of your line but if you are using a 300 length of line amp want to make the knot in the first ten feet having to pass 290 of line thew a loop is a pain But with a fewhalf hitches you will not have to pass the end line threw any loop on the main line
step 1 wrap your line around the anchor point then double over your end line laying the top of the loop over the main line
Step 2 double up your main line amp lay the loop over the loop made by the end line
step 3 in main line above the knot twist in a loop
step 4 put main line loop thew the loop made in step 3 amp pull this loop tight over your main line loop forming a half hitch Repeat step 3 amp 4 to make a doublehalf hitch
step 5 To use the knot just pull down on the end line to put tension on the main line
step 6 after you have the main line snug tie a mid line double half hitch around the two lines forming the loop at the end of the main line with the end line
step 7 Tie a double half hitch with the end line around the end loop of the mid line half hitch of step 6 using the same method as used in steps 3 amp 4
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Image Notes1 the end of step 6
Image Notes1 main line2 end line3 step 1
Image Notes1 main line loop2 end line loop
Image Notes1 step 3
Image Notes1 step 4
Image Notes1 step 4 at the end with a double half hitch on the main loop
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Image Notes1 pull here2 step 5
Image Notes1 the start of step 6
Image Notes1 the end of step 6
Image Notes1 step 72 now the rest of the line is free to do more work
Related Instructables
Paracord KnotDisplay Bord byJamie bagn
ChokelessAdjustableParacord DogLeash byPizzaman101
ParacordLadder wWooden Rungsby josestude
tie a paracordshackle grip byitri45
ParacordPrussik Belt byJavaNut13
TiteTie is theTruckers Knoton Steroids bytitetie
ID Lanyard(Photos) byeschmunk
Dog Toys forHeavy Chewersby J3443RY
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Figure 8 knot and double 8 knotby jonathan111 on November 28 2007
Intro Figure 8 knot and double 8 knotI will show you how to tie a figure 8 knot and a figure 8 follow through
Step 1 Stating the knotThis is a simple knot so just follow the pictures
Step 2 Finishing the knotCross the string under and then push it through the hole Pull tightly unless you are going to do the follow through and leave it somewhat loose
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 3 The follow through knotThe follow through knot should be tied around something brought back and followed through the path of the 8 knot Look at the pictures Basically follow through the 8knot backwards
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Related Instructables
Climb Safe WithA Figure 8Knot by mattste A pocket full of
knots byKiteman
How to Tie aFigure EightKnot byTactical_Pyro
Paracord KnotDisplay Bord byJamie bagn
Cross KnotParacordLanyard byStormdrane
How to Tie aFire-escapeKnot by leonardoismael
Truckers HitchTHE mostawesome knoton the planetby schneidp20
Paracord ZipperPuller byrepeet13
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Truckers Hitch THE most awesome knot on the planetby schneidp20 on October 12 2008
Authorschneidp20I like building stuff Trouble is there just isnt enough time to build everything Sigh
Intro Truckers Hitch THE most awesome knot on the planetYes I know that there are plenty of other cool knots out there many of which I literally couldnt live wo I rock climb However this knot is unlike any other Plus Ineeded a grabber for my Instructable -) (BTW this ISNT a climbing knot) And in truth it isnt a knot by itself but rather a system of common knots
Have you ever tried to tie something down for transporting but just couldnt get the lines tight andor during transport the lines would continually loosen Then this is theknot for you I learned this knot back in the 70s when specialty car racks and ratchet straps were rare or unheard of I initially used it to tie a canoe on a car rack bothattaching to the rack as well as the lines to the bow and stern of the canoe Even with all the new gizmos available today this knot still shines because all you need is arope and ropes dont hum in the wind like straps
The unique aspect of this knot is that it gives you a 2-1 mechanical advantage when tightening the rope Be careful though You can actually damage some thingsbecause of the mechanical advantage This knot holds fast and is easy to untie hallmark traits of any good knot
Below you see the finished knot system well break it apart in the steps that follow
Image Notes1 1st anchor point a bowline2 loop3 securing knots 2 half hitches4 securing loose end with a fishermans knot5 2nd anchor point (should be round)
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Image Notes1 X marks the spot
Step 1 Initial setupThe first step is to anchor one end of the rope and then loop the rope around a 2nd anchor point
For attaching to the 1st anchor point I chose bowline a close 2 on my list -) There are other instructables on that one so I wont bore you here
The 2nd anchor really should be round because it serves as a pulley in this block and tackle type knot Ive used it on sharp anchor points and it doesnt work as well
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 2 Creating a slip knotTie a slip knot somewhere between the two anchor points Correct placement of the slip knot takes some experience to judge it correctly Typically I place it too close tothe 2nd anchor point and end up with not enough room to work with If the knot ends up too far from 2nd anchor point you can extend the knot by enlarging the loop
Be sure you tie the slip knot as shown You may not be able to untie other knots
In this small example the slip knot is uncharacteristically close to the 1st anchor point
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 3 Tightening and securingThe loose end of the rope that went around the 2nd anchor point goes through the slip knot loop Pull the loose end to the desired tension and secure with two halfhitches
Note To allow better view of the knots the rope isnt really tightened in this example
Step 4 Securing loose endThe final knot is just to secure the loose end somehow I chose a fishermans knot to do this
To tie a fishermans knot the rope goes around twice and goes under the X created by the loops Pull the loose end to tighten Finally slide the knot to put tension onthe half hitches
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Image Notes1 X marks the spot
Step 5 FinishedThere you have it I guarantee that the first time you really use this knot (not just practice) you will be amazed at how well it works and youll wish you knew this knot along time ago You may even come over to my side and declare that is is THE most awesome knot on the planet -)
Enjoy and happy haulingDave
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Related Instructables
TiteTie is theTruckers Knoton Steroids bytitetie
Four knots tomake paracordinto a usefultool byerik_mccray
Modify yourbike rack tocarry a sunfishor other boat byewilhelm
SurfboardHammock byGermy
GiganticHalloweenSpider Web bynolte919
How To Tie ASpiders Hitch(video) by back-cast
Three-hitch mathair ornamentby michiexile TRX from
ParacordChallengeAccepted bythrake
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Carry any Bottle with a JUG KNOT Handleby hpstoutharrow on September 17 2009
Intro Carry any Bottle with a JUG KNOT HandleTie a JUG KNOT around a water bottle soda bottle or aluminum bottle to make a secure carrying strap
Re-purpose any container into a reusable water bottle by adding a convenient carrying strap This Instructable will demonstrate how to tie a JUG knot which like its namesuggests is meant to properly secure around the neck of a container
With some cord and the knowledge of this knot you will be able add a handle lanyard or carabiner loop to any of your favorite beverages to carry them on the go
It works perfectly for those disposable water bottles and who knows once you add some colorful cord to the plain old clear water bottle you just might beinclined to refill it and use it again(Check out pictures 4amp5 below)
In addition to plastic beverage bottles like pop water and sports drinks you can turn those rugged aluminum beer bottles into a backpacking canteen
Those of you familiar with my previous aluminum bottle InstructablesROLLED RIM METAL TUMBLERhttpwwwinstructablescomidAluminum-Bottle-Tumbler-Cup-Cook-PotALUMINUM BOTTLE LIGHTWEIGHT ALCOHOL STOVEhttpwwwinstructablescomidAluminum-Bottle-Alcohol-Stovewill recognize the water canteen shown below as a re-purposed aluminum beer bottle Here I have added a painted surface treatment to turn it into a proper lookingwater bottle More on that in steps 13 14 15
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 1 Getting StartedCord size is important Select a small medium weight cord like the one shown here It is a general purpose camp cord sold at most sporting goods stores (shoelacesmight also work)
Do not use a heavy cord or rope because the larger diameter will not tuck under the relatively small lip at the top of the bottleneck and the bottle will fall out
Also the smaller cord cinches tight on itself and will not loosen accidentally
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 2 Form a BightThe next steps show how to tie a JUG KNOT It is the basic step for adding a carrying strap It is also the anchor point for any additional fancy bottle trussing you maywant to add
JUG KNOT Step 1
Form a Bight in the center of a length of cord Bight is a knot term for a loop or bend in the rope In this case the main Bight in this knot is highlighted with a white mark Imakes it easier to follow its path in these steps
The running ends of the cord should be equal length
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 3 Pull the Bight downPULL the Bight DOWN forming two Loops
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 4 Cross the LoopsCROSS the right Loop OVER the left Loop
Step 5 Pass the Bight under the 1st loopTake the main Bight and pass it UNDER the left Loop
Step 6 Weave the BightWEAVE the Bight OVER the portion of the right Loop and UNDER the portion of the left Loop
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 7 Extend the BightExtend the Bight OVER the outer portion of the right Loop
Step 8 Flip the Right Loop behindAdditional colored identification points have been added to the loops to follow their travel in these next two steps
The right Loop Yellow marker is FLIPPED BEHIND the knot and ends up on the far left side of the knot
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 9 Flip the 2nd loop in frontRaise the green marker (located on what was formerly the left loop) and pull it down and to the right FLIPPING IT IN FRONT of the knot
Note the blue portion of the this loop will pass around the outside of the yellow portion of the first loop
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Image Notes1 Center of knot that will tighten around the bottles neck
Step 10 Remove SlackNote where the blue green amp yellow markers end up
Start to remove the slack in the loops by pulling the original main Bight (white marker top right) and the two free standing ends at the bottom
the bottle neck will pass through the very center of the knot
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Image Notes1 Center of knot that will tighten around the bottles neck
Step 11 Tighten the KnotAfter removing the slack insert the bottle neck and finish tightening
The knot should look like this before slipping it over the bottle
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 12 Secure on bottle neckThis is the finished knot shown on the neck of various containers
The loop end and the two free standing ends can be tied together to create a carrying handle (last picture below)
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 13 Aluminum Bottle Water Bottle
The next few steps show the features of an aluminum beer bottle re-purposed as a water bottle canteen It is one of many containers that can be reused as a camp waterbottle
The bottle was lightly sanded masked and then pained with a hammered finished paint to create an interesting surface texture
Image Notes1 Textured finish paint makes an interesting grip-able surface2 Masked with tape for painting3 Masked with tape for painting
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Image Notes1 Dowel used for holding the bottle during painting
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 14 Tethered Cork StopperUse a wine bottle man made Cork as a stopper for your aluminum water bottleNote Use a cork that was removed from the wine bottle without the corkscrew penetrating through the bottom end of the cork (A hole all the way through the cork willcause it to leak) Use the unpierced end of the cork inside the water bottle
Drill a hole through the sides of the Cork Thread the cord through the hole to the center of the cord Use the cork as the main Bight and tie the Jug knot as shown inthe beginning steps
Now the cork is tethered to the bottle and will not get lost or fall on the ground
A Carabiner clip passes through the other cord end to attache the water bottle to you belt or pack
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 15 Trussed for TransportThis is another hanging method for carrying your aluminum bottle water canteen A Jug knot is tied conventionally around the neck
The running ends of the knot however are pulled down towards the bottom of the bottle A Barrel Knot is tied about 34 the way down the side of the bottle A squareknot is tied on the bottom of the knot to keep the two running ends tight against the sides of the bottle
I like the look of the accent colored cord running down the sides of the bottle and the fact that the bottle hangs from the belt upside down It adds to its uniqueness
The last picture shows another truss variation
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 16 AdvancedBelow is a bottle with some additional trussing You can be creative as you want It all starts with a re-purposed container and the Jug Knot (and enough cord)
Related Instructables
AluminumBottle TumblerCup amp Cook Potfor an AlcoholStove byhpstoutharrow
Water BottleBelt Clip byuglymike Duct Tape
Water Bottle byrabidsquire2
AluminumBottle AlcoholStove byhpstoutharrow
DIYGlass WaterBottle byCulturespy
Solar WaterHeater forBackpackingUsing WaterBottles and aCar Shade bykopomeroy
Duct tape waterbottle holder(Photos) by pinkmarshmallow
How to make aCamelPack withan old plasticbottle bywillrandship
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Basic Knots Guideby zorro3355 on April 29 2008
Intro Basic Knots Guidehi
Step 1 Thumb knotThe most simple knotUsed as a stopper and prevent ropes from fraying
Step 2 Reef KnotUsed to tie two ropes of equal thickness togetherIt is pretty easy to tie and untie but under tentionit may be diffcult to untieIt is also not sutible for smoothropes(egnylon ropes)
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 3 Figure of eightused as a stopperprevent ropes from fraying and its more secure than tumb knot its is also used to tie Caribinas to ropes and is often used in rock climbing
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 4 Timber hitchused for pulling logs
Step 5 Clove hitchUsed to tie a rope onto a pole or logThe pole must be roundThe pole lust be thicker then the rope itself
(greatly used during pioneering)
Step 6 Sheet bandused to tie ropes of different thickness together(works on same thickness of ropes too)
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 7 Sheep shankTo shorten RopesTo prevent middle fraying
Step 8 Slip knotWhippingUsed as a grip for pulling things(when tied on a stick or small pole)(marlin spike hitch)
Related Instructables
Rope Rings byhpstoutharrow
How to Tie aFigure EightKnot byTactical_Pyro
Whippin (WestCountry Style)by tim_n
SurvivalBracelet(Updated) bytevers94
HangmansNoose PackClosure byPopEye42
Turkey on aTripod byhpstoutharrow
SurvivalBracelet II bytevers94 Zigzag Spooling
Paracord (video)by Stormdrane
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
How to Tie a Fire-escape Knotby leonardo ismael on October 16 2007
Intro How to Tie a Fire-escape KnotThis knot is used by firemen in case of fires for example imagine a scene where the ladder on the firetruck messes up but people need to get down a five story buildingor more All they have is a long piece of rope they can safely get down with a secure knot like the fire-escape knot So why not learn it its easy to do and hard to untieif you tie it tightly
This is from the American Boys Handbook
Step 1 Get Your RopeFirst grab a piece of rope and bend it like this to make a loop in it Follow every step to the smallest detail
Step 2 Twist the RopeNow make a twist like this and hold it together
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 3 Pull Through the TwistPull the loop through the twist you just made from underneath
Step 4 Go Over the Split EndNow pull the tail through the loop
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 5 FinallyAnd finally just pull it through as pictured below
Congratulations you just learned the fire-escape knot
Step 6 Same Name Not KnotThis is another knot called the fire-escape knot this shouldnt be your result
Related Instructables
House FireEscape Plan(video) byWhatHappensNowAdvice
ParacordLadder wWooden Rungsby josestude
Bed SheetEscape Rope byjessehensel
rope ladder(glow-in-the-dark version) bymikeasaurus
HeadlockEscape 2(video) byjohnnyrockstah
QuickFirestarter byMattandJora
Trail sauna byjakee117
How to Kill FireAnts andCommitGenocide byKentsOkay
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Climb Safe With A Figure 8 Knotby mattste on February 23 2010
Intro Climb Safe With A Figure 8 Knot There are many things that a beginning climber needs to know including several important knots Perhaps the most essential knot is the Figure 8 Follow Through Thistutorial will demonstrate how to correctly harness yourself to a rope using a Figure 8 Follow Through knot This knot is used primarily by rock climbers to provide a life-line Since this knot is used as a life-line it is very important to be able to tie it correctly (Your life could depend upon it)
Dont worry with this tutorial and about 5 minutes of practice you can have this knot mastered
Things you will need
- Climbing Harness- Climbing Rope
If you are wanting to go climbing and dont already have these items they can be purchased for about $25 each at most outdoor sporting goods stores If you are merelylooking to learn the knot a belt loop and a rope (about five feet long) will do
Image Notes1 Climbing Harness2 Climbing Rope
Step 1 Dealing With The RopeThroughout this tutorial I will be discussing different parts of the rope To make these instructions as clear as possible I will define a few terms that I will use throughoutthe tutorial The Anchor End of the rope will generally be at the top of the images This is the end that would be anchored to the wall or rock and does not move Wewill not be doing much with the anchored end The Tail End of the rope is the opposite end that we will be dealing with I will call this the tail for short
Now that we have some terms to work with lets get started
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 2 Tying The First Figure 8This knot has several parts to it The first part of the knot is just tying a basic figure 8 To tie the first figure 8 there are four simple steps
1 - Using the tail make a loop over the rope (as shown in the first picture) keeping in mind that there should be about 3 ft of slack on the tail end
2 - Wrap the tail back this time go under the anchored end (As shown in the second picture)
3 - Bring the tail down through the first loop (As shown in the third picture)
4 - Finally pull the two ends to make the knot a little bit tighter and easier to deal with (Shown in the fourth picture)
After these four steps you should end up with a knot that resembles a figure 8
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 3 Looping Into The Harness In order to secure the rope to the harness simply thread the tail end of the rope through the front loop in the harness as shown in the picture below This step isobviously very important
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 4 Following Back Through The Figure 8After looping the rope through the harness you have to thread the tail end of the rope back through the knot following the first figure 8 I have divided this process intofive smaller steps in order to make it more clear
1 - Coming form underneath the knot bring the tail up through the near loop and to the left behind the anchored end of the rope (Shown in the first picture)
2 - Wrap the tail around the anchored end back to the right and down through the adjacent loop (Shown in the second picture)
3 - You simply need to bring the tail back over the top of the knot to the left (Shown in the third picture)
4 - Bring the tail end up through the far loop following the anchored end (Shown in the fourth picture)
5 - Finally pull the knot tight (Shown in the fifth picture)
As you can see the first four pictures are simply tracing the knot back through with the tail end
For the last part while you pull the knot tight you may want to make small adjustments and rearrange how it all fits together If the knot does not lay perfectly smoothand tight its NOT a big deal
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 5 Finishing The Knot After completing the Figure 8 knot you will want to somehow secure the tail end of the rope out of the way There are a couple different ways to do this the way that Iwill demonstrate is using whats called a Stopper Knot This secondary knot is similar to a Fishermans knot and is pretty simple I have once again divided thisprocess into several smaller steps
1 - Start by wrapping the tail end around the anchored end (As shown in the first picture)
2 - Wrap the tail back underneath the two vertical segments (As shown in the second picture)
3 - Simply repeat the first two steps wrapping the tail around again (As shown in the third picture)
4 - This step in the fourth picture may look complicated but all you need to do is insert the tail up through the two loops that you have just made
5 - To finish off the knot you will want to slowly pull the tail end while gently pushing the bottom of the stopper knot upwards If you have successfully completed this knotit should look something like the fifth picture
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 6 Ready To Climb Now that you have mastered the Figure 8 knot you can securely harness yourself into a climbing rope Remember there are many other skills that go into setting up ananchor and belaying a climber This tutorial only covers the figure 8 knot For more information there are many great websites that demonstrate how to correctly set up asafe climbing system (Ive posted a few below) If you are a beginning climber I recommend that you read up on a few other climbing techniques Also you shouldprobably go to a climbing wall or gym where there are experienced climbers that can show you the ropes Hopefully this tutorial has been helpful Have fun and be safe
Some useful linkshttpwwwstephenprattnetAnchorsanchorshtmhttpwwwuoregonedu~oppclimbingtopicsanchorshtmlhttpwwwabc-of-rockclimbingcomhowtoclimbingtechniquesasp
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Related Instructables
How to Tie aFigure EightKnot byTactical_Pyro
Paracord KnotDisplay Bord byJamie bagn
Basic KnotsGuide byzorro3355
How to Climb aTree (withprussiks) bystasterisk
How to climb atree (using onlyrope) thefunsimple wayby louieaw
How to get arope into a tree(withoutclimbing it) byvitex
How to tievarious knots byadaviel
How to make arope swing byjdub0928
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Turks Head Knots on a Bottleby sklnxbones on July 6 2010
Intro Turks Head Knots on a BottleThis is the finished project A bottle decorated with three Turks Head Knots There are only three knots on this bottle The RED and the BLUE knots are each a 20 Bightby 3 Lead Turks Head Knots The WHITE knot is a 20 Bight by 19 Lead Turks Head Knot
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 1 Supplies
Cord Lots and Lots of cord I cant tell you how much each bottle is differentBottle Washed and Dried inside and out Make sure to remove all water spotsThreaded Needle Cord screws into the threads at the base of the needlePegs I use brass rivets used as a map to tie the Turks Head KnotsHole Punch Used to punch holes in the painters tape to hold the pegsPainters Tape To hold the pegs in place and to make your map for the Turks Head KnotsMarker To write on the painters tapeCloth Towel To remove finger prints and dirt from your bottleKrazy Glue or Super Glue This is used to secure the knots in place to the bottle
OPTIONAL BUT HIGHLY RECOMMENDEDI use the Turks Head Cookbook from KnotToolcom
Step 2 PreparationYou will need to find a bottle you like I used an empty instant tea bottle of course washed and dried (I like to put the bottle in the oven for a few minutes to dry the insidewithout water spots Take off the lid and do not put lid in the oven) Now measure the circumference of the bottle Take a cord and tightly wrap the cord around the bottleMark where the ends meet and use a ruler to measure the length of the cord For my instant tea bottle the circumference is 27cm I know from past knots that I have tiedthat I want my knot to have 20 Bights in the top and bottom (bands) knots I am going to use the Bights in the (bands) knots to tie the middle knot Now divide the numberof Bights (20) into the size of the circumference (27) to get the space between each Bight (135) With me so far
Now take two pieces of painters tape using a ruler measure out the length of the circumference and mark the length on the both pieces of tape Next you will mark thespace between each Bight on the tape
Step 3 Adding the PegsI like to use pegs when tying Turks Head Knots it just makes tying the knot easier
These are what I use for pegs
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 4 Adding Pegs to the TapeNow take a hole punch to cut holes in the tape where the lines meet You will place the pegs in the holes
Insert a peg in each hole and carefully stick the first piece of tape to the bottle
Step 5 Adding the 2nd row of pegsNow do the same thing with the second piece of tape The numbers on each piece of tape must line up
This picture shows you what you should have now This odd looking thing will be your map to tie the Turks Head Knot And this is the end of Step 1
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 6 Tying the first Turks Head KnotUsing the Turks Head Cookbook follow the numbers going over and under as indicated in the book I chose a 20 Bight by 3 Lead knot which will give me a nice bandaround the bottle Once the ends meet you have made one complete knot Tape the running end of your cord and start removing the pegs and the tape
Step 7 Remove the pegs and the tapeBe careful not to untie the knot as you remove the pegs and tape from the bottle Continue to remove all the pegs and remove the tape from the bottle At this point theknot will be very loose and will need to be tightened up
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 8 Remove the slack from the knotHere you can see just how much the knot expanded Starting with the standing end begin to pull the slack out of the knot going towards the running end of the cordDo not expect to pull all the slack out at once You may have to make 3 - 5 attempts at removing the slack out of the knot DO NOT remove all of the slack out of the knotIn order to make the bands we will have to triple the Turks Head Knot We will do this by following the knot three times The threaded needle will really come in handyhere
Step 9 Triple the KnotOnce you have made three passes of the Turks Head Knot use your needle to go under your knot about half the circumference and cut the cord The knot will be tightenough to hide the tail in placeTIP I carefully add a couple of drops of super glue UNDER the band to hold them in place and keep them from sliding around in the nextsteps A drop or two in 3 or 4 places around the band should be enough
Step 10 Add the second knotNow repeat this whole step for the second bandWhen tying the second band you must make sure the Bights line up to the first band This is crucial for the next stepWipe down the bottle to make sure all your finger prints and adhesive from the tape are all removed You want to make sure your bottle is clean at this point Any dirt orfinger prints left on the bottle will be almost impossible to remove From this point on we will use gloves when tying our last knot
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 11 Maping the Top KnotStick a piece of painters tape on top of your first band leaving the bottom of the knot exposedUse a marker to count the number of Bights in your knot Instead of using the pegs we are going to use the Bights to tie our next Turks Head Knot
Step 12 Mapping the Bottom KnotDo the same thing for the bottom band but you must make sure your numbers on top and bottom line up So 1 on top should be the same position as 1 on the bottom
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 13 Adding the last knotAgain using the Turks Head Cookbook and the threaded needle you are going to follow the instructions going over and under as indicated in the book Be sure to usegloves when ever you handle the bottle
Step 14 Thats ItFor this Turks Head Knot I am using a 20 Bight by 19 Lead knot
Because of the amount of cord you are working with your cord will get twisted and knotted You will have to un-twist the cord often Its a pain in the rear but it has to bedone And it has to be done alot
Continue to tie the knot until you finish the knot If you have the cord and the patience you can double or triple the knot When you are done use your needle to hide theends under your bands Cut the ends and your DONE
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Related Instructables
Monkeys FistFloatingKeychain byjokerlz
How To Make ATurks headKnot WithParacord byDoggie Stylish
Tying Trivetsout of Rope forHoliday Gifts bykylemarsh
Paracord KnotDisplay Bord byJamie bagn
How to Make ATurks Head(Photos) bymchs60chip
A pocket full ofknots byKiteman
Monkeys fistknot AND themonkey byjonathan111
TiteTie is theTruckers Knoton Steroids bytitetie
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Larks head noose -- an easy useful knot that tightens and loosensby Larry Breed on February 19 2009
Intro Larks head noose -- an easy useful knot that tightens and loosensI thought I knew all the basic knots but then I was taught this incredibly useful simple knot Its good for tying up the neck of a bag that you want to repeatedly open andsecurely close Its good for tying around a springy bundle that will need tightening and retightening And its easy to undo
Ive looked at knot literature but havent found a name for this so I named it The basic knot is well known its called a larks head Since all Ive done is to slip the twoends through the larks head to make a noose I call it that
WARNING Dont use this knot when human safety would depend on it Climbers and mountaineers have well-tested reliable knots for such situations
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Image Notes1 To tighten further step on this side of the larks head and pull the free ends
Step 1 Double the cord overThe larks head noose requires enough cord to go twice around your bundle plus a foot or two Find the center and double it over Sailors call this a bight
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 2 Form the larks headComing from below the bight hook your thumb and forefinger over the two sides Reach outward and downward and pinch your fingertips together underneath thedoubled cord
Youve made a larks head Move the crossing cord a little farther from your hand so theres a clear opening through the two half-loops
Step 3 Form the nooseSlip the two ends of the cord through the opening we were just talking about Pull the larks head tight so it grips the two cords Find something that needs constrictingand put the noose around it
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 4 Tightening retightening and lockingSlide the knot against the bundle If its not tight enough to keep from slipping tighten it by holding it in one hand and tugging on the cords one at a time with the otherhand Notice that you can slide the knot out again for instance to re-open the bag you just tied shut For some applications this may be as tight as you need it
A springy bundle probably still feels loose If so compress the bundle and get a new grip on the cords Rest your foot on the bundle on the cords nearest the larks headand pull to slide the larks head tighter
To make the knot more permanent you can lock it Make an overhand in the cord ends (Exactly like the first step in tying shoelaces) With your foot still on the bundlepull on the cords and move your hands apart until youre pulling in opposite directions You have just locked the larks head and you can trust it to stay that way()
But lets say that later on you want to loosen the locked knot Again put your foot on the bundle and cords nearest the larks head hold the two cord ends together andpull This makes a little slack between the overhand and the larks head so you can untie the overhand
In twine or small string the locking overhand knot may be difficult to undo Use a shoelace knot instead of an overhand and itll unlock easily
() If youre using slippery cord like polypropylene an overhand may not lock securely You may want to tie another overhand knot For added security wrap a shortlength of duct tape around the two cords close to the knot
Image Notes1 To tighten further step on this side of the larks head and pull the free ends
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Related Instructables
TRX fromParacordChallengeAccepted bythrake
A pocket full ofknots byKiteman
Lens CapLanyard by~teknoarsonist~ how to tie a
noose byawesume
AdjustableParacordGlassesLanyard byjdtwelve12
HangmansNoose PackClosure byPopEye42
Paraleash - ADog LeashFrom Paracordby The Ideanator
How to make arugged andhandy ParacordBelt by Jake22
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Paracord wrist lanyard made with the snake knotby Stormdrane on September 12 2007
AuthorStormdrane Stormdranes BlogNo matter where you go there you are
Intro Paracord wrist lanyard made with the snake knotThis instructable will show how to make a wrist lanyard using paracord and the snake knot The lanyard can be used to secure a key chain knife multi-tool flashlightcell phone camera binoculars compass etc More projects links knot references can be seen on my blog page Stormdranes Blog
Step 1 SuppliesYoull need about 45 feet of paracord(you may use other types of cordage if desired) The paracord I used is from the Supply Captain I left the inner strands in theparacord but you can remove them if preferred If done in one color it will be one continuous 45 ft length if done in two colors youll need 3 ft for the primary color thatincludes the wrist section and 15 ft for the second color that will show in the snake knot Also used are scissors tape measure or ruler lighter hemostats or needle nosepliers(not necessary but they make it much easier) and a swivel clip key ring snap hook cell phone lariat carabiner or whatever attachment you prefer to use
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 2 Attaching two colors of paracordIf using two colors of paracord you will insert one color about 12 inch into the other color You may remove a small amount of the paracords inner strands by pullingthem out trimming with scissors and pulling the paracord outer sheath back over the strands leaving room to insert the other color For various projects Ive used threedifferent methods for attaching two colors of paracord melting sewing or gluing The choice is yours I usually sew them together it doesnt matter as long as its a goodconnection It will be hidden under the first knot
Step 3 Find the center of the length of paracordTake the center of the length of cord and bring it thru the attachment Im using a swivel clip For this tutorial Im measuring the wrist loop at about 10 inches from theattachment The connection of the two colors will be just on the other side at this point
Step 4 Making the snake knotThe snake knot will be made around the wrist loop section of paracord the loop strands being the core of the knot Ive added a series of photos showing the steps Iuse By using two colors youll see that I flip the lanyard over after making each knot so that Im working with the cord on the right side of the lanyard I bring it under allthe other cords working the hemostats under the previously tightened knot and pulling the cord back thru Then tightening up the knot keeping the cord from twisting andworking it up against the previous knot Again flipping the work over youll see two parallel cords of the same color which will be split with the cord on the right goingunder around and pulled thru with the hemostats then tightened up Continue this procedure until youve done about 10 snake knots(you can count them down eitherside
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 5 Count your knotsOnce you have 10 snake knots youre almost done Youll notice from the photos of both sides of the lanyard that one side has the snake knots alternating all the waydown and the other has a set of parallel knots at the top and botton of the sequence of knots Youll always have those at the start and finish of the snake knots I preferto have them end up on the same side of the lanyard so one side appears to have a more uniform look but its not required
Step 6 Trim and melt the excess paracordUse the scissors to trim off the excess cord and quickly melt the ends with a lighter so they dont fray
Step 7 Youre doneYou can make a range of variations using less or more cordknots Shorten the loop for a double ended key chain or make the loop longer for use as a neck lanyard aLanyard Break-Away Connector could be added for the safety conscious You can also add a wooden bead skull cord lock etc Visit my blog page for more knot relatedprojects links and resources Stormdranes Blog You can find ideas for other geargadgets to attach to your lanyard on EDC Forums
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Related Instructables
Paracord ChainSinnet FastDeploy BoonieHatband (video)by Stormdrane
Cross KnotParacordLanyard byStormdrane
Zigzag SpoolingParacord (video)by Stormdrane
SurvivalBracelet II bytevers94
SurvivalBracelet(Updated) bytevers94
Cobra WeaveKey Fob bytevers94
ParacordBoonie HatWrap (video) byStormdrane
Paracord KnotDisplay Bord byJamie bagn
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
How to tie various knotsby adaviel on September 7 2009
Intro How to tie various knotsKnots as a way of joining rope without special equipment are useful in many situations On a sailboat knots are essential both for daily use and for emergency repairsThis instructable describes several different common knots eg
Sheet Bend - to tie two lines togetherBowline - to make a loopReef Knot - to fasten a bundle of materialFishermans Bend - to secure a line to a post or ring
These knots are good for regular rope - braided or 3-strand polyester or natural fibre (hemp sisal) Monofilament (fishing line) or steel cable performs better with differentknots
Knots are typically quite a lot weaker than straight rope - when rope goes around a tight radius such as in a knot the outside is under more tension than the insideSplices (which require special tools and are time-consuming to make) are stronger so permanent fittings usually have eye-splices
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 1 Sheet BendThe sheet bend is used to tie two lines together It is perhaps the most generally useful knot of all When used to tie a line to itself making a loop it is called a bowlineThe strain is taken on the ropes in the middle - not the one coming out the side
How the knot is made is not critical - it is the final shape that is important One can make the flat loop first and work the other rope around it Or one can make thecrossed loop first - required when tying a bowline
The two images show front and back views of the same knot
AdvantagesEasy to makeEasy to undo when tension is removedDoes not easily capsize
DisadvantagesHard to make under loadDangerous to make under heavy load
UsesJoining two equally-sized ropesExtending a towline or stern line
Method 1 the same as a bowline
Method 2 starting with the flat loop
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 2 Double Sheet BendThe double sheet bend is used to tie two lines of different thickness - but not too different It is the same as a normal sheet bend but with an extra turn of the thinner ropearound the flat loop in the thickerThe load goes on the line through the flat loop not the one that comes out the side of the knot
UsesSecuring a heaving line to a tow lineExtending a stern line if you dont have enough line of one thickness
Step 3 BowlineThe bowline is really a special case of the sheet bend but it it tied at the end of a rope to make a loop
The photos show the completed loop and closeups of the front and back of the actual knot Note that it is the same as the sheet bend - but it must be made the right wayround This loop does not tighten in use The knot is quite easy to untie once the load is removed With practice it is very quick to tie
Some usesSecuring a dinghy line to a railing or stanchionSecuring an anchor line to an anchorTie a jib sheet to the sailTie a mooring line around a rock or treeTie a float to an anchor triplineUse one in each line to tie two ropes of very different sizes - eg a throwing line to a large tow ropeDisadvantages the knot must be completely made before it will take any strain - it is hard to tie if there is already a load on the rope
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Linked bowlines
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 4 Bowline on the BightA bowline on the bight is a bowline tied in a loop of rope (neither end is needed) The shape is the same as a bowline made with a double line but the middle of thebight forms the loop around the standing part
UsesAn impromptu bosuns chair - to sit in while being transferred between two boats at sea
Step 5 Clove HitchThe clove hitch can be made when you only have the bight (the middle) of a rope not the ends
UsesSecuring a burgee pole to a burgee halyard (a continuous loop of thin line)Securing a tiller from swinging
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 6 Round Turn and Two Half-HitchesThis is a knot used to secure a line to a ring or bar Wind a couple of turns around the bar then secure the end with two hitches around the standing part (this looks like aclove hitch when done)
AdvantagesCan be made under load - it is easy to take turns around the bar while maintaining tension on the ropeStrong - provided the bar is thicker than the rope the rope is not weakened by sharp bendsDisadvantagesThe end tends to work loose
UsesSecuring a line to a mooring ring or samson post
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 7 Fishermans BendThe fishermans bend is the same as the round turn and two half hitches except that the first hitch is looped under the round turn This uses the tension on the rope tosecure the end from working loose
AdvantagesSecure against working loose
DisadvantagesHard to make under tensionHard to undo under tensionMay seize up under load when wet making it hard to undo
UsesSecuring mooring line to ringSecuring fender lines to rail
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 8 Studsail BendThe studsail bend is like the fishermans bend but the second hitch is also secured under the round turn making it even more secure against working loose when undertension
AdvantagesVery secure against working looseDisadvantagesHard to make under tensionHard to undo under tension
Step 9 Figure-8 KnotThe figure-eight knot is used to prevent an end of rope from passing through a block (pulley) Sometimes called a stopper knot
The double figure-8 knot is used in rock climbing as an alternative to a bowline to secure a climbing harness to the end of a safety rope The double knot is made bymaking a single knot then tracing back around the knot with the free end after passing it around the harness loop
AdvantagesEasy to verify by inspectionNot prone to work loose
DisadvantagesSlow to make and undoCannot be made under load
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 10 Prussic KnotThe prussic knot may be used as a climbing ascender - when made around a vertical rope as shown downwards tension on the ends locks the knot while release oftension allows it to be slid up the rope A pair of prussic knots on foot loops may be used in tandem to climb a rope
UsesClimbing a ropeTaking up tension to free a riding turn on a winch
Step 11 Reef KnotThe reef knot or square knot is used to tie a bundle of material together It must be made around something - it should not be used to tie two free ropes togetherbecause it can easily capsizeIt should not be used to make a loop unless it can be tensioned around a solid object It should not be used around a person - use a bowline instead A capsized reefknot will slip easily and could constrict and cause severe injury
UsesReefing a sail (tying the unused portion around a spar)Securing a furled sail to a spar (sail ties)Wrapping a parcelTying shoelaces
AdvantagesMay be made under moderate load
DisadvantagesCapsizes (works free) if used improperlyCan seize up under load when wet
Tying the knot
Capsizing a reef knot
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 12 CleatsThis is not a knot but is very common on boatsThe first picture shows a rope cleated normally The second shows one with a final locking turn - the last turn is twisted before placing over the cleat so that the tensionon the rope helps secure the free end
When working with ropes under tension take a turn or two around a winch or cleat before trying to secure the end with a knot The load on the free end falls exponentiallywith each turn taken Severe injury can result if a finger or other body part is caught in a loop of rope or between a rope and another object
Step 13 Practice themIt is sometimes useful to be able to tie knots in the dark or as in this video behind your back
Related Instructables
AThird Hand forSailing or OtherThings by WadeTarzia
Paracord KnotDisplay Bord byJamie bagn
Trip LogOutriggerCanoe Sailingthe CaliforniaChannel Islandsby TimAnderson
How to Tie aFigure EightKnot byTactical_Pyro
How to build apirate ship bymdelaney3
Build a ShortDragon (16 foot3-BoardOutriggerSailing Canoe)by Wade Tarzia
repairing aheadsail by josh
How to get arope into a tree(withoutclimbing it) byvitex
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
How to Tie the Lanyard Knotby eddy14777 on January 31 2010
Intro How to Tie the Lanyard KnotMany people including myself have had trouble following the Stormdrane youtube video on tying the lanyard knot so i have done some research and found the solution
Image Notes1 Finished knot
Step 1 MaterialsAll you need is a reasonable length of para cord or whatever you wish to use
Image Notes1 One reasonable amount
Step 2 First StepThe first thing you are going to do is to make a bight that leaves you with to congruent endsThen you are going to put your ring finger through the bight
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Image Notes1 Close enough2 Bight
Step 3 Starting the KnotMake a loop just like the one in the picture and place it over the top strandBring the top strand under the bottom strand
Image Notes1 Notice the way the loop is done2 Top strand
Image Notes1 Bottom strand2 Top strand is under
Step 4 The Most Important PartNow you take the top stand from the previous picture and feed it over the first part of the loop under itself and back over the remainder of the loop
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Image Notes1 Under me2 Top strand3 This should make a diamond type shape
Step 5 DoublingNow take the bottom stand and take it around the part of the top strand nearest to the bight and than come up through the diamond shape in the middleDo the same for the top strand
Image Notes1 Top strand
Image Notes1 Both through the diamond
Step 6 FinishingWhen you take it off your finger it should look like thisWork out the slack by pulling on the bight and the two strands
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Image Notes1 Finished knot
Related Instructables
Cross KnotParacordLanyard byStormdrane
Celtic ButtonKnot (video) byStormdrane
Paracord wristlanyard madewith the snakeknot byStormdrane
Paracord ChainSinnet FastDeploy BoonieHatband (video)by Stormdrane
Zigzag SpoolingParacord (video)by Stormdrane
ParacordBoonie HatWrap (video) byStormdrane
Paracord IDbadge Lanyardby Flahusky
Cobra WeaveKey Fob bytevers94
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Four knots to make paracord into a useful toolby erik_mccray on March 27 2010
Authorerik_mccrayI am an ex-fabricator that is now a stay at home dad I love my new job but I do miss making stuff I love this site amp I am getting involved as a way to keep myskills upOn top of fad work I have also run two small business in the past One was custom sewing amp the other was as a small engine mechanicI have two votec degrees one in metal fabrication amp the other is in engine repairI look forward to getting to know everyone here
Intro Four knots to make paracord into a useful toolParacord is an awesome multitool used everywhere from the wild blue yonder to the deepest caverns But like any good tool it is only as good as the knowledge the userhas about the tool With most people out there using bungee cords amp ratchet straps it seems that paracord is being used for nothing more than friendship bracelets forgrown men This is a shame because for less then the price of a few cheap bungee cords amp some to short to be helpful straps You can get yourself hundreds of feet ofparacord
The key to getting the most out of the paracord is good knot work The first thing you need to know is what makes a good knot One is that the knot is easy amp quick to tieamp more impotant is that the knot is easy amp quick to untie The hitch class of knots is by far the best group of knots that the average person could know The four mostuseful hitch knots are the half hitch a quick simple knot that forms the base for many other knots the inline half hitch allowing you to get the most out of one length ofparacord the slippery hitch that gives you both on the fly control over tension on your paracord but also an adjustable loop that will not change unless you want it amp theinline truckers hitch instantly doubling the your pulling power
Step 1 To get started lets get some terminology that will be used defined
line= the paracord
Main line= the part of the paracord doing the work for example holding down your tarp or the long part of the paracord
Mid line= the middle of the length of the paracord
End line= the unused length of paracord or the short length of paracord
Step 2 The half hitch The half hitch is a simple way to secure a line to an anchor point like the tie down points in most trucks A half hitch is a constrictor knot meaning that the harder you pullon the line the tighter the knots grip gets Another common constrictor knot is the slip knot
Step 1 wrap your line around your anchor point Step 2 wrap the end line around the main line
Step 3 pass the end line threw the end line side of the newly formed loop
step 4 now take the slack out of the knot
step 5 to make sure the knot is secure tie another half hitch to the main line This knot is called adouble half hitch
step 6 another useful thing that can be done with the half hitch is that instead of repeating the wrap on the main line but repeating it on what you are tying to the half hitchcan be used to bind something like a stack of 2x4s
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Image Notes1 End line2 Main line3 step 1
Image Notes1 Step 2
Image Notes1 passing thew the end line side of the loop2 step 3
Image Notes1 step 5
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Image Notes1 step 6
Step 3 The mid line half hitch The mid line half hitch is for when the length of line is to long for the job at hand amp you dont want to have to cut the line to size or you are using multiple anchor pointswith one length of line
Step 1 double up the line at the point in the length you wish to make the knot
Step 2 wrap the doubled up portion of line around your anchor point The doubled up length is now now the end line
Step 3 now tie just as you did for the regular half hitch repeat the knot to make a double half hitch for security
Image Notes1 A mid line double half hitch
Image Notes1 step 1
Image Notes1 The end line2 step 2
Image Notes1 Step 3
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 4 The slippery hitch The slippery hitch is a great knot for adjusting tension on the main line or for having an adjustable fixed loop To adjust the knot simply slide the knot up or down the mainline
Step 1 wrap your line around the anchor point or just double over the line to form a loop
Step 2 wrap the end line around the main line three times Wrapping in the direction of the anchor point or loop
Step 3 put together the two lines making up the loop amp wrap the two lines one time with the end line
Step 4 pass the end line thew the last loop formed covering the two lined of the loop
Step 5 pull the knot tite
step 6 to adjust the size of the loop or main line tension grab the knot amp slide it up or down the main line
Image Notes1 grab just the knot its self to adjust it2 step 5
Image Notes1 step 1
Image Notes1 step 2
Image Notes1 step 3
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Image Notes1 step 4
Image Notes1 grab just the knot its self to adjust it2 step 5
Image Notes1 same knot as in last pic Just slid up2 step 6
Step 5 The mid line truchers hitch The truckers hitch is a great way to double the pulling force on a line There are many ways to tie this knot the problem with most of them is that at some point you aregoing to have to pass the end line through a loop on the main line that is acting like a pulley to double your pulling force this is great if you are making the knot close tothe end of your line but if you are using a 300 length of line amp want to make the knot in the first ten feet having to pass 290 of line thew a loop is a pain But with a fewhalf hitches you will not have to pass the end line threw any loop on the main line
step 1 wrap your line around the anchor point then double over your end line laying the top of the loop over the main line
Step 2 double up your main line amp lay the loop over the loop made by the end line
step 3 in main line above the knot twist in a loop
step 4 put main line loop thew the loop made in step 3 amp pull this loop tight over your main line loop forming a half hitch Repeat step 3 amp 4 to make a doublehalf hitch
step 5 To use the knot just pull down on the end line to put tension on the main line
step 6 after you have the main line snug tie a mid line double half hitch around the two lines forming the loop at the end of the main line with the end line
step 7 Tie a double half hitch with the end line around the end loop of the mid line half hitch of step 6 using the same method as used in steps 3 amp 4
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Image Notes1 the end of step 6
Image Notes1 main line2 end line3 step 1
Image Notes1 main line loop2 end line loop
Image Notes1 step 3
Image Notes1 step 4
Image Notes1 step 4 at the end with a double half hitch on the main loop
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Image Notes1 pull here2 step 5
Image Notes1 the start of step 6
Image Notes1 the end of step 6
Image Notes1 step 72 now the rest of the line is free to do more work
Related Instructables
Paracord KnotDisplay Bord byJamie bagn
ChokelessAdjustableParacord DogLeash byPizzaman101
ParacordLadder wWooden Rungsby josestude
tie a paracordshackle grip byitri45
ParacordPrussik Belt byJavaNut13
TiteTie is theTruckers Knoton Steroids bytitetie
ID Lanyard(Photos) byeschmunk
Dog Toys forHeavy Chewersby J3443RY
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Figure 8 knot and double 8 knotby jonathan111 on November 28 2007
Intro Figure 8 knot and double 8 knotI will show you how to tie a figure 8 knot and a figure 8 follow through
Step 1 Stating the knotThis is a simple knot so just follow the pictures
Step 2 Finishing the knotCross the string under and then push it through the hole Pull tightly unless you are going to do the follow through and leave it somewhat loose
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 3 The follow through knotThe follow through knot should be tied around something brought back and followed through the path of the 8 knot Look at the pictures Basically follow through the 8knot backwards
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Related Instructables
Climb Safe WithA Figure 8Knot by mattste A pocket full of
knots byKiteman
How to Tie aFigure EightKnot byTactical_Pyro
Paracord KnotDisplay Bord byJamie bagn
Cross KnotParacordLanyard byStormdrane
How to Tie aFire-escapeKnot by leonardoismael
Truckers HitchTHE mostawesome knoton the planetby schneidp20
Paracord ZipperPuller byrepeet13
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Truckers Hitch THE most awesome knot on the planetby schneidp20 on October 12 2008
Authorschneidp20I like building stuff Trouble is there just isnt enough time to build everything Sigh
Intro Truckers Hitch THE most awesome knot on the planetYes I know that there are plenty of other cool knots out there many of which I literally couldnt live wo I rock climb However this knot is unlike any other Plus Ineeded a grabber for my Instructable -) (BTW this ISNT a climbing knot) And in truth it isnt a knot by itself but rather a system of common knots
Have you ever tried to tie something down for transporting but just couldnt get the lines tight andor during transport the lines would continually loosen Then this is theknot for you I learned this knot back in the 70s when specialty car racks and ratchet straps were rare or unheard of I initially used it to tie a canoe on a car rack bothattaching to the rack as well as the lines to the bow and stern of the canoe Even with all the new gizmos available today this knot still shines because all you need is arope and ropes dont hum in the wind like straps
The unique aspect of this knot is that it gives you a 2-1 mechanical advantage when tightening the rope Be careful though You can actually damage some thingsbecause of the mechanical advantage This knot holds fast and is easy to untie hallmark traits of any good knot
Below you see the finished knot system well break it apart in the steps that follow
Image Notes1 1st anchor point a bowline2 loop3 securing knots 2 half hitches4 securing loose end with a fishermans knot5 2nd anchor point (should be round)
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Image Notes1 X marks the spot
Step 1 Initial setupThe first step is to anchor one end of the rope and then loop the rope around a 2nd anchor point
For attaching to the 1st anchor point I chose bowline a close 2 on my list -) There are other instructables on that one so I wont bore you here
The 2nd anchor really should be round because it serves as a pulley in this block and tackle type knot Ive used it on sharp anchor points and it doesnt work as well
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 2 Creating a slip knotTie a slip knot somewhere between the two anchor points Correct placement of the slip knot takes some experience to judge it correctly Typically I place it too close tothe 2nd anchor point and end up with not enough room to work with If the knot ends up too far from 2nd anchor point you can extend the knot by enlarging the loop
Be sure you tie the slip knot as shown You may not be able to untie other knots
In this small example the slip knot is uncharacteristically close to the 1st anchor point
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 3 Tightening and securingThe loose end of the rope that went around the 2nd anchor point goes through the slip knot loop Pull the loose end to the desired tension and secure with two halfhitches
Note To allow better view of the knots the rope isnt really tightened in this example
Step 4 Securing loose endThe final knot is just to secure the loose end somehow I chose a fishermans knot to do this
To tie a fishermans knot the rope goes around twice and goes under the X created by the loops Pull the loose end to tighten Finally slide the knot to put tension onthe half hitches
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Image Notes1 X marks the spot
Step 5 FinishedThere you have it I guarantee that the first time you really use this knot (not just practice) you will be amazed at how well it works and youll wish you knew this knot along time ago You may even come over to my side and declare that is is THE most awesome knot on the planet -)
Enjoy and happy haulingDave
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Related Instructables
TiteTie is theTruckers Knoton Steroids bytitetie
Four knots tomake paracordinto a usefultool byerik_mccray
Modify yourbike rack tocarry a sunfishor other boat byewilhelm
SurfboardHammock byGermy
GiganticHalloweenSpider Web bynolte919
How To Tie ASpiders Hitch(video) by back-cast
Three-hitch mathair ornamentby michiexile TRX from
ParacordChallengeAccepted bythrake
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Carry any Bottle with a JUG KNOT Handleby hpstoutharrow on September 17 2009
Intro Carry any Bottle with a JUG KNOT HandleTie a JUG KNOT around a water bottle soda bottle or aluminum bottle to make a secure carrying strap
Re-purpose any container into a reusable water bottle by adding a convenient carrying strap This Instructable will demonstrate how to tie a JUG knot which like its namesuggests is meant to properly secure around the neck of a container
With some cord and the knowledge of this knot you will be able add a handle lanyard or carabiner loop to any of your favorite beverages to carry them on the go
It works perfectly for those disposable water bottles and who knows once you add some colorful cord to the plain old clear water bottle you just might beinclined to refill it and use it again(Check out pictures 4amp5 below)
In addition to plastic beverage bottles like pop water and sports drinks you can turn those rugged aluminum beer bottles into a backpacking canteen
Those of you familiar with my previous aluminum bottle InstructablesROLLED RIM METAL TUMBLERhttpwwwinstructablescomidAluminum-Bottle-Tumbler-Cup-Cook-PotALUMINUM BOTTLE LIGHTWEIGHT ALCOHOL STOVEhttpwwwinstructablescomidAluminum-Bottle-Alcohol-Stovewill recognize the water canteen shown below as a re-purposed aluminum beer bottle Here I have added a painted surface treatment to turn it into a proper lookingwater bottle More on that in steps 13 14 15
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 1 Getting StartedCord size is important Select a small medium weight cord like the one shown here It is a general purpose camp cord sold at most sporting goods stores (shoelacesmight also work)
Do not use a heavy cord or rope because the larger diameter will not tuck under the relatively small lip at the top of the bottleneck and the bottle will fall out
Also the smaller cord cinches tight on itself and will not loosen accidentally
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 2 Form a BightThe next steps show how to tie a JUG KNOT It is the basic step for adding a carrying strap It is also the anchor point for any additional fancy bottle trussing you maywant to add
JUG KNOT Step 1
Form a Bight in the center of a length of cord Bight is a knot term for a loop or bend in the rope In this case the main Bight in this knot is highlighted with a white mark Imakes it easier to follow its path in these steps
The running ends of the cord should be equal length
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 3 Pull the Bight downPULL the Bight DOWN forming two Loops
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 4 Cross the LoopsCROSS the right Loop OVER the left Loop
Step 5 Pass the Bight under the 1st loopTake the main Bight and pass it UNDER the left Loop
Step 6 Weave the BightWEAVE the Bight OVER the portion of the right Loop and UNDER the portion of the left Loop
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 7 Extend the BightExtend the Bight OVER the outer portion of the right Loop
Step 8 Flip the Right Loop behindAdditional colored identification points have been added to the loops to follow their travel in these next two steps
The right Loop Yellow marker is FLIPPED BEHIND the knot and ends up on the far left side of the knot
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 9 Flip the 2nd loop in frontRaise the green marker (located on what was formerly the left loop) and pull it down and to the right FLIPPING IT IN FRONT of the knot
Note the blue portion of the this loop will pass around the outside of the yellow portion of the first loop
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Image Notes1 Center of knot that will tighten around the bottles neck
Step 10 Remove SlackNote where the blue green amp yellow markers end up
Start to remove the slack in the loops by pulling the original main Bight (white marker top right) and the two free standing ends at the bottom
the bottle neck will pass through the very center of the knot
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Image Notes1 Center of knot that will tighten around the bottles neck
Step 11 Tighten the KnotAfter removing the slack insert the bottle neck and finish tightening
The knot should look like this before slipping it over the bottle
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 12 Secure on bottle neckThis is the finished knot shown on the neck of various containers
The loop end and the two free standing ends can be tied together to create a carrying handle (last picture below)
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 13 Aluminum Bottle Water Bottle
The next few steps show the features of an aluminum beer bottle re-purposed as a water bottle canteen It is one of many containers that can be reused as a camp waterbottle
The bottle was lightly sanded masked and then pained with a hammered finished paint to create an interesting surface texture
Image Notes1 Textured finish paint makes an interesting grip-able surface2 Masked with tape for painting3 Masked with tape for painting
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Image Notes1 Dowel used for holding the bottle during painting
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 14 Tethered Cork StopperUse a wine bottle man made Cork as a stopper for your aluminum water bottleNote Use a cork that was removed from the wine bottle without the corkscrew penetrating through the bottom end of the cork (A hole all the way through the cork willcause it to leak) Use the unpierced end of the cork inside the water bottle
Drill a hole through the sides of the Cork Thread the cord through the hole to the center of the cord Use the cork as the main Bight and tie the Jug knot as shown inthe beginning steps
Now the cork is tethered to the bottle and will not get lost or fall on the ground
A Carabiner clip passes through the other cord end to attache the water bottle to you belt or pack
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 15 Trussed for TransportThis is another hanging method for carrying your aluminum bottle water canteen A Jug knot is tied conventionally around the neck
The running ends of the knot however are pulled down towards the bottom of the bottle A Barrel Knot is tied about 34 the way down the side of the bottle A squareknot is tied on the bottom of the knot to keep the two running ends tight against the sides of the bottle
I like the look of the accent colored cord running down the sides of the bottle and the fact that the bottle hangs from the belt upside down It adds to its uniqueness
The last picture shows another truss variation
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 16 AdvancedBelow is a bottle with some additional trussing You can be creative as you want It all starts with a re-purposed container and the Jug Knot (and enough cord)
Related Instructables
AluminumBottle TumblerCup amp Cook Potfor an AlcoholStove byhpstoutharrow
Water BottleBelt Clip byuglymike Duct Tape
Water Bottle byrabidsquire2
AluminumBottle AlcoholStove byhpstoutharrow
DIYGlass WaterBottle byCulturespy
Solar WaterHeater forBackpackingUsing WaterBottles and aCar Shade bykopomeroy
Duct tape waterbottle holder(Photos) by pinkmarshmallow
How to make aCamelPack withan old plasticbottle bywillrandship
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Basic Knots Guideby zorro3355 on April 29 2008
Intro Basic Knots Guidehi
Step 1 Thumb knotThe most simple knotUsed as a stopper and prevent ropes from fraying
Step 2 Reef KnotUsed to tie two ropes of equal thickness togetherIt is pretty easy to tie and untie but under tentionit may be diffcult to untieIt is also not sutible for smoothropes(egnylon ropes)
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 3 Figure of eightused as a stopperprevent ropes from fraying and its more secure than tumb knot its is also used to tie Caribinas to ropes and is often used in rock climbing
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 4 Timber hitchused for pulling logs
Step 5 Clove hitchUsed to tie a rope onto a pole or logThe pole must be roundThe pole lust be thicker then the rope itself
(greatly used during pioneering)
Step 6 Sheet bandused to tie ropes of different thickness together(works on same thickness of ropes too)
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 7 Sheep shankTo shorten RopesTo prevent middle fraying
Step 8 Slip knotWhippingUsed as a grip for pulling things(when tied on a stick or small pole)(marlin spike hitch)
Related Instructables
Rope Rings byhpstoutharrow
How to Tie aFigure EightKnot byTactical_Pyro
Whippin (WestCountry Style)by tim_n
SurvivalBracelet(Updated) bytevers94
HangmansNoose PackClosure byPopEye42
Turkey on aTripod byhpstoutharrow
SurvivalBracelet II bytevers94 Zigzag Spooling
Paracord (video)by Stormdrane
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
How to Tie a Fire-escape Knotby leonardo ismael on October 16 2007
Intro How to Tie a Fire-escape KnotThis knot is used by firemen in case of fires for example imagine a scene where the ladder on the firetruck messes up but people need to get down a five story buildingor more All they have is a long piece of rope they can safely get down with a secure knot like the fire-escape knot So why not learn it its easy to do and hard to untieif you tie it tightly
This is from the American Boys Handbook
Step 1 Get Your RopeFirst grab a piece of rope and bend it like this to make a loop in it Follow every step to the smallest detail
Step 2 Twist the RopeNow make a twist like this and hold it together
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 3 Pull Through the TwistPull the loop through the twist you just made from underneath
Step 4 Go Over the Split EndNow pull the tail through the loop
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 5 FinallyAnd finally just pull it through as pictured below
Congratulations you just learned the fire-escape knot
Step 6 Same Name Not KnotThis is another knot called the fire-escape knot this shouldnt be your result
Related Instructables
House FireEscape Plan(video) byWhatHappensNowAdvice
ParacordLadder wWooden Rungsby josestude
Bed SheetEscape Rope byjessehensel
rope ladder(glow-in-the-dark version) bymikeasaurus
HeadlockEscape 2(video) byjohnnyrockstah
QuickFirestarter byMattandJora
Trail sauna byjakee117
How to Kill FireAnts andCommitGenocide byKentsOkay
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Climb Safe With A Figure 8 Knotby mattste on February 23 2010
Intro Climb Safe With A Figure 8 Knot There are many things that a beginning climber needs to know including several important knots Perhaps the most essential knot is the Figure 8 Follow Through Thistutorial will demonstrate how to correctly harness yourself to a rope using a Figure 8 Follow Through knot This knot is used primarily by rock climbers to provide a life-line Since this knot is used as a life-line it is very important to be able to tie it correctly (Your life could depend upon it)
Dont worry with this tutorial and about 5 minutes of practice you can have this knot mastered
Things you will need
- Climbing Harness- Climbing Rope
If you are wanting to go climbing and dont already have these items they can be purchased for about $25 each at most outdoor sporting goods stores If you are merelylooking to learn the knot a belt loop and a rope (about five feet long) will do
Image Notes1 Climbing Harness2 Climbing Rope
Step 1 Dealing With The RopeThroughout this tutorial I will be discussing different parts of the rope To make these instructions as clear as possible I will define a few terms that I will use throughoutthe tutorial The Anchor End of the rope will generally be at the top of the images This is the end that would be anchored to the wall or rock and does not move Wewill not be doing much with the anchored end The Tail End of the rope is the opposite end that we will be dealing with I will call this the tail for short
Now that we have some terms to work with lets get started
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 2 Tying The First Figure 8This knot has several parts to it The first part of the knot is just tying a basic figure 8 To tie the first figure 8 there are four simple steps
1 - Using the tail make a loop over the rope (as shown in the first picture) keeping in mind that there should be about 3 ft of slack on the tail end
2 - Wrap the tail back this time go under the anchored end (As shown in the second picture)
3 - Bring the tail down through the first loop (As shown in the third picture)
4 - Finally pull the two ends to make the knot a little bit tighter and easier to deal with (Shown in the fourth picture)
After these four steps you should end up with a knot that resembles a figure 8
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 3 Looping Into The Harness In order to secure the rope to the harness simply thread the tail end of the rope through the front loop in the harness as shown in the picture below This step isobviously very important
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 4 Following Back Through The Figure 8After looping the rope through the harness you have to thread the tail end of the rope back through the knot following the first figure 8 I have divided this process intofive smaller steps in order to make it more clear
1 - Coming form underneath the knot bring the tail up through the near loop and to the left behind the anchored end of the rope (Shown in the first picture)
2 - Wrap the tail around the anchored end back to the right and down through the adjacent loop (Shown in the second picture)
3 - You simply need to bring the tail back over the top of the knot to the left (Shown in the third picture)
4 - Bring the tail end up through the far loop following the anchored end (Shown in the fourth picture)
5 - Finally pull the knot tight (Shown in the fifth picture)
As you can see the first four pictures are simply tracing the knot back through with the tail end
For the last part while you pull the knot tight you may want to make small adjustments and rearrange how it all fits together If the knot does not lay perfectly smoothand tight its NOT a big deal
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 5 Finishing The Knot After completing the Figure 8 knot you will want to somehow secure the tail end of the rope out of the way There are a couple different ways to do this the way that Iwill demonstrate is using whats called a Stopper Knot This secondary knot is similar to a Fishermans knot and is pretty simple I have once again divided thisprocess into several smaller steps
1 - Start by wrapping the tail end around the anchored end (As shown in the first picture)
2 - Wrap the tail back underneath the two vertical segments (As shown in the second picture)
3 - Simply repeat the first two steps wrapping the tail around again (As shown in the third picture)
4 - This step in the fourth picture may look complicated but all you need to do is insert the tail up through the two loops that you have just made
5 - To finish off the knot you will want to slowly pull the tail end while gently pushing the bottom of the stopper knot upwards If you have successfully completed this knotit should look something like the fifth picture
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 6 Ready To Climb Now that you have mastered the Figure 8 knot you can securely harness yourself into a climbing rope Remember there are many other skills that go into setting up ananchor and belaying a climber This tutorial only covers the figure 8 knot For more information there are many great websites that demonstrate how to correctly set up asafe climbing system (Ive posted a few below) If you are a beginning climber I recommend that you read up on a few other climbing techniques Also you shouldprobably go to a climbing wall or gym where there are experienced climbers that can show you the ropes Hopefully this tutorial has been helpful Have fun and be safe
Some useful linkshttpwwwstephenprattnetAnchorsanchorshtmhttpwwwuoregonedu~oppclimbingtopicsanchorshtmlhttpwwwabc-of-rockclimbingcomhowtoclimbingtechniquesasp
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Related Instructables
How to Tie aFigure EightKnot byTactical_Pyro
Paracord KnotDisplay Bord byJamie bagn
Basic KnotsGuide byzorro3355
How to Climb aTree (withprussiks) bystasterisk
How to climb atree (using onlyrope) thefunsimple wayby louieaw
How to get arope into a tree(withoutclimbing it) byvitex
How to tievarious knots byadaviel
How to make arope swing byjdub0928
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Turks Head Knots on a Bottleby sklnxbones on July 6 2010
Intro Turks Head Knots on a BottleThis is the finished project A bottle decorated with three Turks Head Knots There are only three knots on this bottle The RED and the BLUE knots are each a 20 Bightby 3 Lead Turks Head Knots The WHITE knot is a 20 Bight by 19 Lead Turks Head Knot
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 1 Supplies
Cord Lots and Lots of cord I cant tell you how much each bottle is differentBottle Washed and Dried inside and out Make sure to remove all water spotsThreaded Needle Cord screws into the threads at the base of the needlePegs I use brass rivets used as a map to tie the Turks Head KnotsHole Punch Used to punch holes in the painters tape to hold the pegsPainters Tape To hold the pegs in place and to make your map for the Turks Head KnotsMarker To write on the painters tapeCloth Towel To remove finger prints and dirt from your bottleKrazy Glue or Super Glue This is used to secure the knots in place to the bottle
OPTIONAL BUT HIGHLY RECOMMENDEDI use the Turks Head Cookbook from KnotToolcom
Step 2 PreparationYou will need to find a bottle you like I used an empty instant tea bottle of course washed and dried (I like to put the bottle in the oven for a few minutes to dry the insidewithout water spots Take off the lid and do not put lid in the oven) Now measure the circumference of the bottle Take a cord and tightly wrap the cord around the bottleMark where the ends meet and use a ruler to measure the length of the cord For my instant tea bottle the circumference is 27cm I know from past knots that I have tiedthat I want my knot to have 20 Bights in the top and bottom (bands) knots I am going to use the Bights in the (bands) knots to tie the middle knot Now divide the numberof Bights (20) into the size of the circumference (27) to get the space between each Bight (135) With me so far
Now take two pieces of painters tape using a ruler measure out the length of the circumference and mark the length on the both pieces of tape Next you will mark thespace between each Bight on the tape
Step 3 Adding the PegsI like to use pegs when tying Turks Head Knots it just makes tying the knot easier
These are what I use for pegs
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 4 Adding Pegs to the TapeNow take a hole punch to cut holes in the tape where the lines meet You will place the pegs in the holes
Insert a peg in each hole and carefully stick the first piece of tape to the bottle
Step 5 Adding the 2nd row of pegsNow do the same thing with the second piece of tape The numbers on each piece of tape must line up
This picture shows you what you should have now This odd looking thing will be your map to tie the Turks Head Knot And this is the end of Step 1
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 6 Tying the first Turks Head KnotUsing the Turks Head Cookbook follow the numbers going over and under as indicated in the book I chose a 20 Bight by 3 Lead knot which will give me a nice bandaround the bottle Once the ends meet you have made one complete knot Tape the running end of your cord and start removing the pegs and the tape
Step 7 Remove the pegs and the tapeBe careful not to untie the knot as you remove the pegs and tape from the bottle Continue to remove all the pegs and remove the tape from the bottle At this point theknot will be very loose and will need to be tightened up
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 8 Remove the slack from the knotHere you can see just how much the knot expanded Starting with the standing end begin to pull the slack out of the knot going towards the running end of the cordDo not expect to pull all the slack out at once You may have to make 3 - 5 attempts at removing the slack out of the knot DO NOT remove all of the slack out of the knotIn order to make the bands we will have to triple the Turks Head Knot We will do this by following the knot three times The threaded needle will really come in handyhere
Step 9 Triple the KnotOnce you have made three passes of the Turks Head Knot use your needle to go under your knot about half the circumference and cut the cord The knot will be tightenough to hide the tail in placeTIP I carefully add a couple of drops of super glue UNDER the band to hold them in place and keep them from sliding around in the nextsteps A drop or two in 3 or 4 places around the band should be enough
Step 10 Add the second knotNow repeat this whole step for the second bandWhen tying the second band you must make sure the Bights line up to the first band This is crucial for the next stepWipe down the bottle to make sure all your finger prints and adhesive from the tape are all removed You want to make sure your bottle is clean at this point Any dirt orfinger prints left on the bottle will be almost impossible to remove From this point on we will use gloves when tying our last knot
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 11 Maping the Top KnotStick a piece of painters tape on top of your first band leaving the bottom of the knot exposedUse a marker to count the number of Bights in your knot Instead of using the pegs we are going to use the Bights to tie our next Turks Head Knot
Step 12 Mapping the Bottom KnotDo the same thing for the bottom band but you must make sure your numbers on top and bottom line up So 1 on top should be the same position as 1 on the bottom
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 13 Adding the last knotAgain using the Turks Head Cookbook and the threaded needle you are going to follow the instructions going over and under as indicated in the book Be sure to usegloves when ever you handle the bottle
Step 14 Thats ItFor this Turks Head Knot I am using a 20 Bight by 19 Lead knot
Because of the amount of cord you are working with your cord will get twisted and knotted You will have to un-twist the cord often Its a pain in the rear but it has to bedone And it has to be done alot
Continue to tie the knot until you finish the knot If you have the cord and the patience you can double or triple the knot When you are done use your needle to hide theends under your bands Cut the ends and your DONE
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Related Instructables
Monkeys FistFloatingKeychain byjokerlz
How To Make ATurks headKnot WithParacord byDoggie Stylish
Tying Trivetsout of Rope forHoliday Gifts bykylemarsh
Paracord KnotDisplay Bord byJamie bagn
How to Make ATurks Head(Photos) bymchs60chip
A pocket full ofknots byKiteman
Monkeys fistknot AND themonkey byjonathan111
TiteTie is theTruckers Knoton Steroids bytitetie
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Larks head noose -- an easy useful knot that tightens and loosensby Larry Breed on February 19 2009
Intro Larks head noose -- an easy useful knot that tightens and loosensI thought I knew all the basic knots but then I was taught this incredibly useful simple knot Its good for tying up the neck of a bag that you want to repeatedly open andsecurely close Its good for tying around a springy bundle that will need tightening and retightening And its easy to undo
Ive looked at knot literature but havent found a name for this so I named it The basic knot is well known its called a larks head Since all Ive done is to slip the twoends through the larks head to make a noose I call it that
WARNING Dont use this knot when human safety would depend on it Climbers and mountaineers have well-tested reliable knots for such situations
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Image Notes1 To tighten further step on this side of the larks head and pull the free ends
Step 1 Double the cord overThe larks head noose requires enough cord to go twice around your bundle plus a foot or two Find the center and double it over Sailors call this a bight
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 2 Form the larks headComing from below the bight hook your thumb and forefinger over the two sides Reach outward and downward and pinch your fingertips together underneath thedoubled cord
Youve made a larks head Move the crossing cord a little farther from your hand so theres a clear opening through the two half-loops
Step 3 Form the nooseSlip the two ends of the cord through the opening we were just talking about Pull the larks head tight so it grips the two cords Find something that needs constrictingand put the noose around it
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 4 Tightening retightening and lockingSlide the knot against the bundle If its not tight enough to keep from slipping tighten it by holding it in one hand and tugging on the cords one at a time with the otherhand Notice that you can slide the knot out again for instance to re-open the bag you just tied shut For some applications this may be as tight as you need it
A springy bundle probably still feels loose If so compress the bundle and get a new grip on the cords Rest your foot on the bundle on the cords nearest the larks headand pull to slide the larks head tighter
To make the knot more permanent you can lock it Make an overhand in the cord ends (Exactly like the first step in tying shoelaces) With your foot still on the bundlepull on the cords and move your hands apart until youre pulling in opposite directions You have just locked the larks head and you can trust it to stay that way()
But lets say that later on you want to loosen the locked knot Again put your foot on the bundle and cords nearest the larks head hold the two cord ends together andpull This makes a little slack between the overhand and the larks head so you can untie the overhand
In twine or small string the locking overhand knot may be difficult to undo Use a shoelace knot instead of an overhand and itll unlock easily
() If youre using slippery cord like polypropylene an overhand may not lock securely You may want to tie another overhand knot For added security wrap a shortlength of duct tape around the two cords close to the knot
Image Notes1 To tighten further step on this side of the larks head and pull the free ends
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Related Instructables
TRX fromParacordChallengeAccepted bythrake
A pocket full ofknots byKiteman
Lens CapLanyard by~teknoarsonist~ how to tie a
noose byawesume
AdjustableParacordGlassesLanyard byjdtwelve12
HangmansNoose PackClosure byPopEye42
Paraleash - ADog LeashFrom Paracordby The Ideanator
How to make arugged andhandy ParacordBelt by Jake22
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 2 Attaching two colors of paracordIf using two colors of paracord you will insert one color about 12 inch into the other color You may remove a small amount of the paracords inner strands by pullingthem out trimming with scissors and pulling the paracord outer sheath back over the strands leaving room to insert the other color For various projects Ive used threedifferent methods for attaching two colors of paracord melting sewing or gluing The choice is yours I usually sew them together it doesnt matter as long as its a goodconnection It will be hidden under the first knot
Step 3 Find the center of the length of paracordTake the center of the length of cord and bring it thru the attachment Im using a swivel clip For this tutorial Im measuring the wrist loop at about 10 inches from theattachment The connection of the two colors will be just on the other side at this point
Step 4 Making the snake knotThe snake knot will be made around the wrist loop section of paracord the loop strands being the core of the knot Ive added a series of photos showing the steps Iuse By using two colors youll see that I flip the lanyard over after making each knot so that Im working with the cord on the right side of the lanyard I bring it under allthe other cords working the hemostats under the previously tightened knot and pulling the cord back thru Then tightening up the knot keeping the cord from twisting andworking it up against the previous knot Again flipping the work over youll see two parallel cords of the same color which will be split with the cord on the right goingunder around and pulled thru with the hemostats then tightened up Continue this procedure until youve done about 10 snake knots(you can count them down eitherside
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 5 Count your knotsOnce you have 10 snake knots youre almost done Youll notice from the photos of both sides of the lanyard that one side has the snake knots alternating all the waydown and the other has a set of parallel knots at the top and botton of the sequence of knots Youll always have those at the start and finish of the snake knots I preferto have them end up on the same side of the lanyard so one side appears to have a more uniform look but its not required
Step 6 Trim and melt the excess paracordUse the scissors to trim off the excess cord and quickly melt the ends with a lighter so they dont fray
Step 7 Youre doneYou can make a range of variations using less or more cordknots Shorten the loop for a double ended key chain or make the loop longer for use as a neck lanyard aLanyard Break-Away Connector could be added for the safety conscious You can also add a wooden bead skull cord lock etc Visit my blog page for more knot relatedprojects links and resources Stormdranes Blog You can find ideas for other geargadgets to attach to your lanyard on EDC Forums
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Related Instructables
Paracord ChainSinnet FastDeploy BoonieHatband (video)by Stormdrane
Cross KnotParacordLanyard byStormdrane
Zigzag SpoolingParacord (video)by Stormdrane
SurvivalBracelet II bytevers94
SurvivalBracelet(Updated) bytevers94
Cobra WeaveKey Fob bytevers94
ParacordBoonie HatWrap (video) byStormdrane
Paracord KnotDisplay Bord byJamie bagn
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
How to tie various knotsby adaviel on September 7 2009
Intro How to tie various knotsKnots as a way of joining rope without special equipment are useful in many situations On a sailboat knots are essential both for daily use and for emergency repairsThis instructable describes several different common knots eg
Sheet Bend - to tie two lines togetherBowline - to make a loopReef Knot - to fasten a bundle of materialFishermans Bend - to secure a line to a post or ring
These knots are good for regular rope - braided or 3-strand polyester or natural fibre (hemp sisal) Monofilament (fishing line) or steel cable performs better with differentknots
Knots are typically quite a lot weaker than straight rope - when rope goes around a tight radius such as in a knot the outside is under more tension than the insideSplices (which require special tools and are time-consuming to make) are stronger so permanent fittings usually have eye-splices
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 1 Sheet BendThe sheet bend is used to tie two lines together It is perhaps the most generally useful knot of all When used to tie a line to itself making a loop it is called a bowlineThe strain is taken on the ropes in the middle - not the one coming out the side
How the knot is made is not critical - it is the final shape that is important One can make the flat loop first and work the other rope around it Or one can make thecrossed loop first - required when tying a bowline
The two images show front and back views of the same knot
AdvantagesEasy to makeEasy to undo when tension is removedDoes not easily capsize
DisadvantagesHard to make under loadDangerous to make under heavy load
UsesJoining two equally-sized ropesExtending a towline or stern line
Method 1 the same as a bowline
Method 2 starting with the flat loop
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 2 Double Sheet BendThe double sheet bend is used to tie two lines of different thickness - but not too different It is the same as a normal sheet bend but with an extra turn of the thinner ropearound the flat loop in the thickerThe load goes on the line through the flat loop not the one that comes out the side of the knot
UsesSecuring a heaving line to a tow lineExtending a stern line if you dont have enough line of one thickness
Step 3 BowlineThe bowline is really a special case of the sheet bend but it it tied at the end of a rope to make a loop
The photos show the completed loop and closeups of the front and back of the actual knot Note that it is the same as the sheet bend - but it must be made the right wayround This loop does not tighten in use The knot is quite easy to untie once the load is removed With practice it is very quick to tie
Some usesSecuring a dinghy line to a railing or stanchionSecuring an anchor line to an anchorTie a jib sheet to the sailTie a mooring line around a rock or treeTie a float to an anchor triplineUse one in each line to tie two ropes of very different sizes - eg a throwing line to a large tow ropeDisadvantages the knot must be completely made before it will take any strain - it is hard to tie if there is already a load on the rope
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Linked bowlines
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 4 Bowline on the BightA bowline on the bight is a bowline tied in a loop of rope (neither end is needed) The shape is the same as a bowline made with a double line but the middle of thebight forms the loop around the standing part
UsesAn impromptu bosuns chair - to sit in while being transferred between two boats at sea
Step 5 Clove HitchThe clove hitch can be made when you only have the bight (the middle) of a rope not the ends
UsesSecuring a burgee pole to a burgee halyard (a continuous loop of thin line)Securing a tiller from swinging
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 6 Round Turn and Two Half-HitchesThis is a knot used to secure a line to a ring or bar Wind a couple of turns around the bar then secure the end with two hitches around the standing part (this looks like aclove hitch when done)
AdvantagesCan be made under load - it is easy to take turns around the bar while maintaining tension on the ropeStrong - provided the bar is thicker than the rope the rope is not weakened by sharp bendsDisadvantagesThe end tends to work loose
UsesSecuring a line to a mooring ring or samson post
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 7 Fishermans BendThe fishermans bend is the same as the round turn and two half hitches except that the first hitch is looped under the round turn This uses the tension on the rope tosecure the end from working loose
AdvantagesSecure against working loose
DisadvantagesHard to make under tensionHard to undo under tensionMay seize up under load when wet making it hard to undo
UsesSecuring mooring line to ringSecuring fender lines to rail
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 8 Studsail BendThe studsail bend is like the fishermans bend but the second hitch is also secured under the round turn making it even more secure against working loose when undertension
AdvantagesVery secure against working looseDisadvantagesHard to make under tensionHard to undo under tension
Step 9 Figure-8 KnotThe figure-eight knot is used to prevent an end of rope from passing through a block (pulley) Sometimes called a stopper knot
The double figure-8 knot is used in rock climbing as an alternative to a bowline to secure a climbing harness to the end of a safety rope The double knot is made bymaking a single knot then tracing back around the knot with the free end after passing it around the harness loop
AdvantagesEasy to verify by inspectionNot prone to work loose
DisadvantagesSlow to make and undoCannot be made under load
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 10 Prussic KnotThe prussic knot may be used as a climbing ascender - when made around a vertical rope as shown downwards tension on the ends locks the knot while release oftension allows it to be slid up the rope A pair of prussic knots on foot loops may be used in tandem to climb a rope
UsesClimbing a ropeTaking up tension to free a riding turn on a winch
Step 11 Reef KnotThe reef knot or square knot is used to tie a bundle of material together It must be made around something - it should not be used to tie two free ropes togetherbecause it can easily capsizeIt should not be used to make a loop unless it can be tensioned around a solid object It should not be used around a person - use a bowline instead A capsized reefknot will slip easily and could constrict and cause severe injury
UsesReefing a sail (tying the unused portion around a spar)Securing a furled sail to a spar (sail ties)Wrapping a parcelTying shoelaces
AdvantagesMay be made under moderate load
DisadvantagesCapsizes (works free) if used improperlyCan seize up under load when wet
Tying the knot
Capsizing a reef knot
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 12 CleatsThis is not a knot but is very common on boatsThe first picture shows a rope cleated normally The second shows one with a final locking turn - the last turn is twisted before placing over the cleat so that the tensionon the rope helps secure the free end
When working with ropes under tension take a turn or two around a winch or cleat before trying to secure the end with a knot The load on the free end falls exponentiallywith each turn taken Severe injury can result if a finger or other body part is caught in a loop of rope or between a rope and another object
Step 13 Practice themIt is sometimes useful to be able to tie knots in the dark or as in this video behind your back
Related Instructables
AThird Hand forSailing or OtherThings by WadeTarzia
Paracord KnotDisplay Bord byJamie bagn
Trip LogOutriggerCanoe Sailingthe CaliforniaChannel Islandsby TimAnderson
How to Tie aFigure EightKnot byTactical_Pyro
How to build apirate ship bymdelaney3
Build a ShortDragon (16 foot3-BoardOutriggerSailing Canoe)by Wade Tarzia
repairing aheadsail by josh
How to get arope into a tree(withoutclimbing it) byvitex
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
How to Tie the Lanyard Knotby eddy14777 on January 31 2010
Intro How to Tie the Lanyard KnotMany people including myself have had trouble following the Stormdrane youtube video on tying the lanyard knot so i have done some research and found the solution
Image Notes1 Finished knot
Step 1 MaterialsAll you need is a reasonable length of para cord or whatever you wish to use
Image Notes1 One reasonable amount
Step 2 First StepThe first thing you are going to do is to make a bight that leaves you with to congruent endsThen you are going to put your ring finger through the bight
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Image Notes1 Close enough2 Bight
Step 3 Starting the KnotMake a loop just like the one in the picture and place it over the top strandBring the top strand under the bottom strand
Image Notes1 Notice the way the loop is done2 Top strand
Image Notes1 Bottom strand2 Top strand is under
Step 4 The Most Important PartNow you take the top stand from the previous picture and feed it over the first part of the loop under itself and back over the remainder of the loop
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Image Notes1 Under me2 Top strand3 This should make a diamond type shape
Step 5 DoublingNow take the bottom stand and take it around the part of the top strand nearest to the bight and than come up through the diamond shape in the middleDo the same for the top strand
Image Notes1 Top strand
Image Notes1 Both through the diamond
Step 6 FinishingWhen you take it off your finger it should look like thisWork out the slack by pulling on the bight and the two strands
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Image Notes1 Finished knot
Related Instructables
Cross KnotParacordLanyard byStormdrane
Celtic ButtonKnot (video) byStormdrane
Paracord wristlanyard madewith the snakeknot byStormdrane
Paracord ChainSinnet FastDeploy BoonieHatband (video)by Stormdrane
Zigzag SpoolingParacord (video)by Stormdrane
ParacordBoonie HatWrap (video) byStormdrane
Paracord IDbadge Lanyardby Flahusky
Cobra WeaveKey Fob bytevers94
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Four knots to make paracord into a useful toolby erik_mccray on March 27 2010
Authorerik_mccrayI am an ex-fabricator that is now a stay at home dad I love my new job but I do miss making stuff I love this site amp I am getting involved as a way to keep myskills upOn top of fad work I have also run two small business in the past One was custom sewing amp the other was as a small engine mechanicI have two votec degrees one in metal fabrication amp the other is in engine repairI look forward to getting to know everyone here
Intro Four knots to make paracord into a useful toolParacord is an awesome multitool used everywhere from the wild blue yonder to the deepest caverns But like any good tool it is only as good as the knowledge the userhas about the tool With most people out there using bungee cords amp ratchet straps it seems that paracord is being used for nothing more than friendship bracelets forgrown men This is a shame because for less then the price of a few cheap bungee cords amp some to short to be helpful straps You can get yourself hundreds of feet ofparacord
The key to getting the most out of the paracord is good knot work The first thing you need to know is what makes a good knot One is that the knot is easy amp quick to tieamp more impotant is that the knot is easy amp quick to untie The hitch class of knots is by far the best group of knots that the average person could know The four mostuseful hitch knots are the half hitch a quick simple knot that forms the base for many other knots the inline half hitch allowing you to get the most out of one length ofparacord the slippery hitch that gives you both on the fly control over tension on your paracord but also an adjustable loop that will not change unless you want it amp theinline truckers hitch instantly doubling the your pulling power
Step 1 To get started lets get some terminology that will be used defined
line= the paracord
Main line= the part of the paracord doing the work for example holding down your tarp or the long part of the paracord
Mid line= the middle of the length of the paracord
End line= the unused length of paracord or the short length of paracord
Step 2 The half hitch The half hitch is a simple way to secure a line to an anchor point like the tie down points in most trucks A half hitch is a constrictor knot meaning that the harder you pullon the line the tighter the knots grip gets Another common constrictor knot is the slip knot
Step 1 wrap your line around your anchor point Step 2 wrap the end line around the main line
Step 3 pass the end line threw the end line side of the newly formed loop
step 4 now take the slack out of the knot
step 5 to make sure the knot is secure tie another half hitch to the main line This knot is called adouble half hitch
step 6 another useful thing that can be done with the half hitch is that instead of repeating the wrap on the main line but repeating it on what you are tying to the half hitchcan be used to bind something like a stack of 2x4s
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Image Notes1 End line2 Main line3 step 1
Image Notes1 Step 2
Image Notes1 passing thew the end line side of the loop2 step 3
Image Notes1 step 5
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Image Notes1 step 6
Step 3 The mid line half hitch The mid line half hitch is for when the length of line is to long for the job at hand amp you dont want to have to cut the line to size or you are using multiple anchor pointswith one length of line
Step 1 double up the line at the point in the length you wish to make the knot
Step 2 wrap the doubled up portion of line around your anchor point The doubled up length is now now the end line
Step 3 now tie just as you did for the regular half hitch repeat the knot to make a double half hitch for security
Image Notes1 A mid line double half hitch
Image Notes1 step 1
Image Notes1 The end line2 step 2
Image Notes1 Step 3
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 4 The slippery hitch The slippery hitch is a great knot for adjusting tension on the main line or for having an adjustable fixed loop To adjust the knot simply slide the knot up or down the mainline
Step 1 wrap your line around the anchor point or just double over the line to form a loop
Step 2 wrap the end line around the main line three times Wrapping in the direction of the anchor point or loop
Step 3 put together the two lines making up the loop amp wrap the two lines one time with the end line
Step 4 pass the end line thew the last loop formed covering the two lined of the loop
Step 5 pull the knot tite
step 6 to adjust the size of the loop or main line tension grab the knot amp slide it up or down the main line
Image Notes1 grab just the knot its self to adjust it2 step 5
Image Notes1 step 1
Image Notes1 step 2
Image Notes1 step 3
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Image Notes1 step 4
Image Notes1 grab just the knot its self to adjust it2 step 5
Image Notes1 same knot as in last pic Just slid up2 step 6
Step 5 The mid line truchers hitch The truckers hitch is a great way to double the pulling force on a line There are many ways to tie this knot the problem with most of them is that at some point you aregoing to have to pass the end line through a loop on the main line that is acting like a pulley to double your pulling force this is great if you are making the knot close tothe end of your line but if you are using a 300 length of line amp want to make the knot in the first ten feet having to pass 290 of line thew a loop is a pain But with a fewhalf hitches you will not have to pass the end line threw any loop on the main line
step 1 wrap your line around the anchor point then double over your end line laying the top of the loop over the main line
Step 2 double up your main line amp lay the loop over the loop made by the end line
step 3 in main line above the knot twist in a loop
step 4 put main line loop thew the loop made in step 3 amp pull this loop tight over your main line loop forming a half hitch Repeat step 3 amp 4 to make a doublehalf hitch
step 5 To use the knot just pull down on the end line to put tension on the main line
step 6 after you have the main line snug tie a mid line double half hitch around the two lines forming the loop at the end of the main line with the end line
step 7 Tie a double half hitch with the end line around the end loop of the mid line half hitch of step 6 using the same method as used in steps 3 amp 4
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Image Notes1 the end of step 6
Image Notes1 main line2 end line3 step 1
Image Notes1 main line loop2 end line loop
Image Notes1 step 3
Image Notes1 step 4
Image Notes1 step 4 at the end with a double half hitch on the main loop
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Image Notes1 pull here2 step 5
Image Notes1 the start of step 6
Image Notes1 the end of step 6
Image Notes1 step 72 now the rest of the line is free to do more work
Related Instructables
Paracord KnotDisplay Bord byJamie bagn
ChokelessAdjustableParacord DogLeash byPizzaman101
ParacordLadder wWooden Rungsby josestude
tie a paracordshackle grip byitri45
ParacordPrussik Belt byJavaNut13
TiteTie is theTruckers Knoton Steroids bytitetie
ID Lanyard(Photos) byeschmunk
Dog Toys forHeavy Chewersby J3443RY
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Figure 8 knot and double 8 knotby jonathan111 on November 28 2007
Intro Figure 8 knot and double 8 knotI will show you how to tie a figure 8 knot and a figure 8 follow through
Step 1 Stating the knotThis is a simple knot so just follow the pictures
Step 2 Finishing the knotCross the string under and then push it through the hole Pull tightly unless you are going to do the follow through and leave it somewhat loose
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 3 The follow through knotThe follow through knot should be tied around something brought back and followed through the path of the 8 knot Look at the pictures Basically follow through the 8knot backwards
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Related Instructables
Climb Safe WithA Figure 8Knot by mattste A pocket full of
knots byKiteman
How to Tie aFigure EightKnot byTactical_Pyro
Paracord KnotDisplay Bord byJamie bagn
Cross KnotParacordLanyard byStormdrane
How to Tie aFire-escapeKnot by leonardoismael
Truckers HitchTHE mostawesome knoton the planetby schneidp20
Paracord ZipperPuller byrepeet13
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Truckers Hitch THE most awesome knot on the planetby schneidp20 on October 12 2008
Authorschneidp20I like building stuff Trouble is there just isnt enough time to build everything Sigh
Intro Truckers Hitch THE most awesome knot on the planetYes I know that there are plenty of other cool knots out there many of which I literally couldnt live wo I rock climb However this knot is unlike any other Plus Ineeded a grabber for my Instructable -) (BTW this ISNT a climbing knot) And in truth it isnt a knot by itself but rather a system of common knots
Have you ever tried to tie something down for transporting but just couldnt get the lines tight andor during transport the lines would continually loosen Then this is theknot for you I learned this knot back in the 70s when specialty car racks and ratchet straps were rare or unheard of I initially used it to tie a canoe on a car rack bothattaching to the rack as well as the lines to the bow and stern of the canoe Even with all the new gizmos available today this knot still shines because all you need is arope and ropes dont hum in the wind like straps
The unique aspect of this knot is that it gives you a 2-1 mechanical advantage when tightening the rope Be careful though You can actually damage some thingsbecause of the mechanical advantage This knot holds fast and is easy to untie hallmark traits of any good knot
Below you see the finished knot system well break it apart in the steps that follow
Image Notes1 1st anchor point a bowline2 loop3 securing knots 2 half hitches4 securing loose end with a fishermans knot5 2nd anchor point (should be round)
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Image Notes1 X marks the spot
Step 1 Initial setupThe first step is to anchor one end of the rope and then loop the rope around a 2nd anchor point
For attaching to the 1st anchor point I chose bowline a close 2 on my list -) There are other instructables on that one so I wont bore you here
The 2nd anchor really should be round because it serves as a pulley in this block and tackle type knot Ive used it on sharp anchor points and it doesnt work as well
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 2 Creating a slip knotTie a slip knot somewhere between the two anchor points Correct placement of the slip knot takes some experience to judge it correctly Typically I place it too close tothe 2nd anchor point and end up with not enough room to work with If the knot ends up too far from 2nd anchor point you can extend the knot by enlarging the loop
Be sure you tie the slip knot as shown You may not be able to untie other knots
In this small example the slip knot is uncharacteristically close to the 1st anchor point
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 3 Tightening and securingThe loose end of the rope that went around the 2nd anchor point goes through the slip knot loop Pull the loose end to the desired tension and secure with two halfhitches
Note To allow better view of the knots the rope isnt really tightened in this example
Step 4 Securing loose endThe final knot is just to secure the loose end somehow I chose a fishermans knot to do this
To tie a fishermans knot the rope goes around twice and goes under the X created by the loops Pull the loose end to tighten Finally slide the knot to put tension onthe half hitches
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Image Notes1 X marks the spot
Step 5 FinishedThere you have it I guarantee that the first time you really use this knot (not just practice) you will be amazed at how well it works and youll wish you knew this knot along time ago You may even come over to my side and declare that is is THE most awesome knot on the planet -)
Enjoy and happy haulingDave
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Related Instructables
TiteTie is theTruckers Knoton Steroids bytitetie
Four knots tomake paracordinto a usefultool byerik_mccray
Modify yourbike rack tocarry a sunfishor other boat byewilhelm
SurfboardHammock byGermy
GiganticHalloweenSpider Web bynolte919
How To Tie ASpiders Hitch(video) by back-cast
Three-hitch mathair ornamentby michiexile TRX from
ParacordChallengeAccepted bythrake
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Carry any Bottle with a JUG KNOT Handleby hpstoutharrow on September 17 2009
Intro Carry any Bottle with a JUG KNOT HandleTie a JUG KNOT around a water bottle soda bottle or aluminum bottle to make a secure carrying strap
Re-purpose any container into a reusable water bottle by adding a convenient carrying strap This Instructable will demonstrate how to tie a JUG knot which like its namesuggests is meant to properly secure around the neck of a container
With some cord and the knowledge of this knot you will be able add a handle lanyard or carabiner loop to any of your favorite beverages to carry them on the go
It works perfectly for those disposable water bottles and who knows once you add some colorful cord to the plain old clear water bottle you just might beinclined to refill it and use it again(Check out pictures 4amp5 below)
In addition to plastic beverage bottles like pop water and sports drinks you can turn those rugged aluminum beer bottles into a backpacking canteen
Those of you familiar with my previous aluminum bottle InstructablesROLLED RIM METAL TUMBLERhttpwwwinstructablescomidAluminum-Bottle-Tumbler-Cup-Cook-PotALUMINUM BOTTLE LIGHTWEIGHT ALCOHOL STOVEhttpwwwinstructablescomidAluminum-Bottle-Alcohol-Stovewill recognize the water canteen shown below as a re-purposed aluminum beer bottle Here I have added a painted surface treatment to turn it into a proper lookingwater bottle More on that in steps 13 14 15
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 1 Getting StartedCord size is important Select a small medium weight cord like the one shown here It is a general purpose camp cord sold at most sporting goods stores (shoelacesmight also work)
Do not use a heavy cord or rope because the larger diameter will not tuck under the relatively small lip at the top of the bottleneck and the bottle will fall out
Also the smaller cord cinches tight on itself and will not loosen accidentally
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 2 Form a BightThe next steps show how to tie a JUG KNOT It is the basic step for adding a carrying strap It is also the anchor point for any additional fancy bottle trussing you maywant to add
JUG KNOT Step 1
Form a Bight in the center of a length of cord Bight is a knot term for a loop or bend in the rope In this case the main Bight in this knot is highlighted with a white mark Imakes it easier to follow its path in these steps
The running ends of the cord should be equal length
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 3 Pull the Bight downPULL the Bight DOWN forming two Loops
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 4 Cross the LoopsCROSS the right Loop OVER the left Loop
Step 5 Pass the Bight under the 1st loopTake the main Bight and pass it UNDER the left Loop
Step 6 Weave the BightWEAVE the Bight OVER the portion of the right Loop and UNDER the portion of the left Loop
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 7 Extend the BightExtend the Bight OVER the outer portion of the right Loop
Step 8 Flip the Right Loop behindAdditional colored identification points have been added to the loops to follow their travel in these next two steps
The right Loop Yellow marker is FLIPPED BEHIND the knot and ends up on the far left side of the knot
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 9 Flip the 2nd loop in frontRaise the green marker (located on what was formerly the left loop) and pull it down and to the right FLIPPING IT IN FRONT of the knot
Note the blue portion of the this loop will pass around the outside of the yellow portion of the first loop
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Image Notes1 Center of knot that will tighten around the bottles neck
Step 10 Remove SlackNote where the blue green amp yellow markers end up
Start to remove the slack in the loops by pulling the original main Bight (white marker top right) and the two free standing ends at the bottom
the bottle neck will pass through the very center of the knot
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Image Notes1 Center of knot that will tighten around the bottles neck
Step 11 Tighten the KnotAfter removing the slack insert the bottle neck and finish tightening
The knot should look like this before slipping it over the bottle
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 12 Secure on bottle neckThis is the finished knot shown on the neck of various containers
The loop end and the two free standing ends can be tied together to create a carrying handle (last picture below)
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 13 Aluminum Bottle Water Bottle
The next few steps show the features of an aluminum beer bottle re-purposed as a water bottle canteen It is one of many containers that can be reused as a camp waterbottle
The bottle was lightly sanded masked and then pained with a hammered finished paint to create an interesting surface texture
Image Notes1 Textured finish paint makes an interesting grip-able surface2 Masked with tape for painting3 Masked with tape for painting
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Image Notes1 Dowel used for holding the bottle during painting
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 14 Tethered Cork StopperUse a wine bottle man made Cork as a stopper for your aluminum water bottleNote Use a cork that was removed from the wine bottle without the corkscrew penetrating through the bottom end of the cork (A hole all the way through the cork willcause it to leak) Use the unpierced end of the cork inside the water bottle
Drill a hole through the sides of the Cork Thread the cord through the hole to the center of the cord Use the cork as the main Bight and tie the Jug knot as shown inthe beginning steps
Now the cork is tethered to the bottle and will not get lost or fall on the ground
A Carabiner clip passes through the other cord end to attache the water bottle to you belt or pack
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 15 Trussed for TransportThis is another hanging method for carrying your aluminum bottle water canteen A Jug knot is tied conventionally around the neck
The running ends of the knot however are pulled down towards the bottom of the bottle A Barrel Knot is tied about 34 the way down the side of the bottle A squareknot is tied on the bottom of the knot to keep the two running ends tight against the sides of the bottle
I like the look of the accent colored cord running down the sides of the bottle and the fact that the bottle hangs from the belt upside down It adds to its uniqueness
The last picture shows another truss variation
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 16 AdvancedBelow is a bottle with some additional trussing You can be creative as you want It all starts with a re-purposed container and the Jug Knot (and enough cord)
Related Instructables
AluminumBottle TumblerCup amp Cook Potfor an AlcoholStove byhpstoutharrow
Water BottleBelt Clip byuglymike Duct Tape
Water Bottle byrabidsquire2
AluminumBottle AlcoholStove byhpstoutharrow
DIYGlass WaterBottle byCulturespy
Solar WaterHeater forBackpackingUsing WaterBottles and aCar Shade bykopomeroy
Duct tape waterbottle holder(Photos) by pinkmarshmallow
How to make aCamelPack withan old plasticbottle bywillrandship
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Basic Knots Guideby zorro3355 on April 29 2008
Intro Basic Knots Guidehi
Step 1 Thumb knotThe most simple knotUsed as a stopper and prevent ropes from fraying
Step 2 Reef KnotUsed to tie two ropes of equal thickness togetherIt is pretty easy to tie and untie but under tentionit may be diffcult to untieIt is also not sutible for smoothropes(egnylon ropes)
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 3 Figure of eightused as a stopperprevent ropes from fraying and its more secure than tumb knot its is also used to tie Caribinas to ropes and is often used in rock climbing
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 4 Timber hitchused for pulling logs
Step 5 Clove hitchUsed to tie a rope onto a pole or logThe pole must be roundThe pole lust be thicker then the rope itself
(greatly used during pioneering)
Step 6 Sheet bandused to tie ropes of different thickness together(works on same thickness of ropes too)
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 7 Sheep shankTo shorten RopesTo prevent middle fraying
Step 8 Slip knotWhippingUsed as a grip for pulling things(when tied on a stick or small pole)(marlin spike hitch)
Related Instructables
Rope Rings byhpstoutharrow
How to Tie aFigure EightKnot byTactical_Pyro
Whippin (WestCountry Style)by tim_n
SurvivalBracelet(Updated) bytevers94
HangmansNoose PackClosure byPopEye42
Turkey on aTripod byhpstoutharrow
SurvivalBracelet II bytevers94 Zigzag Spooling
Paracord (video)by Stormdrane
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
How to Tie a Fire-escape Knotby leonardo ismael on October 16 2007
Intro How to Tie a Fire-escape KnotThis knot is used by firemen in case of fires for example imagine a scene where the ladder on the firetruck messes up but people need to get down a five story buildingor more All they have is a long piece of rope they can safely get down with a secure knot like the fire-escape knot So why not learn it its easy to do and hard to untieif you tie it tightly
This is from the American Boys Handbook
Step 1 Get Your RopeFirst grab a piece of rope and bend it like this to make a loop in it Follow every step to the smallest detail
Step 2 Twist the RopeNow make a twist like this and hold it together
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 3 Pull Through the TwistPull the loop through the twist you just made from underneath
Step 4 Go Over the Split EndNow pull the tail through the loop
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 5 FinallyAnd finally just pull it through as pictured below
Congratulations you just learned the fire-escape knot
Step 6 Same Name Not KnotThis is another knot called the fire-escape knot this shouldnt be your result
Related Instructables
House FireEscape Plan(video) byWhatHappensNowAdvice
ParacordLadder wWooden Rungsby josestude
Bed SheetEscape Rope byjessehensel
rope ladder(glow-in-the-dark version) bymikeasaurus
HeadlockEscape 2(video) byjohnnyrockstah
QuickFirestarter byMattandJora
Trail sauna byjakee117
How to Kill FireAnts andCommitGenocide byKentsOkay
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Climb Safe With A Figure 8 Knotby mattste on February 23 2010
Intro Climb Safe With A Figure 8 Knot There are many things that a beginning climber needs to know including several important knots Perhaps the most essential knot is the Figure 8 Follow Through Thistutorial will demonstrate how to correctly harness yourself to a rope using a Figure 8 Follow Through knot This knot is used primarily by rock climbers to provide a life-line Since this knot is used as a life-line it is very important to be able to tie it correctly (Your life could depend upon it)
Dont worry with this tutorial and about 5 minutes of practice you can have this knot mastered
Things you will need
- Climbing Harness- Climbing Rope
If you are wanting to go climbing and dont already have these items they can be purchased for about $25 each at most outdoor sporting goods stores If you are merelylooking to learn the knot a belt loop and a rope (about five feet long) will do
Image Notes1 Climbing Harness2 Climbing Rope
Step 1 Dealing With The RopeThroughout this tutorial I will be discussing different parts of the rope To make these instructions as clear as possible I will define a few terms that I will use throughoutthe tutorial The Anchor End of the rope will generally be at the top of the images This is the end that would be anchored to the wall or rock and does not move Wewill not be doing much with the anchored end The Tail End of the rope is the opposite end that we will be dealing with I will call this the tail for short
Now that we have some terms to work with lets get started
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 2 Tying The First Figure 8This knot has several parts to it The first part of the knot is just tying a basic figure 8 To tie the first figure 8 there are four simple steps
1 - Using the tail make a loop over the rope (as shown in the first picture) keeping in mind that there should be about 3 ft of slack on the tail end
2 - Wrap the tail back this time go under the anchored end (As shown in the second picture)
3 - Bring the tail down through the first loop (As shown in the third picture)
4 - Finally pull the two ends to make the knot a little bit tighter and easier to deal with (Shown in the fourth picture)
After these four steps you should end up with a knot that resembles a figure 8
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 3 Looping Into The Harness In order to secure the rope to the harness simply thread the tail end of the rope through the front loop in the harness as shown in the picture below This step isobviously very important
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 4 Following Back Through The Figure 8After looping the rope through the harness you have to thread the tail end of the rope back through the knot following the first figure 8 I have divided this process intofive smaller steps in order to make it more clear
1 - Coming form underneath the knot bring the tail up through the near loop and to the left behind the anchored end of the rope (Shown in the first picture)
2 - Wrap the tail around the anchored end back to the right and down through the adjacent loop (Shown in the second picture)
3 - You simply need to bring the tail back over the top of the knot to the left (Shown in the third picture)
4 - Bring the tail end up through the far loop following the anchored end (Shown in the fourth picture)
5 - Finally pull the knot tight (Shown in the fifth picture)
As you can see the first four pictures are simply tracing the knot back through with the tail end
For the last part while you pull the knot tight you may want to make small adjustments and rearrange how it all fits together If the knot does not lay perfectly smoothand tight its NOT a big deal
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 5 Finishing The Knot After completing the Figure 8 knot you will want to somehow secure the tail end of the rope out of the way There are a couple different ways to do this the way that Iwill demonstrate is using whats called a Stopper Knot This secondary knot is similar to a Fishermans knot and is pretty simple I have once again divided thisprocess into several smaller steps
1 - Start by wrapping the tail end around the anchored end (As shown in the first picture)
2 - Wrap the tail back underneath the two vertical segments (As shown in the second picture)
3 - Simply repeat the first two steps wrapping the tail around again (As shown in the third picture)
4 - This step in the fourth picture may look complicated but all you need to do is insert the tail up through the two loops that you have just made
5 - To finish off the knot you will want to slowly pull the tail end while gently pushing the bottom of the stopper knot upwards If you have successfully completed this knotit should look something like the fifth picture
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 6 Ready To Climb Now that you have mastered the Figure 8 knot you can securely harness yourself into a climbing rope Remember there are many other skills that go into setting up ananchor and belaying a climber This tutorial only covers the figure 8 knot For more information there are many great websites that demonstrate how to correctly set up asafe climbing system (Ive posted a few below) If you are a beginning climber I recommend that you read up on a few other climbing techniques Also you shouldprobably go to a climbing wall or gym where there are experienced climbers that can show you the ropes Hopefully this tutorial has been helpful Have fun and be safe
Some useful linkshttpwwwstephenprattnetAnchorsanchorshtmhttpwwwuoregonedu~oppclimbingtopicsanchorshtmlhttpwwwabc-of-rockclimbingcomhowtoclimbingtechniquesasp
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Related Instructables
How to Tie aFigure EightKnot byTactical_Pyro
Paracord KnotDisplay Bord byJamie bagn
Basic KnotsGuide byzorro3355
How to Climb aTree (withprussiks) bystasterisk
How to climb atree (using onlyrope) thefunsimple wayby louieaw
How to get arope into a tree(withoutclimbing it) byvitex
How to tievarious knots byadaviel
How to make arope swing byjdub0928
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Turks Head Knots on a Bottleby sklnxbones on July 6 2010
Intro Turks Head Knots on a BottleThis is the finished project A bottle decorated with three Turks Head Knots There are only three knots on this bottle The RED and the BLUE knots are each a 20 Bightby 3 Lead Turks Head Knots The WHITE knot is a 20 Bight by 19 Lead Turks Head Knot
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 1 Supplies
Cord Lots and Lots of cord I cant tell you how much each bottle is differentBottle Washed and Dried inside and out Make sure to remove all water spotsThreaded Needle Cord screws into the threads at the base of the needlePegs I use brass rivets used as a map to tie the Turks Head KnotsHole Punch Used to punch holes in the painters tape to hold the pegsPainters Tape To hold the pegs in place and to make your map for the Turks Head KnotsMarker To write on the painters tapeCloth Towel To remove finger prints and dirt from your bottleKrazy Glue or Super Glue This is used to secure the knots in place to the bottle
OPTIONAL BUT HIGHLY RECOMMENDEDI use the Turks Head Cookbook from KnotToolcom
Step 2 PreparationYou will need to find a bottle you like I used an empty instant tea bottle of course washed and dried (I like to put the bottle in the oven for a few minutes to dry the insidewithout water spots Take off the lid and do not put lid in the oven) Now measure the circumference of the bottle Take a cord and tightly wrap the cord around the bottleMark where the ends meet and use a ruler to measure the length of the cord For my instant tea bottle the circumference is 27cm I know from past knots that I have tiedthat I want my knot to have 20 Bights in the top and bottom (bands) knots I am going to use the Bights in the (bands) knots to tie the middle knot Now divide the numberof Bights (20) into the size of the circumference (27) to get the space between each Bight (135) With me so far
Now take two pieces of painters tape using a ruler measure out the length of the circumference and mark the length on the both pieces of tape Next you will mark thespace between each Bight on the tape
Step 3 Adding the PegsI like to use pegs when tying Turks Head Knots it just makes tying the knot easier
These are what I use for pegs
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 4 Adding Pegs to the TapeNow take a hole punch to cut holes in the tape where the lines meet You will place the pegs in the holes
Insert a peg in each hole and carefully stick the first piece of tape to the bottle
Step 5 Adding the 2nd row of pegsNow do the same thing with the second piece of tape The numbers on each piece of tape must line up
This picture shows you what you should have now This odd looking thing will be your map to tie the Turks Head Knot And this is the end of Step 1
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 6 Tying the first Turks Head KnotUsing the Turks Head Cookbook follow the numbers going over and under as indicated in the book I chose a 20 Bight by 3 Lead knot which will give me a nice bandaround the bottle Once the ends meet you have made one complete knot Tape the running end of your cord and start removing the pegs and the tape
Step 7 Remove the pegs and the tapeBe careful not to untie the knot as you remove the pegs and tape from the bottle Continue to remove all the pegs and remove the tape from the bottle At this point theknot will be very loose and will need to be tightened up
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 8 Remove the slack from the knotHere you can see just how much the knot expanded Starting with the standing end begin to pull the slack out of the knot going towards the running end of the cordDo not expect to pull all the slack out at once You may have to make 3 - 5 attempts at removing the slack out of the knot DO NOT remove all of the slack out of the knotIn order to make the bands we will have to triple the Turks Head Knot We will do this by following the knot three times The threaded needle will really come in handyhere
Step 9 Triple the KnotOnce you have made three passes of the Turks Head Knot use your needle to go under your knot about half the circumference and cut the cord The knot will be tightenough to hide the tail in placeTIP I carefully add a couple of drops of super glue UNDER the band to hold them in place and keep them from sliding around in the nextsteps A drop or two in 3 or 4 places around the band should be enough
Step 10 Add the second knotNow repeat this whole step for the second bandWhen tying the second band you must make sure the Bights line up to the first band This is crucial for the next stepWipe down the bottle to make sure all your finger prints and adhesive from the tape are all removed You want to make sure your bottle is clean at this point Any dirt orfinger prints left on the bottle will be almost impossible to remove From this point on we will use gloves when tying our last knot
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 11 Maping the Top KnotStick a piece of painters tape on top of your first band leaving the bottom of the knot exposedUse a marker to count the number of Bights in your knot Instead of using the pegs we are going to use the Bights to tie our next Turks Head Knot
Step 12 Mapping the Bottom KnotDo the same thing for the bottom band but you must make sure your numbers on top and bottom line up So 1 on top should be the same position as 1 on the bottom
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 13 Adding the last knotAgain using the Turks Head Cookbook and the threaded needle you are going to follow the instructions going over and under as indicated in the book Be sure to usegloves when ever you handle the bottle
Step 14 Thats ItFor this Turks Head Knot I am using a 20 Bight by 19 Lead knot
Because of the amount of cord you are working with your cord will get twisted and knotted You will have to un-twist the cord often Its a pain in the rear but it has to bedone And it has to be done alot
Continue to tie the knot until you finish the knot If you have the cord and the patience you can double or triple the knot When you are done use your needle to hide theends under your bands Cut the ends and your DONE
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Related Instructables
Monkeys FistFloatingKeychain byjokerlz
How To Make ATurks headKnot WithParacord byDoggie Stylish
Tying Trivetsout of Rope forHoliday Gifts bykylemarsh
Paracord KnotDisplay Bord byJamie bagn
How to Make ATurks Head(Photos) bymchs60chip
A pocket full ofknots byKiteman
Monkeys fistknot AND themonkey byjonathan111
TiteTie is theTruckers Knoton Steroids bytitetie
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Larks head noose -- an easy useful knot that tightens and loosensby Larry Breed on February 19 2009
Intro Larks head noose -- an easy useful knot that tightens and loosensI thought I knew all the basic knots but then I was taught this incredibly useful simple knot Its good for tying up the neck of a bag that you want to repeatedly open andsecurely close Its good for tying around a springy bundle that will need tightening and retightening And its easy to undo
Ive looked at knot literature but havent found a name for this so I named it The basic knot is well known its called a larks head Since all Ive done is to slip the twoends through the larks head to make a noose I call it that
WARNING Dont use this knot when human safety would depend on it Climbers and mountaineers have well-tested reliable knots for such situations
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Image Notes1 To tighten further step on this side of the larks head and pull the free ends
Step 1 Double the cord overThe larks head noose requires enough cord to go twice around your bundle plus a foot or two Find the center and double it over Sailors call this a bight
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 2 Form the larks headComing from below the bight hook your thumb and forefinger over the two sides Reach outward and downward and pinch your fingertips together underneath thedoubled cord
Youve made a larks head Move the crossing cord a little farther from your hand so theres a clear opening through the two half-loops
Step 3 Form the nooseSlip the two ends of the cord through the opening we were just talking about Pull the larks head tight so it grips the two cords Find something that needs constrictingand put the noose around it
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 4 Tightening retightening and lockingSlide the knot against the bundle If its not tight enough to keep from slipping tighten it by holding it in one hand and tugging on the cords one at a time with the otherhand Notice that you can slide the knot out again for instance to re-open the bag you just tied shut For some applications this may be as tight as you need it
A springy bundle probably still feels loose If so compress the bundle and get a new grip on the cords Rest your foot on the bundle on the cords nearest the larks headand pull to slide the larks head tighter
To make the knot more permanent you can lock it Make an overhand in the cord ends (Exactly like the first step in tying shoelaces) With your foot still on the bundlepull on the cords and move your hands apart until youre pulling in opposite directions You have just locked the larks head and you can trust it to stay that way()
But lets say that later on you want to loosen the locked knot Again put your foot on the bundle and cords nearest the larks head hold the two cord ends together andpull This makes a little slack between the overhand and the larks head so you can untie the overhand
In twine or small string the locking overhand knot may be difficult to undo Use a shoelace knot instead of an overhand and itll unlock easily
() If youre using slippery cord like polypropylene an overhand may not lock securely You may want to tie another overhand knot For added security wrap a shortlength of duct tape around the two cords close to the knot
Image Notes1 To tighten further step on this side of the larks head and pull the free ends
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Related Instructables
TRX fromParacordChallengeAccepted bythrake
A pocket full ofknots byKiteman
Lens CapLanyard by~teknoarsonist~ how to tie a
noose byawesume
AdjustableParacordGlassesLanyard byjdtwelve12
HangmansNoose PackClosure byPopEye42
Paraleash - ADog LeashFrom Paracordby The Ideanator
How to make arugged andhandy ParacordBelt by Jake22
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 5 Count your knotsOnce you have 10 snake knots youre almost done Youll notice from the photos of both sides of the lanyard that one side has the snake knots alternating all the waydown and the other has a set of parallel knots at the top and botton of the sequence of knots Youll always have those at the start and finish of the snake knots I preferto have them end up on the same side of the lanyard so one side appears to have a more uniform look but its not required
Step 6 Trim and melt the excess paracordUse the scissors to trim off the excess cord and quickly melt the ends with a lighter so they dont fray
Step 7 Youre doneYou can make a range of variations using less or more cordknots Shorten the loop for a double ended key chain or make the loop longer for use as a neck lanyard aLanyard Break-Away Connector could be added for the safety conscious You can also add a wooden bead skull cord lock etc Visit my blog page for more knot relatedprojects links and resources Stormdranes Blog You can find ideas for other geargadgets to attach to your lanyard on EDC Forums
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Related Instructables
Paracord ChainSinnet FastDeploy BoonieHatband (video)by Stormdrane
Cross KnotParacordLanyard byStormdrane
Zigzag SpoolingParacord (video)by Stormdrane
SurvivalBracelet II bytevers94
SurvivalBracelet(Updated) bytevers94
Cobra WeaveKey Fob bytevers94
ParacordBoonie HatWrap (video) byStormdrane
Paracord KnotDisplay Bord byJamie bagn
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
How to tie various knotsby adaviel on September 7 2009
Intro How to tie various knotsKnots as a way of joining rope without special equipment are useful in many situations On a sailboat knots are essential both for daily use and for emergency repairsThis instructable describes several different common knots eg
Sheet Bend - to tie two lines togetherBowline - to make a loopReef Knot - to fasten a bundle of materialFishermans Bend - to secure a line to a post or ring
These knots are good for regular rope - braided or 3-strand polyester or natural fibre (hemp sisal) Monofilament (fishing line) or steel cable performs better with differentknots
Knots are typically quite a lot weaker than straight rope - when rope goes around a tight radius such as in a knot the outside is under more tension than the insideSplices (which require special tools and are time-consuming to make) are stronger so permanent fittings usually have eye-splices
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 1 Sheet BendThe sheet bend is used to tie two lines together It is perhaps the most generally useful knot of all When used to tie a line to itself making a loop it is called a bowlineThe strain is taken on the ropes in the middle - not the one coming out the side
How the knot is made is not critical - it is the final shape that is important One can make the flat loop first and work the other rope around it Or one can make thecrossed loop first - required when tying a bowline
The two images show front and back views of the same knot
AdvantagesEasy to makeEasy to undo when tension is removedDoes not easily capsize
DisadvantagesHard to make under loadDangerous to make under heavy load
UsesJoining two equally-sized ropesExtending a towline or stern line
Method 1 the same as a bowline
Method 2 starting with the flat loop
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 2 Double Sheet BendThe double sheet bend is used to tie two lines of different thickness - but not too different It is the same as a normal sheet bend but with an extra turn of the thinner ropearound the flat loop in the thickerThe load goes on the line through the flat loop not the one that comes out the side of the knot
UsesSecuring a heaving line to a tow lineExtending a stern line if you dont have enough line of one thickness
Step 3 BowlineThe bowline is really a special case of the sheet bend but it it tied at the end of a rope to make a loop
The photos show the completed loop and closeups of the front and back of the actual knot Note that it is the same as the sheet bend - but it must be made the right wayround This loop does not tighten in use The knot is quite easy to untie once the load is removed With practice it is very quick to tie
Some usesSecuring a dinghy line to a railing or stanchionSecuring an anchor line to an anchorTie a jib sheet to the sailTie a mooring line around a rock or treeTie a float to an anchor triplineUse one in each line to tie two ropes of very different sizes - eg a throwing line to a large tow ropeDisadvantages the knot must be completely made before it will take any strain - it is hard to tie if there is already a load on the rope
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Linked bowlines
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 4 Bowline on the BightA bowline on the bight is a bowline tied in a loop of rope (neither end is needed) The shape is the same as a bowline made with a double line but the middle of thebight forms the loop around the standing part
UsesAn impromptu bosuns chair - to sit in while being transferred between two boats at sea
Step 5 Clove HitchThe clove hitch can be made when you only have the bight (the middle) of a rope not the ends
UsesSecuring a burgee pole to a burgee halyard (a continuous loop of thin line)Securing a tiller from swinging
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 6 Round Turn and Two Half-HitchesThis is a knot used to secure a line to a ring or bar Wind a couple of turns around the bar then secure the end with two hitches around the standing part (this looks like aclove hitch when done)
AdvantagesCan be made under load - it is easy to take turns around the bar while maintaining tension on the ropeStrong - provided the bar is thicker than the rope the rope is not weakened by sharp bendsDisadvantagesThe end tends to work loose
UsesSecuring a line to a mooring ring or samson post
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 7 Fishermans BendThe fishermans bend is the same as the round turn and two half hitches except that the first hitch is looped under the round turn This uses the tension on the rope tosecure the end from working loose
AdvantagesSecure against working loose
DisadvantagesHard to make under tensionHard to undo under tensionMay seize up under load when wet making it hard to undo
UsesSecuring mooring line to ringSecuring fender lines to rail
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 8 Studsail BendThe studsail bend is like the fishermans bend but the second hitch is also secured under the round turn making it even more secure against working loose when undertension
AdvantagesVery secure against working looseDisadvantagesHard to make under tensionHard to undo under tension
Step 9 Figure-8 KnotThe figure-eight knot is used to prevent an end of rope from passing through a block (pulley) Sometimes called a stopper knot
The double figure-8 knot is used in rock climbing as an alternative to a bowline to secure a climbing harness to the end of a safety rope The double knot is made bymaking a single knot then tracing back around the knot with the free end after passing it around the harness loop
AdvantagesEasy to verify by inspectionNot prone to work loose
DisadvantagesSlow to make and undoCannot be made under load
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 10 Prussic KnotThe prussic knot may be used as a climbing ascender - when made around a vertical rope as shown downwards tension on the ends locks the knot while release oftension allows it to be slid up the rope A pair of prussic knots on foot loops may be used in tandem to climb a rope
UsesClimbing a ropeTaking up tension to free a riding turn on a winch
Step 11 Reef KnotThe reef knot or square knot is used to tie a bundle of material together It must be made around something - it should not be used to tie two free ropes togetherbecause it can easily capsizeIt should not be used to make a loop unless it can be tensioned around a solid object It should not be used around a person - use a bowline instead A capsized reefknot will slip easily and could constrict and cause severe injury
UsesReefing a sail (tying the unused portion around a spar)Securing a furled sail to a spar (sail ties)Wrapping a parcelTying shoelaces
AdvantagesMay be made under moderate load
DisadvantagesCapsizes (works free) if used improperlyCan seize up under load when wet
Tying the knot
Capsizing a reef knot
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 12 CleatsThis is not a knot but is very common on boatsThe first picture shows a rope cleated normally The second shows one with a final locking turn - the last turn is twisted before placing over the cleat so that the tensionon the rope helps secure the free end
When working with ropes under tension take a turn or two around a winch or cleat before trying to secure the end with a knot The load on the free end falls exponentiallywith each turn taken Severe injury can result if a finger or other body part is caught in a loop of rope or between a rope and another object
Step 13 Practice themIt is sometimes useful to be able to tie knots in the dark or as in this video behind your back
Related Instructables
AThird Hand forSailing or OtherThings by WadeTarzia
Paracord KnotDisplay Bord byJamie bagn
Trip LogOutriggerCanoe Sailingthe CaliforniaChannel Islandsby TimAnderson
How to Tie aFigure EightKnot byTactical_Pyro
How to build apirate ship bymdelaney3
Build a ShortDragon (16 foot3-BoardOutriggerSailing Canoe)by Wade Tarzia
repairing aheadsail by josh
How to get arope into a tree(withoutclimbing it) byvitex
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
How to Tie the Lanyard Knotby eddy14777 on January 31 2010
Intro How to Tie the Lanyard KnotMany people including myself have had trouble following the Stormdrane youtube video on tying the lanyard knot so i have done some research and found the solution
Image Notes1 Finished knot
Step 1 MaterialsAll you need is a reasonable length of para cord or whatever you wish to use
Image Notes1 One reasonable amount
Step 2 First StepThe first thing you are going to do is to make a bight that leaves you with to congruent endsThen you are going to put your ring finger through the bight
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Image Notes1 Close enough2 Bight
Step 3 Starting the KnotMake a loop just like the one in the picture and place it over the top strandBring the top strand under the bottom strand
Image Notes1 Notice the way the loop is done2 Top strand
Image Notes1 Bottom strand2 Top strand is under
Step 4 The Most Important PartNow you take the top stand from the previous picture and feed it over the first part of the loop under itself and back over the remainder of the loop
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Image Notes1 Under me2 Top strand3 This should make a diamond type shape
Step 5 DoublingNow take the bottom stand and take it around the part of the top strand nearest to the bight and than come up through the diamond shape in the middleDo the same for the top strand
Image Notes1 Top strand
Image Notes1 Both through the diamond
Step 6 FinishingWhen you take it off your finger it should look like thisWork out the slack by pulling on the bight and the two strands
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Image Notes1 Finished knot
Related Instructables
Cross KnotParacordLanyard byStormdrane
Celtic ButtonKnot (video) byStormdrane
Paracord wristlanyard madewith the snakeknot byStormdrane
Paracord ChainSinnet FastDeploy BoonieHatband (video)by Stormdrane
Zigzag SpoolingParacord (video)by Stormdrane
ParacordBoonie HatWrap (video) byStormdrane
Paracord IDbadge Lanyardby Flahusky
Cobra WeaveKey Fob bytevers94
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Four knots to make paracord into a useful toolby erik_mccray on March 27 2010
Authorerik_mccrayI am an ex-fabricator that is now a stay at home dad I love my new job but I do miss making stuff I love this site amp I am getting involved as a way to keep myskills upOn top of fad work I have also run two small business in the past One was custom sewing amp the other was as a small engine mechanicI have two votec degrees one in metal fabrication amp the other is in engine repairI look forward to getting to know everyone here
Intro Four knots to make paracord into a useful toolParacord is an awesome multitool used everywhere from the wild blue yonder to the deepest caverns But like any good tool it is only as good as the knowledge the userhas about the tool With most people out there using bungee cords amp ratchet straps it seems that paracord is being used for nothing more than friendship bracelets forgrown men This is a shame because for less then the price of a few cheap bungee cords amp some to short to be helpful straps You can get yourself hundreds of feet ofparacord
The key to getting the most out of the paracord is good knot work The first thing you need to know is what makes a good knot One is that the knot is easy amp quick to tieamp more impotant is that the knot is easy amp quick to untie The hitch class of knots is by far the best group of knots that the average person could know The four mostuseful hitch knots are the half hitch a quick simple knot that forms the base for many other knots the inline half hitch allowing you to get the most out of one length ofparacord the slippery hitch that gives you both on the fly control over tension on your paracord but also an adjustable loop that will not change unless you want it amp theinline truckers hitch instantly doubling the your pulling power
Step 1 To get started lets get some terminology that will be used defined
line= the paracord
Main line= the part of the paracord doing the work for example holding down your tarp or the long part of the paracord
Mid line= the middle of the length of the paracord
End line= the unused length of paracord or the short length of paracord
Step 2 The half hitch The half hitch is a simple way to secure a line to an anchor point like the tie down points in most trucks A half hitch is a constrictor knot meaning that the harder you pullon the line the tighter the knots grip gets Another common constrictor knot is the slip knot
Step 1 wrap your line around your anchor point Step 2 wrap the end line around the main line
Step 3 pass the end line threw the end line side of the newly formed loop
step 4 now take the slack out of the knot
step 5 to make sure the knot is secure tie another half hitch to the main line This knot is called adouble half hitch
step 6 another useful thing that can be done with the half hitch is that instead of repeating the wrap on the main line but repeating it on what you are tying to the half hitchcan be used to bind something like a stack of 2x4s
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Image Notes1 End line2 Main line3 step 1
Image Notes1 Step 2
Image Notes1 passing thew the end line side of the loop2 step 3
Image Notes1 step 5
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Image Notes1 step 6
Step 3 The mid line half hitch The mid line half hitch is for when the length of line is to long for the job at hand amp you dont want to have to cut the line to size or you are using multiple anchor pointswith one length of line
Step 1 double up the line at the point in the length you wish to make the knot
Step 2 wrap the doubled up portion of line around your anchor point The doubled up length is now now the end line
Step 3 now tie just as you did for the regular half hitch repeat the knot to make a double half hitch for security
Image Notes1 A mid line double half hitch
Image Notes1 step 1
Image Notes1 The end line2 step 2
Image Notes1 Step 3
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 4 The slippery hitch The slippery hitch is a great knot for adjusting tension on the main line or for having an adjustable fixed loop To adjust the knot simply slide the knot up or down the mainline
Step 1 wrap your line around the anchor point or just double over the line to form a loop
Step 2 wrap the end line around the main line three times Wrapping in the direction of the anchor point or loop
Step 3 put together the two lines making up the loop amp wrap the two lines one time with the end line
Step 4 pass the end line thew the last loop formed covering the two lined of the loop
Step 5 pull the knot tite
step 6 to adjust the size of the loop or main line tension grab the knot amp slide it up or down the main line
Image Notes1 grab just the knot its self to adjust it2 step 5
Image Notes1 step 1
Image Notes1 step 2
Image Notes1 step 3
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Image Notes1 step 4
Image Notes1 grab just the knot its self to adjust it2 step 5
Image Notes1 same knot as in last pic Just slid up2 step 6
Step 5 The mid line truchers hitch The truckers hitch is a great way to double the pulling force on a line There are many ways to tie this knot the problem with most of them is that at some point you aregoing to have to pass the end line through a loop on the main line that is acting like a pulley to double your pulling force this is great if you are making the knot close tothe end of your line but if you are using a 300 length of line amp want to make the knot in the first ten feet having to pass 290 of line thew a loop is a pain But with a fewhalf hitches you will not have to pass the end line threw any loop on the main line
step 1 wrap your line around the anchor point then double over your end line laying the top of the loop over the main line
Step 2 double up your main line amp lay the loop over the loop made by the end line
step 3 in main line above the knot twist in a loop
step 4 put main line loop thew the loop made in step 3 amp pull this loop tight over your main line loop forming a half hitch Repeat step 3 amp 4 to make a doublehalf hitch
step 5 To use the knot just pull down on the end line to put tension on the main line
step 6 after you have the main line snug tie a mid line double half hitch around the two lines forming the loop at the end of the main line with the end line
step 7 Tie a double half hitch with the end line around the end loop of the mid line half hitch of step 6 using the same method as used in steps 3 amp 4
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Image Notes1 the end of step 6
Image Notes1 main line2 end line3 step 1
Image Notes1 main line loop2 end line loop
Image Notes1 step 3
Image Notes1 step 4
Image Notes1 step 4 at the end with a double half hitch on the main loop
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Image Notes1 pull here2 step 5
Image Notes1 the start of step 6
Image Notes1 the end of step 6
Image Notes1 step 72 now the rest of the line is free to do more work
Related Instructables
Paracord KnotDisplay Bord byJamie bagn
ChokelessAdjustableParacord DogLeash byPizzaman101
ParacordLadder wWooden Rungsby josestude
tie a paracordshackle grip byitri45
ParacordPrussik Belt byJavaNut13
TiteTie is theTruckers Knoton Steroids bytitetie
ID Lanyard(Photos) byeschmunk
Dog Toys forHeavy Chewersby J3443RY
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Figure 8 knot and double 8 knotby jonathan111 on November 28 2007
Intro Figure 8 knot and double 8 knotI will show you how to tie a figure 8 knot and a figure 8 follow through
Step 1 Stating the knotThis is a simple knot so just follow the pictures
Step 2 Finishing the knotCross the string under and then push it through the hole Pull tightly unless you are going to do the follow through and leave it somewhat loose
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 3 The follow through knotThe follow through knot should be tied around something brought back and followed through the path of the 8 knot Look at the pictures Basically follow through the 8knot backwards
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Related Instructables
Climb Safe WithA Figure 8Knot by mattste A pocket full of
knots byKiteman
How to Tie aFigure EightKnot byTactical_Pyro
Paracord KnotDisplay Bord byJamie bagn
Cross KnotParacordLanyard byStormdrane
How to Tie aFire-escapeKnot by leonardoismael
Truckers HitchTHE mostawesome knoton the planetby schneidp20
Paracord ZipperPuller byrepeet13
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Truckers Hitch THE most awesome knot on the planetby schneidp20 on October 12 2008
Authorschneidp20I like building stuff Trouble is there just isnt enough time to build everything Sigh
Intro Truckers Hitch THE most awesome knot on the planetYes I know that there are plenty of other cool knots out there many of which I literally couldnt live wo I rock climb However this knot is unlike any other Plus Ineeded a grabber for my Instructable -) (BTW this ISNT a climbing knot) And in truth it isnt a knot by itself but rather a system of common knots
Have you ever tried to tie something down for transporting but just couldnt get the lines tight andor during transport the lines would continually loosen Then this is theknot for you I learned this knot back in the 70s when specialty car racks and ratchet straps were rare or unheard of I initially used it to tie a canoe on a car rack bothattaching to the rack as well as the lines to the bow and stern of the canoe Even with all the new gizmos available today this knot still shines because all you need is arope and ropes dont hum in the wind like straps
The unique aspect of this knot is that it gives you a 2-1 mechanical advantage when tightening the rope Be careful though You can actually damage some thingsbecause of the mechanical advantage This knot holds fast and is easy to untie hallmark traits of any good knot
Below you see the finished knot system well break it apart in the steps that follow
Image Notes1 1st anchor point a bowline2 loop3 securing knots 2 half hitches4 securing loose end with a fishermans knot5 2nd anchor point (should be round)
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Image Notes1 X marks the spot
Step 1 Initial setupThe first step is to anchor one end of the rope and then loop the rope around a 2nd anchor point
For attaching to the 1st anchor point I chose bowline a close 2 on my list -) There are other instructables on that one so I wont bore you here
The 2nd anchor really should be round because it serves as a pulley in this block and tackle type knot Ive used it on sharp anchor points and it doesnt work as well
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 2 Creating a slip knotTie a slip knot somewhere between the two anchor points Correct placement of the slip knot takes some experience to judge it correctly Typically I place it too close tothe 2nd anchor point and end up with not enough room to work with If the knot ends up too far from 2nd anchor point you can extend the knot by enlarging the loop
Be sure you tie the slip knot as shown You may not be able to untie other knots
In this small example the slip knot is uncharacteristically close to the 1st anchor point
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 3 Tightening and securingThe loose end of the rope that went around the 2nd anchor point goes through the slip knot loop Pull the loose end to the desired tension and secure with two halfhitches
Note To allow better view of the knots the rope isnt really tightened in this example
Step 4 Securing loose endThe final knot is just to secure the loose end somehow I chose a fishermans knot to do this
To tie a fishermans knot the rope goes around twice and goes under the X created by the loops Pull the loose end to tighten Finally slide the knot to put tension onthe half hitches
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Image Notes1 X marks the spot
Step 5 FinishedThere you have it I guarantee that the first time you really use this knot (not just practice) you will be amazed at how well it works and youll wish you knew this knot along time ago You may even come over to my side and declare that is is THE most awesome knot on the planet -)
Enjoy and happy haulingDave
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Related Instructables
TiteTie is theTruckers Knoton Steroids bytitetie
Four knots tomake paracordinto a usefultool byerik_mccray
Modify yourbike rack tocarry a sunfishor other boat byewilhelm
SurfboardHammock byGermy
GiganticHalloweenSpider Web bynolte919
How To Tie ASpiders Hitch(video) by back-cast
Three-hitch mathair ornamentby michiexile TRX from
ParacordChallengeAccepted bythrake
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Carry any Bottle with a JUG KNOT Handleby hpstoutharrow on September 17 2009
Intro Carry any Bottle with a JUG KNOT HandleTie a JUG KNOT around a water bottle soda bottle or aluminum bottle to make a secure carrying strap
Re-purpose any container into a reusable water bottle by adding a convenient carrying strap This Instructable will demonstrate how to tie a JUG knot which like its namesuggests is meant to properly secure around the neck of a container
With some cord and the knowledge of this knot you will be able add a handle lanyard or carabiner loop to any of your favorite beverages to carry them on the go
It works perfectly for those disposable water bottles and who knows once you add some colorful cord to the plain old clear water bottle you just might beinclined to refill it and use it again(Check out pictures 4amp5 below)
In addition to plastic beverage bottles like pop water and sports drinks you can turn those rugged aluminum beer bottles into a backpacking canteen
Those of you familiar with my previous aluminum bottle InstructablesROLLED RIM METAL TUMBLERhttpwwwinstructablescomidAluminum-Bottle-Tumbler-Cup-Cook-PotALUMINUM BOTTLE LIGHTWEIGHT ALCOHOL STOVEhttpwwwinstructablescomidAluminum-Bottle-Alcohol-Stovewill recognize the water canteen shown below as a re-purposed aluminum beer bottle Here I have added a painted surface treatment to turn it into a proper lookingwater bottle More on that in steps 13 14 15
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 1 Getting StartedCord size is important Select a small medium weight cord like the one shown here It is a general purpose camp cord sold at most sporting goods stores (shoelacesmight also work)
Do not use a heavy cord or rope because the larger diameter will not tuck under the relatively small lip at the top of the bottleneck and the bottle will fall out
Also the smaller cord cinches tight on itself and will not loosen accidentally
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 2 Form a BightThe next steps show how to tie a JUG KNOT It is the basic step for adding a carrying strap It is also the anchor point for any additional fancy bottle trussing you maywant to add
JUG KNOT Step 1
Form a Bight in the center of a length of cord Bight is a knot term for a loop or bend in the rope In this case the main Bight in this knot is highlighted with a white mark Imakes it easier to follow its path in these steps
The running ends of the cord should be equal length
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 3 Pull the Bight downPULL the Bight DOWN forming two Loops
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 4 Cross the LoopsCROSS the right Loop OVER the left Loop
Step 5 Pass the Bight under the 1st loopTake the main Bight and pass it UNDER the left Loop
Step 6 Weave the BightWEAVE the Bight OVER the portion of the right Loop and UNDER the portion of the left Loop
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 7 Extend the BightExtend the Bight OVER the outer portion of the right Loop
Step 8 Flip the Right Loop behindAdditional colored identification points have been added to the loops to follow their travel in these next two steps
The right Loop Yellow marker is FLIPPED BEHIND the knot and ends up on the far left side of the knot
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 9 Flip the 2nd loop in frontRaise the green marker (located on what was formerly the left loop) and pull it down and to the right FLIPPING IT IN FRONT of the knot
Note the blue portion of the this loop will pass around the outside of the yellow portion of the first loop
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Image Notes1 Center of knot that will tighten around the bottles neck
Step 10 Remove SlackNote where the blue green amp yellow markers end up
Start to remove the slack in the loops by pulling the original main Bight (white marker top right) and the two free standing ends at the bottom
the bottle neck will pass through the very center of the knot
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Image Notes1 Center of knot that will tighten around the bottles neck
Step 11 Tighten the KnotAfter removing the slack insert the bottle neck and finish tightening
The knot should look like this before slipping it over the bottle
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 12 Secure on bottle neckThis is the finished knot shown on the neck of various containers
The loop end and the two free standing ends can be tied together to create a carrying handle (last picture below)
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 13 Aluminum Bottle Water Bottle
The next few steps show the features of an aluminum beer bottle re-purposed as a water bottle canteen It is one of many containers that can be reused as a camp waterbottle
The bottle was lightly sanded masked and then pained with a hammered finished paint to create an interesting surface texture
Image Notes1 Textured finish paint makes an interesting grip-able surface2 Masked with tape for painting3 Masked with tape for painting
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Image Notes1 Dowel used for holding the bottle during painting
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 14 Tethered Cork StopperUse a wine bottle man made Cork as a stopper for your aluminum water bottleNote Use a cork that was removed from the wine bottle without the corkscrew penetrating through the bottom end of the cork (A hole all the way through the cork willcause it to leak) Use the unpierced end of the cork inside the water bottle
Drill a hole through the sides of the Cork Thread the cord through the hole to the center of the cord Use the cork as the main Bight and tie the Jug knot as shown inthe beginning steps
Now the cork is tethered to the bottle and will not get lost or fall on the ground
A Carabiner clip passes through the other cord end to attache the water bottle to you belt or pack
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 15 Trussed for TransportThis is another hanging method for carrying your aluminum bottle water canteen A Jug knot is tied conventionally around the neck
The running ends of the knot however are pulled down towards the bottom of the bottle A Barrel Knot is tied about 34 the way down the side of the bottle A squareknot is tied on the bottom of the knot to keep the two running ends tight against the sides of the bottle
I like the look of the accent colored cord running down the sides of the bottle and the fact that the bottle hangs from the belt upside down It adds to its uniqueness
The last picture shows another truss variation
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 16 AdvancedBelow is a bottle with some additional trussing You can be creative as you want It all starts with a re-purposed container and the Jug Knot (and enough cord)
Related Instructables
AluminumBottle TumblerCup amp Cook Potfor an AlcoholStove byhpstoutharrow
Water BottleBelt Clip byuglymike Duct Tape
Water Bottle byrabidsquire2
AluminumBottle AlcoholStove byhpstoutharrow
DIYGlass WaterBottle byCulturespy
Solar WaterHeater forBackpackingUsing WaterBottles and aCar Shade bykopomeroy
Duct tape waterbottle holder(Photos) by pinkmarshmallow
How to make aCamelPack withan old plasticbottle bywillrandship
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Basic Knots Guideby zorro3355 on April 29 2008
Intro Basic Knots Guidehi
Step 1 Thumb knotThe most simple knotUsed as a stopper and prevent ropes from fraying
Step 2 Reef KnotUsed to tie two ropes of equal thickness togetherIt is pretty easy to tie and untie but under tentionit may be diffcult to untieIt is also not sutible for smoothropes(egnylon ropes)
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 3 Figure of eightused as a stopperprevent ropes from fraying and its more secure than tumb knot its is also used to tie Caribinas to ropes and is often used in rock climbing
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 4 Timber hitchused for pulling logs
Step 5 Clove hitchUsed to tie a rope onto a pole or logThe pole must be roundThe pole lust be thicker then the rope itself
(greatly used during pioneering)
Step 6 Sheet bandused to tie ropes of different thickness together(works on same thickness of ropes too)
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 7 Sheep shankTo shorten RopesTo prevent middle fraying
Step 8 Slip knotWhippingUsed as a grip for pulling things(when tied on a stick or small pole)(marlin spike hitch)
Related Instructables
Rope Rings byhpstoutharrow
How to Tie aFigure EightKnot byTactical_Pyro
Whippin (WestCountry Style)by tim_n
SurvivalBracelet(Updated) bytevers94
HangmansNoose PackClosure byPopEye42
Turkey on aTripod byhpstoutharrow
SurvivalBracelet II bytevers94 Zigzag Spooling
Paracord (video)by Stormdrane
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
How to Tie a Fire-escape Knotby leonardo ismael on October 16 2007
Intro How to Tie a Fire-escape KnotThis knot is used by firemen in case of fires for example imagine a scene where the ladder on the firetruck messes up but people need to get down a five story buildingor more All they have is a long piece of rope they can safely get down with a secure knot like the fire-escape knot So why not learn it its easy to do and hard to untieif you tie it tightly
This is from the American Boys Handbook
Step 1 Get Your RopeFirst grab a piece of rope and bend it like this to make a loop in it Follow every step to the smallest detail
Step 2 Twist the RopeNow make a twist like this and hold it together
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 3 Pull Through the TwistPull the loop through the twist you just made from underneath
Step 4 Go Over the Split EndNow pull the tail through the loop
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 5 FinallyAnd finally just pull it through as pictured below
Congratulations you just learned the fire-escape knot
Step 6 Same Name Not KnotThis is another knot called the fire-escape knot this shouldnt be your result
Related Instructables
House FireEscape Plan(video) byWhatHappensNowAdvice
ParacordLadder wWooden Rungsby josestude
Bed SheetEscape Rope byjessehensel
rope ladder(glow-in-the-dark version) bymikeasaurus
HeadlockEscape 2(video) byjohnnyrockstah
QuickFirestarter byMattandJora
Trail sauna byjakee117
How to Kill FireAnts andCommitGenocide byKentsOkay
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Climb Safe With A Figure 8 Knotby mattste on February 23 2010
Intro Climb Safe With A Figure 8 Knot There are many things that a beginning climber needs to know including several important knots Perhaps the most essential knot is the Figure 8 Follow Through Thistutorial will demonstrate how to correctly harness yourself to a rope using a Figure 8 Follow Through knot This knot is used primarily by rock climbers to provide a life-line Since this knot is used as a life-line it is very important to be able to tie it correctly (Your life could depend upon it)
Dont worry with this tutorial and about 5 minutes of practice you can have this knot mastered
Things you will need
- Climbing Harness- Climbing Rope
If you are wanting to go climbing and dont already have these items they can be purchased for about $25 each at most outdoor sporting goods stores If you are merelylooking to learn the knot a belt loop and a rope (about five feet long) will do
Image Notes1 Climbing Harness2 Climbing Rope
Step 1 Dealing With The RopeThroughout this tutorial I will be discussing different parts of the rope To make these instructions as clear as possible I will define a few terms that I will use throughoutthe tutorial The Anchor End of the rope will generally be at the top of the images This is the end that would be anchored to the wall or rock and does not move Wewill not be doing much with the anchored end The Tail End of the rope is the opposite end that we will be dealing with I will call this the tail for short
Now that we have some terms to work with lets get started
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 2 Tying The First Figure 8This knot has several parts to it The first part of the knot is just tying a basic figure 8 To tie the first figure 8 there are four simple steps
1 - Using the tail make a loop over the rope (as shown in the first picture) keeping in mind that there should be about 3 ft of slack on the tail end
2 - Wrap the tail back this time go under the anchored end (As shown in the second picture)
3 - Bring the tail down through the first loop (As shown in the third picture)
4 - Finally pull the two ends to make the knot a little bit tighter and easier to deal with (Shown in the fourth picture)
After these four steps you should end up with a knot that resembles a figure 8
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 3 Looping Into The Harness In order to secure the rope to the harness simply thread the tail end of the rope through the front loop in the harness as shown in the picture below This step isobviously very important
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 4 Following Back Through The Figure 8After looping the rope through the harness you have to thread the tail end of the rope back through the knot following the first figure 8 I have divided this process intofive smaller steps in order to make it more clear
1 - Coming form underneath the knot bring the tail up through the near loop and to the left behind the anchored end of the rope (Shown in the first picture)
2 - Wrap the tail around the anchored end back to the right and down through the adjacent loop (Shown in the second picture)
3 - You simply need to bring the tail back over the top of the knot to the left (Shown in the third picture)
4 - Bring the tail end up through the far loop following the anchored end (Shown in the fourth picture)
5 - Finally pull the knot tight (Shown in the fifth picture)
As you can see the first four pictures are simply tracing the knot back through with the tail end
For the last part while you pull the knot tight you may want to make small adjustments and rearrange how it all fits together If the knot does not lay perfectly smoothand tight its NOT a big deal
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 5 Finishing The Knot After completing the Figure 8 knot you will want to somehow secure the tail end of the rope out of the way There are a couple different ways to do this the way that Iwill demonstrate is using whats called a Stopper Knot This secondary knot is similar to a Fishermans knot and is pretty simple I have once again divided thisprocess into several smaller steps
1 - Start by wrapping the tail end around the anchored end (As shown in the first picture)
2 - Wrap the tail back underneath the two vertical segments (As shown in the second picture)
3 - Simply repeat the first two steps wrapping the tail around again (As shown in the third picture)
4 - This step in the fourth picture may look complicated but all you need to do is insert the tail up through the two loops that you have just made
5 - To finish off the knot you will want to slowly pull the tail end while gently pushing the bottom of the stopper knot upwards If you have successfully completed this knotit should look something like the fifth picture
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 6 Ready To Climb Now that you have mastered the Figure 8 knot you can securely harness yourself into a climbing rope Remember there are many other skills that go into setting up ananchor and belaying a climber This tutorial only covers the figure 8 knot For more information there are many great websites that demonstrate how to correctly set up asafe climbing system (Ive posted a few below) If you are a beginning climber I recommend that you read up on a few other climbing techniques Also you shouldprobably go to a climbing wall or gym where there are experienced climbers that can show you the ropes Hopefully this tutorial has been helpful Have fun and be safe
Some useful linkshttpwwwstephenprattnetAnchorsanchorshtmhttpwwwuoregonedu~oppclimbingtopicsanchorshtmlhttpwwwabc-of-rockclimbingcomhowtoclimbingtechniquesasp
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Related Instructables
How to Tie aFigure EightKnot byTactical_Pyro
Paracord KnotDisplay Bord byJamie bagn
Basic KnotsGuide byzorro3355
How to Climb aTree (withprussiks) bystasterisk
How to climb atree (using onlyrope) thefunsimple wayby louieaw
How to get arope into a tree(withoutclimbing it) byvitex
How to tievarious knots byadaviel
How to make arope swing byjdub0928
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Turks Head Knots on a Bottleby sklnxbones on July 6 2010
Intro Turks Head Knots on a BottleThis is the finished project A bottle decorated with three Turks Head Knots There are only three knots on this bottle The RED and the BLUE knots are each a 20 Bightby 3 Lead Turks Head Knots The WHITE knot is a 20 Bight by 19 Lead Turks Head Knot
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 1 Supplies
Cord Lots and Lots of cord I cant tell you how much each bottle is differentBottle Washed and Dried inside and out Make sure to remove all water spotsThreaded Needle Cord screws into the threads at the base of the needlePegs I use brass rivets used as a map to tie the Turks Head KnotsHole Punch Used to punch holes in the painters tape to hold the pegsPainters Tape To hold the pegs in place and to make your map for the Turks Head KnotsMarker To write on the painters tapeCloth Towel To remove finger prints and dirt from your bottleKrazy Glue or Super Glue This is used to secure the knots in place to the bottle
OPTIONAL BUT HIGHLY RECOMMENDEDI use the Turks Head Cookbook from KnotToolcom
Step 2 PreparationYou will need to find a bottle you like I used an empty instant tea bottle of course washed and dried (I like to put the bottle in the oven for a few minutes to dry the insidewithout water spots Take off the lid and do not put lid in the oven) Now measure the circumference of the bottle Take a cord and tightly wrap the cord around the bottleMark where the ends meet and use a ruler to measure the length of the cord For my instant tea bottle the circumference is 27cm I know from past knots that I have tiedthat I want my knot to have 20 Bights in the top and bottom (bands) knots I am going to use the Bights in the (bands) knots to tie the middle knot Now divide the numberof Bights (20) into the size of the circumference (27) to get the space between each Bight (135) With me so far
Now take two pieces of painters tape using a ruler measure out the length of the circumference and mark the length on the both pieces of tape Next you will mark thespace between each Bight on the tape
Step 3 Adding the PegsI like to use pegs when tying Turks Head Knots it just makes tying the knot easier
These are what I use for pegs
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 4 Adding Pegs to the TapeNow take a hole punch to cut holes in the tape where the lines meet You will place the pegs in the holes
Insert a peg in each hole and carefully stick the first piece of tape to the bottle
Step 5 Adding the 2nd row of pegsNow do the same thing with the second piece of tape The numbers on each piece of tape must line up
This picture shows you what you should have now This odd looking thing will be your map to tie the Turks Head Knot And this is the end of Step 1
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 6 Tying the first Turks Head KnotUsing the Turks Head Cookbook follow the numbers going over and under as indicated in the book I chose a 20 Bight by 3 Lead knot which will give me a nice bandaround the bottle Once the ends meet you have made one complete knot Tape the running end of your cord and start removing the pegs and the tape
Step 7 Remove the pegs and the tapeBe careful not to untie the knot as you remove the pegs and tape from the bottle Continue to remove all the pegs and remove the tape from the bottle At this point theknot will be very loose and will need to be tightened up
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 8 Remove the slack from the knotHere you can see just how much the knot expanded Starting with the standing end begin to pull the slack out of the knot going towards the running end of the cordDo not expect to pull all the slack out at once You may have to make 3 - 5 attempts at removing the slack out of the knot DO NOT remove all of the slack out of the knotIn order to make the bands we will have to triple the Turks Head Knot We will do this by following the knot three times The threaded needle will really come in handyhere
Step 9 Triple the KnotOnce you have made three passes of the Turks Head Knot use your needle to go under your knot about half the circumference and cut the cord The knot will be tightenough to hide the tail in placeTIP I carefully add a couple of drops of super glue UNDER the band to hold them in place and keep them from sliding around in the nextsteps A drop or two in 3 or 4 places around the band should be enough
Step 10 Add the second knotNow repeat this whole step for the second bandWhen tying the second band you must make sure the Bights line up to the first band This is crucial for the next stepWipe down the bottle to make sure all your finger prints and adhesive from the tape are all removed You want to make sure your bottle is clean at this point Any dirt orfinger prints left on the bottle will be almost impossible to remove From this point on we will use gloves when tying our last knot
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 11 Maping the Top KnotStick a piece of painters tape on top of your first band leaving the bottom of the knot exposedUse a marker to count the number of Bights in your knot Instead of using the pegs we are going to use the Bights to tie our next Turks Head Knot
Step 12 Mapping the Bottom KnotDo the same thing for the bottom band but you must make sure your numbers on top and bottom line up So 1 on top should be the same position as 1 on the bottom
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 13 Adding the last knotAgain using the Turks Head Cookbook and the threaded needle you are going to follow the instructions going over and under as indicated in the book Be sure to usegloves when ever you handle the bottle
Step 14 Thats ItFor this Turks Head Knot I am using a 20 Bight by 19 Lead knot
Because of the amount of cord you are working with your cord will get twisted and knotted You will have to un-twist the cord often Its a pain in the rear but it has to bedone And it has to be done alot
Continue to tie the knot until you finish the knot If you have the cord and the patience you can double or triple the knot When you are done use your needle to hide theends under your bands Cut the ends and your DONE
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Related Instructables
Monkeys FistFloatingKeychain byjokerlz
How To Make ATurks headKnot WithParacord byDoggie Stylish
Tying Trivetsout of Rope forHoliday Gifts bykylemarsh
Paracord KnotDisplay Bord byJamie bagn
How to Make ATurks Head(Photos) bymchs60chip
A pocket full ofknots byKiteman
Monkeys fistknot AND themonkey byjonathan111
TiteTie is theTruckers Knoton Steroids bytitetie
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Larks head noose -- an easy useful knot that tightens and loosensby Larry Breed on February 19 2009
Intro Larks head noose -- an easy useful knot that tightens and loosensI thought I knew all the basic knots but then I was taught this incredibly useful simple knot Its good for tying up the neck of a bag that you want to repeatedly open andsecurely close Its good for tying around a springy bundle that will need tightening and retightening And its easy to undo
Ive looked at knot literature but havent found a name for this so I named it The basic knot is well known its called a larks head Since all Ive done is to slip the twoends through the larks head to make a noose I call it that
WARNING Dont use this knot when human safety would depend on it Climbers and mountaineers have well-tested reliable knots for such situations
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Image Notes1 To tighten further step on this side of the larks head and pull the free ends
Step 1 Double the cord overThe larks head noose requires enough cord to go twice around your bundle plus a foot or two Find the center and double it over Sailors call this a bight
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 2 Form the larks headComing from below the bight hook your thumb and forefinger over the two sides Reach outward and downward and pinch your fingertips together underneath thedoubled cord
Youve made a larks head Move the crossing cord a little farther from your hand so theres a clear opening through the two half-loops
Step 3 Form the nooseSlip the two ends of the cord through the opening we were just talking about Pull the larks head tight so it grips the two cords Find something that needs constrictingand put the noose around it
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 4 Tightening retightening and lockingSlide the knot against the bundle If its not tight enough to keep from slipping tighten it by holding it in one hand and tugging on the cords one at a time with the otherhand Notice that you can slide the knot out again for instance to re-open the bag you just tied shut For some applications this may be as tight as you need it
A springy bundle probably still feels loose If so compress the bundle and get a new grip on the cords Rest your foot on the bundle on the cords nearest the larks headand pull to slide the larks head tighter
To make the knot more permanent you can lock it Make an overhand in the cord ends (Exactly like the first step in tying shoelaces) With your foot still on the bundlepull on the cords and move your hands apart until youre pulling in opposite directions You have just locked the larks head and you can trust it to stay that way()
But lets say that later on you want to loosen the locked knot Again put your foot on the bundle and cords nearest the larks head hold the two cord ends together andpull This makes a little slack between the overhand and the larks head so you can untie the overhand
In twine or small string the locking overhand knot may be difficult to undo Use a shoelace knot instead of an overhand and itll unlock easily
() If youre using slippery cord like polypropylene an overhand may not lock securely You may want to tie another overhand knot For added security wrap a shortlength of duct tape around the two cords close to the knot
Image Notes1 To tighten further step on this side of the larks head and pull the free ends
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Related Instructables
TRX fromParacordChallengeAccepted bythrake
A pocket full ofknots byKiteman
Lens CapLanyard by~teknoarsonist~ how to tie a
noose byawesume
AdjustableParacordGlassesLanyard byjdtwelve12
HangmansNoose PackClosure byPopEye42
Paraleash - ADog LeashFrom Paracordby The Ideanator
How to make arugged andhandy ParacordBelt by Jake22
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 5 Count your knotsOnce you have 10 snake knots youre almost done Youll notice from the photos of both sides of the lanyard that one side has the snake knots alternating all the waydown and the other has a set of parallel knots at the top and botton of the sequence of knots Youll always have those at the start and finish of the snake knots I preferto have them end up on the same side of the lanyard so one side appears to have a more uniform look but its not required
Step 6 Trim and melt the excess paracordUse the scissors to trim off the excess cord and quickly melt the ends with a lighter so they dont fray
Step 7 Youre doneYou can make a range of variations using less or more cordknots Shorten the loop for a double ended key chain or make the loop longer for use as a neck lanyard aLanyard Break-Away Connector could be added for the safety conscious You can also add a wooden bead skull cord lock etc Visit my blog page for more knot relatedprojects links and resources Stormdranes Blog You can find ideas for other geargadgets to attach to your lanyard on EDC Forums
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Related Instructables
Paracord ChainSinnet FastDeploy BoonieHatband (video)by Stormdrane
Cross KnotParacordLanyard byStormdrane
Zigzag SpoolingParacord (video)by Stormdrane
SurvivalBracelet II bytevers94
SurvivalBracelet(Updated) bytevers94
Cobra WeaveKey Fob bytevers94
ParacordBoonie HatWrap (video) byStormdrane
Paracord KnotDisplay Bord byJamie bagn
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
How to tie various knotsby adaviel on September 7 2009
Intro How to tie various knotsKnots as a way of joining rope without special equipment are useful in many situations On a sailboat knots are essential both for daily use and for emergency repairsThis instructable describes several different common knots eg
Sheet Bend - to tie two lines togetherBowline - to make a loopReef Knot - to fasten a bundle of materialFishermans Bend - to secure a line to a post or ring
These knots are good for regular rope - braided or 3-strand polyester or natural fibre (hemp sisal) Monofilament (fishing line) or steel cable performs better with differentknots
Knots are typically quite a lot weaker than straight rope - when rope goes around a tight radius such as in a knot the outside is under more tension than the insideSplices (which require special tools and are time-consuming to make) are stronger so permanent fittings usually have eye-splices
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 1 Sheet BendThe sheet bend is used to tie two lines together It is perhaps the most generally useful knot of all When used to tie a line to itself making a loop it is called a bowlineThe strain is taken on the ropes in the middle - not the one coming out the side
How the knot is made is not critical - it is the final shape that is important One can make the flat loop first and work the other rope around it Or one can make thecrossed loop first - required when tying a bowline
The two images show front and back views of the same knot
AdvantagesEasy to makeEasy to undo when tension is removedDoes not easily capsize
DisadvantagesHard to make under loadDangerous to make under heavy load
UsesJoining two equally-sized ropesExtending a towline or stern line
Method 1 the same as a bowline
Method 2 starting with the flat loop
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 2 Double Sheet BendThe double sheet bend is used to tie two lines of different thickness - but not too different It is the same as a normal sheet bend but with an extra turn of the thinner ropearound the flat loop in the thickerThe load goes on the line through the flat loop not the one that comes out the side of the knot
UsesSecuring a heaving line to a tow lineExtending a stern line if you dont have enough line of one thickness
Step 3 BowlineThe bowline is really a special case of the sheet bend but it it tied at the end of a rope to make a loop
The photos show the completed loop and closeups of the front and back of the actual knot Note that it is the same as the sheet bend - but it must be made the right wayround This loop does not tighten in use The knot is quite easy to untie once the load is removed With practice it is very quick to tie
Some usesSecuring a dinghy line to a railing or stanchionSecuring an anchor line to an anchorTie a jib sheet to the sailTie a mooring line around a rock or treeTie a float to an anchor triplineUse one in each line to tie two ropes of very different sizes - eg a throwing line to a large tow ropeDisadvantages the knot must be completely made before it will take any strain - it is hard to tie if there is already a load on the rope
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Linked bowlines
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 4 Bowline on the BightA bowline on the bight is a bowline tied in a loop of rope (neither end is needed) The shape is the same as a bowline made with a double line but the middle of thebight forms the loop around the standing part
UsesAn impromptu bosuns chair - to sit in while being transferred between two boats at sea
Step 5 Clove HitchThe clove hitch can be made when you only have the bight (the middle) of a rope not the ends
UsesSecuring a burgee pole to a burgee halyard (a continuous loop of thin line)Securing a tiller from swinging
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 6 Round Turn and Two Half-HitchesThis is a knot used to secure a line to a ring or bar Wind a couple of turns around the bar then secure the end with two hitches around the standing part (this looks like aclove hitch when done)
AdvantagesCan be made under load - it is easy to take turns around the bar while maintaining tension on the ropeStrong - provided the bar is thicker than the rope the rope is not weakened by sharp bendsDisadvantagesThe end tends to work loose
UsesSecuring a line to a mooring ring or samson post
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 7 Fishermans BendThe fishermans bend is the same as the round turn and two half hitches except that the first hitch is looped under the round turn This uses the tension on the rope tosecure the end from working loose
AdvantagesSecure against working loose
DisadvantagesHard to make under tensionHard to undo under tensionMay seize up under load when wet making it hard to undo
UsesSecuring mooring line to ringSecuring fender lines to rail
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 8 Studsail BendThe studsail bend is like the fishermans bend but the second hitch is also secured under the round turn making it even more secure against working loose when undertension
AdvantagesVery secure against working looseDisadvantagesHard to make under tensionHard to undo under tension
Step 9 Figure-8 KnotThe figure-eight knot is used to prevent an end of rope from passing through a block (pulley) Sometimes called a stopper knot
The double figure-8 knot is used in rock climbing as an alternative to a bowline to secure a climbing harness to the end of a safety rope The double knot is made bymaking a single knot then tracing back around the knot with the free end after passing it around the harness loop
AdvantagesEasy to verify by inspectionNot prone to work loose
DisadvantagesSlow to make and undoCannot be made under load
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 10 Prussic KnotThe prussic knot may be used as a climbing ascender - when made around a vertical rope as shown downwards tension on the ends locks the knot while release oftension allows it to be slid up the rope A pair of prussic knots on foot loops may be used in tandem to climb a rope
UsesClimbing a ropeTaking up tension to free a riding turn on a winch
Step 11 Reef KnotThe reef knot or square knot is used to tie a bundle of material together It must be made around something - it should not be used to tie two free ropes togetherbecause it can easily capsizeIt should not be used to make a loop unless it can be tensioned around a solid object It should not be used around a person - use a bowline instead A capsized reefknot will slip easily and could constrict and cause severe injury
UsesReefing a sail (tying the unused portion around a spar)Securing a furled sail to a spar (sail ties)Wrapping a parcelTying shoelaces
AdvantagesMay be made under moderate load
DisadvantagesCapsizes (works free) if used improperlyCan seize up under load when wet
Tying the knot
Capsizing a reef knot
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 12 CleatsThis is not a knot but is very common on boatsThe first picture shows a rope cleated normally The second shows one with a final locking turn - the last turn is twisted before placing over the cleat so that the tensionon the rope helps secure the free end
When working with ropes under tension take a turn or two around a winch or cleat before trying to secure the end with a knot The load on the free end falls exponentiallywith each turn taken Severe injury can result if a finger or other body part is caught in a loop of rope or between a rope and another object
Step 13 Practice themIt is sometimes useful to be able to tie knots in the dark or as in this video behind your back
Related Instructables
AThird Hand forSailing or OtherThings by WadeTarzia
Paracord KnotDisplay Bord byJamie bagn
Trip LogOutriggerCanoe Sailingthe CaliforniaChannel Islandsby TimAnderson
How to Tie aFigure EightKnot byTactical_Pyro
How to build apirate ship bymdelaney3
Build a ShortDragon (16 foot3-BoardOutriggerSailing Canoe)by Wade Tarzia
repairing aheadsail by josh
How to get arope into a tree(withoutclimbing it) byvitex
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
How to Tie the Lanyard Knotby eddy14777 on January 31 2010
Intro How to Tie the Lanyard KnotMany people including myself have had trouble following the Stormdrane youtube video on tying the lanyard knot so i have done some research and found the solution
Image Notes1 Finished knot
Step 1 MaterialsAll you need is a reasonable length of para cord or whatever you wish to use
Image Notes1 One reasonable amount
Step 2 First StepThe first thing you are going to do is to make a bight that leaves you with to congruent endsThen you are going to put your ring finger through the bight
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Image Notes1 Close enough2 Bight
Step 3 Starting the KnotMake a loop just like the one in the picture and place it over the top strandBring the top strand under the bottom strand
Image Notes1 Notice the way the loop is done2 Top strand
Image Notes1 Bottom strand2 Top strand is under
Step 4 The Most Important PartNow you take the top stand from the previous picture and feed it over the first part of the loop under itself and back over the remainder of the loop
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Image Notes1 Under me2 Top strand3 This should make a diamond type shape
Step 5 DoublingNow take the bottom stand and take it around the part of the top strand nearest to the bight and than come up through the diamond shape in the middleDo the same for the top strand
Image Notes1 Top strand
Image Notes1 Both through the diamond
Step 6 FinishingWhen you take it off your finger it should look like thisWork out the slack by pulling on the bight and the two strands
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Image Notes1 Finished knot
Related Instructables
Cross KnotParacordLanyard byStormdrane
Celtic ButtonKnot (video) byStormdrane
Paracord wristlanyard madewith the snakeknot byStormdrane
Paracord ChainSinnet FastDeploy BoonieHatband (video)by Stormdrane
Zigzag SpoolingParacord (video)by Stormdrane
ParacordBoonie HatWrap (video) byStormdrane
Paracord IDbadge Lanyardby Flahusky
Cobra WeaveKey Fob bytevers94
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Four knots to make paracord into a useful toolby erik_mccray on March 27 2010
Authorerik_mccrayI am an ex-fabricator that is now a stay at home dad I love my new job but I do miss making stuff I love this site amp I am getting involved as a way to keep myskills upOn top of fad work I have also run two small business in the past One was custom sewing amp the other was as a small engine mechanicI have two votec degrees one in metal fabrication amp the other is in engine repairI look forward to getting to know everyone here
Intro Four knots to make paracord into a useful toolParacord is an awesome multitool used everywhere from the wild blue yonder to the deepest caverns But like any good tool it is only as good as the knowledge the userhas about the tool With most people out there using bungee cords amp ratchet straps it seems that paracord is being used for nothing more than friendship bracelets forgrown men This is a shame because for less then the price of a few cheap bungee cords amp some to short to be helpful straps You can get yourself hundreds of feet ofparacord
The key to getting the most out of the paracord is good knot work The first thing you need to know is what makes a good knot One is that the knot is easy amp quick to tieamp more impotant is that the knot is easy amp quick to untie The hitch class of knots is by far the best group of knots that the average person could know The four mostuseful hitch knots are the half hitch a quick simple knot that forms the base for many other knots the inline half hitch allowing you to get the most out of one length ofparacord the slippery hitch that gives you both on the fly control over tension on your paracord but also an adjustable loop that will not change unless you want it amp theinline truckers hitch instantly doubling the your pulling power
Step 1 To get started lets get some terminology that will be used defined
line= the paracord
Main line= the part of the paracord doing the work for example holding down your tarp or the long part of the paracord
Mid line= the middle of the length of the paracord
End line= the unused length of paracord or the short length of paracord
Step 2 The half hitch The half hitch is a simple way to secure a line to an anchor point like the tie down points in most trucks A half hitch is a constrictor knot meaning that the harder you pullon the line the tighter the knots grip gets Another common constrictor knot is the slip knot
Step 1 wrap your line around your anchor point Step 2 wrap the end line around the main line
Step 3 pass the end line threw the end line side of the newly formed loop
step 4 now take the slack out of the knot
step 5 to make sure the knot is secure tie another half hitch to the main line This knot is called adouble half hitch
step 6 another useful thing that can be done with the half hitch is that instead of repeating the wrap on the main line but repeating it on what you are tying to the half hitchcan be used to bind something like a stack of 2x4s
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Image Notes1 End line2 Main line3 step 1
Image Notes1 Step 2
Image Notes1 passing thew the end line side of the loop2 step 3
Image Notes1 step 5
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Image Notes1 step 6
Step 3 The mid line half hitch The mid line half hitch is for when the length of line is to long for the job at hand amp you dont want to have to cut the line to size or you are using multiple anchor pointswith one length of line
Step 1 double up the line at the point in the length you wish to make the knot
Step 2 wrap the doubled up portion of line around your anchor point The doubled up length is now now the end line
Step 3 now tie just as you did for the regular half hitch repeat the knot to make a double half hitch for security
Image Notes1 A mid line double half hitch
Image Notes1 step 1
Image Notes1 The end line2 step 2
Image Notes1 Step 3
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 4 The slippery hitch The slippery hitch is a great knot for adjusting tension on the main line or for having an adjustable fixed loop To adjust the knot simply slide the knot up or down the mainline
Step 1 wrap your line around the anchor point or just double over the line to form a loop
Step 2 wrap the end line around the main line three times Wrapping in the direction of the anchor point or loop
Step 3 put together the two lines making up the loop amp wrap the two lines one time with the end line
Step 4 pass the end line thew the last loop formed covering the two lined of the loop
Step 5 pull the knot tite
step 6 to adjust the size of the loop or main line tension grab the knot amp slide it up or down the main line
Image Notes1 grab just the knot its self to adjust it2 step 5
Image Notes1 step 1
Image Notes1 step 2
Image Notes1 step 3
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Image Notes1 step 4
Image Notes1 grab just the knot its self to adjust it2 step 5
Image Notes1 same knot as in last pic Just slid up2 step 6
Step 5 The mid line truchers hitch The truckers hitch is a great way to double the pulling force on a line There are many ways to tie this knot the problem with most of them is that at some point you aregoing to have to pass the end line through a loop on the main line that is acting like a pulley to double your pulling force this is great if you are making the knot close tothe end of your line but if you are using a 300 length of line amp want to make the knot in the first ten feet having to pass 290 of line thew a loop is a pain But with a fewhalf hitches you will not have to pass the end line threw any loop on the main line
step 1 wrap your line around the anchor point then double over your end line laying the top of the loop over the main line
Step 2 double up your main line amp lay the loop over the loop made by the end line
step 3 in main line above the knot twist in a loop
step 4 put main line loop thew the loop made in step 3 amp pull this loop tight over your main line loop forming a half hitch Repeat step 3 amp 4 to make a doublehalf hitch
step 5 To use the knot just pull down on the end line to put tension on the main line
step 6 after you have the main line snug tie a mid line double half hitch around the two lines forming the loop at the end of the main line with the end line
step 7 Tie a double half hitch with the end line around the end loop of the mid line half hitch of step 6 using the same method as used in steps 3 amp 4
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Image Notes1 the end of step 6
Image Notes1 main line2 end line3 step 1
Image Notes1 main line loop2 end line loop
Image Notes1 step 3
Image Notes1 step 4
Image Notes1 step 4 at the end with a double half hitch on the main loop
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Image Notes1 pull here2 step 5
Image Notes1 the start of step 6
Image Notes1 the end of step 6
Image Notes1 step 72 now the rest of the line is free to do more work
Related Instructables
Paracord KnotDisplay Bord byJamie bagn
ChokelessAdjustableParacord DogLeash byPizzaman101
ParacordLadder wWooden Rungsby josestude
tie a paracordshackle grip byitri45
ParacordPrussik Belt byJavaNut13
TiteTie is theTruckers Knoton Steroids bytitetie
ID Lanyard(Photos) byeschmunk
Dog Toys forHeavy Chewersby J3443RY
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Figure 8 knot and double 8 knotby jonathan111 on November 28 2007
Intro Figure 8 knot and double 8 knotI will show you how to tie a figure 8 knot and a figure 8 follow through
Step 1 Stating the knotThis is a simple knot so just follow the pictures
Step 2 Finishing the knotCross the string under and then push it through the hole Pull tightly unless you are going to do the follow through and leave it somewhat loose
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 3 The follow through knotThe follow through knot should be tied around something brought back and followed through the path of the 8 knot Look at the pictures Basically follow through the 8knot backwards
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Related Instructables
Climb Safe WithA Figure 8Knot by mattste A pocket full of
knots byKiteman
How to Tie aFigure EightKnot byTactical_Pyro
Paracord KnotDisplay Bord byJamie bagn
Cross KnotParacordLanyard byStormdrane
How to Tie aFire-escapeKnot by leonardoismael
Truckers HitchTHE mostawesome knoton the planetby schneidp20
Paracord ZipperPuller byrepeet13
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Truckers Hitch THE most awesome knot on the planetby schneidp20 on October 12 2008
Authorschneidp20I like building stuff Trouble is there just isnt enough time to build everything Sigh
Intro Truckers Hitch THE most awesome knot on the planetYes I know that there are plenty of other cool knots out there many of which I literally couldnt live wo I rock climb However this knot is unlike any other Plus Ineeded a grabber for my Instructable -) (BTW this ISNT a climbing knot) And in truth it isnt a knot by itself but rather a system of common knots
Have you ever tried to tie something down for transporting but just couldnt get the lines tight andor during transport the lines would continually loosen Then this is theknot for you I learned this knot back in the 70s when specialty car racks and ratchet straps were rare or unheard of I initially used it to tie a canoe on a car rack bothattaching to the rack as well as the lines to the bow and stern of the canoe Even with all the new gizmos available today this knot still shines because all you need is arope and ropes dont hum in the wind like straps
The unique aspect of this knot is that it gives you a 2-1 mechanical advantage when tightening the rope Be careful though You can actually damage some thingsbecause of the mechanical advantage This knot holds fast and is easy to untie hallmark traits of any good knot
Below you see the finished knot system well break it apart in the steps that follow
Image Notes1 1st anchor point a bowline2 loop3 securing knots 2 half hitches4 securing loose end with a fishermans knot5 2nd anchor point (should be round)
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Image Notes1 X marks the spot
Step 1 Initial setupThe first step is to anchor one end of the rope and then loop the rope around a 2nd anchor point
For attaching to the 1st anchor point I chose bowline a close 2 on my list -) There are other instructables on that one so I wont bore you here
The 2nd anchor really should be round because it serves as a pulley in this block and tackle type knot Ive used it on sharp anchor points and it doesnt work as well
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 2 Creating a slip knotTie a slip knot somewhere between the two anchor points Correct placement of the slip knot takes some experience to judge it correctly Typically I place it too close tothe 2nd anchor point and end up with not enough room to work with If the knot ends up too far from 2nd anchor point you can extend the knot by enlarging the loop
Be sure you tie the slip knot as shown You may not be able to untie other knots
In this small example the slip knot is uncharacteristically close to the 1st anchor point
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 3 Tightening and securingThe loose end of the rope that went around the 2nd anchor point goes through the slip knot loop Pull the loose end to the desired tension and secure with two halfhitches
Note To allow better view of the knots the rope isnt really tightened in this example
Step 4 Securing loose endThe final knot is just to secure the loose end somehow I chose a fishermans knot to do this
To tie a fishermans knot the rope goes around twice and goes under the X created by the loops Pull the loose end to tighten Finally slide the knot to put tension onthe half hitches
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Image Notes1 X marks the spot
Step 5 FinishedThere you have it I guarantee that the first time you really use this knot (not just practice) you will be amazed at how well it works and youll wish you knew this knot along time ago You may even come over to my side and declare that is is THE most awesome knot on the planet -)
Enjoy and happy haulingDave
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Related Instructables
TiteTie is theTruckers Knoton Steroids bytitetie
Four knots tomake paracordinto a usefultool byerik_mccray
Modify yourbike rack tocarry a sunfishor other boat byewilhelm
SurfboardHammock byGermy
GiganticHalloweenSpider Web bynolte919
How To Tie ASpiders Hitch(video) by back-cast
Three-hitch mathair ornamentby michiexile TRX from
ParacordChallengeAccepted bythrake
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Carry any Bottle with a JUG KNOT Handleby hpstoutharrow on September 17 2009
Intro Carry any Bottle with a JUG KNOT HandleTie a JUG KNOT around a water bottle soda bottle or aluminum bottle to make a secure carrying strap
Re-purpose any container into a reusable water bottle by adding a convenient carrying strap This Instructable will demonstrate how to tie a JUG knot which like its namesuggests is meant to properly secure around the neck of a container
With some cord and the knowledge of this knot you will be able add a handle lanyard or carabiner loop to any of your favorite beverages to carry them on the go
It works perfectly for those disposable water bottles and who knows once you add some colorful cord to the plain old clear water bottle you just might beinclined to refill it and use it again(Check out pictures 4amp5 below)
In addition to plastic beverage bottles like pop water and sports drinks you can turn those rugged aluminum beer bottles into a backpacking canteen
Those of you familiar with my previous aluminum bottle InstructablesROLLED RIM METAL TUMBLERhttpwwwinstructablescomidAluminum-Bottle-Tumbler-Cup-Cook-PotALUMINUM BOTTLE LIGHTWEIGHT ALCOHOL STOVEhttpwwwinstructablescomidAluminum-Bottle-Alcohol-Stovewill recognize the water canteen shown below as a re-purposed aluminum beer bottle Here I have added a painted surface treatment to turn it into a proper lookingwater bottle More on that in steps 13 14 15
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 1 Getting StartedCord size is important Select a small medium weight cord like the one shown here It is a general purpose camp cord sold at most sporting goods stores (shoelacesmight also work)
Do not use a heavy cord or rope because the larger diameter will not tuck under the relatively small lip at the top of the bottleneck and the bottle will fall out
Also the smaller cord cinches tight on itself and will not loosen accidentally
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 2 Form a BightThe next steps show how to tie a JUG KNOT It is the basic step for adding a carrying strap It is also the anchor point for any additional fancy bottle trussing you maywant to add
JUG KNOT Step 1
Form a Bight in the center of a length of cord Bight is a knot term for a loop or bend in the rope In this case the main Bight in this knot is highlighted with a white mark Imakes it easier to follow its path in these steps
The running ends of the cord should be equal length
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 3 Pull the Bight downPULL the Bight DOWN forming two Loops
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 4 Cross the LoopsCROSS the right Loop OVER the left Loop
Step 5 Pass the Bight under the 1st loopTake the main Bight and pass it UNDER the left Loop
Step 6 Weave the BightWEAVE the Bight OVER the portion of the right Loop and UNDER the portion of the left Loop
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 7 Extend the BightExtend the Bight OVER the outer portion of the right Loop
Step 8 Flip the Right Loop behindAdditional colored identification points have been added to the loops to follow their travel in these next two steps
The right Loop Yellow marker is FLIPPED BEHIND the knot and ends up on the far left side of the knot
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 9 Flip the 2nd loop in frontRaise the green marker (located on what was formerly the left loop) and pull it down and to the right FLIPPING IT IN FRONT of the knot
Note the blue portion of the this loop will pass around the outside of the yellow portion of the first loop
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Image Notes1 Center of knot that will tighten around the bottles neck
Step 10 Remove SlackNote where the blue green amp yellow markers end up
Start to remove the slack in the loops by pulling the original main Bight (white marker top right) and the two free standing ends at the bottom
the bottle neck will pass through the very center of the knot
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Image Notes1 Center of knot that will tighten around the bottles neck
Step 11 Tighten the KnotAfter removing the slack insert the bottle neck and finish tightening
The knot should look like this before slipping it over the bottle
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 12 Secure on bottle neckThis is the finished knot shown on the neck of various containers
The loop end and the two free standing ends can be tied together to create a carrying handle (last picture below)
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 13 Aluminum Bottle Water Bottle
The next few steps show the features of an aluminum beer bottle re-purposed as a water bottle canteen It is one of many containers that can be reused as a camp waterbottle
The bottle was lightly sanded masked and then pained with a hammered finished paint to create an interesting surface texture
Image Notes1 Textured finish paint makes an interesting grip-able surface2 Masked with tape for painting3 Masked with tape for painting
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Image Notes1 Dowel used for holding the bottle during painting
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 14 Tethered Cork StopperUse a wine bottle man made Cork as a stopper for your aluminum water bottleNote Use a cork that was removed from the wine bottle without the corkscrew penetrating through the bottom end of the cork (A hole all the way through the cork willcause it to leak) Use the unpierced end of the cork inside the water bottle
Drill a hole through the sides of the Cork Thread the cord through the hole to the center of the cord Use the cork as the main Bight and tie the Jug knot as shown inthe beginning steps
Now the cork is tethered to the bottle and will not get lost or fall on the ground
A Carabiner clip passes through the other cord end to attache the water bottle to you belt or pack
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 15 Trussed for TransportThis is another hanging method for carrying your aluminum bottle water canteen A Jug knot is tied conventionally around the neck
The running ends of the knot however are pulled down towards the bottom of the bottle A Barrel Knot is tied about 34 the way down the side of the bottle A squareknot is tied on the bottom of the knot to keep the two running ends tight against the sides of the bottle
I like the look of the accent colored cord running down the sides of the bottle and the fact that the bottle hangs from the belt upside down It adds to its uniqueness
The last picture shows another truss variation
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 16 AdvancedBelow is a bottle with some additional trussing You can be creative as you want It all starts with a re-purposed container and the Jug Knot (and enough cord)
Related Instructables
AluminumBottle TumblerCup amp Cook Potfor an AlcoholStove byhpstoutharrow
Water BottleBelt Clip byuglymike Duct Tape
Water Bottle byrabidsquire2
AluminumBottle AlcoholStove byhpstoutharrow
DIYGlass WaterBottle byCulturespy
Solar WaterHeater forBackpackingUsing WaterBottles and aCar Shade bykopomeroy
Duct tape waterbottle holder(Photos) by pinkmarshmallow
How to make aCamelPack withan old plasticbottle bywillrandship
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Basic Knots Guideby zorro3355 on April 29 2008
Intro Basic Knots Guidehi
Step 1 Thumb knotThe most simple knotUsed as a stopper and prevent ropes from fraying
Step 2 Reef KnotUsed to tie two ropes of equal thickness togetherIt is pretty easy to tie and untie but under tentionit may be diffcult to untieIt is also not sutible for smoothropes(egnylon ropes)
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 3 Figure of eightused as a stopperprevent ropes from fraying and its more secure than tumb knot its is also used to tie Caribinas to ropes and is often used in rock climbing
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 4 Timber hitchused for pulling logs
Step 5 Clove hitchUsed to tie a rope onto a pole or logThe pole must be roundThe pole lust be thicker then the rope itself
(greatly used during pioneering)
Step 6 Sheet bandused to tie ropes of different thickness together(works on same thickness of ropes too)
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 7 Sheep shankTo shorten RopesTo prevent middle fraying
Step 8 Slip knotWhippingUsed as a grip for pulling things(when tied on a stick or small pole)(marlin spike hitch)
Related Instructables
Rope Rings byhpstoutharrow
How to Tie aFigure EightKnot byTactical_Pyro
Whippin (WestCountry Style)by tim_n
SurvivalBracelet(Updated) bytevers94
HangmansNoose PackClosure byPopEye42
Turkey on aTripod byhpstoutharrow
SurvivalBracelet II bytevers94 Zigzag Spooling
Paracord (video)by Stormdrane
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
How to Tie a Fire-escape Knotby leonardo ismael on October 16 2007
Intro How to Tie a Fire-escape KnotThis knot is used by firemen in case of fires for example imagine a scene where the ladder on the firetruck messes up but people need to get down a five story buildingor more All they have is a long piece of rope they can safely get down with a secure knot like the fire-escape knot So why not learn it its easy to do and hard to untieif you tie it tightly
This is from the American Boys Handbook
Step 1 Get Your RopeFirst grab a piece of rope and bend it like this to make a loop in it Follow every step to the smallest detail
Step 2 Twist the RopeNow make a twist like this and hold it together
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 3 Pull Through the TwistPull the loop through the twist you just made from underneath
Step 4 Go Over the Split EndNow pull the tail through the loop
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 5 FinallyAnd finally just pull it through as pictured below
Congratulations you just learned the fire-escape knot
Step 6 Same Name Not KnotThis is another knot called the fire-escape knot this shouldnt be your result
Related Instructables
House FireEscape Plan(video) byWhatHappensNowAdvice
ParacordLadder wWooden Rungsby josestude
Bed SheetEscape Rope byjessehensel
rope ladder(glow-in-the-dark version) bymikeasaurus
HeadlockEscape 2(video) byjohnnyrockstah
QuickFirestarter byMattandJora
Trail sauna byjakee117
How to Kill FireAnts andCommitGenocide byKentsOkay
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Climb Safe With A Figure 8 Knotby mattste on February 23 2010
Intro Climb Safe With A Figure 8 Knot There are many things that a beginning climber needs to know including several important knots Perhaps the most essential knot is the Figure 8 Follow Through Thistutorial will demonstrate how to correctly harness yourself to a rope using a Figure 8 Follow Through knot This knot is used primarily by rock climbers to provide a life-line Since this knot is used as a life-line it is very important to be able to tie it correctly (Your life could depend upon it)
Dont worry with this tutorial and about 5 minutes of practice you can have this knot mastered
Things you will need
- Climbing Harness- Climbing Rope
If you are wanting to go climbing and dont already have these items they can be purchased for about $25 each at most outdoor sporting goods stores If you are merelylooking to learn the knot a belt loop and a rope (about five feet long) will do
Image Notes1 Climbing Harness2 Climbing Rope
Step 1 Dealing With The RopeThroughout this tutorial I will be discussing different parts of the rope To make these instructions as clear as possible I will define a few terms that I will use throughoutthe tutorial The Anchor End of the rope will generally be at the top of the images This is the end that would be anchored to the wall or rock and does not move Wewill not be doing much with the anchored end The Tail End of the rope is the opposite end that we will be dealing with I will call this the tail for short
Now that we have some terms to work with lets get started
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 2 Tying The First Figure 8This knot has several parts to it The first part of the knot is just tying a basic figure 8 To tie the first figure 8 there are four simple steps
1 - Using the tail make a loop over the rope (as shown in the first picture) keeping in mind that there should be about 3 ft of slack on the tail end
2 - Wrap the tail back this time go under the anchored end (As shown in the second picture)
3 - Bring the tail down through the first loop (As shown in the third picture)
4 - Finally pull the two ends to make the knot a little bit tighter and easier to deal with (Shown in the fourth picture)
After these four steps you should end up with a knot that resembles a figure 8
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 3 Looping Into The Harness In order to secure the rope to the harness simply thread the tail end of the rope through the front loop in the harness as shown in the picture below This step isobviously very important
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 4 Following Back Through The Figure 8After looping the rope through the harness you have to thread the tail end of the rope back through the knot following the first figure 8 I have divided this process intofive smaller steps in order to make it more clear
1 - Coming form underneath the knot bring the tail up through the near loop and to the left behind the anchored end of the rope (Shown in the first picture)
2 - Wrap the tail around the anchored end back to the right and down through the adjacent loop (Shown in the second picture)
3 - You simply need to bring the tail back over the top of the knot to the left (Shown in the third picture)
4 - Bring the tail end up through the far loop following the anchored end (Shown in the fourth picture)
5 - Finally pull the knot tight (Shown in the fifth picture)
As you can see the first four pictures are simply tracing the knot back through with the tail end
For the last part while you pull the knot tight you may want to make small adjustments and rearrange how it all fits together If the knot does not lay perfectly smoothand tight its NOT a big deal
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 5 Finishing The Knot After completing the Figure 8 knot you will want to somehow secure the tail end of the rope out of the way There are a couple different ways to do this the way that Iwill demonstrate is using whats called a Stopper Knot This secondary knot is similar to a Fishermans knot and is pretty simple I have once again divided thisprocess into several smaller steps
1 - Start by wrapping the tail end around the anchored end (As shown in the first picture)
2 - Wrap the tail back underneath the two vertical segments (As shown in the second picture)
3 - Simply repeat the first two steps wrapping the tail around again (As shown in the third picture)
4 - This step in the fourth picture may look complicated but all you need to do is insert the tail up through the two loops that you have just made
5 - To finish off the knot you will want to slowly pull the tail end while gently pushing the bottom of the stopper knot upwards If you have successfully completed this knotit should look something like the fifth picture
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 6 Ready To Climb Now that you have mastered the Figure 8 knot you can securely harness yourself into a climbing rope Remember there are many other skills that go into setting up ananchor and belaying a climber This tutorial only covers the figure 8 knot For more information there are many great websites that demonstrate how to correctly set up asafe climbing system (Ive posted a few below) If you are a beginning climber I recommend that you read up on a few other climbing techniques Also you shouldprobably go to a climbing wall or gym where there are experienced climbers that can show you the ropes Hopefully this tutorial has been helpful Have fun and be safe
Some useful linkshttpwwwstephenprattnetAnchorsanchorshtmhttpwwwuoregonedu~oppclimbingtopicsanchorshtmlhttpwwwabc-of-rockclimbingcomhowtoclimbingtechniquesasp
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Related Instructables
How to Tie aFigure EightKnot byTactical_Pyro
Paracord KnotDisplay Bord byJamie bagn
Basic KnotsGuide byzorro3355
How to Climb aTree (withprussiks) bystasterisk
How to climb atree (using onlyrope) thefunsimple wayby louieaw
How to get arope into a tree(withoutclimbing it) byvitex
How to tievarious knots byadaviel
How to make arope swing byjdub0928
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Turks Head Knots on a Bottleby sklnxbones on July 6 2010
Intro Turks Head Knots on a BottleThis is the finished project A bottle decorated with three Turks Head Knots There are only three knots on this bottle The RED and the BLUE knots are each a 20 Bightby 3 Lead Turks Head Knots The WHITE knot is a 20 Bight by 19 Lead Turks Head Knot
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 1 Supplies
Cord Lots and Lots of cord I cant tell you how much each bottle is differentBottle Washed and Dried inside and out Make sure to remove all water spotsThreaded Needle Cord screws into the threads at the base of the needlePegs I use brass rivets used as a map to tie the Turks Head KnotsHole Punch Used to punch holes in the painters tape to hold the pegsPainters Tape To hold the pegs in place and to make your map for the Turks Head KnotsMarker To write on the painters tapeCloth Towel To remove finger prints and dirt from your bottleKrazy Glue or Super Glue This is used to secure the knots in place to the bottle
OPTIONAL BUT HIGHLY RECOMMENDEDI use the Turks Head Cookbook from KnotToolcom
Step 2 PreparationYou will need to find a bottle you like I used an empty instant tea bottle of course washed and dried (I like to put the bottle in the oven for a few minutes to dry the insidewithout water spots Take off the lid and do not put lid in the oven) Now measure the circumference of the bottle Take a cord and tightly wrap the cord around the bottleMark where the ends meet and use a ruler to measure the length of the cord For my instant tea bottle the circumference is 27cm I know from past knots that I have tiedthat I want my knot to have 20 Bights in the top and bottom (bands) knots I am going to use the Bights in the (bands) knots to tie the middle knot Now divide the numberof Bights (20) into the size of the circumference (27) to get the space between each Bight (135) With me so far
Now take two pieces of painters tape using a ruler measure out the length of the circumference and mark the length on the both pieces of tape Next you will mark thespace between each Bight on the tape
Step 3 Adding the PegsI like to use pegs when tying Turks Head Knots it just makes tying the knot easier
These are what I use for pegs
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 4 Adding Pegs to the TapeNow take a hole punch to cut holes in the tape where the lines meet You will place the pegs in the holes
Insert a peg in each hole and carefully stick the first piece of tape to the bottle
Step 5 Adding the 2nd row of pegsNow do the same thing with the second piece of tape The numbers on each piece of tape must line up
This picture shows you what you should have now This odd looking thing will be your map to tie the Turks Head Knot And this is the end of Step 1
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 6 Tying the first Turks Head KnotUsing the Turks Head Cookbook follow the numbers going over and under as indicated in the book I chose a 20 Bight by 3 Lead knot which will give me a nice bandaround the bottle Once the ends meet you have made one complete knot Tape the running end of your cord and start removing the pegs and the tape
Step 7 Remove the pegs and the tapeBe careful not to untie the knot as you remove the pegs and tape from the bottle Continue to remove all the pegs and remove the tape from the bottle At this point theknot will be very loose and will need to be tightened up
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 8 Remove the slack from the knotHere you can see just how much the knot expanded Starting with the standing end begin to pull the slack out of the knot going towards the running end of the cordDo not expect to pull all the slack out at once You may have to make 3 - 5 attempts at removing the slack out of the knot DO NOT remove all of the slack out of the knotIn order to make the bands we will have to triple the Turks Head Knot We will do this by following the knot three times The threaded needle will really come in handyhere
Step 9 Triple the KnotOnce you have made three passes of the Turks Head Knot use your needle to go under your knot about half the circumference and cut the cord The knot will be tightenough to hide the tail in placeTIP I carefully add a couple of drops of super glue UNDER the band to hold them in place and keep them from sliding around in the nextsteps A drop or two in 3 or 4 places around the band should be enough
Step 10 Add the second knotNow repeat this whole step for the second bandWhen tying the second band you must make sure the Bights line up to the first band This is crucial for the next stepWipe down the bottle to make sure all your finger prints and adhesive from the tape are all removed You want to make sure your bottle is clean at this point Any dirt orfinger prints left on the bottle will be almost impossible to remove From this point on we will use gloves when tying our last knot
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 11 Maping the Top KnotStick a piece of painters tape on top of your first band leaving the bottom of the knot exposedUse a marker to count the number of Bights in your knot Instead of using the pegs we are going to use the Bights to tie our next Turks Head Knot
Step 12 Mapping the Bottom KnotDo the same thing for the bottom band but you must make sure your numbers on top and bottom line up So 1 on top should be the same position as 1 on the bottom
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 13 Adding the last knotAgain using the Turks Head Cookbook and the threaded needle you are going to follow the instructions going over and under as indicated in the book Be sure to usegloves when ever you handle the bottle
Step 14 Thats ItFor this Turks Head Knot I am using a 20 Bight by 19 Lead knot
Because of the amount of cord you are working with your cord will get twisted and knotted You will have to un-twist the cord often Its a pain in the rear but it has to bedone And it has to be done alot
Continue to tie the knot until you finish the knot If you have the cord and the patience you can double or triple the knot When you are done use your needle to hide theends under your bands Cut the ends and your DONE
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Related Instructables
Monkeys FistFloatingKeychain byjokerlz
How To Make ATurks headKnot WithParacord byDoggie Stylish
Tying Trivetsout of Rope forHoliday Gifts bykylemarsh
Paracord KnotDisplay Bord byJamie bagn
How to Make ATurks Head(Photos) bymchs60chip
A pocket full ofknots byKiteman
Monkeys fistknot AND themonkey byjonathan111
TiteTie is theTruckers Knoton Steroids bytitetie
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Larks head noose -- an easy useful knot that tightens and loosensby Larry Breed on February 19 2009
Intro Larks head noose -- an easy useful knot that tightens and loosensI thought I knew all the basic knots but then I was taught this incredibly useful simple knot Its good for tying up the neck of a bag that you want to repeatedly open andsecurely close Its good for tying around a springy bundle that will need tightening and retightening And its easy to undo
Ive looked at knot literature but havent found a name for this so I named it The basic knot is well known its called a larks head Since all Ive done is to slip the twoends through the larks head to make a noose I call it that
WARNING Dont use this knot when human safety would depend on it Climbers and mountaineers have well-tested reliable knots for such situations
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Image Notes1 To tighten further step on this side of the larks head and pull the free ends
Step 1 Double the cord overThe larks head noose requires enough cord to go twice around your bundle plus a foot or two Find the center and double it over Sailors call this a bight
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 2 Form the larks headComing from below the bight hook your thumb and forefinger over the two sides Reach outward and downward and pinch your fingertips together underneath thedoubled cord
Youve made a larks head Move the crossing cord a little farther from your hand so theres a clear opening through the two half-loops
Step 3 Form the nooseSlip the two ends of the cord through the opening we were just talking about Pull the larks head tight so it grips the two cords Find something that needs constrictingand put the noose around it
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 4 Tightening retightening and lockingSlide the knot against the bundle If its not tight enough to keep from slipping tighten it by holding it in one hand and tugging on the cords one at a time with the otherhand Notice that you can slide the knot out again for instance to re-open the bag you just tied shut For some applications this may be as tight as you need it
A springy bundle probably still feels loose If so compress the bundle and get a new grip on the cords Rest your foot on the bundle on the cords nearest the larks headand pull to slide the larks head tighter
To make the knot more permanent you can lock it Make an overhand in the cord ends (Exactly like the first step in tying shoelaces) With your foot still on the bundlepull on the cords and move your hands apart until youre pulling in opposite directions You have just locked the larks head and you can trust it to stay that way()
But lets say that later on you want to loosen the locked knot Again put your foot on the bundle and cords nearest the larks head hold the two cord ends together andpull This makes a little slack between the overhand and the larks head so you can untie the overhand
In twine or small string the locking overhand knot may be difficult to undo Use a shoelace knot instead of an overhand and itll unlock easily
() If youre using slippery cord like polypropylene an overhand may not lock securely You may want to tie another overhand knot For added security wrap a shortlength of duct tape around the two cords close to the knot
Image Notes1 To tighten further step on this side of the larks head and pull the free ends
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Related Instructables
TRX fromParacordChallengeAccepted bythrake
A pocket full ofknots byKiteman
Lens CapLanyard by~teknoarsonist~ how to tie a
noose byawesume
AdjustableParacordGlassesLanyard byjdtwelve12
HangmansNoose PackClosure byPopEye42
Paraleash - ADog LeashFrom Paracordby The Ideanator
How to make arugged andhandy ParacordBelt by Jake22
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 5 Count your knotsOnce you have 10 snake knots youre almost done Youll notice from the photos of both sides of the lanyard that one side has the snake knots alternating all the waydown and the other has a set of parallel knots at the top and botton of the sequence of knots Youll always have those at the start and finish of the snake knots I preferto have them end up on the same side of the lanyard so one side appears to have a more uniform look but its not required
Step 6 Trim and melt the excess paracordUse the scissors to trim off the excess cord and quickly melt the ends with a lighter so they dont fray
Step 7 Youre doneYou can make a range of variations using less or more cordknots Shorten the loop for a double ended key chain or make the loop longer for use as a neck lanyard aLanyard Break-Away Connector could be added for the safety conscious You can also add a wooden bead skull cord lock etc Visit my blog page for more knot relatedprojects links and resources Stormdranes Blog You can find ideas for other geargadgets to attach to your lanyard on EDC Forums
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Related Instructables
Paracord ChainSinnet FastDeploy BoonieHatband (video)by Stormdrane
Cross KnotParacordLanyard byStormdrane
Zigzag SpoolingParacord (video)by Stormdrane
SurvivalBracelet II bytevers94
SurvivalBracelet(Updated) bytevers94
Cobra WeaveKey Fob bytevers94
ParacordBoonie HatWrap (video) byStormdrane
Paracord KnotDisplay Bord byJamie bagn
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
How to tie various knotsby adaviel on September 7 2009
Intro How to tie various knotsKnots as a way of joining rope without special equipment are useful in many situations On a sailboat knots are essential both for daily use and for emergency repairsThis instructable describes several different common knots eg
Sheet Bend - to tie two lines togetherBowline - to make a loopReef Knot - to fasten a bundle of materialFishermans Bend - to secure a line to a post or ring
These knots are good for regular rope - braided or 3-strand polyester or natural fibre (hemp sisal) Monofilament (fishing line) or steel cable performs better with differentknots
Knots are typically quite a lot weaker than straight rope - when rope goes around a tight radius such as in a knot the outside is under more tension than the insideSplices (which require special tools and are time-consuming to make) are stronger so permanent fittings usually have eye-splices
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 1 Sheet BendThe sheet bend is used to tie two lines together It is perhaps the most generally useful knot of all When used to tie a line to itself making a loop it is called a bowlineThe strain is taken on the ropes in the middle - not the one coming out the side
How the knot is made is not critical - it is the final shape that is important One can make the flat loop first and work the other rope around it Or one can make thecrossed loop first - required when tying a bowline
The two images show front and back views of the same knot
AdvantagesEasy to makeEasy to undo when tension is removedDoes not easily capsize
DisadvantagesHard to make under loadDangerous to make under heavy load
UsesJoining two equally-sized ropesExtending a towline or stern line
Method 1 the same as a bowline
Method 2 starting with the flat loop
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 2 Double Sheet BendThe double sheet bend is used to tie two lines of different thickness - but not too different It is the same as a normal sheet bend but with an extra turn of the thinner ropearound the flat loop in the thickerThe load goes on the line through the flat loop not the one that comes out the side of the knot
UsesSecuring a heaving line to a tow lineExtending a stern line if you dont have enough line of one thickness
Step 3 BowlineThe bowline is really a special case of the sheet bend but it it tied at the end of a rope to make a loop
The photos show the completed loop and closeups of the front and back of the actual knot Note that it is the same as the sheet bend - but it must be made the right wayround This loop does not tighten in use The knot is quite easy to untie once the load is removed With practice it is very quick to tie
Some usesSecuring a dinghy line to a railing or stanchionSecuring an anchor line to an anchorTie a jib sheet to the sailTie a mooring line around a rock or treeTie a float to an anchor triplineUse one in each line to tie two ropes of very different sizes - eg a throwing line to a large tow ropeDisadvantages the knot must be completely made before it will take any strain - it is hard to tie if there is already a load on the rope
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Linked bowlines
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 4 Bowline on the BightA bowline on the bight is a bowline tied in a loop of rope (neither end is needed) The shape is the same as a bowline made with a double line but the middle of thebight forms the loop around the standing part
UsesAn impromptu bosuns chair - to sit in while being transferred between two boats at sea
Step 5 Clove HitchThe clove hitch can be made when you only have the bight (the middle) of a rope not the ends
UsesSecuring a burgee pole to a burgee halyard (a continuous loop of thin line)Securing a tiller from swinging
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 6 Round Turn and Two Half-HitchesThis is a knot used to secure a line to a ring or bar Wind a couple of turns around the bar then secure the end with two hitches around the standing part (this looks like aclove hitch when done)
AdvantagesCan be made under load - it is easy to take turns around the bar while maintaining tension on the ropeStrong - provided the bar is thicker than the rope the rope is not weakened by sharp bendsDisadvantagesThe end tends to work loose
UsesSecuring a line to a mooring ring or samson post
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 7 Fishermans BendThe fishermans bend is the same as the round turn and two half hitches except that the first hitch is looped under the round turn This uses the tension on the rope tosecure the end from working loose
AdvantagesSecure against working loose
DisadvantagesHard to make under tensionHard to undo under tensionMay seize up under load when wet making it hard to undo
UsesSecuring mooring line to ringSecuring fender lines to rail
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 8 Studsail BendThe studsail bend is like the fishermans bend but the second hitch is also secured under the round turn making it even more secure against working loose when undertension
AdvantagesVery secure against working looseDisadvantagesHard to make under tensionHard to undo under tension
Step 9 Figure-8 KnotThe figure-eight knot is used to prevent an end of rope from passing through a block (pulley) Sometimes called a stopper knot
The double figure-8 knot is used in rock climbing as an alternative to a bowline to secure a climbing harness to the end of a safety rope The double knot is made bymaking a single knot then tracing back around the knot with the free end after passing it around the harness loop
AdvantagesEasy to verify by inspectionNot prone to work loose
DisadvantagesSlow to make and undoCannot be made under load
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 10 Prussic KnotThe prussic knot may be used as a climbing ascender - when made around a vertical rope as shown downwards tension on the ends locks the knot while release oftension allows it to be slid up the rope A pair of prussic knots on foot loops may be used in tandem to climb a rope
UsesClimbing a ropeTaking up tension to free a riding turn on a winch
Step 11 Reef KnotThe reef knot or square knot is used to tie a bundle of material together It must be made around something - it should not be used to tie two free ropes togetherbecause it can easily capsizeIt should not be used to make a loop unless it can be tensioned around a solid object It should not be used around a person - use a bowline instead A capsized reefknot will slip easily and could constrict and cause severe injury
UsesReefing a sail (tying the unused portion around a spar)Securing a furled sail to a spar (sail ties)Wrapping a parcelTying shoelaces
AdvantagesMay be made under moderate load
DisadvantagesCapsizes (works free) if used improperlyCan seize up under load when wet
Tying the knot
Capsizing a reef knot
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 12 CleatsThis is not a knot but is very common on boatsThe first picture shows a rope cleated normally The second shows one with a final locking turn - the last turn is twisted before placing over the cleat so that the tensionon the rope helps secure the free end
When working with ropes under tension take a turn or two around a winch or cleat before trying to secure the end with a knot The load on the free end falls exponentiallywith each turn taken Severe injury can result if a finger or other body part is caught in a loop of rope or between a rope and another object
Step 13 Practice themIt is sometimes useful to be able to tie knots in the dark or as in this video behind your back
Related Instructables
AThird Hand forSailing or OtherThings by WadeTarzia
Paracord KnotDisplay Bord byJamie bagn
Trip LogOutriggerCanoe Sailingthe CaliforniaChannel Islandsby TimAnderson
How to Tie aFigure EightKnot byTactical_Pyro
How to build apirate ship bymdelaney3
Build a ShortDragon (16 foot3-BoardOutriggerSailing Canoe)by Wade Tarzia
repairing aheadsail by josh
How to get arope into a tree(withoutclimbing it) byvitex
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
How to Tie the Lanyard Knotby eddy14777 on January 31 2010
Intro How to Tie the Lanyard KnotMany people including myself have had trouble following the Stormdrane youtube video on tying the lanyard knot so i have done some research and found the solution
Image Notes1 Finished knot
Step 1 MaterialsAll you need is a reasonable length of para cord or whatever you wish to use
Image Notes1 One reasonable amount
Step 2 First StepThe first thing you are going to do is to make a bight that leaves you with to congruent endsThen you are going to put your ring finger through the bight
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Image Notes1 Close enough2 Bight
Step 3 Starting the KnotMake a loop just like the one in the picture and place it over the top strandBring the top strand under the bottom strand
Image Notes1 Notice the way the loop is done2 Top strand
Image Notes1 Bottom strand2 Top strand is under
Step 4 The Most Important PartNow you take the top stand from the previous picture and feed it over the first part of the loop under itself and back over the remainder of the loop
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Image Notes1 Under me2 Top strand3 This should make a diamond type shape
Step 5 DoublingNow take the bottom stand and take it around the part of the top strand nearest to the bight and than come up through the diamond shape in the middleDo the same for the top strand
Image Notes1 Top strand
Image Notes1 Both through the diamond
Step 6 FinishingWhen you take it off your finger it should look like thisWork out the slack by pulling on the bight and the two strands
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Image Notes1 Finished knot
Related Instructables
Cross KnotParacordLanyard byStormdrane
Celtic ButtonKnot (video) byStormdrane
Paracord wristlanyard madewith the snakeknot byStormdrane
Paracord ChainSinnet FastDeploy BoonieHatband (video)by Stormdrane
Zigzag SpoolingParacord (video)by Stormdrane
ParacordBoonie HatWrap (video) byStormdrane
Paracord IDbadge Lanyardby Flahusky
Cobra WeaveKey Fob bytevers94
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Four knots to make paracord into a useful toolby erik_mccray on March 27 2010
Authorerik_mccrayI am an ex-fabricator that is now a stay at home dad I love my new job but I do miss making stuff I love this site amp I am getting involved as a way to keep myskills upOn top of fad work I have also run two small business in the past One was custom sewing amp the other was as a small engine mechanicI have two votec degrees one in metal fabrication amp the other is in engine repairI look forward to getting to know everyone here
Intro Four knots to make paracord into a useful toolParacord is an awesome multitool used everywhere from the wild blue yonder to the deepest caverns But like any good tool it is only as good as the knowledge the userhas about the tool With most people out there using bungee cords amp ratchet straps it seems that paracord is being used for nothing more than friendship bracelets forgrown men This is a shame because for less then the price of a few cheap bungee cords amp some to short to be helpful straps You can get yourself hundreds of feet ofparacord
The key to getting the most out of the paracord is good knot work The first thing you need to know is what makes a good knot One is that the knot is easy amp quick to tieamp more impotant is that the knot is easy amp quick to untie The hitch class of knots is by far the best group of knots that the average person could know The four mostuseful hitch knots are the half hitch a quick simple knot that forms the base for many other knots the inline half hitch allowing you to get the most out of one length ofparacord the slippery hitch that gives you both on the fly control over tension on your paracord but also an adjustable loop that will not change unless you want it amp theinline truckers hitch instantly doubling the your pulling power
Step 1 To get started lets get some terminology that will be used defined
line= the paracord
Main line= the part of the paracord doing the work for example holding down your tarp or the long part of the paracord
Mid line= the middle of the length of the paracord
End line= the unused length of paracord or the short length of paracord
Step 2 The half hitch The half hitch is a simple way to secure a line to an anchor point like the tie down points in most trucks A half hitch is a constrictor knot meaning that the harder you pullon the line the tighter the knots grip gets Another common constrictor knot is the slip knot
Step 1 wrap your line around your anchor point Step 2 wrap the end line around the main line
Step 3 pass the end line threw the end line side of the newly formed loop
step 4 now take the slack out of the knot
step 5 to make sure the knot is secure tie another half hitch to the main line This knot is called adouble half hitch
step 6 another useful thing that can be done with the half hitch is that instead of repeating the wrap on the main line but repeating it on what you are tying to the half hitchcan be used to bind something like a stack of 2x4s
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Image Notes1 End line2 Main line3 step 1
Image Notes1 Step 2
Image Notes1 passing thew the end line side of the loop2 step 3
Image Notes1 step 5
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Image Notes1 step 6
Step 3 The mid line half hitch The mid line half hitch is for when the length of line is to long for the job at hand amp you dont want to have to cut the line to size or you are using multiple anchor pointswith one length of line
Step 1 double up the line at the point in the length you wish to make the knot
Step 2 wrap the doubled up portion of line around your anchor point The doubled up length is now now the end line
Step 3 now tie just as you did for the regular half hitch repeat the knot to make a double half hitch for security
Image Notes1 A mid line double half hitch
Image Notes1 step 1
Image Notes1 The end line2 step 2
Image Notes1 Step 3
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 4 The slippery hitch The slippery hitch is a great knot for adjusting tension on the main line or for having an adjustable fixed loop To adjust the knot simply slide the knot up or down the mainline
Step 1 wrap your line around the anchor point or just double over the line to form a loop
Step 2 wrap the end line around the main line three times Wrapping in the direction of the anchor point or loop
Step 3 put together the two lines making up the loop amp wrap the two lines one time with the end line
Step 4 pass the end line thew the last loop formed covering the two lined of the loop
Step 5 pull the knot tite
step 6 to adjust the size of the loop or main line tension grab the knot amp slide it up or down the main line
Image Notes1 grab just the knot its self to adjust it2 step 5
Image Notes1 step 1
Image Notes1 step 2
Image Notes1 step 3
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Image Notes1 step 4
Image Notes1 grab just the knot its self to adjust it2 step 5
Image Notes1 same knot as in last pic Just slid up2 step 6
Step 5 The mid line truchers hitch The truckers hitch is a great way to double the pulling force on a line There are many ways to tie this knot the problem with most of them is that at some point you aregoing to have to pass the end line through a loop on the main line that is acting like a pulley to double your pulling force this is great if you are making the knot close tothe end of your line but if you are using a 300 length of line amp want to make the knot in the first ten feet having to pass 290 of line thew a loop is a pain But with a fewhalf hitches you will not have to pass the end line threw any loop on the main line
step 1 wrap your line around the anchor point then double over your end line laying the top of the loop over the main line
Step 2 double up your main line amp lay the loop over the loop made by the end line
step 3 in main line above the knot twist in a loop
step 4 put main line loop thew the loop made in step 3 amp pull this loop tight over your main line loop forming a half hitch Repeat step 3 amp 4 to make a doublehalf hitch
step 5 To use the knot just pull down on the end line to put tension on the main line
step 6 after you have the main line snug tie a mid line double half hitch around the two lines forming the loop at the end of the main line with the end line
step 7 Tie a double half hitch with the end line around the end loop of the mid line half hitch of step 6 using the same method as used in steps 3 amp 4
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Image Notes1 the end of step 6
Image Notes1 main line2 end line3 step 1
Image Notes1 main line loop2 end line loop
Image Notes1 step 3
Image Notes1 step 4
Image Notes1 step 4 at the end with a double half hitch on the main loop
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Image Notes1 pull here2 step 5
Image Notes1 the start of step 6
Image Notes1 the end of step 6
Image Notes1 step 72 now the rest of the line is free to do more work
Related Instructables
Paracord KnotDisplay Bord byJamie bagn
ChokelessAdjustableParacord DogLeash byPizzaman101
ParacordLadder wWooden Rungsby josestude
tie a paracordshackle grip byitri45
ParacordPrussik Belt byJavaNut13
TiteTie is theTruckers Knoton Steroids bytitetie
ID Lanyard(Photos) byeschmunk
Dog Toys forHeavy Chewersby J3443RY
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Figure 8 knot and double 8 knotby jonathan111 on November 28 2007
Intro Figure 8 knot and double 8 knotI will show you how to tie a figure 8 knot and a figure 8 follow through
Step 1 Stating the knotThis is a simple knot so just follow the pictures
Step 2 Finishing the knotCross the string under and then push it through the hole Pull tightly unless you are going to do the follow through and leave it somewhat loose
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 3 The follow through knotThe follow through knot should be tied around something brought back and followed through the path of the 8 knot Look at the pictures Basically follow through the 8knot backwards
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Related Instructables
Climb Safe WithA Figure 8Knot by mattste A pocket full of
knots byKiteman
How to Tie aFigure EightKnot byTactical_Pyro
Paracord KnotDisplay Bord byJamie bagn
Cross KnotParacordLanyard byStormdrane
How to Tie aFire-escapeKnot by leonardoismael
Truckers HitchTHE mostawesome knoton the planetby schneidp20
Paracord ZipperPuller byrepeet13
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Truckers Hitch THE most awesome knot on the planetby schneidp20 on October 12 2008
Authorschneidp20I like building stuff Trouble is there just isnt enough time to build everything Sigh
Intro Truckers Hitch THE most awesome knot on the planetYes I know that there are plenty of other cool knots out there many of which I literally couldnt live wo I rock climb However this knot is unlike any other Plus Ineeded a grabber for my Instructable -) (BTW this ISNT a climbing knot) And in truth it isnt a knot by itself but rather a system of common knots
Have you ever tried to tie something down for transporting but just couldnt get the lines tight andor during transport the lines would continually loosen Then this is theknot for you I learned this knot back in the 70s when specialty car racks and ratchet straps were rare or unheard of I initially used it to tie a canoe on a car rack bothattaching to the rack as well as the lines to the bow and stern of the canoe Even with all the new gizmos available today this knot still shines because all you need is arope and ropes dont hum in the wind like straps
The unique aspect of this knot is that it gives you a 2-1 mechanical advantage when tightening the rope Be careful though You can actually damage some thingsbecause of the mechanical advantage This knot holds fast and is easy to untie hallmark traits of any good knot
Below you see the finished knot system well break it apart in the steps that follow
Image Notes1 1st anchor point a bowline2 loop3 securing knots 2 half hitches4 securing loose end with a fishermans knot5 2nd anchor point (should be round)
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Image Notes1 X marks the spot
Step 1 Initial setupThe first step is to anchor one end of the rope and then loop the rope around a 2nd anchor point
For attaching to the 1st anchor point I chose bowline a close 2 on my list -) There are other instructables on that one so I wont bore you here
The 2nd anchor really should be round because it serves as a pulley in this block and tackle type knot Ive used it on sharp anchor points and it doesnt work as well
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 2 Creating a slip knotTie a slip knot somewhere between the two anchor points Correct placement of the slip knot takes some experience to judge it correctly Typically I place it too close tothe 2nd anchor point and end up with not enough room to work with If the knot ends up too far from 2nd anchor point you can extend the knot by enlarging the loop
Be sure you tie the slip knot as shown You may not be able to untie other knots
In this small example the slip knot is uncharacteristically close to the 1st anchor point
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 3 Tightening and securingThe loose end of the rope that went around the 2nd anchor point goes through the slip knot loop Pull the loose end to the desired tension and secure with two halfhitches
Note To allow better view of the knots the rope isnt really tightened in this example
Step 4 Securing loose endThe final knot is just to secure the loose end somehow I chose a fishermans knot to do this
To tie a fishermans knot the rope goes around twice and goes under the X created by the loops Pull the loose end to tighten Finally slide the knot to put tension onthe half hitches
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Image Notes1 X marks the spot
Step 5 FinishedThere you have it I guarantee that the first time you really use this knot (not just practice) you will be amazed at how well it works and youll wish you knew this knot along time ago You may even come over to my side and declare that is is THE most awesome knot on the planet -)
Enjoy and happy haulingDave
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Related Instructables
TiteTie is theTruckers Knoton Steroids bytitetie
Four knots tomake paracordinto a usefultool byerik_mccray
Modify yourbike rack tocarry a sunfishor other boat byewilhelm
SurfboardHammock byGermy
GiganticHalloweenSpider Web bynolte919
How To Tie ASpiders Hitch(video) by back-cast
Three-hitch mathair ornamentby michiexile TRX from
ParacordChallengeAccepted bythrake
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Carry any Bottle with a JUG KNOT Handleby hpstoutharrow on September 17 2009
Intro Carry any Bottle with a JUG KNOT HandleTie a JUG KNOT around a water bottle soda bottle or aluminum bottle to make a secure carrying strap
Re-purpose any container into a reusable water bottle by adding a convenient carrying strap This Instructable will demonstrate how to tie a JUG knot which like its namesuggests is meant to properly secure around the neck of a container
With some cord and the knowledge of this knot you will be able add a handle lanyard or carabiner loop to any of your favorite beverages to carry them on the go
It works perfectly for those disposable water bottles and who knows once you add some colorful cord to the plain old clear water bottle you just might beinclined to refill it and use it again(Check out pictures 4amp5 below)
In addition to plastic beverage bottles like pop water and sports drinks you can turn those rugged aluminum beer bottles into a backpacking canteen
Those of you familiar with my previous aluminum bottle InstructablesROLLED RIM METAL TUMBLERhttpwwwinstructablescomidAluminum-Bottle-Tumbler-Cup-Cook-PotALUMINUM BOTTLE LIGHTWEIGHT ALCOHOL STOVEhttpwwwinstructablescomidAluminum-Bottle-Alcohol-Stovewill recognize the water canteen shown below as a re-purposed aluminum beer bottle Here I have added a painted surface treatment to turn it into a proper lookingwater bottle More on that in steps 13 14 15
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 1 Getting StartedCord size is important Select a small medium weight cord like the one shown here It is a general purpose camp cord sold at most sporting goods stores (shoelacesmight also work)
Do not use a heavy cord or rope because the larger diameter will not tuck under the relatively small lip at the top of the bottleneck and the bottle will fall out
Also the smaller cord cinches tight on itself and will not loosen accidentally
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 2 Form a BightThe next steps show how to tie a JUG KNOT It is the basic step for adding a carrying strap It is also the anchor point for any additional fancy bottle trussing you maywant to add
JUG KNOT Step 1
Form a Bight in the center of a length of cord Bight is a knot term for a loop or bend in the rope In this case the main Bight in this knot is highlighted with a white mark Imakes it easier to follow its path in these steps
The running ends of the cord should be equal length
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 3 Pull the Bight downPULL the Bight DOWN forming two Loops
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 4 Cross the LoopsCROSS the right Loop OVER the left Loop
Step 5 Pass the Bight under the 1st loopTake the main Bight and pass it UNDER the left Loop
Step 6 Weave the BightWEAVE the Bight OVER the portion of the right Loop and UNDER the portion of the left Loop
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 7 Extend the BightExtend the Bight OVER the outer portion of the right Loop
Step 8 Flip the Right Loop behindAdditional colored identification points have been added to the loops to follow their travel in these next two steps
The right Loop Yellow marker is FLIPPED BEHIND the knot and ends up on the far left side of the knot
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 9 Flip the 2nd loop in frontRaise the green marker (located on what was formerly the left loop) and pull it down and to the right FLIPPING IT IN FRONT of the knot
Note the blue portion of the this loop will pass around the outside of the yellow portion of the first loop
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Image Notes1 Center of knot that will tighten around the bottles neck
Step 10 Remove SlackNote where the blue green amp yellow markers end up
Start to remove the slack in the loops by pulling the original main Bight (white marker top right) and the two free standing ends at the bottom
the bottle neck will pass through the very center of the knot
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Image Notes1 Center of knot that will tighten around the bottles neck
Step 11 Tighten the KnotAfter removing the slack insert the bottle neck and finish tightening
The knot should look like this before slipping it over the bottle
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 12 Secure on bottle neckThis is the finished knot shown on the neck of various containers
The loop end and the two free standing ends can be tied together to create a carrying handle (last picture below)
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 13 Aluminum Bottle Water Bottle
The next few steps show the features of an aluminum beer bottle re-purposed as a water bottle canteen It is one of many containers that can be reused as a camp waterbottle
The bottle was lightly sanded masked and then pained with a hammered finished paint to create an interesting surface texture
Image Notes1 Textured finish paint makes an interesting grip-able surface2 Masked with tape for painting3 Masked with tape for painting
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Image Notes1 Dowel used for holding the bottle during painting
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 14 Tethered Cork StopperUse a wine bottle man made Cork as a stopper for your aluminum water bottleNote Use a cork that was removed from the wine bottle without the corkscrew penetrating through the bottom end of the cork (A hole all the way through the cork willcause it to leak) Use the unpierced end of the cork inside the water bottle
Drill a hole through the sides of the Cork Thread the cord through the hole to the center of the cord Use the cork as the main Bight and tie the Jug knot as shown inthe beginning steps
Now the cork is tethered to the bottle and will not get lost or fall on the ground
A Carabiner clip passes through the other cord end to attache the water bottle to you belt or pack
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 15 Trussed for TransportThis is another hanging method for carrying your aluminum bottle water canteen A Jug knot is tied conventionally around the neck
The running ends of the knot however are pulled down towards the bottom of the bottle A Barrel Knot is tied about 34 the way down the side of the bottle A squareknot is tied on the bottom of the knot to keep the two running ends tight against the sides of the bottle
I like the look of the accent colored cord running down the sides of the bottle and the fact that the bottle hangs from the belt upside down It adds to its uniqueness
The last picture shows another truss variation
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 16 AdvancedBelow is a bottle with some additional trussing You can be creative as you want It all starts with a re-purposed container and the Jug Knot (and enough cord)
Related Instructables
AluminumBottle TumblerCup amp Cook Potfor an AlcoholStove byhpstoutharrow
Water BottleBelt Clip byuglymike Duct Tape
Water Bottle byrabidsquire2
AluminumBottle AlcoholStove byhpstoutharrow
DIYGlass WaterBottle byCulturespy
Solar WaterHeater forBackpackingUsing WaterBottles and aCar Shade bykopomeroy
Duct tape waterbottle holder(Photos) by pinkmarshmallow
How to make aCamelPack withan old plasticbottle bywillrandship
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Basic Knots Guideby zorro3355 on April 29 2008
Intro Basic Knots Guidehi
Step 1 Thumb knotThe most simple knotUsed as a stopper and prevent ropes from fraying
Step 2 Reef KnotUsed to tie two ropes of equal thickness togetherIt is pretty easy to tie and untie but under tentionit may be diffcult to untieIt is also not sutible for smoothropes(egnylon ropes)
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 3 Figure of eightused as a stopperprevent ropes from fraying and its more secure than tumb knot its is also used to tie Caribinas to ropes and is often used in rock climbing
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 4 Timber hitchused for pulling logs
Step 5 Clove hitchUsed to tie a rope onto a pole or logThe pole must be roundThe pole lust be thicker then the rope itself
(greatly used during pioneering)
Step 6 Sheet bandused to tie ropes of different thickness together(works on same thickness of ropes too)
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 7 Sheep shankTo shorten RopesTo prevent middle fraying
Step 8 Slip knotWhippingUsed as a grip for pulling things(when tied on a stick or small pole)(marlin spike hitch)
Related Instructables
Rope Rings byhpstoutharrow
How to Tie aFigure EightKnot byTactical_Pyro
Whippin (WestCountry Style)by tim_n
SurvivalBracelet(Updated) bytevers94
HangmansNoose PackClosure byPopEye42
Turkey on aTripod byhpstoutharrow
SurvivalBracelet II bytevers94 Zigzag Spooling
Paracord (video)by Stormdrane
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
How to Tie a Fire-escape Knotby leonardo ismael on October 16 2007
Intro How to Tie a Fire-escape KnotThis knot is used by firemen in case of fires for example imagine a scene where the ladder on the firetruck messes up but people need to get down a five story buildingor more All they have is a long piece of rope they can safely get down with a secure knot like the fire-escape knot So why not learn it its easy to do and hard to untieif you tie it tightly
This is from the American Boys Handbook
Step 1 Get Your RopeFirst grab a piece of rope and bend it like this to make a loop in it Follow every step to the smallest detail
Step 2 Twist the RopeNow make a twist like this and hold it together
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 3 Pull Through the TwistPull the loop through the twist you just made from underneath
Step 4 Go Over the Split EndNow pull the tail through the loop
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 5 FinallyAnd finally just pull it through as pictured below
Congratulations you just learned the fire-escape knot
Step 6 Same Name Not KnotThis is another knot called the fire-escape knot this shouldnt be your result
Related Instructables
House FireEscape Plan(video) byWhatHappensNowAdvice
ParacordLadder wWooden Rungsby josestude
Bed SheetEscape Rope byjessehensel
rope ladder(glow-in-the-dark version) bymikeasaurus
HeadlockEscape 2(video) byjohnnyrockstah
QuickFirestarter byMattandJora
Trail sauna byjakee117
How to Kill FireAnts andCommitGenocide byKentsOkay
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Climb Safe With A Figure 8 Knotby mattste on February 23 2010
Intro Climb Safe With A Figure 8 Knot There are many things that a beginning climber needs to know including several important knots Perhaps the most essential knot is the Figure 8 Follow Through Thistutorial will demonstrate how to correctly harness yourself to a rope using a Figure 8 Follow Through knot This knot is used primarily by rock climbers to provide a life-line Since this knot is used as a life-line it is very important to be able to tie it correctly (Your life could depend upon it)
Dont worry with this tutorial and about 5 minutes of practice you can have this knot mastered
Things you will need
- Climbing Harness- Climbing Rope
If you are wanting to go climbing and dont already have these items they can be purchased for about $25 each at most outdoor sporting goods stores If you are merelylooking to learn the knot a belt loop and a rope (about five feet long) will do
Image Notes1 Climbing Harness2 Climbing Rope
Step 1 Dealing With The RopeThroughout this tutorial I will be discussing different parts of the rope To make these instructions as clear as possible I will define a few terms that I will use throughoutthe tutorial The Anchor End of the rope will generally be at the top of the images This is the end that would be anchored to the wall or rock and does not move Wewill not be doing much with the anchored end The Tail End of the rope is the opposite end that we will be dealing with I will call this the tail for short
Now that we have some terms to work with lets get started
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 2 Tying The First Figure 8This knot has several parts to it The first part of the knot is just tying a basic figure 8 To tie the first figure 8 there are four simple steps
1 - Using the tail make a loop over the rope (as shown in the first picture) keeping in mind that there should be about 3 ft of slack on the tail end
2 - Wrap the tail back this time go under the anchored end (As shown in the second picture)
3 - Bring the tail down through the first loop (As shown in the third picture)
4 - Finally pull the two ends to make the knot a little bit tighter and easier to deal with (Shown in the fourth picture)
After these four steps you should end up with a knot that resembles a figure 8
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 3 Looping Into The Harness In order to secure the rope to the harness simply thread the tail end of the rope through the front loop in the harness as shown in the picture below This step isobviously very important
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 4 Following Back Through The Figure 8After looping the rope through the harness you have to thread the tail end of the rope back through the knot following the first figure 8 I have divided this process intofive smaller steps in order to make it more clear
1 - Coming form underneath the knot bring the tail up through the near loop and to the left behind the anchored end of the rope (Shown in the first picture)
2 - Wrap the tail around the anchored end back to the right and down through the adjacent loop (Shown in the second picture)
3 - You simply need to bring the tail back over the top of the knot to the left (Shown in the third picture)
4 - Bring the tail end up through the far loop following the anchored end (Shown in the fourth picture)
5 - Finally pull the knot tight (Shown in the fifth picture)
As you can see the first four pictures are simply tracing the knot back through with the tail end
For the last part while you pull the knot tight you may want to make small adjustments and rearrange how it all fits together If the knot does not lay perfectly smoothand tight its NOT a big deal
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 5 Finishing The Knot After completing the Figure 8 knot you will want to somehow secure the tail end of the rope out of the way There are a couple different ways to do this the way that Iwill demonstrate is using whats called a Stopper Knot This secondary knot is similar to a Fishermans knot and is pretty simple I have once again divided thisprocess into several smaller steps
1 - Start by wrapping the tail end around the anchored end (As shown in the first picture)
2 - Wrap the tail back underneath the two vertical segments (As shown in the second picture)
3 - Simply repeat the first two steps wrapping the tail around again (As shown in the third picture)
4 - This step in the fourth picture may look complicated but all you need to do is insert the tail up through the two loops that you have just made
5 - To finish off the knot you will want to slowly pull the tail end while gently pushing the bottom of the stopper knot upwards If you have successfully completed this knotit should look something like the fifth picture
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 6 Ready To Climb Now that you have mastered the Figure 8 knot you can securely harness yourself into a climbing rope Remember there are many other skills that go into setting up ananchor and belaying a climber This tutorial only covers the figure 8 knot For more information there are many great websites that demonstrate how to correctly set up asafe climbing system (Ive posted a few below) If you are a beginning climber I recommend that you read up on a few other climbing techniques Also you shouldprobably go to a climbing wall or gym where there are experienced climbers that can show you the ropes Hopefully this tutorial has been helpful Have fun and be safe
Some useful linkshttpwwwstephenprattnetAnchorsanchorshtmhttpwwwuoregonedu~oppclimbingtopicsanchorshtmlhttpwwwabc-of-rockclimbingcomhowtoclimbingtechniquesasp
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Related Instructables
How to Tie aFigure EightKnot byTactical_Pyro
Paracord KnotDisplay Bord byJamie bagn
Basic KnotsGuide byzorro3355
How to Climb aTree (withprussiks) bystasterisk
How to climb atree (using onlyrope) thefunsimple wayby louieaw
How to get arope into a tree(withoutclimbing it) byvitex
How to tievarious knots byadaviel
How to make arope swing byjdub0928
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Turks Head Knots on a Bottleby sklnxbones on July 6 2010
Intro Turks Head Knots on a BottleThis is the finished project A bottle decorated with three Turks Head Knots There are only three knots on this bottle The RED and the BLUE knots are each a 20 Bightby 3 Lead Turks Head Knots The WHITE knot is a 20 Bight by 19 Lead Turks Head Knot
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 1 Supplies
Cord Lots and Lots of cord I cant tell you how much each bottle is differentBottle Washed and Dried inside and out Make sure to remove all water spotsThreaded Needle Cord screws into the threads at the base of the needlePegs I use brass rivets used as a map to tie the Turks Head KnotsHole Punch Used to punch holes in the painters tape to hold the pegsPainters Tape To hold the pegs in place and to make your map for the Turks Head KnotsMarker To write on the painters tapeCloth Towel To remove finger prints and dirt from your bottleKrazy Glue or Super Glue This is used to secure the knots in place to the bottle
OPTIONAL BUT HIGHLY RECOMMENDEDI use the Turks Head Cookbook from KnotToolcom
Step 2 PreparationYou will need to find a bottle you like I used an empty instant tea bottle of course washed and dried (I like to put the bottle in the oven for a few minutes to dry the insidewithout water spots Take off the lid and do not put lid in the oven) Now measure the circumference of the bottle Take a cord and tightly wrap the cord around the bottleMark where the ends meet and use a ruler to measure the length of the cord For my instant tea bottle the circumference is 27cm I know from past knots that I have tiedthat I want my knot to have 20 Bights in the top and bottom (bands) knots I am going to use the Bights in the (bands) knots to tie the middle knot Now divide the numberof Bights (20) into the size of the circumference (27) to get the space between each Bight (135) With me so far
Now take two pieces of painters tape using a ruler measure out the length of the circumference and mark the length on the both pieces of tape Next you will mark thespace between each Bight on the tape
Step 3 Adding the PegsI like to use pegs when tying Turks Head Knots it just makes tying the knot easier
These are what I use for pegs
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 4 Adding Pegs to the TapeNow take a hole punch to cut holes in the tape where the lines meet You will place the pegs in the holes
Insert a peg in each hole and carefully stick the first piece of tape to the bottle
Step 5 Adding the 2nd row of pegsNow do the same thing with the second piece of tape The numbers on each piece of tape must line up
This picture shows you what you should have now This odd looking thing will be your map to tie the Turks Head Knot And this is the end of Step 1
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 6 Tying the first Turks Head KnotUsing the Turks Head Cookbook follow the numbers going over and under as indicated in the book I chose a 20 Bight by 3 Lead knot which will give me a nice bandaround the bottle Once the ends meet you have made one complete knot Tape the running end of your cord and start removing the pegs and the tape
Step 7 Remove the pegs and the tapeBe careful not to untie the knot as you remove the pegs and tape from the bottle Continue to remove all the pegs and remove the tape from the bottle At this point theknot will be very loose and will need to be tightened up
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 8 Remove the slack from the knotHere you can see just how much the knot expanded Starting with the standing end begin to pull the slack out of the knot going towards the running end of the cordDo not expect to pull all the slack out at once You may have to make 3 - 5 attempts at removing the slack out of the knot DO NOT remove all of the slack out of the knotIn order to make the bands we will have to triple the Turks Head Knot We will do this by following the knot three times The threaded needle will really come in handyhere
Step 9 Triple the KnotOnce you have made three passes of the Turks Head Knot use your needle to go under your knot about half the circumference and cut the cord The knot will be tightenough to hide the tail in placeTIP I carefully add a couple of drops of super glue UNDER the band to hold them in place and keep them from sliding around in the nextsteps A drop or two in 3 or 4 places around the band should be enough
Step 10 Add the second knotNow repeat this whole step for the second bandWhen tying the second band you must make sure the Bights line up to the first band This is crucial for the next stepWipe down the bottle to make sure all your finger prints and adhesive from the tape are all removed You want to make sure your bottle is clean at this point Any dirt orfinger prints left on the bottle will be almost impossible to remove From this point on we will use gloves when tying our last knot
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 11 Maping the Top KnotStick a piece of painters tape on top of your first band leaving the bottom of the knot exposedUse a marker to count the number of Bights in your knot Instead of using the pegs we are going to use the Bights to tie our next Turks Head Knot
Step 12 Mapping the Bottom KnotDo the same thing for the bottom band but you must make sure your numbers on top and bottom line up So 1 on top should be the same position as 1 on the bottom
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 13 Adding the last knotAgain using the Turks Head Cookbook and the threaded needle you are going to follow the instructions going over and under as indicated in the book Be sure to usegloves when ever you handle the bottle
Step 14 Thats ItFor this Turks Head Knot I am using a 20 Bight by 19 Lead knot
Because of the amount of cord you are working with your cord will get twisted and knotted You will have to un-twist the cord often Its a pain in the rear but it has to bedone And it has to be done alot
Continue to tie the knot until you finish the knot If you have the cord and the patience you can double or triple the knot When you are done use your needle to hide theends under your bands Cut the ends and your DONE
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Related Instructables
Monkeys FistFloatingKeychain byjokerlz
How To Make ATurks headKnot WithParacord byDoggie Stylish
Tying Trivetsout of Rope forHoliday Gifts bykylemarsh
Paracord KnotDisplay Bord byJamie bagn
How to Make ATurks Head(Photos) bymchs60chip
A pocket full ofknots byKiteman
Monkeys fistknot AND themonkey byjonathan111
TiteTie is theTruckers Knoton Steroids bytitetie
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Larks head noose -- an easy useful knot that tightens and loosensby Larry Breed on February 19 2009
Intro Larks head noose -- an easy useful knot that tightens and loosensI thought I knew all the basic knots but then I was taught this incredibly useful simple knot Its good for tying up the neck of a bag that you want to repeatedly open andsecurely close Its good for tying around a springy bundle that will need tightening and retightening And its easy to undo
Ive looked at knot literature but havent found a name for this so I named it The basic knot is well known its called a larks head Since all Ive done is to slip the twoends through the larks head to make a noose I call it that
WARNING Dont use this knot when human safety would depend on it Climbers and mountaineers have well-tested reliable knots for such situations
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Image Notes1 To tighten further step on this side of the larks head and pull the free ends
Step 1 Double the cord overThe larks head noose requires enough cord to go twice around your bundle plus a foot or two Find the center and double it over Sailors call this a bight
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 2 Form the larks headComing from below the bight hook your thumb and forefinger over the two sides Reach outward and downward and pinch your fingertips together underneath thedoubled cord
Youve made a larks head Move the crossing cord a little farther from your hand so theres a clear opening through the two half-loops
Step 3 Form the nooseSlip the two ends of the cord through the opening we were just talking about Pull the larks head tight so it grips the two cords Find something that needs constrictingand put the noose around it
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 4 Tightening retightening and lockingSlide the knot against the bundle If its not tight enough to keep from slipping tighten it by holding it in one hand and tugging on the cords one at a time with the otherhand Notice that you can slide the knot out again for instance to re-open the bag you just tied shut For some applications this may be as tight as you need it
A springy bundle probably still feels loose If so compress the bundle and get a new grip on the cords Rest your foot on the bundle on the cords nearest the larks headand pull to slide the larks head tighter
To make the knot more permanent you can lock it Make an overhand in the cord ends (Exactly like the first step in tying shoelaces) With your foot still on the bundlepull on the cords and move your hands apart until youre pulling in opposite directions You have just locked the larks head and you can trust it to stay that way()
But lets say that later on you want to loosen the locked knot Again put your foot on the bundle and cords nearest the larks head hold the two cord ends together andpull This makes a little slack between the overhand and the larks head so you can untie the overhand
In twine or small string the locking overhand knot may be difficult to undo Use a shoelace knot instead of an overhand and itll unlock easily
() If youre using slippery cord like polypropylene an overhand may not lock securely You may want to tie another overhand knot For added security wrap a shortlength of duct tape around the two cords close to the knot
Image Notes1 To tighten further step on this side of the larks head and pull the free ends
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Related Instructables
TRX fromParacordChallengeAccepted bythrake
A pocket full ofknots byKiteman
Lens CapLanyard by~teknoarsonist~ how to tie a
noose byawesume
AdjustableParacordGlassesLanyard byjdtwelve12
HangmansNoose PackClosure byPopEye42
Paraleash - ADog LeashFrom Paracordby The Ideanator
How to make arugged andhandy ParacordBelt by Jake22
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 5 Count your knotsOnce you have 10 snake knots youre almost done Youll notice from the photos of both sides of the lanyard that one side has the snake knots alternating all the waydown and the other has a set of parallel knots at the top and botton of the sequence of knots Youll always have those at the start and finish of the snake knots I preferto have them end up on the same side of the lanyard so one side appears to have a more uniform look but its not required
Step 6 Trim and melt the excess paracordUse the scissors to trim off the excess cord and quickly melt the ends with a lighter so they dont fray
Step 7 Youre doneYou can make a range of variations using less or more cordknots Shorten the loop for a double ended key chain or make the loop longer for use as a neck lanyard aLanyard Break-Away Connector could be added for the safety conscious You can also add a wooden bead skull cord lock etc Visit my blog page for more knot relatedprojects links and resources Stormdranes Blog You can find ideas for other geargadgets to attach to your lanyard on EDC Forums
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Related Instructables
Paracord ChainSinnet FastDeploy BoonieHatband (video)by Stormdrane
Cross KnotParacordLanyard byStormdrane
Zigzag SpoolingParacord (video)by Stormdrane
SurvivalBracelet II bytevers94
SurvivalBracelet(Updated) bytevers94
Cobra WeaveKey Fob bytevers94
ParacordBoonie HatWrap (video) byStormdrane
Paracord KnotDisplay Bord byJamie bagn
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
How to tie various knotsby adaviel on September 7 2009
Intro How to tie various knotsKnots as a way of joining rope without special equipment are useful in many situations On a sailboat knots are essential both for daily use and for emergency repairsThis instructable describes several different common knots eg
Sheet Bend - to tie two lines togetherBowline - to make a loopReef Knot - to fasten a bundle of materialFishermans Bend - to secure a line to a post or ring
These knots are good for regular rope - braided or 3-strand polyester or natural fibre (hemp sisal) Monofilament (fishing line) or steel cable performs better with differentknots
Knots are typically quite a lot weaker than straight rope - when rope goes around a tight radius such as in a knot the outside is under more tension than the insideSplices (which require special tools and are time-consuming to make) are stronger so permanent fittings usually have eye-splices
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 1 Sheet BendThe sheet bend is used to tie two lines together It is perhaps the most generally useful knot of all When used to tie a line to itself making a loop it is called a bowlineThe strain is taken on the ropes in the middle - not the one coming out the side
How the knot is made is not critical - it is the final shape that is important One can make the flat loop first and work the other rope around it Or one can make thecrossed loop first - required when tying a bowline
The two images show front and back views of the same knot
AdvantagesEasy to makeEasy to undo when tension is removedDoes not easily capsize
DisadvantagesHard to make under loadDangerous to make under heavy load
UsesJoining two equally-sized ropesExtending a towline or stern line
Method 1 the same as a bowline
Method 2 starting with the flat loop
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 2 Double Sheet BendThe double sheet bend is used to tie two lines of different thickness - but not too different It is the same as a normal sheet bend but with an extra turn of the thinner ropearound the flat loop in the thickerThe load goes on the line through the flat loop not the one that comes out the side of the knot
UsesSecuring a heaving line to a tow lineExtending a stern line if you dont have enough line of one thickness
Step 3 BowlineThe bowline is really a special case of the sheet bend but it it tied at the end of a rope to make a loop
The photos show the completed loop and closeups of the front and back of the actual knot Note that it is the same as the sheet bend - but it must be made the right wayround This loop does not tighten in use The knot is quite easy to untie once the load is removed With practice it is very quick to tie
Some usesSecuring a dinghy line to a railing or stanchionSecuring an anchor line to an anchorTie a jib sheet to the sailTie a mooring line around a rock or treeTie a float to an anchor triplineUse one in each line to tie two ropes of very different sizes - eg a throwing line to a large tow ropeDisadvantages the knot must be completely made before it will take any strain - it is hard to tie if there is already a load on the rope
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Linked bowlines
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 4 Bowline on the BightA bowline on the bight is a bowline tied in a loop of rope (neither end is needed) The shape is the same as a bowline made with a double line but the middle of thebight forms the loop around the standing part
UsesAn impromptu bosuns chair - to sit in while being transferred between two boats at sea
Step 5 Clove HitchThe clove hitch can be made when you only have the bight (the middle) of a rope not the ends
UsesSecuring a burgee pole to a burgee halyard (a continuous loop of thin line)Securing a tiller from swinging
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 6 Round Turn and Two Half-HitchesThis is a knot used to secure a line to a ring or bar Wind a couple of turns around the bar then secure the end with two hitches around the standing part (this looks like aclove hitch when done)
AdvantagesCan be made under load - it is easy to take turns around the bar while maintaining tension on the ropeStrong - provided the bar is thicker than the rope the rope is not weakened by sharp bendsDisadvantagesThe end tends to work loose
UsesSecuring a line to a mooring ring or samson post
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 7 Fishermans BendThe fishermans bend is the same as the round turn and two half hitches except that the first hitch is looped under the round turn This uses the tension on the rope tosecure the end from working loose
AdvantagesSecure against working loose
DisadvantagesHard to make under tensionHard to undo under tensionMay seize up under load when wet making it hard to undo
UsesSecuring mooring line to ringSecuring fender lines to rail
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 8 Studsail BendThe studsail bend is like the fishermans bend but the second hitch is also secured under the round turn making it even more secure against working loose when undertension
AdvantagesVery secure against working looseDisadvantagesHard to make under tensionHard to undo under tension
Step 9 Figure-8 KnotThe figure-eight knot is used to prevent an end of rope from passing through a block (pulley) Sometimes called a stopper knot
The double figure-8 knot is used in rock climbing as an alternative to a bowline to secure a climbing harness to the end of a safety rope The double knot is made bymaking a single knot then tracing back around the knot with the free end after passing it around the harness loop
AdvantagesEasy to verify by inspectionNot prone to work loose
DisadvantagesSlow to make and undoCannot be made under load
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 10 Prussic KnotThe prussic knot may be used as a climbing ascender - when made around a vertical rope as shown downwards tension on the ends locks the knot while release oftension allows it to be slid up the rope A pair of prussic knots on foot loops may be used in tandem to climb a rope
UsesClimbing a ropeTaking up tension to free a riding turn on a winch
Step 11 Reef KnotThe reef knot or square knot is used to tie a bundle of material together It must be made around something - it should not be used to tie two free ropes togetherbecause it can easily capsizeIt should not be used to make a loop unless it can be tensioned around a solid object It should not be used around a person - use a bowline instead A capsized reefknot will slip easily and could constrict and cause severe injury
UsesReefing a sail (tying the unused portion around a spar)Securing a furled sail to a spar (sail ties)Wrapping a parcelTying shoelaces
AdvantagesMay be made under moderate load
DisadvantagesCapsizes (works free) if used improperlyCan seize up under load when wet
Tying the knot
Capsizing a reef knot
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 12 CleatsThis is not a knot but is very common on boatsThe first picture shows a rope cleated normally The second shows one with a final locking turn - the last turn is twisted before placing over the cleat so that the tensionon the rope helps secure the free end
When working with ropes under tension take a turn or two around a winch or cleat before trying to secure the end with a knot The load on the free end falls exponentiallywith each turn taken Severe injury can result if a finger or other body part is caught in a loop of rope or between a rope and another object
Step 13 Practice themIt is sometimes useful to be able to tie knots in the dark or as in this video behind your back
Related Instructables
AThird Hand forSailing or OtherThings by WadeTarzia
Paracord KnotDisplay Bord byJamie bagn
Trip LogOutriggerCanoe Sailingthe CaliforniaChannel Islandsby TimAnderson
How to Tie aFigure EightKnot byTactical_Pyro
How to build apirate ship bymdelaney3
Build a ShortDragon (16 foot3-BoardOutriggerSailing Canoe)by Wade Tarzia
repairing aheadsail by josh
How to get arope into a tree(withoutclimbing it) byvitex
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
How to Tie the Lanyard Knotby eddy14777 on January 31 2010
Intro How to Tie the Lanyard KnotMany people including myself have had trouble following the Stormdrane youtube video on tying the lanyard knot so i have done some research and found the solution
Image Notes1 Finished knot
Step 1 MaterialsAll you need is a reasonable length of para cord or whatever you wish to use
Image Notes1 One reasonable amount
Step 2 First StepThe first thing you are going to do is to make a bight that leaves you with to congruent endsThen you are going to put your ring finger through the bight
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Image Notes1 Close enough2 Bight
Step 3 Starting the KnotMake a loop just like the one in the picture and place it over the top strandBring the top strand under the bottom strand
Image Notes1 Notice the way the loop is done2 Top strand
Image Notes1 Bottom strand2 Top strand is under
Step 4 The Most Important PartNow you take the top stand from the previous picture and feed it over the first part of the loop under itself and back over the remainder of the loop
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Image Notes1 Under me2 Top strand3 This should make a diamond type shape
Step 5 DoublingNow take the bottom stand and take it around the part of the top strand nearest to the bight and than come up through the diamond shape in the middleDo the same for the top strand
Image Notes1 Top strand
Image Notes1 Both through the diamond
Step 6 FinishingWhen you take it off your finger it should look like thisWork out the slack by pulling on the bight and the two strands
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Image Notes1 Finished knot
Related Instructables
Cross KnotParacordLanyard byStormdrane
Celtic ButtonKnot (video) byStormdrane
Paracord wristlanyard madewith the snakeknot byStormdrane
Paracord ChainSinnet FastDeploy BoonieHatband (video)by Stormdrane
Zigzag SpoolingParacord (video)by Stormdrane
ParacordBoonie HatWrap (video) byStormdrane
Paracord IDbadge Lanyardby Flahusky
Cobra WeaveKey Fob bytevers94
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Four knots to make paracord into a useful toolby erik_mccray on March 27 2010
Authorerik_mccrayI am an ex-fabricator that is now a stay at home dad I love my new job but I do miss making stuff I love this site amp I am getting involved as a way to keep myskills upOn top of fad work I have also run two small business in the past One was custom sewing amp the other was as a small engine mechanicI have two votec degrees one in metal fabrication amp the other is in engine repairI look forward to getting to know everyone here
Intro Four knots to make paracord into a useful toolParacord is an awesome multitool used everywhere from the wild blue yonder to the deepest caverns But like any good tool it is only as good as the knowledge the userhas about the tool With most people out there using bungee cords amp ratchet straps it seems that paracord is being used for nothing more than friendship bracelets forgrown men This is a shame because for less then the price of a few cheap bungee cords amp some to short to be helpful straps You can get yourself hundreds of feet ofparacord
The key to getting the most out of the paracord is good knot work The first thing you need to know is what makes a good knot One is that the knot is easy amp quick to tieamp more impotant is that the knot is easy amp quick to untie The hitch class of knots is by far the best group of knots that the average person could know The four mostuseful hitch knots are the half hitch a quick simple knot that forms the base for many other knots the inline half hitch allowing you to get the most out of one length ofparacord the slippery hitch that gives you both on the fly control over tension on your paracord but also an adjustable loop that will not change unless you want it amp theinline truckers hitch instantly doubling the your pulling power
Step 1 To get started lets get some terminology that will be used defined
line= the paracord
Main line= the part of the paracord doing the work for example holding down your tarp or the long part of the paracord
Mid line= the middle of the length of the paracord
End line= the unused length of paracord or the short length of paracord
Step 2 The half hitch The half hitch is a simple way to secure a line to an anchor point like the tie down points in most trucks A half hitch is a constrictor knot meaning that the harder you pullon the line the tighter the knots grip gets Another common constrictor knot is the slip knot
Step 1 wrap your line around your anchor point Step 2 wrap the end line around the main line
Step 3 pass the end line threw the end line side of the newly formed loop
step 4 now take the slack out of the knot
step 5 to make sure the knot is secure tie another half hitch to the main line This knot is called adouble half hitch
step 6 another useful thing that can be done with the half hitch is that instead of repeating the wrap on the main line but repeating it on what you are tying to the half hitchcan be used to bind something like a stack of 2x4s
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Image Notes1 End line2 Main line3 step 1
Image Notes1 Step 2
Image Notes1 passing thew the end line side of the loop2 step 3
Image Notes1 step 5
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Image Notes1 step 6
Step 3 The mid line half hitch The mid line half hitch is for when the length of line is to long for the job at hand amp you dont want to have to cut the line to size or you are using multiple anchor pointswith one length of line
Step 1 double up the line at the point in the length you wish to make the knot
Step 2 wrap the doubled up portion of line around your anchor point The doubled up length is now now the end line
Step 3 now tie just as you did for the regular half hitch repeat the knot to make a double half hitch for security
Image Notes1 A mid line double half hitch
Image Notes1 step 1
Image Notes1 The end line2 step 2
Image Notes1 Step 3
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 4 The slippery hitch The slippery hitch is a great knot for adjusting tension on the main line or for having an adjustable fixed loop To adjust the knot simply slide the knot up or down the mainline
Step 1 wrap your line around the anchor point or just double over the line to form a loop
Step 2 wrap the end line around the main line three times Wrapping in the direction of the anchor point or loop
Step 3 put together the two lines making up the loop amp wrap the two lines one time with the end line
Step 4 pass the end line thew the last loop formed covering the two lined of the loop
Step 5 pull the knot tite
step 6 to adjust the size of the loop or main line tension grab the knot amp slide it up or down the main line
Image Notes1 grab just the knot its self to adjust it2 step 5
Image Notes1 step 1
Image Notes1 step 2
Image Notes1 step 3
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Image Notes1 step 4
Image Notes1 grab just the knot its self to adjust it2 step 5
Image Notes1 same knot as in last pic Just slid up2 step 6
Step 5 The mid line truchers hitch The truckers hitch is a great way to double the pulling force on a line There are many ways to tie this knot the problem with most of them is that at some point you aregoing to have to pass the end line through a loop on the main line that is acting like a pulley to double your pulling force this is great if you are making the knot close tothe end of your line but if you are using a 300 length of line amp want to make the knot in the first ten feet having to pass 290 of line thew a loop is a pain But with a fewhalf hitches you will not have to pass the end line threw any loop on the main line
step 1 wrap your line around the anchor point then double over your end line laying the top of the loop over the main line
Step 2 double up your main line amp lay the loop over the loop made by the end line
step 3 in main line above the knot twist in a loop
step 4 put main line loop thew the loop made in step 3 amp pull this loop tight over your main line loop forming a half hitch Repeat step 3 amp 4 to make a doublehalf hitch
step 5 To use the knot just pull down on the end line to put tension on the main line
step 6 after you have the main line snug tie a mid line double half hitch around the two lines forming the loop at the end of the main line with the end line
step 7 Tie a double half hitch with the end line around the end loop of the mid line half hitch of step 6 using the same method as used in steps 3 amp 4
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Image Notes1 the end of step 6
Image Notes1 main line2 end line3 step 1
Image Notes1 main line loop2 end line loop
Image Notes1 step 3
Image Notes1 step 4
Image Notes1 step 4 at the end with a double half hitch on the main loop
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Image Notes1 pull here2 step 5
Image Notes1 the start of step 6
Image Notes1 the end of step 6
Image Notes1 step 72 now the rest of the line is free to do more work
Related Instructables
Paracord KnotDisplay Bord byJamie bagn
ChokelessAdjustableParacord DogLeash byPizzaman101
ParacordLadder wWooden Rungsby josestude
tie a paracordshackle grip byitri45
ParacordPrussik Belt byJavaNut13
TiteTie is theTruckers Knoton Steroids bytitetie
ID Lanyard(Photos) byeschmunk
Dog Toys forHeavy Chewersby J3443RY
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Figure 8 knot and double 8 knotby jonathan111 on November 28 2007
Intro Figure 8 knot and double 8 knotI will show you how to tie a figure 8 knot and a figure 8 follow through
Step 1 Stating the knotThis is a simple knot so just follow the pictures
Step 2 Finishing the knotCross the string under and then push it through the hole Pull tightly unless you are going to do the follow through and leave it somewhat loose
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 3 The follow through knotThe follow through knot should be tied around something brought back and followed through the path of the 8 knot Look at the pictures Basically follow through the 8knot backwards
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Related Instructables
Climb Safe WithA Figure 8Knot by mattste A pocket full of
knots byKiteman
How to Tie aFigure EightKnot byTactical_Pyro
Paracord KnotDisplay Bord byJamie bagn
Cross KnotParacordLanyard byStormdrane
How to Tie aFire-escapeKnot by leonardoismael
Truckers HitchTHE mostawesome knoton the planetby schneidp20
Paracord ZipperPuller byrepeet13
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Truckers Hitch THE most awesome knot on the planetby schneidp20 on October 12 2008
Authorschneidp20I like building stuff Trouble is there just isnt enough time to build everything Sigh
Intro Truckers Hitch THE most awesome knot on the planetYes I know that there are plenty of other cool knots out there many of which I literally couldnt live wo I rock climb However this knot is unlike any other Plus Ineeded a grabber for my Instructable -) (BTW this ISNT a climbing knot) And in truth it isnt a knot by itself but rather a system of common knots
Have you ever tried to tie something down for transporting but just couldnt get the lines tight andor during transport the lines would continually loosen Then this is theknot for you I learned this knot back in the 70s when specialty car racks and ratchet straps were rare or unheard of I initially used it to tie a canoe on a car rack bothattaching to the rack as well as the lines to the bow and stern of the canoe Even with all the new gizmos available today this knot still shines because all you need is arope and ropes dont hum in the wind like straps
The unique aspect of this knot is that it gives you a 2-1 mechanical advantage when tightening the rope Be careful though You can actually damage some thingsbecause of the mechanical advantage This knot holds fast and is easy to untie hallmark traits of any good knot
Below you see the finished knot system well break it apart in the steps that follow
Image Notes1 1st anchor point a bowline2 loop3 securing knots 2 half hitches4 securing loose end with a fishermans knot5 2nd anchor point (should be round)
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Image Notes1 X marks the spot
Step 1 Initial setupThe first step is to anchor one end of the rope and then loop the rope around a 2nd anchor point
For attaching to the 1st anchor point I chose bowline a close 2 on my list -) There are other instructables on that one so I wont bore you here
The 2nd anchor really should be round because it serves as a pulley in this block and tackle type knot Ive used it on sharp anchor points and it doesnt work as well
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 2 Creating a slip knotTie a slip knot somewhere between the two anchor points Correct placement of the slip knot takes some experience to judge it correctly Typically I place it too close tothe 2nd anchor point and end up with not enough room to work with If the knot ends up too far from 2nd anchor point you can extend the knot by enlarging the loop
Be sure you tie the slip knot as shown You may not be able to untie other knots
In this small example the slip knot is uncharacteristically close to the 1st anchor point
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 3 Tightening and securingThe loose end of the rope that went around the 2nd anchor point goes through the slip knot loop Pull the loose end to the desired tension and secure with two halfhitches
Note To allow better view of the knots the rope isnt really tightened in this example
Step 4 Securing loose endThe final knot is just to secure the loose end somehow I chose a fishermans knot to do this
To tie a fishermans knot the rope goes around twice and goes under the X created by the loops Pull the loose end to tighten Finally slide the knot to put tension onthe half hitches
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Image Notes1 X marks the spot
Step 5 FinishedThere you have it I guarantee that the first time you really use this knot (not just practice) you will be amazed at how well it works and youll wish you knew this knot along time ago You may even come over to my side and declare that is is THE most awesome knot on the planet -)
Enjoy and happy haulingDave
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Related Instructables
TiteTie is theTruckers Knoton Steroids bytitetie
Four knots tomake paracordinto a usefultool byerik_mccray
Modify yourbike rack tocarry a sunfishor other boat byewilhelm
SurfboardHammock byGermy
GiganticHalloweenSpider Web bynolte919
How To Tie ASpiders Hitch(video) by back-cast
Three-hitch mathair ornamentby michiexile TRX from
ParacordChallengeAccepted bythrake
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Carry any Bottle with a JUG KNOT Handleby hpstoutharrow on September 17 2009
Intro Carry any Bottle with a JUG KNOT HandleTie a JUG KNOT around a water bottle soda bottle or aluminum bottle to make a secure carrying strap
Re-purpose any container into a reusable water bottle by adding a convenient carrying strap This Instructable will demonstrate how to tie a JUG knot which like its namesuggests is meant to properly secure around the neck of a container
With some cord and the knowledge of this knot you will be able add a handle lanyard or carabiner loop to any of your favorite beverages to carry them on the go
It works perfectly for those disposable water bottles and who knows once you add some colorful cord to the plain old clear water bottle you just might beinclined to refill it and use it again(Check out pictures 4amp5 below)
In addition to plastic beverage bottles like pop water and sports drinks you can turn those rugged aluminum beer bottles into a backpacking canteen
Those of you familiar with my previous aluminum bottle InstructablesROLLED RIM METAL TUMBLERhttpwwwinstructablescomidAluminum-Bottle-Tumbler-Cup-Cook-PotALUMINUM BOTTLE LIGHTWEIGHT ALCOHOL STOVEhttpwwwinstructablescomidAluminum-Bottle-Alcohol-Stovewill recognize the water canteen shown below as a re-purposed aluminum beer bottle Here I have added a painted surface treatment to turn it into a proper lookingwater bottle More on that in steps 13 14 15
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 1 Getting StartedCord size is important Select a small medium weight cord like the one shown here It is a general purpose camp cord sold at most sporting goods stores (shoelacesmight also work)
Do not use a heavy cord or rope because the larger diameter will not tuck under the relatively small lip at the top of the bottleneck and the bottle will fall out
Also the smaller cord cinches tight on itself and will not loosen accidentally
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 2 Form a BightThe next steps show how to tie a JUG KNOT It is the basic step for adding a carrying strap It is also the anchor point for any additional fancy bottle trussing you maywant to add
JUG KNOT Step 1
Form a Bight in the center of a length of cord Bight is a knot term for a loop or bend in the rope In this case the main Bight in this knot is highlighted with a white mark Imakes it easier to follow its path in these steps
The running ends of the cord should be equal length
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 3 Pull the Bight downPULL the Bight DOWN forming two Loops
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 4 Cross the LoopsCROSS the right Loop OVER the left Loop
Step 5 Pass the Bight under the 1st loopTake the main Bight and pass it UNDER the left Loop
Step 6 Weave the BightWEAVE the Bight OVER the portion of the right Loop and UNDER the portion of the left Loop
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 7 Extend the BightExtend the Bight OVER the outer portion of the right Loop
Step 8 Flip the Right Loop behindAdditional colored identification points have been added to the loops to follow their travel in these next two steps
The right Loop Yellow marker is FLIPPED BEHIND the knot and ends up on the far left side of the knot
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 9 Flip the 2nd loop in frontRaise the green marker (located on what was formerly the left loop) and pull it down and to the right FLIPPING IT IN FRONT of the knot
Note the blue portion of the this loop will pass around the outside of the yellow portion of the first loop
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Image Notes1 Center of knot that will tighten around the bottles neck
Step 10 Remove SlackNote where the blue green amp yellow markers end up
Start to remove the slack in the loops by pulling the original main Bight (white marker top right) and the two free standing ends at the bottom
the bottle neck will pass through the very center of the knot
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Image Notes1 Center of knot that will tighten around the bottles neck
Step 11 Tighten the KnotAfter removing the slack insert the bottle neck and finish tightening
The knot should look like this before slipping it over the bottle
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 12 Secure on bottle neckThis is the finished knot shown on the neck of various containers
The loop end and the two free standing ends can be tied together to create a carrying handle (last picture below)
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 13 Aluminum Bottle Water Bottle
The next few steps show the features of an aluminum beer bottle re-purposed as a water bottle canteen It is one of many containers that can be reused as a camp waterbottle
The bottle was lightly sanded masked and then pained with a hammered finished paint to create an interesting surface texture
Image Notes1 Textured finish paint makes an interesting grip-able surface2 Masked with tape for painting3 Masked with tape for painting
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Image Notes1 Dowel used for holding the bottle during painting
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 14 Tethered Cork StopperUse a wine bottle man made Cork as a stopper for your aluminum water bottleNote Use a cork that was removed from the wine bottle without the corkscrew penetrating through the bottom end of the cork (A hole all the way through the cork willcause it to leak) Use the unpierced end of the cork inside the water bottle
Drill a hole through the sides of the Cork Thread the cord through the hole to the center of the cord Use the cork as the main Bight and tie the Jug knot as shown inthe beginning steps
Now the cork is tethered to the bottle and will not get lost or fall on the ground
A Carabiner clip passes through the other cord end to attache the water bottle to you belt or pack
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 15 Trussed for TransportThis is another hanging method for carrying your aluminum bottle water canteen A Jug knot is tied conventionally around the neck
The running ends of the knot however are pulled down towards the bottom of the bottle A Barrel Knot is tied about 34 the way down the side of the bottle A squareknot is tied on the bottom of the knot to keep the two running ends tight against the sides of the bottle
I like the look of the accent colored cord running down the sides of the bottle and the fact that the bottle hangs from the belt upside down It adds to its uniqueness
The last picture shows another truss variation
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 16 AdvancedBelow is a bottle with some additional trussing You can be creative as you want It all starts with a re-purposed container and the Jug Knot (and enough cord)
Related Instructables
AluminumBottle TumblerCup amp Cook Potfor an AlcoholStove byhpstoutharrow
Water BottleBelt Clip byuglymike Duct Tape
Water Bottle byrabidsquire2
AluminumBottle AlcoholStove byhpstoutharrow
DIYGlass WaterBottle byCulturespy
Solar WaterHeater forBackpackingUsing WaterBottles and aCar Shade bykopomeroy
Duct tape waterbottle holder(Photos) by pinkmarshmallow
How to make aCamelPack withan old plasticbottle bywillrandship
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Basic Knots Guideby zorro3355 on April 29 2008
Intro Basic Knots Guidehi
Step 1 Thumb knotThe most simple knotUsed as a stopper and prevent ropes from fraying
Step 2 Reef KnotUsed to tie two ropes of equal thickness togetherIt is pretty easy to tie and untie but under tentionit may be diffcult to untieIt is also not sutible for smoothropes(egnylon ropes)
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 3 Figure of eightused as a stopperprevent ropes from fraying and its more secure than tumb knot its is also used to tie Caribinas to ropes and is often used in rock climbing
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 4 Timber hitchused for pulling logs
Step 5 Clove hitchUsed to tie a rope onto a pole or logThe pole must be roundThe pole lust be thicker then the rope itself
(greatly used during pioneering)
Step 6 Sheet bandused to tie ropes of different thickness together(works on same thickness of ropes too)
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 7 Sheep shankTo shorten RopesTo prevent middle fraying
Step 8 Slip knotWhippingUsed as a grip for pulling things(when tied on a stick or small pole)(marlin spike hitch)
Related Instructables
Rope Rings byhpstoutharrow
How to Tie aFigure EightKnot byTactical_Pyro
Whippin (WestCountry Style)by tim_n
SurvivalBracelet(Updated) bytevers94
HangmansNoose PackClosure byPopEye42
Turkey on aTripod byhpstoutharrow
SurvivalBracelet II bytevers94 Zigzag Spooling
Paracord (video)by Stormdrane
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
How to Tie a Fire-escape Knotby leonardo ismael on October 16 2007
Intro How to Tie a Fire-escape KnotThis knot is used by firemen in case of fires for example imagine a scene where the ladder on the firetruck messes up but people need to get down a five story buildingor more All they have is a long piece of rope they can safely get down with a secure knot like the fire-escape knot So why not learn it its easy to do and hard to untieif you tie it tightly
This is from the American Boys Handbook
Step 1 Get Your RopeFirst grab a piece of rope and bend it like this to make a loop in it Follow every step to the smallest detail
Step 2 Twist the RopeNow make a twist like this and hold it together
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 3 Pull Through the TwistPull the loop through the twist you just made from underneath
Step 4 Go Over the Split EndNow pull the tail through the loop
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 5 FinallyAnd finally just pull it through as pictured below
Congratulations you just learned the fire-escape knot
Step 6 Same Name Not KnotThis is another knot called the fire-escape knot this shouldnt be your result
Related Instructables
House FireEscape Plan(video) byWhatHappensNowAdvice
ParacordLadder wWooden Rungsby josestude
Bed SheetEscape Rope byjessehensel
rope ladder(glow-in-the-dark version) bymikeasaurus
HeadlockEscape 2(video) byjohnnyrockstah
QuickFirestarter byMattandJora
Trail sauna byjakee117
How to Kill FireAnts andCommitGenocide byKentsOkay
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Climb Safe With A Figure 8 Knotby mattste on February 23 2010
Intro Climb Safe With A Figure 8 Knot There are many things that a beginning climber needs to know including several important knots Perhaps the most essential knot is the Figure 8 Follow Through Thistutorial will demonstrate how to correctly harness yourself to a rope using a Figure 8 Follow Through knot This knot is used primarily by rock climbers to provide a life-line Since this knot is used as a life-line it is very important to be able to tie it correctly (Your life could depend upon it)
Dont worry with this tutorial and about 5 minutes of practice you can have this knot mastered
Things you will need
- Climbing Harness- Climbing Rope
If you are wanting to go climbing and dont already have these items they can be purchased for about $25 each at most outdoor sporting goods stores If you are merelylooking to learn the knot a belt loop and a rope (about five feet long) will do
Image Notes1 Climbing Harness2 Climbing Rope
Step 1 Dealing With The RopeThroughout this tutorial I will be discussing different parts of the rope To make these instructions as clear as possible I will define a few terms that I will use throughoutthe tutorial The Anchor End of the rope will generally be at the top of the images This is the end that would be anchored to the wall or rock and does not move Wewill not be doing much with the anchored end The Tail End of the rope is the opposite end that we will be dealing with I will call this the tail for short
Now that we have some terms to work with lets get started
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 2 Tying The First Figure 8This knot has several parts to it The first part of the knot is just tying a basic figure 8 To tie the first figure 8 there are four simple steps
1 - Using the tail make a loop over the rope (as shown in the first picture) keeping in mind that there should be about 3 ft of slack on the tail end
2 - Wrap the tail back this time go under the anchored end (As shown in the second picture)
3 - Bring the tail down through the first loop (As shown in the third picture)
4 - Finally pull the two ends to make the knot a little bit tighter and easier to deal with (Shown in the fourth picture)
After these four steps you should end up with a knot that resembles a figure 8
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 3 Looping Into The Harness In order to secure the rope to the harness simply thread the tail end of the rope through the front loop in the harness as shown in the picture below This step isobviously very important
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 4 Following Back Through The Figure 8After looping the rope through the harness you have to thread the tail end of the rope back through the knot following the first figure 8 I have divided this process intofive smaller steps in order to make it more clear
1 - Coming form underneath the knot bring the tail up through the near loop and to the left behind the anchored end of the rope (Shown in the first picture)
2 - Wrap the tail around the anchored end back to the right and down through the adjacent loop (Shown in the second picture)
3 - You simply need to bring the tail back over the top of the knot to the left (Shown in the third picture)
4 - Bring the tail end up through the far loop following the anchored end (Shown in the fourth picture)
5 - Finally pull the knot tight (Shown in the fifth picture)
As you can see the first four pictures are simply tracing the knot back through with the tail end
For the last part while you pull the knot tight you may want to make small adjustments and rearrange how it all fits together If the knot does not lay perfectly smoothand tight its NOT a big deal
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 5 Finishing The Knot After completing the Figure 8 knot you will want to somehow secure the tail end of the rope out of the way There are a couple different ways to do this the way that Iwill demonstrate is using whats called a Stopper Knot This secondary knot is similar to a Fishermans knot and is pretty simple I have once again divided thisprocess into several smaller steps
1 - Start by wrapping the tail end around the anchored end (As shown in the first picture)
2 - Wrap the tail back underneath the two vertical segments (As shown in the second picture)
3 - Simply repeat the first two steps wrapping the tail around again (As shown in the third picture)
4 - This step in the fourth picture may look complicated but all you need to do is insert the tail up through the two loops that you have just made
5 - To finish off the knot you will want to slowly pull the tail end while gently pushing the bottom of the stopper knot upwards If you have successfully completed this knotit should look something like the fifth picture
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 6 Ready To Climb Now that you have mastered the Figure 8 knot you can securely harness yourself into a climbing rope Remember there are many other skills that go into setting up ananchor and belaying a climber This tutorial only covers the figure 8 knot For more information there are many great websites that demonstrate how to correctly set up asafe climbing system (Ive posted a few below) If you are a beginning climber I recommend that you read up on a few other climbing techniques Also you shouldprobably go to a climbing wall or gym where there are experienced climbers that can show you the ropes Hopefully this tutorial has been helpful Have fun and be safe
Some useful linkshttpwwwstephenprattnetAnchorsanchorshtmhttpwwwuoregonedu~oppclimbingtopicsanchorshtmlhttpwwwabc-of-rockclimbingcomhowtoclimbingtechniquesasp
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Related Instructables
How to Tie aFigure EightKnot byTactical_Pyro
Paracord KnotDisplay Bord byJamie bagn
Basic KnotsGuide byzorro3355
How to Climb aTree (withprussiks) bystasterisk
How to climb atree (using onlyrope) thefunsimple wayby louieaw
How to get arope into a tree(withoutclimbing it) byvitex
How to tievarious knots byadaviel
How to make arope swing byjdub0928
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Turks Head Knots on a Bottleby sklnxbones on July 6 2010
Intro Turks Head Knots on a BottleThis is the finished project A bottle decorated with three Turks Head Knots There are only three knots on this bottle The RED and the BLUE knots are each a 20 Bightby 3 Lead Turks Head Knots The WHITE knot is a 20 Bight by 19 Lead Turks Head Knot
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 1 Supplies
Cord Lots and Lots of cord I cant tell you how much each bottle is differentBottle Washed and Dried inside and out Make sure to remove all water spotsThreaded Needle Cord screws into the threads at the base of the needlePegs I use brass rivets used as a map to tie the Turks Head KnotsHole Punch Used to punch holes in the painters tape to hold the pegsPainters Tape To hold the pegs in place and to make your map for the Turks Head KnotsMarker To write on the painters tapeCloth Towel To remove finger prints and dirt from your bottleKrazy Glue or Super Glue This is used to secure the knots in place to the bottle
OPTIONAL BUT HIGHLY RECOMMENDEDI use the Turks Head Cookbook from KnotToolcom
Step 2 PreparationYou will need to find a bottle you like I used an empty instant tea bottle of course washed and dried (I like to put the bottle in the oven for a few minutes to dry the insidewithout water spots Take off the lid and do not put lid in the oven) Now measure the circumference of the bottle Take a cord and tightly wrap the cord around the bottleMark where the ends meet and use a ruler to measure the length of the cord For my instant tea bottle the circumference is 27cm I know from past knots that I have tiedthat I want my knot to have 20 Bights in the top and bottom (bands) knots I am going to use the Bights in the (bands) knots to tie the middle knot Now divide the numberof Bights (20) into the size of the circumference (27) to get the space between each Bight (135) With me so far
Now take two pieces of painters tape using a ruler measure out the length of the circumference and mark the length on the both pieces of tape Next you will mark thespace between each Bight on the tape
Step 3 Adding the PegsI like to use pegs when tying Turks Head Knots it just makes tying the knot easier
These are what I use for pegs
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 4 Adding Pegs to the TapeNow take a hole punch to cut holes in the tape where the lines meet You will place the pegs in the holes
Insert a peg in each hole and carefully stick the first piece of tape to the bottle
Step 5 Adding the 2nd row of pegsNow do the same thing with the second piece of tape The numbers on each piece of tape must line up
This picture shows you what you should have now This odd looking thing will be your map to tie the Turks Head Knot And this is the end of Step 1
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 6 Tying the first Turks Head KnotUsing the Turks Head Cookbook follow the numbers going over and under as indicated in the book I chose a 20 Bight by 3 Lead knot which will give me a nice bandaround the bottle Once the ends meet you have made one complete knot Tape the running end of your cord and start removing the pegs and the tape
Step 7 Remove the pegs and the tapeBe careful not to untie the knot as you remove the pegs and tape from the bottle Continue to remove all the pegs and remove the tape from the bottle At this point theknot will be very loose and will need to be tightened up
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 8 Remove the slack from the knotHere you can see just how much the knot expanded Starting with the standing end begin to pull the slack out of the knot going towards the running end of the cordDo not expect to pull all the slack out at once You may have to make 3 - 5 attempts at removing the slack out of the knot DO NOT remove all of the slack out of the knotIn order to make the bands we will have to triple the Turks Head Knot We will do this by following the knot three times The threaded needle will really come in handyhere
Step 9 Triple the KnotOnce you have made three passes of the Turks Head Knot use your needle to go under your knot about half the circumference and cut the cord The knot will be tightenough to hide the tail in placeTIP I carefully add a couple of drops of super glue UNDER the band to hold them in place and keep them from sliding around in the nextsteps A drop or two in 3 or 4 places around the band should be enough
Step 10 Add the second knotNow repeat this whole step for the second bandWhen tying the second band you must make sure the Bights line up to the first band This is crucial for the next stepWipe down the bottle to make sure all your finger prints and adhesive from the tape are all removed You want to make sure your bottle is clean at this point Any dirt orfinger prints left on the bottle will be almost impossible to remove From this point on we will use gloves when tying our last knot
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 11 Maping the Top KnotStick a piece of painters tape on top of your first band leaving the bottom of the knot exposedUse a marker to count the number of Bights in your knot Instead of using the pegs we are going to use the Bights to tie our next Turks Head Knot
Step 12 Mapping the Bottom KnotDo the same thing for the bottom band but you must make sure your numbers on top and bottom line up So 1 on top should be the same position as 1 on the bottom
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 13 Adding the last knotAgain using the Turks Head Cookbook and the threaded needle you are going to follow the instructions going over and under as indicated in the book Be sure to usegloves when ever you handle the bottle
Step 14 Thats ItFor this Turks Head Knot I am using a 20 Bight by 19 Lead knot
Because of the amount of cord you are working with your cord will get twisted and knotted You will have to un-twist the cord often Its a pain in the rear but it has to bedone And it has to be done alot
Continue to tie the knot until you finish the knot If you have the cord and the patience you can double or triple the knot When you are done use your needle to hide theends under your bands Cut the ends and your DONE
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Related Instructables
Monkeys FistFloatingKeychain byjokerlz
How To Make ATurks headKnot WithParacord byDoggie Stylish
Tying Trivetsout of Rope forHoliday Gifts bykylemarsh
Paracord KnotDisplay Bord byJamie bagn
How to Make ATurks Head(Photos) bymchs60chip
A pocket full ofknots byKiteman
Monkeys fistknot AND themonkey byjonathan111
TiteTie is theTruckers Knoton Steroids bytitetie
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Larks head noose -- an easy useful knot that tightens and loosensby Larry Breed on February 19 2009
Intro Larks head noose -- an easy useful knot that tightens and loosensI thought I knew all the basic knots but then I was taught this incredibly useful simple knot Its good for tying up the neck of a bag that you want to repeatedly open andsecurely close Its good for tying around a springy bundle that will need tightening and retightening And its easy to undo
Ive looked at knot literature but havent found a name for this so I named it The basic knot is well known its called a larks head Since all Ive done is to slip the twoends through the larks head to make a noose I call it that
WARNING Dont use this knot when human safety would depend on it Climbers and mountaineers have well-tested reliable knots for such situations
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Image Notes1 To tighten further step on this side of the larks head and pull the free ends
Step 1 Double the cord overThe larks head noose requires enough cord to go twice around your bundle plus a foot or two Find the center and double it over Sailors call this a bight
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 2 Form the larks headComing from below the bight hook your thumb and forefinger over the two sides Reach outward and downward and pinch your fingertips together underneath thedoubled cord
Youve made a larks head Move the crossing cord a little farther from your hand so theres a clear opening through the two half-loops
Step 3 Form the nooseSlip the two ends of the cord through the opening we were just talking about Pull the larks head tight so it grips the two cords Find something that needs constrictingand put the noose around it
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 4 Tightening retightening and lockingSlide the knot against the bundle If its not tight enough to keep from slipping tighten it by holding it in one hand and tugging on the cords one at a time with the otherhand Notice that you can slide the knot out again for instance to re-open the bag you just tied shut For some applications this may be as tight as you need it
A springy bundle probably still feels loose If so compress the bundle and get a new grip on the cords Rest your foot on the bundle on the cords nearest the larks headand pull to slide the larks head tighter
To make the knot more permanent you can lock it Make an overhand in the cord ends (Exactly like the first step in tying shoelaces) With your foot still on the bundlepull on the cords and move your hands apart until youre pulling in opposite directions You have just locked the larks head and you can trust it to stay that way()
But lets say that later on you want to loosen the locked knot Again put your foot on the bundle and cords nearest the larks head hold the two cord ends together andpull This makes a little slack between the overhand and the larks head so you can untie the overhand
In twine or small string the locking overhand knot may be difficult to undo Use a shoelace knot instead of an overhand and itll unlock easily
() If youre using slippery cord like polypropylene an overhand may not lock securely You may want to tie another overhand knot For added security wrap a shortlength of duct tape around the two cords close to the knot
Image Notes1 To tighten further step on this side of the larks head and pull the free ends
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Related Instructables
TRX fromParacordChallengeAccepted bythrake
A pocket full ofknots byKiteman
Lens CapLanyard by~teknoarsonist~ how to tie a
noose byawesume
AdjustableParacordGlassesLanyard byjdtwelve12
HangmansNoose PackClosure byPopEye42
Paraleash - ADog LeashFrom Paracordby The Ideanator
How to make arugged andhandy ParacordBelt by Jake22
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Related Instructables
Paracord ChainSinnet FastDeploy BoonieHatband (video)by Stormdrane
Cross KnotParacordLanyard byStormdrane
Zigzag SpoolingParacord (video)by Stormdrane
SurvivalBracelet II bytevers94
SurvivalBracelet(Updated) bytevers94
Cobra WeaveKey Fob bytevers94
ParacordBoonie HatWrap (video) byStormdrane
Paracord KnotDisplay Bord byJamie bagn
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
How to tie various knotsby adaviel on September 7 2009
Intro How to tie various knotsKnots as a way of joining rope without special equipment are useful in many situations On a sailboat knots are essential both for daily use and for emergency repairsThis instructable describes several different common knots eg
Sheet Bend - to tie two lines togetherBowline - to make a loopReef Knot - to fasten a bundle of materialFishermans Bend - to secure a line to a post or ring
These knots are good for regular rope - braided or 3-strand polyester or natural fibre (hemp sisal) Monofilament (fishing line) or steel cable performs better with differentknots
Knots are typically quite a lot weaker than straight rope - when rope goes around a tight radius such as in a knot the outside is under more tension than the insideSplices (which require special tools and are time-consuming to make) are stronger so permanent fittings usually have eye-splices
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 1 Sheet BendThe sheet bend is used to tie two lines together It is perhaps the most generally useful knot of all When used to tie a line to itself making a loop it is called a bowlineThe strain is taken on the ropes in the middle - not the one coming out the side
How the knot is made is not critical - it is the final shape that is important One can make the flat loop first and work the other rope around it Or one can make thecrossed loop first - required when tying a bowline
The two images show front and back views of the same knot
AdvantagesEasy to makeEasy to undo when tension is removedDoes not easily capsize
DisadvantagesHard to make under loadDangerous to make under heavy load
UsesJoining two equally-sized ropesExtending a towline or stern line
Method 1 the same as a bowline
Method 2 starting with the flat loop
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 2 Double Sheet BendThe double sheet bend is used to tie two lines of different thickness - but not too different It is the same as a normal sheet bend but with an extra turn of the thinner ropearound the flat loop in the thickerThe load goes on the line through the flat loop not the one that comes out the side of the knot
UsesSecuring a heaving line to a tow lineExtending a stern line if you dont have enough line of one thickness
Step 3 BowlineThe bowline is really a special case of the sheet bend but it it tied at the end of a rope to make a loop
The photos show the completed loop and closeups of the front and back of the actual knot Note that it is the same as the sheet bend - but it must be made the right wayround This loop does not tighten in use The knot is quite easy to untie once the load is removed With practice it is very quick to tie
Some usesSecuring a dinghy line to a railing or stanchionSecuring an anchor line to an anchorTie a jib sheet to the sailTie a mooring line around a rock or treeTie a float to an anchor triplineUse one in each line to tie two ropes of very different sizes - eg a throwing line to a large tow ropeDisadvantages the knot must be completely made before it will take any strain - it is hard to tie if there is already a load on the rope
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Linked bowlines
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 4 Bowline on the BightA bowline on the bight is a bowline tied in a loop of rope (neither end is needed) The shape is the same as a bowline made with a double line but the middle of thebight forms the loop around the standing part
UsesAn impromptu bosuns chair - to sit in while being transferred between two boats at sea
Step 5 Clove HitchThe clove hitch can be made when you only have the bight (the middle) of a rope not the ends
UsesSecuring a burgee pole to a burgee halyard (a continuous loop of thin line)Securing a tiller from swinging
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 6 Round Turn and Two Half-HitchesThis is a knot used to secure a line to a ring or bar Wind a couple of turns around the bar then secure the end with two hitches around the standing part (this looks like aclove hitch when done)
AdvantagesCan be made under load - it is easy to take turns around the bar while maintaining tension on the ropeStrong - provided the bar is thicker than the rope the rope is not weakened by sharp bendsDisadvantagesThe end tends to work loose
UsesSecuring a line to a mooring ring or samson post
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 7 Fishermans BendThe fishermans bend is the same as the round turn and two half hitches except that the first hitch is looped under the round turn This uses the tension on the rope tosecure the end from working loose
AdvantagesSecure against working loose
DisadvantagesHard to make under tensionHard to undo under tensionMay seize up under load when wet making it hard to undo
UsesSecuring mooring line to ringSecuring fender lines to rail
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 8 Studsail BendThe studsail bend is like the fishermans bend but the second hitch is also secured under the round turn making it even more secure against working loose when undertension
AdvantagesVery secure against working looseDisadvantagesHard to make under tensionHard to undo under tension
Step 9 Figure-8 KnotThe figure-eight knot is used to prevent an end of rope from passing through a block (pulley) Sometimes called a stopper knot
The double figure-8 knot is used in rock climbing as an alternative to a bowline to secure a climbing harness to the end of a safety rope The double knot is made bymaking a single knot then tracing back around the knot with the free end after passing it around the harness loop
AdvantagesEasy to verify by inspectionNot prone to work loose
DisadvantagesSlow to make and undoCannot be made under load
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 10 Prussic KnotThe prussic knot may be used as a climbing ascender - when made around a vertical rope as shown downwards tension on the ends locks the knot while release oftension allows it to be slid up the rope A pair of prussic knots on foot loops may be used in tandem to climb a rope
UsesClimbing a ropeTaking up tension to free a riding turn on a winch
Step 11 Reef KnotThe reef knot or square knot is used to tie a bundle of material together It must be made around something - it should not be used to tie two free ropes togetherbecause it can easily capsizeIt should not be used to make a loop unless it can be tensioned around a solid object It should not be used around a person - use a bowline instead A capsized reefknot will slip easily and could constrict and cause severe injury
UsesReefing a sail (tying the unused portion around a spar)Securing a furled sail to a spar (sail ties)Wrapping a parcelTying shoelaces
AdvantagesMay be made under moderate load
DisadvantagesCapsizes (works free) if used improperlyCan seize up under load when wet
Tying the knot
Capsizing a reef knot
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 12 CleatsThis is not a knot but is very common on boatsThe first picture shows a rope cleated normally The second shows one with a final locking turn - the last turn is twisted before placing over the cleat so that the tensionon the rope helps secure the free end
When working with ropes under tension take a turn or two around a winch or cleat before trying to secure the end with a knot The load on the free end falls exponentiallywith each turn taken Severe injury can result if a finger or other body part is caught in a loop of rope or between a rope and another object
Step 13 Practice themIt is sometimes useful to be able to tie knots in the dark or as in this video behind your back
Related Instructables
AThird Hand forSailing or OtherThings by WadeTarzia
Paracord KnotDisplay Bord byJamie bagn
Trip LogOutriggerCanoe Sailingthe CaliforniaChannel Islandsby TimAnderson
How to Tie aFigure EightKnot byTactical_Pyro
How to build apirate ship bymdelaney3
Build a ShortDragon (16 foot3-BoardOutriggerSailing Canoe)by Wade Tarzia
repairing aheadsail by josh
How to get arope into a tree(withoutclimbing it) byvitex
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
How to Tie the Lanyard Knotby eddy14777 on January 31 2010
Intro How to Tie the Lanyard KnotMany people including myself have had trouble following the Stormdrane youtube video on tying the lanyard knot so i have done some research and found the solution
Image Notes1 Finished knot
Step 1 MaterialsAll you need is a reasonable length of para cord or whatever you wish to use
Image Notes1 One reasonable amount
Step 2 First StepThe first thing you are going to do is to make a bight that leaves you with to congruent endsThen you are going to put your ring finger through the bight
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Image Notes1 Close enough2 Bight
Step 3 Starting the KnotMake a loop just like the one in the picture and place it over the top strandBring the top strand under the bottom strand
Image Notes1 Notice the way the loop is done2 Top strand
Image Notes1 Bottom strand2 Top strand is under
Step 4 The Most Important PartNow you take the top stand from the previous picture and feed it over the first part of the loop under itself and back over the remainder of the loop
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Image Notes1 Under me2 Top strand3 This should make a diamond type shape
Step 5 DoublingNow take the bottom stand and take it around the part of the top strand nearest to the bight and than come up through the diamond shape in the middleDo the same for the top strand
Image Notes1 Top strand
Image Notes1 Both through the diamond
Step 6 FinishingWhen you take it off your finger it should look like thisWork out the slack by pulling on the bight and the two strands
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Image Notes1 Finished knot
Related Instructables
Cross KnotParacordLanyard byStormdrane
Celtic ButtonKnot (video) byStormdrane
Paracord wristlanyard madewith the snakeknot byStormdrane
Paracord ChainSinnet FastDeploy BoonieHatband (video)by Stormdrane
Zigzag SpoolingParacord (video)by Stormdrane
ParacordBoonie HatWrap (video) byStormdrane
Paracord IDbadge Lanyardby Flahusky
Cobra WeaveKey Fob bytevers94
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Four knots to make paracord into a useful toolby erik_mccray on March 27 2010
Authorerik_mccrayI am an ex-fabricator that is now a stay at home dad I love my new job but I do miss making stuff I love this site amp I am getting involved as a way to keep myskills upOn top of fad work I have also run two small business in the past One was custom sewing amp the other was as a small engine mechanicI have two votec degrees one in metal fabrication amp the other is in engine repairI look forward to getting to know everyone here
Intro Four knots to make paracord into a useful toolParacord is an awesome multitool used everywhere from the wild blue yonder to the deepest caverns But like any good tool it is only as good as the knowledge the userhas about the tool With most people out there using bungee cords amp ratchet straps it seems that paracord is being used for nothing more than friendship bracelets forgrown men This is a shame because for less then the price of a few cheap bungee cords amp some to short to be helpful straps You can get yourself hundreds of feet ofparacord
The key to getting the most out of the paracord is good knot work The first thing you need to know is what makes a good knot One is that the knot is easy amp quick to tieamp more impotant is that the knot is easy amp quick to untie The hitch class of knots is by far the best group of knots that the average person could know The four mostuseful hitch knots are the half hitch a quick simple knot that forms the base for many other knots the inline half hitch allowing you to get the most out of one length ofparacord the slippery hitch that gives you both on the fly control over tension on your paracord but also an adjustable loop that will not change unless you want it amp theinline truckers hitch instantly doubling the your pulling power
Step 1 To get started lets get some terminology that will be used defined
line= the paracord
Main line= the part of the paracord doing the work for example holding down your tarp or the long part of the paracord
Mid line= the middle of the length of the paracord
End line= the unused length of paracord or the short length of paracord
Step 2 The half hitch The half hitch is a simple way to secure a line to an anchor point like the tie down points in most trucks A half hitch is a constrictor knot meaning that the harder you pullon the line the tighter the knots grip gets Another common constrictor knot is the slip knot
Step 1 wrap your line around your anchor point Step 2 wrap the end line around the main line
Step 3 pass the end line threw the end line side of the newly formed loop
step 4 now take the slack out of the knot
step 5 to make sure the knot is secure tie another half hitch to the main line This knot is called adouble half hitch
step 6 another useful thing that can be done with the half hitch is that instead of repeating the wrap on the main line but repeating it on what you are tying to the half hitchcan be used to bind something like a stack of 2x4s
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Image Notes1 End line2 Main line3 step 1
Image Notes1 Step 2
Image Notes1 passing thew the end line side of the loop2 step 3
Image Notes1 step 5
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Image Notes1 step 6
Step 3 The mid line half hitch The mid line half hitch is for when the length of line is to long for the job at hand amp you dont want to have to cut the line to size or you are using multiple anchor pointswith one length of line
Step 1 double up the line at the point in the length you wish to make the knot
Step 2 wrap the doubled up portion of line around your anchor point The doubled up length is now now the end line
Step 3 now tie just as you did for the regular half hitch repeat the knot to make a double half hitch for security
Image Notes1 A mid line double half hitch
Image Notes1 step 1
Image Notes1 The end line2 step 2
Image Notes1 Step 3
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 4 The slippery hitch The slippery hitch is a great knot for adjusting tension on the main line or for having an adjustable fixed loop To adjust the knot simply slide the knot up or down the mainline
Step 1 wrap your line around the anchor point or just double over the line to form a loop
Step 2 wrap the end line around the main line three times Wrapping in the direction of the anchor point or loop
Step 3 put together the two lines making up the loop amp wrap the two lines one time with the end line
Step 4 pass the end line thew the last loop formed covering the two lined of the loop
Step 5 pull the knot tite
step 6 to adjust the size of the loop or main line tension grab the knot amp slide it up or down the main line
Image Notes1 grab just the knot its self to adjust it2 step 5
Image Notes1 step 1
Image Notes1 step 2
Image Notes1 step 3
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Image Notes1 step 4
Image Notes1 grab just the knot its self to adjust it2 step 5
Image Notes1 same knot as in last pic Just slid up2 step 6
Step 5 The mid line truchers hitch The truckers hitch is a great way to double the pulling force on a line There are many ways to tie this knot the problem with most of them is that at some point you aregoing to have to pass the end line through a loop on the main line that is acting like a pulley to double your pulling force this is great if you are making the knot close tothe end of your line but if you are using a 300 length of line amp want to make the knot in the first ten feet having to pass 290 of line thew a loop is a pain But with a fewhalf hitches you will not have to pass the end line threw any loop on the main line
step 1 wrap your line around the anchor point then double over your end line laying the top of the loop over the main line
Step 2 double up your main line amp lay the loop over the loop made by the end line
step 3 in main line above the knot twist in a loop
step 4 put main line loop thew the loop made in step 3 amp pull this loop tight over your main line loop forming a half hitch Repeat step 3 amp 4 to make a doublehalf hitch
step 5 To use the knot just pull down on the end line to put tension on the main line
step 6 after you have the main line snug tie a mid line double half hitch around the two lines forming the loop at the end of the main line with the end line
step 7 Tie a double half hitch with the end line around the end loop of the mid line half hitch of step 6 using the same method as used in steps 3 amp 4
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Image Notes1 the end of step 6
Image Notes1 main line2 end line3 step 1
Image Notes1 main line loop2 end line loop
Image Notes1 step 3
Image Notes1 step 4
Image Notes1 step 4 at the end with a double half hitch on the main loop
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Image Notes1 pull here2 step 5
Image Notes1 the start of step 6
Image Notes1 the end of step 6
Image Notes1 step 72 now the rest of the line is free to do more work
Related Instructables
Paracord KnotDisplay Bord byJamie bagn
ChokelessAdjustableParacord DogLeash byPizzaman101
ParacordLadder wWooden Rungsby josestude
tie a paracordshackle grip byitri45
ParacordPrussik Belt byJavaNut13
TiteTie is theTruckers Knoton Steroids bytitetie
ID Lanyard(Photos) byeschmunk
Dog Toys forHeavy Chewersby J3443RY
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Figure 8 knot and double 8 knotby jonathan111 on November 28 2007
Intro Figure 8 knot and double 8 knotI will show you how to tie a figure 8 knot and a figure 8 follow through
Step 1 Stating the knotThis is a simple knot so just follow the pictures
Step 2 Finishing the knotCross the string under and then push it through the hole Pull tightly unless you are going to do the follow through and leave it somewhat loose
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 3 The follow through knotThe follow through knot should be tied around something brought back and followed through the path of the 8 knot Look at the pictures Basically follow through the 8knot backwards
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Related Instructables
Climb Safe WithA Figure 8Knot by mattste A pocket full of
knots byKiteman
How to Tie aFigure EightKnot byTactical_Pyro
Paracord KnotDisplay Bord byJamie bagn
Cross KnotParacordLanyard byStormdrane
How to Tie aFire-escapeKnot by leonardoismael
Truckers HitchTHE mostawesome knoton the planetby schneidp20
Paracord ZipperPuller byrepeet13
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Truckers Hitch THE most awesome knot on the planetby schneidp20 on October 12 2008
Authorschneidp20I like building stuff Trouble is there just isnt enough time to build everything Sigh
Intro Truckers Hitch THE most awesome knot on the planetYes I know that there are plenty of other cool knots out there many of which I literally couldnt live wo I rock climb However this knot is unlike any other Plus Ineeded a grabber for my Instructable -) (BTW this ISNT a climbing knot) And in truth it isnt a knot by itself but rather a system of common knots
Have you ever tried to tie something down for transporting but just couldnt get the lines tight andor during transport the lines would continually loosen Then this is theknot for you I learned this knot back in the 70s when specialty car racks and ratchet straps were rare or unheard of I initially used it to tie a canoe on a car rack bothattaching to the rack as well as the lines to the bow and stern of the canoe Even with all the new gizmos available today this knot still shines because all you need is arope and ropes dont hum in the wind like straps
The unique aspect of this knot is that it gives you a 2-1 mechanical advantage when tightening the rope Be careful though You can actually damage some thingsbecause of the mechanical advantage This knot holds fast and is easy to untie hallmark traits of any good knot
Below you see the finished knot system well break it apart in the steps that follow
Image Notes1 1st anchor point a bowline2 loop3 securing knots 2 half hitches4 securing loose end with a fishermans knot5 2nd anchor point (should be round)
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Image Notes1 X marks the spot
Step 1 Initial setupThe first step is to anchor one end of the rope and then loop the rope around a 2nd anchor point
For attaching to the 1st anchor point I chose bowline a close 2 on my list -) There are other instructables on that one so I wont bore you here
The 2nd anchor really should be round because it serves as a pulley in this block and tackle type knot Ive used it on sharp anchor points and it doesnt work as well
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 2 Creating a slip knotTie a slip knot somewhere between the two anchor points Correct placement of the slip knot takes some experience to judge it correctly Typically I place it too close tothe 2nd anchor point and end up with not enough room to work with If the knot ends up too far from 2nd anchor point you can extend the knot by enlarging the loop
Be sure you tie the slip knot as shown You may not be able to untie other knots
In this small example the slip knot is uncharacteristically close to the 1st anchor point
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 3 Tightening and securingThe loose end of the rope that went around the 2nd anchor point goes through the slip knot loop Pull the loose end to the desired tension and secure with two halfhitches
Note To allow better view of the knots the rope isnt really tightened in this example
Step 4 Securing loose endThe final knot is just to secure the loose end somehow I chose a fishermans knot to do this
To tie a fishermans knot the rope goes around twice and goes under the X created by the loops Pull the loose end to tighten Finally slide the knot to put tension onthe half hitches
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Image Notes1 X marks the spot
Step 5 FinishedThere you have it I guarantee that the first time you really use this knot (not just practice) you will be amazed at how well it works and youll wish you knew this knot along time ago You may even come over to my side and declare that is is THE most awesome knot on the planet -)
Enjoy and happy haulingDave
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Related Instructables
TiteTie is theTruckers Knoton Steroids bytitetie
Four knots tomake paracordinto a usefultool byerik_mccray
Modify yourbike rack tocarry a sunfishor other boat byewilhelm
SurfboardHammock byGermy
GiganticHalloweenSpider Web bynolte919
How To Tie ASpiders Hitch(video) by back-cast
Three-hitch mathair ornamentby michiexile TRX from
ParacordChallengeAccepted bythrake
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Carry any Bottle with a JUG KNOT Handleby hpstoutharrow on September 17 2009
Intro Carry any Bottle with a JUG KNOT HandleTie a JUG KNOT around a water bottle soda bottle or aluminum bottle to make a secure carrying strap
Re-purpose any container into a reusable water bottle by adding a convenient carrying strap This Instructable will demonstrate how to tie a JUG knot which like its namesuggests is meant to properly secure around the neck of a container
With some cord and the knowledge of this knot you will be able add a handle lanyard or carabiner loop to any of your favorite beverages to carry them on the go
It works perfectly for those disposable water bottles and who knows once you add some colorful cord to the plain old clear water bottle you just might beinclined to refill it and use it again(Check out pictures 4amp5 below)
In addition to plastic beverage bottles like pop water and sports drinks you can turn those rugged aluminum beer bottles into a backpacking canteen
Those of you familiar with my previous aluminum bottle InstructablesROLLED RIM METAL TUMBLERhttpwwwinstructablescomidAluminum-Bottle-Tumbler-Cup-Cook-PotALUMINUM BOTTLE LIGHTWEIGHT ALCOHOL STOVEhttpwwwinstructablescomidAluminum-Bottle-Alcohol-Stovewill recognize the water canteen shown below as a re-purposed aluminum beer bottle Here I have added a painted surface treatment to turn it into a proper lookingwater bottle More on that in steps 13 14 15
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 1 Getting StartedCord size is important Select a small medium weight cord like the one shown here It is a general purpose camp cord sold at most sporting goods stores (shoelacesmight also work)
Do not use a heavy cord or rope because the larger diameter will not tuck under the relatively small lip at the top of the bottleneck and the bottle will fall out
Also the smaller cord cinches tight on itself and will not loosen accidentally
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 2 Form a BightThe next steps show how to tie a JUG KNOT It is the basic step for adding a carrying strap It is also the anchor point for any additional fancy bottle trussing you maywant to add
JUG KNOT Step 1
Form a Bight in the center of a length of cord Bight is a knot term for a loop or bend in the rope In this case the main Bight in this knot is highlighted with a white mark Imakes it easier to follow its path in these steps
The running ends of the cord should be equal length
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 3 Pull the Bight downPULL the Bight DOWN forming two Loops
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 4 Cross the LoopsCROSS the right Loop OVER the left Loop
Step 5 Pass the Bight under the 1st loopTake the main Bight and pass it UNDER the left Loop
Step 6 Weave the BightWEAVE the Bight OVER the portion of the right Loop and UNDER the portion of the left Loop
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 7 Extend the BightExtend the Bight OVER the outer portion of the right Loop
Step 8 Flip the Right Loop behindAdditional colored identification points have been added to the loops to follow their travel in these next two steps
The right Loop Yellow marker is FLIPPED BEHIND the knot and ends up on the far left side of the knot
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 9 Flip the 2nd loop in frontRaise the green marker (located on what was formerly the left loop) and pull it down and to the right FLIPPING IT IN FRONT of the knot
Note the blue portion of the this loop will pass around the outside of the yellow portion of the first loop
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Image Notes1 Center of knot that will tighten around the bottles neck
Step 10 Remove SlackNote where the blue green amp yellow markers end up
Start to remove the slack in the loops by pulling the original main Bight (white marker top right) and the two free standing ends at the bottom
the bottle neck will pass through the very center of the knot
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Image Notes1 Center of knot that will tighten around the bottles neck
Step 11 Tighten the KnotAfter removing the slack insert the bottle neck and finish tightening
The knot should look like this before slipping it over the bottle
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 12 Secure on bottle neckThis is the finished knot shown on the neck of various containers
The loop end and the two free standing ends can be tied together to create a carrying handle (last picture below)
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 13 Aluminum Bottle Water Bottle
The next few steps show the features of an aluminum beer bottle re-purposed as a water bottle canteen It is one of many containers that can be reused as a camp waterbottle
The bottle was lightly sanded masked and then pained with a hammered finished paint to create an interesting surface texture
Image Notes1 Textured finish paint makes an interesting grip-able surface2 Masked with tape for painting3 Masked with tape for painting
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Image Notes1 Dowel used for holding the bottle during painting
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 14 Tethered Cork StopperUse a wine bottle man made Cork as a stopper for your aluminum water bottleNote Use a cork that was removed from the wine bottle without the corkscrew penetrating through the bottom end of the cork (A hole all the way through the cork willcause it to leak) Use the unpierced end of the cork inside the water bottle
Drill a hole through the sides of the Cork Thread the cord through the hole to the center of the cord Use the cork as the main Bight and tie the Jug knot as shown inthe beginning steps
Now the cork is tethered to the bottle and will not get lost or fall on the ground
A Carabiner clip passes through the other cord end to attache the water bottle to you belt or pack
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 15 Trussed for TransportThis is another hanging method for carrying your aluminum bottle water canteen A Jug knot is tied conventionally around the neck
The running ends of the knot however are pulled down towards the bottom of the bottle A Barrel Knot is tied about 34 the way down the side of the bottle A squareknot is tied on the bottom of the knot to keep the two running ends tight against the sides of the bottle
I like the look of the accent colored cord running down the sides of the bottle and the fact that the bottle hangs from the belt upside down It adds to its uniqueness
The last picture shows another truss variation
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 16 AdvancedBelow is a bottle with some additional trussing You can be creative as you want It all starts with a re-purposed container and the Jug Knot (and enough cord)
Related Instructables
AluminumBottle TumblerCup amp Cook Potfor an AlcoholStove byhpstoutharrow
Water BottleBelt Clip byuglymike Duct Tape
Water Bottle byrabidsquire2
AluminumBottle AlcoholStove byhpstoutharrow
DIYGlass WaterBottle byCulturespy
Solar WaterHeater forBackpackingUsing WaterBottles and aCar Shade bykopomeroy
Duct tape waterbottle holder(Photos) by pinkmarshmallow
How to make aCamelPack withan old plasticbottle bywillrandship
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Basic Knots Guideby zorro3355 on April 29 2008
Intro Basic Knots Guidehi
Step 1 Thumb knotThe most simple knotUsed as a stopper and prevent ropes from fraying
Step 2 Reef KnotUsed to tie two ropes of equal thickness togetherIt is pretty easy to tie and untie but under tentionit may be diffcult to untieIt is also not sutible for smoothropes(egnylon ropes)
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 3 Figure of eightused as a stopperprevent ropes from fraying and its more secure than tumb knot its is also used to tie Caribinas to ropes and is often used in rock climbing
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 4 Timber hitchused for pulling logs
Step 5 Clove hitchUsed to tie a rope onto a pole or logThe pole must be roundThe pole lust be thicker then the rope itself
(greatly used during pioneering)
Step 6 Sheet bandused to tie ropes of different thickness together(works on same thickness of ropes too)
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 7 Sheep shankTo shorten RopesTo prevent middle fraying
Step 8 Slip knotWhippingUsed as a grip for pulling things(when tied on a stick or small pole)(marlin spike hitch)
Related Instructables
Rope Rings byhpstoutharrow
How to Tie aFigure EightKnot byTactical_Pyro
Whippin (WestCountry Style)by tim_n
SurvivalBracelet(Updated) bytevers94
HangmansNoose PackClosure byPopEye42
Turkey on aTripod byhpstoutharrow
SurvivalBracelet II bytevers94 Zigzag Spooling
Paracord (video)by Stormdrane
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
How to Tie a Fire-escape Knotby leonardo ismael on October 16 2007
Intro How to Tie a Fire-escape KnotThis knot is used by firemen in case of fires for example imagine a scene where the ladder on the firetruck messes up but people need to get down a five story buildingor more All they have is a long piece of rope they can safely get down with a secure knot like the fire-escape knot So why not learn it its easy to do and hard to untieif you tie it tightly
This is from the American Boys Handbook
Step 1 Get Your RopeFirst grab a piece of rope and bend it like this to make a loop in it Follow every step to the smallest detail
Step 2 Twist the RopeNow make a twist like this and hold it together
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 3 Pull Through the TwistPull the loop through the twist you just made from underneath
Step 4 Go Over the Split EndNow pull the tail through the loop
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 5 FinallyAnd finally just pull it through as pictured below
Congratulations you just learned the fire-escape knot
Step 6 Same Name Not KnotThis is another knot called the fire-escape knot this shouldnt be your result
Related Instructables
House FireEscape Plan(video) byWhatHappensNowAdvice
ParacordLadder wWooden Rungsby josestude
Bed SheetEscape Rope byjessehensel
rope ladder(glow-in-the-dark version) bymikeasaurus
HeadlockEscape 2(video) byjohnnyrockstah
QuickFirestarter byMattandJora
Trail sauna byjakee117
How to Kill FireAnts andCommitGenocide byKentsOkay
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Climb Safe With A Figure 8 Knotby mattste on February 23 2010
Intro Climb Safe With A Figure 8 Knot There are many things that a beginning climber needs to know including several important knots Perhaps the most essential knot is the Figure 8 Follow Through Thistutorial will demonstrate how to correctly harness yourself to a rope using a Figure 8 Follow Through knot This knot is used primarily by rock climbers to provide a life-line Since this knot is used as a life-line it is very important to be able to tie it correctly (Your life could depend upon it)
Dont worry with this tutorial and about 5 minutes of practice you can have this knot mastered
Things you will need
- Climbing Harness- Climbing Rope
If you are wanting to go climbing and dont already have these items they can be purchased for about $25 each at most outdoor sporting goods stores If you are merelylooking to learn the knot a belt loop and a rope (about five feet long) will do
Image Notes1 Climbing Harness2 Climbing Rope
Step 1 Dealing With The RopeThroughout this tutorial I will be discussing different parts of the rope To make these instructions as clear as possible I will define a few terms that I will use throughoutthe tutorial The Anchor End of the rope will generally be at the top of the images This is the end that would be anchored to the wall or rock and does not move Wewill not be doing much with the anchored end The Tail End of the rope is the opposite end that we will be dealing with I will call this the tail for short
Now that we have some terms to work with lets get started
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 2 Tying The First Figure 8This knot has several parts to it The first part of the knot is just tying a basic figure 8 To tie the first figure 8 there are four simple steps
1 - Using the tail make a loop over the rope (as shown in the first picture) keeping in mind that there should be about 3 ft of slack on the tail end
2 - Wrap the tail back this time go under the anchored end (As shown in the second picture)
3 - Bring the tail down through the first loop (As shown in the third picture)
4 - Finally pull the two ends to make the knot a little bit tighter and easier to deal with (Shown in the fourth picture)
After these four steps you should end up with a knot that resembles a figure 8
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 3 Looping Into The Harness In order to secure the rope to the harness simply thread the tail end of the rope through the front loop in the harness as shown in the picture below This step isobviously very important
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 4 Following Back Through The Figure 8After looping the rope through the harness you have to thread the tail end of the rope back through the knot following the first figure 8 I have divided this process intofive smaller steps in order to make it more clear
1 - Coming form underneath the knot bring the tail up through the near loop and to the left behind the anchored end of the rope (Shown in the first picture)
2 - Wrap the tail around the anchored end back to the right and down through the adjacent loop (Shown in the second picture)
3 - You simply need to bring the tail back over the top of the knot to the left (Shown in the third picture)
4 - Bring the tail end up through the far loop following the anchored end (Shown in the fourth picture)
5 - Finally pull the knot tight (Shown in the fifth picture)
As you can see the first four pictures are simply tracing the knot back through with the tail end
For the last part while you pull the knot tight you may want to make small adjustments and rearrange how it all fits together If the knot does not lay perfectly smoothand tight its NOT a big deal
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 5 Finishing The Knot After completing the Figure 8 knot you will want to somehow secure the tail end of the rope out of the way There are a couple different ways to do this the way that Iwill demonstrate is using whats called a Stopper Knot This secondary knot is similar to a Fishermans knot and is pretty simple I have once again divided thisprocess into several smaller steps
1 - Start by wrapping the tail end around the anchored end (As shown in the first picture)
2 - Wrap the tail back underneath the two vertical segments (As shown in the second picture)
3 - Simply repeat the first two steps wrapping the tail around again (As shown in the third picture)
4 - This step in the fourth picture may look complicated but all you need to do is insert the tail up through the two loops that you have just made
5 - To finish off the knot you will want to slowly pull the tail end while gently pushing the bottom of the stopper knot upwards If you have successfully completed this knotit should look something like the fifth picture
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 6 Ready To Climb Now that you have mastered the Figure 8 knot you can securely harness yourself into a climbing rope Remember there are many other skills that go into setting up ananchor and belaying a climber This tutorial only covers the figure 8 knot For more information there are many great websites that demonstrate how to correctly set up asafe climbing system (Ive posted a few below) If you are a beginning climber I recommend that you read up on a few other climbing techniques Also you shouldprobably go to a climbing wall or gym where there are experienced climbers that can show you the ropes Hopefully this tutorial has been helpful Have fun and be safe
Some useful linkshttpwwwstephenprattnetAnchorsanchorshtmhttpwwwuoregonedu~oppclimbingtopicsanchorshtmlhttpwwwabc-of-rockclimbingcomhowtoclimbingtechniquesasp
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Related Instructables
How to Tie aFigure EightKnot byTactical_Pyro
Paracord KnotDisplay Bord byJamie bagn
Basic KnotsGuide byzorro3355
How to Climb aTree (withprussiks) bystasterisk
How to climb atree (using onlyrope) thefunsimple wayby louieaw
How to get arope into a tree(withoutclimbing it) byvitex
How to tievarious knots byadaviel
How to make arope swing byjdub0928
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Turks Head Knots on a Bottleby sklnxbones on July 6 2010
Intro Turks Head Knots on a BottleThis is the finished project A bottle decorated with three Turks Head Knots There are only three knots on this bottle The RED and the BLUE knots are each a 20 Bightby 3 Lead Turks Head Knots The WHITE knot is a 20 Bight by 19 Lead Turks Head Knot
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 1 Supplies
Cord Lots and Lots of cord I cant tell you how much each bottle is differentBottle Washed and Dried inside and out Make sure to remove all water spotsThreaded Needle Cord screws into the threads at the base of the needlePegs I use brass rivets used as a map to tie the Turks Head KnotsHole Punch Used to punch holes in the painters tape to hold the pegsPainters Tape To hold the pegs in place and to make your map for the Turks Head KnotsMarker To write on the painters tapeCloth Towel To remove finger prints and dirt from your bottleKrazy Glue or Super Glue This is used to secure the knots in place to the bottle
OPTIONAL BUT HIGHLY RECOMMENDEDI use the Turks Head Cookbook from KnotToolcom
Step 2 PreparationYou will need to find a bottle you like I used an empty instant tea bottle of course washed and dried (I like to put the bottle in the oven for a few minutes to dry the insidewithout water spots Take off the lid and do not put lid in the oven) Now measure the circumference of the bottle Take a cord and tightly wrap the cord around the bottleMark where the ends meet and use a ruler to measure the length of the cord For my instant tea bottle the circumference is 27cm I know from past knots that I have tiedthat I want my knot to have 20 Bights in the top and bottom (bands) knots I am going to use the Bights in the (bands) knots to tie the middle knot Now divide the numberof Bights (20) into the size of the circumference (27) to get the space between each Bight (135) With me so far
Now take two pieces of painters tape using a ruler measure out the length of the circumference and mark the length on the both pieces of tape Next you will mark thespace between each Bight on the tape
Step 3 Adding the PegsI like to use pegs when tying Turks Head Knots it just makes tying the knot easier
These are what I use for pegs
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 4 Adding Pegs to the TapeNow take a hole punch to cut holes in the tape where the lines meet You will place the pegs in the holes
Insert a peg in each hole and carefully stick the first piece of tape to the bottle
Step 5 Adding the 2nd row of pegsNow do the same thing with the second piece of tape The numbers on each piece of tape must line up
This picture shows you what you should have now This odd looking thing will be your map to tie the Turks Head Knot And this is the end of Step 1
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 6 Tying the first Turks Head KnotUsing the Turks Head Cookbook follow the numbers going over and under as indicated in the book I chose a 20 Bight by 3 Lead knot which will give me a nice bandaround the bottle Once the ends meet you have made one complete knot Tape the running end of your cord and start removing the pegs and the tape
Step 7 Remove the pegs and the tapeBe careful not to untie the knot as you remove the pegs and tape from the bottle Continue to remove all the pegs and remove the tape from the bottle At this point theknot will be very loose and will need to be tightened up
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 8 Remove the slack from the knotHere you can see just how much the knot expanded Starting with the standing end begin to pull the slack out of the knot going towards the running end of the cordDo not expect to pull all the slack out at once You may have to make 3 - 5 attempts at removing the slack out of the knot DO NOT remove all of the slack out of the knotIn order to make the bands we will have to triple the Turks Head Knot We will do this by following the knot three times The threaded needle will really come in handyhere
Step 9 Triple the KnotOnce you have made three passes of the Turks Head Knot use your needle to go under your knot about half the circumference and cut the cord The knot will be tightenough to hide the tail in placeTIP I carefully add a couple of drops of super glue UNDER the band to hold them in place and keep them from sliding around in the nextsteps A drop or two in 3 or 4 places around the band should be enough
Step 10 Add the second knotNow repeat this whole step for the second bandWhen tying the second band you must make sure the Bights line up to the first band This is crucial for the next stepWipe down the bottle to make sure all your finger prints and adhesive from the tape are all removed You want to make sure your bottle is clean at this point Any dirt orfinger prints left on the bottle will be almost impossible to remove From this point on we will use gloves when tying our last knot
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 11 Maping the Top KnotStick a piece of painters tape on top of your first band leaving the bottom of the knot exposedUse a marker to count the number of Bights in your knot Instead of using the pegs we are going to use the Bights to tie our next Turks Head Knot
Step 12 Mapping the Bottom KnotDo the same thing for the bottom band but you must make sure your numbers on top and bottom line up So 1 on top should be the same position as 1 on the bottom
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 13 Adding the last knotAgain using the Turks Head Cookbook and the threaded needle you are going to follow the instructions going over and under as indicated in the book Be sure to usegloves when ever you handle the bottle
Step 14 Thats ItFor this Turks Head Knot I am using a 20 Bight by 19 Lead knot
Because of the amount of cord you are working with your cord will get twisted and knotted You will have to un-twist the cord often Its a pain in the rear but it has to bedone And it has to be done alot
Continue to tie the knot until you finish the knot If you have the cord and the patience you can double or triple the knot When you are done use your needle to hide theends under your bands Cut the ends and your DONE
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Related Instructables
Monkeys FistFloatingKeychain byjokerlz
How To Make ATurks headKnot WithParacord byDoggie Stylish
Tying Trivetsout of Rope forHoliday Gifts bykylemarsh
Paracord KnotDisplay Bord byJamie bagn
How to Make ATurks Head(Photos) bymchs60chip
A pocket full ofknots byKiteman
Monkeys fistknot AND themonkey byjonathan111
TiteTie is theTruckers Knoton Steroids bytitetie
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Larks head noose -- an easy useful knot that tightens and loosensby Larry Breed on February 19 2009
Intro Larks head noose -- an easy useful knot that tightens and loosensI thought I knew all the basic knots but then I was taught this incredibly useful simple knot Its good for tying up the neck of a bag that you want to repeatedly open andsecurely close Its good for tying around a springy bundle that will need tightening and retightening And its easy to undo
Ive looked at knot literature but havent found a name for this so I named it The basic knot is well known its called a larks head Since all Ive done is to slip the twoends through the larks head to make a noose I call it that
WARNING Dont use this knot when human safety would depend on it Climbers and mountaineers have well-tested reliable knots for such situations
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Image Notes1 To tighten further step on this side of the larks head and pull the free ends
Step 1 Double the cord overThe larks head noose requires enough cord to go twice around your bundle plus a foot or two Find the center and double it over Sailors call this a bight
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 2 Form the larks headComing from below the bight hook your thumb and forefinger over the two sides Reach outward and downward and pinch your fingertips together underneath thedoubled cord
Youve made a larks head Move the crossing cord a little farther from your hand so theres a clear opening through the two half-loops
Step 3 Form the nooseSlip the two ends of the cord through the opening we were just talking about Pull the larks head tight so it grips the two cords Find something that needs constrictingand put the noose around it
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 4 Tightening retightening and lockingSlide the knot against the bundle If its not tight enough to keep from slipping tighten it by holding it in one hand and tugging on the cords one at a time with the otherhand Notice that you can slide the knot out again for instance to re-open the bag you just tied shut For some applications this may be as tight as you need it
A springy bundle probably still feels loose If so compress the bundle and get a new grip on the cords Rest your foot on the bundle on the cords nearest the larks headand pull to slide the larks head tighter
To make the knot more permanent you can lock it Make an overhand in the cord ends (Exactly like the first step in tying shoelaces) With your foot still on the bundlepull on the cords and move your hands apart until youre pulling in opposite directions You have just locked the larks head and you can trust it to stay that way()
But lets say that later on you want to loosen the locked knot Again put your foot on the bundle and cords nearest the larks head hold the two cord ends together andpull This makes a little slack between the overhand and the larks head so you can untie the overhand
In twine or small string the locking overhand knot may be difficult to undo Use a shoelace knot instead of an overhand and itll unlock easily
() If youre using slippery cord like polypropylene an overhand may not lock securely You may want to tie another overhand knot For added security wrap a shortlength of duct tape around the two cords close to the knot
Image Notes1 To tighten further step on this side of the larks head and pull the free ends
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Related Instructables
TRX fromParacordChallengeAccepted bythrake
A pocket full ofknots byKiteman
Lens CapLanyard by~teknoarsonist~ how to tie a
noose byawesume
AdjustableParacordGlassesLanyard byjdtwelve12
HangmansNoose PackClosure byPopEye42
Paraleash - ADog LeashFrom Paracordby The Ideanator
How to make arugged andhandy ParacordBelt by Jake22
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Related Instructables
Paracord ChainSinnet FastDeploy BoonieHatband (video)by Stormdrane
Cross KnotParacordLanyard byStormdrane
Zigzag SpoolingParacord (video)by Stormdrane
SurvivalBracelet II bytevers94
SurvivalBracelet(Updated) bytevers94
Cobra WeaveKey Fob bytevers94
ParacordBoonie HatWrap (video) byStormdrane
Paracord KnotDisplay Bord byJamie bagn
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
How to tie various knotsby adaviel on September 7 2009
Intro How to tie various knotsKnots as a way of joining rope without special equipment are useful in many situations On a sailboat knots are essential both for daily use and for emergency repairsThis instructable describes several different common knots eg
Sheet Bend - to tie two lines togetherBowline - to make a loopReef Knot - to fasten a bundle of materialFishermans Bend - to secure a line to a post or ring
These knots are good for regular rope - braided or 3-strand polyester or natural fibre (hemp sisal) Monofilament (fishing line) or steel cable performs better with differentknots
Knots are typically quite a lot weaker than straight rope - when rope goes around a tight radius such as in a knot the outside is under more tension than the insideSplices (which require special tools and are time-consuming to make) are stronger so permanent fittings usually have eye-splices
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 1 Sheet BendThe sheet bend is used to tie two lines together It is perhaps the most generally useful knot of all When used to tie a line to itself making a loop it is called a bowlineThe strain is taken on the ropes in the middle - not the one coming out the side
How the knot is made is not critical - it is the final shape that is important One can make the flat loop first and work the other rope around it Or one can make thecrossed loop first - required when tying a bowline
The two images show front and back views of the same knot
AdvantagesEasy to makeEasy to undo when tension is removedDoes not easily capsize
DisadvantagesHard to make under loadDangerous to make under heavy load
UsesJoining two equally-sized ropesExtending a towline or stern line
Method 1 the same as a bowline
Method 2 starting with the flat loop
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 2 Double Sheet BendThe double sheet bend is used to tie two lines of different thickness - but not too different It is the same as a normal sheet bend but with an extra turn of the thinner ropearound the flat loop in the thickerThe load goes on the line through the flat loop not the one that comes out the side of the knot
UsesSecuring a heaving line to a tow lineExtending a stern line if you dont have enough line of one thickness
Step 3 BowlineThe bowline is really a special case of the sheet bend but it it tied at the end of a rope to make a loop
The photos show the completed loop and closeups of the front and back of the actual knot Note that it is the same as the sheet bend - but it must be made the right wayround This loop does not tighten in use The knot is quite easy to untie once the load is removed With practice it is very quick to tie
Some usesSecuring a dinghy line to a railing or stanchionSecuring an anchor line to an anchorTie a jib sheet to the sailTie a mooring line around a rock or treeTie a float to an anchor triplineUse one in each line to tie two ropes of very different sizes - eg a throwing line to a large tow ropeDisadvantages the knot must be completely made before it will take any strain - it is hard to tie if there is already a load on the rope
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Linked bowlines
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 4 Bowline on the BightA bowline on the bight is a bowline tied in a loop of rope (neither end is needed) The shape is the same as a bowline made with a double line but the middle of thebight forms the loop around the standing part
UsesAn impromptu bosuns chair - to sit in while being transferred between two boats at sea
Step 5 Clove HitchThe clove hitch can be made when you only have the bight (the middle) of a rope not the ends
UsesSecuring a burgee pole to a burgee halyard (a continuous loop of thin line)Securing a tiller from swinging
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 6 Round Turn and Two Half-HitchesThis is a knot used to secure a line to a ring or bar Wind a couple of turns around the bar then secure the end with two hitches around the standing part (this looks like aclove hitch when done)
AdvantagesCan be made under load - it is easy to take turns around the bar while maintaining tension on the ropeStrong - provided the bar is thicker than the rope the rope is not weakened by sharp bendsDisadvantagesThe end tends to work loose
UsesSecuring a line to a mooring ring or samson post
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 7 Fishermans BendThe fishermans bend is the same as the round turn and two half hitches except that the first hitch is looped under the round turn This uses the tension on the rope tosecure the end from working loose
AdvantagesSecure against working loose
DisadvantagesHard to make under tensionHard to undo under tensionMay seize up under load when wet making it hard to undo
UsesSecuring mooring line to ringSecuring fender lines to rail
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 8 Studsail BendThe studsail bend is like the fishermans bend but the second hitch is also secured under the round turn making it even more secure against working loose when undertension
AdvantagesVery secure against working looseDisadvantagesHard to make under tensionHard to undo under tension
Step 9 Figure-8 KnotThe figure-eight knot is used to prevent an end of rope from passing through a block (pulley) Sometimes called a stopper knot
The double figure-8 knot is used in rock climbing as an alternative to a bowline to secure a climbing harness to the end of a safety rope The double knot is made bymaking a single knot then tracing back around the knot with the free end after passing it around the harness loop
AdvantagesEasy to verify by inspectionNot prone to work loose
DisadvantagesSlow to make and undoCannot be made under load
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 10 Prussic KnotThe prussic knot may be used as a climbing ascender - when made around a vertical rope as shown downwards tension on the ends locks the knot while release oftension allows it to be slid up the rope A pair of prussic knots on foot loops may be used in tandem to climb a rope
UsesClimbing a ropeTaking up tension to free a riding turn on a winch
Step 11 Reef KnotThe reef knot or square knot is used to tie a bundle of material together It must be made around something - it should not be used to tie two free ropes togetherbecause it can easily capsizeIt should not be used to make a loop unless it can be tensioned around a solid object It should not be used around a person - use a bowline instead A capsized reefknot will slip easily and could constrict and cause severe injury
UsesReefing a sail (tying the unused portion around a spar)Securing a furled sail to a spar (sail ties)Wrapping a parcelTying shoelaces
AdvantagesMay be made under moderate load
DisadvantagesCapsizes (works free) if used improperlyCan seize up under load when wet
Tying the knot
Capsizing a reef knot
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 12 CleatsThis is not a knot but is very common on boatsThe first picture shows a rope cleated normally The second shows one with a final locking turn - the last turn is twisted before placing over the cleat so that the tensionon the rope helps secure the free end
When working with ropes under tension take a turn or two around a winch or cleat before trying to secure the end with a knot The load on the free end falls exponentiallywith each turn taken Severe injury can result if a finger or other body part is caught in a loop of rope or between a rope and another object
Step 13 Practice themIt is sometimes useful to be able to tie knots in the dark or as in this video behind your back
Related Instructables
AThird Hand forSailing or OtherThings by WadeTarzia
Paracord KnotDisplay Bord byJamie bagn
Trip LogOutriggerCanoe Sailingthe CaliforniaChannel Islandsby TimAnderson
How to Tie aFigure EightKnot byTactical_Pyro
How to build apirate ship bymdelaney3
Build a ShortDragon (16 foot3-BoardOutriggerSailing Canoe)by Wade Tarzia
repairing aheadsail by josh
How to get arope into a tree(withoutclimbing it) byvitex
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
How to Tie the Lanyard Knotby eddy14777 on January 31 2010
Intro How to Tie the Lanyard KnotMany people including myself have had trouble following the Stormdrane youtube video on tying the lanyard knot so i have done some research and found the solution
Image Notes1 Finished knot
Step 1 MaterialsAll you need is a reasonable length of para cord or whatever you wish to use
Image Notes1 One reasonable amount
Step 2 First StepThe first thing you are going to do is to make a bight that leaves you with to congruent endsThen you are going to put your ring finger through the bight
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Image Notes1 Close enough2 Bight
Step 3 Starting the KnotMake a loop just like the one in the picture and place it over the top strandBring the top strand under the bottom strand
Image Notes1 Notice the way the loop is done2 Top strand
Image Notes1 Bottom strand2 Top strand is under
Step 4 The Most Important PartNow you take the top stand from the previous picture and feed it over the first part of the loop under itself and back over the remainder of the loop
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Image Notes1 Under me2 Top strand3 This should make a diamond type shape
Step 5 DoublingNow take the bottom stand and take it around the part of the top strand nearest to the bight and than come up through the diamond shape in the middleDo the same for the top strand
Image Notes1 Top strand
Image Notes1 Both through the diamond
Step 6 FinishingWhen you take it off your finger it should look like thisWork out the slack by pulling on the bight and the two strands
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Image Notes1 Finished knot
Related Instructables
Cross KnotParacordLanyard byStormdrane
Celtic ButtonKnot (video) byStormdrane
Paracord wristlanyard madewith the snakeknot byStormdrane
Paracord ChainSinnet FastDeploy BoonieHatband (video)by Stormdrane
Zigzag SpoolingParacord (video)by Stormdrane
ParacordBoonie HatWrap (video) byStormdrane
Paracord IDbadge Lanyardby Flahusky
Cobra WeaveKey Fob bytevers94
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Four knots to make paracord into a useful toolby erik_mccray on March 27 2010
Authorerik_mccrayI am an ex-fabricator that is now a stay at home dad I love my new job but I do miss making stuff I love this site amp I am getting involved as a way to keep myskills upOn top of fad work I have also run two small business in the past One was custom sewing amp the other was as a small engine mechanicI have two votec degrees one in metal fabrication amp the other is in engine repairI look forward to getting to know everyone here
Intro Four knots to make paracord into a useful toolParacord is an awesome multitool used everywhere from the wild blue yonder to the deepest caverns But like any good tool it is only as good as the knowledge the userhas about the tool With most people out there using bungee cords amp ratchet straps it seems that paracord is being used for nothing more than friendship bracelets forgrown men This is a shame because for less then the price of a few cheap bungee cords amp some to short to be helpful straps You can get yourself hundreds of feet ofparacord
The key to getting the most out of the paracord is good knot work The first thing you need to know is what makes a good knot One is that the knot is easy amp quick to tieamp more impotant is that the knot is easy amp quick to untie The hitch class of knots is by far the best group of knots that the average person could know The four mostuseful hitch knots are the half hitch a quick simple knot that forms the base for many other knots the inline half hitch allowing you to get the most out of one length ofparacord the slippery hitch that gives you both on the fly control over tension on your paracord but also an adjustable loop that will not change unless you want it amp theinline truckers hitch instantly doubling the your pulling power
Step 1 To get started lets get some terminology that will be used defined
line= the paracord
Main line= the part of the paracord doing the work for example holding down your tarp or the long part of the paracord
Mid line= the middle of the length of the paracord
End line= the unused length of paracord or the short length of paracord
Step 2 The half hitch The half hitch is a simple way to secure a line to an anchor point like the tie down points in most trucks A half hitch is a constrictor knot meaning that the harder you pullon the line the tighter the knots grip gets Another common constrictor knot is the slip knot
Step 1 wrap your line around your anchor point Step 2 wrap the end line around the main line
Step 3 pass the end line threw the end line side of the newly formed loop
step 4 now take the slack out of the knot
step 5 to make sure the knot is secure tie another half hitch to the main line This knot is called adouble half hitch
step 6 another useful thing that can be done with the half hitch is that instead of repeating the wrap on the main line but repeating it on what you are tying to the half hitchcan be used to bind something like a stack of 2x4s
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Image Notes1 End line2 Main line3 step 1
Image Notes1 Step 2
Image Notes1 passing thew the end line side of the loop2 step 3
Image Notes1 step 5
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Image Notes1 step 6
Step 3 The mid line half hitch The mid line half hitch is for when the length of line is to long for the job at hand amp you dont want to have to cut the line to size or you are using multiple anchor pointswith one length of line
Step 1 double up the line at the point in the length you wish to make the knot
Step 2 wrap the doubled up portion of line around your anchor point The doubled up length is now now the end line
Step 3 now tie just as you did for the regular half hitch repeat the knot to make a double half hitch for security
Image Notes1 A mid line double half hitch
Image Notes1 step 1
Image Notes1 The end line2 step 2
Image Notes1 Step 3
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 4 The slippery hitch The slippery hitch is a great knot for adjusting tension on the main line or for having an adjustable fixed loop To adjust the knot simply slide the knot up or down the mainline
Step 1 wrap your line around the anchor point or just double over the line to form a loop
Step 2 wrap the end line around the main line three times Wrapping in the direction of the anchor point or loop
Step 3 put together the two lines making up the loop amp wrap the two lines one time with the end line
Step 4 pass the end line thew the last loop formed covering the two lined of the loop
Step 5 pull the knot tite
step 6 to adjust the size of the loop or main line tension grab the knot amp slide it up or down the main line
Image Notes1 grab just the knot its self to adjust it2 step 5
Image Notes1 step 1
Image Notes1 step 2
Image Notes1 step 3
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Image Notes1 step 4
Image Notes1 grab just the knot its self to adjust it2 step 5
Image Notes1 same knot as in last pic Just slid up2 step 6
Step 5 The mid line truchers hitch The truckers hitch is a great way to double the pulling force on a line There are many ways to tie this knot the problem with most of them is that at some point you aregoing to have to pass the end line through a loop on the main line that is acting like a pulley to double your pulling force this is great if you are making the knot close tothe end of your line but if you are using a 300 length of line amp want to make the knot in the first ten feet having to pass 290 of line thew a loop is a pain But with a fewhalf hitches you will not have to pass the end line threw any loop on the main line
step 1 wrap your line around the anchor point then double over your end line laying the top of the loop over the main line
Step 2 double up your main line amp lay the loop over the loop made by the end line
step 3 in main line above the knot twist in a loop
step 4 put main line loop thew the loop made in step 3 amp pull this loop tight over your main line loop forming a half hitch Repeat step 3 amp 4 to make a doublehalf hitch
step 5 To use the knot just pull down on the end line to put tension on the main line
step 6 after you have the main line snug tie a mid line double half hitch around the two lines forming the loop at the end of the main line with the end line
step 7 Tie a double half hitch with the end line around the end loop of the mid line half hitch of step 6 using the same method as used in steps 3 amp 4
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Image Notes1 the end of step 6
Image Notes1 main line2 end line3 step 1
Image Notes1 main line loop2 end line loop
Image Notes1 step 3
Image Notes1 step 4
Image Notes1 step 4 at the end with a double half hitch on the main loop
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Image Notes1 pull here2 step 5
Image Notes1 the start of step 6
Image Notes1 the end of step 6
Image Notes1 step 72 now the rest of the line is free to do more work
Related Instructables
Paracord KnotDisplay Bord byJamie bagn
ChokelessAdjustableParacord DogLeash byPizzaman101
ParacordLadder wWooden Rungsby josestude
tie a paracordshackle grip byitri45
ParacordPrussik Belt byJavaNut13
TiteTie is theTruckers Knoton Steroids bytitetie
ID Lanyard(Photos) byeschmunk
Dog Toys forHeavy Chewersby J3443RY
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Figure 8 knot and double 8 knotby jonathan111 on November 28 2007
Intro Figure 8 knot and double 8 knotI will show you how to tie a figure 8 knot and a figure 8 follow through
Step 1 Stating the knotThis is a simple knot so just follow the pictures
Step 2 Finishing the knotCross the string under and then push it through the hole Pull tightly unless you are going to do the follow through and leave it somewhat loose
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 3 The follow through knotThe follow through knot should be tied around something brought back and followed through the path of the 8 knot Look at the pictures Basically follow through the 8knot backwards
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Related Instructables
Climb Safe WithA Figure 8Knot by mattste A pocket full of
knots byKiteman
How to Tie aFigure EightKnot byTactical_Pyro
Paracord KnotDisplay Bord byJamie bagn
Cross KnotParacordLanyard byStormdrane
How to Tie aFire-escapeKnot by leonardoismael
Truckers HitchTHE mostawesome knoton the planetby schneidp20
Paracord ZipperPuller byrepeet13
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Truckers Hitch THE most awesome knot on the planetby schneidp20 on October 12 2008
Authorschneidp20I like building stuff Trouble is there just isnt enough time to build everything Sigh
Intro Truckers Hitch THE most awesome knot on the planetYes I know that there are plenty of other cool knots out there many of which I literally couldnt live wo I rock climb However this knot is unlike any other Plus Ineeded a grabber for my Instructable -) (BTW this ISNT a climbing knot) And in truth it isnt a knot by itself but rather a system of common knots
Have you ever tried to tie something down for transporting but just couldnt get the lines tight andor during transport the lines would continually loosen Then this is theknot for you I learned this knot back in the 70s when specialty car racks and ratchet straps were rare or unheard of I initially used it to tie a canoe on a car rack bothattaching to the rack as well as the lines to the bow and stern of the canoe Even with all the new gizmos available today this knot still shines because all you need is arope and ropes dont hum in the wind like straps
The unique aspect of this knot is that it gives you a 2-1 mechanical advantage when tightening the rope Be careful though You can actually damage some thingsbecause of the mechanical advantage This knot holds fast and is easy to untie hallmark traits of any good knot
Below you see the finished knot system well break it apart in the steps that follow
Image Notes1 1st anchor point a bowline2 loop3 securing knots 2 half hitches4 securing loose end with a fishermans knot5 2nd anchor point (should be round)
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Image Notes1 X marks the spot
Step 1 Initial setupThe first step is to anchor one end of the rope and then loop the rope around a 2nd anchor point
For attaching to the 1st anchor point I chose bowline a close 2 on my list -) There are other instructables on that one so I wont bore you here
The 2nd anchor really should be round because it serves as a pulley in this block and tackle type knot Ive used it on sharp anchor points and it doesnt work as well
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 2 Creating a slip knotTie a slip knot somewhere between the two anchor points Correct placement of the slip knot takes some experience to judge it correctly Typically I place it too close tothe 2nd anchor point and end up with not enough room to work with If the knot ends up too far from 2nd anchor point you can extend the knot by enlarging the loop
Be sure you tie the slip knot as shown You may not be able to untie other knots
In this small example the slip knot is uncharacteristically close to the 1st anchor point
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 3 Tightening and securingThe loose end of the rope that went around the 2nd anchor point goes through the slip knot loop Pull the loose end to the desired tension and secure with two halfhitches
Note To allow better view of the knots the rope isnt really tightened in this example
Step 4 Securing loose endThe final knot is just to secure the loose end somehow I chose a fishermans knot to do this
To tie a fishermans knot the rope goes around twice and goes under the X created by the loops Pull the loose end to tighten Finally slide the knot to put tension onthe half hitches
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Image Notes1 X marks the spot
Step 5 FinishedThere you have it I guarantee that the first time you really use this knot (not just practice) you will be amazed at how well it works and youll wish you knew this knot along time ago You may even come over to my side and declare that is is THE most awesome knot on the planet -)
Enjoy and happy haulingDave
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Related Instructables
TiteTie is theTruckers Knoton Steroids bytitetie
Four knots tomake paracordinto a usefultool byerik_mccray
Modify yourbike rack tocarry a sunfishor other boat byewilhelm
SurfboardHammock byGermy
GiganticHalloweenSpider Web bynolte919
How To Tie ASpiders Hitch(video) by back-cast
Three-hitch mathair ornamentby michiexile TRX from
ParacordChallengeAccepted bythrake
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Carry any Bottle with a JUG KNOT Handleby hpstoutharrow on September 17 2009
Intro Carry any Bottle with a JUG KNOT HandleTie a JUG KNOT around a water bottle soda bottle or aluminum bottle to make a secure carrying strap
Re-purpose any container into a reusable water bottle by adding a convenient carrying strap This Instructable will demonstrate how to tie a JUG knot which like its namesuggests is meant to properly secure around the neck of a container
With some cord and the knowledge of this knot you will be able add a handle lanyard or carabiner loop to any of your favorite beverages to carry them on the go
It works perfectly for those disposable water bottles and who knows once you add some colorful cord to the plain old clear water bottle you just might beinclined to refill it and use it again(Check out pictures 4amp5 below)
In addition to plastic beverage bottles like pop water and sports drinks you can turn those rugged aluminum beer bottles into a backpacking canteen
Those of you familiar with my previous aluminum bottle InstructablesROLLED RIM METAL TUMBLERhttpwwwinstructablescomidAluminum-Bottle-Tumbler-Cup-Cook-PotALUMINUM BOTTLE LIGHTWEIGHT ALCOHOL STOVEhttpwwwinstructablescomidAluminum-Bottle-Alcohol-Stovewill recognize the water canteen shown below as a re-purposed aluminum beer bottle Here I have added a painted surface treatment to turn it into a proper lookingwater bottle More on that in steps 13 14 15
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 1 Getting StartedCord size is important Select a small medium weight cord like the one shown here It is a general purpose camp cord sold at most sporting goods stores (shoelacesmight also work)
Do not use a heavy cord or rope because the larger diameter will not tuck under the relatively small lip at the top of the bottleneck and the bottle will fall out
Also the smaller cord cinches tight on itself and will not loosen accidentally
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 2 Form a BightThe next steps show how to tie a JUG KNOT It is the basic step for adding a carrying strap It is also the anchor point for any additional fancy bottle trussing you maywant to add
JUG KNOT Step 1
Form a Bight in the center of a length of cord Bight is a knot term for a loop or bend in the rope In this case the main Bight in this knot is highlighted with a white mark Imakes it easier to follow its path in these steps
The running ends of the cord should be equal length
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 3 Pull the Bight downPULL the Bight DOWN forming two Loops
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 4 Cross the LoopsCROSS the right Loop OVER the left Loop
Step 5 Pass the Bight under the 1st loopTake the main Bight and pass it UNDER the left Loop
Step 6 Weave the BightWEAVE the Bight OVER the portion of the right Loop and UNDER the portion of the left Loop
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 7 Extend the BightExtend the Bight OVER the outer portion of the right Loop
Step 8 Flip the Right Loop behindAdditional colored identification points have been added to the loops to follow their travel in these next two steps
The right Loop Yellow marker is FLIPPED BEHIND the knot and ends up on the far left side of the knot
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 9 Flip the 2nd loop in frontRaise the green marker (located on what was formerly the left loop) and pull it down and to the right FLIPPING IT IN FRONT of the knot
Note the blue portion of the this loop will pass around the outside of the yellow portion of the first loop
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Image Notes1 Center of knot that will tighten around the bottles neck
Step 10 Remove SlackNote where the blue green amp yellow markers end up
Start to remove the slack in the loops by pulling the original main Bight (white marker top right) and the two free standing ends at the bottom
the bottle neck will pass through the very center of the knot
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Image Notes1 Center of knot that will tighten around the bottles neck
Step 11 Tighten the KnotAfter removing the slack insert the bottle neck and finish tightening
The knot should look like this before slipping it over the bottle
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 12 Secure on bottle neckThis is the finished knot shown on the neck of various containers
The loop end and the two free standing ends can be tied together to create a carrying handle (last picture below)
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 13 Aluminum Bottle Water Bottle
The next few steps show the features of an aluminum beer bottle re-purposed as a water bottle canteen It is one of many containers that can be reused as a camp waterbottle
The bottle was lightly sanded masked and then pained with a hammered finished paint to create an interesting surface texture
Image Notes1 Textured finish paint makes an interesting grip-able surface2 Masked with tape for painting3 Masked with tape for painting
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Image Notes1 Dowel used for holding the bottle during painting
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 14 Tethered Cork StopperUse a wine bottle man made Cork as a stopper for your aluminum water bottleNote Use a cork that was removed from the wine bottle without the corkscrew penetrating through the bottom end of the cork (A hole all the way through the cork willcause it to leak) Use the unpierced end of the cork inside the water bottle
Drill a hole through the sides of the Cork Thread the cord through the hole to the center of the cord Use the cork as the main Bight and tie the Jug knot as shown inthe beginning steps
Now the cork is tethered to the bottle and will not get lost or fall on the ground
A Carabiner clip passes through the other cord end to attache the water bottle to you belt or pack
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 15 Trussed for TransportThis is another hanging method for carrying your aluminum bottle water canteen A Jug knot is tied conventionally around the neck
The running ends of the knot however are pulled down towards the bottom of the bottle A Barrel Knot is tied about 34 the way down the side of the bottle A squareknot is tied on the bottom of the knot to keep the two running ends tight against the sides of the bottle
I like the look of the accent colored cord running down the sides of the bottle and the fact that the bottle hangs from the belt upside down It adds to its uniqueness
The last picture shows another truss variation
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 16 AdvancedBelow is a bottle with some additional trussing You can be creative as you want It all starts with a re-purposed container and the Jug Knot (and enough cord)
Related Instructables
AluminumBottle TumblerCup amp Cook Potfor an AlcoholStove byhpstoutharrow
Water BottleBelt Clip byuglymike Duct Tape
Water Bottle byrabidsquire2
AluminumBottle AlcoholStove byhpstoutharrow
DIYGlass WaterBottle byCulturespy
Solar WaterHeater forBackpackingUsing WaterBottles and aCar Shade bykopomeroy
Duct tape waterbottle holder(Photos) by pinkmarshmallow
How to make aCamelPack withan old plasticbottle bywillrandship
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Basic Knots Guideby zorro3355 on April 29 2008
Intro Basic Knots Guidehi
Step 1 Thumb knotThe most simple knotUsed as a stopper and prevent ropes from fraying
Step 2 Reef KnotUsed to tie two ropes of equal thickness togetherIt is pretty easy to tie and untie but under tentionit may be diffcult to untieIt is also not sutible for smoothropes(egnylon ropes)
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 3 Figure of eightused as a stopperprevent ropes from fraying and its more secure than tumb knot its is also used to tie Caribinas to ropes and is often used in rock climbing
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 4 Timber hitchused for pulling logs
Step 5 Clove hitchUsed to tie a rope onto a pole or logThe pole must be roundThe pole lust be thicker then the rope itself
(greatly used during pioneering)
Step 6 Sheet bandused to tie ropes of different thickness together(works on same thickness of ropes too)
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 7 Sheep shankTo shorten RopesTo prevent middle fraying
Step 8 Slip knotWhippingUsed as a grip for pulling things(when tied on a stick or small pole)(marlin spike hitch)
Related Instructables
Rope Rings byhpstoutharrow
How to Tie aFigure EightKnot byTactical_Pyro
Whippin (WestCountry Style)by tim_n
SurvivalBracelet(Updated) bytevers94
HangmansNoose PackClosure byPopEye42
Turkey on aTripod byhpstoutharrow
SurvivalBracelet II bytevers94 Zigzag Spooling
Paracord (video)by Stormdrane
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
How to Tie a Fire-escape Knotby leonardo ismael on October 16 2007
Intro How to Tie a Fire-escape KnotThis knot is used by firemen in case of fires for example imagine a scene where the ladder on the firetruck messes up but people need to get down a five story buildingor more All they have is a long piece of rope they can safely get down with a secure knot like the fire-escape knot So why not learn it its easy to do and hard to untieif you tie it tightly
This is from the American Boys Handbook
Step 1 Get Your RopeFirst grab a piece of rope and bend it like this to make a loop in it Follow every step to the smallest detail
Step 2 Twist the RopeNow make a twist like this and hold it together
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 3 Pull Through the TwistPull the loop through the twist you just made from underneath
Step 4 Go Over the Split EndNow pull the tail through the loop
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 5 FinallyAnd finally just pull it through as pictured below
Congratulations you just learned the fire-escape knot
Step 6 Same Name Not KnotThis is another knot called the fire-escape knot this shouldnt be your result
Related Instructables
House FireEscape Plan(video) byWhatHappensNowAdvice
ParacordLadder wWooden Rungsby josestude
Bed SheetEscape Rope byjessehensel
rope ladder(glow-in-the-dark version) bymikeasaurus
HeadlockEscape 2(video) byjohnnyrockstah
QuickFirestarter byMattandJora
Trail sauna byjakee117
How to Kill FireAnts andCommitGenocide byKentsOkay
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Climb Safe With A Figure 8 Knotby mattste on February 23 2010
Intro Climb Safe With A Figure 8 Knot There are many things that a beginning climber needs to know including several important knots Perhaps the most essential knot is the Figure 8 Follow Through Thistutorial will demonstrate how to correctly harness yourself to a rope using a Figure 8 Follow Through knot This knot is used primarily by rock climbers to provide a life-line Since this knot is used as a life-line it is very important to be able to tie it correctly (Your life could depend upon it)
Dont worry with this tutorial and about 5 minutes of practice you can have this knot mastered
Things you will need
- Climbing Harness- Climbing Rope
If you are wanting to go climbing and dont already have these items they can be purchased for about $25 each at most outdoor sporting goods stores If you are merelylooking to learn the knot a belt loop and a rope (about five feet long) will do
Image Notes1 Climbing Harness2 Climbing Rope
Step 1 Dealing With The RopeThroughout this tutorial I will be discussing different parts of the rope To make these instructions as clear as possible I will define a few terms that I will use throughoutthe tutorial The Anchor End of the rope will generally be at the top of the images This is the end that would be anchored to the wall or rock and does not move Wewill not be doing much with the anchored end The Tail End of the rope is the opposite end that we will be dealing with I will call this the tail for short
Now that we have some terms to work with lets get started
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 2 Tying The First Figure 8This knot has several parts to it The first part of the knot is just tying a basic figure 8 To tie the first figure 8 there are four simple steps
1 - Using the tail make a loop over the rope (as shown in the first picture) keeping in mind that there should be about 3 ft of slack on the tail end
2 - Wrap the tail back this time go under the anchored end (As shown in the second picture)
3 - Bring the tail down through the first loop (As shown in the third picture)
4 - Finally pull the two ends to make the knot a little bit tighter and easier to deal with (Shown in the fourth picture)
After these four steps you should end up with a knot that resembles a figure 8
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 3 Looping Into The Harness In order to secure the rope to the harness simply thread the tail end of the rope through the front loop in the harness as shown in the picture below This step isobviously very important
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 4 Following Back Through The Figure 8After looping the rope through the harness you have to thread the tail end of the rope back through the knot following the first figure 8 I have divided this process intofive smaller steps in order to make it more clear
1 - Coming form underneath the knot bring the tail up through the near loop and to the left behind the anchored end of the rope (Shown in the first picture)
2 - Wrap the tail around the anchored end back to the right and down through the adjacent loop (Shown in the second picture)
3 - You simply need to bring the tail back over the top of the knot to the left (Shown in the third picture)
4 - Bring the tail end up through the far loop following the anchored end (Shown in the fourth picture)
5 - Finally pull the knot tight (Shown in the fifth picture)
As you can see the first four pictures are simply tracing the knot back through with the tail end
For the last part while you pull the knot tight you may want to make small adjustments and rearrange how it all fits together If the knot does not lay perfectly smoothand tight its NOT a big deal
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 5 Finishing The Knot After completing the Figure 8 knot you will want to somehow secure the tail end of the rope out of the way There are a couple different ways to do this the way that Iwill demonstrate is using whats called a Stopper Knot This secondary knot is similar to a Fishermans knot and is pretty simple I have once again divided thisprocess into several smaller steps
1 - Start by wrapping the tail end around the anchored end (As shown in the first picture)
2 - Wrap the tail back underneath the two vertical segments (As shown in the second picture)
3 - Simply repeat the first two steps wrapping the tail around again (As shown in the third picture)
4 - This step in the fourth picture may look complicated but all you need to do is insert the tail up through the two loops that you have just made
5 - To finish off the knot you will want to slowly pull the tail end while gently pushing the bottom of the stopper knot upwards If you have successfully completed this knotit should look something like the fifth picture
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 6 Ready To Climb Now that you have mastered the Figure 8 knot you can securely harness yourself into a climbing rope Remember there are many other skills that go into setting up ananchor and belaying a climber This tutorial only covers the figure 8 knot For more information there are many great websites that demonstrate how to correctly set up asafe climbing system (Ive posted a few below) If you are a beginning climber I recommend that you read up on a few other climbing techniques Also you shouldprobably go to a climbing wall or gym where there are experienced climbers that can show you the ropes Hopefully this tutorial has been helpful Have fun and be safe
Some useful linkshttpwwwstephenprattnetAnchorsanchorshtmhttpwwwuoregonedu~oppclimbingtopicsanchorshtmlhttpwwwabc-of-rockclimbingcomhowtoclimbingtechniquesasp
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Related Instructables
How to Tie aFigure EightKnot byTactical_Pyro
Paracord KnotDisplay Bord byJamie bagn
Basic KnotsGuide byzorro3355
How to Climb aTree (withprussiks) bystasterisk
How to climb atree (using onlyrope) thefunsimple wayby louieaw
How to get arope into a tree(withoutclimbing it) byvitex
How to tievarious knots byadaviel
How to make arope swing byjdub0928
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Turks Head Knots on a Bottleby sklnxbones on July 6 2010
Intro Turks Head Knots on a BottleThis is the finished project A bottle decorated with three Turks Head Knots There are only three knots on this bottle The RED and the BLUE knots are each a 20 Bightby 3 Lead Turks Head Knots The WHITE knot is a 20 Bight by 19 Lead Turks Head Knot
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 1 Supplies
Cord Lots and Lots of cord I cant tell you how much each bottle is differentBottle Washed and Dried inside and out Make sure to remove all water spotsThreaded Needle Cord screws into the threads at the base of the needlePegs I use brass rivets used as a map to tie the Turks Head KnotsHole Punch Used to punch holes in the painters tape to hold the pegsPainters Tape To hold the pegs in place and to make your map for the Turks Head KnotsMarker To write on the painters tapeCloth Towel To remove finger prints and dirt from your bottleKrazy Glue or Super Glue This is used to secure the knots in place to the bottle
OPTIONAL BUT HIGHLY RECOMMENDEDI use the Turks Head Cookbook from KnotToolcom
Step 2 PreparationYou will need to find a bottle you like I used an empty instant tea bottle of course washed and dried (I like to put the bottle in the oven for a few minutes to dry the insidewithout water spots Take off the lid and do not put lid in the oven) Now measure the circumference of the bottle Take a cord and tightly wrap the cord around the bottleMark where the ends meet and use a ruler to measure the length of the cord For my instant tea bottle the circumference is 27cm I know from past knots that I have tiedthat I want my knot to have 20 Bights in the top and bottom (bands) knots I am going to use the Bights in the (bands) knots to tie the middle knot Now divide the numberof Bights (20) into the size of the circumference (27) to get the space between each Bight (135) With me so far
Now take two pieces of painters tape using a ruler measure out the length of the circumference and mark the length on the both pieces of tape Next you will mark thespace between each Bight on the tape
Step 3 Adding the PegsI like to use pegs when tying Turks Head Knots it just makes tying the knot easier
These are what I use for pegs
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 4 Adding Pegs to the TapeNow take a hole punch to cut holes in the tape where the lines meet You will place the pegs in the holes
Insert a peg in each hole and carefully stick the first piece of tape to the bottle
Step 5 Adding the 2nd row of pegsNow do the same thing with the second piece of tape The numbers on each piece of tape must line up
This picture shows you what you should have now This odd looking thing will be your map to tie the Turks Head Knot And this is the end of Step 1
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 6 Tying the first Turks Head KnotUsing the Turks Head Cookbook follow the numbers going over and under as indicated in the book I chose a 20 Bight by 3 Lead knot which will give me a nice bandaround the bottle Once the ends meet you have made one complete knot Tape the running end of your cord and start removing the pegs and the tape
Step 7 Remove the pegs and the tapeBe careful not to untie the knot as you remove the pegs and tape from the bottle Continue to remove all the pegs and remove the tape from the bottle At this point theknot will be very loose and will need to be tightened up
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 8 Remove the slack from the knotHere you can see just how much the knot expanded Starting with the standing end begin to pull the slack out of the knot going towards the running end of the cordDo not expect to pull all the slack out at once You may have to make 3 - 5 attempts at removing the slack out of the knot DO NOT remove all of the slack out of the knotIn order to make the bands we will have to triple the Turks Head Knot We will do this by following the knot three times The threaded needle will really come in handyhere
Step 9 Triple the KnotOnce you have made three passes of the Turks Head Knot use your needle to go under your knot about half the circumference and cut the cord The knot will be tightenough to hide the tail in placeTIP I carefully add a couple of drops of super glue UNDER the band to hold them in place and keep them from sliding around in the nextsteps A drop or two in 3 or 4 places around the band should be enough
Step 10 Add the second knotNow repeat this whole step for the second bandWhen tying the second band you must make sure the Bights line up to the first band This is crucial for the next stepWipe down the bottle to make sure all your finger prints and adhesive from the tape are all removed You want to make sure your bottle is clean at this point Any dirt orfinger prints left on the bottle will be almost impossible to remove From this point on we will use gloves when tying our last knot
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 11 Maping the Top KnotStick a piece of painters tape on top of your first band leaving the bottom of the knot exposedUse a marker to count the number of Bights in your knot Instead of using the pegs we are going to use the Bights to tie our next Turks Head Knot
Step 12 Mapping the Bottom KnotDo the same thing for the bottom band but you must make sure your numbers on top and bottom line up So 1 on top should be the same position as 1 on the bottom
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 13 Adding the last knotAgain using the Turks Head Cookbook and the threaded needle you are going to follow the instructions going over and under as indicated in the book Be sure to usegloves when ever you handle the bottle
Step 14 Thats ItFor this Turks Head Knot I am using a 20 Bight by 19 Lead knot
Because of the amount of cord you are working with your cord will get twisted and knotted You will have to un-twist the cord often Its a pain in the rear but it has to bedone And it has to be done alot
Continue to tie the knot until you finish the knot If you have the cord and the patience you can double or triple the knot When you are done use your needle to hide theends under your bands Cut the ends and your DONE
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Related Instructables
Monkeys FistFloatingKeychain byjokerlz
How To Make ATurks headKnot WithParacord byDoggie Stylish
Tying Trivetsout of Rope forHoliday Gifts bykylemarsh
Paracord KnotDisplay Bord byJamie bagn
How to Make ATurks Head(Photos) bymchs60chip
A pocket full ofknots byKiteman
Monkeys fistknot AND themonkey byjonathan111
TiteTie is theTruckers Knoton Steroids bytitetie
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Larks head noose -- an easy useful knot that tightens and loosensby Larry Breed on February 19 2009
Intro Larks head noose -- an easy useful knot that tightens and loosensI thought I knew all the basic knots but then I was taught this incredibly useful simple knot Its good for tying up the neck of a bag that you want to repeatedly open andsecurely close Its good for tying around a springy bundle that will need tightening and retightening And its easy to undo
Ive looked at knot literature but havent found a name for this so I named it The basic knot is well known its called a larks head Since all Ive done is to slip the twoends through the larks head to make a noose I call it that
WARNING Dont use this knot when human safety would depend on it Climbers and mountaineers have well-tested reliable knots for such situations
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Image Notes1 To tighten further step on this side of the larks head and pull the free ends
Step 1 Double the cord overThe larks head noose requires enough cord to go twice around your bundle plus a foot or two Find the center and double it over Sailors call this a bight
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 2 Form the larks headComing from below the bight hook your thumb and forefinger over the two sides Reach outward and downward and pinch your fingertips together underneath thedoubled cord
Youve made a larks head Move the crossing cord a little farther from your hand so theres a clear opening through the two half-loops
Step 3 Form the nooseSlip the two ends of the cord through the opening we were just talking about Pull the larks head tight so it grips the two cords Find something that needs constrictingand put the noose around it
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 4 Tightening retightening and lockingSlide the knot against the bundle If its not tight enough to keep from slipping tighten it by holding it in one hand and tugging on the cords one at a time with the otherhand Notice that you can slide the knot out again for instance to re-open the bag you just tied shut For some applications this may be as tight as you need it
A springy bundle probably still feels loose If so compress the bundle and get a new grip on the cords Rest your foot on the bundle on the cords nearest the larks headand pull to slide the larks head tighter
To make the knot more permanent you can lock it Make an overhand in the cord ends (Exactly like the first step in tying shoelaces) With your foot still on the bundlepull on the cords and move your hands apart until youre pulling in opposite directions You have just locked the larks head and you can trust it to stay that way()
But lets say that later on you want to loosen the locked knot Again put your foot on the bundle and cords nearest the larks head hold the two cord ends together andpull This makes a little slack between the overhand and the larks head so you can untie the overhand
In twine or small string the locking overhand knot may be difficult to undo Use a shoelace knot instead of an overhand and itll unlock easily
() If youre using slippery cord like polypropylene an overhand may not lock securely You may want to tie another overhand knot For added security wrap a shortlength of duct tape around the two cords close to the knot
Image Notes1 To tighten further step on this side of the larks head and pull the free ends
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Related Instructables
TRX fromParacordChallengeAccepted bythrake
A pocket full ofknots byKiteman
Lens CapLanyard by~teknoarsonist~ how to tie a
noose byawesume
AdjustableParacordGlassesLanyard byjdtwelve12
HangmansNoose PackClosure byPopEye42
Paraleash - ADog LeashFrom Paracordby The Ideanator
How to make arugged andhandy ParacordBelt by Jake22
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
How to tie various knotsby adaviel on September 7 2009
Intro How to tie various knotsKnots as a way of joining rope without special equipment are useful in many situations On a sailboat knots are essential both for daily use and for emergency repairsThis instructable describes several different common knots eg
Sheet Bend - to tie two lines togetherBowline - to make a loopReef Knot - to fasten a bundle of materialFishermans Bend - to secure a line to a post or ring
These knots are good for regular rope - braided or 3-strand polyester or natural fibre (hemp sisal) Monofilament (fishing line) or steel cable performs better with differentknots
Knots are typically quite a lot weaker than straight rope - when rope goes around a tight radius such as in a knot the outside is under more tension than the insideSplices (which require special tools and are time-consuming to make) are stronger so permanent fittings usually have eye-splices
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 1 Sheet BendThe sheet bend is used to tie two lines together It is perhaps the most generally useful knot of all When used to tie a line to itself making a loop it is called a bowlineThe strain is taken on the ropes in the middle - not the one coming out the side
How the knot is made is not critical - it is the final shape that is important One can make the flat loop first and work the other rope around it Or one can make thecrossed loop first - required when tying a bowline
The two images show front and back views of the same knot
AdvantagesEasy to makeEasy to undo when tension is removedDoes not easily capsize
DisadvantagesHard to make under loadDangerous to make under heavy load
UsesJoining two equally-sized ropesExtending a towline or stern line
Method 1 the same as a bowline
Method 2 starting with the flat loop
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 2 Double Sheet BendThe double sheet bend is used to tie two lines of different thickness - but not too different It is the same as a normal sheet bend but with an extra turn of the thinner ropearound the flat loop in the thickerThe load goes on the line through the flat loop not the one that comes out the side of the knot
UsesSecuring a heaving line to a tow lineExtending a stern line if you dont have enough line of one thickness
Step 3 BowlineThe bowline is really a special case of the sheet bend but it it tied at the end of a rope to make a loop
The photos show the completed loop and closeups of the front and back of the actual knot Note that it is the same as the sheet bend - but it must be made the right wayround This loop does not tighten in use The knot is quite easy to untie once the load is removed With practice it is very quick to tie
Some usesSecuring a dinghy line to a railing or stanchionSecuring an anchor line to an anchorTie a jib sheet to the sailTie a mooring line around a rock or treeTie a float to an anchor triplineUse one in each line to tie two ropes of very different sizes - eg a throwing line to a large tow ropeDisadvantages the knot must be completely made before it will take any strain - it is hard to tie if there is already a load on the rope
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Linked bowlines
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 4 Bowline on the BightA bowline on the bight is a bowline tied in a loop of rope (neither end is needed) The shape is the same as a bowline made with a double line but the middle of thebight forms the loop around the standing part
UsesAn impromptu bosuns chair - to sit in while being transferred between two boats at sea
Step 5 Clove HitchThe clove hitch can be made when you only have the bight (the middle) of a rope not the ends
UsesSecuring a burgee pole to a burgee halyard (a continuous loop of thin line)Securing a tiller from swinging
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 6 Round Turn and Two Half-HitchesThis is a knot used to secure a line to a ring or bar Wind a couple of turns around the bar then secure the end with two hitches around the standing part (this looks like aclove hitch when done)
AdvantagesCan be made under load - it is easy to take turns around the bar while maintaining tension on the ropeStrong - provided the bar is thicker than the rope the rope is not weakened by sharp bendsDisadvantagesThe end tends to work loose
UsesSecuring a line to a mooring ring or samson post
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 7 Fishermans BendThe fishermans bend is the same as the round turn and two half hitches except that the first hitch is looped under the round turn This uses the tension on the rope tosecure the end from working loose
AdvantagesSecure against working loose
DisadvantagesHard to make under tensionHard to undo under tensionMay seize up under load when wet making it hard to undo
UsesSecuring mooring line to ringSecuring fender lines to rail
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 8 Studsail BendThe studsail bend is like the fishermans bend but the second hitch is also secured under the round turn making it even more secure against working loose when undertension
AdvantagesVery secure against working looseDisadvantagesHard to make under tensionHard to undo under tension
Step 9 Figure-8 KnotThe figure-eight knot is used to prevent an end of rope from passing through a block (pulley) Sometimes called a stopper knot
The double figure-8 knot is used in rock climbing as an alternative to a bowline to secure a climbing harness to the end of a safety rope The double knot is made bymaking a single knot then tracing back around the knot with the free end after passing it around the harness loop
AdvantagesEasy to verify by inspectionNot prone to work loose
DisadvantagesSlow to make and undoCannot be made under load
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 10 Prussic KnotThe prussic knot may be used as a climbing ascender - when made around a vertical rope as shown downwards tension on the ends locks the knot while release oftension allows it to be slid up the rope A pair of prussic knots on foot loops may be used in tandem to climb a rope
UsesClimbing a ropeTaking up tension to free a riding turn on a winch
Step 11 Reef KnotThe reef knot or square knot is used to tie a bundle of material together It must be made around something - it should not be used to tie two free ropes togetherbecause it can easily capsizeIt should not be used to make a loop unless it can be tensioned around a solid object It should not be used around a person - use a bowline instead A capsized reefknot will slip easily and could constrict and cause severe injury
UsesReefing a sail (tying the unused portion around a spar)Securing a furled sail to a spar (sail ties)Wrapping a parcelTying shoelaces
AdvantagesMay be made under moderate load
DisadvantagesCapsizes (works free) if used improperlyCan seize up under load when wet
Tying the knot
Capsizing a reef knot
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 12 CleatsThis is not a knot but is very common on boatsThe first picture shows a rope cleated normally The second shows one with a final locking turn - the last turn is twisted before placing over the cleat so that the tensionon the rope helps secure the free end
When working with ropes under tension take a turn or two around a winch or cleat before trying to secure the end with a knot The load on the free end falls exponentiallywith each turn taken Severe injury can result if a finger or other body part is caught in a loop of rope or between a rope and another object
Step 13 Practice themIt is sometimes useful to be able to tie knots in the dark or as in this video behind your back
Related Instructables
AThird Hand forSailing or OtherThings by WadeTarzia
Paracord KnotDisplay Bord byJamie bagn
Trip LogOutriggerCanoe Sailingthe CaliforniaChannel Islandsby TimAnderson
How to Tie aFigure EightKnot byTactical_Pyro
How to build apirate ship bymdelaney3
Build a ShortDragon (16 foot3-BoardOutriggerSailing Canoe)by Wade Tarzia
repairing aheadsail by josh
How to get arope into a tree(withoutclimbing it) byvitex
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
How to Tie the Lanyard Knotby eddy14777 on January 31 2010
Intro How to Tie the Lanyard KnotMany people including myself have had trouble following the Stormdrane youtube video on tying the lanyard knot so i have done some research and found the solution
Image Notes1 Finished knot
Step 1 MaterialsAll you need is a reasonable length of para cord or whatever you wish to use
Image Notes1 One reasonable amount
Step 2 First StepThe first thing you are going to do is to make a bight that leaves you with to congruent endsThen you are going to put your ring finger through the bight
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Image Notes1 Close enough2 Bight
Step 3 Starting the KnotMake a loop just like the one in the picture and place it over the top strandBring the top strand under the bottom strand
Image Notes1 Notice the way the loop is done2 Top strand
Image Notes1 Bottom strand2 Top strand is under
Step 4 The Most Important PartNow you take the top stand from the previous picture and feed it over the first part of the loop under itself and back over the remainder of the loop
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Image Notes1 Under me2 Top strand3 This should make a diamond type shape
Step 5 DoublingNow take the bottom stand and take it around the part of the top strand nearest to the bight and than come up through the diamond shape in the middleDo the same for the top strand
Image Notes1 Top strand
Image Notes1 Both through the diamond
Step 6 FinishingWhen you take it off your finger it should look like thisWork out the slack by pulling on the bight and the two strands
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Image Notes1 Finished knot
Related Instructables
Cross KnotParacordLanyard byStormdrane
Celtic ButtonKnot (video) byStormdrane
Paracord wristlanyard madewith the snakeknot byStormdrane
Paracord ChainSinnet FastDeploy BoonieHatband (video)by Stormdrane
Zigzag SpoolingParacord (video)by Stormdrane
ParacordBoonie HatWrap (video) byStormdrane
Paracord IDbadge Lanyardby Flahusky
Cobra WeaveKey Fob bytevers94
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Four knots to make paracord into a useful toolby erik_mccray on March 27 2010
Authorerik_mccrayI am an ex-fabricator that is now a stay at home dad I love my new job but I do miss making stuff I love this site amp I am getting involved as a way to keep myskills upOn top of fad work I have also run two small business in the past One was custom sewing amp the other was as a small engine mechanicI have two votec degrees one in metal fabrication amp the other is in engine repairI look forward to getting to know everyone here
Intro Four knots to make paracord into a useful toolParacord is an awesome multitool used everywhere from the wild blue yonder to the deepest caverns But like any good tool it is only as good as the knowledge the userhas about the tool With most people out there using bungee cords amp ratchet straps it seems that paracord is being used for nothing more than friendship bracelets forgrown men This is a shame because for less then the price of a few cheap bungee cords amp some to short to be helpful straps You can get yourself hundreds of feet ofparacord
The key to getting the most out of the paracord is good knot work The first thing you need to know is what makes a good knot One is that the knot is easy amp quick to tieamp more impotant is that the knot is easy amp quick to untie The hitch class of knots is by far the best group of knots that the average person could know The four mostuseful hitch knots are the half hitch a quick simple knot that forms the base for many other knots the inline half hitch allowing you to get the most out of one length ofparacord the slippery hitch that gives you both on the fly control over tension on your paracord but also an adjustable loop that will not change unless you want it amp theinline truckers hitch instantly doubling the your pulling power
Step 1 To get started lets get some terminology that will be used defined
line= the paracord
Main line= the part of the paracord doing the work for example holding down your tarp or the long part of the paracord
Mid line= the middle of the length of the paracord
End line= the unused length of paracord or the short length of paracord
Step 2 The half hitch The half hitch is a simple way to secure a line to an anchor point like the tie down points in most trucks A half hitch is a constrictor knot meaning that the harder you pullon the line the tighter the knots grip gets Another common constrictor knot is the slip knot
Step 1 wrap your line around your anchor point Step 2 wrap the end line around the main line
Step 3 pass the end line threw the end line side of the newly formed loop
step 4 now take the slack out of the knot
step 5 to make sure the knot is secure tie another half hitch to the main line This knot is called adouble half hitch
step 6 another useful thing that can be done with the half hitch is that instead of repeating the wrap on the main line but repeating it on what you are tying to the half hitchcan be used to bind something like a stack of 2x4s
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Image Notes1 End line2 Main line3 step 1
Image Notes1 Step 2
Image Notes1 passing thew the end line side of the loop2 step 3
Image Notes1 step 5
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Image Notes1 step 6
Step 3 The mid line half hitch The mid line half hitch is for when the length of line is to long for the job at hand amp you dont want to have to cut the line to size or you are using multiple anchor pointswith one length of line
Step 1 double up the line at the point in the length you wish to make the knot
Step 2 wrap the doubled up portion of line around your anchor point The doubled up length is now now the end line
Step 3 now tie just as you did for the regular half hitch repeat the knot to make a double half hitch for security
Image Notes1 A mid line double half hitch
Image Notes1 step 1
Image Notes1 The end line2 step 2
Image Notes1 Step 3
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 4 The slippery hitch The slippery hitch is a great knot for adjusting tension on the main line or for having an adjustable fixed loop To adjust the knot simply slide the knot up or down the mainline
Step 1 wrap your line around the anchor point or just double over the line to form a loop
Step 2 wrap the end line around the main line three times Wrapping in the direction of the anchor point or loop
Step 3 put together the two lines making up the loop amp wrap the two lines one time with the end line
Step 4 pass the end line thew the last loop formed covering the two lined of the loop
Step 5 pull the knot tite
step 6 to adjust the size of the loop or main line tension grab the knot amp slide it up or down the main line
Image Notes1 grab just the knot its self to adjust it2 step 5
Image Notes1 step 1
Image Notes1 step 2
Image Notes1 step 3
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Image Notes1 step 4
Image Notes1 grab just the knot its self to adjust it2 step 5
Image Notes1 same knot as in last pic Just slid up2 step 6
Step 5 The mid line truchers hitch The truckers hitch is a great way to double the pulling force on a line There are many ways to tie this knot the problem with most of them is that at some point you aregoing to have to pass the end line through a loop on the main line that is acting like a pulley to double your pulling force this is great if you are making the knot close tothe end of your line but if you are using a 300 length of line amp want to make the knot in the first ten feet having to pass 290 of line thew a loop is a pain But with a fewhalf hitches you will not have to pass the end line threw any loop on the main line
step 1 wrap your line around the anchor point then double over your end line laying the top of the loop over the main line
Step 2 double up your main line amp lay the loop over the loop made by the end line
step 3 in main line above the knot twist in a loop
step 4 put main line loop thew the loop made in step 3 amp pull this loop tight over your main line loop forming a half hitch Repeat step 3 amp 4 to make a doublehalf hitch
step 5 To use the knot just pull down on the end line to put tension on the main line
step 6 after you have the main line snug tie a mid line double half hitch around the two lines forming the loop at the end of the main line with the end line
step 7 Tie a double half hitch with the end line around the end loop of the mid line half hitch of step 6 using the same method as used in steps 3 amp 4
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Image Notes1 the end of step 6
Image Notes1 main line2 end line3 step 1
Image Notes1 main line loop2 end line loop
Image Notes1 step 3
Image Notes1 step 4
Image Notes1 step 4 at the end with a double half hitch on the main loop
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Image Notes1 pull here2 step 5
Image Notes1 the start of step 6
Image Notes1 the end of step 6
Image Notes1 step 72 now the rest of the line is free to do more work
Related Instructables
Paracord KnotDisplay Bord byJamie bagn
ChokelessAdjustableParacord DogLeash byPizzaman101
ParacordLadder wWooden Rungsby josestude
tie a paracordshackle grip byitri45
ParacordPrussik Belt byJavaNut13
TiteTie is theTruckers Knoton Steroids bytitetie
ID Lanyard(Photos) byeschmunk
Dog Toys forHeavy Chewersby J3443RY
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Figure 8 knot and double 8 knotby jonathan111 on November 28 2007
Intro Figure 8 knot and double 8 knotI will show you how to tie a figure 8 knot and a figure 8 follow through
Step 1 Stating the knotThis is a simple knot so just follow the pictures
Step 2 Finishing the knotCross the string under and then push it through the hole Pull tightly unless you are going to do the follow through and leave it somewhat loose
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 3 The follow through knotThe follow through knot should be tied around something brought back and followed through the path of the 8 knot Look at the pictures Basically follow through the 8knot backwards
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Related Instructables
Climb Safe WithA Figure 8Knot by mattste A pocket full of
knots byKiteman
How to Tie aFigure EightKnot byTactical_Pyro
Paracord KnotDisplay Bord byJamie bagn
Cross KnotParacordLanyard byStormdrane
How to Tie aFire-escapeKnot by leonardoismael
Truckers HitchTHE mostawesome knoton the planetby schneidp20
Paracord ZipperPuller byrepeet13
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Truckers Hitch THE most awesome knot on the planetby schneidp20 on October 12 2008
Authorschneidp20I like building stuff Trouble is there just isnt enough time to build everything Sigh
Intro Truckers Hitch THE most awesome knot on the planetYes I know that there are plenty of other cool knots out there many of which I literally couldnt live wo I rock climb However this knot is unlike any other Plus Ineeded a grabber for my Instructable -) (BTW this ISNT a climbing knot) And in truth it isnt a knot by itself but rather a system of common knots
Have you ever tried to tie something down for transporting but just couldnt get the lines tight andor during transport the lines would continually loosen Then this is theknot for you I learned this knot back in the 70s when specialty car racks and ratchet straps were rare or unheard of I initially used it to tie a canoe on a car rack bothattaching to the rack as well as the lines to the bow and stern of the canoe Even with all the new gizmos available today this knot still shines because all you need is arope and ropes dont hum in the wind like straps
The unique aspect of this knot is that it gives you a 2-1 mechanical advantage when tightening the rope Be careful though You can actually damage some thingsbecause of the mechanical advantage This knot holds fast and is easy to untie hallmark traits of any good knot
Below you see the finished knot system well break it apart in the steps that follow
Image Notes1 1st anchor point a bowline2 loop3 securing knots 2 half hitches4 securing loose end with a fishermans knot5 2nd anchor point (should be round)
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Image Notes1 X marks the spot
Step 1 Initial setupThe first step is to anchor one end of the rope and then loop the rope around a 2nd anchor point
For attaching to the 1st anchor point I chose bowline a close 2 on my list -) There are other instructables on that one so I wont bore you here
The 2nd anchor really should be round because it serves as a pulley in this block and tackle type knot Ive used it on sharp anchor points and it doesnt work as well
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 2 Creating a slip knotTie a slip knot somewhere between the two anchor points Correct placement of the slip knot takes some experience to judge it correctly Typically I place it too close tothe 2nd anchor point and end up with not enough room to work with If the knot ends up too far from 2nd anchor point you can extend the knot by enlarging the loop
Be sure you tie the slip knot as shown You may not be able to untie other knots
In this small example the slip knot is uncharacteristically close to the 1st anchor point
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 3 Tightening and securingThe loose end of the rope that went around the 2nd anchor point goes through the slip knot loop Pull the loose end to the desired tension and secure with two halfhitches
Note To allow better view of the knots the rope isnt really tightened in this example
Step 4 Securing loose endThe final knot is just to secure the loose end somehow I chose a fishermans knot to do this
To tie a fishermans knot the rope goes around twice and goes under the X created by the loops Pull the loose end to tighten Finally slide the knot to put tension onthe half hitches
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Image Notes1 X marks the spot
Step 5 FinishedThere you have it I guarantee that the first time you really use this knot (not just practice) you will be amazed at how well it works and youll wish you knew this knot along time ago You may even come over to my side and declare that is is THE most awesome knot on the planet -)
Enjoy and happy haulingDave
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Related Instructables
TiteTie is theTruckers Knoton Steroids bytitetie
Four knots tomake paracordinto a usefultool byerik_mccray
Modify yourbike rack tocarry a sunfishor other boat byewilhelm
SurfboardHammock byGermy
GiganticHalloweenSpider Web bynolte919
How To Tie ASpiders Hitch(video) by back-cast
Three-hitch mathair ornamentby michiexile TRX from
ParacordChallengeAccepted bythrake
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Carry any Bottle with a JUG KNOT Handleby hpstoutharrow on September 17 2009
Intro Carry any Bottle with a JUG KNOT HandleTie a JUG KNOT around a water bottle soda bottle or aluminum bottle to make a secure carrying strap
Re-purpose any container into a reusable water bottle by adding a convenient carrying strap This Instructable will demonstrate how to tie a JUG knot which like its namesuggests is meant to properly secure around the neck of a container
With some cord and the knowledge of this knot you will be able add a handle lanyard or carabiner loop to any of your favorite beverages to carry them on the go
It works perfectly for those disposable water bottles and who knows once you add some colorful cord to the plain old clear water bottle you just might beinclined to refill it and use it again(Check out pictures 4amp5 below)
In addition to plastic beverage bottles like pop water and sports drinks you can turn those rugged aluminum beer bottles into a backpacking canteen
Those of you familiar with my previous aluminum bottle InstructablesROLLED RIM METAL TUMBLERhttpwwwinstructablescomidAluminum-Bottle-Tumbler-Cup-Cook-PotALUMINUM BOTTLE LIGHTWEIGHT ALCOHOL STOVEhttpwwwinstructablescomidAluminum-Bottle-Alcohol-Stovewill recognize the water canteen shown below as a re-purposed aluminum beer bottle Here I have added a painted surface treatment to turn it into a proper lookingwater bottle More on that in steps 13 14 15
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 1 Getting StartedCord size is important Select a small medium weight cord like the one shown here It is a general purpose camp cord sold at most sporting goods stores (shoelacesmight also work)
Do not use a heavy cord or rope because the larger diameter will not tuck under the relatively small lip at the top of the bottleneck and the bottle will fall out
Also the smaller cord cinches tight on itself and will not loosen accidentally
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 2 Form a BightThe next steps show how to tie a JUG KNOT It is the basic step for adding a carrying strap It is also the anchor point for any additional fancy bottle trussing you maywant to add
JUG KNOT Step 1
Form a Bight in the center of a length of cord Bight is a knot term for a loop or bend in the rope In this case the main Bight in this knot is highlighted with a white mark Imakes it easier to follow its path in these steps
The running ends of the cord should be equal length
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 3 Pull the Bight downPULL the Bight DOWN forming two Loops
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 4 Cross the LoopsCROSS the right Loop OVER the left Loop
Step 5 Pass the Bight under the 1st loopTake the main Bight and pass it UNDER the left Loop
Step 6 Weave the BightWEAVE the Bight OVER the portion of the right Loop and UNDER the portion of the left Loop
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 7 Extend the BightExtend the Bight OVER the outer portion of the right Loop
Step 8 Flip the Right Loop behindAdditional colored identification points have been added to the loops to follow their travel in these next two steps
The right Loop Yellow marker is FLIPPED BEHIND the knot and ends up on the far left side of the knot
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 9 Flip the 2nd loop in frontRaise the green marker (located on what was formerly the left loop) and pull it down and to the right FLIPPING IT IN FRONT of the knot
Note the blue portion of the this loop will pass around the outside of the yellow portion of the first loop
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Image Notes1 Center of knot that will tighten around the bottles neck
Step 10 Remove SlackNote where the blue green amp yellow markers end up
Start to remove the slack in the loops by pulling the original main Bight (white marker top right) and the two free standing ends at the bottom
the bottle neck will pass through the very center of the knot
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Image Notes1 Center of knot that will tighten around the bottles neck
Step 11 Tighten the KnotAfter removing the slack insert the bottle neck and finish tightening
The knot should look like this before slipping it over the bottle
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 12 Secure on bottle neckThis is the finished knot shown on the neck of various containers
The loop end and the two free standing ends can be tied together to create a carrying handle (last picture below)
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 13 Aluminum Bottle Water Bottle
The next few steps show the features of an aluminum beer bottle re-purposed as a water bottle canteen It is one of many containers that can be reused as a camp waterbottle
The bottle was lightly sanded masked and then pained with a hammered finished paint to create an interesting surface texture
Image Notes1 Textured finish paint makes an interesting grip-able surface2 Masked with tape for painting3 Masked with tape for painting
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Image Notes1 Dowel used for holding the bottle during painting
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 14 Tethered Cork StopperUse a wine bottle man made Cork as a stopper for your aluminum water bottleNote Use a cork that was removed from the wine bottle without the corkscrew penetrating through the bottom end of the cork (A hole all the way through the cork willcause it to leak) Use the unpierced end of the cork inside the water bottle
Drill a hole through the sides of the Cork Thread the cord through the hole to the center of the cord Use the cork as the main Bight and tie the Jug knot as shown inthe beginning steps
Now the cork is tethered to the bottle and will not get lost or fall on the ground
A Carabiner clip passes through the other cord end to attache the water bottle to you belt or pack
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 15 Trussed for TransportThis is another hanging method for carrying your aluminum bottle water canteen A Jug knot is tied conventionally around the neck
The running ends of the knot however are pulled down towards the bottom of the bottle A Barrel Knot is tied about 34 the way down the side of the bottle A squareknot is tied on the bottom of the knot to keep the two running ends tight against the sides of the bottle
I like the look of the accent colored cord running down the sides of the bottle and the fact that the bottle hangs from the belt upside down It adds to its uniqueness
The last picture shows another truss variation
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 16 AdvancedBelow is a bottle with some additional trussing You can be creative as you want It all starts with a re-purposed container and the Jug Knot (and enough cord)
Related Instructables
AluminumBottle TumblerCup amp Cook Potfor an AlcoholStove byhpstoutharrow
Water BottleBelt Clip byuglymike Duct Tape
Water Bottle byrabidsquire2
AluminumBottle AlcoholStove byhpstoutharrow
DIYGlass WaterBottle byCulturespy
Solar WaterHeater forBackpackingUsing WaterBottles and aCar Shade bykopomeroy
Duct tape waterbottle holder(Photos) by pinkmarshmallow
How to make aCamelPack withan old plasticbottle bywillrandship
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Basic Knots Guideby zorro3355 on April 29 2008
Intro Basic Knots Guidehi
Step 1 Thumb knotThe most simple knotUsed as a stopper and prevent ropes from fraying
Step 2 Reef KnotUsed to tie two ropes of equal thickness togetherIt is pretty easy to tie and untie but under tentionit may be diffcult to untieIt is also not sutible for smoothropes(egnylon ropes)
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 3 Figure of eightused as a stopperprevent ropes from fraying and its more secure than tumb knot its is also used to tie Caribinas to ropes and is often used in rock climbing
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 4 Timber hitchused for pulling logs
Step 5 Clove hitchUsed to tie a rope onto a pole or logThe pole must be roundThe pole lust be thicker then the rope itself
(greatly used during pioneering)
Step 6 Sheet bandused to tie ropes of different thickness together(works on same thickness of ropes too)
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 7 Sheep shankTo shorten RopesTo prevent middle fraying
Step 8 Slip knotWhippingUsed as a grip for pulling things(when tied on a stick or small pole)(marlin spike hitch)
Related Instructables
Rope Rings byhpstoutharrow
How to Tie aFigure EightKnot byTactical_Pyro
Whippin (WestCountry Style)by tim_n
SurvivalBracelet(Updated) bytevers94
HangmansNoose PackClosure byPopEye42
Turkey on aTripod byhpstoutharrow
SurvivalBracelet II bytevers94 Zigzag Spooling
Paracord (video)by Stormdrane
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
How to Tie a Fire-escape Knotby leonardo ismael on October 16 2007
Intro How to Tie a Fire-escape KnotThis knot is used by firemen in case of fires for example imagine a scene where the ladder on the firetruck messes up but people need to get down a five story buildingor more All they have is a long piece of rope they can safely get down with a secure knot like the fire-escape knot So why not learn it its easy to do and hard to untieif you tie it tightly
This is from the American Boys Handbook
Step 1 Get Your RopeFirst grab a piece of rope and bend it like this to make a loop in it Follow every step to the smallest detail
Step 2 Twist the RopeNow make a twist like this and hold it together
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 3 Pull Through the TwistPull the loop through the twist you just made from underneath
Step 4 Go Over the Split EndNow pull the tail through the loop
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 5 FinallyAnd finally just pull it through as pictured below
Congratulations you just learned the fire-escape knot
Step 6 Same Name Not KnotThis is another knot called the fire-escape knot this shouldnt be your result
Related Instructables
House FireEscape Plan(video) byWhatHappensNowAdvice
ParacordLadder wWooden Rungsby josestude
Bed SheetEscape Rope byjessehensel
rope ladder(glow-in-the-dark version) bymikeasaurus
HeadlockEscape 2(video) byjohnnyrockstah
QuickFirestarter byMattandJora
Trail sauna byjakee117
How to Kill FireAnts andCommitGenocide byKentsOkay
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Climb Safe With A Figure 8 Knotby mattste on February 23 2010
Intro Climb Safe With A Figure 8 Knot There are many things that a beginning climber needs to know including several important knots Perhaps the most essential knot is the Figure 8 Follow Through Thistutorial will demonstrate how to correctly harness yourself to a rope using a Figure 8 Follow Through knot This knot is used primarily by rock climbers to provide a life-line Since this knot is used as a life-line it is very important to be able to tie it correctly (Your life could depend upon it)
Dont worry with this tutorial and about 5 minutes of practice you can have this knot mastered
Things you will need
- Climbing Harness- Climbing Rope
If you are wanting to go climbing and dont already have these items they can be purchased for about $25 each at most outdoor sporting goods stores If you are merelylooking to learn the knot a belt loop and a rope (about five feet long) will do
Image Notes1 Climbing Harness2 Climbing Rope
Step 1 Dealing With The RopeThroughout this tutorial I will be discussing different parts of the rope To make these instructions as clear as possible I will define a few terms that I will use throughoutthe tutorial The Anchor End of the rope will generally be at the top of the images This is the end that would be anchored to the wall or rock and does not move Wewill not be doing much with the anchored end The Tail End of the rope is the opposite end that we will be dealing with I will call this the tail for short
Now that we have some terms to work with lets get started
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 2 Tying The First Figure 8This knot has several parts to it The first part of the knot is just tying a basic figure 8 To tie the first figure 8 there are four simple steps
1 - Using the tail make a loop over the rope (as shown in the first picture) keeping in mind that there should be about 3 ft of slack on the tail end
2 - Wrap the tail back this time go under the anchored end (As shown in the second picture)
3 - Bring the tail down through the first loop (As shown in the third picture)
4 - Finally pull the two ends to make the knot a little bit tighter and easier to deal with (Shown in the fourth picture)
After these four steps you should end up with a knot that resembles a figure 8
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 3 Looping Into The Harness In order to secure the rope to the harness simply thread the tail end of the rope through the front loop in the harness as shown in the picture below This step isobviously very important
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 4 Following Back Through The Figure 8After looping the rope through the harness you have to thread the tail end of the rope back through the knot following the first figure 8 I have divided this process intofive smaller steps in order to make it more clear
1 - Coming form underneath the knot bring the tail up through the near loop and to the left behind the anchored end of the rope (Shown in the first picture)
2 - Wrap the tail around the anchored end back to the right and down through the adjacent loop (Shown in the second picture)
3 - You simply need to bring the tail back over the top of the knot to the left (Shown in the third picture)
4 - Bring the tail end up through the far loop following the anchored end (Shown in the fourth picture)
5 - Finally pull the knot tight (Shown in the fifth picture)
As you can see the first four pictures are simply tracing the knot back through with the tail end
For the last part while you pull the knot tight you may want to make small adjustments and rearrange how it all fits together If the knot does not lay perfectly smoothand tight its NOT a big deal
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 5 Finishing The Knot After completing the Figure 8 knot you will want to somehow secure the tail end of the rope out of the way There are a couple different ways to do this the way that Iwill demonstrate is using whats called a Stopper Knot This secondary knot is similar to a Fishermans knot and is pretty simple I have once again divided thisprocess into several smaller steps
1 - Start by wrapping the tail end around the anchored end (As shown in the first picture)
2 - Wrap the tail back underneath the two vertical segments (As shown in the second picture)
3 - Simply repeat the first two steps wrapping the tail around again (As shown in the third picture)
4 - This step in the fourth picture may look complicated but all you need to do is insert the tail up through the two loops that you have just made
5 - To finish off the knot you will want to slowly pull the tail end while gently pushing the bottom of the stopper knot upwards If you have successfully completed this knotit should look something like the fifth picture
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 6 Ready To Climb Now that you have mastered the Figure 8 knot you can securely harness yourself into a climbing rope Remember there are many other skills that go into setting up ananchor and belaying a climber This tutorial only covers the figure 8 knot For more information there are many great websites that demonstrate how to correctly set up asafe climbing system (Ive posted a few below) If you are a beginning climber I recommend that you read up on a few other climbing techniques Also you shouldprobably go to a climbing wall or gym where there are experienced climbers that can show you the ropes Hopefully this tutorial has been helpful Have fun and be safe
Some useful linkshttpwwwstephenprattnetAnchorsanchorshtmhttpwwwuoregonedu~oppclimbingtopicsanchorshtmlhttpwwwabc-of-rockclimbingcomhowtoclimbingtechniquesasp
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Related Instructables
How to Tie aFigure EightKnot byTactical_Pyro
Paracord KnotDisplay Bord byJamie bagn
Basic KnotsGuide byzorro3355
How to Climb aTree (withprussiks) bystasterisk
How to climb atree (using onlyrope) thefunsimple wayby louieaw
How to get arope into a tree(withoutclimbing it) byvitex
How to tievarious knots byadaviel
How to make arope swing byjdub0928
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Turks Head Knots on a Bottleby sklnxbones on July 6 2010
Intro Turks Head Knots on a BottleThis is the finished project A bottle decorated with three Turks Head Knots There are only three knots on this bottle The RED and the BLUE knots are each a 20 Bightby 3 Lead Turks Head Knots The WHITE knot is a 20 Bight by 19 Lead Turks Head Knot
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 1 Supplies
Cord Lots and Lots of cord I cant tell you how much each bottle is differentBottle Washed and Dried inside and out Make sure to remove all water spotsThreaded Needle Cord screws into the threads at the base of the needlePegs I use brass rivets used as a map to tie the Turks Head KnotsHole Punch Used to punch holes in the painters tape to hold the pegsPainters Tape To hold the pegs in place and to make your map for the Turks Head KnotsMarker To write on the painters tapeCloth Towel To remove finger prints and dirt from your bottleKrazy Glue or Super Glue This is used to secure the knots in place to the bottle
OPTIONAL BUT HIGHLY RECOMMENDEDI use the Turks Head Cookbook from KnotToolcom
Step 2 PreparationYou will need to find a bottle you like I used an empty instant tea bottle of course washed and dried (I like to put the bottle in the oven for a few minutes to dry the insidewithout water spots Take off the lid and do not put lid in the oven) Now measure the circumference of the bottle Take a cord and tightly wrap the cord around the bottleMark where the ends meet and use a ruler to measure the length of the cord For my instant tea bottle the circumference is 27cm I know from past knots that I have tiedthat I want my knot to have 20 Bights in the top and bottom (bands) knots I am going to use the Bights in the (bands) knots to tie the middle knot Now divide the numberof Bights (20) into the size of the circumference (27) to get the space between each Bight (135) With me so far
Now take two pieces of painters tape using a ruler measure out the length of the circumference and mark the length on the both pieces of tape Next you will mark thespace between each Bight on the tape
Step 3 Adding the PegsI like to use pegs when tying Turks Head Knots it just makes tying the knot easier
These are what I use for pegs
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 4 Adding Pegs to the TapeNow take a hole punch to cut holes in the tape where the lines meet You will place the pegs in the holes
Insert a peg in each hole and carefully stick the first piece of tape to the bottle
Step 5 Adding the 2nd row of pegsNow do the same thing with the second piece of tape The numbers on each piece of tape must line up
This picture shows you what you should have now This odd looking thing will be your map to tie the Turks Head Knot And this is the end of Step 1
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 6 Tying the first Turks Head KnotUsing the Turks Head Cookbook follow the numbers going over and under as indicated in the book I chose a 20 Bight by 3 Lead knot which will give me a nice bandaround the bottle Once the ends meet you have made one complete knot Tape the running end of your cord and start removing the pegs and the tape
Step 7 Remove the pegs and the tapeBe careful not to untie the knot as you remove the pegs and tape from the bottle Continue to remove all the pegs and remove the tape from the bottle At this point theknot will be very loose and will need to be tightened up
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 8 Remove the slack from the knotHere you can see just how much the knot expanded Starting with the standing end begin to pull the slack out of the knot going towards the running end of the cordDo not expect to pull all the slack out at once You may have to make 3 - 5 attempts at removing the slack out of the knot DO NOT remove all of the slack out of the knotIn order to make the bands we will have to triple the Turks Head Knot We will do this by following the knot three times The threaded needle will really come in handyhere
Step 9 Triple the KnotOnce you have made three passes of the Turks Head Knot use your needle to go under your knot about half the circumference and cut the cord The knot will be tightenough to hide the tail in placeTIP I carefully add a couple of drops of super glue UNDER the band to hold them in place and keep them from sliding around in the nextsteps A drop or two in 3 or 4 places around the band should be enough
Step 10 Add the second knotNow repeat this whole step for the second bandWhen tying the second band you must make sure the Bights line up to the first band This is crucial for the next stepWipe down the bottle to make sure all your finger prints and adhesive from the tape are all removed You want to make sure your bottle is clean at this point Any dirt orfinger prints left on the bottle will be almost impossible to remove From this point on we will use gloves when tying our last knot
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 11 Maping the Top KnotStick a piece of painters tape on top of your first band leaving the bottom of the knot exposedUse a marker to count the number of Bights in your knot Instead of using the pegs we are going to use the Bights to tie our next Turks Head Knot
Step 12 Mapping the Bottom KnotDo the same thing for the bottom band but you must make sure your numbers on top and bottom line up So 1 on top should be the same position as 1 on the bottom
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 13 Adding the last knotAgain using the Turks Head Cookbook and the threaded needle you are going to follow the instructions going over and under as indicated in the book Be sure to usegloves when ever you handle the bottle
Step 14 Thats ItFor this Turks Head Knot I am using a 20 Bight by 19 Lead knot
Because of the amount of cord you are working with your cord will get twisted and knotted You will have to un-twist the cord often Its a pain in the rear but it has to bedone And it has to be done alot
Continue to tie the knot until you finish the knot If you have the cord and the patience you can double or triple the knot When you are done use your needle to hide theends under your bands Cut the ends and your DONE
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Related Instructables
Monkeys FistFloatingKeychain byjokerlz
How To Make ATurks headKnot WithParacord byDoggie Stylish
Tying Trivetsout of Rope forHoliday Gifts bykylemarsh
Paracord KnotDisplay Bord byJamie bagn
How to Make ATurks Head(Photos) bymchs60chip
A pocket full ofknots byKiteman
Monkeys fistknot AND themonkey byjonathan111
TiteTie is theTruckers Knoton Steroids bytitetie
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Larks head noose -- an easy useful knot that tightens and loosensby Larry Breed on February 19 2009
Intro Larks head noose -- an easy useful knot that tightens and loosensI thought I knew all the basic knots but then I was taught this incredibly useful simple knot Its good for tying up the neck of a bag that you want to repeatedly open andsecurely close Its good for tying around a springy bundle that will need tightening and retightening And its easy to undo
Ive looked at knot literature but havent found a name for this so I named it The basic knot is well known its called a larks head Since all Ive done is to slip the twoends through the larks head to make a noose I call it that
WARNING Dont use this knot when human safety would depend on it Climbers and mountaineers have well-tested reliable knots for such situations
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Image Notes1 To tighten further step on this side of the larks head and pull the free ends
Step 1 Double the cord overThe larks head noose requires enough cord to go twice around your bundle plus a foot or two Find the center and double it over Sailors call this a bight
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 2 Form the larks headComing from below the bight hook your thumb and forefinger over the two sides Reach outward and downward and pinch your fingertips together underneath thedoubled cord
Youve made a larks head Move the crossing cord a little farther from your hand so theres a clear opening through the two half-loops
Step 3 Form the nooseSlip the two ends of the cord through the opening we were just talking about Pull the larks head tight so it grips the two cords Find something that needs constrictingand put the noose around it
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 4 Tightening retightening and lockingSlide the knot against the bundle If its not tight enough to keep from slipping tighten it by holding it in one hand and tugging on the cords one at a time with the otherhand Notice that you can slide the knot out again for instance to re-open the bag you just tied shut For some applications this may be as tight as you need it
A springy bundle probably still feels loose If so compress the bundle and get a new grip on the cords Rest your foot on the bundle on the cords nearest the larks headand pull to slide the larks head tighter
To make the knot more permanent you can lock it Make an overhand in the cord ends (Exactly like the first step in tying shoelaces) With your foot still on the bundlepull on the cords and move your hands apart until youre pulling in opposite directions You have just locked the larks head and you can trust it to stay that way()
But lets say that later on you want to loosen the locked knot Again put your foot on the bundle and cords nearest the larks head hold the two cord ends together andpull This makes a little slack between the overhand and the larks head so you can untie the overhand
In twine or small string the locking overhand knot may be difficult to undo Use a shoelace knot instead of an overhand and itll unlock easily
() If youre using slippery cord like polypropylene an overhand may not lock securely You may want to tie another overhand knot For added security wrap a shortlength of duct tape around the two cords close to the knot
Image Notes1 To tighten further step on this side of the larks head and pull the free ends
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Related Instructables
TRX fromParacordChallengeAccepted bythrake
A pocket full ofknots byKiteman
Lens CapLanyard by~teknoarsonist~ how to tie a
noose byawesume
AdjustableParacordGlassesLanyard byjdtwelve12
HangmansNoose PackClosure byPopEye42
Paraleash - ADog LeashFrom Paracordby The Ideanator
How to make arugged andhandy ParacordBelt by Jake22
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 1 Sheet BendThe sheet bend is used to tie two lines together It is perhaps the most generally useful knot of all When used to tie a line to itself making a loop it is called a bowlineThe strain is taken on the ropes in the middle - not the one coming out the side
How the knot is made is not critical - it is the final shape that is important One can make the flat loop first and work the other rope around it Or one can make thecrossed loop first - required when tying a bowline
The two images show front and back views of the same knot
AdvantagesEasy to makeEasy to undo when tension is removedDoes not easily capsize
DisadvantagesHard to make under loadDangerous to make under heavy load
UsesJoining two equally-sized ropesExtending a towline or stern line
Method 1 the same as a bowline
Method 2 starting with the flat loop
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 2 Double Sheet BendThe double sheet bend is used to tie two lines of different thickness - but not too different It is the same as a normal sheet bend but with an extra turn of the thinner ropearound the flat loop in the thickerThe load goes on the line through the flat loop not the one that comes out the side of the knot
UsesSecuring a heaving line to a tow lineExtending a stern line if you dont have enough line of one thickness
Step 3 BowlineThe bowline is really a special case of the sheet bend but it it tied at the end of a rope to make a loop
The photos show the completed loop and closeups of the front and back of the actual knot Note that it is the same as the sheet bend - but it must be made the right wayround This loop does not tighten in use The knot is quite easy to untie once the load is removed With practice it is very quick to tie
Some usesSecuring a dinghy line to a railing or stanchionSecuring an anchor line to an anchorTie a jib sheet to the sailTie a mooring line around a rock or treeTie a float to an anchor triplineUse one in each line to tie two ropes of very different sizes - eg a throwing line to a large tow ropeDisadvantages the knot must be completely made before it will take any strain - it is hard to tie if there is already a load on the rope
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Linked bowlines
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 4 Bowline on the BightA bowline on the bight is a bowline tied in a loop of rope (neither end is needed) The shape is the same as a bowline made with a double line but the middle of thebight forms the loop around the standing part
UsesAn impromptu bosuns chair - to sit in while being transferred between two boats at sea
Step 5 Clove HitchThe clove hitch can be made when you only have the bight (the middle) of a rope not the ends
UsesSecuring a burgee pole to a burgee halyard (a continuous loop of thin line)Securing a tiller from swinging
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 6 Round Turn and Two Half-HitchesThis is a knot used to secure a line to a ring or bar Wind a couple of turns around the bar then secure the end with two hitches around the standing part (this looks like aclove hitch when done)
AdvantagesCan be made under load - it is easy to take turns around the bar while maintaining tension on the ropeStrong - provided the bar is thicker than the rope the rope is not weakened by sharp bendsDisadvantagesThe end tends to work loose
UsesSecuring a line to a mooring ring or samson post
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 7 Fishermans BendThe fishermans bend is the same as the round turn and two half hitches except that the first hitch is looped under the round turn This uses the tension on the rope tosecure the end from working loose
AdvantagesSecure against working loose
DisadvantagesHard to make under tensionHard to undo under tensionMay seize up under load when wet making it hard to undo
UsesSecuring mooring line to ringSecuring fender lines to rail
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 8 Studsail BendThe studsail bend is like the fishermans bend but the second hitch is also secured under the round turn making it even more secure against working loose when undertension
AdvantagesVery secure against working looseDisadvantagesHard to make under tensionHard to undo under tension
Step 9 Figure-8 KnotThe figure-eight knot is used to prevent an end of rope from passing through a block (pulley) Sometimes called a stopper knot
The double figure-8 knot is used in rock climbing as an alternative to a bowline to secure a climbing harness to the end of a safety rope The double knot is made bymaking a single knot then tracing back around the knot with the free end after passing it around the harness loop
AdvantagesEasy to verify by inspectionNot prone to work loose
DisadvantagesSlow to make and undoCannot be made under load
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 10 Prussic KnotThe prussic knot may be used as a climbing ascender - when made around a vertical rope as shown downwards tension on the ends locks the knot while release oftension allows it to be slid up the rope A pair of prussic knots on foot loops may be used in tandem to climb a rope
UsesClimbing a ropeTaking up tension to free a riding turn on a winch
Step 11 Reef KnotThe reef knot or square knot is used to tie a bundle of material together It must be made around something - it should not be used to tie two free ropes togetherbecause it can easily capsizeIt should not be used to make a loop unless it can be tensioned around a solid object It should not be used around a person - use a bowline instead A capsized reefknot will slip easily and could constrict and cause severe injury
UsesReefing a sail (tying the unused portion around a spar)Securing a furled sail to a spar (sail ties)Wrapping a parcelTying shoelaces
AdvantagesMay be made under moderate load
DisadvantagesCapsizes (works free) if used improperlyCan seize up under load when wet
Tying the knot
Capsizing a reef knot
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 12 CleatsThis is not a knot but is very common on boatsThe first picture shows a rope cleated normally The second shows one with a final locking turn - the last turn is twisted before placing over the cleat so that the tensionon the rope helps secure the free end
When working with ropes under tension take a turn or two around a winch or cleat before trying to secure the end with a knot The load on the free end falls exponentiallywith each turn taken Severe injury can result if a finger or other body part is caught in a loop of rope or between a rope and another object
Step 13 Practice themIt is sometimes useful to be able to tie knots in the dark or as in this video behind your back
Related Instructables
AThird Hand forSailing or OtherThings by WadeTarzia
Paracord KnotDisplay Bord byJamie bagn
Trip LogOutriggerCanoe Sailingthe CaliforniaChannel Islandsby TimAnderson
How to Tie aFigure EightKnot byTactical_Pyro
How to build apirate ship bymdelaney3
Build a ShortDragon (16 foot3-BoardOutriggerSailing Canoe)by Wade Tarzia
repairing aheadsail by josh
How to get arope into a tree(withoutclimbing it) byvitex
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
How to Tie the Lanyard Knotby eddy14777 on January 31 2010
Intro How to Tie the Lanyard KnotMany people including myself have had trouble following the Stormdrane youtube video on tying the lanyard knot so i have done some research and found the solution
Image Notes1 Finished knot
Step 1 MaterialsAll you need is a reasonable length of para cord or whatever you wish to use
Image Notes1 One reasonable amount
Step 2 First StepThe first thing you are going to do is to make a bight that leaves you with to congruent endsThen you are going to put your ring finger through the bight
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Image Notes1 Close enough2 Bight
Step 3 Starting the KnotMake a loop just like the one in the picture and place it over the top strandBring the top strand under the bottom strand
Image Notes1 Notice the way the loop is done2 Top strand
Image Notes1 Bottom strand2 Top strand is under
Step 4 The Most Important PartNow you take the top stand from the previous picture and feed it over the first part of the loop under itself and back over the remainder of the loop
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Image Notes1 Under me2 Top strand3 This should make a diamond type shape
Step 5 DoublingNow take the bottom stand and take it around the part of the top strand nearest to the bight and than come up through the diamond shape in the middleDo the same for the top strand
Image Notes1 Top strand
Image Notes1 Both through the diamond
Step 6 FinishingWhen you take it off your finger it should look like thisWork out the slack by pulling on the bight and the two strands
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Image Notes1 Finished knot
Related Instructables
Cross KnotParacordLanyard byStormdrane
Celtic ButtonKnot (video) byStormdrane
Paracord wristlanyard madewith the snakeknot byStormdrane
Paracord ChainSinnet FastDeploy BoonieHatband (video)by Stormdrane
Zigzag SpoolingParacord (video)by Stormdrane
ParacordBoonie HatWrap (video) byStormdrane
Paracord IDbadge Lanyardby Flahusky
Cobra WeaveKey Fob bytevers94
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Four knots to make paracord into a useful toolby erik_mccray on March 27 2010
Authorerik_mccrayI am an ex-fabricator that is now a stay at home dad I love my new job but I do miss making stuff I love this site amp I am getting involved as a way to keep myskills upOn top of fad work I have also run two small business in the past One was custom sewing amp the other was as a small engine mechanicI have two votec degrees one in metal fabrication amp the other is in engine repairI look forward to getting to know everyone here
Intro Four knots to make paracord into a useful toolParacord is an awesome multitool used everywhere from the wild blue yonder to the deepest caverns But like any good tool it is only as good as the knowledge the userhas about the tool With most people out there using bungee cords amp ratchet straps it seems that paracord is being used for nothing more than friendship bracelets forgrown men This is a shame because for less then the price of a few cheap bungee cords amp some to short to be helpful straps You can get yourself hundreds of feet ofparacord
The key to getting the most out of the paracord is good knot work The first thing you need to know is what makes a good knot One is that the knot is easy amp quick to tieamp more impotant is that the knot is easy amp quick to untie The hitch class of knots is by far the best group of knots that the average person could know The four mostuseful hitch knots are the half hitch a quick simple knot that forms the base for many other knots the inline half hitch allowing you to get the most out of one length ofparacord the slippery hitch that gives you both on the fly control over tension on your paracord but also an adjustable loop that will not change unless you want it amp theinline truckers hitch instantly doubling the your pulling power
Step 1 To get started lets get some terminology that will be used defined
line= the paracord
Main line= the part of the paracord doing the work for example holding down your tarp or the long part of the paracord
Mid line= the middle of the length of the paracord
End line= the unused length of paracord or the short length of paracord
Step 2 The half hitch The half hitch is a simple way to secure a line to an anchor point like the tie down points in most trucks A half hitch is a constrictor knot meaning that the harder you pullon the line the tighter the knots grip gets Another common constrictor knot is the slip knot
Step 1 wrap your line around your anchor point Step 2 wrap the end line around the main line
Step 3 pass the end line threw the end line side of the newly formed loop
step 4 now take the slack out of the knot
step 5 to make sure the knot is secure tie another half hitch to the main line This knot is called adouble half hitch
step 6 another useful thing that can be done with the half hitch is that instead of repeating the wrap on the main line but repeating it on what you are tying to the half hitchcan be used to bind something like a stack of 2x4s
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Image Notes1 End line2 Main line3 step 1
Image Notes1 Step 2
Image Notes1 passing thew the end line side of the loop2 step 3
Image Notes1 step 5
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Image Notes1 step 6
Step 3 The mid line half hitch The mid line half hitch is for when the length of line is to long for the job at hand amp you dont want to have to cut the line to size or you are using multiple anchor pointswith one length of line
Step 1 double up the line at the point in the length you wish to make the knot
Step 2 wrap the doubled up portion of line around your anchor point The doubled up length is now now the end line
Step 3 now tie just as you did for the regular half hitch repeat the knot to make a double half hitch for security
Image Notes1 A mid line double half hitch
Image Notes1 step 1
Image Notes1 The end line2 step 2
Image Notes1 Step 3
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 4 The slippery hitch The slippery hitch is a great knot for adjusting tension on the main line or for having an adjustable fixed loop To adjust the knot simply slide the knot up or down the mainline
Step 1 wrap your line around the anchor point or just double over the line to form a loop
Step 2 wrap the end line around the main line three times Wrapping in the direction of the anchor point or loop
Step 3 put together the two lines making up the loop amp wrap the two lines one time with the end line
Step 4 pass the end line thew the last loop formed covering the two lined of the loop
Step 5 pull the knot tite
step 6 to adjust the size of the loop or main line tension grab the knot amp slide it up or down the main line
Image Notes1 grab just the knot its self to adjust it2 step 5
Image Notes1 step 1
Image Notes1 step 2
Image Notes1 step 3
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Image Notes1 step 4
Image Notes1 grab just the knot its self to adjust it2 step 5
Image Notes1 same knot as in last pic Just slid up2 step 6
Step 5 The mid line truchers hitch The truckers hitch is a great way to double the pulling force on a line There are many ways to tie this knot the problem with most of them is that at some point you aregoing to have to pass the end line through a loop on the main line that is acting like a pulley to double your pulling force this is great if you are making the knot close tothe end of your line but if you are using a 300 length of line amp want to make the knot in the first ten feet having to pass 290 of line thew a loop is a pain But with a fewhalf hitches you will not have to pass the end line threw any loop on the main line
step 1 wrap your line around the anchor point then double over your end line laying the top of the loop over the main line
Step 2 double up your main line amp lay the loop over the loop made by the end line
step 3 in main line above the knot twist in a loop
step 4 put main line loop thew the loop made in step 3 amp pull this loop tight over your main line loop forming a half hitch Repeat step 3 amp 4 to make a doublehalf hitch
step 5 To use the knot just pull down on the end line to put tension on the main line
step 6 after you have the main line snug tie a mid line double half hitch around the two lines forming the loop at the end of the main line with the end line
step 7 Tie a double half hitch with the end line around the end loop of the mid line half hitch of step 6 using the same method as used in steps 3 amp 4
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Image Notes1 the end of step 6
Image Notes1 main line2 end line3 step 1
Image Notes1 main line loop2 end line loop
Image Notes1 step 3
Image Notes1 step 4
Image Notes1 step 4 at the end with a double half hitch on the main loop
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Image Notes1 pull here2 step 5
Image Notes1 the start of step 6
Image Notes1 the end of step 6
Image Notes1 step 72 now the rest of the line is free to do more work
Related Instructables
Paracord KnotDisplay Bord byJamie bagn
ChokelessAdjustableParacord DogLeash byPizzaman101
ParacordLadder wWooden Rungsby josestude
tie a paracordshackle grip byitri45
ParacordPrussik Belt byJavaNut13
TiteTie is theTruckers Knoton Steroids bytitetie
ID Lanyard(Photos) byeschmunk
Dog Toys forHeavy Chewersby J3443RY
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Figure 8 knot and double 8 knotby jonathan111 on November 28 2007
Intro Figure 8 knot and double 8 knotI will show you how to tie a figure 8 knot and a figure 8 follow through
Step 1 Stating the knotThis is a simple knot so just follow the pictures
Step 2 Finishing the knotCross the string under and then push it through the hole Pull tightly unless you are going to do the follow through and leave it somewhat loose
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 3 The follow through knotThe follow through knot should be tied around something brought back and followed through the path of the 8 knot Look at the pictures Basically follow through the 8knot backwards
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Related Instructables
Climb Safe WithA Figure 8Knot by mattste A pocket full of
knots byKiteman
How to Tie aFigure EightKnot byTactical_Pyro
Paracord KnotDisplay Bord byJamie bagn
Cross KnotParacordLanyard byStormdrane
How to Tie aFire-escapeKnot by leonardoismael
Truckers HitchTHE mostawesome knoton the planetby schneidp20
Paracord ZipperPuller byrepeet13
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Truckers Hitch THE most awesome knot on the planetby schneidp20 on October 12 2008
Authorschneidp20I like building stuff Trouble is there just isnt enough time to build everything Sigh
Intro Truckers Hitch THE most awesome knot on the planetYes I know that there are plenty of other cool knots out there many of which I literally couldnt live wo I rock climb However this knot is unlike any other Plus Ineeded a grabber for my Instructable -) (BTW this ISNT a climbing knot) And in truth it isnt a knot by itself but rather a system of common knots
Have you ever tried to tie something down for transporting but just couldnt get the lines tight andor during transport the lines would continually loosen Then this is theknot for you I learned this knot back in the 70s when specialty car racks and ratchet straps were rare or unheard of I initially used it to tie a canoe on a car rack bothattaching to the rack as well as the lines to the bow and stern of the canoe Even with all the new gizmos available today this knot still shines because all you need is arope and ropes dont hum in the wind like straps
The unique aspect of this knot is that it gives you a 2-1 mechanical advantage when tightening the rope Be careful though You can actually damage some thingsbecause of the mechanical advantage This knot holds fast and is easy to untie hallmark traits of any good knot
Below you see the finished knot system well break it apart in the steps that follow
Image Notes1 1st anchor point a bowline2 loop3 securing knots 2 half hitches4 securing loose end with a fishermans knot5 2nd anchor point (should be round)
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Image Notes1 X marks the spot
Step 1 Initial setupThe first step is to anchor one end of the rope and then loop the rope around a 2nd anchor point
For attaching to the 1st anchor point I chose bowline a close 2 on my list -) There are other instructables on that one so I wont bore you here
The 2nd anchor really should be round because it serves as a pulley in this block and tackle type knot Ive used it on sharp anchor points and it doesnt work as well
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 2 Creating a slip knotTie a slip knot somewhere between the two anchor points Correct placement of the slip knot takes some experience to judge it correctly Typically I place it too close tothe 2nd anchor point and end up with not enough room to work with If the knot ends up too far from 2nd anchor point you can extend the knot by enlarging the loop
Be sure you tie the slip knot as shown You may not be able to untie other knots
In this small example the slip knot is uncharacteristically close to the 1st anchor point
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 3 Tightening and securingThe loose end of the rope that went around the 2nd anchor point goes through the slip knot loop Pull the loose end to the desired tension and secure with two halfhitches
Note To allow better view of the knots the rope isnt really tightened in this example
Step 4 Securing loose endThe final knot is just to secure the loose end somehow I chose a fishermans knot to do this
To tie a fishermans knot the rope goes around twice and goes under the X created by the loops Pull the loose end to tighten Finally slide the knot to put tension onthe half hitches
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Image Notes1 X marks the spot
Step 5 FinishedThere you have it I guarantee that the first time you really use this knot (not just practice) you will be amazed at how well it works and youll wish you knew this knot along time ago You may even come over to my side and declare that is is THE most awesome knot on the planet -)
Enjoy and happy haulingDave
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Related Instructables
TiteTie is theTruckers Knoton Steroids bytitetie
Four knots tomake paracordinto a usefultool byerik_mccray
Modify yourbike rack tocarry a sunfishor other boat byewilhelm
SurfboardHammock byGermy
GiganticHalloweenSpider Web bynolte919
How To Tie ASpiders Hitch(video) by back-cast
Three-hitch mathair ornamentby michiexile TRX from
ParacordChallengeAccepted bythrake
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Carry any Bottle with a JUG KNOT Handleby hpstoutharrow on September 17 2009
Intro Carry any Bottle with a JUG KNOT HandleTie a JUG KNOT around a water bottle soda bottle or aluminum bottle to make a secure carrying strap
Re-purpose any container into a reusable water bottle by adding a convenient carrying strap This Instructable will demonstrate how to tie a JUG knot which like its namesuggests is meant to properly secure around the neck of a container
With some cord and the knowledge of this knot you will be able add a handle lanyard or carabiner loop to any of your favorite beverages to carry them on the go
It works perfectly for those disposable water bottles and who knows once you add some colorful cord to the plain old clear water bottle you just might beinclined to refill it and use it again(Check out pictures 4amp5 below)
In addition to plastic beverage bottles like pop water and sports drinks you can turn those rugged aluminum beer bottles into a backpacking canteen
Those of you familiar with my previous aluminum bottle InstructablesROLLED RIM METAL TUMBLERhttpwwwinstructablescomidAluminum-Bottle-Tumbler-Cup-Cook-PotALUMINUM BOTTLE LIGHTWEIGHT ALCOHOL STOVEhttpwwwinstructablescomidAluminum-Bottle-Alcohol-Stovewill recognize the water canteen shown below as a re-purposed aluminum beer bottle Here I have added a painted surface treatment to turn it into a proper lookingwater bottle More on that in steps 13 14 15
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 1 Getting StartedCord size is important Select a small medium weight cord like the one shown here It is a general purpose camp cord sold at most sporting goods stores (shoelacesmight also work)
Do not use a heavy cord or rope because the larger diameter will not tuck under the relatively small lip at the top of the bottleneck and the bottle will fall out
Also the smaller cord cinches tight on itself and will not loosen accidentally
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 2 Form a BightThe next steps show how to tie a JUG KNOT It is the basic step for adding a carrying strap It is also the anchor point for any additional fancy bottle trussing you maywant to add
JUG KNOT Step 1
Form a Bight in the center of a length of cord Bight is a knot term for a loop or bend in the rope In this case the main Bight in this knot is highlighted with a white mark Imakes it easier to follow its path in these steps
The running ends of the cord should be equal length
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 3 Pull the Bight downPULL the Bight DOWN forming two Loops
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 4 Cross the LoopsCROSS the right Loop OVER the left Loop
Step 5 Pass the Bight under the 1st loopTake the main Bight and pass it UNDER the left Loop
Step 6 Weave the BightWEAVE the Bight OVER the portion of the right Loop and UNDER the portion of the left Loop
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 7 Extend the BightExtend the Bight OVER the outer portion of the right Loop
Step 8 Flip the Right Loop behindAdditional colored identification points have been added to the loops to follow their travel in these next two steps
The right Loop Yellow marker is FLIPPED BEHIND the knot and ends up on the far left side of the knot
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 9 Flip the 2nd loop in frontRaise the green marker (located on what was formerly the left loop) and pull it down and to the right FLIPPING IT IN FRONT of the knot
Note the blue portion of the this loop will pass around the outside of the yellow portion of the first loop
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Image Notes1 Center of knot that will tighten around the bottles neck
Step 10 Remove SlackNote where the blue green amp yellow markers end up
Start to remove the slack in the loops by pulling the original main Bight (white marker top right) and the two free standing ends at the bottom
the bottle neck will pass through the very center of the knot
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Image Notes1 Center of knot that will tighten around the bottles neck
Step 11 Tighten the KnotAfter removing the slack insert the bottle neck and finish tightening
The knot should look like this before slipping it over the bottle
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 12 Secure on bottle neckThis is the finished knot shown on the neck of various containers
The loop end and the two free standing ends can be tied together to create a carrying handle (last picture below)
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 13 Aluminum Bottle Water Bottle
The next few steps show the features of an aluminum beer bottle re-purposed as a water bottle canteen It is one of many containers that can be reused as a camp waterbottle
The bottle was lightly sanded masked and then pained with a hammered finished paint to create an interesting surface texture
Image Notes1 Textured finish paint makes an interesting grip-able surface2 Masked with tape for painting3 Masked with tape for painting
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Image Notes1 Dowel used for holding the bottle during painting
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 14 Tethered Cork StopperUse a wine bottle man made Cork as a stopper for your aluminum water bottleNote Use a cork that was removed from the wine bottle without the corkscrew penetrating through the bottom end of the cork (A hole all the way through the cork willcause it to leak) Use the unpierced end of the cork inside the water bottle
Drill a hole through the sides of the Cork Thread the cord through the hole to the center of the cord Use the cork as the main Bight and tie the Jug knot as shown inthe beginning steps
Now the cork is tethered to the bottle and will not get lost or fall on the ground
A Carabiner clip passes through the other cord end to attache the water bottle to you belt or pack
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 15 Trussed for TransportThis is another hanging method for carrying your aluminum bottle water canteen A Jug knot is tied conventionally around the neck
The running ends of the knot however are pulled down towards the bottom of the bottle A Barrel Knot is tied about 34 the way down the side of the bottle A squareknot is tied on the bottom of the knot to keep the two running ends tight against the sides of the bottle
I like the look of the accent colored cord running down the sides of the bottle and the fact that the bottle hangs from the belt upside down It adds to its uniqueness
The last picture shows another truss variation
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 16 AdvancedBelow is a bottle with some additional trussing You can be creative as you want It all starts with a re-purposed container and the Jug Knot (and enough cord)
Related Instructables
AluminumBottle TumblerCup amp Cook Potfor an AlcoholStove byhpstoutharrow
Water BottleBelt Clip byuglymike Duct Tape
Water Bottle byrabidsquire2
AluminumBottle AlcoholStove byhpstoutharrow
DIYGlass WaterBottle byCulturespy
Solar WaterHeater forBackpackingUsing WaterBottles and aCar Shade bykopomeroy
Duct tape waterbottle holder(Photos) by pinkmarshmallow
How to make aCamelPack withan old plasticbottle bywillrandship
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Basic Knots Guideby zorro3355 on April 29 2008
Intro Basic Knots Guidehi
Step 1 Thumb knotThe most simple knotUsed as a stopper and prevent ropes from fraying
Step 2 Reef KnotUsed to tie two ropes of equal thickness togetherIt is pretty easy to tie and untie but under tentionit may be diffcult to untieIt is also not sutible for smoothropes(egnylon ropes)
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 3 Figure of eightused as a stopperprevent ropes from fraying and its more secure than tumb knot its is also used to tie Caribinas to ropes and is often used in rock climbing
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 4 Timber hitchused for pulling logs
Step 5 Clove hitchUsed to tie a rope onto a pole or logThe pole must be roundThe pole lust be thicker then the rope itself
(greatly used during pioneering)
Step 6 Sheet bandused to tie ropes of different thickness together(works on same thickness of ropes too)
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 7 Sheep shankTo shorten RopesTo prevent middle fraying
Step 8 Slip knotWhippingUsed as a grip for pulling things(when tied on a stick or small pole)(marlin spike hitch)
Related Instructables
Rope Rings byhpstoutharrow
How to Tie aFigure EightKnot byTactical_Pyro
Whippin (WestCountry Style)by tim_n
SurvivalBracelet(Updated) bytevers94
HangmansNoose PackClosure byPopEye42
Turkey on aTripod byhpstoutharrow
SurvivalBracelet II bytevers94 Zigzag Spooling
Paracord (video)by Stormdrane
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
How to Tie a Fire-escape Knotby leonardo ismael on October 16 2007
Intro How to Tie a Fire-escape KnotThis knot is used by firemen in case of fires for example imagine a scene where the ladder on the firetruck messes up but people need to get down a five story buildingor more All they have is a long piece of rope they can safely get down with a secure knot like the fire-escape knot So why not learn it its easy to do and hard to untieif you tie it tightly
This is from the American Boys Handbook
Step 1 Get Your RopeFirst grab a piece of rope and bend it like this to make a loop in it Follow every step to the smallest detail
Step 2 Twist the RopeNow make a twist like this and hold it together
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 3 Pull Through the TwistPull the loop through the twist you just made from underneath
Step 4 Go Over the Split EndNow pull the tail through the loop
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 5 FinallyAnd finally just pull it through as pictured below
Congratulations you just learned the fire-escape knot
Step 6 Same Name Not KnotThis is another knot called the fire-escape knot this shouldnt be your result
Related Instructables
House FireEscape Plan(video) byWhatHappensNowAdvice
ParacordLadder wWooden Rungsby josestude
Bed SheetEscape Rope byjessehensel
rope ladder(glow-in-the-dark version) bymikeasaurus
HeadlockEscape 2(video) byjohnnyrockstah
QuickFirestarter byMattandJora
Trail sauna byjakee117
How to Kill FireAnts andCommitGenocide byKentsOkay
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Climb Safe With A Figure 8 Knotby mattste on February 23 2010
Intro Climb Safe With A Figure 8 Knot There are many things that a beginning climber needs to know including several important knots Perhaps the most essential knot is the Figure 8 Follow Through Thistutorial will demonstrate how to correctly harness yourself to a rope using a Figure 8 Follow Through knot This knot is used primarily by rock climbers to provide a life-line Since this knot is used as a life-line it is very important to be able to tie it correctly (Your life could depend upon it)
Dont worry with this tutorial and about 5 minutes of practice you can have this knot mastered
Things you will need
- Climbing Harness- Climbing Rope
If you are wanting to go climbing and dont already have these items they can be purchased for about $25 each at most outdoor sporting goods stores If you are merelylooking to learn the knot a belt loop and a rope (about five feet long) will do
Image Notes1 Climbing Harness2 Climbing Rope
Step 1 Dealing With The RopeThroughout this tutorial I will be discussing different parts of the rope To make these instructions as clear as possible I will define a few terms that I will use throughoutthe tutorial The Anchor End of the rope will generally be at the top of the images This is the end that would be anchored to the wall or rock and does not move Wewill not be doing much with the anchored end The Tail End of the rope is the opposite end that we will be dealing with I will call this the tail for short
Now that we have some terms to work with lets get started
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 2 Tying The First Figure 8This knot has several parts to it The first part of the knot is just tying a basic figure 8 To tie the first figure 8 there are four simple steps
1 - Using the tail make a loop over the rope (as shown in the first picture) keeping in mind that there should be about 3 ft of slack on the tail end
2 - Wrap the tail back this time go under the anchored end (As shown in the second picture)
3 - Bring the tail down through the first loop (As shown in the third picture)
4 - Finally pull the two ends to make the knot a little bit tighter and easier to deal with (Shown in the fourth picture)
After these four steps you should end up with a knot that resembles a figure 8
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 3 Looping Into The Harness In order to secure the rope to the harness simply thread the tail end of the rope through the front loop in the harness as shown in the picture below This step isobviously very important
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 4 Following Back Through The Figure 8After looping the rope through the harness you have to thread the tail end of the rope back through the knot following the first figure 8 I have divided this process intofive smaller steps in order to make it more clear
1 - Coming form underneath the knot bring the tail up through the near loop and to the left behind the anchored end of the rope (Shown in the first picture)
2 - Wrap the tail around the anchored end back to the right and down through the adjacent loop (Shown in the second picture)
3 - You simply need to bring the tail back over the top of the knot to the left (Shown in the third picture)
4 - Bring the tail end up through the far loop following the anchored end (Shown in the fourth picture)
5 - Finally pull the knot tight (Shown in the fifth picture)
As you can see the first four pictures are simply tracing the knot back through with the tail end
For the last part while you pull the knot tight you may want to make small adjustments and rearrange how it all fits together If the knot does not lay perfectly smoothand tight its NOT a big deal
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 5 Finishing The Knot After completing the Figure 8 knot you will want to somehow secure the tail end of the rope out of the way There are a couple different ways to do this the way that Iwill demonstrate is using whats called a Stopper Knot This secondary knot is similar to a Fishermans knot and is pretty simple I have once again divided thisprocess into several smaller steps
1 - Start by wrapping the tail end around the anchored end (As shown in the first picture)
2 - Wrap the tail back underneath the two vertical segments (As shown in the second picture)
3 - Simply repeat the first two steps wrapping the tail around again (As shown in the third picture)
4 - This step in the fourth picture may look complicated but all you need to do is insert the tail up through the two loops that you have just made
5 - To finish off the knot you will want to slowly pull the tail end while gently pushing the bottom of the stopper knot upwards If you have successfully completed this knotit should look something like the fifth picture
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 6 Ready To Climb Now that you have mastered the Figure 8 knot you can securely harness yourself into a climbing rope Remember there are many other skills that go into setting up ananchor and belaying a climber This tutorial only covers the figure 8 knot For more information there are many great websites that demonstrate how to correctly set up asafe climbing system (Ive posted a few below) If you are a beginning climber I recommend that you read up on a few other climbing techniques Also you shouldprobably go to a climbing wall or gym where there are experienced climbers that can show you the ropes Hopefully this tutorial has been helpful Have fun and be safe
Some useful linkshttpwwwstephenprattnetAnchorsanchorshtmhttpwwwuoregonedu~oppclimbingtopicsanchorshtmlhttpwwwabc-of-rockclimbingcomhowtoclimbingtechniquesasp
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Related Instructables
How to Tie aFigure EightKnot byTactical_Pyro
Paracord KnotDisplay Bord byJamie bagn
Basic KnotsGuide byzorro3355
How to Climb aTree (withprussiks) bystasterisk
How to climb atree (using onlyrope) thefunsimple wayby louieaw
How to get arope into a tree(withoutclimbing it) byvitex
How to tievarious knots byadaviel
How to make arope swing byjdub0928
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Turks Head Knots on a Bottleby sklnxbones on July 6 2010
Intro Turks Head Knots on a BottleThis is the finished project A bottle decorated with three Turks Head Knots There are only three knots on this bottle The RED and the BLUE knots are each a 20 Bightby 3 Lead Turks Head Knots The WHITE knot is a 20 Bight by 19 Lead Turks Head Knot
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 1 Supplies
Cord Lots and Lots of cord I cant tell you how much each bottle is differentBottle Washed and Dried inside and out Make sure to remove all water spotsThreaded Needle Cord screws into the threads at the base of the needlePegs I use brass rivets used as a map to tie the Turks Head KnotsHole Punch Used to punch holes in the painters tape to hold the pegsPainters Tape To hold the pegs in place and to make your map for the Turks Head KnotsMarker To write on the painters tapeCloth Towel To remove finger prints and dirt from your bottleKrazy Glue or Super Glue This is used to secure the knots in place to the bottle
OPTIONAL BUT HIGHLY RECOMMENDEDI use the Turks Head Cookbook from KnotToolcom
Step 2 PreparationYou will need to find a bottle you like I used an empty instant tea bottle of course washed and dried (I like to put the bottle in the oven for a few minutes to dry the insidewithout water spots Take off the lid and do not put lid in the oven) Now measure the circumference of the bottle Take a cord and tightly wrap the cord around the bottleMark where the ends meet and use a ruler to measure the length of the cord For my instant tea bottle the circumference is 27cm I know from past knots that I have tiedthat I want my knot to have 20 Bights in the top and bottom (bands) knots I am going to use the Bights in the (bands) knots to tie the middle knot Now divide the numberof Bights (20) into the size of the circumference (27) to get the space between each Bight (135) With me so far
Now take two pieces of painters tape using a ruler measure out the length of the circumference and mark the length on the both pieces of tape Next you will mark thespace between each Bight on the tape
Step 3 Adding the PegsI like to use pegs when tying Turks Head Knots it just makes tying the knot easier
These are what I use for pegs
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 4 Adding Pegs to the TapeNow take a hole punch to cut holes in the tape where the lines meet You will place the pegs in the holes
Insert a peg in each hole and carefully stick the first piece of tape to the bottle
Step 5 Adding the 2nd row of pegsNow do the same thing with the second piece of tape The numbers on each piece of tape must line up
This picture shows you what you should have now This odd looking thing will be your map to tie the Turks Head Knot And this is the end of Step 1
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 6 Tying the first Turks Head KnotUsing the Turks Head Cookbook follow the numbers going over and under as indicated in the book I chose a 20 Bight by 3 Lead knot which will give me a nice bandaround the bottle Once the ends meet you have made one complete knot Tape the running end of your cord and start removing the pegs and the tape
Step 7 Remove the pegs and the tapeBe careful not to untie the knot as you remove the pegs and tape from the bottle Continue to remove all the pegs and remove the tape from the bottle At this point theknot will be very loose and will need to be tightened up
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 8 Remove the slack from the knotHere you can see just how much the knot expanded Starting with the standing end begin to pull the slack out of the knot going towards the running end of the cordDo not expect to pull all the slack out at once You may have to make 3 - 5 attempts at removing the slack out of the knot DO NOT remove all of the slack out of the knotIn order to make the bands we will have to triple the Turks Head Knot We will do this by following the knot three times The threaded needle will really come in handyhere
Step 9 Triple the KnotOnce you have made three passes of the Turks Head Knot use your needle to go under your knot about half the circumference and cut the cord The knot will be tightenough to hide the tail in placeTIP I carefully add a couple of drops of super glue UNDER the band to hold them in place and keep them from sliding around in the nextsteps A drop or two in 3 or 4 places around the band should be enough
Step 10 Add the second knotNow repeat this whole step for the second bandWhen tying the second band you must make sure the Bights line up to the first band This is crucial for the next stepWipe down the bottle to make sure all your finger prints and adhesive from the tape are all removed You want to make sure your bottle is clean at this point Any dirt orfinger prints left on the bottle will be almost impossible to remove From this point on we will use gloves when tying our last knot
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 11 Maping the Top KnotStick a piece of painters tape on top of your first band leaving the bottom of the knot exposedUse a marker to count the number of Bights in your knot Instead of using the pegs we are going to use the Bights to tie our next Turks Head Knot
Step 12 Mapping the Bottom KnotDo the same thing for the bottom band but you must make sure your numbers on top and bottom line up So 1 on top should be the same position as 1 on the bottom
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 13 Adding the last knotAgain using the Turks Head Cookbook and the threaded needle you are going to follow the instructions going over and under as indicated in the book Be sure to usegloves when ever you handle the bottle
Step 14 Thats ItFor this Turks Head Knot I am using a 20 Bight by 19 Lead knot
Because of the amount of cord you are working with your cord will get twisted and knotted You will have to un-twist the cord often Its a pain in the rear but it has to bedone And it has to be done alot
Continue to tie the knot until you finish the knot If you have the cord and the patience you can double or triple the knot When you are done use your needle to hide theends under your bands Cut the ends and your DONE
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Related Instructables
Monkeys FistFloatingKeychain byjokerlz
How To Make ATurks headKnot WithParacord byDoggie Stylish
Tying Trivetsout of Rope forHoliday Gifts bykylemarsh
Paracord KnotDisplay Bord byJamie bagn
How to Make ATurks Head(Photos) bymchs60chip
A pocket full ofknots byKiteman
Monkeys fistknot AND themonkey byjonathan111
TiteTie is theTruckers Knoton Steroids bytitetie
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Larks head noose -- an easy useful knot that tightens and loosensby Larry Breed on February 19 2009
Intro Larks head noose -- an easy useful knot that tightens and loosensI thought I knew all the basic knots but then I was taught this incredibly useful simple knot Its good for tying up the neck of a bag that you want to repeatedly open andsecurely close Its good for tying around a springy bundle that will need tightening and retightening And its easy to undo
Ive looked at knot literature but havent found a name for this so I named it The basic knot is well known its called a larks head Since all Ive done is to slip the twoends through the larks head to make a noose I call it that
WARNING Dont use this knot when human safety would depend on it Climbers and mountaineers have well-tested reliable knots for such situations
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Image Notes1 To tighten further step on this side of the larks head and pull the free ends
Step 1 Double the cord overThe larks head noose requires enough cord to go twice around your bundle plus a foot or two Find the center and double it over Sailors call this a bight
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 2 Form the larks headComing from below the bight hook your thumb and forefinger over the two sides Reach outward and downward and pinch your fingertips together underneath thedoubled cord
Youve made a larks head Move the crossing cord a little farther from your hand so theres a clear opening through the two half-loops
Step 3 Form the nooseSlip the two ends of the cord through the opening we were just talking about Pull the larks head tight so it grips the two cords Find something that needs constrictingand put the noose around it
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 4 Tightening retightening and lockingSlide the knot against the bundle If its not tight enough to keep from slipping tighten it by holding it in one hand and tugging on the cords one at a time with the otherhand Notice that you can slide the knot out again for instance to re-open the bag you just tied shut For some applications this may be as tight as you need it
A springy bundle probably still feels loose If so compress the bundle and get a new grip on the cords Rest your foot on the bundle on the cords nearest the larks headand pull to slide the larks head tighter
To make the knot more permanent you can lock it Make an overhand in the cord ends (Exactly like the first step in tying shoelaces) With your foot still on the bundlepull on the cords and move your hands apart until youre pulling in opposite directions You have just locked the larks head and you can trust it to stay that way()
But lets say that later on you want to loosen the locked knot Again put your foot on the bundle and cords nearest the larks head hold the two cord ends together andpull This makes a little slack between the overhand and the larks head so you can untie the overhand
In twine or small string the locking overhand knot may be difficult to undo Use a shoelace knot instead of an overhand and itll unlock easily
() If youre using slippery cord like polypropylene an overhand may not lock securely You may want to tie another overhand knot For added security wrap a shortlength of duct tape around the two cords close to the knot
Image Notes1 To tighten further step on this side of the larks head and pull the free ends
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Related Instructables
TRX fromParacordChallengeAccepted bythrake
A pocket full ofknots byKiteman
Lens CapLanyard by~teknoarsonist~ how to tie a
noose byawesume
AdjustableParacordGlassesLanyard byjdtwelve12
HangmansNoose PackClosure byPopEye42
Paraleash - ADog LeashFrom Paracordby The Ideanator
How to make arugged andhandy ParacordBelt by Jake22
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 2 Double Sheet BendThe double sheet bend is used to tie two lines of different thickness - but not too different It is the same as a normal sheet bend but with an extra turn of the thinner ropearound the flat loop in the thickerThe load goes on the line through the flat loop not the one that comes out the side of the knot
UsesSecuring a heaving line to a tow lineExtending a stern line if you dont have enough line of one thickness
Step 3 BowlineThe bowline is really a special case of the sheet bend but it it tied at the end of a rope to make a loop
The photos show the completed loop and closeups of the front and back of the actual knot Note that it is the same as the sheet bend - but it must be made the right wayround This loop does not tighten in use The knot is quite easy to untie once the load is removed With practice it is very quick to tie
Some usesSecuring a dinghy line to a railing or stanchionSecuring an anchor line to an anchorTie a jib sheet to the sailTie a mooring line around a rock or treeTie a float to an anchor triplineUse one in each line to tie two ropes of very different sizes - eg a throwing line to a large tow ropeDisadvantages the knot must be completely made before it will take any strain - it is hard to tie if there is already a load on the rope
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Linked bowlines
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 4 Bowline on the BightA bowline on the bight is a bowline tied in a loop of rope (neither end is needed) The shape is the same as a bowline made with a double line but the middle of thebight forms the loop around the standing part
UsesAn impromptu bosuns chair - to sit in while being transferred between two boats at sea
Step 5 Clove HitchThe clove hitch can be made when you only have the bight (the middle) of a rope not the ends
UsesSecuring a burgee pole to a burgee halyard (a continuous loop of thin line)Securing a tiller from swinging
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 6 Round Turn and Two Half-HitchesThis is a knot used to secure a line to a ring or bar Wind a couple of turns around the bar then secure the end with two hitches around the standing part (this looks like aclove hitch when done)
AdvantagesCan be made under load - it is easy to take turns around the bar while maintaining tension on the ropeStrong - provided the bar is thicker than the rope the rope is not weakened by sharp bendsDisadvantagesThe end tends to work loose
UsesSecuring a line to a mooring ring or samson post
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 7 Fishermans BendThe fishermans bend is the same as the round turn and two half hitches except that the first hitch is looped under the round turn This uses the tension on the rope tosecure the end from working loose
AdvantagesSecure against working loose
DisadvantagesHard to make under tensionHard to undo under tensionMay seize up under load when wet making it hard to undo
UsesSecuring mooring line to ringSecuring fender lines to rail
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 8 Studsail BendThe studsail bend is like the fishermans bend but the second hitch is also secured under the round turn making it even more secure against working loose when undertension
AdvantagesVery secure against working looseDisadvantagesHard to make under tensionHard to undo under tension
Step 9 Figure-8 KnotThe figure-eight knot is used to prevent an end of rope from passing through a block (pulley) Sometimes called a stopper knot
The double figure-8 knot is used in rock climbing as an alternative to a bowline to secure a climbing harness to the end of a safety rope The double knot is made bymaking a single knot then tracing back around the knot with the free end after passing it around the harness loop
AdvantagesEasy to verify by inspectionNot prone to work loose
DisadvantagesSlow to make and undoCannot be made under load
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 10 Prussic KnotThe prussic knot may be used as a climbing ascender - when made around a vertical rope as shown downwards tension on the ends locks the knot while release oftension allows it to be slid up the rope A pair of prussic knots on foot loops may be used in tandem to climb a rope
UsesClimbing a ropeTaking up tension to free a riding turn on a winch
Step 11 Reef KnotThe reef knot or square knot is used to tie a bundle of material together It must be made around something - it should not be used to tie two free ropes togetherbecause it can easily capsizeIt should not be used to make a loop unless it can be tensioned around a solid object It should not be used around a person - use a bowline instead A capsized reefknot will slip easily and could constrict and cause severe injury
UsesReefing a sail (tying the unused portion around a spar)Securing a furled sail to a spar (sail ties)Wrapping a parcelTying shoelaces
AdvantagesMay be made under moderate load
DisadvantagesCapsizes (works free) if used improperlyCan seize up under load when wet
Tying the knot
Capsizing a reef knot
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 12 CleatsThis is not a knot but is very common on boatsThe first picture shows a rope cleated normally The second shows one with a final locking turn - the last turn is twisted before placing over the cleat so that the tensionon the rope helps secure the free end
When working with ropes under tension take a turn or two around a winch or cleat before trying to secure the end with a knot The load on the free end falls exponentiallywith each turn taken Severe injury can result if a finger or other body part is caught in a loop of rope or between a rope and another object
Step 13 Practice themIt is sometimes useful to be able to tie knots in the dark or as in this video behind your back
Related Instructables
AThird Hand forSailing or OtherThings by WadeTarzia
Paracord KnotDisplay Bord byJamie bagn
Trip LogOutriggerCanoe Sailingthe CaliforniaChannel Islandsby TimAnderson
How to Tie aFigure EightKnot byTactical_Pyro
How to build apirate ship bymdelaney3
Build a ShortDragon (16 foot3-BoardOutriggerSailing Canoe)by Wade Tarzia
repairing aheadsail by josh
How to get arope into a tree(withoutclimbing it) byvitex
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
How to Tie the Lanyard Knotby eddy14777 on January 31 2010
Intro How to Tie the Lanyard KnotMany people including myself have had trouble following the Stormdrane youtube video on tying the lanyard knot so i have done some research and found the solution
Image Notes1 Finished knot
Step 1 MaterialsAll you need is a reasonable length of para cord or whatever you wish to use
Image Notes1 One reasonable amount
Step 2 First StepThe first thing you are going to do is to make a bight that leaves you with to congruent endsThen you are going to put your ring finger through the bight
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Image Notes1 Close enough2 Bight
Step 3 Starting the KnotMake a loop just like the one in the picture and place it over the top strandBring the top strand under the bottom strand
Image Notes1 Notice the way the loop is done2 Top strand
Image Notes1 Bottom strand2 Top strand is under
Step 4 The Most Important PartNow you take the top stand from the previous picture and feed it over the first part of the loop under itself and back over the remainder of the loop
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Image Notes1 Under me2 Top strand3 This should make a diamond type shape
Step 5 DoublingNow take the bottom stand and take it around the part of the top strand nearest to the bight and than come up through the diamond shape in the middleDo the same for the top strand
Image Notes1 Top strand
Image Notes1 Both through the diamond
Step 6 FinishingWhen you take it off your finger it should look like thisWork out the slack by pulling on the bight and the two strands
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Image Notes1 Finished knot
Related Instructables
Cross KnotParacordLanyard byStormdrane
Celtic ButtonKnot (video) byStormdrane
Paracord wristlanyard madewith the snakeknot byStormdrane
Paracord ChainSinnet FastDeploy BoonieHatband (video)by Stormdrane
Zigzag SpoolingParacord (video)by Stormdrane
ParacordBoonie HatWrap (video) byStormdrane
Paracord IDbadge Lanyardby Flahusky
Cobra WeaveKey Fob bytevers94
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Four knots to make paracord into a useful toolby erik_mccray on March 27 2010
Authorerik_mccrayI am an ex-fabricator that is now a stay at home dad I love my new job but I do miss making stuff I love this site amp I am getting involved as a way to keep myskills upOn top of fad work I have also run two small business in the past One was custom sewing amp the other was as a small engine mechanicI have two votec degrees one in metal fabrication amp the other is in engine repairI look forward to getting to know everyone here
Intro Four knots to make paracord into a useful toolParacord is an awesome multitool used everywhere from the wild blue yonder to the deepest caverns But like any good tool it is only as good as the knowledge the userhas about the tool With most people out there using bungee cords amp ratchet straps it seems that paracord is being used for nothing more than friendship bracelets forgrown men This is a shame because for less then the price of a few cheap bungee cords amp some to short to be helpful straps You can get yourself hundreds of feet ofparacord
The key to getting the most out of the paracord is good knot work The first thing you need to know is what makes a good knot One is that the knot is easy amp quick to tieamp more impotant is that the knot is easy amp quick to untie The hitch class of knots is by far the best group of knots that the average person could know The four mostuseful hitch knots are the half hitch a quick simple knot that forms the base for many other knots the inline half hitch allowing you to get the most out of one length ofparacord the slippery hitch that gives you both on the fly control over tension on your paracord but also an adjustable loop that will not change unless you want it amp theinline truckers hitch instantly doubling the your pulling power
Step 1 To get started lets get some terminology that will be used defined
line= the paracord
Main line= the part of the paracord doing the work for example holding down your tarp or the long part of the paracord
Mid line= the middle of the length of the paracord
End line= the unused length of paracord or the short length of paracord
Step 2 The half hitch The half hitch is a simple way to secure a line to an anchor point like the tie down points in most trucks A half hitch is a constrictor knot meaning that the harder you pullon the line the tighter the knots grip gets Another common constrictor knot is the slip knot
Step 1 wrap your line around your anchor point Step 2 wrap the end line around the main line
Step 3 pass the end line threw the end line side of the newly formed loop
step 4 now take the slack out of the knot
step 5 to make sure the knot is secure tie another half hitch to the main line This knot is called adouble half hitch
step 6 another useful thing that can be done with the half hitch is that instead of repeating the wrap on the main line but repeating it on what you are tying to the half hitchcan be used to bind something like a stack of 2x4s
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Image Notes1 End line2 Main line3 step 1
Image Notes1 Step 2
Image Notes1 passing thew the end line side of the loop2 step 3
Image Notes1 step 5
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Image Notes1 step 6
Step 3 The mid line half hitch The mid line half hitch is for when the length of line is to long for the job at hand amp you dont want to have to cut the line to size or you are using multiple anchor pointswith one length of line
Step 1 double up the line at the point in the length you wish to make the knot
Step 2 wrap the doubled up portion of line around your anchor point The doubled up length is now now the end line
Step 3 now tie just as you did for the regular half hitch repeat the knot to make a double half hitch for security
Image Notes1 A mid line double half hitch
Image Notes1 step 1
Image Notes1 The end line2 step 2
Image Notes1 Step 3
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 4 The slippery hitch The slippery hitch is a great knot for adjusting tension on the main line or for having an adjustable fixed loop To adjust the knot simply slide the knot up or down the mainline
Step 1 wrap your line around the anchor point or just double over the line to form a loop
Step 2 wrap the end line around the main line three times Wrapping in the direction of the anchor point or loop
Step 3 put together the two lines making up the loop amp wrap the two lines one time with the end line
Step 4 pass the end line thew the last loop formed covering the two lined of the loop
Step 5 pull the knot tite
step 6 to adjust the size of the loop or main line tension grab the knot amp slide it up or down the main line
Image Notes1 grab just the knot its self to adjust it2 step 5
Image Notes1 step 1
Image Notes1 step 2
Image Notes1 step 3
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Image Notes1 step 4
Image Notes1 grab just the knot its self to adjust it2 step 5
Image Notes1 same knot as in last pic Just slid up2 step 6
Step 5 The mid line truchers hitch The truckers hitch is a great way to double the pulling force on a line There are many ways to tie this knot the problem with most of them is that at some point you aregoing to have to pass the end line through a loop on the main line that is acting like a pulley to double your pulling force this is great if you are making the knot close tothe end of your line but if you are using a 300 length of line amp want to make the knot in the first ten feet having to pass 290 of line thew a loop is a pain But with a fewhalf hitches you will not have to pass the end line threw any loop on the main line
step 1 wrap your line around the anchor point then double over your end line laying the top of the loop over the main line
Step 2 double up your main line amp lay the loop over the loop made by the end line
step 3 in main line above the knot twist in a loop
step 4 put main line loop thew the loop made in step 3 amp pull this loop tight over your main line loop forming a half hitch Repeat step 3 amp 4 to make a doublehalf hitch
step 5 To use the knot just pull down on the end line to put tension on the main line
step 6 after you have the main line snug tie a mid line double half hitch around the two lines forming the loop at the end of the main line with the end line
step 7 Tie a double half hitch with the end line around the end loop of the mid line half hitch of step 6 using the same method as used in steps 3 amp 4
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Image Notes1 the end of step 6
Image Notes1 main line2 end line3 step 1
Image Notes1 main line loop2 end line loop
Image Notes1 step 3
Image Notes1 step 4
Image Notes1 step 4 at the end with a double half hitch on the main loop
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Image Notes1 pull here2 step 5
Image Notes1 the start of step 6
Image Notes1 the end of step 6
Image Notes1 step 72 now the rest of the line is free to do more work
Related Instructables
Paracord KnotDisplay Bord byJamie bagn
ChokelessAdjustableParacord DogLeash byPizzaman101
ParacordLadder wWooden Rungsby josestude
tie a paracordshackle grip byitri45
ParacordPrussik Belt byJavaNut13
TiteTie is theTruckers Knoton Steroids bytitetie
ID Lanyard(Photos) byeschmunk
Dog Toys forHeavy Chewersby J3443RY
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Figure 8 knot and double 8 knotby jonathan111 on November 28 2007
Intro Figure 8 knot and double 8 knotI will show you how to tie a figure 8 knot and a figure 8 follow through
Step 1 Stating the knotThis is a simple knot so just follow the pictures
Step 2 Finishing the knotCross the string under and then push it through the hole Pull tightly unless you are going to do the follow through and leave it somewhat loose
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 3 The follow through knotThe follow through knot should be tied around something brought back and followed through the path of the 8 knot Look at the pictures Basically follow through the 8knot backwards
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Related Instructables
Climb Safe WithA Figure 8Knot by mattste A pocket full of
knots byKiteman
How to Tie aFigure EightKnot byTactical_Pyro
Paracord KnotDisplay Bord byJamie bagn
Cross KnotParacordLanyard byStormdrane
How to Tie aFire-escapeKnot by leonardoismael
Truckers HitchTHE mostawesome knoton the planetby schneidp20
Paracord ZipperPuller byrepeet13
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Truckers Hitch THE most awesome knot on the planetby schneidp20 on October 12 2008
Authorschneidp20I like building stuff Trouble is there just isnt enough time to build everything Sigh
Intro Truckers Hitch THE most awesome knot on the planetYes I know that there are plenty of other cool knots out there many of which I literally couldnt live wo I rock climb However this knot is unlike any other Plus Ineeded a grabber for my Instructable -) (BTW this ISNT a climbing knot) And in truth it isnt a knot by itself but rather a system of common knots
Have you ever tried to tie something down for transporting but just couldnt get the lines tight andor during transport the lines would continually loosen Then this is theknot for you I learned this knot back in the 70s when specialty car racks and ratchet straps were rare or unheard of I initially used it to tie a canoe on a car rack bothattaching to the rack as well as the lines to the bow and stern of the canoe Even with all the new gizmos available today this knot still shines because all you need is arope and ropes dont hum in the wind like straps
The unique aspect of this knot is that it gives you a 2-1 mechanical advantage when tightening the rope Be careful though You can actually damage some thingsbecause of the mechanical advantage This knot holds fast and is easy to untie hallmark traits of any good knot
Below you see the finished knot system well break it apart in the steps that follow
Image Notes1 1st anchor point a bowline2 loop3 securing knots 2 half hitches4 securing loose end with a fishermans knot5 2nd anchor point (should be round)
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Image Notes1 X marks the spot
Step 1 Initial setupThe first step is to anchor one end of the rope and then loop the rope around a 2nd anchor point
For attaching to the 1st anchor point I chose bowline a close 2 on my list -) There are other instructables on that one so I wont bore you here
The 2nd anchor really should be round because it serves as a pulley in this block and tackle type knot Ive used it on sharp anchor points and it doesnt work as well
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 2 Creating a slip knotTie a slip knot somewhere between the two anchor points Correct placement of the slip knot takes some experience to judge it correctly Typically I place it too close tothe 2nd anchor point and end up with not enough room to work with If the knot ends up too far from 2nd anchor point you can extend the knot by enlarging the loop
Be sure you tie the slip knot as shown You may not be able to untie other knots
In this small example the slip knot is uncharacteristically close to the 1st anchor point
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 3 Tightening and securingThe loose end of the rope that went around the 2nd anchor point goes through the slip knot loop Pull the loose end to the desired tension and secure with two halfhitches
Note To allow better view of the knots the rope isnt really tightened in this example
Step 4 Securing loose endThe final knot is just to secure the loose end somehow I chose a fishermans knot to do this
To tie a fishermans knot the rope goes around twice and goes under the X created by the loops Pull the loose end to tighten Finally slide the knot to put tension onthe half hitches
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Image Notes1 X marks the spot
Step 5 FinishedThere you have it I guarantee that the first time you really use this knot (not just practice) you will be amazed at how well it works and youll wish you knew this knot along time ago You may even come over to my side and declare that is is THE most awesome knot on the planet -)
Enjoy and happy haulingDave
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Related Instructables
TiteTie is theTruckers Knoton Steroids bytitetie
Four knots tomake paracordinto a usefultool byerik_mccray
Modify yourbike rack tocarry a sunfishor other boat byewilhelm
SurfboardHammock byGermy
GiganticHalloweenSpider Web bynolte919
How To Tie ASpiders Hitch(video) by back-cast
Three-hitch mathair ornamentby michiexile TRX from
ParacordChallengeAccepted bythrake
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Carry any Bottle with a JUG KNOT Handleby hpstoutharrow on September 17 2009
Intro Carry any Bottle with a JUG KNOT HandleTie a JUG KNOT around a water bottle soda bottle or aluminum bottle to make a secure carrying strap
Re-purpose any container into a reusable water bottle by adding a convenient carrying strap This Instructable will demonstrate how to tie a JUG knot which like its namesuggests is meant to properly secure around the neck of a container
With some cord and the knowledge of this knot you will be able add a handle lanyard or carabiner loop to any of your favorite beverages to carry them on the go
It works perfectly for those disposable water bottles and who knows once you add some colorful cord to the plain old clear water bottle you just might beinclined to refill it and use it again(Check out pictures 4amp5 below)
In addition to plastic beverage bottles like pop water and sports drinks you can turn those rugged aluminum beer bottles into a backpacking canteen
Those of you familiar with my previous aluminum bottle InstructablesROLLED RIM METAL TUMBLERhttpwwwinstructablescomidAluminum-Bottle-Tumbler-Cup-Cook-PotALUMINUM BOTTLE LIGHTWEIGHT ALCOHOL STOVEhttpwwwinstructablescomidAluminum-Bottle-Alcohol-Stovewill recognize the water canteen shown below as a re-purposed aluminum beer bottle Here I have added a painted surface treatment to turn it into a proper lookingwater bottle More on that in steps 13 14 15
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 1 Getting StartedCord size is important Select a small medium weight cord like the one shown here It is a general purpose camp cord sold at most sporting goods stores (shoelacesmight also work)
Do not use a heavy cord or rope because the larger diameter will not tuck under the relatively small lip at the top of the bottleneck and the bottle will fall out
Also the smaller cord cinches tight on itself and will not loosen accidentally
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 2 Form a BightThe next steps show how to tie a JUG KNOT It is the basic step for adding a carrying strap It is also the anchor point for any additional fancy bottle trussing you maywant to add
JUG KNOT Step 1
Form a Bight in the center of a length of cord Bight is a knot term for a loop or bend in the rope In this case the main Bight in this knot is highlighted with a white mark Imakes it easier to follow its path in these steps
The running ends of the cord should be equal length
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 3 Pull the Bight downPULL the Bight DOWN forming two Loops
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 4 Cross the LoopsCROSS the right Loop OVER the left Loop
Step 5 Pass the Bight under the 1st loopTake the main Bight and pass it UNDER the left Loop
Step 6 Weave the BightWEAVE the Bight OVER the portion of the right Loop and UNDER the portion of the left Loop
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 7 Extend the BightExtend the Bight OVER the outer portion of the right Loop
Step 8 Flip the Right Loop behindAdditional colored identification points have been added to the loops to follow their travel in these next two steps
The right Loop Yellow marker is FLIPPED BEHIND the knot and ends up on the far left side of the knot
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 9 Flip the 2nd loop in frontRaise the green marker (located on what was formerly the left loop) and pull it down and to the right FLIPPING IT IN FRONT of the knot
Note the blue portion of the this loop will pass around the outside of the yellow portion of the first loop
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Image Notes1 Center of knot that will tighten around the bottles neck
Step 10 Remove SlackNote where the blue green amp yellow markers end up
Start to remove the slack in the loops by pulling the original main Bight (white marker top right) and the two free standing ends at the bottom
the bottle neck will pass through the very center of the knot
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Image Notes1 Center of knot that will tighten around the bottles neck
Step 11 Tighten the KnotAfter removing the slack insert the bottle neck and finish tightening
The knot should look like this before slipping it over the bottle
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 12 Secure on bottle neckThis is the finished knot shown on the neck of various containers
The loop end and the two free standing ends can be tied together to create a carrying handle (last picture below)
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 13 Aluminum Bottle Water Bottle
The next few steps show the features of an aluminum beer bottle re-purposed as a water bottle canteen It is one of many containers that can be reused as a camp waterbottle
The bottle was lightly sanded masked and then pained with a hammered finished paint to create an interesting surface texture
Image Notes1 Textured finish paint makes an interesting grip-able surface2 Masked with tape for painting3 Masked with tape for painting
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Image Notes1 Dowel used for holding the bottle during painting
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 14 Tethered Cork StopperUse a wine bottle man made Cork as a stopper for your aluminum water bottleNote Use a cork that was removed from the wine bottle without the corkscrew penetrating through the bottom end of the cork (A hole all the way through the cork willcause it to leak) Use the unpierced end of the cork inside the water bottle
Drill a hole through the sides of the Cork Thread the cord through the hole to the center of the cord Use the cork as the main Bight and tie the Jug knot as shown inthe beginning steps
Now the cork is tethered to the bottle and will not get lost or fall on the ground
A Carabiner clip passes through the other cord end to attache the water bottle to you belt or pack
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 15 Trussed for TransportThis is another hanging method for carrying your aluminum bottle water canteen A Jug knot is tied conventionally around the neck
The running ends of the knot however are pulled down towards the bottom of the bottle A Barrel Knot is tied about 34 the way down the side of the bottle A squareknot is tied on the bottom of the knot to keep the two running ends tight against the sides of the bottle
I like the look of the accent colored cord running down the sides of the bottle and the fact that the bottle hangs from the belt upside down It adds to its uniqueness
The last picture shows another truss variation
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 16 AdvancedBelow is a bottle with some additional trussing You can be creative as you want It all starts with a re-purposed container and the Jug Knot (and enough cord)
Related Instructables
AluminumBottle TumblerCup amp Cook Potfor an AlcoholStove byhpstoutharrow
Water BottleBelt Clip byuglymike Duct Tape
Water Bottle byrabidsquire2
AluminumBottle AlcoholStove byhpstoutharrow
DIYGlass WaterBottle byCulturespy
Solar WaterHeater forBackpackingUsing WaterBottles and aCar Shade bykopomeroy
Duct tape waterbottle holder(Photos) by pinkmarshmallow
How to make aCamelPack withan old plasticbottle bywillrandship
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Basic Knots Guideby zorro3355 on April 29 2008
Intro Basic Knots Guidehi
Step 1 Thumb knotThe most simple knotUsed as a stopper and prevent ropes from fraying
Step 2 Reef KnotUsed to tie two ropes of equal thickness togetherIt is pretty easy to tie and untie but under tentionit may be diffcult to untieIt is also not sutible for smoothropes(egnylon ropes)
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 3 Figure of eightused as a stopperprevent ropes from fraying and its more secure than tumb knot its is also used to tie Caribinas to ropes and is often used in rock climbing
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 4 Timber hitchused for pulling logs
Step 5 Clove hitchUsed to tie a rope onto a pole or logThe pole must be roundThe pole lust be thicker then the rope itself
(greatly used during pioneering)
Step 6 Sheet bandused to tie ropes of different thickness together(works on same thickness of ropes too)
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 7 Sheep shankTo shorten RopesTo prevent middle fraying
Step 8 Slip knotWhippingUsed as a grip for pulling things(when tied on a stick or small pole)(marlin spike hitch)
Related Instructables
Rope Rings byhpstoutharrow
How to Tie aFigure EightKnot byTactical_Pyro
Whippin (WestCountry Style)by tim_n
SurvivalBracelet(Updated) bytevers94
HangmansNoose PackClosure byPopEye42
Turkey on aTripod byhpstoutharrow
SurvivalBracelet II bytevers94 Zigzag Spooling
Paracord (video)by Stormdrane
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
How to Tie a Fire-escape Knotby leonardo ismael on October 16 2007
Intro How to Tie a Fire-escape KnotThis knot is used by firemen in case of fires for example imagine a scene where the ladder on the firetruck messes up but people need to get down a five story buildingor more All they have is a long piece of rope they can safely get down with a secure knot like the fire-escape knot So why not learn it its easy to do and hard to untieif you tie it tightly
This is from the American Boys Handbook
Step 1 Get Your RopeFirst grab a piece of rope and bend it like this to make a loop in it Follow every step to the smallest detail
Step 2 Twist the RopeNow make a twist like this and hold it together
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 3 Pull Through the TwistPull the loop through the twist you just made from underneath
Step 4 Go Over the Split EndNow pull the tail through the loop
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 5 FinallyAnd finally just pull it through as pictured below
Congratulations you just learned the fire-escape knot
Step 6 Same Name Not KnotThis is another knot called the fire-escape knot this shouldnt be your result
Related Instructables
House FireEscape Plan(video) byWhatHappensNowAdvice
ParacordLadder wWooden Rungsby josestude
Bed SheetEscape Rope byjessehensel
rope ladder(glow-in-the-dark version) bymikeasaurus
HeadlockEscape 2(video) byjohnnyrockstah
QuickFirestarter byMattandJora
Trail sauna byjakee117
How to Kill FireAnts andCommitGenocide byKentsOkay
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Climb Safe With A Figure 8 Knotby mattste on February 23 2010
Intro Climb Safe With A Figure 8 Knot There are many things that a beginning climber needs to know including several important knots Perhaps the most essential knot is the Figure 8 Follow Through Thistutorial will demonstrate how to correctly harness yourself to a rope using a Figure 8 Follow Through knot This knot is used primarily by rock climbers to provide a life-line Since this knot is used as a life-line it is very important to be able to tie it correctly (Your life could depend upon it)
Dont worry with this tutorial and about 5 minutes of practice you can have this knot mastered
Things you will need
- Climbing Harness- Climbing Rope
If you are wanting to go climbing and dont already have these items they can be purchased for about $25 each at most outdoor sporting goods stores If you are merelylooking to learn the knot a belt loop and a rope (about five feet long) will do
Image Notes1 Climbing Harness2 Climbing Rope
Step 1 Dealing With The RopeThroughout this tutorial I will be discussing different parts of the rope To make these instructions as clear as possible I will define a few terms that I will use throughoutthe tutorial The Anchor End of the rope will generally be at the top of the images This is the end that would be anchored to the wall or rock and does not move Wewill not be doing much with the anchored end The Tail End of the rope is the opposite end that we will be dealing with I will call this the tail for short
Now that we have some terms to work with lets get started
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 2 Tying The First Figure 8This knot has several parts to it The first part of the knot is just tying a basic figure 8 To tie the first figure 8 there are four simple steps
1 - Using the tail make a loop over the rope (as shown in the first picture) keeping in mind that there should be about 3 ft of slack on the tail end
2 - Wrap the tail back this time go under the anchored end (As shown in the second picture)
3 - Bring the tail down through the first loop (As shown in the third picture)
4 - Finally pull the two ends to make the knot a little bit tighter and easier to deal with (Shown in the fourth picture)
After these four steps you should end up with a knot that resembles a figure 8
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 3 Looping Into The Harness In order to secure the rope to the harness simply thread the tail end of the rope through the front loop in the harness as shown in the picture below This step isobviously very important
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 4 Following Back Through The Figure 8After looping the rope through the harness you have to thread the tail end of the rope back through the knot following the first figure 8 I have divided this process intofive smaller steps in order to make it more clear
1 - Coming form underneath the knot bring the tail up through the near loop and to the left behind the anchored end of the rope (Shown in the first picture)
2 - Wrap the tail around the anchored end back to the right and down through the adjacent loop (Shown in the second picture)
3 - You simply need to bring the tail back over the top of the knot to the left (Shown in the third picture)
4 - Bring the tail end up through the far loop following the anchored end (Shown in the fourth picture)
5 - Finally pull the knot tight (Shown in the fifth picture)
As you can see the first four pictures are simply tracing the knot back through with the tail end
For the last part while you pull the knot tight you may want to make small adjustments and rearrange how it all fits together If the knot does not lay perfectly smoothand tight its NOT a big deal
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 5 Finishing The Knot After completing the Figure 8 knot you will want to somehow secure the tail end of the rope out of the way There are a couple different ways to do this the way that Iwill demonstrate is using whats called a Stopper Knot This secondary knot is similar to a Fishermans knot and is pretty simple I have once again divided thisprocess into several smaller steps
1 - Start by wrapping the tail end around the anchored end (As shown in the first picture)
2 - Wrap the tail back underneath the two vertical segments (As shown in the second picture)
3 - Simply repeat the first two steps wrapping the tail around again (As shown in the third picture)
4 - This step in the fourth picture may look complicated but all you need to do is insert the tail up through the two loops that you have just made
5 - To finish off the knot you will want to slowly pull the tail end while gently pushing the bottom of the stopper knot upwards If you have successfully completed this knotit should look something like the fifth picture
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 6 Ready To Climb Now that you have mastered the Figure 8 knot you can securely harness yourself into a climbing rope Remember there are many other skills that go into setting up ananchor and belaying a climber This tutorial only covers the figure 8 knot For more information there are many great websites that demonstrate how to correctly set up asafe climbing system (Ive posted a few below) If you are a beginning climber I recommend that you read up on a few other climbing techniques Also you shouldprobably go to a climbing wall or gym where there are experienced climbers that can show you the ropes Hopefully this tutorial has been helpful Have fun and be safe
Some useful linkshttpwwwstephenprattnetAnchorsanchorshtmhttpwwwuoregonedu~oppclimbingtopicsanchorshtmlhttpwwwabc-of-rockclimbingcomhowtoclimbingtechniquesasp
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Related Instructables
How to Tie aFigure EightKnot byTactical_Pyro
Paracord KnotDisplay Bord byJamie bagn
Basic KnotsGuide byzorro3355
How to Climb aTree (withprussiks) bystasterisk
How to climb atree (using onlyrope) thefunsimple wayby louieaw
How to get arope into a tree(withoutclimbing it) byvitex
How to tievarious knots byadaviel
How to make arope swing byjdub0928
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Turks Head Knots on a Bottleby sklnxbones on July 6 2010
Intro Turks Head Knots on a BottleThis is the finished project A bottle decorated with three Turks Head Knots There are only three knots on this bottle The RED and the BLUE knots are each a 20 Bightby 3 Lead Turks Head Knots The WHITE knot is a 20 Bight by 19 Lead Turks Head Knot
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 1 Supplies
Cord Lots and Lots of cord I cant tell you how much each bottle is differentBottle Washed and Dried inside and out Make sure to remove all water spotsThreaded Needle Cord screws into the threads at the base of the needlePegs I use brass rivets used as a map to tie the Turks Head KnotsHole Punch Used to punch holes in the painters tape to hold the pegsPainters Tape To hold the pegs in place and to make your map for the Turks Head KnotsMarker To write on the painters tapeCloth Towel To remove finger prints and dirt from your bottleKrazy Glue or Super Glue This is used to secure the knots in place to the bottle
OPTIONAL BUT HIGHLY RECOMMENDEDI use the Turks Head Cookbook from KnotToolcom
Step 2 PreparationYou will need to find a bottle you like I used an empty instant tea bottle of course washed and dried (I like to put the bottle in the oven for a few minutes to dry the insidewithout water spots Take off the lid and do not put lid in the oven) Now measure the circumference of the bottle Take a cord and tightly wrap the cord around the bottleMark where the ends meet and use a ruler to measure the length of the cord For my instant tea bottle the circumference is 27cm I know from past knots that I have tiedthat I want my knot to have 20 Bights in the top and bottom (bands) knots I am going to use the Bights in the (bands) knots to tie the middle knot Now divide the numberof Bights (20) into the size of the circumference (27) to get the space between each Bight (135) With me so far
Now take two pieces of painters tape using a ruler measure out the length of the circumference and mark the length on the both pieces of tape Next you will mark thespace between each Bight on the tape
Step 3 Adding the PegsI like to use pegs when tying Turks Head Knots it just makes tying the knot easier
These are what I use for pegs
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 4 Adding Pegs to the TapeNow take a hole punch to cut holes in the tape where the lines meet You will place the pegs in the holes
Insert a peg in each hole and carefully stick the first piece of tape to the bottle
Step 5 Adding the 2nd row of pegsNow do the same thing with the second piece of tape The numbers on each piece of tape must line up
This picture shows you what you should have now This odd looking thing will be your map to tie the Turks Head Knot And this is the end of Step 1
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 6 Tying the first Turks Head KnotUsing the Turks Head Cookbook follow the numbers going over and under as indicated in the book I chose a 20 Bight by 3 Lead knot which will give me a nice bandaround the bottle Once the ends meet you have made one complete knot Tape the running end of your cord and start removing the pegs and the tape
Step 7 Remove the pegs and the tapeBe careful not to untie the knot as you remove the pegs and tape from the bottle Continue to remove all the pegs and remove the tape from the bottle At this point theknot will be very loose and will need to be tightened up
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 8 Remove the slack from the knotHere you can see just how much the knot expanded Starting with the standing end begin to pull the slack out of the knot going towards the running end of the cordDo not expect to pull all the slack out at once You may have to make 3 - 5 attempts at removing the slack out of the knot DO NOT remove all of the slack out of the knotIn order to make the bands we will have to triple the Turks Head Knot We will do this by following the knot three times The threaded needle will really come in handyhere
Step 9 Triple the KnotOnce you have made three passes of the Turks Head Knot use your needle to go under your knot about half the circumference and cut the cord The knot will be tightenough to hide the tail in placeTIP I carefully add a couple of drops of super glue UNDER the band to hold them in place and keep them from sliding around in the nextsteps A drop or two in 3 or 4 places around the band should be enough
Step 10 Add the second knotNow repeat this whole step for the second bandWhen tying the second band you must make sure the Bights line up to the first band This is crucial for the next stepWipe down the bottle to make sure all your finger prints and adhesive from the tape are all removed You want to make sure your bottle is clean at this point Any dirt orfinger prints left on the bottle will be almost impossible to remove From this point on we will use gloves when tying our last knot
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 11 Maping the Top KnotStick a piece of painters tape on top of your first band leaving the bottom of the knot exposedUse a marker to count the number of Bights in your knot Instead of using the pegs we are going to use the Bights to tie our next Turks Head Knot
Step 12 Mapping the Bottom KnotDo the same thing for the bottom band but you must make sure your numbers on top and bottom line up So 1 on top should be the same position as 1 on the bottom
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 13 Adding the last knotAgain using the Turks Head Cookbook and the threaded needle you are going to follow the instructions going over and under as indicated in the book Be sure to usegloves when ever you handle the bottle
Step 14 Thats ItFor this Turks Head Knot I am using a 20 Bight by 19 Lead knot
Because of the amount of cord you are working with your cord will get twisted and knotted You will have to un-twist the cord often Its a pain in the rear but it has to bedone And it has to be done alot
Continue to tie the knot until you finish the knot If you have the cord and the patience you can double or triple the knot When you are done use your needle to hide theends under your bands Cut the ends and your DONE
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Related Instructables
Monkeys FistFloatingKeychain byjokerlz
How To Make ATurks headKnot WithParacord byDoggie Stylish
Tying Trivetsout of Rope forHoliday Gifts bykylemarsh
Paracord KnotDisplay Bord byJamie bagn
How to Make ATurks Head(Photos) bymchs60chip
A pocket full ofknots byKiteman
Monkeys fistknot AND themonkey byjonathan111
TiteTie is theTruckers Knoton Steroids bytitetie
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Larks head noose -- an easy useful knot that tightens and loosensby Larry Breed on February 19 2009
Intro Larks head noose -- an easy useful knot that tightens and loosensI thought I knew all the basic knots but then I was taught this incredibly useful simple knot Its good for tying up the neck of a bag that you want to repeatedly open andsecurely close Its good for tying around a springy bundle that will need tightening and retightening And its easy to undo
Ive looked at knot literature but havent found a name for this so I named it The basic knot is well known its called a larks head Since all Ive done is to slip the twoends through the larks head to make a noose I call it that
WARNING Dont use this knot when human safety would depend on it Climbers and mountaineers have well-tested reliable knots for such situations
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Image Notes1 To tighten further step on this side of the larks head and pull the free ends
Step 1 Double the cord overThe larks head noose requires enough cord to go twice around your bundle plus a foot or two Find the center and double it over Sailors call this a bight
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 2 Form the larks headComing from below the bight hook your thumb and forefinger over the two sides Reach outward and downward and pinch your fingertips together underneath thedoubled cord
Youve made a larks head Move the crossing cord a little farther from your hand so theres a clear opening through the two half-loops
Step 3 Form the nooseSlip the two ends of the cord through the opening we were just talking about Pull the larks head tight so it grips the two cords Find something that needs constrictingand put the noose around it
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 4 Tightening retightening and lockingSlide the knot against the bundle If its not tight enough to keep from slipping tighten it by holding it in one hand and tugging on the cords one at a time with the otherhand Notice that you can slide the knot out again for instance to re-open the bag you just tied shut For some applications this may be as tight as you need it
A springy bundle probably still feels loose If so compress the bundle and get a new grip on the cords Rest your foot on the bundle on the cords nearest the larks headand pull to slide the larks head tighter
To make the knot more permanent you can lock it Make an overhand in the cord ends (Exactly like the first step in tying shoelaces) With your foot still on the bundlepull on the cords and move your hands apart until youre pulling in opposite directions You have just locked the larks head and you can trust it to stay that way()
But lets say that later on you want to loosen the locked knot Again put your foot on the bundle and cords nearest the larks head hold the two cord ends together andpull This makes a little slack between the overhand and the larks head so you can untie the overhand
In twine or small string the locking overhand knot may be difficult to undo Use a shoelace knot instead of an overhand and itll unlock easily
() If youre using slippery cord like polypropylene an overhand may not lock securely You may want to tie another overhand knot For added security wrap a shortlength of duct tape around the two cords close to the knot
Image Notes1 To tighten further step on this side of the larks head and pull the free ends
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Related Instructables
TRX fromParacordChallengeAccepted bythrake
A pocket full ofknots byKiteman
Lens CapLanyard by~teknoarsonist~ how to tie a
noose byawesume
AdjustableParacordGlassesLanyard byjdtwelve12
HangmansNoose PackClosure byPopEye42
Paraleash - ADog LeashFrom Paracordby The Ideanator
How to make arugged andhandy ParacordBelt by Jake22
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Linked bowlines
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 4 Bowline on the BightA bowline on the bight is a bowline tied in a loop of rope (neither end is needed) The shape is the same as a bowline made with a double line but the middle of thebight forms the loop around the standing part
UsesAn impromptu bosuns chair - to sit in while being transferred between two boats at sea
Step 5 Clove HitchThe clove hitch can be made when you only have the bight (the middle) of a rope not the ends
UsesSecuring a burgee pole to a burgee halyard (a continuous loop of thin line)Securing a tiller from swinging
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 6 Round Turn and Two Half-HitchesThis is a knot used to secure a line to a ring or bar Wind a couple of turns around the bar then secure the end with two hitches around the standing part (this looks like aclove hitch when done)
AdvantagesCan be made under load - it is easy to take turns around the bar while maintaining tension on the ropeStrong - provided the bar is thicker than the rope the rope is not weakened by sharp bendsDisadvantagesThe end tends to work loose
UsesSecuring a line to a mooring ring or samson post
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 7 Fishermans BendThe fishermans bend is the same as the round turn and two half hitches except that the first hitch is looped under the round turn This uses the tension on the rope tosecure the end from working loose
AdvantagesSecure against working loose
DisadvantagesHard to make under tensionHard to undo under tensionMay seize up under load when wet making it hard to undo
UsesSecuring mooring line to ringSecuring fender lines to rail
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 8 Studsail BendThe studsail bend is like the fishermans bend but the second hitch is also secured under the round turn making it even more secure against working loose when undertension
AdvantagesVery secure against working looseDisadvantagesHard to make under tensionHard to undo under tension
Step 9 Figure-8 KnotThe figure-eight knot is used to prevent an end of rope from passing through a block (pulley) Sometimes called a stopper knot
The double figure-8 knot is used in rock climbing as an alternative to a bowline to secure a climbing harness to the end of a safety rope The double knot is made bymaking a single knot then tracing back around the knot with the free end after passing it around the harness loop
AdvantagesEasy to verify by inspectionNot prone to work loose
DisadvantagesSlow to make and undoCannot be made under load
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 10 Prussic KnotThe prussic knot may be used as a climbing ascender - when made around a vertical rope as shown downwards tension on the ends locks the knot while release oftension allows it to be slid up the rope A pair of prussic knots on foot loops may be used in tandem to climb a rope
UsesClimbing a ropeTaking up tension to free a riding turn on a winch
Step 11 Reef KnotThe reef knot or square knot is used to tie a bundle of material together It must be made around something - it should not be used to tie two free ropes togetherbecause it can easily capsizeIt should not be used to make a loop unless it can be tensioned around a solid object It should not be used around a person - use a bowline instead A capsized reefknot will slip easily and could constrict and cause severe injury
UsesReefing a sail (tying the unused portion around a spar)Securing a furled sail to a spar (sail ties)Wrapping a parcelTying shoelaces
AdvantagesMay be made under moderate load
DisadvantagesCapsizes (works free) if used improperlyCan seize up under load when wet
Tying the knot
Capsizing a reef knot
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 12 CleatsThis is not a knot but is very common on boatsThe first picture shows a rope cleated normally The second shows one with a final locking turn - the last turn is twisted before placing over the cleat so that the tensionon the rope helps secure the free end
When working with ropes under tension take a turn or two around a winch or cleat before trying to secure the end with a knot The load on the free end falls exponentiallywith each turn taken Severe injury can result if a finger or other body part is caught in a loop of rope or between a rope and another object
Step 13 Practice themIt is sometimes useful to be able to tie knots in the dark or as in this video behind your back
Related Instructables
AThird Hand forSailing or OtherThings by WadeTarzia
Paracord KnotDisplay Bord byJamie bagn
Trip LogOutriggerCanoe Sailingthe CaliforniaChannel Islandsby TimAnderson
How to Tie aFigure EightKnot byTactical_Pyro
How to build apirate ship bymdelaney3
Build a ShortDragon (16 foot3-BoardOutriggerSailing Canoe)by Wade Tarzia
repairing aheadsail by josh
How to get arope into a tree(withoutclimbing it) byvitex
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
How to Tie the Lanyard Knotby eddy14777 on January 31 2010
Intro How to Tie the Lanyard KnotMany people including myself have had trouble following the Stormdrane youtube video on tying the lanyard knot so i have done some research and found the solution
Image Notes1 Finished knot
Step 1 MaterialsAll you need is a reasonable length of para cord or whatever you wish to use
Image Notes1 One reasonable amount
Step 2 First StepThe first thing you are going to do is to make a bight that leaves you with to congruent endsThen you are going to put your ring finger through the bight
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Image Notes1 Close enough2 Bight
Step 3 Starting the KnotMake a loop just like the one in the picture and place it over the top strandBring the top strand under the bottom strand
Image Notes1 Notice the way the loop is done2 Top strand
Image Notes1 Bottom strand2 Top strand is under
Step 4 The Most Important PartNow you take the top stand from the previous picture and feed it over the first part of the loop under itself and back over the remainder of the loop
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Image Notes1 Under me2 Top strand3 This should make a diamond type shape
Step 5 DoublingNow take the bottom stand and take it around the part of the top strand nearest to the bight and than come up through the diamond shape in the middleDo the same for the top strand
Image Notes1 Top strand
Image Notes1 Both through the diamond
Step 6 FinishingWhen you take it off your finger it should look like thisWork out the slack by pulling on the bight and the two strands
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Image Notes1 Finished knot
Related Instructables
Cross KnotParacordLanyard byStormdrane
Celtic ButtonKnot (video) byStormdrane
Paracord wristlanyard madewith the snakeknot byStormdrane
Paracord ChainSinnet FastDeploy BoonieHatband (video)by Stormdrane
Zigzag SpoolingParacord (video)by Stormdrane
ParacordBoonie HatWrap (video) byStormdrane
Paracord IDbadge Lanyardby Flahusky
Cobra WeaveKey Fob bytevers94
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Four knots to make paracord into a useful toolby erik_mccray on March 27 2010
Authorerik_mccrayI am an ex-fabricator that is now a stay at home dad I love my new job but I do miss making stuff I love this site amp I am getting involved as a way to keep myskills upOn top of fad work I have also run two small business in the past One was custom sewing amp the other was as a small engine mechanicI have two votec degrees one in metal fabrication amp the other is in engine repairI look forward to getting to know everyone here
Intro Four knots to make paracord into a useful toolParacord is an awesome multitool used everywhere from the wild blue yonder to the deepest caverns But like any good tool it is only as good as the knowledge the userhas about the tool With most people out there using bungee cords amp ratchet straps it seems that paracord is being used for nothing more than friendship bracelets forgrown men This is a shame because for less then the price of a few cheap bungee cords amp some to short to be helpful straps You can get yourself hundreds of feet ofparacord
The key to getting the most out of the paracord is good knot work The first thing you need to know is what makes a good knot One is that the knot is easy amp quick to tieamp more impotant is that the knot is easy amp quick to untie The hitch class of knots is by far the best group of knots that the average person could know The four mostuseful hitch knots are the half hitch a quick simple knot that forms the base for many other knots the inline half hitch allowing you to get the most out of one length ofparacord the slippery hitch that gives you both on the fly control over tension on your paracord but also an adjustable loop that will not change unless you want it amp theinline truckers hitch instantly doubling the your pulling power
Step 1 To get started lets get some terminology that will be used defined
line= the paracord
Main line= the part of the paracord doing the work for example holding down your tarp or the long part of the paracord
Mid line= the middle of the length of the paracord
End line= the unused length of paracord or the short length of paracord
Step 2 The half hitch The half hitch is a simple way to secure a line to an anchor point like the tie down points in most trucks A half hitch is a constrictor knot meaning that the harder you pullon the line the tighter the knots grip gets Another common constrictor knot is the slip knot
Step 1 wrap your line around your anchor point Step 2 wrap the end line around the main line
Step 3 pass the end line threw the end line side of the newly formed loop
step 4 now take the slack out of the knot
step 5 to make sure the knot is secure tie another half hitch to the main line This knot is called adouble half hitch
step 6 another useful thing that can be done with the half hitch is that instead of repeating the wrap on the main line but repeating it on what you are tying to the half hitchcan be used to bind something like a stack of 2x4s
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Image Notes1 End line2 Main line3 step 1
Image Notes1 Step 2
Image Notes1 passing thew the end line side of the loop2 step 3
Image Notes1 step 5
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Image Notes1 step 6
Step 3 The mid line half hitch The mid line half hitch is for when the length of line is to long for the job at hand amp you dont want to have to cut the line to size or you are using multiple anchor pointswith one length of line
Step 1 double up the line at the point in the length you wish to make the knot
Step 2 wrap the doubled up portion of line around your anchor point The doubled up length is now now the end line
Step 3 now tie just as you did for the regular half hitch repeat the knot to make a double half hitch for security
Image Notes1 A mid line double half hitch
Image Notes1 step 1
Image Notes1 The end line2 step 2
Image Notes1 Step 3
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 4 The slippery hitch The slippery hitch is a great knot for adjusting tension on the main line or for having an adjustable fixed loop To adjust the knot simply slide the knot up or down the mainline
Step 1 wrap your line around the anchor point or just double over the line to form a loop
Step 2 wrap the end line around the main line three times Wrapping in the direction of the anchor point or loop
Step 3 put together the two lines making up the loop amp wrap the two lines one time with the end line
Step 4 pass the end line thew the last loop formed covering the two lined of the loop
Step 5 pull the knot tite
step 6 to adjust the size of the loop or main line tension grab the knot amp slide it up or down the main line
Image Notes1 grab just the knot its self to adjust it2 step 5
Image Notes1 step 1
Image Notes1 step 2
Image Notes1 step 3
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Image Notes1 step 4
Image Notes1 grab just the knot its self to adjust it2 step 5
Image Notes1 same knot as in last pic Just slid up2 step 6
Step 5 The mid line truchers hitch The truckers hitch is a great way to double the pulling force on a line There are many ways to tie this knot the problem with most of them is that at some point you aregoing to have to pass the end line through a loop on the main line that is acting like a pulley to double your pulling force this is great if you are making the knot close tothe end of your line but if you are using a 300 length of line amp want to make the knot in the first ten feet having to pass 290 of line thew a loop is a pain But with a fewhalf hitches you will not have to pass the end line threw any loop on the main line
step 1 wrap your line around the anchor point then double over your end line laying the top of the loop over the main line
Step 2 double up your main line amp lay the loop over the loop made by the end line
step 3 in main line above the knot twist in a loop
step 4 put main line loop thew the loop made in step 3 amp pull this loop tight over your main line loop forming a half hitch Repeat step 3 amp 4 to make a doublehalf hitch
step 5 To use the knot just pull down on the end line to put tension on the main line
step 6 after you have the main line snug tie a mid line double half hitch around the two lines forming the loop at the end of the main line with the end line
step 7 Tie a double half hitch with the end line around the end loop of the mid line half hitch of step 6 using the same method as used in steps 3 amp 4
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Image Notes1 the end of step 6
Image Notes1 main line2 end line3 step 1
Image Notes1 main line loop2 end line loop
Image Notes1 step 3
Image Notes1 step 4
Image Notes1 step 4 at the end with a double half hitch on the main loop
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Image Notes1 pull here2 step 5
Image Notes1 the start of step 6
Image Notes1 the end of step 6
Image Notes1 step 72 now the rest of the line is free to do more work
Related Instructables
Paracord KnotDisplay Bord byJamie bagn
ChokelessAdjustableParacord DogLeash byPizzaman101
ParacordLadder wWooden Rungsby josestude
tie a paracordshackle grip byitri45
ParacordPrussik Belt byJavaNut13
TiteTie is theTruckers Knoton Steroids bytitetie
ID Lanyard(Photos) byeschmunk
Dog Toys forHeavy Chewersby J3443RY
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Figure 8 knot and double 8 knotby jonathan111 on November 28 2007
Intro Figure 8 knot and double 8 knotI will show you how to tie a figure 8 knot and a figure 8 follow through
Step 1 Stating the knotThis is a simple knot so just follow the pictures
Step 2 Finishing the knotCross the string under and then push it through the hole Pull tightly unless you are going to do the follow through and leave it somewhat loose
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 3 The follow through knotThe follow through knot should be tied around something brought back and followed through the path of the 8 knot Look at the pictures Basically follow through the 8knot backwards
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Related Instructables
Climb Safe WithA Figure 8Knot by mattste A pocket full of
knots byKiteman
How to Tie aFigure EightKnot byTactical_Pyro
Paracord KnotDisplay Bord byJamie bagn
Cross KnotParacordLanyard byStormdrane
How to Tie aFire-escapeKnot by leonardoismael
Truckers HitchTHE mostawesome knoton the planetby schneidp20
Paracord ZipperPuller byrepeet13
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Truckers Hitch THE most awesome knot on the planetby schneidp20 on October 12 2008
Authorschneidp20I like building stuff Trouble is there just isnt enough time to build everything Sigh
Intro Truckers Hitch THE most awesome knot on the planetYes I know that there are plenty of other cool knots out there many of which I literally couldnt live wo I rock climb However this knot is unlike any other Plus Ineeded a grabber for my Instructable -) (BTW this ISNT a climbing knot) And in truth it isnt a knot by itself but rather a system of common knots
Have you ever tried to tie something down for transporting but just couldnt get the lines tight andor during transport the lines would continually loosen Then this is theknot for you I learned this knot back in the 70s when specialty car racks and ratchet straps were rare or unheard of I initially used it to tie a canoe on a car rack bothattaching to the rack as well as the lines to the bow and stern of the canoe Even with all the new gizmos available today this knot still shines because all you need is arope and ropes dont hum in the wind like straps
The unique aspect of this knot is that it gives you a 2-1 mechanical advantage when tightening the rope Be careful though You can actually damage some thingsbecause of the mechanical advantage This knot holds fast and is easy to untie hallmark traits of any good knot
Below you see the finished knot system well break it apart in the steps that follow
Image Notes1 1st anchor point a bowline2 loop3 securing knots 2 half hitches4 securing loose end with a fishermans knot5 2nd anchor point (should be round)
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Image Notes1 X marks the spot
Step 1 Initial setupThe first step is to anchor one end of the rope and then loop the rope around a 2nd anchor point
For attaching to the 1st anchor point I chose bowline a close 2 on my list -) There are other instructables on that one so I wont bore you here
The 2nd anchor really should be round because it serves as a pulley in this block and tackle type knot Ive used it on sharp anchor points and it doesnt work as well
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 2 Creating a slip knotTie a slip knot somewhere between the two anchor points Correct placement of the slip knot takes some experience to judge it correctly Typically I place it too close tothe 2nd anchor point and end up with not enough room to work with If the knot ends up too far from 2nd anchor point you can extend the knot by enlarging the loop
Be sure you tie the slip knot as shown You may not be able to untie other knots
In this small example the slip knot is uncharacteristically close to the 1st anchor point
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 3 Tightening and securingThe loose end of the rope that went around the 2nd anchor point goes through the slip knot loop Pull the loose end to the desired tension and secure with two halfhitches
Note To allow better view of the knots the rope isnt really tightened in this example
Step 4 Securing loose endThe final knot is just to secure the loose end somehow I chose a fishermans knot to do this
To tie a fishermans knot the rope goes around twice and goes under the X created by the loops Pull the loose end to tighten Finally slide the knot to put tension onthe half hitches
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Image Notes1 X marks the spot
Step 5 FinishedThere you have it I guarantee that the first time you really use this knot (not just practice) you will be amazed at how well it works and youll wish you knew this knot along time ago You may even come over to my side and declare that is is THE most awesome knot on the planet -)
Enjoy and happy haulingDave
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Related Instructables
TiteTie is theTruckers Knoton Steroids bytitetie
Four knots tomake paracordinto a usefultool byerik_mccray
Modify yourbike rack tocarry a sunfishor other boat byewilhelm
SurfboardHammock byGermy
GiganticHalloweenSpider Web bynolte919
How To Tie ASpiders Hitch(video) by back-cast
Three-hitch mathair ornamentby michiexile TRX from
ParacordChallengeAccepted bythrake
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Carry any Bottle with a JUG KNOT Handleby hpstoutharrow on September 17 2009
Intro Carry any Bottle with a JUG KNOT HandleTie a JUG KNOT around a water bottle soda bottle or aluminum bottle to make a secure carrying strap
Re-purpose any container into a reusable water bottle by adding a convenient carrying strap This Instructable will demonstrate how to tie a JUG knot which like its namesuggests is meant to properly secure around the neck of a container
With some cord and the knowledge of this knot you will be able add a handle lanyard or carabiner loop to any of your favorite beverages to carry them on the go
It works perfectly for those disposable water bottles and who knows once you add some colorful cord to the plain old clear water bottle you just might beinclined to refill it and use it again(Check out pictures 4amp5 below)
In addition to plastic beverage bottles like pop water and sports drinks you can turn those rugged aluminum beer bottles into a backpacking canteen
Those of you familiar with my previous aluminum bottle InstructablesROLLED RIM METAL TUMBLERhttpwwwinstructablescomidAluminum-Bottle-Tumbler-Cup-Cook-PotALUMINUM BOTTLE LIGHTWEIGHT ALCOHOL STOVEhttpwwwinstructablescomidAluminum-Bottle-Alcohol-Stovewill recognize the water canteen shown below as a re-purposed aluminum beer bottle Here I have added a painted surface treatment to turn it into a proper lookingwater bottle More on that in steps 13 14 15
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 1 Getting StartedCord size is important Select a small medium weight cord like the one shown here It is a general purpose camp cord sold at most sporting goods stores (shoelacesmight also work)
Do not use a heavy cord or rope because the larger diameter will not tuck under the relatively small lip at the top of the bottleneck and the bottle will fall out
Also the smaller cord cinches tight on itself and will not loosen accidentally
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 2 Form a BightThe next steps show how to tie a JUG KNOT It is the basic step for adding a carrying strap It is also the anchor point for any additional fancy bottle trussing you maywant to add
JUG KNOT Step 1
Form a Bight in the center of a length of cord Bight is a knot term for a loop or bend in the rope In this case the main Bight in this knot is highlighted with a white mark Imakes it easier to follow its path in these steps
The running ends of the cord should be equal length
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 3 Pull the Bight downPULL the Bight DOWN forming two Loops
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 4 Cross the LoopsCROSS the right Loop OVER the left Loop
Step 5 Pass the Bight under the 1st loopTake the main Bight and pass it UNDER the left Loop
Step 6 Weave the BightWEAVE the Bight OVER the portion of the right Loop and UNDER the portion of the left Loop
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 7 Extend the BightExtend the Bight OVER the outer portion of the right Loop
Step 8 Flip the Right Loop behindAdditional colored identification points have been added to the loops to follow their travel in these next two steps
The right Loop Yellow marker is FLIPPED BEHIND the knot and ends up on the far left side of the knot
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 9 Flip the 2nd loop in frontRaise the green marker (located on what was formerly the left loop) and pull it down and to the right FLIPPING IT IN FRONT of the knot
Note the blue portion of the this loop will pass around the outside of the yellow portion of the first loop
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Image Notes1 Center of knot that will tighten around the bottles neck
Step 10 Remove SlackNote where the blue green amp yellow markers end up
Start to remove the slack in the loops by pulling the original main Bight (white marker top right) and the two free standing ends at the bottom
the bottle neck will pass through the very center of the knot
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Image Notes1 Center of knot that will tighten around the bottles neck
Step 11 Tighten the KnotAfter removing the slack insert the bottle neck and finish tightening
The knot should look like this before slipping it over the bottle
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 12 Secure on bottle neckThis is the finished knot shown on the neck of various containers
The loop end and the two free standing ends can be tied together to create a carrying handle (last picture below)
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 13 Aluminum Bottle Water Bottle
The next few steps show the features of an aluminum beer bottle re-purposed as a water bottle canteen It is one of many containers that can be reused as a camp waterbottle
The bottle was lightly sanded masked and then pained with a hammered finished paint to create an interesting surface texture
Image Notes1 Textured finish paint makes an interesting grip-able surface2 Masked with tape for painting3 Masked with tape for painting
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Image Notes1 Dowel used for holding the bottle during painting
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 14 Tethered Cork StopperUse a wine bottle man made Cork as a stopper for your aluminum water bottleNote Use a cork that was removed from the wine bottle without the corkscrew penetrating through the bottom end of the cork (A hole all the way through the cork willcause it to leak) Use the unpierced end of the cork inside the water bottle
Drill a hole through the sides of the Cork Thread the cord through the hole to the center of the cord Use the cork as the main Bight and tie the Jug knot as shown inthe beginning steps
Now the cork is tethered to the bottle and will not get lost or fall on the ground
A Carabiner clip passes through the other cord end to attache the water bottle to you belt or pack
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 15 Trussed for TransportThis is another hanging method for carrying your aluminum bottle water canteen A Jug knot is tied conventionally around the neck
The running ends of the knot however are pulled down towards the bottom of the bottle A Barrel Knot is tied about 34 the way down the side of the bottle A squareknot is tied on the bottom of the knot to keep the two running ends tight against the sides of the bottle
I like the look of the accent colored cord running down the sides of the bottle and the fact that the bottle hangs from the belt upside down It adds to its uniqueness
The last picture shows another truss variation
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 16 AdvancedBelow is a bottle with some additional trussing You can be creative as you want It all starts with a re-purposed container and the Jug Knot (and enough cord)
Related Instructables
AluminumBottle TumblerCup amp Cook Potfor an AlcoholStove byhpstoutharrow
Water BottleBelt Clip byuglymike Duct Tape
Water Bottle byrabidsquire2
AluminumBottle AlcoholStove byhpstoutharrow
DIYGlass WaterBottle byCulturespy
Solar WaterHeater forBackpackingUsing WaterBottles and aCar Shade bykopomeroy
Duct tape waterbottle holder(Photos) by pinkmarshmallow
How to make aCamelPack withan old plasticbottle bywillrandship
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Basic Knots Guideby zorro3355 on April 29 2008
Intro Basic Knots Guidehi
Step 1 Thumb knotThe most simple knotUsed as a stopper and prevent ropes from fraying
Step 2 Reef KnotUsed to tie two ropes of equal thickness togetherIt is pretty easy to tie and untie but under tentionit may be diffcult to untieIt is also not sutible for smoothropes(egnylon ropes)
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 3 Figure of eightused as a stopperprevent ropes from fraying and its more secure than tumb knot its is also used to tie Caribinas to ropes and is often used in rock climbing
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 4 Timber hitchused for pulling logs
Step 5 Clove hitchUsed to tie a rope onto a pole or logThe pole must be roundThe pole lust be thicker then the rope itself
(greatly used during pioneering)
Step 6 Sheet bandused to tie ropes of different thickness together(works on same thickness of ropes too)
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 7 Sheep shankTo shorten RopesTo prevent middle fraying
Step 8 Slip knotWhippingUsed as a grip for pulling things(when tied on a stick or small pole)(marlin spike hitch)
Related Instructables
Rope Rings byhpstoutharrow
How to Tie aFigure EightKnot byTactical_Pyro
Whippin (WestCountry Style)by tim_n
SurvivalBracelet(Updated) bytevers94
HangmansNoose PackClosure byPopEye42
Turkey on aTripod byhpstoutharrow
SurvivalBracelet II bytevers94 Zigzag Spooling
Paracord (video)by Stormdrane
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
How to Tie a Fire-escape Knotby leonardo ismael on October 16 2007
Intro How to Tie a Fire-escape KnotThis knot is used by firemen in case of fires for example imagine a scene where the ladder on the firetruck messes up but people need to get down a five story buildingor more All they have is a long piece of rope they can safely get down with a secure knot like the fire-escape knot So why not learn it its easy to do and hard to untieif you tie it tightly
This is from the American Boys Handbook
Step 1 Get Your RopeFirst grab a piece of rope and bend it like this to make a loop in it Follow every step to the smallest detail
Step 2 Twist the RopeNow make a twist like this and hold it together
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 3 Pull Through the TwistPull the loop through the twist you just made from underneath
Step 4 Go Over the Split EndNow pull the tail through the loop
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 5 FinallyAnd finally just pull it through as pictured below
Congratulations you just learned the fire-escape knot
Step 6 Same Name Not KnotThis is another knot called the fire-escape knot this shouldnt be your result
Related Instructables
House FireEscape Plan(video) byWhatHappensNowAdvice
ParacordLadder wWooden Rungsby josestude
Bed SheetEscape Rope byjessehensel
rope ladder(glow-in-the-dark version) bymikeasaurus
HeadlockEscape 2(video) byjohnnyrockstah
QuickFirestarter byMattandJora
Trail sauna byjakee117
How to Kill FireAnts andCommitGenocide byKentsOkay
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Climb Safe With A Figure 8 Knotby mattste on February 23 2010
Intro Climb Safe With A Figure 8 Knot There are many things that a beginning climber needs to know including several important knots Perhaps the most essential knot is the Figure 8 Follow Through Thistutorial will demonstrate how to correctly harness yourself to a rope using a Figure 8 Follow Through knot This knot is used primarily by rock climbers to provide a life-line Since this knot is used as a life-line it is very important to be able to tie it correctly (Your life could depend upon it)
Dont worry with this tutorial and about 5 minutes of practice you can have this knot mastered
Things you will need
- Climbing Harness- Climbing Rope
If you are wanting to go climbing and dont already have these items they can be purchased for about $25 each at most outdoor sporting goods stores If you are merelylooking to learn the knot a belt loop and a rope (about five feet long) will do
Image Notes1 Climbing Harness2 Climbing Rope
Step 1 Dealing With The RopeThroughout this tutorial I will be discussing different parts of the rope To make these instructions as clear as possible I will define a few terms that I will use throughoutthe tutorial The Anchor End of the rope will generally be at the top of the images This is the end that would be anchored to the wall or rock and does not move Wewill not be doing much with the anchored end The Tail End of the rope is the opposite end that we will be dealing with I will call this the tail for short
Now that we have some terms to work with lets get started
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 2 Tying The First Figure 8This knot has several parts to it The first part of the knot is just tying a basic figure 8 To tie the first figure 8 there are four simple steps
1 - Using the tail make a loop over the rope (as shown in the first picture) keeping in mind that there should be about 3 ft of slack on the tail end
2 - Wrap the tail back this time go under the anchored end (As shown in the second picture)
3 - Bring the tail down through the first loop (As shown in the third picture)
4 - Finally pull the two ends to make the knot a little bit tighter and easier to deal with (Shown in the fourth picture)
After these four steps you should end up with a knot that resembles a figure 8
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 3 Looping Into The Harness In order to secure the rope to the harness simply thread the tail end of the rope through the front loop in the harness as shown in the picture below This step isobviously very important
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 4 Following Back Through The Figure 8After looping the rope through the harness you have to thread the tail end of the rope back through the knot following the first figure 8 I have divided this process intofive smaller steps in order to make it more clear
1 - Coming form underneath the knot bring the tail up through the near loop and to the left behind the anchored end of the rope (Shown in the first picture)
2 - Wrap the tail around the anchored end back to the right and down through the adjacent loop (Shown in the second picture)
3 - You simply need to bring the tail back over the top of the knot to the left (Shown in the third picture)
4 - Bring the tail end up through the far loop following the anchored end (Shown in the fourth picture)
5 - Finally pull the knot tight (Shown in the fifth picture)
As you can see the first four pictures are simply tracing the knot back through with the tail end
For the last part while you pull the knot tight you may want to make small adjustments and rearrange how it all fits together If the knot does not lay perfectly smoothand tight its NOT a big deal
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 5 Finishing The Knot After completing the Figure 8 knot you will want to somehow secure the tail end of the rope out of the way There are a couple different ways to do this the way that Iwill demonstrate is using whats called a Stopper Knot This secondary knot is similar to a Fishermans knot and is pretty simple I have once again divided thisprocess into several smaller steps
1 - Start by wrapping the tail end around the anchored end (As shown in the first picture)
2 - Wrap the tail back underneath the two vertical segments (As shown in the second picture)
3 - Simply repeat the first two steps wrapping the tail around again (As shown in the third picture)
4 - This step in the fourth picture may look complicated but all you need to do is insert the tail up through the two loops that you have just made
5 - To finish off the knot you will want to slowly pull the tail end while gently pushing the bottom of the stopper knot upwards If you have successfully completed this knotit should look something like the fifth picture
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 6 Ready To Climb Now that you have mastered the Figure 8 knot you can securely harness yourself into a climbing rope Remember there are many other skills that go into setting up ananchor and belaying a climber This tutorial only covers the figure 8 knot For more information there are many great websites that demonstrate how to correctly set up asafe climbing system (Ive posted a few below) If you are a beginning climber I recommend that you read up on a few other climbing techniques Also you shouldprobably go to a climbing wall or gym where there are experienced climbers that can show you the ropes Hopefully this tutorial has been helpful Have fun and be safe
Some useful linkshttpwwwstephenprattnetAnchorsanchorshtmhttpwwwuoregonedu~oppclimbingtopicsanchorshtmlhttpwwwabc-of-rockclimbingcomhowtoclimbingtechniquesasp
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Related Instructables
How to Tie aFigure EightKnot byTactical_Pyro
Paracord KnotDisplay Bord byJamie bagn
Basic KnotsGuide byzorro3355
How to Climb aTree (withprussiks) bystasterisk
How to climb atree (using onlyrope) thefunsimple wayby louieaw
How to get arope into a tree(withoutclimbing it) byvitex
How to tievarious knots byadaviel
How to make arope swing byjdub0928
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Turks Head Knots on a Bottleby sklnxbones on July 6 2010
Intro Turks Head Knots on a BottleThis is the finished project A bottle decorated with three Turks Head Knots There are only three knots on this bottle The RED and the BLUE knots are each a 20 Bightby 3 Lead Turks Head Knots The WHITE knot is a 20 Bight by 19 Lead Turks Head Knot
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 1 Supplies
Cord Lots and Lots of cord I cant tell you how much each bottle is differentBottle Washed and Dried inside and out Make sure to remove all water spotsThreaded Needle Cord screws into the threads at the base of the needlePegs I use brass rivets used as a map to tie the Turks Head KnotsHole Punch Used to punch holes in the painters tape to hold the pegsPainters Tape To hold the pegs in place and to make your map for the Turks Head KnotsMarker To write on the painters tapeCloth Towel To remove finger prints and dirt from your bottleKrazy Glue or Super Glue This is used to secure the knots in place to the bottle
OPTIONAL BUT HIGHLY RECOMMENDEDI use the Turks Head Cookbook from KnotToolcom
Step 2 PreparationYou will need to find a bottle you like I used an empty instant tea bottle of course washed and dried (I like to put the bottle in the oven for a few minutes to dry the insidewithout water spots Take off the lid and do not put lid in the oven) Now measure the circumference of the bottle Take a cord and tightly wrap the cord around the bottleMark where the ends meet and use a ruler to measure the length of the cord For my instant tea bottle the circumference is 27cm I know from past knots that I have tiedthat I want my knot to have 20 Bights in the top and bottom (bands) knots I am going to use the Bights in the (bands) knots to tie the middle knot Now divide the numberof Bights (20) into the size of the circumference (27) to get the space between each Bight (135) With me so far
Now take two pieces of painters tape using a ruler measure out the length of the circumference and mark the length on the both pieces of tape Next you will mark thespace between each Bight on the tape
Step 3 Adding the PegsI like to use pegs when tying Turks Head Knots it just makes tying the knot easier
These are what I use for pegs
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 4 Adding Pegs to the TapeNow take a hole punch to cut holes in the tape where the lines meet You will place the pegs in the holes
Insert a peg in each hole and carefully stick the first piece of tape to the bottle
Step 5 Adding the 2nd row of pegsNow do the same thing with the second piece of tape The numbers on each piece of tape must line up
This picture shows you what you should have now This odd looking thing will be your map to tie the Turks Head Knot And this is the end of Step 1
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 6 Tying the first Turks Head KnotUsing the Turks Head Cookbook follow the numbers going over and under as indicated in the book I chose a 20 Bight by 3 Lead knot which will give me a nice bandaround the bottle Once the ends meet you have made one complete knot Tape the running end of your cord and start removing the pegs and the tape
Step 7 Remove the pegs and the tapeBe careful not to untie the knot as you remove the pegs and tape from the bottle Continue to remove all the pegs and remove the tape from the bottle At this point theknot will be very loose and will need to be tightened up
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 8 Remove the slack from the knotHere you can see just how much the knot expanded Starting with the standing end begin to pull the slack out of the knot going towards the running end of the cordDo not expect to pull all the slack out at once You may have to make 3 - 5 attempts at removing the slack out of the knot DO NOT remove all of the slack out of the knotIn order to make the bands we will have to triple the Turks Head Knot We will do this by following the knot three times The threaded needle will really come in handyhere
Step 9 Triple the KnotOnce you have made three passes of the Turks Head Knot use your needle to go under your knot about half the circumference and cut the cord The knot will be tightenough to hide the tail in placeTIP I carefully add a couple of drops of super glue UNDER the band to hold them in place and keep them from sliding around in the nextsteps A drop or two in 3 or 4 places around the band should be enough
Step 10 Add the second knotNow repeat this whole step for the second bandWhen tying the second band you must make sure the Bights line up to the first band This is crucial for the next stepWipe down the bottle to make sure all your finger prints and adhesive from the tape are all removed You want to make sure your bottle is clean at this point Any dirt orfinger prints left on the bottle will be almost impossible to remove From this point on we will use gloves when tying our last knot
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 11 Maping the Top KnotStick a piece of painters tape on top of your first band leaving the bottom of the knot exposedUse a marker to count the number of Bights in your knot Instead of using the pegs we are going to use the Bights to tie our next Turks Head Knot
Step 12 Mapping the Bottom KnotDo the same thing for the bottom band but you must make sure your numbers on top and bottom line up So 1 on top should be the same position as 1 on the bottom
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 13 Adding the last knotAgain using the Turks Head Cookbook and the threaded needle you are going to follow the instructions going over and under as indicated in the book Be sure to usegloves when ever you handle the bottle
Step 14 Thats ItFor this Turks Head Knot I am using a 20 Bight by 19 Lead knot
Because of the amount of cord you are working with your cord will get twisted and knotted You will have to un-twist the cord often Its a pain in the rear but it has to bedone And it has to be done alot
Continue to tie the knot until you finish the knot If you have the cord and the patience you can double or triple the knot When you are done use your needle to hide theends under your bands Cut the ends and your DONE
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Related Instructables
Monkeys FistFloatingKeychain byjokerlz
How To Make ATurks headKnot WithParacord byDoggie Stylish
Tying Trivetsout of Rope forHoliday Gifts bykylemarsh
Paracord KnotDisplay Bord byJamie bagn
How to Make ATurks Head(Photos) bymchs60chip
A pocket full ofknots byKiteman
Monkeys fistknot AND themonkey byjonathan111
TiteTie is theTruckers Knoton Steroids bytitetie
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Larks head noose -- an easy useful knot that tightens and loosensby Larry Breed on February 19 2009
Intro Larks head noose -- an easy useful knot that tightens and loosensI thought I knew all the basic knots but then I was taught this incredibly useful simple knot Its good for tying up the neck of a bag that you want to repeatedly open andsecurely close Its good for tying around a springy bundle that will need tightening and retightening And its easy to undo
Ive looked at knot literature but havent found a name for this so I named it The basic knot is well known its called a larks head Since all Ive done is to slip the twoends through the larks head to make a noose I call it that
WARNING Dont use this knot when human safety would depend on it Climbers and mountaineers have well-tested reliable knots for such situations
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Image Notes1 To tighten further step on this side of the larks head and pull the free ends
Step 1 Double the cord overThe larks head noose requires enough cord to go twice around your bundle plus a foot or two Find the center and double it over Sailors call this a bight
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 2 Form the larks headComing from below the bight hook your thumb and forefinger over the two sides Reach outward and downward and pinch your fingertips together underneath thedoubled cord
Youve made a larks head Move the crossing cord a little farther from your hand so theres a clear opening through the two half-loops
Step 3 Form the nooseSlip the two ends of the cord through the opening we were just talking about Pull the larks head tight so it grips the two cords Find something that needs constrictingand put the noose around it
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 4 Tightening retightening and lockingSlide the knot against the bundle If its not tight enough to keep from slipping tighten it by holding it in one hand and tugging on the cords one at a time with the otherhand Notice that you can slide the knot out again for instance to re-open the bag you just tied shut For some applications this may be as tight as you need it
A springy bundle probably still feels loose If so compress the bundle and get a new grip on the cords Rest your foot on the bundle on the cords nearest the larks headand pull to slide the larks head tighter
To make the knot more permanent you can lock it Make an overhand in the cord ends (Exactly like the first step in tying shoelaces) With your foot still on the bundlepull on the cords and move your hands apart until youre pulling in opposite directions You have just locked the larks head and you can trust it to stay that way()
But lets say that later on you want to loosen the locked knot Again put your foot on the bundle and cords nearest the larks head hold the two cord ends together andpull This makes a little slack between the overhand and the larks head so you can untie the overhand
In twine or small string the locking overhand knot may be difficult to undo Use a shoelace knot instead of an overhand and itll unlock easily
() If youre using slippery cord like polypropylene an overhand may not lock securely You may want to tie another overhand knot For added security wrap a shortlength of duct tape around the two cords close to the knot
Image Notes1 To tighten further step on this side of the larks head and pull the free ends
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Related Instructables
TRX fromParacordChallengeAccepted bythrake
A pocket full ofknots byKiteman
Lens CapLanyard by~teknoarsonist~ how to tie a
noose byawesume
AdjustableParacordGlassesLanyard byjdtwelve12
HangmansNoose PackClosure byPopEye42
Paraleash - ADog LeashFrom Paracordby The Ideanator
How to make arugged andhandy ParacordBelt by Jake22
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 4 Bowline on the BightA bowline on the bight is a bowline tied in a loop of rope (neither end is needed) The shape is the same as a bowline made with a double line but the middle of thebight forms the loop around the standing part
UsesAn impromptu bosuns chair - to sit in while being transferred between two boats at sea
Step 5 Clove HitchThe clove hitch can be made when you only have the bight (the middle) of a rope not the ends
UsesSecuring a burgee pole to a burgee halyard (a continuous loop of thin line)Securing a tiller from swinging
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 6 Round Turn and Two Half-HitchesThis is a knot used to secure a line to a ring or bar Wind a couple of turns around the bar then secure the end with two hitches around the standing part (this looks like aclove hitch when done)
AdvantagesCan be made under load - it is easy to take turns around the bar while maintaining tension on the ropeStrong - provided the bar is thicker than the rope the rope is not weakened by sharp bendsDisadvantagesThe end tends to work loose
UsesSecuring a line to a mooring ring or samson post
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 7 Fishermans BendThe fishermans bend is the same as the round turn and two half hitches except that the first hitch is looped under the round turn This uses the tension on the rope tosecure the end from working loose
AdvantagesSecure against working loose
DisadvantagesHard to make under tensionHard to undo under tensionMay seize up under load when wet making it hard to undo
UsesSecuring mooring line to ringSecuring fender lines to rail
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 8 Studsail BendThe studsail bend is like the fishermans bend but the second hitch is also secured under the round turn making it even more secure against working loose when undertension
AdvantagesVery secure against working looseDisadvantagesHard to make under tensionHard to undo under tension
Step 9 Figure-8 KnotThe figure-eight knot is used to prevent an end of rope from passing through a block (pulley) Sometimes called a stopper knot
The double figure-8 knot is used in rock climbing as an alternative to a bowline to secure a climbing harness to the end of a safety rope The double knot is made bymaking a single knot then tracing back around the knot with the free end after passing it around the harness loop
AdvantagesEasy to verify by inspectionNot prone to work loose
DisadvantagesSlow to make and undoCannot be made under load
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 10 Prussic KnotThe prussic knot may be used as a climbing ascender - when made around a vertical rope as shown downwards tension on the ends locks the knot while release oftension allows it to be slid up the rope A pair of prussic knots on foot loops may be used in tandem to climb a rope
UsesClimbing a ropeTaking up tension to free a riding turn on a winch
Step 11 Reef KnotThe reef knot or square knot is used to tie a bundle of material together It must be made around something - it should not be used to tie two free ropes togetherbecause it can easily capsizeIt should not be used to make a loop unless it can be tensioned around a solid object It should not be used around a person - use a bowline instead A capsized reefknot will slip easily and could constrict and cause severe injury
UsesReefing a sail (tying the unused portion around a spar)Securing a furled sail to a spar (sail ties)Wrapping a parcelTying shoelaces
AdvantagesMay be made under moderate load
DisadvantagesCapsizes (works free) if used improperlyCan seize up under load when wet
Tying the knot
Capsizing a reef knot
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 12 CleatsThis is not a knot but is very common on boatsThe first picture shows a rope cleated normally The second shows one with a final locking turn - the last turn is twisted before placing over the cleat so that the tensionon the rope helps secure the free end
When working with ropes under tension take a turn or two around a winch or cleat before trying to secure the end with a knot The load on the free end falls exponentiallywith each turn taken Severe injury can result if a finger or other body part is caught in a loop of rope or between a rope and another object
Step 13 Practice themIt is sometimes useful to be able to tie knots in the dark or as in this video behind your back
Related Instructables
AThird Hand forSailing or OtherThings by WadeTarzia
Paracord KnotDisplay Bord byJamie bagn
Trip LogOutriggerCanoe Sailingthe CaliforniaChannel Islandsby TimAnderson
How to Tie aFigure EightKnot byTactical_Pyro
How to build apirate ship bymdelaney3
Build a ShortDragon (16 foot3-BoardOutriggerSailing Canoe)by Wade Tarzia
repairing aheadsail by josh
How to get arope into a tree(withoutclimbing it) byvitex
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
How to Tie the Lanyard Knotby eddy14777 on January 31 2010
Intro How to Tie the Lanyard KnotMany people including myself have had trouble following the Stormdrane youtube video on tying the lanyard knot so i have done some research and found the solution
Image Notes1 Finished knot
Step 1 MaterialsAll you need is a reasonable length of para cord or whatever you wish to use
Image Notes1 One reasonable amount
Step 2 First StepThe first thing you are going to do is to make a bight that leaves you with to congruent endsThen you are going to put your ring finger through the bight
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Image Notes1 Close enough2 Bight
Step 3 Starting the KnotMake a loop just like the one in the picture and place it over the top strandBring the top strand under the bottom strand
Image Notes1 Notice the way the loop is done2 Top strand
Image Notes1 Bottom strand2 Top strand is under
Step 4 The Most Important PartNow you take the top stand from the previous picture and feed it over the first part of the loop under itself and back over the remainder of the loop
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Image Notes1 Under me2 Top strand3 This should make a diamond type shape
Step 5 DoublingNow take the bottom stand and take it around the part of the top strand nearest to the bight and than come up through the diamond shape in the middleDo the same for the top strand
Image Notes1 Top strand
Image Notes1 Both through the diamond
Step 6 FinishingWhen you take it off your finger it should look like thisWork out the slack by pulling on the bight and the two strands
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Image Notes1 Finished knot
Related Instructables
Cross KnotParacordLanyard byStormdrane
Celtic ButtonKnot (video) byStormdrane
Paracord wristlanyard madewith the snakeknot byStormdrane
Paracord ChainSinnet FastDeploy BoonieHatband (video)by Stormdrane
Zigzag SpoolingParacord (video)by Stormdrane
ParacordBoonie HatWrap (video) byStormdrane
Paracord IDbadge Lanyardby Flahusky
Cobra WeaveKey Fob bytevers94
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Four knots to make paracord into a useful toolby erik_mccray on March 27 2010
Authorerik_mccrayI am an ex-fabricator that is now a stay at home dad I love my new job but I do miss making stuff I love this site amp I am getting involved as a way to keep myskills upOn top of fad work I have also run two small business in the past One was custom sewing amp the other was as a small engine mechanicI have two votec degrees one in metal fabrication amp the other is in engine repairI look forward to getting to know everyone here
Intro Four knots to make paracord into a useful toolParacord is an awesome multitool used everywhere from the wild blue yonder to the deepest caverns But like any good tool it is only as good as the knowledge the userhas about the tool With most people out there using bungee cords amp ratchet straps it seems that paracord is being used for nothing more than friendship bracelets forgrown men This is a shame because for less then the price of a few cheap bungee cords amp some to short to be helpful straps You can get yourself hundreds of feet ofparacord
The key to getting the most out of the paracord is good knot work The first thing you need to know is what makes a good knot One is that the knot is easy amp quick to tieamp more impotant is that the knot is easy amp quick to untie The hitch class of knots is by far the best group of knots that the average person could know The four mostuseful hitch knots are the half hitch a quick simple knot that forms the base for many other knots the inline half hitch allowing you to get the most out of one length ofparacord the slippery hitch that gives you both on the fly control over tension on your paracord but also an adjustable loop that will not change unless you want it amp theinline truckers hitch instantly doubling the your pulling power
Step 1 To get started lets get some terminology that will be used defined
line= the paracord
Main line= the part of the paracord doing the work for example holding down your tarp or the long part of the paracord
Mid line= the middle of the length of the paracord
End line= the unused length of paracord or the short length of paracord
Step 2 The half hitch The half hitch is a simple way to secure a line to an anchor point like the tie down points in most trucks A half hitch is a constrictor knot meaning that the harder you pullon the line the tighter the knots grip gets Another common constrictor knot is the slip knot
Step 1 wrap your line around your anchor point Step 2 wrap the end line around the main line
Step 3 pass the end line threw the end line side of the newly formed loop
step 4 now take the slack out of the knot
step 5 to make sure the knot is secure tie another half hitch to the main line This knot is called adouble half hitch
step 6 another useful thing that can be done with the half hitch is that instead of repeating the wrap on the main line but repeating it on what you are tying to the half hitchcan be used to bind something like a stack of 2x4s
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Image Notes1 End line2 Main line3 step 1
Image Notes1 Step 2
Image Notes1 passing thew the end line side of the loop2 step 3
Image Notes1 step 5
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Image Notes1 step 6
Step 3 The mid line half hitch The mid line half hitch is for when the length of line is to long for the job at hand amp you dont want to have to cut the line to size or you are using multiple anchor pointswith one length of line
Step 1 double up the line at the point in the length you wish to make the knot
Step 2 wrap the doubled up portion of line around your anchor point The doubled up length is now now the end line
Step 3 now tie just as you did for the regular half hitch repeat the knot to make a double half hitch for security
Image Notes1 A mid line double half hitch
Image Notes1 step 1
Image Notes1 The end line2 step 2
Image Notes1 Step 3
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 4 The slippery hitch The slippery hitch is a great knot for adjusting tension on the main line or for having an adjustable fixed loop To adjust the knot simply slide the knot up or down the mainline
Step 1 wrap your line around the anchor point or just double over the line to form a loop
Step 2 wrap the end line around the main line three times Wrapping in the direction of the anchor point or loop
Step 3 put together the two lines making up the loop amp wrap the two lines one time with the end line
Step 4 pass the end line thew the last loop formed covering the two lined of the loop
Step 5 pull the knot tite
step 6 to adjust the size of the loop or main line tension grab the knot amp slide it up or down the main line
Image Notes1 grab just the knot its self to adjust it2 step 5
Image Notes1 step 1
Image Notes1 step 2
Image Notes1 step 3
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Image Notes1 step 4
Image Notes1 grab just the knot its self to adjust it2 step 5
Image Notes1 same knot as in last pic Just slid up2 step 6
Step 5 The mid line truchers hitch The truckers hitch is a great way to double the pulling force on a line There are many ways to tie this knot the problem with most of them is that at some point you aregoing to have to pass the end line through a loop on the main line that is acting like a pulley to double your pulling force this is great if you are making the knot close tothe end of your line but if you are using a 300 length of line amp want to make the knot in the first ten feet having to pass 290 of line thew a loop is a pain But with a fewhalf hitches you will not have to pass the end line threw any loop on the main line
step 1 wrap your line around the anchor point then double over your end line laying the top of the loop over the main line
Step 2 double up your main line amp lay the loop over the loop made by the end line
step 3 in main line above the knot twist in a loop
step 4 put main line loop thew the loop made in step 3 amp pull this loop tight over your main line loop forming a half hitch Repeat step 3 amp 4 to make a doublehalf hitch
step 5 To use the knot just pull down on the end line to put tension on the main line
step 6 after you have the main line snug tie a mid line double half hitch around the two lines forming the loop at the end of the main line with the end line
step 7 Tie a double half hitch with the end line around the end loop of the mid line half hitch of step 6 using the same method as used in steps 3 amp 4
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Image Notes1 the end of step 6
Image Notes1 main line2 end line3 step 1
Image Notes1 main line loop2 end line loop
Image Notes1 step 3
Image Notes1 step 4
Image Notes1 step 4 at the end with a double half hitch on the main loop
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Image Notes1 pull here2 step 5
Image Notes1 the start of step 6
Image Notes1 the end of step 6
Image Notes1 step 72 now the rest of the line is free to do more work
Related Instructables
Paracord KnotDisplay Bord byJamie bagn
ChokelessAdjustableParacord DogLeash byPizzaman101
ParacordLadder wWooden Rungsby josestude
tie a paracordshackle grip byitri45
ParacordPrussik Belt byJavaNut13
TiteTie is theTruckers Knoton Steroids bytitetie
ID Lanyard(Photos) byeschmunk
Dog Toys forHeavy Chewersby J3443RY
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Figure 8 knot and double 8 knotby jonathan111 on November 28 2007
Intro Figure 8 knot and double 8 knotI will show you how to tie a figure 8 knot and a figure 8 follow through
Step 1 Stating the knotThis is a simple knot so just follow the pictures
Step 2 Finishing the knotCross the string under and then push it through the hole Pull tightly unless you are going to do the follow through and leave it somewhat loose
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 3 The follow through knotThe follow through knot should be tied around something brought back and followed through the path of the 8 knot Look at the pictures Basically follow through the 8knot backwards
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Related Instructables
Climb Safe WithA Figure 8Knot by mattste A pocket full of
knots byKiteman
How to Tie aFigure EightKnot byTactical_Pyro
Paracord KnotDisplay Bord byJamie bagn
Cross KnotParacordLanyard byStormdrane
How to Tie aFire-escapeKnot by leonardoismael
Truckers HitchTHE mostawesome knoton the planetby schneidp20
Paracord ZipperPuller byrepeet13
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Truckers Hitch THE most awesome knot on the planetby schneidp20 on October 12 2008
Authorschneidp20I like building stuff Trouble is there just isnt enough time to build everything Sigh
Intro Truckers Hitch THE most awesome knot on the planetYes I know that there are plenty of other cool knots out there many of which I literally couldnt live wo I rock climb However this knot is unlike any other Plus Ineeded a grabber for my Instructable -) (BTW this ISNT a climbing knot) And in truth it isnt a knot by itself but rather a system of common knots
Have you ever tried to tie something down for transporting but just couldnt get the lines tight andor during transport the lines would continually loosen Then this is theknot for you I learned this knot back in the 70s when specialty car racks and ratchet straps were rare or unheard of I initially used it to tie a canoe on a car rack bothattaching to the rack as well as the lines to the bow and stern of the canoe Even with all the new gizmos available today this knot still shines because all you need is arope and ropes dont hum in the wind like straps
The unique aspect of this knot is that it gives you a 2-1 mechanical advantage when tightening the rope Be careful though You can actually damage some thingsbecause of the mechanical advantage This knot holds fast and is easy to untie hallmark traits of any good knot
Below you see the finished knot system well break it apart in the steps that follow
Image Notes1 1st anchor point a bowline2 loop3 securing knots 2 half hitches4 securing loose end with a fishermans knot5 2nd anchor point (should be round)
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Image Notes1 X marks the spot
Step 1 Initial setupThe first step is to anchor one end of the rope and then loop the rope around a 2nd anchor point
For attaching to the 1st anchor point I chose bowline a close 2 on my list -) There are other instructables on that one so I wont bore you here
The 2nd anchor really should be round because it serves as a pulley in this block and tackle type knot Ive used it on sharp anchor points and it doesnt work as well
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 2 Creating a slip knotTie a slip knot somewhere between the two anchor points Correct placement of the slip knot takes some experience to judge it correctly Typically I place it too close tothe 2nd anchor point and end up with not enough room to work with If the knot ends up too far from 2nd anchor point you can extend the knot by enlarging the loop
Be sure you tie the slip knot as shown You may not be able to untie other knots
In this small example the slip knot is uncharacteristically close to the 1st anchor point
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 3 Tightening and securingThe loose end of the rope that went around the 2nd anchor point goes through the slip knot loop Pull the loose end to the desired tension and secure with two halfhitches
Note To allow better view of the knots the rope isnt really tightened in this example
Step 4 Securing loose endThe final knot is just to secure the loose end somehow I chose a fishermans knot to do this
To tie a fishermans knot the rope goes around twice and goes under the X created by the loops Pull the loose end to tighten Finally slide the knot to put tension onthe half hitches
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Image Notes1 X marks the spot
Step 5 FinishedThere you have it I guarantee that the first time you really use this knot (not just practice) you will be amazed at how well it works and youll wish you knew this knot along time ago You may even come over to my side and declare that is is THE most awesome knot on the planet -)
Enjoy and happy haulingDave
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Related Instructables
TiteTie is theTruckers Knoton Steroids bytitetie
Four knots tomake paracordinto a usefultool byerik_mccray
Modify yourbike rack tocarry a sunfishor other boat byewilhelm
SurfboardHammock byGermy
GiganticHalloweenSpider Web bynolte919
How To Tie ASpiders Hitch(video) by back-cast
Three-hitch mathair ornamentby michiexile TRX from
ParacordChallengeAccepted bythrake
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Carry any Bottle with a JUG KNOT Handleby hpstoutharrow on September 17 2009
Intro Carry any Bottle with a JUG KNOT HandleTie a JUG KNOT around a water bottle soda bottle or aluminum bottle to make a secure carrying strap
Re-purpose any container into a reusable water bottle by adding a convenient carrying strap This Instructable will demonstrate how to tie a JUG knot which like its namesuggests is meant to properly secure around the neck of a container
With some cord and the knowledge of this knot you will be able add a handle lanyard or carabiner loop to any of your favorite beverages to carry them on the go
It works perfectly for those disposable water bottles and who knows once you add some colorful cord to the plain old clear water bottle you just might beinclined to refill it and use it again(Check out pictures 4amp5 below)
In addition to plastic beverage bottles like pop water and sports drinks you can turn those rugged aluminum beer bottles into a backpacking canteen
Those of you familiar with my previous aluminum bottle InstructablesROLLED RIM METAL TUMBLERhttpwwwinstructablescomidAluminum-Bottle-Tumbler-Cup-Cook-PotALUMINUM BOTTLE LIGHTWEIGHT ALCOHOL STOVEhttpwwwinstructablescomidAluminum-Bottle-Alcohol-Stovewill recognize the water canteen shown below as a re-purposed aluminum beer bottle Here I have added a painted surface treatment to turn it into a proper lookingwater bottle More on that in steps 13 14 15
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 1 Getting StartedCord size is important Select a small medium weight cord like the one shown here It is a general purpose camp cord sold at most sporting goods stores (shoelacesmight also work)
Do not use a heavy cord or rope because the larger diameter will not tuck under the relatively small lip at the top of the bottleneck and the bottle will fall out
Also the smaller cord cinches tight on itself and will not loosen accidentally
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 2 Form a BightThe next steps show how to tie a JUG KNOT It is the basic step for adding a carrying strap It is also the anchor point for any additional fancy bottle trussing you maywant to add
JUG KNOT Step 1
Form a Bight in the center of a length of cord Bight is a knot term for a loop or bend in the rope In this case the main Bight in this knot is highlighted with a white mark Imakes it easier to follow its path in these steps
The running ends of the cord should be equal length
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 3 Pull the Bight downPULL the Bight DOWN forming two Loops
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 4 Cross the LoopsCROSS the right Loop OVER the left Loop
Step 5 Pass the Bight under the 1st loopTake the main Bight and pass it UNDER the left Loop
Step 6 Weave the BightWEAVE the Bight OVER the portion of the right Loop and UNDER the portion of the left Loop
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 7 Extend the BightExtend the Bight OVER the outer portion of the right Loop
Step 8 Flip the Right Loop behindAdditional colored identification points have been added to the loops to follow their travel in these next two steps
The right Loop Yellow marker is FLIPPED BEHIND the knot and ends up on the far left side of the knot
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 9 Flip the 2nd loop in frontRaise the green marker (located on what was formerly the left loop) and pull it down and to the right FLIPPING IT IN FRONT of the knot
Note the blue portion of the this loop will pass around the outside of the yellow portion of the first loop
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Image Notes1 Center of knot that will tighten around the bottles neck
Step 10 Remove SlackNote where the blue green amp yellow markers end up
Start to remove the slack in the loops by pulling the original main Bight (white marker top right) and the two free standing ends at the bottom
the bottle neck will pass through the very center of the knot
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Image Notes1 Center of knot that will tighten around the bottles neck
Step 11 Tighten the KnotAfter removing the slack insert the bottle neck and finish tightening
The knot should look like this before slipping it over the bottle
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 12 Secure on bottle neckThis is the finished knot shown on the neck of various containers
The loop end and the two free standing ends can be tied together to create a carrying handle (last picture below)
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 13 Aluminum Bottle Water Bottle
The next few steps show the features of an aluminum beer bottle re-purposed as a water bottle canteen It is one of many containers that can be reused as a camp waterbottle
The bottle was lightly sanded masked and then pained with a hammered finished paint to create an interesting surface texture
Image Notes1 Textured finish paint makes an interesting grip-able surface2 Masked with tape for painting3 Masked with tape for painting
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Image Notes1 Dowel used for holding the bottle during painting
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 14 Tethered Cork StopperUse a wine bottle man made Cork as a stopper for your aluminum water bottleNote Use a cork that was removed from the wine bottle without the corkscrew penetrating through the bottom end of the cork (A hole all the way through the cork willcause it to leak) Use the unpierced end of the cork inside the water bottle
Drill a hole through the sides of the Cork Thread the cord through the hole to the center of the cord Use the cork as the main Bight and tie the Jug knot as shown inthe beginning steps
Now the cork is tethered to the bottle and will not get lost or fall on the ground
A Carabiner clip passes through the other cord end to attache the water bottle to you belt or pack
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 15 Trussed for TransportThis is another hanging method for carrying your aluminum bottle water canteen A Jug knot is tied conventionally around the neck
The running ends of the knot however are pulled down towards the bottom of the bottle A Barrel Knot is tied about 34 the way down the side of the bottle A squareknot is tied on the bottom of the knot to keep the two running ends tight against the sides of the bottle
I like the look of the accent colored cord running down the sides of the bottle and the fact that the bottle hangs from the belt upside down It adds to its uniqueness
The last picture shows another truss variation
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 16 AdvancedBelow is a bottle with some additional trussing You can be creative as you want It all starts with a re-purposed container and the Jug Knot (and enough cord)
Related Instructables
AluminumBottle TumblerCup amp Cook Potfor an AlcoholStove byhpstoutharrow
Water BottleBelt Clip byuglymike Duct Tape
Water Bottle byrabidsquire2
AluminumBottle AlcoholStove byhpstoutharrow
DIYGlass WaterBottle byCulturespy
Solar WaterHeater forBackpackingUsing WaterBottles and aCar Shade bykopomeroy
Duct tape waterbottle holder(Photos) by pinkmarshmallow
How to make aCamelPack withan old plasticbottle bywillrandship
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Basic Knots Guideby zorro3355 on April 29 2008
Intro Basic Knots Guidehi
Step 1 Thumb knotThe most simple knotUsed as a stopper and prevent ropes from fraying
Step 2 Reef KnotUsed to tie two ropes of equal thickness togetherIt is pretty easy to tie and untie but under tentionit may be diffcult to untieIt is also not sutible for smoothropes(egnylon ropes)
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 3 Figure of eightused as a stopperprevent ropes from fraying and its more secure than tumb knot its is also used to tie Caribinas to ropes and is often used in rock climbing
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 4 Timber hitchused for pulling logs
Step 5 Clove hitchUsed to tie a rope onto a pole or logThe pole must be roundThe pole lust be thicker then the rope itself
(greatly used during pioneering)
Step 6 Sheet bandused to tie ropes of different thickness together(works on same thickness of ropes too)
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 7 Sheep shankTo shorten RopesTo prevent middle fraying
Step 8 Slip knotWhippingUsed as a grip for pulling things(when tied on a stick or small pole)(marlin spike hitch)
Related Instructables
Rope Rings byhpstoutharrow
How to Tie aFigure EightKnot byTactical_Pyro
Whippin (WestCountry Style)by tim_n
SurvivalBracelet(Updated) bytevers94
HangmansNoose PackClosure byPopEye42
Turkey on aTripod byhpstoutharrow
SurvivalBracelet II bytevers94 Zigzag Spooling
Paracord (video)by Stormdrane
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
How to Tie a Fire-escape Knotby leonardo ismael on October 16 2007
Intro How to Tie a Fire-escape KnotThis knot is used by firemen in case of fires for example imagine a scene where the ladder on the firetruck messes up but people need to get down a five story buildingor more All they have is a long piece of rope they can safely get down with a secure knot like the fire-escape knot So why not learn it its easy to do and hard to untieif you tie it tightly
This is from the American Boys Handbook
Step 1 Get Your RopeFirst grab a piece of rope and bend it like this to make a loop in it Follow every step to the smallest detail
Step 2 Twist the RopeNow make a twist like this and hold it together
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 3 Pull Through the TwistPull the loop through the twist you just made from underneath
Step 4 Go Over the Split EndNow pull the tail through the loop
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 5 FinallyAnd finally just pull it through as pictured below
Congratulations you just learned the fire-escape knot
Step 6 Same Name Not KnotThis is another knot called the fire-escape knot this shouldnt be your result
Related Instructables
House FireEscape Plan(video) byWhatHappensNowAdvice
ParacordLadder wWooden Rungsby josestude
Bed SheetEscape Rope byjessehensel
rope ladder(glow-in-the-dark version) bymikeasaurus
HeadlockEscape 2(video) byjohnnyrockstah
QuickFirestarter byMattandJora
Trail sauna byjakee117
How to Kill FireAnts andCommitGenocide byKentsOkay
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Climb Safe With A Figure 8 Knotby mattste on February 23 2010
Intro Climb Safe With A Figure 8 Knot There are many things that a beginning climber needs to know including several important knots Perhaps the most essential knot is the Figure 8 Follow Through Thistutorial will demonstrate how to correctly harness yourself to a rope using a Figure 8 Follow Through knot This knot is used primarily by rock climbers to provide a life-line Since this knot is used as a life-line it is very important to be able to tie it correctly (Your life could depend upon it)
Dont worry with this tutorial and about 5 minutes of practice you can have this knot mastered
Things you will need
- Climbing Harness- Climbing Rope
If you are wanting to go climbing and dont already have these items they can be purchased for about $25 each at most outdoor sporting goods stores If you are merelylooking to learn the knot a belt loop and a rope (about five feet long) will do
Image Notes1 Climbing Harness2 Climbing Rope
Step 1 Dealing With The RopeThroughout this tutorial I will be discussing different parts of the rope To make these instructions as clear as possible I will define a few terms that I will use throughoutthe tutorial The Anchor End of the rope will generally be at the top of the images This is the end that would be anchored to the wall or rock and does not move Wewill not be doing much with the anchored end The Tail End of the rope is the opposite end that we will be dealing with I will call this the tail for short
Now that we have some terms to work with lets get started
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 2 Tying The First Figure 8This knot has several parts to it The first part of the knot is just tying a basic figure 8 To tie the first figure 8 there are four simple steps
1 - Using the tail make a loop over the rope (as shown in the first picture) keeping in mind that there should be about 3 ft of slack on the tail end
2 - Wrap the tail back this time go under the anchored end (As shown in the second picture)
3 - Bring the tail down through the first loop (As shown in the third picture)
4 - Finally pull the two ends to make the knot a little bit tighter and easier to deal with (Shown in the fourth picture)
After these four steps you should end up with a knot that resembles a figure 8
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 3 Looping Into The Harness In order to secure the rope to the harness simply thread the tail end of the rope through the front loop in the harness as shown in the picture below This step isobviously very important
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 4 Following Back Through The Figure 8After looping the rope through the harness you have to thread the tail end of the rope back through the knot following the first figure 8 I have divided this process intofive smaller steps in order to make it more clear
1 - Coming form underneath the knot bring the tail up through the near loop and to the left behind the anchored end of the rope (Shown in the first picture)
2 - Wrap the tail around the anchored end back to the right and down through the adjacent loop (Shown in the second picture)
3 - You simply need to bring the tail back over the top of the knot to the left (Shown in the third picture)
4 - Bring the tail end up through the far loop following the anchored end (Shown in the fourth picture)
5 - Finally pull the knot tight (Shown in the fifth picture)
As you can see the first four pictures are simply tracing the knot back through with the tail end
For the last part while you pull the knot tight you may want to make small adjustments and rearrange how it all fits together If the knot does not lay perfectly smoothand tight its NOT a big deal
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 5 Finishing The Knot After completing the Figure 8 knot you will want to somehow secure the tail end of the rope out of the way There are a couple different ways to do this the way that Iwill demonstrate is using whats called a Stopper Knot This secondary knot is similar to a Fishermans knot and is pretty simple I have once again divided thisprocess into several smaller steps
1 - Start by wrapping the tail end around the anchored end (As shown in the first picture)
2 - Wrap the tail back underneath the two vertical segments (As shown in the second picture)
3 - Simply repeat the first two steps wrapping the tail around again (As shown in the third picture)
4 - This step in the fourth picture may look complicated but all you need to do is insert the tail up through the two loops that you have just made
5 - To finish off the knot you will want to slowly pull the tail end while gently pushing the bottom of the stopper knot upwards If you have successfully completed this knotit should look something like the fifth picture
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 6 Ready To Climb Now that you have mastered the Figure 8 knot you can securely harness yourself into a climbing rope Remember there are many other skills that go into setting up ananchor and belaying a climber This tutorial only covers the figure 8 knot For more information there are many great websites that demonstrate how to correctly set up asafe climbing system (Ive posted a few below) If you are a beginning climber I recommend that you read up on a few other climbing techniques Also you shouldprobably go to a climbing wall or gym where there are experienced climbers that can show you the ropes Hopefully this tutorial has been helpful Have fun and be safe
Some useful linkshttpwwwstephenprattnetAnchorsanchorshtmhttpwwwuoregonedu~oppclimbingtopicsanchorshtmlhttpwwwabc-of-rockclimbingcomhowtoclimbingtechniquesasp
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Related Instructables
How to Tie aFigure EightKnot byTactical_Pyro
Paracord KnotDisplay Bord byJamie bagn
Basic KnotsGuide byzorro3355
How to Climb aTree (withprussiks) bystasterisk
How to climb atree (using onlyrope) thefunsimple wayby louieaw
How to get arope into a tree(withoutclimbing it) byvitex
How to tievarious knots byadaviel
How to make arope swing byjdub0928
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Turks Head Knots on a Bottleby sklnxbones on July 6 2010
Intro Turks Head Knots on a BottleThis is the finished project A bottle decorated with three Turks Head Knots There are only three knots on this bottle The RED and the BLUE knots are each a 20 Bightby 3 Lead Turks Head Knots The WHITE knot is a 20 Bight by 19 Lead Turks Head Knot
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 1 Supplies
Cord Lots and Lots of cord I cant tell you how much each bottle is differentBottle Washed and Dried inside and out Make sure to remove all water spotsThreaded Needle Cord screws into the threads at the base of the needlePegs I use brass rivets used as a map to tie the Turks Head KnotsHole Punch Used to punch holes in the painters tape to hold the pegsPainters Tape To hold the pegs in place and to make your map for the Turks Head KnotsMarker To write on the painters tapeCloth Towel To remove finger prints and dirt from your bottleKrazy Glue or Super Glue This is used to secure the knots in place to the bottle
OPTIONAL BUT HIGHLY RECOMMENDEDI use the Turks Head Cookbook from KnotToolcom
Step 2 PreparationYou will need to find a bottle you like I used an empty instant tea bottle of course washed and dried (I like to put the bottle in the oven for a few minutes to dry the insidewithout water spots Take off the lid and do not put lid in the oven) Now measure the circumference of the bottle Take a cord and tightly wrap the cord around the bottleMark where the ends meet and use a ruler to measure the length of the cord For my instant tea bottle the circumference is 27cm I know from past knots that I have tiedthat I want my knot to have 20 Bights in the top and bottom (bands) knots I am going to use the Bights in the (bands) knots to tie the middle knot Now divide the numberof Bights (20) into the size of the circumference (27) to get the space between each Bight (135) With me so far
Now take two pieces of painters tape using a ruler measure out the length of the circumference and mark the length on the both pieces of tape Next you will mark thespace between each Bight on the tape
Step 3 Adding the PegsI like to use pegs when tying Turks Head Knots it just makes tying the knot easier
These are what I use for pegs
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 4 Adding Pegs to the TapeNow take a hole punch to cut holes in the tape where the lines meet You will place the pegs in the holes
Insert a peg in each hole and carefully stick the first piece of tape to the bottle
Step 5 Adding the 2nd row of pegsNow do the same thing with the second piece of tape The numbers on each piece of tape must line up
This picture shows you what you should have now This odd looking thing will be your map to tie the Turks Head Knot And this is the end of Step 1
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 6 Tying the first Turks Head KnotUsing the Turks Head Cookbook follow the numbers going over and under as indicated in the book I chose a 20 Bight by 3 Lead knot which will give me a nice bandaround the bottle Once the ends meet you have made one complete knot Tape the running end of your cord and start removing the pegs and the tape
Step 7 Remove the pegs and the tapeBe careful not to untie the knot as you remove the pegs and tape from the bottle Continue to remove all the pegs and remove the tape from the bottle At this point theknot will be very loose and will need to be tightened up
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 8 Remove the slack from the knotHere you can see just how much the knot expanded Starting with the standing end begin to pull the slack out of the knot going towards the running end of the cordDo not expect to pull all the slack out at once You may have to make 3 - 5 attempts at removing the slack out of the knot DO NOT remove all of the slack out of the knotIn order to make the bands we will have to triple the Turks Head Knot We will do this by following the knot three times The threaded needle will really come in handyhere
Step 9 Triple the KnotOnce you have made three passes of the Turks Head Knot use your needle to go under your knot about half the circumference and cut the cord The knot will be tightenough to hide the tail in placeTIP I carefully add a couple of drops of super glue UNDER the band to hold them in place and keep them from sliding around in the nextsteps A drop or two in 3 or 4 places around the band should be enough
Step 10 Add the second knotNow repeat this whole step for the second bandWhen tying the second band you must make sure the Bights line up to the first band This is crucial for the next stepWipe down the bottle to make sure all your finger prints and adhesive from the tape are all removed You want to make sure your bottle is clean at this point Any dirt orfinger prints left on the bottle will be almost impossible to remove From this point on we will use gloves when tying our last knot
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 11 Maping the Top KnotStick a piece of painters tape on top of your first band leaving the bottom of the knot exposedUse a marker to count the number of Bights in your knot Instead of using the pegs we are going to use the Bights to tie our next Turks Head Knot
Step 12 Mapping the Bottom KnotDo the same thing for the bottom band but you must make sure your numbers on top and bottom line up So 1 on top should be the same position as 1 on the bottom
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 13 Adding the last knotAgain using the Turks Head Cookbook and the threaded needle you are going to follow the instructions going over and under as indicated in the book Be sure to usegloves when ever you handle the bottle
Step 14 Thats ItFor this Turks Head Knot I am using a 20 Bight by 19 Lead knot
Because of the amount of cord you are working with your cord will get twisted and knotted You will have to un-twist the cord often Its a pain in the rear but it has to bedone And it has to be done alot
Continue to tie the knot until you finish the knot If you have the cord and the patience you can double or triple the knot When you are done use your needle to hide theends under your bands Cut the ends and your DONE
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Related Instructables
Monkeys FistFloatingKeychain byjokerlz
How To Make ATurks headKnot WithParacord byDoggie Stylish
Tying Trivetsout of Rope forHoliday Gifts bykylemarsh
Paracord KnotDisplay Bord byJamie bagn
How to Make ATurks Head(Photos) bymchs60chip
A pocket full ofknots byKiteman
Monkeys fistknot AND themonkey byjonathan111
TiteTie is theTruckers Knoton Steroids bytitetie
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Larks head noose -- an easy useful knot that tightens and loosensby Larry Breed on February 19 2009
Intro Larks head noose -- an easy useful knot that tightens and loosensI thought I knew all the basic knots but then I was taught this incredibly useful simple knot Its good for tying up the neck of a bag that you want to repeatedly open andsecurely close Its good for tying around a springy bundle that will need tightening and retightening And its easy to undo
Ive looked at knot literature but havent found a name for this so I named it The basic knot is well known its called a larks head Since all Ive done is to slip the twoends through the larks head to make a noose I call it that
WARNING Dont use this knot when human safety would depend on it Climbers and mountaineers have well-tested reliable knots for such situations
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Image Notes1 To tighten further step on this side of the larks head and pull the free ends
Step 1 Double the cord overThe larks head noose requires enough cord to go twice around your bundle plus a foot or two Find the center and double it over Sailors call this a bight
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 2 Form the larks headComing from below the bight hook your thumb and forefinger over the two sides Reach outward and downward and pinch your fingertips together underneath thedoubled cord
Youve made a larks head Move the crossing cord a little farther from your hand so theres a clear opening through the two half-loops
Step 3 Form the nooseSlip the two ends of the cord through the opening we were just talking about Pull the larks head tight so it grips the two cords Find something that needs constrictingand put the noose around it
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 4 Tightening retightening and lockingSlide the knot against the bundle If its not tight enough to keep from slipping tighten it by holding it in one hand and tugging on the cords one at a time with the otherhand Notice that you can slide the knot out again for instance to re-open the bag you just tied shut For some applications this may be as tight as you need it
A springy bundle probably still feels loose If so compress the bundle and get a new grip on the cords Rest your foot on the bundle on the cords nearest the larks headand pull to slide the larks head tighter
To make the knot more permanent you can lock it Make an overhand in the cord ends (Exactly like the first step in tying shoelaces) With your foot still on the bundlepull on the cords and move your hands apart until youre pulling in opposite directions You have just locked the larks head and you can trust it to stay that way()
But lets say that later on you want to loosen the locked knot Again put your foot on the bundle and cords nearest the larks head hold the two cord ends together andpull This makes a little slack between the overhand and the larks head so you can untie the overhand
In twine or small string the locking overhand knot may be difficult to undo Use a shoelace knot instead of an overhand and itll unlock easily
() If youre using slippery cord like polypropylene an overhand may not lock securely You may want to tie another overhand knot For added security wrap a shortlength of duct tape around the two cords close to the knot
Image Notes1 To tighten further step on this side of the larks head and pull the free ends
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Related Instructables
TRX fromParacordChallengeAccepted bythrake
A pocket full ofknots byKiteman
Lens CapLanyard by~teknoarsonist~ how to tie a
noose byawesume
AdjustableParacordGlassesLanyard byjdtwelve12
HangmansNoose PackClosure byPopEye42
Paraleash - ADog LeashFrom Paracordby The Ideanator
How to make arugged andhandy ParacordBelt by Jake22
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 6 Round Turn and Two Half-HitchesThis is a knot used to secure a line to a ring or bar Wind a couple of turns around the bar then secure the end with two hitches around the standing part (this looks like aclove hitch when done)
AdvantagesCan be made under load - it is easy to take turns around the bar while maintaining tension on the ropeStrong - provided the bar is thicker than the rope the rope is not weakened by sharp bendsDisadvantagesThe end tends to work loose
UsesSecuring a line to a mooring ring or samson post
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 7 Fishermans BendThe fishermans bend is the same as the round turn and two half hitches except that the first hitch is looped under the round turn This uses the tension on the rope tosecure the end from working loose
AdvantagesSecure against working loose
DisadvantagesHard to make under tensionHard to undo under tensionMay seize up under load when wet making it hard to undo
UsesSecuring mooring line to ringSecuring fender lines to rail
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 8 Studsail BendThe studsail bend is like the fishermans bend but the second hitch is also secured under the round turn making it even more secure against working loose when undertension
AdvantagesVery secure against working looseDisadvantagesHard to make under tensionHard to undo under tension
Step 9 Figure-8 KnotThe figure-eight knot is used to prevent an end of rope from passing through a block (pulley) Sometimes called a stopper knot
The double figure-8 knot is used in rock climbing as an alternative to a bowline to secure a climbing harness to the end of a safety rope The double knot is made bymaking a single knot then tracing back around the knot with the free end after passing it around the harness loop
AdvantagesEasy to verify by inspectionNot prone to work loose
DisadvantagesSlow to make and undoCannot be made under load
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 10 Prussic KnotThe prussic knot may be used as a climbing ascender - when made around a vertical rope as shown downwards tension on the ends locks the knot while release oftension allows it to be slid up the rope A pair of prussic knots on foot loops may be used in tandem to climb a rope
UsesClimbing a ropeTaking up tension to free a riding turn on a winch
Step 11 Reef KnotThe reef knot or square knot is used to tie a bundle of material together It must be made around something - it should not be used to tie two free ropes togetherbecause it can easily capsizeIt should not be used to make a loop unless it can be tensioned around a solid object It should not be used around a person - use a bowline instead A capsized reefknot will slip easily and could constrict and cause severe injury
UsesReefing a sail (tying the unused portion around a spar)Securing a furled sail to a spar (sail ties)Wrapping a parcelTying shoelaces
AdvantagesMay be made under moderate load
DisadvantagesCapsizes (works free) if used improperlyCan seize up under load when wet
Tying the knot
Capsizing a reef knot
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 12 CleatsThis is not a knot but is very common on boatsThe first picture shows a rope cleated normally The second shows one with a final locking turn - the last turn is twisted before placing over the cleat so that the tensionon the rope helps secure the free end
When working with ropes under tension take a turn or two around a winch or cleat before trying to secure the end with a knot The load on the free end falls exponentiallywith each turn taken Severe injury can result if a finger or other body part is caught in a loop of rope or between a rope and another object
Step 13 Practice themIt is sometimes useful to be able to tie knots in the dark or as in this video behind your back
Related Instructables
AThird Hand forSailing or OtherThings by WadeTarzia
Paracord KnotDisplay Bord byJamie bagn
Trip LogOutriggerCanoe Sailingthe CaliforniaChannel Islandsby TimAnderson
How to Tie aFigure EightKnot byTactical_Pyro
How to build apirate ship bymdelaney3
Build a ShortDragon (16 foot3-BoardOutriggerSailing Canoe)by Wade Tarzia
repairing aheadsail by josh
How to get arope into a tree(withoutclimbing it) byvitex
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
How to Tie the Lanyard Knotby eddy14777 on January 31 2010
Intro How to Tie the Lanyard KnotMany people including myself have had trouble following the Stormdrane youtube video on tying the lanyard knot so i have done some research and found the solution
Image Notes1 Finished knot
Step 1 MaterialsAll you need is a reasonable length of para cord or whatever you wish to use
Image Notes1 One reasonable amount
Step 2 First StepThe first thing you are going to do is to make a bight that leaves you with to congruent endsThen you are going to put your ring finger through the bight
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Image Notes1 Close enough2 Bight
Step 3 Starting the KnotMake a loop just like the one in the picture and place it over the top strandBring the top strand under the bottom strand
Image Notes1 Notice the way the loop is done2 Top strand
Image Notes1 Bottom strand2 Top strand is under
Step 4 The Most Important PartNow you take the top stand from the previous picture and feed it over the first part of the loop under itself and back over the remainder of the loop
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Image Notes1 Under me2 Top strand3 This should make a diamond type shape
Step 5 DoublingNow take the bottom stand and take it around the part of the top strand nearest to the bight and than come up through the diamond shape in the middleDo the same for the top strand
Image Notes1 Top strand
Image Notes1 Both through the diamond
Step 6 FinishingWhen you take it off your finger it should look like thisWork out the slack by pulling on the bight and the two strands
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Image Notes1 Finished knot
Related Instructables
Cross KnotParacordLanyard byStormdrane
Celtic ButtonKnot (video) byStormdrane
Paracord wristlanyard madewith the snakeknot byStormdrane
Paracord ChainSinnet FastDeploy BoonieHatband (video)by Stormdrane
Zigzag SpoolingParacord (video)by Stormdrane
ParacordBoonie HatWrap (video) byStormdrane
Paracord IDbadge Lanyardby Flahusky
Cobra WeaveKey Fob bytevers94
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Four knots to make paracord into a useful toolby erik_mccray on March 27 2010
Authorerik_mccrayI am an ex-fabricator that is now a stay at home dad I love my new job but I do miss making stuff I love this site amp I am getting involved as a way to keep myskills upOn top of fad work I have also run two small business in the past One was custom sewing amp the other was as a small engine mechanicI have two votec degrees one in metal fabrication amp the other is in engine repairI look forward to getting to know everyone here
Intro Four knots to make paracord into a useful toolParacord is an awesome multitool used everywhere from the wild blue yonder to the deepest caverns But like any good tool it is only as good as the knowledge the userhas about the tool With most people out there using bungee cords amp ratchet straps it seems that paracord is being used for nothing more than friendship bracelets forgrown men This is a shame because for less then the price of a few cheap bungee cords amp some to short to be helpful straps You can get yourself hundreds of feet ofparacord
The key to getting the most out of the paracord is good knot work The first thing you need to know is what makes a good knot One is that the knot is easy amp quick to tieamp more impotant is that the knot is easy amp quick to untie The hitch class of knots is by far the best group of knots that the average person could know The four mostuseful hitch knots are the half hitch a quick simple knot that forms the base for many other knots the inline half hitch allowing you to get the most out of one length ofparacord the slippery hitch that gives you both on the fly control over tension on your paracord but also an adjustable loop that will not change unless you want it amp theinline truckers hitch instantly doubling the your pulling power
Step 1 To get started lets get some terminology that will be used defined
line= the paracord
Main line= the part of the paracord doing the work for example holding down your tarp or the long part of the paracord
Mid line= the middle of the length of the paracord
End line= the unused length of paracord or the short length of paracord
Step 2 The half hitch The half hitch is a simple way to secure a line to an anchor point like the tie down points in most trucks A half hitch is a constrictor knot meaning that the harder you pullon the line the tighter the knots grip gets Another common constrictor knot is the slip knot
Step 1 wrap your line around your anchor point Step 2 wrap the end line around the main line
Step 3 pass the end line threw the end line side of the newly formed loop
step 4 now take the slack out of the knot
step 5 to make sure the knot is secure tie another half hitch to the main line This knot is called adouble half hitch
step 6 another useful thing that can be done with the half hitch is that instead of repeating the wrap on the main line but repeating it on what you are tying to the half hitchcan be used to bind something like a stack of 2x4s
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Image Notes1 End line2 Main line3 step 1
Image Notes1 Step 2
Image Notes1 passing thew the end line side of the loop2 step 3
Image Notes1 step 5
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Image Notes1 step 6
Step 3 The mid line half hitch The mid line half hitch is for when the length of line is to long for the job at hand amp you dont want to have to cut the line to size or you are using multiple anchor pointswith one length of line
Step 1 double up the line at the point in the length you wish to make the knot
Step 2 wrap the doubled up portion of line around your anchor point The doubled up length is now now the end line
Step 3 now tie just as you did for the regular half hitch repeat the knot to make a double half hitch for security
Image Notes1 A mid line double half hitch
Image Notes1 step 1
Image Notes1 The end line2 step 2
Image Notes1 Step 3
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 4 The slippery hitch The slippery hitch is a great knot for adjusting tension on the main line or for having an adjustable fixed loop To adjust the knot simply slide the knot up or down the mainline
Step 1 wrap your line around the anchor point or just double over the line to form a loop
Step 2 wrap the end line around the main line three times Wrapping in the direction of the anchor point or loop
Step 3 put together the two lines making up the loop amp wrap the two lines one time with the end line
Step 4 pass the end line thew the last loop formed covering the two lined of the loop
Step 5 pull the knot tite
step 6 to adjust the size of the loop or main line tension grab the knot amp slide it up or down the main line
Image Notes1 grab just the knot its self to adjust it2 step 5
Image Notes1 step 1
Image Notes1 step 2
Image Notes1 step 3
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Image Notes1 step 4
Image Notes1 grab just the knot its self to adjust it2 step 5
Image Notes1 same knot as in last pic Just slid up2 step 6
Step 5 The mid line truchers hitch The truckers hitch is a great way to double the pulling force on a line There are many ways to tie this knot the problem with most of them is that at some point you aregoing to have to pass the end line through a loop on the main line that is acting like a pulley to double your pulling force this is great if you are making the knot close tothe end of your line but if you are using a 300 length of line amp want to make the knot in the first ten feet having to pass 290 of line thew a loop is a pain But with a fewhalf hitches you will not have to pass the end line threw any loop on the main line
step 1 wrap your line around the anchor point then double over your end line laying the top of the loop over the main line
Step 2 double up your main line amp lay the loop over the loop made by the end line
step 3 in main line above the knot twist in a loop
step 4 put main line loop thew the loop made in step 3 amp pull this loop tight over your main line loop forming a half hitch Repeat step 3 amp 4 to make a doublehalf hitch
step 5 To use the knot just pull down on the end line to put tension on the main line
step 6 after you have the main line snug tie a mid line double half hitch around the two lines forming the loop at the end of the main line with the end line
step 7 Tie a double half hitch with the end line around the end loop of the mid line half hitch of step 6 using the same method as used in steps 3 amp 4
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Image Notes1 the end of step 6
Image Notes1 main line2 end line3 step 1
Image Notes1 main line loop2 end line loop
Image Notes1 step 3
Image Notes1 step 4
Image Notes1 step 4 at the end with a double half hitch on the main loop
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Image Notes1 pull here2 step 5
Image Notes1 the start of step 6
Image Notes1 the end of step 6
Image Notes1 step 72 now the rest of the line is free to do more work
Related Instructables
Paracord KnotDisplay Bord byJamie bagn
ChokelessAdjustableParacord DogLeash byPizzaman101
ParacordLadder wWooden Rungsby josestude
tie a paracordshackle grip byitri45
ParacordPrussik Belt byJavaNut13
TiteTie is theTruckers Knoton Steroids bytitetie
ID Lanyard(Photos) byeschmunk
Dog Toys forHeavy Chewersby J3443RY
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Figure 8 knot and double 8 knotby jonathan111 on November 28 2007
Intro Figure 8 knot and double 8 knotI will show you how to tie a figure 8 knot and a figure 8 follow through
Step 1 Stating the knotThis is a simple knot so just follow the pictures
Step 2 Finishing the knotCross the string under and then push it through the hole Pull tightly unless you are going to do the follow through and leave it somewhat loose
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 3 The follow through knotThe follow through knot should be tied around something brought back and followed through the path of the 8 knot Look at the pictures Basically follow through the 8knot backwards
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Related Instructables
Climb Safe WithA Figure 8Knot by mattste A pocket full of
knots byKiteman
How to Tie aFigure EightKnot byTactical_Pyro
Paracord KnotDisplay Bord byJamie bagn
Cross KnotParacordLanyard byStormdrane
How to Tie aFire-escapeKnot by leonardoismael
Truckers HitchTHE mostawesome knoton the planetby schneidp20
Paracord ZipperPuller byrepeet13
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Truckers Hitch THE most awesome knot on the planetby schneidp20 on October 12 2008
Authorschneidp20I like building stuff Trouble is there just isnt enough time to build everything Sigh
Intro Truckers Hitch THE most awesome knot on the planetYes I know that there are plenty of other cool knots out there many of which I literally couldnt live wo I rock climb However this knot is unlike any other Plus Ineeded a grabber for my Instructable -) (BTW this ISNT a climbing knot) And in truth it isnt a knot by itself but rather a system of common knots
Have you ever tried to tie something down for transporting but just couldnt get the lines tight andor during transport the lines would continually loosen Then this is theknot for you I learned this knot back in the 70s when specialty car racks and ratchet straps were rare or unheard of I initially used it to tie a canoe on a car rack bothattaching to the rack as well as the lines to the bow and stern of the canoe Even with all the new gizmos available today this knot still shines because all you need is arope and ropes dont hum in the wind like straps
The unique aspect of this knot is that it gives you a 2-1 mechanical advantage when tightening the rope Be careful though You can actually damage some thingsbecause of the mechanical advantage This knot holds fast and is easy to untie hallmark traits of any good knot
Below you see the finished knot system well break it apart in the steps that follow
Image Notes1 1st anchor point a bowline2 loop3 securing knots 2 half hitches4 securing loose end with a fishermans knot5 2nd anchor point (should be round)
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Image Notes1 X marks the spot
Step 1 Initial setupThe first step is to anchor one end of the rope and then loop the rope around a 2nd anchor point
For attaching to the 1st anchor point I chose bowline a close 2 on my list -) There are other instructables on that one so I wont bore you here
The 2nd anchor really should be round because it serves as a pulley in this block and tackle type knot Ive used it on sharp anchor points and it doesnt work as well
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 2 Creating a slip knotTie a slip knot somewhere between the two anchor points Correct placement of the slip knot takes some experience to judge it correctly Typically I place it too close tothe 2nd anchor point and end up with not enough room to work with If the knot ends up too far from 2nd anchor point you can extend the knot by enlarging the loop
Be sure you tie the slip knot as shown You may not be able to untie other knots
In this small example the slip knot is uncharacteristically close to the 1st anchor point
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 3 Tightening and securingThe loose end of the rope that went around the 2nd anchor point goes through the slip knot loop Pull the loose end to the desired tension and secure with two halfhitches
Note To allow better view of the knots the rope isnt really tightened in this example
Step 4 Securing loose endThe final knot is just to secure the loose end somehow I chose a fishermans knot to do this
To tie a fishermans knot the rope goes around twice and goes under the X created by the loops Pull the loose end to tighten Finally slide the knot to put tension onthe half hitches
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Image Notes1 X marks the spot
Step 5 FinishedThere you have it I guarantee that the first time you really use this knot (not just practice) you will be amazed at how well it works and youll wish you knew this knot along time ago You may even come over to my side and declare that is is THE most awesome knot on the planet -)
Enjoy and happy haulingDave
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Related Instructables
TiteTie is theTruckers Knoton Steroids bytitetie
Four knots tomake paracordinto a usefultool byerik_mccray
Modify yourbike rack tocarry a sunfishor other boat byewilhelm
SurfboardHammock byGermy
GiganticHalloweenSpider Web bynolte919
How To Tie ASpiders Hitch(video) by back-cast
Three-hitch mathair ornamentby michiexile TRX from
ParacordChallengeAccepted bythrake
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Carry any Bottle with a JUG KNOT Handleby hpstoutharrow on September 17 2009
Intro Carry any Bottle with a JUG KNOT HandleTie a JUG KNOT around a water bottle soda bottle or aluminum bottle to make a secure carrying strap
Re-purpose any container into a reusable water bottle by adding a convenient carrying strap This Instructable will demonstrate how to tie a JUG knot which like its namesuggests is meant to properly secure around the neck of a container
With some cord and the knowledge of this knot you will be able add a handle lanyard or carabiner loop to any of your favorite beverages to carry them on the go
It works perfectly for those disposable water bottles and who knows once you add some colorful cord to the plain old clear water bottle you just might beinclined to refill it and use it again(Check out pictures 4amp5 below)
In addition to plastic beverage bottles like pop water and sports drinks you can turn those rugged aluminum beer bottles into a backpacking canteen
Those of you familiar with my previous aluminum bottle InstructablesROLLED RIM METAL TUMBLERhttpwwwinstructablescomidAluminum-Bottle-Tumbler-Cup-Cook-PotALUMINUM BOTTLE LIGHTWEIGHT ALCOHOL STOVEhttpwwwinstructablescomidAluminum-Bottle-Alcohol-Stovewill recognize the water canteen shown below as a re-purposed aluminum beer bottle Here I have added a painted surface treatment to turn it into a proper lookingwater bottle More on that in steps 13 14 15
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 1 Getting StartedCord size is important Select a small medium weight cord like the one shown here It is a general purpose camp cord sold at most sporting goods stores (shoelacesmight also work)
Do not use a heavy cord or rope because the larger diameter will not tuck under the relatively small lip at the top of the bottleneck and the bottle will fall out
Also the smaller cord cinches tight on itself and will not loosen accidentally
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 2 Form a BightThe next steps show how to tie a JUG KNOT It is the basic step for adding a carrying strap It is also the anchor point for any additional fancy bottle trussing you maywant to add
JUG KNOT Step 1
Form a Bight in the center of a length of cord Bight is a knot term for a loop or bend in the rope In this case the main Bight in this knot is highlighted with a white mark Imakes it easier to follow its path in these steps
The running ends of the cord should be equal length
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 3 Pull the Bight downPULL the Bight DOWN forming two Loops
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 4 Cross the LoopsCROSS the right Loop OVER the left Loop
Step 5 Pass the Bight under the 1st loopTake the main Bight and pass it UNDER the left Loop
Step 6 Weave the BightWEAVE the Bight OVER the portion of the right Loop and UNDER the portion of the left Loop
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 7 Extend the BightExtend the Bight OVER the outer portion of the right Loop
Step 8 Flip the Right Loop behindAdditional colored identification points have been added to the loops to follow their travel in these next two steps
The right Loop Yellow marker is FLIPPED BEHIND the knot and ends up on the far left side of the knot
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 9 Flip the 2nd loop in frontRaise the green marker (located on what was formerly the left loop) and pull it down and to the right FLIPPING IT IN FRONT of the knot
Note the blue portion of the this loop will pass around the outside of the yellow portion of the first loop
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Image Notes1 Center of knot that will tighten around the bottles neck
Step 10 Remove SlackNote where the blue green amp yellow markers end up
Start to remove the slack in the loops by pulling the original main Bight (white marker top right) and the two free standing ends at the bottom
the bottle neck will pass through the very center of the knot
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Image Notes1 Center of knot that will tighten around the bottles neck
Step 11 Tighten the KnotAfter removing the slack insert the bottle neck and finish tightening
The knot should look like this before slipping it over the bottle
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 12 Secure on bottle neckThis is the finished knot shown on the neck of various containers
The loop end and the two free standing ends can be tied together to create a carrying handle (last picture below)
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 13 Aluminum Bottle Water Bottle
The next few steps show the features of an aluminum beer bottle re-purposed as a water bottle canteen It is one of many containers that can be reused as a camp waterbottle
The bottle was lightly sanded masked and then pained with a hammered finished paint to create an interesting surface texture
Image Notes1 Textured finish paint makes an interesting grip-able surface2 Masked with tape for painting3 Masked with tape for painting
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Image Notes1 Dowel used for holding the bottle during painting
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 14 Tethered Cork StopperUse a wine bottle man made Cork as a stopper for your aluminum water bottleNote Use a cork that was removed from the wine bottle without the corkscrew penetrating through the bottom end of the cork (A hole all the way through the cork willcause it to leak) Use the unpierced end of the cork inside the water bottle
Drill a hole through the sides of the Cork Thread the cord through the hole to the center of the cord Use the cork as the main Bight and tie the Jug knot as shown inthe beginning steps
Now the cork is tethered to the bottle and will not get lost or fall on the ground
A Carabiner clip passes through the other cord end to attache the water bottle to you belt or pack
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 15 Trussed for TransportThis is another hanging method for carrying your aluminum bottle water canteen A Jug knot is tied conventionally around the neck
The running ends of the knot however are pulled down towards the bottom of the bottle A Barrel Knot is tied about 34 the way down the side of the bottle A squareknot is tied on the bottom of the knot to keep the two running ends tight against the sides of the bottle
I like the look of the accent colored cord running down the sides of the bottle and the fact that the bottle hangs from the belt upside down It adds to its uniqueness
The last picture shows another truss variation
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 16 AdvancedBelow is a bottle with some additional trussing You can be creative as you want It all starts with a re-purposed container and the Jug Knot (and enough cord)
Related Instructables
AluminumBottle TumblerCup amp Cook Potfor an AlcoholStove byhpstoutharrow
Water BottleBelt Clip byuglymike Duct Tape
Water Bottle byrabidsquire2
AluminumBottle AlcoholStove byhpstoutharrow
DIYGlass WaterBottle byCulturespy
Solar WaterHeater forBackpackingUsing WaterBottles and aCar Shade bykopomeroy
Duct tape waterbottle holder(Photos) by pinkmarshmallow
How to make aCamelPack withan old plasticbottle bywillrandship
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Basic Knots Guideby zorro3355 on April 29 2008
Intro Basic Knots Guidehi
Step 1 Thumb knotThe most simple knotUsed as a stopper and prevent ropes from fraying
Step 2 Reef KnotUsed to tie two ropes of equal thickness togetherIt is pretty easy to tie and untie but under tentionit may be diffcult to untieIt is also not sutible for smoothropes(egnylon ropes)
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 3 Figure of eightused as a stopperprevent ropes from fraying and its more secure than tumb knot its is also used to tie Caribinas to ropes and is often used in rock climbing
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 4 Timber hitchused for pulling logs
Step 5 Clove hitchUsed to tie a rope onto a pole or logThe pole must be roundThe pole lust be thicker then the rope itself
(greatly used during pioneering)
Step 6 Sheet bandused to tie ropes of different thickness together(works on same thickness of ropes too)
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 7 Sheep shankTo shorten RopesTo prevent middle fraying
Step 8 Slip knotWhippingUsed as a grip for pulling things(when tied on a stick or small pole)(marlin spike hitch)
Related Instructables
Rope Rings byhpstoutharrow
How to Tie aFigure EightKnot byTactical_Pyro
Whippin (WestCountry Style)by tim_n
SurvivalBracelet(Updated) bytevers94
HangmansNoose PackClosure byPopEye42
Turkey on aTripod byhpstoutharrow
SurvivalBracelet II bytevers94 Zigzag Spooling
Paracord (video)by Stormdrane
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
How to Tie a Fire-escape Knotby leonardo ismael on October 16 2007
Intro How to Tie a Fire-escape KnotThis knot is used by firemen in case of fires for example imagine a scene where the ladder on the firetruck messes up but people need to get down a five story buildingor more All they have is a long piece of rope they can safely get down with a secure knot like the fire-escape knot So why not learn it its easy to do and hard to untieif you tie it tightly
This is from the American Boys Handbook
Step 1 Get Your RopeFirst grab a piece of rope and bend it like this to make a loop in it Follow every step to the smallest detail
Step 2 Twist the RopeNow make a twist like this and hold it together
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 3 Pull Through the TwistPull the loop through the twist you just made from underneath
Step 4 Go Over the Split EndNow pull the tail through the loop
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 5 FinallyAnd finally just pull it through as pictured below
Congratulations you just learned the fire-escape knot
Step 6 Same Name Not KnotThis is another knot called the fire-escape knot this shouldnt be your result
Related Instructables
House FireEscape Plan(video) byWhatHappensNowAdvice
ParacordLadder wWooden Rungsby josestude
Bed SheetEscape Rope byjessehensel
rope ladder(glow-in-the-dark version) bymikeasaurus
HeadlockEscape 2(video) byjohnnyrockstah
QuickFirestarter byMattandJora
Trail sauna byjakee117
How to Kill FireAnts andCommitGenocide byKentsOkay
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Climb Safe With A Figure 8 Knotby mattste on February 23 2010
Intro Climb Safe With A Figure 8 Knot There are many things that a beginning climber needs to know including several important knots Perhaps the most essential knot is the Figure 8 Follow Through Thistutorial will demonstrate how to correctly harness yourself to a rope using a Figure 8 Follow Through knot This knot is used primarily by rock climbers to provide a life-line Since this knot is used as a life-line it is very important to be able to tie it correctly (Your life could depend upon it)
Dont worry with this tutorial and about 5 minutes of practice you can have this knot mastered
Things you will need
- Climbing Harness- Climbing Rope
If you are wanting to go climbing and dont already have these items they can be purchased for about $25 each at most outdoor sporting goods stores If you are merelylooking to learn the knot a belt loop and a rope (about five feet long) will do
Image Notes1 Climbing Harness2 Climbing Rope
Step 1 Dealing With The RopeThroughout this tutorial I will be discussing different parts of the rope To make these instructions as clear as possible I will define a few terms that I will use throughoutthe tutorial The Anchor End of the rope will generally be at the top of the images This is the end that would be anchored to the wall or rock and does not move Wewill not be doing much with the anchored end The Tail End of the rope is the opposite end that we will be dealing with I will call this the tail for short
Now that we have some terms to work with lets get started
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 2 Tying The First Figure 8This knot has several parts to it The first part of the knot is just tying a basic figure 8 To tie the first figure 8 there are four simple steps
1 - Using the tail make a loop over the rope (as shown in the first picture) keeping in mind that there should be about 3 ft of slack on the tail end
2 - Wrap the tail back this time go under the anchored end (As shown in the second picture)
3 - Bring the tail down through the first loop (As shown in the third picture)
4 - Finally pull the two ends to make the knot a little bit tighter and easier to deal with (Shown in the fourth picture)
After these four steps you should end up with a knot that resembles a figure 8
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 3 Looping Into The Harness In order to secure the rope to the harness simply thread the tail end of the rope through the front loop in the harness as shown in the picture below This step isobviously very important
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 4 Following Back Through The Figure 8After looping the rope through the harness you have to thread the tail end of the rope back through the knot following the first figure 8 I have divided this process intofive smaller steps in order to make it more clear
1 - Coming form underneath the knot bring the tail up through the near loop and to the left behind the anchored end of the rope (Shown in the first picture)
2 - Wrap the tail around the anchored end back to the right and down through the adjacent loop (Shown in the second picture)
3 - You simply need to bring the tail back over the top of the knot to the left (Shown in the third picture)
4 - Bring the tail end up through the far loop following the anchored end (Shown in the fourth picture)
5 - Finally pull the knot tight (Shown in the fifth picture)
As you can see the first four pictures are simply tracing the knot back through with the tail end
For the last part while you pull the knot tight you may want to make small adjustments and rearrange how it all fits together If the knot does not lay perfectly smoothand tight its NOT a big deal
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 5 Finishing The Knot After completing the Figure 8 knot you will want to somehow secure the tail end of the rope out of the way There are a couple different ways to do this the way that Iwill demonstrate is using whats called a Stopper Knot This secondary knot is similar to a Fishermans knot and is pretty simple I have once again divided thisprocess into several smaller steps
1 - Start by wrapping the tail end around the anchored end (As shown in the first picture)
2 - Wrap the tail back underneath the two vertical segments (As shown in the second picture)
3 - Simply repeat the first two steps wrapping the tail around again (As shown in the third picture)
4 - This step in the fourth picture may look complicated but all you need to do is insert the tail up through the two loops that you have just made
5 - To finish off the knot you will want to slowly pull the tail end while gently pushing the bottom of the stopper knot upwards If you have successfully completed this knotit should look something like the fifth picture
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 6 Ready To Climb Now that you have mastered the Figure 8 knot you can securely harness yourself into a climbing rope Remember there are many other skills that go into setting up ananchor and belaying a climber This tutorial only covers the figure 8 knot For more information there are many great websites that demonstrate how to correctly set up asafe climbing system (Ive posted a few below) If you are a beginning climber I recommend that you read up on a few other climbing techniques Also you shouldprobably go to a climbing wall or gym where there are experienced climbers that can show you the ropes Hopefully this tutorial has been helpful Have fun and be safe
Some useful linkshttpwwwstephenprattnetAnchorsanchorshtmhttpwwwuoregonedu~oppclimbingtopicsanchorshtmlhttpwwwabc-of-rockclimbingcomhowtoclimbingtechniquesasp
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Related Instructables
How to Tie aFigure EightKnot byTactical_Pyro
Paracord KnotDisplay Bord byJamie bagn
Basic KnotsGuide byzorro3355
How to Climb aTree (withprussiks) bystasterisk
How to climb atree (using onlyrope) thefunsimple wayby louieaw
How to get arope into a tree(withoutclimbing it) byvitex
How to tievarious knots byadaviel
How to make arope swing byjdub0928
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Turks Head Knots on a Bottleby sklnxbones on July 6 2010
Intro Turks Head Knots on a BottleThis is the finished project A bottle decorated with three Turks Head Knots There are only three knots on this bottle The RED and the BLUE knots are each a 20 Bightby 3 Lead Turks Head Knots The WHITE knot is a 20 Bight by 19 Lead Turks Head Knot
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 1 Supplies
Cord Lots and Lots of cord I cant tell you how much each bottle is differentBottle Washed and Dried inside and out Make sure to remove all water spotsThreaded Needle Cord screws into the threads at the base of the needlePegs I use brass rivets used as a map to tie the Turks Head KnotsHole Punch Used to punch holes in the painters tape to hold the pegsPainters Tape To hold the pegs in place and to make your map for the Turks Head KnotsMarker To write on the painters tapeCloth Towel To remove finger prints and dirt from your bottleKrazy Glue or Super Glue This is used to secure the knots in place to the bottle
OPTIONAL BUT HIGHLY RECOMMENDEDI use the Turks Head Cookbook from KnotToolcom
Step 2 PreparationYou will need to find a bottle you like I used an empty instant tea bottle of course washed and dried (I like to put the bottle in the oven for a few minutes to dry the insidewithout water spots Take off the lid and do not put lid in the oven) Now measure the circumference of the bottle Take a cord and tightly wrap the cord around the bottleMark where the ends meet and use a ruler to measure the length of the cord For my instant tea bottle the circumference is 27cm I know from past knots that I have tiedthat I want my knot to have 20 Bights in the top and bottom (bands) knots I am going to use the Bights in the (bands) knots to tie the middle knot Now divide the numberof Bights (20) into the size of the circumference (27) to get the space between each Bight (135) With me so far
Now take two pieces of painters tape using a ruler measure out the length of the circumference and mark the length on the both pieces of tape Next you will mark thespace between each Bight on the tape
Step 3 Adding the PegsI like to use pegs when tying Turks Head Knots it just makes tying the knot easier
These are what I use for pegs
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 4 Adding Pegs to the TapeNow take a hole punch to cut holes in the tape where the lines meet You will place the pegs in the holes
Insert a peg in each hole and carefully stick the first piece of tape to the bottle
Step 5 Adding the 2nd row of pegsNow do the same thing with the second piece of tape The numbers on each piece of tape must line up
This picture shows you what you should have now This odd looking thing will be your map to tie the Turks Head Knot And this is the end of Step 1
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 6 Tying the first Turks Head KnotUsing the Turks Head Cookbook follow the numbers going over and under as indicated in the book I chose a 20 Bight by 3 Lead knot which will give me a nice bandaround the bottle Once the ends meet you have made one complete knot Tape the running end of your cord and start removing the pegs and the tape
Step 7 Remove the pegs and the tapeBe careful not to untie the knot as you remove the pegs and tape from the bottle Continue to remove all the pegs and remove the tape from the bottle At this point theknot will be very loose and will need to be tightened up
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 8 Remove the slack from the knotHere you can see just how much the knot expanded Starting with the standing end begin to pull the slack out of the knot going towards the running end of the cordDo not expect to pull all the slack out at once You may have to make 3 - 5 attempts at removing the slack out of the knot DO NOT remove all of the slack out of the knotIn order to make the bands we will have to triple the Turks Head Knot We will do this by following the knot three times The threaded needle will really come in handyhere
Step 9 Triple the KnotOnce you have made three passes of the Turks Head Knot use your needle to go under your knot about half the circumference and cut the cord The knot will be tightenough to hide the tail in placeTIP I carefully add a couple of drops of super glue UNDER the band to hold them in place and keep them from sliding around in the nextsteps A drop or two in 3 or 4 places around the band should be enough
Step 10 Add the second knotNow repeat this whole step for the second bandWhen tying the second band you must make sure the Bights line up to the first band This is crucial for the next stepWipe down the bottle to make sure all your finger prints and adhesive from the tape are all removed You want to make sure your bottle is clean at this point Any dirt orfinger prints left on the bottle will be almost impossible to remove From this point on we will use gloves when tying our last knot
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 11 Maping the Top KnotStick a piece of painters tape on top of your first band leaving the bottom of the knot exposedUse a marker to count the number of Bights in your knot Instead of using the pegs we are going to use the Bights to tie our next Turks Head Knot
Step 12 Mapping the Bottom KnotDo the same thing for the bottom band but you must make sure your numbers on top and bottom line up So 1 on top should be the same position as 1 on the bottom
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 13 Adding the last knotAgain using the Turks Head Cookbook and the threaded needle you are going to follow the instructions going over and under as indicated in the book Be sure to usegloves when ever you handle the bottle
Step 14 Thats ItFor this Turks Head Knot I am using a 20 Bight by 19 Lead knot
Because of the amount of cord you are working with your cord will get twisted and knotted You will have to un-twist the cord often Its a pain in the rear but it has to bedone And it has to be done alot
Continue to tie the knot until you finish the knot If you have the cord and the patience you can double or triple the knot When you are done use your needle to hide theends under your bands Cut the ends and your DONE
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Related Instructables
Monkeys FistFloatingKeychain byjokerlz
How To Make ATurks headKnot WithParacord byDoggie Stylish
Tying Trivetsout of Rope forHoliday Gifts bykylemarsh
Paracord KnotDisplay Bord byJamie bagn
How to Make ATurks Head(Photos) bymchs60chip
A pocket full ofknots byKiteman
Monkeys fistknot AND themonkey byjonathan111
TiteTie is theTruckers Knoton Steroids bytitetie
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Larks head noose -- an easy useful knot that tightens and loosensby Larry Breed on February 19 2009
Intro Larks head noose -- an easy useful knot that tightens and loosensI thought I knew all the basic knots but then I was taught this incredibly useful simple knot Its good for tying up the neck of a bag that you want to repeatedly open andsecurely close Its good for tying around a springy bundle that will need tightening and retightening And its easy to undo
Ive looked at knot literature but havent found a name for this so I named it The basic knot is well known its called a larks head Since all Ive done is to slip the twoends through the larks head to make a noose I call it that
WARNING Dont use this knot when human safety would depend on it Climbers and mountaineers have well-tested reliable knots for such situations
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Image Notes1 To tighten further step on this side of the larks head and pull the free ends
Step 1 Double the cord overThe larks head noose requires enough cord to go twice around your bundle plus a foot or two Find the center and double it over Sailors call this a bight
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 2 Form the larks headComing from below the bight hook your thumb and forefinger over the two sides Reach outward and downward and pinch your fingertips together underneath thedoubled cord
Youve made a larks head Move the crossing cord a little farther from your hand so theres a clear opening through the two half-loops
Step 3 Form the nooseSlip the two ends of the cord through the opening we were just talking about Pull the larks head tight so it grips the two cords Find something that needs constrictingand put the noose around it
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 4 Tightening retightening and lockingSlide the knot against the bundle If its not tight enough to keep from slipping tighten it by holding it in one hand and tugging on the cords one at a time with the otherhand Notice that you can slide the knot out again for instance to re-open the bag you just tied shut For some applications this may be as tight as you need it
A springy bundle probably still feels loose If so compress the bundle and get a new grip on the cords Rest your foot on the bundle on the cords nearest the larks headand pull to slide the larks head tighter
To make the knot more permanent you can lock it Make an overhand in the cord ends (Exactly like the first step in tying shoelaces) With your foot still on the bundlepull on the cords and move your hands apart until youre pulling in opposite directions You have just locked the larks head and you can trust it to stay that way()
But lets say that later on you want to loosen the locked knot Again put your foot on the bundle and cords nearest the larks head hold the two cord ends together andpull This makes a little slack between the overhand and the larks head so you can untie the overhand
In twine or small string the locking overhand knot may be difficult to undo Use a shoelace knot instead of an overhand and itll unlock easily
() If youre using slippery cord like polypropylene an overhand may not lock securely You may want to tie another overhand knot For added security wrap a shortlength of duct tape around the two cords close to the knot
Image Notes1 To tighten further step on this side of the larks head and pull the free ends
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Related Instructables
TRX fromParacordChallengeAccepted bythrake
A pocket full ofknots byKiteman
Lens CapLanyard by~teknoarsonist~ how to tie a
noose byawesume
AdjustableParacordGlassesLanyard byjdtwelve12
HangmansNoose PackClosure byPopEye42
Paraleash - ADog LeashFrom Paracordby The Ideanator
How to make arugged andhandy ParacordBelt by Jake22
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 7 Fishermans BendThe fishermans bend is the same as the round turn and two half hitches except that the first hitch is looped under the round turn This uses the tension on the rope tosecure the end from working loose
AdvantagesSecure against working loose
DisadvantagesHard to make under tensionHard to undo under tensionMay seize up under load when wet making it hard to undo
UsesSecuring mooring line to ringSecuring fender lines to rail
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 8 Studsail BendThe studsail bend is like the fishermans bend but the second hitch is also secured under the round turn making it even more secure against working loose when undertension
AdvantagesVery secure against working looseDisadvantagesHard to make under tensionHard to undo under tension
Step 9 Figure-8 KnotThe figure-eight knot is used to prevent an end of rope from passing through a block (pulley) Sometimes called a stopper knot
The double figure-8 knot is used in rock climbing as an alternative to a bowline to secure a climbing harness to the end of a safety rope The double knot is made bymaking a single knot then tracing back around the knot with the free end after passing it around the harness loop
AdvantagesEasy to verify by inspectionNot prone to work loose
DisadvantagesSlow to make and undoCannot be made under load
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 10 Prussic KnotThe prussic knot may be used as a climbing ascender - when made around a vertical rope as shown downwards tension on the ends locks the knot while release oftension allows it to be slid up the rope A pair of prussic knots on foot loops may be used in tandem to climb a rope
UsesClimbing a ropeTaking up tension to free a riding turn on a winch
Step 11 Reef KnotThe reef knot or square knot is used to tie a bundle of material together It must be made around something - it should not be used to tie two free ropes togetherbecause it can easily capsizeIt should not be used to make a loop unless it can be tensioned around a solid object It should not be used around a person - use a bowline instead A capsized reefknot will slip easily and could constrict and cause severe injury
UsesReefing a sail (tying the unused portion around a spar)Securing a furled sail to a spar (sail ties)Wrapping a parcelTying shoelaces
AdvantagesMay be made under moderate load
DisadvantagesCapsizes (works free) if used improperlyCan seize up under load when wet
Tying the knot
Capsizing a reef knot
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 12 CleatsThis is not a knot but is very common on boatsThe first picture shows a rope cleated normally The second shows one with a final locking turn - the last turn is twisted before placing over the cleat so that the tensionon the rope helps secure the free end
When working with ropes under tension take a turn or two around a winch or cleat before trying to secure the end with a knot The load on the free end falls exponentiallywith each turn taken Severe injury can result if a finger or other body part is caught in a loop of rope or between a rope and another object
Step 13 Practice themIt is sometimes useful to be able to tie knots in the dark or as in this video behind your back
Related Instructables
AThird Hand forSailing or OtherThings by WadeTarzia
Paracord KnotDisplay Bord byJamie bagn
Trip LogOutriggerCanoe Sailingthe CaliforniaChannel Islandsby TimAnderson
How to Tie aFigure EightKnot byTactical_Pyro
How to build apirate ship bymdelaney3
Build a ShortDragon (16 foot3-BoardOutriggerSailing Canoe)by Wade Tarzia
repairing aheadsail by josh
How to get arope into a tree(withoutclimbing it) byvitex
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
How to Tie the Lanyard Knotby eddy14777 on January 31 2010
Intro How to Tie the Lanyard KnotMany people including myself have had trouble following the Stormdrane youtube video on tying the lanyard knot so i have done some research and found the solution
Image Notes1 Finished knot
Step 1 MaterialsAll you need is a reasonable length of para cord or whatever you wish to use
Image Notes1 One reasonable amount
Step 2 First StepThe first thing you are going to do is to make a bight that leaves you with to congruent endsThen you are going to put your ring finger through the bight
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Image Notes1 Close enough2 Bight
Step 3 Starting the KnotMake a loop just like the one in the picture and place it over the top strandBring the top strand under the bottom strand
Image Notes1 Notice the way the loop is done2 Top strand
Image Notes1 Bottom strand2 Top strand is under
Step 4 The Most Important PartNow you take the top stand from the previous picture and feed it over the first part of the loop under itself and back over the remainder of the loop
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Image Notes1 Under me2 Top strand3 This should make a diamond type shape
Step 5 DoublingNow take the bottom stand and take it around the part of the top strand nearest to the bight and than come up through the diamond shape in the middleDo the same for the top strand
Image Notes1 Top strand
Image Notes1 Both through the diamond
Step 6 FinishingWhen you take it off your finger it should look like thisWork out the slack by pulling on the bight and the two strands
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Image Notes1 Finished knot
Related Instructables
Cross KnotParacordLanyard byStormdrane
Celtic ButtonKnot (video) byStormdrane
Paracord wristlanyard madewith the snakeknot byStormdrane
Paracord ChainSinnet FastDeploy BoonieHatband (video)by Stormdrane
Zigzag SpoolingParacord (video)by Stormdrane
ParacordBoonie HatWrap (video) byStormdrane
Paracord IDbadge Lanyardby Flahusky
Cobra WeaveKey Fob bytevers94
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Four knots to make paracord into a useful toolby erik_mccray on March 27 2010
Authorerik_mccrayI am an ex-fabricator that is now a stay at home dad I love my new job but I do miss making stuff I love this site amp I am getting involved as a way to keep myskills upOn top of fad work I have also run two small business in the past One was custom sewing amp the other was as a small engine mechanicI have two votec degrees one in metal fabrication amp the other is in engine repairI look forward to getting to know everyone here
Intro Four knots to make paracord into a useful toolParacord is an awesome multitool used everywhere from the wild blue yonder to the deepest caverns But like any good tool it is only as good as the knowledge the userhas about the tool With most people out there using bungee cords amp ratchet straps it seems that paracord is being used for nothing more than friendship bracelets forgrown men This is a shame because for less then the price of a few cheap bungee cords amp some to short to be helpful straps You can get yourself hundreds of feet ofparacord
The key to getting the most out of the paracord is good knot work The first thing you need to know is what makes a good knot One is that the knot is easy amp quick to tieamp more impotant is that the knot is easy amp quick to untie The hitch class of knots is by far the best group of knots that the average person could know The four mostuseful hitch knots are the half hitch a quick simple knot that forms the base for many other knots the inline half hitch allowing you to get the most out of one length ofparacord the slippery hitch that gives you both on the fly control over tension on your paracord but also an adjustable loop that will not change unless you want it amp theinline truckers hitch instantly doubling the your pulling power
Step 1 To get started lets get some terminology that will be used defined
line= the paracord
Main line= the part of the paracord doing the work for example holding down your tarp or the long part of the paracord
Mid line= the middle of the length of the paracord
End line= the unused length of paracord or the short length of paracord
Step 2 The half hitch The half hitch is a simple way to secure a line to an anchor point like the tie down points in most trucks A half hitch is a constrictor knot meaning that the harder you pullon the line the tighter the knots grip gets Another common constrictor knot is the slip knot
Step 1 wrap your line around your anchor point Step 2 wrap the end line around the main line
Step 3 pass the end line threw the end line side of the newly formed loop
step 4 now take the slack out of the knot
step 5 to make sure the knot is secure tie another half hitch to the main line This knot is called adouble half hitch
step 6 another useful thing that can be done with the half hitch is that instead of repeating the wrap on the main line but repeating it on what you are tying to the half hitchcan be used to bind something like a stack of 2x4s
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Image Notes1 End line2 Main line3 step 1
Image Notes1 Step 2
Image Notes1 passing thew the end line side of the loop2 step 3
Image Notes1 step 5
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Image Notes1 step 6
Step 3 The mid line half hitch The mid line half hitch is for when the length of line is to long for the job at hand amp you dont want to have to cut the line to size or you are using multiple anchor pointswith one length of line
Step 1 double up the line at the point in the length you wish to make the knot
Step 2 wrap the doubled up portion of line around your anchor point The doubled up length is now now the end line
Step 3 now tie just as you did for the regular half hitch repeat the knot to make a double half hitch for security
Image Notes1 A mid line double half hitch
Image Notes1 step 1
Image Notes1 The end line2 step 2
Image Notes1 Step 3
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 4 The slippery hitch The slippery hitch is a great knot for adjusting tension on the main line or for having an adjustable fixed loop To adjust the knot simply slide the knot up or down the mainline
Step 1 wrap your line around the anchor point or just double over the line to form a loop
Step 2 wrap the end line around the main line three times Wrapping in the direction of the anchor point or loop
Step 3 put together the two lines making up the loop amp wrap the two lines one time with the end line
Step 4 pass the end line thew the last loop formed covering the two lined of the loop
Step 5 pull the knot tite
step 6 to adjust the size of the loop or main line tension grab the knot amp slide it up or down the main line
Image Notes1 grab just the knot its self to adjust it2 step 5
Image Notes1 step 1
Image Notes1 step 2
Image Notes1 step 3
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Image Notes1 step 4
Image Notes1 grab just the knot its self to adjust it2 step 5
Image Notes1 same knot as in last pic Just slid up2 step 6
Step 5 The mid line truchers hitch The truckers hitch is a great way to double the pulling force on a line There are many ways to tie this knot the problem with most of them is that at some point you aregoing to have to pass the end line through a loop on the main line that is acting like a pulley to double your pulling force this is great if you are making the knot close tothe end of your line but if you are using a 300 length of line amp want to make the knot in the first ten feet having to pass 290 of line thew a loop is a pain But with a fewhalf hitches you will not have to pass the end line threw any loop on the main line
step 1 wrap your line around the anchor point then double over your end line laying the top of the loop over the main line
Step 2 double up your main line amp lay the loop over the loop made by the end line
step 3 in main line above the knot twist in a loop
step 4 put main line loop thew the loop made in step 3 amp pull this loop tight over your main line loop forming a half hitch Repeat step 3 amp 4 to make a doublehalf hitch
step 5 To use the knot just pull down on the end line to put tension on the main line
step 6 after you have the main line snug tie a mid line double half hitch around the two lines forming the loop at the end of the main line with the end line
step 7 Tie a double half hitch with the end line around the end loop of the mid line half hitch of step 6 using the same method as used in steps 3 amp 4
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Image Notes1 the end of step 6
Image Notes1 main line2 end line3 step 1
Image Notes1 main line loop2 end line loop
Image Notes1 step 3
Image Notes1 step 4
Image Notes1 step 4 at the end with a double half hitch on the main loop
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Image Notes1 pull here2 step 5
Image Notes1 the start of step 6
Image Notes1 the end of step 6
Image Notes1 step 72 now the rest of the line is free to do more work
Related Instructables
Paracord KnotDisplay Bord byJamie bagn
ChokelessAdjustableParacord DogLeash byPizzaman101
ParacordLadder wWooden Rungsby josestude
tie a paracordshackle grip byitri45
ParacordPrussik Belt byJavaNut13
TiteTie is theTruckers Knoton Steroids bytitetie
ID Lanyard(Photos) byeschmunk
Dog Toys forHeavy Chewersby J3443RY
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Figure 8 knot and double 8 knotby jonathan111 on November 28 2007
Intro Figure 8 knot and double 8 knotI will show you how to tie a figure 8 knot and a figure 8 follow through
Step 1 Stating the knotThis is a simple knot so just follow the pictures
Step 2 Finishing the knotCross the string under and then push it through the hole Pull tightly unless you are going to do the follow through and leave it somewhat loose
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 3 The follow through knotThe follow through knot should be tied around something brought back and followed through the path of the 8 knot Look at the pictures Basically follow through the 8knot backwards
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Related Instructables
Climb Safe WithA Figure 8Knot by mattste A pocket full of
knots byKiteman
How to Tie aFigure EightKnot byTactical_Pyro
Paracord KnotDisplay Bord byJamie bagn
Cross KnotParacordLanyard byStormdrane
How to Tie aFire-escapeKnot by leonardoismael
Truckers HitchTHE mostawesome knoton the planetby schneidp20
Paracord ZipperPuller byrepeet13
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Truckers Hitch THE most awesome knot on the planetby schneidp20 on October 12 2008
Authorschneidp20I like building stuff Trouble is there just isnt enough time to build everything Sigh
Intro Truckers Hitch THE most awesome knot on the planetYes I know that there are plenty of other cool knots out there many of which I literally couldnt live wo I rock climb However this knot is unlike any other Plus Ineeded a grabber for my Instructable -) (BTW this ISNT a climbing knot) And in truth it isnt a knot by itself but rather a system of common knots
Have you ever tried to tie something down for transporting but just couldnt get the lines tight andor during transport the lines would continually loosen Then this is theknot for you I learned this knot back in the 70s when specialty car racks and ratchet straps were rare or unheard of I initially used it to tie a canoe on a car rack bothattaching to the rack as well as the lines to the bow and stern of the canoe Even with all the new gizmos available today this knot still shines because all you need is arope and ropes dont hum in the wind like straps
The unique aspect of this knot is that it gives you a 2-1 mechanical advantage when tightening the rope Be careful though You can actually damage some thingsbecause of the mechanical advantage This knot holds fast and is easy to untie hallmark traits of any good knot
Below you see the finished knot system well break it apart in the steps that follow
Image Notes1 1st anchor point a bowline2 loop3 securing knots 2 half hitches4 securing loose end with a fishermans knot5 2nd anchor point (should be round)
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Image Notes1 X marks the spot
Step 1 Initial setupThe first step is to anchor one end of the rope and then loop the rope around a 2nd anchor point
For attaching to the 1st anchor point I chose bowline a close 2 on my list -) There are other instructables on that one so I wont bore you here
The 2nd anchor really should be round because it serves as a pulley in this block and tackle type knot Ive used it on sharp anchor points and it doesnt work as well
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 2 Creating a slip knotTie a slip knot somewhere between the two anchor points Correct placement of the slip knot takes some experience to judge it correctly Typically I place it too close tothe 2nd anchor point and end up with not enough room to work with If the knot ends up too far from 2nd anchor point you can extend the knot by enlarging the loop
Be sure you tie the slip knot as shown You may not be able to untie other knots
In this small example the slip knot is uncharacteristically close to the 1st anchor point
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 3 Tightening and securingThe loose end of the rope that went around the 2nd anchor point goes through the slip knot loop Pull the loose end to the desired tension and secure with two halfhitches
Note To allow better view of the knots the rope isnt really tightened in this example
Step 4 Securing loose endThe final knot is just to secure the loose end somehow I chose a fishermans knot to do this
To tie a fishermans knot the rope goes around twice and goes under the X created by the loops Pull the loose end to tighten Finally slide the knot to put tension onthe half hitches
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Image Notes1 X marks the spot
Step 5 FinishedThere you have it I guarantee that the first time you really use this knot (not just practice) you will be amazed at how well it works and youll wish you knew this knot along time ago You may even come over to my side and declare that is is THE most awesome knot on the planet -)
Enjoy and happy haulingDave
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Related Instructables
TiteTie is theTruckers Knoton Steroids bytitetie
Four knots tomake paracordinto a usefultool byerik_mccray
Modify yourbike rack tocarry a sunfishor other boat byewilhelm
SurfboardHammock byGermy
GiganticHalloweenSpider Web bynolte919
How To Tie ASpiders Hitch(video) by back-cast
Three-hitch mathair ornamentby michiexile TRX from
ParacordChallengeAccepted bythrake
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Carry any Bottle with a JUG KNOT Handleby hpstoutharrow on September 17 2009
Intro Carry any Bottle with a JUG KNOT HandleTie a JUG KNOT around a water bottle soda bottle or aluminum bottle to make a secure carrying strap
Re-purpose any container into a reusable water bottle by adding a convenient carrying strap This Instructable will demonstrate how to tie a JUG knot which like its namesuggests is meant to properly secure around the neck of a container
With some cord and the knowledge of this knot you will be able add a handle lanyard or carabiner loop to any of your favorite beverages to carry them on the go
It works perfectly for those disposable water bottles and who knows once you add some colorful cord to the plain old clear water bottle you just might beinclined to refill it and use it again(Check out pictures 4amp5 below)
In addition to plastic beverage bottles like pop water and sports drinks you can turn those rugged aluminum beer bottles into a backpacking canteen
Those of you familiar with my previous aluminum bottle InstructablesROLLED RIM METAL TUMBLERhttpwwwinstructablescomidAluminum-Bottle-Tumbler-Cup-Cook-PotALUMINUM BOTTLE LIGHTWEIGHT ALCOHOL STOVEhttpwwwinstructablescomidAluminum-Bottle-Alcohol-Stovewill recognize the water canteen shown below as a re-purposed aluminum beer bottle Here I have added a painted surface treatment to turn it into a proper lookingwater bottle More on that in steps 13 14 15
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 1 Getting StartedCord size is important Select a small medium weight cord like the one shown here It is a general purpose camp cord sold at most sporting goods stores (shoelacesmight also work)
Do not use a heavy cord or rope because the larger diameter will not tuck under the relatively small lip at the top of the bottleneck and the bottle will fall out
Also the smaller cord cinches tight on itself and will not loosen accidentally
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 2 Form a BightThe next steps show how to tie a JUG KNOT It is the basic step for adding a carrying strap It is also the anchor point for any additional fancy bottle trussing you maywant to add
JUG KNOT Step 1
Form a Bight in the center of a length of cord Bight is a knot term for a loop or bend in the rope In this case the main Bight in this knot is highlighted with a white mark Imakes it easier to follow its path in these steps
The running ends of the cord should be equal length
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 3 Pull the Bight downPULL the Bight DOWN forming two Loops
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 4 Cross the LoopsCROSS the right Loop OVER the left Loop
Step 5 Pass the Bight under the 1st loopTake the main Bight and pass it UNDER the left Loop
Step 6 Weave the BightWEAVE the Bight OVER the portion of the right Loop and UNDER the portion of the left Loop
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 7 Extend the BightExtend the Bight OVER the outer portion of the right Loop
Step 8 Flip the Right Loop behindAdditional colored identification points have been added to the loops to follow their travel in these next two steps
The right Loop Yellow marker is FLIPPED BEHIND the knot and ends up on the far left side of the knot
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 9 Flip the 2nd loop in frontRaise the green marker (located on what was formerly the left loop) and pull it down and to the right FLIPPING IT IN FRONT of the knot
Note the blue portion of the this loop will pass around the outside of the yellow portion of the first loop
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Image Notes1 Center of knot that will tighten around the bottles neck
Step 10 Remove SlackNote where the blue green amp yellow markers end up
Start to remove the slack in the loops by pulling the original main Bight (white marker top right) and the two free standing ends at the bottom
the bottle neck will pass through the very center of the knot
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Image Notes1 Center of knot that will tighten around the bottles neck
Step 11 Tighten the KnotAfter removing the slack insert the bottle neck and finish tightening
The knot should look like this before slipping it over the bottle
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 12 Secure on bottle neckThis is the finished knot shown on the neck of various containers
The loop end and the two free standing ends can be tied together to create a carrying handle (last picture below)
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 13 Aluminum Bottle Water Bottle
The next few steps show the features of an aluminum beer bottle re-purposed as a water bottle canteen It is one of many containers that can be reused as a camp waterbottle
The bottle was lightly sanded masked and then pained with a hammered finished paint to create an interesting surface texture
Image Notes1 Textured finish paint makes an interesting grip-able surface2 Masked with tape for painting3 Masked with tape for painting
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Image Notes1 Dowel used for holding the bottle during painting
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 14 Tethered Cork StopperUse a wine bottle man made Cork as a stopper for your aluminum water bottleNote Use a cork that was removed from the wine bottle without the corkscrew penetrating through the bottom end of the cork (A hole all the way through the cork willcause it to leak) Use the unpierced end of the cork inside the water bottle
Drill a hole through the sides of the Cork Thread the cord through the hole to the center of the cord Use the cork as the main Bight and tie the Jug knot as shown inthe beginning steps
Now the cork is tethered to the bottle and will not get lost or fall on the ground
A Carabiner clip passes through the other cord end to attache the water bottle to you belt or pack
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 15 Trussed for TransportThis is another hanging method for carrying your aluminum bottle water canteen A Jug knot is tied conventionally around the neck
The running ends of the knot however are pulled down towards the bottom of the bottle A Barrel Knot is tied about 34 the way down the side of the bottle A squareknot is tied on the bottom of the knot to keep the two running ends tight against the sides of the bottle
I like the look of the accent colored cord running down the sides of the bottle and the fact that the bottle hangs from the belt upside down It adds to its uniqueness
The last picture shows another truss variation
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 16 AdvancedBelow is a bottle with some additional trussing You can be creative as you want It all starts with a re-purposed container and the Jug Knot (and enough cord)
Related Instructables
AluminumBottle TumblerCup amp Cook Potfor an AlcoholStove byhpstoutharrow
Water BottleBelt Clip byuglymike Duct Tape
Water Bottle byrabidsquire2
AluminumBottle AlcoholStove byhpstoutharrow
DIYGlass WaterBottle byCulturespy
Solar WaterHeater forBackpackingUsing WaterBottles and aCar Shade bykopomeroy
Duct tape waterbottle holder(Photos) by pinkmarshmallow
How to make aCamelPack withan old plasticbottle bywillrandship
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Basic Knots Guideby zorro3355 on April 29 2008
Intro Basic Knots Guidehi
Step 1 Thumb knotThe most simple knotUsed as a stopper and prevent ropes from fraying
Step 2 Reef KnotUsed to tie two ropes of equal thickness togetherIt is pretty easy to tie and untie but under tentionit may be diffcult to untieIt is also not sutible for smoothropes(egnylon ropes)
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 3 Figure of eightused as a stopperprevent ropes from fraying and its more secure than tumb knot its is also used to tie Caribinas to ropes and is often used in rock climbing
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 4 Timber hitchused for pulling logs
Step 5 Clove hitchUsed to tie a rope onto a pole or logThe pole must be roundThe pole lust be thicker then the rope itself
(greatly used during pioneering)
Step 6 Sheet bandused to tie ropes of different thickness together(works on same thickness of ropes too)
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 7 Sheep shankTo shorten RopesTo prevent middle fraying
Step 8 Slip knotWhippingUsed as a grip for pulling things(when tied on a stick or small pole)(marlin spike hitch)
Related Instructables
Rope Rings byhpstoutharrow
How to Tie aFigure EightKnot byTactical_Pyro
Whippin (WestCountry Style)by tim_n
SurvivalBracelet(Updated) bytevers94
HangmansNoose PackClosure byPopEye42
Turkey on aTripod byhpstoutharrow
SurvivalBracelet II bytevers94 Zigzag Spooling
Paracord (video)by Stormdrane
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
How to Tie a Fire-escape Knotby leonardo ismael on October 16 2007
Intro How to Tie a Fire-escape KnotThis knot is used by firemen in case of fires for example imagine a scene where the ladder on the firetruck messes up but people need to get down a five story buildingor more All they have is a long piece of rope they can safely get down with a secure knot like the fire-escape knot So why not learn it its easy to do and hard to untieif you tie it tightly
This is from the American Boys Handbook
Step 1 Get Your RopeFirst grab a piece of rope and bend it like this to make a loop in it Follow every step to the smallest detail
Step 2 Twist the RopeNow make a twist like this and hold it together
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 3 Pull Through the TwistPull the loop through the twist you just made from underneath
Step 4 Go Over the Split EndNow pull the tail through the loop
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 5 FinallyAnd finally just pull it through as pictured below
Congratulations you just learned the fire-escape knot
Step 6 Same Name Not KnotThis is another knot called the fire-escape knot this shouldnt be your result
Related Instructables
House FireEscape Plan(video) byWhatHappensNowAdvice
ParacordLadder wWooden Rungsby josestude
Bed SheetEscape Rope byjessehensel
rope ladder(glow-in-the-dark version) bymikeasaurus
HeadlockEscape 2(video) byjohnnyrockstah
QuickFirestarter byMattandJora
Trail sauna byjakee117
How to Kill FireAnts andCommitGenocide byKentsOkay
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Climb Safe With A Figure 8 Knotby mattste on February 23 2010
Intro Climb Safe With A Figure 8 Knot There are many things that a beginning climber needs to know including several important knots Perhaps the most essential knot is the Figure 8 Follow Through Thistutorial will demonstrate how to correctly harness yourself to a rope using a Figure 8 Follow Through knot This knot is used primarily by rock climbers to provide a life-line Since this knot is used as a life-line it is very important to be able to tie it correctly (Your life could depend upon it)
Dont worry with this tutorial and about 5 minutes of practice you can have this knot mastered
Things you will need
- Climbing Harness- Climbing Rope
If you are wanting to go climbing and dont already have these items they can be purchased for about $25 each at most outdoor sporting goods stores If you are merelylooking to learn the knot a belt loop and a rope (about five feet long) will do
Image Notes1 Climbing Harness2 Climbing Rope
Step 1 Dealing With The RopeThroughout this tutorial I will be discussing different parts of the rope To make these instructions as clear as possible I will define a few terms that I will use throughoutthe tutorial The Anchor End of the rope will generally be at the top of the images This is the end that would be anchored to the wall or rock and does not move Wewill not be doing much with the anchored end The Tail End of the rope is the opposite end that we will be dealing with I will call this the tail for short
Now that we have some terms to work with lets get started
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 2 Tying The First Figure 8This knot has several parts to it The first part of the knot is just tying a basic figure 8 To tie the first figure 8 there are four simple steps
1 - Using the tail make a loop over the rope (as shown in the first picture) keeping in mind that there should be about 3 ft of slack on the tail end
2 - Wrap the tail back this time go under the anchored end (As shown in the second picture)
3 - Bring the tail down through the first loop (As shown in the third picture)
4 - Finally pull the two ends to make the knot a little bit tighter and easier to deal with (Shown in the fourth picture)
After these four steps you should end up with a knot that resembles a figure 8
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 3 Looping Into The Harness In order to secure the rope to the harness simply thread the tail end of the rope through the front loop in the harness as shown in the picture below This step isobviously very important
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 4 Following Back Through The Figure 8After looping the rope through the harness you have to thread the tail end of the rope back through the knot following the first figure 8 I have divided this process intofive smaller steps in order to make it more clear
1 - Coming form underneath the knot bring the tail up through the near loop and to the left behind the anchored end of the rope (Shown in the first picture)
2 - Wrap the tail around the anchored end back to the right and down through the adjacent loop (Shown in the second picture)
3 - You simply need to bring the tail back over the top of the knot to the left (Shown in the third picture)
4 - Bring the tail end up through the far loop following the anchored end (Shown in the fourth picture)
5 - Finally pull the knot tight (Shown in the fifth picture)
As you can see the first four pictures are simply tracing the knot back through with the tail end
For the last part while you pull the knot tight you may want to make small adjustments and rearrange how it all fits together If the knot does not lay perfectly smoothand tight its NOT a big deal
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 5 Finishing The Knot After completing the Figure 8 knot you will want to somehow secure the tail end of the rope out of the way There are a couple different ways to do this the way that Iwill demonstrate is using whats called a Stopper Knot This secondary knot is similar to a Fishermans knot and is pretty simple I have once again divided thisprocess into several smaller steps
1 - Start by wrapping the tail end around the anchored end (As shown in the first picture)
2 - Wrap the tail back underneath the two vertical segments (As shown in the second picture)
3 - Simply repeat the first two steps wrapping the tail around again (As shown in the third picture)
4 - This step in the fourth picture may look complicated but all you need to do is insert the tail up through the two loops that you have just made
5 - To finish off the knot you will want to slowly pull the tail end while gently pushing the bottom of the stopper knot upwards If you have successfully completed this knotit should look something like the fifth picture
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 6 Ready To Climb Now that you have mastered the Figure 8 knot you can securely harness yourself into a climbing rope Remember there are many other skills that go into setting up ananchor and belaying a climber This tutorial only covers the figure 8 knot For more information there are many great websites that demonstrate how to correctly set up asafe climbing system (Ive posted a few below) If you are a beginning climber I recommend that you read up on a few other climbing techniques Also you shouldprobably go to a climbing wall or gym where there are experienced climbers that can show you the ropes Hopefully this tutorial has been helpful Have fun and be safe
Some useful linkshttpwwwstephenprattnetAnchorsanchorshtmhttpwwwuoregonedu~oppclimbingtopicsanchorshtmlhttpwwwabc-of-rockclimbingcomhowtoclimbingtechniquesasp
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Related Instructables
How to Tie aFigure EightKnot byTactical_Pyro
Paracord KnotDisplay Bord byJamie bagn
Basic KnotsGuide byzorro3355
How to Climb aTree (withprussiks) bystasterisk
How to climb atree (using onlyrope) thefunsimple wayby louieaw
How to get arope into a tree(withoutclimbing it) byvitex
How to tievarious knots byadaviel
How to make arope swing byjdub0928
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Turks Head Knots on a Bottleby sklnxbones on July 6 2010
Intro Turks Head Knots on a BottleThis is the finished project A bottle decorated with three Turks Head Knots There are only three knots on this bottle The RED and the BLUE knots are each a 20 Bightby 3 Lead Turks Head Knots The WHITE knot is a 20 Bight by 19 Lead Turks Head Knot
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 1 Supplies
Cord Lots and Lots of cord I cant tell you how much each bottle is differentBottle Washed and Dried inside and out Make sure to remove all water spotsThreaded Needle Cord screws into the threads at the base of the needlePegs I use brass rivets used as a map to tie the Turks Head KnotsHole Punch Used to punch holes in the painters tape to hold the pegsPainters Tape To hold the pegs in place and to make your map for the Turks Head KnotsMarker To write on the painters tapeCloth Towel To remove finger prints and dirt from your bottleKrazy Glue or Super Glue This is used to secure the knots in place to the bottle
OPTIONAL BUT HIGHLY RECOMMENDEDI use the Turks Head Cookbook from KnotToolcom
Step 2 PreparationYou will need to find a bottle you like I used an empty instant tea bottle of course washed and dried (I like to put the bottle in the oven for a few minutes to dry the insidewithout water spots Take off the lid and do not put lid in the oven) Now measure the circumference of the bottle Take a cord and tightly wrap the cord around the bottleMark where the ends meet and use a ruler to measure the length of the cord For my instant tea bottle the circumference is 27cm I know from past knots that I have tiedthat I want my knot to have 20 Bights in the top and bottom (bands) knots I am going to use the Bights in the (bands) knots to tie the middle knot Now divide the numberof Bights (20) into the size of the circumference (27) to get the space between each Bight (135) With me so far
Now take two pieces of painters tape using a ruler measure out the length of the circumference and mark the length on the both pieces of tape Next you will mark thespace between each Bight on the tape
Step 3 Adding the PegsI like to use pegs when tying Turks Head Knots it just makes tying the knot easier
These are what I use for pegs
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 4 Adding Pegs to the TapeNow take a hole punch to cut holes in the tape where the lines meet You will place the pegs in the holes
Insert a peg in each hole and carefully stick the first piece of tape to the bottle
Step 5 Adding the 2nd row of pegsNow do the same thing with the second piece of tape The numbers on each piece of tape must line up
This picture shows you what you should have now This odd looking thing will be your map to tie the Turks Head Knot And this is the end of Step 1
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 6 Tying the first Turks Head KnotUsing the Turks Head Cookbook follow the numbers going over and under as indicated in the book I chose a 20 Bight by 3 Lead knot which will give me a nice bandaround the bottle Once the ends meet you have made one complete knot Tape the running end of your cord and start removing the pegs and the tape
Step 7 Remove the pegs and the tapeBe careful not to untie the knot as you remove the pegs and tape from the bottle Continue to remove all the pegs and remove the tape from the bottle At this point theknot will be very loose and will need to be tightened up
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 8 Remove the slack from the knotHere you can see just how much the knot expanded Starting with the standing end begin to pull the slack out of the knot going towards the running end of the cordDo not expect to pull all the slack out at once You may have to make 3 - 5 attempts at removing the slack out of the knot DO NOT remove all of the slack out of the knotIn order to make the bands we will have to triple the Turks Head Knot We will do this by following the knot three times The threaded needle will really come in handyhere
Step 9 Triple the KnotOnce you have made three passes of the Turks Head Knot use your needle to go under your knot about half the circumference and cut the cord The knot will be tightenough to hide the tail in placeTIP I carefully add a couple of drops of super glue UNDER the band to hold them in place and keep them from sliding around in the nextsteps A drop or two in 3 or 4 places around the band should be enough
Step 10 Add the second knotNow repeat this whole step for the second bandWhen tying the second band you must make sure the Bights line up to the first band This is crucial for the next stepWipe down the bottle to make sure all your finger prints and adhesive from the tape are all removed You want to make sure your bottle is clean at this point Any dirt orfinger prints left on the bottle will be almost impossible to remove From this point on we will use gloves when tying our last knot
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 11 Maping the Top KnotStick a piece of painters tape on top of your first band leaving the bottom of the knot exposedUse a marker to count the number of Bights in your knot Instead of using the pegs we are going to use the Bights to tie our next Turks Head Knot
Step 12 Mapping the Bottom KnotDo the same thing for the bottom band but you must make sure your numbers on top and bottom line up So 1 on top should be the same position as 1 on the bottom
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 13 Adding the last knotAgain using the Turks Head Cookbook and the threaded needle you are going to follow the instructions going over and under as indicated in the book Be sure to usegloves when ever you handle the bottle
Step 14 Thats ItFor this Turks Head Knot I am using a 20 Bight by 19 Lead knot
Because of the amount of cord you are working with your cord will get twisted and knotted You will have to un-twist the cord often Its a pain in the rear but it has to bedone And it has to be done alot
Continue to tie the knot until you finish the knot If you have the cord and the patience you can double or triple the knot When you are done use your needle to hide theends under your bands Cut the ends and your DONE
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Related Instructables
Monkeys FistFloatingKeychain byjokerlz
How To Make ATurks headKnot WithParacord byDoggie Stylish
Tying Trivetsout of Rope forHoliday Gifts bykylemarsh
Paracord KnotDisplay Bord byJamie bagn
How to Make ATurks Head(Photos) bymchs60chip
A pocket full ofknots byKiteman
Monkeys fistknot AND themonkey byjonathan111
TiteTie is theTruckers Knoton Steroids bytitetie
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Larks head noose -- an easy useful knot that tightens and loosensby Larry Breed on February 19 2009
Intro Larks head noose -- an easy useful knot that tightens and loosensI thought I knew all the basic knots but then I was taught this incredibly useful simple knot Its good for tying up the neck of a bag that you want to repeatedly open andsecurely close Its good for tying around a springy bundle that will need tightening and retightening And its easy to undo
Ive looked at knot literature but havent found a name for this so I named it The basic knot is well known its called a larks head Since all Ive done is to slip the twoends through the larks head to make a noose I call it that
WARNING Dont use this knot when human safety would depend on it Climbers and mountaineers have well-tested reliable knots for such situations
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Image Notes1 To tighten further step on this side of the larks head and pull the free ends
Step 1 Double the cord overThe larks head noose requires enough cord to go twice around your bundle plus a foot or two Find the center and double it over Sailors call this a bight
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 2 Form the larks headComing from below the bight hook your thumb and forefinger over the two sides Reach outward and downward and pinch your fingertips together underneath thedoubled cord
Youve made a larks head Move the crossing cord a little farther from your hand so theres a clear opening through the two half-loops
Step 3 Form the nooseSlip the two ends of the cord through the opening we were just talking about Pull the larks head tight so it grips the two cords Find something that needs constrictingand put the noose around it
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 4 Tightening retightening and lockingSlide the knot against the bundle If its not tight enough to keep from slipping tighten it by holding it in one hand and tugging on the cords one at a time with the otherhand Notice that you can slide the knot out again for instance to re-open the bag you just tied shut For some applications this may be as tight as you need it
A springy bundle probably still feels loose If so compress the bundle and get a new grip on the cords Rest your foot on the bundle on the cords nearest the larks headand pull to slide the larks head tighter
To make the knot more permanent you can lock it Make an overhand in the cord ends (Exactly like the first step in tying shoelaces) With your foot still on the bundlepull on the cords and move your hands apart until youre pulling in opposite directions You have just locked the larks head and you can trust it to stay that way()
But lets say that later on you want to loosen the locked knot Again put your foot on the bundle and cords nearest the larks head hold the two cord ends together andpull This makes a little slack between the overhand and the larks head so you can untie the overhand
In twine or small string the locking overhand knot may be difficult to undo Use a shoelace knot instead of an overhand and itll unlock easily
() If youre using slippery cord like polypropylene an overhand may not lock securely You may want to tie another overhand knot For added security wrap a shortlength of duct tape around the two cords close to the knot
Image Notes1 To tighten further step on this side of the larks head and pull the free ends
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Related Instructables
TRX fromParacordChallengeAccepted bythrake
A pocket full ofknots byKiteman
Lens CapLanyard by~teknoarsonist~ how to tie a
noose byawesume
AdjustableParacordGlassesLanyard byjdtwelve12
HangmansNoose PackClosure byPopEye42
Paraleash - ADog LeashFrom Paracordby The Ideanator
How to make arugged andhandy ParacordBelt by Jake22
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 8 Studsail BendThe studsail bend is like the fishermans bend but the second hitch is also secured under the round turn making it even more secure against working loose when undertension
AdvantagesVery secure against working looseDisadvantagesHard to make under tensionHard to undo under tension
Step 9 Figure-8 KnotThe figure-eight knot is used to prevent an end of rope from passing through a block (pulley) Sometimes called a stopper knot
The double figure-8 knot is used in rock climbing as an alternative to a bowline to secure a climbing harness to the end of a safety rope The double knot is made bymaking a single knot then tracing back around the knot with the free end after passing it around the harness loop
AdvantagesEasy to verify by inspectionNot prone to work loose
DisadvantagesSlow to make and undoCannot be made under load
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 10 Prussic KnotThe prussic knot may be used as a climbing ascender - when made around a vertical rope as shown downwards tension on the ends locks the knot while release oftension allows it to be slid up the rope A pair of prussic knots on foot loops may be used in tandem to climb a rope
UsesClimbing a ropeTaking up tension to free a riding turn on a winch
Step 11 Reef KnotThe reef knot or square knot is used to tie a bundle of material together It must be made around something - it should not be used to tie two free ropes togetherbecause it can easily capsizeIt should not be used to make a loop unless it can be tensioned around a solid object It should not be used around a person - use a bowline instead A capsized reefknot will slip easily and could constrict and cause severe injury
UsesReefing a sail (tying the unused portion around a spar)Securing a furled sail to a spar (sail ties)Wrapping a parcelTying shoelaces
AdvantagesMay be made under moderate load
DisadvantagesCapsizes (works free) if used improperlyCan seize up under load when wet
Tying the knot
Capsizing a reef knot
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 12 CleatsThis is not a knot but is very common on boatsThe first picture shows a rope cleated normally The second shows one with a final locking turn - the last turn is twisted before placing over the cleat so that the tensionon the rope helps secure the free end
When working with ropes under tension take a turn or two around a winch or cleat before trying to secure the end with a knot The load on the free end falls exponentiallywith each turn taken Severe injury can result if a finger or other body part is caught in a loop of rope or between a rope and another object
Step 13 Practice themIt is sometimes useful to be able to tie knots in the dark or as in this video behind your back
Related Instructables
AThird Hand forSailing or OtherThings by WadeTarzia
Paracord KnotDisplay Bord byJamie bagn
Trip LogOutriggerCanoe Sailingthe CaliforniaChannel Islandsby TimAnderson
How to Tie aFigure EightKnot byTactical_Pyro
How to build apirate ship bymdelaney3
Build a ShortDragon (16 foot3-BoardOutriggerSailing Canoe)by Wade Tarzia
repairing aheadsail by josh
How to get arope into a tree(withoutclimbing it) byvitex
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
How to Tie the Lanyard Knotby eddy14777 on January 31 2010
Intro How to Tie the Lanyard KnotMany people including myself have had trouble following the Stormdrane youtube video on tying the lanyard knot so i have done some research and found the solution
Image Notes1 Finished knot
Step 1 MaterialsAll you need is a reasonable length of para cord or whatever you wish to use
Image Notes1 One reasonable amount
Step 2 First StepThe first thing you are going to do is to make a bight that leaves you with to congruent endsThen you are going to put your ring finger through the bight
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Image Notes1 Close enough2 Bight
Step 3 Starting the KnotMake a loop just like the one in the picture and place it over the top strandBring the top strand under the bottom strand
Image Notes1 Notice the way the loop is done2 Top strand
Image Notes1 Bottom strand2 Top strand is under
Step 4 The Most Important PartNow you take the top stand from the previous picture and feed it over the first part of the loop under itself and back over the remainder of the loop
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Image Notes1 Under me2 Top strand3 This should make a diamond type shape
Step 5 DoublingNow take the bottom stand and take it around the part of the top strand nearest to the bight and than come up through the diamond shape in the middleDo the same for the top strand
Image Notes1 Top strand
Image Notes1 Both through the diamond
Step 6 FinishingWhen you take it off your finger it should look like thisWork out the slack by pulling on the bight and the two strands
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Image Notes1 Finished knot
Related Instructables
Cross KnotParacordLanyard byStormdrane
Celtic ButtonKnot (video) byStormdrane
Paracord wristlanyard madewith the snakeknot byStormdrane
Paracord ChainSinnet FastDeploy BoonieHatband (video)by Stormdrane
Zigzag SpoolingParacord (video)by Stormdrane
ParacordBoonie HatWrap (video) byStormdrane
Paracord IDbadge Lanyardby Flahusky
Cobra WeaveKey Fob bytevers94
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Four knots to make paracord into a useful toolby erik_mccray on March 27 2010
Authorerik_mccrayI am an ex-fabricator that is now a stay at home dad I love my new job but I do miss making stuff I love this site amp I am getting involved as a way to keep myskills upOn top of fad work I have also run two small business in the past One was custom sewing amp the other was as a small engine mechanicI have two votec degrees one in metal fabrication amp the other is in engine repairI look forward to getting to know everyone here
Intro Four knots to make paracord into a useful toolParacord is an awesome multitool used everywhere from the wild blue yonder to the deepest caverns But like any good tool it is only as good as the knowledge the userhas about the tool With most people out there using bungee cords amp ratchet straps it seems that paracord is being used for nothing more than friendship bracelets forgrown men This is a shame because for less then the price of a few cheap bungee cords amp some to short to be helpful straps You can get yourself hundreds of feet ofparacord
The key to getting the most out of the paracord is good knot work The first thing you need to know is what makes a good knot One is that the knot is easy amp quick to tieamp more impotant is that the knot is easy amp quick to untie The hitch class of knots is by far the best group of knots that the average person could know The four mostuseful hitch knots are the half hitch a quick simple knot that forms the base for many other knots the inline half hitch allowing you to get the most out of one length ofparacord the slippery hitch that gives you both on the fly control over tension on your paracord but also an adjustable loop that will not change unless you want it amp theinline truckers hitch instantly doubling the your pulling power
Step 1 To get started lets get some terminology that will be used defined
line= the paracord
Main line= the part of the paracord doing the work for example holding down your tarp or the long part of the paracord
Mid line= the middle of the length of the paracord
End line= the unused length of paracord or the short length of paracord
Step 2 The half hitch The half hitch is a simple way to secure a line to an anchor point like the tie down points in most trucks A half hitch is a constrictor knot meaning that the harder you pullon the line the tighter the knots grip gets Another common constrictor knot is the slip knot
Step 1 wrap your line around your anchor point Step 2 wrap the end line around the main line
Step 3 pass the end line threw the end line side of the newly formed loop
step 4 now take the slack out of the knot
step 5 to make sure the knot is secure tie another half hitch to the main line This knot is called adouble half hitch
step 6 another useful thing that can be done with the half hitch is that instead of repeating the wrap on the main line but repeating it on what you are tying to the half hitchcan be used to bind something like a stack of 2x4s
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Image Notes1 End line2 Main line3 step 1
Image Notes1 Step 2
Image Notes1 passing thew the end line side of the loop2 step 3
Image Notes1 step 5
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Image Notes1 step 6
Step 3 The mid line half hitch The mid line half hitch is for when the length of line is to long for the job at hand amp you dont want to have to cut the line to size or you are using multiple anchor pointswith one length of line
Step 1 double up the line at the point in the length you wish to make the knot
Step 2 wrap the doubled up portion of line around your anchor point The doubled up length is now now the end line
Step 3 now tie just as you did for the regular half hitch repeat the knot to make a double half hitch for security
Image Notes1 A mid line double half hitch
Image Notes1 step 1
Image Notes1 The end line2 step 2
Image Notes1 Step 3
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 4 The slippery hitch The slippery hitch is a great knot for adjusting tension on the main line or for having an adjustable fixed loop To adjust the knot simply slide the knot up or down the mainline
Step 1 wrap your line around the anchor point or just double over the line to form a loop
Step 2 wrap the end line around the main line three times Wrapping in the direction of the anchor point or loop
Step 3 put together the two lines making up the loop amp wrap the two lines one time with the end line
Step 4 pass the end line thew the last loop formed covering the two lined of the loop
Step 5 pull the knot tite
step 6 to adjust the size of the loop or main line tension grab the knot amp slide it up or down the main line
Image Notes1 grab just the knot its self to adjust it2 step 5
Image Notes1 step 1
Image Notes1 step 2
Image Notes1 step 3
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Image Notes1 step 4
Image Notes1 grab just the knot its self to adjust it2 step 5
Image Notes1 same knot as in last pic Just slid up2 step 6
Step 5 The mid line truchers hitch The truckers hitch is a great way to double the pulling force on a line There are many ways to tie this knot the problem with most of them is that at some point you aregoing to have to pass the end line through a loop on the main line that is acting like a pulley to double your pulling force this is great if you are making the knot close tothe end of your line but if you are using a 300 length of line amp want to make the knot in the first ten feet having to pass 290 of line thew a loop is a pain But with a fewhalf hitches you will not have to pass the end line threw any loop on the main line
step 1 wrap your line around the anchor point then double over your end line laying the top of the loop over the main line
Step 2 double up your main line amp lay the loop over the loop made by the end line
step 3 in main line above the knot twist in a loop
step 4 put main line loop thew the loop made in step 3 amp pull this loop tight over your main line loop forming a half hitch Repeat step 3 amp 4 to make a doublehalf hitch
step 5 To use the knot just pull down on the end line to put tension on the main line
step 6 after you have the main line snug tie a mid line double half hitch around the two lines forming the loop at the end of the main line with the end line
step 7 Tie a double half hitch with the end line around the end loop of the mid line half hitch of step 6 using the same method as used in steps 3 amp 4
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Image Notes1 the end of step 6
Image Notes1 main line2 end line3 step 1
Image Notes1 main line loop2 end line loop
Image Notes1 step 3
Image Notes1 step 4
Image Notes1 step 4 at the end with a double half hitch on the main loop
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Image Notes1 pull here2 step 5
Image Notes1 the start of step 6
Image Notes1 the end of step 6
Image Notes1 step 72 now the rest of the line is free to do more work
Related Instructables
Paracord KnotDisplay Bord byJamie bagn
ChokelessAdjustableParacord DogLeash byPizzaman101
ParacordLadder wWooden Rungsby josestude
tie a paracordshackle grip byitri45
ParacordPrussik Belt byJavaNut13
TiteTie is theTruckers Knoton Steroids bytitetie
ID Lanyard(Photos) byeschmunk
Dog Toys forHeavy Chewersby J3443RY
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Figure 8 knot and double 8 knotby jonathan111 on November 28 2007
Intro Figure 8 knot and double 8 knotI will show you how to tie a figure 8 knot and a figure 8 follow through
Step 1 Stating the knotThis is a simple knot so just follow the pictures
Step 2 Finishing the knotCross the string under and then push it through the hole Pull tightly unless you are going to do the follow through and leave it somewhat loose
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 3 The follow through knotThe follow through knot should be tied around something brought back and followed through the path of the 8 knot Look at the pictures Basically follow through the 8knot backwards
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Related Instructables
Climb Safe WithA Figure 8Knot by mattste A pocket full of
knots byKiteman
How to Tie aFigure EightKnot byTactical_Pyro
Paracord KnotDisplay Bord byJamie bagn
Cross KnotParacordLanyard byStormdrane
How to Tie aFire-escapeKnot by leonardoismael
Truckers HitchTHE mostawesome knoton the planetby schneidp20
Paracord ZipperPuller byrepeet13
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Truckers Hitch THE most awesome knot on the planetby schneidp20 on October 12 2008
Authorschneidp20I like building stuff Trouble is there just isnt enough time to build everything Sigh
Intro Truckers Hitch THE most awesome knot on the planetYes I know that there are plenty of other cool knots out there many of which I literally couldnt live wo I rock climb However this knot is unlike any other Plus Ineeded a grabber for my Instructable -) (BTW this ISNT a climbing knot) And in truth it isnt a knot by itself but rather a system of common knots
Have you ever tried to tie something down for transporting but just couldnt get the lines tight andor during transport the lines would continually loosen Then this is theknot for you I learned this knot back in the 70s when specialty car racks and ratchet straps were rare or unheard of I initially used it to tie a canoe on a car rack bothattaching to the rack as well as the lines to the bow and stern of the canoe Even with all the new gizmos available today this knot still shines because all you need is arope and ropes dont hum in the wind like straps
The unique aspect of this knot is that it gives you a 2-1 mechanical advantage when tightening the rope Be careful though You can actually damage some thingsbecause of the mechanical advantage This knot holds fast and is easy to untie hallmark traits of any good knot
Below you see the finished knot system well break it apart in the steps that follow
Image Notes1 1st anchor point a bowline2 loop3 securing knots 2 half hitches4 securing loose end with a fishermans knot5 2nd anchor point (should be round)
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Image Notes1 X marks the spot
Step 1 Initial setupThe first step is to anchor one end of the rope and then loop the rope around a 2nd anchor point
For attaching to the 1st anchor point I chose bowline a close 2 on my list -) There are other instructables on that one so I wont bore you here
The 2nd anchor really should be round because it serves as a pulley in this block and tackle type knot Ive used it on sharp anchor points and it doesnt work as well
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 2 Creating a slip knotTie a slip knot somewhere between the two anchor points Correct placement of the slip knot takes some experience to judge it correctly Typically I place it too close tothe 2nd anchor point and end up with not enough room to work with If the knot ends up too far from 2nd anchor point you can extend the knot by enlarging the loop
Be sure you tie the slip knot as shown You may not be able to untie other knots
In this small example the slip knot is uncharacteristically close to the 1st anchor point
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 3 Tightening and securingThe loose end of the rope that went around the 2nd anchor point goes through the slip knot loop Pull the loose end to the desired tension and secure with two halfhitches
Note To allow better view of the knots the rope isnt really tightened in this example
Step 4 Securing loose endThe final knot is just to secure the loose end somehow I chose a fishermans knot to do this
To tie a fishermans knot the rope goes around twice and goes under the X created by the loops Pull the loose end to tighten Finally slide the knot to put tension onthe half hitches
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Image Notes1 X marks the spot
Step 5 FinishedThere you have it I guarantee that the first time you really use this knot (not just practice) you will be amazed at how well it works and youll wish you knew this knot along time ago You may even come over to my side and declare that is is THE most awesome knot on the planet -)
Enjoy and happy haulingDave
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Related Instructables
TiteTie is theTruckers Knoton Steroids bytitetie
Four knots tomake paracordinto a usefultool byerik_mccray
Modify yourbike rack tocarry a sunfishor other boat byewilhelm
SurfboardHammock byGermy
GiganticHalloweenSpider Web bynolte919
How To Tie ASpiders Hitch(video) by back-cast
Three-hitch mathair ornamentby michiexile TRX from
ParacordChallengeAccepted bythrake
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Carry any Bottle with a JUG KNOT Handleby hpstoutharrow on September 17 2009
Intro Carry any Bottle with a JUG KNOT HandleTie a JUG KNOT around a water bottle soda bottle or aluminum bottle to make a secure carrying strap
Re-purpose any container into a reusable water bottle by adding a convenient carrying strap This Instructable will demonstrate how to tie a JUG knot which like its namesuggests is meant to properly secure around the neck of a container
With some cord and the knowledge of this knot you will be able add a handle lanyard or carabiner loop to any of your favorite beverages to carry them on the go
It works perfectly for those disposable water bottles and who knows once you add some colorful cord to the plain old clear water bottle you just might beinclined to refill it and use it again(Check out pictures 4amp5 below)
In addition to plastic beverage bottles like pop water and sports drinks you can turn those rugged aluminum beer bottles into a backpacking canteen
Those of you familiar with my previous aluminum bottle InstructablesROLLED RIM METAL TUMBLERhttpwwwinstructablescomidAluminum-Bottle-Tumbler-Cup-Cook-PotALUMINUM BOTTLE LIGHTWEIGHT ALCOHOL STOVEhttpwwwinstructablescomidAluminum-Bottle-Alcohol-Stovewill recognize the water canteen shown below as a re-purposed aluminum beer bottle Here I have added a painted surface treatment to turn it into a proper lookingwater bottle More on that in steps 13 14 15
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 1 Getting StartedCord size is important Select a small medium weight cord like the one shown here It is a general purpose camp cord sold at most sporting goods stores (shoelacesmight also work)
Do not use a heavy cord or rope because the larger diameter will not tuck under the relatively small lip at the top of the bottleneck and the bottle will fall out
Also the smaller cord cinches tight on itself and will not loosen accidentally
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 2 Form a BightThe next steps show how to tie a JUG KNOT It is the basic step for adding a carrying strap It is also the anchor point for any additional fancy bottle trussing you maywant to add
JUG KNOT Step 1
Form a Bight in the center of a length of cord Bight is a knot term for a loop or bend in the rope In this case the main Bight in this knot is highlighted with a white mark Imakes it easier to follow its path in these steps
The running ends of the cord should be equal length
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 3 Pull the Bight downPULL the Bight DOWN forming two Loops
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 4 Cross the LoopsCROSS the right Loop OVER the left Loop
Step 5 Pass the Bight under the 1st loopTake the main Bight and pass it UNDER the left Loop
Step 6 Weave the BightWEAVE the Bight OVER the portion of the right Loop and UNDER the portion of the left Loop
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 7 Extend the BightExtend the Bight OVER the outer portion of the right Loop
Step 8 Flip the Right Loop behindAdditional colored identification points have been added to the loops to follow their travel in these next two steps
The right Loop Yellow marker is FLIPPED BEHIND the knot and ends up on the far left side of the knot
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 9 Flip the 2nd loop in frontRaise the green marker (located on what was formerly the left loop) and pull it down and to the right FLIPPING IT IN FRONT of the knot
Note the blue portion of the this loop will pass around the outside of the yellow portion of the first loop
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Image Notes1 Center of knot that will tighten around the bottles neck
Step 10 Remove SlackNote where the blue green amp yellow markers end up
Start to remove the slack in the loops by pulling the original main Bight (white marker top right) and the two free standing ends at the bottom
the bottle neck will pass through the very center of the knot
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Image Notes1 Center of knot that will tighten around the bottles neck
Step 11 Tighten the KnotAfter removing the slack insert the bottle neck and finish tightening
The knot should look like this before slipping it over the bottle
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 12 Secure on bottle neckThis is the finished knot shown on the neck of various containers
The loop end and the two free standing ends can be tied together to create a carrying handle (last picture below)
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 13 Aluminum Bottle Water Bottle
The next few steps show the features of an aluminum beer bottle re-purposed as a water bottle canteen It is one of many containers that can be reused as a camp waterbottle
The bottle was lightly sanded masked and then pained with a hammered finished paint to create an interesting surface texture
Image Notes1 Textured finish paint makes an interesting grip-able surface2 Masked with tape for painting3 Masked with tape for painting
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Image Notes1 Dowel used for holding the bottle during painting
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 14 Tethered Cork StopperUse a wine bottle man made Cork as a stopper for your aluminum water bottleNote Use a cork that was removed from the wine bottle without the corkscrew penetrating through the bottom end of the cork (A hole all the way through the cork willcause it to leak) Use the unpierced end of the cork inside the water bottle
Drill a hole through the sides of the Cork Thread the cord through the hole to the center of the cord Use the cork as the main Bight and tie the Jug knot as shown inthe beginning steps
Now the cork is tethered to the bottle and will not get lost or fall on the ground
A Carabiner clip passes through the other cord end to attache the water bottle to you belt or pack
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 15 Trussed for TransportThis is another hanging method for carrying your aluminum bottle water canteen A Jug knot is tied conventionally around the neck
The running ends of the knot however are pulled down towards the bottom of the bottle A Barrel Knot is tied about 34 the way down the side of the bottle A squareknot is tied on the bottom of the knot to keep the two running ends tight against the sides of the bottle
I like the look of the accent colored cord running down the sides of the bottle and the fact that the bottle hangs from the belt upside down It adds to its uniqueness
The last picture shows another truss variation
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 16 AdvancedBelow is a bottle with some additional trussing You can be creative as you want It all starts with a re-purposed container and the Jug Knot (and enough cord)
Related Instructables
AluminumBottle TumblerCup amp Cook Potfor an AlcoholStove byhpstoutharrow
Water BottleBelt Clip byuglymike Duct Tape
Water Bottle byrabidsquire2
AluminumBottle AlcoholStove byhpstoutharrow
DIYGlass WaterBottle byCulturespy
Solar WaterHeater forBackpackingUsing WaterBottles and aCar Shade bykopomeroy
Duct tape waterbottle holder(Photos) by pinkmarshmallow
How to make aCamelPack withan old plasticbottle bywillrandship
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Basic Knots Guideby zorro3355 on April 29 2008
Intro Basic Knots Guidehi
Step 1 Thumb knotThe most simple knotUsed as a stopper and prevent ropes from fraying
Step 2 Reef KnotUsed to tie two ropes of equal thickness togetherIt is pretty easy to tie and untie but under tentionit may be diffcult to untieIt is also not sutible for smoothropes(egnylon ropes)
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 3 Figure of eightused as a stopperprevent ropes from fraying and its more secure than tumb knot its is also used to tie Caribinas to ropes and is often used in rock climbing
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 4 Timber hitchused for pulling logs
Step 5 Clove hitchUsed to tie a rope onto a pole or logThe pole must be roundThe pole lust be thicker then the rope itself
(greatly used during pioneering)
Step 6 Sheet bandused to tie ropes of different thickness together(works on same thickness of ropes too)
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 7 Sheep shankTo shorten RopesTo prevent middle fraying
Step 8 Slip knotWhippingUsed as a grip for pulling things(when tied on a stick or small pole)(marlin spike hitch)
Related Instructables
Rope Rings byhpstoutharrow
How to Tie aFigure EightKnot byTactical_Pyro
Whippin (WestCountry Style)by tim_n
SurvivalBracelet(Updated) bytevers94
HangmansNoose PackClosure byPopEye42
Turkey on aTripod byhpstoutharrow
SurvivalBracelet II bytevers94 Zigzag Spooling
Paracord (video)by Stormdrane
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
How to Tie a Fire-escape Knotby leonardo ismael on October 16 2007
Intro How to Tie a Fire-escape KnotThis knot is used by firemen in case of fires for example imagine a scene where the ladder on the firetruck messes up but people need to get down a five story buildingor more All they have is a long piece of rope they can safely get down with a secure knot like the fire-escape knot So why not learn it its easy to do and hard to untieif you tie it tightly
This is from the American Boys Handbook
Step 1 Get Your RopeFirst grab a piece of rope and bend it like this to make a loop in it Follow every step to the smallest detail
Step 2 Twist the RopeNow make a twist like this and hold it together
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 3 Pull Through the TwistPull the loop through the twist you just made from underneath
Step 4 Go Over the Split EndNow pull the tail through the loop
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 5 FinallyAnd finally just pull it through as pictured below
Congratulations you just learned the fire-escape knot
Step 6 Same Name Not KnotThis is another knot called the fire-escape knot this shouldnt be your result
Related Instructables
House FireEscape Plan(video) byWhatHappensNowAdvice
ParacordLadder wWooden Rungsby josestude
Bed SheetEscape Rope byjessehensel
rope ladder(glow-in-the-dark version) bymikeasaurus
HeadlockEscape 2(video) byjohnnyrockstah
QuickFirestarter byMattandJora
Trail sauna byjakee117
How to Kill FireAnts andCommitGenocide byKentsOkay
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Climb Safe With A Figure 8 Knotby mattste on February 23 2010
Intro Climb Safe With A Figure 8 Knot There are many things that a beginning climber needs to know including several important knots Perhaps the most essential knot is the Figure 8 Follow Through Thistutorial will demonstrate how to correctly harness yourself to a rope using a Figure 8 Follow Through knot This knot is used primarily by rock climbers to provide a life-line Since this knot is used as a life-line it is very important to be able to tie it correctly (Your life could depend upon it)
Dont worry with this tutorial and about 5 minutes of practice you can have this knot mastered
Things you will need
- Climbing Harness- Climbing Rope
If you are wanting to go climbing and dont already have these items they can be purchased for about $25 each at most outdoor sporting goods stores If you are merelylooking to learn the knot a belt loop and a rope (about five feet long) will do
Image Notes1 Climbing Harness2 Climbing Rope
Step 1 Dealing With The RopeThroughout this tutorial I will be discussing different parts of the rope To make these instructions as clear as possible I will define a few terms that I will use throughoutthe tutorial The Anchor End of the rope will generally be at the top of the images This is the end that would be anchored to the wall or rock and does not move Wewill not be doing much with the anchored end The Tail End of the rope is the opposite end that we will be dealing with I will call this the tail for short
Now that we have some terms to work with lets get started
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 2 Tying The First Figure 8This knot has several parts to it The first part of the knot is just tying a basic figure 8 To tie the first figure 8 there are four simple steps
1 - Using the tail make a loop over the rope (as shown in the first picture) keeping in mind that there should be about 3 ft of slack on the tail end
2 - Wrap the tail back this time go under the anchored end (As shown in the second picture)
3 - Bring the tail down through the first loop (As shown in the third picture)
4 - Finally pull the two ends to make the knot a little bit tighter and easier to deal with (Shown in the fourth picture)
After these four steps you should end up with a knot that resembles a figure 8
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 3 Looping Into The Harness In order to secure the rope to the harness simply thread the tail end of the rope through the front loop in the harness as shown in the picture below This step isobviously very important
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 4 Following Back Through The Figure 8After looping the rope through the harness you have to thread the tail end of the rope back through the knot following the first figure 8 I have divided this process intofive smaller steps in order to make it more clear
1 - Coming form underneath the knot bring the tail up through the near loop and to the left behind the anchored end of the rope (Shown in the first picture)
2 - Wrap the tail around the anchored end back to the right and down through the adjacent loop (Shown in the second picture)
3 - You simply need to bring the tail back over the top of the knot to the left (Shown in the third picture)
4 - Bring the tail end up through the far loop following the anchored end (Shown in the fourth picture)
5 - Finally pull the knot tight (Shown in the fifth picture)
As you can see the first four pictures are simply tracing the knot back through with the tail end
For the last part while you pull the knot tight you may want to make small adjustments and rearrange how it all fits together If the knot does not lay perfectly smoothand tight its NOT a big deal
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 5 Finishing The Knot After completing the Figure 8 knot you will want to somehow secure the tail end of the rope out of the way There are a couple different ways to do this the way that Iwill demonstrate is using whats called a Stopper Knot This secondary knot is similar to a Fishermans knot and is pretty simple I have once again divided thisprocess into several smaller steps
1 - Start by wrapping the tail end around the anchored end (As shown in the first picture)
2 - Wrap the tail back underneath the two vertical segments (As shown in the second picture)
3 - Simply repeat the first two steps wrapping the tail around again (As shown in the third picture)
4 - This step in the fourth picture may look complicated but all you need to do is insert the tail up through the two loops that you have just made
5 - To finish off the knot you will want to slowly pull the tail end while gently pushing the bottom of the stopper knot upwards If you have successfully completed this knotit should look something like the fifth picture
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 6 Ready To Climb Now that you have mastered the Figure 8 knot you can securely harness yourself into a climbing rope Remember there are many other skills that go into setting up ananchor and belaying a climber This tutorial only covers the figure 8 knot For more information there are many great websites that demonstrate how to correctly set up asafe climbing system (Ive posted a few below) If you are a beginning climber I recommend that you read up on a few other climbing techniques Also you shouldprobably go to a climbing wall or gym where there are experienced climbers that can show you the ropes Hopefully this tutorial has been helpful Have fun and be safe
Some useful linkshttpwwwstephenprattnetAnchorsanchorshtmhttpwwwuoregonedu~oppclimbingtopicsanchorshtmlhttpwwwabc-of-rockclimbingcomhowtoclimbingtechniquesasp
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Related Instructables
How to Tie aFigure EightKnot byTactical_Pyro
Paracord KnotDisplay Bord byJamie bagn
Basic KnotsGuide byzorro3355
How to Climb aTree (withprussiks) bystasterisk
How to climb atree (using onlyrope) thefunsimple wayby louieaw
How to get arope into a tree(withoutclimbing it) byvitex
How to tievarious knots byadaviel
How to make arope swing byjdub0928
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Turks Head Knots on a Bottleby sklnxbones on July 6 2010
Intro Turks Head Knots on a BottleThis is the finished project A bottle decorated with three Turks Head Knots There are only three knots on this bottle The RED and the BLUE knots are each a 20 Bightby 3 Lead Turks Head Knots The WHITE knot is a 20 Bight by 19 Lead Turks Head Knot
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 1 Supplies
Cord Lots and Lots of cord I cant tell you how much each bottle is differentBottle Washed and Dried inside and out Make sure to remove all water spotsThreaded Needle Cord screws into the threads at the base of the needlePegs I use brass rivets used as a map to tie the Turks Head KnotsHole Punch Used to punch holes in the painters tape to hold the pegsPainters Tape To hold the pegs in place and to make your map for the Turks Head KnotsMarker To write on the painters tapeCloth Towel To remove finger prints and dirt from your bottleKrazy Glue or Super Glue This is used to secure the knots in place to the bottle
OPTIONAL BUT HIGHLY RECOMMENDEDI use the Turks Head Cookbook from KnotToolcom
Step 2 PreparationYou will need to find a bottle you like I used an empty instant tea bottle of course washed and dried (I like to put the bottle in the oven for a few minutes to dry the insidewithout water spots Take off the lid and do not put lid in the oven) Now measure the circumference of the bottle Take a cord and tightly wrap the cord around the bottleMark where the ends meet and use a ruler to measure the length of the cord For my instant tea bottle the circumference is 27cm I know from past knots that I have tiedthat I want my knot to have 20 Bights in the top and bottom (bands) knots I am going to use the Bights in the (bands) knots to tie the middle knot Now divide the numberof Bights (20) into the size of the circumference (27) to get the space between each Bight (135) With me so far
Now take two pieces of painters tape using a ruler measure out the length of the circumference and mark the length on the both pieces of tape Next you will mark thespace between each Bight on the tape
Step 3 Adding the PegsI like to use pegs when tying Turks Head Knots it just makes tying the knot easier
These are what I use for pegs
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 4 Adding Pegs to the TapeNow take a hole punch to cut holes in the tape where the lines meet You will place the pegs in the holes
Insert a peg in each hole and carefully stick the first piece of tape to the bottle
Step 5 Adding the 2nd row of pegsNow do the same thing with the second piece of tape The numbers on each piece of tape must line up
This picture shows you what you should have now This odd looking thing will be your map to tie the Turks Head Knot And this is the end of Step 1
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 6 Tying the first Turks Head KnotUsing the Turks Head Cookbook follow the numbers going over and under as indicated in the book I chose a 20 Bight by 3 Lead knot which will give me a nice bandaround the bottle Once the ends meet you have made one complete knot Tape the running end of your cord and start removing the pegs and the tape
Step 7 Remove the pegs and the tapeBe careful not to untie the knot as you remove the pegs and tape from the bottle Continue to remove all the pegs and remove the tape from the bottle At this point theknot will be very loose and will need to be tightened up
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 8 Remove the slack from the knotHere you can see just how much the knot expanded Starting with the standing end begin to pull the slack out of the knot going towards the running end of the cordDo not expect to pull all the slack out at once You may have to make 3 - 5 attempts at removing the slack out of the knot DO NOT remove all of the slack out of the knotIn order to make the bands we will have to triple the Turks Head Knot We will do this by following the knot three times The threaded needle will really come in handyhere
Step 9 Triple the KnotOnce you have made three passes of the Turks Head Knot use your needle to go under your knot about half the circumference and cut the cord The knot will be tightenough to hide the tail in placeTIP I carefully add a couple of drops of super glue UNDER the band to hold them in place and keep them from sliding around in the nextsteps A drop or two in 3 or 4 places around the band should be enough
Step 10 Add the second knotNow repeat this whole step for the second bandWhen tying the second band you must make sure the Bights line up to the first band This is crucial for the next stepWipe down the bottle to make sure all your finger prints and adhesive from the tape are all removed You want to make sure your bottle is clean at this point Any dirt orfinger prints left on the bottle will be almost impossible to remove From this point on we will use gloves when tying our last knot
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 11 Maping the Top KnotStick a piece of painters tape on top of your first band leaving the bottom of the knot exposedUse a marker to count the number of Bights in your knot Instead of using the pegs we are going to use the Bights to tie our next Turks Head Knot
Step 12 Mapping the Bottom KnotDo the same thing for the bottom band but you must make sure your numbers on top and bottom line up So 1 on top should be the same position as 1 on the bottom
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 13 Adding the last knotAgain using the Turks Head Cookbook and the threaded needle you are going to follow the instructions going over and under as indicated in the book Be sure to usegloves when ever you handle the bottle
Step 14 Thats ItFor this Turks Head Knot I am using a 20 Bight by 19 Lead knot
Because of the amount of cord you are working with your cord will get twisted and knotted You will have to un-twist the cord often Its a pain in the rear but it has to bedone And it has to be done alot
Continue to tie the knot until you finish the knot If you have the cord and the patience you can double or triple the knot When you are done use your needle to hide theends under your bands Cut the ends and your DONE
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Related Instructables
Monkeys FistFloatingKeychain byjokerlz
How To Make ATurks headKnot WithParacord byDoggie Stylish
Tying Trivetsout of Rope forHoliday Gifts bykylemarsh
Paracord KnotDisplay Bord byJamie bagn
How to Make ATurks Head(Photos) bymchs60chip
A pocket full ofknots byKiteman
Monkeys fistknot AND themonkey byjonathan111
TiteTie is theTruckers Knoton Steroids bytitetie
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Larks head noose -- an easy useful knot that tightens and loosensby Larry Breed on February 19 2009
Intro Larks head noose -- an easy useful knot that tightens and loosensI thought I knew all the basic knots but then I was taught this incredibly useful simple knot Its good for tying up the neck of a bag that you want to repeatedly open andsecurely close Its good for tying around a springy bundle that will need tightening and retightening And its easy to undo
Ive looked at knot literature but havent found a name for this so I named it The basic knot is well known its called a larks head Since all Ive done is to slip the twoends through the larks head to make a noose I call it that
WARNING Dont use this knot when human safety would depend on it Climbers and mountaineers have well-tested reliable knots for such situations
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Image Notes1 To tighten further step on this side of the larks head and pull the free ends
Step 1 Double the cord overThe larks head noose requires enough cord to go twice around your bundle plus a foot or two Find the center and double it over Sailors call this a bight
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 2 Form the larks headComing from below the bight hook your thumb and forefinger over the two sides Reach outward and downward and pinch your fingertips together underneath thedoubled cord
Youve made a larks head Move the crossing cord a little farther from your hand so theres a clear opening through the two half-loops
Step 3 Form the nooseSlip the two ends of the cord through the opening we were just talking about Pull the larks head tight so it grips the two cords Find something that needs constrictingand put the noose around it
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 4 Tightening retightening and lockingSlide the knot against the bundle If its not tight enough to keep from slipping tighten it by holding it in one hand and tugging on the cords one at a time with the otherhand Notice that you can slide the knot out again for instance to re-open the bag you just tied shut For some applications this may be as tight as you need it
A springy bundle probably still feels loose If so compress the bundle and get a new grip on the cords Rest your foot on the bundle on the cords nearest the larks headand pull to slide the larks head tighter
To make the knot more permanent you can lock it Make an overhand in the cord ends (Exactly like the first step in tying shoelaces) With your foot still on the bundlepull on the cords and move your hands apart until youre pulling in opposite directions You have just locked the larks head and you can trust it to stay that way()
But lets say that later on you want to loosen the locked knot Again put your foot on the bundle and cords nearest the larks head hold the two cord ends together andpull This makes a little slack between the overhand and the larks head so you can untie the overhand
In twine or small string the locking overhand knot may be difficult to undo Use a shoelace knot instead of an overhand and itll unlock easily
() If youre using slippery cord like polypropylene an overhand may not lock securely You may want to tie another overhand knot For added security wrap a shortlength of duct tape around the two cords close to the knot
Image Notes1 To tighten further step on this side of the larks head and pull the free ends
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Related Instructables
TRX fromParacordChallengeAccepted bythrake
A pocket full ofknots byKiteman
Lens CapLanyard by~teknoarsonist~ how to tie a
noose byawesume
AdjustableParacordGlassesLanyard byjdtwelve12
HangmansNoose PackClosure byPopEye42
Paraleash - ADog LeashFrom Paracordby The Ideanator
How to make arugged andhandy ParacordBelt by Jake22
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 10 Prussic KnotThe prussic knot may be used as a climbing ascender - when made around a vertical rope as shown downwards tension on the ends locks the knot while release oftension allows it to be slid up the rope A pair of prussic knots on foot loops may be used in tandem to climb a rope
UsesClimbing a ropeTaking up tension to free a riding turn on a winch
Step 11 Reef KnotThe reef knot or square knot is used to tie a bundle of material together It must be made around something - it should not be used to tie two free ropes togetherbecause it can easily capsizeIt should not be used to make a loop unless it can be tensioned around a solid object It should not be used around a person - use a bowline instead A capsized reefknot will slip easily and could constrict and cause severe injury
UsesReefing a sail (tying the unused portion around a spar)Securing a furled sail to a spar (sail ties)Wrapping a parcelTying shoelaces
AdvantagesMay be made under moderate load
DisadvantagesCapsizes (works free) if used improperlyCan seize up under load when wet
Tying the knot
Capsizing a reef knot
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 12 CleatsThis is not a knot but is very common on boatsThe first picture shows a rope cleated normally The second shows one with a final locking turn - the last turn is twisted before placing over the cleat so that the tensionon the rope helps secure the free end
When working with ropes under tension take a turn or two around a winch or cleat before trying to secure the end with a knot The load on the free end falls exponentiallywith each turn taken Severe injury can result if a finger or other body part is caught in a loop of rope or between a rope and another object
Step 13 Practice themIt is sometimes useful to be able to tie knots in the dark or as in this video behind your back
Related Instructables
AThird Hand forSailing or OtherThings by WadeTarzia
Paracord KnotDisplay Bord byJamie bagn
Trip LogOutriggerCanoe Sailingthe CaliforniaChannel Islandsby TimAnderson
How to Tie aFigure EightKnot byTactical_Pyro
How to build apirate ship bymdelaney3
Build a ShortDragon (16 foot3-BoardOutriggerSailing Canoe)by Wade Tarzia
repairing aheadsail by josh
How to get arope into a tree(withoutclimbing it) byvitex
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
How to Tie the Lanyard Knotby eddy14777 on January 31 2010
Intro How to Tie the Lanyard KnotMany people including myself have had trouble following the Stormdrane youtube video on tying the lanyard knot so i have done some research and found the solution
Image Notes1 Finished knot
Step 1 MaterialsAll you need is a reasonable length of para cord or whatever you wish to use
Image Notes1 One reasonable amount
Step 2 First StepThe first thing you are going to do is to make a bight that leaves you with to congruent endsThen you are going to put your ring finger through the bight
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Image Notes1 Close enough2 Bight
Step 3 Starting the KnotMake a loop just like the one in the picture and place it over the top strandBring the top strand under the bottom strand
Image Notes1 Notice the way the loop is done2 Top strand
Image Notes1 Bottom strand2 Top strand is under
Step 4 The Most Important PartNow you take the top stand from the previous picture and feed it over the first part of the loop under itself and back over the remainder of the loop
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Image Notes1 Under me2 Top strand3 This should make a diamond type shape
Step 5 DoublingNow take the bottom stand and take it around the part of the top strand nearest to the bight and than come up through the diamond shape in the middleDo the same for the top strand
Image Notes1 Top strand
Image Notes1 Both through the diamond
Step 6 FinishingWhen you take it off your finger it should look like thisWork out the slack by pulling on the bight and the two strands
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Image Notes1 Finished knot
Related Instructables
Cross KnotParacordLanyard byStormdrane
Celtic ButtonKnot (video) byStormdrane
Paracord wristlanyard madewith the snakeknot byStormdrane
Paracord ChainSinnet FastDeploy BoonieHatband (video)by Stormdrane
Zigzag SpoolingParacord (video)by Stormdrane
ParacordBoonie HatWrap (video) byStormdrane
Paracord IDbadge Lanyardby Flahusky
Cobra WeaveKey Fob bytevers94
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Four knots to make paracord into a useful toolby erik_mccray on March 27 2010
Authorerik_mccrayI am an ex-fabricator that is now a stay at home dad I love my new job but I do miss making stuff I love this site amp I am getting involved as a way to keep myskills upOn top of fad work I have also run two small business in the past One was custom sewing amp the other was as a small engine mechanicI have two votec degrees one in metal fabrication amp the other is in engine repairI look forward to getting to know everyone here
Intro Four knots to make paracord into a useful toolParacord is an awesome multitool used everywhere from the wild blue yonder to the deepest caverns But like any good tool it is only as good as the knowledge the userhas about the tool With most people out there using bungee cords amp ratchet straps it seems that paracord is being used for nothing more than friendship bracelets forgrown men This is a shame because for less then the price of a few cheap bungee cords amp some to short to be helpful straps You can get yourself hundreds of feet ofparacord
The key to getting the most out of the paracord is good knot work The first thing you need to know is what makes a good knot One is that the knot is easy amp quick to tieamp more impotant is that the knot is easy amp quick to untie The hitch class of knots is by far the best group of knots that the average person could know The four mostuseful hitch knots are the half hitch a quick simple knot that forms the base for many other knots the inline half hitch allowing you to get the most out of one length ofparacord the slippery hitch that gives you both on the fly control over tension on your paracord but also an adjustable loop that will not change unless you want it amp theinline truckers hitch instantly doubling the your pulling power
Step 1 To get started lets get some terminology that will be used defined
line= the paracord
Main line= the part of the paracord doing the work for example holding down your tarp or the long part of the paracord
Mid line= the middle of the length of the paracord
End line= the unused length of paracord or the short length of paracord
Step 2 The half hitch The half hitch is a simple way to secure a line to an anchor point like the tie down points in most trucks A half hitch is a constrictor knot meaning that the harder you pullon the line the tighter the knots grip gets Another common constrictor knot is the slip knot
Step 1 wrap your line around your anchor point Step 2 wrap the end line around the main line
Step 3 pass the end line threw the end line side of the newly formed loop
step 4 now take the slack out of the knot
step 5 to make sure the knot is secure tie another half hitch to the main line This knot is called adouble half hitch
step 6 another useful thing that can be done with the half hitch is that instead of repeating the wrap on the main line but repeating it on what you are tying to the half hitchcan be used to bind something like a stack of 2x4s
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Image Notes1 End line2 Main line3 step 1
Image Notes1 Step 2
Image Notes1 passing thew the end line side of the loop2 step 3
Image Notes1 step 5
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Image Notes1 step 6
Step 3 The mid line half hitch The mid line half hitch is for when the length of line is to long for the job at hand amp you dont want to have to cut the line to size or you are using multiple anchor pointswith one length of line
Step 1 double up the line at the point in the length you wish to make the knot
Step 2 wrap the doubled up portion of line around your anchor point The doubled up length is now now the end line
Step 3 now tie just as you did for the regular half hitch repeat the knot to make a double half hitch for security
Image Notes1 A mid line double half hitch
Image Notes1 step 1
Image Notes1 The end line2 step 2
Image Notes1 Step 3
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 4 The slippery hitch The slippery hitch is a great knot for adjusting tension on the main line or for having an adjustable fixed loop To adjust the knot simply slide the knot up or down the mainline
Step 1 wrap your line around the anchor point or just double over the line to form a loop
Step 2 wrap the end line around the main line three times Wrapping in the direction of the anchor point or loop
Step 3 put together the two lines making up the loop amp wrap the two lines one time with the end line
Step 4 pass the end line thew the last loop formed covering the two lined of the loop
Step 5 pull the knot tite
step 6 to adjust the size of the loop or main line tension grab the knot amp slide it up or down the main line
Image Notes1 grab just the knot its self to adjust it2 step 5
Image Notes1 step 1
Image Notes1 step 2
Image Notes1 step 3
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Image Notes1 step 4
Image Notes1 grab just the knot its self to adjust it2 step 5
Image Notes1 same knot as in last pic Just slid up2 step 6
Step 5 The mid line truchers hitch The truckers hitch is a great way to double the pulling force on a line There are many ways to tie this knot the problem with most of them is that at some point you aregoing to have to pass the end line through a loop on the main line that is acting like a pulley to double your pulling force this is great if you are making the knot close tothe end of your line but if you are using a 300 length of line amp want to make the knot in the first ten feet having to pass 290 of line thew a loop is a pain But with a fewhalf hitches you will not have to pass the end line threw any loop on the main line
step 1 wrap your line around the anchor point then double over your end line laying the top of the loop over the main line
Step 2 double up your main line amp lay the loop over the loop made by the end line
step 3 in main line above the knot twist in a loop
step 4 put main line loop thew the loop made in step 3 amp pull this loop tight over your main line loop forming a half hitch Repeat step 3 amp 4 to make a doublehalf hitch
step 5 To use the knot just pull down on the end line to put tension on the main line
step 6 after you have the main line snug tie a mid line double half hitch around the two lines forming the loop at the end of the main line with the end line
step 7 Tie a double half hitch with the end line around the end loop of the mid line half hitch of step 6 using the same method as used in steps 3 amp 4
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Image Notes1 the end of step 6
Image Notes1 main line2 end line3 step 1
Image Notes1 main line loop2 end line loop
Image Notes1 step 3
Image Notes1 step 4
Image Notes1 step 4 at the end with a double half hitch on the main loop
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Image Notes1 pull here2 step 5
Image Notes1 the start of step 6
Image Notes1 the end of step 6
Image Notes1 step 72 now the rest of the line is free to do more work
Related Instructables
Paracord KnotDisplay Bord byJamie bagn
ChokelessAdjustableParacord DogLeash byPizzaman101
ParacordLadder wWooden Rungsby josestude
tie a paracordshackle grip byitri45
ParacordPrussik Belt byJavaNut13
TiteTie is theTruckers Knoton Steroids bytitetie
ID Lanyard(Photos) byeschmunk
Dog Toys forHeavy Chewersby J3443RY
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Figure 8 knot and double 8 knotby jonathan111 on November 28 2007
Intro Figure 8 knot and double 8 knotI will show you how to tie a figure 8 knot and a figure 8 follow through
Step 1 Stating the knotThis is a simple knot so just follow the pictures
Step 2 Finishing the knotCross the string under and then push it through the hole Pull tightly unless you are going to do the follow through and leave it somewhat loose
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 3 The follow through knotThe follow through knot should be tied around something brought back and followed through the path of the 8 knot Look at the pictures Basically follow through the 8knot backwards
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Related Instructables
Climb Safe WithA Figure 8Knot by mattste A pocket full of
knots byKiteman
How to Tie aFigure EightKnot byTactical_Pyro
Paracord KnotDisplay Bord byJamie bagn
Cross KnotParacordLanyard byStormdrane
How to Tie aFire-escapeKnot by leonardoismael
Truckers HitchTHE mostawesome knoton the planetby schneidp20
Paracord ZipperPuller byrepeet13
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Truckers Hitch THE most awesome knot on the planetby schneidp20 on October 12 2008
Authorschneidp20I like building stuff Trouble is there just isnt enough time to build everything Sigh
Intro Truckers Hitch THE most awesome knot on the planetYes I know that there are plenty of other cool knots out there many of which I literally couldnt live wo I rock climb However this knot is unlike any other Plus Ineeded a grabber for my Instructable -) (BTW this ISNT a climbing knot) And in truth it isnt a knot by itself but rather a system of common knots
Have you ever tried to tie something down for transporting but just couldnt get the lines tight andor during transport the lines would continually loosen Then this is theknot for you I learned this knot back in the 70s when specialty car racks and ratchet straps were rare or unheard of I initially used it to tie a canoe on a car rack bothattaching to the rack as well as the lines to the bow and stern of the canoe Even with all the new gizmos available today this knot still shines because all you need is arope and ropes dont hum in the wind like straps
The unique aspect of this knot is that it gives you a 2-1 mechanical advantage when tightening the rope Be careful though You can actually damage some thingsbecause of the mechanical advantage This knot holds fast and is easy to untie hallmark traits of any good knot
Below you see the finished knot system well break it apart in the steps that follow
Image Notes1 1st anchor point a bowline2 loop3 securing knots 2 half hitches4 securing loose end with a fishermans knot5 2nd anchor point (should be round)
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Image Notes1 X marks the spot
Step 1 Initial setupThe first step is to anchor one end of the rope and then loop the rope around a 2nd anchor point
For attaching to the 1st anchor point I chose bowline a close 2 on my list -) There are other instructables on that one so I wont bore you here
The 2nd anchor really should be round because it serves as a pulley in this block and tackle type knot Ive used it on sharp anchor points and it doesnt work as well
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 2 Creating a slip knotTie a slip knot somewhere between the two anchor points Correct placement of the slip knot takes some experience to judge it correctly Typically I place it too close tothe 2nd anchor point and end up with not enough room to work with If the knot ends up too far from 2nd anchor point you can extend the knot by enlarging the loop
Be sure you tie the slip knot as shown You may not be able to untie other knots
In this small example the slip knot is uncharacteristically close to the 1st anchor point
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 3 Tightening and securingThe loose end of the rope that went around the 2nd anchor point goes through the slip knot loop Pull the loose end to the desired tension and secure with two halfhitches
Note To allow better view of the knots the rope isnt really tightened in this example
Step 4 Securing loose endThe final knot is just to secure the loose end somehow I chose a fishermans knot to do this
To tie a fishermans knot the rope goes around twice and goes under the X created by the loops Pull the loose end to tighten Finally slide the knot to put tension onthe half hitches
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Image Notes1 X marks the spot
Step 5 FinishedThere you have it I guarantee that the first time you really use this knot (not just practice) you will be amazed at how well it works and youll wish you knew this knot along time ago You may even come over to my side and declare that is is THE most awesome knot on the planet -)
Enjoy and happy haulingDave
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Related Instructables
TiteTie is theTruckers Knoton Steroids bytitetie
Four knots tomake paracordinto a usefultool byerik_mccray
Modify yourbike rack tocarry a sunfishor other boat byewilhelm
SurfboardHammock byGermy
GiganticHalloweenSpider Web bynolte919
How To Tie ASpiders Hitch(video) by back-cast
Three-hitch mathair ornamentby michiexile TRX from
ParacordChallengeAccepted bythrake
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Carry any Bottle with a JUG KNOT Handleby hpstoutharrow on September 17 2009
Intro Carry any Bottle with a JUG KNOT HandleTie a JUG KNOT around a water bottle soda bottle or aluminum bottle to make a secure carrying strap
Re-purpose any container into a reusable water bottle by adding a convenient carrying strap This Instructable will demonstrate how to tie a JUG knot which like its namesuggests is meant to properly secure around the neck of a container
With some cord and the knowledge of this knot you will be able add a handle lanyard or carabiner loop to any of your favorite beverages to carry them on the go
It works perfectly for those disposable water bottles and who knows once you add some colorful cord to the plain old clear water bottle you just might beinclined to refill it and use it again(Check out pictures 4amp5 below)
In addition to plastic beverage bottles like pop water and sports drinks you can turn those rugged aluminum beer bottles into a backpacking canteen
Those of you familiar with my previous aluminum bottle InstructablesROLLED RIM METAL TUMBLERhttpwwwinstructablescomidAluminum-Bottle-Tumbler-Cup-Cook-PotALUMINUM BOTTLE LIGHTWEIGHT ALCOHOL STOVEhttpwwwinstructablescomidAluminum-Bottle-Alcohol-Stovewill recognize the water canteen shown below as a re-purposed aluminum beer bottle Here I have added a painted surface treatment to turn it into a proper lookingwater bottle More on that in steps 13 14 15
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 1 Getting StartedCord size is important Select a small medium weight cord like the one shown here It is a general purpose camp cord sold at most sporting goods stores (shoelacesmight also work)
Do not use a heavy cord or rope because the larger diameter will not tuck under the relatively small lip at the top of the bottleneck and the bottle will fall out
Also the smaller cord cinches tight on itself and will not loosen accidentally
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 2 Form a BightThe next steps show how to tie a JUG KNOT It is the basic step for adding a carrying strap It is also the anchor point for any additional fancy bottle trussing you maywant to add
JUG KNOT Step 1
Form a Bight in the center of a length of cord Bight is a knot term for a loop or bend in the rope In this case the main Bight in this knot is highlighted with a white mark Imakes it easier to follow its path in these steps
The running ends of the cord should be equal length
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 3 Pull the Bight downPULL the Bight DOWN forming two Loops
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 4 Cross the LoopsCROSS the right Loop OVER the left Loop
Step 5 Pass the Bight under the 1st loopTake the main Bight and pass it UNDER the left Loop
Step 6 Weave the BightWEAVE the Bight OVER the portion of the right Loop and UNDER the portion of the left Loop
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 7 Extend the BightExtend the Bight OVER the outer portion of the right Loop
Step 8 Flip the Right Loop behindAdditional colored identification points have been added to the loops to follow their travel in these next two steps
The right Loop Yellow marker is FLIPPED BEHIND the knot and ends up on the far left side of the knot
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 9 Flip the 2nd loop in frontRaise the green marker (located on what was formerly the left loop) and pull it down and to the right FLIPPING IT IN FRONT of the knot
Note the blue portion of the this loop will pass around the outside of the yellow portion of the first loop
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Image Notes1 Center of knot that will tighten around the bottles neck
Step 10 Remove SlackNote where the blue green amp yellow markers end up
Start to remove the slack in the loops by pulling the original main Bight (white marker top right) and the two free standing ends at the bottom
the bottle neck will pass through the very center of the knot
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Image Notes1 Center of knot that will tighten around the bottles neck
Step 11 Tighten the KnotAfter removing the slack insert the bottle neck and finish tightening
The knot should look like this before slipping it over the bottle
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 12 Secure on bottle neckThis is the finished knot shown on the neck of various containers
The loop end and the two free standing ends can be tied together to create a carrying handle (last picture below)
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 13 Aluminum Bottle Water Bottle
The next few steps show the features of an aluminum beer bottle re-purposed as a water bottle canteen It is one of many containers that can be reused as a camp waterbottle
The bottle was lightly sanded masked and then pained with a hammered finished paint to create an interesting surface texture
Image Notes1 Textured finish paint makes an interesting grip-able surface2 Masked with tape for painting3 Masked with tape for painting
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Image Notes1 Dowel used for holding the bottle during painting
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 14 Tethered Cork StopperUse a wine bottle man made Cork as a stopper for your aluminum water bottleNote Use a cork that was removed from the wine bottle without the corkscrew penetrating through the bottom end of the cork (A hole all the way through the cork willcause it to leak) Use the unpierced end of the cork inside the water bottle
Drill a hole through the sides of the Cork Thread the cord through the hole to the center of the cord Use the cork as the main Bight and tie the Jug knot as shown inthe beginning steps
Now the cork is tethered to the bottle and will not get lost or fall on the ground
A Carabiner clip passes through the other cord end to attache the water bottle to you belt or pack
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 15 Trussed for TransportThis is another hanging method for carrying your aluminum bottle water canteen A Jug knot is tied conventionally around the neck
The running ends of the knot however are pulled down towards the bottom of the bottle A Barrel Knot is tied about 34 the way down the side of the bottle A squareknot is tied on the bottom of the knot to keep the two running ends tight against the sides of the bottle
I like the look of the accent colored cord running down the sides of the bottle and the fact that the bottle hangs from the belt upside down It adds to its uniqueness
The last picture shows another truss variation
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 16 AdvancedBelow is a bottle with some additional trussing You can be creative as you want It all starts with a re-purposed container and the Jug Knot (and enough cord)
Related Instructables
AluminumBottle TumblerCup amp Cook Potfor an AlcoholStove byhpstoutharrow
Water BottleBelt Clip byuglymike Duct Tape
Water Bottle byrabidsquire2
AluminumBottle AlcoholStove byhpstoutharrow
DIYGlass WaterBottle byCulturespy
Solar WaterHeater forBackpackingUsing WaterBottles and aCar Shade bykopomeroy
Duct tape waterbottle holder(Photos) by pinkmarshmallow
How to make aCamelPack withan old plasticbottle bywillrandship
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Basic Knots Guideby zorro3355 on April 29 2008
Intro Basic Knots Guidehi
Step 1 Thumb knotThe most simple knotUsed as a stopper and prevent ropes from fraying
Step 2 Reef KnotUsed to tie two ropes of equal thickness togetherIt is pretty easy to tie and untie but under tentionit may be diffcult to untieIt is also not sutible for smoothropes(egnylon ropes)
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 3 Figure of eightused as a stopperprevent ropes from fraying and its more secure than tumb knot its is also used to tie Caribinas to ropes and is often used in rock climbing
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 4 Timber hitchused for pulling logs
Step 5 Clove hitchUsed to tie a rope onto a pole or logThe pole must be roundThe pole lust be thicker then the rope itself
(greatly used during pioneering)
Step 6 Sheet bandused to tie ropes of different thickness together(works on same thickness of ropes too)
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 7 Sheep shankTo shorten RopesTo prevent middle fraying
Step 8 Slip knotWhippingUsed as a grip for pulling things(when tied on a stick or small pole)(marlin spike hitch)
Related Instructables
Rope Rings byhpstoutharrow
How to Tie aFigure EightKnot byTactical_Pyro
Whippin (WestCountry Style)by tim_n
SurvivalBracelet(Updated) bytevers94
HangmansNoose PackClosure byPopEye42
Turkey on aTripod byhpstoutharrow
SurvivalBracelet II bytevers94 Zigzag Spooling
Paracord (video)by Stormdrane
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
How to Tie a Fire-escape Knotby leonardo ismael on October 16 2007
Intro How to Tie a Fire-escape KnotThis knot is used by firemen in case of fires for example imagine a scene where the ladder on the firetruck messes up but people need to get down a five story buildingor more All they have is a long piece of rope they can safely get down with a secure knot like the fire-escape knot So why not learn it its easy to do and hard to untieif you tie it tightly
This is from the American Boys Handbook
Step 1 Get Your RopeFirst grab a piece of rope and bend it like this to make a loop in it Follow every step to the smallest detail
Step 2 Twist the RopeNow make a twist like this and hold it together
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 3 Pull Through the TwistPull the loop through the twist you just made from underneath
Step 4 Go Over the Split EndNow pull the tail through the loop
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 5 FinallyAnd finally just pull it through as pictured below
Congratulations you just learned the fire-escape knot
Step 6 Same Name Not KnotThis is another knot called the fire-escape knot this shouldnt be your result
Related Instructables
House FireEscape Plan(video) byWhatHappensNowAdvice
ParacordLadder wWooden Rungsby josestude
Bed SheetEscape Rope byjessehensel
rope ladder(glow-in-the-dark version) bymikeasaurus
HeadlockEscape 2(video) byjohnnyrockstah
QuickFirestarter byMattandJora
Trail sauna byjakee117
How to Kill FireAnts andCommitGenocide byKentsOkay
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Climb Safe With A Figure 8 Knotby mattste on February 23 2010
Intro Climb Safe With A Figure 8 Knot There are many things that a beginning climber needs to know including several important knots Perhaps the most essential knot is the Figure 8 Follow Through Thistutorial will demonstrate how to correctly harness yourself to a rope using a Figure 8 Follow Through knot This knot is used primarily by rock climbers to provide a life-line Since this knot is used as a life-line it is very important to be able to tie it correctly (Your life could depend upon it)
Dont worry with this tutorial and about 5 minutes of practice you can have this knot mastered
Things you will need
- Climbing Harness- Climbing Rope
If you are wanting to go climbing and dont already have these items they can be purchased for about $25 each at most outdoor sporting goods stores If you are merelylooking to learn the knot a belt loop and a rope (about five feet long) will do
Image Notes1 Climbing Harness2 Climbing Rope
Step 1 Dealing With The RopeThroughout this tutorial I will be discussing different parts of the rope To make these instructions as clear as possible I will define a few terms that I will use throughoutthe tutorial The Anchor End of the rope will generally be at the top of the images This is the end that would be anchored to the wall or rock and does not move Wewill not be doing much with the anchored end The Tail End of the rope is the opposite end that we will be dealing with I will call this the tail for short
Now that we have some terms to work with lets get started
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 2 Tying The First Figure 8This knot has several parts to it The first part of the knot is just tying a basic figure 8 To tie the first figure 8 there are four simple steps
1 - Using the tail make a loop over the rope (as shown in the first picture) keeping in mind that there should be about 3 ft of slack on the tail end
2 - Wrap the tail back this time go under the anchored end (As shown in the second picture)
3 - Bring the tail down through the first loop (As shown in the third picture)
4 - Finally pull the two ends to make the knot a little bit tighter and easier to deal with (Shown in the fourth picture)
After these four steps you should end up with a knot that resembles a figure 8
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 3 Looping Into The Harness In order to secure the rope to the harness simply thread the tail end of the rope through the front loop in the harness as shown in the picture below This step isobviously very important
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 4 Following Back Through The Figure 8After looping the rope through the harness you have to thread the tail end of the rope back through the knot following the first figure 8 I have divided this process intofive smaller steps in order to make it more clear
1 - Coming form underneath the knot bring the tail up through the near loop and to the left behind the anchored end of the rope (Shown in the first picture)
2 - Wrap the tail around the anchored end back to the right and down through the adjacent loop (Shown in the second picture)
3 - You simply need to bring the tail back over the top of the knot to the left (Shown in the third picture)
4 - Bring the tail end up through the far loop following the anchored end (Shown in the fourth picture)
5 - Finally pull the knot tight (Shown in the fifth picture)
As you can see the first four pictures are simply tracing the knot back through with the tail end
For the last part while you pull the knot tight you may want to make small adjustments and rearrange how it all fits together If the knot does not lay perfectly smoothand tight its NOT a big deal
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 5 Finishing The Knot After completing the Figure 8 knot you will want to somehow secure the tail end of the rope out of the way There are a couple different ways to do this the way that Iwill demonstrate is using whats called a Stopper Knot This secondary knot is similar to a Fishermans knot and is pretty simple I have once again divided thisprocess into several smaller steps
1 - Start by wrapping the tail end around the anchored end (As shown in the first picture)
2 - Wrap the tail back underneath the two vertical segments (As shown in the second picture)
3 - Simply repeat the first two steps wrapping the tail around again (As shown in the third picture)
4 - This step in the fourth picture may look complicated but all you need to do is insert the tail up through the two loops that you have just made
5 - To finish off the knot you will want to slowly pull the tail end while gently pushing the bottom of the stopper knot upwards If you have successfully completed this knotit should look something like the fifth picture
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 6 Ready To Climb Now that you have mastered the Figure 8 knot you can securely harness yourself into a climbing rope Remember there are many other skills that go into setting up ananchor and belaying a climber This tutorial only covers the figure 8 knot For more information there are many great websites that demonstrate how to correctly set up asafe climbing system (Ive posted a few below) If you are a beginning climber I recommend that you read up on a few other climbing techniques Also you shouldprobably go to a climbing wall or gym where there are experienced climbers that can show you the ropes Hopefully this tutorial has been helpful Have fun and be safe
Some useful linkshttpwwwstephenprattnetAnchorsanchorshtmhttpwwwuoregonedu~oppclimbingtopicsanchorshtmlhttpwwwabc-of-rockclimbingcomhowtoclimbingtechniquesasp
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Related Instructables
How to Tie aFigure EightKnot byTactical_Pyro
Paracord KnotDisplay Bord byJamie bagn
Basic KnotsGuide byzorro3355
How to Climb aTree (withprussiks) bystasterisk
How to climb atree (using onlyrope) thefunsimple wayby louieaw
How to get arope into a tree(withoutclimbing it) byvitex
How to tievarious knots byadaviel
How to make arope swing byjdub0928
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Turks Head Knots on a Bottleby sklnxbones on July 6 2010
Intro Turks Head Knots on a BottleThis is the finished project A bottle decorated with three Turks Head Knots There are only three knots on this bottle The RED and the BLUE knots are each a 20 Bightby 3 Lead Turks Head Knots The WHITE knot is a 20 Bight by 19 Lead Turks Head Knot
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 1 Supplies
Cord Lots and Lots of cord I cant tell you how much each bottle is differentBottle Washed and Dried inside and out Make sure to remove all water spotsThreaded Needle Cord screws into the threads at the base of the needlePegs I use brass rivets used as a map to tie the Turks Head KnotsHole Punch Used to punch holes in the painters tape to hold the pegsPainters Tape To hold the pegs in place and to make your map for the Turks Head KnotsMarker To write on the painters tapeCloth Towel To remove finger prints and dirt from your bottleKrazy Glue or Super Glue This is used to secure the knots in place to the bottle
OPTIONAL BUT HIGHLY RECOMMENDEDI use the Turks Head Cookbook from KnotToolcom
Step 2 PreparationYou will need to find a bottle you like I used an empty instant tea bottle of course washed and dried (I like to put the bottle in the oven for a few minutes to dry the insidewithout water spots Take off the lid and do not put lid in the oven) Now measure the circumference of the bottle Take a cord and tightly wrap the cord around the bottleMark where the ends meet and use a ruler to measure the length of the cord For my instant tea bottle the circumference is 27cm I know from past knots that I have tiedthat I want my knot to have 20 Bights in the top and bottom (bands) knots I am going to use the Bights in the (bands) knots to tie the middle knot Now divide the numberof Bights (20) into the size of the circumference (27) to get the space between each Bight (135) With me so far
Now take two pieces of painters tape using a ruler measure out the length of the circumference and mark the length on the both pieces of tape Next you will mark thespace between each Bight on the tape
Step 3 Adding the PegsI like to use pegs when tying Turks Head Knots it just makes tying the knot easier
These are what I use for pegs
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 4 Adding Pegs to the TapeNow take a hole punch to cut holes in the tape where the lines meet You will place the pegs in the holes
Insert a peg in each hole and carefully stick the first piece of tape to the bottle
Step 5 Adding the 2nd row of pegsNow do the same thing with the second piece of tape The numbers on each piece of tape must line up
This picture shows you what you should have now This odd looking thing will be your map to tie the Turks Head Knot And this is the end of Step 1
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 6 Tying the first Turks Head KnotUsing the Turks Head Cookbook follow the numbers going over and under as indicated in the book I chose a 20 Bight by 3 Lead knot which will give me a nice bandaround the bottle Once the ends meet you have made one complete knot Tape the running end of your cord and start removing the pegs and the tape
Step 7 Remove the pegs and the tapeBe careful not to untie the knot as you remove the pegs and tape from the bottle Continue to remove all the pegs and remove the tape from the bottle At this point theknot will be very loose and will need to be tightened up
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 8 Remove the slack from the knotHere you can see just how much the knot expanded Starting with the standing end begin to pull the slack out of the knot going towards the running end of the cordDo not expect to pull all the slack out at once You may have to make 3 - 5 attempts at removing the slack out of the knot DO NOT remove all of the slack out of the knotIn order to make the bands we will have to triple the Turks Head Knot We will do this by following the knot three times The threaded needle will really come in handyhere
Step 9 Triple the KnotOnce you have made three passes of the Turks Head Knot use your needle to go under your knot about half the circumference and cut the cord The knot will be tightenough to hide the tail in placeTIP I carefully add a couple of drops of super glue UNDER the band to hold them in place and keep them from sliding around in the nextsteps A drop or two in 3 or 4 places around the band should be enough
Step 10 Add the second knotNow repeat this whole step for the second bandWhen tying the second band you must make sure the Bights line up to the first band This is crucial for the next stepWipe down the bottle to make sure all your finger prints and adhesive from the tape are all removed You want to make sure your bottle is clean at this point Any dirt orfinger prints left on the bottle will be almost impossible to remove From this point on we will use gloves when tying our last knot
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 11 Maping the Top KnotStick a piece of painters tape on top of your first band leaving the bottom of the knot exposedUse a marker to count the number of Bights in your knot Instead of using the pegs we are going to use the Bights to tie our next Turks Head Knot
Step 12 Mapping the Bottom KnotDo the same thing for the bottom band but you must make sure your numbers on top and bottom line up So 1 on top should be the same position as 1 on the bottom
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 13 Adding the last knotAgain using the Turks Head Cookbook and the threaded needle you are going to follow the instructions going over and under as indicated in the book Be sure to usegloves when ever you handle the bottle
Step 14 Thats ItFor this Turks Head Knot I am using a 20 Bight by 19 Lead knot
Because of the amount of cord you are working with your cord will get twisted and knotted You will have to un-twist the cord often Its a pain in the rear but it has to bedone And it has to be done alot
Continue to tie the knot until you finish the knot If you have the cord and the patience you can double or triple the knot When you are done use your needle to hide theends under your bands Cut the ends and your DONE
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Related Instructables
Monkeys FistFloatingKeychain byjokerlz
How To Make ATurks headKnot WithParacord byDoggie Stylish
Tying Trivetsout of Rope forHoliday Gifts bykylemarsh
Paracord KnotDisplay Bord byJamie bagn
How to Make ATurks Head(Photos) bymchs60chip
A pocket full ofknots byKiteman
Monkeys fistknot AND themonkey byjonathan111
TiteTie is theTruckers Knoton Steroids bytitetie
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Larks head noose -- an easy useful knot that tightens and loosensby Larry Breed on February 19 2009
Intro Larks head noose -- an easy useful knot that tightens and loosensI thought I knew all the basic knots but then I was taught this incredibly useful simple knot Its good for tying up the neck of a bag that you want to repeatedly open andsecurely close Its good for tying around a springy bundle that will need tightening and retightening And its easy to undo
Ive looked at knot literature but havent found a name for this so I named it The basic knot is well known its called a larks head Since all Ive done is to slip the twoends through the larks head to make a noose I call it that
WARNING Dont use this knot when human safety would depend on it Climbers and mountaineers have well-tested reliable knots for such situations
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Image Notes1 To tighten further step on this side of the larks head and pull the free ends
Step 1 Double the cord overThe larks head noose requires enough cord to go twice around your bundle plus a foot or two Find the center and double it over Sailors call this a bight
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 2 Form the larks headComing from below the bight hook your thumb and forefinger over the two sides Reach outward and downward and pinch your fingertips together underneath thedoubled cord
Youve made a larks head Move the crossing cord a little farther from your hand so theres a clear opening through the two half-loops
Step 3 Form the nooseSlip the two ends of the cord through the opening we were just talking about Pull the larks head tight so it grips the two cords Find something that needs constrictingand put the noose around it
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 4 Tightening retightening and lockingSlide the knot against the bundle If its not tight enough to keep from slipping tighten it by holding it in one hand and tugging on the cords one at a time with the otherhand Notice that you can slide the knot out again for instance to re-open the bag you just tied shut For some applications this may be as tight as you need it
A springy bundle probably still feels loose If so compress the bundle and get a new grip on the cords Rest your foot on the bundle on the cords nearest the larks headand pull to slide the larks head tighter
To make the knot more permanent you can lock it Make an overhand in the cord ends (Exactly like the first step in tying shoelaces) With your foot still on the bundlepull on the cords and move your hands apart until youre pulling in opposite directions You have just locked the larks head and you can trust it to stay that way()
But lets say that later on you want to loosen the locked knot Again put your foot on the bundle and cords nearest the larks head hold the two cord ends together andpull This makes a little slack between the overhand and the larks head so you can untie the overhand
In twine or small string the locking overhand knot may be difficult to undo Use a shoelace knot instead of an overhand and itll unlock easily
() If youre using slippery cord like polypropylene an overhand may not lock securely You may want to tie another overhand knot For added security wrap a shortlength of duct tape around the two cords close to the knot
Image Notes1 To tighten further step on this side of the larks head and pull the free ends
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Related Instructables
TRX fromParacordChallengeAccepted bythrake
A pocket full ofknots byKiteman
Lens CapLanyard by~teknoarsonist~ how to tie a
noose byawesume
AdjustableParacordGlassesLanyard byjdtwelve12
HangmansNoose PackClosure byPopEye42
Paraleash - ADog LeashFrom Paracordby The Ideanator
How to make arugged andhandy ParacordBelt by Jake22
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 12 CleatsThis is not a knot but is very common on boatsThe first picture shows a rope cleated normally The second shows one with a final locking turn - the last turn is twisted before placing over the cleat so that the tensionon the rope helps secure the free end
When working with ropes under tension take a turn or two around a winch or cleat before trying to secure the end with a knot The load on the free end falls exponentiallywith each turn taken Severe injury can result if a finger or other body part is caught in a loop of rope or between a rope and another object
Step 13 Practice themIt is sometimes useful to be able to tie knots in the dark or as in this video behind your back
Related Instructables
AThird Hand forSailing or OtherThings by WadeTarzia
Paracord KnotDisplay Bord byJamie bagn
Trip LogOutriggerCanoe Sailingthe CaliforniaChannel Islandsby TimAnderson
How to Tie aFigure EightKnot byTactical_Pyro
How to build apirate ship bymdelaney3
Build a ShortDragon (16 foot3-BoardOutriggerSailing Canoe)by Wade Tarzia
repairing aheadsail by josh
How to get arope into a tree(withoutclimbing it) byvitex
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
How to Tie the Lanyard Knotby eddy14777 on January 31 2010
Intro How to Tie the Lanyard KnotMany people including myself have had trouble following the Stormdrane youtube video on tying the lanyard knot so i have done some research and found the solution
Image Notes1 Finished knot
Step 1 MaterialsAll you need is a reasonable length of para cord or whatever you wish to use
Image Notes1 One reasonable amount
Step 2 First StepThe first thing you are going to do is to make a bight that leaves you with to congruent endsThen you are going to put your ring finger through the bight
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Image Notes1 Close enough2 Bight
Step 3 Starting the KnotMake a loop just like the one in the picture and place it over the top strandBring the top strand under the bottom strand
Image Notes1 Notice the way the loop is done2 Top strand
Image Notes1 Bottom strand2 Top strand is under
Step 4 The Most Important PartNow you take the top stand from the previous picture and feed it over the first part of the loop under itself and back over the remainder of the loop
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Image Notes1 Under me2 Top strand3 This should make a diamond type shape
Step 5 DoublingNow take the bottom stand and take it around the part of the top strand nearest to the bight and than come up through the diamond shape in the middleDo the same for the top strand
Image Notes1 Top strand
Image Notes1 Both through the diamond
Step 6 FinishingWhen you take it off your finger it should look like thisWork out the slack by pulling on the bight and the two strands
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Image Notes1 Finished knot
Related Instructables
Cross KnotParacordLanyard byStormdrane
Celtic ButtonKnot (video) byStormdrane
Paracord wristlanyard madewith the snakeknot byStormdrane
Paracord ChainSinnet FastDeploy BoonieHatband (video)by Stormdrane
Zigzag SpoolingParacord (video)by Stormdrane
ParacordBoonie HatWrap (video) byStormdrane
Paracord IDbadge Lanyardby Flahusky
Cobra WeaveKey Fob bytevers94
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Four knots to make paracord into a useful toolby erik_mccray on March 27 2010
Authorerik_mccrayI am an ex-fabricator that is now a stay at home dad I love my new job but I do miss making stuff I love this site amp I am getting involved as a way to keep myskills upOn top of fad work I have also run two small business in the past One was custom sewing amp the other was as a small engine mechanicI have two votec degrees one in metal fabrication amp the other is in engine repairI look forward to getting to know everyone here
Intro Four knots to make paracord into a useful toolParacord is an awesome multitool used everywhere from the wild blue yonder to the deepest caverns But like any good tool it is only as good as the knowledge the userhas about the tool With most people out there using bungee cords amp ratchet straps it seems that paracord is being used for nothing more than friendship bracelets forgrown men This is a shame because for less then the price of a few cheap bungee cords amp some to short to be helpful straps You can get yourself hundreds of feet ofparacord
The key to getting the most out of the paracord is good knot work The first thing you need to know is what makes a good knot One is that the knot is easy amp quick to tieamp more impotant is that the knot is easy amp quick to untie The hitch class of knots is by far the best group of knots that the average person could know The four mostuseful hitch knots are the half hitch a quick simple knot that forms the base for many other knots the inline half hitch allowing you to get the most out of one length ofparacord the slippery hitch that gives you both on the fly control over tension on your paracord but also an adjustable loop that will not change unless you want it amp theinline truckers hitch instantly doubling the your pulling power
Step 1 To get started lets get some terminology that will be used defined
line= the paracord
Main line= the part of the paracord doing the work for example holding down your tarp or the long part of the paracord
Mid line= the middle of the length of the paracord
End line= the unused length of paracord or the short length of paracord
Step 2 The half hitch The half hitch is a simple way to secure a line to an anchor point like the tie down points in most trucks A half hitch is a constrictor knot meaning that the harder you pullon the line the tighter the knots grip gets Another common constrictor knot is the slip knot
Step 1 wrap your line around your anchor point Step 2 wrap the end line around the main line
Step 3 pass the end line threw the end line side of the newly formed loop
step 4 now take the slack out of the knot
step 5 to make sure the knot is secure tie another half hitch to the main line This knot is called adouble half hitch
step 6 another useful thing that can be done with the half hitch is that instead of repeating the wrap on the main line but repeating it on what you are tying to the half hitchcan be used to bind something like a stack of 2x4s
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Image Notes1 End line2 Main line3 step 1
Image Notes1 Step 2
Image Notes1 passing thew the end line side of the loop2 step 3
Image Notes1 step 5
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Image Notes1 step 6
Step 3 The mid line half hitch The mid line half hitch is for when the length of line is to long for the job at hand amp you dont want to have to cut the line to size or you are using multiple anchor pointswith one length of line
Step 1 double up the line at the point in the length you wish to make the knot
Step 2 wrap the doubled up portion of line around your anchor point The doubled up length is now now the end line
Step 3 now tie just as you did for the regular half hitch repeat the knot to make a double half hitch for security
Image Notes1 A mid line double half hitch
Image Notes1 step 1
Image Notes1 The end line2 step 2
Image Notes1 Step 3
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 4 The slippery hitch The slippery hitch is a great knot for adjusting tension on the main line or for having an adjustable fixed loop To adjust the knot simply slide the knot up or down the mainline
Step 1 wrap your line around the anchor point or just double over the line to form a loop
Step 2 wrap the end line around the main line three times Wrapping in the direction of the anchor point or loop
Step 3 put together the two lines making up the loop amp wrap the two lines one time with the end line
Step 4 pass the end line thew the last loop formed covering the two lined of the loop
Step 5 pull the knot tite
step 6 to adjust the size of the loop or main line tension grab the knot amp slide it up or down the main line
Image Notes1 grab just the knot its self to adjust it2 step 5
Image Notes1 step 1
Image Notes1 step 2
Image Notes1 step 3
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Image Notes1 step 4
Image Notes1 grab just the knot its self to adjust it2 step 5
Image Notes1 same knot as in last pic Just slid up2 step 6
Step 5 The mid line truchers hitch The truckers hitch is a great way to double the pulling force on a line There are many ways to tie this knot the problem with most of them is that at some point you aregoing to have to pass the end line through a loop on the main line that is acting like a pulley to double your pulling force this is great if you are making the knot close tothe end of your line but if you are using a 300 length of line amp want to make the knot in the first ten feet having to pass 290 of line thew a loop is a pain But with a fewhalf hitches you will not have to pass the end line threw any loop on the main line
step 1 wrap your line around the anchor point then double over your end line laying the top of the loop over the main line
Step 2 double up your main line amp lay the loop over the loop made by the end line
step 3 in main line above the knot twist in a loop
step 4 put main line loop thew the loop made in step 3 amp pull this loop tight over your main line loop forming a half hitch Repeat step 3 amp 4 to make a doublehalf hitch
step 5 To use the knot just pull down on the end line to put tension on the main line
step 6 after you have the main line snug tie a mid line double half hitch around the two lines forming the loop at the end of the main line with the end line
step 7 Tie a double half hitch with the end line around the end loop of the mid line half hitch of step 6 using the same method as used in steps 3 amp 4
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Image Notes1 the end of step 6
Image Notes1 main line2 end line3 step 1
Image Notes1 main line loop2 end line loop
Image Notes1 step 3
Image Notes1 step 4
Image Notes1 step 4 at the end with a double half hitch on the main loop
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Image Notes1 pull here2 step 5
Image Notes1 the start of step 6
Image Notes1 the end of step 6
Image Notes1 step 72 now the rest of the line is free to do more work
Related Instructables
Paracord KnotDisplay Bord byJamie bagn
ChokelessAdjustableParacord DogLeash byPizzaman101
ParacordLadder wWooden Rungsby josestude
tie a paracordshackle grip byitri45
ParacordPrussik Belt byJavaNut13
TiteTie is theTruckers Knoton Steroids bytitetie
ID Lanyard(Photos) byeschmunk
Dog Toys forHeavy Chewersby J3443RY
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Figure 8 knot and double 8 knotby jonathan111 on November 28 2007
Intro Figure 8 knot and double 8 knotI will show you how to tie a figure 8 knot and a figure 8 follow through
Step 1 Stating the knotThis is a simple knot so just follow the pictures
Step 2 Finishing the knotCross the string under and then push it through the hole Pull tightly unless you are going to do the follow through and leave it somewhat loose
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 3 The follow through knotThe follow through knot should be tied around something brought back and followed through the path of the 8 knot Look at the pictures Basically follow through the 8knot backwards
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Related Instructables
Climb Safe WithA Figure 8Knot by mattste A pocket full of
knots byKiteman
How to Tie aFigure EightKnot byTactical_Pyro
Paracord KnotDisplay Bord byJamie bagn
Cross KnotParacordLanyard byStormdrane
How to Tie aFire-escapeKnot by leonardoismael
Truckers HitchTHE mostawesome knoton the planetby schneidp20
Paracord ZipperPuller byrepeet13
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Truckers Hitch THE most awesome knot on the planetby schneidp20 on October 12 2008
Authorschneidp20I like building stuff Trouble is there just isnt enough time to build everything Sigh
Intro Truckers Hitch THE most awesome knot on the planetYes I know that there are plenty of other cool knots out there many of which I literally couldnt live wo I rock climb However this knot is unlike any other Plus Ineeded a grabber for my Instructable -) (BTW this ISNT a climbing knot) And in truth it isnt a knot by itself but rather a system of common knots
Have you ever tried to tie something down for transporting but just couldnt get the lines tight andor during transport the lines would continually loosen Then this is theknot for you I learned this knot back in the 70s when specialty car racks and ratchet straps were rare or unheard of I initially used it to tie a canoe on a car rack bothattaching to the rack as well as the lines to the bow and stern of the canoe Even with all the new gizmos available today this knot still shines because all you need is arope and ropes dont hum in the wind like straps
The unique aspect of this knot is that it gives you a 2-1 mechanical advantage when tightening the rope Be careful though You can actually damage some thingsbecause of the mechanical advantage This knot holds fast and is easy to untie hallmark traits of any good knot
Below you see the finished knot system well break it apart in the steps that follow
Image Notes1 1st anchor point a bowline2 loop3 securing knots 2 half hitches4 securing loose end with a fishermans knot5 2nd anchor point (should be round)
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Image Notes1 X marks the spot
Step 1 Initial setupThe first step is to anchor one end of the rope and then loop the rope around a 2nd anchor point
For attaching to the 1st anchor point I chose bowline a close 2 on my list -) There are other instructables on that one so I wont bore you here
The 2nd anchor really should be round because it serves as a pulley in this block and tackle type knot Ive used it on sharp anchor points and it doesnt work as well
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 2 Creating a slip knotTie a slip knot somewhere between the two anchor points Correct placement of the slip knot takes some experience to judge it correctly Typically I place it too close tothe 2nd anchor point and end up with not enough room to work with If the knot ends up too far from 2nd anchor point you can extend the knot by enlarging the loop
Be sure you tie the slip knot as shown You may not be able to untie other knots
In this small example the slip knot is uncharacteristically close to the 1st anchor point
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 3 Tightening and securingThe loose end of the rope that went around the 2nd anchor point goes through the slip knot loop Pull the loose end to the desired tension and secure with two halfhitches
Note To allow better view of the knots the rope isnt really tightened in this example
Step 4 Securing loose endThe final knot is just to secure the loose end somehow I chose a fishermans knot to do this
To tie a fishermans knot the rope goes around twice and goes under the X created by the loops Pull the loose end to tighten Finally slide the knot to put tension onthe half hitches
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Image Notes1 X marks the spot
Step 5 FinishedThere you have it I guarantee that the first time you really use this knot (not just practice) you will be amazed at how well it works and youll wish you knew this knot along time ago You may even come over to my side and declare that is is THE most awesome knot on the planet -)
Enjoy and happy haulingDave
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Related Instructables
TiteTie is theTruckers Knoton Steroids bytitetie
Four knots tomake paracordinto a usefultool byerik_mccray
Modify yourbike rack tocarry a sunfishor other boat byewilhelm
SurfboardHammock byGermy
GiganticHalloweenSpider Web bynolte919
How To Tie ASpiders Hitch(video) by back-cast
Three-hitch mathair ornamentby michiexile TRX from
ParacordChallengeAccepted bythrake
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Carry any Bottle with a JUG KNOT Handleby hpstoutharrow on September 17 2009
Intro Carry any Bottle with a JUG KNOT HandleTie a JUG KNOT around a water bottle soda bottle or aluminum bottle to make a secure carrying strap
Re-purpose any container into a reusable water bottle by adding a convenient carrying strap This Instructable will demonstrate how to tie a JUG knot which like its namesuggests is meant to properly secure around the neck of a container
With some cord and the knowledge of this knot you will be able add a handle lanyard or carabiner loop to any of your favorite beverages to carry them on the go
It works perfectly for those disposable water bottles and who knows once you add some colorful cord to the plain old clear water bottle you just might beinclined to refill it and use it again(Check out pictures 4amp5 below)
In addition to plastic beverage bottles like pop water and sports drinks you can turn those rugged aluminum beer bottles into a backpacking canteen
Those of you familiar with my previous aluminum bottle InstructablesROLLED RIM METAL TUMBLERhttpwwwinstructablescomidAluminum-Bottle-Tumbler-Cup-Cook-PotALUMINUM BOTTLE LIGHTWEIGHT ALCOHOL STOVEhttpwwwinstructablescomidAluminum-Bottle-Alcohol-Stovewill recognize the water canteen shown below as a re-purposed aluminum beer bottle Here I have added a painted surface treatment to turn it into a proper lookingwater bottle More on that in steps 13 14 15
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 1 Getting StartedCord size is important Select a small medium weight cord like the one shown here It is a general purpose camp cord sold at most sporting goods stores (shoelacesmight also work)
Do not use a heavy cord or rope because the larger diameter will not tuck under the relatively small lip at the top of the bottleneck and the bottle will fall out
Also the smaller cord cinches tight on itself and will not loosen accidentally
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 2 Form a BightThe next steps show how to tie a JUG KNOT It is the basic step for adding a carrying strap It is also the anchor point for any additional fancy bottle trussing you maywant to add
JUG KNOT Step 1
Form a Bight in the center of a length of cord Bight is a knot term for a loop or bend in the rope In this case the main Bight in this knot is highlighted with a white mark Imakes it easier to follow its path in these steps
The running ends of the cord should be equal length
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 3 Pull the Bight downPULL the Bight DOWN forming two Loops
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 4 Cross the LoopsCROSS the right Loop OVER the left Loop
Step 5 Pass the Bight under the 1st loopTake the main Bight and pass it UNDER the left Loop
Step 6 Weave the BightWEAVE the Bight OVER the portion of the right Loop and UNDER the portion of the left Loop
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 7 Extend the BightExtend the Bight OVER the outer portion of the right Loop
Step 8 Flip the Right Loop behindAdditional colored identification points have been added to the loops to follow their travel in these next two steps
The right Loop Yellow marker is FLIPPED BEHIND the knot and ends up on the far left side of the knot
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 9 Flip the 2nd loop in frontRaise the green marker (located on what was formerly the left loop) and pull it down and to the right FLIPPING IT IN FRONT of the knot
Note the blue portion of the this loop will pass around the outside of the yellow portion of the first loop
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Image Notes1 Center of knot that will tighten around the bottles neck
Step 10 Remove SlackNote where the blue green amp yellow markers end up
Start to remove the slack in the loops by pulling the original main Bight (white marker top right) and the two free standing ends at the bottom
the bottle neck will pass through the very center of the knot
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Image Notes1 Center of knot that will tighten around the bottles neck
Step 11 Tighten the KnotAfter removing the slack insert the bottle neck and finish tightening
The knot should look like this before slipping it over the bottle
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 12 Secure on bottle neckThis is the finished knot shown on the neck of various containers
The loop end and the two free standing ends can be tied together to create a carrying handle (last picture below)
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 13 Aluminum Bottle Water Bottle
The next few steps show the features of an aluminum beer bottle re-purposed as a water bottle canteen It is one of many containers that can be reused as a camp waterbottle
The bottle was lightly sanded masked and then pained with a hammered finished paint to create an interesting surface texture
Image Notes1 Textured finish paint makes an interesting grip-able surface2 Masked with tape for painting3 Masked with tape for painting
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Image Notes1 Dowel used for holding the bottle during painting
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 14 Tethered Cork StopperUse a wine bottle man made Cork as a stopper for your aluminum water bottleNote Use a cork that was removed from the wine bottle without the corkscrew penetrating through the bottom end of the cork (A hole all the way through the cork willcause it to leak) Use the unpierced end of the cork inside the water bottle
Drill a hole through the sides of the Cork Thread the cord through the hole to the center of the cord Use the cork as the main Bight and tie the Jug knot as shown inthe beginning steps
Now the cork is tethered to the bottle and will not get lost or fall on the ground
A Carabiner clip passes through the other cord end to attache the water bottle to you belt or pack
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 15 Trussed for TransportThis is another hanging method for carrying your aluminum bottle water canteen A Jug knot is tied conventionally around the neck
The running ends of the knot however are pulled down towards the bottom of the bottle A Barrel Knot is tied about 34 the way down the side of the bottle A squareknot is tied on the bottom of the knot to keep the two running ends tight against the sides of the bottle
I like the look of the accent colored cord running down the sides of the bottle and the fact that the bottle hangs from the belt upside down It adds to its uniqueness
The last picture shows another truss variation
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 16 AdvancedBelow is a bottle with some additional trussing You can be creative as you want It all starts with a re-purposed container and the Jug Knot (and enough cord)
Related Instructables
AluminumBottle TumblerCup amp Cook Potfor an AlcoholStove byhpstoutharrow
Water BottleBelt Clip byuglymike Duct Tape
Water Bottle byrabidsquire2
AluminumBottle AlcoholStove byhpstoutharrow
DIYGlass WaterBottle byCulturespy
Solar WaterHeater forBackpackingUsing WaterBottles and aCar Shade bykopomeroy
Duct tape waterbottle holder(Photos) by pinkmarshmallow
How to make aCamelPack withan old plasticbottle bywillrandship
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Basic Knots Guideby zorro3355 on April 29 2008
Intro Basic Knots Guidehi
Step 1 Thumb knotThe most simple knotUsed as a stopper and prevent ropes from fraying
Step 2 Reef KnotUsed to tie two ropes of equal thickness togetherIt is pretty easy to tie and untie but under tentionit may be diffcult to untieIt is also not sutible for smoothropes(egnylon ropes)
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 3 Figure of eightused as a stopperprevent ropes from fraying and its more secure than tumb knot its is also used to tie Caribinas to ropes and is often used in rock climbing
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 4 Timber hitchused for pulling logs
Step 5 Clove hitchUsed to tie a rope onto a pole or logThe pole must be roundThe pole lust be thicker then the rope itself
(greatly used during pioneering)
Step 6 Sheet bandused to tie ropes of different thickness together(works on same thickness of ropes too)
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 7 Sheep shankTo shorten RopesTo prevent middle fraying
Step 8 Slip knotWhippingUsed as a grip for pulling things(when tied on a stick or small pole)(marlin spike hitch)
Related Instructables
Rope Rings byhpstoutharrow
How to Tie aFigure EightKnot byTactical_Pyro
Whippin (WestCountry Style)by tim_n
SurvivalBracelet(Updated) bytevers94
HangmansNoose PackClosure byPopEye42
Turkey on aTripod byhpstoutharrow
SurvivalBracelet II bytevers94 Zigzag Spooling
Paracord (video)by Stormdrane
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
How to Tie a Fire-escape Knotby leonardo ismael on October 16 2007
Intro How to Tie a Fire-escape KnotThis knot is used by firemen in case of fires for example imagine a scene where the ladder on the firetruck messes up but people need to get down a five story buildingor more All they have is a long piece of rope they can safely get down with a secure knot like the fire-escape knot So why not learn it its easy to do and hard to untieif you tie it tightly
This is from the American Boys Handbook
Step 1 Get Your RopeFirst grab a piece of rope and bend it like this to make a loop in it Follow every step to the smallest detail
Step 2 Twist the RopeNow make a twist like this and hold it together
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 3 Pull Through the TwistPull the loop through the twist you just made from underneath
Step 4 Go Over the Split EndNow pull the tail through the loop
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 5 FinallyAnd finally just pull it through as pictured below
Congratulations you just learned the fire-escape knot
Step 6 Same Name Not KnotThis is another knot called the fire-escape knot this shouldnt be your result
Related Instructables
House FireEscape Plan(video) byWhatHappensNowAdvice
ParacordLadder wWooden Rungsby josestude
Bed SheetEscape Rope byjessehensel
rope ladder(glow-in-the-dark version) bymikeasaurus
HeadlockEscape 2(video) byjohnnyrockstah
QuickFirestarter byMattandJora
Trail sauna byjakee117
How to Kill FireAnts andCommitGenocide byKentsOkay
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Climb Safe With A Figure 8 Knotby mattste on February 23 2010
Intro Climb Safe With A Figure 8 Knot There are many things that a beginning climber needs to know including several important knots Perhaps the most essential knot is the Figure 8 Follow Through Thistutorial will demonstrate how to correctly harness yourself to a rope using a Figure 8 Follow Through knot This knot is used primarily by rock climbers to provide a life-line Since this knot is used as a life-line it is very important to be able to tie it correctly (Your life could depend upon it)
Dont worry with this tutorial and about 5 minutes of practice you can have this knot mastered
Things you will need
- Climbing Harness- Climbing Rope
If you are wanting to go climbing and dont already have these items they can be purchased for about $25 each at most outdoor sporting goods stores If you are merelylooking to learn the knot a belt loop and a rope (about five feet long) will do
Image Notes1 Climbing Harness2 Climbing Rope
Step 1 Dealing With The RopeThroughout this tutorial I will be discussing different parts of the rope To make these instructions as clear as possible I will define a few terms that I will use throughoutthe tutorial The Anchor End of the rope will generally be at the top of the images This is the end that would be anchored to the wall or rock and does not move Wewill not be doing much with the anchored end The Tail End of the rope is the opposite end that we will be dealing with I will call this the tail for short
Now that we have some terms to work with lets get started
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 2 Tying The First Figure 8This knot has several parts to it The first part of the knot is just tying a basic figure 8 To tie the first figure 8 there are four simple steps
1 - Using the tail make a loop over the rope (as shown in the first picture) keeping in mind that there should be about 3 ft of slack on the tail end
2 - Wrap the tail back this time go under the anchored end (As shown in the second picture)
3 - Bring the tail down through the first loop (As shown in the third picture)
4 - Finally pull the two ends to make the knot a little bit tighter and easier to deal with (Shown in the fourth picture)
After these four steps you should end up with a knot that resembles a figure 8
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 3 Looping Into The Harness In order to secure the rope to the harness simply thread the tail end of the rope through the front loop in the harness as shown in the picture below This step isobviously very important
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 4 Following Back Through The Figure 8After looping the rope through the harness you have to thread the tail end of the rope back through the knot following the first figure 8 I have divided this process intofive smaller steps in order to make it more clear
1 - Coming form underneath the knot bring the tail up through the near loop and to the left behind the anchored end of the rope (Shown in the first picture)
2 - Wrap the tail around the anchored end back to the right and down through the adjacent loop (Shown in the second picture)
3 - You simply need to bring the tail back over the top of the knot to the left (Shown in the third picture)
4 - Bring the tail end up through the far loop following the anchored end (Shown in the fourth picture)
5 - Finally pull the knot tight (Shown in the fifth picture)
As you can see the first four pictures are simply tracing the knot back through with the tail end
For the last part while you pull the knot tight you may want to make small adjustments and rearrange how it all fits together If the knot does not lay perfectly smoothand tight its NOT a big deal
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 5 Finishing The Knot After completing the Figure 8 knot you will want to somehow secure the tail end of the rope out of the way There are a couple different ways to do this the way that Iwill demonstrate is using whats called a Stopper Knot This secondary knot is similar to a Fishermans knot and is pretty simple I have once again divided thisprocess into several smaller steps
1 - Start by wrapping the tail end around the anchored end (As shown in the first picture)
2 - Wrap the tail back underneath the two vertical segments (As shown in the second picture)
3 - Simply repeat the first two steps wrapping the tail around again (As shown in the third picture)
4 - This step in the fourth picture may look complicated but all you need to do is insert the tail up through the two loops that you have just made
5 - To finish off the knot you will want to slowly pull the tail end while gently pushing the bottom of the stopper knot upwards If you have successfully completed this knotit should look something like the fifth picture
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 6 Ready To Climb Now that you have mastered the Figure 8 knot you can securely harness yourself into a climbing rope Remember there are many other skills that go into setting up ananchor and belaying a climber This tutorial only covers the figure 8 knot For more information there are many great websites that demonstrate how to correctly set up asafe climbing system (Ive posted a few below) If you are a beginning climber I recommend that you read up on a few other climbing techniques Also you shouldprobably go to a climbing wall or gym where there are experienced climbers that can show you the ropes Hopefully this tutorial has been helpful Have fun and be safe
Some useful linkshttpwwwstephenprattnetAnchorsanchorshtmhttpwwwuoregonedu~oppclimbingtopicsanchorshtmlhttpwwwabc-of-rockclimbingcomhowtoclimbingtechniquesasp
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Related Instructables
How to Tie aFigure EightKnot byTactical_Pyro
Paracord KnotDisplay Bord byJamie bagn
Basic KnotsGuide byzorro3355
How to Climb aTree (withprussiks) bystasterisk
How to climb atree (using onlyrope) thefunsimple wayby louieaw
How to get arope into a tree(withoutclimbing it) byvitex
How to tievarious knots byadaviel
How to make arope swing byjdub0928
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Turks Head Knots on a Bottleby sklnxbones on July 6 2010
Intro Turks Head Knots on a BottleThis is the finished project A bottle decorated with three Turks Head Knots There are only three knots on this bottle The RED and the BLUE knots are each a 20 Bightby 3 Lead Turks Head Knots The WHITE knot is a 20 Bight by 19 Lead Turks Head Knot
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 1 Supplies
Cord Lots and Lots of cord I cant tell you how much each bottle is differentBottle Washed and Dried inside and out Make sure to remove all water spotsThreaded Needle Cord screws into the threads at the base of the needlePegs I use brass rivets used as a map to tie the Turks Head KnotsHole Punch Used to punch holes in the painters tape to hold the pegsPainters Tape To hold the pegs in place and to make your map for the Turks Head KnotsMarker To write on the painters tapeCloth Towel To remove finger prints and dirt from your bottleKrazy Glue or Super Glue This is used to secure the knots in place to the bottle
OPTIONAL BUT HIGHLY RECOMMENDEDI use the Turks Head Cookbook from KnotToolcom
Step 2 PreparationYou will need to find a bottle you like I used an empty instant tea bottle of course washed and dried (I like to put the bottle in the oven for a few minutes to dry the insidewithout water spots Take off the lid and do not put lid in the oven) Now measure the circumference of the bottle Take a cord and tightly wrap the cord around the bottleMark where the ends meet and use a ruler to measure the length of the cord For my instant tea bottle the circumference is 27cm I know from past knots that I have tiedthat I want my knot to have 20 Bights in the top and bottom (bands) knots I am going to use the Bights in the (bands) knots to tie the middle knot Now divide the numberof Bights (20) into the size of the circumference (27) to get the space between each Bight (135) With me so far
Now take two pieces of painters tape using a ruler measure out the length of the circumference and mark the length on the both pieces of tape Next you will mark thespace between each Bight on the tape
Step 3 Adding the PegsI like to use pegs when tying Turks Head Knots it just makes tying the knot easier
These are what I use for pegs
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 4 Adding Pegs to the TapeNow take a hole punch to cut holes in the tape where the lines meet You will place the pegs in the holes
Insert a peg in each hole and carefully stick the first piece of tape to the bottle
Step 5 Adding the 2nd row of pegsNow do the same thing with the second piece of tape The numbers on each piece of tape must line up
This picture shows you what you should have now This odd looking thing will be your map to tie the Turks Head Knot And this is the end of Step 1
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 6 Tying the first Turks Head KnotUsing the Turks Head Cookbook follow the numbers going over and under as indicated in the book I chose a 20 Bight by 3 Lead knot which will give me a nice bandaround the bottle Once the ends meet you have made one complete knot Tape the running end of your cord and start removing the pegs and the tape
Step 7 Remove the pegs and the tapeBe careful not to untie the knot as you remove the pegs and tape from the bottle Continue to remove all the pegs and remove the tape from the bottle At this point theknot will be very loose and will need to be tightened up
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 8 Remove the slack from the knotHere you can see just how much the knot expanded Starting with the standing end begin to pull the slack out of the knot going towards the running end of the cordDo not expect to pull all the slack out at once You may have to make 3 - 5 attempts at removing the slack out of the knot DO NOT remove all of the slack out of the knotIn order to make the bands we will have to triple the Turks Head Knot We will do this by following the knot three times The threaded needle will really come in handyhere
Step 9 Triple the KnotOnce you have made three passes of the Turks Head Knot use your needle to go under your knot about half the circumference and cut the cord The knot will be tightenough to hide the tail in placeTIP I carefully add a couple of drops of super glue UNDER the band to hold them in place and keep them from sliding around in the nextsteps A drop or two in 3 or 4 places around the band should be enough
Step 10 Add the second knotNow repeat this whole step for the second bandWhen tying the second band you must make sure the Bights line up to the first band This is crucial for the next stepWipe down the bottle to make sure all your finger prints and adhesive from the tape are all removed You want to make sure your bottle is clean at this point Any dirt orfinger prints left on the bottle will be almost impossible to remove From this point on we will use gloves when tying our last knot
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 11 Maping the Top KnotStick a piece of painters tape on top of your first band leaving the bottom of the knot exposedUse a marker to count the number of Bights in your knot Instead of using the pegs we are going to use the Bights to tie our next Turks Head Knot
Step 12 Mapping the Bottom KnotDo the same thing for the bottom band but you must make sure your numbers on top and bottom line up So 1 on top should be the same position as 1 on the bottom
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 13 Adding the last knotAgain using the Turks Head Cookbook and the threaded needle you are going to follow the instructions going over and under as indicated in the book Be sure to usegloves when ever you handle the bottle
Step 14 Thats ItFor this Turks Head Knot I am using a 20 Bight by 19 Lead knot
Because of the amount of cord you are working with your cord will get twisted and knotted You will have to un-twist the cord often Its a pain in the rear but it has to bedone And it has to be done alot
Continue to tie the knot until you finish the knot If you have the cord and the patience you can double or triple the knot When you are done use your needle to hide theends under your bands Cut the ends and your DONE
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Related Instructables
Monkeys FistFloatingKeychain byjokerlz
How To Make ATurks headKnot WithParacord byDoggie Stylish
Tying Trivetsout of Rope forHoliday Gifts bykylemarsh
Paracord KnotDisplay Bord byJamie bagn
How to Make ATurks Head(Photos) bymchs60chip
A pocket full ofknots byKiteman
Monkeys fistknot AND themonkey byjonathan111
TiteTie is theTruckers Knoton Steroids bytitetie
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Larks head noose -- an easy useful knot that tightens and loosensby Larry Breed on February 19 2009
Intro Larks head noose -- an easy useful knot that tightens and loosensI thought I knew all the basic knots but then I was taught this incredibly useful simple knot Its good for tying up the neck of a bag that you want to repeatedly open andsecurely close Its good for tying around a springy bundle that will need tightening and retightening And its easy to undo
Ive looked at knot literature but havent found a name for this so I named it The basic knot is well known its called a larks head Since all Ive done is to slip the twoends through the larks head to make a noose I call it that
WARNING Dont use this knot when human safety would depend on it Climbers and mountaineers have well-tested reliable knots for such situations
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Image Notes1 To tighten further step on this side of the larks head and pull the free ends
Step 1 Double the cord overThe larks head noose requires enough cord to go twice around your bundle plus a foot or two Find the center and double it over Sailors call this a bight
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 2 Form the larks headComing from below the bight hook your thumb and forefinger over the two sides Reach outward and downward and pinch your fingertips together underneath thedoubled cord
Youve made a larks head Move the crossing cord a little farther from your hand so theres a clear opening through the two half-loops
Step 3 Form the nooseSlip the two ends of the cord through the opening we were just talking about Pull the larks head tight so it grips the two cords Find something that needs constrictingand put the noose around it
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 4 Tightening retightening and lockingSlide the knot against the bundle If its not tight enough to keep from slipping tighten it by holding it in one hand and tugging on the cords one at a time with the otherhand Notice that you can slide the knot out again for instance to re-open the bag you just tied shut For some applications this may be as tight as you need it
A springy bundle probably still feels loose If so compress the bundle and get a new grip on the cords Rest your foot on the bundle on the cords nearest the larks headand pull to slide the larks head tighter
To make the knot more permanent you can lock it Make an overhand in the cord ends (Exactly like the first step in tying shoelaces) With your foot still on the bundlepull on the cords and move your hands apart until youre pulling in opposite directions You have just locked the larks head and you can trust it to stay that way()
But lets say that later on you want to loosen the locked knot Again put your foot on the bundle and cords nearest the larks head hold the two cord ends together andpull This makes a little slack between the overhand and the larks head so you can untie the overhand
In twine or small string the locking overhand knot may be difficult to undo Use a shoelace knot instead of an overhand and itll unlock easily
() If youre using slippery cord like polypropylene an overhand may not lock securely You may want to tie another overhand knot For added security wrap a shortlength of duct tape around the two cords close to the knot
Image Notes1 To tighten further step on this side of the larks head and pull the free ends
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Related Instructables
TRX fromParacordChallengeAccepted bythrake
A pocket full ofknots byKiteman
Lens CapLanyard by~teknoarsonist~ how to tie a
noose byawesume
AdjustableParacordGlassesLanyard byjdtwelve12
HangmansNoose PackClosure byPopEye42
Paraleash - ADog LeashFrom Paracordby The Ideanator
How to make arugged andhandy ParacordBelt by Jake22
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
How to Tie the Lanyard Knotby eddy14777 on January 31 2010
Intro How to Tie the Lanyard KnotMany people including myself have had trouble following the Stormdrane youtube video on tying the lanyard knot so i have done some research and found the solution
Image Notes1 Finished knot
Step 1 MaterialsAll you need is a reasonable length of para cord or whatever you wish to use
Image Notes1 One reasonable amount
Step 2 First StepThe first thing you are going to do is to make a bight that leaves you with to congruent endsThen you are going to put your ring finger through the bight
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Image Notes1 Close enough2 Bight
Step 3 Starting the KnotMake a loop just like the one in the picture and place it over the top strandBring the top strand under the bottom strand
Image Notes1 Notice the way the loop is done2 Top strand
Image Notes1 Bottom strand2 Top strand is under
Step 4 The Most Important PartNow you take the top stand from the previous picture and feed it over the first part of the loop under itself and back over the remainder of the loop
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Image Notes1 Under me2 Top strand3 This should make a diamond type shape
Step 5 DoublingNow take the bottom stand and take it around the part of the top strand nearest to the bight and than come up through the diamond shape in the middleDo the same for the top strand
Image Notes1 Top strand
Image Notes1 Both through the diamond
Step 6 FinishingWhen you take it off your finger it should look like thisWork out the slack by pulling on the bight and the two strands
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Image Notes1 Finished knot
Related Instructables
Cross KnotParacordLanyard byStormdrane
Celtic ButtonKnot (video) byStormdrane
Paracord wristlanyard madewith the snakeknot byStormdrane
Paracord ChainSinnet FastDeploy BoonieHatband (video)by Stormdrane
Zigzag SpoolingParacord (video)by Stormdrane
ParacordBoonie HatWrap (video) byStormdrane
Paracord IDbadge Lanyardby Flahusky
Cobra WeaveKey Fob bytevers94
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Four knots to make paracord into a useful toolby erik_mccray on March 27 2010
Authorerik_mccrayI am an ex-fabricator that is now a stay at home dad I love my new job but I do miss making stuff I love this site amp I am getting involved as a way to keep myskills upOn top of fad work I have also run two small business in the past One was custom sewing amp the other was as a small engine mechanicI have two votec degrees one in metal fabrication amp the other is in engine repairI look forward to getting to know everyone here
Intro Four knots to make paracord into a useful toolParacord is an awesome multitool used everywhere from the wild blue yonder to the deepest caverns But like any good tool it is only as good as the knowledge the userhas about the tool With most people out there using bungee cords amp ratchet straps it seems that paracord is being used for nothing more than friendship bracelets forgrown men This is a shame because for less then the price of a few cheap bungee cords amp some to short to be helpful straps You can get yourself hundreds of feet ofparacord
The key to getting the most out of the paracord is good knot work The first thing you need to know is what makes a good knot One is that the knot is easy amp quick to tieamp more impotant is that the knot is easy amp quick to untie The hitch class of knots is by far the best group of knots that the average person could know The four mostuseful hitch knots are the half hitch a quick simple knot that forms the base for many other knots the inline half hitch allowing you to get the most out of one length ofparacord the slippery hitch that gives you both on the fly control over tension on your paracord but also an adjustable loop that will not change unless you want it amp theinline truckers hitch instantly doubling the your pulling power
Step 1 To get started lets get some terminology that will be used defined
line= the paracord
Main line= the part of the paracord doing the work for example holding down your tarp or the long part of the paracord
Mid line= the middle of the length of the paracord
End line= the unused length of paracord or the short length of paracord
Step 2 The half hitch The half hitch is a simple way to secure a line to an anchor point like the tie down points in most trucks A half hitch is a constrictor knot meaning that the harder you pullon the line the tighter the knots grip gets Another common constrictor knot is the slip knot
Step 1 wrap your line around your anchor point Step 2 wrap the end line around the main line
Step 3 pass the end line threw the end line side of the newly formed loop
step 4 now take the slack out of the knot
step 5 to make sure the knot is secure tie another half hitch to the main line This knot is called adouble half hitch
step 6 another useful thing that can be done with the half hitch is that instead of repeating the wrap on the main line but repeating it on what you are tying to the half hitchcan be used to bind something like a stack of 2x4s
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Image Notes1 End line2 Main line3 step 1
Image Notes1 Step 2
Image Notes1 passing thew the end line side of the loop2 step 3
Image Notes1 step 5
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Image Notes1 step 6
Step 3 The mid line half hitch The mid line half hitch is for when the length of line is to long for the job at hand amp you dont want to have to cut the line to size or you are using multiple anchor pointswith one length of line
Step 1 double up the line at the point in the length you wish to make the knot
Step 2 wrap the doubled up portion of line around your anchor point The doubled up length is now now the end line
Step 3 now tie just as you did for the regular half hitch repeat the knot to make a double half hitch for security
Image Notes1 A mid line double half hitch
Image Notes1 step 1
Image Notes1 The end line2 step 2
Image Notes1 Step 3
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 4 The slippery hitch The slippery hitch is a great knot for adjusting tension on the main line or for having an adjustable fixed loop To adjust the knot simply slide the knot up or down the mainline
Step 1 wrap your line around the anchor point or just double over the line to form a loop
Step 2 wrap the end line around the main line three times Wrapping in the direction of the anchor point or loop
Step 3 put together the two lines making up the loop amp wrap the two lines one time with the end line
Step 4 pass the end line thew the last loop formed covering the two lined of the loop
Step 5 pull the knot tite
step 6 to adjust the size of the loop or main line tension grab the knot amp slide it up or down the main line
Image Notes1 grab just the knot its self to adjust it2 step 5
Image Notes1 step 1
Image Notes1 step 2
Image Notes1 step 3
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Image Notes1 step 4
Image Notes1 grab just the knot its self to adjust it2 step 5
Image Notes1 same knot as in last pic Just slid up2 step 6
Step 5 The mid line truchers hitch The truckers hitch is a great way to double the pulling force on a line There are many ways to tie this knot the problem with most of them is that at some point you aregoing to have to pass the end line through a loop on the main line that is acting like a pulley to double your pulling force this is great if you are making the knot close tothe end of your line but if you are using a 300 length of line amp want to make the knot in the first ten feet having to pass 290 of line thew a loop is a pain But with a fewhalf hitches you will not have to pass the end line threw any loop on the main line
step 1 wrap your line around the anchor point then double over your end line laying the top of the loop over the main line
Step 2 double up your main line amp lay the loop over the loop made by the end line
step 3 in main line above the knot twist in a loop
step 4 put main line loop thew the loop made in step 3 amp pull this loop tight over your main line loop forming a half hitch Repeat step 3 amp 4 to make a doublehalf hitch
step 5 To use the knot just pull down on the end line to put tension on the main line
step 6 after you have the main line snug tie a mid line double half hitch around the two lines forming the loop at the end of the main line with the end line
step 7 Tie a double half hitch with the end line around the end loop of the mid line half hitch of step 6 using the same method as used in steps 3 amp 4
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Image Notes1 the end of step 6
Image Notes1 main line2 end line3 step 1
Image Notes1 main line loop2 end line loop
Image Notes1 step 3
Image Notes1 step 4
Image Notes1 step 4 at the end with a double half hitch on the main loop
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Image Notes1 pull here2 step 5
Image Notes1 the start of step 6
Image Notes1 the end of step 6
Image Notes1 step 72 now the rest of the line is free to do more work
Related Instructables
Paracord KnotDisplay Bord byJamie bagn
ChokelessAdjustableParacord DogLeash byPizzaman101
ParacordLadder wWooden Rungsby josestude
tie a paracordshackle grip byitri45
ParacordPrussik Belt byJavaNut13
TiteTie is theTruckers Knoton Steroids bytitetie
ID Lanyard(Photos) byeschmunk
Dog Toys forHeavy Chewersby J3443RY
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Figure 8 knot and double 8 knotby jonathan111 on November 28 2007
Intro Figure 8 knot and double 8 knotI will show you how to tie a figure 8 knot and a figure 8 follow through
Step 1 Stating the knotThis is a simple knot so just follow the pictures
Step 2 Finishing the knotCross the string under and then push it through the hole Pull tightly unless you are going to do the follow through and leave it somewhat loose
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 3 The follow through knotThe follow through knot should be tied around something brought back and followed through the path of the 8 knot Look at the pictures Basically follow through the 8knot backwards
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Related Instructables
Climb Safe WithA Figure 8Knot by mattste A pocket full of
knots byKiteman
How to Tie aFigure EightKnot byTactical_Pyro
Paracord KnotDisplay Bord byJamie bagn
Cross KnotParacordLanyard byStormdrane
How to Tie aFire-escapeKnot by leonardoismael
Truckers HitchTHE mostawesome knoton the planetby schneidp20
Paracord ZipperPuller byrepeet13
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Truckers Hitch THE most awesome knot on the planetby schneidp20 on October 12 2008
Authorschneidp20I like building stuff Trouble is there just isnt enough time to build everything Sigh
Intro Truckers Hitch THE most awesome knot on the planetYes I know that there are plenty of other cool knots out there many of which I literally couldnt live wo I rock climb However this knot is unlike any other Plus Ineeded a grabber for my Instructable -) (BTW this ISNT a climbing knot) And in truth it isnt a knot by itself but rather a system of common knots
Have you ever tried to tie something down for transporting but just couldnt get the lines tight andor during transport the lines would continually loosen Then this is theknot for you I learned this knot back in the 70s when specialty car racks and ratchet straps were rare or unheard of I initially used it to tie a canoe on a car rack bothattaching to the rack as well as the lines to the bow and stern of the canoe Even with all the new gizmos available today this knot still shines because all you need is arope and ropes dont hum in the wind like straps
The unique aspect of this knot is that it gives you a 2-1 mechanical advantage when tightening the rope Be careful though You can actually damage some thingsbecause of the mechanical advantage This knot holds fast and is easy to untie hallmark traits of any good knot
Below you see the finished knot system well break it apart in the steps that follow
Image Notes1 1st anchor point a bowline2 loop3 securing knots 2 half hitches4 securing loose end with a fishermans knot5 2nd anchor point (should be round)
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Image Notes1 X marks the spot
Step 1 Initial setupThe first step is to anchor one end of the rope and then loop the rope around a 2nd anchor point
For attaching to the 1st anchor point I chose bowline a close 2 on my list -) There are other instructables on that one so I wont bore you here
The 2nd anchor really should be round because it serves as a pulley in this block and tackle type knot Ive used it on sharp anchor points and it doesnt work as well
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 2 Creating a slip knotTie a slip knot somewhere between the two anchor points Correct placement of the slip knot takes some experience to judge it correctly Typically I place it too close tothe 2nd anchor point and end up with not enough room to work with If the knot ends up too far from 2nd anchor point you can extend the knot by enlarging the loop
Be sure you tie the slip knot as shown You may not be able to untie other knots
In this small example the slip knot is uncharacteristically close to the 1st anchor point
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 3 Tightening and securingThe loose end of the rope that went around the 2nd anchor point goes through the slip knot loop Pull the loose end to the desired tension and secure with two halfhitches
Note To allow better view of the knots the rope isnt really tightened in this example
Step 4 Securing loose endThe final knot is just to secure the loose end somehow I chose a fishermans knot to do this
To tie a fishermans knot the rope goes around twice and goes under the X created by the loops Pull the loose end to tighten Finally slide the knot to put tension onthe half hitches
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Image Notes1 X marks the spot
Step 5 FinishedThere you have it I guarantee that the first time you really use this knot (not just practice) you will be amazed at how well it works and youll wish you knew this knot along time ago You may even come over to my side and declare that is is THE most awesome knot on the planet -)
Enjoy and happy haulingDave
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Related Instructables
TiteTie is theTruckers Knoton Steroids bytitetie
Four knots tomake paracordinto a usefultool byerik_mccray
Modify yourbike rack tocarry a sunfishor other boat byewilhelm
SurfboardHammock byGermy
GiganticHalloweenSpider Web bynolte919
How To Tie ASpiders Hitch(video) by back-cast
Three-hitch mathair ornamentby michiexile TRX from
ParacordChallengeAccepted bythrake
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Carry any Bottle with a JUG KNOT Handleby hpstoutharrow on September 17 2009
Intro Carry any Bottle with a JUG KNOT HandleTie a JUG KNOT around a water bottle soda bottle or aluminum bottle to make a secure carrying strap
Re-purpose any container into a reusable water bottle by adding a convenient carrying strap This Instructable will demonstrate how to tie a JUG knot which like its namesuggests is meant to properly secure around the neck of a container
With some cord and the knowledge of this knot you will be able add a handle lanyard or carabiner loop to any of your favorite beverages to carry them on the go
It works perfectly for those disposable water bottles and who knows once you add some colorful cord to the plain old clear water bottle you just might beinclined to refill it and use it again(Check out pictures 4amp5 below)
In addition to plastic beverage bottles like pop water and sports drinks you can turn those rugged aluminum beer bottles into a backpacking canteen
Those of you familiar with my previous aluminum bottle InstructablesROLLED RIM METAL TUMBLERhttpwwwinstructablescomidAluminum-Bottle-Tumbler-Cup-Cook-PotALUMINUM BOTTLE LIGHTWEIGHT ALCOHOL STOVEhttpwwwinstructablescomidAluminum-Bottle-Alcohol-Stovewill recognize the water canteen shown below as a re-purposed aluminum beer bottle Here I have added a painted surface treatment to turn it into a proper lookingwater bottle More on that in steps 13 14 15
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 1 Getting StartedCord size is important Select a small medium weight cord like the one shown here It is a general purpose camp cord sold at most sporting goods stores (shoelacesmight also work)
Do not use a heavy cord or rope because the larger diameter will not tuck under the relatively small lip at the top of the bottleneck and the bottle will fall out
Also the smaller cord cinches tight on itself and will not loosen accidentally
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 2 Form a BightThe next steps show how to tie a JUG KNOT It is the basic step for adding a carrying strap It is also the anchor point for any additional fancy bottle trussing you maywant to add
JUG KNOT Step 1
Form a Bight in the center of a length of cord Bight is a knot term for a loop or bend in the rope In this case the main Bight in this knot is highlighted with a white mark Imakes it easier to follow its path in these steps
The running ends of the cord should be equal length
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 3 Pull the Bight downPULL the Bight DOWN forming two Loops
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 4 Cross the LoopsCROSS the right Loop OVER the left Loop
Step 5 Pass the Bight under the 1st loopTake the main Bight and pass it UNDER the left Loop
Step 6 Weave the BightWEAVE the Bight OVER the portion of the right Loop and UNDER the portion of the left Loop
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 7 Extend the BightExtend the Bight OVER the outer portion of the right Loop
Step 8 Flip the Right Loop behindAdditional colored identification points have been added to the loops to follow their travel in these next two steps
The right Loop Yellow marker is FLIPPED BEHIND the knot and ends up on the far left side of the knot
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 9 Flip the 2nd loop in frontRaise the green marker (located on what was formerly the left loop) and pull it down and to the right FLIPPING IT IN FRONT of the knot
Note the blue portion of the this loop will pass around the outside of the yellow portion of the first loop
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Image Notes1 Center of knot that will tighten around the bottles neck
Step 10 Remove SlackNote where the blue green amp yellow markers end up
Start to remove the slack in the loops by pulling the original main Bight (white marker top right) and the two free standing ends at the bottom
the bottle neck will pass through the very center of the knot
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Image Notes1 Center of knot that will tighten around the bottles neck
Step 11 Tighten the KnotAfter removing the slack insert the bottle neck and finish tightening
The knot should look like this before slipping it over the bottle
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 12 Secure on bottle neckThis is the finished knot shown on the neck of various containers
The loop end and the two free standing ends can be tied together to create a carrying handle (last picture below)
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 13 Aluminum Bottle Water Bottle
The next few steps show the features of an aluminum beer bottle re-purposed as a water bottle canteen It is one of many containers that can be reused as a camp waterbottle
The bottle was lightly sanded masked and then pained with a hammered finished paint to create an interesting surface texture
Image Notes1 Textured finish paint makes an interesting grip-able surface2 Masked with tape for painting3 Masked with tape for painting
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Image Notes1 Dowel used for holding the bottle during painting
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 14 Tethered Cork StopperUse a wine bottle man made Cork as a stopper for your aluminum water bottleNote Use a cork that was removed from the wine bottle without the corkscrew penetrating through the bottom end of the cork (A hole all the way through the cork willcause it to leak) Use the unpierced end of the cork inside the water bottle
Drill a hole through the sides of the Cork Thread the cord through the hole to the center of the cord Use the cork as the main Bight and tie the Jug knot as shown inthe beginning steps
Now the cork is tethered to the bottle and will not get lost or fall on the ground
A Carabiner clip passes through the other cord end to attache the water bottle to you belt or pack
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 15 Trussed for TransportThis is another hanging method for carrying your aluminum bottle water canteen A Jug knot is tied conventionally around the neck
The running ends of the knot however are pulled down towards the bottom of the bottle A Barrel Knot is tied about 34 the way down the side of the bottle A squareknot is tied on the bottom of the knot to keep the two running ends tight against the sides of the bottle
I like the look of the accent colored cord running down the sides of the bottle and the fact that the bottle hangs from the belt upside down It adds to its uniqueness
The last picture shows another truss variation
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 16 AdvancedBelow is a bottle with some additional trussing You can be creative as you want It all starts with a re-purposed container and the Jug Knot (and enough cord)
Related Instructables
AluminumBottle TumblerCup amp Cook Potfor an AlcoholStove byhpstoutharrow
Water BottleBelt Clip byuglymike Duct Tape
Water Bottle byrabidsquire2
AluminumBottle AlcoholStove byhpstoutharrow
DIYGlass WaterBottle byCulturespy
Solar WaterHeater forBackpackingUsing WaterBottles and aCar Shade bykopomeroy
Duct tape waterbottle holder(Photos) by pinkmarshmallow
How to make aCamelPack withan old plasticbottle bywillrandship
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Basic Knots Guideby zorro3355 on April 29 2008
Intro Basic Knots Guidehi
Step 1 Thumb knotThe most simple knotUsed as a stopper and prevent ropes from fraying
Step 2 Reef KnotUsed to tie two ropes of equal thickness togetherIt is pretty easy to tie and untie but under tentionit may be diffcult to untieIt is also not sutible for smoothropes(egnylon ropes)
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 3 Figure of eightused as a stopperprevent ropes from fraying and its more secure than tumb knot its is also used to tie Caribinas to ropes and is often used in rock climbing
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 4 Timber hitchused for pulling logs
Step 5 Clove hitchUsed to tie a rope onto a pole or logThe pole must be roundThe pole lust be thicker then the rope itself
(greatly used during pioneering)
Step 6 Sheet bandused to tie ropes of different thickness together(works on same thickness of ropes too)
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 7 Sheep shankTo shorten RopesTo prevent middle fraying
Step 8 Slip knotWhippingUsed as a grip for pulling things(when tied on a stick or small pole)(marlin spike hitch)
Related Instructables
Rope Rings byhpstoutharrow
How to Tie aFigure EightKnot byTactical_Pyro
Whippin (WestCountry Style)by tim_n
SurvivalBracelet(Updated) bytevers94
HangmansNoose PackClosure byPopEye42
Turkey on aTripod byhpstoutharrow
SurvivalBracelet II bytevers94 Zigzag Spooling
Paracord (video)by Stormdrane
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
How to Tie a Fire-escape Knotby leonardo ismael on October 16 2007
Intro How to Tie a Fire-escape KnotThis knot is used by firemen in case of fires for example imagine a scene where the ladder on the firetruck messes up but people need to get down a five story buildingor more All they have is a long piece of rope they can safely get down with a secure knot like the fire-escape knot So why not learn it its easy to do and hard to untieif you tie it tightly
This is from the American Boys Handbook
Step 1 Get Your RopeFirst grab a piece of rope and bend it like this to make a loop in it Follow every step to the smallest detail
Step 2 Twist the RopeNow make a twist like this and hold it together
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 3 Pull Through the TwistPull the loop through the twist you just made from underneath
Step 4 Go Over the Split EndNow pull the tail through the loop
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 5 FinallyAnd finally just pull it through as pictured below
Congratulations you just learned the fire-escape knot
Step 6 Same Name Not KnotThis is another knot called the fire-escape knot this shouldnt be your result
Related Instructables
House FireEscape Plan(video) byWhatHappensNowAdvice
ParacordLadder wWooden Rungsby josestude
Bed SheetEscape Rope byjessehensel
rope ladder(glow-in-the-dark version) bymikeasaurus
HeadlockEscape 2(video) byjohnnyrockstah
QuickFirestarter byMattandJora
Trail sauna byjakee117
How to Kill FireAnts andCommitGenocide byKentsOkay
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Climb Safe With A Figure 8 Knotby mattste on February 23 2010
Intro Climb Safe With A Figure 8 Knot There are many things that a beginning climber needs to know including several important knots Perhaps the most essential knot is the Figure 8 Follow Through Thistutorial will demonstrate how to correctly harness yourself to a rope using a Figure 8 Follow Through knot This knot is used primarily by rock climbers to provide a life-line Since this knot is used as a life-line it is very important to be able to tie it correctly (Your life could depend upon it)
Dont worry with this tutorial and about 5 minutes of practice you can have this knot mastered
Things you will need
- Climbing Harness- Climbing Rope
If you are wanting to go climbing and dont already have these items they can be purchased for about $25 each at most outdoor sporting goods stores If you are merelylooking to learn the knot a belt loop and a rope (about five feet long) will do
Image Notes1 Climbing Harness2 Climbing Rope
Step 1 Dealing With The RopeThroughout this tutorial I will be discussing different parts of the rope To make these instructions as clear as possible I will define a few terms that I will use throughoutthe tutorial The Anchor End of the rope will generally be at the top of the images This is the end that would be anchored to the wall or rock and does not move Wewill not be doing much with the anchored end The Tail End of the rope is the opposite end that we will be dealing with I will call this the tail for short
Now that we have some terms to work with lets get started
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 2 Tying The First Figure 8This knot has several parts to it The first part of the knot is just tying a basic figure 8 To tie the first figure 8 there are four simple steps
1 - Using the tail make a loop over the rope (as shown in the first picture) keeping in mind that there should be about 3 ft of slack on the tail end
2 - Wrap the tail back this time go under the anchored end (As shown in the second picture)
3 - Bring the tail down through the first loop (As shown in the third picture)
4 - Finally pull the two ends to make the knot a little bit tighter and easier to deal with (Shown in the fourth picture)
After these four steps you should end up with a knot that resembles a figure 8
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 3 Looping Into The Harness In order to secure the rope to the harness simply thread the tail end of the rope through the front loop in the harness as shown in the picture below This step isobviously very important
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 4 Following Back Through The Figure 8After looping the rope through the harness you have to thread the tail end of the rope back through the knot following the first figure 8 I have divided this process intofive smaller steps in order to make it more clear
1 - Coming form underneath the knot bring the tail up through the near loop and to the left behind the anchored end of the rope (Shown in the first picture)
2 - Wrap the tail around the anchored end back to the right and down through the adjacent loop (Shown in the second picture)
3 - You simply need to bring the tail back over the top of the knot to the left (Shown in the third picture)
4 - Bring the tail end up through the far loop following the anchored end (Shown in the fourth picture)
5 - Finally pull the knot tight (Shown in the fifth picture)
As you can see the first four pictures are simply tracing the knot back through with the tail end
For the last part while you pull the knot tight you may want to make small adjustments and rearrange how it all fits together If the knot does not lay perfectly smoothand tight its NOT a big deal
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 5 Finishing The Knot After completing the Figure 8 knot you will want to somehow secure the tail end of the rope out of the way There are a couple different ways to do this the way that Iwill demonstrate is using whats called a Stopper Knot This secondary knot is similar to a Fishermans knot and is pretty simple I have once again divided thisprocess into several smaller steps
1 - Start by wrapping the tail end around the anchored end (As shown in the first picture)
2 - Wrap the tail back underneath the two vertical segments (As shown in the second picture)
3 - Simply repeat the first two steps wrapping the tail around again (As shown in the third picture)
4 - This step in the fourth picture may look complicated but all you need to do is insert the tail up through the two loops that you have just made
5 - To finish off the knot you will want to slowly pull the tail end while gently pushing the bottom of the stopper knot upwards If you have successfully completed this knotit should look something like the fifth picture
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 6 Ready To Climb Now that you have mastered the Figure 8 knot you can securely harness yourself into a climbing rope Remember there are many other skills that go into setting up ananchor and belaying a climber This tutorial only covers the figure 8 knot For more information there are many great websites that demonstrate how to correctly set up asafe climbing system (Ive posted a few below) If you are a beginning climber I recommend that you read up on a few other climbing techniques Also you shouldprobably go to a climbing wall or gym where there are experienced climbers that can show you the ropes Hopefully this tutorial has been helpful Have fun and be safe
Some useful linkshttpwwwstephenprattnetAnchorsanchorshtmhttpwwwuoregonedu~oppclimbingtopicsanchorshtmlhttpwwwabc-of-rockclimbingcomhowtoclimbingtechniquesasp
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Related Instructables
How to Tie aFigure EightKnot byTactical_Pyro
Paracord KnotDisplay Bord byJamie bagn
Basic KnotsGuide byzorro3355
How to Climb aTree (withprussiks) bystasterisk
How to climb atree (using onlyrope) thefunsimple wayby louieaw
How to get arope into a tree(withoutclimbing it) byvitex
How to tievarious knots byadaviel
How to make arope swing byjdub0928
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Turks Head Knots on a Bottleby sklnxbones on July 6 2010
Intro Turks Head Knots on a BottleThis is the finished project A bottle decorated with three Turks Head Knots There are only three knots on this bottle The RED and the BLUE knots are each a 20 Bightby 3 Lead Turks Head Knots The WHITE knot is a 20 Bight by 19 Lead Turks Head Knot
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 1 Supplies
Cord Lots and Lots of cord I cant tell you how much each bottle is differentBottle Washed and Dried inside and out Make sure to remove all water spotsThreaded Needle Cord screws into the threads at the base of the needlePegs I use brass rivets used as a map to tie the Turks Head KnotsHole Punch Used to punch holes in the painters tape to hold the pegsPainters Tape To hold the pegs in place and to make your map for the Turks Head KnotsMarker To write on the painters tapeCloth Towel To remove finger prints and dirt from your bottleKrazy Glue or Super Glue This is used to secure the knots in place to the bottle
OPTIONAL BUT HIGHLY RECOMMENDEDI use the Turks Head Cookbook from KnotToolcom
Step 2 PreparationYou will need to find a bottle you like I used an empty instant tea bottle of course washed and dried (I like to put the bottle in the oven for a few minutes to dry the insidewithout water spots Take off the lid and do not put lid in the oven) Now measure the circumference of the bottle Take a cord and tightly wrap the cord around the bottleMark where the ends meet and use a ruler to measure the length of the cord For my instant tea bottle the circumference is 27cm I know from past knots that I have tiedthat I want my knot to have 20 Bights in the top and bottom (bands) knots I am going to use the Bights in the (bands) knots to tie the middle knot Now divide the numberof Bights (20) into the size of the circumference (27) to get the space between each Bight (135) With me so far
Now take two pieces of painters tape using a ruler measure out the length of the circumference and mark the length on the both pieces of tape Next you will mark thespace between each Bight on the tape
Step 3 Adding the PegsI like to use pegs when tying Turks Head Knots it just makes tying the knot easier
These are what I use for pegs
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 4 Adding Pegs to the TapeNow take a hole punch to cut holes in the tape where the lines meet You will place the pegs in the holes
Insert a peg in each hole and carefully stick the first piece of tape to the bottle
Step 5 Adding the 2nd row of pegsNow do the same thing with the second piece of tape The numbers on each piece of tape must line up
This picture shows you what you should have now This odd looking thing will be your map to tie the Turks Head Knot And this is the end of Step 1
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 6 Tying the first Turks Head KnotUsing the Turks Head Cookbook follow the numbers going over and under as indicated in the book I chose a 20 Bight by 3 Lead knot which will give me a nice bandaround the bottle Once the ends meet you have made one complete knot Tape the running end of your cord and start removing the pegs and the tape
Step 7 Remove the pegs and the tapeBe careful not to untie the knot as you remove the pegs and tape from the bottle Continue to remove all the pegs and remove the tape from the bottle At this point theknot will be very loose and will need to be tightened up
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 8 Remove the slack from the knotHere you can see just how much the knot expanded Starting with the standing end begin to pull the slack out of the knot going towards the running end of the cordDo not expect to pull all the slack out at once You may have to make 3 - 5 attempts at removing the slack out of the knot DO NOT remove all of the slack out of the knotIn order to make the bands we will have to triple the Turks Head Knot We will do this by following the knot three times The threaded needle will really come in handyhere
Step 9 Triple the KnotOnce you have made three passes of the Turks Head Knot use your needle to go under your knot about half the circumference and cut the cord The knot will be tightenough to hide the tail in placeTIP I carefully add a couple of drops of super glue UNDER the band to hold them in place and keep them from sliding around in the nextsteps A drop or two in 3 or 4 places around the band should be enough
Step 10 Add the second knotNow repeat this whole step for the second bandWhen tying the second band you must make sure the Bights line up to the first band This is crucial for the next stepWipe down the bottle to make sure all your finger prints and adhesive from the tape are all removed You want to make sure your bottle is clean at this point Any dirt orfinger prints left on the bottle will be almost impossible to remove From this point on we will use gloves when tying our last knot
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 11 Maping the Top KnotStick a piece of painters tape on top of your first band leaving the bottom of the knot exposedUse a marker to count the number of Bights in your knot Instead of using the pegs we are going to use the Bights to tie our next Turks Head Knot
Step 12 Mapping the Bottom KnotDo the same thing for the bottom band but you must make sure your numbers on top and bottom line up So 1 on top should be the same position as 1 on the bottom
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 13 Adding the last knotAgain using the Turks Head Cookbook and the threaded needle you are going to follow the instructions going over and under as indicated in the book Be sure to usegloves when ever you handle the bottle
Step 14 Thats ItFor this Turks Head Knot I am using a 20 Bight by 19 Lead knot
Because of the amount of cord you are working with your cord will get twisted and knotted You will have to un-twist the cord often Its a pain in the rear but it has to bedone And it has to be done alot
Continue to tie the knot until you finish the knot If you have the cord and the patience you can double or triple the knot When you are done use your needle to hide theends under your bands Cut the ends and your DONE
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Related Instructables
Monkeys FistFloatingKeychain byjokerlz
How To Make ATurks headKnot WithParacord byDoggie Stylish
Tying Trivetsout of Rope forHoliday Gifts bykylemarsh
Paracord KnotDisplay Bord byJamie bagn
How to Make ATurks Head(Photos) bymchs60chip
A pocket full ofknots byKiteman
Monkeys fistknot AND themonkey byjonathan111
TiteTie is theTruckers Knoton Steroids bytitetie
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Larks head noose -- an easy useful knot that tightens and loosensby Larry Breed on February 19 2009
Intro Larks head noose -- an easy useful knot that tightens and loosensI thought I knew all the basic knots but then I was taught this incredibly useful simple knot Its good for tying up the neck of a bag that you want to repeatedly open andsecurely close Its good for tying around a springy bundle that will need tightening and retightening And its easy to undo
Ive looked at knot literature but havent found a name for this so I named it The basic knot is well known its called a larks head Since all Ive done is to slip the twoends through the larks head to make a noose I call it that
WARNING Dont use this knot when human safety would depend on it Climbers and mountaineers have well-tested reliable knots for such situations
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Image Notes1 To tighten further step on this side of the larks head and pull the free ends
Step 1 Double the cord overThe larks head noose requires enough cord to go twice around your bundle plus a foot or two Find the center and double it over Sailors call this a bight
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 2 Form the larks headComing from below the bight hook your thumb and forefinger over the two sides Reach outward and downward and pinch your fingertips together underneath thedoubled cord
Youve made a larks head Move the crossing cord a little farther from your hand so theres a clear opening through the two half-loops
Step 3 Form the nooseSlip the two ends of the cord through the opening we were just talking about Pull the larks head tight so it grips the two cords Find something that needs constrictingand put the noose around it
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 4 Tightening retightening and lockingSlide the knot against the bundle If its not tight enough to keep from slipping tighten it by holding it in one hand and tugging on the cords one at a time with the otherhand Notice that you can slide the knot out again for instance to re-open the bag you just tied shut For some applications this may be as tight as you need it
A springy bundle probably still feels loose If so compress the bundle and get a new grip on the cords Rest your foot on the bundle on the cords nearest the larks headand pull to slide the larks head tighter
To make the knot more permanent you can lock it Make an overhand in the cord ends (Exactly like the first step in tying shoelaces) With your foot still on the bundlepull on the cords and move your hands apart until youre pulling in opposite directions You have just locked the larks head and you can trust it to stay that way()
But lets say that later on you want to loosen the locked knot Again put your foot on the bundle and cords nearest the larks head hold the two cord ends together andpull This makes a little slack between the overhand and the larks head so you can untie the overhand
In twine or small string the locking overhand knot may be difficult to undo Use a shoelace knot instead of an overhand and itll unlock easily
() If youre using slippery cord like polypropylene an overhand may not lock securely You may want to tie another overhand knot For added security wrap a shortlength of duct tape around the two cords close to the knot
Image Notes1 To tighten further step on this side of the larks head and pull the free ends
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Related Instructables
TRX fromParacordChallengeAccepted bythrake
A pocket full ofknots byKiteman
Lens CapLanyard by~teknoarsonist~ how to tie a
noose byawesume
AdjustableParacordGlassesLanyard byjdtwelve12
HangmansNoose PackClosure byPopEye42
Paraleash - ADog LeashFrom Paracordby The Ideanator
How to make arugged andhandy ParacordBelt by Jake22
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Image Notes1 Close enough2 Bight
Step 3 Starting the KnotMake a loop just like the one in the picture and place it over the top strandBring the top strand under the bottom strand
Image Notes1 Notice the way the loop is done2 Top strand
Image Notes1 Bottom strand2 Top strand is under
Step 4 The Most Important PartNow you take the top stand from the previous picture and feed it over the first part of the loop under itself and back over the remainder of the loop
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Image Notes1 Under me2 Top strand3 This should make a diamond type shape
Step 5 DoublingNow take the bottom stand and take it around the part of the top strand nearest to the bight and than come up through the diamond shape in the middleDo the same for the top strand
Image Notes1 Top strand
Image Notes1 Both through the diamond
Step 6 FinishingWhen you take it off your finger it should look like thisWork out the slack by pulling on the bight and the two strands
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Image Notes1 Finished knot
Related Instructables
Cross KnotParacordLanyard byStormdrane
Celtic ButtonKnot (video) byStormdrane
Paracord wristlanyard madewith the snakeknot byStormdrane
Paracord ChainSinnet FastDeploy BoonieHatband (video)by Stormdrane
Zigzag SpoolingParacord (video)by Stormdrane
ParacordBoonie HatWrap (video) byStormdrane
Paracord IDbadge Lanyardby Flahusky
Cobra WeaveKey Fob bytevers94
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Four knots to make paracord into a useful toolby erik_mccray on March 27 2010
Authorerik_mccrayI am an ex-fabricator that is now a stay at home dad I love my new job but I do miss making stuff I love this site amp I am getting involved as a way to keep myskills upOn top of fad work I have also run two small business in the past One was custom sewing amp the other was as a small engine mechanicI have two votec degrees one in metal fabrication amp the other is in engine repairI look forward to getting to know everyone here
Intro Four knots to make paracord into a useful toolParacord is an awesome multitool used everywhere from the wild blue yonder to the deepest caverns But like any good tool it is only as good as the knowledge the userhas about the tool With most people out there using bungee cords amp ratchet straps it seems that paracord is being used for nothing more than friendship bracelets forgrown men This is a shame because for less then the price of a few cheap bungee cords amp some to short to be helpful straps You can get yourself hundreds of feet ofparacord
The key to getting the most out of the paracord is good knot work The first thing you need to know is what makes a good knot One is that the knot is easy amp quick to tieamp more impotant is that the knot is easy amp quick to untie The hitch class of knots is by far the best group of knots that the average person could know The four mostuseful hitch knots are the half hitch a quick simple knot that forms the base for many other knots the inline half hitch allowing you to get the most out of one length ofparacord the slippery hitch that gives you both on the fly control over tension on your paracord but also an adjustable loop that will not change unless you want it amp theinline truckers hitch instantly doubling the your pulling power
Step 1 To get started lets get some terminology that will be used defined
line= the paracord
Main line= the part of the paracord doing the work for example holding down your tarp or the long part of the paracord
Mid line= the middle of the length of the paracord
End line= the unused length of paracord or the short length of paracord
Step 2 The half hitch The half hitch is a simple way to secure a line to an anchor point like the tie down points in most trucks A half hitch is a constrictor knot meaning that the harder you pullon the line the tighter the knots grip gets Another common constrictor knot is the slip knot
Step 1 wrap your line around your anchor point Step 2 wrap the end line around the main line
Step 3 pass the end line threw the end line side of the newly formed loop
step 4 now take the slack out of the knot
step 5 to make sure the knot is secure tie another half hitch to the main line This knot is called adouble half hitch
step 6 another useful thing that can be done with the half hitch is that instead of repeating the wrap on the main line but repeating it on what you are tying to the half hitchcan be used to bind something like a stack of 2x4s
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Image Notes1 End line2 Main line3 step 1
Image Notes1 Step 2
Image Notes1 passing thew the end line side of the loop2 step 3
Image Notes1 step 5
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Image Notes1 step 6
Step 3 The mid line half hitch The mid line half hitch is for when the length of line is to long for the job at hand amp you dont want to have to cut the line to size or you are using multiple anchor pointswith one length of line
Step 1 double up the line at the point in the length you wish to make the knot
Step 2 wrap the doubled up portion of line around your anchor point The doubled up length is now now the end line
Step 3 now tie just as you did for the regular half hitch repeat the knot to make a double half hitch for security
Image Notes1 A mid line double half hitch
Image Notes1 step 1
Image Notes1 The end line2 step 2
Image Notes1 Step 3
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 4 The slippery hitch The slippery hitch is a great knot for adjusting tension on the main line or for having an adjustable fixed loop To adjust the knot simply slide the knot up or down the mainline
Step 1 wrap your line around the anchor point or just double over the line to form a loop
Step 2 wrap the end line around the main line three times Wrapping in the direction of the anchor point or loop
Step 3 put together the two lines making up the loop amp wrap the two lines one time with the end line
Step 4 pass the end line thew the last loop formed covering the two lined of the loop
Step 5 pull the knot tite
step 6 to adjust the size of the loop or main line tension grab the knot amp slide it up or down the main line
Image Notes1 grab just the knot its self to adjust it2 step 5
Image Notes1 step 1
Image Notes1 step 2
Image Notes1 step 3
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Image Notes1 step 4
Image Notes1 grab just the knot its self to adjust it2 step 5
Image Notes1 same knot as in last pic Just slid up2 step 6
Step 5 The mid line truchers hitch The truckers hitch is a great way to double the pulling force on a line There are many ways to tie this knot the problem with most of them is that at some point you aregoing to have to pass the end line through a loop on the main line that is acting like a pulley to double your pulling force this is great if you are making the knot close tothe end of your line but if you are using a 300 length of line amp want to make the knot in the first ten feet having to pass 290 of line thew a loop is a pain But with a fewhalf hitches you will not have to pass the end line threw any loop on the main line
step 1 wrap your line around the anchor point then double over your end line laying the top of the loop over the main line
Step 2 double up your main line amp lay the loop over the loop made by the end line
step 3 in main line above the knot twist in a loop
step 4 put main line loop thew the loop made in step 3 amp pull this loop tight over your main line loop forming a half hitch Repeat step 3 amp 4 to make a doublehalf hitch
step 5 To use the knot just pull down on the end line to put tension on the main line
step 6 after you have the main line snug tie a mid line double half hitch around the two lines forming the loop at the end of the main line with the end line
step 7 Tie a double half hitch with the end line around the end loop of the mid line half hitch of step 6 using the same method as used in steps 3 amp 4
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Image Notes1 the end of step 6
Image Notes1 main line2 end line3 step 1
Image Notes1 main line loop2 end line loop
Image Notes1 step 3
Image Notes1 step 4
Image Notes1 step 4 at the end with a double half hitch on the main loop
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Image Notes1 pull here2 step 5
Image Notes1 the start of step 6
Image Notes1 the end of step 6
Image Notes1 step 72 now the rest of the line is free to do more work
Related Instructables
Paracord KnotDisplay Bord byJamie bagn
ChokelessAdjustableParacord DogLeash byPizzaman101
ParacordLadder wWooden Rungsby josestude
tie a paracordshackle grip byitri45
ParacordPrussik Belt byJavaNut13
TiteTie is theTruckers Knoton Steroids bytitetie
ID Lanyard(Photos) byeschmunk
Dog Toys forHeavy Chewersby J3443RY
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Figure 8 knot and double 8 knotby jonathan111 on November 28 2007
Intro Figure 8 knot and double 8 knotI will show you how to tie a figure 8 knot and a figure 8 follow through
Step 1 Stating the knotThis is a simple knot so just follow the pictures
Step 2 Finishing the knotCross the string under and then push it through the hole Pull tightly unless you are going to do the follow through and leave it somewhat loose
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 3 The follow through knotThe follow through knot should be tied around something brought back and followed through the path of the 8 knot Look at the pictures Basically follow through the 8knot backwards
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Related Instructables
Climb Safe WithA Figure 8Knot by mattste A pocket full of
knots byKiteman
How to Tie aFigure EightKnot byTactical_Pyro
Paracord KnotDisplay Bord byJamie bagn
Cross KnotParacordLanyard byStormdrane
How to Tie aFire-escapeKnot by leonardoismael
Truckers HitchTHE mostawesome knoton the planetby schneidp20
Paracord ZipperPuller byrepeet13
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Truckers Hitch THE most awesome knot on the planetby schneidp20 on October 12 2008
Authorschneidp20I like building stuff Trouble is there just isnt enough time to build everything Sigh
Intro Truckers Hitch THE most awesome knot on the planetYes I know that there are plenty of other cool knots out there many of which I literally couldnt live wo I rock climb However this knot is unlike any other Plus Ineeded a grabber for my Instructable -) (BTW this ISNT a climbing knot) And in truth it isnt a knot by itself but rather a system of common knots
Have you ever tried to tie something down for transporting but just couldnt get the lines tight andor during transport the lines would continually loosen Then this is theknot for you I learned this knot back in the 70s when specialty car racks and ratchet straps were rare or unheard of I initially used it to tie a canoe on a car rack bothattaching to the rack as well as the lines to the bow and stern of the canoe Even with all the new gizmos available today this knot still shines because all you need is arope and ropes dont hum in the wind like straps
The unique aspect of this knot is that it gives you a 2-1 mechanical advantage when tightening the rope Be careful though You can actually damage some thingsbecause of the mechanical advantage This knot holds fast and is easy to untie hallmark traits of any good knot
Below you see the finished knot system well break it apart in the steps that follow
Image Notes1 1st anchor point a bowline2 loop3 securing knots 2 half hitches4 securing loose end with a fishermans knot5 2nd anchor point (should be round)
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Image Notes1 X marks the spot
Step 1 Initial setupThe first step is to anchor one end of the rope and then loop the rope around a 2nd anchor point
For attaching to the 1st anchor point I chose bowline a close 2 on my list -) There are other instructables on that one so I wont bore you here
The 2nd anchor really should be round because it serves as a pulley in this block and tackle type knot Ive used it on sharp anchor points and it doesnt work as well
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 2 Creating a slip knotTie a slip knot somewhere between the two anchor points Correct placement of the slip knot takes some experience to judge it correctly Typically I place it too close tothe 2nd anchor point and end up with not enough room to work with If the knot ends up too far from 2nd anchor point you can extend the knot by enlarging the loop
Be sure you tie the slip knot as shown You may not be able to untie other knots
In this small example the slip knot is uncharacteristically close to the 1st anchor point
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 3 Tightening and securingThe loose end of the rope that went around the 2nd anchor point goes through the slip knot loop Pull the loose end to the desired tension and secure with two halfhitches
Note To allow better view of the knots the rope isnt really tightened in this example
Step 4 Securing loose endThe final knot is just to secure the loose end somehow I chose a fishermans knot to do this
To tie a fishermans knot the rope goes around twice and goes under the X created by the loops Pull the loose end to tighten Finally slide the knot to put tension onthe half hitches
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Image Notes1 X marks the spot
Step 5 FinishedThere you have it I guarantee that the first time you really use this knot (not just practice) you will be amazed at how well it works and youll wish you knew this knot along time ago You may even come over to my side and declare that is is THE most awesome knot on the planet -)
Enjoy and happy haulingDave
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Related Instructables
TiteTie is theTruckers Knoton Steroids bytitetie
Four knots tomake paracordinto a usefultool byerik_mccray
Modify yourbike rack tocarry a sunfishor other boat byewilhelm
SurfboardHammock byGermy
GiganticHalloweenSpider Web bynolte919
How To Tie ASpiders Hitch(video) by back-cast
Three-hitch mathair ornamentby michiexile TRX from
ParacordChallengeAccepted bythrake
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Carry any Bottle with a JUG KNOT Handleby hpstoutharrow on September 17 2009
Intro Carry any Bottle with a JUG KNOT HandleTie a JUG KNOT around a water bottle soda bottle or aluminum bottle to make a secure carrying strap
Re-purpose any container into a reusable water bottle by adding a convenient carrying strap This Instructable will demonstrate how to tie a JUG knot which like its namesuggests is meant to properly secure around the neck of a container
With some cord and the knowledge of this knot you will be able add a handle lanyard or carabiner loop to any of your favorite beverages to carry them on the go
It works perfectly for those disposable water bottles and who knows once you add some colorful cord to the plain old clear water bottle you just might beinclined to refill it and use it again(Check out pictures 4amp5 below)
In addition to plastic beverage bottles like pop water and sports drinks you can turn those rugged aluminum beer bottles into a backpacking canteen
Those of you familiar with my previous aluminum bottle InstructablesROLLED RIM METAL TUMBLERhttpwwwinstructablescomidAluminum-Bottle-Tumbler-Cup-Cook-PotALUMINUM BOTTLE LIGHTWEIGHT ALCOHOL STOVEhttpwwwinstructablescomidAluminum-Bottle-Alcohol-Stovewill recognize the water canteen shown below as a re-purposed aluminum beer bottle Here I have added a painted surface treatment to turn it into a proper lookingwater bottle More on that in steps 13 14 15
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 1 Getting StartedCord size is important Select a small medium weight cord like the one shown here It is a general purpose camp cord sold at most sporting goods stores (shoelacesmight also work)
Do not use a heavy cord or rope because the larger diameter will not tuck under the relatively small lip at the top of the bottleneck and the bottle will fall out
Also the smaller cord cinches tight on itself and will not loosen accidentally
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 2 Form a BightThe next steps show how to tie a JUG KNOT It is the basic step for adding a carrying strap It is also the anchor point for any additional fancy bottle trussing you maywant to add
JUG KNOT Step 1
Form a Bight in the center of a length of cord Bight is a knot term for a loop or bend in the rope In this case the main Bight in this knot is highlighted with a white mark Imakes it easier to follow its path in these steps
The running ends of the cord should be equal length
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 3 Pull the Bight downPULL the Bight DOWN forming two Loops
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 4 Cross the LoopsCROSS the right Loop OVER the left Loop
Step 5 Pass the Bight under the 1st loopTake the main Bight and pass it UNDER the left Loop
Step 6 Weave the BightWEAVE the Bight OVER the portion of the right Loop and UNDER the portion of the left Loop
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 7 Extend the BightExtend the Bight OVER the outer portion of the right Loop
Step 8 Flip the Right Loop behindAdditional colored identification points have been added to the loops to follow their travel in these next two steps
The right Loop Yellow marker is FLIPPED BEHIND the knot and ends up on the far left side of the knot
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 9 Flip the 2nd loop in frontRaise the green marker (located on what was formerly the left loop) and pull it down and to the right FLIPPING IT IN FRONT of the knot
Note the blue portion of the this loop will pass around the outside of the yellow portion of the first loop
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Image Notes1 Center of knot that will tighten around the bottles neck
Step 10 Remove SlackNote where the blue green amp yellow markers end up
Start to remove the slack in the loops by pulling the original main Bight (white marker top right) and the two free standing ends at the bottom
the bottle neck will pass through the very center of the knot
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Image Notes1 Center of knot that will tighten around the bottles neck
Step 11 Tighten the KnotAfter removing the slack insert the bottle neck and finish tightening
The knot should look like this before slipping it over the bottle
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 12 Secure on bottle neckThis is the finished knot shown on the neck of various containers
The loop end and the two free standing ends can be tied together to create a carrying handle (last picture below)
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 13 Aluminum Bottle Water Bottle
The next few steps show the features of an aluminum beer bottle re-purposed as a water bottle canteen It is one of many containers that can be reused as a camp waterbottle
The bottle was lightly sanded masked and then pained with a hammered finished paint to create an interesting surface texture
Image Notes1 Textured finish paint makes an interesting grip-able surface2 Masked with tape for painting3 Masked with tape for painting
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Image Notes1 Dowel used for holding the bottle during painting
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 14 Tethered Cork StopperUse a wine bottle man made Cork as a stopper for your aluminum water bottleNote Use a cork that was removed from the wine bottle without the corkscrew penetrating through the bottom end of the cork (A hole all the way through the cork willcause it to leak) Use the unpierced end of the cork inside the water bottle
Drill a hole through the sides of the Cork Thread the cord through the hole to the center of the cord Use the cork as the main Bight and tie the Jug knot as shown inthe beginning steps
Now the cork is tethered to the bottle and will not get lost or fall on the ground
A Carabiner clip passes through the other cord end to attache the water bottle to you belt or pack
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 15 Trussed for TransportThis is another hanging method for carrying your aluminum bottle water canteen A Jug knot is tied conventionally around the neck
The running ends of the knot however are pulled down towards the bottom of the bottle A Barrel Knot is tied about 34 the way down the side of the bottle A squareknot is tied on the bottom of the knot to keep the two running ends tight against the sides of the bottle
I like the look of the accent colored cord running down the sides of the bottle and the fact that the bottle hangs from the belt upside down It adds to its uniqueness
The last picture shows another truss variation
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 16 AdvancedBelow is a bottle with some additional trussing You can be creative as you want It all starts with a re-purposed container and the Jug Knot (and enough cord)
Related Instructables
AluminumBottle TumblerCup amp Cook Potfor an AlcoholStove byhpstoutharrow
Water BottleBelt Clip byuglymike Duct Tape
Water Bottle byrabidsquire2
AluminumBottle AlcoholStove byhpstoutharrow
DIYGlass WaterBottle byCulturespy
Solar WaterHeater forBackpackingUsing WaterBottles and aCar Shade bykopomeroy
Duct tape waterbottle holder(Photos) by pinkmarshmallow
How to make aCamelPack withan old plasticbottle bywillrandship
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Basic Knots Guideby zorro3355 on April 29 2008
Intro Basic Knots Guidehi
Step 1 Thumb knotThe most simple knotUsed as a stopper and prevent ropes from fraying
Step 2 Reef KnotUsed to tie two ropes of equal thickness togetherIt is pretty easy to tie and untie but under tentionit may be diffcult to untieIt is also not sutible for smoothropes(egnylon ropes)
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 3 Figure of eightused as a stopperprevent ropes from fraying and its more secure than tumb knot its is also used to tie Caribinas to ropes and is often used in rock climbing
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 4 Timber hitchused for pulling logs
Step 5 Clove hitchUsed to tie a rope onto a pole or logThe pole must be roundThe pole lust be thicker then the rope itself
(greatly used during pioneering)
Step 6 Sheet bandused to tie ropes of different thickness together(works on same thickness of ropes too)
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 7 Sheep shankTo shorten RopesTo prevent middle fraying
Step 8 Slip knotWhippingUsed as a grip for pulling things(when tied on a stick or small pole)(marlin spike hitch)
Related Instructables
Rope Rings byhpstoutharrow
How to Tie aFigure EightKnot byTactical_Pyro
Whippin (WestCountry Style)by tim_n
SurvivalBracelet(Updated) bytevers94
HangmansNoose PackClosure byPopEye42
Turkey on aTripod byhpstoutharrow
SurvivalBracelet II bytevers94 Zigzag Spooling
Paracord (video)by Stormdrane
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
How to Tie a Fire-escape Knotby leonardo ismael on October 16 2007
Intro How to Tie a Fire-escape KnotThis knot is used by firemen in case of fires for example imagine a scene where the ladder on the firetruck messes up but people need to get down a five story buildingor more All they have is a long piece of rope they can safely get down with a secure knot like the fire-escape knot So why not learn it its easy to do and hard to untieif you tie it tightly
This is from the American Boys Handbook
Step 1 Get Your RopeFirst grab a piece of rope and bend it like this to make a loop in it Follow every step to the smallest detail
Step 2 Twist the RopeNow make a twist like this and hold it together
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 3 Pull Through the TwistPull the loop through the twist you just made from underneath
Step 4 Go Over the Split EndNow pull the tail through the loop
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 5 FinallyAnd finally just pull it through as pictured below
Congratulations you just learned the fire-escape knot
Step 6 Same Name Not KnotThis is another knot called the fire-escape knot this shouldnt be your result
Related Instructables
House FireEscape Plan(video) byWhatHappensNowAdvice
ParacordLadder wWooden Rungsby josestude
Bed SheetEscape Rope byjessehensel
rope ladder(glow-in-the-dark version) bymikeasaurus
HeadlockEscape 2(video) byjohnnyrockstah
QuickFirestarter byMattandJora
Trail sauna byjakee117
How to Kill FireAnts andCommitGenocide byKentsOkay
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Climb Safe With A Figure 8 Knotby mattste on February 23 2010
Intro Climb Safe With A Figure 8 Knot There are many things that a beginning climber needs to know including several important knots Perhaps the most essential knot is the Figure 8 Follow Through Thistutorial will demonstrate how to correctly harness yourself to a rope using a Figure 8 Follow Through knot This knot is used primarily by rock climbers to provide a life-line Since this knot is used as a life-line it is very important to be able to tie it correctly (Your life could depend upon it)
Dont worry with this tutorial and about 5 minutes of practice you can have this knot mastered
Things you will need
- Climbing Harness- Climbing Rope
If you are wanting to go climbing and dont already have these items they can be purchased for about $25 each at most outdoor sporting goods stores If you are merelylooking to learn the knot a belt loop and a rope (about five feet long) will do
Image Notes1 Climbing Harness2 Climbing Rope
Step 1 Dealing With The RopeThroughout this tutorial I will be discussing different parts of the rope To make these instructions as clear as possible I will define a few terms that I will use throughoutthe tutorial The Anchor End of the rope will generally be at the top of the images This is the end that would be anchored to the wall or rock and does not move Wewill not be doing much with the anchored end The Tail End of the rope is the opposite end that we will be dealing with I will call this the tail for short
Now that we have some terms to work with lets get started
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 2 Tying The First Figure 8This knot has several parts to it The first part of the knot is just tying a basic figure 8 To tie the first figure 8 there are four simple steps
1 - Using the tail make a loop over the rope (as shown in the first picture) keeping in mind that there should be about 3 ft of slack on the tail end
2 - Wrap the tail back this time go under the anchored end (As shown in the second picture)
3 - Bring the tail down through the first loop (As shown in the third picture)
4 - Finally pull the two ends to make the knot a little bit tighter and easier to deal with (Shown in the fourth picture)
After these four steps you should end up with a knot that resembles a figure 8
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 3 Looping Into The Harness In order to secure the rope to the harness simply thread the tail end of the rope through the front loop in the harness as shown in the picture below This step isobviously very important
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 4 Following Back Through The Figure 8After looping the rope through the harness you have to thread the tail end of the rope back through the knot following the first figure 8 I have divided this process intofive smaller steps in order to make it more clear
1 - Coming form underneath the knot bring the tail up through the near loop and to the left behind the anchored end of the rope (Shown in the first picture)
2 - Wrap the tail around the anchored end back to the right and down through the adjacent loop (Shown in the second picture)
3 - You simply need to bring the tail back over the top of the knot to the left (Shown in the third picture)
4 - Bring the tail end up through the far loop following the anchored end (Shown in the fourth picture)
5 - Finally pull the knot tight (Shown in the fifth picture)
As you can see the first four pictures are simply tracing the knot back through with the tail end
For the last part while you pull the knot tight you may want to make small adjustments and rearrange how it all fits together If the knot does not lay perfectly smoothand tight its NOT a big deal
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 5 Finishing The Knot After completing the Figure 8 knot you will want to somehow secure the tail end of the rope out of the way There are a couple different ways to do this the way that Iwill demonstrate is using whats called a Stopper Knot This secondary knot is similar to a Fishermans knot and is pretty simple I have once again divided thisprocess into several smaller steps
1 - Start by wrapping the tail end around the anchored end (As shown in the first picture)
2 - Wrap the tail back underneath the two vertical segments (As shown in the second picture)
3 - Simply repeat the first two steps wrapping the tail around again (As shown in the third picture)
4 - This step in the fourth picture may look complicated but all you need to do is insert the tail up through the two loops that you have just made
5 - To finish off the knot you will want to slowly pull the tail end while gently pushing the bottom of the stopper knot upwards If you have successfully completed this knotit should look something like the fifth picture
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 6 Ready To Climb Now that you have mastered the Figure 8 knot you can securely harness yourself into a climbing rope Remember there are many other skills that go into setting up ananchor and belaying a climber This tutorial only covers the figure 8 knot For more information there are many great websites that demonstrate how to correctly set up asafe climbing system (Ive posted a few below) If you are a beginning climber I recommend that you read up on a few other climbing techniques Also you shouldprobably go to a climbing wall or gym where there are experienced climbers that can show you the ropes Hopefully this tutorial has been helpful Have fun and be safe
Some useful linkshttpwwwstephenprattnetAnchorsanchorshtmhttpwwwuoregonedu~oppclimbingtopicsanchorshtmlhttpwwwabc-of-rockclimbingcomhowtoclimbingtechniquesasp
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Related Instructables
How to Tie aFigure EightKnot byTactical_Pyro
Paracord KnotDisplay Bord byJamie bagn
Basic KnotsGuide byzorro3355
How to Climb aTree (withprussiks) bystasterisk
How to climb atree (using onlyrope) thefunsimple wayby louieaw
How to get arope into a tree(withoutclimbing it) byvitex
How to tievarious knots byadaviel
How to make arope swing byjdub0928
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Turks Head Knots on a Bottleby sklnxbones on July 6 2010
Intro Turks Head Knots on a BottleThis is the finished project A bottle decorated with three Turks Head Knots There are only three knots on this bottle The RED and the BLUE knots are each a 20 Bightby 3 Lead Turks Head Knots The WHITE knot is a 20 Bight by 19 Lead Turks Head Knot
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 1 Supplies
Cord Lots and Lots of cord I cant tell you how much each bottle is differentBottle Washed and Dried inside and out Make sure to remove all water spotsThreaded Needle Cord screws into the threads at the base of the needlePegs I use brass rivets used as a map to tie the Turks Head KnotsHole Punch Used to punch holes in the painters tape to hold the pegsPainters Tape To hold the pegs in place and to make your map for the Turks Head KnotsMarker To write on the painters tapeCloth Towel To remove finger prints and dirt from your bottleKrazy Glue or Super Glue This is used to secure the knots in place to the bottle
OPTIONAL BUT HIGHLY RECOMMENDEDI use the Turks Head Cookbook from KnotToolcom
Step 2 PreparationYou will need to find a bottle you like I used an empty instant tea bottle of course washed and dried (I like to put the bottle in the oven for a few minutes to dry the insidewithout water spots Take off the lid and do not put lid in the oven) Now measure the circumference of the bottle Take a cord and tightly wrap the cord around the bottleMark where the ends meet and use a ruler to measure the length of the cord For my instant tea bottle the circumference is 27cm I know from past knots that I have tiedthat I want my knot to have 20 Bights in the top and bottom (bands) knots I am going to use the Bights in the (bands) knots to tie the middle knot Now divide the numberof Bights (20) into the size of the circumference (27) to get the space between each Bight (135) With me so far
Now take two pieces of painters tape using a ruler measure out the length of the circumference and mark the length on the both pieces of tape Next you will mark thespace between each Bight on the tape
Step 3 Adding the PegsI like to use pegs when tying Turks Head Knots it just makes tying the knot easier
These are what I use for pegs
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 4 Adding Pegs to the TapeNow take a hole punch to cut holes in the tape where the lines meet You will place the pegs in the holes
Insert a peg in each hole and carefully stick the first piece of tape to the bottle
Step 5 Adding the 2nd row of pegsNow do the same thing with the second piece of tape The numbers on each piece of tape must line up
This picture shows you what you should have now This odd looking thing will be your map to tie the Turks Head Knot And this is the end of Step 1
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 6 Tying the first Turks Head KnotUsing the Turks Head Cookbook follow the numbers going over and under as indicated in the book I chose a 20 Bight by 3 Lead knot which will give me a nice bandaround the bottle Once the ends meet you have made one complete knot Tape the running end of your cord and start removing the pegs and the tape
Step 7 Remove the pegs and the tapeBe careful not to untie the knot as you remove the pegs and tape from the bottle Continue to remove all the pegs and remove the tape from the bottle At this point theknot will be very loose and will need to be tightened up
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 8 Remove the slack from the knotHere you can see just how much the knot expanded Starting with the standing end begin to pull the slack out of the knot going towards the running end of the cordDo not expect to pull all the slack out at once You may have to make 3 - 5 attempts at removing the slack out of the knot DO NOT remove all of the slack out of the knotIn order to make the bands we will have to triple the Turks Head Knot We will do this by following the knot three times The threaded needle will really come in handyhere
Step 9 Triple the KnotOnce you have made three passes of the Turks Head Knot use your needle to go under your knot about half the circumference and cut the cord The knot will be tightenough to hide the tail in placeTIP I carefully add a couple of drops of super glue UNDER the band to hold them in place and keep them from sliding around in the nextsteps A drop or two in 3 or 4 places around the band should be enough
Step 10 Add the second knotNow repeat this whole step for the second bandWhen tying the second band you must make sure the Bights line up to the first band This is crucial for the next stepWipe down the bottle to make sure all your finger prints and adhesive from the tape are all removed You want to make sure your bottle is clean at this point Any dirt orfinger prints left on the bottle will be almost impossible to remove From this point on we will use gloves when tying our last knot
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 11 Maping the Top KnotStick a piece of painters tape on top of your first band leaving the bottom of the knot exposedUse a marker to count the number of Bights in your knot Instead of using the pegs we are going to use the Bights to tie our next Turks Head Knot
Step 12 Mapping the Bottom KnotDo the same thing for the bottom band but you must make sure your numbers on top and bottom line up So 1 on top should be the same position as 1 on the bottom
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 13 Adding the last knotAgain using the Turks Head Cookbook and the threaded needle you are going to follow the instructions going over and under as indicated in the book Be sure to usegloves when ever you handle the bottle
Step 14 Thats ItFor this Turks Head Knot I am using a 20 Bight by 19 Lead knot
Because of the amount of cord you are working with your cord will get twisted and knotted You will have to un-twist the cord often Its a pain in the rear but it has to bedone And it has to be done alot
Continue to tie the knot until you finish the knot If you have the cord and the patience you can double or triple the knot When you are done use your needle to hide theends under your bands Cut the ends and your DONE
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Related Instructables
Monkeys FistFloatingKeychain byjokerlz
How To Make ATurks headKnot WithParacord byDoggie Stylish
Tying Trivetsout of Rope forHoliday Gifts bykylemarsh
Paracord KnotDisplay Bord byJamie bagn
How to Make ATurks Head(Photos) bymchs60chip
A pocket full ofknots byKiteman
Monkeys fistknot AND themonkey byjonathan111
TiteTie is theTruckers Knoton Steroids bytitetie
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Larks head noose -- an easy useful knot that tightens and loosensby Larry Breed on February 19 2009
Intro Larks head noose -- an easy useful knot that tightens and loosensI thought I knew all the basic knots but then I was taught this incredibly useful simple knot Its good for tying up the neck of a bag that you want to repeatedly open andsecurely close Its good for tying around a springy bundle that will need tightening and retightening And its easy to undo
Ive looked at knot literature but havent found a name for this so I named it The basic knot is well known its called a larks head Since all Ive done is to slip the twoends through the larks head to make a noose I call it that
WARNING Dont use this knot when human safety would depend on it Climbers and mountaineers have well-tested reliable knots for such situations
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Image Notes1 To tighten further step on this side of the larks head and pull the free ends
Step 1 Double the cord overThe larks head noose requires enough cord to go twice around your bundle plus a foot or two Find the center and double it over Sailors call this a bight
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 2 Form the larks headComing from below the bight hook your thumb and forefinger over the two sides Reach outward and downward and pinch your fingertips together underneath thedoubled cord
Youve made a larks head Move the crossing cord a little farther from your hand so theres a clear opening through the two half-loops
Step 3 Form the nooseSlip the two ends of the cord through the opening we were just talking about Pull the larks head tight so it grips the two cords Find something that needs constrictingand put the noose around it
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 4 Tightening retightening and lockingSlide the knot against the bundle If its not tight enough to keep from slipping tighten it by holding it in one hand and tugging on the cords one at a time with the otherhand Notice that you can slide the knot out again for instance to re-open the bag you just tied shut For some applications this may be as tight as you need it
A springy bundle probably still feels loose If so compress the bundle and get a new grip on the cords Rest your foot on the bundle on the cords nearest the larks headand pull to slide the larks head tighter
To make the knot more permanent you can lock it Make an overhand in the cord ends (Exactly like the first step in tying shoelaces) With your foot still on the bundlepull on the cords and move your hands apart until youre pulling in opposite directions You have just locked the larks head and you can trust it to stay that way()
But lets say that later on you want to loosen the locked knot Again put your foot on the bundle and cords nearest the larks head hold the two cord ends together andpull This makes a little slack between the overhand and the larks head so you can untie the overhand
In twine or small string the locking overhand knot may be difficult to undo Use a shoelace knot instead of an overhand and itll unlock easily
() If youre using slippery cord like polypropylene an overhand may not lock securely You may want to tie another overhand knot For added security wrap a shortlength of duct tape around the two cords close to the knot
Image Notes1 To tighten further step on this side of the larks head and pull the free ends
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Related Instructables
TRX fromParacordChallengeAccepted bythrake
A pocket full ofknots byKiteman
Lens CapLanyard by~teknoarsonist~ how to tie a
noose byawesume
AdjustableParacordGlassesLanyard byjdtwelve12
HangmansNoose PackClosure byPopEye42
Paraleash - ADog LeashFrom Paracordby The Ideanator
How to make arugged andhandy ParacordBelt by Jake22
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Image Notes1 Under me2 Top strand3 This should make a diamond type shape
Step 5 DoublingNow take the bottom stand and take it around the part of the top strand nearest to the bight and than come up through the diamond shape in the middleDo the same for the top strand
Image Notes1 Top strand
Image Notes1 Both through the diamond
Step 6 FinishingWhen you take it off your finger it should look like thisWork out the slack by pulling on the bight and the two strands
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Image Notes1 Finished knot
Related Instructables
Cross KnotParacordLanyard byStormdrane
Celtic ButtonKnot (video) byStormdrane
Paracord wristlanyard madewith the snakeknot byStormdrane
Paracord ChainSinnet FastDeploy BoonieHatband (video)by Stormdrane
Zigzag SpoolingParacord (video)by Stormdrane
ParacordBoonie HatWrap (video) byStormdrane
Paracord IDbadge Lanyardby Flahusky
Cobra WeaveKey Fob bytevers94
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Four knots to make paracord into a useful toolby erik_mccray on March 27 2010
Authorerik_mccrayI am an ex-fabricator that is now a stay at home dad I love my new job but I do miss making stuff I love this site amp I am getting involved as a way to keep myskills upOn top of fad work I have also run two small business in the past One was custom sewing amp the other was as a small engine mechanicI have two votec degrees one in metal fabrication amp the other is in engine repairI look forward to getting to know everyone here
Intro Four knots to make paracord into a useful toolParacord is an awesome multitool used everywhere from the wild blue yonder to the deepest caverns But like any good tool it is only as good as the knowledge the userhas about the tool With most people out there using bungee cords amp ratchet straps it seems that paracord is being used for nothing more than friendship bracelets forgrown men This is a shame because for less then the price of a few cheap bungee cords amp some to short to be helpful straps You can get yourself hundreds of feet ofparacord
The key to getting the most out of the paracord is good knot work The first thing you need to know is what makes a good knot One is that the knot is easy amp quick to tieamp more impotant is that the knot is easy amp quick to untie The hitch class of knots is by far the best group of knots that the average person could know The four mostuseful hitch knots are the half hitch a quick simple knot that forms the base for many other knots the inline half hitch allowing you to get the most out of one length ofparacord the slippery hitch that gives you both on the fly control over tension on your paracord but also an adjustable loop that will not change unless you want it amp theinline truckers hitch instantly doubling the your pulling power
Step 1 To get started lets get some terminology that will be used defined
line= the paracord
Main line= the part of the paracord doing the work for example holding down your tarp or the long part of the paracord
Mid line= the middle of the length of the paracord
End line= the unused length of paracord or the short length of paracord
Step 2 The half hitch The half hitch is a simple way to secure a line to an anchor point like the tie down points in most trucks A half hitch is a constrictor knot meaning that the harder you pullon the line the tighter the knots grip gets Another common constrictor knot is the slip knot
Step 1 wrap your line around your anchor point Step 2 wrap the end line around the main line
Step 3 pass the end line threw the end line side of the newly formed loop
step 4 now take the slack out of the knot
step 5 to make sure the knot is secure tie another half hitch to the main line This knot is called adouble half hitch
step 6 another useful thing that can be done with the half hitch is that instead of repeating the wrap on the main line but repeating it on what you are tying to the half hitchcan be used to bind something like a stack of 2x4s
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Image Notes1 End line2 Main line3 step 1
Image Notes1 Step 2
Image Notes1 passing thew the end line side of the loop2 step 3
Image Notes1 step 5
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Image Notes1 step 6
Step 3 The mid line half hitch The mid line half hitch is for when the length of line is to long for the job at hand amp you dont want to have to cut the line to size or you are using multiple anchor pointswith one length of line
Step 1 double up the line at the point in the length you wish to make the knot
Step 2 wrap the doubled up portion of line around your anchor point The doubled up length is now now the end line
Step 3 now tie just as you did for the regular half hitch repeat the knot to make a double half hitch for security
Image Notes1 A mid line double half hitch
Image Notes1 step 1
Image Notes1 The end line2 step 2
Image Notes1 Step 3
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 4 The slippery hitch The slippery hitch is a great knot for adjusting tension on the main line or for having an adjustable fixed loop To adjust the knot simply slide the knot up or down the mainline
Step 1 wrap your line around the anchor point or just double over the line to form a loop
Step 2 wrap the end line around the main line three times Wrapping in the direction of the anchor point or loop
Step 3 put together the two lines making up the loop amp wrap the two lines one time with the end line
Step 4 pass the end line thew the last loop formed covering the two lined of the loop
Step 5 pull the knot tite
step 6 to adjust the size of the loop or main line tension grab the knot amp slide it up or down the main line
Image Notes1 grab just the knot its self to adjust it2 step 5
Image Notes1 step 1
Image Notes1 step 2
Image Notes1 step 3
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Image Notes1 step 4
Image Notes1 grab just the knot its self to adjust it2 step 5
Image Notes1 same knot as in last pic Just slid up2 step 6
Step 5 The mid line truchers hitch The truckers hitch is a great way to double the pulling force on a line There are many ways to tie this knot the problem with most of them is that at some point you aregoing to have to pass the end line through a loop on the main line that is acting like a pulley to double your pulling force this is great if you are making the knot close tothe end of your line but if you are using a 300 length of line amp want to make the knot in the first ten feet having to pass 290 of line thew a loop is a pain But with a fewhalf hitches you will not have to pass the end line threw any loop on the main line
step 1 wrap your line around the anchor point then double over your end line laying the top of the loop over the main line
Step 2 double up your main line amp lay the loop over the loop made by the end line
step 3 in main line above the knot twist in a loop
step 4 put main line loop thew the loop made in step 3 amp pull this loop tight over your main line loop forming a half hitch Repeat step 3 amp 4 to make a doublehalf hitch
step 5 To use the knot just pull down on the end line to put tension on the main line
step 6 after you have the main line snug tie a mid line double half hitch around the two lines forming the loop at the end of the main line with the end line
step 7 Tie a double half hitch with the end line around the end loop of the mid line half hitch of step 6 using the same method as used in steps 3 amp 4
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Image Notes1 the end of step 6
Image Notes1 main line2 end line3 step 1
Image Notes1 main line loop2 end line loop
Image Notes1 step 3
Image Notes1 step 4
Image Notes1 step 4 at the end with a double half hitch on the main loop
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Image Notes1 pull here2 step 5
Image Notes1 the start of step 6
Image Notes1 the end of step 6
Image Notes1 step 72 now the rest of the line is free to do more work
Related Instructables
Paracord KnotDisplay Bord byJamie bagn
ChokelessAdjustableParacord DogLeash byPizzaman101
ParacordLadder wWooden Rungsby josestude
tie a paracordshackle grip byitri45
ParacordPrussik Belt byJavaNut13
TiteTie is theTruckers Knoton Steroids bytitetie
ID Lanyard(Photos) byeschmunk
Dog Toys forHeavy Chewersby J3443RY
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Figure 8 knot and double 8 knotby jonathan111 on November 28 2007
Intro Figure 8 knot and double 8 knotI will show you how to tie a figure 8 knot and a figure 8 follow through
Step 1 Stating the knotThis is a simple knot so just follow the pictures
Step 2 Finishing the knotCross the string under and then push it through the hole Pull tightly unless you are going to do the follow through and leave it somewhat loose
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 3 The follow through knotThe follow through knot should be tied around something brought back and followed through the path of the 8 knot Look at the pictures Basically follow through the 8knot backwards
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Related Instructables
Climb Safe WithA Figure 8Knot by mattste A pocket full of
knots byKiteman
How to Tie aFigure EightKnot byTactical_Pyro
Paracord KnotDisplay Bord byJamie bagn
Cross KnotParacordLanyard byStormdrane
How to Tie aFire-escapeKnot by leonardoismael
Truckers HitchTHE mostawesome knoton the planetby schneidp20
Paracord ZipperPuller byrepeet13
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Truckers Hitch THE most awesome knot on the planetby schneidp20 on October 12 2008
Authorschneidp20I like building stuff Trouble is there just isnt enough time to build everything Sigh
Intro Truckers Hitch THE most awesome knot on the planetYes I know that there are plenty of other cool knots out there many of which I literally couldnt live wo I rock climb However this knot is unlike any other Plus Ineeded a grabber for my Instructable -) (BTW this ISNT a climbing knot) And in truth it isnt a knot by itself but rather a system of common knots
Have you ever tried to tie something down for transporting but just couldnt get the lines tight andor during transport the lines would continually loosen Then this is theknot for you I learned this knot back in the 70s when specialty car racks and ratchet straps were rare or unheard of I initially used it to tie a canoe on a car rack bothattaching to the rack as well as the lines to the bow and stern of the canoe Even with all the new gizmos available today this knot still shines because all you need is arope and ropes dont hum in the wind like straps
The unique aspect of this knot is that it gives you a 2-1 mechanical advantage when tightening the rope Be careful though You can actually damage some thingsbecause of the mechanical advantage This knot holds fast and is easy to untie hallmark traits of any good knot
Below you see the finished knot system well break it apart in the steps that follow
Image Notes1 1st anchor point a bowline2 loop3 securing knots 2 half hitches4 securing loose end with a fishermans knot5 2nd anchor point (should be round)
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Image Notes1 X marks the spot
Step 1 Initial setupThe first step is to anchor one end of the rope and then loop the rope around a 2nd anchor point
For attaching to the 1st anchor point I chose bowline a close 2 on my list -) There are other instructables on that one so I wont bore you here
The 2nd anchor really should be round because it serves as a pulley in this block and tackle type knot Ive used it on sharp anchor points and it doesnt work as well
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 2 Creating a slip knotTie a slip knot somewhere between the two anchor points Correct placement of the slip knot takes some experience to judge it correctly Typically I place it too close tothe 2nd anchor point and end up with not enough room to work with If the knot ends up too far from 2nd anchor point you can extend the knot by enlarging the loop
Be sure you tie the slip knot as shown You may not be able to untie other knots
In this small example the slip knot is uncharacteristically close to the 1st anchor point
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 3 Tightening and securingThe loose end of the rope that went around the 2nd anchor point goes through the slip knot loop Pull the loose end to the desired tension and secure with two halfhitches
Note To allow better view of the knots the rope isnt really tightened in this example
Step 4 Securing loose endThe final knot is just to secure the loose end somehow I chose a fishermans knot to do this
To tie a fishermans knot the rope goes around twice and goes under the X created by the loops Pull the loose end to tighten Finally slide the knot to put tension onthe half hitches
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Image Notes1 X marks the spot
Step 5 FinishedThere you have it I guarantee that the first time you really use this knot (not just practice) you will be amazed at how well it works and youll wish you knew this knot along time ago You may even come over to my side and declare that is is THE most awesome knot on the planet -)
Enjoy and happy haulingDave
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Related Instructables
TiteTie is theTruckers Knoton Steroids bytitetie
Four knots tomake paracordinto a usefultool byerik_mccray
Modify yourbike rack tocarry a sunfishor other boat byewilhelm
SurfboardHammock byGermy
GiganticHalloweenSpider Web bynolte919
How To Tie ASpiders Hitch(video) by back-cast
Three-hitch mathair ornamentby michiexile TRX from
ParacordChallengeAccepted bythrake
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Carry any Bottle with a JUG KNOT Handleby hpstoutharrow on September 17 2009
Intro Carry any Bottle with a JUG KNOT HandleTie a JUG KNOT around a water bottle soda bottle or aluminum bottle to make a secure carrying strap
Re-purpose any container into a reusable water bottle by adding a convenient carrying strap This Instructable will demonstrate how to tie a JUG knot which like its namesuggests is meant to properly secure around the neck of a container
With some cord and the knowledge of this knot you will be able add a handle lanyard or carabiner loop to any of your favorite beverages to carry them on the go
It works perfectly for those disposable water bottles and who knows once you add some colorful cord to the plain old clear water bottle you just might beinclined to refill it and use it again(Check out pictures 4amp5 below)
In addition to plastic beverage bottles like pop water and sports drinks you can turn those rugged aluminum beer bottles into a backpacking canteen
Those of you familiar with my previous aluminum bottle InstructablesROLLED RIM METAL TUMBLERhttpwwwinstructablescomidAluminum-Bottle-Tumbler-Cup-Cook-PotALUMINUM BOTTLE LIGHTWEIGHT ALCOHOL STOVEhttpwwwinstructablescomidAluminum-Bottle-Alcohol-Stovewill recognize the water canteen shown below as a re-purposed aluminum beer bottle Here I have added a painted surface treatment to turn it into a proper lookingwater bottle More on that in steps 13 14 15
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 1 Getting StartedCord size is important Select a small medium weight cord like the one shown here It is a general purpose camp cord sold at most sporting goods stores (shoelacesmight also work)
Do not use a heavy cord or rope because the larger diameter will not tuck under the relatively small lip at the top of the bottleneck and the bottle will fall out
Also the smaller cord cinches tight on itself and will not loosen accidentally
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 2 Form a BightThe next steps show how to tie a JUG KNOT It is the basic step for adding a carrying strap It is also the anchor point for any additional fancy bottle trussing you maywant to add
JUG KNOT Step 1
Form a Bight in the center of a length of cord Bight is a knot term for a loop or bend in the rope In this case the main Bight in this knot is highlighted with a white mark Imakes it easier to follow its path in these steps
The running ends of the cord should be equal length
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 3 Pull the Bight downPULL the Bight DOWN forming two Loops
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 4 Cross the LoopsCROSS the right Loop OVER the left Loop
Step 5 Pass the Bight under the 1st loopTake the main Bight and pass it UNDER the left Loop
Step 6 Weave the BightWEAVE the Bight OVER the portion of the right Loop and UNDER the portion of the left Loop
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 7 Extend the BightExtend the Bight OVER the outer portion of the right Loop
Step 8 Flip the Right Loop behindAdditional colored identification points have been added to the loops to follow their travel in these next two steps
The right Loop Yellow marker is FLIPPED BEHIND the knot and ends up on the far left side of the knot
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 9 Flip the 2nd loop in frontRaise the green marker (located on what was formerly the left loop) and pull it down and to the right FLIPPING IT IN FRONT of the knot
Note the blue portion of the this loop will pass around the outside of the yellow portion of the first loop
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Image Notes1 Center of knot that will tighten around the bottles neck
Step 10 Remove SlackNote where the blue green amp yellow markers end up
Start to remove the slack in the loops by pulling the original main Bight (white marker top right) and the two free standing ends at the bottom
the bottle neck will pass through the very center of the knot
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Image Notes1 Center of knot that will tighten around the bottles neck
Step 11 Tighten the KnotAfter removing the slack insert the bottle neck and finish tightening
The knot should look like this before slipping it over the bottle
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 12 Secure on bottle neckThis is the finished knot shown on the neck of various containers
The loop end and the two free standing ends can be tied together to create a carrying handle (last picture below)
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 13 Aluminum Bottle Water Bottle
The next few steps show the features of an aluminum beer bottle re-purposed as a water bottle canteen It is one of many containers that can be reused as a camp waterbottle
The bottle was lightly sanded masked and then pained with a hammered finished paint to create an interesting surface texture
Image Notes1 Textured finish paint makes an interesting grip-able surface2 Masked with tape for painting3 Masked with tape for painting
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Image Notes1 Dowel used for holding the bottle during painting
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 14 Tethered Cork StopperUse a wine bottle man made Cork as a stopper for your aluminum water bottleNote Use a cork that was removed from the wine bottle without the corkscrew penetrating through the bottom end of the cork (A hole all the way through the cork willcause it to leak) Use the unpierced end of the cork inside the water bottle
Drill a hole through the sides of the Cork Thread the cord through the hole to the center of the cord Use the cork as the main Bight and tie the Jug knot as shown inthe beginning steps
Now the cork is tethered to the bottle and will not get lost or fall on the ground
A Carabiner clip passes through the other cord end to attache the water bottle to you belt or pack
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 15 Trussed for TransportThis is another hanging method for carrying your aluminum bottle water canteen A Jug knot is tied conventionally around the neck
The running ends of the knot however are pulled down towards the bottom of the bottle A Barrel Knot is tied about 34 the way down the side of the bottle A squareknot is tied on the bottom of the knot to keep the two running ends tight against the sides of the bottle
I like the look of the accent colored cord running down the sides of the bottle and the fact that the bottle hangs from the belt upside down It adds to its uniqueness
The last picture shows another truss variation
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 16 AdvancedBelow is a bottle with some additional trussing You can be creative as you want It all starts with a re-purposed container and the Jug Knot (and enough cord)
Related Instructables
AluminumBottle TumblerCup amp Cook Potfor an AlcoholStove byhpstoutharrow
Water BottleBelt Clip byuglymike Duct Tape
Water Bottle byrabidsquire2
AluminumBottle AlcoholStove byhpstoutharrow
DIYGlass WaterBottle byCulturespy
Solar WaterHeater forBackpackingUsing WaterBottles and aCar Shade bykopomeroy
Duct tape waterbottle holder(Photos) by pinkmarshmallow
How to make aCamelPack withan old plasticbottle bywillrandship
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Basic Knots Guideby zorro3355 on April 29 2008
Intro Basic Knots Guidehi
Step 1 Thumb knotThe most simple knotUsed as a stopper and prevent ropes from fraying
Step 2 Reef KnotUsed to tie two ropes of equal thickness togetherIt is pretty easy to tie and untie but under tentionit may be diffcult to untieIt is also not sutible for smoothropes(egnylon ropes)
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 3 Figure of eightused as a stopperprevent ropes from fraying and its more secure than tumb knot its is also used to tie Caribinas to ropes and is often used in rock climbing
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 4 Timber hitchused for pulling logs
Step 5 Clove hitchUsed to tie a rope onto a pole or logThe pole must be roundThe pole lust be thicker then the rope itself
(greatly used during pioneering)
Step 6 Sheet bandused to tie ropes of different thickness together(works on same thickness of ropes too)
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 7 Sheep shankTo shorten RopesTo prevent middle fraying
Step 8 Slip knotWhippingUsed as a grip for pulling things(when tied on a stick or small pole)(marlin spike hitch)
Related Instructables
Rope Rings byhpstoutharrow
How to Tie aFigure EightKnot byTactical_Pyro
Whippin (WestCountry Style)by tim_n
SurvivalBracelet(Updated) bytevers94
HangmansNoose PackClosure byPopEye42
Turkey on aTripod byhpstoutharrow
SurvivalBracelet II bytevers94 Zigzag Spooling
Paracord (video)by Stormdrane
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
How to Tie a Fire-escape Knotby leonardo ismael on October 16 2007
Intro How to Tie a Fire-escape KnotThis knot is used by firemen in case of fires for example imagine a scene where the ladder on the firetruck messes up but people need to get down a five story buildingor more All they have is a long piece of rope they can safely get down with a secure knot like the fire-escape knot So why not learn it its easy to do and hard to untieif you tie it tightly
This is from the American Boys Handbook
Step 1 Get Your RopeFirst grab a piece of rope and bend it like this to make a loop in it Follow every step to the smallest detail
Step 2 Twist the RopeNow make a twist like this and hold it together
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 3 Pull Through the TwistPull the loop through the twist you just made from underneath
Step 4 Go Over the Split EndNow pull the tail through the loop
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 5 FinallyAnd finally just pull it through as pictured below
Congratulations you just learned the fire-escape knot
Step 6 Same Name Not KnotThis is another knot called the fire-escape knot this shouldnt be your result
Related Instructables
House FireEscape Plan(video) byWhatHappensNowAdvice
ParacordLadder wWooden Rungsby josestude
Bed SheetEscape Rope byjessehensel
rope ladder(glow-in-the-dark version) bymikeasaurus
HeadlockEscape 2(video) byjohnnyrockstah
QuickFirestarter byMattandJora
Trail sauna byjakee117
How to Kill FireAnts andCommitGenocide byKentsOkay
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Climb Safe With A Figure 8 Knotby mattste on February 23 2010
Intro Climb Safe With A Figure 8 Knot There are many things that a beginning climber needs to know including several important knots Perhaps the most essential knot is the Figure 8 Follow Through Thistutorial will demonstrate how to correctly harness yourself to a rope using a Figure 8 Follow Through knot This knot is used primarily by rock climbers to provide a life-line Since this knot is used as a life-line it is very important to be able to tie it correctly (Your life could depend upon it)
Dont worry with this tutorial and about 5 minutes of practice you can have this knot mastered
Things you will need
- Climbing Harness- Climbing Rope
If you are wanting to go climbing and dont already have these items they can be purchased for about $25 each at most outdoor sporting goods stores If you are merelylooking to learn the knot a belt loop and a rope (about five feet long) will do
Image Notes1 Climbing Harness2 Climbing Rope
Step 1 Dealing With The RopeThroughout this tutorial I will be discussing different parts of the rope To make these instructions as clear as possible I will define a few terms that I will use throughoutthe tutorial The Anchor End of the rope will generally be at the top of the images This is the end that would be anchored to the wall or rock and does not move Wewill not be doing much with the anchored end The Tail End of the rope is the opposite end that we will be dealing with I will call this the tail for short
Now that we have some terms to work with lets get started
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 2 Tying The First Figure 8This knot has several parts to it The first part of the knot is just tying a basic figure 8 To tie the first figure 8 there are four simple steps
1 - Using the tail make a loop over the rope (as shown in the first picture) keeping in mind that there should be about 3 ft of slack on the tail end
2 - Wrap the tail back this time go under the anchored end (As shown in the second picture)
3 - Bring the tail down through the first loop (As shown in the third picture)
4 - Finally pull the two ends to make the knot a little bit tighter and easier to deal with (Shown in the fourth picture)
After these four steps you should end up with a knot that resembles a figure 8
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 3 Looping Into The Harness In order to secure the rope to the harness simply thread the tail end of the rope through the front loop in the harness as shown in the picture below This step isobviously very important
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 4 Following Back Through The Figure 8After looping the rope through the harness you have to thread the tail end of the rope back through the knot following the first figure 8 I have divided this process intofive smaller steps in order to make it more clear
1 - Coming form underneath the knot bring the tail up through the near loop and to the left behind the anchored end of the rope (Shown in the first picture)
2 - Wrap the tail around the anchored end back to the right and down through the adjacent loop (Shown in the second picture)
3 - You simply need to bring the tail back over the top of the knot to the left (Shown in the third picture)
4 - Bring the tail end up through the far loop following the anchored end (Shown in the fourth picture)
5 - Finally pull the knot tight (Shown in the fifth picture)
As you can see the first four pictures are simply tracing the knot back through with the tail end
For the last part while you pull the knot tight you may want to make small adjustments and rearrange how it all fits together If the knot does not lay perfectly smoothand tight its NOT a big deal
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 5 Finishing The Knot After completing the Figure 8 knot you will want to somehow secure the tail end of the rope out of the way There are a couple different ways to do this the way that Iwill demonstrate is using whats called a Stopper Knot This secondary knot is similar to a Fishermans knot and is pretty simple I have once again divided thisprocess into several smaller steps
1 - Start by wrapping the tail end around the anchored end (As shown in the first picture)
2 - Wrap the tail back underneath the two vertical segments (As shown in the second picture)
3 - Simply repeat the first two steps wrapping the tail around again (As shown in the third picture)
4 - This step in the fourth picture may look complicated but all you need to do is insert the tail up through the two loops that you have just made
5 - To finish off the knot you will want to slowly pull the tail end while gently pushing the bottom of the stopper knot upwards If you have successfully completed this knotit should look something like the fifth picture
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 6 Ready To Climb Now that you have mastered the Figure 8 knot you can securely harness yourself into a climbing rope Remember there are many other skills that go into setting up ananchor and belaying a climber This tutorial only covers the figure 8 knot For more information there are many great websites that demonstrate how to correctly set up asafe climbing system (Ive posted a few below) If you are a beginning climber I recommend that you read up on a few other climbing techniques Also you shouldprobably go to a climbing wall or gym where there are experienced climbers that can show you the ropes Hopefully this tutorial has been helpful Have fun and be safe
Some useful linkshttpwwwstephenprattnetAnchorsanchorshtmhttpwwwuoregonedu~oppclimbingtopicsanchorshtmlhttpwwwabc-of-rockclimbingcomhowtoclimbingtechniquesasp
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Related Instructables
How to Tie aFigure EightKnot byTactical_Pyro
Paracord KnotDisplay Bord byJamie bagn
Basic KnotsGuide byzorro3355
How to Climb aTree (withprussiks) bystasterisk
How to climb atree (using onlyrope) thefunsimple wayby louieaw
How to get arope into a tree(withoutclimbing it) byvitex
How to tievarious knots byadaviel
How to make arope swing byjdub0928
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Turks Head Knots on a Bottleby sklnxbones on July 6 2010
Intro Turks Head Knots on a BottleThis is the finished project A bottle decorated with three Turks Head Knots There are only three knots on this bottle The RED and the BLUE knots are each a 20 Bightby 3 Lead Turks Head Knots The WHITE knot is a 20 Bight by 19 Lead Turks Head Knot
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 1 Supplies
Cord Lots and Lots of cord I cant tell you how much each bottle is differentBottle Washed and Dried inside and out Make sure to remove all water spotsThreaded Needle Cord screws into the threads at the base of the needlePegs I use brass rivets used as a map to tie the Turks Head KnotsHole Punch Used to punch holes in the painters tape to hold the pegsPainters Tape To hold the pegs in place and to make your map for the Turks Head KnotsMarker To write on the painters tapeCloth Towel To remove finger prints and dirt from your bottleKrazy Glue or Super Glue This is used to secure the knots in place to the bottle
OPTIONAL BUT HIGHLY RECOMMENDEDI use the Turks Head Cookbook from KnotToolcom
Step 2 PreparationYou will need to find a bottle you like I used an empty instant tea bottle of course washed and dried (I like to put the bottle in the oven for a few minutes to dry the insidewithout water spots Take off the lid and do not put lid in the oven) Now measure the circumference of the bottle Take a cord and tightly wrap the cord around the bottleMark where the ends meet and use a ruler to measure the length of the cord For my instant tea bottle the circumference is 27cm I know from past knots that I have tiedthat I want my knot to have 20 Bights in the top and bottom (bands) knots I am going to use the Bights in the (bands) knots to tie the middle knot Now divide the numberof Bights (20) into the size of the circumference (27) to get the space between each Bight (135) With me so far
Now take two pieces of painters tape using a ruler measure out the length of the circumference and mark the length on the both pieces of tape Next you will mark thespace between each Bight on the tape
Step 3 Adding the PegsI like to use pegs when tying Turks Head Knots it just makes tying the knot easier
These are what I use for pegs
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 4 Adding Pegs to the TapeNow take a hole punch to cut holes in the tape where the lines meet You will place the pegs in the holes
Insert a peg in each hole and carefully stick the first piece of tape to the bottle
Step 5 Adding the 2nd row of pegsNow do the same thing with the second piece of tape The numbers on each piece of tape must line up
This picture shows you what you should have now This odd looking thing will be your map to tie the Turks Head Knot And this is the end of Step 1
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 6 Tying the first Turks Head KnotUsing the Turks Head Cookbook follow the numbers going over and under as indicated in the book I chose a 20 Bight by 3 Lead knot which will give me a nice bandaround the bottle Once the ends meet you have made one complete knot Tape the running end of your cord and start removing the pegs and the tape
Step 7 Remove the pegs and the tapeBe careful not to untie the knot as you remove the pegs and tape from the bottle Continue to remove all the pegs and remove the tape from the bottle At this point theknot will be very loose and will need to be tightened up
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 8 Remove the slack from the knotHere you can see just how much the knot expanded Starting with the standing end begin to pull the slack out of the knot going towards the running end of the cordDo not expect to pull all the slack out at once You may have to make 3 - 5 attempts at removing the slack out of the knot DO NOT remove all of the slack out of the knotIn order to make the bands we will have to triple the Turks Head Knot We will do this by following the knot three times The threaded needle will really come in handyhere
Step 9 Triple the KnotOnce you have made three passes of the Turks Head Knot use your needle to go under your knot about half the circumference and cut the cord The knot will be tightenough to hide the tail in placeTIP I carefully add a couple of drops of super glue UNDER the band to hold them in place and keep them from sliding around in the nextsteps A drop or two in 3 or 4 places around the band should be enough
Step 10 Add the second knotNow repeat this whole step for the second bandWhen tying the second band you must make sure the Bights line up to the first band This is crucial for the next stepWipe down the bottle to make sure all your finger prints and adhesive from the tape are all removed You want to make sure your bottle is clean at this point Any dirt orfinger prints left on the bottle will be almost impossible to remove From this point on we will use gloves when tying our last knot
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 11 Maping the Top KnotStick a piece of painters tape on top of your first band leaving the bottom of the knot exposedUse a marker to count the number of Bights in your knot Instead of using the pegs we are going to use the Bights to tie our next Turks Head Knot
Step 12 Mapping the Bottom KnotDo the same thing for the bottom band but you must make sure your numbers on top and bottom line up So 1 on top should be the same position as 1 on the bottom
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 13 Adding the last knotAgain using the Turks Head Cookbook and the threaded needle you are going to follow the instructions going over and under as indicated in the book Be sure to usegloves when ever you handle the bottle
Step 14 Thats ItFor this Turks Head Knot I am using a 20 Bight by 19 Lead knot
Because of the amount of cord you are working with your cord will get twisted and knotted You will have to un-twist the cord often Its a pain in the rear but it has to bedone And it has to be done alot
Continue to tie the knot until you finish the knot If you have the cord and the patience you can double or triple the knot When you are done use your needle to hide theends under your bands Cut the ends and your DONE
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Related Instructables
Monkeys FistFloatingKeychain byjokerlz
How To Make ATurks headKnot WithParacord byDoggie Stylish
Tying Trivetsout of Rope forHoliday Gifts bykylemarsh
Paracord KnotDisplay Bord byJamie bagn
How to Make ATurks Head(Photos) bymchs60chip
A pocket full ofknots byKiteman
Monkeys fistknot AND themonkey byjonathan111
TiteTie is theTruckers Knoton Steroids bytitetie
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Larks head noose -- an easy useful knot that tightens and loosensby Larry Breed on February 19 2009
Intro Larks head noose -- an easy useful knot that tightens and loosensI thought I knew all the basic knots but then I was taught this incredibly useful simple knot Its good for tying up the neck of a bag that you want to repeatedly open andsecurely close Its good for tying around a springy bundle that will need tightening and retightening And its easy to undo
Ive looked at knot literature but havent found a name for this so I named it The basic knot is well known its called a larks head Since all Ive done is to slip the twoends through the larks head to make a noose I call it that
WARNING Dont use this knot when human safety would depend on it Climbers and mountaineers have well-tested reliable knots for such situations
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Image Notes1 To tighten further step on this side of the larks head and pull the free ends
Step 1 Double the cord overThe larks head noose requires enough cord to go twice around your bundle plus a foot or two Find the center and double it over Sailors call this a bight
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 2 Form the larks headComing from below the bight hook your thumb and forefinger over the two sides Reach outward and downward and pinch your fingertips together underneath thedoubled cord
Youve made a larks head Move the crossing cord a little farther from your hand so theres a clear opening through the two half-loops
Step 3 Form the nooseSlip the two ends of the cord through the opening we were just talking about Pull the larks head tight so it grips the two cords Find something that needs constrictingand put the noose around it
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 4 Tightening retightening and lockingSlide the knot against the bundle If its not tight enough to keep from slipping tighten it by holding it in one hand and tugging on the cords one at a time with the otherhand Notice that you can slide the knot out again for instance to re-open the bag you just tied shut For some applications this may be as tight as you need it
A springy bundle probably still feels loose If so compress the bundle and get a new grip on the cords Rest your foot on the bundle on the cords nearest the larks headand pull to slide the larks head tighter
To make the knot more permanent you can lock it Make an overhand in the cord ends (Exactly like the first step in tying shoelaces) With your foot still on the bundlepull on the cords and move your hands apart until youre pulling in opposite directions You have just locked the larks head and you can trust it to stay that way()
But lets say that later on you want to loosen the locked knot Again put your foot on the bundle and cords nearest the larks head hold the two cord ends together andpull This makes a little slack between the overhand and the larks head so you can untie the overhand
In twine or small string the locking overhand knot may be difficult to undo Use a shoelace knot instead of an overhand and itll unlock easily
() If youre using slippery cord like polypropylene an overhand may not lock securely You may want to tie another overhand knot For added security wrap a shortlength of duct tape around the two cords close to the knot
Image Notes1 To tighten further step on this side of the larks head and pull the free ends
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Related Instructables
TRX fromParacordChallengeAccepted bythrake
A pocket full ofknots byKiteman
Lens CapLanyard by~teknoarsonist~ how to tie a
noose byawesume
AdjustableParacordGlassesLanyard byjdtwelve12
HangmansNoose PackClosure byPopEye42
Paraleash - ADog LeashFrom Paracordby The Ideanator
How to make arugged andhandy ParacordBelt by Jake22
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Image Notes1 Finished knot
Related Instructables
Cross KnotParacordLanyard byStormdrane
Celtic ButtonKnot (video) byStormdrane
Paracord wristlanyard madewith the snakeknot byStormdrane
Paracord ChainSinnet FastDeploy BoonieHatband (video)by Stormdrane
Zigzag SpoolingParacord (video)by Stormdrane
ParacordBoonie HatWrap (video) byStormdrane
Paracord IDbadge Lanyardby Flahusky
Cobra WeaveKey Fob bytevers94
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Four knots to make paracord into a useful toolby erik_mccray on March 27 2010
Authorerik_mccrayI am an ex-fabricator that is now a stay at home dad I love my new job but I do miss making stuff I love this site amp I am getting involved as a way to keep myskills upOn top of fad work I have also run two small business in the past One was custom sewing amp the other was as a small engine mechanicI have two votec degrees one in metal fabrication amp the other is in engine repairI look forward to getting to know everyone here
Intro Four knots to make paracord into a useful toolParacord is an awesome multitool used everywhere from the wild blue yonder to the deepest caverns But like any good tool it is only as good as the knowledge the userhas about the tool With most people out there using bungee cords amp ratchet straps it seems that paracord is being used for nothing more than friendship bracelets forgrown men This is a shame because for less then the price of a few cheap bungee cords amp some to short to be helpful straps You can get yourself hundreds of feet ofparacord
The key to getting the most out of the paracord is good knot work The first thing you need to know is what makes a good knot One is that the knot is easy amp quick to tieamp more impotant is that the knot is easy amp quick to untie The hitch class of knots is by far the best group of knots that the average person could know The four mostuseful hitch knots are the half hitch a quick simple knot that forms the base for many other knots the inline half hitch allowing you to get the most out of one length ofparacord the slippery hitch that gives you both on the fly control over tension on your paracord but also an adjustable loop that will not change unless you want it amp theinline truckers hitch instantly doubling the your pulling power
Step 1 To get started lets get some terminology that will be used defined
line= the paracord
Main line= the part of the paracord doing the work for example holding down your tarp or the long part of the paracord
Mid line= the middle of the length of the paracord
End line= the unused length of paracord or the short length of paracord
Step 2 The half hitch The half hitch is a simple way to secure a line to an anchor point like the tie down points in most trucks A half hitch is a constrictor knot meaning that the harder you pullon the line the tighter the knots grip gets Another common constrictor knot is the slip knot
Step 1 wrap your line around your anchor point Step 2 wrap the end line around the main line
Step 3 pass the end line threw the end line side of the newly formed loop
step 4 now take the slack out of the knot
step 5 to make sure the knot is secure tie another half hitch to the main line This knot is called adouble half hitch
step 6 another useful thing that can be done with the half hitch is that instead of repeating the wrap on the main line but repeating it on what you are tying to the half hitchcan be used to bind something like a stack of 2x4s
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Image Notes1 End line2 Main line3 step 1
Image Notes1 Step 2
Image Notes1 passing thew the end line side of the loop2 step 3
Image Notes1 step 5
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Image Notes1 step 6
Step 3 The mid line half hitch The mid line half hitch is for when the length of line is to long for the job at hand amp you dont want to have to cut the line to size or you are using multiple anchor pointswith one length of line
Step 1 double up the line at the point in the length you wish to make the knot
Step 2 wrap the doubled up portion of line around your anchor point The doubled up length is now now the end line
Step 3 now tie just as you did for the regular half hitch repeat the knot to make a double half hitch for security
Image Notes1 A mid line double half hitch
Image Notes1 step 1
Image Notes1 The end line2 step 2
Image Notes1 Step 3
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 4 The slippery hitch The slippery hitch is a great knot for adjusting tension on the main line or for having an adjustable fixed loop To adjust the knot simply slide the knot up or down the mainline
Step 1 wrap your line around the anchor point or just double over the line to form a loop
Step 2 wrap the end line around the main line three times Wrapping in the direction of the anchor point or loop
Step 3 put together the two lines making up the loop amp wrap the two lines one time with the end line
Step 4 pass the end line thew the last loop formed covering the two lined of the loop
Step 5 pull the knot tite
step 6 to adjust the size of the loop or main line tension grab the knot amp slide it up or down the main line
Image Notes1 grab just the knot its self to adjust it2 step 5
Image Notes1 step 1
Image Notes1 step 2
Image Notes1 step 3
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Image Notes1 step 4
Image Notes1 grab just the knot its self to adjust it2 step 5
Image Notes1 same knot as in last pic Just slid up2 step 6
Step 5 The mid line truchers hitch The truckers hitch is a great way to double the pulling force on a line There are many ways to tie this knot the problem with most of them is that at some point you aregoing to have to pass the end line through a loop on the main line that is acting like a pulley to double your pulling force this is great if you are making the knot close tothe end of your line but if you are using a 300 length of line amp want to make the knot in the first ten feet having to pass 290 of line thew a loop is a pain But with a fewhalf hitches you will not have to pass the end line threw any loop on the main line
step 1 wrap your line around the anchor point then double over your end line laying the top of the loop over the main line
Step 2 double up your main line amp lay the loop over the loop made by the end line
step 3 in main line above the knot twist in a loop
step 4 put main line loop thew the loop made in step 3 amp pull this loop tight over your main line loop forming a half hitch Repeat step 3 amp 4 to make a doublehalf hitch
step 5 To use the knot just pull down on the end line to put tension on the main line
step 6 after you have the main line snug tie a mid line double half hitch around the two lines forming the loop at the end of the main line with the end line
step 7 Tie a double half hitch with the end line around the end loop of the mid line half hitch of step 6 using the same method as used in steps 3 amp 4
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Image Notes1 the end of step 6
Image Notes1 main line2 end line3 step 1
Image Notes1 main line loop2 end line loop
Image Notes1 step 3
Image Notes1 step 4
Image Notes1 step 4 at the end with a double half hitch on the main loop
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Image Notes1 pull here2 step 5
Image Notes1 the start of step 6
Image Notes1 the end of step 6
Image Notes1 step 72 now the rest of the line is free to do more work
Related Instructables
Paracord KnotDisplay Bord byJamie bagn
ChokelessAdjustableParacord DogLeash byPizzaman101
ParacordLadder wWooden Rungsby josestude
tie a paracordshackle grip byitri45
ParacordPrussik Belt byJavaNut13
TiteTie is theTruckers Knoton Steroids bytitetie
ID Lanyard(Photos) byeschmunk
Dog Toys forHeavy Chewersby J3443RY
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Figure 8 knot and double 8 knotby jonathan111 on November 28 2007
Intro Figure 8 knot and double 8 knotI will show you how to tie a figure 8 knot and a figure 8 follow through
Step 1 Stating the knotThis is a simple knot so just follow the pictures
Step 2 Finishing the knotCross the string under and then push it through the hole Pull tightly unless you are going to do the follow through and leave it somewhat loose
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 3 The follow through knotThe follow through knot should be tied around something brought back and followed through the path of the 8 knot Look at the pictures Basically follow through the 8knot backwards
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Related Instructables
Climb Safe WithA Figure 8Knot by mattste A pocket full of
knots byKiteman
How to Tie aFigure EightKnot byTactical_Pyro
Paracord KnotDisplay Bord byJamie bagn
Cross KnotParacordLanyard byStormdrane
How to Tie aFire-escapeKnot by leonardoismael
Truckers HitchTHE mostawesome knoton the planetby schneidp20
Paracord ZipperPuller byrepeet13
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Truckers Hitch THE most awesome knot on the planetby schneidp20 on October 12 2008
Authorschneidp20I like building stuff Trouble is there just isnt enough time to build everything Sigh
Intro Truckers Hitch THE most awesome knot on the planetYes I know that there are plenty of other cool knots out there many of which I literally couldnt live wo I rock climb However this knot is unlike any other Plus Ineeded a grabber for my Instructable -) (BTW this ISNT a climbing knot) And in truth it isnt a knot by itself but rather a system of common knots
Have you ever tried to tie something down for transporting but just couldnt get the lines tight andor during transport the lines would continually loosen Then this is theknot for you I learned this knot back in the 70s when specialty car racks and ratchet straps were rare or unheard of I initially used it to tie a canoe on a car rack bothattaching to the rack as well as the lines to the bow and stern of the canoe Even with all the new gizmos available today this knot still shines because all you need is arope and ropes dont hum in the wind like straps
The unique aspect of this knot is that it gives you a 2-1 mechanical advantage when tightening the rope Be careful though You can actually damage some thingsbecause of the mechanical advantage This knot holds fast and is easy to untie hallmark traits of any good knot
Below you see the finished knot system well break it apart in the steps that follow
Image Notes1 1st anchor point a bowline2 loop3 securing knots 2 half hitches4 securing loose end with a fishermans knot5 2nd anchor point (should be round)
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Image Notes1 X marks the spot
Step 1 Initial setupThe first step is to anchor one end of the rope and then loop the rope around a 2nd anchor point
For attaching to the 1st anchor point I chose bowline a close 2 on my list -) There are other instructables on that one so I wont bore you here
The 2nd anchor really should be round because it serves as a pulley in this block and tackle type knot Ive used it on sharp anchor points and it doesnt work as well
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 2 Creating a slip knotTie a slip knot somewhere between the two anchor points Correct placement of the slip knot takes some experience to judge it correctly Typically I place it too close tothe 2nd anchor point and end up with not enough room to work with If the knot ends up too far from 2nd anchor point you can extend the knot by enlarging the loop
Be sure you tie the slip knot as shown You may not be able to untie other knots
In this small example the slip knot is uncharacteristically close to the 1st anchor point
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 3 Tightening and securingThe loose end of the rope that went around the 2nd anchor point goes through the slip knot loop Pull the loose end to the desired tension and secure with two halfhitches
Note To allow better view of the knots the rope isnt really tightened in this example
Step 4 Securing loose endThe final knot is just to secure the loose end somehow I chose a fishermans knot to do this
To tie a fishermans knot the rope goes around twice and goes under the X created by the loops Pull the loose end to tighten Finally slide the knot to put tension onthe half hitches
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Image Notes1 X marks the spot
Step 5 FinishedThere you have it I guarantee that the first time you really use this knot (not just practice) you will be amazed at how well it works and youll wish you knew this knot along time ago You may even come over to my side and declare that is is THE most awesome knot on the planet -)
Enjoy and happy haulingDave
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Related Instructables
TiteTie is theTruckers Knoton Steroids bytitetie
Four knots tomake paracordinto a usefultool byerik_mccray
Modify yourbike rack tocarry a sunfishor other boat byewilhelm
SurfboardHammock byGermy
GiganticHalloweenSpider Web bynolte919
How To Tie ASpiders Hitch(video) by back-cast
Three-hitch mathair ornamentby michiexile TRX from
ParacordChallengeAccepted bythrake
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Carry any Bottle with a JUG KNOT Handleby hpstoutharrow on September 17 2009
Intro Carry any Bottle with a JUG KNOT HandleTie a JUG KNOT around a water bottle soda bottle or aluminum bottle to make a secure carrying strap
Re-purpose any container into a reusable water bottle by adding a convenient carrying strap This Instructable will demonstrate how to tie a JUG knot which like its namesuggests is meant to properly secure around the neck of a container
With some cord and the knowledge of this knot you will be able add a handle lanyard or carabiner loop to any of your favorite beverages to carry them on the go
It works perfectly for those disposable water bottles and who knows once you add some colorful cord to the plain old clear water bottle you just might beinclined to refill it and use it again(Check out pictures 4amp5 below)
In addition to plastic beverage bottles like pop water and sports drinks you can turn those rugged aluminum beer bottles into a backpacking canteen
Those of you familiar with my previous aluminum bottle InstructablesROLLED RIM METAL TUMBLERhttpwwwinstructablescomidAluminum-Bottle-Tumbler-Cup-Cook-PotALUMINUM BOTTLE LIGHTWEIGHT ALCOHOL STOVEhttpwwwinstructablescomidAluminum-Bottle-Alcohol-Stovewill recognize the water canteen shown below as a re-purposed aluminum beer bottle Here I have added a painted surface treatment to turn it into a proper lookingwater bottle More on that in steps 13 14 15
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 1 Getting StartedCord size is important Select a small medium weight cord like the one shown here It is a general purpose camp cord sold at most sporting goods stores (shoelacesmight also work)
Do not use a heavy cord or rope because the larger diameter will not tuck under the relatively small lip at the top of the bottleneck and the bottle will fall out
Also the smaller cord cinches tight on itself and will not loosen accidentally
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 2 Form a BightThe next steps show how to tie a JUG KNOT It is the basic step for adding a carrying strap It is also the anchor point for any additional fancy bottle trussing you maywant to add
JUG KNOT Step 1
Form a Bight in the center of a length of cord Bight is a knot term for a loop or bend in the rope In this case the main Bight in this knot is highlighted with a white mark Imakes it easier to follow its path in these steps
The running ends of the cord should be equal length
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 3 Pull the Bight downPULL the Bight DOWN forming two Loops
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 4 Cross the LoopsCROSS the right Loop OVER the left Loop
Step 5 Pass the Bight under the 1st loopTake the main Bight and pass it UNDER the left Loop
Step 6 Weave the BightWEAVE the Bight OVER the portion of the right Loop and UNDER the portion of the left Loop
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 7 Extend the BightExtend the Bight OVER the outer portion of the right Loop
Step 8 Flip the Right Loop behindAdditional colored identification points have been added to the loops to follow their travel in these next two steps
The right Loop Yellow marker is FLIPPED BEHIND the knot and ends up on the far left side of the knot
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 9 Flip the 2nd loop in frontRaise the green marker (located on what was formerly the left loop) and pull it down and to the right FLIPPING IT IN FRONT of the knot
Note the blue portion of the this loop will pass around the outside of the yellow portion of the first loop
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Image Notes1 Center of knot that will tighten around the bottles neck
Step 10 Remove SlackNote where the blue green amp yellow markers end up
Start to remove the slack in the loops by pulling the original main Bight (white marker top right) and the two free standing ends at the bottom
the bottle neck will pass through the very center of the knot
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Image Notes1 Center of knot that will tighten around the bottles neck
Step 11 Tighten the KnotAfter removing the slack insert the bottle neck and finish tightening
The knot should look like this before slipping it over the bottle
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 12 Secure on bottle neckThis is the finished knot shown on the neck of various containers
The loop end and the two free standing ends can be tied together to create a carrying handle (last picture below)
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 13 Aluminum Bottle Water Bottle
The next few steps show the features of an aluminum beer bottle re-purposed as a water bottle canteen It is one of many containers that can be reused as a camp waterbottle
The bottle was lightly sanded masked and then pained with a hammered finished paint to create an interesting surface texture
Image Notes1 Textured finish paint makes an interesting grip-able surface2 Masked with tape for painting3 Masked with tape for painting
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Image Notes1 Dowel used for holding the bottle during painting
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 14 Tethered Cork StopperUse a wine bottle man made Cork as a stopper for your aluminum water bottleNote Use a cork that was removed from the wine bottle without the corkscrew penetrating through the bottom end of the cork (A hole all the way through the cork willcause it to leak) Use the unpierced end of the cork inside the water bottle
Drill a hole through the sides of the Cork Thread the cord through the hole to the center of the cord Use the cork as the main Bight and tie the Jug knot as shown inthe beginning steps
Now the cork is tethered to the bottle and will not get lost or fall on the ground
A Carabiner clip passes through the other cord end to attache the water bottle to you belt or pack
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 15 Trussed for TransportThis is another hanging method for carrying your aluminum bottle water canteen A Jug knot is tied conventionally around the neck
The running ends of the knot however are pulled down towards the bottom of the bottle A Barrel Knot is tied about 34 the way down the side of the bottle A squareknot is tied on the bottom of the knot to keep the two running ends tight against the sides of the bottle
I like the look of the accent colored cord running down the sides of the bottle and the fact that the bottle hangs from the belt upside down It adds to its uniqueness
The last picture shows another truss variation
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 16 AdvancedBelow is a bottle with some additional trussing You can be creative as you want It all starts with a re-purposed container and the Jug Knot (and enough cord)
Related Instructables
AluminumBottle TumblerCup amp Cook Potfor an AlcoholStove byhpstoutharrow
Water BottleBelt Clip byuglymike Duct Tape
Water Bottle byrabidsquire2
AluminumBottle AlcoholStove byhpstoutharrow
DIYGlass WaterBottle byCulturespy
Solar WaterHeater forBackpackingUsing WaterBottles and aCar Shade bykopomeroy
Duct tape waterbottle holder(Photos) by pinkmarshmallow
How to make aCamelPack withan old plasticbottle bywillrandship
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Basic Knots Guideby zorro3355 on April 29 2008
Intro Basic Knots Guidehi
Step 1 Thumb knotThe most simple knotUsed as a stopper and prevent ropes from fraying
Step 2 Reef KnotUsed to tie two ropes of equal thickness togetherIt is pretty easy to tie and untie but under tentionit may be diffcult to untieIt is also not sutible for smoothropes(egnylon ropes)
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 3 Figure of eightused as a stopperprevent ropes from fraying and its more secure than tumb knot its is also used to tie Caribinas to ropes and is often used in rock climbing
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 4 Timber hitchused for pulling logs
Step 5 Clove hitchUsed to tie a rope onto a pole or logThe pole must be roundThe pole lust be thicker then the rope itself
(greatly used during pioneering)
Step 6 Sheet bandused to tie ropes of different thickness together(works on same thickness of ropes too)
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 7 Sheep shankTo shorten RopesTo prevent middle fraying
Step 8 Slip knotWhippingUsed as a grip for pulling things(when tied on a stick or small pole)(marlin spike hitch)
Related Instructables
Rope Rings byhpstoutharrow
How to Tie aFigure EightKnot byTactical_Pyro
Whippin (WestCountry Style)by tim_n
SurvivalBracelet(Updated) bytevers94
HangmansNoose PackClosure byPopEye42
Turkey on aTripod byhpstoutharrow
SurvivalBracelet II bytevers94 Zigzag Spooling
Paracord (video)by Stormdrane
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
How to Tie a Fire-escape Knotby leonardo ismael on October 16 2007
Intro How to Tie a Fire-escape KnotThis knot is used by firemen in case of fires for example imagine a scene where the ladder on the firetruck messes up but people need to get down a five story buildingor more All they have is a long piece of rope they can safely get down with a secure knot like the fire-escape knot So why not learn it its easy to do and hard to untieif you tie it tightly
This is from the American Boys Handbook
Step 1 Get Your RopeFirst grab a piece of rope and bend it like this to make a loop in it Follow every step to the smallest detail
Step 2 Twist the RopeNow make a twist like this and hold it together
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 3 Pull Through the TwistPull the loop through the twist you just made from underneath
Step 4 Go Over the Split EndNow pull the tail through the loop
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 5 FinallyAnd finally just pull it through as pictured below
Congratulations you just learned the fire-escape knot
Step 6 Same Name Not KnotThis is another knot called the fire-escape knot this shouldnt be your result
Related Instructables
House FireEscape Plan(video) byWhatHappensNowAdvice
ParacordLadder wWooden Rungsby josestude
Bed SheetEscape Rope byjessehensel
rope ladder(glow-in-the-dark version) bymikeasaurus
HeadlockEscape 2(video) byjohnnyrockstah
QuickFirestarter byMattandJora
Trail sauna byjakee117
How to Kill FireAnts andCommitGenocide byKentsOkay
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Climb Safe With A Figure 8 Knotby mattste on February 23 2010
Intro Climb Safe With A Figure 8 Knot There are many things that a beginning climber needs to know including several important knots Perhaps the most essential knot is the Figure 8 Follow Through Thistutorial will demonstrate how to correctly harness yourself to a rope using a Figure 8 Follow Through knot This knot is used primarily by rock climbers to provide a life-line Since this knot is used as a life-line it is very important to be able to tie it correctly (Your life could depend upon it)
Dont worry with this tutorial and about 5 minutes of practice you can have this knot mastered
Things you will need
- Climbing Harness- Climbing Rope
If you are wanting to go climbing and dont already have these items they can be purchased for about $25 each at most outdoor sporting goods stores If you are merelylooking to learn the knot a belt loop and a rope (about five feet long) will do
Image Notes1 Climbing Harness2 Climbing Rope
Step 1 Dealing With The RopeThroughout this tutorial I will be discussing different parts of the rope To make these instructions as clear as possible I will define a few terms that I will use throughoutthe tutorial The Anchor End of the rope will generally be at the top of the images This is the end that would be anchored to the wall or rock and does not move Wewill not be doing much with the anchored end The Tail End of the rope is the opposite end that we will be dealing with I will call this the tail for short
Now that we have some terms to work with lets get started
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 2 Tying The First Figure 8This knot has several parts to it The first part of the knot is just tying a basic figure 8 To tie the first figure 8 there are four simple steps
1 - Using the tail make a loop over the rope (as shown in the first picture) keeping in mind that there should be about 3 ft of slack on the tail end
2 - Wrap the tail back this time go under the anchored end (As shown in the second picture)
3 - Bring the tail down through the first loop (As shown in the third picture)
4 - Finally pull the two ends to make the knot a little bit tighter and easier to deal with (Shown in the fourth picture)
After these four steps you should end up with a knot that resembles a figure 8
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 3 Looping Into The Harness In order to secure the rope to the harness simply thread the tail end of the rope through the front loop in the harness as shown in the picture below This step isobviously very important
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 4 Following Back Through The Figure 8After looping the rope through the harness you have to thread the tail end of the rope back through the knot following the first figure 8 I have divided this process intofive smaller steps in order to make it more clear
1 - Coming form underneath the knot bring the tail up through the near loop and to the left behind the anchored end of the rope (Shown in the first picture)
2 - Wrap the tail around the anchored end back to the right and down through the adjacent loop (Shown in the second picture)
3 - You simply need to bring the tail back over the top of the knot to the left (Shown in the third picture)
4 - Bring the tail end up through the far loop following the anchored end (Shown in the fourth picture)
5 - Finally pull the knot tight (Shown in the fifth picture)
As you can see the first four pictures are simply tracing the knot back through with the tail end
For the last part while you pull the knot tight you may want to make small adjustments and rearrange how it all fits together If the knot does not lay perfectly smoothand tight its NOT a big deal
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 5 Finishing The Knot After completing the Figure 8 knot you will want to somehow secure the tail end of the rope out of the way There are a couple different ways to do this the way that Iwill demonstrate is using whats called a Stopper Knot This secondary knot is similar to a Fishermans knot and is pretty simple I have once again divided thisprocess into several smaller steps
1 - Start by wrapping the tail end around the anchored end (As shown in the first picture)
2 - Wrap the tail back underneath the two vertical segments (As shown in the second picture)
3 - Simply repeat the first two steps wrapping the tail around again (As shown in the third picture)
4 - This step in the fourth picture may look complicated but all you need to do is insert the tail up through the two loops that you have just made
5 - To finish off the knot you will want to slowly pull the tail end while gently pushing the bottom of the stopper knot upwards If you have successfully completed this knotit should look something like the fifth picture
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 6 Ready To Climb Now that you have mastered the Figure 8 knot you can securely harness yourself into a climbing rope Remember there are many other skills that go into setting up ananchor and belaying a climber This tutorial only covers the figure 8 knot For more information there are many great websites that demonstrate how to correctly set up asafe climbing system (Ive posted a few below) If you are a beginning climber I recommend that you read up on a few other climbing techniques Also you shouldprobably go to a climbing wall or gym where there are experienced climbers that can show you the ropes Hopefully this tutorial has been helpful Have fun and be safe
Some useful linkshttpwwwstephenprattnetAnchorsanchorshtmhttpwwwuoregonedu~oppclimbingtopicsanchorshtmlhttpwwwabc-of-rockclimbingcomhowtoclimbingtechniquesasp
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Related Instructables
How to Tie aFigure EightKnot byTactical_Pyro
Paracord KnotDisplay Bord byJamie bagn
Basic KnotsGuide byzorro3355
How to Climb aTree (withprussiks) bystasterisk
How to climb atree (using onlyrope) thefunsimple wayby louieaw
How to get arope into a tree(withoutclimbing it) byvitex
How to tievarious knots byadaviel
How to make arope swing byjdub0928
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Turks Head Knots on a Bottleby sklnxbones on July 6 2010
Intro Turks Head Knots on a BottleThis is the finished project A bottle decorated with three Turks Head Knots There are only three knots on this bottle The RED and the BLUE knots are each a 20 Bightby 3 Lead Turks Head Knots The WHITE knot is a 20 Bight by 19 Lead Turks Head Knot
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 1 Supplies
Cord Lots and Lots of cord I cant tell you how much each bottle is differentBottle Washed and Dried inside and out Make sure to remove all water spotsThreaded Needle Cord screws into the threads at the base of the needlePegs I use brass rivets used as a map to tie the Turks Head KnotsHole Punch Used to punch holes in the painters tape to hold the pegsPainters Tape To hold the pegs in place and to make your map for the Turks Head KnotsMarker To write on the painters tapeCloth Towel To remove finger prints and dirt from your bottleKrazy Glue or Super Glue This is used to secure the knots in place to the bottle
OPTIONAL BUT HIGHLY RECOMMENDEDI use the Turks Head Cookbook from KnotToolcom
Step 2 PreparationYou will need to find a bottle you like I used an empty instant tea bottle of course washed and dried (I like to put the bottle in the oven for a few minutes to dry the insidewithout water spots Take off the lid and do not put lid in the oven) Now measure the circumference of the bottle Take a cord and tightly wrap the cord around the bottleMark where the ends meet and use a ruler to measure the length of the cord For my instant tea bottle the circumference is 27cm I know from past knots that I have tiedthat I want my knot to have 20 Bights in the top and bottom (bands) knots I am going to use the Bights in the (bands) knots to tie the middle knot Now divide the numberof Bights (20) into the size of the circumference (27) to get the space between each Bight (135) With me so far
Now take two pieces of painters tape using a ruler measure out the length of the circumference and mark the length on the both pieces of tape Next you will mark thespace between each Bight on the tape
Step 3 Adding the PegsI like to use pegs when tying Turks Head Knots it just makes tying the knot easier
These are what I use for pegs
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 4 Adding Pegs to the TapeNow take a hole punch to cut holes in the tape where the lines meet You will place the pegs in the holes
Insert a peg in each hole and carefully stick the first piece of tape to the bottle
Step 5 Adding the 2nd row of pegsNow do the same thing with the second piece of tape The numbers on each piece of tape must line up
This picture shows you what you should have now This odd looking thing will be your map to tie the Turks Head Knot And this is the end of Step 1
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 6 Tying the first Turks Head KnotUsing the Turks Head Cookbook follow the numbers going over and under as indicated in the book I chose a 20 Bight by 3 Lead knot which will give me a nice bandaround the bottle Once the ends meet you have made one complete knot Tape the running end of your cord and start removing the pegs and the tape
Step 7 Remove the pegs and the tapeBe careful not to untie the knot as you remove the pegs and tape from the bottle Continue to remove all the pegs and remove the tape from the bottle At this point theknot will be very loose and will need to be tightened up
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 8 Remove the slack from the knotHere you can see just how much the knot expanded Starting with the standing end begin to pull the slack out of the knot going towards the running end of the cordDo not expect to pull all the slack out at once You may have to make 3 - 5 attempts at removing the slack out of the knot DO NOT remove all of the slack out of the knotIn order to make the bands we will have to triple the Turks Head Knot We will do this by following the knot three times The threaded needle will really come in handyhere
Step 9 Triple the KnotOnce you have made three passes of the Turks Head Knot use your needle to go under your knot about half the circumference and cut the cord The knot will be tightenough to hide the tail in placeTIP I carefully add a couple of drops of super glue UNDER the band to hold them in place and keep them from sliding around in the nextsteps A drop or two in 3 or 4 places around the band should be enough
Step 10 Add the second knotNow repeat this whole step for the second bandWhen tying the second band you must make sure the Bights line up to the first band This is crucial for the next stepWipe down the bottle to make sure all your finger prints and adhesive from the tape are all removed You want to make sure your bottle is clean at this point Any dirt orfinger prints left on the bottle will be almost impossible to remove From this point on we will use gloves when tying our last knot
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 11 Maping the Top KnotStick a piece of painters tape on top of your first band leaving the bottom of the knot exposedUse a marker to count the number of Bights in your knot Instead of using the pegs we are going to use the Bights to tie our next Turks Head Knot
Step 12 Mapping the Bottom KnotDo the same thing for the bottom band but you must make sure your numbers on top and bottom line up So 1 on top should be the same position as 1 on the bottom
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 13 Adding the last knotAgain using the Turks Head Cookbook and the threaded needle you are going to follow the instructions going over and under as indicated in the book Be sure to usegloves when ever you handle the bottle
Step 14 Thats ItFor this Turks Head Knot I am using a 20 Bight by 19 Lead knot
Because of the amount of cord you are working with your cord will get twisted and knotted You will have to un-twist the cord often Its a pain in the rear but it has to bedone And it has to be done alot
Continue to tie the knot until you finish the knot If you have the cord and the patience you can double or triple the knot When you are done use your needle to hide theends under your bands Cut the ends and your DONE
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Related Instructables
Monkeys FistFloatingKeychain byjokerlz
How To Make ATurks headKnot WithParacord byDoggie Stylish
Tying Trivetsout of Rope forHoliday Gifts bykylemarsh
Paracord KnotDisplay Bord byJamie bagn
How to Make ATurks Head(Photos) bymchs60chip
A pocket full ofknots byKiteman
Monkeys fistknot AND themonkey byjonathan111
TiteTie is theTruckers Knoton Steroids bytitetie
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Larks head noose -- an easy useful knot that tightens and loosensby Larry Breed on February 19 2009
Intro Larks head noose -- an easy useful knot that tightens and loosensI thought I knew all the basic knots but then I was taught this incredibly useful simple knot Its good for tying up the neck of a bag that you want to repeatedly open andsecurely close Its good for tying around a springy bundle that will need tightening and retightening And its easy to undo
Ive looked at knot literature but havent found a name for this so I named it The basic knot is well known its called a larks head Since all Ive done is to slip the twoends through the larks head to make a noose I call it that
WARNING Dont use this knot when human safety would depend on it Climbers and mountaineers have well-tested reliable knots for such situations
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Image Notes1 To tighten further step on this side of the larks head and pull the free ends
Step 1 Double the cord overThe larks head noose requires enough cord to go twice around your bundle plus a foot or two Find the center and double it over Sailors call this a bight
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 2 Form the larks headComing from below the bight hook your thumb and forefinger over the two sides Reach outward and downward and pinch your fingertips together underneath thedoubled cord
Youve made a larks head Move the crossing cord a little farther from your hand so theres a clear opening through the two half-loops
Step 3 Form the nooseSlip the two ends of the cord through the opening we were just talking about Pull the larks head tight so it grips the two cords Find something that needs constrictingand put the noose around it
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 4 Tightening retightening and lockingSlide the knot against the bundle If its not tight enough to keep from slipping tighten it by holding it in one hand and tugging on the cords one at a time with the otherhand Notice that you can slide the knot out again for instance to re-open the bag you just tied shut For some applications this may be as tight as you need it
A springy bundle probably still feels loose If so compress the bundle and get a new grip on the cords Rest your foot on the bundle on the cords nearest the larks headand pull to slide the larks head tighter
To make the knot more permanent you can lock it Make an overhand in the cord ends (Exactly like the first step in tying shoelaces) With your foot still on the bundlepull on the cords and move your hands apart until youre pulling in opposite directions You have just locked the larks head and you can trust it to stay that way()
But lets say that later on you want to loosen the locked knot Again put your foot on the bundle and cords nearest the larks head hold the two cord ends together andpull This makes a little slack between the overhand and the larks head so you can untie the overhand
In twine or small string the locking overhand knot may be difficult to undo Use a shoelace knot instead of an overhand and itll unlock easily
() If youre using slippery cord like polypropylene an overhand may not lock securely You may want to tie another overhand knot For added security wrap a shortlength of duct tape around the two cords close to the knot
Image Notes1 To tighten further step on this side of the larks head and pull the free ends
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Related Instructables
TRX fromParacordChallengeAccepted bythrake
A pocket full ofknots byKiteman
Lens CapLanyard by~teknoarsonist~ how to tie a
noose byawesume
AdjustableParacordGlassesLanyard byjdtwelve12
HangmansNoose PackClosure byPopEye42
Paraleash - ADog LeashFrom Paracordby The Ideanator
How to make arugged andhandy ParacordBelt by Jake22
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Four knots to make paracord into a useful toolby erik_mccray on March 27 2010
Authorerik_mccrayI am an ex-fabricator that is now a stay at home dad I love my new job but I do miss making stuff I love this site amp I am getting involved as a way to keep myskills upOn top of fad work I have also run two small business in the past One was custom sewing amp the other was as a small engine mechanicI have two votec degrees one in metal fabrication amp the other is in engine repairI look forward to getting to know everyone here
Intro Four knots to make paracord into a useful toolParacord is an awesome multitool used everywhere from the wild blue yonder to the deepest caverns But like any good tool it is only as good as the knowledge the userhas about the tool With most people out there using bungee cords amp ratchet straps it seems that paracord is being used for nothing more than friendship bracelets forgrown men This is a shame because for less then the price of a few cheap bungee cords amp some to short to be helpful straps You can get yourself hundreds of feet ofparacord
The key to getting the most out of the paracord is good knot work The first thing you need to know is what makes a good knot One is that the knot is easy amp quick to tieamp more impotant is that the knot is easy amp quick to untie The hitch class of knots is by far the best group of knots that the average person could know The four mostuseful hitch knots are the half hitch a quick simple knot that forms the base for many other knots the inline half hitch allowing you to get the most out of one length ofparacord the slippery hitch that gives you both on the fly control over tension on your paracord but also an adjustable loop that will not change unless you want it amp theinline truckers hitch instantly doubling the your pulling power
Step 1 To get started lets get some terminology that will be used defined
line= the paracord
Main line= the part of the paracord doing the work for example holding down your tarp or the long part of the paracord
Mid line= the middle of the length of the paracord
End line= the unused length of paracord or the short length of paracord
Step 2 The half hitch The half hitch is a simple way to secure a line to an anchor point like the tie down points in most trucks A half hitch is a constrictor knot meaning that the harder you pullon the line the tighter the knots grip gets Another common constrictor knot is the slip knot
Step 1 wrap your line around your anchor point Step 2 wrap the end line around the main line
Step 3 pass the end line threw the end line side of the newly formed loop
step 4 now take the slack out of the knot
step 5 to make sure the knot is secure tie another half hitch to the main line This knot is called adouble half hitch
step 6 another useful thing that can be done with the half hitch is that instead of repeating the wrap on the main line but repeating it on what you are tying to the half hitchcan be used to bind something like a stack of 2x4s
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Image Notes1 End line2 Main line3 step 1
Image Notes1 Step 2
Image Notes1 passing thew the end line side of the loop2 step 3
Image Notes1 step 5
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Image Notes1 step 6
Step 3 The mid line half hitch The mid line half hitch is for when the length of line is to long for the job at hand amp you dont want to have to cut the line to size or you are using multiple anchor pointswith one length of line
Step 1 double up the line at the point in the length you wish to make the knot
Step 2 wrap the doubled up portion of line around your anchor point The doubled up length is now now the end line
Step 3 now tie just as you did for the regular half hitch repeat the knot to make a double half hitch for security
Image Notes1 A mid line double half hitch
Image Notes1 step 1
Image Notes1 The end line2 step 2
Image Notes1 Step 3
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 4 The slippery hitch The slippery hitch is a great knot for adjusting tension on the main line or for having an adjustable fixed loop To adjust the knot simply slide the knot up or down the mainline
Step 1 wrap your line around the anchor point or just double over the line to form a loop
Step 2 wrap the end line around the main line three times Wrapping in the direction of the anchor point or loop
Step 3 put together the two lines making up the loop amp wrap the two lines one time with the end line
Step 4 pass the end line thew the last loop formed covering the two lined of the loop
Step 5 pull the knot tite
step 6 to adjust the size of the loop or main line tension grab the knot amp slide it up or down the main line
Image Notes1 grab just the knot its self to adjust it2 step 5
Image Notes1 step 1
Image Notes1 step 2
Image Notes1 step 3
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Image Notes1 step 4
Image Notes1 grab just the knot its self to adjust it2 step 5
Image Notes1 same knot as in last pic Just slid up2 step 6
Step 5 The mid line truchers hitch The truckers hitch is a great way to double the pulling force on a line There are many ways to tie this knot the problem with most of them is that at some point you aregoing to have to pass the end line through a loop on the main line that is acting like a pulley to double your pulling force this is great if you are making the knot close tothe end of your line but if you are using a 300 length of line amp want to make the knot in the first ten feet having to pass 290 of line thew a loop is a pain But with a fewhalf hitches you will not have to pass the end line threw any loop on the main line
step 1 wrap your line around the anchor point then double over your end line laying the top of the loop over the main line
Step 2 double up your main line amp lay the loop over the loop made by the end line
step 3 in main line above the knot twist in a loop
step 4 put main line loop thew the loop made in step 3 amp pull this loop tight over your main line loop forming a half hitch Repeat step 3 amp 4 to make a doublehalf hitch
step 5 To use the knot just pull down on the end line to put tension on the main line
step 6 after you have the main line snug tie a mid line double half hitch around the two lines forming the loop at the end of the main line with the end line
step 7 Tie a double half hitch with the end line around the end loop of the mid line half hitch of step 6 using the same method as used in steps 3 amp 4
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Image Notes1 the end of step 6
Image Notes1 main line2 end line3 step 1
Image Notes1 main line loop2 end line loop
Image Notes1 step 3
Image Notes1 step 4
Image Notes1 step 4 at the end with a double half hitch on the main loop
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Image Notes1 pull here2 step 5
Image Notes1 the start of step 6
Image Notes1 the end of step 6
Image Notes1 step 72 now the rest of the line is free to do more work
Related Instructables
Paracord KnotDisplay Bord byJamie bagn
ChokelessAdjustableParacord DogLeash byPizzaman101
ParacordLadder wWooden Rungsby josestude
tie a paracordshackle grip byitri45
ParacordPrussik Belt byJavaNut13
TiteTie is theTruckers Knoton Steroids bytitetie
ID Lanyard(Photos) byeschmunk
Dog Toys forHeavy Chewersby J3443RY
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Figure 8 knot and double 8 knotby jonathan111 on November 28 2007
Intro Figure 8 knot and double 8 knotI will show you how to tie a figure 8 knot and a figure 8 follow through
Step 1 Stating the knotThis is a simple knot so just follow the pictures
Step 2 Finishing the knotCross the string under and then push it through the hole Pull tightly unless you are going to do the follow through and leave it somewhat loose
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 3 The follow through knotThe follow through knot should be tied around something brought back and followed through the path of the 8 knot Look at the pictures Basically follow through the 8knot backwards
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Related Instructables
Climb Safe WithA Figure 8Knot by mattste A pocket full of
knots byKiteman
How to Tie aFigure EightKnot byTactical_Pyro
Paracord KnotDisplay Bord byJamie bagn
Cross KnotParacordLanyard byStormdrane
How to Tie aFire-escapeKnot by leonardoismael
Truckers HitchTHE mostawesome knoton the planetby schneidp20
Paracord ZipperPuller byrepeet13
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Truckers Hitch THE most awesome knot on the planetby schneidp20 on October 12 2008
Authorschneidp20I like building stuff Trouble is there just isnt enough time to build everything Sigh
Intro Truckers Hitch THE most awesome knot on the planetYes I know that there are plenty of other cool knots out there many of which I literally couldnt live wo I rock climb However this knot is unlike any other Plus Ineeded a grabber for my Instructable -) (BTW this ISNT a climbing knot) And in truth it isnt a knot by itself but rather a system of common knots
Have you ever tried to tie something down for transporting but just couldnt get the lines tight andor during transport the lines would continually loosen Then this is theknot for you I learned this knot back in the 70s when specialty car racks and ratchet straps were rare or unheard of I initially used it to tie a canoe on a car rack bothattaching to the rack as well as the lines to the bow and stern of the canoe Even with all the new gizmos available today this knot still shines because all you need is arope and ropes dont hum in the wind like straps
The unique aspect of this knot is that it gives you a 2-1 mechanical advantage when tightening the rope Be careful though You can actually damage some thingsbecause of the mechanical advantage This knot holds fast and is easy to untie hallmark traits of any good knot
Below you see the finished knot system well break it apart in the steps that follow
Image Notes1 1st anchor point a bowline2 loop3 securing knots 2 half hitches4 securing loose end with a fishermans knot5 2nd anchor point (should be round)
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Image Notes1 X marks the spot
Step 1 Initial setupThe first step is to anchor one end of the rope and then loop the rope around a 2nd anchor point
For attaching to the 1st anchor point I chose bowline a close 2 on my list -) There are other instructables on that one so I wont bore you here
The 2nd anchor really should be round because it serves as a pulley in this block and tackle type knot Ive used it on sharp anchor points and it doesnt work as well
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 2 Creating a slip knotTie a slip knot somewhere between the two anchor points Correct placement of the slip knot takes some experience to judge it correctly Typically I place it too close tothe 2nd anchor point and end up with not enough room to work with If the knot ends up too far from 2nd anchor point you can extend the knot by enlarging the loop
Be sure you tie the slip knot as shown You may not be able to untie other knots
In this small example the slip knot is uncharacteristically close to the 1st anchor point
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 3 Tightening and securingThe loose end of the rope that went around the 2nd anchor point goes through the slip knot loop Pull the loose end to the desired tension and secure with two halfhitches
Note To allow better view of the knots the rope isnt really tightened in this example
Step 4 Securing loose endThe final knot is just to secure the loose end somehow I chose a fishermans knot to do this
To tie a fishermans knot the rope goes around twice and goes under the X created by the loops Pull the loose end to tighten Finally slide the knot to put tension onthe half hitches
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Image Notes1 X marks the spot
Step 5 FinishedThere you have it I guarantee that the first time you really use this knot (not just practice) you will be amazed at how well it works and youll wish you knew this knot along time ago You may even come over to my side and declare that is is THE most awesome knot on the planet -)
Enjoy and happy haulingDave
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Related Instructables
TiteTie is theTruckers Knoton Steroids bytitetie
Four knots tomake paracordinto a usefultool byerik_mccray
Modify yourbike rack tocarry a sunfishor other boat byewilhelm
SurfboardHammock byGermy
GiganticHalloweenSpider Web bynolte919
How To Tie ASpiders Hitch(video) by back-cast
Three-hitch mathair ornamentby michiexile TRX from
ParacordChallengeAccepted bythrake
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Carry any Bottle with a JUG KNOT Handleby hpstoutharrow on September 17 2009
Intro Carry any Bottle with a JUG KNOT HandleTie a JUG KNOT around a water bottle soda bottle or aluminum bottle to make a secure carrying strap
Re-purpose any container into a reusable water bottle by adding a convenient carrying strap This Instructable will demonstrate how to tie a JUG knot which like its namesuggests is meant to properly secure around the neck of a container
With some cord and the knowledge of this knot you will be able add a handle lanyard or carabiner loop to any of your favorite beverages to carry them on the go
It works perfectly for those disposable water bottles and who knows once you add some colorful cord to the plain old clear water bottle you just might beinclined to refill it and use it again(Check out pictures 4amp5 below)
In addition to plastic beverage bottles like pop water and sports drinks you can turn those rugged aluminum beer bottles into a backpacking canteen
Those of you familiar with my previous aluminum bottle InstructablesROLLED RIM METAL TUMBLERhttpwwwinstructablescomidAluminum-Bottle-Tumbler-Cup-Cook-PotALUMINUM BOTTLE LIGHTWEIGHT ALCOHOL STOVEhttpwwwinstructablescomidAluminum-Bottle-Alcohol-Stovewill recognize the water canteen shown below as a re-purposed aluminum beer bottle Here I have added a painted surface treatment to turn it into a proper lookingwater bottle More on that in steps 13 14 15
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 1 Getting StartedCord size is important Select a small medium weight cord like the one shown here It is a general purpose camp cord sold at most sporting goods stores (shoelacesmight also work)
Do not use a heavy cord or rope because the larger diameter will not tuck under the relatively small lip at the top of the bottleneck and the bottle will fall out
Also the smaller cord cinches tight on itself and will not loosen accidentally
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 2 Form a BightThe next steps show how to tie a JUG KNOT It is the basic step for adding a carrying strap It is also the anchor point for any additional fancy bottle trussing you maywant to add
JUG KNOT Step 1
Form a Bight in the center of a length of cord Bight is a knot term for a loop or bend in the rope In this case the main Bight in this knot is highlighted with a white mark Imakes it easier to follow its path in these steps
The running ends of the cord should be equal length
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 3 Pull the Bight downPULL the Bight DOWN forming two Loops
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 4 Cross the LoopsCROSS the right Loop OVER the left Loop
Step 5 Pass the Bight under the 1st loopTake the main Bight and pass it UNDER the left Loop
Step 6 Weave the BightWEAVE the Bight OVER the portion of the right Loop and UNDER the portion of the left Loop
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 7 Extend the BightExtend the Bight OVER the outer portion of the right Loop
Step 8 Flip the Right Loop behindAdditional colored identification points have been added to the loops to follow their travel in these next two steps
The right Loop Yellow marker is FLIPPED BEHIND the knot and ends up on the far left side of the knot
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 9 Flip the 2nd loop in frontRaise the green marker (located on what was formerly the left loop) and pull it down and to the right FLIPPING IT IN FRONT of the knot
Note the blue portion of the this loop will pass around the outside of the yellow portion of the first loop
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Image Notes1 Center of knot that will tighten around the bottles neck
Step 10 Remove SlackNote where the blue green amp yellow markers end up
Start to remove the slack in the loops by pulling the original main Bight (white marker top right) and the two free standing ends at the bottom
the bottle neck will pass through the very center of the knot
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Image Notes1 Center of knot that will tighten around the bottles neck
Step 11 Tighten the KnotAfter removing the slack insert the bottle neck and finish tightening
The knot should look like this before slipping it over the bottle
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 12 Secure on bottle neckThis is the finished knot shown on the neck of various containers
The loop end and the two free standing ends can be tied together to create a carrying handle (last picture below)
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 13 Aluminum Bottle Water Bottle
The next few steps show the features of an aluminum beer bottle re-purposed as a water bottle canteen It is one of many containers that can be reused as a camp waterbottle
The bottle was lightly sanded masked and then pained with a hammered finished paint to create an interesting surface texture
Image Notes1 Textured finish paint makes an interesting grip-able surface2 Masked with tape for painting3 Masked with tape for painting
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Image Notes1 Dowel used for holding the bottle during painting
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 14 Tethered Cork StopperUse a wine bottle man made Cork as a stopper for your aluminum water bottleNote Use a cork that was removed from the wine bottle without the corkscrew penetrating through the bottom end of the cork (A hole all the way through the cork willcause it to leak) Use the unpierced end of the cork inside the water bottle
Drill a hole through the sides of the Cork Thread the cord through the hole to the center of the cord Use the cork as the main Bight and tie the Jug knot as shown inthe beginning steps
Now the cork is tethered to the bottle and will not get lost or fall on the ground
A Carabiner clip passes through the other cord end to attache the water bottle to you belt or pack
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 15 Trussed for TransportThis is another hanging method for carrying your aluminum bottle water canteen A Jug knot is tied conventionally around the neck
The running ends of the knot however are pulled down towards the bottom of the bottle A Barrel Knot is tied about 34 the way down the side of the bottle A squareknot is tied on the bottom of the knot to keep the two running ends tight against the sides of the bottle
I like the look of the accent colored cord running down the sides of the bottle and the fact that the bottle hangs from the belt upside down It adds to its uniqueness
The last picture shows another truss variation
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 16 AdvancedBelow is a bottle with some additional trussing You can be creative as you want It all starts with a re-purposed container and the Jug Knot (and enough cord)
Related Instructables
AluminumBottle TumblerCup amp Cook Potfor an AlcoholStove byhpstoutharrow
Water BottleBelt Clip byuglymike Duct Tape
Water Bottle byrabidsquire2
AluminumBottle AlcoholStove byhpstoutharrow
DIYGlass WaterBottle byCulturespy
Solar WaterHeater forBackpackingUsing WaterBottles and aCar Shade bykopomeroy
Duct tape waterbottle holder(Photos) by pinkmarshmallow
How to make aCamelPack withan old plasticbottle bywillrandship
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Basic Knots Guideby zorro3355 on April 29 2008
Intro Basic Knots Guidehi
Step 1 Thumb knotThe most simple knotUsed as a stopper and prevent ropes from fraying
Step 2 Reef KnotUsed to tie two ropes of equal thickness togetherIt is pretty easy to tie and untie but under tentionit may be diffcult to untieIt is also not sutible for smoothropes(egnylon ropes)
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 3 Figure of eightused as a stopperprevent ropes from fraying and its more secure than tumb knot its is also used to tie Caribinas to ropes and is often used in rock climbing
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 4 Timber hitchused for pulling logs
Step 5 Clove hitchUsed to tie a rope onto a pole or logThe pole must be roundThe pole lust be thicker then the rope itself
(greatly used during pioneering)
Step 6 Sheet bandused to tie ropes of different thickness together(works on same thickness of ropes too)
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 7 Sheep shankTo shorten RopesTo prevent middle fraying
Step 8 Slip knotWhippingUsed as a grip for pulling things(when tied on a stick or small pole)(marlin spike hitch)
Related Instructables
Rope Rings byhpstoutharrow
How to Tie aFigure EightKnot byTactical_Pyro
Whippin (WestCountry Style)by tim_n
SurvivalBracelet(Updated) bytevers94
HangmansNoose PackClosure byPopEye42
Turkey on aTripod byhpstoutharrow
SurvivalBracelet II bytevers94 Zigzag Spooling
Paracord (video)by Stormdrane
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
How to Tie a Fire-escape Knotby leonardo ismael on October 16 2007
Intro How to Tie a Fire-escape KnotThis knot is used by firemen in case of fires for example imagine a scene where the ladder on the firetruck messes up but people need to get down a five story buildingor more All they have is a long piece of rope they can safely get down with a secure knot like the fire-escape knot So why not learn it its easy to do and hard to untieif you tie it tightly
This is from the American Boys Handbook
Step 1 Get Your RopeFirst grab a piece of rope and bend it like this to make a loop in it Follow every step to the smallest detail
Step 2 Twist the RopeNow make a twist like this and hold it together
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 3 Pull Through the TwistPull the loop through the twist you just made from underneath
Step 4 Go Over the Split EndNow pull the tail through the loop
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 5 FinallyAnd finally just pull it through as pictured below
Congratulations you just learned the fire-escape knot
Step 6 Same Name Not KnotThis is another knot called the fire-escape knot this shouldnt be your result
Related Instructables
House FireEscape Plan(video) byWhatHappensNowAdvice
ParacordLadder wWooden Rungsby josestude
Bed SheetEscape Rope byjessehensel
rope ladder(glow-in-the-dark version) bymikeasaurus
HeadlockEscape 2(video) byjohnnyrockstah
QuickFirestarter byMattandJora
Trail sauna byjakee117
How to Kill FireAnts andCommitGenocide byKentsOkay
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Climb Safe With A Figure 8 Knotby mattste on February 23 2010
Intro Climb Safe With A Figure 8 Knot There are many things that a beginning climber needs to know including several important knots Perhaps the most essential knot is the Figure 8 Follow Through Thistutorial will demonstrate how to correctly harness yourself to a rope using a Figure 8 Follow Through knot This knot is used primarily by rock climbers to provide a life-line Since this knot is used as a life-line it is very important to be able to tie it correctly (Your life could depend upon it)
Dont worry with this tutorial and about 5 minutes of practice you can have this knot mastered
Things you will need
- Climbing Harness- Climbing Rope
If you are wanting to go climbing and dont already have these items they can be purchased for about $25 each at most outdoor sporting goods stores If you are merelylooking to learn the knot a belt loop and a rope (about five feet long) will do
Image Notes1 Climbing Harness2 Climbing Rope
Step 1 Dealing With The RopeThroughout this tutorial I will be discussing different parts of the rope To make these instructions as clear as possible I will define a few terms that I will use throughoutthe tutorial The Anchor End of the rope will generally be at the top of the images This is the end that would be anchored to the wall or rock and does not move Wewill not be doing much with the anchored end The Tail End of the rope is the opposite end that we will be dealing with I will call this the tail for short
Now that we have some terms to work with lets get started
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 2 Tying The First Figure 8This knot has several parts to it The first part of the knot is just tying a basic figure 8 To tie the first figure 8 there are four simple steps
1 - Using the tail make a loop over the rope (as shown in the first picture) keeping in mind that there should be about 3 ft of slack on the tail end
2 - Wrap the tail back this time go under the anchored end (As shown in the second picture)
3 - Bring the tail down through the first loop (As shown in the third picture)
4 - Finally pull the two ends to make the knot a little bit tighter and easier to deal with (Shown in the fourth picture)
After these four steps you should end up with a knot that resembles a figure 8
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 3 Looping Into The Harness In order to secure the rope to the harness simply thread the tail end of the rope through the front loop in the harness as shown in the picture below This step isobviously very important
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 4 Following Back Through The Figure 8After looping the rope through the harness you have to thread the tail end of the rope back through the knot following the first figure 8 I have divided this process intofive smaller steps in order to make it more clear
1 - Coming form underneath the knot bring the tail up through the near loop and to the left behind the anchored end of the rope (Shown in the first picture)
2 - Wrap the tail around the anchored end back to the right and down through the adjacent loop (Shown in the second picture)
3 - You simply need to bring the tail back over the top of the knot to the left (Shown in the third picture)
4 - Bring the tail end up through the far loop following the anchored end (Shown in the fourth picture)
5 - Finally pull the knot tight (Shown in the fifth picture)
As you can see the first four pictures are simply tracing the knot back through with the tail end
For the last part while you pull the knot tight you may want to make small adjustments and rearrange how it all fits together If the knot does not lay perfectly smoothand tight its NOT a big deal
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 5 Finishing The Knot After completing the Figure 8 knot you will want to somehow secure the tail end of the rope out of the way There are a couple different ways to do this the way that Iwill demonstrate is using whats called a Stopper Knot This secondary knot is similar to a Fishermans knot and is pretty simple I have once again divided thisprocess into several smaller steps
1 - Start by wrapping the tail end around the anchored end (As shown in the first picture)
2 - Wrap the tail back underneath the two vertical segments (As shown in the second picture)
3 - Simply repeat the first two steps wrapping the tail around again (As shown in the third picture)
4 - This step in the fourth picture may look complicated but all you need to do is insert the tail up through the two loops that you have just made
5 - To finish off the knot you will want to slowly pull the tail end while gently pushing the bottom of the stopper knot upwards If you have successfully completed this knotit should look something like the fifth picture
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 6 Ready To Climb Now that you have mastered the Figure 8 knot you can securely harness yourself into a climbing rope Remember there are many other skills that go into setting up ananchor and belaying a climber This tutorial only covers the figure 8 knot For more information there are many great websites that demonstrate how to correctly set up asafe climbing system (Ive posted a few below) If you are a beginning climber I recommend that you read up on a few other climbing techniques Also you shouldprobably go to a climbing wall or gym where there are experienced climbers that can show you the ropes Hopefully this tutorial has been helpful Have fun and be safe
Some useful linkshttpwwwstephenprattnetAnchorsanchorshtmhttpwwwuoregonedu~oppclimbingtopicsanchorshtmlhttpwwwabc-of-rockclimbingcomhowtoclimbingtechniquesasp
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Related Instructables
How to Tie aFigure EightKnot byTactical_Pyro
Paracord KnotDisplay Bord byJamie bagn
Basic KnotsGuide byzorro3355
How to Climb aTree (withprussiks) bystasterisk
How to climb atree (using onlyrope) thefunsimple wayby louieaw
How to get arope into a tree(withoutclimbing it) byvitex
How to tievarious knots byadaviel
How to make arope swing byjdub0928
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Turks Head Knots on a Bottleby sklnxbones on July 6 2010
Intro Turks Head Knots on a BottleThis is the finished project A bottle decorated with three Turks Head Knots There are only three knots on this bottle The RED and the BLUE knots are each a 20 Bightby 3 Lead Turks Head Knots The WHITE knot is a 20 Bight by 19 Lead Turks Head Knot
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 1 Supplies
Cord Lots and Lots of cord I cant tell you how much each bottle is differentBottle Washed and Dried inside and out Make sure to remove all water spotsThreaded Needle Cord screws into the threads at the base of the needlePegs I use brass rivets used as a map to tie the Turks Head KnotsHole Punch Used to punch holes in the painters tape to hold the pegsPainters Tape To hold the pegs in place and to make your map for the Turks Head KnotsMarker To write on the painters tapeCloth Towel To remove finger prints and dirt from your bottleKrazy Glue or Super Glue This is used to secure the knots in place to the bottle
OPTIONAL BUT HIGHLY RECOMMENDEDI use the Turks Head Cookbook from KnotToolcom
Step 2 PreparationYou will need to find a bottle you like I used an empty instant tea bottle of course washed and dried (I like to put the bottle in the oven for a few minutes to dry the insidewithout water spots Take off the lid and do not put lid in the oven) Now measure the circumference of the bottle Take a cord and tightly wrap the cord around the bottleMark where the ends meet and use a ruler to measure the length of the cord For my instant tea bottle the circumference is 27cm I know from past knots that I have tiedthat I want my knot to have 20 Bights in the top and bottom (bands) knots I am going to use the Bights in the (bands) knots to tie the middle knot Now divide the numberof Bights (20) into the size of the circumference (27) to get the space between each Bight (135) With me so far
Now take two pieces of painters tape using a ruler measure out the length of the circumference and mark the length on the both pieces of tape Next you will mark thespace between each Bight on the tape
Step 3 Adding the PegsI like to use pegs when tying Turks Head Knots it just makes tying the knot easier
These are what I use for pegs
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 4 Adding Pegs to the TapeNow take a hole punch to cut holes in the tape where the lines meet You will place the pegs in the holes
Insert a peg in each hole and carefully stick the first piece of tape to the bottle
Step 5 Adding the 2nd row of pegsNow do the same thing with the second piece of tape The numbers on each piece of tape must line up
This picture shows you what you should have now This odd looking thing will be your map to tie the Turks Head Knot And this is the end of Step 1
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 6 Tying the first Turks Head KnotUsing the Turks Head Cookbook follow the numbers going over and under as indicated in the book I chose a 20 Bight by 3 Lead knot which will give me a nice bandaround the bottle Once the ends meet you have made one complete knot Tape the running end of your cord and start removing the pegs and the tape
Step 7 Remove the pegs and the tapeBe careful not to untie the knot as you remove the pegs and tape from the bottle Continue to remove all the pegs and remove the tape from the bottle At this point theknot will be very loose and will need to be tightened up
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 8 Remove the slack from the knotHere you can see just how much the knot expanded Starting with the standing end begin to pull the slack out of the knot going towards the running end of the cordDo not expect to pull all the slack out at once You may have to make 3 - 5 attempts at removing the slack out of the knot DO NOT remove all of the slack out of the knotIn order to make the bands we will have to triple the Turks Head Knot We will do this by following the knot three times The threaded needle will really come in handyhere
Step 9 Triple the KnotOnce you have made three passes of the Turks Head Knot use your needle to go under your knot about half the circumference and cut the cord The knot will be tightenough to hide the tail in placeTIP I carefully add a couple of drops of super glue UNDER the band to hold them in place and keep them from sliding around in the nextsteps A drop or two in 3 or 4 places around the band should be enough
Step 10 Add the second knotNow repeat this whole step for the second bandWhen tying the second band you must make sure the Bights line up to the first band This is crucial for the next stepWipe down the bottle to make sure all your finger prints and adhesive from the tape are all removed You want to make sure your bottle is clean at this point Any dirt orfinger prints left on the bottle will be almost impossible to remove From this point on we will use gloves when tying our last knot
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 11 Maping the Top KnotStick a piece of painters tape on top of your first band leaving the bottom of the knot exposedUse a marker to count the number of Bights in your knot Instead of using the pegs we are going to use the Bights to tie our next Turks Head Knot
Step 12 Mapping the Bottom KnotDo the same thing for the bottom band but you must make sure your numbers on top and bottom line up So 1 on top should be the same position as 1 on the bottom
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 13 Adding the last knotAgain using the Turks Head Cookbook and the threaded needle you are going to follow the instructions going over and under as indicated in the book Be sure to usegloves when ever you handle the bottle
Step 14 Thats ItFor this Turks Head Knot I am using a 20 Bight by 19 Lead knot
Because of the amount of cord you are working with your cord will get twisted and knotted You will have to un-twist the cord often Its a pain in the rear but it has to bedone And it has to be done alot
Continue to tie the knot until you finish the knot If you have the cord and the patience you can double or triple the knot When you are done use your needle to hide theends under your bands Cut the ends and your DONE
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Related Instructables
Monkeys FistFloatingKeychain byjokerlz
How To Make ATurks headKnot WithParacord byDoggie Stylish
Tying Trivetsout of Rope forHoliday Gifts bykylemarsh
Paracord KnotDisplay Bord byJamie bagn
How to Make ATurks Head(Photos) bymchs60chip
A pocket full ofknots byKiteman
Monkeys fistknot AND themonkey byjonathan111
TiteTie is theTruckers Knoton Steroids bytitetie
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Larks head noose -- an easy useful knot that tightens and loosensby Larry Breed on February 19 2009
Intro Larks head noose -- an easy useful knot that tightens and loosensI thought I knew all the basic knots but then I was taught this incredibly useful simple knot Its good for tying up the neck of a bag that you want to repeatedly open andsecurely close Its good for tying around a springy bundle that will need tightening and retightening And its easy to undo
Ive looked at knot literature but havent found a name for this so I named it The basic knot is well known its called a larks head Since all Ive done is to slip the twoends through the larks head to make a noose I call it that
WARNING Dont use this knot when human safety would depend on it Climbers and mountaineers have well-tested reliable knots for such situations
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Image Notes1 To tighten further step on this side of the larks head and pull the free ends
Step 1 Double the cord overThe larks head noose requires enough cord to go twice around your bundle plus a foot or two Find the center and double it over Sailors call this a bight
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 2 Form the larks headComing from below the bight hook your thumb and forefinger over the two sides Reach outward and downward and pinch your fingertips together underneath thedoubled cord
Youve made a larks head Move the crossing cord a little farther from your hand so theres a clear opening through the two half-loops
Step 3 Form the nooseSlip the two ends of the cord through the opening we were just talking about Pull the larks head tight so it grips the two cords Find something that needs constrictingand put the noose around it
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 4 Tightening retightening and lockingSlide the knot against the bundle If its not tight enough to keep from slipping tighten it by holding it in one hand and tugging on the cords one at a time with the otherhand Notice that you can slide the knot out again for instance to re-open the bag you just tied shut For some applications this may be as tight as you need it
A springy bundle probably still feels loose If so compress the bundle and get a new grip on the cords Rest your foot on the bundle on the cords nearest the larks headand pull to slide the larks head tighter
To make the knot more permanent you can lock it Make an overhand in the cord ends (Exactly like the first step in tying shoelaces) With your foot still on the bundlepull on the cords and move your hands apart until youre pulling in opposite directions You have just locked the larks head and you can trust it to stay that way()
But lets say that later on you want to loosen the locked knot Again put your foot on the bundle and cords nearest the larks head hold the two cord ends together andpull This makes a little slack between the overhand and the larks head so you can untie the overhand
In twine or small string the locking overhand knot may be difficult to undo Use a shoelace knot instead of an overhand and itll unlock easily
() If youre using slippery cord like polypropylene an overhand may not lock securely You may want to tie another overhand knot For added security wrap a shortlength of duct tape around the two cords close to the knot
Image Notes1 To tighten further step on this side of the larks head and pull the free ends
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Related Instructables
TRX fromParacordChallengeAccepted bythrake
A pocket full ofknots byKiteman
Lens CapLanyard by~teknoarsonist~ how to tie a
noose byawesume
AdjustableParacordGlassesLanyard byjdtwelve12
HangmansNoose PackClosure byPopEye42
Paraleash - ADog LeashFrom Paracordby The Ideanator
How to make arugged andhandy ParacordBelt by Jake22
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Image Notes1 End line2 Main line3 step 1
Image Notes1 Step 2
Image Notes1 passing thew the end line side of the loop2 step 3
Image Notes1 step 5
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Image Notes1 step 6
Step 3 The mid line half hitch The mid line half hitch is for when the length of line is to long for the job at hand amp you dont want to have to cut the line to size or you are using multiple anchor pointswith one length of line
Step 1 double up the line at the point in the length you wish to make the knot
Step 2 wrap the doubled up portion of line around your anchor point The doubled up length is now now the end line
Step 3 now tie just as you did for the regular half hitch repeat the knot to make a double half hitch for security
Image Notes1 A mid line double half hitch
Image Notes1 step 1
Image Notes1 The end line2 step 2
Image Notes1 Step 3
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 4 The slippery hitch The slippery hitch is a great knot for adjusting tension on the main line or for having an adjustable fixed loop To adjust the knot simply slide the knot up or down the mainline
Step 1 wrap your line around the anchor point or just double over the line to form a loop
Step 2 wrap the end line around the main line three times Wrapping in the direction of the anchor point or loop
Step 3 put together the two lines making up the loop amp wrap the two lines one time with the end line
Step 4 pass the end line thew the last loop formed covering the two lined of the loop
Step 5 pull the knot tite
step 6 to adjust the size of the loop or main line tension grab the knot amp slide it up or down the main line
Image Notes1 grab just the knot its self to adjust it2 step 5
Image Notes1 step 1
Image Notes1 step 2
Image Notes1 step 3
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Image Notes1 step 4
Image Notes1 grab just the knot its self to adjust it2 step 5
Image Notes1 same knot as in last pic Just slid up2 step 6
Step 5 The mid line truchers hitch The truckers hitch is a great way to double the pulling force on a line There are many ways to tie this knot the problem with most of them is that at some point you aregoing to have to pass the end line through a loop on the main line that is acting like a pulley to double your pulling force this is great if you are making the knot close tothe end of your line but if you are using a 300 length of line amp want to make the knot in the first ten feet having to pass 290 of line thew a loop is a pain But with a fewhalf hitches you will not have to pass the end line threw any loop on the main line
step 1 wrap your line around the anchor point then double over your end line laying the top of the loop over the main line
Step 2 double up your main line amp lay the loop over the loop made by the end line
step 3 in main line above the knot twist in a loop
step 4 put main line loop thew the loop made in step 3 amp pull this loop tight over your main line loop forming a half hitch Repeat step 3 amp 4 to make a doublehalf hitch
step 5 To use the knot just pull down on the end line to put tension on the main line
step 6 after you have the main line snug tie a mid line double half hitch around the two lines forming the loop at the end of the main line with the end line
step 7 Tie a double half hitch with the end line around the end loop of the mid line half hitch of step 6 using the same method as used in steps 3 amp 4
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Image Notes1 the end of step 6
Image Notes1 main line2 end line3 step 1
Image Notes1 main line loop2 end line loop
Image Notes1 step 3
Image Notes1 step 4
Image Notes1 step 4 at the end with a double half hitch on the main loop
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Image Notes1 pull here2 step 5
Image Notes1 the start of step 6
Image Notes1 the end of step 6
Image Notes1 step 72 now the rest of the line is free to do more work
Related Instructables
Paracord KnotDisplay Bord byJamie bagn
ChokelessAdjustableParacord DogLeash byPizzaman101
ParacordLadder wWooden Rungsby josestude
tie a paracordshackle grip byitri45
ParacordPrussik Belt byJavaNut13
TiteTie is theTruckers Knoton Steroids bytitetie
ID Lanyard(Photos) byeschmunk
Dog Toys forHeavy Chewersby J3443RY
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Figure 8 knot and double 8 knotby jonathan111 on November 28 2007
Intro Figure 8 knot and double 8 knotI will show you how to tie a figure 8 knot and a figure 8 follow through
Step 1 Stating the knotThis is a simple knot so just follow the pictures
Step 2 Finishing the knotCross the string under and then push it through the hole Pull tightly unless you are going to do the follow through and leave it somewhat loose
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 3 The follow through knotThe follow through knot should be tied around something brought back and followed through the path of the 8 knot Look at the pictures Basically follow through the 8knot backwards
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Related Instructables
Climb Safe WithA Figure 8Knot by mattste A pocket full of
knots byKiteman
How to Tie aFigure EightKnot byTactical_Pyro
Paracord KnotDisplay Bord byJamie bagn
Cross KnotParacordLanyard byStormdrane
How to Tie aFire-escapeKnot by leonardoismael
Truckers HitchTHE mostawesome knoton the planetby schneidp20
Paracord ZipperPuller byrepeet13
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Truckers Hitch THE most awesome knot on the planetby schneidp20 on October 12 2008
Authorschneidp20I like building stuff Trouble is there just isnt enough time to build everything Sigh
Intro Truckers Hitch THE most awesome knot on the planetYes I know that there are plenty of other cool knots out there many of which I literally couldnt live wo I rock climb However this knot is unlike any other Plus Ineeded a grabber for my Instructable -) (BTW this ISNT a climbing knot) And in truth it isnt a knot by itself but rather a system of common knots
Have you ever tried to tie something down for transporting but just couldnt get the lines tight andor during transport the lines would continually loosen Then this is theknot for you I learned this knot back in the 70s when specialty car racks and ratchet straps were rare or unheard of I initially used it to tie a canoe on a car rack bothattaching to the rack as well as the lines to the bow and stern of the canoe Even with all the new gizmos available today this knot still shines because all you need is arope and ropes dont hum in the wind like straps
The unique aspect of this knot is that it gives you a 2-1 mechanical advantage when tightening the rope Be careful though You can actually damage some thingsbecause of the mechanical advantage This knot holds fast and is easy to untie hallmark traits of any good knot
Below you see the finished knot system well break it apart in the steps that follow
Image Notes1 1st anchor point a bowline2 loop3 securing knots 2 half hitches4 securing loose end with a fishermans knot5 2nd anchor point (should be round)
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Image Notes1 X marks the spot
Step 1 Initial setupThe first step is to anchor one end of the rope and then loop the rope around a 2nd anchor point
For attaching to the 1st anchor point I chose bowline a close 2 on my list -) There are other instructables on that one so I wont bore you here
The 2nd anchor really should be round because it serves as a pulley in this block and tackle type knot Ive used it on sharp anchor points and it doesnt work as well
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 2 Creating a slip knotTie a slip knot somewhere between the two anchor points Correct placement of the slip knot takes some experience to judge it correctly Typically I place it too close tothe 2nd anchor point and end up with not enough room to work with If the knot ends up too far from 2nd anchor point you can extend the knot by enlarging the loop
Be sure you tie the slip knot as shown You may not be able to untie other knots
In this small example the slip knot is uncharacteristically close to the 1st anchor point
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 3 Tightening and securingThe loose end of the rope that went around the 2nd anchor point goes through the slip knot loop Pull the loose end to the desired tension and secure with two halfhitches
Note To allow better view of the knots the rope isnt really tightened in this example
Step 4 Securing loose endThe final knot is just to secure the loose end somehow I chose a fishermans knot to do this
To tie a fishermans knot the rope goes around twice and goes under the X created by the loops Pull the loose end to tighten Finally slide the knot to put tension onthe half hitches
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Image Notes1 X marks the spot
Step 5 FinishedThere you have it I guarantee that the first time you really use this knot (not just practice) you will be amazed at how well it works and youll wish you knew this knot along time ago You may even come over to my side and declare that is is THE most awesome knot on the planet -)
Enjoy and happy haulingDave
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Related Instructables
TiteTie is theTruckers Knoton Steroids bytitetie
Four knots tomake paracordinto a usefultool byerik_mccray
Modify yourbike rack tocarry a sunfishor other boat byewilhelm
SurfboardHammock byGermy
GiganticHalloweenSpider Web bynolte919
How To Tie ASpiders Hitch(video) by back-cast
Three-hitch mathair ornamentby michiexile TRX from
ParacordChallengeAccepted bythrake
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Carry any Bottle with a JUG KNOT Handleby hpstoutharrow on September 17 2009
Intro Carry any Bottle with a JUG KNOT HandleTie a JUG KNOT around a water bottle soda bottle or aluminum bottle to make a secure carrying strap
Re-purpose any container into a reusable water bottle by adding a convenient carrying strap This Instructable will demonstrate how to tie a JUG knot which like its namesuggests is meant to properly secure around the neck of a container
With some cord and the knowledge of this knot you will be able add a handle lanyard or carabiner loop to any of your favorite beverages to carry them on the go
It works perfectly for those disposable water bottles and who knows once you add some colorful cord to the plain old clear water bottle you just might beinclined to refill it and use it again(Check out pictures 4amp5 below)
In addition to plastic beverage bottles like pop water and sports drinks you can turn those rugged aluminum beer bottles into a backpacking canteen
Those of you familiar with my previous aluminum bottle InstructablesROLLED RIM METAL TUMBLERhttpwwwinstructablescomidAluminum-Bottle-Tumbler-Cup-Cook-PotALUMINUM BOTTLE LIGHTWEIGHT ALCOHOL STOVEhttpwwwinstructablescomidAluminum-Bottle-Alcohol-Stovewill recognize the water canteen shown below as a re-purposed aluminum beer bottle Here I have added a painted surface treatment to turn it into a proper lookingwater bottle More on that in steps 13 14 15
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 1 Getting StartedCord size is important Select a small medium weight cord like the one shown here It is a general purpose camp cord sold at most sporting goods stores (shoelacesmight also work)
Do not use a heavy cord or rope because the larger diameter will not tuck under the relatively small lip at the top of the bottleneck and the bottle will fall out
Also the smaller cord cinches tight on itself and will not loosen accidentally
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 2 Form a BightThe next steps show how to tie a JUG KNOT It is the basic step for adding a carrying strap It is also the anchor point for any additional fancy bottle trussing you maywant to add
JUG KNOT Step 1
Form a Bight in the center of a length of cord Bight is a knot term for a loop or bend in the rope In this case the main Bight in this knot is highlighted with a white mark Imakes it easier to follow its path in these steps
The running ends of the cord should be equal length
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 3 Pull the Bight downPULL the Bight DOWN forming two Loops
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 4 Cross the LoopsCROSS the right Loop OVER the left Loop
Step 5 Pass the Bight under the 1st loopTake the main Bight and pass it UNDER the left Loop
Step 6 Weave the BightWEAVE the Bight OVER the portion of the right Loop and UNDER the portion of the left Loop
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 7 Extend the BightExtend the Bight OVER the outer portion of the right Loop
Step 8 Flip the Right Loop behindAdditional colored identification points have been added to the loops to follow their travel in these next two steps
The right Loop Yellow marker is FLIPPED BEHIND the knot and ends up on the far left side of the knot
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 9 Flip the 2nd loop in frontRaise the green marker (located on what was formerly the left loop) and pull it down and to the right FLIPPING IT IN FRONT of the knot
Note the blue portion of the this loop will pass around the outside of the yellow portion of the first loop
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Image Notes1 Center of knot that will tighten around the bottles neck
Step 10 Remove SlackNote where the blue green amp yellow markers end up
Start to remove the slack in the loops by pulling the original main Bight (white marker top right) and the two free standing ends at the bottom
the bottle neck will pass through the very center of the knot
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Image Notes1 Center of knot that will tighten around the bottles neck
Step 11 Tighten the KnotAfter removing the slack insert the bottle neck and finish tightening
The knot should look like this before slipping it over the bottle
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 12 Secure on bottle neckThis is the finished knot shown on the neck of various containers
The loop end and the two free standing ends can be tied together to create a carrying handle (last picture below)
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 13 Aluminum Bottle Water Bottle
The next few steps show the features of an aluminum beer bottle re-purposed as a water bottle canteen It is one of many containers that can be reused as a camp waterbottle
The bottle was lightly sanded masked and then pained with a hammered finished paint to create an interesting surface texture
Image Notes1 Textured finish paint makes an interesting grip-able surface2 Masked with tape for painting3 Masked with tape for painting
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Image Notes1 Dowel used for holding the bottle during painting
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 14 Tethered Cork StopperUse a wine bottle man made Cork as a stopper for your aluminum water bottleNote Use a cork that was removed from the wine bottle without the corkscrew penetrating through the bottom end of the cork (A hole all the way through the cork willcause it to leak) Use the unpierced end of the cork inside the water bottle
Drill a hole through the sides of the Cork Thread the cord through the hole to the center of the cord Use the cork as the main Bight and tie the Jug knot as shown inthe beginning steps
Now the cork is tethered to the bottle and will not get lost or fall on the ground
A Carabiner clip passes through the other cord end to attache the water bottle to you belt or pack
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 15 Trussed for TransportThis is another hanging method for carrying your aluminum bottle water canteen A Jug knot is tied conventionally around the neck
The running ends of the knot however are pulled down towards the bottom of the bottle A Barrel Knot is tied about 34 the way down the side of the bottle A squareknot is tied on the bottom of the knot to keep the two running ends tight against the sides of the bottle
I like the look of the accent colored cord running down the sides of the bottle and the fact that the bottle hangs from the belt upside down It adds to its uniqueness
The last picture shows another truss variation
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 16 AdvancedBelow is a bottle with some additional trussing You can be creative as you want It all starts with a re-purposed container and the Jug Knot (and enough cord)
Related Instructables
AluminumBottle TumblerCup amp Cook Potfor an AlcoholStove byhpstoutharrow
Water BottleBelt Clip byuglymike Duct Tape
Water Bottle byrabidsquire2
AluminumBottle AlcoholStove byhpstoutharrow
DIYGlass WaterBottle byCulturespy
Solar WaterHeater forBackpackingUsing WaterBottles and aCar Shade bykopomeroy
Duct tape waterbottle holder(Photos) by pinkmarshmallow
How to make aCamelPack withan old plasticbottle bywillrandship
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Basic Knots Guideby zorro3355 on April 29 2008
Intro Basic Knots Guidehi
Step 1 Thumb knotThe most simple knotUsed as a stopper and prevent ropes from fraying
Step 2 Reef KnotUsed to tie two ropes of equal thickness togetherIt is pretty easy to tie and untie but under tentionit may be diffcult to untieIt is also not sutible for smoothropes(egnylon ropes)
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 3 Figure of eightused as a stopperprevent ropes from fraying and its more secure than tumb knot its is also used to tie Caribinas to ropes and is often used in rock climbing
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 4 Timber hitchused for pulling logs
Step 5 Clove hitchUsed to tie a rope onto a pole or logThe pole must be roundThe pole lust be thicker then the rope itself
(greatly used during pioneering)
Step 6 Sheet bandused to tie ropes of different thickness together(works on same thickness of ropes too)
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 7 Sheep shankTo shorten RopesTo prevent middle fraying
Step 8 Slip knotWhippingUsed as a grip for pulling things(when tied on a stick or small pole)(marlin spike hitch)
Related Instructables
Rope Rings byhpstoutharrow
How to Tie aFigure EightKnot byTactical_Pyro
Whippin (WestCountry Style)by tim_n
SurvivalBracelet(Updated) bytevers94
HangmansNoose PackClosure byPopEye42
Turkey on aTripod byhpstoutharrow
SurvivalBracelet II bytevers94 Zigzag Spooling
Paracord (video)by Stormdrane
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
How to Tie a Fire-escape Knotby leonardo ismael on October 16 2007
Intro How to Tie a Fire-escape KnotThis knot is used by firemen in case of fires for example imagine a scene where the ladder on the firetruck messes up but people need to get down a five story buildingor more All they have is a long piece of rope they can safely get down with a secure knot like the fire-escape knot So why not learn it its easy to do and hard to untieif you tie it tightly
This is from the American Boys Handbook
Step 1 Get Your RopeFirst grab a piece of rope and bend it like this to make a loop in it Follow every step to the smallest detail
Step 2 Twist the RopeNow make a twist like this and hold it together
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 3 Pull Through the TwistPull the loop through the twist you just made from underneath
Step 4 Go Over the Split EndNow pull the tail through the loop
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 5 FinallyAnd finally just pull it through as pictured below
Congratulations you just learned the fire-escape knot
Step 6 Same Name Not KnotThis is another knot called the fire-escape knot this shouldnt be your result
Related Instructables
House FireEscape Plan(video) byWhatHappensNowAdvice
ParacordLadder wWooden Rungsby josestude
Bed SheetEscape Rope byjessehensel
rope ladder(glow-in-the-dark version) bymikeasaurus
HeadlockEscape 2(video) byjohnnyrockstah
QuickFirestarter byMattandJora
Trail sauna byjakee117
How to Kill FireAnts andCommitGenocide byKentsOkay
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Climb Safe With A Figure 8 Knotby mattste on February 23 2010
Intro Climb Safe With A Figure 8 Knot There are many things that a beginning climber needs to know including several important knots Perhaps the most essential knot is the Figure 8 Follow Through Thistutorial will demonstrate how to correctly harness yourself to a rope using a Figure 8 Follow Through knot This knot is used primarily by rock climbers to provide a life-line Since this knot is used as a life-line it is very important to be able to tie it correctly (Your life could depend upon it)
Dont worry with this tutorial and about 5 minutes of practice you can have this knot mastered
Things you will need
- Climbing Harness- Climbing Rope
If you are wanting to go climbing and dont already have these items they can be purchased for about $25 each at most outdoor sporting goods stores If you are merelylooking to learn the knot a belt loop and a rope (about five feet long) will do
Image Notes1 Climbing Harness2 Climbing Rope
Step 1 Dealing With The RopeThroughout this tutorial I will be discussing different parts of the rope To make these instructions as clear as possible I will define a few terms that I will use throughoutthe tutorial The Anchor End of the rope will generally be at the top of the images This is the end that would be anchored to the wall or rock and does not move Wewill not be doing much with the anchored end The Tail End of the rope is the opposite end that we will be dealing with I will call this the tail for short
Now that we have some terms to work with lets get started
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 2 Tying The First Figure 8This knot has several parts to it The first part of the knot is just tying a basic figure 8 To tie the first figure 8 there are four simple steps
1 - Using the tail make a loop over the rope (as shown in the first picture) keeping in mind that there should be about 3 ft of slack on the tail end
2 - Wrap the tail back this time go under the anchored end (As shown in the second picture)
3 - Bring the tail down through the first loop (As shown in the third picture)
4 - Finally pull the two ends to make the knot a little bit tighter and easier to deal with (Shown in the fourth picture)
After these four steps you should end up with a knot that resembles a figure 8
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 3 Looping Into The Harness In order to secure the rope to the harness simply thread the tail end of the rope through the front loop in the harness as shown in the picture below This step isobviously very important
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 4 Following Back Through The Figure 8After looping the rope through the harness you have to thread the tail end of the rope back through the knot following the first figure 8 I have divided this process intofive smaller steps in order to make it more clear
1 - Coming form underneath the knot bring the tail up through the near loop and to the left behind the anchored end of the rope (Shown in the first picture)
2 - Wrap the tail around the anchored end back to the right and down through the adjacent loop (Shown in the second picture)
3 - You simply need to bring the tail back over the top of the knot to the left (Shown in the third picture)
4 - Bring the tail end up through the far loop following the anchored end (Shown in the fourth picture)
5 - Finally pull the knot tight (Shown in the fifth picture)
As you can see the first four pictures are simply tracing the knot back through with the tail end
For the last part while you pull the knot tight you may want to make small adjustments and rearrange how it all fits together If the knot does not lay perfectly smoothand tight its NOT a big deal
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 5 Finishing The Knot After completing the Figure 8 knot you will want to somehow secure the tail end of the rope out of the way There are a couple different ways to do this the way that Iwill demonstrate is using whats called a Stopper Knot This secondary knot is similar to a Fishermans knot and is pretty simple I have once again divided thisprocess into several smaller steps
1 - Start by wrapping the tail end around the anchored end (As shown in the first picture)
2 - Wrap the tail back underneath the two vertical segments (As shown in the second picture)
3 - Simply repeat the first two steps wrapping the tail around again (As shown in the third picture)
4 - This step in the fourth picture may look complicated but all you need to do is insert the tail up through the two loops that you have just made
5 - To finish off the knot you will want to slowly pull the tail end while gently pushing the bottom of the stopper knot upwards If you have successfully completed this knotit should look something like the fifth picture
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 6 Ready To Climb Now that you have mastered the Figure 8 knot you can securely harness yourself into a climbing rope Remember there are many other skills that go into setting up ananchor and belaying a climber This tutorial only covers the figure 8 knot For more information there are many great websites that demonstrate how to correctly set up asafe climbing system (Ive posted a few below) If you are a beginning climber I recommend that you read up on a few other climbing techniques Also you shouldprobably go to a climbing wall or gym where there are experienced climbers that can show you the ropes Hopefully this tutorial has been helpful Have fun and be safe
Some useful linkshttpwwwstephenprattnetAnchorsanchorshtmhttpwwwuoregonedu~oppclimbingtopicsanchorshtmlhttpwwwabc-of-rockclimbingcomhowtoclimbingtechniquesasp
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Related Instructables
How to Tie aFigure EightKnot byTactical_Pyro
Paracord KnotDisplay Bord byJamie bagn
Basic KnotsGuide byzorro3355
How to Climb aTree (withprussiks) bystasterisk
How to climb atree (using onlyrope) thefunsimple wayby louieaw
How to get arope into a tree(withoutclimbing it) byvitex
How to tievarious knots byadaviel
How to make arope swing byjdub0928
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Turks Head Knots on a Bottleby sklnxbones on July 6 2010
Intro Turks Head Knots on a BottleThis is the finished project A bottle decorated with three Turks Head Knots There are only three knots on this bottle The RED and the BLUE knots are each a 20 Bightby 3 Lead Turks Head Knots The WHITE knot is a 20 Bight by 19 Lead Turks Head Knot
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 1 Supplies
Cord Lots and Lots of cord I cant tell you how much each bottle is differentBottle Washed and Dried inside and out Make sure to remove all water spotsThreaded Needle Cord screws into the threads at the base of the needlePegs I use brass rivets used as a map to tie the Turks Head KnotsHole Punch Used to punch holes in the painters tape to hold the pegsPainters Tape To hold the pegs in place and to make your map for the Turks Head KnotsMarker To write on the painters tapeCloth Towel To remove finger prints and dirt from your bottleKrazy Glue or Super Glue This is used to secure the knots in place to the bottle
OPTIONAL BUT HIGHLY RECOMMENDEDI use the Turks Head Cookbook from KnotToolcom
Step 2 PreparationYou will need to find a bottle you like I used an empty instant tea bottle of course washed and dried (I like to put the bottle in the oven for a few minutes to dry the insidewithout water spots Take off the lid and do not put lid in the oven) Now measure the circumference of the bottle Take a cord and tightly wrap the cord around the bottleMark where the ends meet and use a ruler to measure the length of the cord For my instant tea bottle the circumference is 27cm I know from past knots that I have tiedthat I want my knot to have 20 Bights in the top and bottom (bands) knots I am going to use the Bights in the (bands) knots to tie the middle knot Now divide the numberof Bights (20) into the size of the circumference (27) to get the space between each Bight (135) With me so far
Now take two pieces of painters tape using a ruler measure out the length of the circumference and mark the length on the both pieces of tape Next you will mark thespace between each Bight on the tape
Step 3 Adding the PegsI like to use pegs when tying Turks Head Knots it just makes tying the knot easier
These are what I use for pegs
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 4 Adding Pegs to the TapeNow take a hole punch to cut holes in the tape where the lines meet You will place the pegs in the holes
Insert a peg in each hole and carefully stick the first piece of tape to the bottle
Step 5 Adding the 2nd row of pegsNow do the same thing with the second piece of tape The numbers on each piece of tape must line up
This picture shows you what you should have now This odd looking thing will be your map to tie the Turks Head Knot And this is the end of Step 1
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 6 Tying the first Turks Head KnotUsing the Turks Head Cookbook follow the numbers going over and under as indicated in the book I chose a 20 Bight by 3 Lead knot which will give me a nice bandaround the bottle Once the ends meet you have made one complete knot Tape the running end of your cord and start removing the pegs and the tape
Step 7 Remove the pegs and the tapeBe careful not to untie the knot as you remove the pegs and tape from the bottle Continue to remove all the pegs and remove the tape from the bottle At this point theknot will be very loose and will need to be tightened up
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 8 Remove the slack from the knotHere you can see just how much the knot expanded Starting with the standing end begin to pull the slack out of the knot going towards the running end of the cordDo not expect to pull all the slack out at once You may have to make 3 - 5 attempts at removing the slack out of the knot DO NOT remove all of the slack out of the knotIn order to make the bands we will have to triple the Turks Head Knot We will do this by following the knot three times The threaded needle will really come in handyhere
Step 9 Triple the KnotOnce you have made three passes of the Turks Head Knot use your needle to go under your knot about half the circumference and cut the cord The knot will be tightenough to hide the tail in placeTIP I carefully add a couple of drops of super glue UNDER the band to hold them in place and keep them from sliding around in the nextsteps A drop or two in 3 or 4 places around the band should be enough
Step 10 Add the second knotNow repeat this whole step for the second bandWhen tying the second band you must make sure the Bights line up to the first band This is crucial for the next stepWipe down the bottle to make sure all your finger prints and adhesive from the tape are all removed You want to make sure your bottle is clean at this point Any dirt orfinger prints left on the bottle will be almost impossible to remove From this point on we will use gloves when tying our last knot
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 11 Maping the Top KnotStick a piece of painters tape on top of your first band leaving the bottom of the knot exposedUse a marker to count the number of Bights in your knot Instead of using the pegs we are going to use the Bights to tie our next Turks Head Knot
Step 12 Mapping the Bottom KnotDo the same thing for the bottom band but you must make sure your numbers on top and bottom line up So 1 on top should be the same position as 1 on the bottom
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 13 Adding the last knotAgain using the Turks Head Cookbook and the threaded needle you are going to follow the instructions going over and under as indicated in the book Be sure to usegloves when ever you handle the bottle
Step 14 Thats ItFor this Turks Head Knot I am using a 20 Bight by 19 Lead knot
Because of the amount of cord you are working with your cord will get twisted and knotted You will have to un-twist the cord often Its a pain in the rear but it has to bedone And it has to be done alot
Continue to tie the knot until you finish the knot If you have the cord and the patience you can double or triple the knot When you are done use your needle to hide theends under your bands Cut the ends and your DONE
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Related Instructables
Monkeys FistFloatingKeychain byjokerlz
How To Make ATurks headKnot WithParacord byDoggie Stylish
Tying Trivetsout of Rope forHoliday Gifts bykylemarsh
Paracord KnotDisplay Bord byJamie bagn
How to Make ATurks Head(Photos) bymchs60chip
A pocket full ofknots byKiteman
Monkeys fistknot AND themonkey byjonathan111
TiteTie is theTruckers Knoton Steroids bytitetie
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Larks head noose -- an easy useful knot that tightens and loosensby Larry Breed on February 19 2009
Intro Larks head noose -- an easy useful knot that tightens and loosensI thought I knew all the basic knots but then I was taught this incredibly useful simple knot Its good for tying up the neck of a bag that you want to repeatedly open andsecurely close Its good for tying around a springy bundle that will need tightening and retightening And its easy to undo
Ive looked at knot literature but havent found a name for this so I named it The basic knot is well known its called a larks head Since all Ive done is to slip the twoends through the larks head to make a noose I call it that
WARNING Dont use this knot when human safety would depend on it Climbers and mountaineers have well-tested reliable knots for such situations
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Image Notes1 To tighten further step on this side of the larks head and pull the free ends
Step 1 Double the cord overThe larks head noose requires enough cord to go twice around your bundle plus a foot or two Find the center and double it over Sailors call this a bight
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 2 Form the larks headComing from below the bight hook your thumb and forefinger over the two sides Reach outward and downward and pinch your fingertips together underneath thedoubled cord
Youve made a larks head Move the crossing cord a little farther from your hand so theres a clear opening through the two half-loops
Step 3 Form the nooseSlip the two ends of the cord through the opening we were just talking about Pull the larks head tight so it grips the two cords Find something that needs constrictingand put the noose around it
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 4 Tightening retightening and lockingSlide the knot against the bundle If its not tight enough to keep from slipping tighten it by holding it in one hand and tugging on the cords one at a time with the otherhand Notice that you can slide the knot out again for instance to re-open the bag you just tied shut For some applications this may be as tight as you need it
A springy bundle probably still feels loose If so compress the bundle and get a new grip on the cords Rest your foot on the bundle on the cords nearest the larks headand pull to slide the larks head tighter
To make the knot more permanent you can lock it Make an overhand in the cord ends (Exactly like the first step in tying shoelaces) With your foot still on the bundlepull on the cords and move your hands apart until youre pulling in opposite directions You have just locked the larks head and you can trust it to stay that way()
But lets say that later on you want to loosen the locked knot Again put your foot on the bundle and cords nearest the larks head hold the two cord ends together andpull This makes a little slack between the overhand and the larks head so you can untie the overhand
In twine or small string the locking overhand knot may be difficult to undo Use a shoelace knot instead of an overhand and itll unlock easily
() If youre using slippery cord like polypropylene an overhand may not lock securely You may want to tie another overhand knot For added security wrap a shortlength of duct tape around the two cords close to the knot
Image Notes1 To tighten further step on this side of the larks head and pull the free ends
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Related Instructables
TRX fromParacordChallengeAccepted bythrake
A pocket full ofknots byKiteman
Lens CapLanyard by~teknoarsonist~ how to tie a
noose byawesume
AdjustableParacordGlassesLanyard byjdtwelve12
HangmansNoose PackClosure byPopEye42
Paraleash - ADog LeashFrom Paracordby The Ideanator
How to make arugged andhandy ParacordBelt by Jake22
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Image Notes1 step 6
Step 3 The mid line half hitch The mid line half hitch is for when the length of line is to long for the job at hand amp you dont want to have to cut the line to size or you are using multiple anchor pointswith one length of line
Step 1 double up the line at the point in the length you wish to make the knot
Step 2 wrap the doubled up portion of line around your anchor point The doubled up length is now now the end line
Step 3 now tie just as you did for the regular half hitch repeat the knot to make a double half hitch for security
Image Notes1 A mid line double half hitch
Image Notes1 step 1
Image Notes1 The end line2 step 2
Image Notes1 Step 3
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 4 The slippery hitch The slippery hitch is a great knot for adjusting tension on the main line or for having an adjustable fixed loop To adjust the knot simply slide the knot up or down the mainline
Step 1 wrap your line around the anchor point or just double over the line to form a loop
Step 2 wrap the end line around the main line three times Wrapping in the direction of the anchor point or loop
Step 3 put together the two lines making up the loop amp wrap the two lines one time with the end line
Step 4 pass the end line thew the last loop formed covering the two lined of the loop
Step 5 pull the knot tite
step 6 to adjust the size of the loop or main line tension grab the knot amp slide it up or down the main line
Image Notes1 grab just the knot its self to adjust it2 step 5
Image Notes1 step 1
Image Notes1 step 2
Image Notes1 step 3
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Image Notes1 step 4
Image Notes1 grab just the knot its self to adjust it2 step 5
Image Notes1 same knot as in last pic Just slid up2 step 6
Step 5 The mid line truchers hitch The truckers hitch is a great way to double the pulling force on a line There are many ways to tie this knot the problem with most of them is that at some point you aregoing to have to pass the end line through a loop on the main line that is acting like a pulley to double your pulling force this is great if you are making the knot close tothe end of your line but if you are using a 300 length of line amp want to make the knot in the first ten feet having to pass 290 of line thew a loop is a pain But with a fewhalf hitches you will not have to pass the end line threw any loop on the main line
step 1 wrap your line around the anchor point then double over your end line laying the top of the loop over the main line
Step 2 double up your main line amp lay the loop over the loop made by the end line
step 3 in main line above the knot twist in a loop
step 4 put main line loop thew the loop made in step 3 amp pull this loop tight over your main line loop forming a half hitch Repeat step 3 amp 4 to make a doublehalf hitch
step 5 To use the knot just pull down on the end line to put tension on the main line
step 6 after you have the main line snug tie a mid line double half hitch around the two lines forming the loop at the end of the main line with the end line
step 7 Tie a double half hitch with the end line around the end loop of the mid line half hitch of step 6 using the same method as used in steps 3 amp 4
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Image Notes1 the end of step 6
Image Notes1 main line2 end line3 step 1
Image Notes1 main line loop2 end line loop
Image Notes1 step 3
Image Notes1 step 4
Image Notes1 step 4 at the end with a double half hitch on the main loop
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Image Notes1 pull here2 step 5
Image Notes1 the start of step 6
Image Notes1 the end of step 6
Image Notes1 step 72 now the rest of the line is free to do more work
Related Instructables
Paracord KnotDisplay Bord byJamie bagn
ChokelessAdjustableParacord DogLeash byPizzaman101
ParacordLadder wWooden Rungsby josestude
tie a paracordshackle grip byitri45
ParacordPrussik Belt byJavaNut13
TiteTie is theTruckers Knoton Steroids bytitetie
ID Lanyard(Photos) byeschmunk
Dog Toys forHeavy Chewersby J3443RY
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Figure 8 knot and double 8 knotby jonathan111 on November 28 2007
Intro Figure 8 knot and double 8 knotI will show you how to tie a figure 8 knot and a figure 8 follow through
Step 1 Stating the knotThis is a simple knot so just follow the pictures
Step 2 Finishing the knotCross the string under and then push it through the hole Pull tightly unless you are going to do the follow through and leave it somewhat loose
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 3 The follow through knotThe follow through knot should be tied around something brought back and followed through the path of the 8 knot Look at the pictures Basically follow through the 8knot backwards
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Related Instructables
Climb Safe WithA Figure 8Knot by mattste A pocket full of
knots byKiteman
How to Tie aFigure EightKnot byTactical_Pyro
Paracord KnotDisplay Bord byJamie bagn
Cross KnotParacordLanyard byStormdrane
How to Tie aFire-escapeKnot by leonardoismael
Truckers HitchTHE mostawesome knoton the planetby schneidp20
Paracord ZipperPuller byrepeet13
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Truckers Hitch THE most awesome knot on the planetby schneidp20 on October 12 2008
Authorschneidp20I like building stuff Trouble is there just isnt enough time to build everything Sigh
Intro Truckers Hitch THE most awesome knot on the planetYes I know that there are plenty of other cool knots out there many of which I literally couldnt live wo I rock climb However this knot is unlike any other Plus Ineeded a grabber for my Instructable -) (BTW this ISNT a climbing knot) And in truth it isnt a knot by itself but rather a system of common knots
Have you ever tried to tie something down for transporting but just couldnt get the lines tight andor during transport the lines would continually loosen Then this is theknot for you I learned this knot back in the 70s when specialty car racks and ratchet straps were rare or unheard of I initially used it to tie a canoe on a car rack bothattaching to the rack as well as the lines to the bow and stern of the canoe Even with all the new gizmos available today this knot still shines because all you need is arope and ropes dont hum in the wind like straps
The unique aspect of this knot is that it gives you a 2-1 mechanical advantage when tightening the rope Be careful though You can actually damage some thingsbecause of the mechanical advantage This knot holds fast and is easy to untie hallmark traits of any good knot
Below you see the finished knot system well break it apart in the steps that follow
Image Notes1 1st anchor point a bowline2 loop3 securing knots 2 half hitches4 securing loose end with a fishermans knot5 2nd anchor point (should be round)
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Image Notes1 X marks the spot
Step 1 Initial setupThe first step is to anchor one end of the rope and then loop the rope around a 2nd anchor point
For attaching to the 1st anchor point I chose bowline a close 2 on my list -) There are other instructables on that one so I wont bore you here
The 2nd anchor really should be round because it serves as a pulley in this block and tackle type knot Ive used it on sharp anchor points and it doesnt work as well
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 2 Creating a slip knotTie a slip knot somewhere between the two anchor points Correct placement of the slip knot takes some experience to judge it correctly Typically I place it too close tothe 2nd anchor point and end up with not enough room to work with If the knot ends up too far from 2nd anchor point you can extend the knot by enlarging the loop
Be sure you tie the slip knot as shown You may not be able to untie other knots
In this small example the slip knot is uncharacteristically close to the 1st anchor point
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 3 Tightening and securingThe loose end of the rope that went around the 2nd anchor point goes through the slip knot loop Pull the loose end to the desired tension and secure with two halfhitches
Note To allow better view of the knots the rope isnt really tightened in this example
Step 4 Securing loose endThe final knot is just to secure the loose end somehow I chose a fishermans knot to do this
To tie a fishermans knot the rope goes around twice and goes under the X created by the loops Pull the loose end to tighten Finally slide the knot to put tension onthe half hitches
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Image Notes1 X marks the spot
Step 5 FinishedThere you have it I guarantee that the first time you really use this knot (not just practice) you will be amazed at how well it works and youll wish you knew this knot along time ago You may even come over to my side and declare that is is THE most awesome knot on the planet -)
Enjoy and happy haulingDave
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Related Instructables
TiteTie is theTruckers Knoton Steroids bytitetie
Four knots tomake paracordinto a usefultool byerik_mccray
Modify yourbike rack tocarry a sunfishor other boat byewilhelm
SurfboardHammock byGermy
GiganticHalloweenSpider Web bynolte919
How To Tie ASpiders Hitch(video) by back-cast
Three-hitch mathair ornamentby michiexile TRX from
ParacordChallengeAccepted bythrake
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Carry any Bottle with a JUG KNOT Handleby hpstoutharrow on September 17 2009
Intro Carry any Bottle with a JUG KNOT HandleTie a JUG KNOT around a water bottle soda bottle or aluminum bottle to make a secure carrying strap
Re-purpose any container into a reusable water bottle by adding a convenient carrying strap This Instructable will demonstrate how to tie a JUG knot which like its namesuggests is meant to properly secure around the neck of a container
With some cord and the knowledge of this knot you will be able add a handle lanyard or carabiner loop to any of your favorite beverages to carry them on the go
It works perfectly for those disposable water bottles and who knows once you add some colorful cord to the plain old clear water bottle you just might beinclined to refill it and use it again(Check out pictures 4amp5 below)
In addition to plastic beverage bottles like pop water and sports drinks you can turn those rugged aluminum beer bottles into a backpacking canteen
Those of you familiar with my previous aluminum bottle InstructablesROLLED RIM METAL TUMBLERhttpwwwinstructablescomidAluminum-Bottle-Tumbler-Cup-Cook-PotALUMINUM BOTTLE LIGHTWEIGHT ALCOHOL STOVEhttpwwwinstructablescomidAluminum-Bottle-Alcohol-Stovewill recognize the water canteen shown below as a re-purposed aluminum beer bottle Here I have added a painted surface treatment to turn it into a proper lookingwater bottle More on that in steps 13 14 15
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 1 Getting StartedCord size is important Select a small medium weight cord like the one shown here It is a general purpose camp cord sold at most sporting goods stores (shoelacesmight also work)
Do not use a heavy cord or rope because the larger diameter will not tuck under the relatively small lip at the top of the bottleneck and the bottle will fall out
Also the smaller cord cinches tight on itself and will not loosen accidentally
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 2 Form a BightThe next steps show how to tie a JUG KNOT It is the basic step for adding a carrying strap It is also the anchor point for any additional fancy bottle trussing you maywant to add
JUG KNOT Step 1
Form a Bight in the center of a length of cord Bight is a knot term for a loop or bend in the rope In this case the main Bight in this knot is highlighted with a white mark Imakes it easier to follow its path in these steps
The running ends of the cord should be equal length
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 3 Pull the Bight downPULL the Bight DOWN forming two Loops
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 4 Cross the LoopsCROSS the right Loop OVER the left Loop
Step 5 Pass the Bight under the 1st loopTake the main Bight and pass it UNDER the left Loop
Step 6 Weave the BightWEAVE the Bight OVER the portion of the right Loop and UNDER the portion of the left Loop
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 7 Extend the BightExtend the Bight OVER the outer portion of the right Loop
Step 8 Flip the Right Loop behindAdditional colored identification points have been added to the loops to follow their travel in these next two steps
The right Loop Yellow marker is FLIPPED BEHIND the knot and ends up on the far left side of the knot
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 9 Flip the 2nd loop in frontRaise the green marker (located on what was formerly the left loop) and pull it down and to the right FLIPPING IT IN FRONT of the knot
Note the blue portion of the this loop will pass around the outside of the yellow portion of the first loop
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Image Notes1 Center of knot that will tighten around the bottles neck
Step 10 Remove SlackNote where the blue green amp yellow markers end up
Start to remove the slack in the loops by pulling the original main Bight (white marker top right) and the two free standing ends at the bottom
the bottle neck will pass through the very center of the knot
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Image Notes1 Center of knot that will tighten around the bottles neck
Step 11 Tighten the KnotAfter removing the slack insert the bottle neck and finish tightening
The knot should look like this before slipping it over the bottle
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 12 Secure on bottle neckThis is the finished knot shown on the neck of various containers
The loop end and the two free standing ends can be tied together to create a carrying handle (last picture below)
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 13 Aluminum Bottle Water Bottle
The next few steps show the features of an aluminum beer bottle re-purposed as a water bottle canteen It is one of many containers that can be reused as a camp waterbottle
The bottle was lightly sanded masked and then pained with a hammered finished paint to create an interesting surface texture
Image Notes1 Textured finish paint makes an interesting grip-able surface2 Masked with tape for painting3 Masked with tape for painting
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Image Notes1 Dowel used for holding the bottle during painting
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 14 Tethered Cork StopperUse a wine bottle man made Cork as a stopper for your aluminum water bottleNote Use a cork that was removed from the wine bottle without the corkscrew penetrating through the bottom end of the cork (A hole all the way through the cork willcause it to leak) Use the unpierced end of the cork inside the water bottle
Drill a hole through the sides of the Cork Thread the cord through the hole to the center of the cord Use the cork as the main Bight and tie the Jug knot as shown inthe beginning steps
Now the cork is tethered to the bottle and will not get lost or fall on the ground
A Carabiner clip passes through the other cord end to attache the water bottle to you belt or pack
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 15 Trussed for TransportThis is another hanging method for carrying your aluminum bottle water canteen A Jug knot is tied conventionally around the neck
The running ends of the knot however are pulled down towards the bottom of the bottle A Barrel Knot is tied about 34 the way down the side of the bottle A squareknot is tied on the bottom of the knot to keep the two running ends tight against the sides of the bottle
I like the look of the accent colored cord running down the sides of the bottle and the fact that the bottle hangs from the belt upside down It adds to its uniqueness
The last picture shows another truss variation
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 16 AdvancedBelow is a bottle with some additional trussing You can be creative as you want It all starts with a re-purposed container and the Jug Knot (and enough cord)
Related Instructables
AluminumBottle TumblerCup amp Cook Potfor an AlcoholStove byhpstoutharrow
Water BottleBelt Clip byuglymike Duct Tape
Water Bottle byrabidsquire2
AluminumBottle AlcoholStove byhpstoutharrow
DIYGlass WaterBottle byCulturespy
Solar WaterHeater forBackpackingUsing WaterBottles and aCar Shade bykopomeroy
Duct tape waterbottle holder(Photos) by pinkmarshmallow
How to make aCamelPack withan old plasticbottle bywillrandship
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Basic Knots Guideby zorro3355 on April 29 2008
Intro Basic Knots Guidehi
Step 1 Thumb knotThe most simple knotUsed as a stopper and prevent ropes from fraying
Step 2 Reef KnotUsed to tie two ropes of equal thickness togetherIt is pretty easy to tie and untie but under tentionit may be diffcult to untieIt is also not sutible for smoothropes(egnylon ropes)
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 3 Figure of eightused as a stopperprevent ropes from fraying and its more secure than tumb knot its is also used to tie Caribinas to ropes and is often used in rock climbing
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 4 Timber hitchused for pulling logs
Step 5 Clove hitchUsed to tie a rope onto a pole or logThe pole must be roundThe pole lust be thicker then the rope itself
(greatly used during pioneering)
Step 6 Sheet bandused to tie ropes of different thickness together(works on same thickness of ropes too)
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 7 Sheep shankTo shorten RopesTo prevent middle fraying
Step 8 Slip knotWhippingUsed as a grip for pulling things(when tied on a stick or small pole)(marlin spike hitch)
Related Instructables
Rope Rings byhpstoutharrow
How to Tie aFigure EightKnot byTactical_Pyro
Whippin (WestCountry Style)by tim_n
SurvivalBracelet(Updated) bytevers94
HangmansNoose PackClosure byPopEye42
Turkey on aTripod byhpstoutharrow
SurvivalBracelet II bytevers94 Zigzag Spooling
Paracord (video)by Stormdrane
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
How to Tie a Fire-escape Knotby leonardo ismael on October 16 2007
Intro How to Tie a Fire-escape KnotThis knot is used by firemen in case of fires for example imagine a scene where the ladder on the firetruck messes up but people need to get down a five story buildingor more All they have is a long piece of rope they can safely get down with a secure knot like the fire-escape knot So why not learn it its easy to do and hard to untieif you tie it tightly
This is from the American Boys Handbook
Step 1 Get Your RopeFirst grab a piece of rope and bend it like this to make a loop in it Follow every step to the smallest detail
Step 2 Twist the RopeNow make a twist like this and hold it together
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 3 Pull Through the TwistPull the loop through the twist you just made from underneath
Step 4 Go Over the Split EndNow pull the tail through the loop
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 5 FinallyAnd finally just pull it through as pictured below
Congratulations you just learned the fire-escape knot
Step 6 Same Name Not KnotThis is another knot called the fire-escape knot this shouldnt be your result
Related Instructables
House FireEscape Plan(video) byWhatHappensNowAdvice
ParacordLadder wWooden Rungsby josestude
Bed SheetEscape Rope byjessehensel
rope ladder(glow-in-the-dark version) bymikeasaurus
HeadlockEscape 2(video) byjohnnyrockstah
QuickFirestarter byMattandJora
Trail sauna byjakee117
How to Kill FireAnts andCommitGenocide byKentsOkay
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Climb Safe With A Figure 8 Knotby mattste on February 23 2010
Intro Climb Safe With A Figure 8 Knot There are many things that a beginning climber needs to know including several important knots Perhaps the most essential knot is the Figure 8 Follow Through Thistutorial will demonstrate how to correctly harness yourself to a rope using a Figure 8 Follow Through knot This knot is used primarily by rock climbers to provide a life-line Since this knot is used as a life-line it is very important to be able to tie it correctly (Your life could depend upon it)
Dont worry with this tutorial and about 5 minutes of practice you can have this knot mastered
Things you will need
- Climbing Harness- Climbing Rope
If you are wanting to go climbing and dont already have these items they can be purchased for about $25 each at most outdoor sporting goods stores If you are merelylooking to learn the knot a belt loop and a rope (about five feet long) will do
Image Notes1 Climbing Harness2 Climbing Rope
Step 1 Dealing With The RopeThroughout this tutorial I will be discussing different parts of the rope To make these instructions as clear as possible I will define a few terms that I will use throughoutthe tutorial The Anchor End of the rope will generally be at the top of the images This is the end that would be anchored to the wall or rock and does not move Wewill not be doing much with the anchored end The Tail End of the rope is the opposite end that we will be dealing with I will call this the tail for short
Now that we have some terms to work with lets get started
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 2 Tying The First Figure 8This knot has several parts to it The first part of the knot is just tying a basic figure 8 To tie the first figure 8 there are four simple steps
1 - Using the tail make a loop over the rope (as shown in the first picture) keeping in mind that there should be about 3 ft of slack on the tail end
2 - Wrap the tail back this time go under the anchored end (As shown in the second picture)
3 - Bring the tail down through the first loop (As shown in the third picture)
4 - Finally pull the two ends to make the knot a little bit tighter and easier to deal with (Shown in the fourth picture)
After these four steps you should end up with a knot that resembles a figure 8
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 3 Looping Into The Harness In order to secure the rope to the harness simply thread the tail end of the rope through the front loop in the harness as shown in the picture below This step isobviously very important
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 4 Following Back Through The Figure 8After looping the rope through the harness you have to thread the tail end of the rope back through the knot following the first figure 8 I have divided this process intofive smaller steps in order to make it more clear
1 - Coming form underneath the knot bring the tail up through the near loop and to the left behind the anchored end of the rope (Shown in the first picture)
2 - Wrap the tail around the anchored end back to the right and down through the adjacent loop (Shown in the second picture)
3 - You simply need to bring the tail back over the top of the knot to the left (Shown in the third picture)
4 - Bring the tail end up through the far loop following the anchored end (Shown in the fourth picture)
5 - Finally pull the knot tight (Shown in the fifth picture)
As you can see the first four pictures are simply tracing the knot back through with the tail end
For the last part while you pull the knot tight you may want to make small adjustments and rearrange how it all fits together If the knot does not lay perfectly smoothand tight its NOT a big deal
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 5 Finishing The Knot After completing the Figure 8 knot you will want to somehow secure the tail end of the rope out of the way There are a couple different ways to do this the way that Iwill demonstrate is using whats called a Stopper Knot This secondary knot is similar to a Fishermans knot and is pretty simple I have once again divided thisprocess into several smaller steps
1 - Start by wrapping the tail end around the anchored end (As shown in the first picture)
2 - Wrap the tail back underneath the two vertical segments (As shown in the second picture)
3 - Simply repeat the first two steps wrapping the tail around again (As shown in the third picture)
4 - This step in the fourth picture may look complicated but all you need to do is insert the tail up through the two loops that you have just made
5 - To finish off the knot you will want to slowly pull the tail end while gently pushing the bottom of the stopper knot upwards If you have successfully completed this knotit should look something like the fifth picture
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 6 Ready To Climb Now that you have mastered the Figure 8 knot you can securely harness yourself into a climbing rope Remember there are many other skills that go into setting up ananchor and belaying a climber This tutorial only covers the figure 8 knot For more information there are many great websites that demonstrate how to correctly set up asafe climbing system (Ive posted a few below) If you are a beginning climber I recommend that you read up on a few other climbing techniques Also you shouldprobably go to a climbing wall or gym where there are experienced climbers that can show you the ropes Hopefully this tutorial has been helpful Have fun and be safe
Some useful linkshttpwwwstephenprattnetAnchorsanchorshtmhttpwwwuoregonedu~oppclimbingtopicsanchorshtmlhttpwwwabc-of-rockclimbingcomhowtoclimbingtechniquesasp
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Related Instructables
How to Tie aFigure EightKnot byTactical_Pyro
Paracord KnotDisplay Bord byJamie bagn
Basic KnotsGuide byzorro3355
How to Climb aTree (withprussiks) bystasterisk
How to climb atree (using onlyrope) thefunsimple wayby louieaw
How to get arope into a tree(withoutclimbing it) byvitex
How to tievarious knots byadaviel
How to make arope swing byjdub0928
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Turks Head Knots on a Bottleby sklnxbones on July 6 2010
Intro Turks Head Knots on a BottleThis is the finished project A bottle decorated with three Turks Head Knots There are only three knots on this bottle The RED and the BLUE knots are each a 20 Bightby 3 Lead Turks Head Knots The WHITE knot is a 20 Bight by 19 Lead Turks Head Knot
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 1 Supplies
Cord Lots and Lots of cord I cant tell you how much each bottle is differentBottle Washed and Dried inside and out Make sure to remove all water spotsThreaded Needle Cord screws into the threads at the base of the needlePegs I use brass rivets used as a map to tie the Turks Head KnotsHole Punch Used to punch holes in the painters tape to hold the pegsPainters Tape To hold the pegs in place and to make your map for the Turks Head KnotsMarker To write on the painters tapeCloth Towel To remove finger prints and dirt from your bottleKrazy Glue or Super Glue This is used to secure the knots in place to the bottle
OPTIONAL BUT HIGHLY RECOMMENDEDI use the Turks Head Cookbook from KnotToolcom
Step 2 PreparationYou will need to find a bottle you like I used an empty instant tea bottle of course washed and dried (I like to put the bottle in the oven for a few minutes to dry the insidewithout water spots Take off the lid and do not put lid in the oven) Now measure the circumference of the bottle Take a cord and tightly wrap the cord around the bottleMark where the ends meet and use a ruler to measure the length of the cord For my instant tea bottle the circumference is 27cm I know from past knots that I have tiedthat I want my knot to have 20 Bights in the top and bottom (bands) knots I am going to use the Bights in the (bands) knots to tie the middle knot Now divide the numberof Bights (20) into the size of the circumference (27) to get the space between each Bight (135) With me so far
Now take two pieces of painters tape using a ruler measure out the length of the circumference and mark the length on the both pieces of tape Next you will mark thespace between each Bight on the tape
Step 3 Adding the PegsI like to use pegs when tying Turks Head Knots it just makes tying the knot easier
These are what I use for pegs
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 4 Adding Pegs to the TapeNow take a hole punch to cut holes in the tape where the lines meet You will place the pegs in the holes
Insert a peg in each hole and carefully stick the first piece of tape to the bottle
Step 5 Adding the 2nd row of pegsNow do the same thing with the second piece of tape The numbers on each piece of tape must line up
This picture shows you what you should have now This odd looking thing will be your map to tie the Turks Head Knot And this is the end of Step 1
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 6 Tying the first Turks Head KnotUsing the Turks Head Cookbook follow the numbers going over and under as indicated in the book I chose a 20 Bight by 3 Lead knot which will give me a nice bandaround the bottle Once the ends meet you have made one complete knot Tape the running end of your cord and start removing the pegs and the tape
Step 7 Remove the pegs and the tapeBe careful not to untie the knot as you remove the pegs and tape from the bottle Continue to remove all the pegs and remove the tape from the bottle At this point theknot will be very loose and will need to be tightened up
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 8 Remove the slack from the knotHere you can see just how much the knot expanded Starting with the standing end begin to pull the slack out of the knot going towards the running end of the cordDo not expect to pull all the slack out at once You may have to make 3 - 5 attempts at removing the slack out of the knot DO NOT remove all of the slack out of the knotIn order to make the bands we will have to triple the Turks Head Knot We will do this by following the knot three times The threaded needle will really come in handyhere
Step 9 Triple the KnotOnce you have made three passes of the Turks Head Knot use your needle to go under your knot about half the circumference and cut the cord The knot will be tightenough to hide the tail in placeTIP I carefully add a couple of drops of super glue UNDER the band to hold them in place and keep them from sliding around in the nextsteps A drop or two in 3 or 4 places around the band should be enough
Step 10 Add the second knotNow repeat this whole step for the second bandWhen tying the second band you must make sure the Bights line up to the first band This is crucial for the next stepWipe down the bottle to make sure all your finger prints and adhesive from the tape are all removed You want to make sure your bottle is clean at this point Any dirt orfinger prints left on the bottle will be almost impossible to remove From this point on we will use gloves when tying our last knot
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 11 Maping the Top KnotStick a piece of painters tape on top of your first band leaving the bottom of the knot exposedUse a marker to count the number of Bights in your knot Instead of using the pegs we are going to use the Bights to tie our next Turks Head Knot
Step 12 Mapping the Bottom KnotDo the same thing for the bottom band but you must make sure your numbers on top and bottom line up So 1 on top should be the same position as 1 on the bottom
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 13 Adding the last knotAgain using the Turks Head Cookbook and the threaded needle you are going to follow the instructions going over and under as indicated in the book Be sure to usegloves when ever you handle the bottle
Step 14 Thats ItFor this Turks Head Knot I am using a 20 Bight by 19 Lead knot
Because of the amount of cord you are working with your cord will get twisted and knotted You will have to un-twist the cord often Its a pain in the rear but it has to bedone And it has to be done alot
Continue to tie the knot until you finish the knot If you have the cord and the patience you can double or triple the knot When you are done use your needle to hide theends under your bands Cut the ends and your DONE
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Related Instructables
Monkeys FistFloatingKeychain byjokerlz
How To Make ATurks headKnot WithParacord byDoggie Stylish
Tying Trivetsout of Rope forHoliday Gifts bykylemarsh
Paracord KnotDisplay Bord byJamie bagn
How to Make ATurks Head(Photos) bymchs60chip
A pocket full ofknots byKiteman
Monkeys fistknot AND themonkey byjonathan111
TiteTie is theTruckers Knoton Steroids bytitetie
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Larks head noose -- an easy useful knot that tightens and loosensby Larry Breed on February 19 2009
Intro Larks head noose -- an easy useful knot that tightens and loosensI thought I knew all the basic knots but then I was taught this incredibly useful simple knot Its good for tying up the neck of a bag that you want to repeatedly open andsecurely close Its good for tying around a springy bundle that will need tightening and retightening And its easy to undo
Ive looked at knot literature but havent found a name for this so I named it The basic knot is well known its called a larks head Since all Ive done is to slip the twoends through the larks head to make a noose I call it that
WARNING Dont use this knot when human safety would depend on it Climbers and mountaineers have well-tested reliable knots for such situations
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Image Notes1 To tighten further step on this side of the larks head and pull the free ends
Step 1 Double the cord overThe larks head noose requires enough cord to go twice around your bundle plus a foot or two Find the center and double it over Sailors call this a bight
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 2 Form the larks headComing from below the bight hook your thumb and forefinger over the two sides Reach outward and downward and pinch your fingertips together underneath thedoubled cord
Youve made a larks head Move the crossing cord a little farther from your hand so theres a clear opening through the two half-loops
Step 3 Form the nooseSlip the two ends of the cord through the opening we were just talking about Pull the larks head tight so it grips the two cords Find something that needs constrictingand put the noose around it
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 4 Tightening retightening and lockingSlide the knot against the bundle If its not tight enough to keep from slipping tighten it by holding it in one hand and tugging on the cords one at a time with the otherhand Notice that you can slide the knot out again for instance to re-open the bag you just tied shut For some applications this may be as tight as you need it
A springy bundle probably still feels loose If so compress the bundle and get a new grip on the cords Rest your foot on the bundle on the cords nearest the larks headand pull to slide the larks head tighter
To make the knot more permanent you can lock it Make an overhand in the cord ends (Exactly like the first step in tying shoelaces) With your foot still on the bundlepull on the cords and move your hands apart until youre pulling in opposite directions You have just locked the larks head and you can trust it to stay that way()
But lets say that later on you want to loosen the locked knot Again put your foot on the bundle and cords nearest the larks head hold the two cord ends together andpull This makes a little slack between the overhand and the larks head so you can untie the overhand
In twine or small string the locking overhand knot may be difficult to undo Use a shoelace knot instead of an overhand and itll unlock easily
() If youre using slippery cord like polypropylene an overhand may not lock securely You may want to tie another overhand knot For added security wrap a shortlength of duct tape around the two cords close to the knot
Image Notes1 To tighten further step on this side of the larks head and pull the free ends
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Related Instructables
TRX fromParacordChallengeAccepted bythrake
A pocket full ofknots byKiteman
Lens CapLanyard by~teknoarsonist~ how to tie a
noose byawesume
AdjustableParacordGlassesLanyard byjdtwelve12
HangmansNoose PackClosure byPopEye42
Paraleash - ADog LeashFrom Paracordby The Ideanator
How to make arugged andhandy ParacordBelt by Jake22
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 4 The slippery hitch The slippery hitch is a great knot for adjusting tension on the main line or for having an adjustable fixed loop To adjust the knot simply slide the knot up or down the mainline
Step 1 wrap your line around the anchor point or just double over the line to form a loop
Step 2 wrap the end line around the main line three times Wrapping in the direction of the anchor point or loop
Step 3 put together the two lines making up the loop amp wrap the two lines one time with the end line
Step 4 pass the end line thew the last loop formed covering the two lined of the loop
Step 5 pull the knot tite
step 6 to adjust the size of the loop or main line tension grab the knot amp slide it up or down the main line
Image Notes1 grab just the knot its self to adjust it2 step 5
Image Notes1 step 1
Image Notes1 step 2
Image Notes1 step 3
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Image Notes1 step 4
Image Notes1 grab just the knot its self to adjust it2 step 5
Image Notes1 same knot as in last pic Just slid up2 step 6
Step 5 The mid line truchers hitch The truckers hitch is a great way to double the pulling force on a line There are many ways to tie this knot the problem with most of them is that at some point you aregoing to have to pass the end line through a loop on the main line that is acting like a pulley to double your pulling force this is great if you are making the knot close tothe end of your line but if you are using a 300 length of line amp want to make the knot in the first ten feet having to pass 290 of line thew a loop is a pain But with a fewhalf hitches you will not have to pass the end line threw any loop on the main line
step 1 wrap your line around the anchor point then double over your end line laying the top of the loop over the main line
Step 2 double up your main line amp lay the loop over the loop made by the end line
step 3 in main line above the knot twist in a loop
step 4 put main line loop thew the loop made in step 3 amp pull this loop tight over your main line loop forming a half hitch Repeat step 3 amp 4 to make a doublehalf hitch
step 5 To use the knot just pull down on the end line to put tension on the main line
step 6 after you have the main line snug tie a mid line double half hitch around the two lines forming the loop at the end of the main line with the end line
step 7 Tie a double half hitch with the end line around the end loop of the mid line half hitch of step 6 using the same method as used in steps 3 amp 4
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Image Notes1 the end of step 6
Image Notes1 main line2 end line3 step 1
Image Notes1 main line loop2 end line loop
Image Notes1 step 3
Image Notes1 step 4
Image Notes1 step 4 at the end with a double half hitch on the main loop
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Image Notes1 pull here2 step 5
Image Notes1 the start of step 6
Image Notes1 the end of step 6
Image Notes1 step 72 now the rest of the line is free to do more work
Related Instructables
Paracord KnotDisplay Bord byJamie bagn
ChokelessAdjustableParacord DogLeash byPizzaman101
ParacordLadder wWooden Rungsby josestude
tie a paracordshackle grip byitri45
ParacordPrussik Belt byJavaNut13
TiteTie is theTruckers Knoton Steroids bytitetie
ID Lanyard(Photos) byeschmunk
Dog Toys forHeavy Chewersby J3443RY
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Figure 8 knot and double 8 knotby jonathan111 on November 28 2007
Intro Figure 8 knot and double 8 knotI will show you how to tie a figure 8 knot and a figure 8 follow through
Step 1 Stating the knotThis is a simple knot so just follow the pictures
Step 2 Finishing the knotCross the string under and then push it through the hole Pull tightly unless you are going to do the follow through and leave it somewhat loose
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 3 The follow through knotThe follow through knot should be tied around something brought back and followed through the path of the 8 knot Look at the pictures Basically follow through the 8knot backwards
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Related Instructables
Climb Safe WithA Figure 8Knot by mattste A pocket full of
knots byKiteman
How to Tie aFigure EightKnot byTactical_Pyro
Paracord KnotDisplay Bord byJamie bagn
Cross KnotParacordLanyard byStormdrane
How to Tie aFire-escapeKnot by leonardoismael
Truckers HitchTHE mostawesome knoton the planetby schneidp20
Paracord ZipperPuller byrepeet13
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Truckers Hitch THE most awesome knot on the planetby schneidp20 on October 12 2008
Authorschneidp20I like building stuff Trouble is there just isnt enough time to build everything Sigh
Intro Truckers Hitch THE most awesome knot on the planetYes I know that there are plenty of other cool knots out there many of which I literally couldnt live wo I rock climb However this knot is unlike any other Plus Ineeded a grabber for my Instructable -) (BTW this ISNT a climbing knot) And in truth it isnt a knot by itself but rather a system of common knots
Have you ever tried to tie something down for transporting but just couldnt get the lines tight andor during transport the lines would continually loosen Then this is theknot for you I learned this knot back in the 70s when specialty car racks and ratchet straps were rare or unheard of I initially used it to tie a canoe on a car rack bothattaching to the rack as well as the lines to the bow and stern of the canoe Even with all the new gizmos available today this knot still shines because all you need is arope and ropes dont hum in the wind like straps
The unique aspect of this knot is that it gives you a 2-1 mechanical advantage when tightening the rope Be careful though You can actually damage some thingsbecause of the mechanical advantage This knot holds fast and is easy to untie hallmark traits of any good knot
Below you see the finished knot system well break it apart in the steps that follow
Image Notes1 1st anchor point a bowline2 loop3 securing knots 2 half hitches4 securing loose end with a fishermans knot5 2nd anchor point (should be round)
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Image Notes1 X marks the spot
Step 1 Initial setupThe first step is to anchor one end of the rope and then loop the rope around a 2nd anchor point
For attaching to the 1st anchor point I chose bowline a close 2 on my list -) There are other instructables on that one so I wont bore you here
The 2nd anchor really should be round because it serves as a pulley in this block and tackle type knot Ive used it on sharp anchor points and it doesnt work as well
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 2 Creating a slip knotTie a slip knot somewhere between the two anchor points Correct placement of the slip knot takes some experience to judge it correctly Typically I place it too close tothe 2nd anchor point and end up with not enough room to work with If the knot ends up too far from 2nd anchor point you can extend the knot by enlarging the loop
Be sure you tie the slip knot as shown You may not be able to untie other knots
In this small example the slip knot is uncharacteristically close to the 1st anchor point
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 3 Tightening and securingThe loose end of the rope that went around the 2nd anchor point goes through the slip knot loop Pull the loose end to the desired tension and secure with two halfhitches
Note To allow better view of the knots the rope isnt really tightened in this example
Step 4 Securing loose endThe final knot is just to secure the loose end somehow I chose a fishermans knot to do this
To tie a fishermans knot the rope goes around twice and goes under the X created by the loops Pull the loose end to tighten Finally slide the knot to put tension onthe half hitches
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Image Notes1 X marks the spot
Step 5 FinishedThere you have it I guarantee that the first time you really use this knot (not just practice) you will be amazed at how well it works and youll wish you knew this knot along time ago You may even come over to my side and declare that is is THE most awesome knot on the planet -)
Enjoy and happy haulingDave
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Related Instructables
TiteTie is theTruckers Knoton Steroids bytitetie
Four knots tomake paracordinto a usefultool byerik_mccray
Modify yourbike rack tocarry a sunfishor other boat byewilhelm
SurfboardHammock byGermy
GiganticHalloweenSpider Web bynolte919
How To Tie ASpiders Hitch(video) by back-cast
Three-hitch mathair ornamentby michiexile TRX from
ParacordChallengeAccepted bythrake
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Carry any Bottle with a JUG KNOT Handleby hpstoutharrow on September 17 2009
Intro Carry any Bottle with a JUG KNOT HandleTie a JUG KNOT around a water bottle soda bottle or aluminum bottle to make a secure carrying strap
Re-purpose any container into a reusable water bottle by adding a convenient carrying strap This Instructable will demonstrate how to tie a JUG knot which like its namesuggests is meant to properly secure around the neck of a container
With some cord and the knowledge of this knot you will be able add a handle lanyard or carabiner loop to any of your favorite beverages to carry them on the go
It works perfectly for those disposable water bottles and who knows once you add some colorful cord to the plain old clear water bottle you just might beinclined to refill it and use it again(Check out pictures 4amp5 below)
In addition to plastic beverage bottles like pop water and sports drinks you can turn those rugged aluminum beer bottles into a backpacking canteen
Those of you familiar with my previous aluminum bottle InstructablesROLLED RIM METAL TUMBLERhttpwwwinstructablescomidAluminum-Bottle-Tumbler-Cup-Cook-PotALUMINUM BOTTLE LIGHTWEIGHT ALCOHOL STOVEhttpwwwinstructablescomidAluminum-Bottle-Alcohol-Stovewill recognize the water canteen shown below as a re-purposed aluminum beer bottle Here I have added a painted surface treatment to turn it into a proper lookingwater bottle More on that in steps 13 14 15
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 1 Getting StartedCord size is important Select a small medium weight cord like the one shown here It is a general purpose camp cord sold at most sporting goods stores (shoelacesmight also work)
Do not use a heavy cord or rope because the larger diameter will not tuck under the relatively small lip at the top of the bottleneck and the bottle will fall out
Also the smaller cord cinches tight on itself and will not loosen accidentally
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 2 Form a BightThe next steps show how to tie a JUG KNOT It is the basic step for adding a carrying strap It is also the anchor point for any additional fancy bottle trussing you maywant to add
JUG KNOT Step 1
Form a Bight in the center of a length of cord Bight is a knot term for a loop or bend in the rope In this case the main Bight in this knot is highlighted with a white mark Imakes it easier to follow its path in these steps
The running ends of the cord should be equal length
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 3 Pull the Bight downPULL the Bight DOWN forming two Loops
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 4 Cross the LoopsCROSS the right Loop OVER the left Loop
Step 5 Pass the Bight under the 1st loopTake the main Bight and pass it UNDER the left Loop
Step 6 Weave the BightWEAVE the Bight OVER the portion of the right Loop and UNDER the portion of the left Loop
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 7 Extend the BightExtend the Bight OVER the outer portion of the right Loop
Step 8 Flip the Right Loop behindAdditional colored identification points have been added to the loops to follow their travel in these next two steps
The right Loop Yellow marker is FLIPPED BEHIND the knot and ends up on the far left side of the knot
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 9 Flip the 2nd loop in frontRaise the green marker (located on what was formerly the left loop) and pull it down and to the right FLIPPING IT IN FRONT of the knot
Note the blue portion of the this loop will pass around the outside of the yellow portion of the first loop
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Image Notes1 Center of knot that will tighten around the bottles neck
Step 10 Remove SlackNote where the blue green amp yellow markers end up
Start to remove the slack in the loops by pulling the original main Bight (white marker top right) and the two free standing ends at the bottom
the bottle neck will pass through the very center of the knot
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Image Notes1 Center of knot that will tighten around the bottles neck
Step 11 Tighten the KnotAfter removing the slack insert the bottle neck and finish tightening
The knot should look like this before slipping it over the bottle
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 12 Secure on bottle neckThis is the finished knot shown on the neck of various containers
The loop end and the two free standing ends can be tied together to create a carrying handle (last picture below)
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 13 Aluminum Bottle Water Bottle
The next few steps show the features of an aluminum beer bottle re-purposed as a water bottle canteen It is one of many containers that can be reused as a camp waterbottle
The bottle was lightly sanded masked and then pained with a hammered finished paint to create an interesting surface texture
Image Notes1 Textured finish paint makes an interesting grip-able surface2 Masked with tape for painting3 Masked with tape for painting
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Image Notes1 Dowel used for holding the bottle during painting
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 14 Tethered Cork StopperUse a wine bottle man made Cork as a stopper for your aluminum water bottleNote Use a cork that was removed from the wine bottle without the corkscrew penetrating through the bottom end of the cork (A hole all the way through the cork willcause it to leak) Use the unpierced end of the cork inside the water bottle
Drill a hole through the sides of the Cork Thread the cord through the hole to the center of the cord Use the cork as the main Bight and tie the Jug knot as shown inthe beginning steps
Now the cork is tethered to the bottle and will not get lost or fall on the ground
A Carabiner clip passes through the other cord end to attache the water bottle to you belt or pack
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 15 Trussed for TransportThis is another hanging method for carrying your aluminum bottle water canteen A Jug knot is tied conventionally around the neck
The running ends of the knot however are pulled down towards the bottom of the bottle A Barrel Knot is tied about 34 the way down the side of the bottle A squareknot is tied on the bottom of the knot to keep the two running ends tight against the sides of the bottle
I like the look of the accent colored cord running down the sides of the bottle and the fact that the bottle hangs from the belt upside down It adds to its uniqueness
The last picture shows another truss variation
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 16 AdvancedBelow is a bottle with some additional trussing You can be creative as you want It all starts with a re-purposed container and the Jug Knot (and enough cord)
Related Instructables
AluminumBottle TumblerCup amp Cook Potfor an AlcoholStove byhpstoutharrow
Water BottleBelt Clip byuglymike Duct Tape
Water Bottle byrabidsquire2
AluminumBottle AlcoholStove byhpstoutharrow
DIYGlass WaterBottle byCulturespy
Solar WaterHeater forBackpackingUsing WaterBottles and aCar Shade bykopomeroy
Duct tape waterbottle holder(Photos) by pinkmarshmallow
How to make aCamelPack withan old plasticbottle bywillrandship
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Basic Knots Guideby zorro3355 on April 29 2008
Intro Basic Knots Guidehi
Step 1 Thumb knotThe most simple knotUsed as a stopper and prevent ropes from fraying
Step 2 Reef KnotUsed to tie two ropes of equal thickness togetherIt is pretty easy to tie and untie but under tentionit may be diffcult to untieIt is also not sutible for smoothropes(egnylon ropes)
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 3 Figure of eightused as a stopperprevent ropes from fraying and its more secure than tumb knot its is also used to tie Caribinas to ropes and is often used in rock climbing
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 4 Timber hitchused for pulling logs
Step 5 Clove hitchUsed to tie a rope onto a pole or logThe pole must be roundThe pole lust be thicker then the rope itself
(greatly used during pioneering)
Step 6 Sheet bandused to tie ropes of different thickness together(works on same thickness of ropes too)
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 7 Sheep shankTo shorten RopesTo prevent middle fraying
Step 8 Slip knotWhippingUsed as a grip for pulling things(when tied on a stick or small pole)(marlin spike hitch)
Related Instructables
Rope Rings byhpstoutharrow
How to Tie aFigure EightKnot byTactical_Pyro
Whippin (WestCountry Style)by tim_n
SurvivalBracelet(Updated) bytevers94
HangmansNoose PackClosure byPopEye42
Turkey on aTripod byhpstoutharrow
SurvivalBracelet II bytevers94 Zigzag Spooling
Paracord (video)by Stormdrane
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
How to Tie a Fire-escape Knotby leonardo ismael on October 16 2007
Intro How to Tie a Fire-escape KnotThis knot is used by firemen in case of fires for example imagine a scene where the ladder on the firetruck messes up but people need to get down a five story buildingor more All they have is a long piece of rope they can safely get down with a secure knot like the fire-escape knot So why not learn it its easy to do and hard to untieif you tie it tightly
This is from the American Boys Handbook
Step 1 Get Your RopeFirst grab a piece of rope and bend it like this to make a loop in it Follow every step to the smallest detail
Step 2 Twist the RopeNow make a twist like this and hold it together
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 3 Pull Through the TwistPull the loop through the twist you just made from underneath
Step 4 Go Over the Split EndNow pull the tail through the loop
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 5 FinallyAnd finally just pull it through as pictured below
Congratulations you just learned the fire-escape knot
Step 6 Same Name Not KnotThis is another knot called the fire-escape knot this shouldnt be your result
Related Instructables
House FireEscape Plan(video) byWhatHappensNowAdvice
ParacordLadder wWooden Rungsby josestude
Bed SheetEscape Rope byjessehensel
rope ladder(glow-in-the-dark version) bymikeasaurus
HeadlockEscape 2(video) byjohnnyrockstah
QuickFirestarter byMattandJora
Trail sauna byjakee117
How to Kill FireAnts andCommitGenocide byKentsOkay
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Climb Safe With A Figure 8 Knotby mattste on February 23 2010
Intro Climb Safe With A Figure 8 Knot There are many things that a beginning climber needs to know including several important knots Perhaps the most essential knot is the Figure 8 Follow Through Thistutorial will demonstrate how to correctly harness yourself to a rope using a Figure 8 Follow Through knot This knot is used primarily by rock climbers to provide a life-line Since this knot is used as a life-line it is very important to be able to tie it correctly (Your life could depend upon it)
Dont worry with this tutorial and about 5 minutes of practice you can have this knot mastered
Things you will need
- Climbing Harness- Climbing Rope
If you are wanting to go climbing and dont already have these items they can be purchased for about $25 each at most outdoor sporting goods stores If you are merelylooking to learn the knot a belt loop and a rope (about five feet long) will do
Image Notes1 Climbing Harness2 Climbing Rope
Step 1 Dealing With The RopeThroughout this tutorial I will be discussing different parts of the rope To make these instructions as clear as possible I will define a few terms that I will use throughoutthe tutorial The Anchor End of the rope will generally be at the top of the images This is the end that would be anchored to the wall or rock and does not move Wewill not be doing much with the anchored end The Tail End of the rope is the opposite end that we will be dealing with I will call this the tail for short
Now that we have some terms to work with lets get started
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 2 Tying The First Figure 8This knot has several parts to it The first part of the knot is just tying a basic figure 8 To tie the first figure 8 there are four simple steps
1 - Using the tail make a loop over the rope (as shown in the first picture) keeping in mind that there should be about 3 ft of slack on the tail end
2 - Wrap the tail back this time go under the anchored end (As shown in the second picture)
3 - Bring the tail down through the first loop (As shown in the third picture)
4 - Finally pull the two ends to make the knot a little bit tighter and easier to deal with (Shown in the fourth picture)
After these four steps you should end up with a knot that resembles a figure 8
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 3 Looping Into The Harness In order to secure the rope to the harness simply thread the tail end of the rope through the front loop in the harness as shown in the picture below This step isobviously very important
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 4 Following Back Through The Figure 8After looping the rope through the harness you have to thread the tail end of the rope back through the knot following the first figure 8 I have divided this process intofive smaller steps in order to make it more clear
1 - Coming form underneath the knot bring the tail up through the near loop and to the left behind the anchored end of the rope (Shown in the first picture)
2 - Wrap the tail around the anchored end back to the right and down through the adjacent loop (Shown in the second picture)
3 - You simply need to bring the tail back over the top of the knot to the left (Shown in the third picture)
4 - Bring the tail end up through the far loop following the anchored end (Shown in the fourth picture)
5 - Finally pull the knot tight (Shown in the fifth picture)
As you can see the first four pictures are simply tracing the knot back through with the tail end
For the last part while you pull the knot tight you may want to make small adjustments and rearrange how it all fits together If the knot does not lay perfectly smoothand tight its NOT a big deal
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 5 Finishing The Knot After completing the Figure 8 knot you will want to somehow secure the tail end of the rope out of the way There are a couple different ways to do this the way that Iwill demonstrate is using whats called a Stopper Knot This secondary knot is similar to a Fishermans knot and is pretty simple I have once again divided thisprocess into several smaller steps
1 - Start by wrapping the tail end around the anchored end (As shown in the first picture)
2 - Wrap the tail back underneath the two vertical segments (As shown in the second picture)
3 - Simply repeat the first two steps wrapping the tail around again (As shown in the third picture)
4 - This step in the fourth picture may look complicated but all you need to do is insert the tail up through the two loops that you have just made
5 - To finish off the knot you will want to slowly pull the tail end while gently pushing the bottom of the stopper knot upwards If you have successfully completed this knotit should look something like the fifth picture
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 6 Ready To Climb Now that you have mastered the Figure 8 knot you can securely harness yourself into a climbing rope Remember there are many other skills that go into setting up ananchor and belaying a climber This tutorial only covers the figure 8 knot For more information there are many great websites that demonstrate how to correctly set up asafe climbing system (Ive posted a few below) If you are a beginning climber I recommend that you read up on a few other climbing techniques Also you shouldprobably go to a climbing wall or gym where there are experienced climbers that can show you the ropes Hopefully this tutorial has been helpful Have fun and be safe
Some useful linkshttpwwwstephenprattnetAnchorsanchorshtmhttpwwwuoregonedu~oppclimbingtopicsanchorshtmlhttpwwwabc-of-rockclimbingcomhowtoclimbingtechniquesasp
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Related Instructables
How to Tie aFigure EightKnot byTactical_Pyro
Paracord KnotDisplay Bord byJamie bagn
Basic KnotsGuide byzorro3355
How to Climb aTree (withprussiks) bystasterisk
How to climb atree (using onlyrope) thefunsimple wayby louieaw
How to get arope into a tree(withoutclimbing it) byvitex
How to tievarious knots byadaviel
How to make arope swing byjdub0928
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Turks Head Knots on a Bottleby sklnxbones on July 6 2010
Intro Turks Head Knots on a BottleThis is the finished project A bottle decorated with three Turks Head Knots There are only three knots on this bottle The RED and the BLUE knots are each a 20 Bightby 3 Lead Turks Head Knots The WHITE knot is a 20 Bight by 19 Lead Turks Head Knot
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 1 Supplies
Cord Lots and Lots of cord I cant tell you how much each bottle is differentBottle Washed and Dried inside and out Make sure to remove all water spotsThreaded Needle Cord screws into the threads at the base of the needlePegs I use brass rivets used as a map to tie the Turks Head KnotsHole Punch Used to punch holes in the painters tape to hold the pegsPainters Tape To hold the pegs in place and to make your map for the Turks Head KnotsMarker To write on the painters tapeCloth Towel To remove finger prints and dirt from your bottleKrazy Glue or Super Glue This is used to secure the knots in place to the bottle
OPTIONAL BUT HIGHLY RECOMMENDEDI use the Turks Head Cookbook from KnotToolcom
Step 2 PreparationYou will need to find a bottle you like I used an empty instant tea bottle of course washed and dried (I like to put the bottle in the oven for a few minutes to dry the insidewithout water spots Take off the lid and do not put lid in the oven) Now measure the circumference of the bottle Take a cord and tightly wrap the cord around the bottleMark where the ends meet and use a ruler to measure the length of the cord For my instant tea bottle the circumference is 27cm I know from past knots that I have tiedthat I want my knot to have 20 Bights in the top and bottom (bands) knots I am going to use the Bights in the (bands) knots to tie the middle knot Now divide the numberof Bights (20) into the size of the circumference (27) to get the space between each Bight (135) With me so far
Now take two pieces of painters tape using a ruler measure out the length of the circumference and mark the length on the both pieces of tape Next you will mark thespace between each Bight on the tape
Step 3 Adding the PegsI like to use pegs when tying Turks Head Knots it just makes tying the knot easier
These are what I use for pegs
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 4 Adding Pegs to the TapeNow take a hole punch to cut holes in the tape where the lines meet You will place the pegs in the holes
Insert a peg in each hole and carefully stick the first piece of tape to the bottle
Step 5 Adding the 2nd row of pegsNow do the same thing with the second piece of tape The numbers on each piece of tape must line up
This picture shows you what you should have now This odd looking thing will be your map to tie the Turks Head Knot And this is the end of Step 1
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 6 Tying the first Turks Head KnotUsing the Turks Head Cookbook follow the numbers going over and under as indicated in the book I chose a 20 Bight by 3 Lead knot which will give me a nice bandaround the bottle Once the ends meet you have made one complete knot Tape the running end of your cord and start removing the pegs and the tape
Step 7 Remove the pegs and the tapeBe careful not to untie the knot as you remove the pegs and tape from the bottle Continue to remove all the pegs and remove the tape from the bottle At this point theknot will be very loose and will need to be tightened up
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 8 Remove the slack from the knotHere you can see just how much the knot expanded Starting with the standing end begin to pull the slack out of the knot going towards the running end of the cordDo not expect to pull all the slack out at once You may have to make 3 - 5 attempts at removing the slack out of the knot DO NOT remove all of the slack out of the knotIn order to make the bands we will have to triple the Turks Head Knot We will do this by following the knot three times The threaded needle will really come in handyhere
Step 9 Triple the KnotOnce you have made three passes of the Turks Head Knot use your needle to go under your knot about half the circumference and cut the cord The knot will be tightenough to hide the tail in placeTIP I carefully add a couple of drops of super glue UNDER the band to hold them in place and keep them from sliding around in the nextsteps A drop or two in 3 or 4 places around the band should be enough
Step 10 Add the second knotNow repeat this whole step for the second bandWhen tying the second band you must make sure the Bights line up to the first band This is crucial for the next stepWipe down the bottle to make sure all your finger prints and adhesive from the tape are all removed You want to make sure your bottle is clean at this point Any dirt orfinger prints left on the bottle will be almost impossible to remove From this point on we will use gloves when tying our last knot
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 11 Maping the Top KnotStick a piece of painters tape on top of your first band leaving the bottom of the knot exposedUse a marker to count the number of Bights in your knot Instead of using the pegs we are going to use the Bights to tie our next Turks Head Knot
Step 12 Mapping the Bottom KnotDo the same thing for the bottom band but you must make sure your numbers on top and bottom line up So 1 on top should be the same position as 1 on the bottom
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 13 Adding the last knotAgain using the Turks Head Cookbook and the threaded needle you are going to follow the instructions going over and under as indicated in the book Be sure to usegloves when ever you handle the bottle
Step 14 Thats ItFor this Turks Head Knot I am using a 20 Bight by 19 Lead knot
Because of the amount of cord you are working with your cord will get twisted and knotted You will have to un-twist the cord often Its a pain in the rear but it has to bedone And it has to be done alot
Continue to tie the knot until you finish the knot If you have the cord and the patience you can double or triple the knot When you are done use your needle to hide theends under your bands Cut the ends and your DONE
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Related Instructables
Monkeys FistFloatingKeychain byjokerlz
How To Make ATurks headKnot WithParacord byDoggie Stylish
Tying Trivetsout of Rope forHoliday Gifts bykylemarsh
Paracord KnotDisplay Bord byJamie bagn
How to Make ATurks Head(Photos) bymchs60chip
A pocket full ofknots byKiteman
Monkeys fistknot AND themonkey byjonathan111
TiteTie is theTruckers Knoton Steroids bytitetie
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Larks head noose -- an easy useful knot that tightens and loosensby Larry Breed on February 19 2009
Intro Larks head noose -- an easy useful knot that tightens and loosensI thought I knew all the basic knots but then I was taught this incredibly useful simple knot Its good for tying up the neck of a bag that you want to repeatedly open andsecurely close Its good for tying around a springy bundle that will need tightening and retightening And its easy to undo
Ive looked at knot literature but havent found a name for this so I named it The basic knot is well known its called a larks head Since all Ive done is to slip the twoends through the larks head to make a noose I call it that
WARNING Dont use this knot when human safety would depend on it Climbers and mountaineers have well-tested reliable knots for such situations
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Image Notes1 To tighten further step on this side of the larks head and pull the free ends
Step 1 Double the cord overThe larks head noose requires enough cord to go twice around your bundle plus a foot or two Find the center and double it over Sailors call this a bight
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 2 Form the larks headComing from below the bight hook your thumb and forefinger over the two sides Reach outward and downward and pinch your fingertips together underneath thedoubled cord
Youve made a larks head Move the crossing cord a little farther from your hand so theres a clear opening through the two half-loops
Step 3 Form the nooseSlip the two ends of the cord through the opening we were just talking about Pull the larks head tight so it grips the two cords Find something that needs constrictingand put the noose around it
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 4 Tightening retightening and lockingSlide the knot against the bundle If its not tight enough to keep from slipping tighten it by holding it in one hand and tugging on the cords one at a time with the otherhand Notice that you can slide the knot out again for instance to re-open the bag you just tied shut For some applications this may be as tight as you need it
A springy bundle probably still feels loose If so compress the bundle and get a new grip on the cords Rest your foot on the bundle on the cords nearest the larks headand pull to slide the larks head tighter
To make the knot more permanent you can lock it Make an overhand in the cord ends (Exactly like the first step in tying shoelaces) With your foot still on the bundlepull on the cords and move your hands apart until youre pulling in opposite directions You have just locked the larks head and you can trust it to stay that way()
But lets say that later on you want to loosen the locked knot Again put your foot on the bundle and cords nearest the larks head hold the two cord ends together andpull This makes a little slack between the overhand and the larks head so you can untie the overhand
In twine or small string the locking overhand knot may be difficult to undo Use a shoelace knot instead of an overhand and itll unlock easily
() If youre using slippery cord like polypropylene an overhand may not lock securely You may want to tie another overhand knot For added security wrap a shortlength of duct tape around the two cords close to the knot
Image Notes1 To tighten further step on this side of the larks head and pull the free ends
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Related Instructables
TRX fromParacordChallengeAccepted bythrake
A pocket full ofknots byKiteman
Lens CapLanyard by~teknoarsonist~ how to tie a
noose byawesume
AdjustableParacordGlassesLanyard byjdtwelve12
HangmansNoose PackClosure byPopEye42
Paraleash - ADog LeashFrom Paracordby The Ideanator
How to make arugged andhandy ParacordBelt by Jake22
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Image Notes1 step 4
Image Notes1 grab just the knot its self to adjust it2 step 5
Image Notes1 same knot as in last pic Just slid up2 step 6
Step 5 The mid line truchers hitch The truckers hitch is a great way to double the pulling force on a line There are many ways to tie this knot the problem with most of them is that at some point you aregoing to have to pass the end line through a loop on the main line that is acting like a pulley to double your pulling force this is great if you are making the knot close tothe end of your line but if you are using a 300 length of line amp want to make the knot in the first ten feet having to pass 290 of line thew a loop is a pain But with a fewhalf hitches you will not have to pass the end line threw any loop on the main line
step 1 wrap your line around the anchor point then double over your end line laying the top of the loop over the main line
Step 2 double up your main line amp lay the loop over the loop made by the end line
step 3 in main line above the knot twist in a loop
step 4 put main line loop thew the loop made in step 3 amp pull this loop tight over your main line loop forming a half hitch Repeat step 3 amp 4 to make a doublehalf hitch
step 5 To use the knot just pull down on the end line to put tension on the main line
step 6 after you have the main line snug tie a mid line double half hitch around the two lines forming the loop at the end of the main line with the end line
step 7 Tie a double half hitch with the end line around the end loop of the mid line half hitch of step 6 using the same method as used in steps 3 amp 4
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Image Notes1 the end of step 6
Image Notes1 main line2 end line3 step 1
Image Notes1 main line loop2 end line loop
Image Notes1 step 3
Image Notes1 step 4
Image Notes1 step 4 at the end with a double half hitch on the main loop
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Image Notes1 pull here2 step 5
Image Notes1 the start of step 6
Image Notes1 the end of step 6
Image Notes1 step 72 now the rest of the line is free to do more work
Related Instructables
Paracord KnotDisplay Bord byJamie bagn
ChokelessAdjustableParacord DogLeash byPizzaman101
ParacordLadder wWooden Rungsby josestude
tie a paracordshackle grip byitri45
ParacordPrussik Belt byJavaNut13
TiteTie is theTruckers Knoton Steroids bytitetie
ID Lanyard(Photos) byeschmunk
Dog Toys forHeavy Chewersby J3443RY
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Figure 8 knot and double 8 knotby jonathan111 on November 28 2007
Intro Figure 8 knot and double 8 knotI will show you how to tie a figure 8 knot and a figure 8 follow through
Step 1 Stating the knotThis is a simple knot so just follow the pictures
Step 2 Finishing the knotCross the string under and then push it through the hole Pull tightly unless you are going to do the follow through and leave it somewhat loose
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 3 The follow through knotThe follow through knot should be tied around something brought back and followed through the path of the 8 knot Look at the pictures Basically follow through the 8knot backwards
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Related Instructables
Climb Safe WithA Figure 8Knot by mattste A pocket full of
knots byKiteman
How to Tie aFigure EightKnot byTactical_Pyro
Paracord KnotDisplay Bord byJamie bagn
Cross KnotParacordLanyard byStormdrane
How to Tie aFire-escapeKnot by leonardoismael
Truckers HitchTHE mostawesome knoton the planetby schneidp20
Paracord ZipperPuller byrepeet13
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Truckers Hitch THE most awesome knot on the planetby schneidp20 on October 12 2008
Authorschneidp20I like building stuff Trouble is there just isnt enough time to build everything Sigh
Intro Truckers Hitch THE most awesome knot on the planetYes I know that there are plenty of other cool knots out there many of which I literally couldnt live wo I rock climb However this knot is unlike any other Plus Ineeded a grabber for my Instructable -) (BTW this ISNT a climbing knot) And in truth it isnt a knot by itself but rather a system of common knots
Have you ever tried to tie something down for transporting but just couldnt get the lines tight andor during transport the lines would continually loosen Then this is theknot for you I learned this knot back in the 70s when specialty car racks and ratchet straps were rare or unheard of I initially used it to tie a canoe on a car rack bothattaching to the rack as well as the lines to the bow and stern of the canoe Even with all the new gizmos available today this knot still shines because all you need is arope and ropes dont hum in the wind like straps
The unique aspect of this knot is that it gives you a 2-1 mechanical advantage when tightening the rope Be careful though You can actually damage some thingsbecause of the mechanical advantage This knot holds fast and is easy to untie hallmark traits of any good knot
Below you see the finished knot system well break it apart in the steps that follow
Image Notes1 1st anchor point a bowline2 loop3 securing knots 2 half hitches4 securing loose end with a fishermans knot5 2nd anchor point (should be round)
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Image Notes1 X marks the spot
Step 1 Initial setupThe first step is to anchor one end of the rope and then loop the rope around a 2nd anchor point
For attaching to the 1st anchor point I chose bowline a close 2 on my list -) There are other instructables on that one so I wont bore you here
The 2nd anchor really should be round because it serves as a pulley in this block and tackle type knot Ive used it on sharp anchor points and it doesnt work as well
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 2 Creating a slip knotTie a slip knot somewhere between the two anchor points Correct placement of the slip knot takes some experience to judge it correctly Typically I place it too close tothe 2nd anchor point and end up with not enough room to work with If the knot ends up too far from 2nd anchor point you can extend the knot by enlarging the loop
Be sure you tie the slip knot as shown You may not be able to untie other knots
In this small example the slip knot is uncharacteristically close to the 1st anchor point
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 3 Tightening and securingThe loose end of the rope that went around the 2nd anchor point goes through the slip knot loop Pull the loose end to the desired tension and secure with two halfhitches
Note To allow better view of the knots the rope isnt really tightened in this example
Step 4 Securing loose endThe final knot is just to secure the loose end somehow I chose a fishermans knot to do this
To tie a fishermans knot the rope goes around twice and goes under the X created by the loops Pull the loose end to tighten Finally slide the knot to put tension onthe half hitches
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Image Notes1 X marks the spot
Step 5 FinishedThere you have it I guarantee that the first time you really use this knot (not just practice) you will be amazed at how well it works and youll wish you knew this knot along time ago You may even come over to my side and declare that is is THE most awesome knot on the planet -)
Enjoy and happy haulingDave
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Related Instructables
TiteTie is theTruckers Knoton Steroids bytitetie
Four knots tomake paracordinto a usefultool byerik_mccray
Modify yourbike rack tocarry a sunfishor other boat byewilhelm
SurfboardHammock byGermy
GiganticHalloweenSpider Web bynolte919
How To Tie ASpiders Hitch(video) by back-cast
Three-hitch mathair ornamentby michiexile TRX from
ParacordChallengeAccepted bythrake
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Carry any Bottle with a JUG KNOT Handleby hpstoutharrow on September 17 2009
Intro Carry any Bottle with a JUG KNOT HandleTie a JUG KNOT around a water bottle soda bottle or aluminum bottle to make a secure carrying strap
Re-purpose any container into a reusable water bottle by adding a convenient carrying strap This Instructable will demonstrate how to tie a JUG knot which like its namesuggests is meant to properly secure around the neck of a container
With some cord and the knowledge of this knot you will be able add a handle lanyard or carabiner loop to any of your favorite beverages to carry them on the go
It works perfectly for those disposable water bottles and who knows once you add some colorful cord to the plain old clear water bottle you just might beinclined to refill it and use it again(Check out pictures 4amp5 below)
In addition to plastic beverage bottles like pop water and sports drinks you can turn those rugged aluminum beer bottles into a backpacking canteen
Those of you familiar with my previous aluminum bottle InstructablesROLLED RIM METAL TUMBLERhttpwwwinstructablescomidAluminum-Bottle-Tumbler-Cup-Cook-PotALUMINUM BOTTLE LIGHTWEIGHT ALCOHOL STOVEhttpwwwinstructablescomidAluminum-Bottle-Alcohol-Stovewill recognize the water canteen shown below as a re-purposed aluminum beer bottle Here I have added a painted surface treatment to turn it into a proper lookingwater bottle More on that in steps 13 14 15
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 1 Getting StartedCord size is important Select a small medium weight cord like the one shown here It is a general purpose camp cord sold at most sporting goods stores (shoelacesmight also work)
Do not use a heavy cord or rope because the larger diameter will not tuck under the relatively small lip at the top of the bottleneck and the bottle will fall out
Also the smaller cord cinches tight on itself and will not loosen accidentally
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 2 Form a BightThe next steps show how to tie a JUG KNOT It is the basic step for adding a carrying strap It is also the anchor point for any additional fancy bottle trussing you maywant to add
JUG KNOT Step 1
Form a Bight in the center of a length of cord Bight is a knot term for a loop or bend in the rope In this case the main Bight in this knot is highlighted with a white mark Imakes it easier to follow its path in these steps
The running ends of the cord should be equal length
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 3 Pull the Bight downPULL the Bight DOWN forming two Loops
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 4 Cross the LoopsCROSS the right Loop OVER the left Loop
Step 5 Pass the Bight under the 1st loopTake the main Bight and pass it UNDER the left Loop
Step 6 Weave the BightWEAVE the Bight OVER the portion of the right Loop and UNDER the portion of the left Loop
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 7 Extend the BightExtend the Bight OVER the outer portion of the right Loop
Step 8 Flip the Right Loop behindAdditional colored identification points have been added to the loops to follow their travel in these next two steps
The right Loop Yellow marker is FLIPPED BEHIND the knot and ends up on the far left side of the knot
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 9 Flip the 2nd loop in frontRaise the green marker (located on what was formerly the left loop) and pull it down and to the right FLIPPING IT IN FRONT of the knot
Note the blue portion of the this loop will pass around the outside of the yellow portion of the first loop
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Image Notes1 Center of knot that will tighten around the bottles neck
Step 10 Remove SlackNote where the blue green amp yellow markers end up
Start to remove the slack in the loops by pulling the original main Bight (white marker top right) and the two free standing ends at the bottom
the bottle neck will pass through the very center of the knot
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Image Notes1 Center of knot that will tighten around the bottles neck
Step 11 Tighten the KnotAfter removing the slack insert the bottle neck and finish tightening
The knot should look like this before slipping it over the bottle
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 12 Secure on bottle neckThis is the finished knot shown on the neck of various containers
The loop end and the two free standing ends can be tied together to create a carrying handle (last picture below)
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 13 Aluminum Bottle Water Bottle
The next few steps show the features of an aluminum beer bottle re-purposed as a water bottle canteen It is one of many containers that can be reused as a camp waterbottle
The bottle was lightly sanded masked and then pained with a hammered finished paint to create an interesting surface texture
Image Notes1 Textured finish paint makes an interesting grip-able surface2 Masked with tape for painting3 Masked with tape for painting
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Image Notes1 Dowel used for holding the bottle during painting
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 14 Tethered Cork StopperUse a wine bottle man made Cork as a stopper for your aluminum water bottleNote Use a cork that was removed from the wine bottle without the corkscrew penetrating through the bottom end of the cork (A hole all the way through the cork willcause it to leak) Use the unpierced end of the cork inside the water bottle
Drill a hole through the sides of the Cork Thread the cord through the hole to the center of the cord Use the cork as the main Bight and tie the Jug knot as shown inthe beginning steps
Now the cork is tethered to the bottle and will not get lost or fall on the ground
A Carabiner clip passes through the other cord end to attache the water bottle to you belt or pack
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 15 Trussed for TransportThis is another hanging method for carrying your aluminum bottle water canteen A Jug knot is tied conventionally around the neck
The running ends of the knot however are pulled down towards the bottom of the bottle A Barrel Knot is tied about 34 the way down the side of the bottle A squareknot is tied on the bottom of the knot to keep the two running ends tight against the sides of the bottle
I like the look of the accent colored cord running down the sides of the bottle and the fact that the bottle hangs from the belt upside down It adds to its uniqueness
The last picture shows another truss variation
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 16 AdvancedBelow is a bottle with some additional trussing You can be creative as you want It all starts with a re-purposed container and the Jug Knot (and enough cord)
Related Instructables
AluminumBottle TumblerCup amp Cook Potfor an AlcoholStove byhpstoutharrow
Water BottleBelt Clip byuglymike Duct Tape
Water Bottle byrabidsquire2
AluminumBottle AlcoholStove byhpstoutharrow
DIYGlass WaterBottle byCulturespy
Solar WaterHeater forBackpackingUsing WaterBottles and aCar Shade bykopomeroy
Duct tape waterbottle holder(Photos) by pinkmarshmallow
How to make aCamelPack withan old plasticbottle bywillrandship
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Basic Knots Guideby zorro3355 on April 29 2008
Intro Basic Knots Guidehi
Step 1 Thumb knotThe most simple knotUsed as a stopper and prevent ropes from fraying
Step 2 Reef KnotUsed to tie two ropes of equal thickness togetherIt is pretty easy to tie and untie but under tentionit may be diffcult to untieIt is also not sutible for smoothropes(egnylon ropes)
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 3 Figure of eightused as a stopperprevent ropes from fraying and its more secure than tumb knot its is also used to tie Caribinas to ropes and is often used in rock climbing
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 4 Timber hitchused for pulling logs
Step 5 Clove hitchUsed to tie a rope onto a pole or logThe pole must be roundThe pole lust be thicker then the rope itself
(greatly used during pioneering)
Step 6 Sheet bandused to tie ropes of different thickness together(works on same thickness of ropes too)
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 7 Sheep shankTo shorten RopesTo prevent middle fraying
Step 8 Slip knotWhippingUsed as a grip for pulling things(when tied on a stick or small pole)(marlin spike hitch)
Related Instructables
Rope Rings byhpstoutharrow
How to Tie aFigure EightKnot byTactical_Pyro
Whippin (WestCountry Style)by tim_n
SurvivalBracelet(Updated) bytevers94
HangmansNoose PackClosure byPopEye42
Turkey on aTripod byhpstoutharrow
SurvivalBracelet II bytevers94 Zigzag Spooling
Paracord (video)by Stormdrane
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
How to Tie a Fire-escape Knotby leonardo ismael on October 16 2007
Intro How to Tie a Fire-escape KnotThis knot is used by firemen in case of fires for example imagine a scene where the ladder on the firetruck messes up but people need to get down a five story buildingor more All they have is a long piece of rope they can safely get down with a secure knot like the fire-escape knot So why not learn it its easy to do and hard to untieif you tie it tightly
This is from the American Boys Handbook
Step 1 Get Your RopeFirst grab a piece of rope and bend it like this to make a loop in it Follow every step to the smallest detail
Step 2 Twist the RopeNow make a twist like this and hold it together
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 3 Pull Through the TwistPull the loop through the twist you just made from underneath
Step 4 Go Over the Split EndNow pull the tail through the loop
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 5 FinallyAnd finally just pull it through as pictured below
Congratulations you just learned the fire-escape knot
Step 6 Same Name Not KnotThis is another knot called the fire-escape knot this shouldnt be your result
Related Instructables
House FireEscape Plan(video) byWhatHappensNowAdvice
ParacordLadder wWooden Rungsby josestude
Bed SheetEscape Rope byjessehensel
rope ladder(glow-in-the-dark version) bymikeasaurus
HeadlockEscape 2(video) byjohnnyrockstah
QuickFirestarter byMattandJora
Trail sauna byjakee117
How to Kill FireAnts andCommitGenocide byKentsOkay
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Climb Safe With A Figure 8 Knotby mattste on February 23 2010
Intro Climb Safe With A Figure 8 Knot There are many things that a beginning climber needs to know including several important knots Perhaps the most essential knot is the Figure 8 Follow Through Thistutorial will demonstrate how to correctly harness yourself to a rope using a Figure 8 Follow Through knot This knot is used primarily by rock climbers to provide a life-line Since this knot is used as a life-line it is very important to be able to tie it correctly (Your life could depend upon it)
Dont worry with this tutorial and about 5 minutes of practice you can have this knot mastered
Things you will need
- Climbing Harness- Climbing Rope
If you are wanting to go climbing and dont already have these items they can be purchased for about $25 each at most outdoor sporting goods stores If you are merelylooking to learn the knot a belt loop and a rope (about five feet long) will do
Image Notes1 Climbing Harness2 Climbing Rope
Step 1 Dealing With The RopeThroughout this tutorial I will be discussing different parts of the rope To make these instructions as clear as possible I will define a few terms that I will use throughoutthe tutorial The Anchor End of the rope will generally be at the top of the images This is the end that would be anchored to the wall or rock and does not move Wewill not be doing much with the anchored end The Tail End of the rope is the opposite end that we will be dealing with I will call this the tail for short
Now that we have some terms to work with lets get started
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 2 Tying The First Figure 8This knot has several parts to it The first part of the knot is just tying a basic figure 8 To tie the first figure 8 there are four simple steps
1 - Using the tail make a loop over the rope (as shown in the first picture) keeping in mind that there should be about 3 ft of slack on the tail end
2 - Wrap the tail back this time go under the anchored end (As shown in the second picture)
3 - Bring the tail down through the first loop (As shown in the third picture)
4 - Finally pull the two ends to make the knot a little bit tighter and easier to deal with (Shown in the fourth picture)
After these four steps you should end up with a knot that resembles a figure 8
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 3 Looping Into The Harness In order to secure the rope to the harness simply thread the tail end of the rope through the front loop in the harness as shown in the picture below This step isobviously very important
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 4 Following Back Through The Figure 8After looping the rope through the harness you have to thread the tail end of the rope back through the knot following the first figure 8 I have divided this process intofive smaller steps in order to make it more clear
1 - Coming form underneath the knot bring the tail up through the near loop and to the left behind the anchored end of the rope (Shown in the first picture)
2 - Wrap the tail around the anchored end back to the right and down through the adjacent loop (Shown in the second picture)
3 - You simply need to bring the tail back over the top of the knot to the left (Shown in the third picture)
4 - Bring the tail end up through the far loop following the anchored end (Shown in the fourth picture)
5 - Finally pull the knot tight (Shown in the fifth picture)
As you can see the first four pictures are simply tracing the knot back through with the tail end
For the last part while you pull the knot tight you may want to make small adjustments and rearrange how it all fits together If the knot does not lay perfectly smoothand tight its NOT a big deal
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 5 Finishing The Knot After completing the Figure 8 knot you will want to somehow secure the tail end of the rope out of the way There are a couple different ways to do this the way that Iwill demonstrate is using whats called a Stopper Knot This secondary knot is similar to a Fishermans knot and is pretty simple I have once again divided thisprocess into several smaller steps
1 - Start by wrapping the tail end around the anchored end (As shown in the first picture)
2 - Wrap the tail back underneath the two vertical segments (As shown in the second picture)
3 - Simply repeat the first two steps wrapping the tail around again (As shown in the third picture)
4 - This step in the fourth picture may look complicated but all you need to do is insert the tail up through the two loops that you have just made
5 - To finish off the knot you will want to slowly pull the tail end while gently pushing the bottom of the stopper knot upwards If you have successfully completed this knotit should look something like the fifth picture
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 6 Ready To Climb Now that you have mastered the Figure 8 knot you can securely harness yourself into a climbing rope Remember there are many other skills that go into setting up ananchor and belaying a climber This tutorial only covers the figure 8 knot For more information there are many great websites that demonstrate how to correctly set up asafe climbing system (Ive posted a few below) If you are a beginning climber I recommend that you read up on a few other climbing techniques Also you shouldprobably go to a climbing wall or gym where there are experienced climbers that can show you the ropes Hopefully this tutorial has been helpful Have fun and be safe
Some useful linkshttpwwwstephenprattnetAnchorsanchorshtmhttpwwwuoregonedu~oppclimbingtopicsanchorshtmlhttpwwwabc-of-rockclimbingcomhowtoclimbingtechniquesasp
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Related Instructables
How to Tie aFigure EightKnot byTactical_Pyro
Paracord KnotDisplay Bord byJamie bagn
Basic KnotsGuide byzorro3355
How to Climb aTree (withprussiks) bystasterisk
How to climb atree (using onlyrope) thefunsimple wayby louieaw
How to get arope into a tree(withoutclimbing it) byvitex
How to tievarious knots byadaviel
How to make arope swing byjdub0928
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Turks Head Knots on a Bottleby sklnxbones on July 6 2010
Intro Turks Head Knots on a BottleThis is the finished project A bottle decorated with three Turks Head Knots There are only three knots on this bottle The RED and the BLUE knots are each a 20 Bightby 3 Lead Turks Head Knots The WHITE knot is a 20 Bight by 19 Lead Turks Head Knot
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 1 Supplies
Cord Lots and Lots of cord I cant tell you how much each bottle is differentBottle Washed and Dried inside and out Make sure to remove all water spotsThreaded Needle Cord screws into the threads at the base of the needlePegs I use brass rivets used as a map to tie the Turks Head KnotsHole Punch Used to punch holes in the painters tape to hold the pegsPainters Tape To hold the pegs in place and to make your map for the Turks Head KnotsMarker To write on the painters tapeCloth Towel To remove finger prints and dirt from your bottleKrazy Glue or Super Glue This is used to secure the knots in place to the bottle
OPTIONAL BUT HIGHLY RECOMMENDEDI use the Turks Head Cookbook from KnotToolcom
Step 2 PreparationYou will need to find a bottle you like I used an empty instant tea bottle of course washed and dried (I like to put the bottle in the oven for a few minutes to dry the insidewithout water spots Take off the lid and do not put lid in the oven) Now measure the circumference of the bottle Take a cord and tightly wrap the cord around the bottleMark where the ends meet and use a ruler to measure the length of the cord For my instant tea bottle the circumference is 27cm I know from past knots that I have tiedthat I want my knot to have 20 Bights in the top and bottom (bands) knots I am going to use the Bights in the (bands) knots to tie the middle knot Now divide the numberof Bights (20) into the size of the circumference (27) to get the space between each Bight (135) With me so far
Now take two pieces of painters tape using a ruler measure out the length of the circumference and mark the length on the both pieces of tape Next you will mark thespace between each Bight on the tape
Step 3 Adding the PegsI like to use pegs when tying Turks Head Knots it just makes tying the knot easier
These are what I use for pegs
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 4 Adding Pegs to the TapeNow take a hole punch to cut holes in the tape where the lines meet You will place the pegs in the holes
Insert a peg in each hole and carefully stick the first piece of tape to the bottle
Step 5 Adding the 2nd row of pegsNow do the same thing with the second piece of tape The numbers on each piece of tape must line up
This picture shows you what you should have now This odd looking thing will be your map to tie the Turks Head Knot And this is the end of Step 1
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 6 Tying the first Turks Head KnotUsing the Turks Head Cookbook follow the numbers going over and under as indicated in the book I chose a 20 Bight by 3 Lead knot which will give me a nice bandaround the bottle Once the ends meet you have made one complete knot Tape the running end of your cord and start removing the pegs and the tape
Step 7 Remove the pegs and the tapeBe careful not to untie the knot as you remove the pegs and tape from the bottle Continue to remove all the pegs and remove the tape from the bottle At this point theknot will be very loose and will need to be tightened up
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 8 Remove the slack from the knotHere you can see just how much the knot expanded Starting with the standing end begin to pull the slack out of the knot going towards the running end of the cordDo not expect to pull all the slack out at once You may have to make 3 - 5 attempts at removing the slack out of the knot DO NOT remove all of the slack out of the knotIn order to make the bands we will have to triple the Turks Head Knot We will do this by following the knot three times The threaded needle will really come in handyhere
Step 9 Triple the KnotOnce you have made three passes of the Turks Head Knot use your needle to go under your knot about half the circumference and cut the cord The knot will be tightenough to hide the tail in placeTIP I carefully add a couple of drops of super glue UNDER the band to hold them in place and keep them from sliding around in the nextsteps A drop or two in 3 or 4 places around the band should be enough
Step 10 Add the second knotNow repeat this whole step for the second bandWhen tying the second band you must make sure the Bights line up to the first band This is crucial for the next stepWipe down the bottle to make sure all your finger prints and adhesive from the tape are all removed You want to make sure your bottle is clean at this point Any dirt orfinger prints left on the bottle will be almost impossible to remove From this point on we will use gloves when tying our last knot
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 11 Maping the Top KnotStick a piece of painters tape on top of your first band leaving the bottom of the knot exposedUse a marker to count the number of Bights in your knot Instead of using the pegs we are going to use the Bights to tie our next Turks Head Knot
Step 12 Mapping the Bottom KnotDo the same thing for the bottom band but you must make sure your numbers on top and bottom line up So 1 on top should be the same position as 1 on the bottom
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 13 Adding the last knotAgain using the Turks Head Cookbook and the threaded needle you are going to follow the instructions going over and under as indicated in the book Be sure to usegloves when ever you handle the bottle
Step 14 Thats ItFor this Turks Head Knot I am using a 20 Bight by 19 Lead knot
Because of the amount of cord you are working with your cord will get twisted and knotted You will have to un-twist the cord often Its a pain in the rear but it has to bedone And it has to be done alot
Continue to tie the knot until you finish the knot If you have the cord and the patience you can double or triple the knot When you are done use your needle to hide theends under your bands Cut the ends and your DONE
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Related Instructables
Monkeys FistFloatingKeychain byjokerlz
How To Make ATurks headKnot WithParacord byDoggie Stylish
Tying Trivetsout of Rope forHoliday Gifts bykylemarsh
Paracord KnotDisplay Bord byJamie bagn
How to Make ATurks Head(Photos) bymchs60chip
A pocket full ofknots byKiteman
Monkeys fistknot AND themonkey byjonathan111
TiteTie is theTruckers Knoton Steroids bytitetie
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Larks head noose -- an easy useful knot that tightens and loosensby Larry Breed on February 19 2009
Intro Larks head noose -- an easy useful knot that tightens and loosensI thought I knew all the basic knots but then I was taught this incredibly useful simple knot Its good for tying up the neck of a bag that you want to repeatedly open andsecurely close Its good for tying around a springy bundle that will need tightening and retightening And its easy to undo
Ive looked at knot literature but havent found a name for this so I named it The basic knot is well known its called a larks head Since all Ive done is to slip the twoends through the larks head to make a noose I call it that
WARNING Dont use this knot when human safety would depend on it Climbers and mountaineers have well-tested reliable knots for such situations
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Image Notes1 To tighten further step on this side of the larks head and pull the free ends
Step 1 Double the cord overThe larks head noose requires enough cord to go twice around your bundle plus a foot or two Find the center and double it over Sailors call this a bight
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 2 Form the larks headComing from below the bight hook your thumb and forefinger over the two sides Reach outward and downward and pinch your fingertips together underneath thedoubled cord
Youve made a larks head Move the crossing cord a little farther from your hand so theres a clear opening through the two half-loops
Step 3 Form the nooseSlip the two ends of the cord through the opening we were just talking about Pull the larks head tight so it grips the two cords Find something that needs constrictingand put the noose around it
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 4 Tightening retightening and lockingSlide the knot against the bundle If its not tight enough to keep from slipping tighten it by holding it in one hand and tugging on the cords one at a time with the otherhand Notice that you can slide the knot out again for instance to re-open the bag you just tied shut For some applications this may be as tight as you need it
A springy bundle probably still feels loose If so compress the bundle and get a new grip on the cords Rest your foot on the bundle on the cords nearest the larks headand pull to slide the larks head tighter
To make the knot more permanent you can lock it Make an overhand in the cord ends (Exactly like the first step in tying shoelaces) With your foot still on the bundlepull on the cords and move your hands apart until youre pulling in opposite directions You have just locked the larks head and you can trust it to stay that way()
But lets say that later on you want to loosen the locked knot Again put your foot on the bundle and cords nearest the larks head hold the two cord ends together andpull This makes a little slack between the overhand and the larks head so you can untie the overhand
In twine or small string the locking overhand knot may be difficult to undo Use a shoelace knot instead of an overhand and itll unlock easily
() If youre using slippery cord like polypropylene an overhand may not lock securely You may want to tie another overhand knot For added security wrap a shortlength of duct tape around the two cords close to the knot
Image Notes1 To tighten further step on this side of the larks head and pull the free ends
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Related Instructables
TRX fromParacordChallengeAccepted bythrake
A pocket full ofknots byKiteman
Lens CapLanyard by~teknoarsonist~ how to tie a
noose byawesume
AdjustableParacordGlassesLanyard byjdtwelve12
HangmansNoose PackClosure byPopEye42
Paraleash - ADog LeashFrom Paracordby The Ideanator
How to make arugged andhandy ParacordBelt by Jake22
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Image Notes1 the end of step 6
Image Notes1 main line2 end line3 step 1
Image Notes1 main line loop2 end line loop
Image Notes1 step 3
Image Notes1 step 4
Image Notes1 step 4 at the end with a double half hitch on the main loop
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Image Notes1 pull here2 step 5
Image Notes1 the start of step 6
Image Notes1 the end of step 6
Image Notes1 step 72 now the rest of the line is free to do more work
Related Instructables
Paracord KnotDisplay Bord byJamie bagn
ChokelessAdjustableParacord DogLeash byPizzaman101
ParacordLadder wWooden Rungsby josestude
tie a paracordshackle grip byitri45
ParacordPrussik Belt byJavaNut13
TiteTie is theTruckers Knoton Steroids bytitetie
ID Lanyard(Photos) byeschmunk
Dog Toys forHeavy Chewersby J3443RY
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Figure 8 knot and double 8 knotby jonathan111 on November 28 2007
Intro Figure 8 knot and double 8 knotI will show you how to tie a figure 8 knot and a figure 8 follow through
Step 1 Stating the knotThis is a simple knot so just follow the pictures
Step 2 Finishing the knotCross the string under and then push it through the hole Pull tightly unless you are going to do the follow through and leave it somewhat loose
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 3 The follow through knotThe follow through knot should be tied around something brought back and followed through the path of the 8 knot Look at the pictures Basically follow through the 8knot backwards
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Related Instructables
Climb Safe WithA Figure 8Knot by mattste A pocket full of
knots byKiteman
How to Tie aFigure EightKnot byTactical_Pyro
Paracord KnotDisplay Bord byJamie bagn
Cross KnotParacordLanyard byStormdrane
How to Tie aFire-escapeKnot by leonardoismael
Truckers HitchTHE mostawesome knoton the planetby schneidp20
Paracord ZipperPuller byrepeet13
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Truckers Hitch THE most awesome knot on the planetby schneidp20 on October 12 2008
Authorschneidp20I like building stuff Trouble is there just isnt enough time to build everything Sigh
Intro Truckers Hitch THE most awesome knot on the planetYes I know that there are plenty of other cool knots out there many of which I literally couldnt live wo I rock climb However this knot is unlike any other Plus Ineeded a grabber for my Instructable -) (BTW this ISNT a climbing knot) And in truth it isnt a knot by itself but rather a system of common knots
Have you ever tried to tie something down for transporting but just couldnt get the lines tight andor during transport the lines would continually loosen Then this is theknot for you I learned this knot back in the 70s when specialty car racks and ratchet straps were rare or unheard of I initially used it to tie a canoe on a car rack bothattaching to the rack as well as the lines to the bow and stern of the canoe Even with all the new gizmos available today this knot still shines because all you need is arope and ropes dont hum in the wind like straps
The unique aspect of this knot is that it gives you a 2-1 mechanical advantage when tightening the rope Be careful though You can actually damage some thingsbecause of the mechanical advantage This knot holds fast and is easy to untie hallmark traits of any good knot
Below you see the finished knot system well break it apart in the steps that follow
Image Notes1 1st anchor point a bowline2 loop3 securing knots 2 half hitches4 securing loose end with a fishermans knot5 2nd anchor point (should be round)
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Image Notes1 X marks the spot
Step 1 Initial setupThe first step is to anchor one end of the rope and then loop the rope around a 2nd anchor point
For attaching to the 1st anchor point I chose bowline a close 2 on my list -) There are other instructables on that one so I wont bore you here
The 2nd anchor really should be round because it serves as a pulley in this block and tackle type knot Ive used it on sharp anchor points and it doesnt work as well
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 2 Creating a slip knotTie a slip knot somewhere between the two anchor points Correct placement of the slip knot takes some experience to judge it correctly Typically I place it too close tothe 2nd anchor point and end up with not enough room to work with If the knot ends up too far from 2nd anchor point you can extend the knot by enlarging the loop
Be sure you tie the slip knot as shown You may not be able to untie other knots
In this small example the slip knot is uncharacteristically close to the 1st anchor point
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 3 Tightening and securingThe loose end of the rope that went around the 2nd anchor point goes through the slip knot loop Pull the loose end to the desired tension and secure with two halfhitches
Note To allow better view of the knots the rope isnt really tightened in this example
Step 4 Securing loose endThe final knot is just to secure the loose end somehow I chose a fishermans knot to do this
To tie a fishermans knot the rope goes around twice and goes under the X created by the loops Pull the loose end to tighten Finally slide the knot to put tension onthe half hitches
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Image Notes1 X marks the spot
Step 5 FinishedThere you have it I guarantee that the first time you really use this knot (not just practice) you will be amazed at how well it works and youll wish you knew this knot along time ago You may even come over to my side and declare that is is THE most awesome knot on the planet -)
Enjoy and happy haulingDave
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Related Instructables
TiteTie is theTruckers Knoton Steroids bytitetie
Four knots tomake paracordinto a usefultool byerik_mccray
Modify yourbike rack tocarry a sunfishor other boat byewilhelm
SurfboardHammock byGermy
GiganticHalloweenSpider Web bynolte919
How To Tie ASpiders Hitch(video) by back-cast
Three-hitch mathair ornamentby michiexile TRX from
ParacordChallengeAccepted bythrake
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Carry any Bottle with a JUG KNOT Handleby hpstoutharrow on September 17 2009
Intro Carry any Bottle with a JUG KNOT HandleTie a JUG KNOT around a water bottle soda bottle or aluminum bottle to make a secure carrying strap
Re-purpose any container into a reusable water bottle by adding a convenient carrying strap This Instructable will demonstrate how to tie a JUG knot which like its namesuggests is meant to properly secure around the neck of a container
With some cord and the knowledge of this knot you will be able add a handle lanyard or carabiner loop to any of your favorite beverages to carry them on the go
It works perfectly for those disposable water bottles and who knows once you add some colorful cord to the plain old clear water bottle you just might beinclined to refill it and use it again(Check out pictures 4amp5 below)
In addition to plastic beverage bottles like pop water and sports drinks you can turn those rugged aluminum beer bottles into a backpacking canteen
Those of you familiar with my previous aluminum bottle InstructablesROLLED RIM METAL TUMBLERhttpwwwinstructablescomidAluminum-Bottle-Tumbler-Cup-Cook-PotALUMINUM BOTTLE LIGHTWEIGHT ALCOHOL STOVEhttpwwwinstructablescomidAluminum-Bottle-Alcohol-Stovewill recognize the water canteen shown below as a re-purposed aluminum beer bottle Here I have added a painted surface treatment to turn it into a proper lookingwater bottle More on that in steps 13 14 15
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 1 Getting StartedCord size is important Select a small medium weight cord like the one shown here It is a general purpose camp cord sold at most sporting goods stores (shoelacesmight also work)
Do not use a heavy cord or rope because the larger diameter will not tuck under the relatively small lip at the top of the bottleneck and the bottle will fall out
Also the smaller cord cinches tight on itself and will not loosen accidentally
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 2 Form a BightThe next steps show how to tie a JUG KNOT It is the basic step for adding a carrying strap It is also the anchor point for any additional fancy bottle trussing you maywant to add
JUG KNOT Step 1
Form a Bight in the center of a length of cord Bight is a knot term for a loop or bend in the rope In this case the main Bight in this knot is highlighted with a white mark Imakes it easier to follow its path in these steps
The running ends of the cord should be equal length
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 3 Pull the Bight downPULL the Bight DOWN forming two Loops
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 4 Cross the LoopsCROSS the right Loop OVER the left Loop
Step 5 Pass the Bight under the 1st loopTake the main Bight and pass it UNDER the left Loop
Step 6 Weave the BightWEAVE the Bight OVER the portion of the right Loop and UNDER the portion of the left Loop
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 7 Extend the BightExtend the Bight OVER the outer portion of the right Loop
Step 8 Flip the Right Loop behindAdditional colored identification points have been added to the loops to follow their travel in these next two steps
The right Loop Yellow marker is FLIPPED BEHIND the knot and ends up on the far left side of the knot
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 9 Flip the 2nd loop in frontRaise the green marker (located on what was formerly the left loop) and pull it down and to the right FLIPPING IT IN FRONT of the knot
Note the blue portion of the this loop will pass around the outside of the yellow portion of the first loop
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Image Notes1 Center of knot that will tighten around the bottles neck
Step 10 Remove SlackNote where the blue green amp yellow markers end up
Start to remove the slack in the loops by pulling the original main Bight (white marker top right) and the two free standing ends at the bottom
the bottle neck will pass through the very center of the knot
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Image Notes1 Center of knot that will tighten around the bottles neck
Step 11 Tighten the KnotAfter removing the slack insert the bottle neck and finish tightening
The knot should look like this before slipping it over the bottle
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 12 Secure on bottle neckThis is the finished knot shown on the neck of various containers
The loop end and the two free standing ends can be tied together to create a carrying handle (last picture below)
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 13 Aluminum Bottle Water Bottle
The next few steps show the features of an aluminum beer bottle re-purposed as a water bottle canteen It is one of many containers that can be reused as a camp waterbottle
The bottle was lightly sanded masked and then pained with a hammered finished paint to create an interesting surface texture
Image Notes1 Textured finish paint makes an interesting grip-able surface2 Masked with tape for painting3 Masked with tape for painting
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Image Notes1 Dowel used for holding the bottle during painting
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 14 Tethered Cork StopperUse a wine bottle man made Cork as a stopper for your aluminum water bottleNote Use a cork that was removed from the wine bottle without the corkscrew penetrating through the bottom end of the cork (A hole all the way through the cork willcause it to leak) Use the unpierced end of the cork inside the water bottle
Drill a hole through the sides of the Cork Thread the cord through the hole to the center of the cord Use the cork as the main Bight and tie the Jug knot as shown inthe beginning steps
Now the cork is tethered to the bottle and will not get lost or fall on the ground
A Carabiner clip passes through the other cord end to attache the water bottle to you belt or pack
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 15 Trussed for TransportThis is another hanging method for carrying your aluminum bottle water canteen A Jug knot is tied conventionally around the neck
The running ends of the knot however are pulled down towards the bottom of the bottle A Barrel Knot is tied about 34 the way down the side of the bottle A squareknot is tied on the bottom of the knot to keep the two running ends tight against the sides of the bottle
I like the look of the accent colored cord running down the sides of the bottle and the fact that the bottle hangs from the belt upside down It adds to its uniqueness
The last picture shows another truss variation
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 16 AdvancedBelow is a bottle with some additional trussing You can be creative as you want It all starts with a re-purposed container and the Jug Knot (and enough cord)
Related Instructables
AluminumBottle TumblerCup amp Cook Potfor an AlcoholStove byhpstoutharrow
Water BottleBelt Clip byuglymike Duct Tape
Water Bottle byrabidsquire2
AluminumBottle AlcoholStove byhpstoutharrow
DIYGlass WaterBottle byCulturespy
Solar WaterHeater forBackpackingUsing WaterBottles and aCar Shade bykopomeroy
Duct tape waterbottle holder(Photos) by pinkmarshmallow
How to make aCamelPack withan old plasticbottle bywillrandship
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Basic Knots Guideby zorro3355 on April 29 2008
Intro Basic Knots Guidehi
Step 1 Thumb knotThe most simple knotUsed as a stopper and prevent ropes from fraying
Step 2 Reef KnotUsed to tie two ropes of equal thickness togetherIt is pretty easy to tie and untie but under tentionit may be diffcult to untieIt is also not sutible for smoothropes(egnylon ropes)
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 3 Figure of eightused as a stopperprevent ropes from fraying and its more secure than tumb knot its is also used to tie Caribinas to ropes and is often used in rock climbing
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 4 Timber hitchused for pulling logs
Step 5 Clove hitchUsed to tie a rope onto a pole or logThe pole must be roundThe pole lust be thicker then the rope itself
(greatly used during pioneering)
Step 6 Sheet bandused to tie ropes of different thickness together(works on same thickness of ropes too)
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 7 Sheep shankTo shorten RopesTo prevent middle fraying
Step 8 Slip knotWhippingUsed as a grip for pulling things(when tied on a stick or small pole)(marlin spike hitch)
Related Instructables
Rope Rings byhpstoutharrow
How to Tie aFigure EightKnot byTactical_Pyro
Whippin (WestCountry Style)by tim_n
SurvivalBracelet(Updated) bytevers94
HangmansNoose PackClosure byPopEye42
Turkey on aTripod byhpstoutharrow
SurvivalBracelet II bytevers94 Zigzag Spooling
Paracord (video)by Stormdrane
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
How to Tie a Fire-escape Knotby leonardo ismael on October 16 2007
Intro How to Tie a Fire-escape KnotThis knot is used by firemen in case of fires for example imagine a scene where the ladder on the firetruck messes up but people need to get down a five story buildingor more All they have is a long piece of rope they can safely get down with a secure knot like the fire-escape knot So why not learn it its easy to do and hard to untieif you tie it tightly
This is from the American Boys Handbook
Step 1 Get Your RopeFirst grab a piece of rope and bend it like this to make a loop in it Follow every step to the smallest detail
Step 2 Twist the RopeNow make a twist like this and hold it together
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 3 Pull Through the TwistPull the loop through the twist you just made from underneath
Step 4 Go Over the Split EndNow pull the tail through the loop
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 5 FinallyAnd finally just pull it through as pictured below
Congratulations you just learned the fire-escape knot
Step 6 Same Name Not KnotThis is another knot called the fire-escape knot this shouldnt be your result
Related Instructables
House FireEscape Plan(video) byWhatHappensNowAdvice
ParacordLadder wWooden Rungsby josestude
Bed SheetEscape Rope byjessehensel
rope ladder(glow-in-the-dark version) bymikeasaurus
HeadlockEscape 2(video) byjohnnyrockstah
QuickFirestarter byMattandJora
Trail sauna byjakee117
How to Kill FireAnts andCommitGenocide byKentsOkay
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Climb Safe With A Figure 8 Knotby mattste on February 23 2010
Intro Climb Safe With A Figure 8 Knot There are many things that a beginning climber needs to know including several important knots Perhaps the most essential knot is the Figure 8 Follow Through Thistutorial will demonstrate how to correctly harness yourself to a rope using a Figure 8 Follow Through knot This knot is used primarily by rock climbers to provide a life-line Since this knot is used as a life-line it is very important to be able to tie it correctly (Your life could depend upon it)
Dont worry with this tutorial and about 5 minutes of practice you can have this knot mastered
Things you will need
- Climbing Harness- Climbing Rope
If you are wanting to go climbing and dont already have these items they can be purchased for about $25 each at most outdoor sporting goods stores If you are merelylooking to learn the knot a belt loop and a rope (about five feet long) will do
Image Notes1 Climbing Harness2 Climbing Rope
Step 1 Dealing With The RopeThroughout this tutorial I will be discussing different parts of the rope To make these instructions as clear as possible I will define a few terms that I will use throughoutthe tutorial The Anchor End of the rope will generally be at the top of the images This is the end that would be anchored to the wall or rock and does not move Wewill not be doing much with the anchored end The Tail End of the rope is the opposite end that we will be dealing with I will call this the tail for short
Now that we have some terms to work with lets get started
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 2 Tying The First Figure 8This knot has several parts to it The first part of the knot is just tying a basic figure 8 To tie the first figure 8 there are four simple steps
1 - Using the tail make a loop over the rope (as shown in the first picture) keeping in mind that there should be about 3 ft of slack on the tail end
2 - Wrap the tail back this time go under the anchored end (As shown in the second picture)
3 - Bring the tail down through the first loop (As shown in the third picture)
4 - Finally pull the two ends to make the knot a little bit tighter and easier to deal with (Shown in the fourth picture)
After these four steps you should end up with a knot that resembles a figure 8
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 3 Looping Into The Harness In order to secure the rope to the harness simply thread the tail end of the rope through the front loop in the harness as shown in the picture below This step isobviously very important
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 4 Following Back Through The Figure 8After looping the rope through the harness you have to thread the tail end of the rope back through the knot following the first figure 8 I have divided this process intofive smaller steps in order to make it more clear
1 - Coming form underneath the knot bring the tail up through the near loop and to the left behind the anchored end of the rope (Shown in the first picture)
2 - Wrap the tail around the anchored end back to the right and down through the adjacent loop (Shown in the second picture)
3 - You simply need to bring the tail back over the top of the knot to the left (Shown in the third picture)
4 - Bring the tail end up through the far loop following the anchored end (Shown in the fourth picture)
5 - Finally pull the knot tight (Shown in the fifth picture)
As you can see the first four pictures are simply tracing the knot back through with the tail end
For the last part while you pull the knot tight you may want to make small adjustments and rearrange how it all fits together If the knot does not lay perfectly smoothand tight its NOT a big deal
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 5 Finishing The Knot After completing the Figure 8 knot you will want to somehow secure the tail end of the rope out of the way There are a couple different ways to do this the way that Iwill demonstrate is using whats called a Stopper Knot This secondary knot is similar to a Fishermans knot and is pretty simple I have once again divided thisprocess into several smaller steps
1 - Start by wrapping the tail end around the anchored end (As shown in the first picture)
2 - Wrap the tail back underneath the two vertical segments (As shown in the second picture)
3 - Simply repeat the first two steps wrapping the tail around again (As shown in the third picture)
4 - This step in the fourth picture may look complicated but all you need to do is insert the tail up through the two loops that you have just made
5 - To finish off the knot you will want to slowly pull the tail end while gently pushing the bottom of the stopper knot upwards If you have successfully completed this knotit should look something like the fifth picture
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 6 Ready To Climb Now that you have mastered the Figure 8 knot you can securely harness yourself into a climbing rope Remember there are many other skills that go into setting up ananchor and belaying a climber This tutorial only covers the figure 8 knot For more information there are many great websites that demonstrate how to correctly set up asafe climbing system (Ive posted a few below) If you are a beginning climber I recommend that you read up on a few other climbing techniques Also you shouldprobably go to a climbing wall or gym where there are experienced climbers that can show you the ropes Hopefully this tutorial has been helpful Have fun and be safe
Some useful linkshttpwwwstephenprattnetAnchorsanchorshtmhttpwwwuoregonedu~oppclimbingtopicsanchorshtmlhttpwwwabc-of-rockclimbingcomhowtoclimbingtechniquesasp
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Related Instructables
How to Tie aFigure EightKnot byTactical_Pyro
Paracord KnotDisplay Bord byJamie bagn
Basic KnotsGuide byzorro3355
How to Climb aTree (withprussiks) bystasterisk
How to climb atree (using onlyrope) thefunsimple wayby louieaw
How to get arope into a tree(withoutclimbing it) byvitex
How to tievarious knots byadaviel
How to make arope swing byjdub0928
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Turks Head Knots on a Bottleby sklnxbones on July 6 2010
Intro Turks Head Knots on a BottleThis is the finished project A bottle decorated with three Turks Head Knots There are only three knots on this bottle The RED and the BLUE knots are each a 20 Bightby 3 Lead Turks Head Knots The WHITE knot is a 20 Bight by 19 Lead Turks Head Knot
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 1 Supplies
Cord Lots and Lots of cord I cant tell you how much each bottle is differentBottle Washed and Dried inside and out Make sure to remove all water spotsThreaded Needle Cord screws into the threads at the base of the needlePegs I use brass rivets used as a map to tie the Turks Head KnotsHole Punch Used to punch holes in the painters tape to hold the pegsPainters Tape To hold the pegs in place and to make your map for the Turks Head KnotsMarker To write on the painters tapeCloth Towel To remove finger prints and dirt from your bottleKrazy Glue or Super Glue This is used to secure the knots in place to the bottle
OPTIONAL BUT HIGHLY RECOMMENDEDI use the Turks Head Cookbook from KnotToolcom
Step 2 PreparationYou will need to find a bottle you like I used an empty instant tea bottle of course washed and dried (I like to put the bottle in the oven for a few minutes to dry the insidewithout water spots Take off the lid and do not put lid in the oven) Now measure the circumference of the bottle Take a cord and tightly wrap the cord around the bottleMark where the ends meet and use a ruler to measure the length of the cord For my instant tea bottle the circumference is 27cm I know from past knots that I have tiedthat I want my knot to have 20 Bights in the top and bottom (bands) knots I am going to use the Bights in the (bands) knots to tie the middle knot Now divide the numberof Bights (20) into the size of the circumference (27) to get the space between each Bight (135) With me so far
Now take two pieces of painters tape using a ruler measure out the length of the circumference and mark the length on the both pieces of tape Next you will mark thespace between each Bight on the tape
Step 3 Adding the PegsI like to use pegs when tying Turks Head Knots it just makes tying the knot easier
These are what I use for pegs
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 4 Adding Pegs to the TapeNow take a hole punch to cut holes in the tape where the lines meet You will place the pegs in the holes
Insert a peg in each hole and carefully stick the first piece of tape to the bottle
Step 5 Adding the 2nd row of pegsNow do the same thing with the second piece of tape The numbers on each piece of tape must line up
This picture shows you what you should have now This odd looking thing will be your map to tie the Turks Head Knot And this is the end of Step 1
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 6 Tying the first Turks Head KnotUsing the Turks Head Cookbook follow the numbers going over and under as indicated in the book I chose a 20 Bight by 3 Lead knot which will give me a nice bandaround the bottle Once the ends meet you have made one complete knot Tape the running end of your cord and start removing the pegs and the tape
Step 7 Remove the pegs and the tapeBe careful not to untie the knot as you remove the pegs and tape from the bottle Continue to remove all the pegs and remove the tape from the bottle At this point theknot will be very loose and will need to be tightened up
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 8 Remove the slack from the knotHere you can see just how much the knot expanded Starting with the standing end begin to pull the slack out of the knot going towards the running end of the cordDo not expect to pull all the slack out at once You may have to make 3 - 5 attempts at removing the slack out of the knot DO NOT remove all of the slack out of the knotIn order to make the bands we will have to triple the Turks Head Knot We will do this by following the knot three times The threaded needle will really come in handyhere
Step 9 Triple the KnotOnce you have made three passes of the Turks Head Knot use your needle to go under your knot about half the circumference and cut the cord The knot will be tightenough to hide the tail in placeTIP I carefully add a couple of drops of super glue UNDER the band to hold them in place and keep them from sliding around in the nextsteps A drop or two in 3 or 4 places around the band should be enough
Step 10 Add the second knotNow repeat this whole step for the second bandWhen tying the second band you must make sure the Bights line up to the first band This is crucial for the next stepWipe down the bottle to make sure all your finger prints and adhesive from the tape are all removed You want to make sure your bottle is clean at this point Any dirt orfinger prints left on the bottle will be almost impossible to remove From this point on we will use gloves when tying our last knot
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 11 Maping the Top KnotStick a piece of painters tape on top of your first band leaving the bottom of the knot exposedUse a marker to count the number of Bights in your knot Instead of using the pegs we are going to use the Bights to tie our next Turks Head Knot
Step 12 Mapping the Bottom KnotDo the same thing for the bottom band but you must make sure your numbers on top and bottom line up So 1 on top should be the same position as 1 on the bottom
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 13 Adding the last knotAgain using the Turks Head Cookbook and the threaded needle you are going to follow the instructions going over and under as indicated in the book Be sure to usegloves when ever you handle the bottle
Step 14 Thats ItFor this Turks Head Knot I am using a 20 Bight by 19 Lead knot
Because of the amount of cord you are working with your cord will get twisted and knotted You will have to un-twist the cord often Its a pain in the rear but it has to bedone And it has to be done alot
Continue to tie the knot until you finish the knot If you have the cord and the patience you can double or triple the knot When you are done use your needle to hide theends under your bands Cut the ends and your DONE
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Related Instructables
Monkeys FistFloatingKeychain byjokerlz
How To Make ATurks headKnot WithParacord byDoggie Stylish
Tying Trivetsout of Rope forHoliday Gifts bykylemarsh
Paracord KnotDisplay Bord byJamie bagn
How to Make ATurks Head(Photos) bymchs60chip
A pocket full ofknots byKiteman
Monkeys fistknot AND themonkey byjonathan111
TiteTie is theTruckers Knoton Steroids bytitetie
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Larks head noose -- an easy useful knot that tightens and loosensby Larry Breed on February 19 2009
Intro Larks head noose -- an easy useful knot that tightens and loosensI thought I knew all the basic knots but then I was taught this incredibly useful simple knot Its good for tying up the neck of a bag that you want to repeatedly open andsecurely close Its good for tying around a springy bundle that will need tightening and retightening And its easy to undo
Ive looked at knot literature but havent found a name for this so I named it The basic knot is well known its called a larks head Since all Ive done is to slip the twoends through the larks head to make a noose I call it that
WARNING Dont use this knot when human safety would depend on it Climbers and mountaineers have well-tested reliable knots for such situations
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Image Notes1 To tighten further step on this side of the larks head and pull the free ends
Step 1 Double the cord overThe larks head noose requires enough cord to go twice around your bundle plus a foot or two Find the center and double it over Sailors call this a bight
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 2 Form the larks headComing from below the bight hook your thumb and forefinger over the two sides Reach outward and downward and pinch your fingertips together underneath thedoubled cord
Youve made a larks head Move the crossing cord a little farther from your hand so theres a clear opening through the two half-loops
Step 3 Form the nooseSlip the two ends of the cord through the opening we were just talking about Pull the larks head tight so it grips the two cords Find something that needs constrictingand put the noose around it
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 4 Tightening retightening and lockingSlide the knot against the bundle If its not tight enough to keep from slipping tighten it by holding it in one hand and tugging on the cords one at a time with the otherhand Notice that you can slide the knot out again for instance to re-open the bag you just tied shut For some applications this may be as tight as you need it
A springy bundle probably still feels loose If so compress the bundle and get a new grip on the cords Rest your foot on the bundle on the cords nearest the larks headand pull to slide the larks head tighter
To make the knot more permanent you can lock it Make an overhand in the cord ends (Exactly like the first step in tying shoelaces) With your foot still on the bundlepull on the cords and move your hands apart until youre pulling in opposite directions You have just locked the larks head and you can trust it to stay that way()
But lets say that later on you want to loosen the locked knot Again put your foot on the bundle and cords nearest the larks head hold the two cord ends together andpull This makes a little slack between the overhand and the larks head so you can untie the overhand
In twine or small string the locking overhand knot may be difficult to undo Use a shoelace knot instead of an overhand and itll unlock easily
() If youre using slippery cord like polypropylene an overhand may not lock securely You may want to tie another overhand knot For added security wrap a shortlength of duct tape around the two cords close to the knot
Image Notes1 To tighten further step on this side of the larks head and pull the free ends
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Related Instructables
TRX fromParacordChallengeAccepted bythrake
A pocket full ofknots byKiteman
Lens CapLanyard by~teknoarsonist~ how to tie a
noose byawesume
AdjustableParacordGlassesLanyard byjdtwelve12
HangmansNoose PackClosure byPopEye42
Paraleash - ADog LeashFrom Paracordby The Ideanator
How to make arugged andhandy ParacordBelt by Jake22
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Image Notes1 pull here2 step 5
Image Notes1 the start of step 6
Image Notes1 the end of step 6
Image Notes1 step 72 now the rest of the line is free to do more work
Related Instructables
Paracord KnotDisplay Bord byJamie bagn
ChokelessAdjustableParacord DogLeash byPizzaman101
ParacordLadder wWooden Rungsby josestude
tie a paracordshackle grip byitri45
ParacordPrussik Belt byJavaNut13
TiteTie is theTruckers Knoton Steroids bytitetie
ID Lanyard(Photos) byeschmunk
Dog Toys forHeavy Chewersby J3443RY
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Figure 8 knot and double 8 knotby jonathan111 on November 28 2007
Intro Figure 8 knot and double 8 knotI will show you how to tie a figure 8 knot and a figure 8 follow through
Step 1 Stating the knotThis is a simple knot so just follow the pictures
Step 2 Finishing the knotCross the string under and then push it through the hole Pull tightly unless you are going to do the follow through and leave it somewhat loose
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 3 The follow through knotThe follow through knot should be tied around something brought back and followed through the path of the 8 knot Look at the pictures Basically follow through the 8knot backwards
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Related Instructables
Climb Safe WithA Figure 8Knot by mattste A pocket full of
knots byKiteman
How to Tie aFigure EightKnot byTactical_Pyro
Paracord KnotDisplay Bord byJamie bagn
Cross KnotParacordLanyard byStormdrane
How to Tie aFire-escapeKnot by leonardoismael
Truckers HitchTHE mostawesome knoton the planetby schneidp20
Paracord ZipperPuller byrepeet13
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Truckers Hitch THE most awesome knot on the planetby schneidp20 on October 12 2008
Authorschneidp20I like building stuff Trouble is there just isnt enough time to build everything Sigh
Intro Truckers Hitch THE most awesome knot on the planetYes I know that there are plenty of other cool knots out there many of which I literally couldnt live wo I rock climb However this knot is unlike any other Plus Ineeded a grabber for my Instructable -) (BTW this ISNT a climbing knot) And in truth it isnt a knot by itself but rather a system of common knots
Have you ever tried to tie something down for transporting but just couldnt get the lines tight andor during transport the lines would continually loosen Then this is theknot for you I learned this knot back in the 70s when specialty car racks and ratchet straps were rare or unheard of I initially used it to tie a canoe on a car rack bothattaching to the rack as well as the lines to the bow and stern of the canoe Even with all the new gizmos available today this knot still shines because all you need is arope and ropes dont hum in the wind like straps
The unique aspect of this knot is that it gives you a 2-1 mechanical advantage when tightening the rope Be careful though You can actually damage some thingsbecause of the mechanical advantage This knot holds fast and is easy to untie hallmark traits of any good knot
Below you see the finished knot system well break it apart in the steps that follow
Image Notes1 1st anchor point a bowline2 loop3 securing knots 2 half hitches4 securing loose end with a fishermans knot5 2nd anchor point (should be round)
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Image Notes1 X marks the spot
Step 1 Initial setupThe first step is to anchor one end of the rope and then loop the rope around a 2nd anchor point
For attaching to the 1st anchor point I chose bowline a close 2 on my list -) There are other instructables on that one so I wont bore you here
The 2nd anchor really should be round because it serves as a pulley in this block and tackle type knot Ive used it on sharp anchor points and it doesnt work as well
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 2 Creating a slip knotTie a slip knot somewhere between the two anchor points Correct placement of the slip knot takes some experience to judge it correctly Typically I place it too close tothe 2nd anchor point and end up with not enough room to work with If the knot ends up too far from 2nd anchor point you can extend the knot by enlarging the loop
Be sure you tie the slip knot as shown You may not be able to untie other knots
In this small example the slip knot is uncharacteristically close to the 1st anchor point
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 3 Tightening and securingThe loose end of the rope that went around the 2nd anchor point goes through the slip knot loop Pull the loose end to the desired tension and secure with two halfhitches
Note To allow better view of the knots the rope isnt really tightened in this example
Step 4 Securing loose endThe final knot is just to secure the loose end somehow I chose a fishermans knot to do this
To tie a fishermans knot the rope goes around twice and goes under the X created by the loops Pull the loose end to tighten Finally slide the knot to put tension onthe half hitches
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Image Notes1 X marks the spot
Step 5 FinishedThere you have it I guarantee that the first time you really use this knot (not just practice) you will be amazed at how well it works and youll wish you knew this knot along time ago You may even come over to my side and declare that is is THE most awesome knot on the planet -)
Enjoy and happy haulingDave
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Related Instructables
TiteTie is theTruckers Knoton Steroids bytitetie
Four knots tomake paracordinto a usefultool byerik_mccray
Modify yourbike rack tocarry a sunfishor other boat byewilhelm
SurfboardHammock byGermy
GiganticHalloweenSpider Web bynolte919
How To Tie ASpiders Hitch(video) by back-cast
Three-hitch mathair ornamentby michiexile TRX from
ParacordChallengeAccepted bythrake
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Carry any Bottle with a JUG KNOT Handleby hpstoutharrow on September 17 2009
Intro Carry any Bottle with a JUG KNOT HandleTie a JUG KNOT around a water bottle soda bottle or aluminum bottle to make a secure carrying strap
Re-purpose any container into a reusable water bottle by adding a convenient carrying strap This Instructable will demonstrate how to tie a JUG knot which like its namesuggests is meant to properly secure around the neck of a container
With some cord and the knowledge of this knot you will be able add a handle lanyard or carabiner loop to any of your favorite beverages to carry them on the go
It works perfectly for those disposable water bottles and who knows once you add some colorful cord to the plain old clear water bottle you just might beinclined to refill it and use it again(Check out pictures 4amp5 below)
In addition to plastic beverage bottles like pop water and sports drinks you can turn those rugged aluminum beer bottles into a backpacking canteen
Those of you familiar with my previous aluminum bottle InstructablesROLLED RIM METAL TUMBLERhttpwwwinstructablescomidAluminum-Bottle-Tumbler-Cup-Cook-PotALUMINUM BOTTLE LIGHTWEIGHT ALCOHOL STOVEhttpwwwinstructablescomidAluminum-Bottle-Alcohol-Stovewill recognize the water canteen shown below as a re-purposed aluminum beer bottle Here I have added a painted surface treatment to turn it into a proper lookingwater bottle More on that in steps 13 14 15
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 1 Getting StartedCord size is important Select a small medium weight cord like the one shown here It is a general purpose camp cord sold at most sporting goods stores (shoelacesmight also work)
Do not use a heavy cord or rope because the larger diameter will not tuck under the relatively small lip at the top of the bottleneck and the bottle will fall out
Also the smaller cord cinches tight on itself and will not loosen accidentally
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 2 Form a BightThe next steps show how to tie a JUG KNOT It is the basic step for adding a carrying strap It is also the anchor point for any additional fancy bottle trussing you maywant to add
JUG KNOT Step 1
Form a Bight in the center of a length of cord Bight is a knot term for a loop or bend in the rope In this case the main Bight in this knot is highlighted with a white mark Imakes it easier to follow its path in these steps
The running ends of the cord should be equal length
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 3 Pull the Bight downPULL the Bight DOWN forming two Loops
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 4 Cross the LoopsCROSS the right Loop OVER the left Loop
Step 5 Pass the Bight under the 1st loopTake the main Bight and pass it UNDER the left Loop
Step 6 Weave the BightWEAVE the Bight OVER the portion of the right Loop and UNDER the portion of the left Loop
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 7 Extend the BightExtend the Bight OVER the outer portion of the right Loop
Step 8 Flip the Right Loop behindAdditional colored identification points have been added to the loops to follow their travel in these next two steps
The right Loop Yellow marker is FLIPPED BEHIND the knot and ends up on the far left side of the knot
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 9 Flip the 2nd loop in frontRaise the green marker (located on what was formerly the left loop) and pull it down and to the right FLIPPING IT IN FRONT of the knot
Note the blue portion of the this loop will pass around the outside of the yellow portion of the first loop
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Image Notes1 Center of knot that will tighten around the bottles neck
Step 10 Remove SlackNote where the blue green amp yellow markers end up
Start to remove the slack in the loops by pulling the original main Bight (white marker top right) and the two free standing ends at the bottom
the bottle neck will pass through the very center of the knot
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Image Notes1 Center of knot that will tighten around the bottles neck
Step 11 Tighten the KnotAfter removing the slack insert the bottle neck and finish tightening
The knot should look like this before slipping it over the bottle
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 12 Secure on bottle neckThis is the finished knot shown on the neck of various containers
The loop end and the two free standing ends can be tied together to create a carrying handle (last picture below)
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 13 Aluminum Bottle Water Bottle
The next few steps show the features of an aluminum beer bottle re-purposed as a water bottle canteen It is one of many containers that can be reused as a camp waterbottle
The bottle was lightly sanded masked and then pained with a hammered finished paint to create an interesting surface texture
Image Notes1 Textured finish paint makes an interesting grip-able surface2 Masked with tape for painting3 Masked with tape for painting
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Image Notes1 Dowel used for holding the bottle during painting
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 14 Tethered Cork StopperUse a wine bottle man made Cork as a stopper for your aluminum water bottleNote Use a cork that was removed from the wine bottle without the corkscrew penetrating through the bottom end of the cork (A hole all the way through the cork willcause it to leak) Use the unpierced end of the cork inside the water bottle
Drill a hole through the sides of the Cork Thread the cord through the hole to the center of the cord Use the cork as the main Bight and tie the Jug knot as shown inthe beginning steps
Now the cork is tethered to the bottle and will not get lost or fall on the ground
A Carabiner clip passes through the other cord end to attache the water bottle to you belt or pack
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 15 Trussed for TransportThis is another hanging method for carrying your aluminum bottle water canteen A Jug knot is tied conventionally around the neck
The running ends of the knot however are pulled down towards the bottom of the bottle A Barrel Knot is tied about 34 the way down the side of the bottle A squareknot is tied on the bottom of the knot to keep the two running ends tight against the sides of the bottle
I like the look of the accent colored cord running down the sides of the bottle and the fact that the bottle hangs from the belt upside down It adds to its uniqueness
The last picture shows another truss variation
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 16 AdvancedBelow is a bottle with some additional trussing You can be creative as you want It all starts with a re-purposed container and the Jug Knot (and enough cord)
Related Instructables
AluminumBottle TumblerCup amp Cook Potfor an AlcoholStove byhpstoutharrow
Water BottleBelt Clip byuglymike Duct Tape
Water Bottle byrabidsquire2
AluminumBottle AlcoholStove byhpstoutharrow
DIYGlass WaterBottle byCulturespy
Solar WaterHeater forBackpackingUsing WaterBottles and aCar Shade bykopomeroy
Duct tape waterbottle holder(Photos) by pinkmarshmallow
How to make aCamelPack withan old plasticbottle bywillrandship
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Basic Knots Guideby zorro3355 on April 29 2008
Intro Basic Knots Guidehi
Step 1 Thumb knotThe most simple knotUsed as a stopper and prevent ropes from fraying
Step 2 Reef KnotUsed to tie two ropes of equal thickness togetherIt is pretty easy to tie and untie but under tentionit may be diffcult to untieIt is also not sutible for smoothropes(egnylon ropes)
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 3 Figure of eightused as a stopperprevent ropes from fraying and its more secure than tumb knot its is also used to tie Caribinas to ropes and is often used in rock climbing
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 4 Timber hitchused for pulling logs
Step 5 Clove hitchUsed to tie a rope onto a pole or logThe pole must be roundThe pole lust be thicker then the rope itself
(greatly used during pioneering)
Step 6 Sheet bandused to tie ropes of different thickness together(works on same thickness of ropes too)
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 7 Sheep shankTo shorten RopesTo prevent middle fraying
Step 8 Slip knotWhippingUsed as a grip for pulling things(when tied on a stick or small pole)(marlin spike hitch)
Related Instructables
Rope Rings byhpstoutharrow
How to Tie aFigure EightKnot byTactical_Pyro
Whippin (WestCountry Style)by tim_n
SurvivalBracelet(Updated) bytevers94
HangmansNoose PackClosure byPopEye42
Turkey on aTripod byhpstoutharrow
SurvivalBracelet II bytevers94 Zigzag Spooling
Paracord (video)by Stormdrane
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
How to Tie a Fire-escape Knotby leonardo ismael on October 16 2007
Intro How to Tie a Fire-escape KnotThis knot is used by firemen in case of fires for example imagine a scene where the ladder on the firetruck messes up but people need to get down a five story buildingor more All they have is a long piece of rope they can safely get down with a secure knot like the fire-escape knot So why not learn it its easy to do and hard to untieif you tie it tightly
This is from the American Boys Handbook
Step 1 Get Your RopeFirst grab a piece of rope and bend it like this to make a loop in it Follow every step to the smallest detail
Step 2 Twist the RopeNow make a twist like this and hold it together
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 3 Pull Through the TwistPull the loop through the twist you just made from underneath
Step 4 Go Over the Split EndNow pull the tail through the loop
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 5 FinallyAnd finally just pull it through as pictured below
Congratulations you just learned the fire-escape knot
Step 6 Same Name Not KnotThis is another knot called the fire-escape knot this shouldnt be your result
Related Instructables
House FireEscape Plan(video) byWhatHappensNowAdvice
ParacordLadder wWooden Rungsby josestude
Bed SheetEscape Rope byjessehensel
rope ladder(glow-in-the-dark version) bymikeasaurus
HeadlockEscape 2(video) byjohnnyrockstah
QuickFirestarter byMattandJora
Trail sauna byjakee117
How to Kill FireAnts andCommitGenocide byKentsOkay
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Climb Safe With A Figure 8 Knotby mattste on February 23 2010
Intro Climb Safe With A Figure 8 Knot There are many things that a beginning climber needs to know including several important knots Perhaps the most essential knot is the Figure 8 Follow Through Thistutorial will demonstrate how to correctly harness yourself to a rope using a Figure 8 Follow Through knot This knot is used primarily by rock climbers to provide a life-line Since this knot is used as a life-line it is very important to be able to tie it correctly (Your life could depend upon it)
Dont worry with this tutorial and about 5 minutes of practice you can have this knot mastered
Things you will need
- Climbing Harness- Climbing Rope
If you are wanting to go climbing and dont already have these items they can be purchased for about $25 each at most outdoor sporting goods stores If you are merelylooking to learn the knot a belt loop and a rope (about five feet long) will do
Image Notes1 Climbing Harness2 Climbing Rope
Step 1 Dealing With The RopeThroughout this tutorial I will be discussing different parts of the rope To make these instructions as clear as possible I will define a few terms that I will use throughoutthe tutorial The Anchor End of the rope will generally be at the top of the images This is the end that would be anchored to the wall or rock and does not move Wewill not be doing much with the anchored end The Tail End of the rope is the opposite end that we will be dealing with I will call this the tail for short
Now that we have some terms to work with lets get started
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 2 Tying The First Figure 8This knot has several parts to it The first part of the knot is just tying a basic figure 8 To tie the first figure 8 there are four simple steps
1 - Using the tail make a loop over the rope (as shown in the first picture) keeping in mind that there should be about 3 ft of slack on the tail end
2 - Wrap the tail back this time go under the anchored end (As shown in the second picture)
3 - Bring the tail down through the first loop (As shown in the third picture)
4 - Finally pull the two ends to make the knot a little bit tighter and easier to deal with (Shown in the fourth picture)
After these four steps you should end up with a knot that resembles a figure 8
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 3 Looping Into The Harness In order to secure the rope to the harness simply thread the tail end of the rope through the front loop in the harness as shown in the picture below This step isobviously very important
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 4 Following Back Through The Figure 8After looping the rope through the harness you have to thread the tail end of the rope back through the knot following the first figure 8 I have divided this process intofive smaller steps in order to make it more clear
1 - Coming form underneath the knot bring the tail up through the near loop and to the left behind the anchored end of the rope (Shown in the first picture)
2 - Wrap the tail around the anchored end back to the right and down through the adjacent loop (Shown in the second picture)
3 - You simply need to bring the tail back over the top of the knot to the left (Shown in the third picture)
4 - Bring the tail end up through the far loop following the anchored end (Shown in the fourth picture)
5 - Finally pull the knot tight (Shown in the fifth picture)
As you can see the first four pictures are simply tracing the knot back through with the tail end
For the last part while you pull the knot tight you may want to make small adjustments and rearrange how it all fits together If the knot does not lay perfectly smoothand tight its NOT a big deal
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 5 Finishing The Knot After completing the Figure 8 knot you will want to somehow secure the tail end of the rope out of the way There are a couple different ways to do this the way that Iwill demonstrate is using whats called a Stopper Knot This secondary knot is similar to a Fishermans knot and is pretty simple I have once again divided thisprocess into several smaller steps
1 - Start by wrapping the tail end around the anchored end (As shown in the first picture)
2 - Wrap the tail back underneath the two vertical segments (As shown in the second picture)
3 - Simply repeat the first two steps wrapping the tail around again (As shown in the third picture)
4 - This step in the fourth picture may look complicated but all you need to do is insert the tail up through the two loops that you have just made
5 - To finish off the knot you will want to slowly pull the tail end while gently pushing the bottom of the stopper knot upwards If you have successfully completed this knotit should look something like the fifth picture
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 6 Ready To Climb Now that you have mastered the Figure 8 knot you can securely harness yourself into a climbing rope Remember there are many other skills that go into setting up ananchor and belaying a climber This tutorial only covers the figure 8 knot For more information there are many great websites that demonstrate how to correctly set up asafe climbing system (Ive posted a few below) If you are a beginning climber I recommend that you read up on a few other climbing techniques Also you shouldprobably go to a climbing wall or gym where there are experienced climbers that can show you the ropes Hopefully this tutorial has been helpful Have fun and be safe
Some useful linkshttpwwwstephenprattnetAnchorsanchorshtmhttpwwwuoregonedu~oppclimbingtopicsanchorshtmlhttpwwwabc-of-rockclimbingcomhowtoclimbingtechniquesasp
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Related Instructables
How to Tie aFigure EightKnot byTactical_Pyro
Paracord KnotDisplay Bord byJamie bagn
Basic KnotsGuide byzorro3355
How to Climb aTree (withprussiks) bystasterisk
How to climb atree (using onlyrope) thefunsimple wayby louieaw
How to get arope into a tree(withoutclimbing it) byvitex
How to tievarious knots byadaviel
How to make arope swing byjdub0928
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Turks Head Knots on a Bottleby sklnxbones on July 6 2010
Intro Turks Head Knots on a BottleThis is the finished project A bottle decorated with three Turks Head Knots There are only three knots on this bottle The RED and the BLUE knots are each a 20 Bightby 3 Lead Turks Head Knots The WHITE knot is a 20 Bight by 19 Lead Turks Head Knot
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 1 Supplies
Cord Lots and Lots of cord I cant tell you how much each bottle is differentBottle Washed and Dried inside and out Make sure to remove all water spotsThreaded Needle Cord screws into the threads at the base of the needlePegs I use brass rivets used as a map to tie the Turks Head KnotsHole Punch Used to punch holes in the painters tape to hold the pegsPainters Tape To hold the pegs in place and to make your map for the Turks Head KnotsMarker To write on the painters tapeCloth Towel To remove finger prints and dirt from your bottleKrazy Glue or Super Glue This is used to secure the knots in place to the bottle
OPTIONAL BUT HIGHLY RECOMMENDEDI use the Turks Head Cookbook from KnotToolcom
Step 2 PreparationYou will need to find a bottle you like I used an empty instant tea bottle of course washed and dried (I like to put the bottle in the oven for a few minutes to dry the insidewithout water spots Take off the lid and do not put lid in the oven) Now measure the circumference of the bottle Take a cord and tightly wrap the cord around the bottleMark where the ends meet and use a ruler to measure the length of the cord For my instant tea bottle the circumference is 27cm I know from past knots that I have tiedthat I want my knot to have 20 Bights in the top and bottom (bands) knots I am going to use the Bights in the (bands) knots to tie the middle knot Now divide the numberof Bights (20) into the size of the circumference (27) to get the space between each Bight (135) With me so far
Now take two pieces of painters tape using a ruler measure out the length of the circumference and mark the length on the both pieces of tape Next you will mark thespace between each Bight on the tape
Step 3 Adding the PegsI like to use pegs when tying Turks Head Knots it just makes tying the knot easier
These are what I use for pegs
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 4 Adding Pegs to the TapeNow take a hole punch to cut holes in the tape where the lines meet You will place the pegs in the holes
Insert a peg in each hole and carefully stick the first piece of tape to the bottle
Step 5 Adding the 2nd row of pegsNow do the same thing with the second piece of tape The numbers on each piece of tape must line up
This picture shows you what you should have now This odd looking thing will be your map to tie the Turks Head Knot And this is the end of Step 1
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 6 Tying the first Turks Head KnotUsing the Turks Head Cookbook follow the numbers going over and under as indicated in the book I chose a 20 Bight by 3 Lead knot which will give me a nice bandaround the bottle Once the ends meet you have made one complete knot Tape the running end of your cord and start removing the pegs and the tape
Step 7 Remove the pegs and the tapeBe careful not to untie the knot as you remove the pegs and tape from the bottle Continue to remove all the pegs and remove the tape from the bottle At this point theknot will be very loose and will need to be tightened up
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 8 Remove the slack from the knotHere you can see just how much the knot expanded Starting with the standing end begin to pull the slack out of the knot going towards the running end of the cordDo not expect to pull all the slack out at once You may have to make 3 - 5 attempts at removing the slack out of the knot DO NOT remove all of the slack out of the knotIn order to make the bands we will have to triple the Turks Head Knot We will do this by following the knot three times The threaded needle will really come in handyhere
Step 9 Triple the KnotOnce you have made three passes of the Turks Head Knot use your needle to go under your knot about half the circumference and cut the cord The knot will be tightenough to hide the tail in placeTIP I carefully add a couple of drops of super glue UNDER the band to hold them in place and keep them from sliding around in the nextsteps A drop or two in 3 or 4 places around the band should be enough
Step 10 Add the second knotNow repeat this whole step for the second bandWhen tying the second band you must make sure the Bights line up to the first band This is crucial for the next stepWipe down the bottle to make sure all your finger prints and adhesive from the tape are all removed You want to make sure your bottle is clean at this point Any dirt orfinger prints left on the bottle will be almost impossible to remove From this point on we will use gloves when tying our last knot
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 11 Maping the Top KnotStick a piece of painters tape on top of your first band leaving the bottom of the knot exposedUse a marker to count the number of Bights in your knot Instead of using the pegs we are going to use the Bights to tie our next Turks Head Knot
Step 12 Mapping the Bottom KnotDo the same thing for the bottom band but you must make sure your numbers on top and bottom line up So 1 on top should be the same position as 1 on the bottom
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 13 Adding the last knotAgain using the Turks Head Cookbook and the threaded needle you are going to follow the instructions going over and under as indicated in the book Be sure to usegloves when ever you handle the bottle
Step 14 Thats ItFor this Turks Head Knot I am using a 20 Bight by 19 Lead knot
Because of the amount of cord you are working with your cord will get twisted and knotted You will have to un-twist the cord often Its a pain in the rear but it has to bedone And it has to be done alot
Continue to tie the knot until you finish the knot If you have the cord and the patience you can double or triple the knot When you are done use your needle to hide theends under your bands Cut the ends and your DONE
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Related Instructables
Monkeys FistFloatingKeychain byjokerlz
How To Make ATurks headKnot WithParacord byDoggie Stylish
Tying Trivetsout of Rope forHoliday Gifts bykylemarsh
Paracord KnotDisplay Bord byJamie bagn
How to Make ATurks Head(Photos) bymchs60chip
A pocket full ofknots byKiteman
Monkeys fistknot AND themonkey byjonathan111
TiteTie is theTruckers Knoton Steroids bytitetie
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Larks head noose -- an easy useful knot that tightens and loosensby Larry Breed on February 19 2009
Intro Larks head noose -- an easy useful knot that tightens and loosensI thought I knew all the basic knots but then I was taught this incredibly useful simple knot Its good for tying up the neck of a bag that you want to repeatedly open andsecurely close Its good for tying around a springy bundle that will need tightening and retightening And its easy to undo
Ive looked at knot literature but havent found a name for this so I named it The basic knot is well known its called a larks head Since all Ive done is to slip the twoends through the larks head to make a noose I call it that
WARNING Dont use this knot when human safety would depend on it Climbers and mountaineers have well-tested reliable knots for such situations
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Image Notes1 To tighten further step on this side of the larks head and pull the free ends
Step 1 Double the cord overThe larks head noose requires enough cord to go twice around your bundle plus a foot or two Find the center and double it over Sailors call this a bight
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 2 Form the larks headComing from below the bight hook your thumb and forefinger over the two sides Reach outward and downward and pinch your fingertips together underneath thedoubled cord
Youve made a larks head Move the crossing cord a little farther from your hand so theres a clear opening through the two half-loops
Step 3 Form the nooseSlip the two ends of the cord through the opening we were just talking about Pull the larks head tight so it grips the two cords Find something that needs constrictingand put the noose around it
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 4 Tightening retightening and lockingSlide the knot against the bundle If its not tight enough to keep from slipping tighten it by holding it in one hand and tugging on the cords one at a time with the otherhand Notice that you can slide the knot out again for instance to re-open the bag you just tied shut For some applications this may be as tight as you need it
A springy bundle probably still feels loose If so compress the bundle and get a new grip on the cords Rest your foot on the bundle on the cords nearest the larks headand pull to slide the larks head tighter
To make the knot more permanent you can lock it Make an overhand in the cord ends (Exactly like the first step in tying shoelaces) With your foot still on the bundlepull on the cords and move your hands apart until youre pulling in opposite directions You have just locked the larks head and you can trust it to stay that way()
But lets say that later on you want to loosen the locked knot Again put your foot on the bundle and cords nearest the larks head hold the two cord ends together andpull This makes a little slack between the overhand and the larks head so you can untie the overhand
In twine or small string the locking overhand knot may be difficult to undo Use a shoelace knot instead of an overhand and itll unlock easily
() If youre using slippery cord like polypropylene an overhand may not lock securely You may want to tie another overhand knot For added security wrap a shortlength of duct tape around the two cords close to the knot
Image Notes1 To tighten further step on this side of the larks head and pull the free ends
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Related Instructables
TRX fromParacordChallengeAccepted bythrake
A pocket full ofknots byKiteman
Lens CapLanyard by~teknoarsonist~ how to tie a
noose byawesume
AdjustableParacordGlassesLanyard byjdtwelve12
HangmansNoose PackClosure byPopEye42
Paraleash - ADog LeashFrom Paracordby The Ideanator
How to make arugged andhandy ParacordBelt by Jake22
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Figure 8 knot and double 8 knotby jonathan111 on November 28 2007
Intro Figure 8 knot and double 8 knotI will show you how to tie a figure 8 knot and a figure 8 follow through
Step 1 Stating the knotThis is a simple knot so just follow the pictures
Step 2 Finishing the knotCross the string under and then push it through the hole Pull tightly unless you are going to do the follow through and leave it somewhat loose
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 3 The follow through knotThe follow through knot should be tied around something brought back and followed through the path of the 8 knot Look at the pictures Basically follow through the 8knot backwards
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Related Instructables
Climb Safe WithA Figure 8Knot by mattste A pocket full of
knots byKiteman
How to Tie aFigure EightKnot byTactical_Pyro
Paracord KnotDisplay Bord byJamie bagn
Cross KnotParacordLanyard byStormdrane
How to Tie aFire-escapeKnot by leonardoismael
Truckers HitchTHE mostawesome knoton the planetby schneidp20
Paracord ZipperPuller byrepeet13
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Truckers Hitch THE most awesome knot on the planetby schneidp20 on October 12 2008
Authorschneidp20I like building stuff Trouble is there just isnt enough time to build everything Sigh
Intro Truckers Hitch THE most awesome knot on the planetYes I know that there are plenty of other cool knots out there many of which I literally couldnt live wo I rock climb However this knot is unlike any other Plus Ineeded a grabber for my Instructable -) (BTW this ISNT a climbing knot) And in truth it isnt a knot by itself but rather a system of common knots
Have you ever tried to tie something down for transporting but just couldnt get the lines tight andor during transport the lines would continually loosen Then this is theknot for you I learned this knot back in the 70s when specialty car racks and ratchet straps were rare or unheard of I initially used it to tie a canoe on a car rack bothattaching to the rack as well as the lines to the bow and stern of the canoe Even with all the new gizmos available today this knot still shines because all you need is arope and ropes dont hum in the wind like straps
The unique aspect of this knot is that it gives you a 2-1 mechanical advantage when tightening the rope Be careful though You can actually damage some thingsbecause of the mechanical advantage This knot holds fast and is easy to untie hallmark traits of any good knot
Below you see the finished knot system well break it apart in the steps that follow
Image Notes1 1st anchor point a bowline2 loop3 securing knots 2 half hitches4 securing loose end with a fishermans knot5 2nd anchor point (should be round)
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Image Notes1 X marks the spot
Step 1 Initial setupThe first step is to anchor one end of the rope and then loop the rope around a 2nd anchor point
For attaching to the 1st anchor point I chose bowline a close 2 on my list -) There are other instructables on that one so I wont bore you here
The 2nd anchor really should be round because it serves as a pulley in this block and tackle type knot Ive used it on sharp anchor points and it doesnt work as well
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 2 Creating a slip knotTie a slip knot somewhere between the two anchor points Correct placement of the slip knot takes some experience to judge it correctly Typically I place it too close tothe 2nd anchor point and end up with not enough room to work with If the knot ends up too far from 2nd anchor point you can extend the knot by enlarging the loop
Be sure you tie the slip knot as shown You may not be able to untie other knots
In this small example the slip knot is uncharacteristically close to the 1st anchor point
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 3 Tightening and securingThe loose end of the rope that went around the 2nd anchor point goes through the slip knot loop Pull the loose end to the desired tension and secure with two halfhitches
Note To allow better view of the knots the rope isnt really tightened in this example
Step 4 Securing loose endThe final knot is just to secure the loose end somehow I chose a fishermans knot to do this
To tie a fishermans knot the rope goes around twice and goes under the X created by the loops Pull the loose end to tighten Finally slide the knot to put tension onthe half hitches
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Image Notes1 X marks the spot
Step 5 FinishedThere you have it I guarantee that the first time you really use this knot (not just practice) you will be amazed at how well it works and youll wish you knew this knot along time ago You may even come over to my side and declare that is is THE most awesome knot on the planet -)
Enjoy and happy haulingDave
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Related Instructables
TiteTie is theTruckers Knoton Steroids bytitetie
Four knots tomake paracordinto a usefultool byerik_mccray
Modify yourbike rack tocarry a sunfishor other boat byewilhelm
SurfboardHammock byGermy
GiganticHalloweenSpider Web bynolte919
How To Tie ASpiders Hitch(video) by back-cast
Three-hitch mathair ornamentby michiexile TRX from
ParacordChallengeAccepted bythrake
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Carry any Bottle with a JUG KNOT Handleby hpstoutharrow on September 17 2009
Intro Carry any Bottle with a JUG KNOT HandleTie a JUG KNOT around a water bottle soda bottle or aluminum bottle to make a secure carrying strap
Re-purpose any container into a reusable water bottle by adding a convenient carrying strap This Instructable will demonstrate how to tie a JUG knot which like its namesuggests is meant to properly secure around the neck of a container
With some cord and the knowledge of this knot you will be able add a handle lanyard or carabiner loop to any of your favorite beverages to carry them on the go
It works perfectly for those disposable water bottles and who knows once you add some colorful cord to the plain old clear water bottle you just might beinclined to refill it and use it again(Check out pictures 4amp5 below)
In addition to plastic beverage bottles like pop water and sports drinks you can turn those rugged aluminum beer bottles into a backpacking canteen
Those of you familiar with my previous aluminum bottle InstructablesROLLED RIM METAL TUMBLERhttpwwwinstructablescomidAluminum-Bottle-Tumbler-Cup-Cook-PotALUMINUM BOTTLE LIGHTWEIGHT ALCOHOL STOVEhttpwwwinstructablescomidAluminum-Bottle-Alcohol-Stovewill recognize the water canteen shown below as a re-purposed aluminum beer bottle Here I have added a painted surface treatment to turn it into a proper lookingwater bottle More on that in steps 13 14 15
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 1 Getting StartedCord size is important Select a small medium weight cord like the one shown here It is a general purpose camp cord sold at most sporting goods stores (shoelacesmight also work)
Do not use a heavy cord or rope because the larger diameter will not tuck under the relatively small lip at the top of the bottleneck and the bottle will fall out
Also the smaller cord cinches tight on itself and will not loosen accidentally
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 2 Form a BightThe next steps show how to tie a JUG KNOT It is the basic step for adding a carrying strap It is also the anchor point for any additional fancy bottle trussing you maywant to add
JUG KNOT Step 1
Form a Bight in the center of a length of cord Bight is a knot term for a loop or bend in the rope In this case the main Bight in this knot is highlighted with a white mark Imakes it easier to follow its path in these steps
The running ends of the cord should be equal length
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 3 Pull the Bight downPULL the Bight DOWN forming two Loops
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 4 Cross the LoopsCROSS the right Loop OVER the left Loop
Step 5 Pass the Bight under the 1st loopTake the main Bight and pass it UNDER the left Loop
Step 6 Weave the BightWEAVE the Bight OVER the portion of the right Loop and UNDER the portion of the left Loop
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 7 Extend the BightExtend the Bight OVER the outer portion of the right Loop
Step 8 Flip the Right Loop behindAdditional colored identification points have been added to the loops to follow their travel in these next two steps
The right Loop Yellow marker is FLIPPED BEHIND the knot and ends up on the far left side of the knot
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 9 Flip the 2nd loop in frontRaise the green marker (located on what was formerly the left loop) and pull it down and to the right FLIPPING IT IN FRONT of the knot
Note the blue portion of the this loop will pass around the outside of the yellow portion of the first loop
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Image Notes1 Center of knot that will tighten around the bottles neck
Step 10 Remove SlackNote where the blue green amp yellow markers end up
Start to remove the slack in the loops by pulling the original main Bight (white marker top right) and the two free standing ends at the bottom
the bottle neck will pass through the very center of the knot
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Image Notes1 Center of knot that will tighten around the bottles neck
Step 11 Tighten the KnotAfter removing the slack insert the bottle neck and finish tightening
The knot should look like this before slipping it over the bottle
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 12 Secure on bottle neckThis is the finished knot shown on the neck of various containers
The loop end and the two free standing ends can be tied together to create a carrying handle (last picture below)
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 13 Aluminum Bottle Water Bottle
The next few steps show the features of an aluminum beer bottle re-purposed as a water bottle canteen It is one of many containers that can be reused as a camp waterbottle
The bottle was lightly sanded masked and then pained with a hammered finished paint to create an interesting surface texture
Image Notes1 Textured finish paint makes an interesting grip-able surface2 Masked with tape for painting3 Masked with tape for painting
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Image Notes1 Dowel used for holding the bottle during painting
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 14 Tethered Cork StopperUse a wine bottle man made Cork as a stopper for your aluminum water bottleNote Use a cork that was removed from the wine bottle without the corkscrew penetrating through the bottom end of the cork (A hole all the way through the cork willcause it to leak) Use the unpierced end of the cork inside the water bottle
Drill a hole through the sides of the Cork Thread the cord through the hole to the center of the cord Use the cork as the main Bight and tie the Jug knot as shown inthe beginning steps
Now the cork is tethered to the bottle and will not get lost or fall on the ground
A Carabiner clip passes through the other cord end to attache the water bottle to you belt or pack
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 15 Trussed for TransportThis is another hanging method for carrying your aluminum bottle water canteen A Jug knot is tied conventionally around the neck
The running ends of the knot however are pulled down towards the bottom of the bottle A Barrel Knot is tied about 34 the way down the side of the bottle A squareknot is tied on the bottom of the knot to keep the two running ends tight against the sides of the bottle
I like the look of the accent colored cord running down the sides of the bottle and the fact that the bottle hangs from the belt upside down It adds to its uniqueness
The last picture shows another truss variation
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 16 AdvancedBelow is a bottle with some additional trussing You can be creative as you want It all starts with a re-purposed container and the Jug Knot (and enough cord)
Related Instructables
AluminumBottle TumblerCup amp Cook Potfor an AlcoholStove byhpstoutharrow
Water BottleBelt Clip byuglymike Duct Tape
Water Bottle byrabidsquire2
AluminumBottle AlcoholStove byhpstoutharrow
DIYGlass WaterBottle byCulturespy
Solar WaterHeater forBackpackingUsing WaterBottles and aCar Shade bykopomeroy
Duct tape waterbottle holder(Photos) by pinkmarshmallow
How to make aCamelPack withan old plasticbottle bywillrandship
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Basic Knots Guideby zorro3355 on April 29 2008
Intro Basic Knots Guidehi
Step 1 Thumb knotThe most simple knotUsed as a stopper and prevent ropes from fraying
Step 2 Reef KnotUsed to tie two ropes of equal thickness togetherIt is pretty easy to tie and untie but under tentionit may be diffcult to untieIt is also not sutible for smoothropes(egnylon ropes)
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 3 Figure of eightused as a stopperprevent ropes from fraying and its more secure than tumb knot its is also used to tie Caribinas to ropes and is often used in rock climbing
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 4 Timber hitchused for pulling logs
Step 5 Clove hitchUsed to tie a rope onto a pole or logThe pole must be roundThe pole lust be thicker then the rope itself
(greatly used during pioneering)
Step 6 Sheet bandused to tie ropes of different thickness together(works on same thickness of ropes too)
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 7 Sheep shankTo shorten RopesTo prevent middle fraying
Step 8 Slip knotWhippingUsed as a grip for pulling things(when tied on a stick or small pole)(marlin spike hitch)
Related Instructables
Rope Rings byhpstoutharrow
How to Tie aFigure EightKnot byTactical_Pyro
Whippin (WestCountry Style)by tim_n
SurvivalBracelet(Updated) bytevers94
HangmansNoose PackClosure byPopEye42
Turkey on aTripod byhpstoutharrow
SurvivalBracelet II bytevers94 Zigzag Spooling
Paracord (video)by Stormdrane
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
How to Tie a Fire-escape Knotby leonardo ismael on October 16 2007
Intro How to Tie a Fire-escape KnotThis knot is used by firemen in case of fires for example imagine a scene where the ladder on the firetruck messes up but people need to get down a five story buildingor more All they have is a long piece of rope they can safely get down with a secure knot like the fire-escape knot So why not learn it its easy to do and hard to untieif you tie it tightly
This is from the American Boys Handbook
Step 1 Get Your RopeFirst grab a piece of rope and bend it like this to make a loop in it Follow every step to the smallest detail
Step 2 Twist the RopeNow make a twist like this and hold it together
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 3 Pull Through the TwistPull the loop through the twist you just made from underneath
Step 4 Go Over the Split EndNow pull the tail through the loop
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 5 FinallyAnd finally just pull it through as pictured below
Congratulations you just learned the fire-escape knot
Step 6 Same Name Not KnotThis is another knot called the fire-escape knot this shouldnt be your result
Related Instructables
House FireEscape Plan(video) byWhatHappensNowAdvice
ParacordLadder wWooden Rungsby josestude
Bed SheetEscape Rope byjessehensel
rope ladder(glow-in-the-dark version) bymikeasaurus
HeadlockEscape 2(video) byjohnnyrockstah
QuickFirestarter byMattandJora
Trail sauna byjakee117
How to Kill FireAnts andCommitGenocide byKentsOkay
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Climb Safe With A Figure 8 Knotby mattste on February 23 2010
Intro Climb Safe With A Figure 8 Knot There are many things that a beginning climber needs to know including several important knots Perhaps the most essential knot is the Figure 8 Follow Through Thistutorial will demonstrate how to correctly harness yourself to a rope using a Figure 8 Follow Through knot This knot is used primarily by rock climbers to provide a life-line Since this knot is used as a life-line it is very important to be able to tie it correctly (Your life could depend upon it)
Dont worry with this tutorial and about 5 minutes of practice you can have this knot mastered
Things you will need
- Climbing Harness- Climbing Rope
If you are wanting to go climbing and dont already have these items they can be purchased for about $25 each at most outdoor sporting goods stores If you are merelylooking to learn the knot a belt loop and a rope (about five feet long) will do
Image Notes1 Climbing Harness2 Climbing Rope
Step 1 Dealing With The RopeThroughout this tutorial I will be discussing different parts of the rope To make these instructions as clear as possible I will define a few terms that I will use throughoutthe tutorial The Anchor End of the rope will generally be at the top of the images This is the end that would be anchored to the wall or rock and does not move Wewill not be doing much with the anchored end The Tail End of the rope is the opposite end that we will be dealing with I will call this the tail for short
Now that we have some terms to work with lets get started
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 2 Tying The First Figure 8This knot has several parts to it The first part of the knot is just tying a basic figure 8 To tie the first figure 8 there are four simple steps
1 - Using the tail make a loop over the rope (as shown in the first picture) keeping in mind that there should be about 3 ft of slack on the tail end
2 - Wrap the tail back this time go under the anchored end (As shown in the second picture)
3 - Bring the tail down through the first loop (As shown in the third picture)
4 - Finally pull the two ends to make the knot a little bit tighter and easier to deal with (Shown in the fourth picture)
After these four steps you should end up with a knot that resembles a figure 8
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 3 Looping Into The Harness In order to secure the rope to the harness simply thread the tail end of the rope through the front loop in the harness as shown in the picture below This step isobviously very important
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 4 Following Back Through The Figure 8After looping the rope through the harness you have to thread the tail end of the rope back through the knot following the first figure 8 I have divided this process intofive smaller steps in order to make it more clear
1 - Coming form underneath the knot bring the tail up through the near loop and to the left behind the anchored end of the rope (Shown in the first picture)
2 - Wrap the tail around the anchored end back to the right and down through the adjacent loop (Shown in the second picture)
3 - You simply need to bring the tail back over the top of the knot to the left (Shown in the third picture)
4 - Bring the tail end up through the far loop following the anchored end (Shown in the fourth picture)
5 - Finally pull the knot tight (Shown in the fifth picture)
As you can see the first four pictures are simply tracing the knot back through with the tail end
For the last part while you pull the knot tight you may want to make small adjustments and rearrange how it all fits together If the knot does not lay perfectly smoothand tight its NOT a big deal
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 5 Finishing The Knot After completing the Figure 8 knot you will want to somehow secure the tail end of the rope out of the way There are a couple different ways to do this the way that Iwill demonstrate is using whats called a Stopper Knot This secondary knot is similar to a Fishermans knot and is pretty simple I have once again divided thisprocess into several smaller steps
1 - Start by wrapping the tail end around the anchored end (As shown in the first picture)
2 - Wrap the tail back underneath the two vertical segments (As shown in the second picture)
3 - Simply repeat the first two steps wrapping the tail around again (As shown in the third picture)
4 - This step in the fourth picture may look complicated but all you need to do is insert the tail up through the two loops that you have just made
5 - To finish off the knot you will want to slowly pull the tail end while gently pushing the bottom of the stopper knot upwards If you have successfully completed this knotit should look something like the fifth picture
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 6 Ready To Climb Now that you have mastered the Figure 8 knot you can securely harness yourself into a climbing rope Remember there are many other skills that go into setting up ananchor and belaying a climber This tutorial only covers the figure 8 knot For more information there are many great websites that demonstrate how to correctly set up asafe climbing system (Ive posted a few below) If you are a beginning climber I recommend that you read up on a few other climbing techniques Also you shouldprobably go to a climbing wall or gym where there are experienced climbers that can show you the ropes Hopefully this tutorial has been helpful Have fun and be safe
Some useful linkshttpwwwstephenprattnetAnchorsanchorshtmhttpwwwuoregonedu~oppclimbingtopicsanchorshtmlhttpwwwabc-of-rockclimbingcomhowtoclimbingtechniquesasp
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Related Instructables
How to Tie aFigure EightKnot byTactical_Pyro
Paracord KnotDisplay Bord byJamie bagn
Basic KnotsGuide byzorro3355
How to Climb aTree (withprussiks) bystasterisk
How to climb atree (using onlyrope) thefunsimple wayby louieaw
How to get arope into a tree(withoutclimbing it) byvitex
How to tievarious knots byadaviel
How to make arope swing byjdub0928
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Turks Head Knots on a Bottleby sklnxbones on July 6 2010
Intro Turks Head Knots on a BottleThis is the finished project A bottle decorated with three Turks Head Knots There are only three knots on this bottle The RED and the BLUE knots are each a 20 Bightby 3 Lead Turks Head Knots The WHITE knot is a 20 Bight by 19 Lead Turks Head Knot
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 1 Supplies
Cord Lots and Lots of cord I cant tell you how much each bottle is differentBottle Washed and Dried inside and out Make sure to remove all water spotsThreaded Needle Cord screws into the threads at the base of the needlePegs I use brass rivets used as a map to tie the Turks Head KnotsHole Punch Used to punch holes in the painters tape to hold the pegsPainters Tape To hold the pegs in place and to make your map for the Turks Head KnotsMarker To write on the painters tapeCloth Towel To remove finger prints and dirt from your bottleKrazy Glue or Super Glue This is used to secure the knots in place to the bottle
OPTIONAL BUT HIGHLY RECOMMENDEDI use the Turks Head Cookbook from KnotToolcom
Step 2 PreparationYou will need to find a bottle you like I used an empty instant tea bottle of course washed and dried (I like to put the bottle in the oven for a few minutes to dry the insidewithout water spots Take off the lid and do not put lid in the oven) Now measure the circumference of the bottle Take a cord and tightly wrap the cord around the bottleMark where the ends meet and use a ruler to measure the length of the cord For my instant tea bottle the circumference is 27cm I know from past knots that I have tiedthat I want my knot to have 20 Bights in the top and bottom (bands) knots I am going to use the Bights in the (bands) knots to tie the middle knot Now divide the numberof Bights (20) into the size of the circumference (27) to get the space between each Bight (135) With me so far
Now take two pieces of painters tape using a ruler measure out the length of the circumference and mark the length on the both pieces of tape Next you will mark thespace between each Bight on the tape
Step 3 Adding the PegsI like to use pegs when tying Turks Head Knots it just makes tying the knot easier
These are what I use for pegs
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 4 Adding Pegs to the TapeNow take a hole punch to cut holes in the tape where the lines meet You will place the pegs in the holes
Insert a peg in each hole and carefully stick the first piece of tape to the bottle
Step 5 Adding the 2nd row of pegsNow do the same thing with the second piece of tape The numbers on each piece of tape must line up
This picture shows you what you should have now This odd looking thing will be your map to tie the Turks Head Knot And this is the end of Step 1
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 6 Tying the first Turks Head KnotUsing the Turks Head Cookbook follow the numbers going over and under as indicated in the book I chose a 20 Bight by 3 Lead knot which will give me a nice bandaround the bottle Once the ends meet you have made one complete knot Tape the running end of your cord and start removing the pegs and the tape
Step 7 Remove the pegs and the tapeBe careful not to untie the knot as you remove the pegs and tape from the bottle Continue to remove all the pegs and remove the tape from the bottle At this point theknot will be very loose and will need to be tightened up
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 8 Remove the slack from the knotHere you can see just how much the knot expanded Starting with the standing end begin to pull the slack out of the knot going towards the running end of the cordDo not expect to pull all the slack out at once You may have to make 3 - 5 attempts at removing the slack out of the knot DO NOT remove all of the slack out of the knotIn order to make the bands we will have to triple the Turks Head Knot We will do this by following the knot three times The threaded needle will really come in handyhere
Step 9 Triple the KnotOnce you have made three passes of the Turks Head Knot use your needle to go under your knot about half the circumference and cut the cord The knot will be tightenough to hide the tail in placeTIP I carefully add a couple of drops of super glue UNDER the band to hold them in place and keep them from sliding around in the nextsteps A drop or two in 3 or 4 places around the band should be enough
Step 10 Add the second knotNow repeat this whole step for the second bandWhen tying the second band you must make sure the Bights line up to the first band This is crucial for the next stepWipe down the bottle to make sure all your finger prints and adhesive from the tape are all removed You want to make sure your bottle is clean at this point Any dirt orfinger prints left on the bottle will be almost impossible to remove From this point on we will use gloves when tying our last knot
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 11 Maping the Top KnotStick a piece of painters tape on top of your first band leaving the bottom of the knot exposedUse a marker to count the number of Bights in your knot Instead of using the pegs we are going to use the Bights to tie our next Turks Head Knot
Step 12 Mapping the Bottom KnotDo the same thing for the bottom band but you must make sure your numbers on top and bottom line up So 1 on top should be the same position as 1 on the bottom
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 13 Adding the last knotAgain using the Turks Head Cookbook and the threaded needle you are going to follow the instructions going over and under as indicated in the book Be sure to usegloves when ever you handle the bottle
Step 14 Thats ItFor this Turks Head Knot I am using a 20 Bight by 19 Lead knot
Because of the amount of cord you are working with your cord will get twisted and knotted You will have to un-twist the cord often Its a pain in the rear but it has to bedone And it has to be done alot
Continue to tie the knot until you finish the knot If you have the cord and the patience you can double or triple the knot When you are done use your needle to hide theends under your bands Cut the ends and your DONE
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Related Instructables
Monkeys FistFloatingKeychain byjokerlz
How To Make ATurks headKnot WithParacord byDoggie Stylish
Tying Trivetsout of Rope forHoliday Gifts bykylemarsh
Paracord KnotDisplay Bord byJamie bagn
How to Make ATurks Head(Photos) bymchs60chip
A pocket full ofknots byKiteman
Monkeys fistknot AND themonkey byjonathan111
TiteTie is theTruckers Knoton Steroids bytitetie
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Larks head noose -- an easy useful knot that tightens and loosensby Larry Breed on February 19 2009
Intro Larks head noose -- an easy useful knot that tightens and loosensI thought I knew all the basic knots but then I was taught this incredibly useful simple knot Its good for tying up the neck of a bag that you want to repeatedly open andsecurely close Its good for tying around a springy bundle that will need tightening and retightening And its easy to undo
Ive looked at knot literature but havent found a name for this so I named it The basic knot is well known its called a larks head Since all Ive done is to slip the twoends through the larks head to make a noose I call it that
WARNING Dont use this knot when human safety would depend on it Climbers and mountaineers have well-tested reliable knots for such situations
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Image Notes1 To tighten further step on this side of the larks head and pull the free ends
Step 1 Double the cord overThe larks head noose requires enough cord to go twice around your bundle plus a foot or two Find the center and double it over Sailors call this a bight
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 2 Form the larks headComing from below the bight hook your thumb and forefinger over the two sides Reach outward and downward and pinch your fingertips together underneath thedoubled cord
Youve made a larks head Move the crossing cord a little farther from your hand so theres a clear opening through the two half-loops
Step 3 Form the nooseSlip the two ends of the cord through the opening we were just talking about Pull the larks head tight so it grips the two cords Find something that needs constrictingand put the noose around it
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 4 Tightening retightening and lockingSlide the knot against the bundle If its not tight enough to keep from slipping tighten it by holding it in one hand and tugging on the cords one at a time with the otherhand Notice that you can slide the knot out again for instance to re-open the bag you just tied shut For some applications this may be as tight as you need it
A springy bundle probably still feels loose If so compress the bundle and get a new grip on the cords Rest your foot on the bundle on the cords nearest the larks headand pull to slide the larks head tighter
To make the knot more permanent you can lock it Make an overhand in the cord ends (Exactly like the first step in tying shoelaces) With your foot still on the bundlepull on the cords and move your hands apart until youre pulling in opposite directions You have just locked the larks head and you can trust it to stay that way()
But lets say that later on you want to loosen the locked knot Again put your foot on the bundle and cords nearest the larks head hold the two cord ends together andpull This makes a little slack between the overhand and the larks head so you can untie the overhand
In twine or small string the locking overhand knot may be difficult to undo Use a shoelace knot instead of an overhand and itll unlock easily
() If youre using slippery cord like polypropylene an overhand may not lock securely You may want to tie another overhand knot For added security wrap a shortlength of duct tape around the two cords close to the knot
Image Notes1 To tighten further step on this side of the larks head and pull the free ends
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Related Instructables
TRX fromParacordChallengeAccepted bythrake
A pocket full ofknots byKiteman
Lens CapLanyard by~teknoarsonist~ how to tie a
noose byawesume
AdjustableParacordGlassesLanyard byjdtwelve12
HangmansNoose PackClosure byPopEye42
Paraleash - ADog LeashFrom Paracordby The Ideanator
How to make arugged andhandy ParacordBelt by Jake22
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 3 The follow through knotThe follow through knot should be tied around something brought back and followed through the path of the 8 knot Look at the pictures Basically follow through the 8knot backwards
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Related Instructables
Climb Safe WithA Figure 8Knot by mattste A pocket full of
knots byKiteman
How to Tie aFigure EightKnot byTactical_Pyro
Paracord KnotDisplay Bord byJamie bagn
Cross KnotParacordLanyard byStormdrane
How to Tie aFire-escapeKnot by leonardoismael
Truckers HitchTHE mostawesome knoton the planetby schneidp20
Paracord ZipperPuller byrepeet13
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Truckers Hitch THE most awesome knot on the planetby schneidp20 on October 12 2008
Authorschneidp20I like building stuff Trouble is there just isnt enough time to build everything Sigh
Intro Truckers Hitch THE most awesome knot on the planetYes I know that there are plenty of other cool knots out there many of which I literally couldnt live wo I rock climb However this knot is unlike any other Plus Ineeded a grabber for my Instructable -) (BTW this ISNT a climbing knot) And in truth it isnt a knot by itself but rather a system of common knots
Have you ever tried to tie something down for transporting but just couldnt get the lines tight andor during transport the lines would continually loosen Then this is theknot for you I learned this knot back in the 70s when specialty car racks and ratchet straps were rare or unheard of I initially used it to tie a canoe on a car rack bothattaching to the rack as well as the lines to the bow and stern of the canoe Even with all the new gizmos available today this knot still shines because all you need is arope and ropes dont hum in the wind like straps
The unique aspect of this knot is that it gives you a 2-1 mechanical advantage when tightening the rope Be careful though You can actually damage some thingsbecause of the mechanical advantage This knot holds fast and is easy to untie hallmark traits of any good knot
Below you see the finished knot system well break it apart in the steps that follow
Image Notes1 1st anchor point a bowline2 loop3 securing knots 2 half hitches4 securing loose end with a fishermans knot5 2nd anchor point (should be round)
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Image Notes1 X marks the spot
Step 1 Initial setupThe first step is to anchor one end of the rope and then loop the rope around a 2nd anchor point
For attaching to the 1st anchor point I chose bowline a close 2 on my list -) There are other instructables on that one so I wont bore you here
The 2nd anchor really should be round because it serves as a pulley in this block and tackle type knot Ive used it on sharp anchor points and it doesnt work as well
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 2 Creating a slip knotTie a slip knot somewhere between the two anchor points Correct placement of the slip knot takes some experience to judge it correctly Typically I place it too close tothe 2nd anchor point and end up with not enough room to work with If the knot ends up too far from 2nd anchor point you can extend the knot by enlarging the loop
Be sure you tie the slip knot as shown You may not be able to untie other knots
In this small example the slip knot is uncharacteristically close to the 1st anchor point
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 3 Tightening and securingThe loose end of the rope that went around the 2nd anchor point goes through the slip knot loop Pull the loose end to the desired tension and secure with two halfhitches
Note To allow better view of the knots the rope isnt really tightened in this example
Step 4 Securing loose endThe final knot is just to secure the loose end somehow I chose a fishermans knot to do this
To tie a fishermans knot the rope goes around twice and goes under the X created by the loops Pull the loose end to tighten Finally slide the knot to put tension onthe half hitches
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Image Notes1 X marks the spot
Step 5 FinishedThere you have it I guarantee that the first time you really use this knot (not just practice) you will be amazed at how well it works and youll wish you knew this knot along time ago You may even come over to my side and declare that is is THE most awesome knot on the planet -)
Enjoy and happy haulingDave
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Related Instructables
TiteTie is theTruckers Knoton Steroids bytitetie
Four knots tomake paracordinto a usefultool byerik_mccray
Modify yourbike rack tocarry a sunfishor other boat byewilhelm
SurfboardHammock byGermy
GiganticHalloweenSpider Web bynolte919
How To Tie ASpiders Hitch(video) by back-cast
Three-hitch mathair ornamentby michiexile TRX from
ParacordChallengeAccepted bythrake
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Carry any Bottle with a JUG KNOT Handleby hpstoutharrow on September 17 2009
Intro Carry any Bottle with a JUG KNOT HandleTie a JUG KNOT around a water bottle soda bottle or aluminum bottle to make a secure carrying strap
Re-purpose any container into a reusable water bottle by adding a convenient carrying strap This Instructable will demonstrate how to tie a JUG knot which like its namesuggests is meant to properly secure around the neck of a container
With some cord and the knowledge of this knot you will be able add a handle lanyard or carabiner loop to any of your favorite beverages to carry them on the go
It works perfectly for those disposable water bottles and who knows once you add some colorful cord to the plain old clear water bottle you just might beinclined to refill it and use it again(Check out pictures 4amp5 below)
In addition to plastic beverage bottles like pop water and sports drinks you can turn those rugged aluminum beer bottles into a backpacking canteen
Those of you familiar with my previous aluminum bottle InstructablesROLLED RIM METAL TUMBLERhttpwwwinstructablescomidAluminum-Bottle-Tumbler-Cup-Cook-PotALUMINUM BOTTLE LIGHTWEIGHT ALCOHOL STOVEhttpwwwinstructablescomidAluminum-Bottle-Alcohol-Stovewill recognize the water canteen shown below as a re-purposed aluminum beer bottle Here I have added a painted surface treatment to turn it into a proper lookingwater bottle More on that in steps 13 14 15
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 1 Getting StartedCord size is important Select a small medium weight cord like the one shown here It is a general purpose camp cord sold at most sporting goods stores (shoelacesmight also work)
Do not use a heavy cord or rope because the larger diameter will not tuck under the relatively small lip at the top of the bottleneck and the bottle will fall out
Also the smaller cord cinches tight on itself and will not loosen accidentally
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 2 Form a BightThe next steps show how to tie a JUG KNOT It is the basic step for adding a carrying strap It is also the anchor point for any additional fancy bottle trussing you maywant to add
JUG KNOT Step 1
Form a Bight in the center of a length of cord Bight is a knot term for a loop or bend in the rope In this case the main Bight in this knot is highlighted with a white mark Imakes it easier to follow its path in these steps
The running ends of the cord should be equal length
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 3 Pull the Bight downPULL the Bight DOWN forming two Loops
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 4 Cross the LoopsCROSS the right Loop OVER the left Loop
Step 5 Pass the Bight under the 1st loopTake the main Bight and pass it UNDER the left Loop
Step 6 Weave the BightWEAVE the Bight OVER the portion of the right Loop and UNDER the portion of the left Loop
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 7 Extend the BightExtend the Bight OVER the outer portion of the right Loop
Step 8 Flip the Right Loop behindAdditional colored identification points have been added to the loops to follow their travel in these next two steps
The right Loop Yellow marker is FLIPPED BEHIND the knot and ends up on the far left side of the knot
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 9 Flip the 2nd loop in frontRaise the green marker (located on what was formerly the left loop) and pull it down and to the right FLIPPING IT IN FRONT of the knot
Note the blue portion of the this loop will pass around the outside of the yellow portion of the first loop
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Image Notes1 Center of knot that will tighten around the bottles neck
Step 10 Remove SlackNote where the blue green amp yellow markers end up
Start to remove the slack in the loops by pulling the original main Bight (white marker top right) and the two free standing ends at the bottom
the bottle neck will pass through the very center of the knot
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Image Notes1 Center of knot that will tighten around the bottles neck
Step 11 Tighten the KnotAfter removing the slack insert the bottle neck and finish tightening
The knot should look like this before slipping it over the bottle
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 12 Secure on bottle neckThis is the finished knot shown on the neck of various containers
The loop end and the two free standing ends can be tied together to create a carrying handle (last picture below)
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 13 Aluminum Bottle Water Bottle
The next few steps show the features of an aluminum beer bottle re-purposed as a water bottle canteen It is one of many containers that can be reused as a camp waterbottle
The bottle was lightly sanded masked and then pained with a hammered finished paint to create an interesting surface texture
Image Notes1 Textured finish paint makes an interesting grip-able surface2 Masked with tape for painting3 Masked with tape for painting
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Image Notes1 Dowel used for holding the bottle during painting
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 14 Tethered Cork StopperUse a wine bottle man made Cork as a stopper for your aluminum water bottleNote Use a cork that was removed from the wine bottle without the corkscrew penetrating through the bottom end of the cork (A hole all the way through the cork willcause it to leak) Use the unpierced end of the cork inside the water bottle
Drill a hole through the sides of the Cork Thread the cord through the hole to the center of the cord Use the cork as the main Bight and tie the Jug knot as shown inthe beginning steps
Now the cork is tethered to the bottle and will not get lost or fall on the ground
A Carabiner clip passes through the other cord end to attache the water bottle to you belt or pack
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 15 Trussed for TransportThis is another hanging method for carrying your aluminum bottle water canteen A Jug knot is tied conventionally around the neck
The running ends of the knot however are pulled down towards the bottom of the bottle A Barrel Knot is tied about 34 the way down the side of the bottle A squareknot is tied on the bottom of the knot to keep the two running ends tight against the sides of the bottle
I like the look of the accent colored cord running down the sides of the bottle and the fact that the bottle hangs from the belt upside down It adds to its uniqueness
The last picture shows another truss variation
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 16 AdvancedBelow is a bottle with some additional trussing You can be creative as you want It all starts with a re-purposed container and the Jug Knot (and enough cord)
Related Instructables
AluminumBottle TumblerCup amp Cook Potfor an AlcoholStove byhpstoutharrow
Water BottleBelt Clip byuglymike Duct Tape
Water Bottle byrabidsquire2
AluminumBottle AlcoholStove byhpstoutharrow
DIYGlass WaterBottle byCulturespy
Solar WaterHeater forBackpackingUsing WaterBottles and aCar Shade bykopomeroy
Duct tape waterbottle holder(Photos) by pinkmarshmallow
How to make aCamelPack withan old plasticbottle bywillrandship
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Basic Knots Guideby zorro3355 on April 29 2008
Intro Basic Knots Guidehi
Step 1 Thumb knotThe most simple knotUsed as a stopper and prevent ropes from fraying
Step 2 Reef KnotUsed to tie two ropes of equal thickness togetherIt is pretty easy to tie and untie but under tentionit may be diffcult to untieIt is also not sutible for smoothropes(egnylon ropes)
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 3 Figure of eightused as a stopperprevent ropes from fraying and its more secure than tumb knot its is also used to tie Caribinas to ropes and is often used in rock climbing
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 4 Timber hitchused for pulling logs
Step 5 Clove hitchUsed to tie a rope onto a pole or logThe pole must be roundThe pole lust be thicker then the rope itself
(greatly used during pioneering)
Step 6 Sheet bandused to tie ropes of different thickness together(works on same thickness of ropes too)
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 7 Sheep shankTo shorten RopesTo prevent middle fraying
Step 8 Slip knotWhippingUsed as a grip for pulling things(when tied on a stick or small pole)(marlin spike hitch)
Related Instructables
Rope Rings byhpstoutharrow
How to Tie aFigure EightKnot byTactical_Pyro
Whippin (WestCountry Style)by tim_n
SurvivalBracelet(Updated) bytevers94
HangmansNoose PackClosure byPopEye42
Turkey on aTripod byhpstoutharrow
SurvivalBracelet II bytevers94 Zigzag Spooling
Paracord (video)by Stormdrane
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
How to Tie a Fire-escape Knotby leonardo ismael on October 16 2007
Intro How to Tie a Fire-escape KnotThis knot is used by firemen in case of fires for example imagine a scene where the ladder on the firetruck messes up but people need to get down a five story buildingor more All they have is a long piece of rope they can safely get down with a secure knot like the fire-escape knot So why not learn it its easy to do and hard to untieif you tie it tightly
This is from the American Boys Handbook
Step 1 Get Your RopeFirst grab a piece of rope and bend it like this to make a loop in it Follow every step to the smallest detail
Step 2 Twist the RopeNow make a twist like this and hold it together
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 3 Pull Through the TwistPull the loop through the twist you just made from underneath
Step 4 Go Over the Split EndNow pull the tail through the loop
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 5 FinallyAnd finally just pull it through as pictured below
Congratulations you just learned the fire-escape knot
Step 6 Same Name Not KnotThis is another knot called the fire-escape knot this shouldnt be your result
Related Instructables
House FireEscape Plan(video) byWhatHappensNowAdvice
ParacordLadder wWooden Rungsby josestude
Bed SheetEscape Rope byjessehensel
rope ladder(glow-in-the-dark version) bymikeasaurus
HeadlockEscape 2(video) byjohnnyrockstah
QuickFirestarter byMattandJora
Trail sauna byjakee117
How to Kill FireAnts andCommitGenocide byKentsOkay
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Climb Safe With A Figure 8 Knotby mattste on February 23 2010
Intro Climb Safe With A Figure 8 Knot There are many things that a beginning climber needs to know including several important knots Perhaps the most essential knot is the Figure 8 Follow Through Thistutorial will demonstrate how to correctly harness yourself to a rope using a Figure 8 Follow Through knot This knot is used primarily by rock climbers to provide a life-line Since this knot is used as a life-line it is very important to be able to tie it correctly (Your life could depend upon it)
Dont worry with this tutorial and about 5 minutes of practice you can have this knot mastered
Things you will need
- Climbing Harness- Climbing Rope
If you are wanting to go climbing and dont already have these items they can be purchased for about $25 each at most outdoor sporting goods stores If you are merelylooking to learn the knot a belt loop and a rope (about five feet long) will do
Image Notes1 Climbing Harness2 Climbing Rope
Step 1 Dealing With The RopeThroughout this tutorial I will be discussing different parts of the rope To make these instructions as clear as possible I will define a few terms that I will use throughoutthe tutorial The Anchor End of the rope will generally be at the top of the images This is the end that would be anchored to the wall or rock and does not move Wewill not be doing much with the anchored end The Tail End of the rope is the opposite end that we will be dealing with I will call this the tail for short
Now that we have some terms to work with lets get started
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 2 Tying The First Figure 8This knot has several parts to it The first part of the knot is just tying a basic figure 8 To tie the first figure 8 there are four simple steps
1 - Using the tail make a loop over the rope (as shown in the first picture) keeping in mind that there should be about 3 ft of slack on the tail end
2 - Wrap the tail back this time go under the anchored end (As shown in the second picture)
3 - Bring the tail down through the first loop (As shown in the third picture)
4 - Finally pull the two ends to make the knot a little bit tighter and easier to deal with (Shown in the fourth picture)
After these four steps you should end up with a knot that resembles a figure 8
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 3 Looping Into The Harness In order to secure the rope to the harness simply thread the tail end of the rope through the front loop in the harness as shown in the picture below This step isobviously very important
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 4 Following Back Through The Figure 8After looping the rope through the harness you have to thread the tail end of the rope back through the knot following the first figure 8 I have divided this process intofive smaller steps in order to make it more clear
1 - Coming form underneath the knot bring the tail up through the near loop and to the left behind the anchored end of the rope (Shown in the first picture)
2 - Wrap the tail around the anchored end back to the right and down through the adjacent loop (Shown in the second picture)
3 - You simply need to bring the tail back over the top of the knot to the left (Shown in the third picture)
4 - Bring the tail end up through the far loop following the anchored end (Shown in the fourth picture)
5 - Finally pull the knot tight (Shown in the fifth picture)
As you can see the first four pictures are simply tracing the knot back through with the tail end
For the last part while you pull the knot tight you may want to make small adjustments and rearrange how it all fits together If the knot does not lay perfectly smoothand tight its NOT a big deal
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 5 Finishing The Knot After completing the Figure 8 knot you will want to somehow secure the tail end of the rope out of the way There are a couple different ways to do this the way that Iwill demonstrate is using whats called a Stopper Knot This secondary knot is similar to a Fishermans knot and is pretty simple I have once again divided thisprocess into several smaller steps
1 - Start by wrapping the tail end around the anchored end (As shown in the first picture)
2 - Wrap the tail back underneath the two vertical segments (As shown in the second picture)
3 - Simply repeat the first two steps wrapping the tail around again (As shown in the third picture)
4 - This step in the fourth picture may look complicated but all you need to do is insert the tail up through the two loops that you have just made
5 - To finish off the knot you will want to slowly pull the tail end while gently pushing the bottom of the stopper knot upwards If you have successfully completed this knotit should look something like the fifth picture
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 6 Ready To Climb Now that you have mastered the Figure 8 knot you can securely harness yourself into a climbing rope Remember there are many other skills that go into setting up ananchor and belaying a climber This tutorial only covers the figure 8 knot For more information there are many great websites that demonstrate how to correctly set up asafe climbing system (Ive posted a few below) If you are a beginning climber I recommend that you read up on a few other climbing techniques Also you shouldprobably go to a climbing wall or gym where there are experienced climbers that can show you the ropes Hopefully this tutorial has been helpful Have fun and be safe
Some useful linkshttpwwwstephenprattnetAnchorsanchorshtmhttpwwwuoregonedu~oppclimbingtopicsanchorshtmlhttpwwwabc-of-rockclimbingcomhowtoclimbingtechniquesasp
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Related Instructables
How to Tie aFigure EightKnot byTactical_Pyro
Paracord KnotDisplay Bord byJamie bagn
Basic KnotsGuide byzorro3355
How to Climb aTree (withprussiks) bystasterisk
How to climb atree (using onlyrope) thefunsimple wayby louieaw
How to get arope into a tree(withoutclimbing it) byvitex
How to tievarious knots byadaviel
How to make arope swing byjdub0928
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Turks Head Knots on a Bottleby sklnxbones on July 6 2010
Intro Turks Head Knots on a BottleThis is the finished project A bottle decorated with three Turks Head Knots There are only three knots on this bottle The RED and the BLUE knots are each a 20 Bightby 3 Lead Turks Head Knots The WHITE knot is a 20 Bight by 19 Lead Turks Head Knot
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 1 Supplies
Cord Lots and Lots of cord I cant tell you how much each bottle is differentBottle Washed and Dried inside and out Make sure to remove all water spotsThreaded Needle Cord screws into the threads at the base of the needlePegs I use brass rivets used as a map to tie the Turks Head KnotsHole Punch Used to punch holes in the painters tape to hold the pegsPainters Tape To hold the pegs in place and to make your map for the Turks Head KnotsMarker To write on the painters tapeCloth Towel To remove finger prints and dirt from your bottleKrazy Glue or Super Glue This is used to secure the knots in place to the bottle
OPTIONAL BUT HIGHLY RECOMMENDEDI use the Turks Head Cookbook from KnotToolcom
Step 2 PreparationYou will need to find a bottle you like I used an empty instant tea bottle of course washed and dried (I like to put the bottle in the oven for a few minutes to dry the insidewithout water spots Take off the lid and do not put lid in the oven) Now measure the circumference of the bottle Take a cord and tightly wrap the cord around the bottleMark where the ends meet and use a ruler to measure the length of the cord For my instant tea bottle the circumference is 27cm I know from past knots that I have tiedthat I want my knot to have 20 Bights in the top and bottom (bands) knots I am going to use the Bights in the (bands) knots to tie the middle knot Now divide the numberof Bights (20) into the size of the circumference (27) to get the space between each Bight (135) With me so far
Now take two pieces of painters tape using a ruler measure out the length of the circumference and mark the length on the both pieces of tape Next you will mark thespace between each Bight on the tape
Step 3 Adding the PegsI like to use pegs when tying Turks Head Knots it just makes tying the knot easier
These are what I use for pegs
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 4 Adding Pegs to the TapeNow take a hole punch to cut holes in the tape where the lines meet You will place the pegs in the holes
Insert a peg in each hole and carefully stick the first piece of tape to the bottle
Step 5 Adding the 2nd row of pegsNow do the same thing with the second piece of tape The numbers on each piece of tape must line up
This picture shows you what you should have now This odd looking thing will be your map to tie the Turks Head Knot And this is the end of Step 1
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 6 Tying the first Turks Head KnotUsing the Turks Head Cookbook follow the numbers going over and under as indicated in the book I chose a 20 Bight by 3 Lead knot which will give me a nice bandaround the bottle Once the ends meet you have made one complete knot Tape the running end of your cord and start removing the pegs and the tape
Step 7 Remove the pegs and the tapeBe careful not to untie the knot as you remove the pegs and tape from the bottle Continue to remove all the pegs and remove the tape from the bottle At this point theknot will be very loose and will need to be tightened up
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 8 Remove the slack from the knotHere you can see just how much the knot expanded Starting with the standing end begin to pull the slack out of the knot going towards the running end of the cordDo not expect to pull all the slack out at once You may have to make 3 - 5 attempts at removing the slack out of the knot DO NOT remove all of the slack out of the knotIn order to make the bands we will have to triple the Turks Head Knot We will do this by following the knot three times The threaded needle will really come in handyhere
Step 9 Triple the KnotOnce you have made three passes of the Turks Head Knot use your needle to go under your knot about half the circumference and cut the cord The knot will be tightenough to hide the tail in placeTIP I carefully add a couple of drops of super glue UNDER the band to hold them in place and keep them from sliding around in the nextsteps A drop or two in 3 or 4 places around the band should be enough
Step 10 Add the second knotNow repeat this whole step for the second bandWhen tying the second band you must make sure the Bights line up to the first band This is crucial for the next stepWipe down the bottle to make sure all your finger prints and adhesive from the tape are all removed You want to make sure your bottle is clean at this point Any dirt orfinger prints left on the bottle will be almost impossible to remove From this point on we will use gloves when tying our last knot
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 11 Maping the Top KnotStick a piece of painters tape on top of your first band leaving the bottom of the knot exposedUse a marker to count the number of Bights in your knot Instead of using the pegs we are going to use the Bights to tie our next Turks Head Knot
Step 12 Mapping the Bottom KnotDo the same thing for the bottom band but you must make sure your numbers on top and bottom line up So 1 on top should be the same position as 1 on the bottom
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 13 Adding the last knotAgain using the Turks Head Cookbook and the threaded needle you are going to follow the instructions going over and under as indicated in the book Be sure to usegloves when ever you handle the bottle
Step 14 Thats ItFor this Turks Head Knot I am using a 20 Bight by 19 Lead knot
Because of the amount of cord you are working with your cord will get twisted and knotted You will have to un-twist the cord often Its a pain in the rear but it has to bedone And it has to be done alot
Continue to tie the knot until you finish the knot If you have the cord and the patience you can double or triple the knot When you are done use your needle to hide theends under your bands Cut the ends and your DONE
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Related Instructables
Monkeys FistFloatingKeychain byjokerlz
How To Make ATurks headKnot WithParacord byDoggie Stylish
Tying Trivetsout of Rope forHoliday Gifts bykylemarsh
Paracord KnotDisplay Bord byJamie bagn
How to Make ATurks Head(Photos) bymchs60chip
A pocket full ofknots byKiteman
Monkeys fistknot AND themonkey byjonathan111
TiteTie is theTruckers Knoton Steroids bytitetie
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Larks head noose -- an easy useful knot that tightens and loosensby Larry Breed on February 19 2009
Intro Larks head noose -- an easy useful knot that tightens and loosensI thought I knew all the basic knots but then I was taught this incredibly useful simple knot Its good for tying up the neck of a bag that you want to repeatedly open andsecurely close Its good for tying around a springy bundle that will need tightening and retightening And its easy to undo
Ive looked at knot literature but havent found a name for this so I named it The basic knot is well known its called a larks head Since all Ive done is to slip the twoends through the larks head to make a noose I call it that
WARNING Dont use this knot when human safety would depend on it Climbers and mountaineers have well-tested reliable knots for such situations
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Image Notes1 To tighten further step on this side of the larks head and pull the free ends
Step 1 Double the cord overThe larks head noose requires enough cord to go twice around your bundle plus a foot or two Find the center and double it over Sailors call this a bight
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 2 Form the larks headComing from below the bight hook your thumb and forefinger over the two sides Reach outward and downward and pinch your fingertips together underneath thedoubled cord
Youve made a larks head Move the crossing cord a little farther from your hand so theres a clear opening through the two half-loops
Step 3 Form the nooseSlip the two ends of the cord through the opening we were just talking about Pull the larks head tight so it grips the two cords Find something that needs constrictingand put the noose around it
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 4 Tightening retightening and lockingSlide the knot against the bundle If its not tight enough to keep from slipping tighten it by holding it in one hand and tugging on the cords one at a time with the otherhand Notice that you can slide the knot out again for instance to re-open the bag you just tied shut For some applications this may be as tight as you need it
A springy bundle probably still feels loose If so compress the bundle and get a new grip on the cords Rest your foot on the bundle on the cords nearest the larks headand pull to slide the larks head tighter
To make the knot more permanent you can lock it Make an overhand in the cord ends (Exactly like the first step in tying shoelaces) With your foot still on the bundlepull on the cords and move your hands apart until youre pulling in opposite directions You have just locked the larks head and you can trust it to stay that way()
But lets say that later on you want to loosen the locked knot Again put your foot on the bundle and cords nearest the larks head hold the two cord ends together andpull This makes a little slack between the overhand and the larks head so you can untie the overhand
In twine or small string the locking overhand knot may be difficult to undo Use a shoelace knot instead of an overhand and itll unlock easily
() If youre using slippery cord like polypropylene an overhand may not lock securely You may want to tie another overhand knot For added security wrap a shortlength of duct tape around the two cords close to the knot
Image Notes1 To tighten further step on this side of the larks head and pull the free ends
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Related Instructables
TRX fromParacordChallengeAccepted bythrake
A pocket full ofknots byKiteman
Lens CapLanyard by~teknoarsonist~ how to tie a
noose byawesume
AdjustableParacordGlassesLanyard byjdtwelve12
HangmansNoose PackClosure byPopEye42
Paraleash - ADog LeashFrom Paracordby The Ideanator
How to make arugged andhandy ParacordBelt by Jake22
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Related Instructables
Climb Safe WithA Figure 8Knot by mattste A pocket full of
knots byKiteman
How to Tie aFigure EightKnot byTactical_Pyro
Paracord KnotDisplay Bord byJamie bagn
Cross KnotParacordLanyard byStormdrane
How to Tie aFire-escapeKnot by leonardoismael
Truckers HitchTHE mostawesome knoton the planetby schneidp20
Paracord ZipperPuller byrepeet13
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Truckers Hitch THE most awesome knot on the planetby schneidp20 on October 12 2008
Authorschneidp20I like building stuff Trouble is there just isnt enough time to build everything Sigh
Intro Truckers Hitch THE most awesome knot on the planetYes I know that there are plenty of other cool knots out there many of which I literally couldnt live wo I rock climb However this knot is unlike any other Plus Ineeded a grabber for my Instructable -) (BTW this ISNT a climbing knot) And in truth it isnt a knot by itself but rather a system of common knots
Have you ever tried to tie something down for transporting but just couldnt get the lines tight andor during transport the lines would continually loosen Then this is theknot for you I learned this knot back in the 70s when specialty car racks and ratchet straps were rare or unheard of I initially used it to tie a canoe on a car rack bothattaching to the rack as well as the lines to the bow and stern of the canoe Even with all the new gizmos available today this knot still shines because all you need is arope and ropes dont hum in the wind like straps
The unique aspect of this knot is that it gives you a 2-1 mechanical advantage when tightening the rope Be careful though You can actually damage some thingsbecause of the mechanical advantage This knot holds fast and is easy to untie hallmark traits of any good knot
Below you see the finished knot system well break it apart in the steps that follow
Image Notes1 1st anchor point a bowline2 loop3 securing knots 2 half hitches4 securing loose end with a fishermans knot5 2nd anchor point (should be round)
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Image Notes1 X marks the spot
Step 1 Initial setupThe first step is to anchor one end of the rope and then loop the rope around a 2nd anchor point
For attaching to the 1st anchor point I chose bowline a close 2 on my list -) There are other instructables on that one so I wont bore you here
The 2nd anchor really should be round because it serves as a pulley in this block and tackle type knot Ive used it on sharp anchor points and it doesnt work as well
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 2 Creating a slip knotTie a slip knot somewhere between the two anchor points Correct placement of the slip knot takes some experience to judge it correctly Typically I place it too close tothe 2nd anchor point and end up with not enough room to work with If the knot ends up too far from 2nd anchor point you can extend the knot by enlarging the loop
Be sure you tie the slip knot as shown You may not be able to untie other knots
In this small example the slip knot is uncharacteristically close to the 1st anchor point
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 3 Tightening and securingThe loose end of the rope that went around the 2nd anchor point goes through the slip knot loop Pull the loose end to the desired tension and secure with two halfhitches
Note To allow better view of the knots the rope isnt really tightened in this example
Step 4 Securing loose endThe final knot is just to secure the loose end somehow I chose a fishermans knot to do this
To tie a fishermans knot the rope goes around twice and goes under the X created by the loops Pull the loose end to tighten Finally slide the knot to put tension onthe half hitches
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Image Notes1 X marks the spot
Step 5 FinishedThere you have it I guarantee that the first time you really use this knot (not just practice) you will be amazed at how well it works and youll wish you knew this knot along time ago You may even come over to my side and declare that is is THE most awesome knot on the planet -)
Enjoy and happy haulingDave
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Related Instructables
TiteTie is theTruckers Knoton Steroids bytitetie
Four knots tomake paracordinto a usefultool byerik_mccray
Modify yourbike rack tocarry a sunfishor other boat byewilhelm
SurfboardHammock byGermy
GiganticHalloweenSpider Web bynolte919
How To Tie ASpiders Hitch(video) by back-cast
Three-hitch mathair ornamentby michiexile TRX from
ParacordChallengeAccepted bythrake
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Carry any Bottle with a JUG KNOT Handleby hpstoutharrow on September 17 2009
Intro Carry any Bottle with a JUG KNOT HandleTie a JUG KNOT around a water bottle soda bottle or aluminum bottle to make a secure carrying strap
Re-purpose any container into a reusable water bottle by adding a convenient carrying strap This Instructable will demonstrate how to tie a JUG knot which like its namesuggests is meant to properly secure around the neck of a container
With some cord and the knowledge of this knot you will be able add a handle lanyard or carabiner loop to any of your favorite beverages to carry them on the go
It works perfectly for those disposable water bottles and who knows once you add some colorful cord to the plain old clear water bottle you just might beinclined to refill it and use it again(Check out pictures 4amp5 below)
In addition to plastic beverage bottles like pop water and sports drinks you can turn those rugged aluminum beer bottles into a backpacking canteen
Those of you familiar with my previous aluminum bottle InstructablesROLLED RIM METAL TUMBLERhttpwwwinstructablescomidAluminum-Bottle-Tumbler-Cup-Cook-PotALUMINUM BOTTLE LIGHTWEIGHT ALCOHOL STOVEhttpwwwinstructablescomidAluminum-Bottle-Alcohol-Stovewill recognize the water canteen shown below as a re-purposed aluminum beer bottle Here I have added a painted surface treatment to turn it into a proper lookingwater bottle More on that in steps 13 14 15
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 1 Getting StartedCord size is important Select a small medium weight cord like the one shown here It is a general purpose camp cord sold at most sporting goods stores (shoelacesmight also work)
Do not use a heavy cord or rope because the larger diameter will not tuck under the relatively small lip at the top of the bottleneck and the bottle will fall out
Also the smaller cord cinches tight on itself and will not loosen accidentally
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 2 Form a BightThe next steps show how to tie a JUG KNOT It is the basic step for adding a carrying strap It is also the anchor point for any additional fancy bottle trussing you maywant to add
JUG KNOT Step 1
Form a Bight in the center of a length of cord Bight is a knot term for a loop or bend in the rope In this case the main Bight in this knot is highlighted with a white mark Imakes it easier to follow its path in these steps
The running ends of the cord should be equal length
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 3 Pull the Bight downPULL the Bight DOWN forming two Loops
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 4 Cross the LoopsCROSS the right Loop OVER the left Loop
Step 5 Pass the Bight under the 1st loopTake the main Bight and pass it UNDER the left Loop
Step 6 Weave the BightWEAVE the Bight OVER the portion of the right Loop and UNDER the portion of the left Loop
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 7 Extend the BightExtend the Bight OVER the outer portion of the right Loop
Step 8 Flip the Right Loop behindAdditional colored identification points have been added to the loops to follow their travel in these next two steps
The right Loop Yellow marker is FLIPPED BEHIND the knot and ends up on the far left side of the knot
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 9 Flip the 2nd loop in frontRaise the green marker (located on what was formerly the left loop) and pull it down and to the right FLIPPING IT IN FRONT of the knot
Note the blue portion of the this loop will pass around the outside of the yellow portion of the first loop
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Image Notes1 Center of knot that will tighten around the bottles neck
Step 10 Remove SlackNote where the blue green amp yellow markers end up
Start to remove the slack in the loops by pulling the original main Bight (white marker top right) and the two free standing ends at the bottom
the bottle neck will pass through the very center of the knot
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Image Notes1 Center of knot that will tighten around the bottles neck
Step 11 Tighten the KnotAfter removing the slack insert the bottle neck and finish tightening
The knot should look like this before slipping it over the bottle
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 12 Secure on bottle neckThis is the finished knot shown on the neck of various containers
The loop end and the two free standing ends can be tied together to create a carrying handle (last picture below)
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 13 Aluminum Bottle Water Bottle
The next few steps show the features of an aluminum beer bottle re-purposed as a water bottle canteen It is one of many containers that can be reused as a camp waterbottle
The bottle was lightly sanded masked and then pained with a hammered finished paint to create an interesting surface texture
Image Notes1 Textured finish paint makes an interesting grip-able surface2 Masked with tape for painting3 Masked with tape for painting
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Image Notes1 Dowel used for holding the bottle during painting
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 14 Tethered Cork StopperUse a wine bottle man made Cork as a stopper for your aluminum water bottleNote Use a cork that was removed from the wine bottle without the corkscrew penetrating through the bottom end of the cork (A hole all the way through the cork willcause it to leak) Use the unpierced end of the cork inside the water bottle
Drill a hole through the sides of the Cork Thread the cord through the hole to the center of the cord Use the cork as the main Bight and tie the Jug knot as shown inthe beginning steps
Now the cork is tethered to the bottle and will not get lost or fall on the ground
A Carabiner clip passes through the other cord end to attache the water bottle to you belt or pack
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 15 Trussed for TransportThis is another hanging method for carrying your aluminum bottle water canteen A Jug knot is tied conventionally around the neck
The running ends of the knot however are pulled down towards the bottom of the bottle A Barrel Knot is tied about 34 the way down the side of the bottle A squareknot is tied on the bottom of the knot to keep the two running ends tight against the sides of the bottle
I like the look of the accent colored cord running down the sides of the bottle and the fact that the bottle hangs from the belt upside down It adds to its uniqueness
The last picture shows another truss variation
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 16 AdvancedBelow is a bottle with some additional trussing You can be creative as you want It all starts with a re-purposed container and the Jug Knot (and enough cord)
Related Instructables
AluminumBottle TumblerCup amp Cook Potfor an AlcoholStove byhpstoutharrow
Water BottleBelt Clip byuglymike Duct Tape
Water Bottle byrabidsquire2
AluminumBottle AlcoholStove byhpstoutharrow
DIYGlass WaterBottle byCulturespy
Solar WaterHeater forBackpackingUsing WaterBottles and aCar Shade bykopomeroy
Duct tape waterbottle holder(Photos) by pinkmarshmallow
How to make aCamelPack withan old plasticbottle bywillrandship
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Basic Knots Guideby zorro3355 on April 29 2008
Intro Basic Knots Guidehi
Step 1 Thumb knotThe most simple knotUsed as a stopper and prevent ropes from fraying
Step 2 Reef KnotUsed to tie two ropes of equal thickness togetherIt is pretty easy to tie and untie but under tentionit may be diffcult to untieIt is also not sutible for smoothropes(egnylon ropes)
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 3 Figure of eightused as a stopperprevent ropes from fraying and its more secure than tumb knot its is also used to tie Caribinas to ropes and is often used in rock climbing
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 4 Timber hitchused for pulling logs
Step 5 Clove hitchUsed to tie a rope onto a pole or logThe pole must be roundThe pole lust be thicker then the rope itself
(greatly used during pioneering)
Step 6 Sheet bandused to tie ropes of different thickness together(works on same thickness of ropes too)
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 7 Sheep shankTo shorten RopesTo prevent middle fraying
Step 8 Slip knotWhippingUsed as a grip for pulling things(when tied on a stick or small pole)(marlin spike hitch)
Related Instructables
Rope Rings byhpstoutharrow
How to Tie aFigure EightKnot byTactical_Pyro
Whippin (WestCountry Style)by tim_n
SurvivalBracelet(Updated) bytevers94
HangmansNoose PackClosure byPopEye42
Turkey on aTripod byhpstoutharrow
SurvivalBracelet II bytevers94 Zigzag Spooling
Paracord (video)by Stormdrane
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
How to Tie a Fire-escape Knotby leonardo ismael on October 16 2007
Intro How to Tie a Fire-escape KnotThis knot is used by firemen in case of fires for example imagine a scene where the ladder on the firetruck messes up but people need to get down a five story buildingor more All they have is a long piece of rope they can safely get down with a secure knot like the fire-escape knot So why not learn it its easy to do and hard to untieif you tie it tightly
This is from the American Boys Handbook
Step 1 Get Your RopeFirst grab a piece of rope and bend it like this to make a loop in it Follow every step to the smallest detail
Step 2 Twist the RopeNow make a twist like this and hold it together
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 3 Pull Through the TwistPull the loop through the twist you just made from underneath
Step 4 Go Over the Split EndNow pull the tail through the loop
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 5 FinallyAnd finally just pull it through as pictured below
Congratulations you just learned the fire-escape knot
Step 6 Same Name Not KnotThis is another knot called the fire-escape knot this shouldnt be your result
Related Instructables
House FireEscape Plan(video) byWhatHappensNowAdvice
ParacordLadder wWooden Rungsby josestude
Bed SheetEscape Rope byjessehensel
rope ladder(glow-in-the-dark version) bymikeasaurus
HeadlockEscape 2(video) byjohnnyrockstah
QuickFirestarter byMattandJora
Trail sauna byjakee117
How to Kill FireAnts andCommitGenocide byKentsOkay
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Climb Safe With A Figure 8 Knotby mattste on February 23 2010
Intro Climb Safe With A Figure 8 Knot There are many things that a beginning climber needs to know including several important knots Perhaps the most essential knot is the Figure 8 Follow Through Thistutorial will demonstrate how to correctly harness yourself to a rope using a Figure 8 Follow Through knot This knot is used primarily by rock climbers to provide a life-line Since this knot is used as a life-line it is very important to be able to tie it correctly (Your life could depend upon it)
Dont worry with this tutorial and about 5 minutes of practice you can have this knot mastered
Things you will need
- Climbing Harness- Climbing Rope
If you are wanting to go climbing and dont already have these items they can be purchased for about $25 each at most outdoor sporting goods stores If you are merelylooking to learn the knot a belt loop and a rope (about five feet long) will do
Image Notes1 Climbing Harness2 Climbing Rope
Step 1 Dealing With The RopeThroughout this tutorial I will be discussing different parts of the rope To make these instructions as clear as possible I will define a few terms that I will use throughoutthe tutorial The Anchor End of the rope will generally be at the top of the images This is the end that would be anchored to the wall or rock and does not move Wewill not be doing much with the anchored end The Tail End of the rope is the opposite end that we will be dealing with I will call this the tail for short
Now that we have some terms to work with lets get started
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 2 Tying The First Figure 8This knot has several parts to it The first part of the knot is just tying a basic figure 8 To tie the first figure 8 there are four simple steps
1 - Using the tail make a loop over the rope (as shown in the first picture) keeping in mind that there should be about 3 ft of slack on the tail end
2 - Wrap the tail back this time go under the anchored end (As shown in the second picture)
3 - Bring the tail down through the first loop (As shown in the third picture)
4 - Finally pull the two ends to make the knot a little bit tighter and easier to deal with (Shown in the fourth picture)
After these four steps you should end up with a knot that resembles a figure 8
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 3 Looping Into The Harness In order to secure the rope to the harness simply thread the tail end of the rope through the front loop in the harness as shown in the picture below This step isobviously very important
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 4 Following Back Through The Figure 8After looping the rope through the harness you have to thread the tail end of the rope back through the knot following the first figure 8 I have divided this process intofive smaller steps in order to make it more clear
1 - Coming form underneath the knot bring the tail up through the near loop and to the left behind the anchored end of the rope (Shown in the first picture)
2 - Wrap the tail around the anchored end back to the right and down through the adjacent loop (Shown in the second picture)
3 - You simply need to bring the tail back over the top of the knot to the left (Shown in the third picture)
4 - Bring the tail end up through the far loop following the anchored end (Shown in the fourth picture)
5 - Finally pull the knot tight (Shown in the fifth picture)
As you can see the first four pictures are simply tracing the knot back through with the tail end
For the last part while you pull the knot tight you may want to make small adjustments and rearrange how it all fits together If the knot does not lay perfectly smoothand tight its NOT a big deal
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 5 Finishing The Knot After completing the Figure 8 knot you will want to somehow secure the tail end of the rope out of the way There are a couple different ways to do this the way that Iwill demonstrate is using whats called a Stopper Knot This secondary knot is similar to a Fishermans knot and is pretty simple I have once again divided thisprocess into several smaller steps
1 - Start by wrapping the tail end around the anchored end (As shown in the first picture)
2 - Wrap the tail back underneath the two vertical segments (As shown in the second picture)
3 - Simply repeat the first two steps wrapping the tail around again (As shown in the third picture)
4 - This step in the fourth picture may look complicated but all you need to do is insert the tail up through the two loops that you have just made
5 - To finish off the knot you will want to slowly pull the tail end while gently pushing the bottom of the stopper knot upwards If you have successfully completed this knotit should look something like the fifth picture
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 6 Ready To Climb Now that you have mastered the Figure 8 knot you can securely harness yourself into a climbing rope Remember there are many other skills that go into setting up ananchor and belaying a climber This tutorial only covers the figure 8 knot For more information there are many great websites that demonstrate how to correctly set up asafe climbing system (Ive posted a few below) If you are a beginning climber I recommend that you read up on a few other climbing techniques Also you shouldprobably go to a climbing wall or gym where there are experienced climbers that can show you the ropes Hopefully this tutorial has been helpful Have fun and be safe
Some useful linkshttpwwwstephenprattnetAnchorsanchorshtmhttpwwwuoregonedu~oppclimbingtopicsanchorshtmlhttpwwwabc-of-rockclimbingcomhowtoclimbingtechniquesasp
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Related Instructables
How to Tie aFigure EightKnot byTactical_Pyro
Paracord KnotDisplay Bord byJamie bagn
Basic KnotsGuide byzorro3355
How to Climb aTree (withprussiks) bystasterisk
How to climb atree (using onlyrope) thefunsimple wayby louieaw
How to get arope into a tree(withoutclimbing it) byvitex
How to tievarious knots byadaviel
How to make arope swing byjdub0928
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Turks Head Knots on a Bottleby sklnxbones on July 6 2010
Intro Turks Head Knots on a BottleThis is the finished project A bottle decorated with three Turks Head Knots There are only three knots on this bottle The RED and the BLUE knots are each a 20 Bightby 3 Lead Turks Head Knots The WHITE knot is a 20 Bight by 19 Lead Turks Head Knot
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 1 Supplies
Cord Lots and Lots of cord I cant tell you how much each bottle is differentBottle Washed and Dried inside and out Make sure to remove all water spotsThreaded Needle Cord screws into the threads at the base of the needlePegs I use brass rivets used as a map to tie the Turks Head KnotsHole Punch Used to punch holes in the painters tape to hold the pegsPainters Tape To hold the pegs in place and to make your map for the Turks Head KnotsMarker To write on the painters tapeCloth Towel To remove finger prints and dirt from your bottleKrazy Glue or Super Glue This is used to secure the knots in place to the bottle
OPTIONAL BUT HIGHLY RECOMMENDEDI use the Turks Head Cookbook from KnotToolcom
Step 2 PreparationYou will need to find a bottle you like I used an empty instant tea bottle of course washed and dried (I like to put the bottle in the oven for a few minutes to dry the insidewithout water spots Take off the lid and do not put lid in the oven) Now measure the circumference of the bottle Take a cord and tightly wrap the cord around the bottleMark where the ends meet and use a ruler to measure the length of the cord For my instant tea bottle the circumference is 27cm I know from past knots that I have tiedthat I want my knot to have 20 Bights in the top and bottom (bands) knots I am going to use the Bights in the (bands) knots to tie the middle knot Now divide the numberof Bights (20) into the size of the circumference (27) to get the space between each Bight (135) With me so far
Now take two pieces of painters tape using a ruler measure out the length of the circumference and mark the length on the both pieces of tape Next you will mark thespace between each Bight on the tape
Step 3 Adding the PegsI like to use pegs when tying Turks Head Knots it just makes tying the knot easier
These are what I use for pegs
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 4 Adding Pegs to the TapeNow take a hole punch to cut holes in the tape where the lines meet You will place the pegs in the holes
Insert a peg in each hole and carefully stick the first piece of tape to the bottle
Step 5 Adding the 2nd row of pegsNow do the same thing with the second piece of tape The numbers on each piece of tape must line up
This picture shows you what you should have now This odd looking thing will be your map to tie the Turks Head Knot And this is the end of Step 1
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 6 Tying the first Turks Head KnotUsing the Turks Head Cookbook follow the numbers going over and under as indicated in the book I chose a 20 Bight by 3 Lead knot which will give me a nice bandaround the bottle Once the ends meet you have made one complete knot Tape the running end of your cord and start removing the pegs and the tape
Step 7 Remove the pegs and the tapeBe careful not to untie the knot as you remove the pegs and tape from the bottle Continue to remove all the pegs and remove the tape from the bottle At this point theknot will be very loose and will need to be tightened up
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 8 Remove the slack from the knotHere you can see just how much the knot expanded Starting with the standing end begin to pull the slack out of the knot going towards the running end of the cordDo not expect to pull all the slack out at once You may have to make 3 - 5 attempts at removing the slack out of the knot DO NOT remove all of the slack out of the knotIn order to make the bands we will have to triple the Turks Head Knot We will do this by following the knot three times The threaded needle will really come in handyhere
Step 9 Triple the KnotOnce you have made three passes of the Turks Head Knot use your needle to go under your knot about half the circumference and cut the cord The knot will be tightenough to hide the tail in placeTIP I carefully add a couple of drops of super glue UNDER the band to hold them in place and keep them from sliding around in the nextsteps A drop or two in 3 or 4 places around the band should be enough
Step 10 Add the second knotNow repeat this whole step for the second bandWhen tying the second band you must make sure the Bights line up to the first band This is crucial for the next stepWipe down the bottle to make sure all your finger prints and adhesive from the tape are all removed You want to make sure your bottle is clean at this point Any dirt orfinger prints left on the bottle will be almost impossible to remove From this point on we will use gloves when tying our last knot
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 11 Maping the Top KnotStick a piece of painters tape on top of your first band leaving the bottom of the knot exposedUse a marker to count the number of Bights in your knot Instead of using the pegs we are going to use the Bights to tie our next Turks Head Knot
Step 12 Mapping the Bottom KnotDo the same thing for the bottom band but you must make sure your numbers on top and bottom line up So 1 on top should be the same position as 1 on the bottom
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 13 Adding the last knotAgain using the Turks Head Cookbook and the threaded needle you are going to follow the instructions going over and under as indicated in the book Be sure to usegloves when ever you handle the bottle
Step 14 Thats ItFor this Turks Head Knot I am using a 20 Bight by 19 Lead knot
Because of the amount of cord you are working with your cord will get twisted and knotted You will have to un-twist the cord often Its a pain in the rear but it has to bedone And it has to be done alot
Continue to tie the knot until you finish the knot If you have the cord and the patience you can double or triple the knot When you are done use your needle to hide theends under your bands Cut the ends and your DONE
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Related Instructables
Monkeys FistFloatingKeychain byjokerlz
How To Make ATurks headKnot WithParacord byDoggie Stylish
Tying Trivetsout of Rope forHoliday Gifts bykylemarsh
Paracord KnotDisplay Bord byJamie bagn
How to Make ATurks Head(Photos) bymchs60chip
A pocket full ofknots byKiteman
Monkeys fistknot AND themonkey byjonathan111
TiteTie is theTruckers Knoton Steroids bytitetie
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Larks head noose -- an easy useful knot that tightens and loosensby Larry Breed on February 19 2009
Intro Larks head noose -- an easy useful knot that tightens and loosensI thought I knew all the basic knots but then I was taught this incredibly useful simple knot Its good for tying up the neck of a bag that you want to repeatedly open andsecurely close Its good for tying around a springy bundle that will need tightening and retightening And its easy to undo
Ive looked at knot literature but havent found a name for this so I named it The basic knot is well known its called a larks head Since all Ive done is to slip the twoends through the larks head to make a noose I call it that
WARNING Dont use this knot when human safety would depend on it Climbers and mountaineers have well-tested reliable knots for such situations
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Image Notes1 To tighten further step on this side of the larks head and pull the free ends
Step 1 Double the cord overThe larks head noose requires enough cord to go twice around your bundle plus a foot or two Find the center and double it over Sailors call this a bight
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 2 Form the larks headComing from below the bight hook your thumb and forefinger over the two sides Reach outward and downward and pinch your fingertips together underneath thedoubled cord
Youve made a larks head Move the crossing cord a little farther from your hand so theres a clear opening through the two half-loops
Step 3 Form the nooseSlip the two ends of the cord through the opening we were just talking about Pull the larks head tight so it grips the two cords Find something that needs constrictingand put the noose around it
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 4 Tightening retightening and lockingSlide the knot against the bundle If its not tight enough to keep from slipping tighten it by holding it in one hand and tugging on the cords one at a time with the otherhand Notice that you can slide the knot out again for instance to re-open the bag you just tied shut For some applications this may be as tight as you need it
A springy bundle probably still feels loose If so compress the bundle and get a new grip on the cords Rest your foot on the bundle on the cords nearest the larks headand pull to slide the larks head tighter
To make the knot more permanent you can lock it Make an overhand in the cord ends (Exactly like the first step in tying shoelaces) With your foot still on the bundlepull on the cords and move your hands apart until youre pulling in opposite directions You have just locked the larks head and you can trust it to stay that way()
But lets say that later on you want to loosen the locked knot Again put your foot on the bundle and cords nearest the larks head hold the two cord ends together andpull This makes a little slack between the overhand and the larks head so you can untie the overhand
In twine or small string the locking overhand knot may be difficult to undo Use a shoelace knot instead of an overhand and itll unlock easily
() If youre using slippery cord like polypropylene an overhand may not lock securely You may want to tie another overhand knot For added security wrap a shortlength of duct tape around the two cords close to the knot
Image Notes1 To tighten further step on this side of the larks head and pull the free ends
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Related Instructables
TRX fromParacordChallengeAccepted bythrake
A pocket full ofknots byKiteman
Lens CapLanyard by~teknoarsonist~ how to tie a
noose byawesume
AdjustableParacordGlassesLanyard byjdtwelve12
HangmansNoose PackClosure byPopEye42
Paraleash - ADog LeashFrom Paracordby The Ideanator
How to make arugged andhandy ParacordBelt by Jake22
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Truckers Hitch THE most awesome knot on the planetby schneidp20 on October 12 2008
Authorschneidp20I like building stuff Trouble is there just isnt enough time to build everything Sigh
Intro Truckers Hitch THE most awesome knot on the planetYes I know that there are plenty of other cool knots out there many of which I literally couldnt live wo I rock climb However this knot is unlike any other Plus Ineeded a grabber for my Instructable -) (BTW this ISNT a climbing knot) And in truth it isnt a knot by itself but rather a system of common knots
Have you ever tried to tie something down for transporting but just couldnt get the lines tight andor during transport the lines would continually loosen Then this is theknot for you I learned this knot back in the 70s when specialty car racks and ratchet straps were rare or unheard of I initially used it to tie a canoe on a car rack bothattaching to the rack as well as the lines to the bow and stern of the canoe Even with all the new gizmos available today this knot still shines because all you need is arope and ropes dont hum in the wind like straps
The unique aspect of this knot is that it gives you a 2-1 mechanical advantage when tightening the rope Be careful though You can actually damage some thingsbecause of the mechanical advantage This knot holds fast and is easy to untie hallmark traits of any good knot
Below you see the finished knot system well break it apart in the steps that follow
Image Notes1 1st anchor point a bowline2 loop3 securing knots 2 half hitches4 securing loose end with a fishermans knot5 2nd anchor point (should be round)
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Image Notes1 X marks the spot
Step 1 Initial setupThe first step is to anchor one end of the rope and then loop the rope around a 2nd anchor point
For attaching to the 1st anchor point I chose bowline a close 2 on my list -) There are other instructables on that one so I wont bore you here
The 2nd anchor really should be round because it serves as a pulley in this block and tackle type knot Ive used it on sharp anchor points and it doesnt work as well
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 2 Creating a slip knotTie a slip knot somewhere between the two anchor points Correct placement of the slip knot takes some experience to judge it correctly Typically I place it too close tothe 2nd anchor point and end up with not enough room to work with If the knot ends up too far from 2nd anchor point you can extend the knot by enlarging the loop
Be sure you tie the slip knot as shown You may not be able to untie other knots
In this small example the slip knot is uncharacteristically close to the 1st anchor point
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 3 Tightening and securingThe loose end of the rope that went around the 2nd anchor point goes through the slip knot loop Pull the loose end to the desired tension and secure with two halfhitches
Note To allow better view of the knots the rope isnt really tightened in this example
Step 4 Securing loose endThe final knot is just to secure the loose end somehow I chose a fishermans knot to do this
To tie a fishermans knot the rope goes around twice and goes under the X created by the loops Pull the loose end to tighten Finally slide the knot to put tension onthe half hitches
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Image Notes1 X marks the spot
Step 5 FinishedThere you have it I guarantee that the first time you really use this knot (not just practice) you will be amazed at how well it works and youll wish you knew this knot along time ago You may even come over to my side and declare that is is THE most awesome knot on the planet -)
Enjoy and happy haulingDave
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Related Instructables
TiteTie is theTruckers Knoton Steroids bytitetie
Four knots tomake paracordinto a usefultool byerik_mccray
Modify yourbike rack tocarry a sunfishor other boat byewilhelm
SurfboardHammock byGermy
GiganticHalloweenSpider Web bynolte919
How To Tie ASpiders Hitch(video) by back-cast
Three-hitch mathair ornamentby michiexile TRX from
ParacordChallengeAccepted bythrake
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Carry any Bottle with a JUG KNOT Handleby hpstoutharrow on September 17 2009
Intro Carry any Bottle with a JUG KNOT HandleTie a JUG KNOT around a water bottle soda bottle or aluminum bottle to make a secure carrying strap
Re-purpose any container into a reusable water bottle by adding a convenient carrying strap This Instructable will demonstrate how to tie a JUG knot which like its namesuggests is meant to properly secure around the neck of a container
With some cord and the knowledge of this knot you will be able add a handle lanyard or carabiner loop to any of your favorite beverages to carry them on the go
It works perfectly for those disposable water bottles and who knows once you add some colorful cord to the plain old clear water bottle you just might beinclined to refill it and use it again(Check out pictures 4amp5 below)
In addition to plastic beverage bottles like pop water and sports drinks you can turn those rugged aluminum beer bottles into a backpacking canteen
Those of you familiar with my previous aluminum bottle InstructablesROLLED RIM METAL TUMBLERhttpwwwinstructablescomidAluminum-Bottle-Tumbler-Cup-Cook-PotALUMINUM BOTTLE LIGHTWEIGHT ALCOHOL STOVEhttpwwwinstructablescomidAluminum-Bottle-Alcohol-Stovewill recognize the water canteen shown below as a re-purposed aluminum beer bottle Here I have added a painted surface treatment to turn it into a proper lookingwater bottle More on that in steps 13 14 15
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 1 Getting StartedCord size is important Select a small medium weight cord like the one shown here It is a general purpose camp cord sold at most sporting goods stores (shoelacesmight also work)
Do not use a heavy cord or rope because the larger diameter will not tuck under the relatively small lip at the top of the bottleneck and the bottle will fall out
Also the smaller cord cinches tight on itself and will not loosen accidentally
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 2 Form a BightThe next steps show how to tie a JUG KNOT It is the basic step for adding a carrying strap It is also the anchor point for any additional fancy bottle trussing you maywant to add
JUG KNOT Step 1
Form a Bight in the center of a length of cord Bight is a knot term for a loop or bend in the rope In this case the main Bight in this knot is highlighted with a white mark Imakes it easier to follow its path in these steps
The running ends of the cord should be equal length
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 3 Pull the Bight downPULL the Bight DOWN forming two Loops
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 4 Cross the LoopsCROSS the right Loop OVER the left Loop
Step 5 Pass the Bight under the 1st loopTake the main Bight and pass it UNDER the left Loop
Step 6 Weave the BightWEAVE the Bight OVER the portion of the right Loop and UNDER the portion of the left Loop
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 7 Extend the BightExtend the Bight OVER the outer portion of the right Loop
Step 8 Flip the Right Loop behindAdditional colored identification points have been added to the loops to follow their travel in these next two steps
The right Loop Yellow marker is FLIPPED BEHIND the knot and ends up on the far left side of the knot
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 9 Flip the 2nd loop in frontRaise the green marker (located on what was formerly the left loop) and pull it down and to the right FLIPPING IT IN FRONT of the knot
Note the blue portion of the this loop will pass around the outside of the yellow portion of the first loop
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Image Notes1 Center of knot that will tighten around the bottles neck
Step 10 Remove SlackNote where the blue green amp yellow markers end up
Start to remove the slack in the loops by pulling the original main Bight (white marker top right) and the two free standing ends at the bottom
the bottle neck will pass through the very center of the knot
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Image Notes1 Center of knot that will tighten around the bottles neck
Step 11 Tighten the KnotAfter removing the slack insert the bottle neck and finish tightening
The knot should look like this before slipping it over the bottle
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 12 Secure on bottle neckThis is the finished knot shown on the neck of various containers
The loop end and the two free standing ends can be tied together to create a carrying handle (last picture below)
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 13 Aluminum Bottle Water Bottle
The next few steps show the features of an aluminum beer bottle re-purposed as a water bottle canteen It is one of many containers that can be reused as a camp waterbottle
The bottle was lightly sanded masked and then pained with a hammered finished paint to create an interesting surface texture
Image Notes1 Textured finish paint makes an interesting grip-able surface2 Masked with tape for painting3 Masked with tape for painting
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Image Notes1 Dowel used for holding the bottle during painting
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 14 Tethered Cork StopperUse a wine bottle man made Cork as a stopper for your aluminum water bottleNote Use a cork that was removed from the wine bottle without the corkscrew penetrating through the bottom end of the cork (A hole all the way through the cork willcause it to leak) Use the unpierced end of the cork inside the water bottle
Drill a hole through the sides of the Cork Thread the cord through the hole to the center of the cord Use the cork as the main Bight and tie the Jug knot as shown inthe beginning steps
Now the cork is tethered to the bottle and will not get lost or fall on the ground
A Carabiner clip passes through the other cord end to attache the water bottle to you belt or pack
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 15 Trussed for TransportThis is another hanging method for carrying your aluminum bottle water canteen A Jug knot is tied conventionally around the neck
The running ends of the knot however are pulled down towards the bottom of the bottle A Barrel Knot is tied about 34 the way down the side of the bottle A squareknot is tied on the bottom of the knot to keep the two running ends tight against the sides of the bottle
I like the look of the accent colored cord running down the sides of the bottle and the fact that the bottle hangs from the belt upside down It adds to its uniqueness
The last picture shows another truss variation
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 16 AdvancedBelow is a bottle with some additional trussing You can be creative as you want It all starts with a re-purposed container and the Jug Knot (and enough cord)
Related Instructables
AluminumBottle TumblerCup amp Cook Potfor an AlcoholStove byhpstoutharrow
Water BottleBelt Clip byuglymike Duct Tape
Water Bottle byrabidsquire2
AluminumBottle AlcoholStove byhpstoutharrow
DIYGlass WaterBottle byCulturespy
Solar WaterHeater forBackpackingUsing WaterBottles and aCar Shade bykopomeroy
Duct tape waterbottle holder(Photos) by pinkmarshmallow
How to make aCamelPack withan old plasticbottle bywillrandship
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Basic Knots Guideby zorro3355 on April 29 2008
Intro Basic Knots Guidehi
Step 1 Thumb knotThe most simple knotUsed as a stopper and prevent ropes from fraying
Step 2 Reef KnotUsed to tie two ropes of equal thickness togetherIt is pretty easy to tie and untie but under tentionit may be diffcult to untieIt is also not sutible for smoothropes(egnylon ropes)
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 3 Figure of eightused as a stopperprevent ropes from fraying and its more secure than tumb knot its is also used to tie Caribinas to ropes and is often used in rock climbing
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 4 Timber hitchused for pulling logs
Step 5 Clove hitchUsed to tie a rope onto a pole or logThe pole must be roundThe pole lust be thicker then the rope itself
(greatly used during pioneering)
Step 6 Sheet bandused to tie ropes of different thickness together(works on same thickness of ropes too)
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 7 Sheep shankTo shorten RopesTo prevent middle fraying
Step 8 Slip knotWhippingUsed as a grip for pulling things(when tied on a stick or small pole)(marlin spike hitch)
Related Instructables
Rope Rings byhpstoutharrow
How to Tie aFigure EightKnot byTactical_Pyro
Whippin (WestCountry Style)by tim_n
SurvivalBracelet(Updated) bytevers94
HangmansNoose PackClosure byPopEye42
Turkey on aTripod byhpstoutharrow
SurvivalBracelet II bytevers94 Zigzag Spooling
Paracord (video)by Stormdrane
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
How to Tie a Fire-escape Knotby leonardo ismael on October 16 2007
Intro How to Tie a Fire-escape KnotThis knot is used by firemen in case of fires for example imagine a scene where the ladder on the firetruck messes up but people need to get down a five story buildingor more All they have is a long piece of rope they can safely get down with a secure knot like the fire-escape knot So why not learn it its easy to do and hard to untieif you tie it tightly
This is from the American Boys Handbook
Step 1 Get Your RopeFirst grab a piece of rope and bend it like this to make a loop in it Follow every step to the smallest detail
Step 2 Twist the RopeNow make a twist like this and hold it together
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 3 Pull Through the TwistPull the loop through the twist you just made from underneath
Step 4 Go Over the Split EndNow pull the tail through the loop
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 5 FinallyAnd finally just pull it through as pictured below
Congratulations you just learned the fire-escape knot
Step 6 Same Name Not KnotThis is another knot called the fire-escape knot this shouldnt be your result
Related Instructables
House FireEscape Plan(video) byWhatHappensNowAdvice
ParacordLadder wWooden Rungsby josestude
Bed SheetEscape Rope byjessehensel
rope ladder(glow-in-the-dark version) bymikeasaurus
HeadlockEscape 2(video) byjohnnyrockstah
QuickFirestarter byMattandJora
Trail sauna byjakee117
How to Kill FireAnts andCommitGenocide byKentsOkay
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Climb Safe With A Figure 8 Knotby mattste on February 23 2010
Intro Climb Safe With A Figure 8 Knot There are many things that a beginning climber needs to know including several important knots Perhaps the most essential knot is the Figure 8 Follow Through Thistutorial will demonstrate how to correctly harness yourself to a rope using a Figure 8 Follow Through knot This knot is used primarily by rock climbers to provide a life-line Since this knot is used as a life-line it is very important to be able to tie it correctly (Your life could depend upon it)
Dont worry with this tutorial and about 5 minutes of practice you can have this knot mastered
Things you will need
- Climbing Harness- Climbing Rope
If you are wanting to go climbing and dont already have these items they can be purchased for about $25 each at most outdoor sporting goods stores If you are merelylooking to learn the knot a belt loop and a rope (about five feet long) will do
Image Notes1 Climbing Harness2 Climbing Rope
Step 1 Dealing With The RopeThroughout this tutorial I will be discussing different parts of the rope To make these instructions as clear as possible I will define a few terms that I will use throughoutthe tutorial The Anchor End of the rope will generally be at the top of the images This is the end that would be anchored to the wall or rock and does not move Wewill not be doing much with the anchored end The Tail End of the rope is the opposite end that we will be dealing with I will call this the tail for short
Now that we have some terms to work with lets get started
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 2 Tying The First Figure 8This knot has several parts to it The first part of the knot is just tying a basic figure 8 To tie the first figure 8 there are four simple steps
1 - Using the tail make a loop over the rope (as shown in the first picture) keeping in mind that there should be about 3 ft of slack on the tail end
2 - Wrap the tail back this time go under the anchored end (As shown in the second picture)
3 - Bring the tail down through the first loop (As shown in the third picture)
4 - Finally pull the two ends to make the knot a little bit tighter and easier to deal with (Shown in the fourth picture)
After these four steps you should end up with a knot that resembles a figure 8
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 3 Looping Into The Harness In order to secure the rope to the harness simply thread the tail end of the rope through the front loop in the harness as shown in the picture below This step isobviously very important
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 4 Following Back Through The Figure 8After looping the rope through the harness you have to thread the tail end of the rope back through the knot following the first figure 8 I have divided this process intofive smaller steps in order to make it more clear
1 - Coming form underneath the knot bring the tail up through the near loop and to the left behind the anchored end of the rope (Shown in the first picture)
2 - Wrap the tail around the anchored end back to the right and down through the adjacent loop (Shown in the second picture)
3 - You simply need to bring the tail back over the top of the knot to the left (Shown in the third picture)
4 - Bring the tail end up through the far loop following the anchored end (Shown in the fourth picture)
5 - Finally pull the knot tight (Shown in the fifth picture)
As you can see the first four pictures are simply tracing the knot back through with the tail end
For the last part while you pull the knot tight you may want to make small adjustments and rearrange how it all fits together If the knot does not lay perfectly smoothand tight its NOT a big deal
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 5 Finishing The Knot After completing the Figure 8 knot you will want to somehow secure the tail end of the rope out of the way There are a couple different ways to do this the way that Iwill demonstrate is using whats called a Stopper Knot This secondary knot is similar to a Fishermans knot and is pretty simple I have once again divided thisprocess into several smaller steps
1 - Start by wrapping the tail end around the anchored end (As shown in the first picture)
2 - Wrap the tail back underneath the two vertical segments (As shown in the second picture)
3 - Simply repeat the first two steps wrapping the tail around again (As shown in the third picture)
4 - This step in the fourth picture may look complicated but all you need to do is insert the tail up through the two loops that you have just made
5 - To finish off the knot you will want to slowly pull the tail end while gently pushing the bottom of the stopper knot upwards If you have successfully completed this knotit should look something like the fifth picture
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 6 Ready To Climb Now that you have mastered the Figure 8 knot you can securely harness yourself into a climbing rope Remember there are many other skills that go into setting up ananchor and belaying a climber This tutorial only covers the figure 8 knot For more information there are many great websites that demonstrate how to correctly set up asafe climbing system (Ive posted a few below) If you are a beginning climber I recommend that you read up on a few other climbing techniques Also you shouldprobably go to a climbing wall or gym where there are experienced climbers that can show you the ropes Hopefully this tutorial has been helpful Have fun and be safe
Some useful linkshttpwwwstephenprattnetAnchorsanchorshtmhttpwwwuoregonedu~oppclimbingtopicsanchorshtmlhttpwwwabc-of-rockclimbingcomhowtoclimbingtechniquesasp
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Related Instructables
How to Tie aFigure EightKnot byTactical_Pyro
Paracord KnotDisplay Bord byJamie bagn
Basic KnotsGuide byzorro3355
How to Climb aTree (withprussiks) bystasterisk
How to climb atree (using onlyrope) thefunsimple wayby louieaw
How to get arope into a tree(withoutclimbing it) byvitex
How to tievarious knots byadaviel
How to make arope swing byjdub0928
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Turks Head Knots on a Bottleby sklnxbones on July 6 2010
Intro Turks Head Knots on a BottleThis is the finished project A bottle decorated with three Turks Head Knots There are only three knots on this bottle The RED and the BLUE knots are each a 20 Bightby 3 Lead Turks Head Knots The WHITE knot is a 20 Bight by 19 Lead Turks Head Knot
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 1 Supplies
Cord Lots and Lots of cord I cant tell you how much each bottle is differentBottle Washed and Dried inside and out Make sure to remove all water spotsThreaded Needle Cord screws into the threads at the base of the needlePegs I use brass rivets used as a map to tie the Turks Head KnotsHole Punch Used to punch holes in the painters tape to hold the pegsPainters Tape To hold the pegs in place and to make your map for the Turks Head KnotsMarker To write on the painters tapeCloth Towel To remove finger prints and dirt from your bottleKrazy Glue or Super Glue This is used to secure the knots in place to the bottle
OPTIONAL BUT HIGHLY RECOMMENDEDI use the Turks Head Cookbook from KnotToolcom
Step 2 PreparationYou will need to find a bottle you like I used an empty instant tea bottle of course washed and dried (I like to put the bottle in the oven for a few minutes to dry the insidewithout water spots Take off the lid and do not put lid in the oven) Now measure the circumference of the bottle Take a cord and tightly wrap the cord around the bottleMark where the ends meet and use a ruler to measure the length of the cord For my instant tea bottle the circumference is 27cm I know from past knots that I have tiedthat I want my knot to have 20 Bights in the top and bottom (bands) knots I am going to use the Bights in the (bands) knots to tie the middle knot Now divide the numberof Bights (20) into the size of the circumference (27) to get the space between each Bight (135) With me so far
Now take two pieces of painters tape using a ruler measure out the length of the circumference and mark the length on the both pieces of tape Next you will mark thespace between each Bight on the tape
Step 3 Adding the PegsI like to use pegs when tying Turks Head Knots it just makes tying the knot easier
These are what I use for pegs
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 4 Adding Pegs to the TapeNow take a hole punch to cut holes in the tape where the lines meet You will place the pegs in the holes
Insert a peg in each hole and carefully stick the first piece of tape to the bottle
Step 5 Adding the 2nd row of pegsNow do the same thing with the second piece of tape The numbers on each piece of tape must line up
This picture shows you what you should have now This odd looking thing will be your map to tie the Turks Head Knot And this is the end of Step 1
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 6 Tying the first Turks Head KnotUsing the Turks Head Cookbook follow the numbers going over and under as indicated in the book I chose a 20 Bight by 3 Lead knot which will give me a nice bandaround the bottle Once the ends meet you have made one complete knot Tape the running end of your cord and start removing the pegs and the tape
Step 7 Remove the pegs and the tapeBe careful not to untie the knot as you remove the pegs and tape from the bottle Continue to remove all the pegs and remove the tape from the bottle At this point theknot will be very loose and will need to be tightened up
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 8 Remove the slack from the knotHere you can see just how much the knot expanded Starting with the standing end begin to pull the slack out of the knot going towards the running end of the cordDo not expect to pull all the slack out at once You may have to make 3 - 5 attempts at removing the slack out of the knot DO NOT remove all of the slack out of the knotIn order to make the bands we will have to triple the Turks Head Knot We will do this by following the knot three times The threaded needle will really come in handyhere
Step 9 Triple the KnotOnce you have made three passes of the Turks Head Knot use your needle to go under your knot about half the circumference and cut the cord The knot will be tightenough to hide the tail in placeTIP I carefully add a couple of drops of super glue UNDER the band to hold them in place and keep them from sliding around in the nextsteps A drop or two in 3 or 4 places around the band should be enough
Step 10 Add the second knotNow repeat this whole step for the second bandWhen tying the second band you must make sure the Bights line up to the first band This is crucial for the next stepWipe down the bottle to make sure all your finger prints and adhesive from the tape are all removed You want to make sure your bottle is clean at this point Any dirt orfinger prints left on the bottle will be almost impossible to remove From this point on we will use gloves when tying our last knot
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 11 Maping the Top KnotStick a piece of painters tape on top of your first band leaving the bottom of the knot exposedUse a marker to count the number of Bights in your knot Instead of using the pegs we are going to use the Bights to tie our next Turks Head Knot
Step 12 Mapping the Bottom KnotDo the same thing for the bottom band but you must make sure your numbers on top and bottom line up So 1 on top should be the same position as 1 on the bottom
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 13 Adding the last knotAgain using the Turks Head Cookbook and the threaded needle you are going to follow the instructions going over and under as indicated in the book Be sure to usegloves when ever you handle the bottle
Step 14 Thats ItFor this Turks Head Knot I am using a 20 Bight by 19 Lead knot
Because of the amount of cord you are working with your cord will get twisted and knotted You will have to un-twist the cord often Its a pain in the rear but it has to bedone And it has to be done alot
Continue to tie the knot until you finish the knot If you have the cord and the patience you can double or triple the knot When you are done use your needle to hide theends under your bands Cut the ends and your DONE
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Related Instructables
Monkeys FistFloatingKeychain byjokerlz
How To Make ATurks headKnot WithParacord byDoggie Stylish
Tying Trivetsout of Rope forHoliday Gifts bykylemarsh
Paracord KnotDisplay Bord byJamie bagn
How to Make ATurks Head(Photos) bymchs60chip
A pocket full ofknots byKiteman
Monkeys fistknot AND themonkey byjonathan111
TiteTie is theTruckers Knoton Steroids bytitetie
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Larks head noose -- an easy useful knot that tightens and loosensby Larry Breed on February 19 2009
Intro Larks head noose -- an easy useful knot that tightens and loosensI thought I knew all the basic knots but then I was taught this incredibly useful simple knot Its good for tying up the neck of a bag that you want to repeatedly open andsecurely close Its good for tying around a springy bundle that will need tightening and retightening And its easy to undo
Ive looked at knot literature but havent found a name for this so I named it The basic knot is well known its called a larks head Since all Ive done is to slip the twoends through the larks head to make a noose I call it that
WARNING Dont use this knot when human safety would depend on it Climbers and mountaineers have well-tested reliable knots for such situations
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Image Notes1 To tighten further step on this side of the larks head and pull the free ends
Step 1 Double the cord overThe larks head noose requires enough cord to go twice around your bundle plus a foot or two Find the center and double it over Sailors call this a bight
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 2 Form the larks headComing from below the bight hook your thumb and forefinger over the two sides Reach outward and downward and pinch your fingertips together underneath thedoubled cord
Youve made a larks head Move the crossing cord a little farther from your hand so theres a clear opening through the two half-loops
Step 3 Form the nooseSlip the two ends of the cord through the opening we were just talking about Pull the larks head tight so it grips the two cords Find something that needs constrictingand put the noose around it
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 4 Tightening retightening and lockingSlide the knot against the bundle If its not tight enough to keep from slipping tighten it by holding it in one hand and tugging on the cords one at a time with the otherhand Notice that you can slide the knot out again for instance to re-open the bag you just tied shut For some applications this may be as tight as you need it
A springy bundle probably still feels loose If so compress the bundle and get a new grip on the cords Rest your foot on the bundle on the cords nearest the larks headand pull to slide the larks head tighter
To make the knot more permanent you can lock it Make an overhand in the cord ends (Exactly like the first step in tying shoelaces) With your foot still on the bundlepull on the cords and move your hands apart until youre pulling in opposite directions You have just locked the larks head and you can trust it to stay that way()
But lets say that later on you want to loosen the locked knot Again put your foot on the bundle and cords nearest the larks head hold the two cord ends together andpull This makes a little slack between the overhand and the larks head so you can untie the overhand
In twine or small string the locking overhand knot may be difficult to undo Use a shoelace knot instead of an overhand and itll unlock easily
() If youre using slippery cord like polypropylene an overhand may not lock securely You may want to tie another overhand knot For added security wrap a shortlength of duct tape around the two cords close to the knot
Image Notes1 To tighten further step on this side of the larks head and pull the free ends
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Related Instructables
TRX fromParacordChallengeAccepted bythrake
A pocket full ofknots byKiteman
Lens CapLanyard by~teknoarsonist~ how to tie a
noose byawesume
AdjustableParacordGlassesLanyard byjdtwelve12
HangmansNoose PackClosure byPopEye42
Paraleash - ADog LeashFrom Paracordby The Ideanator
How to make arugged andhandy ParacordBelt by Jake22
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Image Notes1 X marks the spot
Step 1 Initial setupThe first step is to anchor one end of the rope and then loop the rope around a 2nd anchor point
For attaching to the 1st anchor point I chose bowline a close 2 on my list -) There are other instructables on that one so I wont bore you here
The 2nd anchor really should be round because it serves as a pulley in this block and tackle type knot Ive used it on sharp anchor points and it doesnt work as well
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 2 Creating a slip knotTie a slip knot somewhere between the two anchor points Correct placement of the slip knot takes some experience to judge it correctly Typically I place it too close tothe 2nd anchor point and end up with not enough room to work with If the knot ends up too far from 2nd anchor point you can extend the knot by enlarging the loop
Be sure you tie the slip knot as shown You may not be able to untie other knots
In this small example the slip knot is uncharacteristically close to the 1st anchor point
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 3 Tightening and securingThe loose end of the rope that went around the 2nd anchor point goes through the slip knot loop Pull the loose end to the desired tension and secure with two halfhitches
Note To allow better view of the knots the rope isnt really tightened in this example
Step 4 Securing loose endThe final knot is just to secure the loose end somehow I chose a fishermans knot to do this
To tie a fishermans knot the rope goes around twice and goes under the X created by the loops Pull the loose end to tighten Finally slide the knot to put tension onthe half hitches
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Image Notes1 X marks the spot
Step 5 FinishedThere you have it I guarantee that the first time you really use this knot (not just practice) you will be amazed at how well it works and youll wish you knew this knot along time ago You may even come over to my side and declare that is is THE most awesome knot on the planet -)
Enjoy and happy haulingDave
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Related Instructables
TiteTie is theTruckers Knoton Steroids bytitetie
Four knots tomake paracordinto a usefultool byerik_mccray
Modify yourbike rack tocarry a sunfishor other boat byewilhelm
SurfboardHammock byGermy
GiganticHalloweenSpider Web bynolte919
How To Tie ASpiders Hitch(video) by back-cast
Three-hitch mathair ornamentby michiexile TRX from
ParacordChallengeAccepted bythrake
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Carry any Bottle with a JUG KNOT Handleby hpstoutharrow on September 17 2009
Intro Carry any Bottle with a JUG KNOT HandleTie a JUG KNOT around a water bottle soda bottle or aluminum bottle to make a secure carrying strap
Re-purpose any container into a reusable water bottle by adding a convenient carrying strap This Instructable will demonstrate how to tie a JUG knot which like its namesuggests is meant to properly secure around the neck of a container
With some cord and the knowledge of this knot you will be able add a handle lanyard or carabiner loop to any of your favorite beverages to carry them on the go
It works perfectly for those disposable water bottles and who knows once you add some colorful cord to the plain old clear water bottle you just might beinclined to refill it and use it again(Check out pictures 4amp5 below)
In addition to plastic beverage bottles like pop water and sports drinks you can turn those rugged aluminum beer bottles into a backpacking canteen
Those of you familiar with my previous aluminum bottle InstructablesROLLED RIM METAL TUMBLERhttpwwwinstructablescomidAluminum-Bottle-Tumbler-Cup-Cook-PotALUMINUM BOTTLE LIGHTWEIGHT ALCOHOL STOVEhttpwwwinstructablescomidAluminum-Bottle-Alcohol-Stovewill recognize the water canteen shown below as a re-purposed aluminum beer bottle Here I have added a painted surface treatment to turn it into a proper lookingwater bottle More on that in steps 13 14 15
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 1 Getting StartedCord size is important Select a small medium weight cord like the one shown here It is a general purpose camp cord sold at most sporting goods stores (shoelacesmight also work)
Do not use a heavy cord or rope because the larger diameter will not tuck under the relatively small lip at the top of the bottleneck and the bottle will fall out
Also the smaller cord cinches tight on itself and will not loosen accidentally
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 2 Form a BightThe next steps show how to tie a JUG KNOT It is the basic step for adding a carrying strap It is also the anchor point for any additional fancy bottle trussing you maywant to add
JUG KNOT Step 1
Form a Bight in the center of a length of cord Bight is a knot term for a loop or bend in the rope In this case the main Bight in this knot is highlighted with a white mark Imakes it easier to follow its path in these steps
The running ends of the cord should be equal length
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 3 Pull the Bight downPULL the Bight DOWN forming two Loops
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 4 Cross the LoopsCROSS the right Loop OVER the left Loop
Step 5 Pass the Bight under the 1st loopTake the main Bight and pass it UNDER the left Loop
Step 6 Weave the BightWEAVE the Bight OVER the portion of the right Loop and UNDER the portion of the left Loop
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 7 Extend the BightExtend the Bight OVER the outer portion of the right Loop
Step 8 Flip the Right Loop behindAdditional colored identification points have been added to the loops to follow their travel in these next two steps
The right Loop Yellow marker is FLIPPED BEHIND the knot and ends up on the far left side of the knot
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 9 Flip the 2nd loop in frontRaise the green marker (located on what was formerly the left loop) and pull it down and to the right FLIPPING IT IN FRONT of the knot
Note the blue portion of the this loop will pass around the outside of the yellow portion of the first loop
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Image Notes1 Center of knot that will tighten around the bottles neck
Step 10 Remove SlackNote where the blue green amp yellow markers end up
Start to remove the slack in the loops by pulling the original main Bight (white marker top right) and the two free standing ends at the bottom
the bottle neck will pass through the very center of the knot
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Image Notes1 Center of knot that will tighten around the bottles neck
Step 11 Tighten the KnotAfter removing the slack insert the bottle neck and finish tightening
The knot should look like this before slipping it over the bottle
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 12 Secure on bottle neckThis is the finished knot shown on the neck of various containers
The loop end and the two free standing ends can be tied together to create a carrying handle (last picture below)
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 13 Aluminum Bottle Water Bottle
The next few steps show the features of an aluminum beer bottle re-purposed as a water bottle canteen It is one of many containers that can be reused as a camp waterbottle
The bottle was lightly sanded masked and then pained with a hammered finished paint to create an interesting surface texture
Image Notes1 Textured finish paint makes an interesting grip-able surface2 Masked with tape for painting3 Masked with tape for painting
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Image Notes1 Dowel used for holding the bottle during painting
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 14 Tethered Cork StopperUse a wine bottle man made Cork as a stopper for your aluminum water bottleNote Use a cork that was removed from the wine bottle without the corkscrew penetrating through the bottom end of the cork (A hole all the way through the cork willcause it to leak) Use the unpierced end of the cork inside the water bottle
Drill a hole through the sides of the Cork Thread the cord through the hole to the center of the cord Use the cork as the main Bight and tie the Jug knot as shown inthe beginning steps
Now the cork is tethered to the bottle and will not get lost or fall on the ground
A Carabiner clip passes through the other cord end to attache the water bottle to you belt or pack
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 15 Trussed for TransportThis is another hanging method for carrying your aluminum bottle water canteen A Jug knot is tied conventionally around the neck
The running ends of the knot however are pulled down towards the bottom of the bottle A Barrel Knot is tied about 34 the way down the side of the bottle A squareknot is tied on the bottom of the knot to keep the two running ends tight against the sides of the bottle
I like the look of the accent colored cord running down the sides of the bottle and the fact that the bottle hangs from the belt upside down It adds to its uniqueness
The last picture shows another truss variation
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 16 AdvancedBelow is a bottle with some additional trussing You can be creative as you want It all starts with a re-purposed container and the Jug Knot (and enough cord)
Related Instructables
AluminumBottle TumblerCup amp Cook Potfor an AlcoholStove byhpstoutharrow
Water BottleBelt Clip byuglymike Duct Tape
Water Bottle byrabidsquire2
AluminumBottle AlcoholStove byhpstoutharrow
DIYGlass WaterBottle byCulturespy
Solar WaterHeater forBackpackingUsing WaterBottles and aCar Shade bykopomeroy
Duct tape waterbottle holder(Photos) by pinkmarshmallow
How to make aCamelPack withan old plasticbottle bywillrandship
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Basic Knots Guideby zorro3355 on April 29 2008
Intro Basic Knots Guidehi
Step 1 Thumb knotThe most simple knotUsed as a stopper and prevent ropes from fraying
Step 2 Reef KnotUsed to tie two ropes of equal thickness togetherIt is pretty easy to tie and untie but under tentionit may be diffcult to untieIt is also not sutible for smoothropes(egnylon ropes)
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 3 Figure of eightused as a stopperprevent ropes from fraying and its more secure than tumb knot its is also used to tie Caribinas to ropes and is often used in rock climbing
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 4 Timber hitchused for pulling logs
Step 5 Clove hitchUsed to tie a rope onto a pole or logThe pole must be roundThe pole lust be thicker then the rope itself
(greatly used during pioneering)
Step 6 Sheet bandused to tie ropes of different thickness together(works on same thickness of ropes too)
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 7 Sheep shankTo shorten RopesTo prevent middle fraying
Step 8 Slip knotWhippingUsed as a grip for pulling things(when tied on a stick or small pole)(marlin spike hitch)
Related Instructables
Rope Rings byhpstoutharrow
How to Tie aFigure EightKnot byTactical_Pyro
Whippin (WestCountry Style)by tim_n
SurvivalBracelet(Updated) bytevers94
HangmansNoose PackClosure byPopEye42
Turkey on aTripod byhpstoutharrow
SurvivalBracelet II bytevers94 Zigzag Spooling
Paracord (video)by Stormdrane
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
How to Tie a Fire-escape Knotby leonardo ismael on October 16 2007
Intro How to Tie a Fire-escape KnotThis knot is used by firemen in case of fires for example imagine a scene where the ladder on the firetruck messes up but people need to get down a five story buildingor more All they have is a long piece of rope they can safely get down with a secure knot like the fire-escape knot So why not learn it its easy to do and hard to untieif you tie it tightly
This is from the American Boys Handbook
Step 1 Get Your RopeFirst grab a piece of rope and bend it like this to make a loop in it Follow every step to the smallest detail
Step 2 Twist the RopeNow make a twist like this and hold it together
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 3 Pull Through the TwistPull the loop through the twist you just made from underneath
Step 4 Go Over the Split EndNow pull the tail through the loop
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 5 FinallyAnd finally just pull it through as pictured below
Congratulations you just learned the fire-escape knot
Step 6 Same Name Not KnotThis is another knot called the fire-escape knot this shouldnt be your result
Related Instructables
House FireEscape Plan(video) byWhatHappensNowAdvice
ParacordLadder wWooden Rungsby josestude
Bed SheetEscape Rope byjessehensel
rope ladder(glow-in-the-dark version) bymikeasaurus
HeadlockEscape 2(video) byjohnnyrockstah
QuickFirestarter byMattandJora
Trail sauna byjakee117
How to Kill FireAnts andCommitGenocide byKentsOkay
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Climb Safe With A Figure 8 Knotby mattste on February 23 2010
Intro Climb Safe With A Figure 8 Knot There are many things that a beginning climber needs to know including several important knots Perhaps the most essential knot is the Figure 8 Follow Through Thistutorial will demonstrate how to correctly harness yourself to a rope using a Figure 8 Follow Through knot This knot is used primarily by rock climbers to provide a life-line Since this knot is used as a life-line it is very important to be able to tie it correctly (Your life could depend upon it)
Dont worry with this tutorial and about 5 minutes of practice you can have this knot mastered
Things you will need
- Climbing Harness- Climbing Rope
If you are wanting to go climbing and dont already have these items they can be purchased for about $25 each at most outdoor sporting goods stores If you are merelylooking to learn the knot a belt loop and a rope (about five feet long) will do
Image Notes1 Climbing Harness2 Climbing Rope
Step 1 Dealing With The RopeThroughout this tutorial I will be discussing different parts of the rope To make these instructions as clear as possible I will define a few terms that I will use throughoutthe tutorial The Anchor End of the rope will generally be at the top of the images This is the end that would be anchored to the wall or rock and does not move Wewill not be doing much with the anchored end The Tail End of the rope is the opposite end that we will be dealing with I will call this the tail for short
Now that we have some terms to work with lets get started
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 2 Tying The First Figure 8This knot has several parts to it The first part of the knot is just tying a basic figure 8 To tie the first figure 8 there are four simple steps
1 - Using the tail make a loop over the rope (as shown in the first picture) keeping in mind that there should be about 3 ft of slack on the tail end
2 - Wrap the tail back this time go under the anchored end (As shown in the second picture)
3 - Bring the tail down through the first loop (As shown in the third picture)
4 - Finally pull the two ends to make the knot a little bit tighter and easier to deal with (Shown in the fourth picture)
After these four steps you should end up with a knot that resembles a figure 8
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 3 Looping Into The Harness In order to secure the rope to the harness simply thread the tail end of the rope through the front loop in the harness as shown in the picture below This step isobviously very important
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 4 Following Back Through The Figure 8After looping the rope through the harness you have to thread the tail end of the rope back through the knot following the first figure 8 I have divided this process intofive smaller steps in order to make it more clear
1 - Coming form underneath the knot bring the tail up through the near loop and to the left behind the anchored end of the rope (Shown in the first picture)
2 - Wrap the tail around the anchored end back to the right and down through the adjacent loop (Shown in the second picture)
3 - You simply need to bring the tail back over the top of the knot to the left (Shown in the third picture)
4 - Bring the tail end up through the far loop following the anchored end (Shown in the fourth picture)
5 - Finally pull the knot tight (Shown in the fifth picture)
As you can see the first four pictures are simply tracing the knot back through with the tail end
For the last part while you pull the knot tight you may want to make small adjustments and rearrange how it all fits together If the knot does not lay perfectly smoothand tight its NOT a big deal
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 5 Finishing The Knot After completing the Figure 8 knot you will want to somehow secure the tail end of the rope out of the way There are a couple different ways to do this the way that Iwill demonstrate is using whats called a Stopper Knot This secondary knot is similar to a Fishermans knot and is pretty simple I have once again divided thisprocess into several smaller steps
1 - Start by wrapping the tail end around the anchored end (As shown in the first picture)
2 - Wrap the tail back underneath the two vertical segments (As shown in the second picture)
3 - Simply repeat the first two steps wrapping the tail around again (As shown in the third picture)
4 - This step in the fourth picture may look complicated but all you need to do is insert the tail up through the two loops that you have just made
5 - To finish off the knot you will want to slowly pull the tail end while gently pushing the bottom of the stopper knot upwards If you have successfully completed this knotit should look something like the fifth picture
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 6 Ready To Climb Now that you have mastered the Figure 8 knot you can securely harness yourself into a climbing rope Remember there are many other skills that go into setting up ananchor and belaying a climber This tutorial only covers the figure 8 knot For more information there are many great websites that demonstrate how to correctly set up asafe climbing system (Ive posted a few below) If you are a beginning climber I recommend that you read up on a few other climbing techniques Also you shouldprobably go to a climbing wall or gym where there are experienced climbers that can show you the ropes Hopefully this tutorial has been helpful Have fun and be safe
Some useful linkshttpwwwstephenprattnetAnchorsanchorshtmhttpwwwuoregonedu~oppclimbingtopicsanchorshtmlhttpwwwabc-of-rockclimbingcomhowtoclimbingtechniquesasp
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Related Instructables
How to Tie aFigure EightKnot byTactical_Pyro
Paracord KnotDisplay Bord byJamie bagn
Basic KnotsGuide byzorro3355
How to Climb aTree (withprussiks) bystasterisk
How to climb atree (using onlyrope) thefunsimple wayby louieaw
How to get arope into a tree(withoutclimbing it) byvitex
How to tievarious knots byadaviel
How to make arope swing byjdub0928
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Turks Head Knots on a Bottleby sklnxbones on July 6 2010
Intro Turks Head Knots on a BottleThis is the finished project A bottle decorated with three Turks Head Knots There are only three knots on this bottle The RED and the BLUE knots are each a 20 Bightby 3 Lead Turks Head Knots The WHITE knot is a 20 Bight by 19 Lead Turks Head Knot
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 1 Supplies
Cord Lots and Lots of cord I cant tell you how much each bottle is differentBottle Washed and Dried inside and out Make sure to remove all water spotsThreaded Needle Cord screws into the threads at the base of the needlePegs I use brass rivets used as a map to tie the Turks Head KnotsHole Punch Used to punch holes in the painters tape to hold the pegsPainters Tape To hold the pegs in place and to make your map for the Turks Head KnotsMarker To write on the painters tapeCloth Towel To remove finger prints and dirt from your bottleKrazy Glue or Super Glue This is used to secure the knots in place to the bottle
OPTIONAL BUT HIGHLY RECOMMENDEDI use the Turks Head Cookbook from KnotToolcom
Step 2 PreparationYou will need to find a bottle you like I used an empty instant tea bottle of course washed and dried (I like to put the bottle in the oven for a few minutes to dry the insidewithout water spots Take off the lid and do not put lid in the oven) Now measure the circumference of the bottle Take a cord and tightly wrap the cord around the bottleMark where the ends meet and use a ruler to measure the length of the cord For my instant tea bottle the circumference is 27cm I know from past knots that I have tiedthat I want my knot to have 20 Bights in the top and bottom (bands) knots I am going to use the Bights in the (bands) knots to tie the middle knot Now divide the numberof Bights (20) into the size of the circumference (27) to get the space between each Bight (135) With me so far
Now take two pieces of painters tape using a ruler measure out the length of the circumference and mark the length on the both pieces of tape Next you will mark thespace between each Bight on the tape
Step 3 Adding the PegsI like to use pegs when tying Turks Head Knots it just makes tying the knot easier
These are what I use for pegs
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 4 Adding Pegs to the TapeNow take a hole punch to cut holes in the tape where the lines meet You will place the pegs in the holes
Insert a peg in each hole and carefully stick the first piece of tape to the bottle
Step 5 Adding the 2nd row of pegsNow do the same thing with the second piece of tape The numbers on each piece of tape must line up
This picture shows you what you should have now This odd looking thing will be your map to tie the Turks Head Knot And this is the end of Step 1
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 6 Tying the first Turks Head KnotUsing the Turks Head Cookbook follow the numbers going over and under as indicated in the book I chose a 20 Bight by 3 Lead knot which will give me a nice bandaround the bottle Once the ends meet you have made one complete knot Tape the running end of your cord and start removing the pegs and the tape
Step 7 Remove the pegs and the tapeBe careful not to untie the knot as you remove the pegs and tape from the bottle Continue to remove all the pegs and remove the tape from the bottle At this point theknot will be very loose and will need to be tightened up
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 8 Remove the slack from the knotHere you can see just how much the knot expanded Starting with the standing end begin to pull the slack out of the knot going towards the running end of the cordDo not expect to pull all the slack out at once You may have to make 3 - 5 attempts at removing the slack out of the knot DO NOT remove all of the slack out of the knotIn order to make the bands we will have to triple the Turks Head Knot We will do this by following the knot three times The threaded needle will really come in handyhere
Step 9 Triple the KnotOnce you have made three passes of the Turks Head Knot use your needle to go under your knot about half the circumference and cut the cord The knot will be tightenough to hide the tail in placeTIP I carefully add a couple of drops of super glue UNDER the band to hold them in place and keep them from sliding around in the nextsteps A drop or two in 3 or 4 places around the band should be enough
Step 10 Add the second knotNow repeat this whole step for the second bandWhen tying the second band you must make sure the Bights line up to the first band This is crucial for the next stepWipe down the bottle to make sure all your finger prints and adhesive from the tape are all removed You want to make sure your bottle is clean at this point Any dirt orfinger prints left on the bottle will be almost impossible to remove From this point on we will use gloves when tying our last knot
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 11 Maping the Top KnotStick a piece of painters tape on top of your first band leaving the bottom of the knot exposedUse a marker to count the number of Bights in your knot Instead of using the pegs we are going to use the Bights to tie our next Turks Head Knot
Step 12 Mapping the Bottom KnotDo the same thing for the bottom band but you must make sure your numbers on top and bottom line up So 1 on top should be the same position as 1 on the bottom
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 13 Adding the last knotAgain using the Turks Head Cookbook and the threaded needle you are going to follow the instructions going over and under as indicated in the book Be sure to usegloves when ever you handle the bottle
Step 14 Thats ItFor this Turks Head Knot I am using a 20 Bight by 19 Lead knot
Because of the amount of cord you are working with your cord will get twisted and knotted You will have to un-twist the cord often Its a pain in the rear but it has to bedone And it has to be done alot
Continue to tie the knot until you finish the knot If you have the cord and the patience you can double or triple the knot When you are done use your needle to hide theends under your bands Cut the ends and your DONE
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Related Instructables
Monkeys FistFloatingKeychain byjokerlz
How To Make ATurks headKnot WithParacord byDoggie Stylish
Tying Trivetsout of Rope forHoliday Gifts bykylemarsh
Paracord KnotDisplay Bord byJamie bagn
How to Make ATurks Head(Photos) bymchs60chip
A pocket full ofknots byKiteman
Monkeys fistknot AND themonkey byjonathan111
TiteTie is theTruckers Knoton Steroids bytitetie
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Larks head noose -- an easy useful knot that tightens and loosensby Larry Breed on February 19 2009
Intro Larks head noose -- an easy useful knot that tightens and loosensI thought I knew all the basic knots but then I was taught this incredibly useful simple knot Its good for tying up the neck of a bag that you want to repeatedly open andsecurely close Its good for tying around a springy bundle that will need tightening and retightening And its easy to undo
Ive looked at knot literature but havent found a name for this so I named it The basic knot is well known its called a larks head Since all Ive done is to slip the twoends through the larks head to make a noose I call it that
WARNING Dont use this knot when human safety would depend on it Climbers and mountaineers have well-tested reliable knots for such situations
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Image Notes1 To tighten further step on this side of the larks head and pull the free ends
Step 1 Double the cord overThe larks head noose requires enough cord to go twice around your bundle plus a foot or two Find the center and double it over Sailors call this a bight
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 2 Form the larks headComing from below the bight hook your thumb and forefinger over the two sides Reach outward and downward and pinch your fingertips together underneath thedoubled cord
Youve made a larks head Move the crossing cord a little farther from your hand so theres a clear opening through the two half-loops
Step 3 Form the nooseSlip the two ends of the cord through the opening we were just talking about Pull the larks head tight so it grips the two cords Find something that needs constrictingand put the noose around it
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 4 Tightening retightening and lockingSlide the knot against the bundle If its not tight enough to keep from slipping tighten it by holding it in one hand and tugging on the cords one at a time with the otherhand Notice that you can slide the knot out again for instance to re-open the bag you just tied shut For some applications this may be as tight as you need it
A springy bundle probably still feels loose If so compress the bundle and get a new grip on the cords Rest your foot on the bundle on the cords nearest the larks headand pull to slide the larks head tighter
To make the knot more permanent you can lock it Make an overhand in the cord ends (Exactly like the first step in tying shoelaces) With your foot still on the bundlepull on the cords and move your hands apart until youre pulling in opposite directions You have just locked the larks head and you can trust it to stay that way()
But lets say that later on you want to loosen the locked knot Again put your foot on the bundle and cords nearest the larks head hold the two cord ends together andpull This makes a little slack between the overhand and the larks head so you can untie the overhand
In twine or small string the locking overhand knot may be difficult to undo Use a shoelace knot instead of an overhand and itll unlock easily
() If youre using slippery cord like polypropylene an overhand may not lock securely You may want to tie another overhand knot For added security wrap a shortlength of duct tape around the two cords close to the knot
Image Notes1 To tighten further step on this side of the larks head and pull the free ends
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Related Instructables
TRX fromParacordChallengeAccepted bythrake
A pocket full ofknots byKiteman
Lens CapLanyard by~teknoarsonist~ how to tie a
noose byawesume
AdjustableParacordGlassesLanyard byjdtwelve12
HangmansNoose PackClosure byPopEye42
Paraleash - ADog LeashFrom Paracordby The Ideanator
How to make arugged andhandy ParacordBelt by Jake22
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Image Notes1 X marks the spot
Step 1 Initial setupThe first step is to anchor one end of the rope and then loop the rope around a 2nd anchor point
For attaching to the 1st anchor point I chose bowline a close 2 on my list -) There are other instructables on that one so I wont bore you here
The 2nd anchor really should be round because it serves as a pulley in this block and tackle type knot Ive used it on sharp anchor points and it doesnt work as well
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 2 Creating a slip knotTie a slip knot somewhere between the two anchor points Correct placement of the slip knot takes some experience to judge it correctly Typically I place it too close tothe 2nd anchor point and end up with not enough room to work with If the knot ends up too far from 2nd anchor point you can extend the knot by enlarging the loop
Be sure you tie the slip knot as shown You may not be able to untie other knots
In this small example the slip knot is uncharacteristically close to the 1st anchor point
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 3 Tightening and securingThe loose end of the rope that went around the 2nd anchor point goes through the slip knot loop Pull the loose end to the desired tension and secure with two halfhitches
Note To allow better view of the knots the rope isnt really tightened in this example
Step 4 Securing loose endThe final knot is just to secure the loose end somehow I chose a fishermans knot to do this
To tie a fishermans knot the rope goes around twice and goes under the X created by the loops Pull the loose end to tighten Finally slide the knot to put tension onthe half hitches
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Image Notes1 X marks the spot
Step 5 FinishedThere you have it I guarantee that the first time you really use this knot (not just practice) you will be amazed at how well it works and youll wish you knew this knot along time ago You may even come over to my side and declare that is is THE most awesome knot on the planet -)
Enjoy and happy haulingDave
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Related Instructables
TiteTie is theTruckers Knoton Steroids bytitetie
Four knots tomake paracordinto a usefultool byerik_mccray
Modify yourbike rack tocarry a sunfishor other boat byewilhelm
SurfboardHammock byGermy
GiganticHalloweenSpider Web bynolte919
How To Tie ASpiders Hitch(video) by back-cast
Three-hitch mathair ornamentby michiexile TRX from
ParacordChallengeAccepted bythrake
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Carry any Bottle with a JUG KNOT Handleby hpstoutharrow on September 17 2009
Intro Carry any Bottle with a JUG KNOT HandleTie a JUG KNOT around a water bottle soda bottle or aluminum bottle to make a secure carrying strap
Re-purpose any container into a reusable water bottle by adding a convenient carrying strap This Instructable will demonstrate how to tie a JUG knot which like its namesuggests is meant to properly secure around the neck of a container
With some cord and the knowledge of this knot you will be able add a handle lanyard or carabiner loop to any of your favorite beverages to carry them on the go
It works perfectly for those disposable water bottles and who knows once you add some colorful cord to the plain old clear water bottle you just might beinclined to refill it and use it again(Check out pictures 4amp5 below)
In addition to plastic beverage bottles like pop water and sports drinks you can turn those rugged aluminum beer bottles into a backpacking canteen
Those of you familiar with my previous aluminum bottle InstructablesROLLED RIM METAL TUMBLERhttpwwwinstructablescomidAluminum-Bottle-Tumbler-Cup-Cook-PotALUMINUM BOTTLE LIGHTWEIGHT ALCOHOL STOVEhttpwwwinstructablescomidAluminum-Bottle-Alcohol-Stovewill recognize the water canteen shown below as a re-purposed aluminum beer bottle Here I have added a painted surface treatment to turn it into a proper lookingwater bottle More on that in steps 13 14 15
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 1 Getting StartedCord size is important Select a small medium weight cord like the one shown here It is a general purpose camp cord sold at most sporting goods stores (shoelacesmight also work)
Do not use a heavy cord or rope because the larger diameter will not tuck under the relatively small lip at the top of the bottleneck and the bottle will fall out
Also the smaller cord cinches tight on itself and will not loosen accidentally
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 2 Form a BightThe next steps show how to tie a JUG KNOT It is the basic step for adding a carrying strap It is also the anchor point for any additional fancy bottle trussing you maywant to add
JUG KNOT Step 1
Form a Bight in the center of a length of cord Bight is a knot term for a loop or bend in the rope In this case the main Bight in this knot is highlighted with a white mark Imakes it easier to follow its path in these steps
The running ends of the cord should be equal length
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 3 Pull the Bight downPULL the Bight DOWN forming two Loops
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 4 Cross the LoopsCROSS the right Loop OVER the left Loop
Step 5 Pass the Bight under the 1st loopTake the main Bight and pass it UNDER the left Loop
Step 6 Weave the BightWEAVE the Bight OVER the portion of the right Loop and UNDER the portion of the left Loop
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 7 Extend the BightExtend the Bight OVER the outer portion of the right Loop
Step 8 Flip the Right Loop behindAdditional colored identification points have been added to the loops to follow their travel in these next two steps
The right Loop Yellow marker is FLIPPED BEHIND the knot and ends up on the far left side of the knot
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 9 Flip the 2nd loop in frontRaise the green marker (located on what was formerly the left loop) and pull it down and to the right FLIPPING IT IN FRONT of the knot
Note the blue portion of the this loop will pass around the outside of the yellow portion of the first loop
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Image Notes1 Center of knot that will tighten around the bottles neck
Step 10 Remove SlackNote where the blue green amp yellow markers end up
Start to remove the slack in the loops by pulling the original main Bight (white marker top right) and the two free standing ends at the bottom
the bottle neck will pass through the very center of the knot
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Image Notes1 Center of knot that will tighten around the bottles neck
Step 11 Tighten the KnotAfter removing the slack insert the bottle neck and finish tightening
The knot should look like this before slipping it over the bottle
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 12 Secure on bottle neckThis is the finished knot shown on the neck of various containers
The loop end and the two free standing ends can be tied together to create a carrying handle (last picture below)
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 13 Aluminum Bottle Water Bottle
The next few steps show the features of an aluminum beer bottle re-purposed as a water bottle canteen It is one of many containers that can be reused as a camp waterbottle
The bottle was lightly sanded masked and then pained with a hammered finished paint to create an interesting surface texture
Image Notes1 Textured finish paint makes an interesting grip-able surface2 Masked with tape for painting3 Masked with tape for painting
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Image Notes1 Dowel used for holding the bottle during painting
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 14 Tethered Cork StopperUse a wine bottle man made Cork as a stopper for your aluminum water bottleNote Use a cork that was removed from the wine bottle without the corkscrew penetrating through the bottom end of the cork (A hole all the way through the cork willcause it to leak) Use the unpierced end of the cork inside the water bottle
Drill a hole through the sides of the Cork Thread the cord through the hole to the center of the cord Use the cork as the main Bight and tie the Jug knot as shown inthe beginning steps
Now the cork is tethered to the bottle and will not get lost or fall on the ground
A Carabiner clip passes through the other cord end to attache the water bottle to you belt or pack
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 15 Trussed for TransportThis is another hanging method for carrying your aluminum bottle water canteen A Jug knot is tied conventionally around the neck
The running ends of the knot however are pulled down towards the bottom of the bottle A Barrel Knot is tied about 34 the way down the side of the bottle A squareknot is tied on the bottom of the knot to keep the two running ends tight against the sides of the bottle
I like the look of the accent colored cord running down the sides of the bottle and the fact that the bottle hangs from the belt upside down It adds to its uniqueness
The last picture shows another truss variation
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 16 AdvancedBelow is a bottle with some additional trussing You can be creative as you want It all starts with a re-purposed container and the Jug Knot (and enough cord)
Related Instructables
AluminumBottle TumblerCup amp Cook Potfor an AlcoholStove byhpstoutharrow
Water BottleBelt Clip byuglymike Duct Tape
Water Bottle byrabidsquire2
AluminumBottle AlcoholStove byhpstoutharrow
DIYGlass WaterBottle byCulturespy
Solar WaterHeater forBackpackingUsing WaterBottles and aCar Shade bykopomeroy
Duct tape waterbottle holder(Photos) by pinkmarshmallow
How to make aCamelPack withan old plasticbottle bywillrandship
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Basic Knots Guideby zorro3355 on April 29 2008
Intro Basic Knots Guidehi
Step 1 Thumb knotThe most simple knotUsed as a stopper and prevent ropes from fraying
Step 2 Reef KnotUsed to tie two ropes of equal thickness togetherIt is pretty easy to tie and untie but under tentionit may be diffcult to untieIt is also not sutible for smoothropes(egnylon ropes)
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 3 Figure of eightused as a stopperprevent ropes from fraying and its more secure than tumb knot its is also used to tie Caribinas to ropes and is often used in rock climbing
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 4 Timber hitchused for pulling logs
Step 5 Clove hitchUsed to tie a rope onto a pole or logThe pole must be roundThe pole lust be thicker then the rope itself
(greatly used during pioneering)
Step 6 Sheet bandused to tie ropes of different thickness together(works on same thickness of ropes too)
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 7 Sheep shankTo shorten RopesTo prevent middle fraying
Step 8 Slip knotWhippingUsed as a grip for pulling things(when tied on a stick or small pole)(marlin spike hitch)
Related Instructables
Rope Rings byhpstoutharrow
How to Tie aFigure EightKnot byTactical_Pyro
Whippin (WestCountry Style)by tim_n
SurvivalBracelet(Updated) bytevers94
HangmansNoose PackClosure byPopEye42
Turkey on aTripod byhpstoutharrow
SurvivalBracelet II bytevers94 Zigzag Spooling
Paracord (video)by Stormdrane
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
How to Tie a Fire-escape Knotby leonardo ismael on October 16 2007
Intro How to Tie a Fire-escape KnotThis knot is used by firemen in case of fires for example imagine a scene where the ladder on the firetruck messes up but people need to get down a five story buildingor more All they have is a long piece of rope they can safely get down with a secure knot like the fire-escape knot So why not learn it its easy to do and hard to untieif you tie it tightly
This is from the American Boys Handbook
Step 1 Get Your RopeFirst grab a piece of rope and bend it like this to make a loop in it Follow every step to the smallest detail
Step 2 Twist the RopeNow make a twist like this and hold it together
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 3 Pull Through the TwistPull the loop through the twist you just made from underneath
Step 4 Go Over the Split EndNow pull the tail through the loop
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 5 FinallyAnd finally just pull it through as pictured below
Congratulations you just learned the fire-escape knot
Step 6 Same Name Not KnotThis is another knot called the fire-escape knot this shouldnt be your result
Related Instructables
House FireEscape Plan(video) byWhatHappensNowAdvice
ParacordLadder wWooden Rungsby josestude
Bed SheetEscape Rope byjessehensel
rope ladder(glow-in-the-dark version) bymikeasaurus
HeadlockEscape 2(video) byjohnnyrockstah
QuickFirestarter byMattandJora
Trail sauna byjakee117
How to Kill FireAnts andCommitGenocide byKentsOkay
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Climb Safe With A Figure 8 Knotby mattste on February 23 2010
Intro Climb Safe With A Figure 8 Knot There are many things that a beginning climber needs to know including several important knots Perhaps the most essential knot is the Figure 8 Follow Through Thistutorial will demonstrate how to correctly harness yourself to a rope using a Figure 8 Follow Through knot This knot is used primarily by rock climbers to provide a life-line Since this knot is used as a life-line it is very important to be able to tie it correctly (Your life could depend upon it)
Dont worry with this tutorial and about 5 minutes of practice you can have this knot mastered
Things you will need
- Climbing Harness- Climbing Rope
If you are wanting to go climbing and dont already have these items they can be purchased for about $25 each at most outdoor sporting goods stores If you are merelylooking to learn the knot a belt loop and a rope (about five feet long) will do
Image Notes1 Climbing Harness2 Climbing Rope
Step 1 Dealing With The RopeThroughout this tutorial I will be discussing different parts of the rope To make these instructions as clear as possible I will define a few terms that I will use throughoutthe tutorial The Anchor End of the rope will generally be at the top of the images This is the end that would be anchored to the wall or rock and does not move Wewill not be doing much with the anchored end The Tail End of the rope is the opposite end that we will be dealing with I will call this the tail for short
Now that we have some terms to work with lets get started
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 2 Tying The First Figure 8This knot has several parts to it The first part of the knot is just tying a basic figure 8 To tie the first figure 8 there are four simple steps
1 - Using the tail make a loop over the rope (as shown in the first picture) keeping in mind that there should be about 3 ft of slack on the tail end
2 - Wrap the tail back this time go under the anchored end (As shown in the second picture)
3 - Bring the tail down through the first loop (As shown in the third picture)
4 - Finally pull the two ends to make the knot a little bit tighter and easier to deal with (Shown in the fourth picture)
After these four steps you should end up with a knot that resembles a figure 8
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 3 Looping Into The Harness In order to secure the rope to the harness simply thread the tail end of the rope through the front loop in the harness as shown in the picture below This step isobviously very important
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 4 Following Back Through The Figure 8After looping the rope through the harness you have to thread the tail end of the rope back through the knot following the first figure 8 I have divided this process intofive smaller steps in order to make it more clear
1 - Coming form underneath the knot bring the tail up through the near loop and to the left behind the anchored end of the rope (Shown in the first picture)
2 - Wrap the tail around the anchored end back to the right and down through the adjacent loop (Shown in the second picture)
3 - You simply need to bring the tail back over the top of the knot to the left (Shown in the third picture)
4 - Bring the tail end up through the far loop following the anchored end (Shown in the fourth picture)
5 - Finally pull the knot tight (Shown in the fifth picture)
As you can see the first four pictures are simply tracing the knot back through with the tail end
For the last part while you pull the knot tight you may want to make small adjustments and rearrange how it all fits together If the knot does not lay perfectly smoothand tight its NOT a big deal
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 5 Finishing The Knot After completing the Figure 8 knot you will want to somehow secure the tail end of the rope out of the way There are a couple different ways to do this the way that Iwill demonstrate is using whats called a Stopper Knot This secondary knot is similar to a Fishermans knot and is pretty simple I have once again divided thisprocess into several smaller steps
1 - Start by wrapping the tail end around the anchored end (As shown in the first picture)
2 - Wrap the tail back underneath the two vertical segments (As shown in the second picture)
3 - Simply repeat the first two steps wrapping the tail around again (As shown in the third picture)
4 - This step in the fourth picture may look complicated but all you need to do is insert the tail up through the two loops that you have just made
5 - To finish off the knot you will want to slowly pull the tail end while gently pushing the bottom of the stopper knot upwards If you have successfully completed this knotit should look something like the fifth picture
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 6 Ready To Climb Now that you have mastered the Figure 8 knot you can securely harness yourself into a climbing rope Remember there are many other skills that go into setting up ananchor and belaying a climber This tutorial only covers the figure 8 knot For more information there are many great websites that demonstrate how to correctly set up asafe climbing system (Ive posted a few below) If you are a beginning climber I recommend that you read up on a few other climbing techniques Also you shouldprobably go to a climbing wall or gym where there are experienced climbers that can show you the ropes Hopefully this tutorial has been helpful Have fun and be safe
Some useful linkshttpwwwstephenprattnetAnchorsanchorshtmhttpwwwuoregonedu~oppclimbingtopicsanchorshtmlhttpwwwabc-of-rockclimbingcomhowtoclimbingtechniquesasp
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Related Instructables
How to Tie aFigure EightKnot byTactical_Pyro
Paracord KnotDisplay Bord byJamie bagn
Basic KnotsGuide byzorro3355
How to Climb aTree (withprussiks) bystasterisk
How to climb atree (using onlyrope) thefunsimple wayby louieaw
How to get arope into a tree(withoutclimbing it) byvitex
How to tievarious knots byadaviel
How to make arope swing byjdub0928
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Turks Head Knots on a Bottleby sklnxbones on July 6 2010
Intro Turks Head Knots on a BottleThis is the finished project A bottle decorated with three Turks Head Knots There are only three knots on this bottle The RED and the BLUE knots are each a 20 Bightby 3 Lead Turks Head Knots The WHITE knot is a 20 Bight by 19 Lead Turks Head Knot
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 1 Supplies
Cord Lots and Lots of cord I cant tell you how much each bottle is differentBottle Washed and Dried inside and out Make sure to remove all water spotsThreaded Needle Cord screws into the threads at the base of the needlePegs I use brass rivets used as a map to tie the Turks Head KnotsHole Punch Used to punch holes in the painters tape to hold the pegsPainters Tape To hold the pegs in place and to make your map for the Turks Head KnotsMarker To write on the painters tapeCloth Towel To remove finger prints and dirt from your bottleKrazy Glue or Super Glue This is used to secure the knots in place to the bottle
OPTIONAL BUT HIGHLY RECOMMENDEDI use the Turks Head Cookbook from KnotToolcom
Step 2 PreparationYou will need to find a bottle you like I used an empty instant tea bottle of course washed and dried (I like to put the bottle in the oven for a few minutes to dry the insidewithout water spots Take off the lid and do not put lid in the oven) Now measure the circumference of the bottle Take a cord and tightly wrap the cord around the bottleMark where the ends meet and use a ruler to measure the length of the cord For my instant tea bottle the circumference is 27cm I know from past knots that I have tiedthat I want my knot to have 20 Bights in the top and bottom (bands) knots I am going to use the Bights in the (bands) knots to tie the middle knot Now divide the numberof Bights (20) into the size of the circumference (27) to get the space between each Bight (135) With me so far
Now take two pieces of painters tape using a ruler measure out the length of the circumference and mark the length on the both pieces of tape Next you will mark thespace between each Bight on the tape
Step 3 Adding the PegsI like to use pegs when tying Turks Head Knots it just makes tying the knot easier
These are what I use for pegs
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 4 Adding Pegs to the TapeNow take a hole punch to cut holes in the tape where the lines meet You will place the pegs in the holes
Insert a peg in each hole and carefully stick the first piece of tape to the bottle
Step 5 Adding the 2nd row of pegsNow do the same thing with the second piece of tape The numbers on each piece of tape must line up
This picture shows you what you should have now This odd looking thing will be your map to tie the Turks Head Knot And this is the end of Step 1
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 6 Tying the first Turks Head KnotUsing the Turks Head Cookbook follow the numbers going over and under as indicated in the book I chose a 20 Bight by 3 Lead knot which will give me a nice bandaround the bottle Once the ends meet you have made one complete knot Tape the running end of your cord and start removing the pegs and the tape
Step 7 Remove the pegs and the tapeBe careful not to untie the knot as you remove the pegs and tape from the bottle Continue to remove all the pegs and remove the tape from the bottle At this point theknot will be very loose and will need to be tightened up
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 8 Remove the slack from the knotHere you can see just how much the knot expanded Starting with the standing end begin to pull the slack out of the knot going towards the running end of the cordDo not expect to pull all the slack out at once You may have to make 3 - 5 attempts at removing the slack out of the knot DO NOT remove all of the slack out of the knotIn order to make the bands we will have to triple the Turks Head Knot We will do this by following the knot three times The threaded needle will really come in handyhere
Step 9 Triple the KnotOnce you have made three passes of the Turks Head Knot use your needle to go under your knot about half the circumference and cut the cord The knot will be tightenough to hide the tail in placeTIP I carefully add a couple of drops of super glue UNDER the band to hold them in place and keep them from sliding around in the nextsteps A drop or two in 3 or 4 places around the band should be enough
Step 10 Add the second knotNow repeat this whole step for the second bandWhen tying the second band you must make sure the Bights line up to the first band This is crucial for the next stepWipe down the bottle to make sure all your finger prints and adhesive from the tape are all removed You want to make sure your bottle is clean at this point Any dirt orfinger prints left on the bottle will be almost impossible to remove From this point on we will use gloves when tying our last knot
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 11 Maping the Top KnotStick a piece of painters tape on top of your first band leaving the bottom of the knot exposedUse a marker to count the number of Bights in your knot Instead of using the pegs we are going to use the Bights to tie our next Turks Head Knot
Step 12 Mapping the Bottom KnotDo the same thing for the bottom band but you must make sure your numbers on top and bottom line up So 1 on top should be the same position as 1 on the bottom
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 13 Adding the last knotAgain using the Turks Head Cookbook and the threaded needle you are going to follow the instructions going over and under as indicated in the book Be sure to usegloves when ever you handle the bottle
Step 14 Thats ItFor this Turks Head Knot I am using a 20 Bight by 19 Lead knot
Because of the amount of cord you are working with your cord will get twisted and knotted You will have to un-twist the cord often Its a pain in the rear but it has to bedone And it has to be done alot
Continue to tie the knot until you finish the knot If you have the cord and the patience you can double or triple the knot When you are done use your needle to hide theends under your bands Cut the ends and your DONE
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Related Instructables
Monkeys FistFloatingKeychain byjokerlz
How To Make ATurks headKnot WithParacord byDoggie Stylish
Tying Trivetsout of Rope forHoliday Gifts bykylemarsh
Paracord KnotDisplay Bord byJamie bagn
How to Make ATurks Head(Photos) bymchs60chip
A pocket full ofknots byKiteman
Monkeys fistknot AND themonkey byjonathan111
TiteTie is theTruckers Knoton Steroids bytitetie
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Larks head noose -- an easy useful knot that tightens and loosensby Larry Breed on February 19 2009
Intro Larks head noose -- an easy useful knot that tightens and loosensI thought I knew all the basic knots but then I was taught this incredibly useful simple knot Its good for tying up the neck of a bag that you want to repeatedly open andsecurely close Its good for tying around a springy bundle that will need tightening and retightening And its easy to undo
Ive looked at knot literature but havent found a name for this so I named it The basic knot is well known its called a larks head Since all Ive done is to slip the twoends through the larks head to make a noose I call it that
WARNING Dont use this knot when human safety would depend on it Climbers and mountaineers have well-tested reliable knots for such situations
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Image Notes1 To tighten further step on this side of the larks head and pull the free ends
Step 1 Double the cord overThe larks head noose requires enough cord to go twice around your bundle plus a foot or two Find the center and double it over Sailors call this a bight
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 2 Form the larks headComing from below the bight hook your thumb and forefinger over the two sides Reach outward and downward and pinch your fingertips together underneath thedoubled cord
Youve made a larks head Move the crossing cord a little farther from your hand so theres a clear opening through the two half-loops
Step 3 Form the nooseSlip the two ends of the cord through the opening we were just talking about Pull the larks head tight so it grips the two cords Find something that needs constrictingand put the noose around it
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 4 Tightening retightening and lockingSlide the knot against the bundle If its not tight enough to keep from slipping tighten it by holding it in one hand and tugging on the cords one at a time with the otherhand Notice that you can slide the knot out again for instance to re-open the bag you just tied shut For some applications this may be as tight as you need it
A springy bundle probably still feels loose If so compress the bundle and get a new grip on the cords Rest your foot on the bundle on the cords nearest the larks headand pull to slide the larks head tighter
To make the knot more permanent you can lock it Make an overhand in the cord ends (Exactly like the first step in tying shoelaces) With your foot still on the bundlepull on the cords and move your hands apart until youre pulling in opposite directions You have just locked the larks head and you can trust it to stay that way()
But lets say that later on you want to loosen the locked knot Again put your foot on the bundle and cords nearest the larks head hold the two cord ends together andpull This makes a little slack between the overhand and the larks head so you can untie the overhand
In twine or small string the locking overhand knot may be difficult to undo Use a shoelace knot instead of an overhand and itll unlock easily
() If youre using slippery cord like polypropylene an overhand may not lock securely You may want to tie another overhand knot For added security wrap a shortlength of duct tape around the two cords close to the knot
Image Notes1 To tighten further step on this side of the larks head and pull the free ends
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Related Instructables
TRX fromParacordChallengeAccepted bythrake
A pocket full ofknots byKiteman
Lens CapLanyard by~teknoarsonist~ how to tie a
noose byawesume
AdjustableParacordGlassesLanyard byjdtwelve12
HangmansNoose PackClosure byPopEye42
Paraleash - ADog LeashFrom Paracordby The Ideanator
How to make arugged andhandy ParacordBelt by Jake22
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 2 Creating a slip knotTie a slip knot somewhere between the two anchor points Correct placement of the slip knot takes some experience to judge it correctly Typically I place it too close tothe 2nd anchor point and end up with not enough room to work with If the knot ends up too far from 2nd anchor point you can extend the knot by enlarging the loop
Be sure you tie the slip knot as shown You may not be able to untie other knots
In this small example the slip knot is uncharacteristically close to the 1st anchor point
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 3 Tightening and securingThe loose end of the rope that went around the 2nd anchor point goes through the slip knot loop Pull the loose end to the desired tension and secure with two halfhitches
Note To allow better view of the knots the rope isnt really tightened in this example
Step 4 Securing loose endThe final knot is just to secure the loose end somehow I chose a fishermans knot to do this
To tie a fishermans knot the rope goes around twice and goes under the X created by the loops Pull the loose end to tighten Finally slide the knot to put tension onthe half hitches
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Image Notes1 X marks the spot
Step 5 FinishedThere you have it I guarantee that the first time you really use this knot (not just practice) you will be amazed at how well it works and youll wish you knew this knot along time ago You may even come over to my side and declare that is is THE most awesome knot on the planet -)
Enjoy and happy haulingDave
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Related Instructables
TiteTie is theTruckers Knoton Steroids bytitetie
Four knots tomake paracordinto a usefultool byerik_mccray
Modify yourbike rack tocarry a sunfishor other boat byewilhelm
SurfboardHammock byGermy
GiganticHalloweenSpider Web bynolte919
How To Tie ASpiders Hitch(video) by back-cast
Three-hitch mathair ornamentby michiexile TRX from
ParacordChallengeAccepted bythrake
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Carry any Bottle with a JUG KNOT Handleby hpstoutharrow on September 17 2009
Intro Carry any Bottle with a JUG KNOT HandleTie a JUG KNOT around a water bottle soda bottle or aluminum bottle to make a secure carrying strap
Re-purpose any container into a reusable water bottle by adding a convenient carrying strap This Instructable will demonstrate how to tie a JUG knot which like its namesuggests is meant to properly secure around the neck of a container
With some cord and the knowledge of this knot you will be able add a handle lanyard or carabiner loop to any of your favorite beverages to carry them on the go
It works perfectly for those disposable water bottles and who knows once you add some colorful cord to the plain old clear water bottle you just might beinclined to refill it and use it again(Check out pictures 4amp5 below)
In addition to plastic beverage bottles like pop water and sports drinks you can turn those rugged aluminum beer bottles into a backpacking canteen
Those of you familiar with my previous aluminum bottle InstructablesROLLED RIM METAL TUMBLERhttpwwwinstructablescomidAluminum-Bottle-Tumbler-Cup-Cook-PotALUMINUM BOTTLE LIGHTWEIGHT ALCOHOL STOVEhttpwwwinstructablescomidAluminum-Bottle-Alcohol-Stovewill recognize the water canteen shown below as a re-purposed aluminum beer bottle Here I have added a painted surface treatment to turn it into a proper lookingwater bottle More on that in steps 13 14 15
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 1 Getting StartedCord size is important Select a small medium weight cord like the one shown here It is a general purpose camp cord sold at most sporting goods stores (shoelacesmight also work)
Do not use a heavy cord or rope because the larger diameter will not tuck under the relatively small lip at the top of the bottleneck and the bottle will fall out
Also the smaller cord cinches tight on itself and will not loosen accidentally
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 2 Form a BightThe next steps show how to tie a JUG KNOT It is the basic step for adding a carrying strap It is also the anchor point for any additional fancy bottle trussing you maywant to add
JUG KNOT Step 1
Form a Bight in the center of a length of cord Bight is a knot term for a loop or bend in the rope In this case the main Bight in this knot is highlighted with a white mark Imakes it easier to follow its path in these steps
The running ends of the cord should be equal length
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 3 Pull the Bight downPULL the Bight DOWN forming two Loops
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 4 Cross the LoopsCROSS the right Loop OVER the left Loop
Step 5 Pass the Bight under the 1st loopTake the main Bight and pass it UNDER the left Loop
Step 6 Weave the BightWEAVE the Bight OVER the portion of the right Loop and UNDER the portion of the left Loop
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 7 Extend the BightExtend the Bight OVER the outer portion of the right Loop
Step 8 Flip the Right Loop behindAdditional colored identification points have been added to the loops to follow their travel in these next two steps
The right Loop Yellow marker is FLIPPED BEHIND the knot and ends up on the far left side of the knot
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 9 Flip the 2nd loop in frontRaise the green marker (located on what was formerly the left loop) and pull it down and to the right FLIPPING IT IN FRONT of the knot
Note the blue portion of the this loop will pass around the outside of the yellow portion of the first loop
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Image Notes1 Center of knot that will tighten around the bottles neck
Step 10 Remove SlackNote where the blue green amp yellow markers end up
Start to remove the slack in the loops by pulling the original main Bight (white marker top right) and the two free standing ends at the bottom
the bottle neck will pass through the very center of the knot
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Image Notes1 Center of knot that will tighten around the bottles neck
Step 11 Tighten the KnotAfter removing the slack insert the bottle neck and finish tightening
The knot should look like this before slipping it over the bottle
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 12 Secure on bottle neckThis is the finished knot shown on the neck of various containers
The loop end and the two free standing ends can be tied together to create a carrying handle (last picture below)
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 13 Aluminum Bottle Water Bottle
The next few steps show the features of an aluminum beer bottle re-purposed as a water bottle canteen It is one of many containers that can be reused as a camp waterbottle
The bottle was lightly sanded masked and then pained with a hammered finished paint to create an interesting surface texture
Image Notes1 Textured finish paint makes an interesting grip-able surface2 Masked with tape for painting3 Masked with tape for painting
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Image Notes1 Dowel used for holding the bottle during painting
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 14 Tethered Cork StopperUse a wine bottle man made Cork as a stopper for your aluminum water bottleNote Use a cork that was removed from the wine bottle without the corkscrew penetrating through the bottom end of the cork (A hole all the way through the cork willcause it to leak) Use the unpierced end of the cork inside the water bottle
Drill a hole through the sides of the Cork Thread the cord through the hole to the center of the cord Use the cork as the main Bight and tie the Jug knot as shown inthe beginning steps
Now the cork is tethered to the bottle and will not get lost or fall on the ground
A Carabiner clip passes through the other cord end to attache the water bottle to you belt or pack
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 15 Trussed for TransportThis is another hanging method for carrying your aluminum bottle water canteen A Jug knot is tied conventionally around the neck
The running ends of the knot however are pulled down towards the bottom of the bottle A Barrel Knot is tied about 34 the way down the side of the bottle A squareknot is tied on the bottom of the knot to keep the two running ends tight against the sides of the bottle
I like the look of the accent colored cord running down the sides of the bottle and the fact that the bottle hangs from the belt upside down It adds to its uniqueness
The last picture shows another truss variation
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 16 AdvancedBelow is a bottle with some additional trussing You can be creative as you want It all starts with a re-purposed container and the Jug Knot (and enough cord)
Related Instructables
AluminumBottle TumblerCup amp Cook Potfor an AlcoholStove byhpstoutharrow
Water BottleBelt Clip byuglymike Duct Tape
Water Bottle byrabidsquire2
AluminumBottle AlcoholStove byhpstoutharrow
DIYGlass WaterBottle byCulturespy
Solar WaterHeater forBackpackingUsing WaterBottles and aCar Shade bykopomeroy
Duct tape waterbottle holder(Photos) by pinkmarshmallow
How to make aCamelPack withan old plasticbottle bywillrandship
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Basic Knots Guideby zorro3355 on April 29 2008
Intro Basic Knots Guidehi
Step 1 Thumb knotThe most simple knotUsed as a stopper and prevent ropes from fraying
Step 2 Reef KnotUsed to tie two ropes of equal thickness togetherIt is pretty easy to tie and untie but under tentionit may be diffcult to untieIt is also not sutible for smoothropes(egnylon ropes)
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 3 Figure of eightused as a stopperprevent ropes from fraying and its more secure than tumb knot its is also used to tie Caribinas to ropes and is often used in rock climbing
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 4 Timber hitchused for pulling logs
Step 5 Clove hitchUsed to tie a rope onto a pole or logThe pole must be roundThe pole lust be thicker then the rope itself
(greatly used during pioneering)
Step 6 Sheet bandused to tie ropes of different thickness together(works on same thickness of ropes too)
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 7 Sheep shankTo shorten RopesTo prevent middle fraying
Step 8 Slip knotWhippingUsed as a grip for pulling things(when tied on a stick or small pole)(marlin spike hitch)
Related Instructables
Rope Rings byhpstoutharrow
How to Tie aFigure EightKnot byTactical_Pyro
Whippin (WestCountry Style)by tim_n
SurvivalBracelet(Updated) bytevers94
HangmansNoose PackClosure byPopEye42
Turkey on aTripod byhpstoutharrow
SurvivalBracelet II bytevers94 Zigzag Spooling
Paracord (video)by Stormdrane
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
How to Tie a Fire-escape Knotby leonardo ismael on October 16 2007
Intro How to Tie a Fire-escape KnotThis knot is used by firemen in case of fires for example imagine a scene where the ladder on the firetruck messes up but people need to get down a five story buildingor more All they have is a long piece of rope they can safely get down with a secure knot like the fire-escape knot So why not learn it its easy to do and hard to untieif you tie it tightly
This is from the American Boys Handbook
Step 1 Get Your RopeFirst grab a piece of rope and bend it like this to make a loop in it Follow every step to the smallest detail
Step 2 Twist the RopeNow make a twist like this and hold it together
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 3 Pull Through the TwistPull the loop through the twist you just made from underneath
Step 4 Go Over the Split EndNow pull the tail through the loop
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 5 FinallyAnd finally just pull it through as pictured below
Congratulations you just learned the fire-escape knot
Step 6 Same Name Not KnotThis is another knot called the fire-escape knot this shouldnt be your result
Related Instructables
House FireEscape Plan(video) byWhatHappensNowAdvice
ParacordLadder wWooden Rungsby josestude
Bed SheetEscape Rope byjessehensel
rope ladder(glow-in-the-dark version) bymikeasaurus
HeadlockEscape 2(video) byjohnnyrockstah
QuickFirestarter byMattandJora
Trail sauna byjakee117
How to Kill FireAnts andCommitGenocide byKentsOkay
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Climb Safe With A Figure 8 Knotby mattste on February 23 2010
Intro Climb Safe With A Figure 8 Knot There are many things that a beginning climber needs to know including several important knots Perhaps the most essential knot is the Figure 8 Follow Through Thistutorial will demonstrate how to correctly harness yourself to a rope using a Figure 8 Follow Through knot This knot is used primarily by rock climbers to provide a life-line Since this knot is used as a life-line it is very important to be able to tie it correctly (Your life could depend upon it)
Dont worry with this tutorial and about 5 minutes of practice you can have this knot mastered
Things you will need
- Climbing Harness- Climbing Rope
If you are wanting to go climbing and dont already have these items they can be purchased for about $25 each at most outdoor sporting goods stores If you are merelylooking to learn the knot a belt loop and a rope (about five feet long) will do
Image Notes1 Climbing Harness2 Climbing Rope
Step 1 Dealing With The RopeThroughout this tutorial I will be discussing different parts of the rope To make these instructions as clear as possible I will define a few terms that I will use throughoutthe tutorial The Anchor End of the rope will generally be at the top of the images This is the end that would be anchored to the wall or rock and does not move Wewill not be doing much with the anchored end The Tail End of the rope is the opposite end that we will be dealing with I will call this the tail for short
Now that we have some terms to work with lets get started
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 2 Tying The First Figure 8This knot has several parts to it The first part of the knot is just tying a basic figure 8 To tie the first figure 8 there are four simple steps
1 - Using the tail make a loop over the rope (as shown in the first picture) keeping in mind that there should be about 3 ft of slack on the tail end
2 - Wrap the tail back this time go under the anchored end (As shown in the second picture)
3 - Bring the tail down through the first loop (As shown in the third picture)
4 - Finally pull the two ends to make the knot a little bit tighter and easier to deal with (Shown in the fourth picture)
After these four steps you should end up with a knot that resembles a figure 8
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 3 Looping Into The Harness In order to secure the rope to the harness simply thread the tail end of the rope through the front loop in the harness as shown in the picture below This step isobviously very important
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 4 Following Back Through The Figure 8After looping the rope through the harness you have to thread the tail end of the rope back through the knot following the first figure 8 I have divided this process intofive smaller steps in order to make it more clear
1 - Coming form underneath the knot bring the tail up through the near loop and to the left behind the anchored end of the rope (Shown in the first picture)
2 - Wrap the tail around the anchored end back to the right and down through the adjacent loop (Shown in the second picture)
3 - You simply need to bring the tail back over the top of the knot to the left (Shown in the third picture)
4 - Bring the tail end up through the far loop following the anchored end (Shown in the fourth picture)
5 - Finally pull the knot tight (Shown in the fifth picture)
As you can see the first four pictures are simply tracing the knot back through with the tail end
For the last part while you pull the knot tight you may want to make small adjustments and rearrange how it all fits together If the knot does not lay perfectly smoothand tight its NOT a big deal
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 5 Finishing The Knot After completing the Figure 8 knot you will want to somehow secure the tail end of the rope out of the way There are a couple different ways to do this the way that Iwill demonstrate is using whats called a Stopper Knot This secondary knot is similar to a Fishermans knot and is pretty simple I have once again divided thisprocess into several smaller steps
1 - Start by wrapping the tail end around the anchored end (As shown in the first picture)
2 - Wrap the tail back underneath the two vertical segments (As shown in the second picture)
3 - Simply repeat the first two steps wrapping the tail around again (As shown in the third picture)
4 - This step in the fourth picture may look complicated but all you need to do is insert the tail up through the two loops that you have just made
5 - To finish off the knot you will want to slowly pull the tail end while gently pushing the bottom of the stopper knot upwards If you have successfully completed this knotit should look something like the fifth picture
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 6 Ready To Climb Now that you have mastered the Figure 8 knot you can securely harness yourself into a climbing rope Remember there are many other skills that go into setting up ananchor and belaying a climber This tutorial only covers the figure 8 knot For more information there are many great websites that demonstrate how to correctly set up asafe climbing system (Ive posted a few below) If you are a beginning climber I recommend that you read up on a few other climbing techniques Also you shouldprobably go to a climbing wall or gym where there are experienced climbers that can show you the ropes Hopefully this tutorial has been helpful Have fun and be safe
Some useful linkshttpwwwstephenprattnetAnchorsanchorshtmhttpwwwuoregonedu~oppclimbingtopicsanchorshtmlhttpwwwabc-of-rockclimbingcomhowtoclimbingtechniquesasp
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Related Instructables
How to Tie aFigure EightKnot byTactical_Pyro
Paracord KnotDisplay Bord byJamie bagn
Basic KnotsGuide byzorro3355
How to Climb aTree (withprussiks) bystasterisk
How to climb atree (using onlyrope) thefunsimple wayby louieaw
How to get arope into a tree(withoutclimbing it) byvitex
How to tievarious knots byadaviel
How to make arope swing byjdub0928
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Turks Head Knots on a Bottleby sklnxbones on July 6 2010
Intro Turks Head Knots on a BottleThis is the finished project A bottle decorated with three Turks Head Knots There are only three knots on this bottle The RED and the BLUE knots are each a 20 Bightby 3 Lead Turks Head Knots The WHITE knot is a 20 Bight by 19 Lead Turks Head Knot
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 1 Supplies
Cord Lots and Lots of cord I cant tell you how much each bottle is differentBottle Washed and Dried inside and out Make sure to remove all water spotsThreaded Needle Cord screws into the threads at the base of the needlePegs I use brass rivets used as a map to tie the Turks Head KnotsHole Punch Used to punch holes in the painters tape to hold the pegsPainters Tape To hold the pegs in place and to make your map for the Turks Head KnotsMarker To write on the painters tapeCloth Towel To remove finger prints and dirt from your bottleKrazy Glue or Super Glue This is used to secure the knots in place to the bottle
OPTIONAL BUT HIGHLY RECOMMENDEDI use the Turks Head Cookbook from KnotToolcom
Step 2 PreparationYou will need to find a bottle you like I used an empty instant tea bottle of course washed and dried (I like to put the bottle in the oven for a few minutes to dry the insidewithout water spots Take off the lid and do not put lid in the oven) Now measure the circumference of the bottle Take a cord and tightly wrap the cord around the bottleMark where the ends meet and use a ruler to measure the length of the cord For my instant tea bottle the circumference is 27cm I know from past knots that I have tiedthat I want my knot to have 20 Bights in the top and bottom (bands) knots I am going to use the Bights in the (bands) knots to tie the middle knot Now divide the numberof Bights (20) into the size of the circumference (27) to get the space between each Bight (135) With me so far
Now take two pieces of painters tape using a ruler measure out the length of the circumference and mark the length on the both pieces of tape Next you will mark thespace between each Bight on the tape
Step 3 Adding the PegsI like to use pegs when tying Turks Head Knots it just makes tying the knot easier
These are what I use for pegs
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 4 Adding Pegs to the TapeNow take a hole punch to cut holes in the tape where the lines meet You will place the pegs in the holes
Insert a peg in each hole and carefully stick the first piece of tape to the bottle
Step 5 Adding the 2nd row of pegsNow do the same thing with the second piece of tape The numbers on each piece of tape must line up
This picture shows you what you should have now This odd looking thing will be your map to tie the Turks Head Knot And this is the end of Step 1
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 6 Tying the first Turks Head KnotUsing the Turks Head Cookbook follow the numbers going over and under as indicated in the book I chose a 20 Bight by 3 Lead knot which will give me a nice bandaround the bottle Once the ends meet you have made one complete knot Tape the running end of your cord and start removing the pegs and the tape
Step 7 Remove the pegs and the tapeBe careful not to untie the knot as you remove the pegs and tape from the bottle Continue to remove all the pegs and remove the tape from the bottle At this point theknot will be very loose and will need to be tightened up
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 8 Remove the slack from the knotHere you can see just how much the knot expanded Starting with the standing end begin to pull the slack out of the knot going towards the running end of the cordDo not expect to pull all the slack out at once You may have to make 3 - 5 attempts at removing the slack out of the knot DO NOT remove all of the slack out of the knotIn order to make the bands we will have to triple the Turks Head Knot We will do this by following the knot three times The threaded needle will really come in handyhere
Step 9 Triple the KnotOnce you have made three passes of the Turks Head Knot use your needle to go under your knot about half the circumference and cut the cord The knot will be tightenough to hide the tail in placeTIP I carefully add a couple of drops of super glue UNDER the band to hold them in place and keep them from sliding around in the nextsteps A drop or two in 3 or 4 places around the band should be enough
Step 10 Add the second knotNow repeat this whole step for the second bandWhen tying the second band you must make sure the Bights line up to the first band This is crucial for the next stepWipe down the bottle to make sure all your finger prints and adhesive from the tape are all removed You want to make sure your bottle is clean at this point Any dirt orfinger prints left on the bottle will be almost impossible to remove From this point on we will use gloves when tying our last knot
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 11 Maping the Top KnotStick a piece of painters tape on top of your first band leaving the bottom of the knot exposedUse a marker to count the number of Bights in your knot Instead of using the pegs we are going to use the Bights to tie our next Turks Head Knot
Step 12 Mapping the Bottom KnotDo the same thing for the bottom band but you must make sure your numbers on top and bottom line up So 1 on top should be the same position as 1 on the bottom
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 13 Adding the last knotAgain using the Turks Head Cookbook and the threaded needle you are going to follow the instructions going over and under as indicated in the book Be sure to usegloves when ever you handle the bottle
Step 14 Thats ItFor this Turks Head Knot I am using a 20 Bight by 19 Lead knot
Because of the amount of cord you are working with your cord will get twisted and knotted You will have to un-twist the cord often Its a pain in the rear but it has to bedone And it has to be done alot
Continue to tie the knot until you finish the knot If you have the cord and the patience you can double or triple the knot When you are done use your needle to hide theends under your bands Cut the ends and your DONE
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Related Instructables
Monkeys FistFloatingKeychain byjokerlz
How To Make ATurks headKnot WithParacord byDoggie Stylish
Tying Trivetsout of Rope forHoliday Gifts bykylemarsh
Paracord KnotDisplay Bord byJamie bagn
How to Make ATurks Head(Photos) bymchs60chip
A pocket full ofknots byKiteman
Monkeys fistknot AND themonkey byjonathan111
TiteTie is theTruckers Knoton Steroids bytitetie
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Larks head noose -- an easy useful knot that tightens and loosensby Larry Breed on February 19 2009
Intro Larks head noose -- an easy useful knot that tightens and loosensI thought I knew all the basic knots but then I was taught this incredibly useful simple knot Its good for tying up the neck of a bag that you want to repeatedly open andsecurely close Its good for tying around a springy bundle that will need tightening and retightening And its easy to undo
Ive looked at knot literature but havent found a name for this so I named it The basic knot is well known its called a larks head Since all Ive done is to slip the twoends through the larks head to make a noose I call it that
WARNING Dont use this knot when human safety would depend on it Climbers and mountaineers have well-tested reliable knots for such situations
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Image Notes1 To tighten further step on this side of the larks head and pull the free ends
Step 1 Double the cord overThe larks head noose requires enough cord to go twice around your bundle plus a foot or two Find the center and double it over Sailors call this a bight
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 2 Form the larks headComing from below the bight hook your thumb and forefinger over the two sides Reach outward and downward and pinch your fingertips together underneath thedoubled cord
Youve made a larks head Move the crossing cord a little farther from your hand so theres a clear opening through the two half-loops
Step 3 Form the nooseSlip the two ends of the cord through the opening we were just talking about Pull the larks head tight so it grips the two cords Find something that needs constrictingand put the noose around it
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 4 Tightening retightening and lockingSlide the knot against the bundle If its not tight enough to keep from slipping tighten it by holding it in one hand and tugging on the cords one at a time with the otherhand Notice that you can slide the knot out again for instance to re-open the bag you just tied shut For some applications this may be as tight as you need it
A springy bundle probably still feels loose If so compress the bundle and get a new grip on the cords Rest your foot on the bundle on the cords nearest the larks headand pull to slide the larks head tighter
To make the knot more permanent you can lock it Make an overhand in the cord ends (Exactly like the first step in tying shoelaces) With your foot still on the bundlepull on the cords and move your hands apart until youre pulling in opposite directions You have just locked the larks head and you can trust it to stay that way()
But lets say that later on you want to loosen the locked knot Again put your foot on the bundle and cords nearest the larks head hold the two cord ends together andpull This makes a little slack between the overhand and the larks head so you can untie the overhand
In twine or small string the locking overhand knot may be difficult to undo Use a shoelace knot instead of an overhand and itll unlock easily
() If youre using slippery cord like polypropylene an overhand may not lock securely You may want to tie another overhand knot For added security wrap a shortlength of duct tape around the two cords close to the knot
Image Notes1 To tighten further step on this side of the larks head and pull the free ends
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Related Instructables
TRX fromParacordChallengeAccepted bythrake
A pocket full ofknots byKiteman
Lens CapLanyard by~teknoarsonist~ how to tie a
noose byawesume
AdjustableParacordGlassesLanyard byjdtwelve12
HangmansNoose PackClosure byPopEye42
Paraleash - ADog LeashFrom Paracordby The Ideanator
How to make arugged andhandy ParacordBelt by Jake22
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 3 Tightening and securingThe loose end of the rope that went around the 2nd anchor point goes through the slip knot loop Pull the loose end to the desired tension and secure with two halfhitches
Note To allow better view of the knots the rope isnt really tightened in this example
Step 4 Securing loose endThe final knot is just to secure the loose end somehow I chose a fishermans knot to do this
To tie a fishermans knot the rope goes around twice and goes under the X created by the loops Pull the loose end to tighten Finally slide the knot to put tension onthe half hitches
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Image Notes1 X marks the spot
Step 5 FinishedThere you have it I guarantee that the first time you really use this knot (not just practice) you will be amazed at how well it works and youll wish you knew this knot along time ago You may even come over to my side and declare that is is THE most awesome knot on the planet -)
Enjoy and happy haulingDave
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Related Instructables
TiteTie is theTruckers Knoton Steroids bytitetie
Four knots tomake paracordinto a usefultool byerik_mccray
Modify yourbike rack tocarry a sunfishor other boat byewilhelm
SurfboardHammock byGermy
GiganticHalloweenSpider Web bynolte919
How To Tie ASpiders Hitch(video) by back-cast
Three-hitch mathair ornamentby michiexile TRX from
ParacordChallengeAccepted bythrake
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Carry any Bottle with a JUG KNOT Handleby hpstoutharrow on September 17 2009
Intro Carry any Bottle with a JUG KNOT HandleTie a JUG KNOT around a water bottle soda bottle or aluminum bottle to make a secure carrying strap
Re-purpose any container into a reusable water bottle by adding a convenient carrying strap This Instructable will demonstrate how to tie a JUG knot which like its namesuggests is meant to properly secure around the neck of a container
With some cord and the knowledge of this knot you will be able add a handle lanyard or carabiner loop to any of your favorite beverages to carry them on the go
It works perfectly for those disposable water bottles and who knows once you add some colorful cord to the plain old clear water bottle you just might beinclined to refill it and use it again(Check out pictures 4amp5 below)
In addition to plastic beverage bottles like pop water and sports drinks you can turn those rugged aluminum beer bottles into a backpacking canteen
Those of you familiar with my previous aluminum bottle InstructablesROLLED RIM METAL TUMBLERhttpwwwinstructablescomidAluminum-Bottle-Tumbler-Cup-Cook-PotALUMINUM BOTTLE LIGHTWEIGHT ALCOHOL STOVEhttpwwwinstructablescomidAluminum-Bottle-Alcohol-Stovewill recognize the water canteen shown below as a re-purposed aluminum beer bottle Here I have added a painted surface treatment to turn it into a proper lookingwater bottle More on that in steps 13 14 15
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 1 Getting StartedCord size is important Select a small medium weight cord like the one shown here It is a general purpose camp cord sold at most sporting goods stores (shoelacesmight also work)
Do not use a heavy cord or rope because the larger diameter will not tuck under the relatively small lip at the top of the bottleneck and the bottle will fall out
Also the smaller cord cinches tight on itself and will not loosen accidentally
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 2 Form a BightThe next steps show how to tie a JUG KNOT It is the basic step for adding a carrying strap It is also the anchor point for any additional fancy bottle trussing you maywant to add
JUG KNOT Step 1
Form a Bight in the center of a length of cord Bight is a knot term for a loop or bend in the rope In this case the main Bight in this knot is highlighted with a white mark Imakes it easier to follow its path in these steps
The running ends of the cord should be equal length
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 3 Pull the Bight downPULL the Bight DOWN forming two Loops
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 4 Cross the LoopsCROSS the right Loop OVER the left Loop
Step 5 Pass the Bight under the 1st loopTake the main Bight and pass it UNDER the left Loop
Step 6 Weave the BightWEAVE the Bight OVER the portion of the right Loop and UNDER the portion of the left Loop
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 7 Extend the BightExtend the Bight OVER the outer portion of the right Loop
Step 8 Flip the Right Loop behindAdditional colored identification points have been added to the loops to follow their travel in these next two steps
The right Loop Yellow marker is FLIPPED BEHIND the knot and ends up on the far left side of the knot
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 9 Flip the 2nd loop in frontRaise the green marker (located on what was formerly the left loop) and pull it down and to the right FLIPPING IT IN FRONT of the knot
Note the blue portion of the this loop will pass around the outside of the yellow portion of the first loop
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Image Notes1 Center of knot that will tighten around the bottles neck
Step 10 Remove SlackNote where the blue green amp yellow markers end up
Start to remove the slack in the loops by pulling the original main Bight (white marker top right) and the two free standing ends at the bottom
the bottle neck will pass through the very center of the knot
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Image Notes1 Center of knot that will tighten around the bottles neck
Step 11 Tighten the KnotAfter removing the slack insert the bottle neck and finish tightening
The knot should look like this before slipping it over the bottle
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 12 Secure on bottle neckThis is the finished knot shown on the neck of various containers
The loop end and the two free standing ends can be tied together to create a carrying handle (last picture below)
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 13 Aluminum Bottle Water Bottle
The next few steps show the features of an aluminum beer bottle re-purposed as a water bottle canteen It is one of many containers that can be reused as a camp waterbottle
The bottle was lightly sanded masked and then pained with a hammered finished paint to create an interesting surface texture
Image Notes1 Textured finish paint makes an interesting grip-able surface2 Masked with tape for painting3 Masked with tape for painting
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Image Notes1 Dowel used for holding the bottle during painting
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 14 Tethered Cork StopperUse a wine bottle man made Cork as a stopper for your aluminum water bottleNote Use a cork that was removed from the wine bottle without the corkscrew penetrating through the bottom end of the cork (A hole all the way through the cork willcause it to leak) Use the unpierced end of the cork inside the water bottle
Drill a hole through the sides of the Cork Thread the cord through the hole to the center of the cord Use the cork as the main Bight and tie the Jug knot as shown inthe beginning steps
Now the cork is tethered to the bottle and will not get lost or fall on the ground
A Carabiner clip passes through the other cord end to attache the water bottle to you belt or pack
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 15 Trussed for TransportThis is another hanging method for carrying your aluminum bottle water canteen A Jug knot is tied conventionally around the neck
The running ends of the knot however are pulled down towards the bottom of the bottle A Barrel Knot is tied about 34 the way down the side of the bottle A squareknot is tied on the bottom of the knot to keep the two running ends tight against the sides of the bottle
I like the look of the accent colored cord running down the sides of the bottle and the fact that the bottle hangs from the belt upside down It adds to its uniqueness
The last picture shows another truss variation
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 16 AdvancedBelow is a bottle with some additional trussing You can be creative as you want It all starts with a re-purposed container and the Jug Knot (and enough cord)
Related Instructables
AluminumBottle TumblerCup amp Cook Potfor an AlcoholStove byhpstoutharrow
Water BottleBelt Clip byuglymike Duct Tape
Water Bottle byrabidsquire2
AluminumBottle AlcoholStove byhpstoutharrow
DIYGlass WaterBottle byCulturespy
Solar WaterHeater forBackpackingUsing WaterBottles and aCar Shade bykopomeroy
Duct tape waterbottle holder(Photos) by pinkmarshmallow
How to make aCamelPack withan old plasticbottle bywillrandship
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Basic Knots Guideby zorro3355 on April 29 2008
Intro Basic Knots Guidehi
Step 1 Thumb knotThe most simple knotUsed as a stopper and prevent ropes from fraying
Step 2 Reef KnotUsed to tie two ropes of equal thickness togetherIt is pretty easy to tie and untie but under tentionit may be diffcult to untieIt is also not sutible for smoothropes(egnylon ropes)
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 3 Figure of eightused as a stopperprevent ropes from fraying and its more secure than tumb knot its is also used to tie Caribinas to ropes and is often used in rock climbing
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 4 Timber hitchused for pulling logs
Step 5 Clove hitchUsed to tie a rope onto a pole or logThe pole must be roundThe pole lust be thicker then the rope itself
(greatly used during pioneering)
Step 6 Sheet bandused to tie ropes of different thickness together(works on same thickness of ropes too)
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 7 Sheep shankTo shorten RopesTo prevent middle fraying
Step 8 Slip knotWhippingUsed as a grip for pulling things(when tied on a stick or small pole)(marlin spike hitch)
Related Instructables
Rope Rings byhpstoutharrow
How to Tie aFigure EightKnot byTactical_Pyro
Whippin (WestCountry Style)by tim_n
SurvivalBracelet(Updated) bytevers94
HangmansNoose PackClosure byPopEye42
Turkey on aTripod byhpstoutharrow
SurvivalBracelet II bytevers94 Zigzag Spooling
Paracord (video)by Stormdrane
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
How to Tie a Fire-escape Knotby leonardo ismael on October 16 2007
Intro How to Tie a Fire-escape KnotThis knot is used by firemen in case of fires for example imagine a scene where the ladder on the firetruck messes up but people need to get down a five story buildingor more All they have is a long piece of rope they can safely get down with a secure knot like the fire-escape knot So why not learn it its easy to do and hard to untieif you tie it tightly
This is from the American Boys Handbook
Step 1 Get Your RopeFirst grab a piece of rope and bend it like this to make a loop in it Follow every step to the smallest detail
Step 2 Twist the RopeNow make a twist like this and hold it together
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 3 Pull Through the TwistPull the loop through the twist you just made from underneath
Step 4 Go Over the Split EndNow pull the tail through the loop
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 5 FinallyAnd finally just pull it through as pictured below
Congratulations you just learned the fire-escape knot
Step 6 Same Name Not KnotThis is another knot called the fire-escape knot this shouldnt be your result
Related Instructables
House FireEscape Plan(video) byWhatHappensNowAdvice
ParacordLadder wWooden Rungsby josestude
Bed SheetEscape Rope byjessehensel
rope ladder(glow-in-the-dark version) bymikeasaurus
HeadlockEscape 2(video) byjohnnyrockstah
QuickFirestarter byMattandJora
Trail sauna byjakee117
How to Kill FireAnts andCommitGenocide byKentsOkay
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Climb Safe With A Figure 8 Knotby mattste on February 23 2010
Intro Climb Safe With A Figure 8 Knot There are many things that a beginning climber needs to know including several important knots Perhaps the most essential knot is the Figure 8 Follow Through Thistutorial will demonstrate how to correctly harness yourself to a rope using a Figure 8 Follow Through knot This knot is used primarily by rock climbers to provide a life-line Since this knot is used as a life-line it is very important to be able to tie it correctly (Your life could depend upon it)
Dont worry with this tutorial and about 5 minutes of practice you can have this knot mastered
Things you will need
- Climbing Harness- Climbing Rope
If you are wanting to go climbing and dont already have these items they can be purchased for about $25 each at most outdoor sporting goods stores If you are merelylooking to learn the knot a belt loop and a rope (about five feet long) will do
Image Notes1 Climbing Harness2 Climbing Rope
Step 1 Dealing With The RopeThroughout this tutorial I will be discussing different parts of the rope To make these instructions as clear as possible I will define a few terms that I will use throughoutthe tutorial The Anchor End of the rope will generally be at the top of the images This is the end that would be anchored to the wall or rock and does not move Wewill not be doing much with the anchored end The Tail End of the rope is the opposite end that we will be dealing with I will call this the tail for short
Now that we have some terms to work with lets get started
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 2 Tying The First Figure 8This knot has several parts to it The first part of the knot is just tying a basic figure 8 To tie the first figure 8 there are four simple steps
1 - Using the tail make a loop over the rope (as shown in the first picture) keeping in mind that there should be about 3 ft of slack on the tail end
2 - Wrap the tail back this time go under the anchored end (As shown in the second picture)
3 - Bring the tail down through the first loop (As shown in the third picture)
4 - Finally pull the two ends to make the knot a little bit tighter and easier to deal with (Shown in the fourth picture)
After these four steps you should end up with a knot that resembles a figure 8
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 3 Looping Into The Harness In order to secure the rope to the harness simply thread the tail end of the rope through the front loop in the harness as shown in the picture below This step isobviously very important
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 4 Following Back Through The Figure 8After looping the rope through the harness you have to thread the tail end of the rope back through the knot following the first figure 8 I have divided this process intofive smaller steps in order to make it more clear
1 - Coming form underneath the knot bring the tail up through the near loop and to the left behind the anchored end of the rope (Shown in the first picture)
2 - Wrap the tail around the anchored end back to the right and down through the adjacent loop (Shown in the second picture)
3 - You simply need to bring the tail back over the top of the knot to the left (Shown in the third picture)
4 - Bring the tail end up through the far loop following the anchored end (Shown in the fourth picture)
5 - Finally pull the knot tight (Shown in the fifth picture)
As you can see the first four pictures are simply tracing the knot back through with the tail end
For the last part while you pull the knot tight you may want to make small adjustments and rearrange how it all fits together If the knot does not lay perfectly smoothand tight its NOT a big deal
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 5 Finishing The Knot After completing the Figure 8 knot you will want to somehow secure the tail end of the rope out of the way There are a couple different ways to do this the way that Iwill demonstrate is using whats called a Stopper Knot This secondary knot is similar to a Fishermans knot and is pretty simple I have once again divided thisprocess into several smaller steps
1 - Start by wrapping the tail end around the anchored end (As shown in the first picture)
2 - Wrap the tail back underneath the two vertical segments (As shown in the second picture)
3 - Simply repeat the first two steps wrapping the tail around again (As shown in the third picture)
4 - This step in the fourth picture may look complicated but all you need to do is insert the tail up through the two loops that you have just made
5 - To finish off the knot you will want to slowly pull the tail end while gently pushing the bottom of the stopper knot upwards If you have successfully completed this knotit should look something like the fifth picture
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 6 Ready To Climb Now that you have mastered the Figure 8 knot you can securely harness yourself into a climbing rope Remember there are many other skills that go into setting up ananchor and belaying a climber This tutorial only covers the figure 8 knot For more information there are many great websites that demonstrate how to correctly set up asafe climbing system (Ive posted a few below) If you are a beginning climber I recommend that you read up on a few other climbing techniques Also you shouldprobably go to a climbing wall or gym where there are experienced climbers that can show you the ropes Hopefully this tutorial has been helpful Have fun and be safe
Some useful linkshttpwwwstephenprattnetAnchorsanchorshtmhttpwwwuoregonedu~oppclimbingtopicsanchorshtmlhttpwwwabc-of-rockclimbingcomhowtoclimbingtechniquesasp
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Related Instructables
How to Tie aFigure EightKnot byTactical_Pyro
Paracord KnotDisplay Bord byJamie bagn
Basic KnotsGuide byzorro3355
How to Climb aTree (withprussiks) bystasterisk
How to climb atree (using onlyrope) thefunsimple wayby louieaw
How to get arope into a tree(withoutclimbing it) byvitex
How to tievarious knots byadaviel
How to make arope swing byjdub0928
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Turks Head Knots on a Bottleby sklnxbones on July 6 2010
Intro Turks Head Knots on a BottleThis is the finished project A bottle decorated with three Turks Head Knots There are only three knots on this bottle The RED and the BLUE knots are each a 20 Bightby 3 Lead Turks Head Knots The WHITE knot is a 20 Bight by 19 Lead Turks Head Knot
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 1 Supplies
Cord Lots and Lots of cord I cant tell you how much each bottle is differentBottle Washed and Dried inside and out Make sure to remove all water spotsThreaded Needle Cord screws into the threads at the base of the needlePegs I use brass rivets used as a map to tie the Turks Head KnotsHole Punch Used to punch holes in the painters tape to hold the pegsPainters Tape To hold the pegs in place and to make your map for the Turks Head KnotsMarker To write on the painters tapeCloth Towel To remove finger prints and dirt from your bottleKrazy Glue or Super Glue This is used to secure the knots in place to the bottle
OPTIONAL BUT HIGHLY RECOMMENDEDI use the Turks Head Cookbook from KnotToolcom
Step 2 PreparationYou will need to find a bottle you like I used an empty instant tea bottle of course washed and dried (I like to put the bottle in the oven for a few minutes to dry the insidewithout water spots Take off the lid and do not put lid in the oven) Now measure the circumference of the bottle Take a cord and tightly wrap the cord around the bottleMark where the ends meet and use a ruler to measure the length of the cord For my instant tea bottle the circumference is 27cm I know from past knots that I have tiedthat I want my knot to have 20 Bights in the top and bottom (bands) knots I am going to use the Bights in the (bands) knots to tie the middle knot Now divide the numberof Bights (20) into the size of the circumference (27) to get the space between each Bight (135) With me so far
Now take two pieces of painters tape using a ruler measure out the length of the circumference and mark the length on the both pieces of tape Next you will mark thespace between each Bight on the tape
Step 3 Adding the PegsI like to use pegs when tying Turks Head Knots it just makes tying the knot easier
These are what I use for pegs
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 4 Adding Pegs to the TapeNow take a hole punch to cut holes in the tape where the lines meet You will place the pegs in the holes
Insert a peg in each hole and carefully stick the first piece of tape to the bottle
Step 5 Adding the 2nd row of pegsNow do the same thing with the second piece of tape The numbers on each piece of tape must line up
This picture shows you what you should have now This odd looking thing will be your map to tie the Turks Head Knot And this is the end of Step 1
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 6 Tying the first Turks Head KnotUsing the Turks Head Cookbook follow the numbers going over and under as indicated in the book I chose a 20 Bight by 3 Lead knot which will give me a nice bandaround the bottle Once the ends meet you have made one complete knot Tape the running end of your cord and start removing the pegs and the tape
Step 7 Remove the pegs and the tapeBe careful not to untie the knot as you remove the pegs and tape from the bottle Continue to remove all the pegs and remove the tape from the bottle At this point theknot will be very loose and will need to be tightened up
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 8 Remove the slack from the knotHere you can see just how much the knot expanded Starting with the standing end begin to pull the slack out of the knot going towards the running end of the cordDo not expect to pull all the slack out at once You may have to make 3 - 5 attempts at removing the slack out of the knot DO NOT remove all of the slack out of the knotIn order to make the bands we will have to triple the Turks Head Knot We will do this by following the knot three times The threaded needle will really come in handyhere
Step 9 Triple the KnotOnce you have made three passes of the Turks Head Knot use your needle to go under your knot about half the circumference and cut the cord The knot will be tightenough to hide the tail in placeTIP I carefully add a couple of drops of super glue UNDER the band to hold them in place and keep them from sliding around in the nextsteps A drop or two in 3 or 4 places around the band should be enough
Step 10 Add the second knotNow repeat this whole step for the second bandWhen tying the second band you must make sure the Bights line up to the first band This is crucial for the next stepWipe down the bottle to make sure all your finger prints and adhesive from the tape are all removed You want to make sure your bottle is clean at this point Any dirt orfinger prints left on the bottle will be almost impossible to remove From this point on we will use gloves when tying our last knot
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 11 Maping the Top KnotStick a piece of painters tape on top of your first band leaving the bottom of the knot exposedUse a marker to count the number of Bights in your knot Instead of using the pegs we are going to use the Bights to tie our next Turks Head Knot
Step 12 Mapping the Bottom KnotDo the same thing for the bottom band but you must make sure your numbers on top and bottom line up So 1 on top should be the same position as 1 on the bottom
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 13 Adding the last knotAgain using the Turks Head Cookbook and the threaded needle you are going to follow the instructions going over and under as indicated in the book Be sure to usegloves when ever you handle the bottle
Step 14 Thats ItFor this Turks Head Knot I am using a 20 Bight by 19 Lead knot
Because of the amount of cord you are working with your cord will get twisted and knotted You will have to un-twist the cord often Its a pain in the rear but it has to bedone And it has to be done alot
Continue to tie the knot until you finish the knot If you have the cord and the patience you can double or triple the knot When you are done use your needle to hide theends under your bands Cut the ends and your DONE
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Related Instructables
Monkeys FistFloatingKeychain byjokerlz
How To Make ATurks headKnot WithParacord byDoggie Stylish
Tying Trivetsout of Rope forHoliday Gifts bykylemarsh
Paracord KnotDisplay Bord byJamie bagn
How to Make ATurks Head(Photos) bymchs60chip
A pocket full ofknots byKiteman
Monkeys fistknot AND themonkey byjonathan111
TiteTie is theTruckers Knoton Steroids bytitetie
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Larks head noose -- an easy useful knot that tightens and loosensby Larry Breed on February 19 2009
Intro Larks head noose -- an easy useful knot that tightens and loosensI thought I knew all the basic knots but then I was taught this incredibly useful simple knot Its good for tying up the neck of a bag that you want to repeatedly open andsecurely close Its good for tying around a springy bundle that will need tightening and retightening And its easy to undo
Ive looked at knot literature but havent found a name for this so I named it The basic knot is well known its called a larks head Since all Ive done is to slip the twoends through the larks head to make a noose I call it that
WARNING Dont use this knot when human safety would depend on it Climbers and mountaineers have well-tested reliable knots for such situations
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Image Notes1 To tighten further step on this side of the larks head and pull the free ends
Step 1 Double the cord overThe larks head noose requires enough cord to go twice around your bundle plus a foot or two Find the center and double it over Sailors call this a bight
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 2 Form the larks headComing from below the bight hook your thumb and forefinger over the two sides Reach outward and downward and pinch your fingertips together underneath thedoubled cord
Youve made a larks head Move the crossing cord a little farther from your hand so theres a clear opening through the two half-loops
Step 3 Form the nooseSlip the two ends of the cord through the opening we were just talking about Pull the larks head tight so it grips the two cords Find something that needs constrictingand put the noose around it
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 4 Tightening retightening and lockingSlide the knot against the bundle If its not tight enough to keep from slipping tighten it by holding it in one hand and tugging on the cords one at a time with the otherhand Notice that you can slide the knot out again for instance to re-open the bag you just tied shut For some applications this may be as tight as you need it
A springy bundle probably still feels loose If so compress the bundle and get a new grip on the cords Rest your foot on the bundle on the cords nearest the larks headand pull to slide the larks head tighter
To make the knot more permanent you can lock it Make an overhand in the cord ends (Exactly like the first step in tying shoelaces) With your foot still on the bundlepull on the cords and move your hands apart until youre pulling in opposite directions You have just locked the larks head and you can trust it to stay that way()
But lets say that later on you want to loosen the locked knot Again put your foot on the bundle and cords nearest the larks head hold the two cord ends together andpull This makes a little slack between the overhand and the larks head so you can untie the overhand
In twine or small string the locking overhand knot may be difficult to undo Use a shoelace knot instead of an overhand and itll unlock easily
() If youre using slippery cord like polypropylene an overhand may not lock securely You may want to tie another overhand knot For added security wrap a shortlength of duct tape around the two cords close to the knot
Image Notes1 To tighten further step on this side of the larks head and pull the free ends
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Related Instructables
TRX fromParacordChallengeAccepted bythrake
A pocket full ofknots byKiteman
Lens CapLanyard by~teknoarsonist~ how to tie a
noose byawesume
AdjustableParacordGlassesLanyard byjdtwelve12
HangmansNoose PackClosure byPopEye42
Paraleash - ADog LeashFrom Paracordby The Ideanator
How to make arugged andhandy ParacordBelt by Jake22
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Image Notes1 X marks the spot
Step 5 FinishedThere you have it I guarantee that the first time you really use this knot (not just practice) you will be amazed at how well it works and youll wish you knew this knot along time ago You may even come over to my side and declare that is is THE most awesome knot on the planet -)
Enjoy and happy haulingDave
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Related Instructables
TiteTie is theTruckers Knoton Steroids bytitetie
Four knots tomake paracordinto a usefultool byerik_mccray
Modify yourbike rack tocarry a sunfishor other boat byewilhelm
SurfboardHammock byGermy
GiganticHalloweenSpider Web bynolte919
How To Tie ASpiders Hitch(video) by back-cast
Three-hitch mathair ornamentby michiexile TRX from
ParacordChallengeAccepted bythrake
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Carry any Bottle with a JUG KNOT Handleby hpstoutharrow on September 17 2009
Intro Carry any Bottle with a JUG KNOT HandleTie a JUG KNOT around a water bottle soda bottle or aluminum bottle to make a secure carrying strap
Re-purpose any container into a reusable water bottle by adding a convenient carrying strap This Instructable will demonstrate how to tie a JUG knot which like its namesuggests is meant to properly secure around the neck of a container
With some cord and the knowledge of this knot you will be able add a handle lanyard or carabiner loop to any of your favorite beverages to carry them on the go
It works perfectly for those disposable water bottles and who knows once you add some colorful cord to the plain old clear water bottle you just might beinclined to refill it and use it again(Check out pictures 4amp5 below)
In addition to plastic beverage bottles like pop water and sports drinks you can turn those rugged aluminum beer bottles into a backpacking canteen
Those of you familiar with my previous aluminum bottle InstructablesROLLED RIM METAL TUMBLERhttpwwwinstructablescomidAluminum-Bottle-Tumbler-Cup-Cook-PotALUMINUM BOTTLE LIGHTWEIGHT ALCOHOL STOVEhttpwwwinstructablescomidAluminum-Bottle-Alcohol-Stovewill recognize the water canteen shown below as a re-purposed aluminum beer bottle Here I have added a painted surface treatment to turn it into a proper lookingwater bottle More on that in steps 13 14 15
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 1 Getting StartedCord size is important Select a small medium weight cord like the one shown here It is a general purpose camp cord sold at most sporting goods stores (shoelacesmight also work)
Do not use a heavy cord or rope because the larger diameter will not tuck under the relatively small lip at the top of the bottleneck and the bottle will fall out
Also the smaller cord cinches tight on itself and will not loosen accidentally
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 2 Form a BightThe next steps show how to tie a JUG KNOT It is the basic step for adding a carrying strap It is also the anchor point for any additional fancy bottle trussing you maywant to add
JUG KNOT Step 1
Form a Bight in the center of a length of cord Bight is a knot term for a loop or bend in the rope In this case the main Bight in this knot is highlighted with a white mark Imakes it easier to follow its path in these steps
The running ends of the cord should be equal length
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 3 Pull the Bight downPULL the Bight DOWN forming two Loops
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 4 Cross the LoopsCROSS the right Loop OVER the left Loop
Step 5 Pass the Bight under the 1st loopTake the main Bight and pass it UNDER the left Loop
Step 6 Weave the BightWEAVE the Bight OVER the portion of the right Loop and UNDER the portion of the left Loop
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 7 Extend the BightExtend the Bight OVER the outer portion of the right Loop
Step 8 Flip the Right Loop behindAdditional colored identification points have been added to the loops to follow their travel in these next two steps
The right Loop Yellow marker is FLIPPED BEHIND the knot and ends up on the far left side of the knot
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 9 Flip the 2nd loop in frontRaise the green marker (located on what was formerly the left loop) and pull it down and to the right FLIPPING IT IN FRONT of the knot
Note the blue portion of the this loop will pass around the outside of the yellow portion of the first loop
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Image Notes1 Center of knot that will tighten around the bottles neck
Step 10 Remove SlackNote where the blue green amp yellow markers end up
Start to remove the slack in the loops by pulling the original main Bight (white marker top right) and the two free standing ends at the bottom
the bottle neck will pass through the very center of the knot
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Image Notes1 Center of knot that will tighten around the bottles neck
Step 11 Tighten the KnotAfter removing the slack insert the bottle neck and finish tightening
The knot should look like this before slipping it over the bottle
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 12 Secure on bottle neckThis is the finished knot shown on the neck of various containers
The loop end and the two free standing ends can be tied together to create a carrying handle (last picture below)
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 13 Aluminum Bottle Water Bottle
The next few steps show the features of an aluminum beer bottle re-purposed as a water bottle canteen It is one of many containers that can be reused as a camp waterbottle
The bottle was lightly sanded masked and then pained with a hammered finished paint to create an interesting surface texture
Image Notes1 Textured finish paint makes an interesting grip-able surface2 Masked with tape for painting3 Masked with tape for painting
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Image Notes1 Dowel used for holding the bottle during painting
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 14 Tethered Cork StopperUse a wine bottle man made Cork as a stopper for your aluminum water bottleNote Use a cork that was removed from the wine bottle without the corkscrew penetrating through the bottom end of the cork (A hole all the way through the cork willcause it to leak) Use the unpierced end of the cork inside the water bottle
Drill a hole through the sides of the Cork Thread the cord through the hole to the center of the cord Use the cork as the main Bight and tie the Jug knot as shown inthe beginning steps
Now the cork is tethered to the bottle and will not get lost or fall on the ground
A Carabiner clip passes through the other cord end to attache the water bottle to you belt or pack
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 15 Trussed for TransportThis is another hanging method for carrying your aluminum bottle water canteen A Jug knot is tied conventionally around the neck
The running ends of the knot however are pulled down towards the bottom of the bottle A Barrel Knot is tied about 34 the way down the side of the bottle A squareknot is tied on the bottom of the knot to keep the two running ends tight against the sides of the bottle
I like the look of the accent colored cord running down the sides of the bottle and the fact that the bottle hangs from the belt upside down It adds to its uniqueness
The last picture shows another truss variation
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 16 AdvancedBelow is a bottle with some additional trussing You can be creative as you want It all starts with a re-purposed container and the Jug Knot (and enough cord)
Related Instructables
AluminumBottle TumblerCup amp Cook Potfor an AlcoholStove byhpstoutharrow
Water BottleBelt Clip byuglymike Duct Tape
Water Bottle byrabidsquire2
AluminumBottle AlcoholStove byhpstoutharrow
DIYGlass WaterBottle byCulturespy
Solar WaterHeater forBackpackingUsing WaterBottles and aCar Shade bykopomeroy
Duct tape waterbottle holder(Photos) by pinkmarshmallow
How to make aCamelPack withan old plasticbottle bywillrandship
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Basic Knots Guideby zorro3355 on April 29 2008
Intro Basic Knots Guidehi
Step 1 Thumb knotThe most simple knotUsed as a stopper and prevent ropes from fraying
Step 2 Reef KnotUsed to tie two ropes of equal thickness togetherIt is pretty easy to tie and untie but under tentionit may be diffcult to untieIt is also not sutible for smoothropes(egnylon ropes)
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 3 Figure of eightused as a stopperprevent ropes from fraying and its more secure than tumb knot its is also used to tie Caribinas to ropes and is often used in rock climbing
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 4 Timber hitchused for pulling logs
Step 5 Clove hitchUsed to tie a rope onto a pole or logThe pole must be roundThe pole lust be thicker then the rope itself
(greatly used during pioneering)
Step 6 Sheet bandused to tie ropes of different thickness together(works on same thickness of ropes too)
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 7 Sheep shankTo shorten RopesTo prevent middle fraying
Step 8 Slip knotWhippingUsed as a grip for pulling things(when tied on a stick or small pole)(marlin spike hitch)
Related Instructables
Rope Rings byhpstoutharrow
How to Tie aFigure EightKnot byTactical_Pyro
Whippin (WestCountry Style)by tim_n
SurvivalBracelet(Updated) bytevers94
HangmansNoose PackClosure byPopEye42
Turkey on aTripod byhpstoutharrow
SurvivalBracelet II bytevers94 Zigzag Spooling
Paracord (video)by Stormdrane
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
How to Tie a Fire-escape Knotby leonardo ismael on October 16 2007
Intro How to Tie a Fire-escape KnotThis knot is used by firemen in case of fires for example imagine a scene where the ladder on the firetruck messes up but people need to get down a five story buildingor more All they have is a long piece of rope they can safely get down with a secure knot like the fire-escape knot So why not learn it its easy to do and hard to untieif you tie it tightly
This is from the American Boys Handbook
Step 1 Get Your RopeFirst grab a piece of rope and bend it like this to make a loop in it Follow every step to the smallest detail
Step 2 Twist the RopeNow make a twist like this and hold it together
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 3 Pull Through the TwistPull the loop through the twist you just made from underneath
Step 4 Go Over the Split EndNow pull the tail through the loop
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 5 FinallyAnd finally just pull it through as pictured below
Congratulations you just learned the fire-escape knot
Step 6 Same Name Not KnotThis is another knot called the fire-escape knot this shouldnt be your result
Related Instructables
House FireEscape Plan(video) byWhatHappensNowAdvice
ParacordLadder wWooden Rungsby josestude
Bed SheetEscape Rope byjessehensel
rope ladder(glow-in-the-dark version) bymikeasaurus
HeadlockEscape 2(video) byjohnnyrockstah
QuickFirestarter byMattandJora
Trail sauna byjakee117
How to Kill FireAnts andCommitGenocide byKentsOkay
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Climb Safe With A Figure 8 Knotby mattste on February 23 2010
Intro Climb Safe With A Figure 8 Knot There are many things that a beginning climber needs to know including several important knots Perhaps the most essential knot is the Figure 8 Follow Through Thistutorial will demonstrate how to correctly harness yourself to a rope using a Figure 8 Follow Through knot This knot is used primarily by rock climbers to provide a life-line Since this knot is used as a life-line it is very important to be able to tie it correctly (Your life could depend upon it)
Dont worry with this tutorial and about 5 minutes of practice you can have this knot mastered
Things you will need
- Climbing Harness- Climbing Rope
If you are wanting to go climbing and dont already have these items they can be purchased for about $25 each at most outdoor sporting goods stores If you are merelylooking to learn the knot a belt loop and a rope (about five feet long) will do
Image Notes1 Climbing Harness2 Climbing Rope
Step 1 Dealing With The RopeThroughout this tutorial I will be discussing different parts of the rope To make these instructions as clear as possible I will define a few terms that I will use throughoutthe tutorial The Anchor End of the rope will generally be at the top of the images This is the end that would be anchored to the wall or rock and does not move Wewill not be doing much with the anchored end The Tail End of the rope is the opposite end that we will be dealing with I will call this the tail for short
Now that we have some terms to work with lets get started
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 2 Tying The First Figure 8This knot has several parts to it The first part of the knot is just tying a basic figure 8 To tie the first figure 8 there are four simple steps
1 - Using the tail make a loop over the rope (as shown in the first picture) keeping in mind that there should be about 3 ft of slack on the tail end
2 - Wrap the tail back this time go under the anchored end (As shown in the second picture)
3 - Bring the tail down through the first loop (As shown in the third picture)
4 - Finally pull the two ends to make the knot a little bit tighter and easier to deal with (Shown in the fourth picture)
After these four steps you should end up with a knot that resembles a figure 8
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 3 Looping Into The Harness In order to secure the rope to the harness simply thread the tail end of the rope through the front loop in the harness as shown in the picture below This step isobviously very important
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 4 Following Back Through The Figure 8After looping the rope through the harness you have to thread the tail end of the rope back through the knot following the first figure 8 I have divided this process intofive smaller steps in order to make it more clear
1 - Coming form underneath the knot bring the tail up through the near loop and to the left behind the anchored end of the rope (Shown in the first picture)
2 - Wrap the tail around the anchored end back to the right and down through the adjacent loop (Shown in the second picture)
3 - You simply need to bring the tail back over the top of the knot to the left (Shown in the third picture)
4 - Bring the tail end up through the far loop following the anchored end (Shown in the fourth picture)
5 - Finally pull the knot tight (Shown in the fifth picture)
As you can see the first four pictures are simply tracing the knot back through with the tail end
For the last part while you pull the knot tight you may want to make small adjustments and rearrange how it all fits together If the knot does not lay perfectly smoothand tight its NOT a big deal
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 5 Finishing The Knot After completing the Figure 8 knot you will want to somehow secure the tail end of the rope out of the way There are a couple different ways to do this the way that Iwill demonstrate is using whats called a Stopper Knot This secondary knot is similar to a Fishermans knot and is pretty simple I have once again divided thisprocess into several smaller steps
1 - Start by wrapping the tail end around the anchored end (As shown in the first picture)
2 - Wrap the tail back underneath the two vertical segments (As shown in the second picture)
3 - Simply repeat the first two steps wrapping the tail around again (As shown in the third picture)
4 - This step in the fourth picture may look complicated but all you need to do is insert the tail up through the two loops that you have just made
5 - To finish off the knot you will want to slowly pull the tail end while gently pushing the bottom of the stopper knot upwards If you have successfully completed this knotit should look something like the fifth picture
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 6 Ready To Climb Now that you have mastered the Figure 8 knot you can securely harness yourself into a climbing rope Remember there are many other skills that go into setting up ananchor and belaying a climber This tutorial only covers the figure 8 knot For more information there are many great websites that demonstrate how to correctly set up asafe climbing system (Ive posted a few below) If you are a beginning climber I recommend that you read up on a few other climbing techniques Also you shouldprobably go to a climbing wall or gym where there are experienced climbers that can show you the ropes Hopefully this tutorial has been helpful Have fun and be safe
Some useful linkshttpwwwstephenprattnetAnchorsanchorshtmhttpwwwuoregonedu~oppclimbingtopicsanchorshtmlhttpwwwabc-of-rockclimbingcomhowtoclimbingtechniquesasp
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Related Instructables
How to Tie aFigure EightKnot byTactical_Pyro
Paracord KnotDisplay Bord byJamie bagn
Basic KnotsGuide byzorro3355
How to Climb aTree (withprussiks) bystasterisk
How to climb atree (using onlyrope) thefunsimple wayby louieaw
How to get arope into a tree(withoutclimbing it) byvitex
How to tievarious knots byadaviel
How to make arope swing byjdub0928
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Turks Head Knots on a Bottleby sklnxbones on July 6 2010
Intro Turks Head Knots on a BottleThis is the finished project A bottle decorated with three Turks Head Knots There are only three knots on this bottle The RED and the BLUE knots are each a 20 Bightby 3 Lead Turks Head Knots The WHITE knot is a 20 Bight by 19 Lead Turks Head Knot
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 1 Supplies
Cord Lots and Lots of cord I cant tell you how much each bottle is differentBottle Washed and Dried inside and out Make sure to remove all water spotsThreaded Needle Cord screws into the threads at the base of the needlePegs I use brass rivets used as a map to tie the Turks Head KnotsHole Punch Used to punch holes in the painters tape to hold the pegsPainters Tape To hold the pegs in place and to make your map for the Turks Head KnotsMarker To write on the painters tapeCloth Towel To remove finger prints and dirt from your bottleKrazy Glue or Super Glue This is used to secure the knots in place to the bottle
OPTIONAL BUT HIGHLY RECOMMENDEDI use the Turks Head Cookbook from KnotToolcom
Step 2 PreparationYou will need to find a bottle you like I used an empty instant tea bottle of course washed and dried (I like to put the bottle in the oven for a few minutes to dry the insidewithout water spots Take off the lid and do not put lid in the oven) Now measure the circumference of the bottle Take a cord and tightly wrap the cord around the bottleMark where the ends meet and use a ruler to measure the length of the cord For my instant tea bottle the circumference is 27cm I know from past knots that I have tiedthat I want my knot to have 20 Bights in the top and bottom (bands) knots I am going to use the Bights in the (bands) knots to tie the middle knot Now divide the numberof Bights (20) into the size of the circumference (27) to get the space between each Bight (135) With me so far
Now take two pieces of painters tape using a ruler measure out the length of the circumference and mark the length on the both pieces of tape Next you will mark thespace between each Bight on the tape
Step 3 Adding the PegsI like to use pegs when tying Turks Head Knots it just makes tying the knot easier
These are what I use for pegs
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 4 Adding Pegs to the TapeNow take a hole punch to cut holes in the tape where the lines meet You will place the pegs in the holes
Insert a peg in each hole and carefully stick the first piece of tape to the bottle
Step 5 Adding the 2nd row of pegsNow do the same thing with the second piece of tape The numbers on each piece of tape must line up
This picture shows you what you should have now This odd looking thing will be your map to tie the Turks Head Knot And this is the end of Step 1
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 6 Tying the first Turks Head KnotUsing the Turks Head Cookbook follow the numbers going over and under as indicated in the book I chose a 20 Bight by 3 Lead knot which will give me a nice bandaround the bottle Once the ends meet you have made one complete knot Tape the running end of your cord and start removing the pegs and the tape
Step 7 Remove the pegs and the tapeBe careful not to untie the knot as you remove the pegs and tape from the bottle Continue to remove all the pegs and remove the tape from the bottle At this point theknot will be very loose and will need to be tightened up
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 8 Remove the slack from the knotHere you can see just how much the knot expanded Starting with the standing end begin to pull the slack out of the knot going towards the running end of the cordDo not expect to pull all the slack out at once You may have to make 3 - 5 attempts at removing the slack out of the knot DO NOT remove all of the slack out of the knotIn order to make the bands we will have to triple the Turks Head Knot We will do this by following the knot three times The threaded needle will really come in handyhere
Step 9 Triple the KnotOnce you have made three passes of the Turks Head Knot use your needle to go under your knot about half the circumference and cut the cord The knot will be tightenough to hide the tail in placeTIP I carefully add a couple of drops of super glue UNDER the band to hold them in place and keep them from sliding around in the nextsteps A drop or two in 3 or 4 places around the band should be enough
Step 10 Add the second knotNow repeat this whole step for the second bandWhen tying the second band you must make sure the Bights line up to the first band This is crucial for the next stepWipe down the bottle to make sure all your finger prints and adhesive from the tape are all removed You want to make sure your bottle is clean at this point Any dirt orfinger prints left on the bottle will be almost impossible to remove From this point on we will use gloves when tying our last knot
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 11 Maping the Top KnotStick a piece of painters tape on top of your first band leaving the bottom of the knot exposedUse a marker to count the number of Bights in your knot Instead of using the pegs we are going to use the Bights to tie our next Turks Head Knot
Step 12 Mapping the Bottom KnotDo the same thing for the bottom band but you must make sure your numbers on top and bottom line up So 1 on top should be the same position as 1 on the bottom
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 13 Adding the last knotAgain using the Turks Head Cookbook and the threaded needle you are going to follow the instructions going over and under as indicated in the book Be sure to usegloves when ever you handle the bottle
Step 14 Thats ItFor this Turks Head Knot I am using a 20 Bight by 19 Lead knot
Because of the amount of cord you are working with your cord will get twisted and knotted You will have to un-twist the cord often Its a pain in the rear but it has to bedone And it has to be done alot
Continue to tie the knot until you finish the knot If you have the cord and the patience you can double or triple the knot When you are done use your needle to hide theends under your bands Cut the ends and your DONE
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Related Instructables
Monkeys FistFloatingKeychain byjokerlz
How To Make ATurks headKnot WithParacord byDoggie Stylish
Tying Trivetsout of Rope forHoliday Gifts bykylemarsh
Paracord KnotDisplay Bord byJamie bagn
How to Make ATurks Head(Photos) bymchs60chip
A pocket full ofknots byKiteman
Monkeys fistknot AND themonkey byjonathan111
TiteTie is theTruckers Knoton Steroids bytitetie
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Larks head noose -- an easy useful knot that tightens and loosensby Larry Breed on February 19 2009
Intro Larks head noose -- an easy useful knot that tightens and loosensI thought I knew all the basic knots but then I was taught this incredibly useful simple knot Its good for tying up the neck of a bag that you want to repeatedly open andsecurely close Its good for tying around a springy bundle that will need tightening and retightening And its easy to undo
Ive looked at knot literature but havent found a name for this so I named it The basic knot is well known its called a larks head Since all Ive done is to slip the twoends through the larks head to make a noose I call it that
WARNING Dont use this knot when human safety would depend on it Climbers and mountaineers have well-tested reliable knots for such situations
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Image Notes1 To tighten further step on this side of the larks head and pull the free ends
Step 1 Double the cord overThe larks head noose requires enough cord to go twice around your bundle plus a foot or two Find the center and double it over Sailors call this a bight
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 2 Form the larks headComing from below the bight hook your thumb and forefinger over the two sides Reach outward and downward and pinch your fingertips together underneath thedoubled cord
Youve made a larks head Move the crossing cord a little farther from your hand so theres a clear opening through the two half-loops
Step 3 Form the nooseSlip the two ends of the cord through the opening we were just talking about Pull the larks head tight so it grips the two cords Find something that needs constrictingand put the noose around it
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 4 Tightening retightening and lockingSlide the knot against the bundle If its not tight enough to keep from slipping tighten it by holding it in one hand and tugging on the cords one at a time with the otherhand Notice that you can slide the knot out again for instance to re-open the bag you just tied shut For some applications this may be as tight as you need it
A springy bundle probably still feels loose If so compress the bundle and get a new grip on the cords Rest your foot on the bundle on the cords nearest the larks headand pull to slide the larks head tighter
To make the knot more permanent you can lock it Make an overhand in the cord ends (Exactly like the first step in tying shoelaces) With your foot still on the bundlepull on the cords and move your hands apart until youre pulling in opposite directions You have just locked the larks head and you can trust it to stay that way()
But lets say that later on you want to loosen the locked knot Again put your foot on the bundle and cords nearest the larks head hold the two cord ends together andpull This makes a little slack between the overhand and the larks head so you can untie the overhand
In twine or small string the locking overhand knot may be difficult to undo Use a shoelace knot instead of an overhand and itll unlock easily
() If youre using slippery cord like polypropylene an overhand may not lock securely You may want to tie another overhand knot For added security wrap a shortlength of duct tape around the two cords close to the knot
Image Notes1 To tighten further step on this side of the larks head and pull the free ends
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Related Instructables
TRX fromParacordChallengeAccepted bythrake
A pocket full ofknots byKiteman
Lens CapLanyard by~teknoarsonist~ how to tie a
noose byawesume
AdjustableParacordGlassesLanyard byjdtwelve12
HangmansNoose PackClosure byPopEye42
Paraleash - ADog LeashFrom Paracordby The Ideanator
How to make arugged andhandy ParacordBelt by Jake22
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Related Instructables
TiteTie is theTruckers Knoton Steroids bytitetie
Four knots tomake paracordinto a usefultool byerik_mccray
Modify yourbike rack tocarry a sunfishor other boat byewilhelm
SurfboardHammock byGermy
GiganticHalloweenSpider Web bynolte919
How To Tie ASpiders Hitch(video) by back-cast
Three-hitch mathair ornamentby michiexile TRX from
ParacordChallengeAccepted bythrake
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Carry any Bottle with a JUG KNOT Handleby hpstoutharrow on September 17 2009
Intro Carry any Bottle with a JUG KNOT HandleTie a JUG KNOT around a water bottle soda bottle or aluminum bottle to make a secure carrying strap
Re-purpose any container into a reusable water bottle by adding a convenient carrying strap This Instructable will demonstrate how to tie a JUG knot which like its namesuggests is meant to properly secure around the neck of a container
With some cord and the knowledge of this knot you will be able add a handle lanyard or carabiner loop to any of your favorite beverages to carry them on the go
It works perfectly for those disposable water bottles and who knows once you add some colorful cord to the plain old clear water bottle you just might beinclined to refill it and use it again(Check out pictures 4amp5 below)
In addition to plastic beverage bottles like pop water and sports drinks you can turn those rugged aluminum beer bottles into a backpacking canteen
Those of you familiar with my previous aluminum bottle InstructablesROLLED RIM METAL TUMBLERhttpwwwinstructablescomidAluminum-Bottle-Tumbler-Cup-Cook-PotALUMINUM BOTTLE LIGHTWEIGHT ALCOHOL STOVEhttpwwwinstructablescomidAluminum-Bottle-Alcohol-Stovewill recognize the water canteen shown below as a re-purposed aluminum beer bottle Here I have added a painted surface treatment to turn it into a proper lookingwater bottle More on that in steps 13 14 15
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 1 Getting StartedCord size is important Select a small medium weight cord like the one shown here It is a general purpose camp cord sold at most sporting goods stores (shoelacesmight also work)
Do not use a heavy cord or rope because the larger diameter will not tuck under the relatively small lip at the top of the bottleneck and the bottle will fall out
Also the smaller cord cinches tight on itself and will not loosen accidentally
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 2 Form a BightThe next steps show how to tie a JUG KNOT It is the basic step for adding a carrying strap It is also the anchor point for any additional fancy bottle trussing you maywant to add
JUG KNOT Step 1
Form a Bight in the center of a length of cord Bight is a knot term for a loop or bend in the rope In this case the main Bight in this knot is highlighted with a white mark Imakes it easier to follow its path in these steps
The running ends of the cord should be equal length
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 3 Pull the Bight downPULL the Bight DOWN forming two Loops
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 4 Cross the LoopsCROSS the right Loop OVER the left Loop
Step 5 Pass the Bight under the 1st loopTake the main Bight and pass it UNDER the left Loop
Step 6 Weave the BightWEAVE the Bight OVER the portion of the right Loop and UNDER the portion of the left Loop
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 7 Extend the BightExtend the Bight OVER the outer portion of the right Loop
Step 8 Flip the Right Loop behindAdditional colored identification points have been added to the loops to follow their travel in these next two steps
The right Loop Yellow marker is FLIPPED BEHIND the knot and ends up on the far left side of the knot
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 9 Flip the 2nd loop in frontRaise the green marker (located on what was formerly the left loop) and pull it down and to the right FLIPPING IT IN FRONT of the knot
Note the blue portion of the this loop will pass around the outside of the yellow portion of the first loop
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Image Notes1 Center of knot that will tighten around the bottles neck
Step 10 Remove SlackNote where the blue green amp yellow markers end up
Start to remove the slack in the loops by pulling the original main Bight (white marker top right) and the two free standing ends at the bottom
the bottle neck will pass through the very center of the knot
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Image Notes1 Center of knot that will tighten around the bottles neck
Step 11 Tighten the KnotAfter removing the slack insert the bottle neck and finish tightening
The knot should look like this before slipping it over the bottle
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 12 Secure on bottle neckThis is the finished knot shown on the neck of various containers
The loop end and the two free standing ends can be tied together to create a carrying handle (last picture below)
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 13 Aluminum Bottle Water Bottle
The next few steps show the features of an aluminum beer bottle re-purposed as a water bottle canteen It is one of many containers that can be reused as a camp waterbottle
The bottle was lightly sanded masked and then pained with a hammered finished paint to create an interesting surface texture
Image Notes1 Textured finish paint makes an interesting grip-able surface2 Masked with tape for painting3 Masked with tape for painting
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Image Notes1 Dowel used for holding the bottle during painting
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 14 Tethered Cork StopperUse a wine bottle man made Cork as a stopper for your aluminum water bottleNote Use a cork that was removed from the wine bottle without the corkscrew penetrating through the bottom end of the cork (A hole all the way through the cork willcause it to leak) Use the unpierced end of the cork inside the water bottle
Drill a hole through the sides of the Cork Thread the cord through the hole to the center of the cord Use the cork as the main Bight and tie the Jug knot as shown inthe beginning steps
Now the cork is tethered to the bottle and will not get lost or fall on the ground
A Carabiner clip passes through the other cord end to attache the water bottle to you belt or pack
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 15 Trussed for TransportThis is another hanging method for carrying your aluminum bottle water canteen A Jug knot is tied conventionally around the neck
The running ends of the knot however are pulled down towards the bottom of the bottle A Barrel Knot is tied about 34 the way down the side of the bottle A squareknot is tied on the bottom of the knot to keep the two running ends tight against the sides of the bottle
I like the look of the accent colored cord running down the sides of the bottle and the fact that the bottle hangs from the belt upside down It adds to its uniqueness
The last picture shows another truss variation
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 16 AdvancedBelow is a bottle with some additional trussing You can be creative as you want It all starts with a re-purposed container and the Jug Knot (and enough cord)
Related Instructables
AluminumBottle TumblerCup amp Cook Potfor an AlcoholStove byhpstoutharrow
Water BottleBelt Clip byuglymike Duct Tape
Water Bottle byrabidsquire2
AluminumBottle AlcoholStove byhpstoutharrow
DIYGlass WaterBottle byCulturespy
Solar WaterHeater forBackpackingUsing WaterBottles and aCar Shade bykopomeroy
Duct tape waterbottle holder(Photos) by pinkmarshmallow
How to make aCamelPack withan old plasticbottle bywillrandship
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Basic Knots Guideby zorro3355 on April 29 2008
Intro Basic Knots Guidehi
Step 1 Thumb knotThe most simple knotUsed as a stopper and prevent ropes from fraying
Step 2 Reef KnotUsed to tie two ropes of equal thickness togetherIt is pretty easy to tie and untie but under tentionit may be diffcult to untieIt is also not sutible for smoothropes(egnylon ropes)
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 3 Figure of eightused as a stopperprevent ropes from fraying and its more secure than tumb knot its is also used to tie Caribinas to ropes and is often used in rock climbing
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 4 Timber hitchused for pulling logs
Step 5 Clove hitchUsed to tie a rope onto a pole or logThe pole must be roundThe pole lust be thicker then the rope itself
(greatly used during pioneering)
Step 6 Sheet bandused to tie ropes of different thickness together(works on same thickness of ropes too)
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 7 Sheep shankTo shorten RopesTo prevent middle fraying
Step 8 Slip knotWhippingUsed as a grip for pulling things(when tied on a stick or small pole)(marlin spike hitch)
Related Instructables
Rope Rings byhpstoutharrow
How to Tie aFigure EightKnot byTactical_Pyro
Whippin (WestCountry Style)by tim_n
SurvivalBracelet(Updated) bytevers94
HangmansNoose PackClosure byPopEye42
Turkey on aTripod byhpstoutharrow
SurvivalBracelet II bytevers94 Zigzag Spooling
Paracord (video)by Stormdrane
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
How to Tie a Fire-escape Knotby leonardo ismael on October 16 2007
Intro How to Tie a Fire-escape KnotThis knot is used by firemen in case of fires for example imagine a scene where the ladder on the firetruck messes up but people need to get down a five story buildingor more All they have is a long piece of rope they can safely get down with a secure knot like the fire-escape knot So why not learn it its easy to do and hard to untieif you tie it tightly
This is from the American Boys Handbook
Step 1 Get Your RopeFirst grab a piece of rope and bend it like this to make a loop in it Follow every step to the smallest detail
Step 2 Twist the RopeNow make a twist like this and hold it together
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 3 Pull Through the TwistPull the loop through the twist you just made from underneath
Step 4 Go Over the Split EndNow pull the tail through the loop
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 5 FinallyAnd finally just pull it through as pictured below
Congratulations you just learned the fire-escape knot
Step 6 Same Name Not KnotThis is another knot called the fire-escape knot this shouldnt be your result
Related Instructables
House FireEscape Plan(video) byWhatHappensNowAdvice
ParacordLadder wWooden Rungsby josestude
Bed SheetEscape Rope byjessehensel
rope ladder(glow-in-the-dark version) bymikeasaurus
HeadlockEscape 2(video) byjohnnyrockstah
QuickFirestarter byMattandJora
Trail sauna byjakee117
How to Kill FireAnts andCommitGenocide byKentsOkay
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Climb Safe With A Figure 8 Knotby mattste on February 23 2010
Intro Climb Safe With A Figure 8 Knot There are many things that a beginning climber needs to know including several important knots Perhaps the most essential knot is the Figure 8 Follow Through Thistutorial will demonstrate how to correctly harness yourself to a rope using a Figure 8 Follow Through knot This knot is used primarily by rock climbers to provide a life-line Since this knot is used as a life-line it is very important to be able to tie it correctly (Your life could depend upon it)
Dont worry with this tutorial and about 5 minutes of practice you can have this knot mastered
Things you will need
- Climbing Harness- Climbing Rope
If you are wanting to go climbing and dont already have these items they can be purchased for about $25 each at most outdoor sporting goods stores If you are merelylooking to learn the knot a belt loop and a rope (about five feet long) will do
Image Notes1 Climbing Harness2 Climbing Rope
Step 1 Dealing With The RopeThroughout this tutorial I will be discussing different parts of the rope To make these instructions as clear as possible I will define a few terms that I will use throughoutthe tutorial The Anchor End of the rope will generally be at the top of the images This is the end that would be anchored to the wall or rock and does not move Wewill not be doing much with the anchored end The Tail End of the rope is the opposite end that we will be dealing with I will call this the tail for short
Now that we have some terms to work with lets get started
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 2 Tying The First Figure 8This knot has several parts to it The first part of the knot is just tying a basic figure 8 To tie the first figure 8 there are four simple steps
1 - Using the tail make a loop over the rope (as shown in the first picture) keeping in mind that there should be about 3 ft of slack on the tail end
2 - Wrap the tail back this time go under the anchored end (As shown in the second picture)
3 - Bring the tail down through the first loop (As shown in the third picture)
4 - Finally pull the two ends to make the knot a little bit tighter and easier to deal with (Shown in the fourth picture)
After these four steps you should end up with a knot that resembles a figure 8
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 3 Looping Into The Harness In order to secure the rope to the harness simply thread the tail end of the rope through the front loop in the harness as shown in the picture below This step isobviously very important
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 4 Following Back Through The Figure 8After looping the rope through the harness you have to thread the tail end of the rope back through the knot following the first figure 8 I have divided this process intofive smaller steps in order to make it more clear
1 - Coming form underneath the knot bring the tail up through the near loop and to the left behind the anchored end of the rope (Shown in the first picture)
2 - Wrap the tail around the anchored end back to the right and down through the adjacent loop (Shown in the second picture)
3 - You simply need to bring the tail back over the top of the knot to the left (Shown in the third picture)
4 - Bring the tail end up through the far loop following the anchored end (Shown in the fourth picture)
5 - Finally pull the knot tight (Shown in the fifth picture)
As you can see the first four pictures are simply tracing the knot back through with the tail end
For the last part while you pull the knot tight you may want to make small adjustments and rearrange how it all fits together If the knot does not lay perfectly smoothand tight its NOT a big deal
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 5 Finishing The Knot After completing the Figure 8 knot you will want to somehow secure the tail end of the rope out of the way There are a couple different ways to do this the way that Iwill demonstrate is using whats called a Stopper Knot This secondary knot is similar to a Fishermans knot and is pretty simple I have once again divided thisprocess into several smaller steps
1 - Start by wrapping the tail end around the anchored end (As shown in the first picture)
2 - Wrap the tail back underneath the two vertical segments (As shown in the second picture)
3 - Simply repeat the first two steps wrapping the tail around again (As shown in the third picture)
4 - This step in the fourth picture may look complicated but all you need to do is insert the tail up through the two loops that you have just made
5 - To finish off the knot you will want to slowly pull the tail end while gently pushing the bottom of the stopper knot upwards If you have successfully completed this knotit should look something like the fifth picture
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 6 Ready To Climb Now that you have mastered the Figure 8 knot you can securely harness yourself into a climbing rope Remember there are many other skills that go into setting up ananchor and belaying a climber This tutorial only covers the figure 8 knot For more information there are many great websites that demonstrate how to correctly set up asafe climbing system (Ive posted a few below) If you are a beginning climber I recommend that you read up on a few other climbing techniques Also you shouldprobably go to a climbing wall or gym where there are experienced climbers that can show you the ropes Hopefully this tutorial has been helpful Have fun and be safe
Some useful linkshttpwwwstephenprattnetAnchorsanchorshtmhttpwwwuoregonedu~oppclimbingtopicsanchorshtmlhttpwwwabc-of-rockclimbingcomhowtoclimbingtechniquesasp
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Related Instructables
How to Tie aFigure EightKnot byTactical_Pyro
Paracord KnotDisplay Bord byJamie bagn
Basic KnotsGuide byzorro3355
How to Climb aTree (withprussiks) bystasterisk
How to climb atree (using onlyrope) thefunsimple wayby louieaw
How to get arope into a tree(withoutclimbing it) byvitex
How to tievarious knots byadaviel
How to make arope swing byjdub0928
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Turks Head Knots on a Bottleby sklnxbones on July 6 2010
Intro Turks Head Knots on a BottleThis is the finished project A bottle decorated with three Turks Head Knots There are only three knots on this bottle The RED and the BLUE knots are each a 20 Bightby 3 Lead Turks Head Knots The WHITE knot is a 20 Bight by 19 Lead Turks Head Knot
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 1 Supplies
Cord Lots and Lots of cord I cant tell you how much each bottle is differentBottle Washed and Dried inside and out Make sure to remove all water spotsThreaded Needle Cord screws into the threads at the base of the needlePegs I use brass rivets used as a map to tie the Turks Head KnotsHole Punch Used to punch holes in the painters tape to hold the pegsPainters Tape To hold the pegs in place and to make your map for the Turks Head KnotsMarker To write on the painters tapeCloth Towel To remove finger prints and dirt from your bottleKrazy Glue or Super Glue This is used to secure the knots in place to the bottle
OPTIONAL BUT HIGHLY RECOMMENDEDI use the Turks Head Cookbook from KnotToolcom
Step 2 PreparationYou will need to find a bottle you like I used an empty instant tea bottle of course washed and dried (I like to put the bottle in the oven for a few minutes to dry the insidewithout water spots Take off the lid and do not put lid in the oven) Now measure the circumference of the bottle Take a cord and tightly wrap the cord around the bottleMark where the ends meet and use a ruler to measure the length of the cord For my instant tea bottle the circumference is 27cm I know from past knots that I have tiedthat I want my knot to have 20 Bights in the top and bottom (bands) knots I am going to use the Bights in the (bands) knots to tie the middle knot Now divide the numberof Bights (20) into the size of the circumference (27) to get the space between each Bight (135) With me so far
Now take two pieces of painters tape using a ruler measure out the length of the circumference and mark the length on the both pieces of tape Next you will mark thespace between each Bight on the tape
Step 3 Adding the PegsI like to use pegs when tying Turks Head Knots it just makes tying the knot easier
These are what I use for pegs
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 4 Adding Pegs to the TapeNow take a hole punch to cut holes in the tape where the lines meet You will place the pegs in the holes
Insert a peg in each hole and carefully stick the first piece of tape to the bottle
Step 5 Adding the 2nd row of pegsNow do the same thing with the second piece of tape The numbers on each piece of tape must line up
This picture shows you what you should have now This odd looking thing will be your map to tie the Turks Head Knot And this is the end of Step 1
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 6 Tying the first Turks Head KnotUsing the Turks Head Cookbook follow the numbers going over and under as indicated in the book I chose a 20 Bight by 3 Lead knot which will give me a nice bandaround the bottle Once the ends meet you have made one complete knot Tape the running end of your cord and start removing the pegs and the tape
Step 7 Remove the pegs and the tapeBe careful not to untie the knot as you remove the pegs and tape from the bottle Continue to remove all the pegs and remove the tape from the bottle At this point theknot will be very loose and will need to be tightened up
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 8 Remove the slack from the knotHere you can see just how much the knot expanded Starting with the standing end begin to pull the slack out of the knot going towards the running end of the cordDo not expect to pull all the slack out at once You may have to make 3 - 5 attempts at removing the slack out of the knot DO NOT remove all of the slack out of the knotIn order to make the bands we will have to triple the Turks Head Knot We will do this by following the knot three times The threaded needle will really come in handyhere
Step 9 Triple the KnotOnce you have made three passes of the Turks Head Knot use your needle to go under your knot about half the circumference and cut the cord The knot will be tightenough to hide the tail in placeTIP I carefully add a couple of drops of super glue UNDER the band to hold them in place and keep them from sliding around in the nextsteps A drop or two in 3 or 4 places around the band should be enough
Step 10 Add the second knotNow repeat this whole step for the second bandWhen tying the second band you must make sure the Bights line up to the first band This is crucial for the next stepWipe down the bottle to make sure all your finger prints and adhesive from the tape are all removed You want to make sure your bottle is clean at this point Any dirt orfinger prints left on the bottle will be almost impossible to remove From this point on we will use gloves when tying our last knot
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 11 Maping the Top KnotStick a piece of painters tape on top of your first band leaving the bottom of the knot exposedUse a marker to count the number of Bights in your knot Instead of using the pegs we are going to use the Bights to tie our next Turks Head Knot
Step 12 Mapping the Bottom KnotDo the same thing for the bottom band but you must make sure your numbers on top and bottom line up So 1 on top should be the same position as 1 on the bottom
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 13 Adding the last knotAgain using the Turks Head Cookbook and the threaded needle you are going to follow the instructions going over and under as indicated in the book Be sure to usegloves when ever you handle the bottle
Step 14 Thats ItFor this Turks Head Knot I am using a 20 Bight by 19 Lead knot
Because of the amount of cord you are working with your cord will get twisted and knotted You will have to un-twist the cord often Its a pain in the rear but it has to bedone And it has to be done alot
Continue to tie the knot until you finish the knot If you have the cord and the patience you can double or triple the knot When you are done use your needle to hide theends under your bands Cut the ends and your DONE
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Related Instructables
Monkeys FistFloatingKeychain byjokerlz
How To Make ATurks headKnot WithParacord byDoggie Stylish
Tying Trivetsout of Rope forHoliday Gifts bykylemarsh
Paracord KnotDisplay Bord byJamie bagn
How to Make ATurks Head(Photos) bymchs60chip
A pocket full ofknots byKiteman
Monkeys fistknot AND themonkey byjonathan111
TiteTie is theTruckers Knoton Steroids bytitetie
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Larks head noose -- an easy useful knot that tightens and loosensby Larry Breed on February 19 2009
Intro Larks head noose -- an easy useful knot that tightens and loosensI thought I knew all the basic knots but then I was taught this incredibly useful simple knot Its good for tying up the neck of a bag that you want to repeatedly open andsecurely close Its good for tying around a springy bundle that will need tightening and retightening And its easy to undo
Ive looked at knot literature but havent found a name for this so I named it The basic knot is well known its called a larks head Since all Ive done is to slip the twoends through the larks head to make a noose I call it that
WARNING Dont use this knot when human safety would depend on it Climbers and mountaineers have well-tested reliable knots for such situations
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Image Notes1 To tighten further step on this side of the larks head and pull the free ends
Step 1 Double the cord overThe larks head noose requires enough cord to go twice around your bundle plus a foot or two Find the center and double it over Sailors call this a bight
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 2 Form the larks headComing from below the bight hook your thumb and forefinger over the two sides Reach outward and downward and pinch your fingertips together underneath thedoubled cord
Youve made a larks head Move the crossing cord a little farther from your hand so theres a clear opening through the two half-loops
Step 3 Form the nooseSlip the two ends of the cord through the opening we were just talking about Pull the larks head tight so it grips the two cords Find something that needs constrictingand put the noose around it
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 4 Tightening retightening and lockingSlide the knot against the bundle If its not tight enough to keep from slipping tighten it by holding it in one hand and tugging on the cords one at a time with the otherhand Notice that you can slide the knot out again for instance to re-open the bag you just tied shut For some applications this may be as tight as you need it
A springy bundle probably still feels loose If so compress the bundle and get a new grip on the cords Rest your foot on the bundle on the cords nearest the larks headand pull to slide the larks head tighter
To make the knot more permanent you can lock it Make an overhand in the cord ends (Exactly like the first step in tying shoelaces) With your foot still on the bundlepull on the cords and move your hands apart until youre pulling in opposite directions You have just locked the larks head and you can trust it to stay that way()
But lets say that later on you want to loosen the locked knot Again put your foot on the bundle and cords nearest the larks head hold the two cord ends together andpull This makes a little slack between the overhand and the larks head so you can untie the overhand
In twine or small string the locking overhand knot may be difficult to undo Use a shoelace knot instead of an overhand and itll unlock easily
() If youre using slippery cord like polypropylene an overhand may not lock securely You may want to tie another overhand knot For added security wrap a shortlength of duct tape around the two cords close to the knot
Image Notes1 To tighten further step on this side of the larks head and pull the free ends
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Related Instructables
TRX fromParacordChallengeAccepted bythrake
A pocket full ofknots byKiteman
Lens CapLanyard by~teknoarsonist~ how to tie a
noose byawesume
AdjustableParacordGlassesLanyard byjdtwelve12
HangmansNoose PackClosure byPopEye42
Paraleash - ADog LeashFrom Paracordby The Ideanator
How to make arugged andhandy ParacordBelt by Jake22
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Carry any Bottle with a JUG KNOT Handleby hpstoutharrow on September 17 2009
Intro Carry any Bottle with a JUG KNOT HandleTie a JUG KNOT around a water bottle soda bottle or aluminum bottle to make a secure carrying strap
Re-purpose any container into a reusable water bottle by adding a convenient carrying strap This Instructable will demonstrate how to tie a JUG knot which like its namesuggests is meant to properly secure around the neck of a container
With some cord and the knowledge of this knot you will be able add a handle lanyard or carabiner loop to any of your favorite beverages to carry them on the go
It works perfectly for those disposable water bottles and who knows once you add some colorful cord to the plain old clear water bottle you just might beinclined to refill it and use it again(Check out pictures 4amp5 below)
In addition to plastic beverage bottles like pop water and sports drinks you can turn those rugged aluminum beer bottles into a backpacking canteen
Those of you familiar with my previous aluminum bottle InstructablesROLLED RIM METAL TUMBLERhttpwwwinstructablescomidAluminum-Bottle-Tumbler-Cup-Cook-PotALUMINUM BOTTLE LIGHTWEIGHT ALCOHOL STOVEhttpwwwinstructablescomidAluminum-Bottle-Alcohol-Stovewill recognize the water canteen shown below as a re-purposed aluminum beer bottle Here I have added a painted surface treatment to turn it into a proper lookingwater bottle More on that in steps 13 14 15
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 1 Getting StartedCord size is important Select a small medium weight cord like the one shown here It is a general purpose camp cord sold at most sporting goods stores (shoelacesmight also work)
Do not use a heavy cord or rope because the larger diameter will not tuck under the relatively small lip at the top of the bottleneck and the bottle will fall out
Also the smaller cord cinches tight on itself and will not loosen accidentally
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 2 Form a BightThe next steps show how to tie a JUG KNOT It is the basic step for adding a carrying strap It is also the anchor point for any additional fancy bottle trussing you maywant to add
JUG KNOT Step 1
Form a Bight in the center of a length of cord Bight is a knot term for a loop or bend in the rope In this case the main Bight in this knot is highlighted with a white mark Imakes it easier to follow its path in these steps
The running ends of the cord should be equal length
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 3 Pull the Bight downPULL the Bight DOWN forming two Loops
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 4 Cross the LoopsCROSS the right Loop OVER the left Loop
Step 5 Pass the Bight under the 1st loopTake the main Bight and pass it UNDER the left Loop
Step 6 Weave the BightWEAVE the Bight OVER the portion of the right Loop and UNDER the portion of the left Loop
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 7 Extend the BightExtend the Bight OVER the outer portion of the right Loop
Step 8 Flip the Right Loop behindAdditional colored identification points have been added to the loops to follow their travel in these next two steps
The right Loop Yellow marker is FLIPPED BEHIND the knot and ends up on the far left side of the knot
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 9 Flip the 2nd loop in frontRaise the green marker (located on what was formerly the left loop) and pull it down and to the right FLIPPING IT IN FRONT of the knot
Note the blue portion of the this loop will pass around the outside of the yellow portion of the first loop
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Image Notes1 Center of knot that will tighten around the bottles neck
Step 10 Remove SlackNote where the blue green amp yellow markers end up
Start to remove the slack in the loops by pulling the original main Bight (white marker top right) and the two free standing ends at the bottom
the bottle neck will pass through the very center of the knot
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Image Notes1 Center of knot that will tighten around the bottles neck
Step 11 Tighten the KnotAfter removing the slack insert the bottle neck and finish tightening
The knot should look like this before slipping it over the bottle
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 12 Secure on bottle neckThis is the finished knot shown on the neck of various containers
The loop end and the two free standing ends can be tied together to create a carrying handle (last picture below)
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 13 Aluminum Bottle Water Bottle
The next few steps show the features of an aluminum beer bottle re-purposed as a water bottle canteen It is one of many containers that can be reused as a camp waterbottle
The bottle was lightly sanded masked and then pained with a hammered finished paint to create an interesting surface texture
Image Notes1 Textured finish paint makes an interesting grip-able surface2 Masked with tape for painting3 Masked with tape for painting
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Image Notes1 Dowel used for holding the bottle during painting
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 14 Tethered Cork StopperUse a wine bottle man made Cork as a stopper for your aluminum water bottleNote Use a cork that was removed from the wine bottle without the corkscrew penetrating through the bottom end of the cork (A hole all the way through the cork willcause it to leak) Use the unpierced end of the cork inside the water bottle
Drill a hole through the sides of the Cork Thread the cord through the hole to the center of the cord Use the cork as the main Bight and tie the Jug knot as shown inthe beginning steps
Now the cork is tethered to the bottle and will not get lost or fall on the ground
A Carabiner clip passes through the other cord end to attache the water bottle to you belt or pack
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 15 Trussed for TransportThis is another hanging method for carrying your aluminum bottle water canteen A Jug knot is tied conventionally around the neck
The running ends of the knot however are pulled down towards the bottom of the bottle A Barrel Knot is tied about 34 the way down the side of the bottle A squareknot is tied on the bottom of the knot to keep the two running ends tight against the sides of the bottle
I like the look of the accent colored cord running down the sides of the bottle and the fact that the bottle hangs from the belt upside down It adds to its uniqueness
The last picture shows another truss variation
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 16 AdvancedBelow is a bottle with some additional trussing You can be creative as you want It all starts with a re-purposed container and the Jug Knot (and enough cord)
Related Instructables
AluminumBottle TumblerCup amp Cook Potfor an AlcoholStove byhpstoutharrow
Water BottleBelt Clip byuglymike Duct Tape
Water Bottle byrabidsquire2
AluminumBottle AlcoholStove byhpstoutharrow
DIYGlass WaterBottle byCulturespy
Solar WaterHeater forBackpackingUsing WaterBottles and aCar Shade bykopomeroy
Duct tape waterbottle holder(Photos) by pinkmarshmallow
How to make aCamelPack withan old plasticbottle bywillrandship
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Basic Knots Guideby zorro3355 on April 29 2008
Intro Basic Knots Guidehi
Step 1 Thumb knotThe most simple knotUsed as a stopper and prevent ropes from fraying
Step 2 Reef KnotUsed to tie two ropes of equal thickness togetherIt is pretty easy to tie and untie but under tentionit may be diffcult to untieIt is also not sutible for smoothropes(egnylon ropes)
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 3 Figure of eightused as a stopperprevent ropes from fraying and its more secure than tumb knot its is also used to tie Caribinas to ropes and is often used in rock climbing
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 4 Timber hitchused for pulling logs
Step 5 Clove hitchUsed to tie a rope onto a pole or logThe pole must be roundThe pole lust be thicker then the rope itself
(greatly used during pioneering)
Step 6 Sheet bandused to tie ropes of different thickness together(works on same thickness of ropes too)
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 7 Sheep shankTo shorten RopesTo prevent middle fraying
Step 8 Slip knotWhippingUsed as a grip for pulling things(when tied on a stick or small pole)(marlin spike hitch)
Related Instructables
Rope Rings byhpstoutharrow
How to Tie aFigure EightKnot byTactical_Pyro
Whippin (WestCountry Style)by tim_n
SurvivalBracelet(Updated) bytevers94
HangmansNoose PackClosure byPopEye42
Turkey on aTripod byhpstoutharrow
SurvivalBracelet II bytevers94 Zigzag Spooling
Paracord (video)by Stormdrane
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
How to Tie a Fire-escape Knotby leonardo ismael on October 16 2007
Intro How to Tie a Fire-escape KnotThis knot is used by firemen in case of fires for example imagine a scene where the ladder on the firetruck messes up but people need to get down a five story buildingor more All they have is a long piece of rope they can safely get down with a secure knot like the fire-escape knot So why not learn it its easy to do and hard to untieif you tie it tightly
This is from the American Boys Handbook
Step 1 Get Your RopeFirst grab a piece of rope and bend it like this to make a loop in it Follow every step to the smallest detail
Step 2 Twist the RopeNow make a twist like this and hold it together
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 3 Pull Through the TwistPull the loop through the twist you just made from underneath
Step 4 Go Over the Split EndNow pull the tail through the loop
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 5 FinallyAnd finally just pull it through as pictured below
Congratulations you just learned the fire-escape knot
Step 6 Same Name Not KnotThis is another knot called the fire-escape knot this shouldnt be your result
Related Instructables
House FireEscape Plan(video) byWhatHappensNowAdvice
ParacordLadder wWooden Rungsby josestude
Bed SheetEscape Rope byjessehensel
rope ladder(glow-in-the-dark version) bymikeasaurus
HeadlockEscape 2(video) byjohnnyrockstah
QuickFirestarter byMattandJora
Trail sauna byjakee117
How to Kill FireAnts andCommitGenocide byKentsOkay
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Climb Safe With A Figure 8 Knotby mattste on February 23 2010
Intro Climb Safe With A Figure 8 Knot There are many things that a beginning climber needs to know including several important knots Perhaps the most essential knot is the Figure 8 Follow Through Thistutorial will demonstrate how to correctly harness yourself to a rope using a Figure 8 Follow Through knot This knot is used primarily by rock climbers to provide a life-line Since this knot is used as a life-line it is very important to be able to tie it correctly (Your life could depend upon it)
Dont worry with this tutorial and about 5 minutes of practice you can have this knot mastered
Things you will need
- Climbing Harness- Climbing Rope
If you are wanting to go climbing and dont already have these items they can be purchased for about $25 each at most outdoor sporting goods stores If you are merelylooking to learn the knot a belt loop and a rope (about five feet long) will do
Image Notes1 Climbing Harness2 Climbing Rope
Step 1 Dealing With The RopeThroughout this tutorial I will be discussing different parts of the rope To make these instructions as clear as possible I will define a few terms that I will use throughoutthe tutorial The Anchor End of the rope will generally be at the top of the images This is the end that would be anchored to the wall or rock and does not move Wewill not be doing much with the anchored end The Tail End of the rope is the opposite end that we will be dealing with I will call this the tail for short
Now that we have some terms to work with lets get started
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 2 Tying The First Figure 8This knot has several parts to it The first part of the knot is just tying a basic figure 8 To tie the first figure 8 there are four simple steps
1 - Using the tail make a loop over the rope (as shown in the first picture) keeping in mind that there should be about 3 ft of slack on the tail end
2 - Wrap the tail back this time go under the anchored end (As shown in the second picture)
3 - Bring the tail down through the first loop (As shown in the third picture)
4 - Finally pull the two ends to make the knot a little bit tighter and easier to deal with (Shown in the fourth picture)
After these four steps you should end up with a knot that resembles a figure 8
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 3 Looping Into The Harness In order to secure the rope to the harness simply thread the tail end of the rope through the front loop in the harness as shown in the picture below This step isobviously very important
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 4 Following Back Through The Figure 8After looping the rope through the harness you have to thread the tail end of the rope back through the knot following the first figure 8 I have divided this process intofive smaller steps in order to make it more clear
1 - Coming form underneath the knot bring the tail up through the near loop and to the left behind the anchored end of the rope (Shown in the first picture)
2 - Wrap the tail around the anchored end back to the right and down through the adjacent loop (Shown in the second picture)
3 - You simply need to bring the tail back over the top of the knot to the left (Shown in the third picture)
4 - Bring the tail end up through the far loop following the anchored end (Shown in the fourth picture)
5 - Finally pull the knot tight (Shown in the fifth picture)
As you can see the first four pictures are simply tracing the knot back through with the tail end
For the last part while you pull the knot tight you may want to make small adjustments and rearrange how it all fits together If the knot does not lay perfectly smoothand tight its NOT a big deal
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 5 Finishing The Knot After completing the Figure 8 knot you will want to somehow secure the tail end of the rope out of the way There are a couple different ways to do this the way that Iwill demonstrate is using whats called a Stopper Knot This secondary knot is similar to a Fishermans knot and is pretty simple I have once again divided thisprocess into several smaller steps
1 - Start by wrapping the tail end around the anchored end (As shown in the first picture)
2 - Wrap the tail back underneath the two vertical segments (As shown in the second picture)
3 - Simply repeat the first two steps wrapping the tail around again (As shown in the third picture)
4 - This step in the fourth picture may look complicated but all you need to do is insert the tail up through the two loops that you have just made
5 - To finish off the knot you will want to slowly pull the tail end while gently pushing the bottom of the stopper knot upwards If you have successfully completed this knotit should look something like the fifth picture
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 6 Ready To Climb Now that you have mastered the Figure 8 knot you can securely harness yourself into a climbing rope Remember there are many other skills that go into setting up ananchor and belaying a climber This tutorial only covers the figure 8 knot For more information there are many great websites that demonstrate how to correctly set up asafe climbing system (Ive posted a few below) If you are a beginning climber I recommend that you read up on a few other climbing techniques Also you shouldprobably go to a climbing wall or gym where there are experienced climbers that can show you the ropes Hopefully this tutorial has been helpful Have fun and be safe
Some useful linkshttpwwwstephenprattnetAnchorsanchorshtmhttpwwwuoregonedu~oppclimbingtopicsanchorshtmlhttpwwwabc-of-rockclimbingcomhowtoclimbingtechniquesasp
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Related Instructables
How to Tie aFigure EightKnot byTactical_Pyro
Paracord KnotDisplay Bord byJamie bagn
Basic KnotsGuide byzorro3355
How to Climb aTree (withprussiks) bystasterisk
How to climb atree (using onlyrope) thefunsimple wayby louieaw
How to get arope into a tree(withoutclimbing it) byvitex
How to tievarious knots byadaviel
How to make arope swing byjdub0928
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Turks Head Knots on a Bottleby sklnxbones on July 6 2010
Intro Turks Head Knots on a BottleThis is the finished project A bottle decorated with three Turks Head Knots There are only three knots on this bottle The RED and the BLUE knots are each a 20 Bightby 3 Lead Turks Head Knots The WHITE knot is a 20 Bight by 19 Lead Turks Head Knot
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 1 Supplies
Cord Lots and Lots of cord I cant tell you how much each bottle is differentBottle Washed and Dried inside and out Make sure to remove all water spotsThreaded Needle Cord screws into the threads at the base of the needlePegs I use brass rivets used as a map to tie the Turks Head KnotsHole Punch Used to punch holes in the painters tape to hold the pegsPainters Tape To hold the pegs in place and to make your map for the Turks Head KnotsMarker To write on the painters tapeCloth Towel To remove finger prints and dirt from your bottleKrazy Glue or Super Glue This is used to secure the knots in place to the bottle
OPTIONAL BUT HIGHLY RECOMMENDEDI use the Turks Head Cookbook from KnotToolcom
Step 2 PreparationYou will need to find a bottle you like I used an empty instant tea bottle of course washed and dried (I like to put the bottle in the oven for a few minutes to dry the insidewithout water spots Take off the lid and do not put lid in the oven) Now measure the circumference of the bottle Take a cord and tightly wrap the cord around the bottleMark where the ends meet and use a ruler to measure the length of the cord For my instant tea bottle the circumference is 27cm I know from past knots that I have tiedthat I want my knot to have 20 Bights in the top and bottom (bands) knots I am going to use the Bights in the (bands) knots to tie the middle knot Now divide the numberof Bights (20) into the size of the circumference (27) to get the space between each Bight (135) With me so far
Now take two pieces of painters tape using a ruler measure out the length of the circumference and mark the length on the both pieces of tape Next you will mark thespace between each Bight on the tape
Step 3 Adding the PegsI like to use pegs when tying Turks Head Knots it just makes tying the knot easier
These are what I use for pegs
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 4 Adding Pegs to the TapeNow take a hole punch to cut holes in the tape where the lines meet You will place the pegs in the holes
Insert a peg in each hole and carefully stick the first piece of tape to the bottle
Step 5 Adding the 2nd row of pegsNow do the same thing with the second piece of tape The numbers on each piece of tape must line up
This picture shows you what you should have now This odd looking thing will be your map to tie the Turks Head Knot And this is the end of Step 1
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 6 Tying the first Turks Head KnotUsing the Turks Head Cookbook follow the numbers going over and under as indicated in the book I chose a 20 Bight by 3 Lead knot which will give me a nice bandaround the bottle Once the ends meet you have made one complete knot Tape the running end of your cord and start removing the pegs and the tape
Step 7 Remove the pegs and the tapeBe careful not to untie the knot as you remove the pegs and tape from the bottle Continue to remove all the pegs and remove the tape from the bottle At this point theknot will be very loose and will need to be tightened up
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 8 Remove the slack from the knotHere you can see just how much the knot expanded Starting with the standing end begin to pull the slack out of the knot going towards the running end of the cordDo not expect to pull all the slack out at once You may have to make 3 - 5 attempts at removing the slack out of the knot DO NOT remove all of the slack out of the knotIn order to make the bands we will have to triple the Turks Head Knot We will do this by following the knot three times The threaded needle will really come in handyhere
Step 9 Triple the KnotOnce you have made three passes of the Turks Head Knot use your needle to go under your knot about half the circumference and cut the cord The knot will be tightenough to hide the tail in placeTIP I carefully add a couple of drops of super glue UNDER the band to hold them in place and keep them from sliding around in the nextsteps A drop or two in 3 or 4 places around the band should be enough
Step 10 Add the second knotNow repeat this whole step for the second bandWhen tying the second band you must make sure the Bights line up to the first band This is crucial for the next stepWipe down the bottle to make sure all your finger prints and adhesive from the tape are all removed You want to make sure your bottle is clean at this point Any dirt orfinger prints left on the bottle will be almost impossible to remove From this point on we will use gloves when tying our last knot
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 11 Maping the Top KnotStick a piece of painters tape on top of your first band leaving the bottom of the knot exposedUse a marker to count the number of Bights in your knot Instead of using the pegs we are going to use the Bights to tie our next Turks Head Knot
Step 12 Mapping the Bottom KnotDo the same thing for the bottom band but you must make sure your numbers on top and bottom line up So 1 on top should be the same position as 1 on the bottom
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 13 Adding the last knotAgain using the Turks Head Cookbook and the threaded needle you are going to follow the instructions going over and under as indicated in the book Be sure to usegloves when ever you handle the bottle
Step 14 Thats ItFor this Turks Head Knot I am using a 20 Bight by 19 Lead knot
Because of the amount of cord you are working with your cord will get twisted and knotted You will have to un-twist the cord often Its a pain in the rear but it has to bedone And it has to be done alot
Continue to tie the knot until you finish the knot If you have the cord and the patience you can double or triple the knot When you are done use your needle to hide theends under your bands Cut the ends and your DONE
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Related Instructables
Monkeys FistFloatingKeychain byjokerlz
How To Make ATurks headKnot WithParacord byDoggie Stylish
Tying Trivetsout of Rope forHoliday Gifts bykylemarsh
Paracord KnotDisplay Bord byJamie bagn
How to Make ATurks Head(Photos) bymchs60chip
A pocket full ofknots byKiteman
Monkeys fistknot AND themonkey byjonathan111
TiteTie is theTruckers Knoton Steroids bytitetie
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Larks head noose -- an easy useful knot that tightens and loosensby Larry Breed on February 19 2009
Intro Larks head noose -- an easy useful knot that tightens and loosensI thought I knew all the basic knots but then I was taught this incredibly useful simple knot Its good for tying up the neck of a bag that you want to repeatedly open andsecurely close Its good for tying around a springy bundle that will need tightening and retightening And its easy to undo
Ive looked at knot literature but havent found a name for this so I named it The basic knot is well known its called a larks head Since all Ive done is to slip the twoends through the larks head to make a noose I call it that
WARNING Dont use this knot when human safety would depend on it Climbers and mountaineers have well-tested reliable knots for such situations
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Image Notes1 To tighten further step on this side of the larks head and pull the free ends
Step 1 Double the cord overThe larks head noose requires enough cord to go twice around your bundle plus a foot or two Find the center and double it over Sailors call this a bight
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 2 Form the larks headComing from below the bight hook your thumb and forefinger over the two sides Reach outward and downward and pinch your fingertips together underneath thedoubled cord
Youve made a larks head Move the crossing cord a little farther from your hand so theres a clear opening through the two half-loops
Step 3 Form the nooseSlip the two ends of the cord through the opening we were just talking about Pull the larks head tight so it grips the two cords Find something that needs constrictingand put the noose around it
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 4 Tightening retightening and lockingSlide the knot against the bundle If its not tight enough to keep from slipping tighten it by holding it in one hand and tugging on the cords one at a time with the otherhand Notice that you can slide the knot out again for instance to re-open the bag you just tied shut For some applications this may be as tight as you need it
A springy bundle probably still feels loose If so compress the bundle and get a new grip on the cords Rest your foot on the bundle on the cords nearest the larks headand pull to slide the larks head tighter
To make the knot more permanent you can lock it Make an overhand in the cord ends (Exactly like the first step in tying shoelaces) With your foot still on the bundlepull on the cords and move your hands apart until youre pulling in opposite directions You have just locked the larks head and you can trust it to stay that way()
But lets say that later on you want to loosen the locked knot Again put your foot on the bundle and cords nearest the larks head hold the two cord ends together andpull This makes a little slack between the overhand and the larks head so you can untie the overhand
In twine or small string the locking overhand knot may be difficult to undo Use a shoelace knot instead of an overhand and itll unlock easily
() If youre using slippery cord like polypropylene an overhand may not lock securely You may want to tie another overhand knot For added security wrap a shortlength of duct tape around the two cords close to the knot
Image Notes1 To tighten further step on this side of the larks head and pull the free ends
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Related Instructables
TRX fromParacordChallengeAccepted bythrake
A pocket full ofknots byKiteman
Lens CapLanyard by~teknoarsonist~ how to tie a
noose byawesume
AdjustableParacordGlassesLanyard byjdtwelve12
HangmansNoose PackClosure byPopEye42
Paraleash - ADog LeashFrom Paracordby The Ideanator
How to make arugged andhandy ParacordBelt by Jake22
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 1 Getting StartedCord size is important Select a small medium weight cord like the one shown here It is a general purpose camp cord sold at most sporting goods stores (shoelacesmight also work)
Do not use a heavy cord or rope because the larger diameter will not tuck under the relatively small lip at the top of the bottleneck and the bottle will fall out
Also the smaller cord cinches tight on itself and will not loosen accidentally
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 2 Form a BightThe next steps show how to tie a JUG KNOT It is the basic step for adding a carrying strap It is also the anchor point for any additional fancy bottle trussing you maywant to add
JUG KNOT Step 1
Form a Bight in the center of a length of cord Bight is a knot term for a loop or bend in the rope In this case the main Bight in this knot is highlighted with a white mark Imakes it easier to follow its path in these steps
The running ends of the cord should be equal length
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 3 Pull the Bight downPULL the Bight DOWN forming two Loops
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 4 Cross the LoopsCROSS the right Loop OVER the left Loop
Step 5 Pass the Bight under the 1st loopTake the main Bight and pass it UNDER the left Loop
Step 6 Weave the BightWEAVE the Bight OVER the portion of the right Loop and UNDER the portion of the left Loop
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 7 Extend the BightExtend the Bight OVER the outer portion of the right Loop
Step 8 Flip the Right Loop behindAdditional colored identification points have been added to the loops to follow their travel in these next two steps
The right Loop Yellow marker is FLIPPED BEHIND the knot and ends up on the far left side of the knot
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 9 Flip the 2nd loop in frontRaise the green marker (located on what was formerly the left loop) and pull it down and to the right FLIPPING IT IN FRONT of the knot
Note the blue portion of the this loop will pass around the outside of the yellow portion of the first loop
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Image Notes1 Center of knot that will tighten around the bottles neck
Step 10 Remove SlackNote where the blue green amp yellow markers end up
Start to remove the slack in the loops by pulling the original main Bight (white marker top right) and the two free standing ends at the bottom
the bottle neck will pass through the very center of the knot
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Image Notes1 Center of knot that will tighten around the bottles neck
Step 11 Tighten the KnotAfter removing the slack insert the bottle neck and finish tightening
The knot should look like this before slipping it over the bottle
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 12 Secure on bottle neckThis is the finished knot shown on the neck of various containers
The loop end and the two free standing ends can be tied together to create a carrying handle (last picture below)
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 13 Aluminum Bottle Water Bottle
The next few steps show the features of an aluminum beer bottle re-purposed as a water bottle canteen It is one of many containers that can be reused as a camp waterbottle
The bottle was lightly sanded masked and then pained with a hammered finished paint to create an interesting surface texture
Image Notes1 Textured finish paint makes an interesting grip-able surface2 Masked with tape for painting3 Masked with tape for painting
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Image Notes1 Dowel used for holding the bottle during painting
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 14 Tethered Cork StopperUse a wine bottle man made Cork as a stopper for your aluminum water bottleNote Use a cork that was removed from the wine bottle without the corkscrew penetrating through the bottom end of the cork (A hole all the way through the cork willcause it to leak) Use the unpierced end of the cork inside the water bottle
Drill a hole through the sides of the Cork Thread the cord through the hole to the center of the cord Use the cork as the main Bight and tie the Jug knot as shown inthe beginning steps
Now the cork is tethered to the bottle and will not get lost or fall on the ground
A Carabiner clip passes through the other cord end to attache the water bottle to you belt or pack
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 15 Trussed for TransportThis is another hanging method for carrying your aluminum bottle water canteen A Jug knot is tied conventionally around the neck
The running ends of the knot however are pulled down towards the bottom of the bottle A Barrel Knot is tied about 34 the way down the side of the bottle A squareknot is tied on the bottom of the knot to keep the two running ends tight against the sides of the bottle
I like the look of the accent colored cord running down the sides of the bottle and the fact that the bottle hangs from the belt upside down It adds to its uniqueness
The last picture shows another truss variation
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 16 AdvancedBelow is a bottle with some additional trussing You can be creative as you want It all starts with a re-purposed container and the Jug Knot (and enough cord)
Related Instructables
AluminumBottle TumblerCup amp Cook Potfor an AlcoholStove byhpstoutharrow
Water BottleBelt Clip byuglymike Duct Tape
Water Bottle byrabidsquire2
AluminumBottle AlcoholStove byhpstoutharrow
DIYGlass WaterBottle byCulturespy
Solar WaterHeater forBackpackingUsing WaterBottles and aCar Shade bykopomeroy
Duct tape waterbottle holder(Photos) by pinkmarshmallow
How to make aCamelPack withan old plasticbottle bywillrandship
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Basic Knots Guideby zorro3355 on April 29 2008
Intro Basic Knots Guidehi
Step 1 Thumb knotThe most simple knotUsed as a stopper and prevent ropes from fraying
Step 2 Reef KnotUsed to tie two ropes of equal thickness togetherIt is pretty easy to tie and untie but under tentionit may be diffcult to untieIt is also not sutible for smoothropes(egnylon ropes)
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 3 Figure of eightused as a stopperprevent ropes from fraying and its more secure than tumb knot its is also used to tie Caribinas to ropes and is often used in rock climbing
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 4 Timber hitchused for pulling logs
Step 5 Clove hitchUsed to tie a rope onto a pole or logThe pole must be roundThe pole lust be thicker then the rope itself
(greatly used during pioneering)
Step 6 Sheet bandused to tie ropes of different thickness together(works on same thickness of ropes too)
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 7 Sheep shankTo shorten RopesTo prevent middle fraying
Step 8 Slip knotWhippingUsed as a grip for pulling things(when tied on a stick or small pole)(marlin spike hitch)
Related Instructables
Rope Rings byhpstoutharrow
How to Tie aFigure EightKnot byTactical_Pyro
Whippin (WestCountry Style)by tim_n
SurvivalBracelet(Updated) bytevers94
HangmansNoose PackClosure byPopEye42
Turkey on aTripod byhpstoutharrow
SurvivalBracelet II bytevers94 Zigzag Spooling
Paracord (video)by Stormdrane
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
How to Tie a Fire-escape Knotby leonardo ismael on October 16 2007
Intro How to Tie a Fire-escape KnotThis knot is used by firemen in case of fires for example imagine a scene where the ladder on the firetruck messes up but people need to get down a five story buildingor more All they have is a long piece of rope they can safely get down with a secure knot like the fire-escape knot So why not learn it its easy to do and hard to untieif you tie it tightly
This is from the American Boys Handbook
Step 1 Get Your RopeFirst grab a piece of rope and bend it like this to make a loop in it Follow every step to the smallest detail
Step 2 Twist the RopeNow make a twist like this and hold it together
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 3 Pull Through the TwistPull the loop through the twist you just made from underneath
Step 4 Go Over the Split EndNow pull the tail through the loop
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 5 FinallyAnd finally just pull it through as pictured below
Congratulations you just learned the fire-escape knot
Step 6 Same Name Not KnotThis is another knot called the fire-escape knot this shouldnt be your result
Related Instructables
House FireEscape Plan(video) byWhatHappensNowAdvice
ParacordLadder wWooden Rungsby josestude
Bed SheetEscape Rope byjessehensel
rope ladder(glow-in-the-dark version) bymikeasaurus
HeadlockEscape 2(video) byjohnnyrockstah
QuickFirestarter byMattandJora
Trail sauna byjakee117
How to Kill FireAnts andCommitGenocide byKentsOkay
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Climb Safe With A Figure 8 Knotby mattste on February 23 2010
Intro Climb Safe With A Figure 8 Knot There are many things that a beginning climber needs to know including several important knots Perhaps the most essential knot is the Figure 8 Follow Through Thistutorial will demonstrate how to correctly harness yourself to a rope using a Figure 8 Follow Through knot This knot is used primarily by rock climbers to provide a life-line Since this knot is used as a life-line it is very important to be able to tie it correctly (Your life could depend upon it)
Dont worry with this tutorial and about 5 minutes of practice you can have this knot mastered
Things you will need
- Climbing Harness- Climbing Rope
If you are wanting to go climbing and dont already have these items they can be purchased for about $25 each at most outdoor sporting goods stores If you are merelylooking to learn the knot a belt loop and a rope (about five feet long) will do
Image Notes1 Climbing Harness2 Climbing Rope
Step 1 Dealing With The RopeThroughout this tutorial I will be discussing different parts of the rope To make these instructions as clear as possible I will define a few terms that I will use throughoutthe tutorial The Anchor End of the rope will generally be at the top of the images This is the end that would be anchored to the wall or rock and does not move Wewill not be doing much with the anchored end The Tail End of the rope is the opposite end that we will be dealing with I will call this the tail for short
Now that we have some terms to work with lets get started
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 2 Tying The First Figure 8This knot has several parts to it The first part of the knot is just tying a basic figure 8 To tie the first figure 8 there are four simple steps
1 - Using the tail make a loop over the rope (as shown in the first picture) keeping in mind that there should be about 3 ft of slack on the tail end
2 - Wrap the tail back this time go under the anchored end (As shown in the second picture)
3 - Bring the tail down through the first loop (As shown in the third picture)
4 - Finally pull the two ends to make the knot a little bit tighter and easier to deal with (Shown in the fourth picture)
After these four steps you should end up with a knot that resembles a figure 8
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 3 Looping Into The Harness In order to secure the rope to the harness simply thread the tail end of the rope through the front loop in the harness as shown in the picture below This step isobviously very important
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 4 Following Back Through The Figure 8After looping the rope through the harness you have to thread the tail end of the rope back through the knot following the first figure 8 I have divided this process intofive smaller steps in order to make it more clear
1 - Coming form underneath the knot bring the tail up through the near loop and to the left behind the anchored end of the rope (Shown in the first picture)
2 - Wrap the tail around the anchored end back to the right and down through the adjacent loop (Shown in the second picture)
3 - You simply need to bring the tail back over the top of the knot to the left (Shown in the third picture)
4 - Bring the tail end up through the far loop following the anchored end (Shown in the fourth picture)
5 - Finally pull the knot tight (Shown in the fifth picture)
As you can see the first four pictures are simply tracing the knot back through with the tail end
For the last part while you pull the knot tight you may want to make small adjustments and rearrange how it all fits together If the knot does not lay perfectly smoothand tight its NOT a big deal
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 5 Finishing The Knot After completing the Figure 8 knot you will want to somehow secure the tail end of the rope out of the way There are a couple different ways to do this the way that Iwill demonstrate is using whats called a Stopper Knot This secondary knot is similar to a Fishermans knot and is pretty simple I have once again divided thisprocess into several smaller steps
1 - Start by wrapping the tail end around the anchored end (As shown in the first picture)
2 - Wrap the tail back underneath the two vertical segments (As shown in the second picture)
3 - Simply repeat the first two steps wrapping the tail around again (As shown in the third picture)
4 - This step in the fourth picture may look complicated but all you need to do is insert the tail up through the two loops that you have just made
5 - To finish off the knot you will want to slowly pull the tail end while gently pushing the bottom of the stopper knot upwards If you have successfully completed this knotit should look something like the fifth picture
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 6 Ready To Climb Now that you have mastered the Figure 8 knot you can securely harness yourself into a climbing rope Remember there are many other skills that go into setting up ananchor and belaying a climber This tutorial only covers the figure 8 knot For more information there are many great websites that demonstrate how to correctly set up asafe climbing system (Ive posted a few below) If you are a beginning climber I recommend that you read up on a few other climbing techniques Also you shouldprobably go to a climbing wall or gym where there are experienced climbers that can show you the ropes Hopefully this tutorial has been helpful Have fun and be safe
Some useful linkshttpwwwstephenprattnetAnchorsanchorshtmhttpwwwuoregonedu~oppclimbingtopicsanchorshtmlhttpwwwabc-of-rockclimbingcomhowtoclimbingtechniquesasp
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Related Instructables
How to Tie aFigure EightKnot byTactical_Pyro
Paracord KnotDisplay Bord byJamie bagn
Basic KnotsGuide byzorro3355
How to Climb aTree (withprussiks) bystasterisk
How to climb atree (using onlyrope) thefunsimple wayby louieaw
How to get arope into a tree(withoutclimbing it) byvitex
How to tievarious knots byadaviel
How to make arope swing byjdub0928
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Turks Head Knots on a Bottleby sklnxbones on July 6 2010
Intro Turks Head Knots on a BottleThis is the finished project A bottle decorated with three Turks Head Knots There are only three knots on this bottle The RED and the BLUE knots are each a 20 Bightby 3 Lead Turks Head Knots The WHITE knot is a 20 Bight by 19 Lead Turks Head Knot
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 1 Supplies
Cord Lots and Lots of cord I cant tell you how much each bottle is differentBottle Washed and Dried inside and out Make sure to remove all water spotsThreaded Needle Cord screws into the threads at the base of the needlePegs I use brass rivets used as a map to tie the Turks Head KnotsHole Punch Used to punch holes in the painters tape to hold the pegsPainters Tape To hold the pegs in place and to make your map for the Turks Head KnotsMarker To write on the painters tapeCloth Towel To remove finger prints and dirt from your bottleKrazy Glue or Super Glue This is used to secure the knots in place to the bottle
OPTIONAL BUT HIGHLY RECOMMENDEDI use the Turks Head Cookbook from KnotToolcom
Step 2 PreparationYou will need to find a bottle you like I used an empty instant tea bottle of course washed and dried (I like to put the bottle in the oven for a few minutes to dry the insidewithout water spots Take off the lid and do not put lid in the oven) Now measure the circumference of the bottle Take a cord and tightly wrap the cord around the bottleMark where the ends meet and use a ruler to measure the length of the cord For my instant tea bottle the circumference is 27cm I know from past knots that I have tiedthat I want my knot to have 20 Bights in the top and bottom (bands) knots I am going to use the Bights in the (bands) knots to tie the middle knot Now divide the numberof Bights (20) into the size of the circumference (27) to get the space between each Bight (135) With me so far
Now take two pieces of painters tape using a ruler measure out the length of the circumference and mark the length on the both pieces of tape Next you will mark thespace between each Bight on the tape
Step 3 Adding the PegsI like to use pegs when tying Turks Head Knots it just makes tying the knot easier
These are what I use for pegs
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 4 Adding Pegs to the TapeNow take a hole punch to cut holes in the tape where the lines meet You will place the pegs in the holes
Insert a peg in each hole and carefully stick the first piece of tape to the bottle
Step 5 Adding the 2nd row of pegsNow do the same thing with the second piece of tape The numbers on each piece of tape must line up
This picture shows you what you should have now This odd looking thing will be your map to tie the Turks Head Knot And this is the end of Step 1
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 6 Tying the first Turks Head KnotUsing the Turks Head Cookbook follow the numbers going over and under as indicated in the book I chose a 20 Bight by 3 Lead knot which will give me a nice bandaround the bottle Once the ends meet you have made one complete knot Tape the running end of your cord and start removing the pegs and the tape
Step 7 Remove the pegs and the tapeBe careful not to untie the knot as you remove the pegs and tape from the bottle Continue to remove all the pegs and remove the tape from the bottle At this point theknot will be very loose and will need to be tightened up
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 8 Remove the slack from the knotHere you can see just how much the knot expanded Starting with the standing end begin to pull the slack out of the knot going towards the running end of the cordDo not expect to pull all the slack out at once You may have to make 3 - 5 attempts at removing the slack out of the knot DO NOT remove all of the slack out of the knotIn order to make the bands we will have to triple the Turks Head Knot We will do this by following the knot three times The threaded needle will really come in handyhere
Step 9 Triple the KnotOnce you have made three passes of the Turks Head Knot use your needle to go under your knot about half the circumference and cut the cord The knot will be tightenough to hide the tail in placeTIP I carefully add a couple of drops of super glue UNDER the band to hold them in place and keep them from sliding around in the nextsteps A drop or two in 3 or 4 places around the band should be enough
Step 10 Add the second knotNow repeat this whole step for the second bandWhen tying the second band you must make sure the Bights line up to the first band This is crucial for the next stepWipe down the bottle to make sure all your finger prints and adhesive from the tape are all removed You want to make sure your bottle is clean at this point Any dirt orfinger prints left on the bottle will be almost impossible to remove From this point on we will use gloves when tying our last knot
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 11 Maping the Top KnotStick a piece of painters tape on top of your first band leaving the bottom of the knot exposedUse a marker to count the number of Bights in your knot Instead of using the pegs we are going to use the Bights to tie our next Turks Head Knot
Step 12 Mapping the Bottom KnotDo the same thing for the bottom band but you must make sure your numbers on top and bottom line up So 1 on top should be the same position as 1 on the bottom
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 13 Adding the last knotAgain using the Turks Head Cookbook and the threaded needle you are going to follow the instructions going over and under as indicated in the book Be sure to usegloves when ever you handle the bottle
Step 14 Thats ItFor this Turks Head Knot I am using a 20 Bight by 19 Lead knot
Because of the amount of cord you are working with your cord will get twisted and knotted You will have to un-twist the cord often Its a pain in the rear but it has to bedone And it has to be done alot
Continue to tie the knot until you finish the knot If you have the cord and the patience you can double or triple the knot When you are done use your needle to hide theends under your bands Cut the ends and your DONE
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Related Instructables
Monkeys FistFloatingKeychain byjokerlz
How To Make ATurks headKnot WithParacord byDoggie Stylish
Tying Trivetsout of Rope forHoliday Gifts bykylemarsh
Paracord KnotDisplay Bord byJamie bagn
How to Make ATurks Head(Photos) bymchs60chip
A pocket full ofknots byKiteman
Monkeys fistknot AND themonkey byjonathan111
TiteTie is theTruckers Knoton Steroids bytitetie
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Larks head noose -- an easy useful knot that tightens and loosensby Larry Breed on February 19 2009
Intro Larks head noose -- an easy useful knot that tightens and loosensI thought I knew all the basic knots but then I was taught this incredibly useful simple knot Its good for tying up the neck of a bag that you want to repeatedly open andsecurely close Its good for tying around a springy bundle that will need tightening and retightening And its easy to undo
Ive looked at knot literature but havent found a name for this so I named it The basic knot is well known its called a larks head Since all Ive done is to slip the twoends through the larks head to make a noose I call it that
WARNING Dont use this knot when human safety would depend on it Climbers and mountaineers have well-tested reliable knots for such situations
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Image Notes1 To tighten further step on this side of the larks head and pull the free ends
Step 1 Double the cord overThe larks head noose requires enough cord to go twice around your bundle plus a foot or two Find the center and double it over Sailors call this a bight
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 2 Form the larks headComing from below the bight hook your thumb and forefinger over the two sides Reach outward and downward and pinch your fingertips together underneath thedoubled cord
Youve made a larks head Move the crossing cord a little farther from your hand so theres a clear opening through the two half-loops
Step 3 Form the nooseSlip the two ends of the cord through the opening we were just talking about Pull the larks head tight so it grips the two cords Find something that needs constrictingand put the noose around it
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 4 Tightening retightening and lockingSlide the knot against the bundle If its not tight enough to keep from slipping tighten it by holding it in one hand and tugging on the cords one at a time with the otherhand Notice that you can slide the knot out again for instance to re-open the bag you just tied shut For some applications this may be as tight as you need it
A springy bundle probably still feels loose If so compress the bundle and get a new grip on the cords Rest your foot on the bundle on the cords nearest the larks headand pull to slide the larks head tighter
To make the knot more permanent you can lock it Make an overhand in the cord ends (Exactly like the first step in tying shoelaces) With your foot still on the bundlepull on the cords and move your hands apart until youre pulling in opposite directions You have just locked the larks head and you can trust it to stay that way()
But lets say that later on you want to loosen the locked knot Again put your foot on the bundle and cords nearest the larks head hold the two cord ends together andpull This makes a little slack between the overhand and the larks head so you can untie the overhand
In twine or small string the locking overhand knot may be difficult to undo Use a shoelace knot instead of an overhand and itll unlock easily
() If youre using slippery cord like polypropylene an overhand may not lock securely You may want to tie another overhand knot For added security wrap a shortlength of duct tape around the two cords close to the knot
Image Notes1 To tighten further step on this side of the larks head and pull the free ends
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Related Instructables
TRX fromParacordChallengeAccepted bythrake
A pocket full ofknots byKiteman
Lens CapLanyard by~teknoarsonist~ how to tie a
noose byawesume
AdjustableParacordGlassesLanyard byjdtwelve12
HangmansNoose PackClosure byPopEye42
Paraleash - ADog LeashFrom Paracordby The Ideanator
How to make arugged andhandy ParacordBelt by Jake22
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 1 Getting StartedCord size is important Select a small medium weight cord like the one shown here It is a general purpose camp cord sold at most sporting goods stores (shoelacesmight also work)
Do not use a heavy cord or rope because the larger diameter will not tuck under the relatively small lip at the top of the bottleneck and the bottle will fall out
Also the smaller cord cinches tight on itself and will not loosen accidentally
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 2 Form a BightThe next steps show how to tie a JUG KNOT It is the basic step for adding a carrying strap It is also the anchor point for any additional fancy bottle trussing you maywant to add
JUG KNOT Step 1
Form a Bight in the center of a length of cord Bight is a knot term for a loop or bend in the rope In this case the main Bight in this knot is highlighted with a white mark Imakes it easier to follow its path in these steps
The running ends of the cord should be equal length
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 3 Pull the Bight downPULL the Bight DOWN forming two Loops
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 4 Cross the LoopsCROSS the right Loop OVER the left Loop
Step 5 Pass the Bight under the 1st loopTake the main Bight and pass it UNDER the left Loop
Step 6 Weave the BightWEAVE the Bight OVER the portion of the right Loop and UNDER the portion of the left Loop
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 7 Extend the BightExtend the Bight OVER the outer portion of the right Loop
Step 8 Flip the Right Loop behindAdditional colored identification points have been added to the loops to follow their travel in these next two steps
The right Loop Yellow marker is FLIPPED BEHIND the knot and ends up on the far left side of the knot
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 9 Flip the 2nd loop in frontRaise the green marker (located on what was formerly the left loop) and pull it down and to the right FLIPPING IT IN FRONT of the knot
Note the blue portion of the this loop will pass around the outside of the yellow portion of the first loop
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Image Notes1 Center of knot that will tighten around the bottles neck
Step 10 Remove SlackNote where the blue green amp yellow markers end up
Start to remove the slack in the loops by pulling the original main Bight (white marker top right) and the two free standing ends at the bottom
the bottle neck will pass through the very center of the knot
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Image Notes1 Center of knot that will tighten around the bottles neck
Step 11 Tighten the KnotAfter removing the slack insert the bottle neck and finish tightening
The knot should look like this before slipping it over the bottle
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 12 Secure on bottle neckThis is the finished knot shown on the neck of various containers
The loop end and the two free standing ends can be tied together to create a carrying handle (last picture below)
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 13 Aluminum Bottle Water Bottle
The next few steps show the features of an aluminum beer bottle re-purposed as a water bottle canteen It is one of many containers that can be reused as a camp waterbottle
The bottle was lightly sanded masked and then pained with a hammered finished paint to create an interesting surface texture
Image Notes1 Textured finish paint makes an interesting grip-able surface2 Masked with tape for painting3 Masked with tape for painting
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Image Notes1 Dowel used for holding the bottle during painting
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 14 Tethered Cork StopperUse a wine bottle man made Cork as a stopper for your aluminum water bottleNote Use a cork that was removed from the wine bottle without the corkscrew penetrating through the bottom end of the cork (A hole all the way through the cork willcause it to leak) Use the unpierced end of the cork inside the water bottle
Drill a hole through the sides of the Cork Thread the cord through the hole to the center of the cord Use the cork as the main Bight and tie the Jug knot as shown inthe beginning steps
Now the cork is tethered to the bottle and will not get lost or fall on the ground
A Carabiner clip passes through the other cord end to attache the water bottle to you belt or pack
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 15 Trussed for TransportThis is another hanging method for carrying your aluminum bottle water canteen A Jug knot is tied conventionally around the neck
The running ends of the knot however are pulled down towards the bottom of the bottle A Barrel Knot is tied about 34 the way down the side of the bottle A squareknot is tied on the bottom of the knot to keep the two running ends tight against the sides of the bottle
I like the look of the accent colored cord running down the sides of the bottle and the fact that the bottle hangs from the belt upside down It adds to its uniqueness
The last picture shows another truss variation
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 16 AdvancedBelow is a bottle with some additional trussing You can be creative as you want It all starts with a re-purposed container and the Jug Knot (and enough cord)
Related Instructables
AluminumBottle TumblerCup amp Cook Potfor an AlcoholStove byhpstoutharrow
Water BottleBelt Clip byuglymike Duct Tape
Water Bottle byrabidsquire2
AluminumBottle AlcoholStove byhpstoutharrow
DIYGlass WaterBottle byCulturespy
Solar WaterHeater forBackpackingUsing WaterBottles and aCar Shade bykopomeroy
Duct tape waterbottle holder(Photos) by pinkmarshmallow
How to make aCamelPack withan old plasticbottle bywillrandship
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Basic Knots Guideby zorro3355 on April 29 2008
Intro Basic Knots Guidehi
Step 1 Thumb knotThe most simple knotUsed as a stopper and prevent ropes from fraying
Step 2 Reef KnotUsed to tie two ropes of equal thickness togetherIt is pretty easy to tie and untie but under tentionit may be diffcult to untieIt is also not sutible for smoothropes(egnylon ropes)
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 3 Figure of eightused as a stopperprevent ropes from fraying and its more secure than tumb knot its is also used to tie Caribinas to ropes and is often used in rock climbing
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 4 Timber hitchused for pulling logs
Step 5 Clove hitchUsed to tie a rope onto a pole or logThe pole must be roundThe pole lust be thicker then the rope itself
(greatly used during pioneering)
Step 6 Sheet bandused to tie ropes of different thickness together(works on same thickness of ropes too)
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 7 Sheep shankTo shorten RopesTo prevent middle fraying
Step 8 Slip knotWhippingUsed as a grip for pulling things(when tied on a stick or small pole)(marlin spike hitch)
Related Instructables
Rope Rings byhpstoutharrow
How to Tie aFigure EightKnot byTactical_Pyro
Whippin (WestCountry Style)by tim_n
SurvivalBracelet(Updated) bytevers94
HangmansNoose PackClosure byPopEye42
Turkey on aTripod byhpstoutharrow
SurvivalBracelet II bytevers94 Zigzag Spooling
Paracord (video)by Stormdrane
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
How to Tie a Fire-escape Knotby leonardo ismael on October 16 2007
Intro How to Tie a Fire-escape KnotThis knot is used by firemen in case of fires for example imagine a scene where the ladder on the firetruck messes up but people need to get down a five story buildingor more All they have is a long piece of rope they can safely get down with a secure knot like the fire-escape knot So why not learn it its easy to do and hard to untieif you tie it tightly
This is from the American Boys Handbook
Step 1 Get Your RopeFirst grab a piece of rope and bend it like this to make a loop in it Follow every step to the smallest detail
Step 2 Twist the RopeNow make a twist like this and hold it together
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 3 Pull Through the TwistPull the loop through the twist you just made from underneath
Step 4 Go Over the Split EndNow pull the tail through the loop
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 5 FinallyAnd finally just pull it through as pictured below
Congratulations you just learned the fire-escape knot
Step 6 Same Name Not KnotThis is another knot called the fire-escape knot this shouldnt be your result
Related Instructables
House FireEscape Plan(video) byWhatHappensNowAdvice
ParacordLadder wWooden Rungsby josestude
Bed SheetEscape Rope byjessehensel
rope ladder(glow-in-the-dark version) bymikeasaurus
HeadlockEscape 2(video) byjohnnyrockstah
QuickFirestarter byMattandJora
Trail sauna byjakee117
How to Kill FireAnts andCommitGenocide byKentsOkay
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Climb Safe With A Figure 8 Knotby mattste on February 23 2010
Intro Climb Safe With A Figure 8 Knot There are many things that a beginning climber needs to know including several important knots Perhaps the most essential knot is the Figure 8 Follow Through Thistutorial will demonstrate how to correctly harness yourself to a rope using a Figure 8 Follow Through knot This knot is used primarily by rock climbers to provide a life-line Since this knot is used as a life-line it is very important to be able to tie it correctly (Your life could depend upon it)
Dont worry with this tutorial and about 5 minutes of practice you can have this knot mastered
Things you will need
- Climbing Harness- Climbing Rope
If you are wanting to go climbing and dont already have these items they can be purchased for about $25 each at most outdoor sporting goods stores If you are merelylooking to learn the knot a belt loop and a rope (about five feet long) will do
Image Notes1 Climbing Harness2 Climbing Rope
Step 1 Dealing With The RopeThroughout this tutorial I will be discussing different parts of the rope To make these instructions as clear as possible I will define a few terms that I will use throughoutthe tutorial The Anchor End of the rope will generally be at the top of the images This is the end that would be anchored to the wall or rock and does not move Wewill not be doing much with the anchored end The Tail End of the rope is the opposite end that we will be dealing with I will call this the tail for short
Now that we have some terms to work with lets get started
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 2 Tying The First Figure 8This knot has several parts to it The first part of the knot is just tying a basic figure 8 To tie the first figure 8 there are four simple steps
1 - Using the tail make a loop over the rope (as shown in the first picture) keeping in mind that there should be about 3 ft of slack on the tail end
2 - Wrap the tail back this time go under the anchored end (As shown in the second picture)
3 - Bring the tail down through the first loop (As shown in the third picture)
4 - Finally pull the two ends to make the knot a little bit tighter and easier to deal with (Shown in the fourth picture)
After these four steps you should end up with a knot that resembles a figure 8
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 3 Looping Into The Harness In order to secure the rope to the harness simply thread the tail end of the rope through the front loop in the harness as shown in the picture below This step isobviously very important
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 4 Following Back Through The Figure 8After looping the rope through the harness you have to thread the tail end of the rope back through the knot following the first figure 8 I have divided this process intofive smaller steps in order to make it more clear
1 - Coming form underneath the knot bring the tail up through the near loop and to the left behind the anchored end of the rope (Shown in the first picture)
2 - Wrap the tail around the anchored end back to the right and down through the adjacent loop (Shown in the second picture)
3 - You simply need to bring the tail back over the top of the knot to the left (Shown in the third picture)
4 - Bring the tail end up through the far loop following the anchored end (Shown in the fourth picture)
5 - Finally pull the knot tight (Shown in the fifth picture)
As you can see the first four pictures are simply tracing the knot back through with the tail end
For the last part while you pull the knot tight you may want to make small adjustments and rearrange how it all fits together If the knot does not lay perfectly smoothand tight its NOT a big deal
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 5 Finishing The Knot After completing the Figure 8 knot you will want to somehow secure the tail end of the rope out of the way There are a couple different ways to do this the way that Iwill demonstrate is using whats called a Stopper Knot This secondary knot is similar to a Fishermans knot and is pretty simple I have once again divided thisprocess into several smaller steps
1 - Start by wrapping the tail end around the anchored end (As shown in the first picture)
2 - Wrap the tail back underneath the two vertical segments (As shown in the second picture)
3 - Simply repeat the first two steps wrapping the tail around again (As shown in the third picture)
4 - This step in the fourth picture may look complicated but all you need to do is insert the tail up through the two loops that you have just made
5 - To finish off the knot you will want to slowly pull the tail end while gently pushing the bottom of the stopper knot upwards If you have successfully completed this knotit should look something like the fifth picture
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 6 Ready To Climb Now that you have mastered the Figure 8 knot you can securely harness yourself into a climbing rope Remember there are many other skills that go into setting up ananchor and belaying a climber This tutorial only covers the figure 8 knot For more information there are many great websites that demonstrate how to correctly set up asafe climbing system (Ive posted a few below) If you are a beginning climber I recommend that you read up on a few other climbing techniques Also you shouldprobably go to a climbing wall or gym where there are experienced climbers that can show you the ropes Hopefully this tutorial has been helpful Have fun and be safe
Some useful linkshttpwwwstephenprattnetAnchorsanchorshtmhttpwwwuoregonedu~oppclimbingtopicsanchorshtmlhttpwwwabc-of-rockclimbingcomhowtoclimbingtechniquesasp
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Related Instructables
How to Tie aFigure EightKnot byTactical_Pyro
Paracord KnotDisplay Bord byJamie bagn
Basic KnotsGuide byzorro3355
How to Climb aTree (withprussiks) bystasterisk
How to climb atree (using onlyrope) thefunsimple wayby louieaw
How to get arope into a tree(withoutclimbing it) byvitex
How to tievarious knots byadaviel
How to make arope swing byjdub0928
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Turks Head Knots on a Bottleby sklnxbones on July 6 2010
Intro Turks Head Knots on a BottleThis is the finished project A bottle decorated with three Turks Head Knots There are only three knots on this bottle The RED and the BLUE knots are each a 20 Bightby 3 Lead Turks Head Knots The WHITE knot is a 20 Bight by 19 Lead Turks Head Knot
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 1 Supplies
Cord Lots and Lots of cord I cant tell you how much each bottle is differentBottle Washed and Dried inside and out Make sure to remove all water spotsThreaded Needle Cord screws into the threads at the base of the needlePegs I use brass rivets used as a map to tie the Turks Head KnotsHole Punch Used to punch holes in the painters tape to hold the pegsPainters Tape To hold the pegs in place and to make your map for the Turks Head KnotsMarker To write on the painters tapeCloth Towel To remove finger prints and dirt from your bottleKrazy Glue or Super Glue This is used to secure the knots in place to the bottle
OPTIONAL BUT HIGHLY RECOMMENDEDI use the Turks Head Cookbook from KnotToolcom
Step 2 PreparationYou will need to find a bottle you like I used an empty instant tea bottle of course washed and dried (I like to put the bottle in the oven for a few minutes to dry the insidewithout water spots Take off the lid and do not put lid in the oven) Now measure the circumference of the bottle Take a cord and tightly wrap the cord around the bottleMark where the ends meet and use a ruler to measure the length of the cord For my instant tea bottle the circumference is 27cm I know from past knots that I have tiedthat I want my knot to have 20 Bights in the top and bottom (bands) knots I am going to use the Bights in the (bands) knots to tie the middle knot Now divide the numberof Bights (20) into the size of the circumference (27) to get the space between each Bight (135) With me so far
Now take two pieces of painters tape using a ruler measure out the length of the circumference and mark the length on the both pieces of tape Next you will mark thespace between each Bight on the tape
Step 3 Adding the PegsI like to use pegs when tying Turks Head Knots it just makes tying the knot easier
These are what I use for pegs
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 4 Adding Pegs to the TapeNow take a hole punch to cut holes in the tape where the lines meet You will place the pegs in the holes
Insert a peg in each hole and carefully stick the first piece of tape to the bottle
Step 5 Adding the 2nd row of pegsNow do the same thing with the second piece of tape The numbers on each piece of tape must line up
This picture shows you what you should have now This odd looking thing will be your map to tie the Turks Head Knot And this is the end of Step 1
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 6 Tying the first Turks Head KnotUsing the Turks Head Cookbook follow the numbers going over and under as indicated in the book I chose a 20 Bight by 3 Lead knot which will give me a nice bandaround the bottle Once the ends meet you have made one complete knot Tape the running end of your cord and start removing the pegs and the tape
Step 7 Remove the pegs and the tapeBe careful not to untie the knot as you remove the pegs and tape from the bottle Continue to remove all the pegs and remove the tape from the bottle At this point theknot will be very loose and will need to be tightened up
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 8 Remove the slack from the knotHere you can see just how much the knot expanded Starting with the standing end begin to pull the slack out of the knot going towards the running end of the cordDo not expect to pull all the slack out at once You may have to make 3 - 5 attempts at removing the slack out of the knot DO NOT remove all of the slack out of the knotIn order to make the bands we will have to triple the Turks Head Knot We will do this by following the knot three times The threaded needle will really come in handyhere
Step 9 Triple the KnotOnce you have made three passes of the Turks Head Knot use your needle to go under your knot about half the circumference and cut the cord The knot will be tightenough to hide the tail in placeTIP I carefully add a couple of drops of super glue UNDER the band to hold them in place and keep them from sliding around in the nextsteps A drop or two in 3 or 4 places around the band should be enough
Step 10 Add the second knotNow repeat this whole step for the second bandWhen tying the second band you must make sure the Bights line up to the first band This is crucial for the next stepWipe down the bottle to make sure all your finger prints and adhesive from the tape are all removed You want to make sure your bottle is clean at this point Any dirt orfinger prints left on the bottle will be almost impossible to remove From this point on we will use gloves when tying our last knot
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 11 Maping the Top KnotStick a piece of painters tape on top of your first band leaving the bottom of the knot exposedUse a marker to count the number of Bights in your knot Instead of using the pegs we are going to use the Bights to tie our next Turks Head Knot
Step 12 Mapping the Bottom KnotDo the same thing for the bottom band but you must make sure your numbers on top and bottom line up So 1 on top should be the same position as 1 on the bottom
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 13 Adding the last knotAgain using the Turks Head Cookbook and the threaded needle you are going to follow the instructions going over and under as indicated in the book Be sure to usegloves when ever you handle the bottle
Step 14 Thats ItFor this Turks Head Knot I am using a 20 Bight by 19 Lead knot
Because of the amount of cord you are working with your cord will get twisted and knotted You will have to un-twist the cord often Its a pain in the rear but it has to bedone And it has to be done alot
Continue to tie the knot until you finish the knot If you have the cord and the patience you can double or triple the knot When you are done use your needle to hide theends under your bands Cut the ends and your DONE
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Related Instructables
Monkeys FistFloatingKeychain byjokerlz
How To Make ATurks headKnot WithParacord byDoggie Stylish
Tying Trivetsout of Rope forHoliday Gifts bykylemarsh
Paracord KnotDisplay Bord byJamie bagn
How to Make ATurks Head(Photos) bymchs60chip
A pocket full ofknots byKiteman
Monkeys fistknot AND themonkey byjonathan111
TiteTie is theTruckers Knoton Steroids bytitetie
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Larks head noose -- an easy useful knot that tightens and loosensby Larry Breed on February 19 2009
Intro Larks head noose -- an easy useful knot that tightens and loosensI thought I knew all the basic knots but then I was taught this incredibly useful simple knot Its good for tying up the neck of a bag that you want to repeatedly open andsecurely close Its good for tying around a springy bundle that will need tightening and retightening And its easy to undo
Ive looked at knot literature but havent found a name for this so I named it The basic knot is well known its called a larks head Since all Ive done is to slip the twoends through the larks head to make a noose I call it that
WARNING Dont use this knot when human safety would depend on it Climbers and mountaineers have well-tested reliable knots for such situations
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Image Notes1 To tighten further step on this side of the larks head and pull the free ends
Step 1 Double the cord overThe larks head noose requires enough cord to go twice around your bundle plus a foot or two Find the center and double it over Sailors call this a bight
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 2 Form the larks headComing from below the bight hook your thumb and forefinger over the two sides Reach outward and downward and pinch your fingertips together underneath thedoubled cord
Youve made a larks head Move the crossing cord a little farther from your hand so theres a clear opening through the two half-loops
Step 3 Form the nooseSlip the two ends of the cord through the opening we were just talking about Pull the larks head tight so it grips the two cords Find something that needs constrictingand put the noose around it
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 4 Tightening retightening and lockingSlide the knot against the bundle If its not tight enough to keep from slipping tighten it by holding it in one hand and tugging on the cords one at a time with the otherhand Notice that you can slide the knot out again for instance to re-open the bag you just tied shut For some applications this may be as tight as you need it
A springy bundle probably still feels loose If so compress the bundle and get a new grip on the cords Rest your foot on the bundle on the cords nearest the larks headand pull to slide the larks head tighter
To make the knot more permanent you can lock it Make an overhand in the cord ends (Exactly like the first step in tying shoelaces) With your foot still on the bundlepull on the cords and move your hands apart until youre pulling in opposite directions You have just locked the larks head and you can trust it to stay that way()
But lets say that later on you want to loosen the locked knot Again put your foot on the bundle and cords nearest the larks head hold the two cord ends together andpull This makes a little slack between the overhand and the larks head so you can untie the overhand
In twine or small string the locking overhand knot may be difficult to undo Use a shoelace knot instead of an overhand and itll unlock easily
() If youre using slippery cord like polypropylene an overhand may not lock securely You may want to tie another overhand knot For added security wrap a shortlength of duct tape around the two cords close to the knot
Image Notes1 To tighten further step on this side of the larks head and pull the free ends
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Related Instructables
TRX fromParacordChallengeAccepted bythrake
A pocket full ofknots byKiteman
Lens CapLanyard by~teknoarsonist~ how to tie a
noose byawesume
AdjustableParacordGlassesLanyard byjdtwelve12
HangmansNoose PackClosure byPopEye42
Paraleash - ADog LeashFrom Paracordby The Ideanator
How to make arugged andhandy ParacordBelt by Jake22
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 2 Form a BightThe next steps show how to tie a JUG KNOT It is the basic step for adding a carrying strap It is also the anchor point for any additional fancy bottle trussing you maywant to add
JUG KNOT Step 1
Form a Bight in the center of a length of cord Bight is a knot term for a loop or bend in the rope In this case the main Bight in this knot is highlighted with a white mark Imakes it easier to follow its path in these steps
The running ends of the cord should be equal length
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 3 Pull the Bight downPULL the Bight DOWN forming two Loops
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 4 Cross the LoopsCROSS the right Loop OVER the left Loop
Step 5 Pass the Bight under the 1st loopTake the main Bight and pass it UNDER the left Loop
Step 6 Weave the BightWEAVE the Bight OVER the portion of the right Loop and UNDER the portion of the left Loop
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 7 Extend the BightExtend the Bight OVER the outer portion of the right Loop
Step 8 Flip the Right Loop behindAdditional colored identification points have been added to the loops to follow their travel in these next two steps
The right Loop Yellow marker is FLIPPED BEHIND the knot and ends up on the far left side of the knot
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 9 Flip the 2nd loop in frontRaise the green marker (located on what was formerly the left loop) and pull it down and to the right FLIPPING IT IN FRONT of the knot
Note the blue portion of the this loop will pass around the outside of the yellow portion of the first loop
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Image Notes1 Center of knot that will tighten around the bottles neck
Step 10 Remove SlackNote where the blue green amp yellow markers end up
Start to remove the slack in the loops by pulling the original main Bight (white marker top right) and the two free standing ends at the bottom
the bottle neck will pass through the very center of the knot
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Image Notes1 Center of knot that will tighten around the bottles neck
Step 11 Tighten the KnotAfter removing the slack insert the bottle neck and finish tightening
The knot should look like this before slipping it over the bottle
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 12 Secure on bottle neckThis is the finished knot shown on the neck of various containers
The loop end and the two free standing ends can be tied together to create a carrying handle (last picture below)
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 13 Aluminum Bottle Water Bottle
The next few steps show the features of an aluminum beer bottle re-purposed as a water bottle canteen It is one of many containers that can be reused as a camp waterbottle
The bottle was lightly sanded masked and then pained with a hammered finished paint to create an interesting surface texture
Image Notes1 Textured finish paint makes an interesting grip-able surface2 Masked with tape for painting3 Masked with tape for painting
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Image Notes1 Dowel used for holding the bottle during painting
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 14 Tethered Cork StopperUse a wine bottle man made Cork as a stopper for your aluminum water bottleNote Use a cork that was removed from the wine bottle without the corkscrew penetrating through the bottom end of the cork (A hole all the way through the cork willcause it to leak) Use the unpierced end of the cork inside the water bottle
Drill a hole through the sides of the Cork Thread the cord through the hole to the center of the cord Use the cork as the main Bight and tie the Jug knot as shown inthe beginning steps
Now the cork is tethered to the bottle and will not get lost or fall on the ground
A Carabiner clip passes through the other cord end to attache the water bottle to you belt or pack
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 15 Trussed for TransportThis is another hanging method for carrying your aluminum bottle water canteen A Jug knot is tied conventionally around the neck
The running ends of the knot however are pulled down towards the bottom of the bottle A Barrel Knot is tied about 34 the way down the side of the bottle A squareknot is tied on the bottom of the knot to keep the two running ends tight against the sides of the bottle
I like the look of the accent colored cord running down the sides of the bottle and the fact that the bottle hangs from the belt upside down It adds to its uniqueness
The last picture shows another truss variation
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 16 AdvancedBelow is a bottle with some additional trussing You can be creative as you want It all starts with a re-purposed container and the Jug Knot (and enough cord)
Related Instructables
AluminumBottle TumblerCup amp Cook Potfor an AlcoholStove byhpstoutharrow
Water BottleBelt Clip byuglymike Duct Tape
Water Bottle byrabidsquire2
AluminumBottle AlcoholStove byhpstoutharrow
DIYGlass WaterBottle byCulturespy
Solar WaterHeater forBackpackingUsing WaterBottles and aCar Shade bykopomeroy
Duct tape waterbottle holder(Photos) by pinkmarshmallow
How to make aCamelPack withan old plasticbottle bywillrandship
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Basic Knots Guideby zorro3355 on April 29 2008
Intro Basic Knots Guidehi
Step 1 Thumb knotThe most simple knotUsed as a stopper and prevent ropes from fraying
Step 2 Reef KnotUsed to tie two ropes of equal thickness togetherIt is pretty easy to tie and untie but under tentionit may be diffcult to untieIt is also not sutible for smoothropes(egnylon ropes)
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 3 Figure of eightused as a stopperprevent ropes from fraying and its more secure than tumb knot its is also used to tie Caribinas to ropes and is often used in rock climbing
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 4 Timber hitchused for pulling logs
Step 5 Clove hitchUsed to tie a rope onto a pole or logThe pole must be roundThe pole lust be thicker then the rope itself
(greatly used during pioneering)
Step 6 Sheet bandused to tie ropes of different thickness together(works on same thickness of ropes too)
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 7 Sheep shankTo shorten RopesTo prevent middle fraying
Step 8 Slip knotWhippingUsed as a grip for pulling things(when tied on a stick or small pole)(marlin spike hitch)
Related Instructables
Rope Rings byhpstoutharrow
How to Tie aFigure EightKnot byTactical_Pyro
Whippin (WestCountry Style)by tim_n
SurvivalBracelet(Updated) bytevers94
HangmansNoose PackClosure byPopEye42
Turkey on aTripod byhpstoutharrow
SurvivalBracelet II bytevers94 Zigzag Spooling
Paracord (video)by Stormdrane
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
How to Tie a Fire-escape Knotby leonardo ismael on October 16 2007
Intro How to Tie a Fire-escape KnotThis knot is used by firemen in case of fires for example imagine a scene where the ladder on the firetruck messes up but people need to get down a five story buildingor more All they have is a long piece of rope they can safely get down with a secure knot like the fire-escape knot So why not learn it its easy to do and hard to untieif you tie it tightly
This is from the American Boys Handbook
Step 1 Get Your RopeFirst grab a piece of rope and bend it like this to make a loop in it Follow every step to the smallest detail
Step 2 Twist the RopeNow make a twist like this and hold it together
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 3 Pull Through the TwistPull the loop through the twist you just made from underneath
Step 4 Go Over the Split EndNow pull the tail through the loop
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 5 FinallyAnd finally just pull it through as pictured below
Congratulations you just learned the fire-escape knot
Step 6 Same Name Not KnotThis is another knot called the fire-escape knot this shouldnt be your result
Related Instructables
House FireEscape Plan(video) byWhatHappensNowAdvice
ParacordLadder wWooden Rungsby josestude
Bed SheetEscape Rope byjessehensel
rope ladder(glow-in-the-dark version) bymikeasaurus
HeadlockEscape 2(video) byjohnnyrockstah
QuickFirestarter byMattandJora
Trail sauna byjakee117
How to Kill FireAnts andCommitGenocide byKentsOkay
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Climb Safe With A Figure 8 Knotby mattste on February 23 2010
Intro Climb Safe With A Figure 8 Knot There are many things that a beginning climber needs to know including several important knots Perhaps the most essential knot is the Figure 8 Follow Through Thistutorial will demonstrate how to correctly harness yourself to a rope using a Figure 8 Follow Through knot This knot is used primarily by rock climbers to provide a life-line Since this knot is used as a life-line it is very important to be able to tie it correctly (Your life could depend upon it)
Dont worry with this tutorial and about 5 minutes of practice you can have this knot mastered
Things you will need
- Climbing Harness- Climbing Rope
If you are wanting to go climbing and dont already have these items they can be purchased for about $25 each at most outdoor sporting goods stores If you are merelylooking to learn the knot a belt loop and a rope (about five feet long) will do
Image Notes1 Climbing Harness2 Climbing Rope
Step 1 Dealing With The RopeThroughout this tutorial I will be discussing different parts of the rope To make these instructions as clear as possible I will define a few terms that I will use throughoutthe tutorial The Anchor End of the rope will generally be at the top of the images This is the end that would be anchored to the wall or rock and does not move Wewill not be doing much with the anchored end The Tail End of the rope is the opposite end that we will be dealing with I will call this the tail for short
Now that we have some terms to work with lets get started
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 2 Tying The First Figure 8This knot has several parts to it The first part of the knot is just tying a basic figure 8 To tie the first figure 8 there are four simple steps
1 - Using the tail make a loop over the rope (as shown in the first picture) keeping in mind that there should be about 3 ft of slack on the tail end
2 - Wrap the tail back this time go under the anchored end (As shown in the second picture)
3 - Bring the tail down through the first loop (As shown in the third picture)
4 - Finally pull the two ends to make the knot a little bit tighter and easier to deal with (Shown in the fourth picture)
After these four steps you should end up with a knot that resembles a figure 8
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 3 Looping Into The Harness In order to secure the rope to the harness simply thread the tail end of the rope through the front loop in the harness as shown in the picture below This step isobviously very important
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 4 Following Back Through The Figure 8After looping the rope through the harness you have to thread the tail end of the rope back through the knot following the first figure 8 I have divided this process intofive smaller steps in order to make it more clear
1 - Coming form underneath the knot bring the tail up through the near loop and to the left behind the anchored end of the rope (Shown in the first picture)
2 - Wrap the tail around the anchored end back to the right and down through the adjacent loop (Shown in the second picture)
3 - You simply need to bring the tail back over the top of the knot to the left (Shown in the third picture)
4 - Bring the tail end up through the far loop following the anchored end (Shown in the fourth picture)
5 - Finally pull the knot tight (Shown in the fifth picture)
As you can see the first four pictures are simply tracing the knot back through with the tail end
For the last part while you pull the knot tight you may want to make small adjustments and rearrange how it all fits together If the knot does not lay perfectly smoothand tight its NOT a big deal
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 5 Finishing The Knot After completing the Figure 8 knot you will want to somehow secure the tail end of the rope out of the way There are a couple different ways to do this the way that Iwill demonstrate is using whats called a Stopper Knot This secondary knot is similar to a Fishermans knot and is pretty simple I have once again divided thisprocess into several smaller steps
1 - Start by wrapping the tail end around the anchored end (As shown in the first picture)
2 - Wrap the tail back underneath the two vertical segments (As shown in the second picture)
3 - Simply repeat the first two steps wrapping the tail around again (As shown in the third picture)
4 - This step in the fourth picture may look complicated but all you need to do is insert the tail up through the two loops that you have just made
5 - To finish off the knot you will want to slowly pull the tail end while gently pushing the bottom of the stopper knot upwards If you have successfully completed this knotit should look something like the fifth picture
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 6 Ready To Climb Now that you have mastered the Figure 8 knot you can securely harness yourself into a climbing rope Remember there are many other skills that go into setting up ananchor and belaying a climber This tutorial only covers the figure 8 knot For more information there are many great websites that demonstrate how to correctly set up asafe climbing system (Ive posted a few below) If you are a beginning climber I recommend that you read up on a few other climbing techniques Also you shouldprobably go to a climbing wall or gym where there are experienced climbers that can show you the ropes Hopefully this tutorial has been helpful Have fun and be safe
Some useful linkshttpwwwstephenprattnetAnchorsanchorshtmhttpwwwuoregonedu~oppclimbingtopicsanchorshtmlhttpwwwabc-of-rockclimbingcomhowtoclimbingtechniquesasp
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Related Instructables
How to Tie aFigure EightKnot byTactical_Pyro
Paracord KnotDisplay Bord byJamie bagn
Basic KnotsGuide byzorro3355
How to Climb aTree (withprussiks) bystasterisk
How to climb atree (using onlyrope) thefunsimple wayby louieaw
How to get arope into a tree(withoutclimbing it) byvitex
How to tievarious knots byadaviel
How to make arope swing byjdub0928
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Turks Head Knots on a Bottleby sklnxbones on July 6 2010
Intro Turks Head Knots on a BottleThis is the finished project A bottle decorated with three Turks Head Knots There are only three knots on this bottle The RED and the BLUE knots are each a 20 Bightby 3 Lead Turks Head Knots The WHITE knot is a 20 Bight by 19 Lead Turks Head Knot
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 1 Supplies
Cord Lots and Lots of cord I cant tell you how much each bottle is differentBottle Washed and Dried inside and out Make sure to remove all water spotsThreaded Needle Cord screws into the threads at the base of the needlePegs I use brass rivets used as a map to tie the Turks Head KnotsHole Punch Used to punch holes in the painters tape to hold the pegsPainters Tape To hold the pegs in place and to make your map for the Turks Head KnotsMarker To write on the painters tapeCloth Towel To remove finger prints and dirt from your bottleKrazy Glue or Super Glue This is used to secure the knots in place to the bottle
OPTIONAL BUT HIGHLY RECOMMENDEDI use the Turks Head Cookbook from KnotToolcom
Step 2 PreparationYou will need to find a bottle you like I used an empty instant tea bottle of course washed and dried (I like to put the bottle in the oven for a few minutes to dry the insidewithout water spots Take off the lid and do not put lid in the oven) Now measure the circumference of the bottle Take a cord and tightly wrap the cord around the bottleMark where the ends meet and use a ruler to measure the length of the cord For my instant tea bottle the circumference is 27cm I know from past knots that I have tiedthat I want my knot to have 20 Bights in the top and bottom (bands) knots I am going to use the Bights in the (bands) knots to tie the middle knot Now divide the numberof Bights (20) into the size of the circumference (27) to get the space between each Bight (135) With me so far
Now take two pieces of painters tape using a ruler measure out the length of the circumference and mark the length on the both pieces of tape Next you will mark thespace between each Bight on the tape
Step 3 Adding the PegsI like to use pegs when tying Turks Head Knots it just makes tying the knot easier
These are what I use for pegs
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 4 Adding Pegs to the TapeNow take a hole punch to cut holes in the tape where the lines meet You will place the pegs in the holes
Insert a peg in each hole and carefully stick the first piece of tape to the bottle
Step 5 Adding the 2nd row of pegsNow do the same thing with the second piece of tape The numbers on each piece of tape must line up
This picture shows you what you should have now This odd looking thing will be your map to tie the Turks Head Knot And this is the end of Step 1
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 6 Tying the first Turks Head KnotUsing the Turks Head Cookbook follow the numbers going over and under as indicated in the book I chose a 20 Bight by 3 Lead knot which will give me a nice bandaround the bottle Once the ends meet you have made one complete knot Tape the running end of your cord and start removing the pegs and the tape
Step 7 Remove the pegs and the tapeBe careful not to untie the knot as you remove the pegs and tape from the bottle Continue to remove all the pegs and remove the tape from the bottle At this point theknot will be very loose and will need to be tightened up
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 8 Remove the slack from the knotHere you can see just how much the knot expanded Starting with the standing end begin to pull the slack out of the knot going towards the running end of the cordDo not expect to pull all the slack out at once You may have to make 3 - 5 attempts at removing the slack out of the knot DO NOT remove all of the slack out of the knotIn order to make the bands we will have to triple the Turks Head Knot We will do this by following the knot three times The threaded needle will really come in handyhere
Step 9 Triple the KnotOnce you have made three passes of the Turks Head Knot use your needle to go under your knot about half the circumference and cut the cord The knot will be tightenough to hide the tail in placeTIP I carefully add a couple of drops of super glue UNDER the band to hold them in place and keep them from sliding around in the nextsteps A drop or two in 3 or 4 places around the band should be enough
Step 10 Add the second knotNow repeat this whole step for the second bandWhen tying the second band you must make sure the Bights line up to the first band This is crucial for the next stepWipe down the bottle to make sure all your finger prints and adhesive from the tape are all removed You want to make sure your bottle is clean at this point Any dirt orfinger prints left on the bottle will be almost impossible to remove From this point on we will use gloves when tying our last knot
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 11 Maping the Top KnotStick a piece of painters tape on top of your first band leaving the bottom of the knot exposedUse a marker to count the number of Bights in your knot Instead of using the pegs we are going to use the Bights to tie our next Turks Head Knot
Step 12 Mapping the Bottom KnotDo the same thing for the bottom band but you must make sure your numbers on top and bottom line up So 1 on top should be the same position as 1 on the bottom
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 13 Adding the last knotAgain using the Turks Head Cookbook and the threaded needle you are going to follow the instructions going over and under as indicated in the book Be sure to usegloves when ever you handle the bottle
Step 14 Thats ItFor this Turks Head Knot I am using a 20 Bight by 19 Lead knot
Because of the amount of cord you are working with your cord will get twisted and knotted You will have to un-twist the cord often Its a pain in the rear but it has to bedone And it has to be done alot
Continue to tie the knot until you finish the knot If you have the cord and the patience you can double or triple the knot When you are done use your needle to hide theends under your bands Cut the ends and your DONE
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Related Instructables
Monkeys FistFloatingKeychain byjokerlz
How To Make ATurks headKnot WithParacord byDoggie Stylish
Tying Trivetsout of Rope forHoliday Gifts bykylemarsh
Paracord KnotDisplay Bord byJamie bagn
How to Make ATurks Head(Photos) bymchs60chip
A pocket full ofknots byKiteman
Monkeys fistknot AND themonkey byjonathan111
TiteTie is theTruckers Knoton Steroids bytitetie
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Larks head noose -- an easy useful knot that tightens and loosensby Larry Breed on February 19 2009
Intro Larks head noose -- an easy useful knot that tightens and loosensI thought I knew all the basic knots but then I was taught this incredibly useful simple knot Its good for tying up the neck of a bag that you want to repeatedly open andsecurely close Its good for tying around a springy bundle that will need tightening and retightening And its easy to undo
Ive looked at knot literature but havent found a name for this so I named it The basic knot is well known its called a larks head Since all Ive done is to slip the twoends through the larks head to make a noose I call it that
WARNING Dont use this knot when human safety would depend on it Climbers and mountaineers have well-tested reliable knots for such situations
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Image Notes1 To tighten further step on this side of the larks head and pull the free ends
Step 1 Double the cord overThe larks head noose requires enough cord to go twice around your bundle plus a foot or two Find the center and double it over Sailors call this a bight
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 2 Form the larks headComing from below the bight hook your thumb and forefinger over the two sides Reach outward and downward and pinch your fingertips together underneath thedoubled cord
Youve made a larks head Move the crossing cord a little farther from your hand so theres a clear opening through the two half-loops
Step 3 Form the nooseSlip the two ends of the cord through the opening we were just talking about Pull the larks head tight so it grips the two cords Find something that needs constrictingand put the noose around it
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 4 Tightening retightening and lockingSlide the knot against the bundle If its not tight enough to keep from slipping tighten it by holding it in one hand and tugging on the cords one at a time with the otherhand Notice that you can slide the knot out again for instance to re-open the bag you just tied shut For some applications this may be as tight as you need it
A springy bundle probably still feels loose If so compress the bundle and get a new grip on the cords Rest your foot on the bundle on the cords nearest the larks headand pull to slide the larks head tighter
To make the knot more permanent you can lock it Make an overhand in the cord ends (Exactly like the first step in tying shoelaces) With your foot still on the bundlepull on the cords and move your hands apart until youre pulling in opposite directions You have just locked the larks head and you can trust it to stay that way()
But lets say that later on you want to loosen the locked knot Again put your foot on the bundle and cords nearest the larks head hold the two cord ends together andpull This makes a little slack between the overhand and the larks head so you can untie the overhand
In twine or small string the locking overhand knot may be difficult to undo Use a shoelace knot instead of an overhand and itll unlock easily
() If youre using slippery cord like polypropylene an overhand may not lock securely You may want to tie another overhand knot For added security wrap a shortlength of duct tape around the two cords close to the knot
Image Notes1 To tighten further step on this side of the larks head and pull the free ends
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Related Instructables
TRX fromParacordChallengeAccepted bythrake
A pocket full ofknots byKiteman
Lens CapLanyard by~teknoarsonist~ how to tie a
noose byawesume
AdjustableParacordGlassesLanyard byjdtwelve12
HangmansNoose PackClosure byPopEye42
Paraleash - ADog LeashFrom Paracordby The Ideanator
How to make arugged andhandy ParacordBelt by Jake22
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 2 Form a BightThe next steps show how to tie a JUG KNOT It is the basic step for adding a carrying strap It is also the anchor point for any additional fancy bottle trussing you maywant to add
JUG KNOT Step 1
Form a Bight in the center of a length of cord Bight is a knot term for a loop or bend in the rope In this case the main Bight in this knot is highlighted with a white mark Imakes it easier to follow its path in these steps
The running ends of the cord should be equal length
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 3 Pull the Bight downPULL the Bight DOWN forming two Loops
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 4 Cross the LoopsCROSS the right Loop OVER the left Loop
Step 5 Pass the Bight under the 1st loopTake the main Bight and pass it UNDER the left Loop
Step 6 Weave the BightWEAVE the Bight OVER the portion of the right Loop and UNDER the portion of the left Loop
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 7 Extend the BightExtend the Bight OVER the outer portion of the right Loop
Step 8 Flip the Right Loop behindAdditional colored identification points have been added to the loops to follow their travel in these next two steps
The right Loop Yellow marker is FLIPPED BEHIND the knot and ends up on the far left side of the knot
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 9 Flip the 2nd loop in frontRaise the green marker (located on what was formerly the left loop) and pull it down and to the right FLIPPING IT IN FRONT of the knot
Note the blue portion of the this loop will pass around the outside of the yellow portion of the first loop
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Image Notes1 Center of knot that will tighten around the bottles neck
Step 10 Remove SlackNote where the blue green amp yellow markers end up
Start to remove the slack in the loops by pulling the original main Bight (white marker top right) and the two free standing ends at the bottom
the bottle neck will pass through the very center of the knot
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Image Notes1 Center of knot that will tighten around the bottles neck
Step 11 Tighten the KnotAfter removing the slack insert the bottle neck and finish tightening
The knot should look like this before slipping it over the bottle
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 12 Secure on bottle neckThis is the finished knot shown on the neck of various containers
The loop end and the two free standing ends can be tied together to create a carrying handle (last picture below)
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 13 Aluminum Bottle Water Bottle
The next few steps show the features of an aluminum beer bottle re-purposed as a water bottle canteen It is one of many containers that can be reused as a camp waterbottle
The bottle was lightly sanded masked and then pained with a hammered finished paint to create an interesting surface texture
Image Notes1 Textured finish paint makes an interesting grip-able surface2 Masked with tape for painting3 Masked with tape for painting
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Image Notes1 Dowel used for holding the bottle during painting
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 14 Tethered Cork StopperUse a wine bottle man made Cork as a stopper for your aluminum water bottleNote Use a cork that was removed from the wine bottle without the corkscrew penetrating through the bottom end of the cork (A hole all the way through the cork willcause it to leak) Use the unpierced end of the cork inside the water bottle
Drill a hole through the sides of the Cork Thread the cord through the hole to the center of the cord Use the cork as the main Bight and tie the Jug knot as shown inthe beginning steps
Now the cork is tethered to the bottle and will not get lost or fall on the ground
A Carabiner clip passes through the other cord end to attache the water bottle to you belt or pack
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 15 Trussed for TransportThis is another hanging method for carrying your aluminum bottle water canteen A Jug knot is tied conventionally around the neck
The running ends of the knot however are pulled down towards the bottom of the bottle A Barrel Knot is tied about 34 the way down the side of the bottle A squareknot is tied on the bottom of the knot to keep the two running ends tight against the sides of the bottle
I like the look of the accent colored cord running down the sides of the bottle and the fact that the bottle hangs from the belt upside down It adds to its uniqueness
The last picture shows another truss variation
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 16 AdvancedBelow is a bottle with some additional trussing You can be creative as you want It all starts with a re-purposed container and the Jug Knot (and enough cord)
Related Instructables
AluminumBottle TumblerCup amp Cook Potfor an AlcoholStove byhpstoutharrow
Water BottleBelt Clip byuglymike Duct Tape
Water Bottle byrabidsquire2
AluminumBottle AlcoholStove byhpstoutharrow
DIYGlass WaterBottle byCulturespy
Solar WaterHeater forBackpackingUsing WaterBottles and aCar Shade bykopomeroy
Duct tape waterbottle holder(Photos) by pinkmarshmallow
How to make aCamelPack withan old plasticbottle bywillrandship
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Basic Knots Guideby zorro3355 on April 29 2008
Intro Basic Knots Guidehi
Step 1 Thumb knotThe most simple knotUsed as a stopper and prevent ropes from fraying
Step 2 Reef KnotUsed to tie two ropes of equal thickness togetherIt is pretty easy to tie and untie but under tentionit may be diffcult to untieIt is also not sutible for smoothropes(egnylon ropes)
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 3 Figure of eightused as a stopperprevent ropes from fraying and its more secure than tumb knot its is also used to tie Caribinas to ropes and is often used in rock climbing
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 4 Timber hitchused for pulling logs
Step 5 Clove hitchUsed to tie a rope onto a pole or logThe pole must be roundThe pole lust be thicker then the rope itself
(greatly used during pioneering)
Step 6 Sheet bandused to tie ropes of different thickness together(works on same thickness of ropes too)
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 7 Sheep shankTo shorten RopesTo prevent middle fraying
Step 8 Slip knotWhippingUsed as a grip for pulling things(when tied on a stick or small pole)(marlin spike hitch)
Related Instructables
Rope Rings byhpstoutharrow
How to Tie aFigure EightKnot byTactical_Pyro
Whippin (WestCountry Style)by tim_n
SurvivalBracelet(Updated) bytevers94
HangmansNoose PackClosure byPopEye42
Turkey on aTripod byhpstoutharrow
SurvivalBracelet II bytevers94 Zigzag Spooling
Paracord (video)by Stormdrane
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
How to Tie a Fire-escape Knotby leonardo ismael on October 16 2007
Intro How to Tie a Fire-escape KnotThis knot is used by firemen in case of fires for example imagine a scene where the ladder on the firetruck messes up but people need to get down a five story buildingor more All they have is a long piece of rope they can safely get down with a secure knot like the fire-escape knot So why not learn it its easy to do and hard to untieif you tie it tightly
This is from the American Boys Handbook
Step 1 Get Your RopeFirst grab a piece of rope and bend it like this to make a loop in it Follow every step to the smallest detail
Step 2 Twist the RopeNow make a twist like this and hold it together
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 3 Pull Through the TwistPull the loop through the twist you just made from underneath
Step 4 Go Over the Split EndNow pull the tail through the loop
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 5 FinallyAnd finally just pull it through as pictured below
Congratulations you just learned the fire-escape knot
Step 6 Same Name Not KnotThis is another knot called the fire-escape knot this shouldnt be your result
Related Instructables
House FireEscape Plan(video) byWhatHappensNowAdvice
ParacordLadder wWooden Rungsby josestude
Bed SheetEscape Rope byjessehensel
rope ladder(glow-in-the-dark version) bymikeasaurus
HeadlockEscape 2(video) byjohnnyrockstah
QuickFirestarter byMattandJora
Trail sauna byjakee117
How to Kill FireAnts andCommitGenocide byKentsOkay
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Climb Safe With A Figure 8 Knotby mattste on February 23 2010
Intro Climb Safe With A Figure 8 Knot There are many things that a beginning climber needs to know including several important knots Perhaps the most essential knot is the Figure 8 Follow Through Thistutorial will demonstrate how to correctly harness yourself to a rope using a Figure 8 Follow Through knot This knot is used primarily by rock climbers to provide a life-line Since this knot is used as a life-line it is very important to be able to tie it correctly (Your life could depend upon it)
Dont worry with this tutorial and about 5 minutes of practice you can have this knot mastered
Things you will need
- Climbing Harness- Climbing Rope
If you are wanting to go climbing and dont already have these items they can be purchased for about $25 each at most outdoor sporting goods stores If you are merelylooking to learn the knot a belt loop and a rope (about five feet long) will do
Image Notes1 Climbing Harness2 Climbing Rope
Step 1 Dealing With The RopeThroughout this tutorial I will be discussing different parts of the rope To make these instructions as clear as possible I will define a few terms that I will use throughoutthe tutorial The Anchor End of the rope will generally be at the top of the images This is the end that would be anchored to the wall or rock and does not move Wewill not be doing much with the anchored end The Tail End of the rope is the opposite end that we will be dealing with I will call this the tail for short
Now that we have some terms to work with lets get started
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 2 Tying The First Figure 8This knot has several parts to it The first part of the knot is just tying a basic figure 8 To tie the first figure 8 there are four simple steps
1 - Using the tail make a loop over the rope (as shown in the first picture) keeping in mind that there should be about 3 ft of slack on the tail end
2 - Wrap the tail back this time go under the anchored end (As shown in the second picture)
3 - Bring the tail down through the first loop (As shown in the third picture)
4 - Finally pull the two ends to make the knot a little bit tighter and easier to deal with (Shown in the fourth picture)
After these four steps you should end up with a knot that resembles a figure 8
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 3 Looping Into The Harness In order to secure the rope to the harness simply thread the tail end of the rope through the front loop in the harness as shown in the picture below This step isobviously very important
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 4 Following Back Through The Figure 8After looping the rope through the harness you have to thread the tail end of the rope back through the knot following the first figure 8 I have divided this process intofive smaller steps in order to make it more clear
1 - Coming form underneath the knot bring the tail up through the near loop and to the left behind the anchored end of the rope (Shown in the first picture)
2 - Wrap the tail around the anchored end back to the right and down through the adjacent loop (Shown in the second picture)
3 - You simply need to bring the tail back over the top of the knot to the left (Shown in the third picture)
4 - Bring the tail end up through the far loop following the anchored end (Shown in the fourth picture)
5 - Finally pull the knot tight (Shown in the fifth picture)
As you can see the first four pictures are simply tracing the knot back through with the tail end
For the last part while you pull the knot tight you may want to make small adjustments and rearrange how it all fits together If the knot does not lay perfectly smoothand tight its NOT a big deal
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 5 Finishing The Knot After completing the Figure 8 knot you will want to somehow secure the tail end of the rope out of the way There are a couple different ways to do this the way that Iwill demonstrate is using whats called a Stopper Knot This secondary knot is similar to a Fishermans knot and is pretty simple I have once again divided thisprocess into several smaller steps
1 - Start by wrapping the tail end around the anchored end (As shown in the first picture)
2 - Wrap the tail back underneath the two vertical segments (As shown in the second picture)
3 - Simply repeat the first two steps wrapping the tail around again (As shown in the third picture)
4 - This step in the fourth picture may look complicated but all you need to do is insert the tail up through the two loops that you have just made
5 - To finish off the knot you will want to slowly pull the tail end while gently pushing the bottom of the stopper knot upwards If you have successfully completed this knotit should look something like the fifth picture
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 6 Ready To Climb Now that you have mastered the Figure 8 knot you can securely harness yourself into a climbing rope Remember there are many other skills that go into setting up ananchor and belaying a climber This tutorial only covers the figure 8 knot For more information there are many great websites that demonstrate how to correctly set up asafe climbing system (Ive posted a few below) If you are a beginning climber I recommend that you read up on a few other climbing techniques Also you shouldprobably go to a climbing wall or gym where there are experienced climbers that can show you the ropes Hopefully this tutorial has been helpful Have fun and be safe
Some useful linkshttpwwwstephenprattnetAnchorsanchorshtmhttpwwwuoregonedu~oppclimbingtopicsanchorshtmlhttpwwwabc-of-rockclimbingcomhowtoclimbingtechniquesasp
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Related Instructables
How to Tie aFigure EightKnot byTactical_Pyro
Paracord KnotDisplay Bord byJamie bagn
Basic KnotsGuide byzorro3355
How to Climb aTree (withprussiks) bystasterisk
How to climb atree (using onlyrope) thefunsimple wayby louieaw
How to get arope into a tree(withoutclimbing it) byvitex
How to tievarious knots byadaviel
How to make arope swing byjdub0928
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Turks Head Knots on a Bottleby sklnxbones on July 6 2010
Intro Turks Head Knots on a BottleThis is the finished project A bottle decorated with three Turks Head Knots There are only three knots on this bottle The RED and the BLUE knots are each a 20 Bightby 3 Lead Turks Head Knots The WHITE knot is a 20 Bight by 19 Lead Turks Head Knot
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 1 Supplies
Cord Lots and Lots of cord I cant tell you how much each bottle is differentBottle Washed and Dried inside and out Make sure to remove all water spotsThreaded Needle Cord screws into the threads at the base of the needlePegs I use brass rivets used as a map to tie the Turks Head KnotsHole Punch Used to punch holes in the painters tape to hold the pegsPainters Tape To hold the pegs in place and to make your map for the Turks Head KnotsMarker To write on the painters tapeCloth Towel To remove finger prints and dirt from your bottleKrazy Glue or Super Glue This is used to secure the knots in place to the bottle
OPTIONAL BUT HIGHLY RECOMMENDEDI use the Turks Head Cookbook from KnotToolcom
Step 2 PreparationYou will need to find a bottle you like I used an empty instant tea bottle of course washed and dried (I like to put the bottle in the oven for a few minutes to dry the insidewithout water spots Take off the lid and do not put lid in the oven) Now measure the circumference of the bottle Take a cord and tightly wrap the cord around the bottleMark where the ends meet and use a ruler to measure the length of the cord For my instant tea bottle the circumference is 27cm I know from past knots that I have tiedthat I want my knot to have 20 Bights in the top and bottom (bands) knots I am going to use the Bights in the (bands) knots to tie the middle knot Now divide the numberof Bights (20) into the size of the circumference (27) to get the space between each Bight (135) With me so far
Now take two pieces of painters tape using a ruler measure out the length of the circumference and mark the length on the both pieces of tape Next you will mark thespace between each Bight on the tape
Step 3 Adding the PegsI like to use pegs when tying Turks Head Knots it just makes tying the knot easier
These are what I use for pegs
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 4 Adding Pegs to the TapeNow take a hole punch to cut holes in the tape where the lines meet You will place the pegs in the holes
Insert a peg in each hole and carefully stick the first piece of tape to the bottle
Step 5 Adding the 2nd row of pegsNow do the same thing with the second piece of tape The numbers on each piece of tape must line up
This picture shows you what you should have now This odd looking thing will be your map to tie the Turks Head Knot And this is the end of Step 1
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 6 Tying the first Turks Head KnotUsing the Turks Head Cookbook follow the numbers going over and under as indicated in the book I chose a 20 Bight by 3 Lead knot which will give me a nice bandaround the bottle Once the ends meet you have made one complete knot Tape the running end of your cord and start removing the pegs and the tape
Step 7 Remove the pegs and the tapeBe careful not to untie the knot as you remove the pegs and tape from the bottle Continue to remove all the pegs and remove the tape from the bottle At this point theknot will be very loose and will need to be tightened up
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 8 Remove the slack from the knotHere you can see just how much the knot expanded Starting with the standing end begin to pull the slack out of the knot going towards the running end of the cordDo not expect to pull all the slack out at once You may have to make 3 - 5 attempts at removing the slack out of the knot DO NOT remove all of the slack out of the knotIn order to make the bands we will have to triple the Turks Head Knot We will do this by following the knot three times The threaded needle will really come in handyhere
Step 9 Triple the KnotOnce you have made three passes of the Turks Head Knot use your needle to go under your knot about half the circumference and cut the cord The knot will be tightenough to hide the tail in placeTIP I carefully add a couple of drops of super glue UNDER the band to hold them in place and keep them from sliding around in the nextsteps A drop or two in 3 or 4 places around the band should be enough
Step 10 Add the second knotNow repeat this whole step for the second bandWhen tying the second band you must make sure the Bights line up to the first band This is crucial for the next stepWipe down the bottle to make sure all your finger prints and adhesive from the tape are all removed You want to make sure your bottle is clean at this point Any dirt orfinger prints left on the bottle will be almost impossible to remove From this point on we will use gloves when tying our last knot
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 11 Maping the Top KnotStick a piece of painters tape on top of your first band leaving the bottom of the knot exposedUse a marker to count the number of Bights in your knot Instead of using the pegs we are going to use the Bights to tie our next Turks Head Knot
Step 12 Mapping the Bottom KnotDo the same thing for the bottom band but you must make sure your numbers on top and bottom line up So 1 on top should be the same position as 1 on the bottom
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 13 Adding the last knotAgain using the Turks Head Cookbook and the threaded needle you are going to follow the instructions going over and under as indicated in the book Be sure to usegloves when ever you handle the bottle
Step 14 Thats ItFor this Turks Head Knot I am using a 20 Bight by 19 Lead knot
Because of the amount of cord you are working with your cord will get twisted and knotted You will have to un-twist the cord often Its a pain in the rear but it has to bedone And it has to be done alot
Continue to tie the knot until you finish the knot If you have the cord and the patience you can double or triple the knot When you are done use your needle to hide theends under your bands Cut the ends and your DONE
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Related Instructables
Monkeys FistFloatingKeychain byjokerlz
How To Make ATurks headKnot WithParacord byDoggie Stylish
Tying Trivetsout of Rope forHoliday Gifts bykylemarsh
Paracord KnotDisplay Bord byJamie bagn
How to Make ATurks Head(Photos) bymchs60chip
A pocket full ofknots byKiteman
Monkeys fistknot AND themonkey byjonathan111
TiteTie is theTruckers Knoton Steroids bytitetie
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Larks head noose -- an easy useful knot that tightens and loosensby Larry Breed on February 19 2009
Intro Larks head noose -- an easy useful knot that tightens and loosensI thought I knew all the basic knots but then I was taught this incredibly useful simple knot Its good for tying up the neck of a bag that you want to repeatedly open andsecurely close Its good for tying around a springy bundle that will need tightening and retightening And its easy to undo
Ive looked at knot literature but havent found a name for this so I named it The basic knot is well known its called a larks head Since all Ive done is to slip the twoends through the larks head to make a noose I call it that
WARNING Dont use this knot when human safety would depend on it Climbers and mountaineers have well-tested reliable knots for such situations
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Image Notes1 To tighten further step on this side of the larks head and pull the free ends
Step 1 Double the cord overThe larks head noose requires enough cord to go twice around your bundle plus a foot or two Find the center and double it over Sailors call this a bight
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 2 Form the larks headComing from below the bight hook your thumb and forefinger over the two sides Reach outward and downward and pinch your fingertips together underneath thedoubled cord
Youve made a larks head Move the crossing cord a little farther from your hand so theres a clear opening through the two half-loops
Step 3 Form the nooseSlip the two ends of the cord through the opening we were just talking about Pull the larks head tight so it grips the two cords Find something that needs constrictingand put the noose around it
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 4 Tightening retightening and lockingSlide the knot against the bundle If its not tight enough to keep from slipping tighten it by holding it in one hand and tugging on the cords one at a time with the otherhand Notice that you can slide the knot out again for instance to re-open the bag you just tied shut For some applications this may be as tight as you need it
A springy bundle probably still feels loose If so compress the bundle and get a new grip on the cords Rest your foot on the bundle on the cords nearest the larks headand pull to slide the larks head tighter
To make the knot more permanent you can lock it Make an overhand in the cord ends (Exactly like the first step in tying shoelaces) With your foot still on the bundlepull on the cords and move your hands apart until youre pulling in opposite directions You have just locked the larks head and you can trust it to stay that way()
But lets say that later on you want to loosen the locked knot Again put your foot on the bundle and cords nearest the larks head hold the two cord ends together andpull This makes a little slack between the overhand and the larks head so you can untie the overhand
In twine or small string the locking overhand knot may be difficult to undo Use a shoelace knot instead of an overhand and itll unlock easily
() If youre using slippery cord like polypropylene an overhand may not lock securely You may want to tie another overhand knot For added security wrap a shortlength of duct tape around the two cords close to the knot
Image Notes1 To tighten further step on this side of the larks head and pull the free ends
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Related Instructables
TRX fromParacordChallengeAccepted bythrake
A pocket full ofknots byKiteman
Lens CapLanyard by~teknoarsonist~ how to tie a
noose byawesume
AdjustableParacordGlassesLanyard byjdtwelve12
HangmansNoose PackClosure byPopEye42
Paraleash - ADog LeashFrom Paracordby The Ideanator
How to make arugged andhandy ParacordBelt by Jake22
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 3 Pull the Bight downPULL the Bight DOWN forming two Loops
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 4 Cross the LoopsCROSS the right Loop OVER the left Loop
Step 5 Pass the Bight under the 1st loopTake the main Bight and pass it UNDER the left Loop
Step 6 Weave the BightWEAVE the Bight OVER the portion of the right Loop and UNDER the portion of the left Loop
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 7 Extend the BightExtend the Bight OVER the outer portion of the right Loop
Step 8 Flip the Right Loop behindAdditional colored identification points have been added to the loops to follow their travel in these next two steps
The right Loop Yellow marker is FLIPPED BEHIND the knot and ends up on the far left side of the knot
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 9 Flip the 2nd loop in frontRaise the green marker (located on what was formerly the left loop) and pull it down and to the right FLIPPING IT IN FRONT of the knot
Note the blue portion of the this loop will pass around the outside of the yellow portion of the first loop
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Image Notes1 Center of knot that will tighten around the bottles neck
Step 10 Remove SlackNote where the blue green amp yellow markers end up
Start to remove the slack in the loops by pulling the original main Bight (white marker top right) and the two free standing ends at the bottom
the bottle neck will pass through the very center of the knot
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Image Notes1 Center of knot that will tighten around the bottles neck
Step 11 Tighten the KnotAfter removing the slack insert the bottle neck and finish tightening
The knot should look like this before slipping it over the bottle
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 12 Secure on bottle neckThis is the finished knot shown on the neck of various containers
The loop end and the two free standing ends can be tied together to create a carrying handle (last picture below)
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 13 Aluminum Bottle Water Bottle
The next few steps show the features of an aluminum beer bottle re-purposed as a water bottle canteen It is one of many containers that can be reused as a camp waterbottle
The bottle was lightly sanded masked and then pained with a hammered finished paint to create an interesting surface texture
Image Notes1 Textured finish paint makes an interesting grip-able surface2 Masked with tape for painting3 Masked with tape for painting
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Image Notes1 Dowel used for holding the bottle during painting
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 14 Tethered Cork StopperUse a wine bottle man made Cork as a stopper for your aluminum water bottleNote Use a cork that was removed from the wine bottle without the corkscrew penetrating through the bottom end of the cork (A hole all the way through the cork willcause it to leak) Use the unpierced end of the cork inside the water bottle
Drill a hole through the sides of the Cork Thread the cord through the hole to the center of the cord Use the cork as the main Bight and tie the Jug knot as shown inthe beginning steps
Now the cork is tethered to the bottle and will not get lost or fall on the ground
A Carabiner clip passes through the other cord end to attache the water bottle to you belt or pack
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 15 Trussed for TransportThis is another hanging method for carrying your aluminum bottle water canteen A Jug knot is tied conventionally around the neck
The running ends of the knot however are pulled down towards the bottom of the bottle A Barrel Knot is tied about 34 the way down the side of the bottle A squareknot is tied on the bottom of the knot to keep the two running ends tight against the sides of the bottle
I like the look of the accent colored cord running down the sides of the bottle and the fact that the bottle hangs from the belt upside down It adds to its uniqueness
The last picture shows another truss variation
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 16 AdvancedBelow is a bottle with some additional trussing You can be creative as you want It all starts with a re-purposed container and the Jug Knot (and enough cord)
Related Instructables
AluminumBottle TumblerCup amp Cook Potfor an AlcoholStove byhpstoutharrow
Water BottleBelt Clip byuglymike Duct Tape
Water Bottle byrabidsquire2
AluminumBottle AlcoholStove byhpstoutharrow
DIYGlass WaterBottle byCulturespy
Solar WaterHeater forBackpackingUsing WaterBottles and aCar Shade bykopomeroy
Duct tape waterbottle holder(Photos) by pinkmarshmallow
How to make aCamelPack withan old plasticbottle bywillrandship
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Basic Knots Guideby zorro3355 on April 29 2008
Intro Basic Knots Guidehi
Step 1 Thumb knotThe most simple knotUsed as a stopper and prevent ropes from fraying
Step 2 Reef KnotUsed to tie two ropes of equal thickness togetherIt is pretty easy to tie and untie but under tentionit may be diffcult to untieIt is also not sutible for smoothropes(egnylon ropes)
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 3 Figure of eightused as a stopperprevent ropes from fraying and its more secure than tumb knot its is also used to tie Caribinas to ropes and is often used in rock climbing
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 4 Timber hitchused for pulling logs
Step 5 Clove hitchUsed to tie a rope onto a pole or logThe pole must be roundThe pole lust be thicker then the rope itself
(greatly used during pioneering)
Step 6 Sheet bandused to tie ropes of different thickness together(works on same thickness of ropes too)
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 7 Sheep shankTo shorten RopesTo prevent middle fraying
Step 8 Slip knotWhippingUsed as a grip for pulling things(when tied on a stick or small pole)(marlin spike hitch)
Related Instructables
Rope Rings byhpstoutharrow
How to Tie aFigure EightKnot byTactical_Pyro
Whippin (WestCountry Style)by tim_n
SurvivalBracelet(Updated) bytevers94
HangmansNoose PackClosure byPopEye42
Turkey on aTripod byhpstoutharrow
SurvivalBracelet II bytevers94 Zigzag Spooling
Paracord (video)by Stormdrane
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
How to Tie a Fire-escape Knotby leonardo ismael on October 16 2007
Intro How to Tie a Fire-escape KnotThis knot is used by firemen in case of fires for example imagine a scene where the ladder on the firetruck messes up but people need to get down a five story buildingor more All they have is a long piece of rope they can safely get down with a secure knot like the fire-escape knot So why not learn it its easy to do and hard to untieif you tie it tightly
This is from the American Boys Handbook
Step 1 Get Your RopeFirst grab a piece of rope and bend it like this to make a loop in it Follow every step to the smallest detail
Step 2 Twist the RopeNow make a twist like this and hold it together
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 3 Pull Through the TwistPull the loop through the twist you just made from underneath
Step 4 Go Over the Split EndNow pull the tail through the loop
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 5 FinallyAnd finally just pull it through as pictured below
Congratulations you just learned the fire-escape knot
Step 6 Same Name Not KnotThis is another knot called the fire-escape knot this shouldnt be your result
Related Instructables
House FireEscape Plan(video) byWhatHappensNowAdvice
ParacordLadder wWooden Rungsby josestude
Bed SheetEscape Rope byjessehensel
rope ladder(glow-in-the-dark version) bymikeasaurus
HeadlockEscape 2(video) byjohnnyrockstah
QuickFirestarter byMattandJora
Trail sauna byjakee117
How to Kill FireAnts andCommitGenocide byKentsOkay
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Climb Safe With A Figure 8 Knotby mattste on February 23 2010
Intro Climb Safe With A Figure 8 Knot There are many things that a beginning climber needs to know including several important knots Perhaps the most essential knot is the Figure 8 Follow Through Thistutorial will demonstrate how to correctly harness yourself to a rope using a Figure 8 Follow Through knot This knot is used primarily by rock climbers to provide a life-line Since this knot is used as a life-line it is very important to be able to tie it correctly (Your life could depend upon it)
Dont worry with this tutorial and about 5 minutes of practice you can have this knot mastered
Things you will need
- Climbing Harness- Climbing Rope
If you are wanting to go climbing and dont already have these items they can be purchased for about $25 each at most outdoor sporting goods stores If you are merelylooking to learn the knot a belt loop and a rope (about five feet long) will do
Image Notes1 Climbing Harness2 Climbing Rope
Step 1 Dealing With The RopeThroughout this tutorial I will be discussing different parts of the rope To make these instructions as clear as possible I will define a few terms that I will use throughoutthe tutorial The Anchor End of the rope will generally be at the top of the images This is the end that would be anchored to the wall or rock and does not move Wewill not be doing much with the anchored end The Tail End of the rope is the opposite end that we will be dealing with I will call this the tail for short
Now that we have some terms to work with lets get started
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 2 Tying The First Figure 8This knot has several parts to it The first part of the knot is just tying a basic figure 8 To tie the first figure 8 there are four simple steps
1 - Using the tail make a loop over the rope (as shown in the first picture) keeping in mind that there should be about 3 ft of slack on the tail end
2 - Wrap the tail back this time go under the anchored end (As shown in the second picture)
3 - Bring the tail down through the first loop (As shown in the third picture)
4 - Finally pull the two ends to make the knot a little bit tighter and easier to deal with (Shown in the fourth picture)
After these four steps you should end up with a knot that resembles a figure 8
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 3 Looping Into The Harness In order to secure the rope to the harness simply thread the tail end of the rope through the front loop in the harness as shown in the picture below This step isobviously very important
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 4 Following Back Through The Figure 8After looping the rope through the harness you have to thread the tail end of the rope back through the knot following the first figure 8 I have divided this process intofive smaller steps in order to make it more clear
1 - Coming form underneath the knot bring the tail up through the near loop and to the left behind the anchored end of the rope (Shown in the first picture)
2 - Wrap the tail around the anchored end back to the right and down through the adjacent loop (Shown in the second picture)
3 - You simply need to bring the tail back over the top of the knot to the left (Shown in the third picture)
4 - Bring the tail end up through the far loop following the anchored end (Shown in the fourth picture)
5 - Finally pull the knot tight (Shown in the fifth picture)
As you can see the first four pictures are simply tracing the knot back through with the tail end
For the last part while you pull the knot tight you may want to make small adjustments and rearrange how it all fits together If the knot does not lay perfectly smoothand tight its NOT a big deal
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 5 Finishing The Knot After completing the Figure 8 knot you will want to somehow secure the tail end of the rope out of the way There are a couple different ways to do this the way that Iwill demonstrate is using whats called a Stopper Knot This secondary knot is similar to a Fishermans knot and is pretty simple I have once again divided thisprocess into several smaller steps
1 - Start by wrapping the tail end around the anchored end (As shown in the first picture)
2 - Wrap the tail back underneath the two vertical segments (As shown in the second picture)
3 - Simply repeat the first two steps wrapping the tail around again (As shown in the third picture)
4 - This step in the fourth picture may look complicated but all you need to do is insert the tail up through the two loops that you have just made
5 - To finish off the knot you will want to slowly pull the tail end while gently pushing the bottom of the stopper knot upwards If you have successfully completed this knotit should look something like the fifth picture
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 6 Ready To Climb Now that you have mastered the Figure 8 knot you can securely harness yourself into a climbing rope Remember there are many other skills that go into setting up ananchor and belaying a climber This tutorial only covers the figure 8 knot For more information there are many great websites that demonstrate how to correctly set up asafe climbing system (Ive posted a few below) If you are a beginning climber I recommend that you read up on a few other climbing techniques Also you shouldprobably go to a climbing wall or gym where there are experienced climbers that can show you the ropes Hopefully this tutorial has been helpful Have fun and be safe
Some useful linkshttpwwwstephenprattnetAnchorsanchorshtmhttpwwwuoregonedu~oppclimbingtopicsanchorshtmlhttpwwwabc-of-rockclimbingcomhowtoclimbingtechniquesasp
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Related Instructables
How to Tie aFigure EightKnot byTactical_Pyro
Paracord KnotDisplay Bord byJamie bagn
Basic KnotsGuide byzorro3355
How to Climb aTree (withprussiks) bystasterisk
How to climb atree (using onlyrope) thefunsimple wayby louieaw
How to get arope into a tree(withoutclimbing it) byvitex
How to tievarious knots byadaviel
How to make arope swing byjdub0928
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Turks Head Knots on a Bottleby sklnxbones on July 6 2010
Intro Turks Head Knots on a BottleThis is the finished project A bottle decorated with three Turks Head Knots There are only three knots on this bottle The RED and the BLUE knots are each a 20 Bightby 3 Lead Turks Head Knots The WHITE knot is a 20 Bight by 19 Lead Turks Head Knot
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 1 Supplies
Cord Lots and Lots of cord I cant tell you how much each bottle is differentBottle Washed and Dried inside and out Make sure to remove all water spotsThreaded Needle Cord screws into the threads at the base of the needlePegs I use brass rivets used as a map to tie the Turks Head KnotsHole Punch Used to punch holes in the painters tape to hold the pegsPainters Tape To hold the pegs in place and to make your map for the Turks Head KnotsMarker To write on the painters tapeCloth Towel To remove finger prints and dirt from your bottleKrazy Glue or Super Glue This is used to secure the knots in place to the bottle
OPTIONAL BUT HIGHLY RECOMMENDEDI use the Turks Head Cookbook from KnotToolcom
Step 2 PreparationYou will need to find a bottle you like I used an empty instant tea bottle of course washed and dried (I like to put the bottle in the oven for a few minutes to dry the insidewithout water spots Take off the lid and do not put lid in the oven) Now measure the circumference of the bottle Take a cord and tightly wrap the cord around the bottleMark where the ends meet and use a ruler to measure the length of the cord For my instant tea bottle the circumference is 27cm I know from past knots that I have tiedthat I want my knot to have 20 Bights in the top and bottom (bands) knots I am going to use the Bights in the (bands) knots to tie the middle knot Now divide the numberof Bights (20) into the size of the circumference (27) to get the space between each Bight (135) With me so far
Now take two pieces of painters tape using a ruler measure out the length of the circumference and mark the length on the both pieces of tape Next you will mark thespace between each Bight on the tape
Step 3 Adding the PegsI like to use pegs when tying Turks Head Knots it just makes tying the knot easier
These are what I use for pegs
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 4 Adding Pegs to the TapeNow take a hole punch to cut holes in the tape where the lines meet You will place the pegs in the holes
Insert a peg in each hole and carefully stick the first piece of tape to the bottle
Step 5 Adding the 2nd row of pegsNow do the same thing with the second piece of tape The numbers on each piece of tape must line up
This picture shows you what you should have now This odd looking thing will be your map to tie the Turks Head Knot And this is the end of Step 1
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 6 Tying the first Turks Head KnotUsing the Turks Head Cookbook follow the numbers going over and under as indicated in the book I chose a 20 Bight by 3 Lead knot which will give me a nice bandaround the bottle Once the ends meet you have made one complete knot Tape the running end of your cord and start removing the pegs and the tape
Step 7 Remove the pegs and the tapeBe careful not to untie the knot as you remove the pegs and tape from the bottle Continue to remove all the pegs and remove the tape from the bottle At this point theknot will be very loose and will need to be tightened up
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 8 Remove the slack from the knotHere you can see just how much the knot expanded Starting with the standing end begin to pull the slack out of the knot going towards the running end of the cordDo not expect to pull all the slack out at once You may have to make 3 - 5 attempts at removing the slack out of the knot DO NOT remove all of the slack out of the knotIn order to make the bands we will have to triple the Turks Head Knot We will do this by following the knot three times The threaded needle will really come in handyhere
Step 9 Triple the KnotOnce you have made three passes of the Turks Head Knot use your needle to go under your knot about half the circumference and cut the cord The knot will be tightenough to hide the tail in placeTIP I carefully add a couple of drops of super glue UNDER the band to hold them in place and keep them from sliding around in the nextsteps A drop or two in 3 or 4 places around the band should be enough
Step 10 Add the second knotNow repeat this whole step for the second bandWhen tying the second band you must make sure the Bights line up to the first band This is crucial for the next stepWipe down the bottle to make sure all your finger prints and adhesive from the tape are all removed You want to make sure your bottle is clean at this point Any dirt orfinger prints left on the bottle will be almost impossible to remove From this point on we will use gloves when tying our last knot
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 11 Maping the Top KnotStick a piece of painters tape on top of your first band leaving the bottom of the knot exposedUse a marker to count the number of Bights in your knot Instead of using the pegs we are going to use the Bights to tie our next Turks Head Knot
Step 12 Mapping the Bottom KnotDo the same thing for the bottom band but you must make sure your numbers on top and bottom line up So 1 on top should be the same position as 1 on the bottom
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 13 Adding the last knotAgain using the Turks Head Cookbook and the threaded needle you are going to follow the instructions going over and under as indicated in the book Be sure to usegloves when ever you handle the bottle
Step 14 Thats ItFor this Turks Head Knot I am using a 20 Bight by 19 Lead knot
Because of the amount of cord you are working with your cord will get twisted and knotted You will have to un-twist the cord often Its a pain in the rear but it has to bedone And it has to be done alot
Continue to tie the knot until you finish the knot If you have the cord and the patience you can double or triple the knot When you are done use your needle to hide theends under your bands Cut the ends and your DONE
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Related Instructables
Monkeys FistFloatingKeychain byjokerlz
How To Make ATurks headKnot WithParacord byDoggie Stylish
Tying Trivetsout of Rope forHoliday Gifts bykylemarsh
Paracord KnotDisplay Bord byJamie bagn
How to Make ATurks Head(Photos) bymchs60chip
A pocket full ofknots byKiteman
Monkeys fistknot AND themonkey byjonathan111
TiteTie is theTruckers Knoton Steroids bytitetie
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Larks head noose -- an easy useful knot that tightens and loosensby Larry Breed on February 19 2009
Intro Larks head noose -- an easy useful knot that tightens and loosensI thought I knew all the basic knots but then I was taught this incredibly useful simple knot Its good for tying up the neck of a bag that you want to repeatedly open andsecurely close Its good for tying around a springy bundle that will need tightening and retightening And its easy to undo
Ive looked at knot literature but havent found a name for this so I named it The basic knot is well known its called a larks head Since all Ive done is to slip the twoends through the larks head to make a noose I call it that
WARNING Dont use this knot when human safety would depend on it Climbers and mountaineers have well-tested reliable knots for such situations
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Image Notes1 To tighten further step on this side of the larks head and pull the free ends
Step 1 Double the cord overThe larks head noose requires enough cord to go twice around your bundle plus a foot or two Find the center and double it over Sailors call this a bight
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 2 Form the larks headComing from below the bight hook your thumb and forefinger over the two sides Reach outward and downward and pinch your fingertips together underneath thedoubled cord
Youve made a larks head Move the crossing cord a little farther from your hand so theres a clear opening through the two half-loops
Step 3 Form the nooseSlip the two ends of the cord through the opening we were just talking about Pull the larks head tight so it grips the two cords Find something that needs constrictingand put the noose around it
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 4 Tightening retightening and lockingSlide the knot against the bundle If its not tight enough to keep from slipping tighten it by holding it in one hand and tugging on the cords one at a time with the otherhand Notice that you can slide the knot out again for instance to re-open the bag you just tied shut For some applications this may be as tight as you need it
A springy bundle probably still feels loose If so compress the bundle and get a new grip on the cords Rest your foot on the bundle on the cords nearest the larks headand pull to slide the larks head tighter
To make the knot more permanent you can lock it Make an overhand in the cord ends (Exactly like the first step in tying shoelaces) With your foot still on the bundlepull on the cords and move your hands apart until youre pulling in opposite directions You have just locked the larks head and you can trust it to stay that way()
But lets say that later on you want to loosen the locked knot Again put your foot on the bundle and cords nearest the larks head hold the two cord ends together andpull This makes a little slack between the overhand and the larks head so you can untie the overhand
In twine or small string the locking overhand knot may be difficult to undo Use a shoelace knot instead of an overhand and itll unlock easily
() If youre using slippery cord like polypropylene an overhand may not lock securely You may want to tie another overhand knot For added security wrap a shortlength of duct tape around the two cords close to the knot
Image Notes1 To tighten further step on this side of the larks head and pull the free ends
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Related Instructables
TRX fromParacordChallengeAccepted bythrake
A pocket full ofknots byKiteman
Lens CapLanyard by~teknoarsonist~ how to tie a
noose byawesume
AdjustableParacordGlassesLanyard byjdtwelve12
HangmansNoose PackClosure byPopEye42
Paraleash - ADog LeashFrom Paracordby The Ideanator
How to make arugged andhandy ParacordBelt by Jake22
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 4 Cross the LoopsCROSS the right Loop OVER the left Loop
Step 5 Pass the Bight under the 1st loopTake the main Bight and pass it UNDER the left Loop
Step 6 Weave the BightWEAVE the Bight OVER the portion of the right Loop and UNDER the portion of the left Loop
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 7 Extend the BightExtend the Bight OVER the outer portion of the right Loop
Step 8 Flip the Right Loop behindAdditional colored identification points have been added to the loops to follow their travel in these next two steps
The right Loop Yellow marker is FLIPPED BEHIND the knot and ends up on the far left side of the knot
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 9 Flip the 2nd loop in frontRaise the green marker (located on what was formerly the left loop) and pull it down and to the right FLIPPING IT IN FRONT of the knot
Note the blue portion of the this loop will pass around the outside of the yellow portion of the first loop
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Image Notes1 Center of knot that will tighten around the bottles neck
Step 10 Remove SlackNote where the blue green amp yellow markers end up
Start to remove the slack in the loops by pulling the original main Bight (white marker top right) and the two free standing ends at the bottom
the bottle neck will pass through the very center of the knot
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Image Notes1 Center of knot that will tighten around the bottles neck
Step 11 Tighten the KnotAfter removing the slack insert the bottle neck and finish tightening
The knot should look like this before slipping it over the bottle
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 12 Secure on bottle neckThis is the finished knot shown on the neck of various containers
The loop end and the two free standing ends can be tied together to create a carrying handle (last picture below)
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 13 Aluminum Bottle Water Bottle
The next few steps show the features of an aluminum beer bottle re-purposed as a water bottle canteen It is one of many containers that can be reused as a camp waterbottle
The bottle was lightly sanded masked and then pained with a hammered finished paint to create an interesting surface texture
Image Notes1 Textured finish paint makes an interesting grip-able surface2 Masked with tape for painting3 Masked with tape for painting
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Image Notes1 Dowel used for holding the bottle during painting
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 14 Tethered Cork StopperUse a wine bottle man made Cork as a stopper for your aluminum water bottleNote Use a cork that was removed from the wine bottle without the corkscrew penetrating through the bottom end of the cork (A hole all the way through the cork willcause it to leak) Use the unpierced end of the cork inside the water bottle
Drill a hole through the sides of the Cork Thread the cord through the hole to the center of the cord Use the cork as the main Bight and tie the Jug knot as shown inthe beginning steps
Now the cork is tethered to the bottle and will not get lost or fall on the ground
A Carabiner clip passes through the other cord end to attache the water bottle to you belt or pack
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 15 Trussed for TransportThis is another hanging method for carrying your aluminum bottle water canteen A Jug knot is tied conventionally around the neck
The running ends of the knot however are pulled down towards the bottom of the bottle A Barrel Knot is tied about 34 the way down the side of the bottle A squareknot is tied on the bottom of the knot to keep the two running ends tight against the sides of the bottle
I like the look of the accent colored cord running down the sides of the bottle and the fact that the bottle hangs from the belt upside down It adds to its uniqueness
The last picture shows another truss variation
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 16 AdvancedBelow is a bottle with some additional trussing You can be creative as you want It all starts with a re-purposed container and the Jug Knot (and enough cord)
Related Instructables
AluminumBottle TumblerCup amp Cook Potfor an AlcoholStove byhpstoutharrow
Water BottleBelt Clip byuglymike Duct Tape
Water Bottle byrabidsquire2
AluminumBottle AlcoholStove byhpstoutharrow
DIYGlass WaterBottle byCulturespy
Solar WaterHeater forBackpackingUsing WaterBottles and aCar Shade bykopomeroy
Duct tape waterbottle holder(Photos) by pinkmarshmallow
How to make aCamelPack withan old plasticbottle bywillrandship
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Basic Knots Guideby zorro3355 on April 29 2008
Intro Basic Knots Guidehi
Step 1 Thumb knotThe most simple knotUsed as a stopper and prevent ropes from fraying
Step 2 Reef KnotUsed to tie two ropes of equal thickness togetherIt is pretty easy to tie and untie but under tentionit may be diffcult to untieIt is also not sutible for smoothropes(egnylon ropes)
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 3 Figure of eightused as a stopperprevent ropes from fraying and its more secure than tumb knot its is also used to tie Caribinas to ropes and is often used in rock climbing
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 4 Timber hitchused for pulling logs
Step 5 Clove hitchUsed to tie a rope onto a pole or logThe pole must be roundThe pole lust be thicker then the rope itself
(greatly used during pioneering)
Step 6 Sheet bandused to tie ropes of different thickness together(works on same thickness of ropes too)
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 7 Sheep shankTo shorten RopesTo prevent middle fraying
Step 8 Slip knotWhippingUsed as a grip for pulling things(when tied on a stick or small pole)(marlin spike hitch)
Related Instructables
Rope Rings byhpstoutharrow
How to Tie aFigure EightKnot byTactical_Pyro
Whippin (WestCountry Style)by tim_n
SurvivalBracelet(Updated) bytevers94
HangmansNoose PackClosure byPopEye42
Turkey on aTripod byhpstoutharrow
SurvivalBracelet II bytevers94 Zigzag Spooling
Paracord (video)by Stormdrane
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
How to Tie a Fire-escape Knotby leonardo ismael on October 16 2007
Intro How to Tie a Fire-escape KnotThis knot is used by firemen in case of fires for example imagine a scene where the ladder on the firetruck messes up but people need to get down a five story buildingor more All they have is a long piece of rope they can safely get down with a secure knot like the fire-escape knot So why not learn it its easy to do and hard to untieif you tie it tightly
This is from the American Boys Handbook
Step 1 Get Your RopeFirst grab a piece of rope and bend it like this to make a loop in it Follow every step to the smallest detail
Step 2 Twist the RopeNow make a twist like this and hold it together
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 3 Pull Through the TwistPull the loop through the twist you just made from underneath
Step 4 Go Over the Split EndNow pull the tail through the loop
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 5 FinallyAnd finally just pull it through as pictured below
Congratulations you just learned the fire-escape knot
Step 6 Same Name Not KnotThis is another knot called the fire-escape knot this shouldnt be your result
Related Instructables
House FireEscape Plan(video) byWhatHappensNowAdvice
ParacordLadder wWooden Rungsby josestude
Bed SheetEscape Rope byjessehensel
rope ladder(glow-in-the-dark version) bymikeasaurus
HeadlockEscape 2(video) byjohnnyrockstah
QuickFirestarter byMattandJora
Trail sauna byjakee117
How to Kill FireAnts andCommitGenocide byKentsOkay
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Climb Safe With A Figure 8 Knotby mattste on February 23 2010
Intro Climb Safe With A Figure 8 Knot There are many things that a beginning climber needs to know including several important knots Perhaps the most essential knot is the Figure 8 Follow Through Thistutorial will demonstrate how to correctly harness yourself to a rope using a Figure 8 Follow Through knot This knot is used primarily by rock climbers to provide a life-line Since this knot is used as a life-line it is very important to be able to tie it correctly (Your life could depend upon it)
Dont worry with this tutorial and about 5 minutes of practice you can have this knot mastered
Things you will need
- Climbing Harness- Climbing Rope
If you are wanting to go climbing and dont already have these items they can be purchased for about $25 each at most outdoor sporting goods stores If you are merelylooking to learn the knot a belt loop and a rope (about five feet long) will do
Image Notes1 Climbing Harness2 Climbing Rope
Step 1 Dealing With The RopeThroughout this tutorial I will be discussing different parts of the rope To make these instructions as clear as possible I will define a few terms that I will use throughoutthe tutorial The Anchor End of the rope will generally be at the top of the images This is the end that would be anchored to the wall or rock and does not move Wewill not be doing much with the anchored end The Tail End of the rope is the opposite end that we will be dealing with I will call this the tail for short
Now that we have some terms to work with lets get started
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 2 Tying The First Figure 8This knot has several parts to it The first part of the knot is just tying a basic figure 8 To tie the first figure 8 there are four simple steps
1 - Using the tail make a loop over the rope (as shown in the first picture) keeping in mind that there should be about 3 ft of slack on the tail end
2 - Wrap the tail back this time go under the anchored end (As shown in the second picture)
3 - Bring the tail down through the first loop (As shown in the third picture)
4 - Finally pull the two ends to make the knot a little bit tighter and easier to deal with (Shown in the fourth picture)
After these four steps you should end up with a knot that resembles a figure 8
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 3 Looping Into The Harness In order to secure the rope to the harness simply thread the tail end of the rope through the front loop in the harness as shown in the picture below This step isobviously very important
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 4 Following Back Through The Figure 8After looping the rope through the harness you have to thread the tail end of the rope back through the knot following the first figure 8 I have divided this process intofive smaller steps in order to make it more clear
1 - Coming form underneath the knot bring the tail up through the near loop and to the left behind the anchored end of the rope (Shown in the first picture)
2 - Wrap the tail around the anchored end back to the right and down through the adjacent loop (Shown in the second picture)
3 - You simply need to bring the tail back over the top of the knot to the left (Shown in the third picture)
4 - Bring the tail end up through the far loop following the anchored end (Shown in the fourth picture)
5 - Finally pull the knot tight (Shown in the fifth picture)
As you can see the first four pictures are simply tracing the knot back through with the tail end
For the last part while you pull the knot tight you may want to make small adjustments and rearrange how it all fits together If the knot does not lay perfectly smoothand tight its NOT a big deal
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 5 Finishing The Knot After completing the Figure 8 knot you will want to somehow secure the tail end of the rope out of the way There are a couple different ways to do this the way that Iwill demonstrate is using whats called a Stopper Knot This secondary knot is similar to a Fishermans knot and is pretty simple I have once again divided thisprocess into several smaller steps
1 - Start by wrapping the tail end around the anchored end (As shown in the first picture)
2 - Wrap the tail back underneath the two vertical segments (As shown in the second picture)
3 - Simply repeat the first two steps wrapping the tail around again (As shown in the third picture)
4 - This step in the fourth picture may look complicated but all you need to do is insert the tail up through the two loops that you have just made
5 - To finish off the knot you will want to slowly pull the tail end while gently pushing the bottom of the stopper knot upwards If you have successfully completed this knotit should look something like the fifth picture
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 6 Ready To Climb Now that you have mastered the Figure 8 knot you can securely harness yourself into a climbing rope Remember there are many other skills that go into setting up ananchor and belaying a climber This tutorial only covers the figure 8 knot For more information there are many great websites that demonstrate how to correctly set up asafe climbing system (Ive posted a few below) If you are a beginning climber I recommend that you read up on a few other climbing techniques Also you shouldprobably go to a climbing wall or gym where there are experienced climbers that can show you the ropes Hopefully this tutorial has been helpful Have fun and be safe
Some useful linkshttpwwwstephenprattnetAnchorsanchorshtmhttpwwwuoregonedu~oppclimbingtopicsanchorshtmlhttpwwwabc-of-rockclimbingcomhowtoclimbingtechniquesasp
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Related Instructables
How to Tie aFigure EightKnot byTactical_Pyro
Paracord KnotDisplay Bord byJamie bagn
Basic KnotsGuide byzorro3355
How to Climb aTree (withprussiks) bystasterisk
How to climb atree (using onlyrope) thefunsimple wayby louieaw
How to get arope into a tree(withoutclimbing it) byvitex
How to tievarious knots byadaviel
How to make arope swing byjdub0928
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Turks Head Knots on a Bottleby sklnxbones on July 6 2010
Intro Turks Head Knots on a BottleThis is the finished project A bottle decorated with three Turks Head Knots There are only three knots on this bottle The RED and the BLUE knots are each a 20 Bightby 3 Lead Turks Head Knots The WHITE knot is a 20 Bight by 19 Lead Turks Head Knot
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 1 Supplies
Cord Lots and Lots of cord I cant tell you how much each bottle is differentBottle Washed and Dried inside and out Make sure to remove all water spotsThreaded Needle Cord screws into the threads at the base of the needlePegs I use brass rivets used as a map to tie the Turks Head KnotsHole Punch Used to punch holes in the painters tape to hold the pegsPainters Tape To hold the pegs in place and to make your map for the Turks Head KnotsMarker To write on the painters tapeCloth Towel To remove finger prints and dirt from your bottleKrazy Glue or Super Glue This is used to secure the knots in place to the bottle
OPTIONAL BUT HIGHLY RECOMMENDEDI use the Turks Head Cookbook from KnotToolcom
Step 2 PreparationYou will need to find a bottle you like I used an empty instant tea bottle of course washed and dried (I like to put the bottle in the oven for a few minutes to dry the insidewithout water spots Take off the lid and do not put lid in the oven) Now measure the circumference of the bottle Take a cord and tightly wrap the cord around the bottleMark where the ends meet and use a ruler to measure the length of the cord For my instant tea bottle the circumference is 27cm I know from past knots that I have tiedthat I want my knot to have 20 Bights in the top and bottom (bands) knots I am going to use the Bights in the (bands) knots to tie the middle knot Now divide the numberof Bights (20) into the size of the circumference (27) to get the space between each Bight (135) With me so far
Now take two pieces of painters tape using a ruler measure out the length of the circumference and mark the length on the both pieces of tape Next you will mark thespace between each Bight on the tape
Step 3 Adding the PegsI like to use pegs when tying Turks Head Knots it just makes tying the knot easier
These are what I use for pegs
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 4 Adding Pegs to the TapeNow take a hole punch to cut holes in the tape where the lines meet You will place the pegs in the holes
Insert a peg in each hole and carefully stick the first piece of tape to the bottle
Step 5 Adding the 2nd row of pegsNow do the same thing with the second piece of tape The numbers on each piece of tape must line up
This picture shows you what you should have now This odd looking thing will be your map to tie the Turks Head Knot And this is the end of Step 1
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 6 Tying the first Turks Head KnotUsing the Turks Head Cookbook follow the numbers going over and under as indicated in the book I chose a 20 Bight by 3 Lead knot which will give me a nice bandaround the bottle Once the ends meet you have made one complete knot Tape the running end of your cord and start removing the pegs and the tape
Step 7 Remove the pegs and the tapeBe careful not to untie the knot as you remove the pegs and tape from the bottle Continue to remove all the pegs and remove the tape from the bottle At this point theknot will be very loose and will need to be tightened up
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 8 Remove the slack from the knotHere you can see just how much the knot expanded Starting with the standing end begin to pull the slack out of the knot going towards the running end of the cordDo not expect to pull all the slack out at once You may have to make 3 - 5 attempts at removing the slack out of the knot DO NOT remove all of the slack out of the knotIn order to make the bands we will have to triple the Turks Head Knot We will do this by following the knot three times The threaded needle will really come in handyhere
Step 9 Triple the KnotOnce you have made three passes of the Turks Head Knot use your needle to go under your knot about half the circumference and cut the cord The knot will be tightenough to hide the tail in placeTIP I carefully add a couple of drops of super glue UNDER the band to hold them in place and keep them from sliding around in the nextsteps A drop or two in 3 or 4 places around the band should be enough
Step 10 Add the second knotNow repeat this whole step for the second bandWhen tying the second band you must make sure the Bights line up to the first band This is crucial for the next stepWipe down the bottle to make sure all your finger prints and adhesive from the tape are all removed You want to make sure your bottle is clean at this point Any dirt orfinger prints left on the bottle will be almost impossible to remove From this point on we will use gloves when tying our last knot
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 11 Maping the Top KnotStick a piece of painters tape on top of your first band leaving the bottom of the knot exposedUse a marker to count the number of Bights in your knot Instead of using the pegs we are going to use the Bights to tie our next Turks Head Knot
Step 12 Mapping the Bottom KnotDo the same thing for the bottom band but you must make sure your numbers on top and bottom line up So 1 on top should be the same position as 1 on the bottom
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 13 Adding the last knotAgain using the Turks Head Cookbook and the threaded needle you are going to follow the instructions going over and under as indicated in the book Be sure to usegloves when ever you handle the bottle
Step 14 Thats ItFor this Turks Head Knot I am using a 20 Bight by 19 Lead knot
Because of the amount of cord you are working with your cord will get twisted and knotted You will have to un-twist the cord often Its a pain in the rear but it has to bedone And it has to be done alot
Continue to tie the knot until you finish the knot If you have the cord and the patience you can double or triple the knot When you are done use your needle to hide theends under your bands Cut the ends and your DONE
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Related Instructables
Monkeys FistFloatingKeychain byjokerlz
How To Make ATurks headKnot WithParacord byDoggie Stylish
Tying Trivetsout of Rope forHoliday Gifts bykylemarsh
Paracord KnotDisplay Bord byJamie bagn
How to Make ATurks Head(Photos) bymchs60chip
A pocket full ofknots byKiteman
Monkeys fistknot AND themonkey byjonathan111
TiteTie is theTruckers Knoton Steroids bytitetie
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Larks head noose -- an easy useful knot that tightens and loosensby Larry Breed on February 19 2009
Intro Larks head noose -- an easy useful knot that tightens and loosensI thought I knew all the basic knots but then I was taught this incredibly useful simple knot Its good for tying up the neck of a bag that you want to repeatedly open andsecurely close Its good for tying around a springy bundle that will need tightening and retightening And its easy to undo
Ive looked at knot literature but havent found a name for this so I named it The basic knot is well known its called a larks head Since all Ive done is to slip the twoends through the larks head to make a noose I call it that
WARNING Dont use this knot when human safety would depend on it Climbers and mountaineers have well-tested reliable knots for such situations
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Image Notes1 To tighten further step on this side of the larks head and pull the free ends
Step 1 Double the cord overThe larks head noose requires enough cord to go twice around your bundle plus a foot or two Find the center and double it over Sailors call this a bight
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 2 Form the larks headComing from below the bight hook your thumb and forefinger over the two sides Reach outward and downward and pinch your fingertips together underneath thedoubled cord
Youve made a larks head Move the crossing cord a little farther from your hand so theres a clear opening through the two half-loops
Step 3 Form the nooseSlip the two ends of the cord through the opening we were just talking about Pull the larks head tight so it grips the two cords Find something that needs constrictingand put the noose around it
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 4 Tightening retightening and lockingSlide the knot against the bundle If its not tight enough to keep from slipping tighten it by holding it in one hand and tugging on the cords one at a time with the otherhand Notice that you can slide the knot out again for instance to re-open the bag you just tied shut For some applications this may be as tight as you need it
A springy bundle probably still feels loose If so compress the bundle and get a new grip on the cords Rest your foot on the bundle on the cords nearest the larks headand pull to slide the larks head tighter
To make the knot more permanent you can lock it Make an overhand in the cord ends (Exactly like the first step in tying shoelaces) With your foot still on the bundlepull on the cords and move your hands apart until youre pulling in opposite directions You have just locked the larks head and you can trust it to stay that way()
But lets say that later on you want to loosen the locked knot Again put your foot on the bundle and cords nearest the larks head hold the two cord ends together andpull This makes a little slack between the overhand and the larks head so you can untie the overhand
In twine or small string the locking overhand knot may be difficult to undo Use a shoelace knot instead of an overhand and itll unlock easily
() If youre using slippery cord like polypropylene an overhand may not lock securely You may want to tie another overhand knot For added security wrap a shortlength of duct tape around the two cords close to the knot
Image Notes1 To tighten further step on this side of the larks head and pull the free ends
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Related Instructables
TRX fromParacordChallengeAccepted bythrake
A pocket full ofknots byKiteman
Lens CapLanyard by~teknoarsonist~ how to tie a
noose byawesume
AdjustableParacordGlassesLanyard byjdtwelve12
HangmansNoose PackClosure byPopEye42
Paraleash - ADog LeashFrom Paracordby The Ideanator
How to make arugged andhandy ParacordBelt by Jake22
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 7 Extend the BightExtend the Bight OVER the outer portion of the right Loop
Step 8 Flip the Right Loop behindAdditional colored identification points have been added to the loops to follow their travel in these next two steps
The right Loop Yellow marker is FLIPPED BEHIND the knot and ends up on the far left side of the knot
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 9 Flip the 2nd loop in frontRaise the green marker (located on what was formerly the left loop) and pull it down and to the right FLIPPING IT IN FRONT of the knot
Note the blue portion of the this loop will pass around the outside of the yellow portion of the first loop
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Image Notes1 Center of knot that will tighten around the bottles neck
Step 10 Remove SlackNote where the blue green amp yellow markers end up
Start to remove the slack in the loops by pulling the original main Bight (white marker top right) and the two free standing ends at the bottom
the bottle neck will pass through the very center of the knot
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Image Notes1 Center of knot that will tighten around the bottles neck
Step 11 Tighten the KnotAfter removing the slack insert the bottle neck and finish tightening
The knot should look like this before slipping it over the bottle
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 12 Secure on bottle neckThis is the finished knot shown on the neck of various containers
The loop end and the two free standing ends can be tied together to create a carrying handle (last picture below)
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 13 Aluminum Bottle Water Bottle
The next few steps show the features of an aluminum beer bottle re-purposed as a water bottle canteen It is one of many containers that can be reused as a camp waterbottle
The bottle was lightly sanded masked and then pained with a hammered finished paint to create an interesting surface texture
Image Notes1 Textured finish paint makes an interesting grip-able surface2 Masked with tape for painting3 Masked with tape for painting
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Image Notes1 Dowel used for holding the bottle during painting
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 14 Tethered Cork StopperUse a wine bottle man made Cork as a stopper for your aluminum water bottleNote Use a cork that was removed from the wine bottle without the corkscrew penetrating through the bottom end of the cork (A hole all the way through the cork willcause it to leak) Use the unpierced end of the cork inside the water bottle
Drill a hole through the sides of the Cork Thread the cord through the hole to the center of the cord Use the cork as the main Bight and tie the Jug knot as shown inthe beginning steps
Now the cork is tethered to the bottle and will not get lost or fall on the ground
A Carabiner clip passes through the other cord end to attache the water bottle to you belt or pack
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 15 Trussed for TransportThis is another hanging method for carrying your aluminum bottle water canteen A Jug knot is tied conventionally around the neck
The running ends of the knot however are pulled down towards the bottom of the bottle A Barrel Knot is tied about 34 the way down the side of the bottle A squareknot is tied on the bottom of the knot to keep the two running ends tight against the sides of the bottle
I like the look of the accent colored cord running down the sides of the bottle and the fact that the bottle hangs from the belt upside down It adds to its uniqueness
The last picture shows another truss variation
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 16 AdvancedBelow is a bottle with some additional trussing You can be creative as you want It all starts with a re-purposed container and the Jug Knot (and enough cord)
Related Instructables
AluminumBottle TumblerCup amp Cook Potfor an AlcoholStove byhpstoutharrow
Water BottleBelt Clip byuglymike Duct Tape
Water Bottle byrabidsquire2
AluminumBottle AlcoholStove byhpstoutharrow
DIYGlass WaterBottle byCulturespy
Solar WaterHeater forBackpackingUsing WaterBottles and aCar Shade bykopomeroy
Duct tape waterbottle holder(Photos) by pinkmarshmallow
How to make aCamelPack withan old plasticbottle bywillrandship
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Basic Knots Guideby zorro3355 on April 29 2008
Intro Basic Knots Guidehi
Step 1 Thumb knotThe most simple knotUsed as a stopper and prevent ropes from fraying
Step 2 Reef KnotUsed to tie two ropes of equal thickness togetherIt is pretty easy to tie and untie but under tentionit may be diffcult to untieIt is also not sutible for smoothropes(egnylon ropes)
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 3 Figure of eightused as a stopperprevent ropes from fraying and its more secure than tumb knot its is also used to tie Caribinas to ropes and is often used in rock climbing
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 4 Timber hitchused for pulling logs
Step 5 Clove hitchUsed to tie a rope onto a pole or logThe pole must be roundThe pole lust be thicker then the rope itself
(greatly used during pioneering)
Step 6 Sheet bandused to tie ropes of different thickness together(works on same thickness of ropes too)
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 7 Sheep shankTo shorten RopesTo prevent middle fraying
Step 8 Slip knotWhippingUsed as a grip for pulling things(when tied on a stick or small pole)(marlin spike hitch)
Related Instructables
Rope Rings byhpstoutharrow
How to Tie aFigure EightKnot byTactical_Pyro
Whippin (WestCountry Style)by tim_n
SurvivalBracelet(Updated) bytevers94
HangmansNoose PackClosure byPopEye42
Turkey on aTripod byhpstoutharrow
SurvivalBracelet II bytevers94 Zigzag Spooling
Paracord (video)by Stormdrane
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
How to Tie a Fire-escape Knotby leonardo ismael on October 16 2007
Intro How to Tie a Fire-escape KnotThis knot is used by firemen in case of fires for example imagine a scene where the ladder on the firetruck messes up but people need to get down a five story buildingor more All they have is a long piece of rope they can safely get down with a secure knot like the fire-escape knot So why not learn it its easy to do and hard to untieif you tie it tightly
This is from the American Boys Handbook
Step 1 Get Your RopeFirst grab a piece of rope and bend it like this to make a loop in it Follow every step to the smallest detail
Step 2 Twist the RopeNow make a twist like this and hold it together
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 3 Pull Through the TwistPull the loop through the twist you just made from underneath
Step 4 Go Over the Split EndNow pull the tail through the loop
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 5 FinallyAnd finally just pull it through as pictured below
Congratulations you just learned the fire-escape knot
Step 6 Same Name Not KnotThis is another knot called the fire-escape knot this shouldnt be your result
Related Instructables
House FireEscape Plan(video) byWhatHappensNowAdvice
ParacordLadder wWooden Rungsby josestude
Bed SheetEscape Rope byjessehensel
rope ladder(glow-in-the-dark version) bymikeasaurus
HeadlockEscape 2(video) byjohnnyrockstah
QuickFirestarter byMattandJora
Trail sauna byjakee117
How to Kill FireAnts andCommitGenocide byKentsOkay
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Climb Safe With A Figure 8 Knotby mattste on February 23 2010
Intro Climb Safe With A Figure 8 Knot There are many things that a beginning climber needs to know including several important knots Perhaps the most essential knot is the Figure 8 Follow Through Thistutorial will demonstrate how to correctly harness yourself to a rope using a Figure 8 Follow Through knot This knot is used primarily by rock climbers to provide a life-line Since this knot is used as a life-line it is very important to be able to tie it correctly (Your life could depend upon it)
Dont worry with this tutorial and about 5 minutes of practice you can have this knot mastered
Things you will need
- Climbing Harness- Climbing Rope
If you are wanting to go climbing and dont already have these items they can be purchased for about $25 each at most outdoor sporting goods stores If you are merelylooking to learn the knot a belt loop and a rope (about five feet long) will do
Image Notes1 Climbing Harness2 Climbing Rope
Step 1 Dealing With The RopeThroughout this tutorial I will be discussing different parts of the rope To make these instructions as clear as possible I will define a few terms that I will use throughoutthe tutorial The Anchor End of the rope will generally be at the top of the images This is the end that would be anchored to the wall or rock and does not move Wewill not be doing much with the anchored end The Tail End of the rope is the opposite end that we will be dealing with I will call this the tail for short
Now that we have some terms to work with lets get started
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 2 Tying The First Figure 8This knot has several parts to it The first part of the knot is just tying a basic figure 8 To tie the first figure 8 there are four simple steps
1 - Using the tail make a loop over the rope (as shown in the first picture) keeping in mind that there should be about 3 ft of slack on the tail end
2 - Wrap the tail back this time go under the anchored end (As shown in the second picture)
3 - Bring the tail down through the first loop (As shown in the third picture)
4 - Finally pull the two ends to make the knot a little bit tighter and easier to deal with (Shown in the fourth picture)
After these four steps you should end up with a knot that resembles a figure 8
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 3 Looping Into The Harness In order to secure the rope to the harness simply thread the tail end of the rope through the front loop in the harness as shown in the picture below This step isobviously very important
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 4 Following Back Through The Figure 8After looping the rope through the harness you have to thread the tail end of the rope back through the knot following the first figure 8 I have divided this process intofive smaller steps in order to make it more clear
1 - Coming form underneath the knot bring the tail up through the near loop and to the left behind the anchored end of the rope (Shown in the first picture)
2 - Wrap the tail around the anchored end back to the right and down through the adjacent loop (Shown in the second picture)
3 - You simply need to bring the tail back over the top of the knot to the left (Shown in the third picture)
4 - Bring the tail end up through the far loop following the anchored end (Shown in the fourth picture)
5 - Finally pull the knot tight (Shown in the fifth picture)
As you can see the first four pictures are simply tracing the knot back through with the tail end
For the last part while you pull the knot tight you may want to make small adjustments and rearrange how it all fits together If the knot does not lay perfectly smoothand tight its NOT a big deal
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 5 Finishing The Knot After completing the Figure 8 knot you will want to somehow secure the tail end of the rope out of the way There are a couple different ways to do this the way that Iwill demonstrate is using whats called a Stopper Knot This secondary knot is similar to a Fishermans knot and is pretty simple I have once again divided thisprocess into several smaller steps
1 - Start by wrapping the tail end around the anchored end (As shown in the first picture)
2 - Wrap the tail back underneath the two vertical segments (As shown in the second picture)
3 - Simply repeat the first two steps wrapping the tail around again (As shown in the third picture)
4 - This step in the fourth picture may look complicated but all you need to do is insert the tail up through the two loops that you have just made
5 - To finish off the knot you will want to slowly pull the tail end while gently pushing the bottom of the stopper knot upwards If you have successfully completed this knotit should look something like the fifth picture
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 6 Ready To Climb Now that you have mastered the Figure 8 knot you can securely harness yourself into a climbing rope Remember there are many other skills that go into setting up ananchor and belaying a climber This tutorial only covers the figure 8 knot For more information there are many great websites that demonstrate how to correctly set up asafe climbing system (Ive posted a few below) If you are a beginning climber I recommend that you read up on a few other climbing techniques Also you shouldprobably go to a climbing wall or gym where there are experienced climbers that can show you the ropes Hopefully this tutorial has been helpful Have fun and be safe
Some useful linkshttpwwwstephenprattnetAnchorsanchorshtmhttpwwwuoregonedu~oppclimbingtopicsanchorshtmlhttpwwwabc-of-rockclimbingcomhowtoclimbingtechniquesasp
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Related Instructables
How to Tie aFigure EightKnot byTactical_Pyro
Paracord KnotDisplay Bord byJamie bagn
Basic KnotsGuide byzorro3355
How to Climb aTree (withprussiks) bystasterisk
How to climb atree (using onlyrope) thefunsimple wayby louieaw
How to get arope into a tree(withoutclimbing it) byvitex
How to tievarious knots byadaviel
How to make arope swing byjdub0928
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Turks Head Knots on a Bottleby sklnxbones on July 6 2010
Intro Turks Head Knots on a BottleThis is the finished project A bottle decorated with three Turks Head Knots There are only three knots on this bottle The RED and the BLUE knots are each a 20 Bightby 3 Lead Turks Head Knots The WHITE knot is a 20 Bight by 19 Lead Turks Head Knot
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 1 Supplies
Cord Lots and Lots of cord I cant tell you how much each bottle is differentBottle Washed and Dried inside and out Make sure to remove all water spotsThreaded Needle Cord screws into the threads at the base of the needlePegs I use brass rivets used as a map to tie the Turks Head KnotsHole Punch Used to punch holes in the painters tape to hold the pegsPainters Tape To hold the pegs in place and to make your map for the Turks Head KnotsMarker To write on the painters tapeCloth Towel To remove finger prints and dirt from your bottleKrazy Glue or Super Glue This is used to secure the knots in place to the bottle
OPTIONAL BUT HIGHLY RECOMMENDEDI use the Turks Head Cookbook from KnotToolcom
Step 2 PreparationYou will need to find a bottle you like I used an empty instant tea bottle of course washed and dried (I like to put the bottle in the oven for a few minutes to dry the insidewithout water spots Take off the lid and do not put lid in the oven) Now measure the circumference of the bottle Take a cord and tightly wrap the cord around the bottleMark where the ends meet and use a ruler to measure the length of the cord For my instant tea bottle the circumference is 27cm I know from past knots that I have tiedthat I want my knot to have 20 Bights in the top and bottom (bands) knots I am going to use the Bights in the (bands) knots to tie the middle knot Now divide the numberof Bights (20) into the size of the circumference (27) to get the space between each Bight (135) With me so far
Now take two pieces of painters tape using a ruler measure out the length of the circumference and mark the length on the both pieces of tape Next you will mark thespace between each Bight on the tape
Step 3 Adding the PegsI like to use pegs when tying Turks Head Knots it just makes tying the knot easier
These are what I use for pegs
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 4 Adding Pegs to the TapeNow take a hole punch to cut holes in the tape where the lines meet You will place the pegs in the holes
Insert a peg in each hole and carefully stick the first piece of tape to the bottle
Step 5 Adding the 2nd row of pegsNow do the same thing with the second piece of tape The numbers on each piece of tape must line up
This picture shows you what you should have now This odd looking thing will be your map to tie the Turks Head Knot And this is the end of Step 1
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 6 Tying the first Turks Head KnotUsing the Turks Head Cookbook follow the numbers going over and under as indicated in the book I chose a 20 Bight by 3 Lead knot which will give me a nice bandaround the bottle Once the ends meet you have made one complete knot Tape the running end of your cord and start removing the pegs and the tape
Step 7 Remove the pegs and the tapeBe careful not to untie the knot as you remove the pegs and tape from the bottle Continue to remove all the pegs and remove the tape from the bottle At this point theknot will be very loose and will need to be tightened up
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 8 Remove the slack from the knotHere you can see just how much the knot expanded Starting with the standing end begin to pull the slack out of the knot going towards the running end of the cordDo not expect to pull all the slack out at once You may have to make 3 - 5 attempts at removing the slack out of the knot DO NOT remove all of the slack out of the knotIn order to make the bands we will have to triple the Turks Head Knot We will do this by following the knot three times The threaded needle will really come in handyhere
Step 9 Triple the KnotOnce you have made three passes of the Turks Head Knot use your needle to go under your knot about half the circumference and cut the cord The knot will be tightenough to hide the tail in placeTIP I carefully add a couple of drops of super glue UNDER the band to hold them in place and keep them from sliding around in the nextsteps A drop or two in 3 or 4 places around the band should be enough
Step 10 Add the second knotNow repeat this whole step for the second bandWhen tying the second band you must make sure the Bights line up to the first band This is crucial for the next stepWipe down the bottle to make sure all your finger prints and adhesive from the tape are all removed You want to make sure your bottle is clean at this point Any dirt orfinger prints left on the bottle will be almost impossible to remove From this point on we will use gloves when tying our last knot
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 11 Maping the Top KnotStick a piece of painters tape on top of your first band leaving the bottom of the knot exposedUse a marker to count the number of Bights in your knot Instead of using the pegs we are going to use the Bights to tie our next Turks Head Knot
Step 12 Mapping the Bottom KnotDo the same thing for the bottom band but you must make sure your numbers on top and bottom line up So 1 on top should be the same position as 1 on the bottom
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 13 Adding the last knotAgain using the Turks Head Cookbook and the threaded needle you are going to follow the instructions going over and under as indicated in the book Be sure to usegloves when ever you handle the bottle
Step 14 Thats ItFor this Turks Head Knot I am using a 20 Bight by 19 Lead knot
Because of the amount of cord you are working with your cord will get twisted and knotted You will have to un-twist the cord often Its a pain in the rear but it has to bedone And it has to be done alot
Continue to tie the knot until you finish the knot If you have the cord and the patience you can double or triple the knot When you are done use your needle to hide theends under your bands Cut the ends and your DONE
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Related Instructables
Monkeys FistFloatingKeychain byjokerlz
How To Make ATurks headKnot WithParacord byDoggie Stylish
Tying Trivetsout of Rope forHoliday Gifts bykylemarsh
Paracord KnotDisplay Bord byJamie bagn
How to Make ATurks Head(Photos) bymchs60chip
A pocket full ofknots byKiteman
Monkeys fistknot AND themonkey byjonathan111
TiteTie is theTruckers Knoton Steroids bytitetie
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Larks head noose -- an easy useful knot that tightens and loosensby Larry Breed on February 19 2009
Intro Larks head noose -- an easy useful knot that tightens and loosensI thought I knew all the basic knots but then I was taught this incredibly useful simple knot Its good for tying up the neck of a bag that you want to repeatedly open andsecurely close Its good for tying around a springy bundle that will need tightening and retightening And its easy to undo
Ive looked at knot literature but havent found a name for this so I named it The basic knot is well known its called a larks head Since all Ive done is to slip the twoends through the larks head to make a noose I call it that
WARNING Dont use this knot when human safety would depend on it Climbers and mountaineers have well-tested reliable knots for such situations
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Image Notes1 To tighten further step on this side of the larks head and pull the free ends
Step 1 Double the cord overThe larks head noose requires enough cord to go twice around your bundle plus a foot or two Find the center and double it over Sailors call this a bight
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 2 Form the larks headComing from below the bight hook your thumb and forefinger over the two sides Reach outward and downward and pinch your fingertips together underneath thedoubled cord
Youve made a larks head Move the crossing cord a little farther from your hand so theres a clear opening through the two half-loops
Step 3 Form the nooseSlip the two ends of the cord through the opening we were just talking about Pull the larks head tight so it grips the two cords Find something that needs constrictingand put the noose around it
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 4 Tightening retightening and lockingSlide the knot against the bundle If its not tight enough to keep from slipping tighten it by holding it in one hand and tugging on the cords one at a time with the otherhand Notice that you can slide the knot out again for instance to re-open the bag you just tied shut For some applications this may be as tight as you need it
A springy bundle probably still feels loose If so compress the bundle and get a new grip on the cords Rest your foot on the bundle on the cords nearest the larks headand pull to slide the larks head tighter
To make the knot more permanent you can lock it Make an overhand in the cord ends (Exactly like the first step in tying shoelaces) With your foot still on the bundlepull on the cords and move your hands apart until youre pulling in opposite directions You have just locked the larks head and you can trust it to stay that way()
But lets say that later on you want to loosen the locked knot Again put your foot on the bundle and cords nearest the larks head hold the two cord ends together andpull This makes a little slack between the overhand and the larks head so you can untie the overhand
In twine or small string the locking overhand knot may be difficult to undo Use a shoelace knot instead of an overhand and itll unlock easily
() If youre using slippery cord like polypropylene an overhand may not lock securely You may want to tie another overhand knot For added security wrap a shortlength of duct tape around the two cords close to the knot
Image Notes1 To tighten further step on this side of the larks head and pull the free ends
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Related Instructables
TRX fromParacordChallengeAccepted bythrake
A pocket full ofknots byKiteman
Lens CapLanyard by~teknoarsonist~ how to tie a
noose byawesume
AdjustableParacordGlassesLanyard byjdtwelve12
HangmansNoose PackClosure byPopEye42
Paraleash - ADog LeashFrom Paracordby The Ideanator
How to make arugged andhandy ParacordBelt by Jake22
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 9 Flip the 2nd loop in frontRaise the green marker (located on what was formerly the left loop) and pull it down and to the right FLIPPING IT IN FRONT of the knot
Note the blue portion of the this loop will pass around the outside of the yellow portion of the first loop
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Image Notes1 Center of knot that will tighten around the bottles neck
Step 10 Remove SlackNote where the blue green amp yellow markers end up
Start to remove the slack in the loops by pulling the original main Bight (white marker top right) and the two free standing ends at the bottom
the bottle neck will pass through the very center of the knot
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Image Notes1 Center of knot that will tighten around the bottles neck
Step 11 Tighten the KnotAfter removing the slack insert the bottle neck and finish tightening
The knot should look like this before slipping it over the bottle
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 12 Secure on bottle neckThis is the finished knot shown on the neck of various containers
The loop end and the two free standing ends can be tied together to create a carrying handle (last picture below)
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 13 Aluminum Bottle Water Bottle
The next few steps show the features of an aluminum beer bottle re-purposed as a water bottle canteen It is one of many containers that can be reused as a camp waterbottle
The bottle was lightly sanded masked and then pained with a hammered finished paint to create an interesting surface texture
Image Notes1 Textured finish paint makes an interesting grip-able surface2 Masked with tape for painting3 Masked with tape for painting
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Image Notes1 Dowel used for holding the bottle during painting
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 14 Tethered Cork StopperUse a wine bottle man made Cork as a stopper for your aluminum water bottleNote Use a cork that was removed from the wine bottle without the corkscrew penetrating through the bottom end of the cork (A hole all the way through the cork willcause it to leak) Use the unpierced end of the cork inside the water bottle
Drill a hole through the sides of the Cork Thread the cord through the hole to the center of the cord Use the cork as the main Bight and tie the Jug knot as shown inthe beginning steps
Now the cork is tethered to the bottle and will not get lost or fall on the ground
A Carabiner clip passes through the other cord end to attache the water bottle to you belt or pack
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 15 Trussed for TransportThis is another hanging method for carrying your aluminum bottle water canteen A Jug knot is tied conventionally around the neck
The running ends of the knot however are pulled down towards the bottom of the bottle A Barrel Knot is tied about 34 the way down the side of the bottle A squareknot is tied on the bottom of the knot to keep the two running ends tight against the sides of the bottle
I like the look of the accent colored cord running down the sides of the bottle and the fact that the bottle hangs from the belt upside down It adds to its uniqueness
The last picture shows another truss variation
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 16 AdvancedBelow is a bottle with some additional trussing You can be creative as you want It all starts with a re-purposed container and the Jug Knot (and enough cord)
Related Instructables
AluminumBottle TumblerCup amp Cook Potfor an AlcoholStove byhpstoutharrow
Water BottleBelt Clip byuglymike Duct Tape
Water Bottle byrabidsquire2
AluminumBottle AlcoholStove byhpstoutharrow
DIYGlass WaterBottle byCulturespy
Solar WaterHeater forBackpackingUsing WaterBottles and aCar Shade bykopomeroy
Duct tape waterbottle holder(Photos) by pinkmarshmallow
How to make aCamelPack withan old plasticbottle bywillrandship
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Basic Knots Guideby zorro3355 on April 29 2008
Intro Basic Knots Guidehi
Step 1 Thumb knotThe most simple knotUsed as a stopper and prevent ropes from fraying
Step 2 Reef KnotUsed to tie two ropes of equal thickness togetherIt is pretty easy to tie and untie but under tentionit may be diffcult to untieIt is also not sutible for smoothropes(egnylon ropes)
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 3 Figure of eightused as a stopperprevent ropes from fraying and its more secure than tumb knot its is also used to tie Caribinas to ropes and is often used in rock climbing
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 4 Timber hitchused for pulling logs
Step 5 Clove hitchUsed to tie a rope onto a pole or logThe pole must be roundThe pole lust be thicker then the rope itself
(greatly used during pioneering)
Step 6 Sheet bandused to tie ropes of different thickness together(works on same thickness of ropes too)
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 7 Sheep shankTo shorten RopesTo prevent middle fraying
Step 8 Slip knotWhippingUsed as a grip for pulling things(when tied on a stick or small pole)(marlin spike hitch)
Related Instructables
Rope Rings byhpstoutharrow
How to Tie aFigure EightKnot byTactical_Pyro
Whippin (WestCountry Style)by tim_n
SurvivalBracelet(Updated) bytevers94
HangmansNoose PackClosure byPopEye42
Turkey on aTripod byhpstoutharrow
SurvivalBracelet II bytevers94 Zigzag Spooling
Paracord (video)by Stormdrane
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
How to Tie a Fire-escape Knotby leonardo ismael on October 16 2007
Intro How to Tie a Fire-escape KnotThis knot is used by firemen in case of fires for example imagine a scene where the ladder on the firetruck messes up but people need to get down a five story buildingor more All they have is a long piece of rope they can safely get down with a secure knot like the fire-escape knot So why not learn it its easy to do and hard to untieif you tie it tightly
This is from the American Boys Handbook
Step 1 Get Your RopeFirst grab a piece of rope and bend it like this to make a loop in it Follow every step to the smallest detail
Step 2 Twist the RopeNow make a twist like this and hold it together
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 3 Pull Through the TwistPull the loop through the twist you just made from underneath
Step 4 Go Over the Split EndNow pull the tail through the loop
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 5 FinallyAnd finally just pull it through as pictured below
Congratulations you just learned the fire-escape knot
Step 6 Same Name Not KnotThis is another knot called the fire-escape knot this shouldnt be your result
Related Instructables
House FireEscape Plan(video) byWhatHappensNowAdvice
ParacordLadder wWooden Rungsby josestude
Bed SheetEscape Rope byjessehensel
rope ladder(glow-in-the-dark version) bymikeasaurus
HeadlockEscape 2(video) byjohnnyrockstah
QuickFirestarter byMattandJora
Trail sauna byjakee117
How to Kill FireAnts andCommitGenocide byKentsOkay
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Climb Safe With A Figure 8 Knotby mattste on February 23 2010
Intro Climb Safe With A Figure 8 Knot There are many things that a beginning climber needs to know including several important knots Perhaps the most essential knot is the Figure 8 Follow Through Thistutorial will demonstrate how to correctly harness yourself to a rope using a Figure 8 Follow Through knot This knot is used primarily by rock climbers to provide a life-line Since this knot is used as a life-line it is very important to be able to tie it correctly (Your life could depend upon it)
Dont worry with this tutorial and about 5 minutes of practice you can have this knot mastered
Things you will need
- Climbing Harness- Climbing Rope
If you are wanting to go climbing and dont already have these items they can be purchased for about $25 each at most outdoor sporting goods stores If you are merelylooking to learn the knot a belt loop and a rope (about five feet long) will do
Image Notes1 Climbing Harness2 Climbing Rope
Step 1 Dealing With The RopeThroughout this tutorial I will be discussing different parts of the rope To make these instructions as clear as possible I will define a few terms that I will use throughoutthe tutorial The Anchor End of the rope will generally be at the top of the images This is the end that would be anchored to the wall or rock and does not move Wewill not be doing much with the anchored end The Tail End of the rope is the opposite end that we will be dealing with I will call this the tail for short
Now that we have some terms to work with lets get started
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 2 Tying The First Figure 8This knot has several parts to it The first part of the knot is just tying a basic figure 8 To tie the first figure 8 there are four simple steps
1 - Using the tail make a loop over the rope (as shown in the first picture) keeping in mind that there should be about 3 ft of slack on the tail end
2 - Wrap the tail back this time go under the anchored end (As shown in the second picture)
3 - Bring the tail down through the first loop (As shown in the third picture)
4 - Finally pull the two ends to make the knot a little bit tighter and easier to deal with (Shown in the fourth picture)
After these four steps you should end up with a knot that resembles a figure 8
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 3 Looping Into The Harness In order to secure the rope to the harness simply thread the tail end of the rope through the front loop in the harness as shown in the picture below This step isobviously very important
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 4 Following Back Through The Figure 8After looping the rope through the harness you have to thread the tail end of the rope back through the knot following the first figure 8 I have divided this process intofive smaller steps in order to make it more clear
1 - Coming form underneath the knot bring the tail up through the near loop and to the left behind the anchored end of the rope (Shown in the first picture)
2 - Wrap the tail around the anchored end back to the right and down through the adjacent loop (Shown in the second picture)
3 - You simply need to bring the tail back over the top of the knot to the left (Shown in the third picture)
4 - Bring the tail end up through the far loop following the anchored end (Shown in the fourth picture)
5 - Finally pull the knot tight (Shown in the fifth picture)
As you can see the first four pictures are simply tracing the knot back through with the tail end
For the last part while you pull the knot tight you may want to make small adjustments and rearrange how it all fits together If the knot does not lay perfectly smoothand tight its NOT a big deal
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 5 Finishing The Knot After completing the Figure 8 knot you will want to somehow secure the tail end of the rope out of the way There are a couple different ways to do this the way that Iwill demonstrate is using whats called a Stopper Knot This secondary knot is similar to a Fishermans knot and is pretty simple I have once again divided thisprocess into several smaller steps
1 - Start by wrapping the tail end around the anchored end (As shown in the first picture)
2 - Wrap the tail back underneath the two vertical segments (As shown in the second picture)
3 - Simply repeat the first two steps wrapping the tail around again (As shown in the third picture)
4 - This step in the fourth picture may look complicated but all you need to do is insert the tail up through the two loops that you have just made
5 - To finish off the knot you will want to slowly pull the tail end while gently pushing the bottom of the stopper knot upwards If you have successfully completed this knotit should look something like the fifth picture
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 6 Ready To Climb Now that you have mastered the Figure 8 knot you can securely harness yourself into a climbing rope Remember there are many other skills that go into setting up ananchor and belaying a climber This tutorial only covers the figure 8 knot For more information there are many great websites that demonstrate how to correctly set up asafe climbing system (Ive posted a few below) If you are a beginning climber I recommend that you read up on a few other climbing techniques Also you shouldprobably go to a climbing wall or gym where there are experienced climbers that can show you the ropes Hopefully this tutorial has been helpful Have fun and be safe
Some useful linkshttpwwwstephenprattnetAnchorsanchorshtmhttpwwwuoregonedu~oppclimbingtopicsanchorshtmlhttpwwwabc-of-rockclimbingcomhowtoclimbingtechniquesasp
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Related Instructables
How to Tie aFigure EightKnot byTactical_Pyro
Paracord KnotDisplay Bord byJamie bagn
Basic KnotsGuide byzorro3355
How to Climb aTree (withprussiks) bystasterisk
How to climb atree (using onlyrope) thefunsimple wayby louieaw
How to get arope into a tree(withoutclimbing it) byvitex
How to tievarious knots byadaviel
How to make arope swing byjdub0928
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Turks Head Knots on a Bottleby sklnxbones on July 6 2010
Intro Turks Head Knots on a BottleThis is the finished project A bottle decorated with three Turks Head Knots There are only three knots on this bottle The RED and the BLUE knots are each a 20 Bightby 3 Lead Turks Head Knots The WHITE knot is a 20 Bight by 19 Lead Turks Head Knot
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 1 Supplies
Cord Lots and Lots of cord I cant tell you how much each bottle is differentBottle Washed and Dried inside and out Make sure to remove all water spotsThreaded Needle Cord screws into the threads at the base of the needlePegs I use brass rivets used as a map to tie the Turks Head KnotsHole Punch Used to punch holes in the painters tape to hold the pegsPainters Tape To hold the pegs in place and to make your map for the Turks Head KnotsMarker To write on the painters tapeCloth Towel To remove finger prints and dirt from your bottleKrazy Glue or Super Glue This is used to secure the knots in place to the bottle
OPTIONAL BUT HIGHLY RECOMMENDEDI use the Turks Head Cookbook from KnotToolcom
Step 2 PreparationYou will need to find a bottle you like I used an empty instant tea bottle of course washed and dried (I like to put the bottle in the oven for a few minutes to dry the insidewithout water spots Take off the lid and do not put lid in the oven) Now measure the circumference of the bottle Take a cord and tightly wrap the cord around the bottleMark where the ends meet and use a ruler to measure the length of the cord For my instant tea bottle the circumference is 27cm I know from past knots that I have tiedthat I want my knot to have 20 Bights in the top and bottom (bands) knots I am going to use the Bights in the (bands) knots to tie the middle knot Now divide the numberof Bights (20) into the size of the circumference (27) to get the space between each Bight (135) With me so far
Now take two pieces of painters tape using a ruler measure out the length of the circumference and mark the length on the both pieces of tape Next you will mark thespace between each Bight on the tape
Step 3 Adding the PegsI like to use pegs when tying Turks Head Knots it just makes tying the knot easier
These are what I use for pegs
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 4 Adding Pegs to the TapeNow take a hole punch to cut holes in the tape where the lines meet You will place the pegs in the holes
Insert a peg in each hole and carefully stick the first piece of tape to the bottle
Step 5 Adding the 2nd row of pegsNow do the same thing with the second piece of tape The numbers on each piece of tape must line up
This picture shows you what you should have now This odd looking thing will be your map to tie the Turks Head Knot And this is the end of Step 1
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 6 Tying the first Turks Head KnotUsing the Turks Head Cookbook follow the numbers going over and under as indicated in the book I chose a 20 Bight by 3 Lead knot which will give me a nice bandaround the bottle Once the ends meet you have made one complete knot Tape the running end of your cord and start removing the pegs and the tape
Step 7 Remove the pegs and the tapeBe careful not to untie the knot as you remove the pegs and tape from the bottle Continue to remove all the pegs and remove the tape from the bottle At this point theknot will be very loose and will need to be tightened up
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 8 Remove the slack from the knotHere you can see just how much the knot expanded Starting with the standing end begin to pull the slack out of the knot going towards the running end of the cordDo not expect to pull all the slack out at once You may have to make 3 - 5 attempts at removing the slack out of the knot DO NOT remove all of the slack out of the knotIn order to make the bands we will have to triple the Turks Head Knot We will do this by following the knot three times The threaded needle will really come in handyhere
Step 9 Triple the KnotOnce you have made three passes of the Turks Head Knot use your needle to go under your knot about half the circumference and cut the cord The knot will be tightenough to hide the tail in placeTIP I carefully add a couple of drops of super glue UNDER the band to hold them in place and keep them from sliding around in the nextsteps A drop or two in 3 or 4 places around the band should be enough
Step 10 Add the second knotNow repeat this whole step for the second bandWhen tying the second band you must make sure the Bights line up to the first band This is crucial for the next stepWipe down the bottle to make sure all your finger prints and adhesive from the tape are all removed You want to make sure your bottle is clean at this point Any dirt orfinger prints left on the bottle will be almost impossible to remove From this point on we will use gloves when tying our last knot
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 11 Maping the Top KnotStick a piece of painters tape on top of your first band leaving the bottom of the knot exposedUse a marker to count the number of Bights in your knot Instead of using the pegs we are going to use the Bights to tie our next Turks Head Knot
Step 12 Mapping the Bottom KnotDo the same thing for the bottom band but you must make sure your numbers on top and bottom line up So 1 on top should be the same position as 1 on the bottom
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 13 Adding the last knotAgain using the Turks Head Cookbook and the threaded needle you are going to follow the instructions going over and under as indicated in the book Be sure to usegloves when ever you handle the bottle
Step 14 Thats ItFor this Turks Head Knot I am using a 20 Bight by 19 Lead knot
Because of the amount of cord you are working with your cord will get twisted and knotted You will have to un-twist the cord often Its a pain in the rear but it has to bedone And it has to be done alot
Continue to tie the knot until you finish the knot If you have the cord and the patience you can double or triple the knot When you are done use your needle to hide theends under your bands Cut the ends and your DONE
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Related Instructables
Monkeys FistFloatingKeychain byjokerlz
How To Make ATurks headKnot WithParacord byDoggie Stylish
Tying Trivetsout of Rope forHoliday Gifts bykylemarsh
Paracord KnotDisplay Bord byJamie bagn
How to Make ATurks Head(Photos) bymchs60chip
A pocket full ofknots byKiteman
Monkeys fistknot AND themonkey byjonathan111
TiteTie is theTruckers Knoton Steroids bytitetie
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Larks head noose -- an easy useful knot that tightens and loosensby Larry Breed on February 19 2009
Intro Larks head noose -- an easy useful knot that tightens and loosensI thought I knew all the basic knots but then I was taught this incredibly useful simple knot Its good for tying up the neck of a bag that you want to repeatedly open andsecurely close Its good for tying around a springy bundle that will need tightening and retightening And its easy to undo
Ive looked at knot literature but havent found a name for this so I named it The basic knot is well known its called a larks head Since all Ive done is to slip the twoends through the larks head to make a noose I call it that
WARNING Dont use this knot when human safety would depend on it Climbers and mountaineers have well-tested reliable knots for such situations
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Image Notes1 To tighten further step on this side of the larks head and pull the free ends
Step 1 Double the cord overThe larks head noose requires enough cord to go twice around your bundle plus a foot or two Find the center and double it over Sailors call this a bight
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 2 Form the larks headComing from below the bight hook your thumb and forefinger over the two sides Reach outward and downward and pinch your fingertips together underneath thedoubled cord
Youve made a larks head Move the crossing cord a little farther from your hand so theres a clear opening through the two half-loops
Step 3 Form the nooseSlip the two ends of the cord through the opening we were just talking about Pull the larks head tight so it grips the two cords Find something that needs constrictingand put the noose around it
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 4 Tightening retightening and lockingSlide the knot against the bundle If its not tight enough to keep from slipping tighten it by holding it in one hand and tugging on the cords one at a time with the otherhand Notice that you can slide the knot out again for instance to re-open the bag you just tied shut For some applications this may be as tight as you need it
A springy bundle probably still feels loose If so compress the bundle and get a new grip on the cords Rest your foot on the bundle on the cords nearest the larks headand pull to slide the larks head tighter
To make the knot more permanent you can lock it Make an overhand in the cord ends (Exactly like the first step in tying shoelaces) With your foot still on the bundlepull on the cords and move your hands apart until youre pulling in opposite directions You have just locked the larks head and you can trust it to stay that way()
But lets say that later on you want to loosen the locked knot Again put your foot on the bundle and cords nearest the larks head hold the two cord ends together andpull This makes a little slack between the overhand and the larks head so you can untie the overhand
In twine or small string the locking overhand knot may be difficult to undo Use a shoelace knot instead of an overhand and itll unlock easily
() If youre using slippery cord like polypropylene an overhand may not lock securely You may want to tie another overhand knot For added security wrap a shortlength of duct tape around the two cords close to the knot
Image Notes1 To tighten further step on this side of the larks head and pull the free ends
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Related Instructables
TRX fromParacordChallengeAccepted bythrake
A pocket full ofknots byKiteman
Lens CapLanyard by~teknoarsonist~ how to tie a
noose byawesume
AdjustableParacordGlassesLanyard byjdtwelve12
HangmansNoose PackClosure byPopEye42
Paraleash - ADog LeashFrom Paracordby The Ideanator
How to make arugged andhandy ParacordBelt by Jake22
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Image Notes1 Center of knot that will tighten around the bottles neck
Step 10 Remove SlackNote where the blue green amp yellow markers end up
Start to remove the slack in the loops by pulling the original main Bight (white marker top right) and the two free standing ends at the bottom
the bottle neck will pass through the very center of the knot
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Image Notes1 Center of knot that will tighten around the bottles neck
Step 11 Tighten the KnotAfter removing the slack insert the bottle neck and finish tightening
The knot should look like this before slipping it over the bottle
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 12 Secure on bottle neckThis is the finished knot shown on the neck of various containers
The loop end and the two free standing ends can be tied together to create a carrying handle (last picture below)
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 13 Aluminum Bottle Water Bottle
The next few steps show the features of an aluminum beer bottle re-purposed as a water bottle canteen It is one of many containers that can be reused as a camp waterbottle
The bottle was lightly sanded masked and then pained with a hammered finished paint to create an interesting surface texture
Image Notes1 Textured finish paint makes an interesting grip-able surface2 Masked with tape for painting3 Masked with tape for painting
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Image Notes1 Dowel used for holding the bottle during painting
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 14 Tethered Cork StopperUse a wine bottle man made Cork as a stopper for your aluminum water bottleNote Use a cork that was removed from the wine bottle without the corkscrew penetrating through the bottom end of the cork (A hole all the way through the cork willcause it to leak) Use the unpierced end of the cork inside the water bottle
Drill a hole through the sides of the Cork Thread the cord through the hole to the center of the cord Use the cork as the main Bight and tie the Jug knot as shown inthe beginning steps
Now the cork is tethered to the bottle and will not get lost or fall on the ground
A Carabiner clip passes through the other cord end to attache the water bottle to you belt or pack
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 15 Trussed for TransportThis is another hanging method for carrying your aluminum bottle water canteen A Jug knot is tied conventionally around the neck
The running ends of the knot however are pulled down towards the bottom of the bottle A Barrel Knot is tied about 34 the way down the side of the bottle A squareknot is tied on the bottom of the knot to keep the two running ends tight against the sides of the bottle
I like the look of the accent colored cord running down the sides of the bottle and the fact that the bottle hangs from the belt upside down It adds to its uniqueness
The last picture shows another truss variation
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 16 AdvancedBelow is a bottle with some additional trussing You can be creative as you want It all starts with a re-purposed container and the Jug Knot (and enough cord)
Related Instructables
AluminumBottle TumblerCup amp Cook Potfor an AlcoholStove byhpstoutharrow
Water BottleBelt Clip byuglymike Duct Tape
Water Bottle byrabidsquire2
AluminumBottle AlcoholStove byhpstoutharrow
DIYGlass WaterBottle byCulturespy
Solar WaterHeater forBackpackingUsing WaterBottles and aCar Shade bykopomeroy
Duct tape waterbottle holder(Photos) by pinkmarshmallow
How to make aCamelPack withan old plasticbottle bywillrandship
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Basic Knots Guideby zorro3355 on April 29 2008
Intro Basic Knots Guidehi
Step 1 Thumb knotThe most simple knotUsed as a stopper and prevent ropes from fraying
Step 2 Reef KnotUsed to tie two ropes of equal thickness togetherIt is pretty easy to tie and untie but under tentionit may be diffcult to untieIt is also not sutible for smoothropes(egnylon ropes)
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 3 Figure of eightused as a stopperprevent ropes from fraying and its more secure than tumb knot its is also used to tie Caribinas to ropes and is often used in rock climbing
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 4 Timber hitchused for pulling logs
Step 5 Clove hitchUsed to tie a rope onto a pole or logThe pole must be roundThe pole lust be thicker then the rope itself
(greatly used during pioneering)
Step 6 Sheet bandused to tie ropes of different thickness together(works on same thickness of ropes too)
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 7 Sheep shankTo shorten RopesTo prevent middle fraying
Step 8 Slip knotWhippingUsed as a grip for pulling things(when tied on a stick or small pole)(marlin spike hitch)
Related Instructables
Rope Rings byhpstoutharrow
How to Tie aFigure EightKnot byTactical_Pyro
Whippin (WestCountry Style)by tim_n
SurvivalBracelet(Updated) bytevers94
HangmansNoose PackClosure byPopEye42
Turkey on aTripod byhpstoutharrow
SurvivalBracelet II bytevers94 Zigzag Spooling
Paracord (video)by Stormdrane
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
How to Tie a Fire-escape Knotby leonardo ismael on October 16 2007
Intro How to Tie a Fire-escape KnotThis knot is used by firemen in case of fires for example imagine a scene where the ladder on the firetruck messes up but people need to get down a five story buildingor more All they have is a long piece of rope they can safely get down with a secure knot like the fire-escape knot So why not learn it its easy to do and hard to untieif you tie it tightly
This is from the American Boys Handbook
Step 1 Get Your RopeFirst grab a piece of rope and bend it like this to make a loop in it Follow every step to the smallest detail
Step 2 Twist the RopeNow make a twist like this and hold it together
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 3 Pull Through the TwistPull the loop through the twist you just made from underneath
Step 4 Go Over the Split EndNow pull the tail through the loop
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 5 FinallyAnd finally just pull it through as pictured below
Congratulations you just learned the fire-escape knot
Step 6 Same Name Not KnotThis is another knot called the fire-escape knot this shouldnt be your result
Related Instructables
House FireEscape Plan(video) byWhatHappensNowAdvice
ParacordLadder wWooden Rungsby josestude
Bed SheetEscape Rope byjessehensel
rope ladder(glow-in-the-dark version) bymikeasaurus
HeadlockEscape 2(video) byjohnnyrockstah
QuickFirestarter byMattandJora
Trail sauna byjakee117
How to Kill FireAnts andCommitGenocide byKentsOkay
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Climb Safe With A Figure 8 Knotby mattste on February 23 2010
Intro Climb Safe With A Figure 8 Knot There are many things that a beginning climber needs to know including several important knots Perhaps the most essential knot is the Figure 8 Follow Through Thistutorial will demonstrate how to correctly harness yourself to a rope using a Figure 8 Follow Through knot This knot is used primarily by rock climbers to provide a life-line Since this knot is used as a life-line it is very important to be able to tie it correctly (Your life could depend upon it)
Dont worry with this tutorial and about 5 minutes of practice you can have this knot mastered
Things you will need
- Climbing Harness- Climbing Rope
If you are wanting to go climbing and dont already have these items they can be purchased for about $25 each at most outdoor sporting goods stores If you are merelylooking to learn the knot a belt loop and a rope (about five feet long) will do
Image Notes1 Climbing Harness2 Climbing Rope
Step 1 Dealing With The RopeThroughout this tutorial I will be discussing different parts of the rope To make these instructions as clear as possible I will define a few terms that I will use throughoutthe tutorial The Anchor End of the rope will generally be at the top of the images This is the end that would be anchored to the wall or rock and does not move Wewill not be doing much with the anchored end The Tail End of the rope is the opposite end that we will be dealing with I will call this the tail for short
Now that we have some terms to work with lets get started
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 2 Tying The First Figure 8This knot has several parts to it The first part of the knot is just tying a basic figure 8 To tie the first figure 8 there are four simple steps
1 - Using the tail make a loop over the rope (as shown in the first picture) keeping in mind that there should be about 3 ft of slack on the tail end
2 - Wrap the tail back this time go under the anchored end (As shown in the second picture)
3 - Bring the tail down through the first loop (As shown in the third picture)
4 - Finally pull the two ends to make the knot a little bit tighter and easier to deal with (Shown in the fourth picture)
After these four steps you should end up with a knot that resembles a figure 8
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 3 Looping Into The Harness In order to secure the rope to the harness simply thread the tail end of the rope through the front loop in the harness as shown in the picture below This step isobviously very important
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 4 Following Back Through The Figure 8After looping the rope through the harness you have to thread the tail end of the rope back through the knot following the first figure 8 I have divided this process intofive smaller steps in order to make it more clear
1 - Coming form underneath the knot bring the tail up through the near loop and to the left behind the anchored end of the rope (Shown in the first picture)
2 - Wrap the tail around the anchored end back to the right and down through the adjacent loop (Shown in the second picture)
3 - You simply need to bring the tail back over the top of the knot to the left (Shown in the third picture)
4 - Bring the tail end up through the far loop following the anchored end (Shown in the fourth picture)
5 - Finally pull the knot tight (Shown in the fifth picture)
As you can see the first four pictures are simply tracing the knot back through with the tail end
For the last part while you pull the knot tight you may want to make small adjustments and rearrange how it all fits together If the knot does not lay perfectly smoothand tight its NOT a big deal
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 5 Finishing The Knot After completing the Figure 8 knot you will want to somehow secure the tail end of the rope out of the way There are a couple different ways to do this the way that Iwill demonstrate is using whats called a Stopper Knot This secondary knot is similar to a Fishermans knot and is pretty simple I have once again divided thisprocess into several smaller steps
1 - Start by wrapping the tail end around the anchored end (As shown in the first picture)
2 - Wrap the tail back underneath the two vertical segments (As shown in the second picture)
3 - Simply repeat the first two steps wrapping the tail around again (As shown in the third picture)
4 - This step in the fourth picture may look complicated but all you need to do is insert the tail up through the two loops that you have just made
5 - To finish off the knot you will want to slowly pull the tail end while gently pushing the bottom of the stopper knot upwards If you have successfully completed this knotit should look something like the fifth picture
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 6 Ready To Climb Now that you have mastered the Figure 8 knot you can securely harness yourself into a climbing rope Remember there are many other skills that go into setting up ananchor and belaying a climber This tutorial only covers the figure 8 knot For more information there are many great websites that demonstrate how to correctly set up asafe climbing system (Ive posted a few below) If you are a beginning climber I recommend that you read up on a few other climbing techniques Also you shouldprobably go to a climbing wall or gym where there are experienced climbers that can show you the ropes Hopefully this tutorial has been helpful Have fun and be safe
Some useful linkshttpwwwstephenprattnetAnchorsanchorshtmhttpwwwuoregonedu~oppclimbingtopicsanchorshtmlhttpwwwabc-of-rockclimbingcomhowtoclimbingtechniquesasp
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Related Instructables
How to Tie aFigure EightKnot byTactical_Pyro
Paracord KnotDisplay Bord byJamie bagn
Basic KnotsGuide byzorro3355
How to Climb aTree (withprussiks) bystasterisk
How to climb atree (using onlyrope) thefunsimple wayby louieaw
How to get arope into a tree(withoutclimbing it) byvitex
How to tievarious knots byadaviel
How to make arope swing byjdub0928
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Turks Head Knots on a Bottleby sklnxbones on July 6 2010
Intro Turks Head Knots on a BottleThis is the finished project A bottle decorated with three Turks Head Knots There are only three knots on this bottle The RED and the BLUE knots are each a 20 Bightby 3 Lead Turks Head Knots The WHITE knot is a 20 Bight by 19 Lead Turks Head Knot
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 1 Supplies
Cord Lots and Lots of cord I cant tell you how much each bottle is differentBottle Washed and Dried inside and out Make sure to remove all water spotsThreaded Needle Cord screws into the threads at the base of the needlePegs I use brass rivets used as a map to tie the Turks Head KnotsHole Punch Used to punch holes in the painters tape to hold the pegsPainters Tape To hold the pegs in place and to make your map for the Turks Head KnotsMarker To write on the painters tapeCloth Towel To remove finger prints and dirt from your bottleKrazy Glue or Super Glue This is used to secure the knots in place to the bottle
OPTIONAL BUT HIGHLY RECOMMENDEDI use the Turks Head Cookbook from KnotToolcom
Step 2 PreparationYou will need to find a bottle you like I used an empty instant tea bottle of course washed and dried (I like to put the bottle in the oven for a few minutes to dry the insidewithout water spots Take off the lid and do not put lid in the oven) Now measure the circumference of the bottle Take a cord and tightly wrap the cord around the bottleMark where the ends meet and use a ruler to measure the length of the cord For my instant tea bottle the circumference is 27cm I know from past knots that I have tiedthat I want my knot to have 20 Bights in the top and bottom (bands) knots I am going to use the Bights in the (bands) knots to tie the middle knot Now divide the numberof Bights (20) into the size of the circumference (27) to get the space between each Bight (135) With me so far
Now take two pieces of painters tape using a ruler measure out the length of the circumference and mark the length on the both pieces of tape Next you will mark thespace between each Bight on the tape
Step 3 Adding the PegsI like to use pegs when tying Turks Head Knots it just makes tying the knot easier
These are what I use for pegs
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 4 Adding Pegs to the TapeNow take a hole punch to cut holes in the tape where the lines meet You will place the pegs in the holes
Insert a peg in each hole and carefully stick the first piece of tape to the bottle
Step 5 Adding the 2nd row of pegsNow do the same thing with the second piece of tape The numbers on each piece of tape must line up
This picture shows you what you should have now This odd looking thing will be your map to tie the Turks Head Knot And this is the end of Step 1
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 6 Tying the first Turks Head KnotUsing the Turks Head Cookbook follow the numbers going over and under as indicated in the book I chose a 20 Bight by 3 Lead knot which will give me a nice bandaround the bottle Once the ends meet you have made one complete knot Tape the running end of your cord and start removing the pegs and the tape
Step 7 Remove the pegs and the tapeBe careful not to untie the knot as you remove the pegs and tape from the bottle Continue to remove all the pegs and remove the tape from the bottle At this point theknot will be very loose and will need to be tightened up
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 8 Remove the slack from the knotHere you can see just how much the knot expanded Starting with the standing end begin to pull the slack out of the knot going towards the running end of the cordDo not expect to pull all the slack out at once You may have to make 3 - 5 attempts at removing the slack out of the knot DO NOT remove all of the slack out of the knotIn order to make the bands we will have to triple the Turks Head Knot We will do this by following the knot three times The threaded needle will really come in handyhere
Step 9 Triple the KnotOnce you have made three passes of the Turks Head Knot use your needle to go under your knot about half the circumference and cut the cord The knot will be tightenough to hide the tail in placeTIP I carefully add a couple of drops of super glue UNDER the band to hold them in place and keep them from sliding around in the nextsteps A drop or two in 3 or 4 places around the band should be enough
Step 10 Add the second knotNow repeat this whole step for the second bandWhen tying the second band you must make sure the Bights line up to the first band This is crucial for the next stepWipe down the bottle to make sure all your finger prints and adhesive from the tape are all removed You want to make sure your bottle is clean at this point Any dirt orfinger prints left on the bottle will be almost impossible to remove From this point on we will use gloves when tying our last knot
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 11 Maping the Top KnotStick a piece of painters tape on top of your first band leaving the bottom of the knot exposedUse a marker to count the number of Bights in your knot Instead of using the pegs we are going to use the Bights to tie our next Turks Head Knot
Step 12 Mapping the Bottom KnotDo the same thing for the bottom band but you must make sure your numbers on top and bottom line up So 1 on top should be the same position as 1 on the bottom
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 13 Adding the last knotAgain using the Turks Head Cookbook and the threaded needle you are going to follow the instructions going over and under as indicated in the book Be sure to usegloves when ever you handle the bottle
Step 14 Thats ItFor this Turks Head Knot I am using a 20 Bight by 19 Lead knot
Because of the amount of cord you are working with your cord will get twisted and knotted You will have to un-twist the cord often Its a pain in the rear but it has to bedone And it has to be done alot
Continue to tie the knot until you finish the knot If you have the cord and the patience you can double or triple the knot When you are done use your needle to hide theends under your bands Cut the ends and your DONE
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Related Instructables
Monkeys FistFloatingKeychain byjokerlz
How To Make ATurks headKnot WithParacord byDoggie Stylish
Tying Trivetsout of Rope forHoliday Gifts bykylemarsh
Paracord KnotDisplay Bord byJamie bagn
How to Make ATurks Head(Photos) bymchs60chip
A pocket full ofknots byKiteman
Monkeys fistknot AND themonkey byjonathan111
TiteTie is theTruckers Knoton Steroids bytitetie
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Larks head noose -- an easy useful knot that tightens and loosensby Larry Breed on February 19 2009
Intro Larks head noose -- an easy useful knot that tightens and loosensI thought I knew all the basic knots but then I was taught this incredibly useful simple knot Its good for tying up the neck of a bag that you want to repeatedly open andsecurely close Its good for tying around a springy bundle that will need tightening and retightening And its easy to undo
Ive looked at knot literature but havent found a name for this so I named it The basic knot is well known its called a larks head Since all Ive done is to slip the twoends through the larks head to make a noose I call it that
WARNING Dont use this knot when human safety would depend on it Climbers and mountaineers have well-tested reliable knots for such situations
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Image Notes1 To tighten further step on this side of the larks head and pull the free ends
Step 1 Double the cord overThe larks head noose requires enough cord to go twice around your bundle plus a foot or two Find the center and double it over Sailors call this a bight
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 2 Form the larks headComing from below the bight hook your thumb and forefinger over the two sides Reach outward and downward and pinch your fingertips together underneath thedoubled cord
Youve made a larks head Move the crossing cord a little farther from your hand so theres a clear opening through the two half-loops
Step 3 Form the nooseSlip the two ends of the cord through the opening we were just talking about Pull the larks head tight so it grips the two cords Find something that needs constrictingand put the noose around it
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 4 Tightening retightening and lockingSlide the knot against the bundle If its not tight enough to keep from slipping tighten it by holding it in one hand and tugging on the cords one at a time with the otherhand Notice that you can slide the knot out again for instance to re-open the bag you just tied shut For some applications this may be as tight as you need it
A springy bundle probably still feels loose If so compress the bundle and get a new grip on the cords Rest your foot on the bundle on the cords nearest the larks headand pull to slide the larks head tighter
To make the knot more permanent you can lock it Make an overhand in the cord ends (Exactly like the first step in tying shoelaces) With your foot still on the bundlepull on the cords and move your hands apart until youre pulling in opposite directions You have just locked the larks head and you can trust it to stay that way()
But lets say that later on you want to loosen the locked knot Again put your foot on the bundle and cords nearest the larks head hold the two cord ends together andpull This makes a little slack between the overhand and the larks head so you can untie the overhand
In twine or small string the locking overhand knot may be difficult to undo Use a shoelace knot instead of an overhand and itll unlock easily
() If youre using slippery cord like polypropylene an overhand may not lock securely You may want to tie another overhand knot For added security wrap a shortlength of duct tape around the two cords close to the knot
Image Notes1 To tighten further step on this side of the larks head and pull the free ends
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Related Instructables
TRX fromParacordChallengeAccepted bythrake
A pocket full ofknots byKiteman
Lens CapLanyard by~teknoarsonist~ how to tie a
noose byawesume
AdjustableParacordGlassesLanyard byjdtwelve12
HangmansNoose PackClosure byPopEye42
Paraleash - ADog LeashFrom Paracordby The Ideanator
How to make arugged andhandy ParacordBelt by Jake22
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Image Notes1 Center of knot that will tighten around the bottles neck
Step 11 Tighten the KnotAfter removing the slack insert the bottle neck and finish tightening
The knot should look like this before slipping it over the bottle
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 12 Secure on bottle neckThis is the finished knot shown on the neck of various containers
The loop end and the two free standing ends can be tied together to create a carrying handle (last picture below)
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 13 Aluminum Bottle Water Bottle
The next few steps show the features of an aluminum beer bottle re-purposed as a water bottle canteen It is one of many containers that can be reused as a camp waterbottle
The bottle was lightly sanded masked and then pained with a hammered finished paint to create an interesting surface texture
Image Notes1 Textured finish paint makes an interesting grip-able surface2 Masked with tape for painting3 Masked with tape for painting
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Image Notes1 Dowel used for holding the bottle during painting
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 14 Tethered Cork StopperUse a wine bottle man made Cork as a stopper for your aluminum water bottleNote Use a cork that was removed from the wine bottle without the corkscrew penetrating through the bottom end of the cork (A hole all the way through the cork willcause it to leak) Use the unpierced end of the cork inside the water bottle
Drill a hole through the sides of the Cork Thread the cord through the hole to the center of the cord Use the cork as the main Bight and tie the Jug knot as shown inthe beginning steps
Now the cork is tethered to the bottle and will not get lost or fall on the ground
A Carabiner clip passes through the other cord end to attache the water bottle to you belt or pack
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 15 Trussed for TransportThis is another hanging method for carrying your aluminum bottle water canteen A Jug knot is tied conventionally around the neck
The running ends of the knot however are pulled down towards the bottom of the bottle A Barrel Knot is tied about 34 the way down the side of the bottle A squareknot is tied on the bottom of the knot to keep the two running ends tight against the sides of the bottle
I like the look of the accent colored cord running down the sides of the bottle and the fact that the bottle hangs from the belt upside down It adds to its uniqueness
The last picture shows another truss variation
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 16 AdvancedBelow is a bottle with some additional trussing You can be creative as you want It all starts with a re-purposed container and the Jug Knot (and enough cord)
Related Instructables
AluminumBottle TumblerCup amp Cook Potfor an AlcoholStove byhpstoutharrow
Water BottleBelt Clip byuglymike Duct Tape
Water Bottle byrabidsquire2
AluminumBottle AlcoholStove byhpstoutharrow
DIYGlass WaterBottle byCulturespy
Solar WaterHeater forBackpackingUsing WaterBottles and aCar Shade bykopomeroy
Duct tape waterbottle holder(Photos) by pinkmarshmallow
How to make aCamelPack withan old plasticbottle bywillrandship
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Basic Knots Guideby zorro3355 on April 29 2008
Intro Basic Knots Guidehi
Step 1 Thumb knotThe most simple knotUsed as a stopper and prevent ropes from fraying
Step 2 Reef KnotUsed to tie two ropes of equal thickness togetherIt is pretty easy to tie and untie but under tentionit may be diffcult to untieIt is also not sutible for smoothropes(egnylon ropes)
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 3 Figure of eightused as a stopperprevent ropes from fraying and its more secure than tumb knot its is also used to tie Caribinas to ropes and is often used in rock climbing
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 4 Timber hitchused for pulling logs
Step 5 Clove hitchUsed to tie a rope onto a pole or logThe pole must be roundThe pole lust be thicker then the rope itself
(greatly used during pioneering)
Step 6 Sheet bandused to tie ropes of different thickness together(works on same thickness of ropes too)
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 7 Sheep shankTo shorten RopesTo prevent middle fraying
Step 8 Slip knotWhippingUsed as a grip for pulling things(when tied on a stick or small pole)(marlin spike hitch)
Related Instructables
Rope Rings byhpstoutharrow
How to Tie aFigure EightKnot byTactical_Pyro
Whippin (WestCountry Style)by tim_n
SurvivalBracelet(Updated) bytevers94
HangmansNoose PackClosure byPopEye42
Turkey on aTripod byhpstoutharrow
SurvivalBracelet II bytevers94 Zigzag Spooling
Paracord (video)by Stormdrane
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
How to Tie a Fire-escape Knotby leonardo ismael on October 16 2007
Intro How to Tie a Fire-escape KnotThis knot is used by firemen in case of fires for example imagine a scene where the ladder on the firetruck messes up but people need to get down a five story buildingor more All they have is a long piece of rope they can safely get down with a secure knot like the fire-escape knot So why not learn it its easy to do and hard to untieif you tie it tightly
This is from the American Boys Handbook
Step 1 Get Your RopeFirst grab a piece of rope and bend it like this to make a loop in it Follow every step to the smallest detail
Step 2 Twist the RopeNow make a twist like this and hold it together
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 3 Pull Through the TwistPull the loop through the twist you just made from underneath
Step 4 Go Over the Split EndNow pull the tail through the loop
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 5 FinallyAnd finally just pull it through as pictured below
Congratulations you just learned the fire-escape knot
Step 6 Same Name Not KnotThis is another knot called the fire-escape knot this shouldnt be your result
Related Instructables
House FireEscape Plan(video) byWhatHappensNowAdvice
ParacordLadder wWooden Rungsby josestude
Bed SheetEscape Rope byjessehensel
rope ladder(glow-in-the-dark version) bymikeasaurus
HeadlockEscape 2(video) byjohnnyrockstah
QuickFirestarter byMattandJora
Trail sauna byjakee117
How to Kill FireAnts andCommitGenocide byKentsOkay
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Climb Safe With A Figure 8 Knotby mattste on February 23 2010
Intro Climb Safe With A Figure 8 Knot There are many things that a beginning climber needs to know including several important knots Perhaps the most essential knot is the Figure 8 Follow Through Thistutorial will demonstrate how to correctly harness yourself to a rope using a Figure 8 Follow Through knot This knot is used primarily by rock climbers to provide a life-line Since this knot is used as a life-line it is very important to be able to tie it correctly (Your life could depend upon it)
Dont worry with this tutorial and about 5 minutes of practice you can have this knot mastered
Things you will need
- Climbing Harness- Climbing Rope
If you are wanting to go climbing and dont already have these items they can be purchased for about $25 each at most outdoor sporting goods stores If you are merelylooking to learn the knot a belt loop and a rope (about five feet long) will do
Image Notes1 Climbing Harness2 Climbing Rope
Step 1 Dealing With The RopeThroughout this tutorial I will be discussing different parts of the rope To make these instructions as clear as possible I will define a few terms that I will use throughoutthe tutorial The Anchor End of the rope will generally be at the top of the images This is the end that would be anchored to the wall or rock and does not move Wewill not be doing much with the anchored end The Tail End of the rope is the opposite end that we will be dealing with I will call this the tail for short
Now that we have some terms to work with lets get started
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 2 Tying The First Figure 8This knot has several parts to it The first part of the knot is just tying a basic figure 8 To tie the first figure 8 there are four simple steps
1 - Using the tail make a loop over the rope (as shown in the first picture) keeping in mind that there should be about 3 ft of slack on the tail end
2 - Wrap the tail back this time go under the anchored end (As shown in the second picture)
3 - Bring the tail down through the first loop (As shown in the third picture)
4 - Finally pull the two ends to make the knot a little bit tighter and easier to deal with (Shown in the fourth picture)
After these four steps you should end up with a knot that resembles a figure 8
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 3 Looping Into The Harness In order to secure the rope to the harness simply thread the tail end of the rope through the front loop in the harness as shown in the picture below This step isobviously very important
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 4 Following Back Through The Figure 8After looping the rope through the harness you have to thread the tail end of the rope back through the knot following the first figure 8 I have divided this process intofive smaller steps in order to make it more clear
1 - Coming form underneath the knot bring the tail up through the near loop and to the left behind the anchored end of the rope (Shown in the first picture)
2 - Wrap the tail around the anchored end back to the right and down through the adjacent loop (Shown in the second picture)
3 - You simply need to bring the tail back over the top of the knot to the left (Shown in the third picture)
4 - Bring the tail end up through the far loop following the anchored end (Shown in the fourth picture)
5 - Finally pull the knot tight (Shown in the fifth picture)
As you can see the first four pictures are simply tracing the knot back through with the tail end
For the last part while you pull the knot tight you may want to make small adjustments and rearrange how it all fits together If the knot does not lay perfectly smoothand tight its NOT a big deal
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 5 Finishing The Knot After completing the Figure 8 knot you will want to somehow secure the tail end of the rope out of the way There are a couple different ways to do this the way that Iwill demonstrate is using whats called a Stopper Knot This secondary knot is similar to a Fishermans knot and is pretty simple I have once again divided thisprocess into several smaller steps
1 - Start by wrapping the tail end around the anchored end (As shown in the first picture)
2 - Wrap the tail back underneath the two vertical segments (As shown in the second picture)
3 - Simply repeat the first two steps wrapping the tail around again (As shown in the third picture)
4 - This step in the fourth picture may look complicated but all you need to do is insert the tail up through the two loops that you have just made
5 - To finish off the knot you will want to slowly pull the tail end while gently pushing the bottom of the stopper knot upwards If you have successfully completed this knotit should look something like the fifth picture
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 6 Ready To Climb Now that you have mastered the Figure 8 knot you can securely harness yourself into a climbing rope Remember there are many other skills that go into setting up ananchor and belaying a climber This tutorial only covers the figure 8 knot For more information there are many great websites that demonstrate how to correctly set up asafe climbing system (Ive posted a few below) If you are a beginning climber I recommend that you read up on a few other climbing techniques Also you shouldprobably go to a climbing wall or gym where there are experienced climbers that can show you the ropes Hopefully this tutorial has been helpful Have fun and be safe
Some useful linkshttpwwwstephenprattnetAnchorsanchorshtmhttpwwwuoregonedu~oppclimbingtopicsanchorshtmlhttpwwwabc-of-rockclimbingcomhowtoclimbingtechniquesasp
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Related Instructables
How to Tie aFigure EightKnot byTactical_Pyro
Paracord KnotDisplay Bord byJamie bagn
Basic KnotsGuide byzorro3355
How to Climb aTree (withprussiks) bystasterisk
How to climb atree (using onlyrope) thefunsimple wayby louieaw
How to get arope into a tree(withoutclimbing it) byvitex
How to tievarious knots byadaviel
How to make arope swing byjdub0928
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Turks Head Knots on a Bottleby sklnxbones on July 6 2010
Intro Turks Head Knots on a BottleThis is the finished project A bottle decorated with three Turks Head Knots There are only three knots on this bottle The RED and the BLUE knots are each a 20 Bightby 3 Lead Turks Head Knots The WHITE knot is a 20 Bight by 19 Lead Turks Head Knot
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 1 Supplies
Cord Lots and Lots of cord I cant tell you how much each bottle is differentBottle Washed and Dried inside and out Make sure to remove all water spotsThreaded Needle Cord screws into the threads at the base of the needlePegs I use brass rivets used as a map to tie the Turks Head KnotsHole Punch Used to punch holes in the painters tape to hold the pegsPainters Tape To hold the pegs in place and to make your map for the Turks Head KnotsMarker To write on the painters tapeCloth Towel To remove finger prints and dirt from your bottleKrazy Glue or Super Glue This is used to secure the knots in place to the bottle
OPTIONAL BUT HIGHLY RECOMMENDEDI use the Turks Head Cookbook from KnotToolcom
Step 2 PreparationYou will need to find a bottle you like I used an empty instant tea bottle of course washed and dried (I like to put the bottle in the oven for a few minutes to dry the insidewithout water spots Take off the lid and do not put lid in the oven) Now measure the circumference of the bottle Take a cord and tightly wrap the cord around the bottleMark where the ends meet and use a ruler to measure the length of the cord For my instant tea bottle the circumference is 27cm I know from past knots that I have tiedthat I want my knot to have 20 Bights in the top and bottom (bands) knots I am going to use the Bights in the (bands) knots to tie the middle knot Now divide the numberof Bights (20) into the size of the circumference (27) to get the space between each Bight (135) With me so far
Now take two pieces of painters tape using a ruler measure out the length of the circumference and mark the length on the both pieces of tape Next you will mark thespace between each Bight on the tape
Step 3 Adding the PegsI like to use pegs when tying Turks Head Knots it just makes tying the knot easier
These are what I use for pegs
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 4 Adding Pegs to the TapeNow take a hole punch to cut holes in the tape where the lines meet You will place the pegs in the holes
Insert a peg in each hole and carefully stick the first piece of tape to the bottle
Step 5 Adding the 2nd row of pegsNow do the same thing with the second piece of tape The numbers on each piece of tape must line up
This picture shows you what you should have now This odd looking thing will be your map to tie the Turks Head Knot And this is the end of Step 1
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 6 Tying the first Turks Head KnotUsing the Turks Head Cookbook follow the numbers going over and under as indicated in the book I chose a 20 Bight by 3 Lead knot which will give me a nice bandaround the bottle Once the ends meet you have made one complete knot Tape the running end of your cord and start removing the pegs and the tape
Step 7 Remove the pegs and the tapeBe careful not to untie the knot as you remove the pegs and tape from the bottle Continue to remove all the pegs and remove the tape from the bottle At this point theknot will be very loose and will need to be tightened up
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 8 Remove the slack from the knotHere you can see just how much the knot expanded Starting with the standing end begin to pull the slack out of the knot going towards the running end of the cordDo not expect to pull all the slack out at once You may have to make 3 - 5 attempts at removing the slack out of the knot DO NOT remove all of the slack out of the knotIn order to make the bands we will have to triple the Turks Head Knot We will do this by following the knot three times The threaded needle will really come in handyhere
Step 9 Triple the KnotOnce you have made three passes of the Turks Head Knot use your needle to go under your knot about half the circumference and cut the cord The knot will be tightenough to hide the tail in placeTIP I carefully add a couple of drops of super glue UNDER the band to hold them in place and keep them from sliding around in the nextsteps A drop or two in 3 or 4 places around the band should be enough
Step 10 Add the second knotNow repeat this whole step for the second bandWhen tying the second band you must make sure the Bights line up to the first band This is crucial for the next stepWipe down the bottle to make sure all your finger prints and adhesive from the tape are all removed You want to make sure your bottle is clean at this point Any dirt orfinger prints left on the bottle will be almost impossible to remove From this point on we will use gloves when tying our last knot
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 11 Maping the Top KnotStick a piece of painters tape on top of your first band leaving the bottom of the knot exposedUse a marker to count the number of Bights in your knot Instead of using the pegs we are going to use the Bights to tie our next Turks Head Knot
Step 12 Mapping the Bottom KnotDo the same thing for the bottom band but you must make sure your numbers on top and bottom line up So 1 on top should be the same position as 1 on the bottom
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 13 Adding the last knotAgain using the Turks Head Cookbook and the threaded needle you are going to follow the instructions going over and under as indicated in the book Be sure to usegloves when ever you handle the bottle
Step 14 Thats ItFor this Turks Head Knot I am using a 20 Bight by 19 Lead knot
Because of the amount of cord you are working with your cord will get twisted and knotted You will have to un-twist the cord often Its a pain in the rear but it has to bedone And it has to be done alot
Continue to tie the knot until you finish the knot If you have the cord and the patience you can double or triple the knot When you are done use your needle to hide theends under your bands Cut the ends and your DONE
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Related Instructables
Monkeys FistFloatingKeychain byjokerlz
How To Make ATurks headKnot WithParacord byDoggie Stylish
Tying Trivetsout of Rope forHoliday Gifts bykylemarsh
Paracord KnotDisplay Bord byJamie bagn
How to Make ATurks Head(Photos) bymchs60chip
A pocket full ofknots byKiteman
Monkeys fistknot AND themonkey byjonathan111
TiteTie is theTruckers Knoton Steroids bytitetie
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Larks head noose -- an easy useful knot that tightens and loosensby Larry Breed on February 19 2009
Intro Larks head noose -- an easy useful knot that tightens and loosensI thought I knew all the basic knots but then I was taught this incredibly useful simple knot Its good for tying up the neck of a bag that you want to repeatedly open andsecurely close Its good for tying around a springy bundle that will need tightening and retightening And its easy to undo
Ive looked at knot literature but havent found a name for this so I named it The basic knot is well known its called a larks head Since all Ive done is to slip the twoends through the larks head to make a noose I call it that
WARNING Dont use this knot when human safety would depend on it Climbers and mountaineers have well-tested reliable knots for such situations
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Image Notes1 To tighten further step on this side of the larks head and pull the free ends
Step 1 Double the cord overThe larks head noose requires enough cord to go twice around your bundle plus a foot or two Find the center and double it over Sailors call this a bight
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 2 Form the larks headComing from below the bight hook your thumb and forefinger over the two sides Reach outward and downward and pinch your fingertips together underneath thedoubled cord
Youve made a larks head Move the crossing cord a little farther from your hand so theres a clear opening through the two half-loops
Step 3 Form the nooseSlip the two ends of the cord through the opening we were just talking about Pull the larks head tight so it grips the two cords Find something that needs constrictingand put the noose around it
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 4 Tightening retightening and lockingSlide the knot against the bundle If its not tight enough to keep from slipping tighten it by holding it in one hand and tugging on the cords one at a time with the otherhand Notice that you can slide the knot out again for instance to re-open the bag you just tied shut For some applications this may be as tight as you need it
A springy bundle probably still feels loose If so compress the bundle and get a new grip on the cords Rest your foot on the bundle on the cords nearest the larks headand pull to slide the larks head tighter
To make the knot more permanent you can lock it Make an overhand in the cord ends (Exactly like the first step in tying shoelaces) With your foot still on the bundlepull on the cords and move your hands apart until youre pulling in opposite directions You have just locked the larks head and you can trust it to stay that way()
But lets say that later on you want to loosen the locked knot Again put your foot on the bundle and cords nearest the larks head hold the two cord ends together andpull This makes a little slack between the overhand and the larks head so you can untie the overhand
In twine or small string the locking overhand knot may be difficult to undo Use a shoelace knot instead of an overhand and itll unlock easily
() If youre using slippery cord like polypropylene an overhand may not lock securely You may want to tie another overhand knot For added security wrap a shortlength of duct tape around the two cords close to the knot
Image Notes1 To tighten further step on this side of the larks head and pull the free ends
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Related Instructables
TRX fromParacordChallengeAccepted bythrake
A pocket full ofknots byKiteman
Lens CapLanyard by~teknoarsonist~ how to tie a
noose byawesume
AdjustableParacordGlassesLanyard byjdtwelve12
HangmansNoose PackClosure byPopEye42
Paraleash - ADog LeashFrom Paracordby The Ideanator
How to make arugged andhandy ParacordBelt by Jake22
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 12 Secure on bottle neckThis is the finished knot shown on the neck of various containers
The loop end and the two free standing ends can be tied together to create a carrying handle (last picture below)
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 13 Aluminum Bottle Water Bottle
The next few steps show the features of an aluminum beer bottle re-purposed as a water bottle canteen It is one of many containers that can be reused as a camp waterbottle
The bottle was lightly sanded masked and then pained with a hammered finished paint to create an interesting surface texture
Image Notes1 Textured finish paint makes an interesting grip-able surface2 Masked with tape for painting3 Masked with tape for painting
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Image Notes1 Dowel used for holding the bottle during painting
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 14 Tethered Cork StopperUse a wine bottle man made Cork as a stopper for your aluminum water bottleNote Use a cork that was removed from the wine bottle without the corkscrew penetrating through the bottom end of the cork (A hole all the way through the cork willcause it to leak) Use the unpierced end of the cork inside the water bottle
Drill a hole through the sides of the Cork Thread the cord through the hole to the center of the cord Use the cork as the main Bight and tie the Jug knot as shown inthe beginning steps
Now the cork is tethered to the bottle and will not get lost or fall on the ground
A Carabiner clip passes through the other cord end to attache the water bottle to you belt or pack
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 15 Trussed for TransportThis is another hanging method for carrying your aluminum bottle water canteen A Jug knot is tied conventionally around the neck
The running ends of the knot however are pulled down towards the bottom of the bottle A Barrel Knot is tied about 34 the way down the side of the bottle A squareknot is tied on the bottom of the knot to keep the two running ends tight against the sides of the bottle
I like the look of the accent colored cord running down the sides of the bottle and the fact that the bottle hangs from the belt upside down It adds to its uniqueness
The last picture shows another truss variation
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 16 AdvancedBelow is a bottle with some additional trussing You can be creative as you want It all starts with a re-purposed container and the Jug Knot (and enough cord)
Related Instructables
AluminumBottle TumblerCup amp Cook Potfor an AlcoholStove byhpstoutharrow
Water BottleBelt Clip byuglymike Duct Tape
Water Bottle byrabidsquire2
AluminumBottle AlcoholStove byhpstoutharrow
DIYGlass WaterBottle byCulturespy
Solar WaterHeater forBackpackingUsing WaterBottles and aCar Shade bykopomeroy
Duct tape waterbottle holder(Photos) by pinkmarshmallow
How to make aCamelPack withan old plasticbottle bywillrandship
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Basic Knots Guideby zorro3355 on April 29 2008
Intro Basic Knots Guidehi
Step 1 Thumb knotThe most simple knotUsed as a stopper and prevent ropes from fraying
Step 2 Reef KnotUsed to tie two ropes of equal thickness togetherIt is pretty easy to tie and untie but under tentionit may be diffcult to untieIt is also not sutible for smoothropes(egnylon ropes)
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 3 Figure of eightused as a stopperprevent ropes from fraying and its more secure than tumb knot its is also used to tie Caribinas to ropes and is often used in rock climbing
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 4 Timber hitchused for pulling logs
Step 5 Clove hitchUsed to tie a rope onto a pole or logThe pole must be roundThe pole lust be thicker then the rope itself
(greatly used during pioneering)
Step 6 Sheet bandused to tie ropes of different thickness together(works on same thickness of ropes too)
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 7 Sheep shankTo shorten RopesTo prevent middle fraying
Step 8 Slip knotWhippingUsed as a grip for pulling things(when tied on a stick or small pole)(marlin spike hitch)
Related Instructables
Rope Rings byhpstoutharrow
How to Tie aFigure EightKnot byTactical_Pyro
Whippin (WestCountry Style)by tim_n
SurvivalBracelet(Updated) bytevers94
HangmansNoose PackClosure byPopEye42
Turkey on aTripod byhpstoutharrow
SurvivalBracelet II bytevers94 Zigzag Spooling
Paracord (video)by Stormdrane
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
How to Tie a Fire-escape Knotby leonardo ismael on October 16 2007
Intro How to Tie a Fire-escape KnotThis knot is used by firemen in case of fires for example imagine a scene where the ladder on the firetruck messes up but people need to get down a five story buildingor more All they have is a long piece of rope they can safely get down with a secure knot like the fire-escape knot So why not learn it its easy to do and hard to untieif you tie it tightly
This is from the American Boys Handbook
Step 1 Get Your RopeFirst grab a piece of rope and bend it like this to make a loop in it Follow every step to the smallest detail
Step 2 Twist the RopeNow make a twist like this and hold it together
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 3 Pull Through the TwistPull the loop through the twist you just made from underneath
Step 4 Go Over the Split EndNow pull the tail through the loop
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 5 FinallyAnd finally just pull it through as pictured below
Congratulations you just learned the fire-escape knot
Step 6 Same Name Not KnotThis is another knot called the fire-escape knot this shouldnt be your result
Related Instructables
House FireEscape Plan(video) byWhatHappensNowAdvice
ParacordLadder wWooden Rungsby josestude
Bed SheetEscape Rope byjessehensel
rope ladder(glow-in-the-dark version) bymikeasaurus
HeadlockEscape 2(video) byjohnnyrockstah
QuickFirestarter byMattandJora
Trail sauna byjakee117
How to Kill FireAnts andCommitGenocide byKentsOkay
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Climb Safe With A Figure 8 Knotby mattste on February 23 2010
Intro Climb Safe With A Figure 8 Knot There are many things that a beginning climber needs to know including several important knots Perhaps the most essential knot is the Figure 8 Follow Through Thistutorial will demonstrate how to correctly harness yourself to a rope using a Figure 8 Follow Through knot This knot is used primarily by rock climbers to provide a life-line Since this knot is used as a life-line it is very important to be able to tie it correctly (Your life could depend upon it)
Dont worry with this tutorial and about 5 minutes of practice you can have this knot mastered
Things you will need
- Climbing Harness- Climbing Rope
If you are wanting to go climbing and dont already have these items they can be purchased for about $25 each at most outdoor sporting goods stores If you are merelylooking to learn the knot a belt loop and a rope (about five feet long) will do
Image Notes1 Climbing Harness2 Climbing Rope
Step 1 Dealing With The RopeThroughout this tutorial I will be discussing different parts of the rope To make these instructions as clear as possible I will define a few terms that I will use throughoutthe tutorial The Anchor End of the rope will generally be at the top of the images This is the end that would be anchored to the wall or rock and does not move Wewill not be doing much with the anchored end The Tail End of the rope is the opposite end that we will be dealing with I will call this the tail for short
Now that we have some terms to work with lets get started
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 2 Tying The First Figure 8This knot has several parts to it The first part of the knot is just tying a basic figure 8 To tie the first figure 8 there are four simple steps
1 - Using the tail make a loop over the rope (as shown in the first picture) keeping in mind that there should be about 3 ft of slack on the tail end
2 - Wrap the tail back this time go under the anchored end (As shown in the second picture)
3 - Bring the tail down through the first loop (As shown in the third picture)
4 - Finally pull the two ends to make the knot a little bit tighter and easier to deal with (Shown in the fourth picture)
After these four steps you should end up with a knot that resembles a figure 8
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 3 Looping Into The Harness In order to secure the rope to the harness simply thread the tail end of the rope through the front loop in the harness as shown in the picture below This step isobviously very important
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 4 Following Back Through The Figure 8After looping the rope through the harness you have to thread the tail end of the rope back through the knot following the first figure 8 I have divided this process intofive smaller steps in order to make it more clear
1 - Coming form underneath the knot bring the tail up through the near loop and to the left behind the anchored end of the rope (Shown in the first picture)
2 - Wrap the tail around the anchored end back to the right and down through the adjacent loop (Shown in the second picture)
3 - You simply need to bring the tail back over the top of the knot to the left (Shown in the third picture)
4 - Bring the tail end up through the far loop following the anchored end (Shown in the fourth picture)
5 - Finally pull the knot tight (Shown in the fifth picture)
As you can see the first four pictures are simply tracing the knot back through with the tail end
For the last part while you pull the knot tight you may want to make small adjustments and rearrange how it all fits together If the knot does not lay perfectly smoothand tight its NOT a big deal
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 5 Finishing The Knot After completing the Figure 8 knot you will want to somehow secure the tail end of the rope out of the way There are a couple different ways to do this the way that Iwill demonstrate is using whats called a Stopper Knot This secondary knot is similar to a Fishermans knot and is pretty simple I have once again divided thisprocess into several smaller steps
1 - Start by wrapping the tail end around the anchored end (As shown in the first picture)
2 - Wrap the tail back underneath the two vertical segments (As shown in the second picture)
3 - Simply repeat the first two steps wrapping the tail around again (As shown in the third picture)
4 - This step in the fourth picture may look complicated but all you need to do is insert the tail up through the two loops that you have just made
5 - To finish off the knot you will want to slowly pull the tail end while gently pushing the bottom of the stopper knot upwards If you have successfully completed this knotit should look something like the fifth picture
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 6 Ready To Climb Now that you have mastered the Figure 8 knot you can securely harness yourself into a climbing rope Remember there are many other skills that go into setting up ananchor and belaying a climber This tutorial only covers the figure 8 knot For more information there are many great websites that demonstrate how to correctly set up asafe climbing system (Ive posted a few below) If you are a beginning climber I recommend that you read up on a few other climbing techniques Also you shouldprobably go to a climbing wall or gym where there are experienced climbers that can show you the ropes Hopefully this tutorial has been helpful Have fun and be safe
Some useful linkshttpwwwstephenprattnetAnchorsanchorshtmhttpwwwuoregonedu~oppclimbingtopicsanchorshtmlhttpwwwabc-of-rockclimbingcomhowtoclimbingtechniquesasp
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Related Instructables
How to Tie aFigure EightKnot byTactical_Pyro
Paracord KnotDisplay Bord byJamie bagn
Basic KnotsGuide byzorro3355
How to Climb aTree (withprussiks) bystasterisk
How to climb atree (using onlyrope) thefunsimple wayby louieaw
How to get arope into a tree(withoutclimbing it) byvitex
How to tievarious knots byadaviel
How to make arope swing byjdub0928
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Turks Head Knots on a Bottleby sklnxbones on July 6 2010
Intro Turks Head Knots on a BottleThis is the finished project A bottle decorated with three Turks Head Knots There are only three knots on this bottle The RED and the BLUE knots are each a 20 Bightby 3 Lead Turks Head Knots The WHITE knot is a 20 Bight by 19 Lead Turks Head Knot
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 1 Supplies
Cord Lots and Lots of cord I cant tell you how much each bottle is differentBottle Washed and Dried inside and out Make sure to remove all water spotsThreaded Needle Cord screws into the threads at the base of the needlePegs I use brass rivets used as a map to tie the Turks Head KnotsHole Punch Used to punch holes in the painters tape to hold the pegsPainters Tape To hold the pegs in place and to make your map for the Turks Head KnotsMarker To write on the painters tapeCloth Towel To remove finger prints and dirt from your bottleKrazy Glue or Super Glue This is used to secure the knots in place to the bottle
OPTIONAL BUT HIGHLY RECOMMENDEDI use the Turks Head Cookbook from KnotToolcom
Step 2 PreparationYou will need to find a bottle you like I used an empty instant tea bottle of course washed and dried (I like to put the bottle in the oven for a few minutes to dry the insidewithout water spots Take off the lid and do not put lid in the oven) Now measure the circumference of the bottle Take a cord and tightly wrap the cord around the bottleMark where the ends meet and use a ruler to measure the length of the cord For my instant tea bottle the circumference is 27cm I know from past knots that I have tiedthat I want my knot to have 20 Bights in the top and bottom (bands) knots I am going to use the Bights in the (bands) knots to tie the middle knot Now divide the numberof Bights (20) into the size of the circumference (27) to get the space between each Bight (135) With me so far
Now take two pieces of painters tape using a ruler measure out the length of the circumference and mark the length on the both pieces of tape Next you will mark thespace between each Bight on the tape
Step 3 Adding the PegsI like to use pegs when tying Turks Head Knots it just makes tying the knot easier
These are what I use for pegs
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 4 Adding Pegs to the TapeNow take a hole punch to cut holes in the tape where the lines meet You will place the pegs in the holes
Insert a peg in each hole and carefully stick the first piece of tape to the bottle
Step 5 Adding the 2nd row of pegsNow do the same thing with the second piece of tape The numbers on each piece of tape must line up
This picture shows you what you should have now This odd looking thing will be your map to tie the Turks Head Knot And this is the end of Step 1
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 6 Tying the first Turks Head KnotUsing the Turks Head Cookbook follow the numbers going over and under as indicated in the book I chose a 20 Bight by 3 Lead knot which will give me a nice bandaround the bottle Once the ends meet you have made one complete knot Tape the running end of your cord and start removing the pegs and the tape
Step 7 Remove the pegs and the tapeBe careful not to untie the knot as you remove the pegs and tape from the bottle Continue to remove all the pegs and remove the tape from the bottle At this point theknot will be very loose and will need to be tightened up
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 8 Remove the slack from the knotHere you can see just how much the knot expanded Starting with the standing end begin to pull the slack out of the knot going towards the running end of the cordDo not expect to pull all the slack out at once You may have to make 3 - 5 attempts at removing the slack out of the knot DO NOT remove all of the slack out of the knotIn order to make the bands we will have to triple the Turks Head Knot We will do this by following the knot three times The threaded needle will really come in handyhere
Step 9 Triple the KnotOnce you have made three passes of the Turks Head Knot use your needle to go under your knot about half the circumference and cut the cord The knot will be tightenough to hide the tail in placeTIP I carefully add a couple of drops of super glue UNDER the band to hold them in place and keep them from sliding around in the nextsteps A drop or two in 3 or 4 places around the band should be enough
Step 10 Add the second knotNow repeat this whole step for the second bandWhen tying the second band you must make sure the Bights line up to the first band This is crucial for the next stepWipe down the bottle to make sure all your finger prints and adhesive from the tape are all removed You want to make sure your bottle is clean at this point Any dirt orfinger prints left on the bottle will be almost impossible to remove From this point on we will use gloves when tying our last knot
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 11 Maping the Top KnotStick a piece of painters tape on top of your first band leaving the bottom of the knot exposedUse a marker to count the number of Bights in your knot Instead of using the pegs we are going to use the Bights to tie our next Turks Head Knot
Step 12 Mapping the Bottom KnotDo the same thing for the bottom band but you must make sure your numbers on top and bottom line up So 1 on top should be the same position as 1 on the bottom
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 13 Adding the last knotAgain using the Turks Head Cookbook and the threaded needle you are going to follow the instructions going over and under as indicated in the book Be sure to usegloves when ever you handle the bottle
Step 14 Thats ItFor this Turks Head Knot I am using a 20 Bight by 19 Lead knot
Because of the amount of cord you are working with your cord will get twisted and knotted You will have to un-twist the cord often Its a pain in the rear but it has to bedone And it has to be done alot
Continue to tie the knot until you finish the knot If you have the cord and the patience you can double or triple the knot When you are done use your needle to hide theends under your bands Cut the ends and your DONE
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Related Instructables
Monkeys FistFloatingKeychain byjokerlz
How To Make ATurks headKnot WithParacord byDoggie Stylish
Tying Trivetsout of Rope forHoliday Gifts bykylemarsh
Paracord KnotDisplay Bord byJamie bagn
How to Make ATurks Head(Photos) bymchs60chip
A pocket full ofknots byKiteman
Monkeys fistknot AND themonkey byjonathan111
TiteTie is theTruckers Knoton Steroids bytitetie
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Larks head noose -- an easy useful knot that tightens and loosensby Larry Breed on February 19 2009
Intro Larks head noose -- an easy useful knot that tightens and loosensI thought I knew all the basic knots but then I was taught this incredibly useful simple knot Its good for tying up the neck of a bag that you want to repeatedly open andsecurely close Its good for tying around a springy bundle that will need tightening and retightening And its easy to undo
Ive looked at knot literature but havent found a name for this so I named it The basic knot is well known its called a larks head Since all Ive done is to slip the twoends through the larks head to make a noose I call it that
WARNING Dont use this knot when human safety would depend on it Climbers and mountaineers have well-tested reliable knots for such situations
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Image Notes1 To tighten further step on this side of the larks head and pull the free ends
Step 1 Double the cord overThe larks head noose requires enough cord to go twice around your bundle plus a foot or two Find the center and double it over Sailors call this a bight
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 2 Form the larks headComing from below the bight hook your thumb and forefinger over the two sides Reach outward and downward and pinch your fingertips together underneath thedoubled cord
Youve made a larks head Move the crossing cord a little farther from your hand so theres a clear opening through the two half-loops
Step 3 Form the nooseSlip the two ends of the cord through the opening we were just talking about Pull the larks head tight so it grips the two cords Find something that needs constrictingand put the noose around it
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 4 Tightening retightening and lockingSlide the knot against the bundle If its not tight enough to keep from slipping tighten it by holding it in one hand and tugging on the cords one at a time with the otherhand Notice that you can slide the knot out again for instance to re-open the bag you just tied shut For some applications this may be as tight as you need it
A springy bundle probably still feels loose If so compress the bundle and get a new grip on the cords Rest your foot on the bundle on the cords nearest the larks headand pull to slide the larks head tighter
To make the knot more permanent you can lock it Make an overhand in the cord ends (Exactly like the first step in tying shoelaces) With your foot still on the bundlepull on the cords and move your hands apart until youre pulling in opposite directions You have just locked the larks head and you can trust it to stay that way()
But lets say that later on you want to loosen the locked knot Again put your foot on the bundle and cords nearest the larks head hold the two cord ends together andpull This makes a little slack between the overhand and the larks head so you can untie the overhand
In twine or small string the locking overhand knot may be difficult to undo Use a shoelace knot instead of an overhand and itll unlock easily
() If youre using slippery cord like polypropylene an overhand may not lock securely You may want to tie another overhand knot For added security wrap a shortlength of duct tape around the two cords close to the knot
Image Notes1 To tighten further step on this side of the larks head and pull the free ends
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Related Instructables
TRX fromParacordChallengeAccepted bythrake
A pocket full ofknots byKiteman
Lens CapLanyard by~teknoarsonist~ how to tie a
noose byawesume
AdjustableParacordGlassesLanyard byjdtwelve12
HangmansNoose PackClosure byPopEye42
Paraleash - ADog LeashFrom Paracordby The Ideanator
How to make arugged andhandy ParacordBelt by Jake22
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 13 Aluminum Bottle Water Bottle
The next few steps show the features of an aluminum beer bottle re-purposed as a water bottle canteen It is one of many containers that can be reused as a camp waterbottle
The bottle was lightly sanded masked and then pained with a hammered finished paint to create an interesting surface texture
Image Notes1 Textured finish paint makes an interesting grip-able surface2 Masked with tape for painting3 Masked with tape for painting
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Image Notes1 Dowel used for holding the bottle during painting
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 14 Tethered Cork StopperUse a wine bottle man made Cork as a stopper for your aluminum water bottleNote Use a cork that was removed from the wine bottle without the corkscrew penetrating through the bottom end of the cork (A hole all the way through the cork willcause it to leak) Use the unpierced end of the cork inside the water bottle
Drill a hole through the sides of the Cork Thread the cord through the hole to the center of the cord Use the cork as the main Bight and tie the Jug knot as shown inthe beginning steps
Now the cork is tethered to the bottle and will not get lost or fall on the ground
A Carabiner clip passes through the other cord end to attache the water bottle to you belt or pack
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 15 Trussed for TransportThis is another hanging method for carrying your aluminum bottle water canteen A Jug knot is tied conventionally around the neck
The running ends of the knot however are pulled down towards the bottom of the bottle A Barrel Knot is tied about 34 the way down the side of the bottle A squareknot is tied on the bottom of the knot to keep the two running ends tight against the sides of the bottle
I like the look of the accent colored cord running down the sides of the bottle and the fact that the bottle hangs from the belt upside down It adds to its uniqueness
The last picture shows another truss variation
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 16 AdvancedBelow is a bottle with some additional trussing You can be creative as you want It all starts with a re-purposed container and the Jug Knot (and enough cord)
Related Instructables
AluminumBottle TumblerCup amp Cook Potfor an AlcoholStove byhpstoutharrow
Water BottleBelt Clip byuglymike Duct Tape
Water Bottle byrabidsquire2
AluminumBottle AlcoholStove byhpstoutharrow
DIYGlass WaterBottle byCulturespy
Solar WaterHeater forBackpackingUsing WaterBottles and aCar Shade bykopomeroy
Duct tape waterbottle holder(Photos) by pinkmarshmallow
How to make aCamelPack withan old plasticbottle bywillrandship
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Basic Knots Guideby zorro3355 on April 29 2008
Intro Basic Knots Guidehi
Step 1 Thumb knotThe most simple knotUsed as a stopper and prevent ropes from fraying
Step 2 Reef KnotUsed to tie two ropes of equal thickness togetherIt is pretty easy to tie and untie but under tentionit may be diffcult to untieIt is also not sutible for smoothropes(egnylon ropes)
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 3 Figure of eightused as a stopperprevent ropes from fraying and its more secure than tumb knot its is also used to tie Caribinas to ropes and is often used in rock climbing
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 4 Timber hitchused for pulling logs
Step 5 Clove hitchUsed to tie a rope onto a pole or logThe pole must be roundThe pole lust be thicker then the rope itself
(greatly used during pioneering)
Step 6 Sheet bandused to tie ropes of different thickness together(works on same thickness of ropes too)
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 7 Sheep shankTo shorten RopesTo prevent middle fraying
Step 8 Slip knotWhippingUsed as a grip for pulling things(when tied on a stick or small pole)(marlin spike hitch)
Related Instructables
Rope Rings byhpstoutharrow
How to Tie aFigure EightKnot byTactical_Pyro
Whippin (WestCountry Style)by tim_n
SurvivalBracelet(Updated) bytevers94
HangmansNoose PackClosure byPopEye42
Turkey on aTripod byhpstoutharrow
SurvivalBracelet II bytevers94 Zigzag Spooling
Paracord (video)by Stormdrane
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
How to Tie a Fire-escape Knotby leonardo ismael on October 16 2007
Intro How to Tie a Fire-escape KnotThis knot is used by firemen in case of fires for example imagine a scene where the ladder on the firetruck messes up but people need to get down a five story buildingor more All they have is a long piece of rope they can safely get down with a secure knot like the fire-escape knot So why not learn it its easy to do and hard to untieif you tie it tightly
This is from the American Boys Handbook
Step 1 Get Your RopeFirst grab a piece of rope and bend it like this to make a loop in it Follow every step to the smallest detail
Step 2 Twist the RopeNow make a twist like this and hold it together
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 3 Pull Through the TwistPull the loop through the twist you just made from underneath
Step 4 Go Over the Split EndNow pull the tail through the loop
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 5 FinallyAnd finally just pull it through as pictured below
Congratulations you just learned the fire-escape knot
Step 6 Same Name Not KnotThis is another knot called the fire-escape knot this shouldnt be your result
Related Instructables
House FireEscape Plan(video) byWhatHappensNowAdvice
ParacordLadder wWooden Rungsby josestude
Bed SheetEscape Rope byjessehensel
rope ladder(glow-in-the-dark version) bymikeasaurus
HeadlockEscape 2(video) byjohnnyrockstah
QuickFirestarter byMattandJora
Trail sauna byjakee117
How to Kill FireAnts andCommitGenocide byKentsOkay
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Climb Safe With A Figure 8 Knotby mattste on February 23 2010
Intro Climb Safe With A Figure 8 Knot There are many things that a beginning climber needs to know including several important knots Perhaps the most essential knot is the Figure 8 Follow Through Thistutorial will demonstrate how to correctly harness yourself to a rope using a Figure 8 Follow Through knot This knot is used primarily by rock climbers to provide a life-line Since this knot is used as a life-line it is very important to be able to tie it correctly (Your life could depend upon it)
Dont worry with this tutorial and about 5 minutes of practice you can have this knot mastered
Things you will need
- Climbing Harness- Climbing Rope
If you are wanting to go climbing and dont already have these items they can be purchased for about $25 each at most outdoor sporting goods stores If you are merelylooking to learn the knot a belt loop and a rope (about five feet long) will do
Image Notes1 Climbing Harness2 Climbing Rope
Step 1 Dealing With The RopeThroughout this tutorial I will be discussing different parts of the rope To make these instructions as clear as possible I will define a few terms that I will use throughoutthe tutorial The Anchor End of the rope will generally be at the top of the images This is the end that would be anchored to the wall or rock and does not move Wewill not be doing much with the anchored end The Tail End of the rope is the opposite end that we will be dealing with I will call this the tail for short
Now that we have some terms to work with lets get started
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 2 Tying The First Figure 8This knot has several parts to it The first part of the knot is just tying a basic figure 8 To tie the first figure 8 there are four simple steps
1 - Using the tail make a loop over the rope (as shown in the first picture) keeping in mind that there should be about 3 ft of slack on the tail end
2 - Wrap the tail back this time go under the anchored end (As shown in the second picture)
3 - Bring the tail down through the first loop (As shown in the third picture)
4 - Finally pull the two ends to make the knot a little bit tighter and easier to deal with (Shown in the fourth picture)
After these four steps you should end up with a knot that resembles a figure 8
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 3 Looping Into The Harness In order to secure the rope to the harness simply thread the tail end of the rope through the front loop in the harness as shown in the picture below This step isobviously very important
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 4 Following Back Through The Figure 8After looping the rope through the harness you have to thread the tail end of the rope back through the knot following the first figure 8 I have divided this process intofive smaller steps in order to make it more clear
1 - Coming form underneath the knot bring the tail up through the near loop and to the left behind the anchored end of the rope (Shown in the first picture)
2 - Wrap the tail around the anchored end back to the right and down through the adjacent loop (Shown in the second picture)
3 - You simply need to bring the tail back over the top of the knot to the left (Shown in the third picture)
4 - Bring the tail end up through the far loop following the anchored end (Shown in the fourth picture)
5 - Finally pull the knot tight (Shown in the fifth picture)
As you can see the first four pictures are simply tracing the knot back through with the tail end
For the last part while you pull the knot tight you may want to make small adjustments and rearrange how it all fits together If the knot does not lay perfectly smoothand tight its NOT a big deal
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 5 Finishing The Knot After completing the Figure 8 knot you will want to somehow secure the tail end of the rope out of the way There are a couple different ways to do this the way that Iwill demonstrate is using whats called a Stopper Knot This secondary knot is similar to a Fishermans knot and is pretty simple I have once again divided thisprocess into several smaller steps
1 - Start by wrapping the tail end around the anchored end (As shown in the first picture)
2 - Wrap the tail back underneath the two vertical segments (As shown in the second picture)
3 - Simply repeat the first two steps wrapping the tail around again (As shown in the third picture)
4 - This step in the fourth picture may look complicated but all you need to do is insert the tail up through the two loops that you have just made
5 - To finish off the knot you will want to slowly pull the tail end while gently pushing the bottom of the stopper knot upwards If you have successfully completed this knotit should look something like the fifth picture
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 6 Ready To Climb Now that you have mastered the Figure 8 knot you can securely harness yourself into a climbing rope Remember there are many other skills that go into setting up ananchor and belaying a climber This tutorial only covers the figure 8 knot For more information there are many great websites that demonstrate how to correctly set up asafe climbing system (Ive posted a few below) If you are a beginning climber I recommend that you read up on a few other climbing techniques Also you shouldprobably go to a climbing wall or gym where there are experienced climbers that can show you the ropes Hopefully this tutorial has been helpful Have fun and be safe
Some useful linkshttpwwwstephenprattnetAnchorsanchorshtmhttpwwwuoregonedu~oppclimbingtopicsanchorshtmlhttpwwwabc-of-rockclimbingcomhowtoclimbingtechniquesasp
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Related Instructables
How to Tie aFigure EightKnot byTactical_Pyro
Paracord KnotDisplay Bord byJamie bagn
Basic KnotsGuide byzorro3355
How to Climb aTree (withprussiks) bystasterisk
How to climb atree (using onlyrope) thefunsimple wayby louieaw
How to get arope into a tree(withoutclimbing it) byvitex
How to tievarious knots byadaviel
How to make arope swing byjdub0928
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Turks Head Knots on a Bottleby sklnxbones on July 6 2010
Intro Turks Head Knots on a BottleThis is the finished project A bottle decorated with three Turks Head Knots There are only three knots on this bottle The RED and the BLUE knots are each a 20 Bightby 3 Lead Turks Head Knots The WHITE knot is a 20 Bight by 19 Lead Turks Head Knot
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 1 Supplies
Cord Lots and Lots of cord I cant tell you how much each bottle is differentBottle Washed and Dried inside and out Make sure to remove all water spotsThreaded Needle Cord screws into the threads at the base of the needlePegs I use brass rivets used as a map to tie the Turks Head KnotsHole Punch Used to punch holes in the painters tape to hold the pegsPainters Tape To hold the pegs in place and to make your map for the Turks Head KnotsMarker To write on the painters tapeCloth Towel To remove finger prints and dirt from your bottleKrazy Glue or Super Glue This is used to secure the knots in place to the bottle
OPTIONAL BUT HIGHLY RECOMMENDEDI use the Turks Head Cookbook from KnotToolcom
Step 2 PreparationYou will need to find a bottle you like I used an empty instant tea bottle of course washed and dried (I like to put the bottle in the oven for a few minutes to dry the insidewithout water spots Take off the lid and do not put lid in the oven) Now measure the circumference of the bottle Take a cord and tightly wrap the cord around the bottleMark where the ends meet and use a ruler to measure the length of the cord For my instant tea bottle the circumference is 27cm I know from past knots that I have tiedthat I want my knot to have 20 Bights in the top and bottom (bands) knots I am going to use the Bights in the (bands) knots to tie the middle knot Now divide the numberof Bights (20) into the size of the circumference (27) to get the space between each Bight (135) With me so far
Now take two pieces of painters tape using a ruler measure out the length of the circumference and mark the length on the both pieces of tape Next you will mark thespace between each Bight on the tape
Step 3 Adding the PegsI like to use pegs when tying Turks Head Knots it just makes tying the knot easier
These are what I use for pegs
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 4 Adding Pegs to the TapeNow take a hole punch to cut holes in the tape where the lines meet You will place the pegs in the holes
Insert a peg in each hole and carefully stick the first piece of tape to the bottle
Step 5 Adding the 2nd row of pegsNow do the same thing with the second piece of tape The numbers on each piece of tape must line up
This picture shows you what you should have now This odd looking thing will be your map to tie the Turks Head Knot And this is the end of Step 1
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 6 Tying the first Turks Head KnotUsing the Turks Head Cookbook follow the numbers going over and under as indicated in the book I chose a 20 Bight by 3 Lead knot which will give me a nice bandaround the bottle Once the ends meet you have made one complete knot Tape the running end of your cord and start removing the pegs and the tape
Step 7 Remove the pegs and the tapeBe careful not to untie the knot as you remove the pegs and tape from the bottle Continue to remove all the pegs and remove the tape from the bottle At this point theknot will be very loose and will need to be tightened up
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 8 Remove the slack from the knotHere you can see just how much the knot expanded Starting with the standing end begin to pull the slack out of the knot going towards the running end of the cordDo not expect to pull all the slack out at once You may have to make 3 - 5 attempts at removing the slack out of the knot DO NOT remove all of the slack out of the knotIn order to make the bands we will have to triple the Turks Head Knot We will do this by following the knot three times The threaded needle will really come in handyhere
Step 9 Triple the KnotOnce you have made three passes of the Turks Head Knot use your needle to go under your knot about half the circumference and cut the cord The knot will be tightenough to hide the tail in placeTIP I carefully add a couple of drops of super glue UNDER the band to hold them in place and keep them from sliding around in the nextsteps A drop or two in 3 or 4 places around the band should be enough
Step 10 Add the second knotNow repeat this whole step for the second bandWhen tying the second band you must make sure the Bights line up to the first band This is crucial for the next stepWipe down the bottle to make sure all your finger prints and adhesive from the tape are all removed You want to make sure your bottle is clean at this point Any dirt orfinger prints left on the bottle will be almost impossible to remove From this point on we will use gloves when tying our last knot
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 11 Maping the Top KnotStick a piece of painters tape on top of your first band leaving the bottom of the knot exposedUse a marker to count the number of Bights in your knot Instead of using the pegs we are going to use the Bights to tie our next Turks Head Knot
Step 12 Mapping the Bottom KnotDo the same thing for the bottom band but you must make sure your numbers on top and bottom line up So 1 on top should be the same position as 1 on the bottom
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 13 Adding the last knotAgain using the Turks Head Cookbook and the threaded needle you are going to follow the instructions going over and under as indicated in the book Be sure to usegloves when ever you handle the bottle
Step 14 Thats ItFor this Turks Head Knot I am using a 20 Bight by 19 Lead knot
Because of the amount of cord you are working with your cord will get twisted and knotted You will have to un-twist the cord often Its a pain in the rear but it has to bedone And it has to be done alot
Continue to tie the knot until you finish the knot If you have the cord and the patience you can double or triple the knot When you are done use your needle to hide theends under your bands Cut the ends and your DONE
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Related Instructables
Monkeys FistFloatingKeychain byjokerlz
How To Make ATurks headKnot WithParacord byDoggie Stylish
Tying Trivetsout of Rope forHoliday Gifts bykylemarsh
Paracord KnotDisplay Bord byJamie bagn
How to Make ATurks Head(Photos) bymchs60chip
A pocket full ofknots byKiteman
Monkeys fistknot AND themonkey byjonathan111
TiteTie is theTruckers Knoton Steroids bytitetie
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Larks head noose -- an easy useful knot that tightens and loosensby Larry Breed on February 19 2009
Intro Larks head noose -- an easy useful knot that tightens and loosensI thought I knew all the basic knots but then I was taught this incredibly useful simple knot Its good for tying up the neck of a bag that you want to repeatedly open andsecurely close Its good for tying around a springy bundle that will need tightening and retightening And its easy to undo
Ive looked at knot literature but havent found a name for this so I named it The basic knot is well known its called a larks head Since all Ive done is to slip the twoends through the larks head to make a noose I call it that
WARNING Dont use this knot when human safety would depend on it Climbers and mountaineers have well-tested reliable knots for such situations
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Image Notes1 To tighten further step on this side of the larks head and pull the free ends
Step 1 Double the cord overThe larks head noose requires enough cord to go twice around your bundle plus a foot or two Find the center and double it over Sailors call this a bight
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 2 Form the larks headComing from below the bight hook your thumb and forefinger over the two sides Reach outward and downward and pinch your fingertips together underneath thedoubled cord
Youve made a larks head Move the crossing cord a little farther from your hand so theres a clear opening through the two half-loops
Step 3 Form the nooseSlip the two ends of the cord through the opening we were just talking about Pull the larks head tight so it grips the two cords Find something that needs constrictingand put the noose around it
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 4 Tightening retightening and lockingSlide the knot against the bundle If its not tight enough to keep from slipping tighten it by holding it in one hand and tugging on the cords one at a time with the otherhand Notice that you can slide the knot out again for instance to re-open the bag you just tied shut For some applications this may be as tight as you need it
A springy bundle probably still feels loose If so compress the bundle and get a new grip on the cords Rest your foot on the bundle on the cords nearest the larks headand pull to slide the larks head tighter
To make the knot more permanent you can lock it Make an overhand in the cord ends (Exactly like the first step in tying shoelaces) With your foot still on the bundlepull on the cords and move your hands apart until youre pulling in opposite directions You have just locked the larks head and you can trust it to stay that way()
But lets say that later on you want to loosen the locked knot Again put your foot on the bundle and cords nearest the larks head hold the two cord ends together andpull This makes a little slack between the overhand and the larks head so you can untie the overhand
In twine or small string the locking overhand knot may be difficult to undo Use a shoelace knot instead of an overhand and itll unlock easily
() If youre using slippery cord like polypropylene an overhand may not lock securely You may want to tie another overhand knot For added security wrap a shortlength of duct tape around the two cords close to the knot
Image Notes1 To tighten further step on this side of the larks head and pull the free ends
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Related Instructables
TRX fromParacordChallengeAccepted bythrake
A pocket full ofknots byKiteman
Lens CapLanyard by~teknoarsonist~ how to tie a
noose byawesume
AdjustableParacordGlassesLanyard byjdtwelve12
HangmansNoose PackClosure byPopEye42
Paraleash - ADog LeashFrom Paracordby The Ideanator
How to make arugged andhandy ParacordBelt by Jake22
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Image Notes1 Dowel used for holding the bottle during painting
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 14 Tethered Cork StopperUse a wine bottle man made Cork as a stopper for your aluminum water bottleNote Use a cork that was removed from the wine bottle without the corkscrew penetrating through the bottom end of the cork (A hole all the way through the cork willcause it to leak) Use the unpierced end of the cork inside the water bottle
Drill a hole through the sides of the Cork Thread the cord through the hole to the center of the cord Use the cork as the main Bight and tie the Jug knot as shown inthe beginning steps
Now the cork is tethered to the bottle and will not get lost or fall on the ground
A Carabiner clip passes through the other cord end to attache the water bottle to you belt or pack
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 15 Trussed for TransportThis is another hanging method for carrying your aluminum bottle water canteen A Jug knot is tied conventionally around the neck
The running ends of the knot however are pulled down towards the bottom of the bottle A Barrel Knot is tied about 34 the way down the side of the bottle A squareknot is tied on the bottom of the knot to keep the two running ends tight against the sides of the bottle
I like the look of the accent colored cord running down the sides of the bottle and the fact that the bottle hangs from the belt upside down It adds to its uniqueness
The last picture shows another truss variation
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 16 AdvancedBelow is a bottle with some additional trussing You can be creative as you want It all starts with a re-purposed container and the Jug Knot (and enough cord)
Related Instructables
AluminumBottle TumblerCup amp Cook Potfor an AlcoholStove byhpstoutharrow
Water BottleBelt Clip byuglymike Duct Tape
Water Bottle byrabidsquire2
AluminumBottle AlcoholStove byhpstoutharrow
DIYGlass WaterBottle byCulturespy
Solar WaterHeater forBackpackingUsing WaterBottles and aCar Shade bykopomeroy
Duct tape waterbottle holder(Photos) by pinkmarshmallow
How to make aCamelPack withan old plasticbottle bywillrandship
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Basic Knots Guideby zorro3355 on April 29 2008
Intro Basic Knots Guidehi
Step 1 Thumb knotThe most simple knotUsed as a stopper and prevent ropes from fraying
Step 2 Reef KnotUsed to tie two ropes of equal thickness togetherIt is pretty easy to tie and untie but under tentionit may be diffcult to untieIt is also not sutible for smoothropes(egnylon ropes)
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 3 Figure of eightused as a stopperprevent ropes from fraying and its more secure than tumb knot its is also used to tie Caribinas to ropes and is often used in rock climbing
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 4 Timber hitchused for pulling logs
Step 5 Clove hitchUsed to tie a rope onto a pole or logThe pole must be roundThe pole lust be thicker then the rope itself
(greatly used during pioneering)
Step 6 Sheet bandused to tie ropes of different thickness together(works on same thickness of ropes too)
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 7 Sheep shankTo shorten RopesTo prevent middle fraying
Step 8 Slip knotWhippingUsed as a grip for pulling things(when tied on a stick or small pole)(marlin spike hitch)
Related Instructables
Rope Rings byhpstoutharrow
How to Tie aFigure EightKnot byTactical_Pyro
Whippin (WestCountry Style)by tim_n
SurvivalBracelet(Updated) bytevers94
HangmansNoose PackClosure byPopEye42
Turkey on aTripod byhpstoutharrow
SurvivalBracelet II bytevers94 Zigzag Spooling
Paracord (video)by Stormdrane
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
How to Tie a Fire-escape Knotby leonardo ismael on October 16 2007
Intro How to Tie a Fire-escape KnotThis knot is used by firemen in case of fires for example imagine a scene where the ladder on the firetruck messes up but people need to get down a five story buildingor more All they have is a long piece of rope they can safely get down with a secure knot like the fire-escape knot So why not learn it its easy to do and hard to untieif you tie it tightly
This is from the American Boys Handbook
Step 1 Get Your RopeFirst grab a piece of rope and bend it like this to make a loop in it Follow every step to the smallest detail
Step 2 Twist the RopeNow make a twist like this and hold it together
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 3 Pull Through the TwistPull the loop through the twist you just made from underneath
Step 4 Go Over the Split EndNow pull the tail through the loop
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 5 FinallyAnd finally just pull it through as pictured below
Congratulations you just learned the fire-escape knot
Step 6 Same Name Not KnotThis is another knot called the fire-escape knot this shouldnt be your result
Related Instructables
House FireEscape Plan(video) byWhatHappensNowAdvice
ParacordLadder wWooden Rungsby josestude
Bed SheetEscape Rope byjessehensel
rope ladder(glow-in-the-dark version) bymikeasaurus
HeadlockEscape 2(video) byjohnnyrockstah
QuickFirestarter byMattandJora
Trail sauna byjakee117
How to Kill FireAnts andCommitGenocide byKentsOkay
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Climb Safe With A Figure 8 Knotby mattste on February 23 2010
Intro Climb Safe With A Figure 8 Knot There are many things that a beginning climber needs to know including several important knots Perhaps the most essential knot is the Figure 8 Follow Through Thistutorial will demonstrate how to correctly harness yourself to a rope using a Figure 8 Follow Through knot This knot is used primarily by rock climbers to provide a life-line Since this knot is used as a life-line it is very important to be able to tie it correctly (Your life could depend upon it)
Dont worry with this tutorial and about 5 minutes of practice you can have this knot mastered
Things you will need
- Climbing Harness- Climbing Rope
If you are wanting to go climbing and dont already have these items they can be purchased for about $25 each at most outdoor sporting goods stores If you are merelylooking to learn the knot a belt loop and a rope (about five feet long) will do
Image Notes1 Climbing Harness2 Climbing Rope
Step 1 Dealing With The RopeThroughout this tutorial I will be discussing different parts of the rope To make these instructions as clear as possible I will define a few terms that I will use throughoutthe tutorial The Anchor End of the rope will generally be at the top of the images This is the end that would be anchored to the wall or rock and does not move Wewill not be doing much with the anchored end The Tail End of the rope is the opposite end that we will be dealing with I will call this the tail for short
Now that we have some terms to work with lets get started
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 2 Tying The First Figure 8This knot has several parts to it The first part of the knot is just tying a basic figure 8 To tie the first figure 8 there are four simple steps
1 - Using the tail make a loop over the rope (as shown in the first picture) keeping in mind that there should be about 3 ft of slack on the tail end
2 - Wrap the tail back this time go under the anchored end (As shown in the second picture)
3 - Bring the tail down through the first loop (As shown in the third picture)
4 - Finally pull the two ends to make the knot a little bit tighter and easier to deal with (Shown in the fourth picture)
After these four steps you should end up with a knot that resembles a figure 8
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 3 Looping Into The Harness In order to secure the rope to the harness simply thread the tail end of the rope through the front loop in the harness as shown in the picture below This step isobviously very important
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 4 Following Back Through The Figure 8After looping the rope through the harness you have to thread the tail end of the rope back through the knot following the first figure 8 I have divided this process intofive smaller steps in order to make it more clear
1 - Coming form underneath the knot bring the tail up through the near loop and to the left behind the anchored end of the rope (Shown in the first picture)
2 - Wrap the tail around the anchored end back to the right and down through the adjacent loop (Shown in the second picture)
3 - You simply need to bring the tail back over the top of the knot to the left (Shown in the third picture)
4 - Bring the tail end up through the far loop following the anchored end (Shown in the fourth picture)
5 - Finally pull the knot tight (Shown in the fifth picture)
As you can see the first four pictures are simply tracing the knot back through with the tail end
For the last part while you pull the knot tight you may want to make small adjustments and rearrange how it all fits together If the knot does not lay perfectly smoothand tight its NOT a big deal
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 5 Finishing The Knot After completing the Figure 8 knot you will want to somehow secure the tail end of the rope out of the way There are a couple different ways to do this the way that Iwill demonstrate is using whats called a Stopper Knot This secondary knot is similar to a Fishermans knot and is pretty simple I have once again divided thisprocess into several smaller steps
1 - Start by wrapping the tail end around the anchored end (As shown in the first picture)
2 - Wrap the tail back underneath the two vertical segments (As shown in the second picture)
3 - Simply repeat the first two steps wrapping the tail around again (As shown in the third picture)
4 - This step in the fourth picture may look complicated but all you need to do is insert the tail up through the two loops that you have just made
5 - To finish off the knot you will want to slowly pull the tail end while gently pushing the bottom of the stopper knot upwards If you have successfully completed this knotit should look something like the fifth picture
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 6 Ready To Climb Now that you have mastered the Figure 8 knot you can securely harness yourself into a climbing rope Remember there are many other skills that go into setting up ananchor and belaying a climber This tutorial only covers the figure 8 knot For more information there are many great websites that demonstrate how to correctly set up asafe climbing system (Ive posted a few below) If you are a beginning climber I recommend that you read up on a few other climbing techniques Also you shouldprobably go to a climbing wall or gym where there are experienced climbers that can show you the ropes Hopefully this tutorial has been helpful Have fun and be safe
Some useful linkshttpwwwstephenprattnetAnchorsanchorshtmhttpwwwuoregonedu~oppclimbingtopicsanchorshtmlhttpwwwabc-of-rockclimbingcomhowtoclimbingtechniquesasp
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Related Instructables
How to Tie aFigure EightKnot byTactical_Pyro
Paracord KnotDisplay Bord byJamie bagn
Basic KnotsGuide byzorro3355
How to Climb aTree (withprussiks) bystasterisk
How to climb atree (using onlyrope) thefunsimple wayby louieaw
How to get arope into a tree(withoutclimbing it) byvitex
How to tievarious knots byadaviel
How to make arope swing byjdub0928
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Turks Head Knots on a Bottleby sklnxbones on July 6 2010
Intro Turks Head Knots on a BottleThis is the finished project A bottle decorated with three Turks Head Knots There are only three knots on this bottle The RED and the BLUE knots are each a 20 Bightby 3 Lead Turks Head Knots The WHITE knot is a 20 Bight by 19 Lead Turks Head Knot
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 1 Supplies
Cord Lots and Lots of cord I cant tell you how much each bottle is differentBottle Washed and Dried inside and out Make sure to remove all water spotsThreaded Needle Cord screws into the threads at the base of the needlePegs I use brass rivets used as a map to tie the Turks Head KnotsHole Punch Used to punch holes in the painters tape to hold the pegsPainters Tape To hold the pegs in place and to make your map for the Turks Head KnotsMarker To write on the painters tapeCloth Towel To remove finger prints and dirt from your bottleKrazy Glue or Super Glue This is used to secure the knots in place to the bottle
OPTIONAL BUT HIGHLY RECOMMENDEDI use the Turks Head Cookbook from KnotToolcom
Step 2 PreparationYou will need to find a bottle you like I used an empty instant tea bottle of course washed and dried (I like to put the bottle in the oven for a few minutes to dry the insidewithout water spots Take off the lid and do not put lid in the oven) Now measure the circumference of the bottle Take a cord and tightly wrap the cord around the bottleMark where the ends meet and use a ruler to measure the length of the cord For my instant tea bottle the circumference is 27cm I know from past knots that I have tiedthat I want my knot to have 20 Bights in the top and bottom (bands) knots I am going to use the Bights in the (bands) knots to tie the middle knot Now divide the numberof Bights (20) into the size of the circumference (27) to get the space between each Bight (135) With me so far
Now take two pieces of painters tape using a ruler measure out the length of the circumference and mark the length on the both pieces of tape Next you will mark thespace between each Bight on the tape
Step 3 Adding the PegsI like to use pegs when tying Turks Head Knots it just makes tying the knot easier
These are what I use for pegs
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 4 Adding Pegs to the TapeNow take a hole punch to cut holes in the tape where the lines meet You will place the pegs in the holes
Insert a peg in each hole and carefully stick the first piece of tape to the bottle
Step 5 Adding the 2nd row of pegsNow do the same thing with the second piece of tape The numbers on each piece of tape must line up
This picture shows you what you should have now This odd looking thing will be your map to tie the Turks Head Knot And this is the end of Step 1
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 6 Tying the first Turks Head KnotUsing the Turks Head Cookbook follow the numbers going over and under as indicated in the book I chose a 20 Bight by 3 Lead knot which will give me a nice bandaround the bottle Once the ends meet you have made one complete knot Tape the running end of your cord and start removing the pegs and the tape
Step 7 Remove the pegs and the tapeBe careful not to untie the knot as you remove the pegs and tape from the bottle Continue to remove all the pegs and remove the tape from the bottle At this point theknot will be very loose and will need to be tightened up
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 8 Remove the slack from the knotHere you can see just how much the knot expanded Starting with the standing end begin to pull the slack out of the knot going towards the running end of the cordDo not expect to pull all the slack out at once You may have to make 3 - 5 attempts at removing the slack out of the knot DO NOT remove all of the slack out of the knotIn order to make the bands we will have to triple the Turks Head Knot We will do this by following the knot three times The threaded needle will really come in handyhere
Step 9 Triple the KnotOnce you have made three passes of the Turks Head Knot use your needle to go under your knot about half the circumference and cut the cord The knot will be tightenough to hide the tail in placeTIP I carefully add a couple of drops of super glue UNDER the band to hold them in place and keep them from sliding around in the nextsteps A drop or two in 3 or 4 places around the band should be enough
Step 10 Add the second knotNow repeat this whole step for the second bandWhen tying the second band you must make sure the Bights line up to the first band This is crucial for the next stepWipe down the bottle to make sure all your finger prints and adhesive from the tape are all removed You want to make sure your bottle is clean at this point Any dirt orfinger prints left on the bottle will be almost impossible to remove From this point on we will use gloves when tying our last knot
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 11 Maping the Top KnotStick a piece of painters tape on top of your first band leaving the bottom of the knot exposedUse a marker to count the number of Bights in your knot Instead of using the pegs we are going to use the Bights to tie our next Turks Head Knot
Step 12 Mapping the Bottom KnotDo the same thing for the bottom band but you must make sure your numbers on top and bottom line up So 1 on top should be the same position as 1 on the bottom
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 13 Adding the last knotAgain using the Turks Head Cookbook and the threaded needle you are going to follow the instructions going over and under as indicated in the book Be sure to usegloves when ever you handle the bottle
Step 14 Thats ItFor this Turks Head Knot I am using a 20 Bight by 19 Lead knot
Because of the amount of cord you are working with your cord will get twisted and knotted You will have to un-twist the cord often Its a pain in the rear but it has to bedone And it has to be done alot
Continue to tie the knot until you finish the knot If you have the cord and the patience you can double or triple the knot When you are done use your needle to hide theends under your bands Cut the ends and your DONE
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Related Instructables
Monkeys FistFloatingKeychain byjokerlz
How To Make ATurks headKnot WithParacord byDoggie Stylish
Tying Trivetsout of Rope forHoliday Gifts bykylemarsh
Paracord KnotDisplay Bord byJamie bagn
How to Make ATurks Head(Photos) bymchs60chip
A pocket full ofknots byKiteman
Monkeys fistknot AND themonkey byjonathan111
TiteTie is theTruckers Knoton Steroids bytitetie
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Larks head noose -- an easy useful knot that tightens and loosensby Larry Breed on February 19 2009
Intro Larks head noose -- an easy useful knot that tightens and loosensI thought I knew all the basic knots but then I was taught this incredibly useful simple knot Its good for tying up the neck of a bag that you want to repeatedly open andsecurely close Its good for tying around a springy bundle that will need tightening and retightening And its easy to undo
Ive looked at knot literature but havent found a name for this so I named it The basic knot is well known its called a larks head Since all Ive done is to slip the twoends through the larks head to make a noose I call it that
WARNING Dont use this knot when human safety would depend on it Climbers and mountaineers have well-tested reliable knots for such situations
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Image Notes1 To tighten further step on this side of the larks head and pull the free ends
Step 1 Double the cord overThe larks head noose requires enough cord to go twice around your bundle plus a foot or two Find the center and double it over Sailors call this a bight
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 2 Form the larks headComing from below the bight hook your thumb and forefinger over the two sides Reach outward and downward and pinch your fingertips together underneath thedoubled cord
Youve made a larks head Move the crossing cord a little farther from your hand so theres a clear opening through the two half-loops
Step 3 Form the nooseSlip the two ends of the cord through the opening we were just talking about Pull the larks head tight so it grips the two cords Find something that needs constrictingand put the noose around it
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 4 Tightening retightening and lockingSlide the knot against the bundle If its not tight enough to keep from slipping tighten it by holding it in one hand and tugging on the cords one at a time with the otherhand Notice that you can slide the knot out again for instance to re-open the bag you just tied shut For some applications this may be as tight as you need it
A springy bundle probably still feels loose If so compress the bundle and get a new grip on the cords Rest your foot on the bundle on the cords nearest the larks headand pull to slide the larks head tighter
To make the knot more permanent you can lock it Make an overhand in the cord ends (Exactly like the first step in tying shoelaces) With your foot still on the bundlepull on the cords and move your hands apart until youre pulling in opposite directions You have just locked the larks head and you can trust it to stay that way()
But lets say that later on you want to loosen the locked knot Again put your foot on the bundle and cords nearest the larks head hold the two cord ends together andpull This makes a little slack between the overhand and the larks head so you can untie the overhand
In twine or small string the locking overhand knot may be difficult to undo Use a shoelace knot instead of an overhand and itll unlock easily
() If youre using slippery cord like polypropylene an overhand may not lock securely You may want to tie another overhand knot For added security wrap a shortlength of duct tape around the two cords close to the knot
Image Notes1 To tighten further step on this side of the larks head and pull the free ends
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Related Instructables
TRX fromParacordChallengeAccepted bythrake
A pocket full ofknots byKiteman
Lens CapLanyard by~teknoarsonist~ how to tie a
noose byawesume
AdjustableParacordGlassesLanyard byjdtwelve12
HangmansNoose PackClosure byPopEye42
Paraleash - ADog LeashFrom Paracordby The Ideanator
How to make arugged andhandy ParacordBelt by Jake22
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 14 Tethered Cork StopperUse a wine bottle man made Cork as a stopper for your aluminum water bottleNote Use a cork that was removed from the wine bottle without the corkscrew penetrating through the bottom end of the cork (A hole all the way through the cork willcause it to leak) Use the unpierced end of the cork inside the water bottle
Drill a hole through the sides of the Cork Thread the cord through the hole to the center of the cord Use the cork as the main Bight and tie the Jug knot as shown inthe beginning steps
Now the cork is tethered to the bottle and will not get lost or fall on the ground
A Carabiner clip passes through the other cord end to attache the water bottle to you belt or pack
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 15 Trussed for TransportThis is another hanging method for carrying your aluminum bottle water canteen A Jug knot is tied conventionally around the neck
The running ends of the knot however are pulled down towards the bottom of the bottle A Barrel Knot is tied about 34 the way down the side of the bottle A squareknot is tied on the bottom of the knot to keep the two running ends tight against the sides of the bottle
I like the look of the accent colored cord running down the sides of the bottle and the fact that the bottle hangs from the belt upside down It adds to its uniqueness
The last picture shows another truss variation
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 16 AdvancedBelow is a bottle with some additional trussing You can be creative as you want It all starts with a re-purposed container and the Jug Knot (and enough cord)
Related Instructables
AluminumBottle TumblerCup amp Cook Potfor an AlcoholStove byhpstoutharrow
Water BottleBelt Clip byuglymike Duct Tape
Water Bottle byrabidsquire2
AluminumBottle AlcoholStove byhpstoutharrow
DIYGlass WaterBottle byCulturespy
Solar WaterHeater forBackpackingUsing WaterBottles and aCar Shade bykopomeroy
Duct tape waterbottle holder(Photos) by pinkmarshmallow
How to make aCamelPack withan old plasticbottle bywillrandship
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Basic Knots Guideby zorro3355 on April 29 2008
Intro Basic Knots Guidehi
Step 1 Thumb knotThe most simple knotUsed as a stopper and prevent ropes from fraying
Step 2 Reef KnotUsed to tie two ropes of equal thickness togetherIt is pretty easy to tie and untie but under tentionit may be diffcult to untieIt is also not sutible for smoothropes(egnylon ropes)
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 3 Figure of eightused as a stopperprevent ropes from fraying and its more secure than tumb knot its is also used to tie Caribinas to ropes and is often used in rock climbing
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 4 Timber hitchused for pulling logs
Step 5 Clove hitchUsed to tie a rope onto a pole or logThe pole must be roundThe pole lust be thicker then the rope itself
(greatly used during pioneering)
Step 6 Sheet bandused to tie ropes of different thickness together(works on same thickness of ropes too)
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 7 Sheep shankTo shorten RopesTo prevent middle fraying
Step 8 Slip knotWhippingUsed as a grip for pulling things(when tied on a stick or small pole)(marlin spike hitch)
Related Instructables
Rope Rings byhpstoutharrow
How to Tie aFigure EightKnot byTactical_Pyro
Whippin (WestCountry Style)by tim_n
SurvivalBracelet(Updated) bytevers94
HangmansNoose PackClosure byPopEye42
Turkey on aTripod byhpstoutharrow
SurvivalBracelet II bytevers94 Zigzag Spooling
Paracord (video)by Stormdrane
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
How to Tie a Fire-escape Knotby leonardo ismael on October 16 2007
Intro How to Tie a Fire-escape KnotThis knot is used by firemen in case of fires for example imagine a scene where the ladder on the firetruck messes up but people need to get down a five story buildingor more All they have is a long piece of rope they can safely get down with a secure knot like the fire-escape knot So why not learn it its easy to do and hard to untieif you tie it tightly
This is from the American Boys Handbook
Step 1 Get Your RopeFirst grab a piece of rope and bend it like this to make a loop in it Follow every step to the smallest detail
Step 2 Twist the RopeNow make a twist like this and hold it together
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 3 Pull Through the TwistPull the loop through the twist you just made from underneath
Step 4 Go Over the Split EndNow pull the tail through the loop
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 5 FinallyAnd finally just pull it through as pictured below
Congratulations you just learned the fire-escape knot
Step 6 Same Name Not KnotThis is another knot called the fire-escape knot this shouldnt be your result
Related Instructables
House FireEscape Plan(video) byWhatHappensNowAdvice
ParacordLadder wWooden Rungsby josestude
Bed SheetEscape Rope byjessehensel
rope ladder(glow-in-the-dark version) bymikeasaurus
HeadlockEscape 2(video) byjohnnyrockstah
QuickFirestarter byMattandJora
Trail sauna byjakee117
How to Kill FireAnts andCommitGenocide byKentsOkay
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Climb Safe With A Figure 8 Knotby mattste on February 23 2010
Intro Climb Safe With A Figure 8 Knot There are many things that a beginning climber needs to know including several important knots Perhaps the most essential knot is the Figure 8 Follow Through Thistutorial will demonstrate how to correctly harness yourself to a rope using a Figure 8 Follow Through knot This knot is used primarily by rock climbers to provide a life-line Since this knot is used as a life-line it is very important to be able to tie it correctly (Your life could depend upon it)
Dont worry with this tutorial and about 5 minutes of practice you can have this knot mastered
Things you will need
- Climbing Harness- Climbing Rope
If you are wanting to go climbing and dont already have these items they can be purchased for about $25 each at most outdoor sporting goods stores If you are merelylooking to learn the knot a belt loop and a rope (about five feet long) will do
Image Notes1 Climbing Harness2 Climbing Rope
Step 1 Dealing With The RopeThroughout this tutorial I will be discussing different parts of the rope To make these instructions as clear as possible I will define a few terms that I will use throughoutthe tutorial The Anchor End of the rope will generally be at the top of the images This is the end that would be anchored to the wall or rock and does not move Wewill not be doing much with the anchored end The Tail End of the rope is the opposite end that we will be dealing with I will call this the tail for short
Now that we have some terms to work with lets get started
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 2 Tying The First Figure 8This knot has several parts to it The first part of the knot is just tying a basic figure 8 To tie the first figure 8 there are four simple steps
1 - Using the tail make a loop over the rope (as shown in the first picture) keeping in mind that there should be about 3 ft of slack on the tail end
2 - Wrap the tail back this time go under the anchored end (As shown in the second picture)
3 - Bring the tail down through the first loop (As shown in the third picture)
4 - Finally pull the two ends to make the knot a little bit tighter and easier to deal with (Shown in the fourth picture)
After these four steps you should end up with a knot that resembles a figure 8
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 3 Looping Into The Harness In order to secure the rope to the harness simply thread the tail end of the rope through the front loop in the harness as shown in the picture below This step isobviously very important
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 4 Following Back Through The Figure 8After looping the rope through the harness you have to thread the tail end of the rope back through the knot following the first figure 8 I have divided this process intofive smaller steps in order to make it more clear
1 - Coming form underneath the knot bring the tail up through the near loop and to the left behind the anchored end of the rope (Shown in the first picture)
2 - Wrap the tail around the anchored end back to the right and down through the adjacent loop (Shown in the second picture)
3 - You simply need to bring the tail back over the top of the knot to the left (Shown in the third picture)
4 - Bring the tail end up through the far loop following the anchored end (Shown in the fourth picture)
5 - Finally pull the knot tight (Shown in the fifth picture)
As you can see the first four pictures are simply tracing the knot back through with the tail end
For the last part while you pull the knot tight you may want to make small adjustments and rearrange how it all fits together If the knot does not lay perfectly smoothand tight its NOT a big deal
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 5 Finishing The Knot After completing the Figure 8 knot you will want to somehow secure the tail end of the rope out of the way There are a couple different ways to do this the way that Iwill demonstrate is using whats called a Stopper Knot This secondary knot is similar to a Fishermans knot and is pretty simple I have once again divided thisprocess into several smaller steps
1 - Start by wrapping the tail end around the anchored end (As shown in the first picture)
2 - Wrap the tail back underneath the two vertical segments (As shown in the second picture)
3 - Simply repeat the first two steps wrapping the tail around again (As shown in the third picture)
4 - This step in the fourth picture may look complicated but all you need to do is insert the tail up through the two loops that you have just made
5 - To finish off the knot you will want to slowly pull the tail end while gently pushing the bottom of the stopper knot upwards If you have successfully completed this knotit should look something like the fifth picture
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 6 Ready To Climb Now that you have mastered the Figure 8 knot you can securely harness yourself into a climbing rope Remember there are many other skills that go into setting up ananchor and belaying a climber This tutorial only covers the figure 8 knot For more information there are many great websites that demonstrate how to correctly set up asafe climbing system (Ive posted a few below) If you are a beginning climber I recommend that you read up on a few other climbing techniques Also you shouldprobably go to a climbing wall or gym where there are experienced climbers that can show you the ropes Hopefully this tutorial has been helpful Have fun and be safe
Some useful linkshttpwwwstephenprattnetAnchorsanchorshtmhttpwwwuoregonedu~oppclimbingtopicsanchorshtmlhttpwwwabc-of-rockclimbingcomhowtoclimbingtechniquesasp
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Related Instructables
How to Tie aFigure EightKnot byTactical_Pyro
Paracord KnotDisplay Bord byJamie bagn
Basic KnotsGuide byzorro3355
How to Climb aTree (withprussiks) bystasterisk
How to climb atree (using onlyrope) thefunsimple wayby louieaw
How to get arope into a tree(withoutclimbing it) byvitex
How to tievarious knots byadaviel
How to make arope swing byjdub0928
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Turks Head Knots on a Bottleby sklnxbones on July 6 2010
Intro Turks Head Knots on a BottleThis is the finished project A bottle decorated with three Turks Head Knots There are only three knots on this bottle The RED and the BLUE knots are each a 20 Bightby 3 Lead Turks Head Knots The WHITE knot is a 20 Bight by 19 Lead Turks Head Knot
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 1 Supplies
Cord Lots and Lots of cord I cant tell you how much each bottle is differentBottle Washed and Dried inside and out Make sure to remove all water spotsThreaded Needle Cord screws into the threads at the base of the needlePegs I use brass rivets used as a map to tie the Turks Head KnotsHole Punch Used to punch holes in the painters tape to hold the pegsPainters Tape To hold the pegs in place and to make your map for the Turks Head KnotsMarker To write on the painters tapeCloth Towel To remove finger prints and dirt from your bottleKrazy Glue or Super Glue This is used to secure the knots in place to the bottle
OPTIONAL BUT HIGHLY RECOMMENDEDI use the Turks Head Cookbook from KnotToolcom
Step 2 PreparationYou will need to find a bottle you like I used an empty instant tea bottle of course washed and dried (I like to put the bottle in the oven for a few minutes to dry the insidewithout water spots Take off the lid and do not put lid in the oven) Now measure the circumference of the bottle Take a cord and tightly wrap the cord around the bottleMark where the ends meet and use a ruler to measure the length of the cord For my instant tea bottle the circumference is 27cm I know from past knots that I have tiedthat I want my knot to have 20 Bights in the top and bottom (bands) knots I am going to use the Bights in the (bands) knots to tie the middle knot Now divide the numberof Bights (20) into the size of the circumference (27) to get the space between each Bight (135) With me so far
Now take two pieces of painters tape using a ruler measure out the length of the circumference and mark the length on the both pieces of tape Next you will mark thespace between each Bight on the tape
Step 3 Adding the PegsI like to use pegs when tying Turks Head Knots it just makes tying the knot easier
These are what I use for pegs
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 4 Adding Pegs to the TapeNow take a hole punch to cut holes in the tape where the lines meet You will place the pegs in the holes
Insert a peg in each hole and carefully stick the first piece of tape to the bottle
Step 5 Adding the 2nd row of pegsNow do the same thing with the second piece of tape The numbers on each piece of tape must line up
This picture shows you what you should have now This odd looking thing will be your map to tie the Turks Head Knot And this is the end of Step 1
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 6 Tying the first Turks Head KnotUsing the Turks Head Cookbook follow the numbers going over and under as indicated in the book I chose a 20 Bight by 3 Lead knot which will give me a nice bandaround the bottle Once the ends meet you have made one complete knot Tape the running end of your cord and start removing the pegs and the tape
Step 7 Remove the pegs and the tapeBe careful not to untie the knot as you remove the pegs and tape from the bottle Continue to remove all the pegs and remove the tape from the bottle At this point theknot will be very loose and will need to be tightened up
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 8 Remove the slack from the knotHere you can see just how much the knot expanded Starting with the standing end begin to pull the slack out of the knot going towards the running end of the cordDo not expect to pull all the slack out at once You may have to make 3 - 5 attempts at removing the slack out of the knot DO NOT remove all of the slack out of the knotIn order to make the bands we will have to triple the Turks Head Knot We will do this by following the knot three times The threaded needle will really come in handyhere
Step 9 Triple the KnotOnce you have made three passes of the Turks Head Knot use your needle to go under your knot about half the circumference and cut the cord The knot will be tightenough to hide the tail in placeTIP I carefully add a couple of drops of super glue UNDER the band to hold them in place and keep them from sliding around in the nextsteps A drop or two in 3 or 4 places around the band should be enough
Step 10 Add the second knotNow repeat this whole step for the second bandWhen tying the second band you must make sure the Bights line up to the first band This is crucial for the next stepWipe down the bottle to make sure all your finger prints and adhesive from the tape are all removed You want to make sure your bottle is clean at this point Any dirt orfinger prints left on the bottle will be almost impossible to remove From this point on we will use gloves when tying our last knot
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 11 Maping the Top KnotStick a piece of painters tape on top of your first band leaving the bottom of the knot exposedUse a marker to count the number of Bights in your knot Instead of using the pegs we are going to use the Bights to tie our next Turks Head Knot
Step 12 Mapping the Bottom KnotDo the same thing for the bottom band but you must make sure your numbers on top and bottom line up So 1 on top should be the same position as 1 on the bottom
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 13 Adding the last knotAgain using the Turks Head Cookbook and the threaded needle you are going to follow the instructions going over and under as indicated in the book Be sure to usegloves when ever you handle the bottle
Step 14 Thats ItFor this Turks Head Knot I am using a 20 Bight by 19 Lead knot
Because of the amount of cord you are working with your cord will get twisted and knotted You will have to un-twist the cord often Its a pain in the rear but it has to bedone And it has to be done alot
Continue to tie the knot until you finish the knot If you have the cord and the patience you can double or triple the knot When you are done use your needle to hide theends under your bands Cut the ends and your DONE
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Related Instructables
Monkeys FistFloatingKeychain byjokerlz
How To Make ATurks headKnot WithParacord byDoggie Stylish
Tying Trivetsout of Rope forHoliday Gifts bykylemarsh
Paracord KnotDisplay Bord byJamie bagn
How to Make ATurks Head(Photos) bymchs60chip
A pocket full ofknots byKiteman
Monkeys fistknot AND themonkey byjonathan111
TiteTie is theTruckers Knoton Steroids bytitetie
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Larks head noose -- an easy useful knot that tightens and loosensby Larry Breed on February 19 2009
Intro Larks head noose -- an easy useful knot that tightens and loosensI thought I knew all the basic knots but then I was taught this incredibly useful simple knot Its good for tying up the neck of a bag that you want to repeatedly open andsecurely close Its good for tying around a springy bundle that will need tightening and retightening And its easy to undo
Ive looked at knot literature but havent found a name for this so I named it The basic knot is well known its called a larks head Since all Ive done is to slip the twoends through the larks head to make a noose I call it that
WARNING Dont use this knot when human safety would depend on it Climbers and mountaineers have well-tested reliable knots for such situations
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Image Notes1 To tighten further step on this side of the larks head and pull the free ends
Step 1 Double the cord overThe larks head noose requires enough cord to go twice around your bundle plus a foot or two Find the center and double it over Sailors call this a bight
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 2 Form the larks headComing from below the bight hook your thumb and forefinger over the two sides Reach outward and downward and pinch your fingertips together underneath thedoubled cord
Youve made a larks head Move the crossing cord a little farther from your hand so theres a clear opening through the two half-loops
Step 3 Form the nooseSlip the two ends of the cord through the opening we were just talking about Pull the larks head tight so it grips the two cords Find something that needs constrictingand put the noose around it
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 4 Tightening retightening and lockingSlide the knot against the bundle If its not tight enough to keep from slipping tighten it by holding it in one hand and tugging on the cords one at a time with the otherhand Notice that you can slide the knot out again for instance to re-open the bag you just tied shut For some applications this may be as tight as you need it
A springy bundle probably still feels loose If so compress the bundle and get a new grip on the cords Rest your foot on the bundle on the cords nearest the larks headand pull to slide the larks head tighter
To make the knot more permanent you can lock it Make an overhand in the cord ends (Exactly like the first step in tying shoelaces) With your foot still on the bundlepull on the cords and move your hands apart until youre pulling in opposite directions You have just locked the larks head and you can trust it to stay that way()
But lets say that later on you want to loosen the locked knot Again put your foot on the bundle and cords nearest the larks head hold the two cord ends together andpull This makes a little slack between the overhand and the larks head so you can untie the overhand
In twine or small string the locking overhand knot may be difficult to undo Use a shoelace knot instead of an overhand and itll unlock easily
() If youre using slippery cord like polypropylene an overhand may not lock securely You may want to tie another overhand knot For added security wrap a shortlength of duct tape around the two cords close to the knot
Image Notes1 To tighten further step on this side of the larks head and pull the free ends
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Related Instructables
TRX fromParacordChallengeAccepted bythrake
A pocket full ofknots byKiteman
Lens CapLanyard by~teknoarsonist~ how to tie a
noose byawesume
AdjustableParacordGlassesLanyard byjdtwelve12
HangmansNoose PackClosure byPopEye42
Paraleash - ADog LeashFrom Paracordby The Ideanator
How to make arugged andhandy ParacordBelt by Jake22
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 15 Trussed for TransportThis is another hanging method for carrying your aluminum bottle water canteen A Jug knot is tied conventionally around the neck
The running ends of the knot however are pulled down towards the bottom of the bottle A Barrel Knot is tied about 34 the way down the side of the bottle A squareknot is tied on the bottom of the knot to keep the two running ends tight against the sides of the bottle
I like the look of the accent colored cord running down the sides of the bottle and the fact that the bottle hangs from the belt upside down It adds to its uniqueness
The last picture shows another truss variation
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 16 AdvancedBelow is a bottle with some additional trussing You can be creative as you want It all starts with a re-purposed container and the Jug Knot (and enough cord)
Related Instructables
AluminumBottle TumblerCup amp Cook Potfor an AlcoholStove byhpstoutharrow
Water BottleBelt Clip byuglymike Duct Tape
Water Bottle byrabidsquire2
AluminumBottle AlcoholStove byhpstoutharrow
DIYGlass WaterBottle byCulturespy
Solar WaterHeater forBackpackingUsing WaterBottles and aCar Shade bykopomeroy
Duct tape waterbottle holder(Photos) by pinkmarshmallow
How to make aCamelPack withan old plasticbottle bywillrandship
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Basic Knots Guideby zorro3355 on April 29 2008
Intro Basic Knots Guidehi
Step 1 Thumb knotThe most simple knotUsed as a stopper and prevent ropes from fraying
Step 2 Reef KnotUsed to tie two ropes of equal thickness togetherIt is pretty easy to tie and untie but under tentionit may be diffcult to untieIt is also not sutible for smoothropes(egnylon ropes)
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 3 Figure of eightused as a stopperprevent ropes from fraying and its more secure than tumb knot its is also used to tie Caribinas to ropes and is often used in rock climbing
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 4 Timber hitchused for pulling logs
Step 5 Clove hitchUsed to tie a rope onto a pole or logThe pole must be roundThe pole lust be thicker then the rope itself
(greatly used during pioneering)
Step 6 Sheet bandused to tie ropes of different thickness together(works on same thickness of ropes too)
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 7 Sheep shankTo shorten RopesTo prevent middle fraying
Step 8 Slip knotWhippingUsed as a grip for pulling things(when tied on a stick or small pole)(marlin spike hitch)
Related Instructables
Rope Rings byhpstoutharrow
How to Tie aFigure EightKnot byTactical_Pyro
Whippin (WestCountry Style)by tim_n
SurvivalBracelet(Updated) bytevers94
HangmansNoose PackClosure byPopEye42
Turkey on aTripod byhpstoutharrow
SurvivalBracelet II bytevers94 Zigzag Spooling
Paracord (video)by Stormdrane
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
How to Tie a Fire-escape Knotby leonardo ismael on October 16 2007
Intro How to Tie a Fire-escape KnotThis knot is used by firemen in case of fires for example imagine a scene where the ladder on the firetruck messes up but people need to get down a five story buildingor more All they have is a long piece of rope they can safely get down with a secure knot like the fire-escape knot So why not learn it its easy to do and hard to untieif you tie it tightly
This is from the American Boys Handbook
Step 1 Get Your RopeFirst grab a piece of rope and bend it like this to make a loop in it Follow every step to the smallest detail
Step 2 Twist the RopeNow make a twist like this and hold it together
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 3 Pull Through the TwistPull the loop through the twist you just made from underneath
Step 4 Go Over the Split EndNow pull the tail through the loop
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 5 FinallyAnd finally just pull it through as pictured below
Congratulations you just learned the fire-escape knot
Step 6 Same Name Not KnotThis is another knot called the fire-escape knot this shouldnt be your result
Related Instructables
House FireEscape Plan(video) byWhatHappensNowAdvice
ParacordLadder wWooden Rungsby josestude
Bed SheetEscape Rope byjessehensel
rope ladder(glow-in-the-dark version) bymikeasaurus
HeadlockEscape 2(video) byjohnnyrockstah
QuickFirestarter byMattandJora
Trail sauna byjakee117
How to Kill FireAnts andCommitGenocide byKentsOkay
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Climb Safe With A Figure 8 Knotby mattste on February 23 2010
Intro Climb Safe With A Figure 8 Knot There are many things that a beginning climber needs to know including several important knots Perhaps the most essential knot is the Figure 8 Follow Through Thistutorial will demonstrate how to correctly harness yourself to a rope using a Figure 8 Follow Through knot This knot is used primarily by rock climbers to provide a life-line Since this knot is used as a life-line it is very important to be able to tie it correctly (Your life could depend upon it)
Dont worry with this tutorial and about 5 minutes of practice you can have this knot mastered
Things you will need
- Climbing Harness- Climbing Rope
If you are wanting to go climbing and dont already have these items they can be purchased for about $25 each at most outdoor sporting goods stores If you are merelylooking to learn the knot a belt loop and a rope (about five feet long) will do
Image Notes1 Climbing Harness2 Climbing Rope
Step 1 Dealing With The RopeThroughout this tutorial I will be discussing different parts of the rope To make these instructions as clear as possible I will define a few terms that I will use throughoutthe tutorial The Anchor End of the rope will generally be at the top of the images This is the end that would be anchored to the wall or rock and does not move Wewill not be doing much with the anchored end The Tail End of the rope is the opposite end that we will be dealing with I will call this the tail for short
Now that we have some terms to work with lets get started
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 2 Tying The First Figure 8This knot has several parts to it The first part of the knot is just tying a basic figure 8 To tie the first figure 8 there are four simple steps
1 - Using the tail make a loop over the rope (as shown in the first picture) keeping in mind that there should be about 3 ft of slack on the tail end
2 - Wrap the tail back this time go under the anchored end (As shown in the second picture)
3 - Bring the tail down through the first loop (As shown in the third picture)
4 - Finally pull the two ends to make the knot a little bit tighter and easier to deal with (Shown in the fourth picture)
After these four steps you should end up with a knot that resembles a figure 8
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 3 Looping Into The Harness In order to secure the rope to the harness simply thread the tail end of the rope through the front loop in the harness as shown in the picture below This step isobviously very important
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 4 Following Back Through The Figure 8After looping the rope through the harness you have to thread the tail end of the rope back through the knot following the first figure 8 I have divided this process intofive smaller steps in order to make it more clear
1 - Coming form underneath the knot bring the tail up through the near loop and to the left behind the anchored end of the rope (Shown in the first picture)
2 - Wrap the tail around the anchored end back to the right and down through the adjacent loop (Shown in the second picture)
3 - You simply need to bring the tail back over the top of the knot to the left (Shown in the third picture)
4 - Bring the tail end up through the far loop following the anchored end (Shown in the fourth picture)
5 - Finally pull the knot tight (Shown in the fifth picture)
As you can see the first four pictures are simply tracing the knot back through with the tail end
For the last part while you pull the knot tight you may want to make small adjustments and rearrange how it all fits together If the knot does not lay perfectly smoothand tight its NOT a big deal
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 5 Finishing The Knot After completing the Figure 8 knot you will want to somehow secure the tail end of the rope out of the way There are a couple different ways to do this the way that Iwill demonstrate is using whats called a Stopper Knot This secondary knot is similar to a Fishermans knot and is pretty simple I have once again divided thisprocess into several smaller steps
1 - Start by wrapping the tail end around the anchored end (As shown in the first picture)
2 - Wrap the tail back underneath the two vertical segments (As shown in the second picture)
3 - Simply repeat the first two steps wrapping the tail around again (As shown in the third picture)
4 - This step in the fourth picture may look complicated but all you need to do is insert the tail up through the two loops that you have just made
5 - To finish off the knot you will want to slowly pull the tail end while gently pushing the bottom of the stopper knot upwards If you have successfully completed this knotit should look something like the fifth picture
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 6 Ready To Climb Now that you have mastered the Figure 8 knot you can securely harness yourself into a climbing rope Remember there are many other skills that go into setting up ananchor and belaying a climber This tutorial only covers the figure 8 knot For more information there are many great websites that demonstrate how to correctly set up asafe climbing system (Ive posted a few below) If you are a beginning climber I recommend that you read up on a few other climbing techniques Also you shouldprobably go to a climbing wall or gym where there are experienced climbers that can show you the ropes Hopefully this tutorial has been helpful Have fun and be safe
Some useful linkshttpwwwstephenprattnetAnchorsanchorshtmhttpwwwuoregonedu~oppclimbingtopicsanchorshtmlhttpwwwabc-of-rockclimbingcomhowtoclimbingtechniquesasp
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Related Instructables
How to Tie aFigure EightKnot byTactical_Pyro
Paracord KnotDisplay Bord byJamie bagn
Basic KnotsGuide byzorro3355
How to Climb aTree (withprussiks) bystasterisk
How to climb atree (using onlyrope) thefunsimple wayby louieaw
How to get arope into a tree(withoutclimbing it) byvitex
How to tievarious knots byadaviel
How to make arope swing byjdub0928
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Turks Head Knots on a Bottleby sklnxbones on July 6 2010
Intro Turks Head Knots on a BottleThis is the finished project A bottle decorated with three Turks Head Knots There are only three knots on this bottle The RED and the BLUE knots are each a 20 Bightby 3 Lead Turks Head Knots The WHITE knot is a 20 Bight by 19 Lead Turks Head Knot
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 1 Supplies
Cord Lots and Lots of cord I cant tell you how much each bottle is differentBottle Washed and Dried inside and out Make sure to remove all water spotsThreaded Needle Cord screws into the threads at the base of the needlePegs I use brass rivets used as a map to tie the Turks Head KnotsHole Punch Used to punch holes in the painters tape to hold the pegsPainters Tape To hold the pegs in place and to make your map for the Turks Head KnotsMarker To write on the painters tapeCloth Towel To remove finger prints and dirt from your bottleKrazy Glue or Super Glue This is used to secure the knots in place to the bottle
OPTIONAL BUT HIGHLY RECOMMENDEDI use the Turks Head Cookbook from KnotToolcom
Step 2 PreparationYou will need to find a bottle you like I used an empty instant tea bottle of course washed and dried (I like to put the bottle in the oven for a few minutes to dry the insidewithout water spots Take off the lid and do not put lid in the oven) Now measure the circumference of the bottle Take a cord and tightly wrap the cord around the bottleMark where the ends meet and use a ruler to measure the length of the cord For my instant tea bottle the circumference is 27cm I know from past knots that I have tiedthat I want my knot to have 20 Bights in the top and bottom (bands) knots I am going to use the Bights in the (bands) knots to tie the middle knot Now divide the numberof Bights (20) into the size of the circumference (27) to get the space between each Bight (135) With me so far
Now take two pieces of painters tape using a ruler measure out the length of the circumference and mark the length on the both pieces of tape Next you will mark thespace between each Bight on the tape
Step 3 Adding the PegsI like to use pegs when tying Turks Head Knots it just makes tying the knot easier
These are what I use for pegs
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 4 Adding Pegs to the TapeNow take a hole punch to cut holes in the tape where the lines meet You will place the pegs in the holes
Insert a peg in each hole and carefully stick the first piece of tape to the bottle
Step 5 Adding the 2nd row of pegsNow do the same thing with the second piece of tape The numbers on each piece of tape must line up
This picture shows you what you should have now This odd looking thing will be your map to tie the Turks Head Knot And this is the end of Step 1
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 6 Tying the first Turks Head KnotUsing the Turks Head Cookbook follow the numbers going over and under as indicated in the book I chose a 20 Bight by 3 Lead knot which will give me a nice bandaround the bottle Once the ends meet you have made one complete knot Tape the running end of your cord and start removing the pegs and the tape
Step 7 Remove the pegs and the tapeBe careful not to untie the knot as you remove the pegs and tape from the bottle Continue to remove all the pegs and remove the tape from the bottle At this point theknot will be very loose and will need to be tightened up
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 8 Remove the slack from the knotHere you can see just how much the knot expanded Starting with the standing end begin to pull the slack out of the knot going towards the running end of the cordDo not expect to pull all the slack out at once You may have to make 3 - 5 attempts at removing the slack out of the knot DO NOT remove all of the slack out of the knotIn order to make the bands we will have to triple the Turks Head Knot We will do this by following the knot three times The threaded needle will really come in handyhere
Step 9 Triple the KnotOnce you have made three passes of the Turks Head Knot use your needle to go under your knot about half the circumference and cut the cord The knot will be tightenough to hide the tail in placeTIP I carefully add a couple of drops of super glue UNDER the band to hold them in place and keep them from sliding around in the nextsteps A drop or two in 3 or 4 places around the band should be enough
Step 10 Add the second knotNow repeat this whole step for the second bandWhen tying the second band you must make sure the Bights line up to the first band This is crucial for the next stepWipe down the bottle to make sure all your finger prints and adhesive from the tape are all removed You want to make sure your bottle is clean at this point Any dirt orfinger prints left on the bottle will be almost impossible to remove From this point on we will use gloves when tying our last knot
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 11 Maping the Top KnotStick a piece of painters tape on top of your first band leaving the bottom of the knot exposedUse a marker to count the number of Bights in your knot Instead of using the pegs we are going to use the Bights to tie our next Turks Head Knot
Step 12 Mapping the Bottom KnotDo the same thing for the bottom band but you must make sure your numbers on top and bottom line up So 1 on top should be the same position as 1 on the bottom
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 13 Adding the last knotAgain using the Turks Head Cookbook and the threaded needle you are going to follow the instructions going over and under as indicated in the book Be sure to usegloves when ever you handle the bottle
Step 14 Thats ItFor this Turks Head Knot I am using a 20 Bight by 19 Lead knot
Because of the amount of cord you are working with your cord will get twisted and knotted You will have to un-twist the cord often Its a pain in the rear but it has to bedone And it has to be done alot
Continue to tie the knot until you finish the knot If you have the cord and the patience you can double or triple the knot When you are done use your needle to hide theends under your bands Cut the ends and your DONE
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Related Instructables
Monkeys FistFloatingKeychain byjokerlz
How To Make ATurks headKnot WithParacord byDoggie Stylish
Tying Trivetsout of Rope forHoliday Gifts bykylemarsh
Paracord KnotDisplay Bord byJamie bagn
How to Make ATurks Head(Photos) bymchs60chip
A pocket full ofknots byKiteman
Monkeys fistknot AND themonkey byjonathan111
TiteTie is theTruckers Knoton Steroids bytitetie
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Larks head noose -- an easy useful knot that tightens and loosensby Larry Breed on February 19 2009
Intro Larks head noose -- an easy useful knot that tightens and loosensI thought I knew all the basic knots but then I was taught this incredibly useful simple knot Its good for tying up the neck of a bag that you want to repeatedly open andsecurely close Its good for tying around a springy bundle that will need tightening and retightening And its easy to undo
Ive looked at knot literature but havent found a name for this so I named it The basic knot is well known its called a larks head Since all Ive done is to slip the twoends through the larks head to make a noose I call it that
WARNING Dont use this knot when human safety would depend on it Climbers and mountaineers have well-tested reliable knots for such situations
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Image Notes1 To tighten further step on this side of the larks head and pull the free ends
Step 1 Double the cord overThe larks head noose requires enough cord to go twice around your bundle plus a foot or two Find the center and double it over Sailors call this a bight
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 2 Form the larks headComing from below the bight hook your thumb and forefinger over the two sides Reach outward and downward and pinch your fingertips together underneath thedoubled cord
Youve made a larks head Move the crossing cord a little farther from your hand so theres a clear opening through the two half-loops
Step 3 Form the nooseSlip the two ends of the cord through the opening we were just talking about Pull the larks head tight so it grips the two cords Find something that needs constrictingand put the noose around it
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 4 Tightening retightening and lockingSlide the knot against the bundle If its not tight enough to keep from slipping tighten it by holding it in one hand and tugging on the cords one at a time with the otherhand Notice that you can slide the knot out again for instance to re-open the bag you just tied shut For some applications this may be as tight as you need it
A springy bundle probably still feels loose If so compress the bundle and get a new grip on the cords Rest your foot on the bundle on the cords nearest the larks headand pull to slide the larks head tighter
To make the knot more permanent you can lock it Make an overhand in the cord ends (Exactly like the first step in tying shoelaces) With your foot still on the bundlepull on the cords and move your hands apart until youre pulling in opposite directions You have just locked the larks head and you can trust it to stay that way()
But lets say that later on you want to loosen the locked knot Again put your foot on the bundle and cords nearest the larks head hold the two cord ends together andpull This makes a little slack between the overhand and the larks head so you can untie the overhand
In twine or small string the locking overhand knot may be difficult to undo Use a shoelace knot instead of an overhand and itll unlock easily
() If youre using slippery cord like polypropylene an overhand may not lock securely You may want to tie another overhand knot For added security wrap a shortlength of duct tape around the two cords close to the knot
Image Notes1 To tighten further step on this side of the larks head and pull the free ends
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Related Instructables
TRX fromParacordChallengeAccepted bythrake
A pocket full ofknots byKiteman
Lens CapLanyard by~teknoarsonist~ how to tie a
noose byawesume
AdjustableParacordGlassesLanyard byjdtwelve12
HangmansNoose PackClosure byPopEye42
Paraleash - ADog LeashFrom Paracordby The Ideanator
How to make arugged andhandy ParacordBelt by Jake22
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 16 AdvancedBelow is a bottle with some additional trussing You can be creative as you want It all starts with a re-purposed container and the Jug Knot (and enough cord)
Related Instructables
AluminumBottle TumblerCup amp Cook Potfor an AlcoholStove byhpstoutharrow
Water BottleBelt Clip byuglymike Duct Tape
Water Bottle byrabidsquire2
AluminumBottle AlcoholStove byhpstoutharrow
DIYGlass WaterBottle byCulturespy
Solar WaterHeater forBackpackingUsing WaterBottles and aCar Shade bykopomeroy
Duct tape waterbottle holder(Photos) by pinkmarshmallow
How to make aCamelPack withan old plasticbottle bywillrandship
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Basic Knots Guideby zorro3355 on April 29 2008
Intro Basic Knots Guidehi
Step 1 Thumb knotThe most simple knotUsed as a stopper and prevent ropes from fraying
Step 2 Reef KnotUsed to tie two ropes of equal thickness togetherIt is pretty easy to tie and untie but under tentionit may be diffcult to untieIt is also not sutible for smoothropes(egnylon ropes)
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 3 Figure of eightused as a stopperprevent ropes from fraying and its more secure than tumb knot its is also used to tie Caribinas to ropes and is often used in rock climbing
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 4 Timber hitchused for pulling logs
Step 5 Clove hitchUsed to tie a rope onto a pole or logThe pole must be roundThe pole lust be thicker then the rope itself
(greatly used during pioneering)
Step 6 Sheet bandused to tie ropes of different thickness together(works on same thickness of ropes too)
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 7 Sheep shankTo shorten RopesTo prevent middle fraying
Step 8 Slip knotWhippingUsed as a grip for pulling things(when tied on a stick or small pole)(marlin spike hitch)
Related Instructables
Rope Rings byhpstoutharrow
How to Tie aFigure EightKnot byTactical_Pyro
Whippin (WestCountry Style)by tim_n
SurvivalBracelet(Updated) bytevers94
HangmansNoose PackClosure byPopEye42
Turkey on aTripod byhpstoutharrow
SurvivalBracelet II bytevers94 Zigzag Spooling
Paracord (video)by Stormdrane
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
How to Tie a Fire-escape Knotby leonardo ismael on October 16 2007
Intro How to Tie a Fire-escape KnotThis knot is used by firemen in case of fires for example imagine a scene where the ladder on the firetruck messes up but people need to get down a five story buildingor more All they have is a long piece of rope they can safely get down with a secure knot like the fire-escape knot So why not learn it its easy to do and hard to untieif you tie it tightly
This is from the American Boys Handbook
Step 1 Get Your RopeFirst grab a piece of rope and bend it like this to make a loop in it Follow every step to the smallest detail
Step 2 Twist the RopeNow make a twist like this and hold it together
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 3 Pull Through the TwistPull the loop through the twist you just made from underneath
Step 4 Go Over the Split EndNow pull the tail through the loop
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 5 FinallyAnd finally just pull it through as pictured below
Congratulations you just learned the fire-escape knot
Step 6 Same Name Not KnotThis is another knot called the fire-escape knot this shouldnt be your result
Related Instructables
House FireEscape Plan(video) byWhatHappensNowAdvice
ParacordLadder wWooden Rungsby josestude
Bed SheetEscape Rope byjessehensel
rope ladder(glow-in-the-dark version) bymikeasaurus
HeadlockEscape 2(video) byjohnnyrockstah
QuickFirestarter byMattandJora
Trail sauna byjakee117
How to Kill FireAnts andCommitGenocide byKentsOkay
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Climb Safe With A Figure 8 Knotby mattste on February 23 2010
Intro Climb Safe With A Figure 8 Knot There are many things that a beginning climber needs to know including several important knots Perhaps the most essential knot is the Figure 8 Follow Through Thistutorial will demonstrate how to correctly harness yourself to a rope using a Figure 8 Follow Through knot This knot is used primarily by rock climbers to provide a life-line Since this knot is used as a life-line it is very important to be able to tie it correctly (Your life could depend upon it)
Dont worry with this tutorial and about 5 minutes of practice you can have this knot mastered
Things you will need
- Climbing Harness- Climbing Rope
If you are wanting to go climbing and dont already have these items they can be purchased for about $25 each at most outdoor sporting goods stores If you are merelylooking to learn the knot a belt loop and a rope (about five feet long) will do
Image Notes1 Climbing Harness2 Climbing Rope
Step 1 Dealing With The RopeThroughout this tutorial I will be discussing different parts of the rope To make these instructions as clear as possible I will define a few terms that I will use throughoutthe tutorial The Anchor End of the rope will generally be at the top of the images This is the end that would be anchored to the wall or rock and does not move Wewill not be doing much with the anchored end The Tail End of the rope is the opposite end that we will be dealing with I will call this the tail for short
Now that we have some terms to work with lets get started
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 2 Tying The First Figure 8This knot has several parts to it The first part of the knot is just tying a basic figure 8 To tie the first figure 8 there are four simple steps
1 - Using the tail make a loop over the rope (as shown in the first picture) keeping in mind that there should be about 3 ft of slack on the tail end
2 - Wrap the tail back this time go under the anchored end (As shown in the second picture)
3 - Bring the tail down through the first loop (As shown in the third picture)
4 - Finally pull the two ends to make the knot a little bit tighter and easier to deal with (Shown in the fourth picture)
After these four steps you should end up with a knot that resembles a figure 8
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 3 Looping Into The Harness In order to secure the rope to the harness simply thread the tail end of the rope through the front loop in the harness as shown in the picture below This step isobviously very important
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 4 Following Back Through The Figure 8After looping the rope through the harness you have to thread the tail end of the rope back through the knot following the first figure 8 I have divided this process intofive smaller steps in order to make it more clear
1 - Coming form underneath the knot bring the tail up through the near loop and to the left behind the anchored end of the rope (Shown in the first picture)
2 - Wrap the tail around the anchored end back to the right and down through the adjacent loop (Shown in the second picture)
3 - You simply need to bring the tail back over the top of the knot to the left (Shown in the third picture)
4 - Bring the tail end up through the far loop following the anchored end (Shown in the fourth picture)
5 - Finally pull the knot tight (Shown in the fifth picture)
As you can see the first four pictures are simply tracing the knot back through with the tail end
For the last part while you pull the knot tight you may want to make small adjustments and rearrange how it all fits together If the knot does not lay perfectly smoothand tight its NOT a big deal
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 5 Finishing The Knot After completing the Figure 8 knot you will want to somehow secure the tail end of the rope out of the way There are a couple different ways to do this the way that Iwill demonstrate is using whats called a Stopper Knot This secondary knot is similar to a Fishermans knot and is pretty simple I have once again divided thisprocess into several smaller steps
1 - Start by wrapping the tail end around the anchored end (As shown in the first picture)
2 - Wrap the tail back underneath the two vertical segments (As shown in the second picture)
3 - Simply repeat the first two steps wrapping the tail around again (As shown in the third picture)
4 - This step in the fourth picture may look complicated but all you need to do is insert the tail up through the two loops that you have just made
5 - To finish off the knot you will want to slowly pull the tail end while gently pushing the bottom of the stopper knot upwards If you have successfully completed this knotit should look something like the fifth picture
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 6 Ready To Climb Now that you have mastered the Figure 8 knot you can securely harness yourself into a climbing rope Remember there are many other skills that go into setting up ananchor and belaying a climber This tutorial only covers the figure 8 knot For more information there are many great websites that demonstrate how to correctly set up asafe climbing system (Ive posted a few below) If you are a beginning climber I recommend that you read up on a few other climbing techniques Also you shouldprobably go to a climbing wall or gym where there are experienced climbers that can show you the ropes Hopefully this tutorial has been helpful Have fun and be safe
Some useful linkshttpwwwstephenprattnetAnchorsanchorshtmhttpwwwuoregonedu~oppclimbingtopicsanchorshtmlhttpwwwabc-of-rockclimbingcomhowtoclimbingtechniquesasp
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Related Instructables
How to Tie aFigure EightKnot byTactical_Pyro
Paracord KnotDisplay Bord byJamie bagn
Basic KnotsGuide byzorro3355
How to Climb aTree (withprussiks) bystasterisk
How to climb atree (using onlyrope) thefunsimple wayby louieaw
How to get arope into a tree(withoutclimbing it) byvitex
How to tievarious knots byadaviel
How to make arope swing byjdub0928
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Turks Head Knots on a Bottleby sklnxbones on July 6 2010
Intro Turks Head Knots on a BottleThis is the finished project A bottle decorated with three Turks Head Knots There are only three knots on this bottle The RED and the BLUE knots are each a 20 Bightby 3 Lead Turks Head Knots The WHITE knot is a 20 Bight by 19 Lead Turks Head Knot
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 1 Supplies
Cord Lots and Lots of cord I cant tell you how much each bottle is differentBottle Washed and Dried inside and out Make sure to remove all water spotsThreaded Needle Cord screws into the threads at the base of the needlePegs I use brass rivets used as a map to tie the Turks Head KnotsHole Punch Used to punch holes in the painters tape to hold the pegsPainters Tape To hold the pegs in place and to make your map for the Turks Head KnotsMarker To write on the painters tapeCloth Towel To remove finger prints and dirt from your bottleKrazy Glue or Super Glue This is used to secure the knots in place to the bottle
OPTIONAL BUT HIGHLY RECOMMENDEDI use the Turks Head Cookbook from KnotToolcom
Step 2 PreparationYou will need to find a bottle you like I used an empty instant tea bottle of course washed and dried (I like to put the bottle in the oven for a few minutes to dry the insidewithout water spots Take off the lid and do not put lid in the oven) Now measure the circumference of the bottle Take a cord and tightly wrap the cord around the bottleMark where the ends meet and use a ruler to measure the length of the cord For my instant tea bottle the circumference is 27cm I know from past knots that I have tiedthat I want my knot to have 20 Bights in the top and bottom (bands) knots I am going to use the Bights in the (bands) knots to tie the middle knot Now divide the numberof Bights (20) into the size of the circumference (27) to get the space between each Bight (135) With me so far
Now take two pieces of painters tape using a ruler measure out the length of the circumference and mark the length on the both pieces of tape Next you will mark thespace between each Bight on the tape
Step 3 Adding the PegsI like to use pegs when tying Turks Head Knots it just makes tying the knot easier
These are what I use for pegs
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 4 Adding Pegs to the TapeNow take a hole punch to cut holes in the tape where the lines meet You will place the pegs in the holes
Insert a peg in each hole and carefully stick the first piece of tape to the bottle
Step 5 Adding the 2nd row of pegsNow do the same thing with the second piece of tape The numbers on each piece of tape must line up
This picture shows you what you should have now This odd looking thing will be your map to tie the Turks Head Knot And this is the end of Step 1
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 6 Tying the first Turks Head KnotUsing the Turks Head Cookbook follow the numbers going over and under as indicated in the book I chose a 20 Bight by 3 Lead knot which will give me a nice bandaround the bottle Once the ends meet you have made one complete knot Tape the running end of your cord and start removing the pegs and the tape
Step 7 Remove the pegs and the tapeBe careful not to untie the knot as you remove the pegs and tape from the bottle Continue to remove all the pegs and remove the tape from the bottle At this point theknot will be very loose and will need to be tightened up
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 8 Remove the slack from the knotHere you can see just how much the knot expanded Starting with the standing end begin to pull the slack out of the knot going towards the running end of the cordDo not expect to pull all the slack out at once You may have to make 3 - 5 attempts at removing the slack out of the knot DO NOT remove all of the slack out of the knotIn order to make the bands we will have to triple the Turks Head Knot We will do this by following the knot three times The threaded needle will really come in handyhere
Step 9 Triple the KnotOnce you have made three passes of the Turks Head Knot use your needle to go under your knot about half the circumference and cut the cord The knot will be tightenough to hide the tail in placeTIP I carefully add a couple of drops of super glue UNDER the band to hold them in place and keep them from sliding around in the nextsteps A drop or two in 3 or 4 places around the band should be enough
Step 10 Add the second knotNow repeat this whole step for the second bandWhen tying the second band you must make sure the Bights line up to the first band This is crucial for the next stepWipe down the bottle to make sure all your finger prints and adhesive from the tape are all removed You want to make sure your bottle is clean at this point Any dirt orfinger prints left on the bottle will be almost impossible to remove From this point on we will use gloves when tying our last knot
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 11 Maping the Top KnotStick a piece of painters tape on top of your first band leaving the bottom of the knot exposedUse a marker to count the number of Bights in your knot Instead of using the pegs we are going to use the Bights to tie our next Turks Head Knot
Step 12 Mapping the Bottom KnotDo the same thing for the bottom band but you must make sure your numbers on top and bottom line up So 1 on top should be the same position as 1 on the bottom
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 13 Adding the last knotAgain using the Turks Head Cookbook and the threaded needle you are going to follow the instructions going over and under as indicated in the book Be sure to usegloves when ever you handle the bottle
Step 14 Thats ItFor this Turks Head Knot I am using a 20 Bight by 19 Lead knot
Because of the amount of cord you are working with your cord will get twisted and knotted You will have to un-twist the cord often Its a pain in the rear but it has to bedone And it has to be done alot
Continue to tie the knot until you finish the knot If you have the cord and the patience you can double or triple the knot When you are done use your needle to hide theends under your bands Cut the ends and your DONE
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Related Instructables
Monkeys FistFloatingKeychain byjokerlz
How To Make ATurks headKnot WithParacord byDoggie Stylish
Tying Trivetsout of Rope forHoliday Gifts bykylemarsh
Paracord KnotDisplay Bord byJamie bagn
How to Make ATurks Head(Photos) bymchs60chip
A pocket full ofknots byKiteman
Monkeys fistknot AND themonkey byjonathan111
TiteTie is theTruckers Knoton Steroids bytitetie
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Larks head noose -- an easy useful knot that tightens and loosensby Larry Breed on February 19 2009
Intro Larks head noose -- an easy useful knot that tightens and loosensI thought I knew all the basic knots but then I was taught this incredibly useful simple knot Its good for tying up the neck of a bag that you want to repeatedly open andsecurely close Its good for tying around a springy bundle that will need tightening and retightening And its easy to undo
Ive looked at knot literature but havent found a name for this so I named it The basic knot is well known its called a larks head Since all Ive done is to slip the twoends through the larks head to make a noose I call it that
WARNING Dont use this knot when human safety would depend on it Climbers and mountaineers have well-tested reliable knots for such situations
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Image Notes1 To tighten further step on this side of the larks head and pull the free ends
Step 1 Double the cord overThe larks head noose requires enough cord to go twice around your bundle plus a foot or two Find the center and double it over Sailors call this a bight
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 2 Form the larks headComing from below the bight hook your thumb and forefinger over the two sides Reach outward and downward and pinch your fingertips together underneath thedoubled cord
Youve made a larks head Move the crossing cord a little farther from your hand so theres a clear opening through the two half-loops
Step 3 Form the nooseSlip the two ends of the cord through the opening we were just talking about Pull the larks head tight so it grips the two cords Find something that needs constrictingand put the noose around it
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 4 Tightening retightening and lockingSlide the knot against the bundle If its not tight enough to keep from slipping tighten it by holding it in one hand and tugging on the cords one at a time with the otherhand Notice that you can slide the knot out again for instance to re-open the bag you just tied shut For some applications this may be as tight as you need it
A springy bundle probably still feels loose If so compress the bundle and get a new grip on the cords Rest your foot on the bundle on the cords nearest the larks headand pull to slide the larks head tighter
To make the knot more permanent you can lock it Make an overhand in the cord ends (Exactly like the first step in tying shoelaces) With your foot still on the bundlepull on the cords and move your hands apart until youre pulling in opposite directions You have just locked the larks head and you can trust it to stay that way()
But lets say that later on you want to loosen the locked knot Again put your foot on the bundle and cords nearest the larks head hold the two cord ends together andpull This makes a little slack between the overhand and the larks head so you can untie the overhand
In twine or small string the locking overhand knot may be difficult to undo Use a shoelace knot instead of an overhand and itll unlock easily
() If youre using slippery cord like polypropylene an overhand may not lock securely You may want to tie another overhand knot For added security wrap a shortlength of duct tape around the two cords close to the knot
Image Notes1 To tighten further step on this side of the larks head and pull the free ends
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Related Instructables
TRX fromParacordChallengeAccepted bythrake
A pocket full ofknots byKiteman
Lens CapLanyard by~teknoarsonist~ how to tie a
noose byawesume
AdjustableParacordGlassesLanyard byjdtwelve12
HangmansNoose PackClosure byPopEye42
Paraleash - ADog LeashFrom Paracordby The Ideanator
How to make arugged andhandy ParacordBelt by Jake22
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 16 AdvancedBelow is a bottle with some additional trussing You can be creative as you want It all starts with a re-purposed container and the Jug Knot (and enough cord)
Related Instructables
AluminumBottle TumblerCup amp Cook Potfor an AlcoholStove byhpstoutharrow
Water BottleBelt Clip byuglymike Duct Tape
Water Bottle byrabidsquire2
AluminumBottle AlcoholStove byhpstoutharrow
DIYGlass WaterBottle byCulturespy
Solar WaterHeater forBackpackingUsing WaterBottles and aCar Shade bykopomeroy
Duct tape waterbottle holder(Photos) by pinkmarshmallow
How to make aCamelPack withan old plasticbottle bywillrandship
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Basic Knots Guideby zorro3355 on April 29 2008
Intro Basic Knots Guidehi
Step 1 Thumb knotThe most simple knotUsed as a stopper and prevent ropes from fraying
Step 2 Reef KnotUsed to tie two ropes of equal thickness togetherIt is pretty easy to tie and untie but under tentionit may be diffcult to untieIt is also not sutible for smoothropes(egnylon ropes)
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 3 Figure of eightused as a stopperprevent ropes from fraying and its more secure than tumb knot its is also used to tie Caribinas to ropes and is often used in rock climbing
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 4 Timber hitchused for pulling logs
Step 5 Clove hitchUsed to tie a rope onto a pole or logThe pole must be roundThe pole lust be thicker then the rope itself
(greatly used during pioneering)
Step 6 Sheet bandused to tie ropes of different thickness together(works on same thickness of ropes too)
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 7 Sheep shankTo shorten RopesTo prevent middle fraying
Step 8 Slip knotWhippingUsed as a grip for pulling things(when tied on a stick or small pole)(marlin spike hitch)
Related Instructables
Rope Rings byhpstoutharrow
How to Tie aFigure EightKnot byTactical_Pyro
Whippin (WestCountry Style)by tim_n
SurvivalBracelet(Updated) bytevers94
HangmansNoose PackClosure byPopEye42
Turkey on aTripod byhpstoutharrow
SurvivalBracelet II bytevers94 Zigzag Spooling
Paracord (video)by Stormdrane
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
How to Tie a Fire-escape Knotby leonardo ismael on October 16 2007
Intro How to Tie a Fire-escape KnotThis knot is used by firemen in case of fires for example imagine a scene where the ladder on the firetruck messes up but people need to get down a five story buildingor more All they have is a long piece of rope they can safely get down with a secure knot like the fire-escape knot So why not learn it its easy to do and hard to untieif you tie it tightly
This is from the American Boys Handbook
Step 1 Get Your RopeFirst grab a piece of rope and bend it like this to make a loop in it Follow every step to the smallest detail
Step 2 Twist the RopeNow make a twist like this and hold it together
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 3 Pull Through the TwistPull the loop through the twist you just made from underneath
Step 4 Go Over the Split EndNow pull the tail through the loop
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 5 FinallyAnd finally just pull it through as pictured below
Congratulations you just learned the fire-escape knot
Step 6 Same Name Not KnotThis is another knot called the fire-escape knot this shouldnt be your result
Related Instructables
House FireEscape Plan(video) byWhatHappensNowAdvice
ParacordLadder wWooden Rungsby josestude
Bed SheetEscape Rope byjessehensel
rope ladder(glow-in-the-dark version) bymikeasaurus
HeadlockEscape 2(video) byjohnnyrockstah
QuickFirestarter byMattandJora
Trail sauna byjakee117
How to Kill FireAnts andCommitGenocide byKentsOkay
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Climb Safe With A Figure 8 Knotby mattste on February 23 2010
Intro Climb Safe With A Figure 8 Knot There are many things that a beginning climber needs to know including several important knots Perhaps the most essential knot is the Figure 8 Follow Through Thistutorial will demonstrate how to correctly harness yourself to a rope using a Figure 8 Follow Through knot This knot is used primarily by rock climbers to provide a life-line Since this knot is used as a life-line it is very important to be able to tie it correctly (Your life could depend upon it)
Dont worry with this tutorial and about 5 minutes of practice you can have this knot mastered
Things you will need
- Climbing Harness- Climbing Rope
If you are wanting to go climbing and dont already have these items they can be purchased for about $25 each at most outdoor sporting goods stores If you are merelylooking to learn the knot a belt loop and a rope (about five feet long) will do
Image Notes1 Climbing Harness2 Climbing Rope
Step 1 Dealing With The RopeThroughout this tutorial I will be discussing different parts of the rope To make these instructions as clear as possible I will define a few terms that I will use throughoutthe tutorial The Anchor End of the rope will generally be at the top of the images This is the end that would be anchored to the wall or rock and does not move Wewill not be doing much with the anchored end The Tail End of the rope is the opposite end that we will be dealing with I will call this the tail for short
Now that we have some terms to work with lets get started
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 2 Tying The First Figure 8This knot has several parts to it The first part of the knot is just tying a basic figure 8 To tie the first figure 8 there are four simple steps
1 - Using the tail make a loop over the rope (as shown in the first picture) keeping in mind that there should be about 3 ft of slack on the tail end
2 - Wrap the tail back this time go under the anchored end (As shown in the second picture)
3 - Bring the tail down through the first loop (As shown in the third picture)
4 - Finally pull the two ends to make the knot a little bit tighter and easier to deal with (Shown in the fourth picture)
After these four steps you should end up with a knot that resembles a figure 8
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 3 Looping Into The Harness In order to secure the rope to the harness simply thread the tail end of the rope through the front loop in the harness as shown in the picture below This step isobviously very important
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 4 Following Back Through The Figure 8After looping the rope through the harness you have to thread the tail end of the rope back through the knot following the first figure 8 I have divided this process intofive smaller steps in order to make it more clear
1 - Coming form underneath the knot bring the tail up through the near loop and to the left behind the anchored end of the rope (Shown in the first picture)
2 - Wrap the tail around the anchored end back to the right and down through the adjacent loop (Shown in the second picture)
3 - You simply need to bring the tail back over the top of the knot to the left (Shown in the third picture)
4 - Bring the tail end up through the far loop following the anchored end (Shown in the fourth picture)
5 - Finally pull the knot tight (Shown in the fifth picture)
As you can see the first four pictures are simply tracing the knot back through with the tail end
For the last part while you pull the knot tight you may want to make small adjustments and rearrange how it all fits together If the knot does not lay perfectly smoothand tight its NOT a big deal
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 5 Finishing The Knot After completing the Figure 8 knot you will want to somehow secure the tail end of the rope out of the way There are a couple different ways to do this the way that Iwill demonstrate is using whats called a Stopper Knot This secondary knot is similar to a Fishermans knot and is pretty simple I have once again divided thisprocess into several smaller steps
1 - Start by wrapping the tail end around the anchored end (As shown in the first picture)
2 - Wrap the tail back underneath the two vertical segments (As shown in the second picture)
3 - Simply repeat the first two steps wrapping the tail around again (As shown in the third picture)
4 - This step in the fourth picture may look complicated but all you need to do is insert the tail up through the two loops that you have just made
5 - To finish off the knot you will want to slowly pull the tail end while gently pushing the bottom of the stopper knot upwards If you have successfully completed this knotit should look something like the fifth picture
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 6 Ready To Climb Now that you have mastered the Figure 8 knot you can securely harness yourself into a climbing rope Remember there are many other skills that go into setting up ananchor and belaying a climber This tutorial only covers the figure 8 knot For more information there are many great websites that demonstrate how to correctly set up asafe climbing system (Ive posted a few below) If you are a beginning climber I recommend that you read up on a few other climbing techniques Also you shouldprobably go to a climbing wall or gym where there are experienced climbers that can show you the ropes Hopefully this tutorial has been helpful Have fun and be safe
Some useful linkshttpwwwstephenprattnetAnchorsanchorshtmhttpwwwuoregonedu~oppclimbingtopicsanchorshtmlhttpwwwabc-of-rockclimbingcomhowtoclimbingtechniquesasp
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Related Instructables
How to Tie aFigure EightKnot byTactical_Pyro
Paracord KnotDisplay Bord byJamie bagn
Basic KnotsGuide byzorro3355
How to Climb aTree (withprussiks) bystasterisk
How to climb atree (using onlyrope) thefunsimple wayby louieaw
How to get arope into a tree(withoutclimbing it) byvitex
How to tievarious knots byadaviel
How to make arope swing byjdub0928
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Turks Head Knots on a Bottleby sklnxbones on July 6 2010
Intro Turks Head Knots on a BottleThis is the finished project A bottle decorated with three Turks Head Knots There are only three knots on this bottle The RED and the BLUE knots are each a 20 Bightby 3 Lead Turks Head Knots The WHITE knot is a 20 Bight by 19 Lead Turks Head Knot
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 1 Supplies
Cord Lots and Lots of cord I cant tell you how much each bottle is differentBottle Washed and Dried inside and out Make sure to remove all water spotsThreaded Needle Cord screws into the threads at the base of the needlePegs I use brass rivets used as a map to tie the Turks Head KnotsHole Punch Used to punch holes in the painters tape to hold the pegsPainters Tape To hold the pegs in place and to make your map for the Turks Head KnotsMarker To write on the painters tapeCloth Towel To remove finger prints and dirt from your bottleKrazy Glue or Super Glue This is used to secure the knots in place to the bottle
OPTIONAL BUT HIGHLY RECOMMENDEDI use the Turks Head Cookbook from KnotToolcom
Step 2 PreparationYou will need to find a bottle you like I used an empty instant tea bottle of course washed and dried (I like to put the bottle in the oven for a few minutes to dry the insidewithout water spots Take off the lid and do not put lid in the oven) Now measure the circumference of the bottle Take a cord and tightly wrap the cord around the bottleMark where the ends meet and use a ruler to measure the length of the cord For my instant tea bottle the circumference is 27cm I know from past knots that I have tiedthat I want my knot to have 20 Bights in the top and bottom (bands) knots I am going to use the Bights in the (bands) knots to tie the middle knot Now divide the numberof Bights (20) into the size of the circumference (27) to get the space between each Bight (135) With me so far
Now take two pieces of painters tape using a ruler measure out the length of the circumference and mark the length on the both pieces of tape Next you will mark thespace between each Bight on the tape
Step 3 Adding the PegsI like to use pegs when tying Turks Head Knots it just makes tying the knot easier
These are what I use for pegs
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 4 Adding Pegs to the TapeNow take a hole punch to cut holes in the tape where the lines meet You will place the pegs in the holes
Insert a peg in each hole and carefully stick the first piece of tape to the bottle
Step 5 Adding the 2nd row of pegsNow do the same thing with the second piece of tape The numbers on each piece of tape must line up
This picture shows you what you should have now This odd looking thing will be your map to tie the Turks Head Knot And this is the end of Step 1
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 6 Tying the first Turks Head KnotUsing the Turks Head Cookbook follow the numbers going over and under as indicated in the book I chose a 20 Bight by 3 Lead knot which will give me a nice bandaround the bottle Once the ends meet you have made one complete knot Tape the running end of your cord and start removing the pegs and the tape
Step 7 Remove the pegs and the tapeBe careful not to untie the knot as you remove the pegs and tape from the bottle Continue to remove all the pegs and remove the tape from the bottle At this point theknot will be very loose and will need to be tightened up
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 8 Remove the slack from the knotHere you can see just how much the knot expanded Starting with the standing end begin to pull the slack out of the knot going towards the running end of the cordDo not expect to pull all the slack out at once You may have to make 3 - 5 attempts at removing the slack out of the knot DO NOT remove all of the slack out of the knotIn order to make the bands we will have to triple the Turks Head Knot We will do this by following the knot three times The threaded needle will really come in handyhere
Step 9 Triple the KnotOnce you have made three passes of the Turks Head Knot use your needle to go under your knot about half the circumference and cut the cord The knot will be tightenough to hide the tail in placeTIP I carefully add a couple of drops of super glue UNDER the band to hold them in place and keep them from sliding around in the nextsteps A drop or two in 3 or 4 places around the band should be enough
Step 10 Add the second knotNow repeat this whole step for the second bandWhen tying the second band you must make sure the Bights line up to the first band This is crucial for the next stepWipe down the bottle to make sure all your finger prints and adhesive from the tape are all removed You want to make sure your bottle is clean at this point Any dirt orfinger prints left on the bottle will be almost impossible to remove From this point on we will use gloves when tying our last knot
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 11 Maping the Top KnotStick a piece of painters tape on top of your first band leaving the bottom of the knot exposedUse a marker to count the number of Bights in your knot Instead of using the pegs we are going to use the Bights to tie our next Turks Head Knot
Step 12 Mapping the Bottom KnotDo the same thing for the bottom band but you must make sure your numbers on top and bottom line up So 1 on top should be the same position as 1 on the bottom
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 13 Adding the last knotAgain using the Turks Head Cookbook and the threaded needle you are going to follow the instructions going over and under as indicated in the book Be sure to usegloves when ever you handle the bottle
Step 14 Thats ItFor this Turks Head Knot I am using a 20 Bight by 19 Lead knot
Because of the amount of cord you are working with your cord will get twisted and knotted You will have to un-twist the cord often Its a pain in the rear but it has to bedone And it has to be done alot
Continue to tie the knot until you finish the knot If you have the cord and the patience you can double or triple the knot When you are done use your needle to hide theends under your bands Cut the ends and your DONE
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Related Instructables
Monkeys FistFloatingKeychain byjokerlz
How To Make ATurks headKnot WithParacord byDoggie Stylish
Tying Trivetsout of Rope forHoliday Gifts bykylemarsh
Paracord KnotDisplay Bord byJamie bagn
How to Make ATurks Head(Photos) bymchs60chip
A pocket full ofknots byKiteman
Monkeys fistknot AND themonkey byjonathan111
TiteTie is theTruckers Knoton Steroids bytitetie
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Larks head noose -- an easy useful knot that tightens and loosensby Larry Breed on February 19 2009
Intro Larks head noose -- an easy useful knot that tightens and loosensI thought I knew all the basic knots but then I was taught this incredibly useful simple knot Its good for tying up the neck of a bag that you want to repeatedly open andsecurely close Its good for tying around a springy bundle that will need tightening and retightening And its easy to undo
Ive looked at knot literature but havent found a name for this so I named it The basic knot is well known its called a larks head Since all Ive done is to slip the twoends through the larks head to make a noose I call it that
WARNING Dont use this knot when human safety would depend on it Climbers and mountaineers have well-tested reliable knots for such situations
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Image Notes1 To tighten further step on this side of the larks head and pull the free ends
Step 1 Double the cord overThe larks head noose requires enough cord to go twice around your bundle plus a foot or two Find the center and double it over Sailors call this a bight
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 2 Form the larks headComing from below the bight hook your thumb and forefinger over the two sides Reach outward and downward and pinch your fingertips together underneath thedoubled cord
Youve made a larks head Move the crossing cord a little farther from your hand so theres a clear opening through the two half-loops
Step 3 Form the nooseSlip the two ends of the cord through the opening we were just talking about Pull the larks head tight so it grips the two cords Find something that needs constrictingand put the noose around it
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 4 Tightening retightening and lockingSlide the knot against the bundle If its not tight enough to keep from slipping tighten it by holding it in one hand and tugging on the cords one at a time with the otherhand Notice that you can slide the knot out again for instance to re-open the bag you just tied shut For some applications this may be as tight as you need it
A springy bundle probably still feels loose If so compress the bundle and get a new grip on the cords Rest your foot on the bundle on the cords nearest the larks headand pull to slide the larks head tighter
To make the knot more permanent you can lock it Make an overhand in the cord ends (Exactly like the first step in tying shoelaces) With your foot still on the bundlepull on the cords and move your hands apart until youre pulling in opposite directions You have just locked the larks head and you can trust it to stay that way()
But lets say that later on you want to loosen the locked knot Again put your foot on the bundle and cords nearest the larks head hold the two cord ends together andpull This makes a little slack between the overhand and the larks head so you can untie the overhand
In twine or small string the locking overhand knot may be difficult to undo Use a shoelace knot instead of an overhand and itll unlock easily
() If youre using slippery cord like polypropylene an overhand may not lock securely You may want to tie another overhand knot For added security wrap a shortlength of duct tape around the two cords close to the knot
Image Notes1 To tighten further step on this side of the larks head and pull the free ends
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Related Instructables
TRX fromParacordChallengeAccepted bythrake
A pocket full ofknots byKiteman
Lens CapLanyard by~teknoarsonist~ how to tie a
noose byawesume
AdjustableParacordGlassesLanyard byjdtwelve12
HangmansNoose PackClosure byPopEye42
Paraleash - ADog LeashFrom Paracordby The Ideanator
How to make arugged andhandy ParacordBelt by Jake22
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 16 AdvancedBelow is a bottle with some additional trussing You can be creative as you want It all starts with a re-purposed container and the Jug Knot (and enough cord)
Related Instructables
AluminumBottle TumblerCup amp Cook Potfor an AlcoholStove byhpstoutharrow
Water BottleBelt Clip byuglymike Duct Tape
Water Bottle byrabidsquire2
AluminumBottle AlcoholStove byhpstoutharrow
DIYGlass WaterBottle byCulturespy
Solar WaterHeater forBackpackingUsing WaterBottles and aCar Shade bykopomeroy
Duct tape waterbottle holder(Photos) by pinkmarshmallow
How to make aCamelPack withan old plasticbottle bywillrandship
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Basic Knots Guideby zorro3355 on April 29 2008
Intro Basic Knots Guidehi
Step 1 Thumb knotThe most simple knotUsed as a stopper and prevent ropes from fraying
Step 2 Reef KnotUsed to tie two ropes of equal thickness togetherIt is pretty easy to tie and untie but under tentionit may be diffcult to untieIt is also not sutible for smoothropes(egnylon ropes)
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 3 Figure of eightused as a stopperprevent ropes from fraying and its more secure than tumb knot its is also used to tie Caribinas to ropes and is often used in rock climbing
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 4 Timber hitchused for pulling logs
Step 5 Clove hitchUsed to tie a rope onto a pole or logThe pole must be roundThe pole lust be thicker then the rope itself
(greatly used during pioneering)
Step 6 Sheet bandused to tie ropes of different thickness together(works on same thickness of ropes too)
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 7 Sheep shankTo shorten RopesTo prevent middle fraying
Step 8 Slip knotWhippingUsed as a grip for pulling things(when tied on a stick or small pole)(marlin spike hitch)
Related Instructables
Rope Rings byhpstoutharrow
How to Tie aFigure EightKnot byTactical_Pyro
Whippin (WestCountry Style)by tim_n
SurvivalBracelet(Updated) bytevers94
HangmansNoose PackClosure byPopEye42
Turkey on aTripod byhpstoutharrow
SurvivalBracelet II bytevers94 Zigzag Spooling
Paracord (video)by Stormdrane
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
How to Tie a Fire-escape Knotby leonardo ismael on October 16 2007
Intro How to Tie a Fire-escape KnotThis knot is used by firemen in case of fires for example imagine a scene where the ladder on the firetruck messes up but people need to get down a five story buildingor more All they have is a long piece of rope they can safely get down with a secure knot like the fire-escape knot So why not learn it its easy to do and hard to untieif you tie it tightly
This is from the American Boys Handbook
Step 1 Get Your RopeFirst grab a piece of rope and bend it like this to make a loop in it Follow every step to the smallest detail
Step 2 Twist the RopeNow make a twist like this and hold it together
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 3 Pull Through the TwistPull the loop through the twist you just made from underneath
Step 4 Go Over the Split EndNow pull the tail through the loop
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 5 FinallyAnd finally just pull it through as pictured below
Congratulations you just learned the fire-escape knot
Step 6 Same Name Not KnotThis is another knot called the fire-escape knot this shouldnt be your result
Related Instructables
House FireEscape Plan(video) byWhatHappensNowAdvice
ParacordLadder wWooden Rungsby josestude
Bed SheetEscape Rope byjessehensel
rope ladder(glow-in-the-dark version) bymikeasaurus
HeadlockEscape 2(video) byjohnnyrockstah
QuickFirestarter byMattandJora
Trail sauna byjakee117
How to Kill FireAnts andCommitGenocide byKentsOkay
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Climb Safe With A Figure 8 Knotby mattste on February 23 2010
Intro Climb Safe With A Figure 8 Knot There are many things that a beginning climber needs to know including several important knots Perhaps the most essential knot is the Figure 8 Follow Through Thistutorial will demonstrate how to correctly harness yourself to a rope using a Figure 8 Follow Through knot This knot is used primarily by rock climbers to provide a life-line Since this knot is used as a life-line it is very important to be able to tie it correctly (Your life could depend upon it)
Dont worry with this tutorial and about 5 minutes of practice you can have this knot mastered
Things you will need
- Climbing Harness- Climbing Rope
If you are wanting to go climbing and dont already have these items they can be purchased for about $25 each at most outdoor sporting goods stores If you are merelylooking to learn the knot a belt loop and a rope (about five feet long) will do
Image Notes1 Climbing Harness2 Climbing Rope
Step 1 Dealing With The RopeThroughout this tutorial I will be discussing different parts of the rope To make these instructions as clear as possible I will define a few terms that I will use throughoutthe tutorial The Anchor End of the rope will generally be at the top of the images This is the end that would be anchored to the wall or rock and does not move Wewill not be doing much with the anchored end The Tail End of the rope is the opposite end that we will be dealing with I will call this the tail for short
Now that we have some terms to work with lets get started
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 2 Tying The First Figure 8This knot has several parts to it The first part of the knot is just tying a basic figure 8 To tie the first figure 8 there are four simple steps
1 - Using the tail make a loop over the rope (as shown in the first picture) keeping in mind that there should be about 3 ft of slack on the tail end
2 - Wrap the tail back this time go under the anchored end (As shown in the second picture)
3 - Bring the tail down through the first loop (As shown in the third picture)
4 - Finally pull the two ends to make the knot a little bit tighter and easier to deal with (Shown in the fourth picture)
After these four steps you should end up with a knot that resembles a figure 8
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 3 Looping Into The Harness In order to secure the rope to the harness simply thread the tail end of the rope through the front loop in the harness as shown in the picture below This step isobviously very important
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 4 Following Back Through The Figure 8After looping the rope through the harness you have to thread the tail end of the rope back through the knot following the first figure 8 I have divided this process intofive smaller steps in order to make it more clear
1 - Coming form underneath the knot bring the tail up through the near loop and to the left behind the anchored end of the rope (Shown in the first picture)
2 - Wrap the tail around the anchored end back to the right and down through the adjacent loop (Shown in the second picture)
3 - You simply need to bring the tail back over the top of the knot to the left (Shown in the third picture)
4 - Bring the tail end up through the far loop following the anchored end (Shown in the fourth picture)
5 - Finally pull the knot tight (Shown in the fifth picture)
As you can see the first four pictures are simply tracing the knot back through with the tail end
For the last part while you pull the knot tight you may want to make small adjustments and rearrange how it all fits together If the knot does not lay perfectly smoothand tight its NOT a big deal
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 5 Finishing The Knot After completing the Figure 8 knot you will want to somehow secure the tail end of the rope out of the way There are a couple different ways to do this the way that Iwill demonstrate is using whats called a Stopper Knot This secondary knot is similar to a Fishermans knot and is pretty simple I have once again divided thisprocess into several smaller steps
1 - Start by wrapping the tail end around the anchored end (As shown in the first picture)
2 - Wrap the tail back underneath the two vertical segments (As shown in the second picture)
3 - Simply repeat the first two steps wrapping the tail around again (As shown in the third picture)
4 - This step in the fourth picture may look complicated but all you need to do is insert the tail up through the two loops that you have just made
5 - To finish off the knot you will want to slowly pull the tail end while gently pushing the bottom of the stopper knot upwards If you have successfully completed this knotit should look something like the fifth picture
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 6 Ready To Climb Now that you have mastered the Figure 8 knot you can securely harness yourself into a climbing rope Remember there are many other skills that go into setting up ananchor and belaying a climber This tutorial only covers the figure 8 knot For more information there are many great websites that demonstrate how to correctly set up asafe climbing system (Ive posted a few below) If you are a beginning climber I recommend that you read up on a few other climbing techniques Also you shouldprobably go to a climbing wall or gym where there are experienced climbers that can show you the ropes Hopefully this tutorial has been helpful Have fun and be safe
Some useful linkshttpwwwstephenprattnetAnchorsanchorshtmhttpwwwuoregonedu~oppclimbingtopicsanchorshtmlhttpwwwabc-of-rockclimbingcomhowtoclimbingtechniquesasp
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Related Instructables
How to Tie aFigure EightKnot byTactical_Pyro
Paracord KnotDisplay Bord byJamie bagn
Basic KnotsGuide byzorro3355
How to Climb aTree (withprussiks) bystasterisk
How to climb atree (using onlyrope) thefunsimple wayby louieaw
How to get arope into a tree(withoutclimbing it) byvitex
How to tievarious knots byadaviel
How to make arope swing byjdub0928
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Turks Head Knots on a Bottleby sklnxbones on July 6 2010
Intro Turks Head Knots on a BottleThis is the finished project A bottle decorated with three Turks Head Knots There are only three knots on this bottle The RED and the BLUE knots are each a 20 Bightby 3 Lead Turks Head Knots The WHITE knot is a 20 Bight by 19 Lead Turks Head Knot
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 1 Supplies
Cord Lots and Lots of cord I cant tell you how much each bottle is differentBottle Washed and Dried inside and out Make sure to remove all water spotsThreaded Needle Cord screws into the threads at the base of the needlePegs I use brass rivets used as a map to tie the Turks Head KnotsHole Punch Used to punch holes in the painters tape to hold the pegsPainters Tape To hold the pegs in place and to make your map for the Turks Head KnotsMarker To write on the painters tapeCloth Towel To remove finger prints and dirt from your bottleKrazy Glue or Super Glue This is used to secure the knots in place to the bottle
OPTIONAL BUT HIGHLY RECOMMENDEDI use the Turks Head Cookbook from KnotToolcom
Step 2 PreparationYou will need to find a bottle you like I used an empty instant tea bottle of course washed and dried (I like to put the bottle in the oven for a few minutes to dry the insidewithout water spots Take off the lid and do not put lid in the oven) Now measure the circumference of the bottle Take a cord and tightly wrap the cord around the bottleMark where the ends meet and use a ruler to measure the length of the cord For my instant tea bottle the circumference is 27cm I know from past knots that I have tiedthat I want my knot to have 20 Bights in the top and bottom (bands) knots I am going to use the Bights in the (bands) knots to tie the middle knot Now divide the numberof Bights (20) into the size of the circumference (27) to get the space between each Bight (135) With me so far
Now take two pieces of painters tape using a ruler measure out the length of the circumference and mark the length on the both pieces of tape Next you will mark thespace between each Bight on the tape
Step 3 Adding the PegsI like to use pegs when tying Turks Head Knots it just makes tying the knot easier
These are what I use for pegs
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 4 Adding Pegs to the TapeNow take a hole punch to cut holes in the tape where the lines meet You will place the pegs in the holes
Insert a peg in each hole and carefully stick the first piece of tape to the bottle
Step 5 Adding the 2nd row of pegsNow do the same thing with the second piece of tape The numbers on each piece of tape must line up
This picture shows you what you should have now This odd looking thing will be your map to tie the Turks Head Knot And this is the end of Step 1
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 6 Tying the first Turks Head KnotUsing the Turks Head Cookbook follow the numbers going over and under as indicated in the book I chose a 20 Bight by 3 Lead knot which will give me a nice bandaround the bottle Once the ends meet you have made one complete knot Tape the running end of your cord and start removing the pegs and the tape
Step 7 Remove the pegs and the tapeBe careful not to untie the knot as you remove the pegs and tape from the bottle Continue to remove all the pegs and remove the tape from the bottle At this point theknot will be very loose and will need to be tightened up
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 8 Remove the slack from the knotHere you can see just how much the knot expanded Starting with the standing end begin to pull the slack out of the knot going towards the running end of the cordDo not expect to pull all the slack out at once You may have to make 3 - 5 attempts at removing the slack out of the knot DO NOT remove all of the slack out of the knotIn order to make the bands we will have to triple the Turks Head Knot We will do this by following the knot three times The threaded needle will really come in handyhere
Step 9 Triple the KnotOnce you have made three passes of the Turks Head Knot use your needle to go under your knot about half the circumference and cut the cord The knot will be tightenough to hide the tail in placeTIP I carefully add a couple of drops of super glue UNDER the band to hold them in place and keep them from sliding around in the nextsteps A drop or two in 3 or 4 places around the band should be enough
Step 10 Add the second knotNow repeat this whole step for the second bandWhen tying the second band you must make sure the Bights line up to the first band This is crucial for the next stepWipe down the bottle to make sure all your finger prints and adhesive from the tape are all removed You want to make sure your bottle is clean at this point Any dirt orfinger prints left on the bottle will be almost impossible to remove From this point on we will use gloves when tying our last knot
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 11 Maping the Top KnotStick a piece of painters tape on top of your first band leaving the bottom of the knot exposedUse a marker to count the number of Bights in your knot Instead of using the pegs we are going to use the Bights to tie our next Turks Head Knot
Step 12 Mapping the Bottom KnotDo the same thing for the bottom band but you must make sure your numbers on top and bottom line up So 1 on top should be the same position as 1 on the bottom
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 13 Adding the last knotAgain using the Turks Head Cookbook and the threaded needle you are going to follow the instructions going over and under as indicated in the book Be sure to usegloves when ever you handle the bottle
Step 14 Thats ItFor this Turks Head Knot I am using a 20 Bight by 19 Lead knot
Because of the amount of cord you are working with your cord will get twisted and knotted You will have to un-twist the cord often Its a pain in the rear but it has to bedone And it has to be done alot
Continue to tie the knot until you finish the knot If you have the cord and the patience you can double or triple the knot When you are done use your needle to hide theends under your bands Cut the ends and your DONE
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Related Instructables
Monkeys FistFloatingKeychain byjokerlz
How To Make ATurks headKnot WithParacord byDoggie Stylish
Tying Trivetsout of Rope forHoliday Gifts bykylemarsh
Paracord KnotDisplay Bord byJamie bagn
How to Make ATurks Head(Photos) bymchs60chip
A pocket full ofknots byKiteman
Monkeys fistknot AND themonkey byjonathan111
TiteTie is theTruckers Knoton Steroids bytitetie
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Larks head noose -- an easy useful knot that tightens and loosensby Larry Breed on February 19 2009
Intro Larks head noose -- an easy useful knot that tightens and loosensI thought I knew all the basic knots but then I was taught this incredibly useful simple knot Its good for tying up the neck of a bag that you want to repeatedly open andsecurely close Its good for tying around a springy bundle that will need tightening and retightening And its easy to undo
Ive looked at knot literature but havent found a name for this so I named it The basic knot is well known its called a larks head Since all Ive done is to slip the twoends through the larks head to make a noose I call it that
WARNING Dont use this knot when human safety would depend on it Climbers and mountaineers have well-tested reliable knots for such situations
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Image Notes1 To tighten further step on this side of the larks head and pull the free ends
Step 1 Double the cord overThe larks head noose requires enough cord to go twice around your bundle plus a foot or two Find the center and double it over Sailors call this a bight
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 2 Form the larks headComing from below the bight hook your thumb and forefinger over the two sides Reach outward and downward and pinch your fingertips together underneath thedoubled cord
Youve made a larks head Move the crossing cord a little farther from your hand so theres a clear opening through the two half-loops
Step 3 Form the nooseSlip the two ends of the cord through the opening we were just talking about Pull the larks head tight so it grips the two cords Find something that needs constrictingand put the noose around it
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 4 Tightening retightening and lockingSlide the knot against the bundle If its not tight enough to keep from slipping tighten it by holding it in one hand and tugging on the cords one at a time with the otherhand Notice that you can slide the knot out again for instance to re-open the bag you just tied shut For some applications this may be as tight as you need it
A springy bundle probably still feels loose If so compress the bundle and get a new grip on the cords Rest your foot on the bundle on the cords nearest the larks headand pull to slide the larks head tighter
To make the knot more permanent you can lock it Make an overhand in the cord ends (Exactly like the first step in tying shoelaces) With your foot still on the bundlepull on the cords and move your hands apart until youre pulling in opposite directions You have just locked the larks head and you can trust it to stay that way()
But lets say that later on you want to loosen the locked knot Again put your foot on the bundle and cords nearest the larks head hold the two cord ends together andpull This makes a little slack between the overhand and the larks head so you can untie the overhand
In twine or small string the locking overhand knot may be difficult to undo Use a shoelace knot instead of an overhand and itll unlock easily
() If youre using slippery cord like polypropylene an overhand may not lock securely You may want to tie another overhand knot For added security wrap a shortlength of duct tape around the two cords close to the knot
Image Notes1 To tighten further step on this side of the larks head and pull the free ends
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Related Instructables
TRX fromParacordChallengeAccepted bythrake
A pocket full ofknots byKiteman
Lens CapLanyard by~teknoarsonist~ how to tie a
noose byawesume
AdjustableParacordGlassesLanyard byjdtwelve12
HangmansNoose PackClosure byPopEye42
Paraleash - ADog LeashFrom Paracordby The Ideanator
How to make arugged andhandy ParacordBelt by Jake22
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Basic Knots Guideby zorro3355 on April 29 2008
Intro Basic Knots Guidehi
Step 1 Thumb knotThe most simple knotUsed as a stopper and prevent ropes from fraying
Step 2 Reef KnotUsed to tie two ropes of equal thickness togetherIt is pretty easy to tie and untie but under tentionit may be diffcult to untieIt is also not sutible for smoothropes(egnylon ropes)
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 3 Figure of eightused as a stopperprevent ropes from fraying and its more secure than tumb knot its is also used to tie Caribinas to ropes and is often used in rock climbing
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 4 Timber hitchused for pulling logs
Step 5 Clove hitchUsed to tie a rope onto a pole or logThe pole must be roundThe pole lust be thicker then the rope itself
(greatly used during pioneering)
Step 6 Sheet bandused to tie ropes of different thickness together(works on same thickness of ropes too)
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 7 Sheep shankTo shorten RopesTo prevent middle fraying
Step 8 Slip knotWhippingUsed as a grip for pulling things(when tied on a stick or small pole)(marlin spike hitch)
Related Instructables
Rope Rings byhpstoutharrow
How to Tie aFigure EightKnot byTactical_Pyro
Whippin (WestCountry Style)by tim_n
SurvivalBracelet(Updated) bytevers94
HangmansNoose PackClosure byPopEye42
Turkey on aTripod byhpstoutharrow
SurvivalBracelet II bytevers94 Zigzag Spooling
Paracord (video)by Stormdrane
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
How to Tie a Fire-escape Knotby leonardo ismael on October 16 2007
Intro How to Tie a Fire-escape KnotThis knot is used by firemen in case of fires for example imagine a scene where the ladder on the firetruck messes up but people need to get down a five story buildingor more All they have is a long piece of rope they can safely get down with a secure knot like the fire-escape knot So why not learn it its easy to do and hard to untieif you tie it tightly
This is from the American Boys Handbook
Step 1 Get Your RopeFirst grab a piece of rope and bend it like this to make a loop in it Follow every step to the smallest detail
Step 2 Twist the RopeNow make a twist like this and hold it together
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 3 Pull Through the TwistPull the loop through the twist you just made from underneath
Step 4 Go Over the Split EndNow pull the tail through the loop
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 5 FinallyAnd finally just pull it through as pictured below
Congratulations you just learned the fire-escape knot
Step 6 Same Name Not KnotThis is another knot called the fire-escape knot this shouldnt be your result
Related Instructables
House FireEscape Plan(video) byWhatHappensNowAdvice
ParacordLadder wWooden Rungsby josestude
Bed SheetEscape Rope byjessehensel
rope ladder(glow-in-the-dark version) bymikeasaurus
HeadlockEscape 2(video) byjohnnyrockstah
QuickFirestarter byMattandJora
Trail sauna byjakee117
How to Kill FireAnts andCommitGenocide byKentsOkay
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Climb Safe With A Figure 8 Knotby mattste on February 23 2010
Intro Climb Safe With A Figure 8 Knot There are many things that a beginning climber needs to know including several important knots Perhaps the most essential knot is the Figure 8 Follow Through Thistutorial will demonstrate how to correctly harness yourself to a rope using a Figure 8 Follow Through knot This knot is used primarily by rock climbers to provide a life-line Since this knot is used as a life-line it is very important to be able to tie it correctly (Your life could depend upon it)
Dont worry with this tutorial and about 5 minutes of practice you can have this knot mastered
Things you will need
- Climbing Harness- Climbing Rope
If you are wanting to go climbing and dont already have these items they can be purchased for about $25 each at most outdoor sporting goods stores If you are merelylooking to learn the knot a belt loop and a rope (about five feet long) will do
Image Notes1 Climbing Harness2 Climbing Rope
Step 1 Dealing With The RopeThroughout this tutorial I will be discussing different parts of the rope To make these instructions as clear as possible I will define a few terms that I will use throughoutthe tutorial The Anchor End of the rope will generally be at the top of the images This is the end that would be anchored to the wall or rock and does not move Wewill not be doing much with the anchored end The Tail End of the rope is the opposite end that we will be dealing with I will call this the tail for short
Now that we have some terms to work with lets get started
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 2 Tying The First Figure 8This knot has several parts to it The first part of the knot is just tying a basic figure 8 To tie the first figure 8 there are four simple steps
1 - Using the tail make a loop over the rope (as shown in the first picture) keeping in mind that there should be about 3 ft of slack on the tail end
2 - Wrap the tail back this time go under the anchored end (As shown in the second picture)
3 - Bring the tail down through the first loop (As shown in the third picture)
4 - Finally pull the two ends to make the knot a little bit tighter and easier to deal with (Shown in the fourth picture)
After these four steps you should end up with a knot that resembles a figure 8
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 3 Looping Into The Harness In order to secure the rope to the harness simply thread the tail end of the rope through the front loop in the harness as shown in the picture below This step isobviously very important
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 4 Following Back Through The Figure 8After looping the rope through the harness you have to thread the tail end of the rope back through the knot following the first figure 8 I have divided this process intofive smaller steps in order to make it more clear
1 - Coming form underneath the knot bring the tail up through the near loop and to the left behind the anchored end of the rope (Shown in the first picture)
2 - Wrap the tail around the anchored end back to the right and down through the adjacent loop (Shown in the second picture)
3 - You simply need to bring the tail back over the top of the knot to the left (Shown in the third picture)
4 - Bring the tail end up through the far loop following the anchored end (Shown in the fourth picture)
5 - Finally pull the knot tight (Shown in the fifth picture)
As you can see the first four pictures are simply tracing the knot back through with the tail end
For the last part while you pull the knot tight you may want to make small adjustments and rearrange how it all fits together If the knot does not lay perfectly smoothand tight its NOT a big deal
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 5 Finishing The Knot After completing the Figure 8 knot you will want to somehow secure the tail end of the rope out of the way There are a couple different ways to do this the way that Iwill demonstrate is using whats called a Stopper Knot This secondary knot is similar to a Fishermans knot and is pretty simple I have once again divided thisprocess into several smaller steps
1 - Start by wrapping the tail end around the anchored end (As shown in the first picture)
2 - Wrap the tail back underneath the two vertical segments (As shown in the second picture)
3 - Simply repeat the first two steps wrapping the tail around again (As shown in the third picture)
4 - This step in the fourth picture may look complicated but all you need to do is insert the tail up through the two loops that you have just made
5 - To finish off the knot you will want to slowly pull the tail end while gently pushing the bottom of the stopper knot upwards If you have successfully completed this knotit should look something like the fifth picture
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 6 Ready To Climb Now that you have mastered the Figure 8 knot you can securely harness yourself into a climbing rope Remember there are many other skills that go into setting up ananchor and belaying a climber This tutorial only covers the figure 8 knot For more information there are many great websites that demonstrate how to correctly set up asafe climbing system (Ive posted a few below) If you are a beginning climber I recommend that you read up on a few other climbing techniques Also you shouldprobably go to a climbing wall or gym where there are experienced climbers that can show you the ropes Hopefully this tutorial has been helpful Have fun and be safe
Some useful linkshttpwwwstephenprattnetAnchorsanchorshtmhttpwwwuoregonedu~oppclimbingtopicsanchorshtmlhttpwwwabc-of-rockclimbingcomhowtoclimbingtechniquesasp
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Related Instructables
How to Tie aFigure EightKnot byTactical_Pyro
Paracord KnotDisplay Bord byJamie bagn
Basic KnotsGuide byzorro3355
How to Climb aTree (withprussiks) bystasterisk
How to climb atree (using onlyrope) thefunsimple wayby louieaw
How to get arope into a tree(withoutclimbing it) byvitex
How to tievarious knots byadaviel
How to make arope swing byjdub0928
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Turks Head Knots on a Bottleby sklnxbones on July 6 2010
Intro Turks Head Knots on a BottleThis is the finished project A bottle decorated with three Turks Head Knots There are only three knots on this bottle The RED and the BLUE knots are each a 20 Bightby 3 Lead Turks Head Knots The WHITE knot is a 20 Bight by 19 Lead Turks Head Knot
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 1 Supplies
Cord Lots and Lots of cord I cant tell you how much each bottle is differentBottle Washed and Dried inside and out Make sure to remove all water spotsThreaded Needle Cord screws into the threads at the base of the needlePegs I use brass rivets used as a map to tie the Turks Head KnotsHole Punch Used to punch holes in the painters tape to hold the pegsPainters Tape To hold the pegs in place and to make your map for the Turks Head KnotsMarker To write on the painters tapeCloth Towel To remove finger prints and dirt from your bottleKrazy Glue or Super Glue This is used to secure the knots in place to the bottle
OPTIONAL BUT HIGHLY RECOMMENDEDI use the Turks Head Cookbook from KnotToolcom
Step 2 PreparationYou will need to find a bottle you like I used an empty instant tea bottle of course washed and dried (I like to put the bottle in the oven for a few minutes to dry the insidewithout water spots Take off the lid and do not put lid in the oven) Now measure the circumference of the bottle Take a cord and tightly wrap the cord around the bottleMark where the ends meet and use a ruler to measure the length of the cord For my instant tea bottle the circumference is 27cm I know from past knots that I have tiedthat I want my knot to have 20 Bights in the top and bottom (bands) knots I am going to use the Bights in the (bands) knots to tie the middle knot Now divide the numberof Bights (20) into the size of the circumference (27) to get the space between each Bight (135) With me so far
Now take two pieces of painters tape using a ruler measure out the length of the circumference and mark the length on the both pieces of tape Next you will mark thespace between each Bight on the tape
Step 3 Adding the PegsI like to use pegs when tying Turks Head Knots it just makes tying the knot easier
These are what I use for pegs
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 4 Adding Pegs to the TapeNow take a hole punch to cut holes in the tape where the lines meet You will place the pegs in the holes
Insert a peg in each hole and carefully stick the first piece of tape to the bottle
Step 5 Adding the 2nd row of pegsNow do the same thing with the second piece of tape The numbers on each piece of tape must line up
This picture shows you what you should have now This odd looking thing will be your map to tie the Turks Head Knot And this is the end of Step 1
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 6 Tying the first Turks Head KnotUsing the Turks Head Cookbook follow the numbers going over and under as indicated in the book I chose a 20 Bight by 3 Lead knot which will give me a nice bandaround the bottle Once the ends meet you have made one complete knot Tape the running end of your cord and start removing the pegs and the tape
Step 7 Remove the pegs and the tapeBe careful not to untie the knot as you remove the pegs and tape from the bottle Continue to remove all the pegs and remove the tape from the bottle At this point theknot will be very loose and will need to be tightened up
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 8 Remove the slack from the knotHere you can see just how much the knot expanded Starting with the standing end begin to pull the slack out of the knot going towards the running end of the cordDo not expect to pull all the slack out at once You may have to make 3 - 5 attempts at removing the slack out of the knot DO NOT remove all of the slack out of the knotIn order to make the bands we will have to triple the Turks Head Knot We will do this by following the knot three times The threaded needle will really come in handyhere
Step 9 Triple the KnotOnce you have made three passes of the Turks Head Knot use your needle to go under your knot about half the circumference and cut the cord The knot will be tightenough to hide the tail in placeTIP I carefully add a couple of drops of super glue UNDER the band to hold them in place and keep them from sliding around in the nextsteps A drop or two in 3 or 4 places around the band should be enough
Step 10 Add the second knotNow repeat this whole step for the second bandWhen tying the second band you must make sure the Bights line up to the first band This is crucial for the next stepWipe down the bottle to make sure all your finger prints and adhesive from the tape are all removed You want to make sure your bottle is clean at this point Any dirt orfinger prints left on the bottle will be almost impossible to remove From this point on we will use gloves when tying our last knot
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 11 Maping the Top KnotStick a piece of painters tape on top of your first band leaving the bottom of the knot exposedUse a marker to count the number of Bights in your knot Instead of using the pegs we are going to use the Bights to tie our next Turks Head Knot
Step 12 Mapping the Bottom KnotDo the same thing for the bottom band but you must make sure your numbers on top and bottom line up So 1 on top should be the same position as 1 on the bottom
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 13 Adding the last knotAgain using the Turks Head Cookbook and the threaded needle you are going to follow the instructions going over and under as indicated in the book Be sure to usegloves when ever you handle the bottle
Step 14 Thats ItFor this Turks Head Knot I am using a 20 Bight by 19 Lead knot
Because of the amount of cord you are working with your cord will get twisted and knotted You will have to un-twist the cord often Its a pain in the rear but it has to bedone And it has to be done alot
Continue to tie the knot until you finish the knot If you have the cord and the patience you can double or triple the knot When you are done use your needle to hide theends under your bands Cut the ends and your DONE
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Related Instructables
Monkeys FistFloatingKeychain byjokerlz
How To Make ATurks headKnot WithParacord byDoggie Stylish
Tying Trivetsout of Rope forHoliday Gifts bykylemarsh
Paracord KnotDisplay Bord byJamie bagn
How to Make ATurks Head(Photos) bymchs60chip
A pocket full ofknots byKiteman
Monkeys fistknot AND themonkey byjonathan111
TiteTie is theTruckers Knoton Steroids bytitetie
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Larks head noose -- an easy useful knot that tightens and loosensby Larry Breed on February 19 2009
Intro Larks head noose -- an easy useful knot that tightens and loosensI thought I knew all the basic knots but then I was taught this incredibly useful simple knot Its good for tying up the neck of a bag that you want to repeatedly open andsecurely close Its good for tying around a springy bundle that will need tightening and retightening And its easy to undo
Ive looked at knot literature but havent found a name for this so I named it The basic knot is well known its called a larks head Since all Ive done is to slip the twoends through the larks head to make a noose I call it that
WARNING Dont use this knot when human safety would depend on it Climbers and mountaineers have well-tested reliable knots for such situations
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Image Notes1 To tighten further step on this side of the larks head and pull the free ends
Step 1 Double the cord overThe larks head noose requires enough cord to go twice around your bundle plus a foot or two Find the center and double it over Sailors call this a bight
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 2 Form the larks headComing from below the bight hook your thumb and forefinger over the two sides Reach outward and downward and pinch your fingertips together underneath thedoubled cord
Youve made a larks head Move the crossing cord a little farther from your hand so theres a clear opening through the two half-loops
Step 3 Form the nooseSlip the two ends of the cord through the opening we were just talking about Pull the larks head tight so it grips the two cords Find something that needs constrictingand put the noose around it
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 4 Tightening retightening and lockingSlide the knot against the bundle If its not tight enough to keep from slipping tighten it by holding it in one hand and tugging on the cords one at a time with the otherhand Notice that you can slide the knot out again for instance to re-open the bag you just tied shut For some applications this may be as tight as you need it
A springy bundle probably still feels loose If so compress the bundle and get a new grip on the cords Rest your foot on the bundle on the cords nearest the larks headand pull to slide the larks head tighter
To make the knot more permanent you can lock it Make an overhand in the cord ends (Exactly like the first step in tying shoelaces) With your foot still on the bundlepull on the cords and move your hands apart until youre pulling in opposite directions You have just locked the larks head and you can trust it to stay that way()
But lets say that later on you want to loosen the locked knot Again put your foot on the bundle and cords nearest the larks head hold the two cord ends together andpull This makes a little slack between the overhand and the larks head so you can untie the overhand
In twine or small string the locking overhand knot may be difficult to undo Use a shoelace knot instead of an overhand and itll unlock easily
() If youre using slippery cord like polypropylene an overhand may not lock securely You may want to tie another overhand knot For added security wrap a shortlength of duct tape around the two cords close to the knot
Image Notes1 To tighten further step on this side of the larks head and pull the free ends
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Related Instructables
TRX fromParacordChallengeAccepted bythrake
A pocket full ofknots byKiteman
Lens CapLanyard by~teknoarsonist~ how to tie a
noose byawesume
AdjustableParacordGlassesLanyard byjdtwelve12
HangmansNoose PackClosure byPopEye42
Paraleash - ADog LeashFrom Paracordby The Ideanator
How to make arugged andhandy ParacordBelt by Jake22
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 3 Figure of eightused as a stopperprevent ropes from fraying and its more secure than tumb knot its is also used to tie Caribinas to ropes and is often used in rock climbing
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 4 Timber hitchused for pulling logs
Step 5 Clove hitchUsed to tie a rope onto a pole or logThe pole must be roundThe pole lust be thicker then the rope itself
(greatly used during pioneering)
Step 6 Sheet bandused to tie ropes of different thickness together(works on same thickness of ropes too)
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 7 Sheep shankTo shorten RopesTo prevent middle fraying
Step 8 Slip knotWhippingUsed as a grip for pulling things(when tied on a stick or small pole)(marlin spike hitch)
Related Instructables
Rope Rings byhpstoutharrow
How to Tie aFigure EightKnot byTactical_Pyro
Whippin (WestCountry Style)by tim_n
SurvivalBracelet(Updated) bytevers94
HangmansNoose PackClosure byPopEye42
Turkey on aTripod byhpstoutharrow
SurvivalBracelet II bytevers94 Zigzag Spooling
Paracord (video)by Stormdrane
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
How to Tie a Fire-escape Knotby leonardo ismael on October 16 2007
Intro How to Tie a Fire-escape KnotThis knot is used by firemen in case of fires for example imagine a scene where the ladder on the firetruck messes up but people need to get down a five story buildingor more All they have is a long piece of rope they can safely get down with a secure knot like the fire-escape knot So why not learn it its easy to do and hard to untieif you tie it tightly
This is from the American Boys Handbook
Step 1 Get Your RopeFirst grab a piece of rope and bend it like this to make a loop in it Follow every step to the smallest detail
Step 2 Twist the RopeNow make a twist like this and hold it together
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 3 Pull Through the TwistPull the loop through the twist you just made from underneath
Step 4 Go Over the Split EndNow pull the tail through the loop
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 5 FinallyAnd finally just pull it through as pictured below
Congratulations you just learned the fire-escape knot
Step 6 Same Name Not KnotThis is another knot called the fire-escape knot this shouldnt be your result
Related Instructables
House FireEscape Plan(video) byWhatHappensNowAdvice
ParacordLadder wWooden Rungsby josestude
Bed SheetEscape Rope byjessehensel
rope ladder(glow-in-the-dark version) bymikeasaurus
HeadlockEscape 2(video) byjohnnyrockstah
QuickFirestarter byMattandJora
Trail sauna byjakee117
How to Kill FireAnts andCommitGenocide byKentsOkay
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Climb Safe With A Figure 8 Knotby mattste on February 23 2010
Intro Climb Safe With A Figure 8 Knot There are many things that a beginning climber needs to know including several important knots Perhaps the most essential knot is the Figure 8 Follow Through Thistutorial will demonstrate how to correctly harness yourself to a rope using a Figure 8 Follow Through knot This knot is used primarily by rock climbers to provide a life-line Since this knot is used as a life-line it is very important to be able to tie it correctly (Your life could depend upon it)
Dont worry with this tutorial and about 5 minutes of practice you can have this knot mastered
Things you will need
- Climbing Harness- Climbing Rope
If you are wanting to go climbing and dont already have these items they can be purchased for about $25 each at most outdoor sporting goods stores If you are merelylooking to learn the knot a belt loop and a rope (about five feet long) will do
Image Notes1 Climbing Harness2 Climbing Rope
Step 1 Dealing With The RopeThroughout this tutorial I will be discussing different parts of the rope To make these instructions as clear as possible I will define a few terms that I will use throughoutthe tutorial The Anchor End of the rope will generally be at the top of the images This is the end that would be anchored to the wall or rock and does not move Wewill not be doing much with the anchored end The Tail End of the rope is the opposite end that we will be dealing with I will call this the tail for short
Now that we have some terms to work with lets get started
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 2 Tying The First Figure 8This knot has several parts to it The first part of the knot is just tying a basic figure 8 To tie the first figure 8 there are four simple steps
1 - Using the tail make a loop over the rope (as shown in the first picture) keeping in mind that there should be about 3 ft of slack on the tail end
2 - Wrap the tail back this time go under the anchored end (As shown in the second picture)
3 - Bring the tail down through the first loop (As shown in the third picture)
4 - Finally pull the two ends to make the knot a little bit tighter and easier to deal with (Shown in the fourth picture)
After these four steps you should end up with a knot that resembles a figure 8
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 3 Looping Into The Harness In order to secure the rope to the harness simply thread the tail end of the rope through the front loop in the harness as shown in the picture below This step isobviously very important
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 4 Following Back Through The Figure 8After looping the rope through the harness you have to thread the tail end of the rope back through the knot following the first figure 8 I have divided this process intofive smaller steps in order to make it more clear
1 - Coming form underneath the knot bring the tail up through the near loop and to the left behind the anchored end of the rope (Shown in the first picture)
2 - Wrap the tail around the anchored end back to the right and down through the adjacent loop (Shown in the second picture)
3 - You simply need to bring the tail back over the top of the knot to the left (Shown in the third picture)
4 - Bring the tail end up through the far loop following the anchored end (Shown in the fourth picture)
5 - Finally pull the knot tight (Shown in the fifth picture)
As you can see the first four pictures are simply tracing the knot back through with the tail end
For the last part while you pull the knot tight you may want to make small adjustments and rearrange how it all fits together If the knot does not lay perfectly smoothand tight its NOT a big deal
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 5 Finishing The Knot After completing the Figure 8 knot you will want to somehow secure the tail end of the rope out of the way There are a couple different ways to do this the way that Iwill demonstrate is using whats called a Stopper Knot This secondary knot is similar to a Fishermans knot and is pretty simple I have once again divided thisprocess into several smaller steps
1 - Start by wrapping the tail end around the anchored end (As shown in the first picture)
2 - Wrap the tail back underneath the two vertical segments (As shown in the second picture)
3 - Simply repeat the first two steps wrapping the tail around again (As shown in the third picture)
4 - This step in the fourth picture may look complicated but all you need to do is insert the tail up through the two loops that you have just made
5 - To finish off the knot you will want to slowly pull the tail end while gently pushing the bottom of the stopper knot upwards If you have successfully completed this knotit should look something like the fifth picture
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 6 Ready To Climb Now that you have mastered the Figure 8 knot you can securely harness yourself into a climbing rope Remember there are many other skills that go into setting up ananchor and belaying a climber This tutorial only covers the figure 8 knot For more information there are many great websites that demonstrate how to correctly set up asafe climbing system (Ive posted a few below) If you are a beginning climber I recommend that you read up on a few other climbing techniques Also you shouldprobably go to a climbing wall or gym where there are experienced climbers that can show you the ropes Hopefully this tutorial has been helpful Have fun and be safe
Some useful linkshttpwwwstephenprattnetAnchorsanchorshtmhttpwwwuoregonedu~oppclimbingtopicsanchorshtmlhttpwwwabc-of-rockclimbingcomhowtoclimbingtechniquesasp
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Related Instructables
How to Tie aFigure EightKnot byTactical_Pyro
Paracord KnotDisplay Bord byJamie bagn
Basic KnotsGuide byzorro3355
How to Climb aTree (withprussiks) bystasterisk
How to climb atree (using onlyrope) thefunsimple wayby louieaw
How to get arope into a tree(withoutclimbing it) byvitex
How to tievarious knots byadaviel
How to make arope swing byjdub0928
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Turks Head Knots on a Bottleby sklnxbones on July 6 2010
Intro Turks Head Knots on a BottleThis is the finished project A bottle decorated with three Turks Head Knots There are only three knots on this bottle The RED and the BLUE knots are each a 20 Bightby 3 Lead Turks Head Knots The WHITE knot is a 20 Bight by 19 Lead Turks Head Knot
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 1 Supplies
Cord Lots and Lots of cord I cant tell you how much each bottle is differentBottle Washed and Dried inside and out Make sure to remove all water spotsThreaded Needle Cord screws into the threads at the base of the needlePegs I use brass rivets used as a map to tie the Turks Head KnotsHole Punch Used to punch holes in the painters tape to hold the pegsPainters Tape To hold the pegs in place and to make your map for the Turks Head KnotsMarker To write on the painters tapeCloth Towel To remove finger prints and dirt from your bottleKrazy Glue or Super Glue This is used to secure the knots in place to the bottle
OPTIONAL BUT HIGHLY RECOMMENDEDI use the Turks Head Cookbook from KnotToolcom
Step 2 PreparationYou will need to find a bottle you like I used an empty instant tea bottle of course washed and dried (I like to put the bottle in the oven for a few minutes to dry the insidewithout water spots Take off the lid and do not put lid in the oven) Now measure the circumference of the bottle Take a cord and tightly wrap the cord around the bottleMark where the ends meet and use a ruler to measure the length of the cord For my instant tea bottle the circumference is 27cm I know from past knots that I have tiedthat I want my knot to have 20 Bights in the top and bottom (bands) knots I am going to use the Bights in the (bands) knots to tie the middle knot Now divide the numberof Bights (20) into the size of the circumference (27) to get the space between each Bight (135) With me so far
Now take two pieces of painters tape using a ruler measure out the length of the circumference and mark the length on the both pieces of tape Next you will mark thespace between each Bight on the tape
Step 3 Adding the PegsI like to use pegs when tying Turks Head Knots it just makes tying the knot easier
These are what I use for pegs
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 4 Adding Pegs to the TapeNow take a hole punch to cut holes in the tape where the lines meet You will place the pegs in the holes
Insert a peg in each hole and carefully stick the first piece of tape to the bottle
Step 5 Adding the 2nd row of pegsNow do the same thing with the second piece of tape The numbers on each piece of tape must line up
This picture shows you what you should have now This odd looking thing will be your map to tie the Turks Head Knot And this is the end of Step 1
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 6 Tying the first Turks Head KnotUsing the Turks Head Cookbook follow the numbers going over and under as indicated in the book I chose a 20 Bight by 3 Lead knot which will give me a nice bandaround the bottle Once the ends meet you have made one complete knot Tape the running end of your cord and start removing the pegs and the tape
Step 7 Remove the pegs and the tapeBe careful not to untie the knot as you remove the pegs and tape from the bottle Continue to remove all the pegs and remove the tape from the bottle At this point theknot will be very loose and will need to be tightened up
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 8 Remove the slack from the knotHere you can see just how much the knot expanded Starting with the standing end begin to pull the slack out of the knot going towards the running end of the cordDo not expect to pull all the slack out at once You may have to make 3 - 5 attempts at removing the slack out of the knot DO NOT remove all of the slack out of the knotIn order to make the bands we will have to triple the Turks Head Knot We will do this by following the knot three times The threaded needle will really come in handyhere
Step 9 Triple the KnotOnce you have made three passes of the Turks Head Knot use your needle to go under your knot about half the circumference and cut the cord The knot will be tightenough to hide the tail in placeTIP I carefully add a couple of drops of super glue UNDER the band to hold them in place and keep them from sliding around in the nextsteps A drop or two in 3 or 4 places around the band should be enough
Step 10 Add the second knotNow repeat this whole step for the second bandWhen tying the second band you must make sure the Bights line up to the first band This is crucial for the next stepWipe down the bottle to make sure all your finger prints and adhesive from the tape are all removed You want to make sure your bottle is clean at this point Any dirt orfinger prints left on the bottle will be almost impossible to remove From this point on we will use gloves when tying our last knot
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 11 Maping the Top KnotStick a piece of painters tape on top of your first band leaving the bottom of the knot exposedUse a marker to count the number of Bights in your knot Instead of using the pegs we are going to use the Bights to tie our next Turks Head Knot
Step 12 Mapping the Bottom KnotDo the same thing for the bottom band but you must make sure your numbers on top and bottom line up So 1 on top should be the same position as 1 on the bottom
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 13 Adding the last knotAgain using the Turks Head Cookbook and the threaded needle you are going to follow the instructions going over and under as indicated in the book Be sure to usegloves when ever you handle the bottle
Step 14 Thats ItFor this Turks Head Knot I am using a 20 Bight by 19 Lead knot
Because of the amount of cord you are working with your cord will get twisted and knotted You will have to un-twist the cord often Its a pain in the rear but it has to bedone And it has to be done alot
Continue to tie the knot until you finish the knot If you have the cord and the patience you can double or triple the knot When you are done use your needle to hide theends under your bands Cut the ends and your DONE
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Related Instructables
Monkeys FistFloatingKeychain byjokerlz
How To Make ATurks headKnot WithParacord byDoggie Stylish
Tying Trivetsout of Rope forHoliday Gifts bykylemarsh
Paracord KnotDisplay Bord byJamie bagn
How to Make ATurks Head(Photos) bymchs60chip
A pocket full ofknots byKiteman
Monkeys fistknot AND themonkey byjonathan111
TiteTie is theTruckers Knoton Steroids bytitetie
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Larks head noose -- an easy useful knot that tightens and loosensby Larry Breed on February 19 2009
Intro Larks head noose -- an easy useful knot that tightens and loosensI thought I knew all the basic knots but then I was taught this incredibly useful simple knot Its good for tying up the neck of a bag that you want to repeatedly open andsecurely close Its good for tying around a springy bundle that will need tightening and retightening And its easy to undo
Ive looked at knot literature but havent found a name for this so I named it The basic knot is well known its called a larks head Since all Ive done is to slip the twoends through the larks head to make a noose I call it that
WARNING Dont use this knot when human safety would depend on it Climbers and mountaineers have well-tested reliable knots for such situations
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Image Notes1 To tighten further step on this side of the larks head and pull the free ends
Step 1 Double the cord overThe larks head noose requires enough cord to go twice around your bundle plus a foot or two Find the center and double it over Sailors call this a bight
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 2 Form the larks headComing from below the bight hook your thumb and forefinger over the two sides Reach outward and downward and pinch your fingertips together underneath thedoubled cord
Youve made a larks head Move the crossing cord a little farther from your hand so theres a clear opening through the two half-loops
Step 3 Form the nooseSlip the two ends of the cord through the opening we were just talking about Pull the larks head tight so it grips the two cords Find something that needs constrictingand put the noose around it
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 4 Tightening retightening and lockingSlide the knot against the bundle If its not tight enough to keep from slipping tighten it by holding it in one hand and tugging on the cords one at a time with the otherhand Notice that you can slide the knot out again for instance to re-open the bag you just tied shut For some applications this may be as tight as you need it
A springy bundle probably still feels loose If so compress the bundle and get a new grip on the cords Rest your foot on the bundle on the cords nearest the larks headand pull to slide the larks head tighter
To make the knot more permanent you can lock it Make an overhand in the cord ends (Exactly like the first step in tying shoelaces) With your foot still on the bundlepull on the cords and move your hands apart until youre pulling in opposite directions You have just locked the larks head and you can trust it to stay that way()
But lets say that later on you want to loosen the locked knot Again put your foot on the bundle and cords nearest the larks head hold the two cord ends together andpull This makes a little slack between the overhand and the larks head so you can untie the overhand
In twine or small string the locking overhand knot may be difficult to undo Use a shoelace knot instead of an overhand and itll unlock easily
() If youre using slippery cord like polypropylene an overhand may not lock securely You may want to tie another overhand knot For added security wrap a shortlength of duct tape around the two cords close to the knot
Image Notes1 To tighten further step on this side of the larks head and pull the free ends
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Related Instructables
TRX fromParacordChallengeAccepted bythrake
A pocket full ofknots byKiteman
Lens CapLanyard by~teknoarsonist~ how to tie a
noose byawesume
AdjustableParacordGlassesLanyard byjdtwelve12
HangmansNoose PackClosure byPopEye42
Paraleash - ADog LeashFrom Paracordby The Ideanator
How to make arugged andhandy ParacordBelt by Jake22
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 4 Timber hitchused for pulling logs
Step 5 Clove hitchUsed to tie a rope onto a pole or logThe pole must be roundThe pole lust be thicker then the rope itself
(greatly used during pioneering)
Step 6 Sheet bandused to tie ropes of different thickness together(works on same thickness of ropes too)
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 7 Sheep shankTo shorten RopesTo prevent middle fraying
Step 8 Slip knotWhippingUsed as a grip for pulling things(when tied on a stick or small pole)(marlin spike hitch)
Related Instructables
Rope Rings byhpstoutharrow
How to Tie aFigure EightKnot byTactical_Pyro
Whippin (WestCountry Style)by tim_n
SurvivalBracelet(Updated) bytevers94
HangmansNoose PackClosure byPopEye42
Turkey on aTripod byhpstoutharrow
SurvivalBracelet II bytevers94 Zigzag Spooling
Paracord (video)by Stormdrane
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
How to Tie a Fire-escape Knotby leonardo ismael on October 16 2007
Intro How to Tie a Fire-escape KnotThis knot is used by firemen in case of fires for example imagine a scene where the ladder on the firetruck messes up but people need to get down a five story buildingor more All they have is a long piece of rope they can safely get down with a secure knot like the fire-escape knot So why not learn it its easy to do and hard to untieif you tie it tightly
This is from the American Boys Handbook
Step 1 Get Your RopeFirst grab a piece of rope and bend it like this to make a loop in it Follow every step to the smallest detail
Step 2 Twist the RopeNow make a twist like this and hold it together
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 3 Pull Through the TwistPull the loop through the twist you just made from underneath
Step 4 Go Over the Split EndNow pull the tail through the loop
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 5 FinallyAnd finally just pull it through as pictured below
Congratulations you just learned the fire-escape knot
Step 6 Same Name Not KnotThis is another knot called the fire-escape knot this shouldnt be your result
Related Instructables
House FireEscape Plan(video) byWhatHappensNowAdvice
ParacordLadder wWooden Rungsby josestude
Bed SheetEscape Rope byjessehensel
rope ladder(glow-in-the-dark version) bymikeasaurus
HeadlockEscape 2(video) byjohnnyrockstah
QuickFirestarter byMattandJora
Trail sauna byjakee117
How to Kill FireAnts andCommitGenocide byKentsOkay
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Climb Safe With A Figure 8 Knotby mattste on February 23 2010
Intro Climb Safe With A Figure 8 Knot There are many things that a beginning climber needs to know including several important knots Perhaps the most essential knot is the Figure 8 Follow Through Thistutorial will demonstrate how to correctly harness yourself to a rope using a Figure 8 Follow Through knot This knot is used primarily by rock climbers to provide a life-line Since this knot is used as a life-line it is very important to be able to tie it correctly (Your life could depend upon it)
Dont worry with this tutorial and about 5 minutes of practice you can have this knot mastered
Things you will need
- Climbing Harness- Climbing Rope
If you are wanting to go climbing and dont already have these items they can be purchased for about $25 each at most outdoor sporting goods stores If you are merelylooking to learn the knot a belt loop and a rope (about five feet long) will do
Image Notes1 Climbing Harness2 Climbing Rope
Step 1 Dealing With The RopeThroughout this tutorial I will be discussing different parts of the rope To make these instructions as clear as possible I will define a few terms that I will use throughoutthe tutorial The Anchor End of the rope will generally be at the top of the images This is the end that would be anchored to the wall or rock and does not move Wewill not be doing much with the anchored end The Tail End of the rope is the opposite end that we will be dealing with I will call this the tail for short
Now that we have some terms to work with lets get started
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 2 Tying The First Figure 8This knot has several parts to it The first part of the knot is just tying a basic figure 8 To tie the first figure 8 there are four simple steps
1 - Using the tail make a loop over the rope (as shown in the first picture) keeping in mind that there should be about 3 ft of slack on the tail end
2 - Wrap the tail back this time go under the anchored end (As shown in the second picture)
3 - Bring the tail down through the first loop (As shown in the third picture)
4 - Finally pull the two ends to make the knot a little bit tighter and easier to deal with (Shown in the fourth picture)
After these four steps you should end up with a knot that resembles a figure 8
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 3 Looping Into The Harness In order to secure the rope to the harness simply thread the tail end of the rope through the front loop in the harness as shown in the picture below This step isobviously very important
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 4 Following Back Through The Figure 8After looping the rope through the harness you have to thread the tail end of the rope back through the knot following the first figure 8 I have divided this process intofive smaller steps in order to make it more clear
1 - Coming form underneath the knot bring the tail up through the near loop and to the left behind the anchored end of the rope (Shown in the first picture)
2 - Wrap the tail around the anchored end back to the right and down through the adjacent loop (Shown in the second picture)
3 - You simply need to bring the tail back over the top of the knot to the left (Shown in the third picture)
4 - Bring the tail end up through the far loop following the anchored end (Shown in the fourth picture)
5 - Finally pull the knot tight (Shown in the fifth picture)
As you can see the first four pictures are simply tracing the knot back through with the tail end
For the last part while you pull the knot tight you may want to make small adjustments and rearrange how it all fits together If the knot does not lay perfectly smoothand tight its NOT a big deal
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 5 Finishing The Knot After completing the Figure 8 knot you will want to somehow secure the tail end of the rope out of the way There are a couple different ways to do this the way that Iwill demonstrate is using whats called a Stopper Knot This secondary knot is similar to a Fishermans knot and is pretty simple I have once again divided thisprocess into several smaller steps
1 - Start by wrapping the tail end around the anchored end (As shown in the first picture)
2 - Wrap the tail back underneath the two vertical segments (As shown in the second picture)
3 - Simply repeat the first two steps wrapping the tail around again (As shown in the third picture)
4 - This step in the fourth picture may look complicated but all you need to do is insert the tail up through the two loops that you have just made
5 - To finish off the knot you will want to slowly pull the tail end while gently pushing the bottom of the stopper knot upwards If you have successfully completed this knotit should look something like the fifth picture
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 6 Ready To Climb Now that you have mastered the Figure 8 knot you can securely harness yourself into a climbing rope Remember there are many other skills that go into setting up ananchor and belaying a climber This tutorial only covers the figure 8 knot For more information there are many great websites that demonstrate how to correctly set up asafe climbing system (Ive posted a few below) If you are a beginning climber I recommend that you read up on a few other climbing techniques Also you shouldprobably go to a climbing wall or gym where there are experienced climbers that can show you the ropes Hopefully this tutorial has been helpful Have fun and be safe
Some useful linkshttpwwwstephenprattnetAnchorsanchorshtmhttpwwwuoregonedu~oppclimbingtopicsanchorshtmlhttpwwwabc-of-rockclimbingcomhowtoclimbingtechniquesasp
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Related Instructables
How to Tie aFigure EightKnot byTactical_Pyro
Paracord KnotDisplay Bord byJamie bagn
Basic KnotsGuide byzorro3355
How to Climb aTree (withprussiks) bystasterisk
How to climb atree (using onlyrope) thefunsimple wayby louieaw
How to get arope into a tree(withoutclimbing it) byvitex
How to tievarious knots byadaviel
How to make arope swing byjdub0928
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Turks Head Knots on a Bottleby sklnxbones on July 6 2010
Intro Turks Head Knots on a BottleThis is the finished project A bottle decorated with three Turks Head Knots There are only three knots on this bottle The RED and the BLUE knots are each a 20 Bightby 3 Lead Turks Head Knots The WHITE knot is a 20 Bight by 19 Lead Turks Head Knot
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 1 Supplies
Cord Lots and Lots of cord I cant tell you how much each bottle is differentBottle Washed and Dried inside and out Make sure to remove all water spotsThreaded Needle Cord screws into the threads at the base of the needlePegs I use brass rivets used as a map to tie the Turks Head KnotsHole Punch Used to punch holes in the painters tape to hold the pegsPainters Tape To hold the pegs in place and to make your map for the Turks Head KnotsMarker To write on the painters tapeCloth Towel To remove finger prints and dirt from your bottleKrazy Glue or Super Glue This is used to secure the knots in place to the bottle
OPTIONAL BUT HIGHLY RECOMMENDEDI use the Turks Head Cookbook from KnotToolcom
Step 2 PreparationYou will need to find a bottle you like I used an empty instant tea bottle of course washed and dried (I like to put the bottle in the oven for a few minutes to dry the insidewithout water spots Take off the lid and do not put lid in the oven) Now measure the circumference of the bottle Take a cord and tightly wrap the cord around the bottleMark where the ends meet and use a ruler to measure the length of the cord For my instant tea bottle the circumference is 27cm I know from past knots that I have tiedthat I want my knot to have 20 Bights in the top and bottom (bands) knots I am going to use the Bights in the (bands) knots to tie the middle knot Now divide the numberof Bights (20) into the size of the circumference (27) to get the space between each Bight (135) With me so far
Now take two pieces of painters tape using a ruler measure out the length of the circumference and mark the length on the both pieces of tape Next you will mark thespace between each Bight on the tape
Step 3 Adding the PegsI like to use pegs when tying Turks Head Knots it just makes tying the knot easier
These are what I use for pegs
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 4 Adding Pegs to the TapeNow take a hole punch to cut holes in the tape where the lines meet You will place the pegs in the holes
Insert a peg in each hole and carefully stick the first piece of tape to the bottle
Step 5 Adding the 2nd row of pegsNow do the same thing with the second piece of tape The numbers on each piece of tape must line up
This picture shows you what you should have now This odd looking thing will be your map to tie the Turks Head Knot And this is the end of Step 1
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 6 Tying the first Turks Head KnotUsing the Turks Head Cookbook follow the numbers going over and under as indicated in the book I chose a 20 Bight by 3 Lead knot which will give me a nice bandaround the bottle Once the ends meet you have made one complete knot Tape the running end of your cord and start removing the pegs and the tape
Step 7 Remove the pegs and the tapeBe careful not to untie the knot as you remove the pegs and tape from the bottle Continue to remove all the pegs and remove the tape from the bottle At this point theknot will be very loose and will need to be tightened up
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 8 Remove the slack from the knotHere you can see just how much the knot expanded Starting with the standing end begin to pull the slack out of the knot going towards the running end of the cordDo not expect to pull all the slack out at once You may have to make 3 - 5 attempts at removing the slack out of the knot DO NOT remove all of the slack out of the knotIn order to make the bands we will have to triple the Turks Head Knot We will do this by following the knot three times The threaded needle will really come in handyhere
Step 9 Triple the KnotOnce you have made three passes of the Turks Head Knot use your needle to go under your knot about half the circumference and cut the cord The knot will be tightenough to hide the tail in placeTIP I carefully add a couple of drops of super glue UNDER the band to hold them in place and keep them from sliding around in the nextsteps A drop or two in 3 or 4 places around the band should be enough
Step 10 Add the second knotNow repeat this whole step for the second bandWhen tying the second band you must make sure the Bights line up to the first band This is crucial for the next stepWipe down the bottle to make sure all your finger prints and adhesive from the tape are all removed You want to make sure your bottle is clean at this point Any dirt orfinger prints left on the bottle will be almost impossible to remove From this point on we will use gloves when tying our last knot
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 11 Maping the Top KnotStick a piece of painters tape on top of your first band leaving the bottom of the knot exposedUse a marker to count the number of Bights in your knot Instead of using the pegs we are going to use the Bights to tie our next Turks Head Knot
Step 12 Mapping the Bottom KnotDo the same thing for the bottom band but you must make sure your numbers on top and bottom line up So 1 on top should be the same position as 1 on the bottom
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 13 Adding the last knotAgain using the Turks Head Cookbook and the threaded needle you are going to follow the instructions going over and under as indicated in the book Be sure to usegloves when ever you handle the bottle
Step 14 Thats ItFor this Turks Head Knot I am using a 20 Bight by 19 Lead knot
Because of the amount of cord you are working with your cord will get twisted and knotted You will have to un-twist the cord often Its a pain in the rear but it has to bedone And it has to be done alot
Continue to tie the knot until you finish the knot If you have the cord and the patience you can double or triple the knot When you are done use your needle to hide theends under your bands Cut the ends and your DONE
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Related Instructables
Monkeys FistFloatingKeychain byjokerlz
How To Make ATurks headKnot WithParacord byDoggie Stylish
Tying Trivetsout of Rope forHoliday Gifts bykylemarsh
Paracord KnotDisplay Bord byJamie bagn
How to Make ATurks Head(Photos) bymchs60chip
A pocket full ofknots byKiteman
Monkeys fistknot AND themonkey byjonathan111
TiteTie is theTruckers Knoton Steroids bytitetie
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Larks head noose -- an easy useful knot that tightens and loosensby Larry Breed on February 19 2009
Intro Larks head noose -- an easy useful knot that tightens and loosensI thought I knew all the basic knots but then I was taught this incredibly useful simple knot Its good for tying up the neck of a bag that you want to repeatedly open andsecurely close Its good for tying around a springy bundle that will need tightening and retightening And its easy to undo
Ive looked at knot literature but havent found a name for this so I named it The basic knot is well known its called a larks head Since all Ive done is to slip the twoends through the larks head to make a noose I call it that
WARNING Dont use this knot when human safety would depend on it Climbers and mountaineers have well-tested reliable knots for such situations
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Image Notes1 To tighten further step on this side of the larks head and pull the free ends
Step 1 Double the cord overThe larks head noose requires enough cord to go twice around your bundle plus a foot or two Find the center and double it over Sailors call this a bight
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 2 Form the larks headComing from below the bight hook your thumb and forefinger over the two sides Reach outward and downward and pinch your fingertips together underneath thedoubled cord
Youve made a larks head Move the crossing cord a little farther from your hand so theres a clear opening through the two half-loops
Step 3 Form the nooseSlip the two ends of the cord through the opening we were just talking about Pull the larks head tight so it grips the two cords Find something that needs constrictingand put the noose around it
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 4 Tightening retightening and lockingSlide the knot against the bundle If its not tight enough to keep from slipping tighten it by holding it in one hand and tugging on the cords one at a time with the otherhand Notice that you can slide the knot out again for instance to re-open the bag you just tied shut For some applications this may be as tight as you need it
A springy bundle probably still feels loose If so compress the bundle and get a new grip on the cords Rest your foot on the bundle on the cords nearest the larks headand pull to slide the larks head tighter
To make the knot more permanent you can lock it Make an overhand in the cord ends (Exactly like the first step in tying shoelaces) With your foot still on the bundlepull on the cords and move your hands apart until youre pulling in opposite directions You have just locked the larks head and you can trust it to stay that way()
But lets say that later on you want to loosen the locked knot Again put your foot on the bundle and cords nearest the larks head hold the two cord ends together andpull This makes a little slack between the overhand and the larks head so you can untie the overhand
In twine or small string the locking overhand knot may be difficult to undo Use a shoelace knot instead of an overhand and itll unlock easily
() If youre using slippery cord like polypropylene an overhand may not lock securely You may want to tie another overhand knot For added security wrap a shortlength of duct tape around the two cords close to the knot
Image Notes1 To tighten further step on this side of the larks head and pull the free ends
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Related Instructables
TRX fromParacordChallengeAccepted bythrake
A pocket full ofknots byKiteman
Lens CapLanyard by~teknoarsonist~ how to tie a
noose byawesume
AdjustableParacordGlassesLanyard byjdtwelve12
HangmansNoose PackClosure byPopEye42
Paraleash - ADog LeashFrom Paracordby The Ideanator
How to make arugged andhandy ParacordBelt by Jake22
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 7 Sheep shankTo shorten RopesTo prevent middle fraying
Step 8 Slip knotWhippingUsed as a grip for pulling things(when tied on a stick or small pole)(marlin spike hitch)
Related Instructables
Rope Rings byhpstoutharrow
How to Tie aFigure EightKnot byTactical_Pyro
Whippin (WestCountry Style)by tim_n
SurvivalBracelet(Updated) bytevers94
HangmansNoose PackClosure byPopEye42
Turkey on aTripod byhpstoutharrow
SurvivalBracelet II bytevers94 Zigzag Spooling
Paracord (video)by Stormdrane
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
How to Tie a Fire-escape Knotby leonardo ismael on October 16 2007
Intro How to Tie a Fire-escape KnotThis knot is used by firemen in case of fires for example imagine a scene where the ladder on the firetruck messes up but people need to get down a five story buildingor more All they have is a long piece of rope they can safely get down with a secure knot like the fire-escape knot So why not learn it its easy to do and hard to untieif you tie it tightly
This is from the American Boys Handbook
Step 1 Get Your RopeFirst grab a piece of rope and bend it like this to make a loop in it Follow every step to the smallest detail
Step 2 Twist the RopeNow make a twist like this and hold it together
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 3 Pull Through the TwistPull the loop through the twist you just made from underneath
Step 4 Go Over the Split EndNow pull the tail through the loop
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 5 FinallyAnd finally just pull it through as pictured below
Congratulations you just learned the fire-escape knot
Step 6 Same Name Not KnotThis is another knot called the fire-escape knot this shouldnt be your result
Related Instructables
House FireEscape Plan(video) byWhatHappensNowAdvice
ParacordLadder wWooden Rungsby josestude
Bed SheetEscape Rope byjessehensel
rope ladder(glow-in-the-dark version) bymikeasaurus
HeadlockEscape 2(video) byjohnnyrockstah
QuickFirestarter byMattandJora
Trail sauna byjakee117
How to Kill FireAnts andCommitGenocide byKentsOkay
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Climb Safe With A Figure 8 Knotby mattste on February 23 2010
Intro Climb Safe With A Figure 8 Knot There are many things that a beginning climber needs to know including several important knots Perhaps the most essential knot is the Figure 8 Follow Through Thistutorial will demonstrate how to correctly harness yourself to a rope using a Figure 8 Follow Through knot This knot is used primarily by rock climbers to provide a life-line Since this knot is used as a life-line it is very important to be able to tie it correctly (Your life could depend upon it)
Dont worry with this tutorial and about 5 minutes of practice you can have this knot mastered
Things you will need
- Climbing Harness- Climbing Rope
If you are wanting to go climbing and dont already have these items they can be purchased for about $25 each at most outdoor sporting goods stores If you are merelylooking to learn the knot a belt loop and a rope (about five feet long) will do
Image Notes1 Climbing Harness2 Climbing Rope
Step 1 Dealing With The RopeThroughout this tutorial I will be discussing different parts of the rope To make these instructions as clear as possible I will define a few terms that I will use throughoutthe tutorial The Anchor End of the rope will generally be at the top of the images This is the end that would be anchored to the wall or rock and does not move Wewill not be doing much with the anchored end The Tail End of the rope is the opposite end that we will be dealing with I will call this the tail for short
Now that we have some terms to work with lets get started
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 2 Tying The First Figure 8This knot has several parts to it The first part of the knot is just tying a basic figure 8 To tie the first figure 8 there are four simple steps
1 - Using the tail make a loop over the rope (as shown in the first picture) keeping in mind that there should be about 3 ft of slack on the tail end
2 - Wrap the tail back this time go under the anchored end (As shown in the second picture)
3 - Bring the tail down through the first loop (As shown in the third picture)
4 - Finally pull the two ends to make the knot a little bit tighter and easier to deal with (Shown in the fourth picture)
After these four steps you should end up with a knot that resembles a figure 8
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 3 Looping Into The Harness In order to secure the rope to the harness simply thread the tail end of the rope through the front loop in the harness as shown in the picture below This step isobviously very important
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 4 Following Back Through The Figure 8After looping the rope through the harness you have to thread the tail end of the rope back through the knot following the first figure 8 I have divided this process intofive smaller steps in order to make it more clear
1 - Coming form underneath the knot bring the tail up through the near loop and to the left behind the anchored end of the rope (Shown in the first picture)
2 - Wrap the tail around the anchored end back to the right and down through the adjacent loop (Shown in the second picture)
3 - You simply need to bring the tail back over the top of the knot to the left (Shown in the third picture)
4 - Bring the tail end up through the far loop following the anchored end (Shown in the fourth picture)
5 - Finally pull the knot tight (Shown in the fifth picture)
As you can see the first four pictures are simply tracing the knot back through with the tail end
For the last part while you pull the knot tight you may want to make small adjustments and rearrange how it all fits together If the knot does not lay perfectly smoothand tight its NOT a big deal
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 5 Finishing The Knot After completing the Figure 8 knot you will want to somehow secure the tail end of the rope out of the way There are a couple different ways to do this the way that Iwill demonstrate is using whats called a Stopper Knot This secondary knot is similar to a Fishermans knot and is pretty simple I have once again divided thisprocess into several smaller steps
1 - Start by wrapping the tail end around the anchored end (As shown in the first picture)
2 - Wrap the tail back underneath the two vertical segments (As shown in the second picture)
3 - Simply repeat the first two steps wrapping the tail around again (As shown in the third picture)
4 - This step in the fourth picture may look complicated but all you need to do is insert the tail up through the two loops that you have just made
5 - To finish off the knot you will want to slowly pull the tail end while gently pushing the bottom of the stopper knot upwards If you have successfully completed this knotit should look something like the fifth picture
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 6 Ready To Climb Now that you have mastered the Figure 8 knot you can securely harness yourself into a climbing rope Remember there are many other skills that go into setting up ananchor and belaying a climber This tutorial only covers the figure 8 knot For more information there are many great websites that demonstrate how to correctly set up asafe climbing system (Ive posted a few below) If you are a beginning climber I recommend that you read up on a few other climbing techniques Also you shouldprobably go to a climbing wall or gym where there are experienced climbers that can show you the ropes Hopefully this tutorial has been helpful Have fun and be safe
Some useful linkshttpwwwstephenprattnetAnchorsanchorshtmhttpwwwuoregonedu~oppclimbingtopicsanchorshtmlhttpwwwabc-of-rockclimbingcomhowtoclimbingtechniquesasp
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Related Instructables
How to Tie aFigure EightKnot byTactical_Pyro
Paracord KnotDisplay Bord byJamie bagn
Basic KnotsGuide byzorro3355
How to Climb aTree (withprussiks) bystasterisk
How to climb atree (using onlyrope) thefunsimple wayby louieaw
How to get arope into a tree(withoutclimbing it) byvitex
How to tievarious knots byadaviel
How to make arope swing byjdub0928
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Turks Head Knots on a Bottleby sklnxbones on July 6 2010
Intro Turks Head Knots on a BottleThis is the finished project A bottle decorated with three Turks Head Knots There are only three knots on this bottle The RED and the BLUE knots are each a 20 Bightby 3 Lead Turks Head Knots The WHITE knot is a 20 Bight by 19 Lead Turks Head Knot
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 1 Supplies
Cord Lots and Lots of cord I cant tell you how much each bottle is differentBottle Washed and Dried inside and out Make sure to remove all water spotsThreaded Needle Cord screws into the threads at the base of the needlePegs I use brass rivets used as a map to tie the Turks Head KnotsHole Punch Used to punch holes in the painters tape to hold the pegsPainters Tape To hold the pegs in place and to make your map for the Turks Head KnotsMarker To write on the painters tapeCloth Towel To remove finger prints and dirt from your bottleKrazy Glue or Super Glue This is used to secure the knots in place to the bottle
OPTIONAL BUT HIGHLY RECOMMENDEDI use the Turks Head Cookbook from KnotToolcom
Step 2 PreparationYou will need to find a bottle you like I used an empty instant tea bottle of course washed and dried (I like to put the bottle in the oven for a few minutes to dry the insidewithout water spots Take off the lid and do not put lid in the oven) Now measure the circumference of the bottle Take a cord and tightly wrap the cord around the bottleMark where the ends meet and use a ruler to measure the length of the cord For my instant tea bottle the circumference is 27cm I know from past knots that I have tiedthat I want my knot to have 20 Bights in the top and bottom (bands) knots I am going to use the Bights in the (bands) knots to tie the middle knot Now divide the numberof Bights (20) into the size of the circumference (27) to get the space between each Bight (135) With me so far
Now take two pieces of painters tape using a ruler measure out the length of the circumference and mark the length on the both pieces of tape Next you will mark thespace between each Bight on the tape
Step 3 Adding the PegsI like to use pegs when tying Turks Head Knots it just makes tying the knot easier
These are what I use for pegs
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 4 Adding Pegs to the TapeNow take a hole punch to cut holes in the tape where the lines meet You will place the pegs in the holes
Insert a peg in each hole and carefully stick the first piece of tape to the bottle
Step 5 Adding the 2nd row of pegsNow do the same thing with the second piece of tape The numbers on each piece of tape must line up
This picture shows you what you should have now This odd looking thing will be your map to tie the Turks Head Knot And this is the end of Step 1
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 6 Tying the first Turks Head KnotUsing the Turks Head Cookbook follow the numbers going over and under as indicated in the book I chose a 20 Bight by 3 Lead knot which will give me a nice bandaround the bottle Once the ends meet you have made one complete knot Tape the running end of your cord and start removing the pegs and the tape
Step 7 Remove the pegs and the tapeBe careful not to untie the knot as you remove the pegs and tape from the bottle Continue to remove all the pegs and remove the tape from the bottle At this point theknot will be very loose and will need to be tightened up
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 8 Remove the slack from the knotHere you can see just how much the knot expanded Starting with the standing end begin to pull the slack out of the knot going towards the running end of the cordDo not expect to pull all the slack out at once You may have to make 3 - 5 attempts at removing the slack out of the knot DO NOT remove all of the slack out of the knotIn order to make the bands we will have to triple the Turks Head Knot We will do this by following the knot three times The threaded needle will really come in handyhere
Step 9 Triple the KnotOnce you have made three passes of the Turks Head Knot use your needle to go under your knot about half the circumference and cut the cord The knot will be tightenough to hide the tail in placeTIP I carefully add a couple of drops of super glue UNDER the band to hold them in place and keep them from sliding around in the nextsteps A drop or two in 3 or 4 places around the band should be enough
Step 10 Add the second knotNow repeat this whole step for the second bandWhen tying the second band you must make sure the Bights line up to the first band This is crucial for the next stepWipe down the bottle to make sure all your finger prints and adhesive from the tape are all removed You want to make sure your bottle is clean at this point Any dirt orfinger prints left on the bottle will be almost impossible to remove From this point on we will use gloves when tying our last knot
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 11 Maping the Top KnotStick a piece of painters tape on top of your first band leaving the bottom of the knot exposedUse a marker to count the number of Bights in your knot Instead of using the pegs we are going to use the Bights to tie our next Turks Head Knot
Step 12 Mapping the Bottom KnotDo the same thing for the bottom band but you must make sure your numbers on top and bottom line up So 1 on top should be the same position as 1 on the bottom
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 13 Adding the last knotAgain using the Turks Head Cookbook and the threaded needle you are going to follow the instructions going over and under as indicated in the book Be sure to usegloves when ever you handle the bottle
Step 14 Thats ItFor this Turks Head Knot I am using a 20 Bight by 19 Lead knot
Because of the amount of cord you are working with your cord will get twisted and knotted You will have to un-twist the cord often Its a pain in the rear but it has to bedone And it has to be done alot
Continue to tie the knot until you finish the knot If you have the cord and the patience you can double or triple the knot When you are done use your needle to hide theends under your bands Cut the ends and your DONE
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Related Instructables
Monkeys FistFloatingKeychain byjokerlz
How To Make ATurks headKnot WithParacord byDoggie Stylish
Tying Trivetsout of Rope forHoliday Gifts bykylemarsh
Paracord KnotDisplay Bord byJamie bagn
How to Make ATurks Head(Photos) bymchs60chip
A pocket full ofknots byKiteman
Monkeys fistknot AND themonkey byjonathan111
TiteTie is theTruckers Knoton Steroids bytitetie
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Larks head noose -- an easy useful knot that tightens and loosensby Larry Breed on February 19 2009
Intro Larks head noose -- an easy useful knot that tightens and loosensI thought I knew all the basic knots but then I was taught this incredibly useful simple knot Its good for tying up the neck of a bag that you want to repeatedly open andsecurely close Its good for tying around a springy bundle that will need tightening and retightening And its easy to undo
Ive looked at knot literature but havent found a name for this so I named it The basic knot is well known its called a larks head Since all Ive done is to slip the twoends through the larks head to make a noose I call it that
WARNING Dont use this knot when human safety would depend on it Climbers and mountaineers have well-tested reliable knots for such situations
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Image Notes1 To tighten further step on this side of the larks head and pull the free ends
Step 1 Double the cord overThe larks head noose requires enough cord to go twice around your bundle plus a foot or two Find the center and double it over Sailors call this a bight
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 2 Form the larks headComing from below the bight hook your thumb and forefinger over the two sides Reach outward and downward and pinch your fingertips together underneath thedoubled cord
Youve made a larks head Move the crossing cord a little farther from your hand so theres a clear opening through the two half-loops
Step 3 Form the nooseSlip the two ends of the cord through the opening we were just talking about Pull the larks head tight so it grips the two cords Find something that needs constrictingand put the noose around it
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 4 Tightening retightening and lockingSlide the knot against the bundle If its not tight enough to keep from slipping tighten it by holding it in one hand and tugging on the cords one at a time with the otherhand Notice that you can slide the knot out again for instance to re-open the bag you just tied shut For some applications this may be as tight as you need it
A springy bundle probably still feels loose If so compress the bundle and get a new grip on the cords Rest your foot on the bundle on the cords nearest the larks headand pull to slide the larks head tighter
To make the knot more permanent you can lock it Make an overhand in the cord ends (Exactly like the first step in tying shoelaces) With your foot still on the bundlepull on the cords and move your hands apart until youre pulling in opposite directions You have just locked the larks head and you can trust it to stay that way()
But lets say that later on you want to loosen the locked knot Again put your foot on the bundle and cords nearest the larks head hold the two cord ends together andpull This makes a little slack between the overhand and the larks head so you can untie the overhand
In twine or small string the locking overhand knot may be difficult to undo Use a shoelace knot instead of an overhand and itll unlock easily
() If youre using slippery cord like polypropylene an overhand may not lock securely You may want to tie another overhand knot For added security wrap a shortlength of duct tape around the two cords close to the knot
Image Notes1 To tighten further step on this side of the larks head and pull the free ends
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Related Instructables
TRX fromParacordChallengeAccepted bythrake
A pocket full ofknots byKiteman
Lens CapLanyard by~teknoarsonist~ how to tie a
noose byawesume
AdjustableParacordGlassesLanyard byjdtwelve12
HangmansNoose PackClosure byPopEye42
Paraleash - ADog LeashFrom Paracordby The Ideanator
How to make arugged andhandy ParacordBelt by Jake22
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 7 Sheep shankTo shorten RopesTo prevent middle fraying
Step 8 Slip knotWhippingUsed as a grip for pulling things(when tied on a stick or small pole)(marlin spike hitch)
Related Instructables
Rope Rings byhpstoutharrow
How to Tie aFigure EightKnot byTactical_Pyro
Whippin (WestCountry Style)by tim_n
SurvivalBracelet(Updated) bytevers94
HangmansNoose PackClosure byPopEye42
Turkey on aTripod byhpstoutharrow
SurvivalBracelet II bytevers94 Zigzag Spooling
Paracord (video)by Stormdrane
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
How to Tie a Fire-escape Knotby leonardo ismael on October 16 2007
Intro How to Tie a Fire-escape KnotThis knot is used by firemen in case of fires for example imagine a scene where the ladder on the firetruck messes up but people need to get down a five story buildingor more All they have is a long piece of rope they can safely get down with a secure knot like the fire-escape knot So why not learn it its easy to do and hard to untieif you tie it tightly
This is from the American Boys Handbook
Step 1 Get Your RopeFirst grab a piece of rope and bend it like this to make a loop in it Follow every step to the smallest detail
Step 2 Twist the RopeNow make a twist like this and hold it together
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 3 Pull Through the TwistPull the loop through the twist you just made from underneath
Step 4 Go Over the Split EndNow pull the tail through the loop
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 5 FinallyAnd finally just pull it through as pictured below
Congratulations you just learned the fire-escape knot
Step 6 Same Name Not KnotThis is another knot called the fire-escape knot this shouldnt be your result
Related Instructables
House FireEscape Plan(video) byWhatHappensNowAdvice
ParacordLadder wWooden Rungsby josestude
Bed SheetEscape Rope byjessehensel
rope ladder(glow-in-the-dark version) bymikeasaurus
HeadlockEscape 2(video) byjohnnyrockstah
QuickFirestarter byMattandJora
Trail sauna byjakee117
How to Kill FireAnts andCommitGenocide byKentsOkay
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Climb Safe With A Figure 8 Knotby mattste on February 23 2010
Intro Climb Safe With A Figure 8 Knot There are many things that a beginning climber needs to know including several important knots Perhaps the most essential knot is the Figure 8 Follow Through Thistutorial will demonstrate how to correctly harness yourself to a rope using a Figure 8 Follow Through knot This knot is used primarily by rock climbers to provide a life-line Since this knot is used as a life-line it is very important to be able to tie it correctly (Your life could depend upon it)
Dont worry with this tutorial and about 5 minutes of practice you can have this knot mastered
Things you will need
- Climbing Harness- Climbing Rope
If you are wanting to go climbing and dont already have these items they can be purchased for about $25 each at most outdoor sporting goods stores If you are merelylooking to learn the knot a belt loop and a rope (about five feet long) will do
Image Notes1 Climbing Harness2 Climbing Rope
Step 1 Dealing With The RopeThroughout this tutorial I will be discussing different parts of the rope To make these instructions as clear as possible I will define a few terms that I will use throughoutthe tutorial The Anchor End of the rope will generally be at the top of the images This is the end that would be anchored to the wall or rock and does not move Wewill not be doing much with the anchored end The Tail End of the rope is the opposite end that we will be dealing with I will call this the tail for short
Now that we have some terms to work with lets get started
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 2 Tying The First Figure 8This knot has several parts to it The first part of the knot is just tying a basic figure 8 To tie the first figure 8 there are four simple steps
1 - Using the tail make a loop over the rope (as shown in the first picture) keeping in mind that there should be about 3 ft of slack on the tail end
2 - Wrap the tail back this time go under the anchored end (As shown in the second picture)
3 - Bring the tail down through the first loop (As shown in the third picture)
4 - Finally pull the two ends to make the knot a little bit tighter and easier to deal with (Shown in the fourth picture)
After these four steps you should end up with a knot that resembles a figure 8
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 3 Looping Into The Harness In order to secure the rope to the harness simply thread the tail end of the rope through the front loop in the harness as shown in the picture below This step isobviously very important
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 4 Following Back Through The Figure 8After looping the rope through the harness you have to thread the tail end of the rope back through the knot following the first figure 8 I have divided this process intofive smaller steps in order to make it more clear
1 - Coming form underneath the knot bring the tail up through the near loop and to the left behind the anchored end of the rope (Shown in the first picture)
2 - Wrap the tail around the anchored end back to the right and down through the adjacent loop (Shown in the second picture)
3 - You simply need to bring the tail back over the top of the knot to the left (Shown in the third picture)
4 - Bring the tail end up through the far loop following the anchored end (Shown in the fourth picture)
5 - Finally pull the knot tight (Shown in the fifth picture)
As you can see the first four pictures are simply tracing the knot back through with the tail end
For the last part while you pull the knot tight you may want to make small adjustments and rearrange how it all fits together If the knot does not lay perfectly smoothand tight its NOT a big deal
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 5 Finishing The Knot After completing the Figure 8 knot you will want to somehow secure the tail end of the rope out of the way There are a couple different ways to do this the way that Iwill demonstrate is using whats called a Stopper Knot This secondary knot is similar to a Fishermans knot and is pretty simple I have once again divided thisprocess into several smaller steps
1 - Start by wrapping the tail end around the anchored end (As shown in the first picture)
2 - Wrap the tail back underneath the two vertical segments (As shown in the second picture)
3 - Simply repeat the first two steps wrapping the tail around again (As shown in the third picture)
4 - This step in the fourth picture may look complicated but all you need to do is insert the tail up through the two loops that you have just made
5 - To finish off the knot you will want to slowly pull the tail end while gently pushing the bottom of the stopper knot upwards If you have successfully completed this knotit should look something like the fifth picture
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 6 Ready To Climb Now that you have mastered the Figure 8 knot you can securely harness yourself into a climbing rope Remember there are many other skills that go into setting up ananchor and belaying a climber This tutorial only covers the figure 8 knot For more information there are many great websites that demonstrate how to correctly set up asafe climbing system (Ive posted a few below) If you are a beginning climber I recommend that you read up on a few other climbing techniques Also you shouldprobably go to a climbing wall or gym where there are experienced climbers that can show you the ropes Hopefully this tutorial has been helpful Have fun and be safe
Some useful linkshttpwwwstephenprattnetAnchorsanchorshtmhttpwwwuoregonedu~oppclimbingtopicsanchorshtmlhttpwwwabc-of-rockclimbingcomhowtoclimbingtechniquesasp
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Related Instructables
How to Tie aFigure EightKnot byTactical_Pyro
Paracord KnotDisplay Bord byJamie bagn
Basic KnotsGuide byzorro3355
How to Climb aTree (withprussiks) bystasterisk
How to climb atree (using onlyrope) thefunsimple wayby louieaw
How to get arope into a tree(withoutclimbing it) byvitex
How to tievarious knots byadaviel
How to make arope swing byjdub0928
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Turks Head Knots on a Bottleby sklnxbones on July 6 2010
Intro Turks Head Knots on a BottleThis is the finished project A bottle decorated with three Turks Head Knots There are only three knots on this bottle The RED and the BLUE knots are each a 20 Bightby 3 Lead Turks Head Knots The WHITE knot is a 20 Bight by 19 Lead Turks Head Knot
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 1 Supplies
Cord Lots and Lots of cord I cant tell you how much each bottle is differentBottle Washed and Dried inside and out Make sure to remove all water spotsThreaded Needle Cord screws into the threads at the base of the needlePegs I use brass rivets used as a map to tie the Turks Head KnotsHole Punch Used to punch holes in the painters tape to hold the pegsPainters Tape To hold the pegs in place and to make your map for the Turks Head KnotsMarker To write on the painters tapeCloth Towel To remove finger prints and dirt from your bottleKrazy Glue or Super Glue This is used to secure the knots in place to the bottle
OPTIONAL BUT HIGHLY RECOMMENDEDI use the Turks Head Cookbook from KnotToolcom
Step 2 PreparationYou will need to find a bottle you like I used an empty instant tea bottle of course washed and dried (I like to put the bottle in the oven for a few minutes to dry the insidewithout water spots Take off the lid and do not put lid in the oven) Now measure the circumference of the bottle Take a cord and tightly wrap the cord around the bottleMark where the ends meet and use a ruler to measure the length of the cord For my instant tea bottle the circumference is 27cm I know from past knots that I have tiedthat I want my knot to have 20 Bights in the top and bottom (bands) knots I am going to use the Bights in the (bands) knots to tie the middle knot Now divide the numberof Bights (20) into the size of the circumference (27) to get the space between each Bight (135) With me so far
Now take two pieces of painters tape using a ruler measure out the length of the circumference and mark the length on the both pieces of tape Next you will mark thespace between each Bight on the tape
Step 3 Adding the PegsI like to use pegs when tying Turks Head Knots it just makes tying the knot easier
These are what I use for pegs
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 4 Adding Pegs to the TapeNow take a hole punch to cut holes in the tape where the lines meet You will place the pegs in the holes
Insert a peg in each hole and carefully stick the first piece of tape to the bottle
Step 5 Adding the 2nd row of pegsNow do the same thing with the second piece of tape The numbers on each piece of tape must line up
This picture shows you what you should have now This odd looking thing will be your map to tie the Turks Head Knot And this is the end of Step 1
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 6 Tying the first Turks Head KnotUsing the Turks Head Cookbook follow the numbers going over and under as indicated in the book I chose a 20 Bight by 3 Lead knot which will give me a nice bandaround the bottle Once the ends meet you have made one complete knot Tape the running end of your cord and start removing the pegs and the tape
Step 7 Remove the pegs and the tapeBe careful not to untie the knot as you remove the pegs and tape from the bottle Continue to remove all the pegs and remove the tape from the bottle At this point theknot will be very loose and will need to be tightened up
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 8 Remove the slack from the knotHere you can see just how much the knot expanded Starting with the standing end begin to pull the slack out of the knot going towards the running end of the cordDo not expect to pull all the slack out at once You may have to make 3 - 5 attempts at removing the slack out of the knot DO NOT remove all of the slack out of the knotIn order to make the bands we will have to triple the Turks Head Knot We will do this by following the knot three times The threaded needle will really come in handyhere
Step 9 Triple the KnotOnce you have made three passes of the Turks Head Knot use your needle to go under your knot about half the circumference and cut the cord The knot will be tightenough to hide the tail in placeTIP I carefully add a couple of drops of super glue UNDER the band to hold them in place and keep them from sliding around in the nextsteps A drop or two in 3 or 4 places around the band should be enough
Step 10 Add the second knotNow repeat this whole step for the second bandWhen tying the second band you must make sure the Bights line up to the first band This is crucial for the next stepWipe down the bottle to make sure all your finger prints and adhesive from the tape are all removed You want to make sure your bottle is clean at this point Any dirt orfinger prints left on the bottle will be almost impossible to remove From this point on we will use gloves when tying our last knot
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 11 Maping the Top KnotStick a piece of painters tape on top of your first band leaving the bottom of the knot exposedUse a marker to count the number of Bights in your knot Instead of using the pegs we are going to use the Bights to tie our next Turks Head Knot
Step 12 Mapping the Bottom KnotDo the same thing for the bottom band but you must make sure your numbers on top and bottom line up So 1 on top should be the same position as 1 on the bottom
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 13 Adding the last knotAgain using the Turks Head Cookbook and the threaded needle you are going to follow the instructions going over and under as indicated in the book Be sure to usegloves when ever you handle the bottle
Step 14 Thats ItFor this Turks Head Knot I am using a 20 Bight by 19 Lead knot
Because of the amount of cord you are working with your cord will get twisted and knotted You will have to un-twist the cord often Its a pain in the rear but it has to bedone And it has to be done alot
Continue to tie the knot until you finish the knot If you have the cord and the patience you can double or triple the knot When you are done use your needle to hide theends under your bands Cut the ends and your DONE
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Related Instructables
Monkeys FistFloatingKeychain byjokerlz
How To Make ATurks headKnot WithParacord byDoggie Stylish
Tying Trivetsout of Rope forHoliday Gifts bykylemarsh
Paracord KnotDisplay Bord byJamie bagn
How to Make ATurks Head(Photos) bymchs60chip
A pocket full ofknots byKiteman
Monkeys fistknot AND themonkey byjonathan111
TiteTie is theTruckers Knoton Steroids bytitetie
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Larks head noose -- an easy useful knot that tightens and loosensby Larry Breed on February 19 2009
Intro Larks head noose -- an easy useful knot that tightens and loosensI thought I knew all the basic knots but then I was taught this incredibly useful simple knot Its good for tying up the neck of a bag that you want to repeatedly open andsecurely close Its good for tying around a springy bundle that will need tightening and retightening And its easy to undo
Ive looked at knot literature but havent found a name for this so I named it The basic knot is well known its called a larks head Since all Ive done is to slip the twoends through the larks head to make a noose I call it that
WARNING Dont use this knot when human safety would depend on it Climbers and mountaineers have well-tested reliable knots for such situations
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Image Notes1 To tighten further step on this side of the larks head and pull the free ends
Step 1 Double the cord overThe larks head noose requires enough cord to go twice around your bundle plus a foot or two Find the center and double it over Sailors call this a bight
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 2 Form the larks headComing from below the bight hook your thumb and forefinger over the two sides Reach outward and downward and pinch your fingertips together underneath thedoubled cord
Youve made a larks head Move the crossing cord a little farther from your hand so theres a clear opening through the two half-loops
Step 3 Form the nooseSlip the two ends of the cord through the opening we were just talking about Pull the larks head tight so it grips the two cords Find something that needs constrictingand put the noose around it
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 4 Tightening retightening and lockingSlide the knot against the bundle If its not tight enough to keep from slipping tighten it by holding it in one hand and tugging on the cords one at a time with the otherhand Notice that you can slide the knot out again for instance to re-open the bag you just tied shut For some applications this may be as tight as you need it
A springy bundle probably still feels loose If so compress the bundle and get a new grip on the cords Rest your foot on the bundle on the cords nearest the larks headand pull to slide the larks head tighter
To make the knot more permanent you can lock it Make an overhand in the cord ends (Exactly like the first step in tying shoelaces) With your foot still on the bundlepull on the cords and move your hands apart until youre pulling in opposite directions You have just locked the larks head and you can trust it to stay that way()
But lets say that later on you want to loosen the locked knot Again put your foot on the bundle and cords nearest the larks head hold the two cord ends together andpull This makes a little slack between the overhand and the larks head so you can untie the overhand
In twine or small string the locking overhand knot may be difficult to undo Use a shoelace knot instead of an overhand and itll unlock easily
() If youre using slippery cord like polypropylene an overhand may not lock securely You may want to tie another overhand knot For added security wrap a shortlength of duct tape around the two cords close to the knot
Image Notes1 To tighten further step on this side of the larks head and pull the free ends
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Related Instructables
TRX fromParacordChallengeAccepted bythrake
A pocket full ofknots byKiteman
Lens CapLanyard by~teknoarsonist~ how to tie a
noose byawesume
AdjustableParacordGlassesLanyard byjdtwelve12
HangmansNoose PackClosure byPopEye42
Paraleash - ADog LeashFrom Paracordby The Ideanator
How to make arugged andhandy ParacordBelt by Jake22
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
How to Tie a Fire-escape Knotby leonardo ismael on October 16 2007
Intro How to Tie a Fire-escape KnotThis knot is used by firemen in case of fires for example imagine a scene where the ladder on the firetruck messes up but people need to get down a five story buildingor more All they have is a long piece of rope they can safely get down with a secure knot like the fire-escape knot So why not learn it its easy to do and hard to untieif you tie it tightly
This is from the American Boys Handbook
Step 1 Get Your RopeFirst grab a piece of rope and bend it like this to make a loop in it Follow every step to the smallest detail
Step 2 Twist the RopeNow make a twist like this and hold it together
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 3 Pull Through the TwistPull the loop through the twist you just made from underneath
Step 4 Go Over the Split EndNow pull the tail through the loop
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 5 FinallyAnd finally just pull it through as pictured below
Congratulations you just learned the fire-escape knot
Step 6 Same Name Not KnotThis is another knot called the fire-escape knot this shouldnt be your result
Related Instructables
House FireEscape Plan(video) byWhatHappensNowAdvice
ParacordLadder wWooden Rungsby josestude
Bed SheetEscape Rope byjessehensel
rope ladder(glow-in-the-dark version) bymikeasaurus
HeadlockEscape 2(video) byjohnnyrockstah
QuickFirestarter byMattandJora
Trail sauna byjakee117
How to Kill FireAnts andCommitGenocide byKentsOkay
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Climb Safe With A Figure 8 Knotby mattste on February 23 2010
Intro Climb Safe With A Figure 8 Knot There are many things that a beginning climber needs to know including several important knots Perhaps the most essential knot is the Figure 8 Follow Through Thistutorial will demonstrate how to correctly harness yourself to a rope using a Figure 8 Follow Through knot This knot is used primarily by rock climbers to provide a life-line Since this knot is used as a life-line it is very important to be able to tie it correctly (Your life could depend upon it)
Dont worry with this tutorial and about 5 minutes of practice you can have this knot mastered
Things you will need
- Climbing Harness- Climbing Rope
If you are wanting to go climbing and dont already have these items they can be purchased for about $25 each at most outdoor sporting goods stores If you are merelylooking to learn the knot a belt loop and a rope (about five feet long) will do
Image Notes1 Climbing Harness2 Climbing Rope
Step 1 Dealing With The RopeThroughout this tutorial I will be discussing different parts of the rope To make these instructions as clear as possible I will define a few terms that I will use throughoutthe tutorial The Anchor End of the rope will generally be at the top of the images This is the end that would be anchored to the wall or rock and does not move Wewill not be doing much with the anchored end The Tail End of the rope is the opposite end that we will be dealing with I will call this the tail for short
Now that we have some terms to work with lets get started
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 2 Tying The First Figure 8This knot has several parts to it The first part of the knot is just tying a basic figure 8 To tie the first figure 8 there are four simple steps
1 - Using the tail make a loop over the rope (as shown in the first picture) keeping in mind that there should be about 3 ft of slack on the tail end
2 - Wrap the tail back this time go under the anchored end (As shown in the second picture)
3 - Bring the tail down through the first loop (As shown in the third picture)
4 - Finally pull the two ends to make the knot a little bit tighter and easier to deal with (Shown in the fourth picture)
After these four steps you should end up with a knot that resembles a figure 8
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 3 Looping Into The Harness In order to secure the rope to the harness simply thread the tail end of the rope through the front loop in the harness as shown in the picture below This step isobviously very important
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 4 Following Back Through The Figure 8After looping the rope through the harness you have to thread the tail end of the rope back through the knot following the first figure 8 I have divided this process intofive smaller steps in order to make it more clear
1 - Coming form underneath the knot bring the tail up through the near loop and to the left behind the anchored end of the rope (Shown in the first picture)
2 - Wrap the tail around the anchored end back to the right and down through the adjacent loop (Shown in the second picture)
3 - You simply need to bring the tail back over the top of the knot to the left (Shown in the third picture)
4 - Bring the tail end up through the far loop following the anchored end (Shown in the fourth picture)
5 - Finally pull the knot tight (Shown in the fifth picture)
As you can see the first four pictures are simply tracing the knot back through with the tail end
For the last part while you pull the knot tight you may want to make small adjustments and rearrange how it all fits together If the knot does not lay perfectly smoothand tight its NOT a big deal
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 5 Finishing The Knot After completing the Figure 8 knot you will want to somehow secure the tail end of the rope out of the way There are a couple different ways to do this the way that Iwill demonstrate is using whats called a Stopper Knot This secondary knot is similar to a Fishermans knot and is pretty simple I have once again divided thisprocess into several smaller steps
1 - Start by wrapping the tail end around the anchored end (As shown in the first picture)
2 - Wrap the tail back underneath the two vertical segments (As shown in the second picture)
3 - Simply repeat the first two steps wrapping the tail around again (As shown in the third picture)
4 - This step in the fourth picture may look complicated but all you need to do is insert the tail up through the two loops that you have just made
5 - To finish off the knot you will want to slowly pull the tail end while gently pushing the bottom of the stopper knot upwards If you have successfully completed this knotit should look something like the fifth picture
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 6 Ready To Climb Now that you have mastered the Figure 8 knot you can securely harness yourself into a climbing rope Remember there are many other skills that go into setting up ananchor and belaying a climber This tutorial only covers the figure 8 knot For more information there are many great websites that demonstrate how to correctly set up asafe climbing system (Ive posted a few below) If you are a beginning climber I recommend that you read up on a few other climbing techniques Also you shouldprobably go to a climbing wall or gym where there are experienced climbers that can show you the ropes Hopefully this tutorial has been helpful Have fun and be safe
Some useful linkshttpwwwstephenprattnetAnchorsanchorshtmhttpwwwuoregonedu~oppclimbingtopicsanchorshtmlhttpwwwabc-of-rockclimbingcomhowtoclimbingtechniquesasp
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Related Instructables
How to Tie aFigure EightKnot byTactical_Pyro
Paracord KnotDisplay Bord byJamie bagn
Basic KnotsGuide byzorro3355
How to Climb aTree (withprussiks) bystasterisk
How to climb atree (using onlyrope) thefunsimple wayby louieaw
How to get arope into a tree(withoutclimbing it) byvitex
How to tievarious knots byadaviel
How to make arope swing byjdub0928
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Turks Head Knots on a Bottleby sklnxbones on July 6 2010
Intro Turks Head Knots on a BottleThis is the finished project A bottle decorated with three Turks Head Knots There are only three knots on this bottle The RED and the BLUE knots are each a 20 Bightby 3 Lead Turks Head Knots The WHITE knot is a 20 Bight by 19 Lead Turks Head Knot
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 1 Supplies
Cord Lots and Lots of cord I cant tell you how much each bottle is differentBottle Washed and Dried inside and out Make sure to remove all water spotsThreaded Needle Cord screws into the threads at the base of the needlePegs I use brass rivets used as a map to tie the Turks Head KnotsHole Punch Used to punch holes in the painters tape to hold the pegsPainters Tape To hold the pegs in place and to make your map for the Turks Head KnotsMarker To write on the painters tapeCloth Towel To remove finger prints and dirt from your bottleKrazy Glue or Super Glue This is used to secure the knots in place to the bottle
OPTIONAL BUT HIGHLY RECOMMENDEDI use the Turks Head Cookbook from KnotToolcom
Step 2 PreparationYou will need to find a bottle you like I used an empty instant tea bottle of course washed and dried (I like to put the bottle in the oven for a few minutes to dry the insidewithout water spots Take off the lid and do not put lid in the oven) Now measure the circumference of the bottle Take a cord and tightly wrap the cord around the bottleMark where the ends meet and use a ruler to measure the length of the cord For my instant tea bottle the circumference is 27cm I know from past knots that I have tiedthat I want my knot to have 20 Bights in the top and bottom (bands) knots I am going to use the Bights in the (bands) knots to tie the middle knot Now divide the numberof Bights (20) into the size of the circumference (27) to get the space between each Bight (135) With me so far
Now take two pieces of painters tape using a ruler measure out the length of the circumference and mark the length on the both pieces of tape Next you will mark thespace between each Bight on the tape
Step 3 Adding the PegsI like to use pegs when tying Turks Head Knots it just makes tying the knot easier
These are what I use for pegs
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 4 Adding Pegs to the TapeNow take a hole punch to cut holes in the tape where the lines meet You will place the pegs in the holes
Insert a peg in each hole and carefully stick the first piece of tape to the bottle
Step 5 Adding the 2nd row of pegsNow do the same thing with the second piece of tape The numbers on each piece of tape must line up
This picture shows you what you should have now This odd looking thing will be your map to tie the Turks Head Knot And this is the end of Step 1
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 6 Tying the first Turks Head KnotUsing the Turks Head Cookbook follow the numbers going over and under as indicated in the book I chose a 20 Bight by 3 Lead knot which will give me a nice bandaround the bottle Once the ends meet you have made one complete knot Tape the running end of your cord and start removing the pegs and the tape
Step 7 Remove the pegs and the tapeBe careful not to untie the knot as you remove the pegs and tape from the bottle Continue to remove all the pegs and remove the tape from the bottle At this point theknot will be very loose and will need to be tightened up
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 8 Remove the slack from the knotHere you can see just how much the knot expanded Starting with the standing end begin to pull the slack out of the knot going towards the running end of the cordDo not expect to pull all the slack out at once You may have to make 3 - 5 attempts at removing the slack out of the knot DO NOT remove all of the slack out of the knotIn order to make the bands we will have to triple the Turks Head Knot We will do this by following the knot three times The threaded needle will really come in handyhere
Step 9 Triple the KnotOnce you have made three passes of the Turks Head Knot use your needle to go under your knot about half the circumference and cut the cord The knot will be tightenough to hide the tail in placeTIP I carefully add a couple of drops of super glue UNDER the band to hold them in place and keep them from sliding around in the nextsteps A drop or two in 3 or 4 places around the band should be enough
Step 10 Add the second knotNow repeat this whole step for the second bandWhen tying the second band you must make sure the Bights line up to the first band This is crucial for the next stepWipe down the bottle to make sure all your finger prints and adhesive from the tape are all removed You want to make sure your bottle is clean at this point Any dirt orfinger prints left on the bottle will be almost impossible to remove From this point on we will use gloves when tying our last knot
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 11 Maping the Top KnotStick a piece of painters tape on top of your first band leaving the bottom of the knot exposedUse a marker to count the number of Bights in your knot Instead of using the pegs we are going to use the Bights to tie our next Turks Head Knot
Step 12 Mapping the Bottom KnotDo the same thing for the bottom band but you must make sure your numbers on top and bottom line up So 1 on top should be the same position as 1 on the bottom
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 13 Adding the last knotAgain using the Turks Head Cookbook and the threaded needle you are going to follow the instructions going over and under as indicated in the book Be sure to usegloves when ever you handle the bottle
Step 14 Thats ItFor this Turks Head Knot I am using a 20 Bight by 19 Lead knot
Because of the amount of cord you are working with your cord will get twisted and knotted You will have to un-twist the cord often Its a pain in the rear but it has to bedone And it has to be done alot
Continue to tie the knot until you finish the knot If you have the cord and the patience you can double or triple the knot When you are done use your needle to hide theends under your bands Cut the ends and your DONE
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Related Instructables
Monkeys FistFloatingKeychain byjokerlz
How To Make ATurks headKnot WithParacord byDoggie Stylish
Tying Trivetsout of Rope forHoliday Gifts bykylemarsh
Paracord KnotDisplay Bord byJamie bagn
How to Make ATurks Head(Photos) bymchs60chip
A pocket full ofknots byKiteman
Monkeys fistknot AND themonkey byjonathan111
TiteTie is theTruckers Knoton Steroids bytitetie
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Larks head noose -- an easy useful knot that tightens and loosensby Larry Breed on February 19 2009
Intro Larks head noose -- an easy useful knot that tightens and loosensI thought I knew all the basic knots but then I was taught this incredibly useful simple knot Its good for tying up the neck of a bag that you want to repeatedly open andsecurely close Its good for tying around a springy bundle that will need tightening and retightening And its easy to undo
Ive looked at knot literature but havent found a name for this so I named it The basic knot is well known its called a larks head Since all Ive done is to slip the twoends through the larks head to make a noose I call it that
WARNING Dont use this knot when human safety would depend on it Climbers and mountaineers have well-tested reliable knots for such situations
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Image Notes1 To tighten further step on this side of the larks head and pull the free ends
Step 1 Double the cord overThe larks head noose requires enough cord to go twice around your bundle plus a foot or two Find the center and double it over Sailors call this a bight
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 2 Form the larks headComing from below the bight hook your thumb and forefinger over the two sides Reach outward and downward and pinch your fingertips together underneath thedoubled cord
Youve made a larks head Move the crossing cord a little farther from your hand so theres a clear opening through the two half-loops
Step 3 Form the nooseSlip the two ends of the cord through the opening we were just talking about Pull the larks head tight so it grips the two cords Find something that needs constrictingand put the noose around it
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 4 Tightening retightening and lockingSlide the knot against the bundle If its not tight enough to keep from slipping tighten it by holding it in one hand and tugging on the cords one at a time with the otherhand Notice that you can slide the knot out again for instance to re-open the bag you just tied shut For some applications this may be as tight as you need it
A springy bundle probably still feels loose If so compress the bundle and get a new grip on the cords Rest your foot on the bundle on the cords nearest the larks headand pull to slide the larks head tighter
To make the knot more permanent you can lock it Make an overhand in the cord ends (Exactly like the first step in tying shoelaces) With your foot still on the bundlepull on the cords and move your hands apart until youre pulling in opposite directions You have just locked the larks head and you can trust it to stay that way()
But lets say that later on you want to loosen the locked knot Again put your foot on the bundle and cords nearest the larks head hold the two cord ends together andpull This makes a little slack between the overhand and the larks head so you can untie the overhand
In twine or small string the locking overhand knot may be difficult to undo Use a shoelace knot instead of an overhand and itll unlock easily
() If youre using slippery cord like polypropylene an overhand may not lock securely You may want to tie another overhand knot For added security wrap a shortlength of duct tape around the two cords close to the knot
Image Notes1 To tighten further step on this side of the larks head and pull the free ends
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Related Instructables
TRX fromParacordChallengeAccepted bythrake
A pocket full ofknots byKiteman
Lens CapLanyard by~teknoarsonist~ how to tie a
noose byawesume
AdjustableParacordGlassesLanyard byjdtwelve12
HangmansNoose PackClosure byPopEye42
Paraleash - ADog LeashFrom Paracordby The Ideanator
How to make arugged andhandy ParacordBelt by Jake22
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 3 Pull Through the TwistPull the loop through the twist you just made from underneath
Step 4 Go Over the Split EndNow pull the tail through the loop
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 5 FinallyAnd finally just pull it through as pictured below
Congratulations you just learned the fire-escape knot
Step 6 Same Name Not KnotThis is another knot called the fire-escape knot this shouldnt be your result
Related Instructables
House FireEscape Plan(video) byWhatHappensNowAdvice
ParacordLadder wWooden Rungsby josestude
Bed SheetEscape Rope byjessehensel
rope ladder(glow-in-the-dark version) bymikeasaurus
HeadlockEscape 2(video) byjohnnyrockstah
QuickFirestarter byMattandJora
Trail sauna byjakee117
How to Kill FireAnts andCommitGenocide byKentsOkay
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Climb Safe With A Figure 8 Knotby mattste on February 23 2010
Intro Climb Safe With A Figure 8 Knot There are many things that a beginning climber needs to know including several important knots Perhaps the most essential knot is the Figure 8 Follow Through Thistutorial will demonstrate how to correctly harness yourself to a rope using a Figure 8 Follow Through knot This knot is used primarily by rock climbers to provide a life-line Since this knot is used as a life-line it is very important to be able to tie it correctly (Your life could depend upon it)
Dont worry with this tutorial and about 5 minutes of practice you can have this knot mastered
Things you will need
- Climbing Harness- Climbing Rope
If you are wanting to go climbing and dont already have these items they can be purchased for about $25 each at most outdoor sporting goods stores If you are merelylooking to learn the knot a belt loop and a rope (about five feet long) will do
Image Notes1 Climbing Harness2 Climbing Rope
Step 1 Dealing With The RopeThroughout this tutorial I will be discussing different parts of the rope To make these instructions as clear as possible I will define a few terms that I will use throughoutthe tutorial The Anchor End of the rope will generally be at the top of the images This is the end that would be anchored to the wall or rock and does not move Wewill not be doing much with the anchored end The Tail End of the rope is the opposite end that we will be dealing with I will call this the tail for short
Now that we have some terms to work with lets get started
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 2 Tying The First Figure 8This knot has several parts to it The first part of the knot is just tying a basic figure 8 To tie the first figure 8 there are four simple steps
1 - Using the tail make a loop over the rope (as shown in the first picture) keeping in mind that there should be about 3 ft of slack on the tail end
2 - Wrap the tail back this time go under the anchored end (As shown in the second picture)
3 - Bring the tail down through the first loop (As shown in the third picture)
4 - Finally pull the two ends to make the knot a little bit tighter and easier to deal with (Shown in the fourth picture)
After these four steps you should end up with a knot that resembles a figure 8
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 3 Looping Into The Harness In order to secure the rope to the harness simply thread the tail end of the rope through the front loop in the harness as shown in the picture below This step isobviously very important
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 4 Following Back Through The Figure 8After looping the rope through the harness you have to thread the tail end of the rope back through the knot following the first figure 8 I have divided this process intofive smaller steps in order to make it more clear
1 - Coming form underneath the knot bring the tail up through the near loop and to the left behind the anchored end of the rope (Shown in the first picture)
2 - Wrap the tail around the anchored end back to the right and down through the adjacent loop (Shown in the second picture)
3 - You simply need to bring the tail back over the top of the knot to the left (Shown in the third picture)
4 - Bring the tail end up through the far loop following the anchored end (Shown in the fourth picture)
5 - Finally pull the knot tight (Shown in the fifth picture)
As you can see the first four pictures are simply tracing the knot back through with the tail end
For the last part while you pull the knot tight you may want to make small adjustments and rearrange how it all fits together If the knot does not lay perfectly smoothand tight its NOT a big deal
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 5 Finishing The Knot After completing the Figure 8 knot you will want to somehow secure the tail end of the rope out of the way There are a couple different ways to do this the way that Iwill demonstrate is using whats called a Stopper Knot This secondary knot is similar to a Fishermans knot and is pretty simple I have once again divided thisprocess into several smaller steps
1 - Start by wrapping the tail end around the anchored end (As shown in the first picture)
2 - Wrap the tail back underneath the two vertical segments (As shown in the second picture)
3 - Simply repeat the first two steps wrapping the tail around again (As shown in the third picture)
4 - This step in the fourth picture may look complicated but all you need to do is insert the tail up through the two loops that you have just made
5 - To finish off the knot you will want to slowly pull the tail end while gently pushing the bottom of the stopper knot upwards If you have successfully completed this knotit should look something like the fifth picture
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 6 Ready To Climb Now that you have mastered the Figure 8 knot you can securely harness yourself into a climbing rope Remember there are many other skills that go into setting up ananchor and belaying a climber This tutorial only covers the figure 8 knot For more information there are many great websites that demonstrate how to correctly set up asafe climbing system (Ive posted a few below) If you are a beginning climber I recommend that you read up on a few other climbing techniques Also you shouldprobably go to a climbing wall or gym where there are experienced climbers that can show you the ropes Hopefully this tutorial has been helpful Have fun and be safe
Some useful linkshttpwwwstephenprattnetAnchorsanchorshtmhttpwwwuoregonedu~oppclimbingtopicsanchorshtmlhttpwwwabc-of-rockclimbingcomhowtoclimbingtechniquesasp
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Related Instructables
How to Tie aFigure EightKnot byTactical_Pyro
Paracord KnotDisplay Bord byJamie bagn
Basic KnotsGuide byzorro3355
How to Climb aTree (withprussiks) bystasterisk
How to climb atree (using onlyrope) thefunsimple wayby louieaw
How to get arope into a tree(withoutclimbing it) byvitex
How to tievarious knots byadaviel
How to make arope swing byjdub0928
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Turks Head Knots on a Bottleby sklnxbones on July 6 2010
Intro Turks Head Knots on a BottleThis is the finished project A bottle decorated with three Turks Head Knots There are only three knots on this bottle The RED and the BLUE knots are each a 20 Bightby 3 Lead Turks Head Knots The WHITE knot is a 20 Bight by 19 Lead Turks Head Knot
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 1 Supplies
Cord Lots and Lots of cord I cant tell you how much each bottle is differentBottle Washed and Dried inside and out Make sure to remove all water spotsThreaded Needle Cord screws into the threads at the base of the needlePegs I use brass rivets used as a map to tie the Turks Head KnotsHole Punch Used to punch holes in the painters tape to hold the pegsPainters Tape To hold the pegs in place and to make your map for the Turks Head KnotsMarker To write on the painters tapeCloth Towel To remove finger prints and dirt from your bottleKrazy Glue or Super Glue This is used to secure the knots in place to the bottle
OPTIONAL BUT HIGHLY RECOMMENDEDI use the Turks Head Cookbook from KnotToolcom
Step 2 PreparationYou will need to find a bottle you like I used an empty instant tea bottle of course washed and dried (I like to put the bottle in the oven for a few minutes to dry the insidewithout water spots Take off the lid and do not put lid in the oven) Now measure the circumference of the bottle Take a cord and tightly wrap the cord around the bottleMark where the ends meet and use a ruler to measure the length of the cord For my instant tea bottle the circumference is 27cm I know from past knots that I have tiedthat I want my knot to have 20 Bights in the top and bottom (bands) knots I am going to use the Bights in the (bands) knots to tie the middle knot Now divide the numberof Bights (20) into the size of the circumference (27) to get the space between each Bight (135) With me so far
Now take two pieces of painters tape using a ruler measure out the length of the circumference and mark the length on the both pieces of tape Next you will mark thespace between each Bight on the tape
Step 3 Adding the PegsI like to use pegs when tying Turks Head Knots it just makes tying the knot easier
These are what I use for pegs
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 4 Adding Pegs to the TapeNow take a hole punch to cut holes in the tape where the lines meet You will place the pegs in the holes
Insert a peg in each hole and carefully stick the first piece of tape to the bottle
Step 5 Adding the 2nd row of pegsNow do the same thing with the second piece of tape The numbers on each piece of tape must line up
This picture shows you what you should have now This odd looking thing will be your map to tie the Turks Head Knot And this is the end of Step 1
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 6 Tying the first Turks Head KnotUsing the Turks Head Cookbook follow the numbers going over and under as indicated in the book I chose a 20 Bight by 3 Lead knot which will give me a nice bandaround the bottle Once the ends meet you have made one complete knot Tape the running end of your cord and start removing the pegs and the tape
Step 7 Remove the pegs and the tapeBe careful not to untie the knot as you remove the pegs and tape from the bottle Continue to remove all the pegs and remove the tape from the bottle At this point theknot will be very loose and will need to be tightened up
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 8 Remove the slack from the knotHere you can see just how much the knot expanded Starting with the standing end begin to pull the slack out of the knot going towards the running end of the cordDo not expect to pull all the slack out at once You may have to make 3 - 5 attempts at removing the slack out of the knot DO NOT remove all of the slack out of the knotIn order to make the bands we will have to triple the Turks Head Knot We will do this by following the knot three times The threaded needle will really come in handyhere
Step 9 Triple the KnotOnce you have made three passes of the Turks Head Knot use your needle to go under your knot about half the circumference and cut the cord The knot will be tightenough to hide the tail in placeTIP I carefully add a couple of drops of super glue UNDER the band to hold them in place and keep them from sliding around in the nextsteps A drop or two in 3 or 4 places around the band should be enough
Step 10 Add the second knotNow repeat this whole step for the second bandWhen tying the second band you must make sure the Bights line up to the first band This is crucial for the next stepWipe down the bottle to make sure all your finger prints and adhesive from the tape are all removed You want to make sure your bottle is clean at this point Any dirt orfinger prints left on the bottle will be almost impossible to remove From this point on we will use gloves when tying our last knot
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 11 Maping the Top KnotStick a piece of painters tape on top of your first band leaving the bottom of the knot exposedUse a marker to count the number of Bights in your knot Instead of using the pegs we are going to use the Bights to tie our next Turks Head Knot
Step 12 Mapping the Bottom KnotDo the same thing for the bottom band but you must make sure your numbers on top and bottom line up So 1 on top should be the same position as 1 on the bottom
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 13 Adding the last knotAgain using the Turks Head Cookbook and the threaded needle you are going to follow the instructions going over and under as indicated in the book Be sure to usegloves when ever you handle the bottle
Step 14 Thats ItFor this Turks Head Knot I am using a 20 Bight by 19 Lead knot
Because of the amount of cord you are working with your cord will get twisted and knotted You will have to un-twist the cord often Its a pain in the rear but it has to bedone And it has to be done alot
Continue to tie the knot until you finish the knot If you have the cord and the patience you can double or triple the knot When you are done use your needle to hide theends under your bands Cut the ends and your DONE
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Related Instructables
Monkeys FistFloatingKeychain byjokerlz
How To Make ATurks headKnot WithParacord byDoggie Stylish
Tying Trivetsout of Rope forHoliday Gifts bykylemarsh
Paracord KnotDisplay Bord byJamie bagn
How to Make ATurks Head(Photos) bymchs60chip
A pocket full ofknots byKiteman
Monkeys fistknot AND themonkey byjonathan111
TiteTie is theTruckers Knoton Steroids bytitetie
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Larks head noose -- an easy useful knot that tightens and loosensby Larry Breed on February 19 2009
Intro Larks head noose -- an easy useful knot that tightens and loosensI thought I knew all the basic knots but then I was taught this incredibly useful simple knot Its good for tying up the neck of a bag that you want to repeatedly open andsecurely close Its good for tying around a springy bundle that will need tightening and retightening And its easy to undo
Ive looked at knot literature but havent found a name for this so I named it The basic knot is well known its called a larks head Since all Ive done is to slip the twoends through the larks head to make a noose I call it that
WARNING Dont use this knot when human safety would depend on it Climbers and mountaineers have well-tested reliable knots for such situations
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Image Notes1 To tighten further step on this side of the larks head and pull the free ends
Step 1 Double the cord overThe larks head noose requires enough cord to go twice around your bundle plus a foot or two Find the center and double it over Sailors call this a bight
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 2 Form the larks headComing from below the bight hook your thumb and forefinger over the two sides Reach outward and downward and pinch your fingertips together underneath thedoubled cord
Youve made a larks head Move the crossing cord a little farther from your hand so theres a clear opening through the two half-loops
Step 3 Form the nooseSlip the two ends of the cord through the opening we were just talking about Pull the larks head tight so it grips the two cords Find something that needs constrictingand put the noose around it
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 4 Tightening retightening and lockingSlide the knot against the bundle If its not tight enough to keep from slipping tighten it by holding it in one hand and tugging on the cords one at a time with the otherhand Notice that you can slide the knot out again for instance to re-open the bag you just tied shut For some applications this may be as tight as you need it
A springy bundle probably still feels loose If so compress the bundle and get a new grip on the cords Rest your foot on the bundle on the cords nearest the larks headand pull to slide the larks head tighter
To make the knot more permanent you can lock it Make an overhand in the cord ends (Exactly like the first step in tying shoelaces) With your foot still on the bundlepull on the cords and move your hands apart until youre pulling in opposite directions You have just locked the larks head and you can trust it to stay that way()
But lets say that later on you want to loosen the locked knot Again put your foot on the bundle and cords nearest the larks head hold the two cord ends together andpull This makes a little slack between the overhand and the larks head so you can untie the overhand
In twine or small string the locking overhand knot may be difficult to undo Use a shoelace knot instead of an overhand and itll unlock easily
() If youre using slippery cord like polypropylene an overhand may not lock securely You may want to tie another overhand knot For added security wrap a shortlength of duct tape around the two cords close to the knot
Image Notes1 To tighten further step on this side of the larks head and pull the free ends
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Related Instructables
TRX fromParacordChallengeAccepted bythrake
A pocket full ofknots byKiteman
Lens CapLanyard by~teknoarsonist~ how to tie a
noose byawesume
AdjustableParacordGlassesLanyard byjdtwelve12
HangmansNoose PackClosure byPopEye42
Paraleash - ADog LeashFrom Paracordby The Ideanator
How to make arugged andhandy ParacordBelt by Jake22
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 5 FinallyAnd finally just pull it through as pictured below
Congratulations you just learned the fire-escape knot
Step 6 Same Name Not KnotThis is another knot called the fire-escape knot this shouldnt be your result
Related Instructables
House FireEscape Plan(video) byWhatHappensNowAdvice
ParacordLadder wWooden Rungsby josestude
Bed SheetEscape Rope byjessehensel
rope ladder(glow-in-the-dark version) bymikeasaurus
HeadlockEscape 2(video) byjohnnyrockstah
QuickFirestarter byMattandJora
Trail sauna byjakee117
How to Kill FireAnts andCommitGenocide byKentsOkay
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Climb Safe With A Figure 8 Knotby mattste on February 23 2010
Intro Climb Safe With A Figure 8 Knot There are many things that a beginning climber needs to know including several important knots Perhaps the most essential knot is the Figure 8 Follow Through Thistutorial will demonstrate how to correctly harness yourself to a rope using a Figure 8 Follow Through knot This knot is used primarily by rock climbers to provide a life-line Since this knot is used as a life-line it is very important to be able to tie it correctly (Your life could depend upon it)
Dont worry with this tutorial and about 5 minutes of practice you can have this knot mastered
Things you will need
- Climbing Harness- Climbing Rope
If you are wanting to go climbing and dont already have these items they can be purchased for about $25 each at most outdoor sporting goods stores If you are merelylooking to learn the knot a belt loop and a rope (about five feet long) will do
Image Notes1 Climbing Harness2 Climbing Rope
Step 1 Dealing With The RopeThroughout this tutorial I will be discussing different parts of the rope To make these instructions as clear as possible I will define a few terms that I will use throughoutthe tutorial The Anchor End of the rope will generally be at the top of the images This is the end that would be anchored to the wall or rock and does not move Wewill not be doing much with the anchored end The Tail End of the rope is the opposite end that we will be dealing with I will call this the tail for short
Now that we have some terms to work with lets get started
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 2 Tying The First Figure 8This knot has several parts to it The first part of the knot is just tying a basic figure 8 To tie the first figure 8 there are four simple steps
1 - Using the tail make a loop over the rope (as shown in the first picture) keeping in mind that there should be about 3 ft of slack on the tail end
2 - Wrap the tail back this time go under the anchored end (As shown in the second picture)
3 - Bring the tail down through the first loop (As shown in the third picture)
4 - Finally pull the two ends to make the knot a little bit tighter and easier to deal with (Shown in the fourth picture)
After these four steps you should end up with a knot that resembles a figure 8
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 3 Looping Into The Harness In order to secure the rope to the harness simply thread the tail end of the rope through the front loop in the harness as shown in the picture below This step isobviously very important
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 4 Following Back Through The Figure 8After looping the rope through the harness you have to thread the tail end of the rope back through the knot following the first figure 8 I have divided this process intofive smaller steps in order to make it more clear
1 - Coming form underneath the knot bring the tail up through the near loop and to the left behind the anchored end of the rope (Shown in the first picture)
2 - Wrap the tail around the anchored end back to the right and down through the adjacent loop (Shown in the second picture)
3 - You simply need to bring the tail back over the top of the knot to the left (Shown in the third picture)
4 - Bring the tail end up through the far loop following the anchored end (Shown in the fourth picture)
5 - Finally pull the knot tight (Shown in the fifth picture)
As you can see the first four pictures are simply tracing the knot back through with the tail end
For the last part while you pull the knot tight you may want to make small adjustments and rearrange how it all fits together If the knot does not lay perfectly smoothand tight its NOT a big deal
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 5 Finishing The Knot After completing the Figure 8 knot you will want to somehow secure the tail end of the rope out of the way There are a couple different ways to do this the way that Iwill demonstrate is using whats called a Stopper Knot This secondary knot is similar to a Fishermans knot and is pretty simple I have once again divided thisprocess into several smaller steps
1 - Start by wrapping the tail end around the anchored end (As shown in the first picture)
2 - Wrap the tail back underneath the two vertical segments (As shown in the second picture)
3 - Simply repeat the first two steps wrapping the tail around again (As shown in the third picture)
4 - This step in the fourth picture may look complicated but all you need to do is insert the tail up through the two loops that you have just made
5 - To finish off the knot you will want to slowly pull the tail end while gently pushing the bottom of the stopper knot upwards If you have successfully completed this knotit should look something like the fifth picture
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 6 Ready To Climb Now that you have mastered the Figure 8 knot you can securely harness yourself into a climbing rope Remember there are many other skills that go into setting up ananchor and belaying a climber This tutorial only covers the figure 8 knot For more information there are many great websites that demonstrate how to correctly set up asafe climbing system (Ive posted a few below) If you are a beginning climber I recommend that you read up on a few other climbing techniques Also you shouldprobably go to a climbing wall or gym where there are experienced climbers that can show you the ropes Hopefully this tutorial has been helpful Have fun and be safe
Some useful linkshttpwwwstephenprattnetAnchorsanchorshtmhttpwwwuoregonedu~oppclimbingtopicsanchorshtmlhttpwwwabc-of-rockclimbingcomhowtoclimbingtechniquesasp
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Related Instructables
How to Tie aFigure EightKnot byTactical_Pyro
Paracord KnotDisplay Bord byJamie bagn
Basic KnotsGuide byzorro3355
How to Climb aTree (withprussiks) bystasterisk
How to climb atree (using onlyrope) thefunsimple wayby louieaw
How to get arope into a tree(withoutclimbing it) byvitex
How to tievarious knots byadaviel
How to make arope swing byjdub0928
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Turks Head Knots on a Bottleby sklnxbones on July 6 2010
Intro Turks Head Knots on a BottleThis is the finished project A bottle decorated with three Turks Head Knots There are only three knots on this bottle The RED and the BLUE knots are each a 20 Bightby 3 Lead Turks Head Knots The WHITE knot is a 20 Bight by 19 Lead Turks Head Knot
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 1 Supplies
Cord Lots and Lots of cord I cant tell you how much each bottle is differentBottle Washed and Dried inside and out Make sure to remove all water spotsThreaded Needle Cord screws into the threads at the base of the needlePegs I use brass rivets used as a map to tie the Turks Head KnotsHole Punch Used to punch holes in the painters tape to hold the pegsPainters Tape To hold the pegs in place and to make your map for the Turks Head KnotsMarker To write on the painters tapeCloth Towel To remove finger prints and dirt from your bottleKrazy Glue or Super Glue This is used to secure the knots in place to the bottle
OPTIONAL BUT HIGHLY RECOMMENDEDI use the Turks Head Cookbook from KnotToolcom
Step 2 PreparationYou will need to find a bottle you like I used an empty instant tea bottle of course washed and dried (I like to put the bottle in the oven for a few minutes to dry the insidewithout water spots Take off the lid and do not put lid in the oven) Now measure the circumference of the bottle Take a cord and tightly wrap the cord around the bottleMark where the ends meet and use a ruler to measure the length of the cord For my instant tea bottle the circumference is 27cm I know from past knots that I have tiedthat I want my knot to have 20 Bights in the top and bottom (bands) knots I am going to use the Bights in the (bands) knots to tie the middle knot Now divide the numberof Bights (20) into the size of the circumference (27) to get the space between each Bight (135) With me so far
Now take two pieces of painters tape using a ruler measure out the length of the circumference and mark the length on the both pieces of tape Next you will mark thespace between each Bight on the tape
Step 3 Adding the PegsI like to use pegs when tying Turks Head Knots it just makes tying the knot easier
These are what I use for pegs
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 4 Adding Pegs to the TapeNow take a hole punch to cut holes in the tape where the lines meet You will place the pegs in the holes
Insert a peg in each hole and carefully stick the first piece of tape to the bottle
Step 5 Adding the 2nd row of pegsNow do the same thing with the second piece of tape The numbers on each piece of tape must line up
This picture shows you what you should have now This odd looking thing will be your map to tie the Turks Head Knot And this is the end of Step 1
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 6 Tying the first Turks Head KnotUsing the Turks Head Cookbook follow the numbers going over and under as indicated in the book I chose a 20 Bight by 3 Lead knot which will give me a nice bandaround the bottle Once the ends meet you have made one complete knot Tape the running end of your cord and start removing the pegs and the tape
Step 7 Remove the pegs and the tapeBe careful not to untie the knot as you remove the pegs and tape from the bottle Continue to remove all the pegs and remove the tape from the bottle At this point theknot will be very loose and will need to be tightened up
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 8 Remove the slack from the knotHere you can see just how much the knot expanded Starting with the standing end begin to pull the slack out of the knot going towards the running end of the cordDo not expect to pull all the slack out at once You may have to make 3 - 5 attempts at removing the slack out of the knot DO NOT remove all of the slack out of the knotIn order to make the bands we will have to triple the Turks Head Knot We will do this by following the knot three times The threaded needle will really come in handyhere
Step 9 Triple the KnotOnce you have made three passes of the Turks Head Knot use your needle to go under your knot about half the circumference and cut the cord The knot will be tightenough to hide the tail in placeTIP I carefully add a couple of drops of super glue UNDER the band to hold them in place and keep them from sliding around in the nextsteps A drop or two in 3 or 4 places around the band should be enough
Step 10 Add the second knotNow repeat this whole step for the second bandWhen tying the second band you must make sure the Bights line up to the first band This is crucial for the next stepWipe down the bottle to make sure all your finger prints and adhesive from the tape are all removed You want to make sure your bottle is clean at this point Any dirt orfinger prints left on the bottle will be almost impossible to remove From this point on we will use gloves when tying our last knot
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 11 Maping the Top KnotStick a piece of painters tape on top of your first band leaving the bottom of the knot exposedUse a marker to count the number of Bights in your knot Instead of using the pegs we are going to use the Bights to tie our next Turks Head Knot
Step 12 Mapping the Bottom KnotDo the same thing for the bottom band but you must make sure your numbers on top and bottom line up So 1 on top should be the same position as 1 on the bottom
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 13 Adding the last knotAgain using the Turks Head Cookbook and the threaded needle you are going to follow the instructions going over and under as indicated in the book Be sure to usegloves when ever you handle the bottle
Step 14 Thats ItFor this Turks Head Knot I am using a 20 Bight by 19 Lead knot
Because of the amount of cord you are working with your cord will get twisted and knotted You will have to un-twist the cord often Its a pain in the rear but it has to bedone And it has to be done alot
Continue to tie the knot until you finish the knot If you have the cord and the patience you can double or triple the knot When you are done use your needle to hide theends under your bands Cut the ends and your DONE
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Related Instructables
Monkeys FistFloatingKeychain byjokerlz
How To Make ATurks headKnot WithParacord byDoggie Stylish
Tying Trivetsout of Rope forHoliday Gifts bykylemarsh
Paracord KnotDisplay Bord byJamie bagn
How to Make ATurks Head(Photos) bymchs60chip
A pocket full ofknots byKiteman
Monkeys fistknot AND themonkey byjonathan111
TiteTie is theTruckers Knoton Steroids bytitetie
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Larks head noose -- an easy useful knot that tightens and loosensby Larry Breed on February 19 2009
Intro Larks head noose -- an easy useful knot that tightens and loosensI thought I knew all the basic knots but then I was taught this incredibly useful simple knot Its good for tying up the neck of a bag that you want to repeatedly open andsecurely close Its good for tying around a springy bundle that will need tightening and retightening And its easy to undo
Ive looked at knot literature but havent found a name for this so I named it The basic knot is well known its called a larks head Since all Ive done is to slip the twoends through the larks head to make a noose I call it that
WARNING Dont use this knot when human safety would depend on it Climbers and mountaineers have well-tested reliable knots for such situations
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Image Notes1 To tighten further step on this side of the larks head and pull the free ends
Step 1 Double the cord overThe larks head noose requires enough cord to go twice around your bundle plus a foot or two Find the center and double it over Sailors call this a bight
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 2 Form the larks headComing from below the bight hook your thumb and forefinger over the two sides Reach outward and downward and pinch your fingertips together underneath thedoubled cord
Youve made a larks head Move the crossing cord a little farther from your hand so theres a clear opening through the two half-loops
Step 3 Form the nooseSlip the two ends of the cord through the opening we were just talking about Pull the larks head tight so it grips the two cords Find something that needs constrictingand put the noose around it
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 4 Tightening retightening and lockingSlide the knot against the bundle If its not tight enough to keep from slipping tighten it by holding it in one hand and tugging on the cords one at a time with the otherhand Notice that you can slide the knot out again for instance to re-open the bag you just tied shut For some applications this may be as tight as you need it
A springy bundle probably still feels loose If so compress the bundle and get a new grip on the cords Rest your foot on the bundle on the cords nearest the larks headand pull to slide the larks head tighter
To make the knot more permanent you can lock it Make an overhand in the cord ends (Exactly like the first step in tying shoelaces) With your foot still on the bundlepull on the cords and move your hands apart until youre pulling in opposite directions You have just locked the larks head and you can trust it to stay that way()
But lets say that later on you want to loosen the locked knot Again put your foot on the bundle and cords nearest the larks head hold the two cord ends together andpull This makes a little slack between the overhand and the larks head so you can untie the overhand
In twine or small string the locking overhand knot may be difficult to undo Use a shoelace knot instead of an overhand and itll unlock easily
() If youre using slippery cord like polypropylene an overhand may not lock securely You may want to tie another overhand knot For added security wrap a shortlength of duct tape around the two cords close to the knot
Image Notes1 To tighten further step on this side of the larks head and pull the free ends
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Related Instructables
TRX fromParacordChallengeAccepted bythrake
A pocket full ofknots byKiteman
Lens CapLanyard by~teknoarsonist~ how to tie a
noose byawesume
AdjustableParacordGlassesLanyard byjdtwelve12
HangmansNoose PackClosure byPopEye42
Paraleash - ADog LeashFrom Paracordby The Ideanator
How to make arugged andhandy ParacordBelt by Jake22
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Climb Safe With A Figure 8 Knotby mattste on February 23 2010
Intro Climb Safe With A Figure 8 Knot There are many things that a beginning climber needs to know including several important knots Perhaps the most essential knot is the Figure 8 Follow Through Thistutorial will demonstrate how to correctly harness yourself to a rope using a Figure 8 Follow Through knot This knot is used primarily by rock climbers to provide a life-line Since this knot is used as a life-line it is very important to be able to tie it correctly (Your life could depend upon it)
Dont worry with this tutorial and about 5 minutes of practice you can have this knot mastered
Things you will need
- Climbing Harness- Climbing Rope
If you are wanting to go climbing and dont already have these items they can be purchased for about $25 each at most outdoor sporting goods stores If you are merelylooking to learn the knot a belt loop and a rope (about five feet long) will do
Image Notes1 Climbing Harness2 Climbing Rope
Step 1 Dealing With The RopeThroughout this tutorial I will be discussing different parts of the rope To make these instructions as clear as possible I will define a few terms that I will use throughoutthe tutorial The Anchor End of the rope will generally be at the top of the images This is the end that would be anchored to the wall or rock and does not move Wewill not be doing much with the anchored end The Tail End of the rope is the opposite end that we will be dealing with I will call this the tail for short
Now that we have some terms to work with lets get started
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 2 Tying The First Figure 8This knot has several parts to it The first part of the knot is just tying a basic figure 8 To tie the first figure 8 there are four simple steps
1 - Using the tail make a loop over the rope (as shown in the first picture) keeping in mind that there should be about 3 ft of slack on the tail end
2 - Wrap the tail back this time go under the anchored end (As shown in the second picture)
3 - Bring the tail down through the first loop (As shown in the third picture)
4 - Finally pull the two ends to make the knot a little bit tighter and easier to deal with (Shown in the fourth picture)
After these four steps you should end up with a knot that resembles a figure 8
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 3 Looping Into The Harness In order to secure the rope to the harness simply thread the tail end of the rope through the front loop in the harness as shown in the picture below This step isobviously very important
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 4 Following Back Through The Figure 8After looping the rope through the harness you have to thread the tail end of the rope back through the knot following the first figure 8 I have divided this process intofive smaller steps in order to make it more clear
1 - Coming form underneath the knot bring the tail up through the near loop and to the left behind the anchored end of the rope (Shown in the first picture)
2 - Wrap the tail around the anchored end back to the right and down through the adjacent loop (Shown in the second picture)
3 - You simply need to bring the tail back over the top of the knot to the left (Shown in the third picture)
4 - Bring the tail end up through the far loop following the anchored end (Shown in the fourth picture)
5 - Finally pull the knot tight (Shown in the fifth picture)
As you can see the first four pictures are simply tracing the knot back through with the tail end
For the last part while you pull the knot tight you may want to make small adjustments and rearrange how it all fits together If the knot does not lay perfectly smoothand tight its NOT a big deal
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 5 Finishing The Knot After completing the Figure 8 knot you will want to somehow secure the tail end of the rope out of the way There are a couple different ways to do this the way that Iwill demonstrate is using whats called a Stopper Knot This secondary knot is similar to a Fishermans knot and is pretty simple I have once again divided thisprocess into several smaller steps
1 - Start by wrapping the tail end around the anchored end (As shown in the first picture)
2 - Wrap the tail back underneath the two vertical segments (As shown in the second picture)
3 - Simply repeat the first two steps wrapping the tail around again (As shown in the third picture)
4 - This step in the fourth picture may look complicated but all you need to do is insert the tail up through the two loops that you have just made
5 - To finish off the knot you will want to slowly pull the tail end while gently pushing the bottom of the stopper knot upwards If you have successfully completed this knotit should look something like the fifth picture
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 6 Ready To Climb Now that you have mastered the Figure 8 knot you can securely harness yourself into a climbing rope Remember there are many other skills that go into setting up ananchor and belaying a climber This tutorial only covers the figure 8 knot For more information there are many great websites that demonstrate how to correctly set up asafe climbing system (Ive posted a few below) If you are a beginning climber I recommend that you read up on a few other climbing techniques Also you shouldprobably go to a climbing wall or gym where there are experienced climbers that can show you the ropes Hopefully this tutorial has been helpful Have fun and be safe
Some useful linkshttpwwwstephenprattnetAnchorsanchorshtmhttpwwwuoregonedu~oppclimbingtopicsanchorshtmlhttpwwwabc-of-rockclimbingcomhowtoclimbingtechniquesasp
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Related Instructables
How to Tie aFigure EightKnot byTactical_Pyro
Paracord KnotDisplay Bord byJamie bagn
Basic KnotsGuide byzorro3355
How to Climb aTree (withprussiks) bystasterisk
How to climb atree (using onlyrope) thefunsimple wayby louieaw
How to get arope into a tree(withoutclimbing it) byvitex
How to tievarious knots byadaviel
How to make arope swing byjdub0928
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Turks Head Knots on a Bottleby sklnxbones on July 6 2010
Intro Turks Head Knots on a BottleThis is the finished project A bottle decorated with three Turks Head Knots There are only three knots on this bottle The RED and the BLUE knots are each a 20 Bightby 3 Lead Turks Head Knots The WHITE knot is a 20 Bight by 19 Lead Turks Head Knot
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 1 Supplies
Cord Lots and Lots of cord I cant tell you how much each bottle is differentBottle Washed and Dried inside and out Make sure to remove all water spotsThreaded Needle Cord screws into the threads at the base of the needlePegs I use brass rivets used as a map to tie the Turks Head KnotsHole Punch Used to punch holes in the painters tape to hold the pegsPainters Tape To hold the pegs in place and to make your map for the Turks Head KnotsMarker To write on the painters tapeCloth Towel To remove finger prints and dirt from your bottleKrazy Glue or Super Glue This is used to secure the knots in place to the bottle
OPTIONAL BUT HIGHLY RECOMMENDEDI use the Turks Head Cookbook from KnotToolcom
Step 2 PreparationYou will need to find a bottle you like I used an empty instant tea bottle of course washed and dried (I like to put the bottle in the oven for a few minutes to dry the insidewithout water spots Take off the lid and do not put lid in the oven) Now measure the circumference of the bottle Take a cord and tightly wrap the cord around the bottleMark where the ends meet and use a ruler to measure the length of the cord For my instant tea bottle the circumference is 27cm I know from past knots that I have tiedthat I want my knot to have 20 Bights in the top and bottom (bands) knots I am going to use the Bights in the (bands) knots to tie the middle knot Now divide the numberof Bights (20) into the size of the circumference (27) to get the space between each Bight (135) With me so far
Now take two pieces of painters tape using a ruler measure out the length of the circumference and mark the length on the both pieces of tape Next you will mark thespace between each Bight on the tape
Step 3 Adding the PegsI like to use pegs when tying Turks Head Knots it just makes tying the knot easier
These are what I use for pegs
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 4 Adding Pegs to the TapeNow take a hole punch to cut holes in the tape where the lines meet You will place the pegs in the holes
Insert a peg in each hole and carefully stick the first piece of tape to the bottle
Step 5 Adding the 2nd row of pegsNow do the same thing with the second piece of tape The numbers on each piece of tape must line up
This picture shows you what you should have now This odd looking thing will be your map to tie the Turks Head Knot And this is the end of Step 1
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 6 Tying the first Turks Head KnotUsing the Turks Head Cookbook follow the numbers going over and under as indicated in the book I chose a 20 Bight by 3 Lead knot which will give me a nice bandaround the bottle Once the ends meet you have made one complete knot Tape the running end of your cord and start removing the pegs and the tape
Step 7 Remove the pegs and the tapeBe careful not to untie the knot as you remove the pegs and tape from the bottle Continue to remove all the pegs and remove the tape from the bottle At this point theknot will be very loose and will need to be tightened up
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 8 Remove the slack from the knotHere you can see just how much the knot expanded Starting with the standing end begin to pull the slack out of the knot going towards the running end of the cordDo not expect to pull all the slack out at once You may have to make 3 - 5 attempts at removing the slack out of the knot DO NOT remove all of the slack out of the knotIn order to make the bands we will have to triple the Turks Head Knot We will do this by following the knot three times The threaded needle will really come in handyhere
Step 9 Triple the KnotOnce you have made three passes of the Turks Head Knot use your needle to go under your knot about half the circumference and cut the cord The knot will be tightenough to hide the tail in placeTIP I carefully add a couple of drops of super glue UNDER the band to hold them in place and keep them from sliding around in the nextsteps A drop or two in 3 or 4 places around the band should be enough
Step 10 Add the second knotNow repeat this whole step for the second bandWhen tying the second band you must make sure the Bights line up to the first band This is crucial for the next stepWipe down the bottle to make sure all your finger prints and adhesive from the tape are all removed You want to make sure your bottle is clean at this point Any dirt orfinger prints left on the bottle will be almost impossible to remove From this point on we will use gloves when tying our last knot
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 11 Maping the Top KnotStick a piece of painters tape on top of your first band leaving the bottom of the knot exposedUse a marker to count the number of Bights in your knot Instead of using the pegs we are going to use the Bights to tie our next Turks Head Knot
Step 12 Mapping the Bottom KnotDo the same thing for the bottom band but you must make sure your numbers on top and bottom line up So 1 on top should be the same position as 1 on the bottom
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 13 Adding the last knotAgain using the Turks Head Cookbook and the threaded needle you are going to follow the instructions going over and under as indicated in the book Be sure to usegloves when ever you handle the bottle
Step 14 Thats ItFor this Turks Head Knot I am using a 20 Bight by 19 Lead knot
Because of the amount of cord you are working with your cord will get twisted and knotted You will have to un-twist the cord often Its a pain in the rear but it has to bedone And it has to be done alot
Continue to tie the knot until you finish the knot If you have the cord and the patience you can double or triple the knot When you are done use your needle to hide theends under your bands Cut the ends and your DONE
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Related Instructables
Monkeys FistFloatingKeychain byjokerlz
How To Make ATurks headKnot WithParacord byDoggie Stylish
Tying Trivetsout of Rope forHoliday Gifts bykylemarsh
Paracord KnotDisplay Bord byJamie bagn
How to Make ATurks Head(Photos) bymchs60chip
A pocket full ofknots byKiteman
Monkeys fistknot AND themonkey byjonathan111
TiteTie is theTruckers Knoton Steroids bytitetie
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Larks head noose -- an easy useful knot that tightens and loosensby Larry Breed on February 19 2009
Intro Larks head noose -- an easy useful knot that tightens and loosensI thought I knew all the basic knots but then I was taught this incredibly useful simple knot Its good for tying up the neck of a bag that you want to repeatedly open andsecurely close Its good for tying around a springy bundle that will need tightening and retightening And its easy to undo
Ive looked at knot literature but havent found a name for this so I named it The basic knot is well known its called a larks head Since all Ive done is to slip the twoends through the larks head to make a noose I call it that
WARNING Dont use this knot when human safety would depend on it Climbers and mountaineers have well-tested reliable knots for such situations
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Image Notes1 To tighten further step on this side of the larks head and pull the free ends
Step 1 Double the cord overThe larks head noose requires enough cord to go twice around your bundle plus a foot or two Find the center and double it over Sailors call this a bight
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 2 Form the larks headComing from below the bight hook your thumb and forefinger over the two sides Reach outward and downward and pinch your fingertips together underneath thedoubled cord
Youve made a larks head Move the crossing cord a little farther from your hand so theres a clear opening through the two half-loops
Step 3 Form the nooseSlip the two ends of the cord through the opening we were just talking about Pull the larks head tight so it grips the two cords Find something that needs constrictingand put the noose around it
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 4 Tightening retightening and lockingSlide the knot against the bundle If its not tight enough to keep from slipping tighten it by holding it in one hand and tugging on the cords one at a time with the otherhand Notice that you can slide the knot out again for instance to re-open the bag you just tied shut For some applications this may be as tight as you need it
A springy bundle probably still feels loose If so compress the bundle and get a new grip on the cords Rest your foot on the bundle on the cords nearest the larks headand pull to slide the larks head tighter
To make the knot more permanent you can lock it Make an overhand in the cord ends (Exactly like the first step in tying shoelaces) With your foot still on the bundlepull on the cords and move your hands apart until youre pulling in opposite directions You have just locked the larks head and you can trust it to stay that way()
But lets say that later on you want to loosen the locked knot Again put your foot on the bundle and cords nearest the larks head hold the two cord ends together andpull This makes a little slack between the overhand and the larks head so you can untie the overhand
In twine or small string the locking overhand knot may be difficult to undo Use a shoelace knot instead of an overhand and itll unlock easily
() If youre using slippery cord like polypropylene an overhand may not lock securely You may want to tie another overhand knot For added security wrap a shortlength of duct tape around the two cords close to the knot
Image Notes1 To tighten further step on this side of the larks head and pull the free ends
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Related Instructables
TRX fromParacordChallengeAccepted bythrake
A pocket full ofknots byKiteman
Lens CapLanyard by~teknoarsonist~ how to tie a
noose byawesume
AdjustableParacordGlassesLanyard byjdtwelve12
HangmansNoose PackClosure byPopEye42
Paraleash - ADog LeashFrom Paracordby The Ideanator
How to make arugged andhandy ParacordBelt by Jake22
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 2 Tying The First Figure 8This knot has several parts to it The first part of the knot is just tying a basic figure 8 To tie the first figure 8 there are four simple steps
1 - Using the tail make a loop over the rope (as shown in the first picture) keeping in mind that there should be about 3 ft of slack on the tail end
2 - Wrap the tail back this time go under the anchored end (As shown in the second picture)
3 - Bring the tail down through the first loop (As shown in the third picture)
4 - Finally pull the two ends to make the knot a little bit tighter and easier to deal with (Shown in the fourth picture)
After these four steps you should end up with a knot that resembles a figure 8
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 3 Looping Into The Harness In order to secure the rope to the harness simply thread the tail end of the rope through the front loop in the harness as shown in the picture below This step isobviously very important
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 4 Following Back Through The Figure 8After looping the rope through the harness you have to thread the tail end of the rope back through the knot following the first figure 8 I have divided this process intofive smaller steps in order to make it more clear
1 - Coming form underneath the knot bring the tail up through the near loop and to the left behind the anchored end of the rope (Shown in the first picture)
2 - Wrap the tail around the anchored end back to the right and down through the adjacent loop (Shown in the second picture)
3 - You simply need to bring the tail back over the top of the knot to the left (Shown in the third picture)
4 - Bring the tail end up through the far loop following the anchored end (Shown in the fourth picture)
5 - Finally pull the knot tight (Shown in the fifth picture)
As you can see the first four pictures are simply tracing the knot back through with the tail end
For the last part while you pull the knot tight you may want to make small adjustments and rearrange how it all fits together If the knot does not lay perfectly smoothand tight its NOT a big deal
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 5 Finishing The Knot After completing the Figure 8 knot you will want to somehow secure the tail end of the rope out of the way There are a couple different ways to do this the way that Iwill demonstrate is using whats called a Stopper Knot This secondary knot is similar to a Fishermans knot and is pretty simple I have once again divided thisprocess into several smaller steps
1 - Start by wrapping the tail end around the anchored end (As shown in the first picture)
2 - Wrap the tail back underneath the two vertical segments (As shown in the second picture)
3 - Simply repeat the first two steps wrapping the tail around again (As shown in the third picture)
4 - This step in the fourth picture may look complicated but all you need to do is insert the tail up through the two loops that you have just made
5 - To finish off the knot you will want to slowly pull the tail end while gently pushing the bottom of the stopper knot upwards If you have successfully completed this knotit should look something like the fifth picture
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 6 Ready To Climb Now that you have mastered the Figure 8 knot you can securely harness yourself into a climbing rope Remember there are many other skills that go into setting up ananchor and belaying a climber This tutorial only covers the figure 8 knot For more information there are many great websites that demonstrate how to correctly set up asafe climbing system (Ive posted a few below) If you are a beginning climber I recommend that you read up on a few other climbing techniques Also you shouldprobably go to a climbing wall or gym where there are experienced climbers that can show you the ropes Hopefully this tutorial has been helpful Have fun and be safe
Some useful linkshttpwwwstephenprattnetAnchorsanchorshtmhttpwwwuoregonedu~oppclimbingtopicsanchorshtmlhttpwwwabc-of-rockclimbingcomhowtoclimbingtechniquesasp
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Related Instructables
How to Tie aFigure EightKnot byTactical_Pyro
Paracord KnotDisplay Bord byJamie bagn
Basic KnotsGuide byzorro3355
How to Climb aTree (withprussiks) bystasterisk
How to climb atree (using onlyrope) thefunsimple wayby louieaw
How to get arope into a tree(withoutclimbing it) byvitex
How to tievarious knots byadaviel
How to make arope swing byjdub0928
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Turks Head Knots on a Bottleby sklnxbones on July 6 2010
Intro Turks Head Knots on a BottleThis is the finished project A bottle decorated with three Turks Head Knots There are only three knots on this bottle The RED and the BLUE knots are each a 20 Bightby 3 Lead Turks Head Knots The WHITE knot is a 20 Bight by 19 Lead Turks Head Knot
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 1 Supplies
Cord Lots and Lots of cord I cant tell you how much each bottle is differentBottle Washed and Dried inside and out Make sure to remove all water spotsThreaded Needle Cord screws into the threads at the base of the needlePegs I use brass rivets used as a map to tie the Turks Head KnotsHole Punch Used to punch holes in the painters tape to hold the pegsPainters Tape To hold the pegs in place and to make your map for the Turks Head KnotsMarker To write on the painters tapeCloth Towel To remove finger prints and dirt from your bottleKrazy Glue or Super Glue This is used to secure the knots in place to the bottle
OPTIONAL BUT HIGHLY RECOMMENDEDI use the Turks Head Cookbook from KnotToolcom
Step 2 PreparationYou will need to find a bottle you like I used an empty instant tea bottle of course washed and dried (I like to put the bottle in the oven for a few minutes to dry the insidewithout water spots Take off the lid and do not put lid in the oven) Now measure the circumference of the bottle Take a cord and tightly wrap the cord around the bottleMark where the ends meet and use a ruler to measure the length of the cord For my instant tea bottle the circumference is 27cm I know from past knots that I have tiedthat I want my knot to have 20 Bights in the top and bottom (bands) knots I am going to use the Bights in the (bands) knots to tie the middle knot Now divide the numberof Bights (20) into the size of the circumference (27) to get the space between each Bight (135) With me so far
Now take two pieces of painters tape using a ruler measure out the length of the circumference and mark the length on the both pieces of tape Next you will mark thespace between each Bight on the tape
Step 3 Adding the PegsI like to use pegs when tying Turks Head Knots it just makes tying the knot easier
These are what I use for pegs
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 4 Adding Pegs to the TapeNow take a hole punch to cut holes in the tape where the lines meet You will place the pegs in the holes
Insert a peg in each hole and carefully stick the first piece of tape to the bottle
Step 5 Adding the 2nd row of pegsNow do the same thing with the second piece of tape The numbers on each piece of tape must line up
This picture shows you what you should have now This odd looking thing will be your map to tie the Turks Head Knot And this is the end of Step 1
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 6 Tying the first Turks Head KnotUsing the Turks Head Cookbook follow the numbers going over and under as indicated in the book I chose a 20 Bight by 3 Lead knot which will give me a nice bandaround the bottle Once the ends meet you have made one complete knot Tape the running end of your cord and start removing the pegs and the tape
Step 7 Remove the pegs and the tapeBe careful not to untie the knot as you remove the pegs and tape from the bottle Continue to remove all the pegs and remove the tape from the bottle At this point theknot will be very loose and will need to be tightened up
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 8 Remove the slack from the knotHere you can see just how much the knot expanded Starting with the standing end begin to pull the slack out of the knot going towards the running end of the cordDo not expect to pull all the slack out at once You may have to make 3 - 5 attempts at removing the slack out of the knot DO NOT remove all of the slack out of the knotIn order to make the bands we will have to triple the Turks Head Knot We will do this by following the knot three times The threaded needle will really come in handyhere
Step 9 Triple the KnotOnce you have made three passes of the Turks Head Knot use your needle to go under your knot about half the circumference and cut the cord The knot will be tightenough to hide the tail in placeTIP I carefully add a couple of drops of super glue UNDER the band to hold them in place and keep them from sliding around in the nextsteps A drop or two in 3 or 4 places around the band should be enough
Step 10 Add the second knotNow repeat this whole step for the second bandWhen tying the second band you must make sure the Bights line up to the first band This is crucial for the next stepWipe down the bottle to make sure all your finger prints and adhesive from the tape are all removed You want to make sure your bottle is clean at this point Any dirt orfinger prints left on the bottle will be almost impossible to remove From this point on we will use gloves when tying our last knot
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 11 Maping the Top KnotStick a piece of painters tape on top of your first band leaving the bottom of the knot exposedUse a marker to count the number of Bights in your knot Instead of using the pegs we are going to use the Bights to tie our next Turks Head Knot
Step 12 Mapping the Bottom KnotDo the same thing for the bottom band but you must make sure your numbers on top and bottom line up So 1 on top should be the same position as 1 on the bottom
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 13 Adding the last knotAgain using the Turks Head Cookbook and the threaded needle you are going to follow the instructions going over and under as indicated in the book Be sure to usegloves when ever you handle the bottle
Step 14 Thats ItFor this Turks Head Knot I am using a 20 Bight by 19 Lead knot
Because of the amount of cord you are working with your cord will get twisted and knotted You will have to un-twist the cord often Its a pain in the rear but it has to bedone And it has to be done alot
Continue to tie the knot until you finish the knot If you have the cord and the patience you can double or triple the knot When you are done use your needle to hide theends under your bands Cut the ends and your DONE
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Related Instructables
Monkeys FistFloatingKeychain byjokerlz
How To Make ATurks headKnot WithParacord byDoggie Stylish
Tying Trivetsout of Rope forHoliday Gifts bykylemarsh
Paracord KnotDisplay Bord byJamie bagn
How to Make ATurks Head(Photos) bymchs60chip
A pocket full ofknots byKiteman
Monkeys fistknot AND themonkey byjonathan111
TiteTie is theTruckers Knoton Steroids bytitetie
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Larks head noose -- an easy useful knot that tightens and loosensby Larry Breed on February 19 2009
Intro Larks head noose -- an easy useful knot that tightens and loosensI thought I knew all the basic knots but then I was taught this incredibly useful simple knot Its good for tying up the neck of a bag that you want to repeatedly open andsecurely close Its good for tying around a springy bundle that will need tightening and retightening And its easy to undo
Ive looked at knot literature but havent found a name for this so I named it The basic knot is well known its called a larks head Since all Ive done is to slip the twoends through the larks head to make a noose I call it that
WARNING Dont use this knot when human safety would depend on it Climbers and mountaineers have well-tested reliable knots for such situations
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Image Notes1 To tighten further step on this side of the larks head and pull the free ends
Step 1 Double the cord overThe larks head noose requires enough cord to go twice around your bundle plus a foot or two Find the center and double it over Sailors call this a bight
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 2 Form the larks headComing from below the bight hook your thumb and forefinger over the two sides Reach outward and downward and pinch your fingertips together underneath thedoubled cord
Youve made a larks head Move the crossing cord a little farther from your hand so theres a clear opening through the two half-loops
Step 3 Form the nooseSlip the two ends of the cord through the opening we were just talking about Pull the larks head tight so it grips the two cords Find something that needs constrictingand put the noose around it
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 4 Tightening retightening and lockingSlide the knot against the bundle If its not tight enough to keep from slipping tighten it by holding it in one hand and tugging on the cords one at a time with the otherhand Notice that you can slide the knot out again for instance to re-open the bag you just tied shut For some applications this may be as tight as you need it
A springy bundle probably still feels loose If so compress the bundle and get a new grip on the cords Rest your foot on the bundle on the cords nearest the larks headand pull to slide the larks head tighter
To make the knot more permanent you can lock it Make an overhand in the cord ends (Exactly like the first step in tying shoelaces) With your foot still on the bundlepull on the cords and move your hands apart until youre pulling in opposite directions You have just locked the larks head and you can trust it to stay that way()
But lets say that later on you want to loosen the locked knot Again put your foot on the bundle and cords nearest the larks head hold the two cord ends together andpull This makes a little slack between the overhand and the larks head so you can untie the overhand
In twine or small string the locking overhand knot may be difficult to undo Use a shoelace knot instead of an overhand and itll unlock easily
() If youre using slippery cord like polypropylene an overhand may not lock securely You may want to tie another overhand knot For added security wrap a shortlength of duct tape around the two cords close to the knot
Image Notes1 To tighten further step on this side of the larks head and pull the free ends
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Related Instructables
TRX fromParacordChallengeAccepted bythrake
A pocket full ofknots byKiteman
Lens CapLanyard by~teknoarsonist~ how to tie a
noose byawesume
AdjustableParacordGlassesLanyard byjdtwelve12
HangmansNoose PackClosure byPopEye42
Paraleash - ADog LeashFrom Paracordby The Ideanator
How to make arugged andhandy ParacordBelt by Jake22
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 3 Looping Into The Harness In order to secure the rope to the harness simply thread the tail end of the rope through the front loop in the harness as shown in the picture below This step isobviously very important
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 4 Following Back Through The Figure 8After looping the rope through the harness you have to thread the tail end of the rope back through the knot following the first figure 8 I have divided this process intofive smaller steps in order to make it more clear
1 - Coming form underneath the knot bring the tail up through the near loop and to the left behind the anchored end of the rope (Shown in the first picture)
2 - Wrap the tail around the anchored end back to the right and down through the adjacent loop (Shown in the second picture)
3 - You simply need to bring the tail back over the top of the knot to the left (Shown in the third picture)
4 - Bring the tail end up through the far loop following the anchored end (Shown in the fourth picture)
5 - Finally pull the knot tight (Shown in the fifth picture)
As you can see the first four pictures are simply tracing the knot back through with the tail end
For the last part while you pull the knot tight you may want to make small adjustments and rearrange how it all fits together If the knot does not lay perfectly smoothand tight its NOT a big deal
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 5 Finishing The Knot After completing the Figure 8 knot you will want to somehow secure the tail end of the rope out of the way There are a couple different ways to do this the way that Iwill demonstrate is using whats called a Stopper Knot This secondary knot is similar to a Fishermans knot and is pretty simple I have once again divided thisprocess into several smaller steps
1 - Start by wrapping the tail end around the anchored end (As shown in the first picture)
2 - Wrap the tail back underneath the two vertical segments (As shown in the second picture)
3 - Simply repeat the first two steps wrapping the tail around again (As shown in the third picture)
4 - This step in the fourth picture may look complicated but all you need to do is insert the tail up through the two loops that you have just made
5 - To finish off the knot you will want to slowly pull the tail end while gently pushing the bottom of the stopper knot upwards If you have successfully completed this knotit should look something like the fifth picture
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 6 Ready To Climb Now that you have mastered the Figure 8 knot you can securely harness yourself into a climbing rope Remember there are many other skills that go into setting up ananchor and belaying a climber This tutorial only covers the figure 8 knot For more information there are many great websites that demonstrate how to correctly set up asafe climbing system (Ive posted a few below) If you are a beginning climber I recommend that you read up on a few other climbing techniques Also you shouldprobably go to a climbing wall or gym where there are experienced climbers that can show you the ropes Hopefully this tutorial has been helpful Have fun and be safe
Some useful linkshttpwwwstephenprattnetAnchorsanchorshtmhttpwwwuoregonedu~oppclimbingtopicsanchorshtmlhttpwwwabc-of-rockclimbingcomhowtoclimbingtechniquesasp
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Related Instructables
How to Tie aFigure EightKnot byTactical_Pyro
Paracord KnotDisplay Bord byJamie bagn
Basic KnotsGuide byzorro3355
How to Climb aTree (withprussiks) bystasterisk
How to climb atree (using onlyrope) thefunsimple wayby louieaw
How to get arope into a tree(withoutclimbing it) byvitex
How to tievarious knots byadaviel
How to make arope swing byjdub0928
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Turks Head Knots on a Bottleby sklnxbones on July 6 2010
Intro Turks Head Knots on a BottleThis is the finished project A bottle decorated with three Turks Head Knots There are only three knots on this bottle The RED and the BLUE knots are each a 20 Bightby 3 Lead Turks Head Knots The WHITE knot is a 20 Bight by 19 Lead Turks Head Knot
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 1 Supplies
Cord Lots and Lots of cord I cant tell you how much each bottle is differentBottle Washed and Dried inside and out Make sure to remove all water spotsThreaded Needle Cord screws into the threads at the base of the needlePegs I use brass rivets used as a map to tie the Turks Head KnotsHole Punch Used to punch holes in the painters tape to hold the pegsPainters Tape To hold the pegs in place and to make your map for the Turks Head KnotsMarker To write on the painters tapeCloth Towel To remove finger prints and dirt from your bottleKrazy Glue or Super Glue This is used to secure the knots in place to the bottle
OPTIONAL BUT HIGHLY RECOMMENDEDI use the Turks Head Cookbook from KnotToolcom
Step 2 PreparationYou will need to find a bottle you like I used an empty instant tea bottle of course washed and dried (I like to put the bottle in the oven for a few minutes to dry the insidewithout water spots Take off the lid and do not put lid in the oven) Now measure the circumference of the bottle Take a cord and tightly wrap the cord around the bottleMark where the ends meet and use a ruler to measure the length of the cord For my instant tea bottle the circumference is 27cm I know from past knots that I have tiedthat I want my knot to have 20 Bights in the top and bottom (bands) knots I am going to use the Bights in the (bands) knots to tie the middle knot Now divide the numberof Bights (20) into the size of the circumference (27) to get the space between each Bight (135) With me so far
Now take two pieces of painters tape using a ruler measure out the length of the circumference and mark the length on the both pieces of tape Next you will mark thespace between each Bight on the tape
Step 3 Adding the PegsI like to use pegs when tying Turks Head Knots it just makes tying the knot easier
These are what I use for pegs
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 4 Adding Pegs to the TapeNow take a hole punch to cut holes in the tape where the lines meet You will place the pegs in the holes
Insert a peg in each hole and carefully stick the first piece of tape to the bottle
Step 5 Adding the 2nd row of pegsNow do the same thing with the second piece of tape The numbers on each piece of tape must line up
This picture shows you what you should have now This odd looking thing will be your map to tie the Turks Head Knot And this is the end of Step 1
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 6 Tying the first Turks Head KnotUsing the Turks Head Cookbook follow the numbers going over and under as indicated in the book I chose a 20 Bight by 3 Lead knot which will give me a nice bandaround the bottle Once the ends meet you have made one complete knot Tape the running end of your cord and start removing the pegs and the tape
Step 7 Remove the pegs and the tapeBe careful not to untie the knot as you remove the pegs and tape from the bottle Continue to remove all the pegs and remove the tape from the bottle At this point theknot will be very loose and will need to be tightened up
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 8 Remove the slack from the knotHere you can see just how much the knot expanded Starting with the standing end begin to pull the slack out of the knot going towards the running end of the cordDo not expect to pull all the slack out at once You may have to make 3 - 5 attempts at removing the slack out of the knot DO NOT remove all of the slack out of the knotIn order to make the bands we will have to triple the Turks Head Knot We will do this by following the knot three times The threaded needle will really come in handyhere
Step 9 Triple the KnotOnce you have made three passes of the Turks Head Knot use your needle to go under your knot about half the circumference and cut the cord The knot will be tightenough to hide the tail in placeTIP I carefully add a couple of drops of super glue UNDER the band to hold them in place and keep them from sliding around in the nextsteps A drop or two in 3 or 4 places around the band should be enough
Step 10 Add the second knotNow repeat this whole step for the second bandWhen tying the second band you must make sure the Bights line up to the first band This is crucial for the next stepWipe down the bottle to make sure all your finger prints and adhesive from the tape are all removed You want to make sure your bottle is clean at this point Any dirt orfinger prints left on the bottle will be almost impossible to remove From this point on we will use gloves when tying our last knot
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 11 Maping the Top KnotStick a piece of painters tape on top of your first band leaving the bottom of the knot exposedUse a marker to count the number of Bights in your knot Instead of using the pegs we are going to use the Bights to tie our next Turks Head Knot
Step 12 Mapping the Bottom KnotDo the same thing for the bottom band but you must make sure your numbers on top and bottom line up So 1 on top should be the same position as 1 on the bottom
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 13 Adding the last knotAgain using the Turks Head Cookbook and the threaded needle you are going to follow the instructions going over and under as indicated in the book Be sure to usegloves when ever you handle the bottle
Step 14 Thats ItFor this Turks Head Knot I am using a 20 Bight by 19 Lead knot
Because of the amount of cord you are working with your cord will get twisted and knotted You will have to un-twist the cord often Its a pain in the rear but it has to bedone And it has to be done alot
Continue to tie the knot until you finish the knot If you have the cord and the patience you can double or triple the knot When you are done use your needle to hide theends under your bands Cut the ends and your DONE
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Related Instructables
Monkeys FistFloatingKeychain byjokerlz
How To Make ATurks headKnot WithParacord byDoggie Stylish
Tying Trivetsout of Rope forHoliday Gifts bykylemarsh
Paracord KnotDisplay Bord byJamie bagn
How to Make ATurks Head(Photos) bymchs60chip
A pocket full ofknots byKiteman
Monkeys fistknot AND themonkey byjonathan111
TiteTie is theTruckers Knoton Steroids bytitetie
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Larks head noose -- an easy useful knot that tightens and loosensby Larry Breed on February 19 2009
Intro Larks head noose -- an easy useful knot that tightens and loosensI thought I knew all the basic knots but then I was taught this incredibly useful simple knot Its good for tying up the neck of a bag that you want to repeatedly open andsecurely close Its good for tying around a springy bundle that will need tightening and retightening And its easy to undo
Ive looked at knot literature but havent found a name for this so I named it The basic knot is well known its called a larks head Since all Ive done is to slip the twoends through the larks head to make a noose I call it that
WARNING Dont use this knot when human safety would depend on it Climbers and mountaineers have well-tested reliable knots for such situations
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Image Notes1 To tighten further step on this side of the larks head and pull the free ends
Step 1 Double the cord overThe larks head noose requires enough cord to go twice around your bundle plus a foot or two Find the center and double it over Sailors call this a bight
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 2 Form the larks headComing from below the bight hook your thumb and forefinger over the two sides Reach outward and downward and pinch your fingertips together underneath thedoubled cord
Youve made a larks head Move the crossing cord a little farther from your hand so theres a clear opening through the two half-loops
Step 3 Form the nooseSlip the two ends of the cord through the opening we were just talking about Pull the larks head tight so it grips the two cords Find something that needs constrictingand put the noose around it
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 4 Tightening retightening and lockingSlide the knot against the bundle If its not tight enough to keep from slipping tighten it by holding it in one hand and tugging on the cords one at a time with the otherhand Notice that you can slide the knot out again for instance to re-open the bag you just tied shut For some applications this may be as tight as you need it
A springy bundle probably still feels loose If so compress the bundle and get a new grip on the cords Rest your foot on the bundle on the cords nearest the larks headand pull to slide the larks head tighter
To make the knot more permanent you can lock it Make an overhand in the cord ends (Exactly like the first step in tying shoelaces) With your foot still on the bundlepull on the cords and move your hands apart until youre pulling in opposite directions You have just locked the larks head and you can trust it to stay that way()
But lets say that later on you want to loosen the locked knot Again put your foot on the bundle and cords nearest the larks head hold the two cord ends together andpull This makes a little slack between the overhand and the larks head so you can untie the overhand
In twine or small string the locking overhand knot may be difficult to undo Use a shoelace knot instead of an overhand and itll unlock easily
() If youre using slippery cord like polypropylene an overhand may not lock securely You may want to tie another overhand knot For added security wrap a shortlength of duct tape around the two cords close to the knot
Image Notes1 To tighten further step on this side of the larks head and pull the free ends
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Related Instructables
TRX fromParacordChallengeAccepted bythrake
A pocket full ofknots byKiteman
Lens CapLanyard by~teknoarsonist~ how to tie a
noose byawesume
AdjustableParacordGlassesLanyard byjdtwelve12
HangmansNoose PackClosure byPopEye42
Paraleash - ADog LeashFrom Paracordby The Ideanator
How to make arugged andhandy ParacordBelt by Jake22
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 3 Looping Into The Harness In order to secure the rope to the harness simply thread the tail end of the rope through the front loop in the harness as shown in the picture below This step isobviously very important
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 4 Following Back Through The Figure 8After looping the rope through the harness you have to thread the tail end of the rope back through the knot following the first figure 8 I have divided this process intofive smaller steps in order to make it more clear
1 - Coming form underneath the knot bring the tail up through the near loop and to the left behind the anchored end of the rope (Shown in the first picture)
2 - Wrap the tail around the anchored end back to the right and down through the adjacent loop (Shown in the second picture)
3 - You simply need to bring the tail back over the top of the knot to the left (Shown in the third picture)
4 - Bring the tail end up through the far loop following the anchored end (Shown in the fourth picture)
5 - Finally pull the knot tight (Shown in the fifth picture)
As you can see the first four pictures are simply tracing the knot back through with the tail end
For the last part while you pull the knot tight you may want to make small adjustments and rearrange how it all fits together If the knot does not lay perfectly smoothand tight its NOT a big deal
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 5 Finishing The Knot After completing the Figure 8 knot you will want to somehow secure the tail end of the rope out of the way There are a couple different ways to do this the way that Iwill demonstrate is using whats called a Stopper Knot This secondary knot is similar to a Fishermans knot and is pretty simple I have once again divided thisprocess into several smaller steps
1 - Start by wrapping the tail end around the anchored end (As shown in the first picture)
2 - Wrap the tail back underneath the two vertical segments (As shown in the second picture)
3 - Simply repeat the first two steps wrapping the tail around again (As shown in the third picture)
4 - This step in the fourth picture may look complicated but all you need to do is insert the tail up through the two loops that you have just made
5 - To finish off the knot you will want to slowly pull the tail end while gently pushing the bottom of the stopper knot upwards If you have successfully completed this knotit should look something like the fifth picture
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 6 Ready To Climb Now that you have mastered the Figure 8 knot you can securely harness yourself into a climbing rope Remember there are many other skills that go into setting up ananchor and belaying a climber This tutorial only covers the figure 8 knot For more information there are many great websites that demonstrate how to correctly set up asafe climbing system (Ive posted a few below) If you are a beginning climber I recommend that you read up on a few other climbing techniques Also you shouldprobably go to a climbing wall or gym where there are experienced climbers that can show you the ropes Hopefully this tutorial has been helpful Have fun and be safe
Some useful linkshttpwwwstephenprattnetAnchorsanchorshtmhttpwwwuoregonedu~oppclimbingtopicsanchorshtmlhttpwwwabc-of-rockclimbingcomhowtoclimbingtechniquesasp
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Related Instructables
How to Tie aFigure EightKnot byTactical_Pyro
Paracord KnotDisplay Bord byJamie bagn
Basic KnotsGuide byzorro3355
How to Climb aTree (withprussiks) bystasterisk
How to climb atree (using onlyrope) thefunsimple wayby louieaw
How to get arope into a tree(withoutclimbing it) byvitex
How to tievarious knots byadaviel
How to make arope swing byjdub0928
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Turks Head Knots on a Bottleby sklnxbones on July 6 2010
Intro Turks Head Knots on a BottleThis is the finished project A bottle decorated with three Turks Head Knots There are only three knots on this bottle The RED and the BLUE knots are each a 20 Bightby 3 Lead Turks Head Knots The WHITE knot is a 20 Bight by 19 Lead Turks Head Knot
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 1 Supplies
Cord Lots and Lots of cord I cant tell you how much each bottle is differentBottle Washed and Dried inside and out Make sure to remove all water spotsThreaded Needle Cord screws into the threads at the base of the needlePegs I use brass rivets used as a map to tie the Turks Head KnotsHole Punch Used to punch holes in the painters tape to hold the pegsPainters Tape To hold the pegs in place and to make your map for the Turks Head KnotsMarker To write on the painters tapeCloth Towel To remove finger prints and dirt from your bottleKrazy Glue or Super Glue This is used to secure the knots in place to the bottle
OPTIONAL BUT HIGHLY RECOMMENDEDI use the Turks Head Cookbook from KnotToolcom
Step 2 PreparationYou will need to find a bottle you like I used an empty instant tea bottle of course washed and dried (I like to put the bottle in the oven for a few minutes to dry the insidewithout water spots Take off the lid and do not put lid in the oven) Now measure the circumference of the bottle Take a cord and tightly wrap the cord around the bottleMark where the ends meet and use a ruler to measure the length of the cord For my instant tea bottle the circumference is 27cm I know from past knots that I have tiedthat I want my knot to have 20 Bights in the top and bottom (bands) knots I am going to use the Bights in the (bands) knots to tie the middle knot Now divide the numberof Bights (20) into the size of the circumference (27) to get the space between each Bight (135) With me so far
Now take two pieces of painters tape using a ruler measure out the length of the circumference and mark the length on the both pieces of tape Next you will mark thespace between each Bight on the tape
Step 3 Adding the PegsI like to use pegs when tying Turks Head Knots it just makes tying the knot easier
These are what I use for pegs
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 4 Adding Pegs to the TapeNow take a hole punch to cut holes in the tape where the lines meet You will place the pegs in the holes
Insert a peg in each hole and carefully stick the first piece of tape to the bottle
Step 5 Adding the 2nd row of pegsNow do the same thing with the second piece of tape The numbers on each piece of tape must line up
This picture shows you what you should have now This odd looking thing will be your map to tie the Turks Head Knot And this is the end of Step 1
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 6 Tying the first Turks Head KnotUsing the Turks Head Cookbook follow the numbers going over and under as indicated in the book I chose a 20 Bight by 3 Lead knot which will give me a nice bandaround the bottle Once the ends meet you have made one complete knot Tape the running end of your cord and start removing the pegs and the tape
Step 7 Remove the pegs and the tapeBe careful not to untie the knot as you remove the pegs and tape from the bottle Continue to remove all the pegs and remove the tape from the bottle At this point theknot will be very loose and will need to be tightened up
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 8 Remove the slack from the knotHere you can see just how much the knot expanded Starting with the standing end begin to pull the slack out of the knot going towards the running end of the cordDo not expect to pull all the slack out at once You may have to make 3 - 5 attempts at removing the slack out of the knot DO NOT remove all of the slack out of the knotIn order to make the bands we will have to triple the Turks Head Knot We will do this by following the knot three times The threaded needle will really come in handyhere
Step 9 Triple the KnotOnce you have made three passes of the Turks Head Knot use your needle to go under your knot about half the circumference and cut the cord The knot will be tightenough to hide the tail in placeTIP I carefully add a couple of drops of super glue UNDER the band to hold them in place and keep them from sliding around in the nextsteps A drop or two in 3 or 4 places around the band should be enough
Step 10 Add the second knotNow repeat this whole step for the second bandWhen tying the second band you must make sure the Bights line up to the first band This is crucial for the next stepWipe down the bottle to make sure all your finger prints and adhesive from the tape are all removed You want to make sure your bottle is clean at this point Any dirt orfinger prints left on the bottle will be almost impossible to remove From this point on we will use gloves when tying our last knot
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 11 Maping the Top KnotStick a piece of painters tape on top of your first band leaving the bottom of the knot exposedUse a marker to count the number of Bights in your knot Instead of using the pegs we are going to use the Bights to tie our next Turks Head Knot
Step 12 Mapping the Bottom KnotDo the same thing for the bottom band but you must make sure your numbers on top and bottom line up So 1 on top should be the same position as 1 on the bottom
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 13 Adding the last knotAgain using the Turks Head Cookbook and the threaded needle you are going to follow the instructions going over and under as indicated in the book Be sure to usegloves when ever you handle the bottle
Step 14 Thats ItFor this Turks Head Knot I am using a 20 Bight by 19 Lead knot
Because of the amount of cord you are working with your cord will get twisted and knotted You will have to un-twist the cord often Its a pain in the rear but it has to bedone And it has to be done alot
Continue to tie the knot until you finish the knot If you have the cord and the patience you can double or triple the knot When you are done use your needle to hide theends under your bands Cut the ends and your DONE
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Related Instructables
Monkeys FistFloatingKeychain byjokerlz
How To Make ATurks headKnot WithParacord byDoggie Stylish
Tying Trivetsout of Rope forHoliday Gifts bykylemarsh
Paracord KnotDisplay Bord byJamie bagn
How to Make ATurks Head(Photos) bymchs60chip
A pocket full ofknots byKiteman
Monkeys fistknot AND themonkey byjonathan111
TiteTie is theTruckers Knoton Steroids bytitetie
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Larks head noose -- an easy useful knot that tightens and loosensby Larry Breed on February 19 2009
Intro Larks head noose -- an easy useful knot that tightens and loosensI thought I knew all the basic knots but then I was taught this incredibly useful simple knot Its good for tying up the neck of a bag that you want to repeatedly open andsecurely close Its good for tying around a springy bundle that will need tightening and retightening And its easy to undo
Ive looked at knot literature but havent found a name for this so I named it The basic knot is well known its called a larks head Since all Ive done is to slip the twoends through the larks head to make a noose I call it that
WARNING Dont use this knot when human safety would depend on it Climbers and mountaineers have well-tested reliable knots for such situations
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Image Notes1 To tighten further step on this side of the larks head and pull the free ends
Step 1 Double the cord overThe larks head noose requires enough cord to go twice around your bundle plus a foot or two Find the center and double it over Sailors call this a bight
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 2 Form the larks headComing from below the bight hook your thumb and forefinger over the two sides Reach outward and downward and pinch your fingertips together underneath thedoubled cord
Youve made a larks head Move the crossing cord a little farther from your hand so theres a clear opening through the two half-loops
Step 3 Form the nooseSlip the two ends of the cord through the opening we were just talking about Pull the larks head tight so it grips the two cords Find something that needs constrictingand put the noose around it
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 4 Tightening retightening and lockingSlide the knot against the bundle If its not tight enough to keep from slipping tighten it by holding it in one hand and tugging on the cords one at a time with the otherhand Notice that you can slide the knot out again for instance to re-open the bag you just tied shut For some applications this may be as tight as you need it
A springy bundle probably still feels loose If so compress the bundle and get a new grip on the cords Rest your foot on the bundle on the cords nearest the larks headand pull to slide the larks head tighter
To make the knot more permanent you can lock it Make an overhand in the cord ends (Exactly like the first step in tying shoelaces) With your foot still on the bundlepull on the cords and move your hands apart until youre pulling in opposite directions You have just locked the larks head and you can trust it to stay that way()
But lets say that later on you want to loosen the locked knot Again put your foot on the bundle and cords nearest the larks head hold the two cord ends together andpull This makes a little slack between the overhand and the larks head so you can untie the overhand
In twine or small string the locking overhand knot may be difficult to undo Use a shoelace knot instead of an overhand and itll unlock easily
() If youre using slippery cord like polypropylene an overhand may not lock securely You may want to tie another overhand knot For added security wrap a shortlength of duct tape around the two cords close to the knot
Image Notes1 To tighten further step on this side of the larks head and pull the free ends
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Related Instructables
TRX fromParacordChallengeAccepted bythrake
A pocket full ofknots byKiteman
Lens CapLanyard by~teknoarsonist~ how to tie a
noose byawesume
AdjustableParacordGlassesLanyard byjdtwelve12
HangmansNoose PackClosure byPopEye42
Paraleash - ADog LeashFrom Paracordby The Ideanator
How to make arugged andhandy ParacordBelt by Jake22
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 4 Following Back Through The Figure 8After looping the rope through the harness you have to thread the tail end of the rope back through the knot following the first figure 8 I have divided this process intofive smaller steps in order to make it more clear
1 - Coming form underneath the knot bring the tail up through the near loop and to the left behind the anchored end of the rope (Shown in the first picture)
2 - Wrap the tail around the anchored end back to the right and down through the adjacent loop (Shown in the second picture)
3 - You simply need to bring the tail back over the top of the knot to the left (Shown in the third picture)
4 - Bring the tail end up through the far loop following the anchored end (Shown in the fourth picture)
5 - Finally pull the knot tight (Shown in the fifth picture)
As you can see the first four pictures are simply tracing the knot back through with the tail end
For the last part while you pull the knot tight you may want to make small adjustments and rearrange how it all fits together If the knot does not lay perfectly smoothand tight its NOT a big deal
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 5 Finishing The Knot After completing the Figure 8 knot you will want to somehow secure the tail end of the rope out of the way There are a couple different ways to do this the way that Iwill demonstrate is using whats called a Stopper Knot This secondary knot is similar to a Fishermans knot and is pretty simple I have once again divided thisprocess into several smaller steps
1 - Start by wrapping the tail end around the anchored end (As shown in the first picture)
2 - Wrap the tail back underneath the two vertical segments (As shown in the second picture)
3 - Simply repeat the first two steps wrapping the tail around again (As shown in the third picture)
4 - This step in the fourth picture may look complicated but all you need to do is insert the tail up through the two loops that you have just made
5 - To finish off the knot you will want to slowly pull the tail end while gently pushing the bottom of the stopper knot upwards If you have successfully completed this knotit should look something like the fifth picture
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 6 Ready To Climb Now that you have mastered the Figure 8 knot you can securely harness yourself into a climbing rope Remember there are many other skills that go into setting up ananchor and belaying a climber This tutorial only covers the figure 8 knot For more information there are many great websites that demonstrate how to correctly set up asafe climbing system (Ive posted a few below) If you are a beginning climber I recommend that you read up on a few other climbing techniques Also you shouldprobably go to a climbing wall or gym where there are experienced climbers that can show you the ropes Hopefully this tutorial has been helpful Have fun and be safe
Some useful linkshttpwwwstephenprattnetAnchorsanchorshtmhttpwwwuoregonedu~oppclimbingtopicsanchorshtmlhttpwwwabc-of-rockclimbingcomhowtoclimbingtechniquesasp
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Related Instructables
How to Tie aFigure EightKnot byTactical_Pyro
Paracord KnotDisplay Bord byJamie bagn
Basic KnotsGuide byzorro3355
How to Climb aTree (withprussiks) bystasterisk
How to climb atree (using onlyrope) thefunsimple wayby louieaw
How to get arope into a tree(withoutclimbing it) byvitex
How to tievarious knots byadaviel
How to make arope swing byjdub0928
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Turks Head Knots on a Bottleby sklnxbones on July 6 2010
Intro Turks Head Knots on a BottleThis is the finished project A bottle decorated with three Turks Head Knots There are only three knots on this bottle The RED and the BLUE knots are each a 20 Bightby 3 Lead Turks Head Knots The WHITE knot is a 20 Bight by 19 Lead Turks Head Knot
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 1 Supplies
Cord Lots and Lots of cord I cant tell you how much each bottle is differentBottle Washed and Dried inside and out Make sure to remove all water spotsThreaded Needle Cord screws into the threads at the base of the needlePegs I use brass rivets used as a map to tie the Turks Head KnotsHole Punch Used to punch holes in the painters tape to hold the pegsPainters Tape To hold the pegs in place and to make your map for the Turks Head KnotsMarker To write on the painters tapeCloth Towel To remove finger prints and dirt from your bottleKrazy Glue or Super Glue This is used to secure the knots in place to the bottle
OPTIONAL BUT HIGHLY RECOMMENDEDI use the Turks Head Cookbook from KnotToolcom
Step 2 PreparationYou will need to find a bottle you like I used an empty instant tea bottle of course washed and dried (I like to put the bottle in the oven for a few minutes to dry the insidewithout water spots Take off the lid and do not put lid in the oven) Now measure the circumference of the bottle Take a cord and tightly wrap the cord around the bottleMark where the ends meet and use a ruler to measure the length of the cord For my instant tea bottle the circumference is 27cm I know from past knots that I have tiedthat I want my knot to have 20 Bights in the top and bottom (bands) knots I am going to use the Bights in the (bands) knots to tie the middle knot Now divide the numberof Bights (20) into the size of the circumference (27) to get the space between each Bight (135) With me so far
Now take two pieces of painters tape using a ruler measure out the length of the circumference and mark the length on the both pieces of tape Next you will mark thespace between each Bight on the tape
Step 3 Adding the PegsI like to use pegs when tying Turks Head Knots it just makes tying the knot easier
These are what I use for pegs
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 4 Adding Pegs to the TapeNow take a hole punch to cut holes in the tape where the lines meet You will place the pegs in the holes
Insert a peg in each hole and carefully stick the first piece of tape to the bottle
Step 5 Adding the 2nd row of pegsNow do the same thing with the second piece of tape The numbers on each piece of tape must line up
This picture shows you what you should have now This odd looking thing will be your map to tie the Turks Head Knot And this is the end of Step 1
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 6 Tying the first Turks Head KnotUsing the Turks Head Cookbook follow the numbers going over and under as indicated in the book I chose a 20 Bight by 3 Lead knot which will give me a nice bandaround the bottle Once the ends meet you have made one complete knot Tape the running end of your cord and start removing the pegs and the tape
Step 7 Remove the pegs and the tapeBe careful not to untie the knot as you remove the pegs and tape from the bottle Continue to remove all the pegs and remove the tape from the bottle At this point theknot will be very loose and will need to be tightened up
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 8 Remove the slack from the knotHere you can see just how much the knot expanded Starting with the standing end begin to pull the slack out of the knot going towards the running end of the cordDo not expect to pull all the slack out at once You may have to make 3 - 5 attempts at removing the slack out of the knot DO NOT remove all of the slack out of the knotIn order to make the bands we will have to triple the Turks Head Knot We will do this by following the knot three times The threaded needle will really come in handyhere
Step 9 Triple the KnotOnce you have made three passes of the Turks Head Knot use your needle to go under your knot about half the circumference and cut the cord The knot will be tightenough to hide the tail in placeTIP I carefully add a couple of drops of super glue UNDER the band to hold them in place and keep them from sliding around in the nextsteps A drop or two in 3 or 4 places around the band should be enough
Step 10 Add the second knotNow repeat this whole step for the second bandWhen tying the second band you must make sure the Bights line up to the first band This is crucial for the next stepWipe down the bottle to make sure all your finger prints and adhesive from the tape are all removed You want to make sure your bottle is clean at this point Any dirt orfinger prints left on the bottle will be almost impossible to remove From this point on we will use gloves when tying our last knot
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 11 Maping the Top KnotStick a piece of painters tape on top of your first band leaving the bottom of the knot exposedUse a marker to count the number of Bights in your knot Instead of using the pegs we are going to use the Bights to tie our next Turks Head Knot
Step 12 Mapping the Bottom KnotDo the same thing for the bottom band but you must make sure your numbers on top and bottom line up So 1 on top should be the same position as 1 on the bottom
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 13 Adding the last knotAgain using the Turks Head Cookbook and the threaded needle you are going to follow the instructions going over and under as indicated in the book Be sure to usegloves when ever you handle the bottle
Step 14 Thats ItFor this Turks Head Knot I am using a 20 Bight by 19 Lead knot
Because of the amount of cord you are working with your cord will get twisted and knotted You will have to un-twist the cord often Its a pain in the rear but it has to bedone And it has to be done alot
Continue to tie the knot until you finish the knot If you have the cord and the patience you can double or triple the knot When you are done use your needle to hide theends under your bands Cut the ends and your DONE
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Related Instructables
Monkeys FistFloatingKeychain byjokerlz
How To Make ATurks headKnot WithParacord byDoggie Stylish
Tying Trivetsout of Rope forHoliday Gifts bykylemarsh
Paracord KnotDisplay Bord byJamie bagn
How to Make ATurks Head(Photos) bymchs60chip
A pocket full ofknots byKiteman
Monkeys fistknot AND themonkey byjonathan111
TiteTie is theTruckers Knoton Steroids bytitetie
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Larks head noose -- an easy useful knot that tightens and loosensby Larry Breed on February 19 2009
Intro Larks head noose -- an easy useful knot that tightens and loosensI thought I knew all the basic knots but then I was taught this incredibly useful simple knot Its good for tying up the neck of a bag that you want to repeatedly open andsecurely close Its good for tying around a springy bundle that will need tightening and retightening And its easy to undo
Ive looked at knot literature but havent found a name for this so I named it The basic knot is well known its called a larks head Since all Ive done is to slip the twoends through the larks head to make a noose I call it that
WARNING Dont use this knot when human safety would depend on it Climbers and mountaineers have well-tested reliable knots for such situations
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Image Notes1 To tighten further step on this side of the larks head and pull the free ends
Step 1 Double the cord overThe larks head noose requires enough cord to go twice around your bundle plus a foot or two Find the center and double it over Sailors call this a bight
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 2 Form the larks headComing from below the bight hook your thumb and forefinger over the two sides Reach outward and downward and pinch your fingertips together underneath thedoubled cord
Youve made a larks head Move the crossing cord a little farther from your hand so theres a clear opening through the two half-loops
Step 3 Form the nooseSlip the two ends of the cord through the opening we were just talking about Pull the larks head tight so it grips the two cords Find something that needs constrictingand put the noose around it
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 4 Tightening retightening and lockingSlide the knot against the bundle If its not tight enough to keep from slipping tighten it by holding it in one hand and tugging on the cords one at a time with the otherhand Notice that you can slide the knot out again for instance to re-open the bag you just tied shut For some applications this may be as tight as you need it
A springy bundle probably still feels loose If so compress the bundle and get a new grip on the cords Rest your foot on the bundle on the cords nearest the larks headand pull to slide the larks head tighter
To make the knot more permanent you can lock it Make an overhand in the cord ends (Exactly like the first step in tying shoelaces) With your foot still on the bundlepull on the cords and move your hands apart until youre pulling in opposite directions You have just locked the larks head and you can trust it to stay that way()
But lets say that later on you want to loosen the locked knot Again put your foot on the bundle and cords nearest the larks head hold the two cord ends together andpull This makes a little slack between the overhand and the larks head so you can untie the overhand
In twine or small string the locking overhand knot may be difficult to undo Use a shoelace knot instead of an overhand and itll unlock easily
() If youre using slippery cord like polypropylene an overhand may not lock securely You may want to tie another overhand knot For added security wrap a shortlength of duct tape around the two cords close to the knot
Image Notes1 To tighten further step on this side of the larks head and pull the free ends
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Related Instructables
TRX fromParacordChallengeAccepted bythrake
A pocket full ofknots byKiteman
Lens CapLanyard by~teknoarsonist~ how to tie a
noose byawesume
AdjustableParacordGlassesLanyard byjdtwelve12
HangmansNoose PackClosure byPopEye42
Paraleash - ADog LeashFrom Paracordby The Ideanator
How to make arugged andhandy ParacordBelt by Jake22
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 5 Finishing The Knot After completing the Figure 8 knot you will want to somehow secure the tail end of the rope out of the way There are a couple different ways to do this the way that Iwill demonstrate is using whats called a Stopper Knot This secondary knot is similar to a Fishermans knot and is pretty simple I have once again divided thisprocess into several smaller steps
1 - Start by wrapping the tail end around the anchored end (As shown in the first picture)
2 - Wrap the tail back underneath the two vertical segments (As shown in the second picture)
3 - Simply repeat the first two steps wrapping the tail around again (As shown in the third picture)
4 - This step in the fourth picture may look complicated but all you need to do is insert the tail up through the two loops that you have just made
5 - To finish off the knot you will want to slowly pull the tail end while gently pushing the bottom of the stopper knot upwards If you have successfully completed this knotit should look something like the fifth picture
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 6 Ready To Climb Now that you have mastered the Figure 8 knot you can securely harness yourself into a climbing rope Remember there are many other skills that go into setting up ananchor and belaying a climber This tutorial only covers the figure 8 knot For more information there are many great websites that demonstrate how to correctly set up asafe climbing system (Ive posted a few below) If you are a beginning climber I recommend that you read up on a few other climbing techniques Also you shouldprobably go to a climbing wall or gym where there are experienced climbers that can show you the ropes Hopefully this tutorial has been helpful Have fun and be safe
Some useful linkshttpwwwstephenprattnetAnchorsanchorshtmhttpwwwuoregonedu~oppclimbingtopicsanchorshtmlhttpwwwabc-of-rockclimbingcomhowtoclimbingtechniquesasp
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Related Instructables
How to Tie aFigure EightKnot byTactical_Pyro
Paracord KnotDisplay Bord byJamie bagn
Basic KnotsGuide byzorro3355
How to Climb aTree (withprussiks) bystasterisk
How to climb atree (using onlyrope) thefunsimple wayby louieaw
How to get arope into a tree(withoutclimbing it) byvitex
How to tievarious knots byadaviel
How to make arope swing byjdub0928
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Turks Head Knots on a Bottleby sklnxbones on July 6 2010
Intro Turks Head Knots on a BottleThis is the finished project A bottle decorated with three Turks Head Knots There are only three knots on this bottle The RED and the BLUE knots are each a 20 Bightby 3 Lead Turks Head Knots The WHITE knot is a 20 Bight by 19 Lead Turks Head Knot
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 1 Supplies
Cord Lots and Lots of cord I cant tell you how much each bottle is differentBottle Washed and Dried inside and out Make sure to remove all water spotsThreaded Needle Cord screws into the threads at the base of the needlePegs I use brass rivets used as a map to tie the Turks Head KnotsHole Punch Used to punch holes in the painters tape to hold the pegsPainters Tape To hold the pegs in place and to make your map for the Turks Head KnotsMarker To write on the painters tapeCloth Towel To remove finger prints and dirt from your bottleKrazy Glue or Super Glue This is used to secure the knots in place to the bottle
OPTIONAL BUT HIGHLY RECOMMENDEDI use the Turks Head Cookbook from KnotToolcom
Step 2 PreparationYou will need to find a bottle you like I used an empty instant tea bottle of course washed and dried (I like to put the bottle in the oven for a few minutes to dry the insidewithout water spots Take off the lid and do not put lid in the oven) Now measure the circumference of the bottle Take a cord and tightly wrap the cord around the bottleMark where the ends meet and use a ruler to measure the length of the cord For my instant tea bottle the circumference is 27cm I know from past knots that I have tiedthat I want my knot to have 20 Bights in the top and bottom (bands) knots I am going to use the Bights in the (bands) knots to tie the middle knot Now divide the numberof Bights (20) into the size of the circumference (27) to get the space between each Bight (135) With me so far
Now take two pieces of painters tape using a ruler measure out the length of the circumference and mark the length on the both pieces of tape Next you will mark thespace between each Bight on the tape
Step 3 Adding the PegsI like to use pegs when tying Turks Head Knots it just makes tying the knot easier
These are what I use for pegs
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 4 Adding Pegs to the TapeNow take a hole punch to cut holes in the tape where the lines meet You will place the pegs in the holes
Insert a peg in each hole and carefully stick the first piece of tape to the bottle
Step 5 Adding the 2nd row of pegsNow do the same thing with the second piece of tape The numbers on each piece of tape must line up
This picture shows you what you should have now This odd looking thing will be your map to tie the Turks Head Knot And this is the end of Step 1
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 6 Tying the first Turks Head KnotUsing the Turks Head Cookbook follow the numbers going over and under as indicated in the book I chose a 20 Bight by 3 Lead knot which will give me a nice bandaround the bottle Once the ends meet you have made one complete knot Tape the running end of your cord and start removing the pegs and the tape
Step 7 Remove the pegs and the tapeBe careful not to untie the knot as you remove the pegs and tape from the bottle Continue to remove all the pegs and remove the tape from the bottle At this point theknot will be very loose and will need to be tightened up
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 8 Remove the slack from the knotHere you can see just how much the knot expanded Starting with the standing end begin to pull the slack out of the knot going towards the running end of the cordDo not expect to pull all the slack out at once You may have to make 3 - 5 attempts at removing the slack out of the knot DO NOT remove all of the slack out of the knotIn order to make the bands we will have to triple the Turks Head Knot We will do this by following the knot three times The threaded needle will really come in handyhere
Step 9 Triple the KnotOnce you have made three passes of the Turks Head Knot use your needle to go under your knot about half the circumference and cut the cord The knot will be tightenough to hide the tail in placeTIP I carefully add a couple of drops of super glue UNDER the band to hold them in place and keep them from sliding around in the nextsteps A drop or two in 3 or 4 places around the band should be enough
Step 10 Add the second knotNow repeat this whole step for the second bandWhen tying the second band you must make sure the Bights line up to the first band This is crucial for the next stepWipe down the bottle to make sure all your finger prints and adhesive from the tape are all removed You want to make sure your bottle is clean at this point Any dirt orfinger prints left on the bottle will be almost impossible to remove From this point on we will use gloves when tying our last knot
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 11 Maping the Top KnotStick a piece of painters tape on top of your first band leaving the bottom of the knot exposedUse a marker to count the number of Bights in your knot Instead of using the pegs we are going to use the Bights to tie our next Turks Head Knot
Step 12 Mapping the Bottom KnotDo the same thing for the bottom band but you must make sure your numbers on top and bottom line up So 1 on top should be the same position as 1 on the bottom
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 13 Adding the last knotAgain using the Turks Head Cookbook and the threaded needle you are going to follow the instructions going over and under as indicated in the book Be sure to usegloves when ever you handle the bottle
Step 14 Thats ItFor this Turks Head Knot I am using a 20 Bight by 19 Lead knot
Because of the amount of cord you are working with your cord will get twisted and knotted You will have to un-twist the cord often Its a pain in the rear but it has to bedone And it has to be done alot
Continue to tie the knot until you finish the knot If you have the cord and the patience you can double or triple the knot When you are done use your needle to hide theends under your bands Cut the ends and your DONE
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Related Instructables
Monkeys FistFloatingKeychain byjokerlz
How To Make ATurks headKnot WithParacord byDoggie Stylish
Tying Trivetsout of Rope forHoliday Gifts bykylemarsh
Paracord KnotDisplay Bord byJamie bagn
How to Make ATurks Head(Photos) bymchs60chip
A pocket full ofknots byKiteman
Monkeys fistknot AND themonkey byjonathan111
TiteTie is theTruckers Knoton Steroids bytitetie
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Larks head noose -- an easy useful knot that tightens and loosensby Larry Breed on February 19 2009
Intro Larks head noose -- an easy useful knot that tightens and loosensI thought I knew all the basic knots but then I was taught this incredibly useful simple knot Its good for tying up the neck of a bag that you want to repeatedly open andsecurely close Its good for tying around a springy bundle that will need tightening and retightening And its easy to undo
Ive looked at knot literature but havent found a name for this so I named it The basic knot is well known its called a larks head Since all Ive done is to slip the twoends through the larks head to make a noose I call it that
WARNING Dont use this knot when human safety would depend on it Climbers and mountaineers have well-tested reliable knots for such situations
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Image Notes1 To tighten further step on this side of the larks head and pull the free ends
Step 1 Double the cord overThe larks head noose requires enough cord to go twice around your bundle plus a foot or two Find the center and double it over Sailors call this a bight
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 2 Form the larks headComing from below the bight hook your thumb and forefinger over the two sides Reach outward and downward and pinch your fingertips together underneath thedoubled cord
Youve made a larks head Move the crossing cord a little farther from your hand so theres a clear opening through the two half-loops
Step 3 Form the nooseSlip the two ends of the cord through the opening we were just talking about Pull the larks head tight so it grips the two cords Find something that needs constrictingand put the noose around it
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 4 Tightening retightening and lockingSlide the knot against the bundle If its not tight enough to keep from slipping tighten it by holding it in one hand and tugging on the cords one at a time with the otherhand Notice that you can slide the knot out again for instance to re-open the bag you just tied shut For some applications this may be as tight as you need it
A springy bundle probably still feels loose If so compress the bundle and get a new grip on the cords Rest your foot on the bundle on the cords nearest the larks headand pull to slide the larks head tighter
To make the knot more permanent you can lock it Make an overhand in the cord ends (Exactly like the first step in tying shoelaces) With your foot still on the bundlepull on the cords and move your hands apart until youre pulling in opposite directions You have just locked the larks head and you can trust it to stay that way()
But lets say that later on you want to loosen the locked knot Again put your foot on the bundle and cords nearest the larks head hold the two cord ends together andpull This makes a little slack between the overhand and the larks head so you can untie the overhand
In twine or small string the locking overhand knot may be difficult to undo Use a shoelace knot instead of an overhand and itll unlock easily
() If youre using slippery cord like polypropylene an overhand may not lock securely You may want to tie another overhand knot For added security wrap a shortlength of duct tape around the two cords close to the knot
Image Notes1 To tighten further step on this side of the larks head and pull the free ends
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Related Instructables
TRX fromParacordChallengeAccepted bythrake
A pocket full ofknots byKiteman
Lens CapLanyard by~teknoarsonist~ how to tie a
noose byawesume
AdjustableParacordGlassesLanyard byjdtwelve12
HangmansNoose PackClosure byPopEye42
Paraleash - ADog LeashFrom Paracordby The Ideanator
How to make arugged andhandy ParacordBelt by Jake22
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 5 Finishing The Knot After completing the Figure 8 knot you will want to somehow secure the tail end of the rope out of the way There are a couple different ways to do this the way that Iwill demonstrate is using whats called a Stopper Knot This secondary knot is similar to a Fishermans knot and is pretty simple I have once again divided thisprocess into several smaller steps
1 - Start by wrapping the tail end around the anchored end (As shown in the first picture)
2 - Wrap the tail back underneath the two vertical segments (As shown in the second picture)
3 - Simply repeat the first two steps wrapping the tail around again (As shown in the third picture)
4 - This step in the fourth picture may look complicated but all you need to do is insert the tail up through the two loops that you have just made
5 - To finish off the knot you will want to slowly pull the tail end while gently pushing the bottom of the stopper knot upwards If you have successfully completed this knotit should look something like the fifth picture
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 6 Ready To Climb Now that you have mastered the Figure 8 knot you can securely harness yourself into a climbing rope Remember there are many other skills that go into setting up ananchor and belaying a climber This tutorial only covers the figure 8 knot For more information there are many great websites that demonstrate how to correctly set up asafe climbing system (Ive posted a few below) If you are a beginning climber I recommend that you read up on a few other climbing techniques Also you shouldprobably go to a climbing wall or gym where there are experienced climbers that can show you the ropes Hopefully this tutorial has been helpful Have fun and be safe
Some useful linkshttpwwwstephenprattnetAnchorsanchorshtmhttpwwwuoregonedu~oppclimbingtopicsanchorshtmlhttpwwwabc-of-rockclimbingcomhowtoclimbingtechniquesasp
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Related Instructables
How to Tie aFigure EightKnot byTactical_Pyro
Paracord KnotDisplay Bord byJamie bagn
Basic KnotsGuide byzorro3355
How to Climb aTree (withprussiks) bystasterisk
How to climb atree (using onlyrope) thefunsimple wayby louieaw
How to get arope into a tree(withoutclimbing it) byvitex
How to tievarious knots byadaviel
How to make arope swing byjdub0928
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Turks Head Knots on a Bottleby sklnxbones on July 6 2010
Intro Turks Head Knots on a BottleThis is the finished project A bottle decorated with three Turks Head Knots There are only three knots on this bottle The RED and the BLUE knots are each a 20 Bightby 3 Lead Turks Head Knots The WHITE knot is a 20 Bight by 19 Lead Turks Head Knot
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 1 Supplies
Cord Lots and Lots of cord I cant tell you how much each bottle is differentBottle Washed and Dried inside and out Make sure to remove all water spotsThreaded Needle Cord screws into the threads at the base of the needlePegs I use brass rivets used as a map to tie the Turks Head KnotsHole Punch Used to punch holes in the painters tape to hold the pegsPainters Tape To hold the pegs in place and to make your map for the Turks Head KnotsMarker To write on the painters tapeCloth Towel To remove finger prints and dirt from your bottleKrazy Glue or Super Glue This is used to secure the knots in place to the bottle
OPTIONAL BUT HIGHLY RECOMMENDEDI use the Turks Head Cookbook from KnotToolcom
Step 2 PreparationYou will need to find a bottle you like I used an empty instant tea bottle of course washed and dried (I like to put the bottle in the oven for a few minutes to dry the insidewithout water spots Take off the lid and do not put lid in the oven) Now measure the circumference of the bottle Take a cord and tightly wrap the cord around the bottleMark where the ends meet and use a ruler to measure the length of the cord For my instant tea bottle the circumference is 27cm I know from past knots that I have tiedthat I want my knot to have 20 Bights in the top and bottom (bands) knots I am going to use the Bights in the (bands) knots to tie the middle knot Now divide the numberof Bights (20) into the size of the circumference (27) to get the space between each Bight (135) With me so far
Now take two pieces of painters tape using a ruler measure out the length of the circumference and mark the length on the both pieces of tape Next you will mark thespace between each Bight on the tape
Step 3 Adding the PegsI like to use pegs when tying Turks Head Knots it just makes tying the knot easier
These are what I use for pegs
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 4 Adding Pegs to the TapeNow take a hole punch to cut holes in the tape where the lines meet You will place the pegs in the holes
Insert a peg in each hole and carefully stick the first piece of tape to the bottle
Step 5 Adding the 2nd row of pegsNow do the same thing with the second piece of tape The numbers on each piece of tape must line up
This picture shows you what you should have now This odd looking thing will be your map to tie the Turks Head Knot And this is the end of Step 1
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 6 Tying the first Turks Head KnotUsing the Turks Head Cookbook follow the numbers going over and under as indicated in the book I chose a 20 Bight by 3 Lead knot which will give me a nice bandaround the bottle Once the ends meet you have made one complete knot Tape the running end of your cord and start removing the pegs and the tape
Step 7 Remove the pegs and the tapeBe careful not to untie the knot as you remove the pegs and tape from the bottle Continue to remove all the pegs and remove the tape from the bottle At this point theknot will be very loose and will need to be tightened up
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 8 Remove the slack from the knotHere you can see just how much the knot expanded Starting with the standing end begin to pull the slack out of the knot going towards the running end of the cordDo not expect to pull all the slack out at once You may have to make 3 - 5 attempts at removing the slack out of the knot DO NOT remove all of the slack out of the knotIn order to make the bands we will have to triple the Turks Head Knot We will do this by following the knot three times The threaded needle will really come in handyhere
Step 9 Triple the KnotOnce you have made three passes of the Turks Head Knot use your needle to go under your knot about half the circumference and cut the cord The knot will be tightenough to hide the tail in placeTIP I carefully add a couple of drops of super glue UNDER the band to hold them in place and keep them from sliding around in the nextsteps A drop or two in 3 or 4 places around the band should be enough
Step 10 Add the second knotNow repeat this whole step for the second bandWhen tying the second band you must make sure the Bights line up to the first band This is crucial for the next stepWipe down the bottle to make sure all your finger prints and adhesive from the tape are all removed You want to make sure your bottle is clean at this point Any dirt orfinger prints left on the bottle will be almost impossible to remove From this point on we will use gloves when tying our last knot
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 11 Maping the Top KnotStick a piece of painters tape on top of your first band leaving the bottom of the knot exposedUse a marker to count the number of Bights in your knot Instead of using the pegs we are going to use the Bights to tie our next Turks Head Knot
Step 12 Mapping the Bottom KnotDo the same thing for the bottom band but you must make sure your numbers on top and bottom line up So 1 on top should be the same position as 1 on the bottom
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 13 Adding the last knotAgain using the Turks Head Cookbook and the threaded needle you are going to follow the instructions going over and under as indicated in the book Be sure to usegloves when ever you handle the bottle
Step 14 Thats ItFor this Turks Head Knot I am using a 20 Bight by 19 Lead knot
Because of the amount of cord you are working with your cord will get twisted and knotted You will have to un-twist the cord often Its a pain in the rear but it has to bedone And it has to be done alot
Continue to tie the knot until you finish the knot If you have the cord and the patience you can double or triple the knot When you are done use your needle to hide theends under your bands Cut the ends and your DONE
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Related Instructables
Monkeys FistFloatingKeychain byjokerlz
How To Make ATurks headKnot WithParacord byDoggie Stylish
Tying Trivetsout of Rope forHoliday Gifts bykylemarsh
Paracord KnotDisplay Bord byJamie bagn
How to Make ATurks Head(Photos) bymchs60chip
A pocket full ofknots byKiteman
Monkeys fistknot AND themonkey byjonathan111
TiteTie is theTruckers Knoton Steroids bytitetie
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Larks head noose -- an easy useful knot that tightens and loosensby Larry Breed on February 19 2009
Intro Larks head noose -- an easy useful knot that tightens and loosensI thought I knew all the basic knots but then I was taught this incredibly useful simple knot Its good for tying up the neck of a bag that you want to repeatedly open andsecurely close Its good for tying around a springy bundle that will need tightening and retightening And its easy to undo
Ive looked at knot literature but havent found a name for this so I named it The basic knot is well known its called a larks head Since all Ive done is to slip the twoends through the larks head to make a noose I call it that
WARNING Dont use this knot when human safety would depend on it Climbers and mountaineers have well-tested reliable knots for such situations
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Image Notes1 To tighten further step on this side of the larks head and pull the free ends
Step 1 Double the cord overThe larks head noose requires enough cord to go twice around your bundle plus a foot or two Find the center and double it over Sailors call this a bight
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 2 Form the larks headComing from below the bight hook your thumb and forefinger over the two sides Reach outward and downward and pinch your fingertips together underneath thedoubled cord
Youve made a larks head Move the crossing cord a little farther from your hand so theres a clear opening through the two half-loops
Step 3 Form the nooseSlip the two ends of the cord through the opening we were just talking about Pull the larks head tight so it grips the two cords Find something that needs constrictingand put the noose around it
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 4 Tightening retightening and lockingSlide the knot against the bundle If its not tight enough to keep from slipping tighten it by holding it in one hand and tugging on the cords one at a time with the otherhand Notice that you can slide the knot out again for instance to re-open the bag you just tied shut For some applications this may be as tight as you need it
A springy bundle probably still feels loose If so compress the bundle and get a new grip on the cords Rest your foot on the bundle on the cords nearest the larks headand pull to slide the larks head tighter
To make the knot more permanent you can lock it Make an overhand in the cord ends (Exactly like the first step in tying shoelaces) With your foot still on the bundlepull on the cords and move your hands apart until youre pulling in opposite directions You have just locked the larks head and you can trust it to stay that way()
But lets say that later on you want to loosen the locked knot Again put your foot on the bundle and cords nearest the larks head hold the two cord ends together andpull This makes a little slack between the overhand and the larks head so you can untie the overhand
In twine or small string the locking overhand knot may be difficult to undo Use a shoelace knot instead of an overhand and itll unlock easily
() If youre using slippery cord like polypropylene an overhand may not lock securely You may want to tie another overhand knot For added security wrap a shortlength of duct tape around the two cords close to the knot
Image Notes1 To tighten further step on this side of the larks head and pull the free ends
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Related Instructables
TRX fromParacordChallengeAccepted bythrake
A pocket full ofknots byKiteman
Lens CapLanyard by~teknoarsonist~ how to tie a
noose byawesume
AdjustableParacordGlassesLanyard byjdtwelve12
HangmansNoose PackClosure byPopEye42
Paraleash - ADog LeashFrom Paracordby The Ideanator
How to make arugged andhandy ParacordBelt by Jake22
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 6 Ready To Climb Now that you have mastered the Figure 8 knot you can securely harness yourself into a climbing rope Remember there are many other skills that go into setting up ananchor and belaying a climber This tutorial only covers the figure 8 knot For more information there are many great websites that demonstrate how to correctly set up asafe climbing system (Ive posted a few below) If you are a beginning climber I recommend that you read up on a few other climbing techniques Also you shouldprobably go to a climbing wall or gym where there are experienced climbers that can show you the ropes Hopefully this tutorial has been helpful Have fun and be safe
Some useful linkshttpwwwstephenprattnetAnchorsanchorshtmhttpwwwuoregonedu~oppclimbingtopicsanchorshtmlhttpwwwabc-of-rockclimbingcomhowtoclimbingtechniquesasp
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Related Instructables
How to Tie aFigure EightKnot byTactical_Pyro
Paracord KnotDisplay Bord byJamie bagn
Basic KnotsGuide byzorro3355
How to Climb aTree (withprussiks) bystasterisk
How to climb atree (using onlyrope) thefunsimple wayby louieaw
How to get arope into a tree(withoutclimbing it) byvitex
How to tievarious knots byadaviel
How to make arope swing byjdub0928
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Turks Head Knots on a Bottleby sklnxbones on July 6 2010
Intro Turks Head Knots on a BottleThis is the finished project A bottle decorated with three Turks Head Knots There are only three knots on this bottle The RED and the BLUE knots are each a 20 Bightby 3 Lead Turks Head Knots The WHITE knot is a 20 Bight by 19 Lead Turks Head Knot
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 1 Supplies
Cord Lots and Lots of cord I cant tell you how much each bottle is differentBottle Washed and Dried inside and out Make sure to remove all water spotsThreaded Needle Cord screws into the threads at the base of the needlePegs I use brass rivets used as a map to tie the Turks Head KnotsHole Punch Used to punch holes in the painters tape to hold the pegsPainters Tape To hold the pegs in place and to make your map for the Turks Head KnotsMarker To write on the painters tapeCloth Towel To remove finger prints and dirt from your bottleKrazy Glue or Super Glue This is used to secure the knots in place to the bottle
OPTIONAL BUT HIGHLY RECOMMENDEDI use the Turks Head Cookbook from KnotToolcom
Step 2 PreparationYou will need to find a bottle you like I used an empty instant tea bottle of course washed and dried (I like to put the bottle in the oven for a few minutes to dry the insidewithout water spots Take off the lid and do not put lid in the oven) Now measure the circumference of the bottle Take a cord and tightly wrap the cord around the bottleMark where the ends meet and use a ruler to measure the length of the cord For my instant tea bottle the circumference is 27cm I know from past knots that I have tiedthat I want my knot to have 20 Bights in the top and bottom (bands) knots I am going to use the Bights in the (bands) knots to tie the middle knot Now divide the numberof Bights (20) into the size of the circumference (27) to get the space between each Bight (135) With me so far
Now take two pieces of painters tape using a ruler measure out the length of the circumference and mark the length on the both pieces of tape Next you will mark thespace between each Bight on the tape
Step 3 Adding the PegsI like to use pegs when tying Turks Head Knots it just makes tying the knot easier
These are what I use for pegs
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 4 Adding Pegs to the TapeNow take a hole punch to cut holes in the tape where the lines meet You will place the pegs in the holes
Insert a peg in each hole and carefully stick the first piece of tape to the bottle
Step 5 Adding the 2nd row of pegsNow do the same thing with the second piece of tape The numbers on each piece of tape must line up
This picture shows you what you should have now This odd looking thing will be your map to tie the Turks Head Knot And this is the end of Step 1
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 6 Tying the first Turks Head KnotUsing the Turks Head Cookbook follow the numbers going over and under as indicated in the book I chose a 20 Bight by 3 Lead knot which will give me a nice bandaround the bottle Once the ends meet you have made one complete knot Tape the running end of your cord and start removing the pegs and the tape
Step 7 Remove the pegs and the tapeBe careful not to untie the knot as you remove the pegs and tape from the bottle Continue to remove all the pegs and remove the tape from the bottle At this point theknot will be very loose and will need to be tightened up
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 8 Remove the slack from the knotHere you can see just how much the knot expanded Starting with the standing end begin to pull the slack out of the knot going towards the running end of the cordDo not expect to pull all the slack out at once You may have to make 3 - 5 attempts at removing the slack out of the knot DO NOT remove all of the slack out of the knotIn order to make the bands we will have to triple the Turks Head Knot We will do this by following the knot three times The threaded needle will really come in handyhere
Step 9 Triple the KnotOnce you have made three passes of the Turks Head Knot use your needle to go under your knot about half the circumference and cut the cord The knot will be tightenough to hide the tail in placeTIP I carefully add a couple of drops of super glue UNDER the band to hold them in place and keep them from sliding around in the nextsteps A drop or two in 3 or 4 places around the band should be enough
Step 10 Add the second knotNow repeat this whole step for the second bandWhen tying the second band you must make sure the Bights line up to the first band This is crucial for the next stepWipe down the bottle to make sure all your finger prints and adhesive from the tape are all removed You want to make sure your bottle is clean at this point Any dirt orfinger prints left on the bottle will be almost impossible to remove From this point on we will use gloves when tying our last knot
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 11 Maping the Top KnotStick a piece of painters tape on top of your first band leaving the bottom of the knot exposedUse a marker to count the number of Bights in your knot Instead of using the pegs we are going to use the Bights to tie our next Turks Head Knot
Step 12 Mapping the Bottom KnotDo the same thing for the bottom band but you must make sure your numbers on top and bottom line up So 1 on top should be the same position as 1 on the bottom
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 13 Adding the last knotAgain using the Turks Head Cookbook and the threaded needle you are going to follow the instructions going over and under as indicated in the book Be sure to usegloves when ever you handle the bottle
Step 14 Thats ItFor this Turks Head Knot I am using a 20 Bight by 19 Lead knot
Because of the amount of cord you are working with your cord will get twisted and knotted You will have to un-twist the cord often Its a pain in the rear but it has to bedone And it has to be done alot
Continue to tie the knot until you finish the knot If you have the cord and the patience you can double or triple the knot When you are done use your needle to hide theends under your bands Cut the ends and your DONE
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Related Instructables
Monkeys FistFloatingKeychain byjokerlz
How To Make ATurks headKnot WithParacord byDoggie Stylish
Tying Trivetsout of Rope forHoliday Gifts bykylemarsh
Paracord KnotDisplay Bord byJamie bagn
How to Make ATurks Head(Photos) bymchs60chip
A pocket full ofknots byKiteman
Monkeys fistknot AND themonkey byjonathan111
TiteTie is theTruckers Knoton Steroids bytitetie
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Larks head noose -- an easy useful knot that tightens and loosensby Larry Breed on February 19 2009
Intro Larks head noose -- an easy useful knot that tightens and loosensI thought I knew all the basic knots but then I was taught this incredibly useful simple knot Its good for tying up the neck of a bag that you want to repeatedly open andsecurely close Its good for tying around a springy bundle that will need tightening and retightening And its easy to undo
Ive looked at knot literature but havent found a name for this so I named it The basic knot is well known its called a larks head Since all Ive done is to slip the twoends through the larks head to make a noose I call it that
WARNING Dont use this knot when human safety would depend on it Climbers and mountaineers have well-tested reliable knots for such situations
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Image Notes1 To tighten further step on this side of the larks head and pull the free ends
Step 1 Double the cord overThe larks head noose requires enough cord to go twice around your bundle plus a foot or two Find the center and double it over Sailors call this a bight
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 2 Form the larks headComing from below the bight hook your thumb and forefinger over the two sides Reach outward and downward and pinch your fingertips together underneath thedoubled cord
Youve made a larks head Move the crossing cord a little farther from your hand so theres a clear opening through the two half-loops
Step 3 Form the nooseSlip the two ends of the cord through the opening we were just talking about Pull the larks head tight so it grips the two cords Find something that needs constrictingand put the noose around it
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 4 Tightening retightening and lockingSlide the knot against the bundle If its not tight enough to keep from slipping tighten it by holding it in one hand and tugging on the cords one at a time with the otherhand Notice that you can slide the knot out again for instance to re-open the bag you just tied shut For some applications this may be as tight as you need it
A springy bundle probably still feels loose If so compress the bundle and get a new grip on the cords Rest your foot on the bundle on the cords nearest the larks headand pull to slide the larks head tighter
To make the knot more permanent you can lock it Make an overhand in the cord ends (Exactly like the first step in tying shoelaces) With your foot still on the bundlepull on the cords and move your hands apart until youre pulling in opposite directions You have just locked the larks head and you can trust it to stay that way()
But lets say that later on you want to loosen the locked knot Again put your foot on the bundle and cords nearest the larks head hold the two cord ends together andpull This makes a little slack between the overhand and the larks head so you can untie the overhand
In twine or small string the locking overhand knot may be difficult to undo Use a shoelace knot instead of an overhand and itll unlock easily
() If youre using slippery cord like polypropylene an overhand may not lock securely You may want to tie another overhand knot For added security wrap a shortlength of duct tape around the two cords close to the knot
Image Notes1 To tighten further step on this side of the larks head and pull the free ends
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Related Instructables
TRX fromParacordChallengeAccepted bythrake
A pocket full ofknots byKiteman
Lens CapLanyard by~teknoarsonist~ how to tie a
noose byawesume
AdjustableParacordGlassesLanyard byjdtwelve12
HangmansNoose PackClosure byPopEye42
Paraleash - ADog LeashFrom Paracordby The Ideanator
How to make arugged andhandy ParacordBelt by Jake22
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 6 Ready To Climb Now that you have mastered the Figure 8 knot you can securely harness yourself into a climbing rope Remember there are many other skills that go into setting up ananchor and belaying a climber This tutorial only covers the figure 8 knot For more information there are many great websites that demonstrate how to correctly set up asafe climbing system (Ive posted a few below) If you are a beginning climber I recommend that you read up on a few other climbing techniques Also you shouldprobably go to a climbing wall or gym where there are experienced climbers that can show you the ropes Hopefully this tutorial has been helpful Have fun and be safe
Some useful linkshttpwwwstephenprattnetAnchorsanchorshtmhttpwwwuoregonedu~oppclimbingtopicsanchorshtmlhttpwwwabc-of-rockclimbingcomhowtoclimbingtechniquesasp
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Related Instructables
How to Tie aFigure EightKnot byTactical_Pyro
Paracord KnotDisplay Bord byJamie bagn
Basic KnotsGuide byzorro3355
How to Climb aTree (withprussiks) bystasterisk
How to climb atree (using onlyrope) thefunsimple wayby louieaw
How to get arope into a tree(withoutclimbing it) byvitex
How to tievarious knots byadaviel
How to make arope swing byjdub0928
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Turks Head Knots on a Bottleby sklnxbones on July 6 2010
Intro Turks Head Knots on a BottleThis is the finished project A bottle decorated with three Turks Head Knots There are only three knots on this bottle The RED and the BLUE knots are each a 20 Bightby 3 Lead Turks Head Knots The WHITE knot is a 20 Bight by 19 Lead Turks Head Knot
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 1 Supplies
Cord Lots and Lots of cord I cant tell you how much each bottle is differentBottle Washed and Dried inside and out Make sure to remove all water spotsThreaded Needle Cord screws into the threads at the base of the needlePegs I use brass rivets used as a map to tie the Turks Head KnotsHole Punch Used to punch holes in the painters tape to hold the pegsPainters Tape To hold the pegs in place and to make your map for the Turks Head KnotsMarker To write on the painters tapeCloth Towel To remove finger prints and dirt from your bottleKrazy Glue or Super Glue This is used to secure the knots in place to the bottle
OPTIONAL BUT HIGHLY RECOMMENDEDI use the Turks Head Cookbook from KnotToolcom
Step 2 PreparationYou will need to find a bottle you like I used an empty instant tea bottle of course washed and dried (I like to put the bottle in the oven for a few minutes to dry the insidewithout water spots Take off the lid and do not put lid in the oven) Now measure the circumference of the bottle Take a cord and tightly wrap the cord around the bottleMark where the ends meet and use a ruler to measure the length of the cord For my instant tea bottle the circumference is 27cm I know from past knots that I have tiedthat I want my knot to have 20 Bights in the top and bottom (bands) knots I am going to use the Bights in the (bands) knots to tie the middle knot Now divide the numberof Bights (20) into the size of the circumference (27) to get the space between each Bight (135) With me so far
Now take two pieces of painters tape using a ruler measure out the length of the circumference and mark the length on the both pieces of tape Next you will mark thespace between each Bight on the tape
Step 3 Adding the PegsI like to use pegs when tying Turks Head Knots it just makes tying the knot easier
These are what I use for pegs
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 4 Adding Pegs to the TapeNow take a hole punch to cut holes in the tape where the lines meet You will place the pegs in the holes
Insert a peg in each hole and carefully stick the first piece of tape to the bottle
Step 5 Adding the 2nd row of pegsNow do the same thing with the second piece of tape The numbers on each piece of tape must line up
This picture shows you what you should have now This odd looking thing will be your map to tie the Turks Head Knot And this is the end of Step 1
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 6 Tying the first Turks Head KnotUsing the Turks Head Cookbook follow the numbers going over and under as indicated in the book I chose a 20 Bight by 3 Lead knot which will give me a nice bandaround the bottle Once the ends meet you have made one complete knot Tape the running end of your cord and start removing the pegs and the tape
Step 7 Remove the pegs and the tapeBe careful not to untie the knot as you remove the pegs and tape from the bottle Continue to remove all the pegs and remove the tape from the bottle At this point theknot will be very loose and will need to be tightened up
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 8 Remove the slack from the knotHere you can see just how much the knot expanded Starting with the standing end begin to pull the slack out of the knot going towards the running end of the cordDo not expect to pull all the slack out at once You may have to make 3 - 5 attempts at removing the slack out of the knot DO NOT remove all of the slack out of the knotIn order to make the bands we will have to triple the Turks Head Knot We will do this by following the knot three times The threaded needle will really come in handyhere
Step 9 Triple the KnotOnce you have made three passes of the Turks Head Knot use your needle to go under your knot about half the circumference and cut the cord The knot will be tightenough to hide the tail in placeTIP I carefully add a couple of drops of super glue UNDER the band to hold them in place and keep them from sliding around in the nextsteps A drop or two in 3 or 4 places around the band should be enough
Step 10 Add the second knotNow repeat this whole step for the second bandWhen tying the second band you must make sure the Bights line up to the first band This is crucial for the next stepWipe down the bottle to make sure all your finger prints and adhesive from the tape are all removed You want to make sure your bottle is clean at this point Any dirt orfinger prints left on the bottle will be almost impossible to remove From this point on we will use gloves when tying our last knot
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 11 Maping the Top KnotStick a piece of painters tape on top of your first band leaving the bottom of the knot exposedUse a marker to count the number of Bights in your knot Instead of using the pegs we are going to use the Bights to tie our next Turks Head Knot
Step 12 Mapping the Bottom KnotDo the same thing for the bottom band but you must make sure your numbers on top and bottom line up So 1 on top should be the same position as 1 on the bottom
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 13 Adding the last knotAgain using the Turks Head Cookbook and the threaded needle you are going to follow the instructions going over and under as indicated in the book Be sure to usegloves when ever you handle the bottle
Step 14 Thats ItFor this Turks Head Knot I am using a 20 Bight by 19 Lead knot
Because of the amount of cord you are working with your cord will get twisted and knotted You will have to un-twist the cord often Its a pain in the rear but it has to bedone And it has to be done alot
Continue to tie the knot until you finish the knot If you have the cord and the patience you can double or triple the knot When you are done use your needle to hide theends under your bands Cut the ends and your DONE
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Related Instructables
Monkeys FistFloatingKeychain byjokerlz
How To Make ATurks headKnot WithParacord byDoggie Stylish
Tying Trivetsout of Rope forHoliday Gifts bykylemarsh
Paracord KnotDisplay Bord byJamie bagn
How to Make ATurks Head(Photos) bymchs60chip
A pocket full ofknots byKiteman
Monkeys fistknot AND themonkey byjonathan111
TiteTie is theTruckers Knoton Steroids bytitetie
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Larks head noose -- an easy useful knot that tightens and loosensby Larry Breed on February 19 2009
Intro Larks head noose -- an easy useful knot that tightens and loosensI thought I knew all the basic knots but then I was taught this incredibly useful simple knot Its good for tying up the neck of a bag that you want to repeatedly open andsecurely close Its good for tying around a springy bundle that will need tightening and retightening And its easy to undo
Ive looked at knot literature but havent found a name for this so I named it The basic knot is well known its called a larks head Since all Ive done is to slip the twoends through the larks head to make a noose I call it that
WARNING Dont use this knot when human safety would depend on it Climbers and mountaineers have well-tested reliable knots for such situations
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Image Notes1 To tighten further step on this side of the larks head and pull the free ends
Step 1 Double the cord overThe larks head noose requires enough cord to go twice around your bundle plus a foot or two Find the center and double it over Sailors call this a bight
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 2 Form the larks headComing from below the bight hook your thumb and forefinger over the two sides Reach outward and downward and pinch your fingertips together underneath thedoubled cord
Youve made a larks head Move the crossing cord a little farther from your hand so theres a clear opening through the two half-loops
Step 3 Form the nooseSlip the two ends of the cord through the opening we were just talking about Pull the larks head tight so it grips the two cords Find something that needs constrictingand put the noose around it
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 4 Tightening retightening and lockingSlide the knot against the bundle If its not tight enough to keep from slipping tighten it by holding it in one hand and tugging on the cords one at a time with the otherhand Notice that you can slide the knot out again for instance to re-open the bag you just tied shut For some applications this may be as tight as you need it
A springy bundle probably still feels loose If so compress the bundle and get a new grip on the cords Rest your foot on the bundle on the cords nearest the larks headand pull to slide the larks head tighter
To make the knot more permanent you can lock it Make an overhand in the cord ends (Exactly like the first step in tying shoelaces) With your foot still on the bundlepull on the cords and move your hands apart until youre pulling in opposite directions You have just locked the larks head and you can trust it to stay that way()
But lets say that later on you want to loosen the locked knot Again put your foot on the bundle and cords nearest the larks head hold the two cord ends together andpull This makes a little slack between the overhand and the larks head so you can untie the overhand
In twine or small string the locking overhand knot may be difficult to undo Use a shoelace knot instead of an overhand and itll unlock easily
() If youre using slippery cord like polypropylene an overhand may not lock securely You may want to tie another overhand knot For added security wrap a shortlength of duct tape around the two cords close to the knot
Image Notes1 To tighten further step on this side of the larks head and pull the free ends
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Related Instructables
TRX fromParacordChallengeAccepted bythrake
A pocket full ofknots byKiteman
Lens CapLanyard by~teknoarsonist~ how to tie a
noose byawesume
AdjustableParacordGlassesLanyard byjdtwelve12
HangmansNoose PackClosure byPopEye42
Paraleash - ADog LeashFrom Paracordby The Ideanator
How to make arugged andhandy ParacordBelt by Jake22
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 6 Ready To Climb Now that you have mastered the Figure 8 knot you can securely harness yourself into a climbing rope Remember there are many other skills that go into setting up ananchor and belaying a climber This tutorial only covers the figure 8 knot For more information there are many great websites that demonstrate how to correctly set up asafe climbing system (Ive posted a few below) If you are a beginning climber I recommend that you read up on a few other climbing techniques Also you shouldprobably go to a climbing wall or gym where there are experienced climbers that can show you the ropes Hopefully this tutorial has been helpful Have fun and be safe
Some useful linkshttpwwwstephenprattnetAnchorsanchorshtmhttpwwwuoregonedu~oppclimbingtopicsanchorshtmlhttpwwwabc-of-rockclimbingcomhowtoclimbingtechniquesasp
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Related Instructables
How to Tie aFigure EightKnot byTactical_Pyro
Paracord KnotDisplay Bord byJamie bagn
Basic KnotsGuide byzorro3355
How to Climb aTree (withprussiks) bystasterisk
How to climb atree (using onlyrope) thefunsimple wayby louieaw
How to get arope into a tree(withoutclimbing it) byvitex
How to tievarious knots byadaviel
How to make arope swing byjdub0928
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Turks Head Knots on a Bottleby sklnxbones on July 6 2010
Intro Turks Head Knots on a BottleThis is the finished project A bottle decorated with three Turks Head Knots There are only three knots on this bottle The RED and the BLUE knots are each a 20 Bightby 3 Lead Turks Head Knots The WHITE knot is a 20 Bight by 19 Lead Turks Head Knot
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 1 Supplies
Cord Lots and Lots of cord I cant tell you how much each bottle is differentBottle Washed and Dried inside and out Make sure to remove all water spotsThreaded Needle Cord screws into the threads at the base of the needlePegs I use brass rivets used as a map to tie the Turks Head KnotsHole Punch Used to punch holes in the painters tape to hold the pegsPainters Tape To hold the pegs in place and to make your map for the Turks Head KnotsMarker To write on the painters tapeCloth Towel To remove finger prints and dirt from your bottleKrazy Glue or Super Glue This is used to secure the knots in place to the bottle
OPTIONAL BUT HIGHLY RECOMMENDEDI use the Turks Head Cookbook from KnotToolcom
Step 2 PreparationYou will need to find a bottle you like I used an empty instant tea bottle of course washed and dried (I like to put the bottle in the oven for a few minutes to dry the insidewithout water spots Take off the lid and do not put lid in the oven) Now measure the circumference of the bottle Take a cord and tightly wrap the cord around the bottleMark where the ends meet and use a ruler to measure the length of the cord For my instant tea bottle the circumference is 27cm I know from past knots that I have tiedthat I want my knot to have 20 Bights in the top and bottom (bands) knots I am going to use the Bights in the (bands) knots to tie the middle knot Now divide the numberof Bights (20) into the size of the circumference (27) to get the space between each Bight (135) With me so far
Now take two pieces of painters tape using a ruler measure out the length of the circumference and mark the length on the both pieces of tape Next you will mark thespace between each Bight on the tape
Step 3 Adding the PegsI like to use pegs when tying Turks Head Knots it just makes tying the knot easier
These are what I use for pegs
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 4 Adding Pegs to the TapeNow take a hole punch to cut holes in the tape where the lines meet You will place the pegs in the holes
Insert a peg in each hole and carefully stick the first piece of tape to the bottle
Step 5 Adding the 2nd row of pegsNow do the same thing with the second piece of tape The numbers on each piece of tape must line up
This picture shows you what you should have now This odd looking thing will be your map to tie the Turks Head Knot And this is the end of Step 1
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 6 Tying the first Turks Head KnotUsing the Turks Head Cookbook follow the numbers going over and under as indicated in the book I chose a 20 Bight by 3 Lead knot which will give me a nice bandaround the bottle Once the ends meet you have made one complete knot Tape the running end of your cord and start removing the pegs and the tape
Step 7 Remove the pegs and the tapeBe careful not to untie the knot as you remove the pegs and tape from the bottle Continue to remove all the pegs and remove the tape from the bottle At this point theknot will be very loose and will need to be tightened up
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 8 Remove the slack from the knotHere you can see just how much the knot expanded Starting with the standing end begin to pull the slack out of the knot going towards the running end of the cordDo not expect to pull all the slack out at once You may have to make 3 - 5 attempts at removing the slack out of the knot DO NOT remove all of the slack out of the knotIn order to make the bands we will have to triple the Turks Head Knot We will do this by following the knot three times The threaded needle will really come in handyhere
Step 9 Triple the KnotOnce you have made three passes of the Turks Head Knot use your needle to go under your knot about half the circumference and cut the cord The knot will be tightenough to hide the tail in placeTIP I carefully add a couple of drops of super glue UNDER the band to hold them in place and keep them from sliding around in the nextsteps A drop or two in 3 or 4 places around the band should be enough
Step 10 Add the second knotNow repeat this whole step for the second bandWhen tying the second band you must make sure the Bights line up to the first band This is crucial for the next stepWipe down the bottle to make sure all your finger prints and adhesive from the tape are all removed You want to make sure your bottle is clean at this point Any dirt orfinger prints left on the bottle will be almost impossible to remove From this point on we will use gloves when tying our last knot
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 11 Maping the Top KnotStick a piece of painters tape on top of your first band leaving the bottom of the knot exposedUse a marker to count the number of Bights in your knot Instead of using the pegs we are going to use the Bights to tie our next Turks Head Knot
Step 12 Mapping the Bottom KnotDo the same thing for the bottom band but you must make sure your numbers on top and bottom line up So 1 on top should be the same position as 1 on the bottom
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 13 Adding the last knotAgain using the Turks Head Cookbook and the threaded needle you are going to follow the instructions going over and under as indicated in the book Be sure to usegloves when ever you handle the bottle
Step 14 Thats ItFor this Turks Head Knot I am using a 20 Bight by 19 Lead knot
Because of the amount of cord you are working with your cord will get twisted and knotted You will have to un-twist the cord often Its a pain in the rear but it has to bedone And it has to be done alot
Continue to tie the knot until you finish the knot If you have the cord and the patience you can double or triple the knot When you are done use your needle to hide theends under your bands Cut the ends and your DONE
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Related Instructables
Monkeys FistFloatingKeychain byjokerlz
How To Make ATurks headKnot WithParacord byDoggie Stylish
Tying Trivetsout of Rope forHoliday Gifts bykylemarsh
Paracord KnotDisplay Bord byJamie bagn
How to Make ATurks Head(Photos) bymchs60chip
A pocket full ofknots byKiteman
Monkeys fistknot AND themonkey byjonathan111
TiteTie is theTruckers Knoton Steroids bytitetie
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Larks head noose -- an easy useful knot that tightens and loosensby Larry Breed on February 19 2009
Intro Larks head noose -- an easy useful knot that tightens and loosensI thought I knew all the basic knots but then I was taught this incredibly useful simple knot Its good for tying up the neck of a bag that you want to repeatedly open andsecurely close Its good for tying around a springy bundle that will need tightening and retightening And its easy to undo
Ive looked at knot literature but havent found a name for this so I named it The basic knot is well known its called a larks head Since all Ive done is to slip the twoends through the larks head to make a noose I call it that
WARNING Dont use this knot when human safety would depend on it Climbers and mountaineers have well-tested reliable knots for such situations
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Image Notes1 To tighten further step on this side of the larks head and pull the free ends
Step 1 Double the cord overThe larks head noose requires enough cord to go twice around your bundle plus a foot or two Find the center and double it over Sailors call this a bight
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 2 Form the larks headComing from below the bight hook your thumb and forefinger over the two sides Reach outward and downward and pinch your fingertips together underneath thedoubled cord
Youve made a larks head Move the crossing cord a little farther from your hand so theres a clear opening through the two half-loops
Step 3 Form the nooseSlip the two ends of the cord through the opening we were just talking about Pull the larks head tight so it grips the two cords Find something that needs constrictingand put the noose around it
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 4 Tightening retightening and lockingSlide the knot against the bundle If its not tight enough to keep from slipping tighten it by holding it in one hand and tugging on the cords one at a time with the otherhand Notice that you can slide the knot out again for instance to re-open the bag you just tied shut For some applications this may be as tight as you need it
A springy bundle probably still feels loose If so compress the bundle and get a new grip on the cords Rest your foot on the bundle on the cords nearest the larks headand pull to slide the larks head tighter
To make the knot more permanent you can lock it Make an overhand in the cord ends (Exactly like the first step in tying shoelaces) With your foot still on the bundlepull on the cords and move your hands apart until youre pulling in opposite directions You have just locked the larks head and you can trust it to stay that way()
But lets say that later on you want to loosen the locked knot Again put your foot on the bundle and cords nearest the larks head hold the two cord ends together andpull This makes a little slack between the overhand and the larks head so you can untie the overhand
In twine or small string the locking overhand knot may be difficult to undo Use a shoelace knot instead of an overhand and itll unlock easily
() If youre using slippery cord like polypropylene an overhand may not lock securely You may want to tie another overhand knot For added security wrap a shortlength of duct tape around the two cords close to the knot
Image Notes1 To tighten further step on this side of the larks head and pull the free ends
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Related Instructables
TRX fromParacordChallengeAccepted bythrake
A pocket full ofknots byKiteman
Lens CapLanyard by~teknoarsonist~ how to tie a
noose byawesume
AdjustableParacordGlassesLanyard byjdtwelve12
HangmansNoose PackClosure byPopEye42
Paraleash - ADog LeashFrom Paracordby The Ideanator
How to make arugged andhandy ParacordBelt by Jake22
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Related Instructables
How to Tie aFigure EightKnot byTactical_Pyro
Paracord KnotDisplay Bord byJamie bagn
Basic KnotsGuide byzorro3355
How to Climb aTree (withprussiks) bystasterisk
How to climb atree (using onlyrope) thefunsimple wayby louieaw
How to get arope into a tree(withoutclimbing it) byvitex
How to tievarious knots byadaviel
How to make arope swing byjdub0928
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Turks Head Knots on a Bottleby sklnxbones on July 6 2010
Intro Turks Head Knots on a BottleThis is the finished project A bottle decorated with three Turks Head Knots There are only three knots on this bottle The RED and the BLUE knots are each a 20 Bightby 3 Lead Turks Head Knots The WHITE knot is a 20 Bight by 19 Lead Turks Head Knot
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 1 Supplies
Cord Lots and Lots of cord I cant tell you how much each bottle is differentBottle Washed and Dried inside and out Make sure to remove all water spotsThreaded Needle Cord screws into the threads at the base of the needlePegs I use brass rivets used as a map to tie the Turks Head KnotsHole Punch Used to punch holes in the painters tape to hold the pegsPainters Tape To hold the pegs in place and to make your map for the Turks Head KnotsMarker To write on the painters tapeCloth Towel To remove finger prints and dirt from your bottleKrazy Glue or Super Glue This is used to secure the knots in place to the bottle
OPTIONAL BUT HIGHLY RECOMMENDEDI use the Turks Head Cookbook from KnotToolcom
Step 2 PreparationYou will need to find a bottle you like I used an empty instant tea bottle of course washed and dried (I like to put the bottle in the oven for a few minutes to dry the insidewithout water spots Take off the lid and do not put lid in the oven) Now measure the circumference of the bottle Take a cord and tightly wrap the cord around the bottleMark where the ends meet and use a ruler to measure the length of the cord For my instant tea bottle the circumference is 27cm I know from past knots that I have tiedthat I want my knot to have 20 Bights in the top and bottom (bands) knots I am going to use the Bights in the (bands) knots to tie the middle knot Now divide the numberof Bights (20) into the size of the circumference (27) to get the space between each Bight (135) With me so far
Now take two pieces of painters tape using a ruler measure out the length of the circumference and mark the length on the both pieces of tape Next you will mark thespace between each Bight on the tape
Step 3 Adding the PegsI like to use pegs when tying Turks Head Knots it just makes tying the knot easier
These are what I use for pegs
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 4 Adding Pegs to the TapeNow take a hole punch to cut holes in the tape where the lines meet You will place the pegs in the holes
Insert a peg in each hole and carefully stick the first piece of tape to the bottle
Step 5 Adding the 2nd row of pegsNow do the same thing with the second piece of tape The numbers on each piece of tape must line up
This picture shows you what you should have now This odd looking thing will be your map to tie the Turks Head Knot And this is the end of Step 1
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 6 Tying the first Turks Head KnotUsing the Turks Head Cookbook follow the numbers going over and under as indicated in the book I chose a 20 Bight by 3 Lead knot which will give me a nice bandaround the bottle Once the ends meet you have made one complete knot Tape the running end of your cord and start removing the pegs and the tape
Step 7 Remove the pegs and the tapeBe careful not to untie the knot as you remove the pegs and tape from the bottle Continue to remove all the pegs and remove the tape from the bottle At this point theknot will be very loose and will need to be tightened up
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 8 Remove the slack from the knotHere you can see just how much the knot expanded Starting with the standing end begin to pull the slack out of the knot going towards the running end of the cordDo not expect to pull all the slack out at once You may have to make 3 - 5 attempts at removing the slack out of the knot DO NOT remove all of the slack out of the knotIn order to make the bands we will have to triple the Turks Head Knot We will do this by following the knot three times The threaded needle will really come in handyhere
Step 9 Triple the KnotOnce you have made three passes of the Turks Head Knot use your needle to go under your knot about half the circumference and cut the cord The knot will be tightenough to hide the tail in placeTIP I carefully add a couple of drops of super glue UNDER the band to hold them in place and keep them from sliding around in the nextsteps A drop or two in 3 or 4 places around the band should be enough
Step 10 Add the second knotNow repeat this whole step for the second bandWhen tying the second band you must make sure the Bights line up to the first band This is crucial for the next stepWipe down the bottle to make sure all your finger prints and adhesive from the tape are all removed You want to make sure your bottle is clean at this point Any dirt orfinger prints left on the bottle will be almost impossible to remove From this point on we will use gloves when tying our last knot
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 11 Maping the Top KnotStick a piece of painters tape on top of your first band leaving the bottom of the knot exposedUse a marker to count the number of Bights in your knot Instead of using the pegs we are going to use the Bights to tie our next Turks Head Knot
Step 12 Mapping the Bottom KnotDo the same thing for the bottom band but you must make sure your numbers on top and bottom line up So 1 on top should be the same position as 1 on the bottom
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 13 Adding the last knotAgain using the Turks Head Cookbook and the threaded needle you are going to follow the instructions going over and under as indicated in the book Be sure to usegloves when ever you handle the bottle
Step 14 Thats ItFor this Turks Head Knot I am using a 20 Bight by 19 Lead knot
Because of the amount of cord you are working with your cord will get twisted and knotted You will have to un-twist the cord often Its a pain in the rear but it has to bedone And it has to be done alot
Continue to tie the knot until you finish the knot If you have the cord and the patience you can double or triple the knot When you are done use your needle to hide theends under your bands Cut the ends and your DONE
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Related Instructables
Monkeys FistFloatingKeychain byjokerlz
How To Make ATurks headKnot WithParacord byDoggie Stylish
Tying Trivetsout of Rope forHoliday Gifts bykylemarsh
Paracord KnotDisplay Bord byJamie bagn
How to Make ATurks Head(Photos) bymchs60chip
A pocket full ofknots byKiteman
Monkeys fistknot AND themonkey byjonathan111
TiteTie is theTruckers Knoton Steroids bytitetie
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Larks head noose -- an easy useful knot that tightens and loosensby Larry Breed on February 19 2009
Intro Larks head noose -- an easy useful knot that tightens and loosensI thought I knew all the basic knots but then I was taught this incredibly useful simple knot Its good for tying up the neck of a bag that you want to repeatedly open andsecurely close Its good for tying around a springy bundle that will need tightening and retightening And its easy to undo
Ive looked at knot literature but havent found a name for this so I named it The basic knot is well known its called a larks head Since all Ive done is to slip the twoends through the larks head to make a noose I call it that
WARNING Dont use this knot when human safety would depend on it Climbers and mountaineers have well-tested reliable knots for such situations
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Image Notes1 To tighten further step on this side of the larks head and pull the free ends
Step 1 Double the cord overThe larks head noose requires enough cord to go twice around your bundle plus a foot or two Find the center and double it over Sailors call this a bight
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 2 Form the larks headComing from below the bight hook your thumb and forefinger over the two sides Reach outward and downward and pinch your fingertips together underneath thedoubled cord
Youve made a larks head Move the crossing cord a little farther from your hand so theres a clear opening through the two half-loops
Step 3 Form the nooseSlip the two ends of the cord through the opening we were just talking about Pull the larks head tight so it grips the two cords Find something that needs constrictingand put the noose around it
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 4 Tightening retightening and lockingSlide the knot against the bundle If its not tight enough to keep from slipping tighten it by holding it in one hand and tugging on the cords one at a time with the otherhand Notice that you can slide the knot out again for instance to re-open the bag you just tied shut For some applications this may be as tight as you need it
A springy bundle probably still feels loose If so compress the bundle and get a new grip on the cords Rest your foot on the bundle on the cords nearest the larks headand pull to slide the larks head tighter
To make the knot more permanent you can lock it Make an overhand in the cord ends (Exactly like the first step in tying shoelaces) With your foot still on the bundlepull on the cords and move your hands apart until youre pulling in opposite directions You have just locked the larks head and you can trust it to stay that way()
But lets say that later on you want to loosen the locked knot Again put your foot on the bundle and cords nearest the larks head hold the two cord ends together andpull This makes a little slack between the overhand and the larks head so you can untie the overhand
In twine or small string the locking overhand knot may be difficult to undo Use a shoelace knot instead of an overhand and itll unlock easily
() If youre using slippery cord like polypropylene an overhand may not lock securely You may want to tie another overhand knot For added security wrap a shortlength of duct tape around the two cords close to the knot
Image Notes1 To tighten further step on this side of the larks head and pull the free ends
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Related Instructables
TRX fromParacordChallengeAccepted bythrake
A pocket full ofknots byKiteman
Lens CapLanyard by~teknoarsonist~ how to tie a
noose byawesume
AdjustableParacordGlassesLanyard byjdtwelve12
HangmansNoose PackClosure byPopEye42
Paraleash - ADog LeashFrom Paracordby The Ideanator
How to make arugged andhandy ParacordBelt by Jake22
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Turks Head Knots on a Bottleby sklnxbones on July 6 2010
Intro Turks Head Knots on a BottleThis is the finished project A bottle decorated with three Turks Head Knots There are only three knots on this bottle The RED and the BLUE knots are each a 20 Bightby 3 Lead Turks Head Knots The WHITE knot is a 20 Bight by 19 Lead Turks Head Knot
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 1 Supplies
Cord Lots and Lots of cord I cant tell you how much each bottle is differentBottle Washed and Dried inside and out Make sure to remove all water spotsThreaded Needle Cord screws into the threads at the base of the needlePegs I use brass rivets used as a map to tie the Turks Head KnotsHole Punch Used to punch holes in the painters tape to hold the pegsPainters Tape To hold the pegs in place and to make your map for the Turks Head KnotsMarker To write on the painters tapeCloth Towel To remove finger prints and dirt from your bottleKrazy Glue or Super Glue This is used to secure the knots in place to the bottle
OPTIONAL BUT HIGHLY RECOMMENDEDI use the Turks Head Cookbook from KnotToolcom
Step 2 PreparationYou will need to find a bottle you like I used an empty instant tea bottle of course washed and dried (I like to put the bottle in the oven for a few minutes to dry the insidewithout water spots Take off the lid and do not put lid in the oven) Now measure the circumference of the bottle Take a cord and tightly wrap the cord around the bottleMark where the ends meet and use a ruler to measure the length of the cord For my instant tea bottle the circumference is 27cm I know from past knots that I have tiedthat I want my knot to have 20 Bights in the top and bottom (bands) knots I am going to use the Bights in the (bands) knots to tie the middle knot Now divide the numberof Bights (20) into the size of the circumference (27) to get the space between each Bight (135) With me so far
Now take two pieces of painters tape using a ruler measure out the length of the circumference and mark the length on the both pieces of tape Next you will mark thespace between each Bight on the tape
Step 3 Adding the PegsI like to use pegs when tying Turks Head Knots it just makes tying the knot easier
These are what I use for pegs
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 4 Adding Pegs to the TapeNow take a hole punch to cut holes in the tape where the lines meet You will place the pegs in the holes
Insert a peg in each hole and carefully stick the first piece of tape to the bottle
Step 5 Adding the 2nd row of pegsNow do the same thing with the second piece of tape The numbers on each piece of tape must line up
This picture shows you what you should have now This odd looking thing will be your map to tie the Turks Head Knot And this is the end of Step 1
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 6 Tying the first Turks Head KnotUsing the Turks Head Cookbook follow the numbers going over and under as indicated in the book I chose a 20 Bight by 3 Lead knot which will give me a nice bandaround the bottle Once the ends meet you have made one complete knot Tape the running end of your cord and start removing the pegs and the tape
Step 7 Remove the pegs and the tapeBe careful not to untie the knot as you remove the pegs and tape from the bottle Continue to remove all the pegs and remove the tape from the bottle At this point theknot will be very loose and will need to be tightened up
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 8 Remove the slack from the knotHere you can see just how much the knot expanded Starting with the standing end begin to pull the slack out of the knot going towards the running end of the cordDo not expect to pull all the slack out at once You may have to make 3 - 5 attempts at removing the slack out of the knot DO NOT remove all of the slack out of the knotIn order to make the bands we will have to triple the Turks Head Knot We will do this by following the knot three times The threaded needle will really come in handyhere
Step 9 Triple the KnotOnce you have made three passes of the Turks Head Knot use your needle to go under your knot about half the circumference and cut the cord The knot will be tightenough to hide the tail in placeTIP I carefully add a couple of drops of super glue UNDER the band to hold them in place and keep them from sliding around in the nextsteps A drop or two in 3 or 4 places around the band should be enough
Step 10 Add the second knotNow repeat this whole step for the second bandWhen tying the second band you must make sure the Bights line up to the first band This is crucial for the next stepWipe down the bottle to make sure all your finger prints and adhesive from the tape are all removed You want to make sure your bottle is clean at this point Any dirt orfinger prints left on the bottle will be almost impossible to remove From this point on we will use gloves when tying our last knot
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 11 Maping the Top KnotStick a piece of painters tape on top of your first band leaving the bottom of the knot exposedUse a marker to count the number of Bights in your knot Instead of using the pegs we are going to use the Bights to tie our next Turks Head Knot
Step 12 Mapping the Bottom KnotDo the same thing for the bottom band but you must make sure your numbers on top and bottom line up So 1 on top should be the same position as 1 on the bottom
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 13 Adding the last knotAgain using the Turks Head Cookbook and the threaded needle you are going to follow the instructions going over and under as indicated in the book Be sure to usegloves when ever you handle the bottle
Step 14 Thats ItFor this Turks Head Knot I am using a 20 Bight by 19 Lead knot
Because of the amount of cord you are working with your cord will get twisted and knotted You will have to un-twist the cord often Its a pain in the rear but it has to bedone And it has to be done alot
Continue to tie the knot until you finish the knot If you have the cord and the patience you can double or triple the knot When you are done use your needle to hide theends under your bands Cut the ends and your DONE
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Related Instructables
Monkeys FistFloatingKeychain byjokerlz
How To Make ATurks headKnot WithParacord byDoggie Stylish
Tying Trivetsout of Rope forHoliday Gifts bykylemarsh
Paracord KnotDisplay Bord byJamie bagn
How to Make ATurks Head(Photos) bymchs60chip
A pocket full ofknots byKiteman
Monkeys fistknot AND themonkey byjonathan111
TiteTie is theTruckers Knoton Steroids bytitetie
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Larks head noose -- an easy useful knot that tightens and loosensby Larry Breed on February 19 2009
Intro Larks head noose -- an easy useful knot that tightens and loosensI thought I knew all the basic knots but then I was taught this incredibly useful simple knot Its good for tying up the neck of a bag that you want to repeatedly open andsecurely close Its good for tying around a springy bundle that will need tightening and retightening And its easy to undo
Ive looked at knot literature but havent found a name for this so I named it The basic knot is well known its called a larks head Since all Ive done is to slip the twoends through the larks head to make a noose I call it that
WARNING Dont use this knot when human safety would depend on it Climbers and mountaineers have well-tested reliable knots for such situations
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Image Notes1 To tighten further step on this side of the larks head and pull the free ends
Step 1 Double the cord overThe larks head noose requires enough cord to go twice around your bundle plus a foot or two Find the center and double it over Sailors call this a bight
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 2 Form the larks headComing from below the bight hook your thumb and forefinger over the two sides Reach outward and downward and pinch your fingertips together underneath thedoubled cord
Youve made a larks head Move the crossing cord a little farther from your hand so theres a clear opening through the two half-loops
Step 3 Form the nooseSlip the two ends of the cord through the opening we were just talking about Pull the larks head tight so it grips the two cords Find something that needs constrictingand put the noose around it
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 4 Tightening retightening and lockingSlide the knot against the bundle If its not tight enough to keep from slipping tighten it by holding it in one hand and tugging on the cords one at a time with the otherhand Notice that you can slide the knot out again for instance to re-open the bag you just tied shut For some applications this may be as tight as you need it
A springy bundle probably still feels loose If so compress the bundle and get a new grip on the cords Rest your foot on the bundle on the cords nearest the larks headand pull to slide the larks head tighter
To make the knot more permanent you can lock it Make an overhand in the cord ends (Exactly like the first step in tying shoelaces) With your foot still on the bundlepull on the cords and move your hands apart until youre pulling in opposite directions You have just locked the larks head and you can trust it to stay that way()
But lets say that later on you want to loosen the locked knot Again put your foot on the bundle and cords nearest the larks head hold the two cord ends together andpull This makes a little slack between the overhand and the larks head so you can untie the overhand
In twine or small string the locking overhand knot may be difficult to undo Use a shoelace knot instead of an overhand and itll unlock easily
() If youre using slippery cord like polypropylene an overhand may not lock securely You may want to tie another overhand knot For added security wrap a shortlength of duct tape around the two cords close to the knot
Image Notes1 To tighten further step on this side of the larks head and pull the free ends
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Related Instructables
TRX fromParacordChallengeAccepted bythrake
A pocket full ofknots byKiteman
Lens CapLanyard by~teknoarsonist~ how to tie a
noose byawesume
AdjustableParacordGlassesLanyard byjdtwelve12
HangmansNoose PackClosure byPopEye42
Paraleash - ADog LeashFrom Paracordby The Ideanator
How to make arugged andhandy ParacordBelt by Jake22
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 1 Supplies
Cord Lots and Lots of cord I cant tell you how much each bottle is differentBottle Washed and Dried inside and out Make sure to remove all water spotsThreaded Needle Cord screws into the threads at the base of the needlePegs I use brass rivets used as a map to tie the Turks Head KnotsHole Punch Used to punch holes in the painters tape to hold the pegsPainters Tape To hold the pegs in place and to make your map for the Turks Head KnotsMarker To write on the painters tapeCloth Towel To remove finger prints and dirt from your bottleKrazy Glue or Super Glue This is used to secure the knots in place to the bottle
OPTIONAL BUT HIGHLY RECOMMENDEDI use the Turks Head Cookbook from KnotToolcom
Step 2 PreparationYou will need to find a bottle you like I used an empty instant tea bottle of course washed and dried (I like to put the bottle in the oven for a few minutes to dry the insidewithout water spots Take off the lid and do not put lid in the oven) Now measure the circumference of the bottle Take a cord and tightly wrap the cord around the bottleMark where the ends meet and use a ruler to measure the length of the cord For my instant tea bottle the circumference is 27cm I know from past knots that I have tiedthat I want my knot to have 20 Bights in the top and bottom (bands) knots I am going to use the Bights in the (bands) knots to tie the middle knot Now divide the numberof Bights (20) into the size of the circumference (27) to get the space between each Bight (135) With me so far
Now take two pieces of painters tape using a ruler measure out the length of the circumference and mark the length on the both pieces of tape Next you will mark thespace between each Bight on the tape
Step 3 Adding the PegsI like to use pegs when tying Turks Head Knots it just makes tying the knot easier
These are what I use for pegs
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 4 Adding Pegs to the TapeNow take a hole punch to cut holes in the tape where the lines meet You will place the pegs in the holes
Insert a peg in each hole and carefully stick the first piece of tape to the bottle
Step 5 Adding the 2nd row of pegsNow do the same thing with the second piece of tape The numbers on each piece of tape must line up
This picture shows you what you should have now This odd looking thing will be your map to tie the Turks Head Knot And this is the end of Step 1
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 6 Tying the first Turks Head KnotUsing the Turks Head Cookbook follow the numbers going over and under as indicated in the book I chose a 20 Bight by 3 Lead knot which will give me a nice bandaround the bottle Once the ends meet you have made one complete knot Tape the running end of your cord and start removing the pegs and the tape
Step 7 Remove the pegs and the tapeBe careful not to untie the knot as you remove the pegs and tape from the bottle Continue to remove all the pegs and remove the tape from the bottle At this point theknot will be very loose and will need to be tightened up
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 8 Remove the slack from the knotHere you can see just how much the knot expanded Starting with the standing end begin to pull the slack out of the knot going towards the running end of the cordDo not expect to pull all the slack out at once You may have to make 3 - 5 attempts at removing the slack out of the knot DO NOT remove all of the slack out of the knotIn order to make the bands we will have to triple the Turks Head Knot We will do this by following the knot three times The threaded needle will really come in handyhere
Step 9 Triple the KnotOnce you have made three passes of the Turks Head Knot use your needle to go under your knot about half the circumference and cut the cord The knot will be tightenough to hide the tail in placeTIP I carefully add a couple of drops of super glue UNDER the band to hold them in place and keep them from sliding around in the nextsteps A drop or two in 3 or 4 places around the band should be enough
Step 10 Add the second knotNow repeat this whole step for the second bandWhen tying the second band you must make sure the Bights line up to the first band This is crucial for the next stepWipe down the bottle to make sure all your finger prints and adhesive from the tape are all removed You want to make sure your bottle is clean at this point Any dirt orfinger prints left on the bottle will be almost impossible to remove From this point on we will use gloves when tying our last knot
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 11 Maping the Top KnotStick a piece of painters tape on top of your first band leaving the bottom of the knot exposedUse a marker to count the number of Bights in your knot Instead of using the pegs we are going to use the Bights to tie our next Turks Head Knot
Step 12 Mapping the Bottom KnotDo the same thing for the bottom band but you must make sure your numbers on top and bottom line up So 1 on top should be the same position as 1 on the bottom
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 13 Adding the last knotAgain using the Turks Head Cookbook and the threaded needle you are going to follow the instructions going over and under as indicated in the book Be sure to usegloves when ever you handle the bottle
Step 14 Thats ItFor this Turks Head Knot I am using a 20 Bight by 19 Lead knot
Because of the amount of cord you are working with your cord will get twisted and knotted You will have to un-twist the cord often Its a pain in the rear but it has to bedone And it has to be done alot
Continue to tie the knot until you finish the knot If you have the cord and the patience you can double or triple the knot When you are done use your needle to hide theends under your bands Cut the ends and your DONE
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Related Instructables
Monkeys FistFloatingKeychain byjokerlz
How To Make ATurks headKnot WithParacord byDoggie Stylish
Tying Trivetsout of Rope forHoliday Gifts bykylemarsh
Paracord KnotDisplay Bord byJamie bagn
How to Make ATurks Head(Photos) bymchs60chip
A pocket full ofknots byKiteman
Monkeys fistknot AND themonkey byjonathan111
TiteTie is theTruckers Knoton Steroids bytitetie
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Larks head noose -- an easy useful knot that tightens and loosensby Larry Breed on February 19 2009
Intro Larks head noose -- an easy useful knot that tightens and loosensI thought I knew all the basic knots but then I was taught this incredibly useful simple knot Its good for tying up the neck of a bag that you want to repeatedly open andsecurely close Its good for tying around a springy bundle that will need tightening and retightening And its easy to undo
Ive looked at knot literature but havent found a name for this so I named it The basic knot is well known its called a larks head Since all Ive done is to slip the twoends through the larks head to make a noose I call it that
WARNING Dont use this knot when human safety would depend on it Climbers and mountaineers have well-tested reliable knots for such situations
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Image Notes1 To tighten further step on this side of the larks head and pull the free ends
Step 1 Double the cord overThe larks head noose requires enough cord to go twice around your bundle plus a foot or two Find the center and double it over Sailors call this a bight
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 2 Form the larks headComing from below the bight hook your thumb and forefinger over the two sides Reach outward and downward and pinch your fingertips together underneath thedoubled cord
Youve made a larks head Move the crossing cord a little farther from your hand so theres a clear opening through the two half-loops
Step 3 Form the nooseSlip the two ends of the cord through the opening we were just talking about Pull the larks head tight so it grips the two cords Find something that needs constrictingand put the noose around it
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 4 Tightening retightening and lockingSlide the knot against the bundle If its not tight enough to keep from slipping tighten it by holding it in one hand and tugging on the cords one at a time with the otherhand Notice that you can slide the knot out again for instance to re-open the bag you just tied shut For some applications this may be as tight as you need it
A springy bundle probably still feels loose If so compress the bundle and get a new grip on the cords Rest your foot on the bundle on the cords nearest the larks headand pull to slide the larks head tighter
To make the knot more permanent you can lock it Make an overhand in the cord ends (Exactly like the first step in tying shoelaces) With your foot still on the bundlepull on the cords and move your hands apart until youre pulling in opposite directions You have just locked the larks head and you can trust it to stay that way()
But lets say that later on you want to loosen the locked knot Again put your foot on the bundle and cords nearest the larks head hold the two cord ends together andpull This makes a little slack between the overhand and the larks head so you can untie the overhand
In twine or small string the locking overhand knot may be difficult to undo Use a shoelace knot instead of an overhand and itll unlock easily
() If youre using slippery cord like polypropylene an overhand may not lock securely You may want to tie another overhand knot For added security wrap a shortlength of duct tape around the two cords close to the knot
Image Notes1 To tighten further step on this side of the larks head and pull the free ends
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Related Instructables
TRX fromParacordChallengeAccepted bythrake
A pocket full ofknots byKiteman
Lens CapLanyard by~teknoarsonist~ how to tie a
noose byawesume
AdjustableParacordGlassesLanyard byjdtwelve12
HangmansNoose PackClosure byPopEye42
Paraleash - ADog LeashFrom Paracordby The Ideanator
How to make arugged andhandy ParacordBelt by Jake22
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 4 Adding Pegs to the TapeNow take a hole punch to cut holes in the tape where the lines meet You will place the pegs in the holes
Insert a peg in each hole and carefully stick the first piece of tape to the bottle
Step 5 Adding the 2nd row of pegsNow do the same thing with the second piece of tape The numbers on each piece of tape must line up
This picture shows you what you should have now This odd looking thing will be your map to tie the Turks Head Knot And this is the end of Step 1
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 6 Tying the first Turks Head KnotUsing the Turks Head Cookbook follow the numbers going over and under as indicated in the book I chose a 20 Bight by 3 Lead knot which will give me a nice bandaround the bottle Once the ends meet you have made one complete knot Tape the running end of your cord and start removing the pegs and the tape
Step 7 Remove the pegs and the tapeBe careful not to untie the knot as you remove the pegs and tape from the bottle Continue to remove all the pegs and remove the tape from the bottle At this point theknot will be very loose and will need to be tightened up
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 8 Remove the slack from the knotHere you can see just how much the knot expanded Starting with the standing end begin to pull the slack out of the knot going towards the running end of the cordDo not expect to pull all the slack out at once You may have to make 3 - 5 attempts at removing the slack out of the knot DO NOT remove all of the slack out of the knotIn order to make the bands we will have to triple the Turks Head Knot We will do this by following the knot three times The threaded needle will really come in handyhere
Step 9 Triple the KnotOnce you have made three passes of the Turks Head Knot use your needle to go under your knot about half the circumference and cut the cord The knot will be tightenough to hide the tail in placeTIP I carefully add a couple of drops of super glue UNDER the band to hold them in place and keep them from sliding around in the nextsteps A drop or two in 3 or 4 places around the band should be enough
Step 10 Add the second knotNow repeat this whole step for the second bandWhen tying the second band you must make sure the Bights line up to the first band This is crucial for the next stepWipe down the bottle to make sure all your finger prints and adhesive from the tape are all removed You want to make sure your bottle is clean at this point Any dirt orfinger prints left on the bottle will be almost impossible to remove From this point on we will use gloves when tying our last knot
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 11 Maping the Top KnotStick a piece of painters tape on top of your first band leaving the bottom of the knot exposedUse a marker to count the number of Bights in your knot Instead of using the pegs we are going to use the Bights to tie our next Turks Head Knot
Step 12 Mapping the Bottom KnotDo the same thing for the bottom band but you must make sure your numbers on top and bottom line up So 1 on top should be the same position as 1 on the bottom
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 13 Adding the last knotAgain using the Turks Head Cookbook and the threaded needle you are going to follow the instructions going over and under as indicated in the book Be sure to usegloves when ever you handle the bottle
Step 14 Thats ItFor this Turks Head Knot I am using a 20 Bight by 19 Lead knot
Because of the amount of cord you are working with your cord will get twisted and knotted You will have to un-twist the cord often Its a pain in the rear but it has to bedone And it has to be done alot
Continue to tie the knot until you finish the knot If you have the cord and the patience you can double or triple the knot When you are done use your needle to hide theends under your bands Cut the ends and your DONE
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Related Instructables
Monkeys FistFloatingKeychain byjokerlz
How To Make ATurks headKnot WithParacord byDoggie Stylish
Tying Trivetsout of Rope forHoliday Gifts bykylemarsh
Paracord KnotDisplay Bord byJamie bagn
How to Make ATurks Head(Photos) bymchs60chip
A pocket full ofknots byKiteman
Monkeys fistknot AND themonkey byjonathan111
TiteTie is theTruckers Knoton Steroids bytitetie
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Larks head noose -- an easy useful knot that tightens and loosensby Larry Breed on February 19 2009
Intro Larks head noose -- an easy useful knot that tightens and loosensI thought I knew all the basic knots but then I was taught this incredibly useful simple knot Its good for tying up the neck of a bag that you want to repeatedly open andsecurely close Its good for tying around a springy bundle that will need tightening and retightening And its easy to undo
Ive looked at knot literature but havent found a name for this so I named it The basic knot is well known its called a larks head Since all Ive done is to slip the twoends through the larks head to make a noose I call it that
WARNING Dont use this knot when human safety would depend on it Climbers and mountaineers have well-tested reliable knots for such situations
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Image Notes1 To tighten further step on this side of the larks head and pull the free ends
Step 1 Double the cord overThe larks head noose requires enough cord to go twice around your bundle plus a foot or two Find the center and double it over Sailors call this a bight
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 2 Form the larks headComing from below the bight hook your thumb and forefinger over the two sides Reach outward and downward and pinch your fingertips together underneath thedoubled cord
Youve made a larks head Move the crossing cord a little farther from your hand so theres a clear opening through the two half-loops
Step 3 Form the nooseSlip the two ends of the cord through the opening we were just talking about Pull the larks head tight so it grips the two cords Find something that needs constrictingand put the noose around it
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 4 Tightening retightening and lockingSlide the knot against the bundle If its not tight enough to keep from slipping tighten it by holding it in one hand and tugging on the cords one at a time with the otherhand Notice that you can slide the knot out again for instance to re-open the bag you just tied shut For some applications this may be as tight as you need it
A springy bundle probably still feels loose If so compress the bundle and get a new grip on the cords Rest your foot on the bundle on the cords nearest the larks headand pull to slide the larks head tighter
To make the knot more permanent you can lock it Make an overhand in the cord ends (Exactly like the first step in tying shoelaces) With your foot still on the bundlepull on the cords and move your hands apart until youre pulling in opposite directions You have just locked the larks head and you can trust it to stay that way()
But lets say that later on you want to loosen the locked knot Again put your foot on the bundle and cords nearest the larks head hold the two cord ends together andpull This makes a little slack between the overhand and the larks head so you can untie the overhand
In twine or small string the locking overhand knot may be difficult to undo Use a shoelace knot instead of an overhand and itll unlock easily
() If youre using slippery cord like polypropylene an overhand may not lock securely You may want to tie another overhand knot For added security wrap a shortlength of duct tape around the two cords close to the knot
Image Notes1 To tighten further step on this side of the larks head and pull the free ends
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Related Instructables
TRX fromParacordChallengeAccepted bythrake
A pocket full ofknots byKiteman
Lens CapLanyard by~teknoarsonist~ how to tie a
noose byawesume
AdjustableParacordGlassesLanyard byjdtwelve12
HangmansNoose PackClosure byPopEye42
Paraleash - ADog LeashFrom Paracordby The Ideanator
How to make arugged andhandy ParacordBelt by Jake22
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 6 Tying the first Turks Head KnotUsing the Turks Head Cookbook follow the numbers going over and under as indicated in the book I chose a 20 Bight by 3 Lead knot which will give me a nice bandaround the bottle Once the ends meet you have made one complete knot Tape the running end of your cord and start removing the pegs and the tape
Step 7 Remove the pegs and the tapeBe careful not to untie the knot as you remove the pegs and tape from the bottle Continue to remove all the pegs and remove the tape from the bottle At this point theknot will be very loose and will need to be tightened up
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 8 Remove the slack from the knotHere you can see just how much the knot expanded Starting with the standing end begin to pull the slack out of the knot going towards the running end of the cordDo not expect to pull all the slack out at once You may have to make 3 - 5 attempts at removing the slack out of the knot DO NOT remove all of the slack out of the knotIn order to make the bands we will have to triple the Turks Head Knot We will do this by following the knot three times The threaded needle will really come in handyhere
Step 9 Triple the KnotOnce you have made three passes of the Turks Head Knot use your needle to go under your knot about half the circumference and cut the cord The knot will be tightenough to hide the tail in placeTIP I carefully add a couple of drops of super glue UNDER the band to hold them in place and keep them from sliding around in the nextsteps A drop or two in 3 or 4 places around the band should be enough
Step 10 Add the second knotNow repeat this whole step for the second bandWhen tying the second band you must make sure the Bights line up to the first band This is crucial for the next stepWipe down the bottle to make sure all your finger prints and adhesive from the tape are all removed You want to make sure your bottle is clean at this point Any dirt orfinger prints left on the bottle will be almost impossible to remove From this point on we will use gloves when tying our last knot
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 11 Maping the Top KnotStick a piece of painters tape on top of your first band leaving the bottom of the knot exposedUse a marker to count the number of Bights in your knot Instead of using the pegs we are going to use the Bights to tie our next Turks Head Knot
Step 12 Mapping the Bottom KnotDo the same thing for the bottom band but you must make sure your numbers on top and bottom line up So 1 on top should be the same position as 1 on the bottom
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 13 Adding the last knotAgain using the Turks Head Cookbook and the threaded needle you are going to follow the instructions going over and under as indicated in the book Be sure to usegloves when ever you handle the bottle
Step 14 Thats ItFor this Turks Head Knot I am using a 20 Bight by 19 Lead knot
Because of the amount of cord you are working with your cord will get twisted and knotted You will have to un-twist the cord often Its a pain in the rear but it has to bedone And it has to be done alot
Continue to tie the knot until you finish the knot If you have the cord and the patience you can double or triple the knot When you are done use your needle to hide theends under your bands Cut the ends and your DONE
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Related Instructables
Monkeys FistFloatingKeychain byjokerlz
How To Make ATurks headKnot WithParacord byDoggie Stylish
Tying Trivetsout of Rope forHoliday Gifts bykylemarsh
Paracord KnotDisplay Bord byJamie bagn
How to Make ATurks Head(Photos) bymchs60chip
A pocket full ofknots byKiteman
Monkeys fistknot AND themonkey byjonathan111
TiteTie is theTruckers Knoton Steroids bytitetie
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Larks head noose -- an easy useful knot that tightens and loosensby Larry Breed on February 19 2009
Intro Larks head noose -- an easy useful knot that tightens and loosensI thought I knew all the basic knots but then I was taught this incredibly useful simple knot Its good for tying up the neck of a bag that you want to repeatedly open andsecurely close Its good for tying around a springy bundle that will need tightening and retightening And its easy to undo
Ive looked at knot literature but havent found a name for this so I named it The basic knot is well known its called a larks head Since all Ive done is to slip the twoends through the larks head to make a noose I call it that
WARNING Dont use this knot when human safety would depend on it Climbers and mountaineers have well-tested reliable knots for such situations
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Image Notes1 To tighten further step on this side of the larks head and pull the free ends
Step 1 Double the cord overThe larks head noose requires enough cord to go twice around your bundle plus a foot or two Find the center and double it over Sailors call this a bight
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 2 Form the larks headComing from below the bight hook your thumb and forefinger over the two sides Reach outward and downward and pinch your fingertips together underneath thedoubled cord
Youve made a larks head Move the crossing cord a little farther from your hand so theres a clear opening through the two half-loops
Step 3 Form the nooseSlip the two ends of the cord through the opening we were just talking about Pull the larks head tight so it grips the two cords Find something that needs constrictingand put the noose around it
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 4 Tightening retightening and lockingSlide the knot against the bundle If its not tight enough to keep from slipping tighten it by holding it in one hand and tugging on the cords one at a time with the otherhand Notice that you can slide the knot out again for instance to re-open the bag you just tied shut For some applications this may be as tight as you need it
A springy bundle probably still feels loose If so compress the bundle and get a new grip on the cords Rest your foot on the bundle on the cords nearest the larks headand pull to slide the larks head tighter
To make the knot more permanent you can lock it Make an overhand in the cord ends (Exactly like the first step in tying shoelaces) With your foot still on the bundlepull on the cords and move your hands apart until youre pulling in opposite directions You have just locked the larks head and you can trust it to stay that way()
But lets say that later on you want to loosen the locked knot Again put your foot on the bundle and cords nearest the larks head hold the two cord ends together andpull This makes a little slack between the overhand and the larks head so you can untie the overhand
In twine or small string the locking overhand knot may be difficult to undo Use a shoelace knot instead of an overhand and itll unlock easily
() If youre using slippery cord like polypropylene an overhand may not lock securely You may want to tie another overhand knot For added security wrap a shortlength of duct tape around the two cords close to the knot
Image Notes1 To tighten further step on this side of the larks head and pull the free ends
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Related Instructables
TRX fromParacordChallengeAccepted bythrake
A pocket full ofknots byKiteman
Lens CapLanyard by~teknoarsonist~ how to tie a
noose byawesume
AdjustableParacordGlassesLanyard byjdtwelve12
HangmansNoose PackClosure byPopEye42
Paraleash - ADog LeashFrom Paracordby The Ideanator
How to make arugged andhandy ParacordBelt by Jake22
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 8 Remove the slack from the knotHere you can see just how much the knot expanded Starting with the standing end begin to pull the slack out of the knot going towards the running end of the cordDo not expect to pull all the slack out at once You may have to make 3 - 5 attempts at removing the slack out of the knot DO NOT remove all of the slack out of the knotIn order to make the bands we will have to triple the Turks Head Knot We will do this by following the knot three times The threaded needle will really come in handyhere
Step 9 Triple the KnotOnce you have made three passes of the Turks Head Knot use your needle to go under your knot about half the circumference and cut the cord The knot will be tightenough to hide the tail in placeTIP I carefully add a couple of drops of super glue UNDER the band to hold them in place and keep them from sliding around in the nextsteps A drop or two in 3 or 4 places around the band should be enough
Step 10 Add the second knotNow repeat this whole step for the second bandWhen tying the second band you must make sure the Bights line up to the first band This is crucial for the next stepWipe down the bottle to make sure all your finger prints and adhesive from the tape are all removed You want to make sure your bottle is clean at this point Any dirt orfinger prints left on the bottle will be almost impossible to remove From this point on we will use gloves when tying our last knot
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 11 Maping the Top KnotStick a piece of painters tape on top of your first band leaving the bottom of the knot exposedUse a marker to count the number of Bights in your knot Instead of using the pegs we are going to use the Bights to tie our next Turks Head Knot
Step 12 Mapping the Bottom KnotDo the same thing for the bottom band but you must make sure your numbers on top and bottom line up So 1 on top should be the same position as 1 on the bottom
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 13 Adding the last knotAgain using the Turks Head Cookbook and the threaded needle you are going to follow the instructions going over and under as indicated in the book Be sure to usegloves when ever you handle the bottle
Step 14 Thats ItFor this Turks Head Knot I am using a 20 Bight by 19 Lead knot
Because of the amount of cord you are working with your cord will get twisted and knotted You will have to un-twist the cord often Its a pain in the rear but it has to bedone And it has to be done alot
Continue to tie the knot until you finish the knot If you have the cord and the patience you can double or triple the knot When you are done use your needle to hide theends under your bands Cut the ends and your DONE
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Related Instructables
Monkeys FistFloatingKeychain byjokerlz
How To Make ATurks headKnot WithParacord byDoggie Stylish
Tying Trivetsout of Rope forHoliday Gifts bykylemarsh
Paracord KnotDisplay Bord byJamie bagn
How to Make ATurks Head(Photos) bymchs60chip
A pocket full ofknots byKiteman
Monkeys fistknot AND themonkey byjonathan111
TiteTie is theTruckers Knoton Steroids bytitetie
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Larks head noose -- an easy useful knot that tightens and loosensby Larry Breed on February 19 2009
Intro Larks head noose -- an easy useful knot that tightens and loosensI thought I knew all the basic knots but then I was taught this incredibly useful simple knot Its good for tying up the neck of a bag that you want to repeatedly open andsecurely close Its good for tying around a springy bundle that will need tightening and retightening And its easy to undo
Ive looked at knot literature but havent found a name for this so I named it The basic knot is well known its called a larks head Since all Ive done is to slip the twoends through the larks head to make a noose I call it that
WARNING Dont use this knot when human safety would depend on it Climbers and mountaineers have well-tested reliable knots for such situations
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Image Notes1 To tighten further step on this side of the larks head and pull the free ends
Step 1 Double the cord overThe larks head noose requires enough cord to go twice around your bundle plus a foot or two Find the center and double it over Sailors call this a bight
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 2 Form the larks headComing from below the bight hook your thumb and forefinger over the two sides Reach outward and downward and pinch your fingertips together underneath thedoubled cord
Youve made a larks head Move the crossing cord a little farther from your hand so theres a clear opening through the two half-loops
Step 3 Form the nooseSlip the two ends of the cord through the opening we were just talking about Pull the larks head tight so it grips the two cords Find something that needs constrictingand put the noose around it
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 4 Tightening retightening and lockingSlide the knot against the bundle If its not tight enough to keep from slipping tighten it by holding it in one hand and tugging on the cords one at a time with the otherhand Notice that you can slide the knot out again for instance to re-open the bag you just tied shut For some applications this may be as tight as you need it
A springy bundle probably still feels loose If so compress the bundle and get a new grip on the cords Rest your foot on the bundle on the cords nearest the larks headand pull to slide the larks head tighter
To make the knot more permanent you can lock it Make an overhand in the cord ends (Exactly like the first step in tying shoelaces) With your foot still on the bundlepull on the cords and move your hands apart until youre pulling in opposite directions You have just locked the larks head and you can trust it to stay that way()
But lets say that later on you want to loosen the locked knot Again put your foot on the bundle and cords nearest the larks head hold the two cord ends together andpull This makes a little slack between the overhand and the larks head so you can untie the overhand
In twine or small string the locking overhand knot may be difficult to undo Use a shoelace knot instead of an overhand and itll unlock easily
() If youre using slippery cord like polypropylene an overhand may not lock securely You may want to tie another overhand knot For added security wrap a shortlength of duct tape around the two cords close to the knot
Image Notes1 To tighten further step on this side of the larks head and pull the free ends
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Related Instructables
TRX fromParacordChallengeAccepted bythrake
A pocket full ofknots byKiteman
Lens CapLanyard by~teknoarsonist~ how to tie a
noose byawesume
AdjustableParacordGlassesLanyard byjdtwelve12
HangmansNoose PackClosure byPopEye42
Paraleash - ADog LeashFrom Paracordby The Ideanator
How to make arugged andhandy ParacordBelt by Jake22
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 11 Maping the Top KnotStick a piece of painters tape on top of your first band leaving the bottom of the knot exposedUse a marker to count the number of Bights in your knot Instead of using the pegs we are going to use the Bights to tie our next Turks Head Knot
Step 12 Mapping the Bottom KnotDo the same thing for the bottom band but you must make sure your numbers on top and bottom line up So 1 on top should be the same position as 1 on the bottom
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 13 Adding the last knotAgain using the Turks Head Cookbook and the threaded needle you are going to follow the instructions going over and under as indicated in the book Be sure to usegloves when ever you handle the bottle
Step 14 Thats ItFor this Turks Head Knot I am using a 20 Bight by 19 Lead knot
Because of the amount of cord you are working with your cord will get twisted and knotted You will have to un-twist the cord often Its a pain in the rear but it has to bedone And it has to be done alot
Continue to tie the knot until you finish the knot If you have the cord and the patience you can double or triple the knot When you are done use your needle to hide theends under your bands Cut the ends and your DONE
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Related Instructables
Monkeys FistFloatingKeychain byjokerlz
How To Make ATurks headKnot WithParacord byDoggie Stylish
Tying Trivetsout of Rope forHoliday Gifts bykylemarsh
Paracord KnotDisplay Bord byJamie bagn
How to Make ATurks Head(Photos) bymchs60chip
A pocket full ofknots byKiteman
Monkeys fistknot AND themonkey byjonathan111
TiteTie is theTruckers Knoton Steroids bytitetie
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Larks head noose -- an easy useful knot that tightens and loosensby Larry Breed on February 19 2009
Intro Larks head noose -- an easy useful knot that tightens and loosensI thought I knew all the basic knots but then I was taught this incredibly useful simple knot Its good for tying up the neck of a bag that you want to repeatedly open andsecurely close Its good for tying around a springy bundle that will need tightening and retightening And its easy to undo
Ive looked at knot literature but havent found a name for this so I named it The basic knot is well known its called a larks head Since all Ive done is to slip the twoends through the larks head to make a noose I call it that
WARNING Dont use this knot when human safety would depend on it Climbers and mountaineers have well-tested reliable knots for such situations
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Image Notes1 To tighten further step on this side of the larks head and pull the free ends
Step 1 Double the cord overThe larks head noose requires enough cord to go twice around your bundle plus a foot or two Find the center and double it over Sailors call this a bight
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 2 Form the larks headComing from below the bight hook your thumb and forefinger over the two sides Reach outward and downward and pinch your fingertips together underneath thedoubled cord
Youve made a larks head Move the crossing cord a little farther from your hand so theres a clear opening through the two half-loops
Step 3 Form the nooseSlip the two ends of the cord through the opening we were just talking about Pull the larks head tight so it grips the two cords Find something that needs constrictingand put the noose around it
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 4 Tightening retightening and lockingSlide the knot against the bundle If its not tight enough to keep from slipping tighten it by holding it in one hand and tugging on the cords one at a time with the otherhand Notice that you can slide the knot out again for instance to re-open the bag you just tied shut For some applications this may be as tight as you need it
A springy bundle probably still feels loose If so compress the bundle and get a new grip on the cords Rest your foot on the bundle on the cords nearest the larks headand pull to slide the larks head tighter
To make the knot more permanent you can lock it Make an overhand in the cord ends (Exactly like the first step in tying shoelaces) With your foot still on the bundlepull on the cords and move your hands apart until youre pulling in opposite directions You have just locked the larks head and you can trust it to stay that way()
But lets say that later on you want to loosen the locked knot Again put your foot on the bundle and cords nearest the larks head hold the two cord ends together andpull This makes a little slack between the overhand and the larks head so you can untie the overhand
In twine or small string the locking overhand knot may be difficult to undo Use a shoelace knot instead of an overhand and itll unlock easily
() If youre using slippery cord like polypropylene an overhand may not lock securely You may want to tie another overhand knot For added security wrap a shortlength of duct tape around the two cords close to the knot
Image Notes1 To tighten further step on this side of the larks head and pull the free ends
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Related Instructables
TRX fromParacordChallengeAccepted bythrake
A pocket full ofknots byKiteman
Lens CapLanyard by~teknoarsonist~ how to tie a
noose byawesume
AdjustableParacordGlassesLanyard byjdtwelve12
HangmansNoose PackClosure byPopEye42
Paraleash - ADog LeashFrom Paracordby The Ideanator
How to make arugged andhandy ParacordBelt by Jake22
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 13 Adding the last knotAgain using the Turks Head Cookbook and the threaded needle you are going to follow the instructions going over and under as indicated in the book Be sure to usegloves when ever you handle the bottle
Step 14 Thats ItFor this Turks Head Knot I am using a 20 Bight by 19 Lead knot
Because of the amount of cord you are working with your cord will get twisted and knotted You will have to un-twist the cord often Its a pain in the rear but it has to bedone And it has to be done alot
Continue to tie the knot until you finish the knot If you have the cord and the patience you can double or triple the knot When you are done use your needle to hide theends under your bands Cut the ends and your DONE
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Related Instructables
Monkeys FistFloatingKeychain byjokerlz
How To Make ATurks headKnot WithParacord byDoggie Stylish
Tying Trivetsout of Rope forHoliday Gifts bykylemarsh
Paracord KnotDisplay Bord byJamie bagn
How to Make ATurks Head(Photos) bymchs60chip
A pocket full ofknots byKiteman
Monkeys fistknot AND themonkey byjonathan111
TiteTie is theTruckers Knoton Steroids bytitetie
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Larks head noose -- an easy useful knot that tightens and loosensby Larry Breed on February 19 2009
Intro Larks head noose -- an easy useful knot that tightens and loosensI thought I knew all the basic knots but then I was taught this incredibly useful simple knot Its good for tying up the neck of a bag that you want to repeatedly open andsecurely close Its good for tying around a springy bundle that will need tightening and retightening And its easy to undo
Ive looked at knot literature but havent found a name for this so I named it The basic knot is well known its called a larks head Since all Ive done is to slip the twoends through the larks head to make a noose I call it that
WARNING Dont use this knot when human safety would depend on it Climbers and mountaineers have well-tested reliable knots for such situations
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Image Notes1 To tighten further step on this side of the larks head and pull the free ends
Step 1 Double the cord overThe larks head noose requires enough cord to go twice around your bundle plus a foot or two Find the center and double it over Sailors call this a bight
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 2 Form the larks headComing from below the bight hook your thumb and forefinger over the two sides Reach outward and downward and pinch your fingertips together underneath thedoubled cord
Youve made a larks head Move the crossing cord a little farther from your hand so theres a clear opening through the two half-loops
Step 3 Form the nooseSlip the two ends of the cord through the opening we were just talking about Pull the larks head tight so it grips the two cords Find something that needs constrictingand put the noose around it
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 4 Tightening retightening and lockingSlide the knot against the bundle If its not tight enough to keep from slipping tighten it by holding it in one hand and tugging on the cords one at a time with the otherhand Notice that you can slide the knot out again for instance to re-open the bag you just tied shut For some applications this may be as tight as you need it
A springy bundle probably still feels loose If so compress the bundle and get a new grip on the cords Rest your foot on the bundle on the cords nearest the larks headand pull to slide the larks head tighter
To make the knot more permanent you can lock it Make an overhand in the cord ends (Exactly like the first step in tying shoelaces) With your foot still on the bundlepull on the cords and move your hands apart until youre pulling in opposite directions You have just locked the larks head and you can trust it to stay that way()
But lets say that later on you want to loosen the locked knot Again put your foot on the bundle and cords nearest the larks head hold the two cord ends together andpull This makes a little slack between the overhand and the larks head so you can untie the overhand
In twine or small string the locking overhand knot may be difficult to undo Use a shoelace knot instead of an overhand and itll unlock easily
() If youre using slippery cord like polypropylene an overhand may not lock securely You may want to tie another overhand knot For added security wrap a shortlength of duct tape around the two cords close to the knot
Image Notes1 To tighten further step on this side of the larks head and pull the free ends
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Related Instructables
TRX fromParacordChallengeAccepted bythrake
A pocket full ofknots byKiteman
Lens CapLanyard by~teknoarsonist~ how to tie a
noose byawesume
AdjustableParacordGlassesLanyard byjdtwelve12
HangmansNoose PackClosure byPopEye42
Paraleash - ADog LeashFrom Paracordby The Ideanator
How to make arugged andhandy ParacordBelt by Jake22
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Related Instructables
Monkeys FistFloatingKeychain byjokerlz
How To Make ATurks headKnot WithParacord byDoggie Stylish
Tying Trivetsout of Rope forHoliday Gifts bykylemarsh
Paracord KnotDisplay Bord byJamie bagn
How to Make ATurks Head(Photos) bymchs60chip
A pocket full ofknots byKiteman
Monkeys fistknot AND themonkey byjonathan111
TiteTie is theTruckers Knoton Steroids bytitetie
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Larks head noose -- an easy useful knot that tightens and loosensby Larry Breed on February 19 2009
Intro Larks head noose -- an easy useful knot that tightens and loosensI thought I knew all the basic knots but then I was taught this incredibly useful simple knot Its good for tying up the neck of a bag that you want to repeatedly open andsecurely close Its good for tying around a springy bundle that will need tightening and retightening And its easy to undo
Ive looked at knot literature but havent found a name for this so I named it The basic knot is well known its called a larks head Since all Ive done is to slip the twoends through the larks head to make a noose I call it that
WARNING Dont use this knot when human safety would depend on it Climbers and mountaineers have well-tested reliable knots for such situations
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Image Notes1 To tighten further step on this side of the larks head and pull the free ends
Step 1 Double the cord overThe larks head noose requires enough cord to go twice around your bundle plus a foot or two Find the center and double it over Sailors call this a bight
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 2 Form the larks headComing from below the bight hook your thumb and forefinger over the two sides Reach outward and downward and pinch your fingertips together underneath thedoubled cord
Youve made a larks head Move the crossing cord a little farther from your hand so theres a clear opening through the two half-loops
Step 3 Form the nooseSlip the two ends of the cord through the opening we were just talking about Pull the larks head tight so it grips the two cords Find something that needs constrictingand put the noose around it
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 4 Tightening retightening and lockingSlide the knot against the bundle If its not tight enough to keep from slipping tighten it by holding it in one hand and tugging on the cords one at a time with the otherhand Notice that you can slide the knot out again for instance to re-open the bag you just tied shut For some applications this may be as tight as you need it
A springy bundle probably still feels loose If so compress the bundle and get a new grip on the cords Rest your foot on the bundle on the cords nearest the larks headand pull to slide the larks head tighter
To make the knot more permanent you can lock it Make an overhand in the cord ends (Exactly like the first step in tying shoelaces) With your foot still on the bundlepull on the cords and move your hands apart until youre pulling in opposite directions You have just locked the larks head and you can trust it to stay that way()
But lets say that later on you want to loosen the locked knot Again put your foot on the bundle and cords nearest the larks head hold the two cord ends together andpull This makes a little slack between the overhand and the larks head so you can untie the overhand
In twine or small string the locking overhand knot may be difficult to undo Use a shoelace knot instead of an overhand and itll unlock easily
() If youre using slippery cord like polypropylene an overhand may not lock securely You may want to tie another overhand knot For added security wrap a shortlength of duct tape around the two cords close to the knot
Image Notes1 To tighten further step on this side of the larks head and pull the free ends
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Related Instructables
TRX fromParacordChallengeAccepted bythrake
A pocket full ofknots byKiteman
Lens CapLanyard by~teknoarsonist~ how to tie a
noose byawesume
AdjustableParacordGlassesLanyard byjdtwelve12
HangmansNoose PackClosure byPopEye42
Paraleash - ADog LeashFrom Paracordby The Ideanator
How to make arugged andhandy ParacordBelt by Jake22
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Larks head noose -- an easy useful knot that tightens and loosensby Larry Breed on February 19 2009
Intro Larks head noose -- an easy useful knot that tightens and loosensI thought I knew all the basic knots but then I was taught this incredibly useful simple knot Its good for tying up the neck of a bag that you want to repeatedly open andsecurely close Its good for tying around a springy bundle that will need tightening and retightening And its easy to undo
Ive looked at knot literature but havent found a name for this so I named it The basic knot is well known its called a larks head Since all Ive done is to slip the twoends through the larks head to make a noose I call it that
WARNING Dont use this knot when human safety would depend on it Climbers and mountaineers have well-tested reliable knots for such situations
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Image Notes1 To tighten further step on this side of the larks head and pull the free ends
Step 1 Double the cord overThe larks head noose requires enough cord to go twice around your bundle plus a foot or two Find the center and double it over Sailors call this a bight
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 2 Form the larks headComing from below the bight hook your thumb and forefinger over the two sides Reach outward and downward and pinch your fingertips together underneath thedoubled cord
Youve made a larks head Move the crossing cord a little farther from your hand so theres a clear opening through the two half-loops
Step 3 Form the nooseSlip the two ends of the cord through the opening we were just talking about Pull the larks head tight so it grips the two cords Find something that needs constrictingand put the noose around it
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 4 Tightening retightening and lockingSlide the knot against the bundle If its not tight enough to keep from slipping tighten it by holding it in one hand and tugging on the cords one at a time with the otherhand Notice that you can slide the knot out again for instance to re-open the bag you just tied shut For some applications this may be as tight as you need it
A springy bundle probably still feels loose If so compress the bundle and get a new grip on the cords Rest your foot on the bundle on the cords nearest the larks headand pull to slide the larks head tighter
To make the knot more permanent you can lock it Make an overhand in the cord ends (Exactly like the first step in tying shoelaces) With your foot still on the bundlepull on the cords and move your hands apart until youre pulling in opposite directions You have just locked the larks head and you can trust it to stay that way()
But lets say that later on you want to loosen the locked knot Again put your foot on the bundle and cords nearest the larks head hold the two cord ends together andpull This makes a little slack between the overhand and the larks head so you can untie the overhand
In twine or small string the locking overhand knot may be difficult to undo Use a shoelace knot instead of an overhand and itll unlock easily
() If youre using slippery cord like polypropylene an overhand may not lock securely You may want to tie another overhand knot For added security wrap a shortlength of duct tape around the two cords close to the knot
Image Notes1 To tighten further step on this side of the larks head and pull the free ends
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Related Instructables
TRX fromParacordChallengeAccepted bythrake
A pocket full ofknots byKiteman
Lens CapLanyard by~teknoarsonist~ how to tie a
noose byawesume
AdjustableParacordGlassesLanyard byjdtwelve12
HangmansNoose PackClosure byPopEye42
Paraleash - ADog LeashFrom Paracordby The Ideanator
How to make arugged andhandy ParacordBelt by Jake22
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Image Notes1 To tighten further step on this side of the larks head and pull the free ends
Step 1 Double the cord overThe larks head noose requires enough cord to go twice around your bundle plus a foot or two Find the center and double it over Sailors call this a bight
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 2 Form the larks headComing from below the bight hook your thumb and forefinger over the two sides Reach outward and downward and pinch your fingertips together underneath thedoubled cord
Youve made a larks head Move the crossing cord a little farther from your hand so theres a clear opening through the two half-loops
Step 3 Form the nooseSlip the two ends of the cord through the opening we were just talking about Pull the larks head tight so it grips the two cords Find something that needs constrictingand put the noose around it
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 4 Tightening retightening and lockingSlide the knot against the bundle If its not tight enough to keep from slipping tighten it by holding it in one hand and tugging on the cords one at a time with the otherhand Notice that you can slide the knot out again for instance to re-open the bag you just tied shut For some applications this may be as tight as you need it
A springy bundle probably still feels loose If so compress the bundle and get a new grip on the cords Rest your foot on the bundle on the cords nearest the larks headand pull to slide the larks head tighter
To make the knot more permanent you can lock it Make an overhand in the cord ends (Exactly like the first step in tying shoelaces) With your foot still on the bundlepull on the cords and move your hands apart until youre pulling in opposite directions You have just locked the larks head and you can trust it to stay that way()
But lets say that later on you want to loosen the locked knot Again put your foot on the bundle and cords nearest the larks head hold the two cord ends together andpull This makes a little slack between the overhand and the larks head so you can untie the overhand
In twine or small string the locking overhand knot may be difficult to undo Use a shoelace knot instead of an overhand and itll unlock easily
() If youre using slippery cord like polypropylene an overhand may not lock securely You may want to tie another overhand knot For added security wrap a shortlength of duct tape around the two cords close to the knot
Image Notes1 To tighten further step on this side of the larks head and pull the free ends
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Related Instructables
TRX fromParacordChallengeAccepted bythrake
A pocket full ofknots byKiteman
Lens CapLanyard by~teknoarsonist~ how to tie a
noose byawesume
AdjustableParacordGlassesLanyard byjdtwelve12
HangmansNoose PackClosure byPopEye42
Paraleash - ADog LeashFrom Paracordby The Ideanator
How to make arugged andhandy ParacordBelt by Jake22
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 2 Form the larks headComing from below the bight hook your thumb and forefinger over the two sides Reach outward and downward and pinch your fingertips together underneath thedoubled cord
Youve made a larks head Move the crossing cord a little farther from your hand so theres a clear opening through the two half-loops
Step 3 Form the nooseSlip the two ends of the cord through the opening we were just talking about Pull the larks head tight so it grips the two cords Find something that needs constrictingand put the noose around it
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 4 Tightening retightening and lockingSlide the knot against the bundle If its not tight enough to keep from slipping tighten it by holding it in one hand and tugging on the cords one at a time with the otherhand Notice that you can slide the knot out again for instance to re-open the bag you just tied shut For some applications this may be as tight as you need it
A springy bundle probably still feels loose If so compress the bundle and get a new grip on the cords Rest your foot on the bundle on the cords nearest the larks headand pull to slide the larks head tighter
To make the knot more permanent you can lock it Make an overhand in the cord ends (Exactly like the first step in tying shoelaces) With your foot still on the bundlepull on the cords and move your hands apart until youre pulling in opposite directions You have just locked the larks head and you can trust it to stay that way()
But lets say that later on you want to loosen the locked knot Again put your foot on the bundle and cords nearest the larks head hold the two cord ends together andpull This makes a little slack between the overhand and the larks head so you can untie the overhand
In twine or small string the locking overhand knot may be difficult to undo Use a shoelace knot instead of an overhand and itll unlock easily
() If youre using slippery cord like polypropylene an overhand may not lock securely You may want to tie another overhand knot For added security wrap a shortlength of duct tape around the two cords close to the knot
Image Notes1 To tighten further step on this side of the larks head and pull the free ends
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Related Instructables
TRX fromParacordChallengeAccepted bythrake
A pocket full ofknots byKiteman
Lens CapLanyard by~teknoarsonist~ how to tie a
noose byawesume
AdjustableParacordGlassesLanyard byjdtwelve12
HangmansNoose PackClosure byPopEye42
Paraleash - ADog LeashFrom Paracordby The Ideanator
How to make arugged andhandy ParacordBelt by Jake22
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Step 4 Tightening retightening and lockingSlide the knot against the bundle If its not tight enough to keep from slipping tighten it by holding it in one hand and tugging on the cords one at a time with the otherhand Notice that you can slide the knot out again for instance to re-open the bag you just tied shut For some applications this may be as tight as you need it
A springy bundle probably still feels loose If so compress the bundle and get a new grip on the cords Rest your foot on the bundle on the cords nearest the larks headand pull to slide the larks head tighter
To make the knot more permanent you can lock it Make an overhand in the cord ends (Exactly like the first step in tying shoelaces) With your foot still on the bundlepull on the cords and move your hands apart until youre pulling in opposite directions You have just locked the larks head and you can trust it to stay that way()
But lets say that later on you want to loosen the locked knot Again put your foot on the bundle and cords nearest the larks head hold the two cord ends together andpull This makes a little slack between the overhand and the larks head so you can untie the overhand
In twine or small string the locking overhand knot may be difficult to undo Use a shoelace knot instead of an overhand and itll unlock easily
() If youre using slippery cord like polypropylene an overhand may not lock securely You may want to tie another overhand knot For added security wrap a shortlength of duct tape around the two cords close to the knot
Image Notes1 To tighten further step on this side of the larks head and pull the free ends
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Related Instructables
TRX fromParacordChallengeAccepted bythrake
A pocket full ofknots byKiteman
Lens CapLanyard by~teknoarsonist~ how to tie a
noose byawesume
AdjustableParacordGlassesLanyard byjdtwelve12
HangmansNoose PackClosure byPopEye42
Paraleash - ADog LeashFrom Paracordby The Ideanator
How to make arugged andhandy ParacordBelt by Jake22
httpwwwinstructablescomidKnots
Related Instructables
TRX fromParacordChallengeAccepted bythrake
A pocket full ofknots byKiteman
Lens CapLanyard by~teknoarsonist~ how to tie a
noose byawesume
AdjustableParacordGlassesLanyard byjdtwelve12
HangmansNoose PackClosure byPopEye42
Paraleash - ADog LeashFrom Paracordby The Ideanator
How to make arugged andhandy ParacordBelt by Jake22
top related